ts 


nie 


a 
> 


PL Por SS. 


»>* 


5 


ee, 


ye 


Sefer t Pe 


SHE 


- 


cS, 
Ropeeatenes 
baa eases S65 


Cae 


> 


< 
» 
Se 


» 

wt, 
lesa ta > 
eee ey >. 
epereryree 


> 
<. 


> 
Scesad 
>, 
> 


Bice 
> 
he 


> 
*, 


s. 
>. 
>>, 


> 


> 
» 


<4 


*, 
ke 
ary 


sa 


- 


eit . 
> 


‘ 


i 


ASAP “ 


» 


Cha te tte) 


ge Te Se Se Sat a Sa Ul So 


, 
y 
MO<, 
» 


Seca 
» 


(oy 


Re, 


ba tee os oe x53 X, 


>.> 
aN, 


> 
eases 


> 


* 


. 


ee 


ey 
fe 


» » 
Penn 
> 

+s: 
Sat ta® 


ae 
ma. 
> 
. 


* 
* he 


yee ¥ 
SEES, 


2 A 


hoe 


Lat 
be Sasa 
is 


4° 
fet 
eles. 


7 
. 
Pahoa tae Se Pyrat 
te ei ee Oe EG 


+ 
aes 


das 


a 
ay: 


“ 
> 


* 


» 


< 
>, 
> 
s 


», 
> 
> 


a 


Ses 


eS 


im 


YS 


+> 

Oe 
. Se 
Moe 


is 


- 


nine 


~ 


ed, 


PETS Ty 


e> 


Sp 


» 


» 


* 


oe 


* 


ey 


Se et 


o 


ae 


-* 
Z 


ee 


ry 


A. 


ep 


vy 


* 
Lye 


SA bh 
We a 
yy, 


‘A wf 
(y) 


vy a 


- 


(ASE 


eda 


Ae sats dhs 


a4 


AAA Ada 





NA+ +A me 
AP ere aA 


re ee 
ey 











. 


rere 


REVISED GREEK GRAMMAR, 





A 


GRAMMAR 


OF THE 


GREEK LANGUAGE. 


For the Use of Schools and Colleges. 


By ALPHEUS CROSBY, 


PROFESSOR EMERITUS OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE IN DARTMOUTH COLLEGE, 











































mT 


FF ~ = ra ~3 z — = Ez — 
rr == 
en es 
Soe ae elas a oder Tima a Ki ra ee —— 
NE LADY De RV HA TE Re VW ai Ni fii Al ! 
aN RN ae AARNE NG SIR TSU A A eH 
Wi ! i 41} i i HUN Ht = 
f f Wie A Wi VR A —= 
Ai iif Rea | MAN A a 
i i iN ie 
i | Kt il {Hl Si my I 
i ae on ae ; ae: * ut street grat Th 
ee ts MiP juin anat Ti pe % 
at FY ee cate 
i Ni = “ C4 
Ady’ =; nyt 
ve 
ax 


Lisp Fac rast << 
J Sp j # EN 
G Cl eh CHICAGO 
AMERICAN  ¥#d%0 COMPANY 


FROM THE PRESS OF 


A. S. BARNES & CO. 








BOSTON COLLEGE LIBRARY 
CHESTNUT HILL, MASS, 


ys) [FORTY-SINTH EDITION,]} 


‘¢The LANGUAGE OF THE GREEKS was truly like themselves, it was con- 
formable to their transcendent and universal Genius. . . .. THE GREEK 
TonGuE, from its propriety and universality, is made for all that is great, and 
all that is beautiful, in every Sulject, and under every Form of writing.’’ — 
Harris’s Hermes, Bk. IlI., Ch. 5. 


‘‘ GREEK, —the shrine of the genius of the old world; as universal as our 
race, as individual as ourselves; of infinite flexibility, of indefatigable strength, 
with the complication and the distinctness of Nature herself; to which nothing 
was vulgar, from which nothing was excluded; speaking to the ear like Italian, 
speaking to the mind like English; with words like pictures, with words like 
the gossamer film of the summer; at once the variety and picturesqueness of 
Homer, the gloom and the intensity of Zschylus; not compressed to the closest 
by Thucydides, not fathomed to the bottom by Plato, not sounding with all 
its thunders, nor lit up with all its ardors even under the Promethean touch 
of Demosthenes! ’? — CoLeRIDGE’s Study of the Greek Classic Poets. 


VIGNETTE: TEMPLE OF THESEUS AT ATHENS. 
‘* Athens, the eye of Greece.’? — Milton. 


Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1871, 
BY ALPHEUS CROSBY, 
in the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. 


132954V 





FROM THE 
PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. 


Tue following pages are the result of an attempt to supply what 
was believed to be a desideratum in the list of Greek text-books; 
viz., a grammar which should be portable and simple enough to be put 
into the hands of the beginner, and which should yet be sufficiently 
scientific and complete to accompany him through his whole course. 
The volume from which the elements of a language are first learned 
becomes to the student a species of mnemonic tables, and cannot be 
changed in the course of his study without a material derangement 
of those associations upon which memory essentially depends. The 
familiar remark, “It must be remembered that, if the grammar be 
the first book put into the learner’s hands, it should also be the last 
to leave them,” though applying most happily to grammatical study 
in general, was made by its accomplished author with particular ref- 
erence to the manual used by the student. 

In the preparation of this work, the routine of daily life has obliged 
me to keep constantly in view the wants of more advanced students ; 
and, for their sake, an attempt has been made to investigate the prin- 
ciples of the language more deeply, and illustrate its use more fully, 
than has-been usual in grammatical treatises, even of far greater size. 
At the same time, no pains have been spared to meet the wants of 
the beginner, by a studious simplicity of method and expression, and 
by the reduction of the most important principles to the form of con- 
cise rules, easy of retention and convenient for citation. Many val- 
uable works in philology fail of attaining the highest point of utility, 
through a cumbrousness of form, burdensome alike to the under- 
standing and the memory of the learner. They have been the armor 
of Saul to the youthful David. I have not, however, believed that I 
should consult the advantage even of the beginner by a false repre- 
sentation of the language, or by any departure from philosophical ac- 
curacy of statement or propriety of arrangement. Truth is always 
better than falsehood, and science than empiricism. 

To secure, as far as might be, the double object of the work, it has 
been constructed upon the following plan: — 

First, to state the usage of the language in comprehensire rules, 
and condensed tables, to be imprinted upon the memory of the 
student. 

Secondly, to explain the usage of the language, and trace its his- 


4 PREFACE. 


torical development, as fully as the limits allowed to the work, and 
the present state of philological science, would permit. The student 
who thinks wishes to know, not only what is true, but why it ts true ; 
and to the philosophical mind, a single principle addressed to the 
reason is often like the silver cord of A‘olus, confining a vast number 
of facts, which otherwise, like the enfranchised winds, are scattered 
far and wide beyond the power of control.* 

Thirdly, to illustrate the use of the language by great fulness of 
remark and exemplification. In these remarks and examples, as well 
as in the more general rules and statements, I have designed to keep 
myself carefully within the limits of Attic usage, as exhibiting the 
language in its standard form, except when some intimation is given 
to the contrary; believing that the grammarian has no more right 
than the author to use indiscriminately and without notice, the vo- 
cabulary, forms, and idioms of different ages and communities, — 


“* A party-color’d dress 
Of patch’d and pye-ball’d languages.” 


The examples of syntax, in order that the student may be assured 
in regard to their genuineness and sources, and be able to examine 
them in their connection, have been cited from classic authors in the 
precise words in which they occur, and with references to the places 
where they may be found. In accordance with the general plan of 
the work, these examples have been mostly taken from the purest 
Attic writers, beginning with Aischylus, and ending with Adschines. 
It was also thought that the practical value of such examples might 
be greatly enhanced to the student by selecting a single author, 
whose works, as those of a model-writer, should be most frequently 
resorted to; and especially, by selecting for constant citation a single 
work of this author, which could be in the hands of every student 
as a companion to his grammar, in which he might consult the pas- 





* “* Memory can neither accurately grasp the great variety of Greek forms nor 
retain them, unless it be supported by an analyzing and combining intelligence, 
which furnishes, as it were, the hooks and cement to strengthen that which has 
been learned, and permanently impress it upon the mind.’’ — Curtius. 

‘“‘T aimed above all things at making every point intelligible by furnishing for 
every usage, so far as was possible, a satisfactory reason; and by thus trying 
to eliminate all mere grammatical mysticism, I hoped that I should also ren- 
der grammar interesting to every boy who has any aptitude for such studies, 
and is sufficiently advanced to understand them. 

‘*Taught in a parrot-like manner to crude minds, I believe that grammar 
becomes bewildering and pernicious; taught at a later age and in a more ra- 
tional method, I believe that it will be found to furnish a most valuable insight 
into the logical and metaphysical laws which regulate the expression of human 
thought, and that it will always maintain its ground as an important branch of 
knowledge, and a valuable means of intellectual training.’ — Farrar. 





PREFACE. 5 


sages referred to, and which might be to him, at the same time, a 
text-book in reading, and a model in writing, Greek. In making the 
choice, I could not hesitate in selecting, among authors, Xenophon, 
and among his writings, the Anabasis. References also abound in 
the Etymology, but chiefly in respect to peculiar and dialectic forms. 
When the reference here follows the word without an intervening 
comma, it will be understood that the word is cited in the very form 
in which it occurs. The subject of euphonic laws has received a 
larger share of attention than is usual in works of this kind, but not 
larger than I felt compelled to bestow, in treating of a language 
““ Whose law was heavenly beauty, and whose breath 
Enrapturing music.” 

I cannot conclude this preface without the expression of my most 
sincere thanks to those personal friends and friends of learning who 
have so kindly encouraged and aided me inmy work. Among those 
to whom I am especially indebted for valuable suggestions, or for the 
loan of books, are President Woolsey, whose elevation, while I am 
writing, to a post which he will so much adorn, will not, I trust, 
withdraw him from that department of study and authorship in 
which he has won for himself so enviable a distinction; Professors 
Felton of Cambridge, Gibbs of New Haven, Hackett of Newton, San- 
born, my highly esteemed associate in classical instruction, Stuart of 
Andover, and Tyler of Amherst; and Messrs. Richards of Meriden, 
Sophocles of Hartford, and Taylor of Andover. Nor can I conclude 
without the acknowledgment of my deep obligations to previous 
laborers in the same field, to the Great Livina, and to the GREAT 
DEAD, — Requiescant in pace! It is almost superfluous that I should 
mention, as among those to whom I am most greatly indebted, the 
honored names of Ahrens, Bernhardy, Bopp, Buttmann, Carmichael, 
Fischer, Hartung, Hermann, Hoogeveen, Kiihner, Lobeck, Mait- 
taire, Matthie, Passow, Rost, Thiersch, and Viger. 

Hanover, October 13, 1846. A. C. 


Ir is with mingled emotions that I read this list, written a quarter 
of a century ago. To some whose names are here mentioned, I have 
new obligations to acknowledge. How many have ceased from their 
studies on earth! And with what words shall I weleome and thank 
a younger generation of laborers in the classic field? To how many 
personal friends am I deeply indebted for suggestion, counsel, en- 
couragement, and aid! Will they accept my heartiest thanks? 

During this period that has elapsed, many works of true learning 
have been published, in this country and abroad, of which I have 
been glad to avail myself. Among the scholars of our own country 
not before mentioned, to whom I am thus under most obligation, 
are Professors Drisler, Goodwin, Hadley, and Short. To the Trans- 


6 PREFACE. 


atlantic list should now he specially added the names of Clyde, Cur- 
tius, Donaldson, Farrar, Jelf, Kriiger, Madvig, Veitch, and Winer. 
The name of Professor Sophocles may certainly be repeated for his 
more recent works, and that of Dr. Kiihner, for the Larger Gram- 
mar, — anew work rather than a new edition, — which he is now 
issuing when so close upon the age of seventy. Much of the advance 
in classical learning during this period is due to the light thrown upon 
it by Comparative Philology ; though some familiar applications of 
this to the Greek seem to me unwarranted, and I wish there were 
room here for an argument upon some points. 

In the preparation of this revised edition, it has been my constant 
effort to convey more information of value to the student, without 
increasing the size of the book. That this might be effected, and even 
with a larger and clearer type than before, two new fonts of Greek 
were kindly obtained by the Proprietors of the University Press at 
Cambridge, to whom I am under so much obligation throughout. 
Nor can I omit to express how greatly I am indebted to the skilful 
compositor upon the work, Mr. Weinschenk. 

Those acquainted with former editions may perhaps observe to 
how much greater extent the translation of examples has now been 
carried, though it has not always been deemed wise to cumber the ~ 
page by translating familiar particles. They may also notice, in the 
present edition, a more convenient system of reference with still 
fuller indexes, a more copious treatment of the anomalous verbs 
with the advantage both of alphabetic order and of classification, 
more attention to the particles, a second series of rules in syntax 
distinguished from the first by letters, a new chapter on arrange- 
ment, a more distinct statement of important principles and useful 
methods in General Grammar, and a freer illustration from Compara- 
tive Philology, especially by the abundant and often minute compari- 
son of the Latin and the Greek. These twin languages, so noble in 
their structure and literature, and which occupy so large a space in 
the curriculum of liberal education, ought not to be studied without 
all the light which they are so capable of throwing upon each other. 
We may not think with “the great Busby,” that his joint grammar 
of the two languages, written in Latin hexameter for the West- 
minster School, would convert their acquisition into mere pastime, . 

‘‘Ludicra Grammatice, tetricas fallentia curas”’; 


but most certainly the student, after devoting the time usually given 
to the elements of the Latin, ought not then to pass to the Greek; 
without seeing to how great an extent his new study is only a review 
of the old, — in the words of Horace, aliudque et idem, — and with- 
out the delight and encouragement that come from finding in a sup- 
posed stranger an old friend. —Szpremper 16, 1871. 


PREFACE TO THE TABLES. 


Tre following tables have been prepared as part of a Greek Gram. 
mar. They are likewise published separately, for the greater con- 
venience and economy in their use. The advantages of a tabular 
arrangement are too obvious to require remark; nor is it less obvi- 
ous, that tables are consulted and compared with greater ease when 
printed together, than when scattered throughout a volume. 

The principles upon which the Tables of Paradigms have been 
constructed are the following: — 

I. To avoid needless repetition. There is a certain ellipsis in gram- 
matical tables, as well as in discourse, which relieves not only the 
material instruments of the mind, but the mind itself; and which as- 
sists alike the understanding and the memory. When the student 
has learned that, in the neuter gender, the nominative, accusative, 
and vocative are always the same, why, in each neuter paradigm that 
he studies, must his eye and mind be taxed with the examination of 
nine forms instead of three? why, in his daily exercises in declen- 
sion, must his tongue triple its labor, and more than triple the weari- 
ness of the teacher’s ear ? 

II. To represent the language according to its actual use, and not 
according to the theories or fancies of the Alexandrine and Byzantine 
grammarians. For a single example, where not a few might be 
cited, the second future active and middle, which, except as a eu- 
phonic form of the first future, is purely imaginary, has been wholly 
rejected. 

Ill. To distinguish between regular and irregular usage. What 
student, from the common paradigms, does not receive the impres- 
sion, sometimes never corrected, that the second perfect and pluper- 
fect, the second aorist and future, and the third future belong as reg- 
ularly to the Greek verb, as the first tenses bearing the same name; 
when, in point of fact, the Attic dialect, even including poetic usage, 
presents only about fifty verbs which have the second perfect or 
pluperfect ; eighty, which have the second aorist active; fifty, which 
have the second aorist or future passive; forty, which have the 
second aorist middle; and thirty which have the third future? The 
gleanings of all the other dialects will not double these numbers. 

From the common paradigms, what student would hesitate, in 
writing Greek, to employ the form in -pe@oy, little suspecting that it 
is only a variety of the first person dual, so exceedingly rare, that 
the learned Elmsley (perhaps too hastily) pronounced it a mere in- 


8 PREFACE. 


vention of the Alexandrine grammarians? The teacher who meets 
with it in his recitation-room may almost call his class, as the crier 
called the Roman people upon the celebration of the secular games, 
“to gaze upon that which they had never seen before, and would 
never see again.” And yet, in the single paradigm of rumra, as I 
‘learned it in my boyhood, this ‘‘needless Alexandrine,” 

“ Which, like a wounded snake, drags its slow length along,” 


occurs no fewer than twenty-six times, — almost nine times as often 
as in the whole range of the Greek classics. 

To some there may appear to be an impiety in attacking the ven- 
erable shade of timrw, but alas! it is little more than a shade, and, 
with all my early and long cherished attachment to it, I am forced, 
after examination, to exclaim, in the language of Electra, 

*Avtl pirtarns 
Mopdijs, croddév re kai oxtday dvadedt, 
and to ask why, in an age which professes such devotion to truth, a 
false representation of an irregular verb should be still set forth as 
the paradigm of regular conjugation, and made the Procrustes’ bed to 
which all other verbs must be stretched or pruned.* 

With respect to the manner in which these tables should be used, 
so much depends upon the age and attainments of the student, that 
no directions could be given which might not require to be greatly 
modified in particular cases. I would, however, recommend, 

1, That the paradigms should not be learned en masse, but gradu- 
ally, in connection with the study of the principles and rules of the 
erammar, and with other exercises. 

2. That some of the paradigms should rather be used for reference, 
than formally committed to memory. It will be seen at once, that 
some of them have been inserted merely for the sake of exhibiting 
differences of accent, or individual peculiarities. | 

3. That, in learning and consulting the paradigms, the student 
should constantly compare them with each other, with the tables of 
terminations, and with the rules of the grammar. 

4. That the humble volume should not be dismissed from service, 
till the paradigms are impressed upon the tablets of the memory as 
legibly as upon the printed page, — till they have become so familiar 
to the student, that whenever he has occasion to repeat them, “ the 





* In this edition, the example which takes the place of rémrw is \dw, hap- 
pily chosen by the sagacious Kriiger as convenient and economical of time 
(zeitsparend), —a verb which presents, to the eye, the prefixes, stem, and affixes, 
with entire distinctness and regularity throughout. A method of pronuncia- 
tion now becoming common in our country renders the use of BovAedw as a 
verb of constant repetition less desirable than formerly, while it removes an 
objection to the use of \vw. This paradigm, as well as some others, has been 
the rather substituted as presenting a closer analogy to the Latin. 


PREFACE. 9 


words,” in the expressive language of Milton, “like so many nimble 

and airy servitors, shall trip about him at command, and in well- 

ordered files, as he would wish, fall aptly into their own places.” 
HANOVER, August 10, 1841. A. C. 


Durine the period that has passed since the preceding was writ- 
ten, such great changes have taken place in the grammars used in 
our schools and colleges, that some passages above seem almost to 
require historic notes, and the earnestness of argument in others 
may appear to students of the present generation like a Quixotic 
joust with windmills. It seems difficult to believe that it is only 
since that time that the use of tUmrw as a paradigm, and the tedious 
superfluities in -efov, have been dropped in our American grammars 
(not yet in all); and it is certainly much harder to understand, with 
all allowances for conservative force, why the latter are still so com- 
monly retained in the grammars prepared for German and English 
students. But time and labor are accounted of less value in the Old 
World than in the New. 

The Tables are printed, in the present edition, more compactly 
than they have hitherto been, and with a distinction of type to assist 
in the analysis of forms, which has also been made more minute. For 
illustration and explanation, many Latin analogies and many refer- 
ences to the text of the Grammar have been introduced, while other 
examples have been proposed for further practice. A minute Cata- 
logue of Verbs, with many references to authors, has been brought 
within moderate compass, with the help of some abbreviations; while 
the tenses commonly cited in parsing are so distinguished by larger 
type, that the eye of the student will catch them at once. 

It was believed that a few pages could not be better occupied than 
by a very brief statement of some of the chief principles, definitions, 
and figures of Syntax, and of a convenient System of Sentential 
Analysis. As these belong to General Grammar, rather than to that 
of any particular language, it seemed best, for economy of space and 
greater clearness, to present the few examples which only could find 
room, in our own language chiefly. 

Full compensation, however, is made to the Greek in § 80, which 
has been condensed from Dr. Clyde’s Appendix to his valuable trea- 
tise on Greek Syntax, with slight additions in brackets, and refer- 
ences to parallel parts of the present grammar. We are truly his 
debtors for presenting to us so concisely the received principles of 
Greek Grammar, in language such as an ancient grammarian, writing 
of course after the most classic period, might himself have used. 


«*, The volume of Tables contains pp. 1, 2, 7-10, 13 ~120. 
uli. 


CONTENTS. 


TABLES. 
I. ORTHOGRAPHY AND 11. Formation of the Tenses. .§ 31 
ORTHOEPY. Ill. Lise of the Verb 32 
1. Alphabet. . Sg ftv: ranslation of ratw . 34 
2. Comparison of Alphabets Hd See Alias analyzed 35 
3. Ligatures. 3 : 
4) Vscal Rlomenta 4| VI. get A analyzed a 
5. Words classified according to s| vir. General Paradidiniae a5 37 
Accent. . ? 
6. Figures affecting Letters and + ae , wéroida, érpiByv. 38 
Sounds . 5 etree + VERSES OL ieee 
7. Contraction of Vowels FB lenis: hin a : ea 
8. Consonant Changes . . 8 a: onhke phi ne a 
P D. Pure. i. Contract, rua. 
IJ. ETYMOLOGY. PiO, 5nrO, Onp&, wréw, Ke. 42 
Latin Analogies 43 
. DECLENSION. 
a ee : il. i, Barytones in -w, Jw, &e. 44 
1. Cases classified . . . 10 Verbs in -pr, tornue 
11. Affixes of Declension . 1} Selene SSope : Scat, 
111. Elements of the Affixes. 12 Vane elie ate “ pnul, & cs 
Af ee ee art Noe 13| _E: Preteritives, ofa, quae, &e. 46 
pared with the Latin 1x. Relation of Tenses and Stem- 
vy. Greek and Latin Paradigms Crnk 47 
compared, Avpa, vavT 7s, “ke. 14 ac Tysalantia Varn ° ae 48 
vi. Nouns of Declension L., ded, XI. Classes & Notation of Stems 49 
poboa, wo, ud, Taulas, &c. 15| +17 Catalogue of Verbs. . 50 
vit. Nouns of Declension IL., 4 
xopds, vods, vews, wor, i 16 D. NUMERALS 52 
virt. Nouns of Declension IIT. tna ee 
A Mute you Gole Dorlssekele KE. PRONOMINAL CORRELATIVES 53 
dw, TGua, POs, képas, &c. 17 F. TABLE OF DERIVATION 54 
B. Liquid, O7p, pis, dvip, &. 18} G, gienrpicanr ELEMENTS 55 
c. Pure, kis, ofs, wéAcs, tarevs, 
4X, vats, yévos, dorv, Ke. 19 ¥ 
1x. Dialectic Forms ofDeclension 20 Ill, SYNTAX. 
x. Irregular and Dialectic De- oT 
clension, Zevs, vids, dépu, &e, 21 “y once ot aan a a 
XI. pO ee Pa A hota 96 0. Formsof Analysisand Parsing 72 
xr. Adjectives of Three Termi- D. Chief Rules of Systems 
nations, “pos, ndvs, &c. 23 
x11t. Numerals, ets, 80,4 pets, &e, 25| IV. PROSODY AND PRO- 
xiv. Active Participles,\vwr,&e. 26 NUNCIATION. 
xv. Substantive Pronouns . 27) A. Table of Feet ; is ae 
xvi. Adjective Pronouns, 6, &c. 28|B. Metrical Description and 
B. Comparison Analysis . . - 78 
5 te C. Methods of Pronunciation . 79 
C. CONJUGATION. 
1. Distinctions classified . 30 GREEK APPENDIX 80 





CONTENTS. 


INTRODUCTION. — DIALECTS. . . . . .§8l 


BOOK I. ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. 


Cu. 1.. CHARACTERS. . . . §90 c. Apostrophe, or Elision . 
History of at Sa . . 97} Dialectic Variations 

Cu. 2.. FicuREs . . . . 99/CH. 4. CONSONANTS . 

Cu. 3. VowrErs . .. . . 106} Old Semivowels. 
Syllabication . . . . . 111] Euphonic Changes, 


1. Precession. . + “a 118 A. In Formation of Words 
11. Union of Syllables . evn 117 B. In Connection of Words 
meontraction. i". . °. 118 c. Special Rules . : 


B. Crasis . . . . . . 124] Dialectic Variations 


BOOK II. ETYMOLOGY. 


Divisions and Definitions . . 172! co. Mode 


Cu. 1. PRINCIPLES OF DECLEN- p. Number and Person 
morro eo) 31/3) ° B. History. of Conjugation 
A. Gender .. . . © 174/CH. 8. PREFIXES OF COoNJUGA- 
B. Number, c. Case : 178 TION. 


D. Methods and General Rules 180| 1. Augment . 
E. History of Declension. . 186} 11. Reduplication 
Cu. 2. DECLENSION oF Nouns. 111. In Composition 
I. First Declension. . . . 194] Dialectic Use : 
Dialectic Forms. . . . 197/Cu. 9. AFFIXES oF ConsUGA- 


11. Second Declension. . . 199 TION. 
Dialectic Forms. . . . 201] 1. Classification and Analysis 
ut. Third Declension. . . 202 A. Tense-Signs a. 
Mepates ee ser! tv. 208 B. Connecting Vowels . 


Beams eter gs). 208 c. Flexible Endings. 
erures  . sha YS 212) . 1. Union with the:Stem. 


Dialectic Forms. . . . 221 A. Consonant Changes . 
Iv. Irregular Nouns . . . 223 B. Vowel Changes 
CHy3. ADJECTIVES. . . . 229 c. -MI Form . 
Hea. NUMERALS .«. .  . 239 Dp. Complete Tenses . 
Cu. 5. Pronouns. Dialectic Forms. 


1. Substantive . . . . . 243/Cu. 10. Srem or THE Ven 
ieadjective.. . . '. <« 249| 1. Prime Stems’. : 
Cu. 6. CoMpARIsSON. . . . 256] 11. Euphonic Stems 
1. Of Adjectives, 111. Emphatic Stems . 
A. By -repos, -raros . . 257, Iv. Adopted Stems. 
B. By -twv, -ueros . . ) . 260|/CH. 11. FORMATION OF Worps 
c. Irregular . . . . . 262! 1. Of Simple Words : 
Rpt Adverbs... 2°. 4 > «268 A. Nouns . 
History of Comparison . . 264 B. Adjectives . 


Cu. 7. PRINCIPLES oF CondguU- c. Pronouns . 
ere 3) Se a oe i ox ks OD p. Verbs 
MERA oy 6h hela) 53 2OG rE. Adverbs 


SES el ae Rey cf Of Compound Words . 


BOOK III. SYNTAX. 


omeras Remarks: ... . + S91) J. Agreement... . 
Cu. 1. Tue SuBsTANTIVE. II. Use of Cases. 


12 


A. Nominative 
B. Genitive. ; 
1. Of Departure 
1. Separation. 
2. Distinction 
Il. oh Cause. 
. Origin . 
. Material 
. Supply. 
. Partitive 
. Motive, &. . . 
. Price, Value, &c. 
. Sensible and Men- 
tal Object 
. Time and Place . 
ce. Active . 
p. Constituent 
1. Property 
2. Relation 
C. Dative Objective . 
1. Of Approach . 
1. Nearness . 
2. Likeness 
1. Of Influence 
D. Dative Residual 5 
1. Instrumental and Modal 
Ir, Temporal and Local 
E. Aceusative . . 
1. Of Direct Object, &e. 
Double Accusative . 
11. Of Specification 
i. Of Extent . 
iv. Adverbial 
F. Vocative. ; 
Remarks on the Cases 
III. Use of Numbers, Gen- 
ders, and Persons 
Rules of Agreement 
Cu. 2. ADJECTIVE AND PRo- 
NOUN. 
1. Agreement . : 
11. On the Adjective ; 


i Ob eH BO De 


§ 400 


403 
404 
405 
406 
410 
411 
412 
414 
415 
428 
431 


432 
433 
434 
435 
440 
441 
448 
449 
450 
451 
452 
465 
466 
469 
470 
472 
480 
481 
482 
483 
484 
485 


488 
492 


504 
506 


BOOK IV. 


CH. 1. QUANTITY AND VER- 
SIFICATION .. 

I. Natural Quantity . 

II. Local Quantity 

Ill. Versitication . 
Daetylie Verse . 
Anapestic Verse 
Tambic Verse. 
. Trochaie Verse . 
. Other Metres 


Hab 


725 
726 
734 
740 
747 
751 
755 
760 
764 


CONTENTS. 


111. Use of Degrees 
Iv. Use of the Article. 
A. Broad Use 
B. Article Proper . . 
vy. On the Pronoun sa eee 
A. Personal, &c. nee 
B. Avrés . ‘ 
c. Demonstrative 
p. Indefinite. 
E. Relative 4 
¥. Complementary and In- 
terrogative . - 
G.”AdXos and “Erepos . . 
Cu. 3. THE VERB. 


I. Agreement : 
II. Use of the Voices 
A. Active seem woe 
B. Middle: .4 Vaasa 
c.. Passive aoe . ie 
Ill. Use of the Tenses oat 
A. Definite and Indefinite 
B. Complete . 
c. Interchange = ta. see 
IV. Use of the Modes. 
A. Intellective . ais 
Use of dy a alee 
1. Final Clauses. . . 
11. Conditional 
1. Relative & Temporal 
tv. Complementary . 
v. Interchange . 
B. Volitive 
c. Incorporated . 
1. Infinitive . 
11. Participle . : 
11. Verbal in -réos . 
Cu. 4. THe PARTICLE. 
A. The Adverb . : 
B. The Preposition. . 
c. The Conjunction . 
Observations en 
'Cu. 5. ARRANGEMENT. . . 


PROSODY. 


CH. 2. ACOENT 2) ‘Poe eee 
I. General Laws . 


II. In Vowel Changes . .: 


III: In Inflection = Jee 
IV. In Construction. 

A. Grave Accent . . 
B. Anastrophe . 
oc. Proclitics.-... ee 
Db. Enchiti¢s <-. ., 2 
V. In Formation . 


GREEK TABLES, 


1. ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEFPY. 


1. Tur ALPHABET. 


($ 90 — 92.) 
Order. Taree eal Tee: Names. 
I, Aire a “AAda Alpha 
ti: Brig, 6 b Byra Beta 
III. Py | g,n Tappa Gamma 
IV. Ag ee 0 d AéATa Delta 
y: Ey Se é *E Widov Epsilon 
VI. Bog Z Znta Zeta 
VII > ae é *Hra Kta 
VIII. 6 63 th O7Ta Theta 
rx. I t i "lora Iota 
xs ge ti. 8 C Karma Kappa 
XI. ae K ] AapB8a =Lambda 
XII eg m Mo Mu 
XIII N vp n No Nu 
XIV =z .& x on Xi 
XV oan %) "O pikpdvy Omicron 
XVI. il «m64w@ p an Pi 
XVII ener Ay r ‘Pa Rho 
XVIII 3,C as S) Ziypa Sigma 
Kix. ToS eE7 t Tad Tau 
x. Yx-. i y *y¥ Widov Upsilon 
XXI. ¢’ ph di Phi 
XXII xX x ch Xi Chi 
XXIII St ps Vi Psi 
XXIV 2 @ a) 72 peya Omega 
f Fey is f Bat Vau 
ah 9,6 Kérra Koppa 
( 7) sh Sey San 


he 
sk 
" - 


Coo Oy OP & LO 





14 TABLES. § 2. 
2. COMPARISON OF ALPHABETS. 
(97, 98.) 

Hebrew. Greex. Latin Hebrew. Greek. ‘Latin. 
x Aleph Aa Alpha A a |D Samekh 2 oSigma SS 5 
5 Beth B B Beta B b |y Ayin Oo Omicron O o 
1 Gimel IT y Gamma G g /|5 Pe II w Pi Pip 
+ Daleth A & Delta D d |x Tsadhe @E Xi Bae 
1 He Ee Epsilon E e p Qoph Fg Koppa Q q 
.. VaAv.. we oP Va F f | Resh Pop Rho Leo 
1 Zayin Zt Zeta Z z |wShin 7 San,Sampi 
mn Hheth Hy Eta H h |nTav T + Tau T = 
» Tet © 6 Theta Y v U psilon U,V,u, v, 
> Yodh I t Iota 153-1;4 b Bef 
3 Kaph Kk Kappa C,Ke,k @ > Phi 
5 Lamedh A A Lambda L 1 X X Chi 
Dn Mem Mp Mu M m WY wf Psi 
1 Nun Nv Nu Non Q w O mega 

3. LIGATURES. 
(90. 2.) 

Oh ar | bx ert | of 
X70 atro|« e& | ol obas 
Ow av | €u or oo 

\ \ 
~ yep lu UT ten = OT 
of YY | 4 ee ox 

\ Kab 

apo yev | € ‘) Tat 
2€ yP | mM AX Qu Tav 
eX > ‘ 
5 de He pev | F THY 
ds ce |G os |¢ TS 
Do. Sia | g ov | To 
es | ? Ges Tepe! B TOU 

€ ‘ 
d C& pa |F TOV 
Cn eK CA pe Uw UV 
oy & | @9 po. Alas sro 


§ 5. ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOHPY. 15 


4. VocaL ELEMENTS. 
I. Vowets, Simpte anp Compounp (106-110). 


Class I. II. jaa s IV. V. 
A O E U I 
Orders. Sounds. Sounds. Sounds. Scunds. Sounds, 
Short Fa re) € v t 
Smete VowELs, : gay 3 z 
ong, yg | @ n v t 
Proper, 4. 3.~ a ou et ve 
DIPHTHONGS IN 1, z P: 
Improper, 4. 4 @ n ve 
Proper 5. av ov ev 
DIPHTHONGS IN v4 Ase ‘ 
Improper, 6. dv wu nv 


II. Consonants (137, 138). 


Class I. Class II. Class III. 
Orders. Labials. Palatals. Linguals. 





1, Smoora Motes, T K T 
MUTHS. < 2. Mippie Motes, B y 5 
3. Roucn Mutes, p x 6 
4, DousLe Consonants, é ¢ 
SEMI- )5. Sprrrants, F I o 
VOWELS. - 
6. Nasa.s, pe y y Liquids 
7. FLUENTS, A p 
ConsoNANTS (SECOND ARRANGEMENT). 
Labial, or w Mutes, 7, B, , 
MoutEs, { Guttural, or « Mutes, k, y, X, 
° Dental, or +r Mutes, +, 8, 0, Simple Consonants. 
Liquids, A, p, v, p, y nasal, 
S Ww , 
ae’) Sibilents, | PS % } 
a Double, or Compound Cen« 
Mixed, ¥, & f sonants. 


III. Breataines (93). 


Rouen Breatuine, or AsprRATE (‘). 
Smooru, or Sorr BreatHina é*). 


5. Worpbs CLassiFlED ACCORDING TO ACCENT. 
Proclitic: ( Oxytone: { Paroxytone: 
6, OU, €v, ws. | av, iOé, akon. AV@, Tapias. 
ORTHOTONE : Barytone : Proparoxytone: 


vw, aka, Ave - 


—— 


a de cal 

Os, Mpa, TuUp* 
Enclitic: Properispome : 
wads tis. | ov, 6p, dua. | odkov, Tyare. 


idcos, €dvere. 








Perispome : 


16 ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. § 6. 


6. Figures arrectine LETTERS AND Sounps (99s). 


1. Adding: 2. Subtracting: 3. Transposing: 5. Uniting: 

PROTHESIS, (Jnitial) APHARESIS, METATHESIS. SYNZRESIS, 

EPENTHESIS, (Medial) SyNcopE, 4, Exchanging : Contraction, 

PARAGOGE, (inal) APOCOPE, ANTITHESIS. Crasis, 

EXTENSION. Apostrophe. Assimilation. Synizesis. 

6. Resolving : 7. Shortening: 8. Lengthening: 9. Attenuating: 
DIARESIS. SYSTOLE. DIASTOLE. PRECESSION. 


7. Contraction oF VowELs (115s). 


In the columnsin § 7 and 8, the first of the vowels or consonants affected by the change 
is placed at the left, and the second at the top, both in common type. The result of the 
change is in full-face type, in a line with the first and beneath the second. The paren- 
theses enclose regular changes in the union of the stem and affixes of verbs. The labial, 
palatal, or lingual mute with which v final combines as a, is represented by/ orp. Some 
changes are placed below the columns, and some special cases are enclosed in brackets. 


Ga a @ €  €& YY -0 Ot OV ity Sie 
& a .« (@ @ &@ q@ © @ © (i) 
a av nn 1 1D © GD CO EC CE @ 
7) au [Dor. @ a 
n nn 9 (© & WH YQ ov o ov @) @ ae 
e,@ aq yy [lon. ev ev] 
e & [Augm. 7 o © 7 ee 
oie eae Nt od = 1 Byes te 
( @ aL (ov ob @ OL ov ob ov ww) @® oO ov 
0. 4a wo Hn O@ @ 
{ ov 1 
wo @ ra) @ wv- 
La t t it 
v v v wu v 


eve & eva et, ove & ora O1, ovca w & ov, viv. In Augment, éav nd & ad, éev 
ev & nv, €0 @, éeo éw. In Affixes (13), ao ovXa, ae ar, oc o X& w, oF w. 


8. EvrHonic CHancEs or Consonants (141 8). 


6, v fi- T, B, 7” 
co. Wy o8 Teer hal 6 oY “eee 
™ Bd (% & pp >0 wr dar) Ja B85 [wd] [oo, f] 
Ke Ys AE. eK PKS KT YXaT) pa 5 [kx] oo, f 
f(r « op oO oF Sar) la o, oF 
ao [78] y t, oo 
(ve yk pp vO) par wv 
as K op va pB OY 


v 

oo p Y 

: + oe 

VA AA, vp Pp & vBp, vOc ver, vet, (Ao he, wo Pe, po PE, Mut His YYE YH») 
HA BX, vp Bp, po Pp, oo Tr, 05 L, Fp p, Fo vo, AL 





§ 10. ETYMOLOGY. —- DECLENSION. 17 


Il ETYMOLOGY. 


9. Nores. 1. To avoid needless repetition, alike burdensome to 
teacher and pupil, and to accustom the student early to the application 
of rule, the tables of paradigms have been constructed with the following 
ellipses, which will be at once supplied from general rules : 

a. In the paradigms of DECLENSION, except the first, the Voc. sing. is 
omitted whenever it has the same form with the Nom., and the following 
cases are omitted throughout (see 181) : 

a. The Voc. plur., because it is always the same with the Nom. 

B. The Dat. dual, because it is always the same with the Gen. 

. The Ace. and Voc. dual, as always the same with the Nom. 
The Ace. and Voc. neut., in all the numbers, as always the same 
with the Nom. 

b. In the paradigms of ApsEcTIVES, and of words similarly inflected, 
the Neuter is omitted in the Gen. and Dat. of all the numbers, and in the 
Nom. dual ; because in these cases it never differs from the Masculine. 

ce. In the paradigms of consuGATION, the Ist Pers. dual is omitted 
throughout, as having the same form with the Ist Pers. plur., and the 3d 
Pers. dual is omitted whenever it has the same form with the 2d Pers. 
dual, that is, in the primary tenses of the Indicative, and in the Subjunc- 
tive (299c). For the form in -ye@orv, whose empty shade has been so 
multiplied by grammarians, and forced to stand, for idle show, in the 
rank and file of numbers and persons, see 299 b. 

2. Varieties of inflection have been illustrated by some tables of still 
briefer form ; where it seemed undesirable to cumber the page and weary 
the eye by the multiplication of needless details (17 s, 26, 39s). In the 
shorter paradigms of verbs, the dual has been commonly omitted, because 
so little used, and so readily supplied from the general rule in 299 c. 

3. The regular formation of the tenses is exhibited in the table (31), 
which may be thus read: ‘‘ The tense is formed from the stem by 
affixin ,” or, *‘by prefixing and affixing (or, in the nude 
form, ——).” In the application of this table, the forms of the stem 
must be distinguished, if it has more than a single form (336). 

4. A star (*) in the tables shows that an element or form is wanting. 
Brackets [ ] are chiefly used to enclose what is unusual or doubtful, or 
may be omitted. For the common mode of representing euphonic change 
by the aid of parentheses, see 118e. In this mode, Latin Jtalics have 
the same office as Greek full-face letters (and also, in § 42, common Greek 
letters, until a hyphen separates). For the use of the signs j, ||, ~, see 27; 
of ‘, !, and superior figures, 36 g, 37 r ; of (», 162a. 

















A. TABLES OF DECLENSION. 
10. 1. Cases CuassiFiep (397 s). 


Subjective. Objective. Residual. 
NoMINATIVE. ACCUSATIVE. VovuaTIVE. 
Direct. Subject. Direct Object. Compellative. 
Who. W hereinto. Address. 


GENITIVE. DATIVE. Dative (Ablative). 
Indirect. Origin, &e. Indirect Object. Accompaniment. 
Whence (from, of). Whither (to, for). Where (at,in, with, by). 


18 DECLENSION. —— AFFIXES. § 11. 


11. wu. AFFIXES OF THE THREE DECLENSIONS. 











Dec. I. Dec. II. Dec. III. 
Masc. Fem. M.F. Neut. M.F Neut. 
Sing. Nom. as, ns|a, 7 os | ov S = 
Gen. ov jas, 7S ov os 
Dat. a, @ i 
Ace. av, nv ov Via e 
Voc. a, 7 € ov “ * 
Plur. Nom. at o | a& eS | a 
Gen. QV wy wv 
Dat. aus ous civ 
Acc. as ous | @ as a 
Voc. at ou a ES a 
Dual Nom. a @ € 
Gen. au ow owv 
Dat. au ov ow 
Ace. a w € 
Voc. a @ € 


12. 11. Exements or THE AFFIXES. 


In the column of Flexible Endings, the figures denote the Declensions ; 
the small full-face letters are signs of relation or case, and the full-face 
capitals are signs of nwmber ; while those to which G. is attached also in- 
dicate gender. See 186-189. 


{ Connecting Vowels. Flexible Endings. 
Dec. I. | Dec. IT. | Dee. IIT. 











Sing. Nom. || a(n) | o - s. Fem. 1, *. Neut. 2, vG.; 3, * 
Gen. a(n) oO = (08) os. 2and Mase. 1, o. 
Dat. a(n) | o ir Cal te 
Ace. a(n) | o x8 v;t. Nent. 72: 
Voce. a(n) | o(e) ‘é x 

Plur. Nom. || a o * * Es. land 2, E. Neut.vA G. 
Gen. a os * oN. 
Dat. a oF x (E21). 3, Sv. 1 and 2, wD. 
Ace. a o * * (va) &&. Neut.“A G, 

Du. N. A.V.|| a fc) z EK. 

G. D. a o * tN. 3, oN 


§ 14. 
13. 


AFFIXES AND PARADIGMS COMPARED. 


19 


iv. AFFIXES ANALYZED AND COMPARED WITH THE LATIN, 


The Affixes, printed in full-face type or italics, are preceded by their 
analyses in common type. Hyphens separate the Connecting Vowels from 


the Flexible Endings. 











Dec. I. Dec. II. Dec. III. 
Masc. Fem. M. F. Neut. M. F. Neut, 
S.N. a-s ds,ys | a-* a, n°} o-s os | o-v ov s Ms 
a-* @ o-s as | o-m wn 8 be 
G.a-o ov | a-os ds, ys 0-0 Ov, os 
a-il edi, as] o-i 2 [tits] is 
at 4, y o-- =o t 
a-l  @ o-i 6 [2] a 
Ab.a-e a o-e 6 é [2] 
A. a-v ay, HY _0o-v ov v, a he 
a-m am o-m dm ém [im] : 
vocan-. O, 1 o-* € o-» ov hel Bed is 
a-* @ o-* @ o-m wn Ns 3 
PN. a-¢ aw oe ov | *-a & €S & 
a-e @& o-e 7 *-a a és a [ta] 
G. a-wy av 0-wy wv ov 
a-um. drum [un] o-um drim[ tim) wn [vim] 
DD.  a-ws ats 0-ts OLS ot(v 
a-is is [abis] o-is is [dbus] tbis[is] 
A. a-vs as o-vs ovs | *-a & vs &s a 
a-ms ds o-ms ds | *-a & ems és [7s] a& [ia] 
DN. a-e @ o-€ @ € 
G. a-w aww o-w ow ou 
14, v. GREEK AND Latin PARADIGMS COMPARED. 
FIRST DECLENSION. — FEMININE. 
Sing. Nom. va, l¥ra, a lyre (Subject). 
ase Gen. lyre, of a lyre. 
prersaa, Aupts, Abl. lyra, From a lyre. 
, Dat. lyre, to or for a lyre. 
Dats) d¢pq, Abl. lyra, with or by a lyre. 
Ace. vpay, lyram, a lyre (Object). 
Voc. dAvpa, lyra, O lyre. 
Plur. Nom. dAvpar, lyre, lyres (Subject). 
“a Gen. lyra@rum, of lyres. 
Gens * Aupeov, Abl. lyris, From lyres. 
, Dat. lyris, to or for lyres. 
Dat. « Npars, Abl. lyris, with or by lyres. 
Acc. ' uvpas, lyras, lyres (Object). 
Voc. Avpar, lyre, O lyres. 
Dual Nom. Avpa, lyre duc, two lyres (Subject). 
Gen. Avpaty, lyrarum duérum, of two lyres, &c. 


20 GREEK AND LATIN DECLENSION COMPARED. § 14. 


DEC. I. MASC. DEC. II. MASC. DEC. III. M. F, 
Sailor. Wile. Swine. 
Sing. Nom. vatrns nauta dédros dolus cis siis 
Gen. vatrou naute d5dov dolt actos suis 
Dat. vairy naute diAw dolo ovt = sta 
Abl. nauta dolo ste 
Acc. vavrny nautam ddrov dolwm adv stem 
Voc. vatra nauta ddre dole od ~~ suis 
Plur. N.V. vadrav naute ddrov_ dol aves sites 
Gen. vauTav nautérum  didrtov dolorum oSav sium 
Dat. vatrats  nautis d5rors dolis ciol stibus 
Acc. vatrds nautas ddAovs dolos ciias sites 
Du. N. A.V. vatra 55\o ove 
G. D. = vavray dddouv ovotv 
DEC. IJ. NEUT. DEC. III. NEUT. DEC. IV. N. 
Gift. Fire. Throat. Tear. Knee. 
S. N. A.V. d@pov déinum mop gutttr ddxpd =. gent 
Gen. dwpov dont mupdes guttiris ddxptos gen(tis)iis 
Dat. ddpw dono mupt gutturé ddkput gen(ud)a ~ 
Abl. dono gutture gen(ue)t 
P. N. A.V. 68k dona guttura ddxpva genua 
Gen. dwpwy dondrum gutturwm daxpiov genuwm 
Dat. dwpors donis gutturibus ddxpvor genubus 
D. N. A.V. ddépa OdKpve 
G. D.  dwpow Oaxpvorv 


For vas was also used the contract form ods ; for swibus, the syncopated 
stibus ; and for genwbus (genuibus), by a syncope of the u, genibus. See 225 f. 


15. vi. Nouns oF THE First DECLENSION. 
a. FEMININE. 


The goddess, Ty, MUSE, table, song, mink 
Lat. dea musca misa mensa ode mina 
SON ay bea pula povoa TpamreCa oon pva 
G. ths deas pulas povons  tpamé(ns Gdns  pvas 
" 7H og pula Hoven Tpare Cn» @o7 pra 
- Ty Oeav  pviav povody tpanelav @dnv pray 
Peal Peat.” Fav povoa tpareCat @dai ava 
G. tov Gedy jpuidv = ovoav— tpaneav = @ OGY pa 
D; Tats eats pias povous TparéCats @dais _—uvais 
Jf - > Cyn > a 
A. tas eas puias povoads TpaneCas @dds vas 
D.N. ta ea pula povoa Tpare(a oda pa 
G. raw Ocatv prviaw potoaw  rpamécaw gdaiv pvaty 


_ § 15. c Dec. I. 180b, 194s: Gender 176 ; 4, 6,173 b; @, a, or 2, 
in Sing., 194s; moenra 194. 2; ur(aa)a, “Hpu(éas)fs, 196, 120e; Boppa, 
TwSpdou and -a, 198.1, 93d. Accent: Oeds 775 a, wvlas 771 b, wuav 77a, 
tpamégns 770 a, ’Arpetdac 7710, “Epu(éas)ijs 772. — Other Examples, oxid 
shadow, oixia house, Ovpa door, pa hora, HOUR, jotpa portion, yAéoou or 
yAGrra (169 a) tongue, 55fa opinion, Néawa lioness, riut honor, Kopn maiden, 
ovK(éa)h fig-tree ; vedvias young man, xpirhs Judge, Wépons Persian. 


§ 16. NOUNS OF THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSION. 21 
b. MASCULINE. 
The steward, poet, sonof Atreus, Mercury, north wind. 
Lat. questor — poeta Atrides Hermes boreas 
, > , f= lad Sm \ICA 
S. N. 6 Tapas TounTns Arpeidns ‘Epp(éas )js Bo(péas)ppas 
G. rod Tapiov monrovd ‘Atpetdov ‘Epu(€éou )od Bo(péov)ppa 
D. TO Tapia Tour?) “Atpeldy Eppleg ln  Bolpéa )ppa 
A. Tov Tapidy moutyv ‘ArpetOny Epp(éav nv Bo(péav)ppav 
/- iM ¢ f- “ f— pia tte!) 
V.@& rapid  mounra “Arpeion “Epu(ea )n —Bo(péa )ppa 
’ ; ‘ : : ‘ Gobryas. 
P. N. of = rapiae  rroinrai Arpeidat “Epp(eac )at N. TwSpvas 
G. Tév Tapidy tontdav Artpedav Epp(edy se G. TwBpvov, 
D. rois trapiats momrais *Arpeidats ‘Eppléats)ais TwBpva 
A. rods tapias romras Arpeidds ‘Eppléas ie D. Tw8pva 
D. N. TO Tapia mouTa “Arpeioa ‘Epplea Ja A. TwBpvav 
G. row tapiav momrtaiy *Arpeidaw “Epp(éaw)aivy V. TwBpva 
16. vit. Nouns or THE Second DECLENSION. 
a. MASCULINE AND FEMININE. 
The choir, island, angel, mind, temple. 
Lat. chorus instila angélus mens fanum 
€ ~ ae e a id =-/ U 
S. N. 6 xopds ) vncos 6 ayyekos 6 vd0s, vods 6 vads, vews 
y 4 , ~ “A , 
G. Xopov ynoov dyyéhov yoov, vou vaov, vEew 
D. Xop@ moe dyyého v6, ve vag, ved 
A.  xopdv ynoov dyyehov vdov, voov vaov, VEoV, 
V.  xope VTE dyyede voe, vo [veo 
P. NN; opot ynooe dyyenot vool, vot vaol, veo 
x an 7 “iyy€ , ~ ~ 5 
G. xopov wvncor ayyé av vo@v, vav va@v, vewy 
D. xopois woos ayyéots vols vols vaois, ve@s 
A. xopods  vncovs ayyédovs _ vdovs, vovs vaovs, vews 
D.N. ope vnow ayye Aw VO@, VO yaw, vew 
x Pp c 7 tidy , be ~ 4 
G.  yopotv myoow  — ayy Now voowv, vow vaoiv, vEewv 
b. NEUTER. 
The C99, cave, apple, part, bone. 
Lat. ovum antram malum membrum Os 
S. N. 76 @Ov civTpov HOV dplov doTéov, dOaTour 
p pi pop 
G. trod = oD tv Tov pendou popiov datéov, daTod 
D. ro o@ avTp@ pnr@ popl@ OOTE@, OOT@ 
P.N. ra ou avrpa pnra propia doTéd, dota 
G. Tay aay avTpey —s nov popiav doTéwy, OoTaY 
D. rots = ois — avtpors_ ~—spaAows popios  — daTéots, daTois 
D.N. ro Ow awrpe pINAw popio 6OTE®, OTH 
G. toiv ov dyrpow pnrow popiow  daTéow, dorow 





§ 16. c. Dec. Il. 199s: Gender 176; v(d0s)ods, do7(€ov)otv, 121, 120, 


772 ; 


v(ads)ews 120 e, 1, 772d; A. vew 199. 3; wdv 140. —O. E. 6 Adyos 


word, q 656s way, 6 Ojwos people, 6 Tavpos taurus, bull, 6, dvOpwmos homo, 
min, 6 Beds (182 ¢) deus, god, 6 mobs voyage, 6 News people, 6 Nayws hure, 


h éws dawn ; 


mrepsv wing, psdov rosa, ROSE, obxKoy fig, dpyavov tool. 


22 THIRD DECLENSION. — MUTES. phe 
17. v. Nouns or THE THIRD DECLENSION. 
A. MUT&.—a, MAscuLinE AND FEMININE. 
a. LABIAL. b. PALATAL. c. LINGUAL. 
6, vulture. | 6,7, goat. , hair. | 7, hope. 6, tooth. n, key. 
>) / vb , eS 
S.N. yip ai, Opi eAmis ddovs kXeis clavis 
G. yimos aiyos Tptxos | €Amidos  ddovtos  xkdetdos 
D. yori aiyt Tpixi eAmiou OOovTt KAeLde : 
A. yomra atya tTpixa | €Amida ddovra _—kXeiOa, Kew 
P.N. yomes alyes tpixes | €Awides  dddvTes _kdetdes| kAeis] 
G. yorav | aiyav  rtpiyadv | eAnidwv ddovray Kewdov 
D. yoi aifi Op&i eArriot ddovot ketal 
A. yimas | atyas tpixas | eAmidas dddvras kAetdas, Kets 
D.N. yine alye Tpixe eAride cOovre _— kA ete 
G. yuroiv | alyoiy ptyoiv | eAmidow dddvrow  xkevdoiv 
H, ven 6, raven. 6, lynx. | , strife. n, helmet. 6, foot. 
, wu v 4 
S. N. prey KopaE ~—- Avy épis Kopus mous 
G. preBos | Kdvaxos Avykds | epidos Kopubos modus 
D. pdreBi_ | Kdépaxe —- Avyxi epide Kopvt moot 
? / / »* a+ id , ‘ 
A. @deBa | Kopaxa vyxa | €ptda, Epiv KopvOa, Kopuy moda 
P.D. preypi | copa Avy§i | epeoe kopvat Toot 
d. LINGUAL (continued). 
6,7, child. 6,sovereign. %, wife. 6, lion. 6, giant.  %, Opus. 
S. N. mais dvak dapap éewv yiyas ’Orrovs 
G. watdos ivaxtos Sduaptos éovtos yiyavros ”Omodvros 
D. radi avaktt Sdpaprte A€ovTe yiyavte ’Orodvre 
A. maida = d@vaxta_—s Odpapra— eovta —syiyavta =’ Onoda 
V. nat ava déov yiyav 
P.D. wai = va ku Sdpapot Reovot —yiydor 
e. NEUTER. — LINGUAL. 
Td, body. 76, light. 710, liver. 16, horn. 70, ear. 
S. N. copa pas rap Képas cornu ovs 
HS , uv Ave sou 
G. c@piros hwros rdtos  Képaros, Képdos, Kepws Tos 
, 4 os = / 
D. copare pari Hrare képa@tt, Képai, képa ari 
P.N. ocopara para rata Képata, Képaa, Képa ora 
G. gapdrav dorav nrdrev Keparev Kepdwy, Kepov adToV 
D. copace doci Hract kepaat aci 
D.N. compare pore rare Kepate, Kkepae, Kepa Ore 
G. gopdrov dorow nrarow  keparow, Kepdow, Kep@v — @TOLV 





$17. f. Dec. III. 202s: Gender 177. Mutes: yd(as)p, Avy(xs)&, 
lyn(cs)x, éAmi(ds)s, 151 ; yi(av)ara, xre?(dv)v, 160 e, 204a; (0)rpexds 159 b; 


6d(ovrs)ovs den(ts)s, 


6d(ovrat)otor, 


yiy(aers)as gig(ants)das, 


A€(ovTs)ov 


le(ons)o, ddua(prs)p, 153, 156, 205 ; w(ods)ods pe(ds)s 214a; dv(axr)a, rat, 


$19. LIQUIDS. PURE. 23 


(a. Not syncopated.) 18. 8B. LIQUID. (b. Syncopated.) 
6, beast. ,nose. %, hand. 6, man. 0,7), dog. 0,7, lamb. 

S.N. Onp féra pis xelp ayip vir Kvov (apvos) 
G. Onpos pivos —- xetpds avépos, avdpos Kvvds —adpvds 
D. @npi pwi xecpi avept, avdpi kuvi apvi 
A. Ona piva xelpa dvépa, dvipa = kuva_—s iva 
Vv. pu avep KUOV 

P.N. 6npes pives —_xetpes dvepes, av6pes Kuves — ipves 
G. Onpav pwav xe—pav — avépav, avdpav = kuvav— dpvav 
D. @npoi prot xepot dvOpace Kvot dpvact 
A. @npas pivas  xelpas ~— avepas, dvdpas kvvas ~— ipvas 

P.N. Onpe pive xetpe dvepe, avdpe KUVE dipve 
G. Onpoiv pivow  xepotv avépow, avdpoiy Kuvoty — apvoiv 

6, orator. 6, harbor. 6, deity. 6, pean. 6, Sather. 

Lat. orator portus deemon pean pater 

ae A pyrep Atunv daipev mavay marnp 
ES prropos Aupévos Oaipovos Taavos Tare pos, marpos 
D. prropt Aypeve daipove Tavave marépt, tmarpl 
A. piropa Aupéva daipova mavava Tarepa 
V. pyrop datpov mwaTep 

P.D. pyropot — upeote daipoct Taact TaTpact 


19. C. PURE. —a. MAscuLine AND FEMININE. 


6, weevil. 6,7, sheep. 6, hero. 6, 1), OX. 6, fish. nh, echo. 
S.N. kis ois Ovis pws hérds Bods bos iy bus nx echo 
G. Klos olds 1pwos Boos bovis iyévos 7x(Gos)ovs 
D. xii — ott npot [jpo| Bot bovi ixdvi NXE Jo 
A. Kw ~~ ow Wpoa, ipo  PBovv ix vv 7x(6a )@ 
V. Bov ix Gv nxot 
P.N. Kies otesfots] Fpwes Boes iyOves [ixGds] 
G. Kiav oly NP@ev Body boum iydvev 
D. kioi —oiat pact Bovoi ixGvor 
A. Kias olas, ols fpwas, pws das, Bots ixOvas, iybis 
D.N. kite ove Hpwe Boe ixdve [ix 90] 
G. kloty oiotv pm@ouw Boowv iyOvow 


204b; cGp(ar)a, d(wr)as, Fr(ar)ap, 160. Contraction 207: Kets 122, 
Or(bers)00$ 118 d, 121 b, xépg 119, xépa, Képos, (ots) obs, wrds, 120 a, b, c. 
Accent : yumés 778 a, PwTwr 778b. —O. E. 6 ypuy, -vrés, gryps, -Fphis, 
GRIFFIN, “Apay, -afos, ARAB, } Pddayé, -ayyos, phalanx, -angis, 47s, 
Onrés, hired man,  Napmas, -ddos, torch, LAMP, 7) xdpts, -tTos, grace, h vvé, 
-kTés, NOX, -ctis, NIGHT, 6 dpdxwy, -ovros, draco, DRAGON, 6 luds, -dvros, 
thong ; 76 rolnua, -aros, poéma, -atis, POEM, TO Huap, -aros, day, To Tépas, 
-atos, prodigy,rd viwp, bdaros, water. 
§ 18. c. Liquids 208 s: O7(ps)p, Ayc(evs)hv, fl(vs)s, 153, 156, 208 ; 

Amor, Onpol, 154, 157 ; xepol 224f; dvep 208f; Ku[o|yds canis, mar[e]pi 


24 THIRD DECLENSION. — PURES. 19, 


b. MascuLInE AND FEMININE (continued). 


“~ v s , be = e A ° 
S N. 9 wdXts city 6 mxvs cubit 6 inmets knight 9 vavs ship 
, « ik 
@ inmrews VEws 
G. mddews mXEos e. ond = a ‘A 
D. worei, moder mnyxei, mnxer inmet, immer yn 
A. amoAw 7 XUV inmea vauv 
V. won ™XV immed (ypav) 
4 € Lod ~ ~ 
P.N. addAees, modes TXEES, mxers immees, immets, -Ns Yes 
€ z val 
G. mddewv m7) xeov [7nxav| inmewy ve@v 
D. médeoe T™XETL inmevaot vavot 
A. éddeas, mOdELs =mNXEaAS, THXELS immeds, inmets vavs 
D.N. maédee, médAn = mH XEE immee [vie] 
, c , a 
G. smoéow T™NXEOLWV imméow veo 
S. N. Swxparns Socrates ‘HpakAéns, “Hpaxdns Hercules 
G. Swkpdreos, SwKpdrous ‘Hpaxhéeos, “Hpaxheous _ 
, 7 € a ~ 
D. Sewxparei, Swxparer “Hpakv ect, Hpakve€et, Hpakvet 
’ c f—_ A 
A. S@xpdtea, Saxpatn, -nv “Hpak\éea, “Hpakded, —“Hpakan 
a € / 
V. Seaxpares ‘Hpdkdees, “Hpdkders ["Hpakdes] 
c. NEUTER. 
S.N. 10 yépiis honor 76 yevos race génis TO dorv town 
G. épaos, yepas éveos, évous oenéris doreos, UTTEWS 
yépdos, yépos —yéveos, y toreos, & 
D. epat épat ével éver generl aotTel, aaoret 
Yep YFP PRUE oy 
P.N. yepaa, yepa yevea yevn genere dotea, aot 
G. Epadwy, yEepav eveay yevav wenerum aoTe wy 
yepdav, “yep yevéov yevav gener i 
D. —-yepaot yeveot generibus  aoreat 
D.N. yepae, ye pa yevee yer doTee 
G.  yepdow, yep@v —-yeveouv, yevoiv aoreou 








patie ri, dple]va, 210 ; dvd pds 146 ; dp(evorvaow 145a.—O. E. 6 pap, 
-wpds, fu(rs)7, thief, 6, 7 ‘en, -€pos, aer, AIR, 7 MAT NP, -Tpds, mater, -tris, 
MOTHER, 7 dxrls, -tvos, TAY, 0 ToL, ae shepherd, 6 jv, unvds, mensis, 
MONTH, 6 aidy, -Gvos, evum, age, 6 dds, adds, sa(ls)l, SALT ; 7d véxrap, 
-apos, nectar, 7d (Feap) gap Hp ver, spring. 

$19. d. Pures 212s: kis, ixOvs, 217; xiv 216 b, 202 a3 (dF ovis) 
dis ois 21, 140 b; [Bors, Boros bovis] Bods, Bods, 214, 217 a, b; twrm(eFs)ets, 
v(aFs)ads navis, rnxus, dorv 213a, 215 b, 216, 217b; rods 213 b, 217g; 
LwKparyns 213 a, 217 e; yévos 215 b, 217d; Hy(os)@ 214b; V. Hxot, Bod, 
215 c, 217 b, d ; Bovsl, vavol, 216d; vnt 222f; Zwxpdrny 216c. Con- 
traction 7, 118s: How, det yépa, 119 ; . €pdy adorn, YEpws, Hjpw, 120 a, 
ba "Hoaxhéa 120 f£:: pews 120.1, ZIT « nets, yévous, 7xo0s echus, ols, 
bya, wodn, tras, 121; A. ols, Bods, wiktes vats, 122; mwédews, lrméd, -as, 
220; mnxav 220f ; "Hoaxhfs 219c.—0O. E. 6 bibs, Owds, jackal, 6 pis, 
uivds, miis, miiris, MOUSE ; % dpxus, -vos, net, 7) Id, “Iods, Io, Tus, 4 rages, 
-ews, rank, 6 wédexus, -ews, aX, 0 Bacireds king, 6 Kvuévns, -ous, 6 Iept- 
kX(éns) fs * TO Kpéas caro, flesh, 7d védos niibes, cloud, 7d Tetxos wall. 


aa) 
bo 
~ 
bo 
Cr 


DIALECTS. 


1x. Drauectic Forms oF DECLENSION. 


20. 


a. First DrciEnsion (197s). 


‘ Tauins, Bopéns. 

‘ vauras, Arpeidas. 
* trmérd, pnrierd. 
* Uppy, oikin.. [o7. 

; Ep. addBein, Kvic- 
uj ‘ad wid, Tyud, Ya. 

"Ar peiddo, Bopéao. 


G. ov, Old, ao- 


Ion. ea, * Arpeidew, Bopéw. 


Dor. a: “Arpelda, ‘Hpua. 
Gs, lon. ns ° Avpys, yevefs. 
ns, Dor. Gs* Trias, wovods. 
Ep. 8e(v - Aisb,unbev, 
D.a, lon. 4° Tasty, vpn. 
my, Dor. @° vatra, ra w5¢. 


Ep. qou(v: jd: Binow. 


Ae | Sue penned Up, 
protaydpyy, -eu. 

aa ite! av: valray, Tydy. 
Vase L002 eo rauly, penilan 

&%, Poet. n° Aljrn Ap. Rh. 

nm, Dor. &: “Arpetda, Mevdrdxa. 
Old, &+ viudd, Acca. 

P. G. av, Old, deov * At pedduv. [wv. 

Ton. éav "Arperdéwv, Nupeé- 

Dor. ‘Ar peday, Oupar. 


D. ats, Old, stein Tatot Ovparow. 
lon. qou(v, ys * Pena, wérpys. 

A. Gs, [Ion.e&3(masc.) ; deo drecs |. 
Dor. &3+ Motpds, vindiis. 
fEol. as: ra's reuals. 


b. Second DEcLENSION (201). 


S. N.os, Laconic, op: maredp, 169d. 
G. ov, Ep. & Thes. ove - roto Néyoxo. 


Dor. w+ 7d byw. 
[lon. €o > Barrew, Kpoicew. | 
Ep. o€e(v - ovdpdvoley. 


@ (fr. aov), Ep. wo: Ieredo. 
D.@, Old, ov: “IcOu02, ro? Sduoe. 
Ep. égu(v- adrégu, (vyipu. 

Ep. 081 - otpavibc, “Idd. 


ec. THIrD DECLENSION (22 


S. G. aros, aos, lon. eos - képeos, ov Geos. 


eos, lon. & Dor. evs: @épeus. 

éa3, Ep. hos ~ Baccd fos, iam fos. 
Jon. & Dor. gos + Bacidéos. 

eas, Poct. os, os ~ ddeos, -nos. 
Ion. & Dor. tos ~ médos. 

uSos, Ion. & Dor. vos: Kuzpuos. 
Dor. uros + Odu:ros. 


ovs, Dor. & ol. ws - dx ds, aldws. 


D.et, Ep. At- Basdji, Inde. 
Jon. & + Baowdéi, IL nréi. 
eae, lon. & Dor.t: dN, Suvdui. 
| wt, Ion. & Dor. t- Ort, drdNt. 
‘ vi, Ep. w- vexu, digi. 
{ A.v, Poet. a+ evpéa, ixdva. 
6a, lon. ctv: ‘Iodv, Anrodv. 
Dor. ov: “Hpwr, Aarwr. 


éa, Ep. q+ Basia, braid 
Ion. & Poet. €&- Bacidér. 
Dor. & Poet. 4° Bacid7. 
V.es, Mol. €* Diwxpare. 
GR, TAB. 2 








8S. D.@, Beeot. ¥° av’ri, ri ddyi. 
P.N.ov, Beeot. 0+ Kadi, “Onnov. 
[G. ev, lon. éwv-> rupéwy, Dovcéwr.] 


D. avs, Old, ovee(v + rotor Adyourw. 
Beeot, 0s + dts wpokévis. 
A. ous, Dor. as, os Tas \Oyws, THs 
vKos, wapGévos. 
iol. ous* avdzetors wésrdors. 
Dual ow, Ep. oviv: troy, @woriv. 


1s). 


P.N.efs, Old Att. As° Baorjs. 
Kp. fjes > Baccd jes, im jes. 
Ion. & Dor.ées * Bacidées. 
ELS, Ion. & Dor. ves - mies. 
ac, Poet. a: Epa, Kpéed. 
Ton. ea: yepea, Téped. 
G.av, Ilon.dwv: xnvéwy, dvipéwy. 
[Dor. Gv- alyay, xuvév 4] 
éov, lip. fev: BaciAjwv. 
ewv, lon. & Dor. tov: rodiwy, 
D.ciuv, Old, err(v- xelpecc. 


Poet. cor(y: &recot. 
ecou(v: midecow. 
eoi(v, Ep. expi(v: dxerpu. 
Ion. tou(y* modeze. 
etou(v, Ep. herou(y* dpi T Herc. 


A.€os, Hp. fas + Baowdijds. (as. 
ion. & Dor. étis + Baoidé- 
Comm. ets + Basideis. 
€lS, Ton. & Dor. tas - wéXas. 
| Dualow, Ep. oviv: modotw. 


26 NOUNS. . § 21, 


21. x. IRREGULAR AND DIALECTIC DECLENSION, 


6, Jupiter. Dor. 0, Glis. 6, Gdipus. Poet. & Ion. 
S. N. Zevs, Lav TAods Oldizrovs [Oddizros] 
G. Acés, Znvis Zdvis Vdod Oidtrodos, Oldizov poet. Oldurdddo,-d,-ew 
D. Ad, Zyvi Zari Tob Olbttr0du Oidurdda, -y 
A. Ala, Ziva Zava T)otv Oldiroda, Oldizrouv Oidim bday, -nv 
V. Zed Tod = Oldizrov Oldirdda, -n 
P. N. [Ales, Zhves] G. Oldurddwr, A. -as - 
Attic. 6,son. Homeric. Doric.7, ship. Tonic. 
S. N. vids vids vats [vas] vnds [vqis} 
G. viod, vidos viod, vios, vidos vads vnds, veds 
D. vig, viet vid, vit, viet, viet vat pnt 
A. vidv vidv, via, viléd vabv [vay] via, véa [vndv] 
V. vié vié 
P.N. viot, viets vies, vides, vieis vaes pies, vées 
G. vidy, vidwr vidr, viéwy vady vpnav, vey 
D. viots, viéou viotor, vider, vavol,vaerot rnual, vnerot,véeror, 
A. viovs, vies vias, vidas vaas vijas, véas = [vadgy 
D.N. vid, vide 
G. vioty, vidow 
Attic. 76, spear. Homeric. 7, cave. Homeric. 6,stone. - 
S. N. ddpu Poet. dépu . oméos ozeios das 
G. ddparos, dopds Sovpds (yotvaros)  ozetous ddos 
D. ddpart, Sopi, Sdper Sovpi dovpare omrnt at 
A. \dav 
P.N. ddpara, dépn dodpa  Sdovpara (kdéa) 
G. dopdrwy dovpwy  orrelaw Ado 
D. ddpace dovperar, dovpact oTréool, orjerot DAdeoor 
D.N. ddpare dodpe Ge 
G. dopdrow 
Homeric PARADIGMS. 
6, knight. n, city. 6, ), sheep. 
S. N. immeds més bis 
G. immijos (Tvdéos) amddcos, mrddeos, wéd€os, TOANOS dios, olds 
D. inmi (Ilndéi-e) rod, ~—s arddet, oder? TOdANE 
A. immja (Tvdéd,-7) rokw, =arddw (rédna Hes.) div 
V. immed (udvre A. 106) 
P.N. inmies, treis? ones, woAnes dies 
\ ¢ D , = a 
x. lrajwv ToN\lwy  dtav, olay 
D. immedor (dpiorh- modlecot (érddteow) dleoct, olect, 
A. immijas  [eoor) modas, rodis or rodeLs, réAnas bis [Beooe 
6, Ulysses. 6, Patroclus. 6, Mars. 
8. N. ‘Odveceds, Odvcevs IIdrpoxdos (-fsTheoe.) “Apys 
| > a , 3 a a , a 
r. Odvocijos,-€os, Odvojjos, Odvceds TlarpoxXov, -o10, -fos “Apnos, -€os 
D. ( Axrre? ) Odvoni Tlarpéxr\w "Apyi, -€t,-€t 
A. ‘Odvocja, Odvoja ‘OdvcH  Idrpoxdov, -Fa “Apna, -nv 


V. ‘Odvaced, ‘Odvced IldrpoxXe, -ees or -ets “Apes EB. 31. 


¢ 22. ADJECTIVES. 27 
22. x1. ApsecTIVES oF Two TERMINATIONS. 
a. Or THE SECOND DECLENSION. 
6, 7 (unjust) 7d 6, 7 (unfading) TO 
S. N. adios ddixov aynpdos aynpes dynpaov, dynpav 
G. adixouv dynpaov, aynpe 
D. adixo dyn pag, aynpe 
A. aSixoy dynpaov, aynpev, aynpe 
* V. ddcce 
ye adcxot aduxa dynpaot, dynpp dynpaa, daynpe 
G. ddixev dynpdov, ayhpev 
D.  adixors aynpdos, aynpos 
A. adikous dynpdovs, Bynes 
D.N. ddixo aynpaw, dynpo 
G. adikouy aynpaow,  aynpav 


b. Or THE TutRD DECLENSION. 


6, 4) (male) 7d 0, 7 (pleasing) Td 7 (two-footed) rd 


S.N. dippnv  appev eV apis eVyapt uss Sirouy 
G. appevos evxdptros dimodos 
D. apper evydpire dimode 
A. appeva evxapira, evxapLy dimoda, dior 
V. x td eVxape Oimou 
PEN, ip peves appeva + evxdpires ev xapiTa Sirodes Siroda 
G. appevov evyapitav durddwv 
D. appear evyapioe dimroae 
A. appevas evyapitas dimodas 
D.N. dippeve evyapite Oimrode 
G. appéevow evxapitow Ourrddow 
0, 7, (evident) rd 0, ) (greater) Td 
S.N. cays aades peitov major peifov majus 
G. aadeos, cadots peiCovos majoris 
D. casi, caet peiCou = majori 
A. aged, capn peicova, pelo 
V. ocaés petCov 
P.N. caées cadeis cadpéa, capy peitoves, petCovs petCova, peiCo 
G. capéoy, capav perCovev 
D. ocadéor peiCoot 
A. gaeéas, caeis peiCovas, peiCous 
D.N. cade, cap7 pelCove 
G. gcadzow, cao pecCévowv 


§ 22. 





ce. Aps. oF Two TERM. 231: 


dyipws 200, ayhpw 199. 3, 120e; 


dpp(evs)nv, wel((ovs)wv, 208 a, 157 ; etxape(rs)s 204; dia(ods)ous bipes, dimour, 
Ql4a, 231 c, 24a, 22a, dirov 215¢; capys, cadés, 213c, 215a, 217d, e,; 
capois, cadet, 219 a, 119, 1218; pelgw 211. —O. E. fovyos quiet, &dokos 
glorious, dv(oos)ovs, -(oov)ouv, senseless, 1\(aos)ews propitious, etyews fertile ; 
evdalu(ovs)wv fortunate, evedri(ds)s hopeful, adnOjs, -és, true, vyehs, -és 
(120f), healthy, wetwv minor, less, rodvrrovs many-footed, polypus, polyp. 








28 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. § 23. 
23. xu. AbdJECTIVES OF THREE TERMINATIONS. 
a. OF THE SEcoND AND First DECLENSIONS. 
6 (morus) % (foolish) rd M. (aya0ds) F. (good) N. 
S.N. padpos papa p@pov bonus bona bonum 
G. pa@pov papas boni bonee 
D. pape papa bono bonee, Ab. -a 
A. p@pov  popav bonum bonam 
V. pape bone 
P, N.  papor papal papa boni bonee bona 
G. papov popwv bonérum bonarum 
D. pepo  popats bonis bonis 
A. popovs popas bonos bonas 
D.N. pape popa 
G. popow  popary 
o (sapiens) % (wise) 7d o (simplex) 7 (simple) ré 
S..N. copés copy aoddv dmd‘dos \ots amdlon )n rd ‘Govod¥ 
G. copov sods amX(dov )ov cmd ‘ons )ns 
D. ToHe@ copy dmd'd@ )o cmd (on M0 
A. copay codny dm Gov )ovv amd‘onv nv 
V. cod 
P.N. codoi coda copa dm\‘dot \ot dm ‘oat lat amd oa )a 
G. copay copar at\bwv dv arX(Cov av 
D. codois coats dmA(oots )ots dad ‘oats)ats 
A. godovs codas dm\(oous\ ots dmAlods \as 
D.N. copd coda and\'ow \o admdroa a 
NX +3 a c , ; eee c 77 r 
G. copow copay dmX oot )oiy amd (oaty, aw 
o (aureus, gold) n TO 
S. N, xpugeos, xpvoovs xpuoei, — xpuoh Xpvoeov, xpuTovy 
Ce XpuTeov, —XpvTov Xpvoeas,  Xpvons 
D. xpvoep, — xpvo@ XPvTEd, —_ Xpvoy 
A. xpvaeov, xpucovy Xpvoeav, xXpvonv 
P.N. ypvoeot,  xpvooi xpvoea, yxpvoat xpvoed, ypvoa 
G. ypucéwv, xpvoa@v xpvtéwv, xpvoov 
D. ypvoeois yxpvaots Xpuoeas, yxpvcais 
A. xpuaeovs, xpuaovs xpvceas, xpuoas 
D.N. ypvoé@,  yxpvoed xXpvoed,  yxpvoa 
G. xpueéow,  yxpvootv Xpvoeaw, xpvoaw 
§ 23. ce. Dec. I. and II. 232: pdow» 777.2; dadods, xpucods, 200, 


120s, 77.2 ¢, 777.2. —O. E. piruos friendly, dixacos just, waxpds long, ex Opis 
hostile, a@@psos dense, cards beautiful. wéoos medius, MIDDLE, demA(dos)ovs 
duplex, DOUBLE, dpyvpeos apy pods argenteus, of silver. 


ad. 


Deo. LIL and, I. 


217-b; mé.awa, Hde7a, 233.0; 


9° 
23 


3: wéd\as 208; wa 


s, xapiers 205 3 Hdds 213 ¢, 


Twaoa, xaplecoa, 233 b, 155, 156; pedact, 


AS 


| . 
. 





a 


mw 
Zr UOs4 <PyoZ 


S 
Q 


D.N. 
G. 


OF THREE TERMINATIONS. 


b. Or THE THirp AND First DECLENSIONS. 


Oo (niger) 
peas 

pe Aavos 
pedave 


pe Nava 


peAaves 
peAavov 
peAace - 
peAavas 


pe Aave 
peXavow 


n (black) 
pédava 
peAaivns 
peAaivn 
pee Nauvay 


pe Aauvae 
peAawv@v 
peAaivats 
peAaivds 


pedaiva 
peAaivay 


TO 
pe Nay 


pe ava 


0 (gratio..us) 7 (agreeable) 7d 


Xapeers xapieroa xaplev 
xapievtos § yxapteaons 

, ; i 
xXaplevte = xapteoon 
xapievra = xapieooay 
xapiev 
Xapievres xXaplecoat xapievra 
xapievrwy yxapiecoay 

, a 
xaplect Xapiecoas 

‘ ete 
xapievras yapiecods 
xapievte Xapreroa 
Xapievrow yapiéaoaty 


o (omnis) 9 (all) 7d 


mas 
TavTos 
qwavrt 
mavra 


TAYTES 
TAVT@V 
Tact 
mayras 


TaVvTE 
[Wavrow 


0 (suavis) 


Taga 
Taons 
Tracy 

Tacav 


macat mwavra 
TAaT@v 

macas 

mTaods 

Twaca 

macau 


n (sweet) Td 


n0Us yoeta 00 
NOES 7Oeias 

nO<t, moet  noeia 

Sv 7O€layv 

900 

noees, nOeis nOetae dea 
O€wv 7devav 
nOeot 70€lats 
noeas, ndets deltas 

noe noeta 

7 Oéou nOetaw 


24, OF THE THREE DECLENSIONS. 


o (magnus) 4 (great) 7d 


peyas 
peyaXou 
peyaio 
peyav 
peyare 
preyaXor 
peyddov 
peyddos 
peyadous 


peyaro 
peyddou 


peyarn 
peyadns 
peyady 
peyadny 


peyarar - 
peydov 
peyadats 
pleyadas 


peyada 
peyadaty 


peya 


peyada 


6 (multus) 7 (much) 7d 


\ 


moXUs. mon qWoAV 
moANod ~—s TroAANS 
TOAX@ ToAAN 
mohvuv —- woAAny 

multi, many 
jo\Aot mwo\Nai = TOAAG 
TOAA@VY = TOAA@ 
tmoA\Aois = rwoAAats 
moANovs moAddAas 





yaplert, maot, 1548; wav, mdvrwv, waor, 729. 2, 7780; hdet 219. — 
O. E. rad(avs)Gs wretched (M. Voc. rdéddv), rép(evs)nv tener, TENDER, 
cvurds (ctv, was), -doa, -cv, all together, Tiunes honored, wrepsecs winged 
(207 c), éx(ovrs)ov willing, Bpaxvs brevis, short, yNuxis dulcis, sweet (168), 
evpts wide, c&is sharp, Bpadvs tardus, slow, raxvs swift. 


30 ADJECTIVES. — NUMERALS. § 24. 


SAac0 (mitis) 7 (mild) TO LP. of al Ta 
N. mpaos mpacia mpaor @Mpaot,  mpacis mpaeiat mpaea 
G. mpdov_ mpaeias Tpaeov Tpaer@v 
D. mpd  mpaeia Tpaols, Mpacot Mpaetats mpacar 
A. mpaov mpae.av TMpaovs, TMpaeis mpueids 
25. xu. DECLENSION oF NUMERALS. 
M. (anus) F. (one) N. M. (nullus) F. (70 one) N. M., none. 
8. N. eis pia fy ovdeis  ovdepia ov ev P. otdéves 
G. é€vés  uas ovdevds ovdeutas ovdevey 
D. évi ua ovdevi = ovd es ovdeoe 
A. €va  piay ovdeva — ovdepriay ovdevas 
M. F.N., both. M.F.N., 0200. Me Foe 


~PN. A. dudo ambo, -x, -0 dvo, es duo due duo 
G. D. audotv amborum, &e. dvoiv, late G. dveiy P. late D. duet 


M.F.(three)N. M.F. N. M. F. (quatuor, four) x. 
?.N. tpets tpia tres tria Téooapes, Térrapes Téa capa, TéTTApa 
G.  tprav trium TETTAPwV, TETTAPOV 
D. rpii tribus Técoapot, TeTTapGt 
A. spss tres Tégoapas, TéTTAapas 


§ 24. a. See 236; modds 213 ¢, 217 b; mpacia 233 a, wpaets 121. 


g. Homeric Forms of onus. 


0) q TO 
S.2N: ToNUs, TOUNYS mo\NOs WoAXH ToXU, TouNU, WoAddv 
G. modéos TONS 
D. (aodet ? Asch.) TOMA@ WoAAD 
A. mwodtv, movdvtv wo\Ndv od, tmToudvv 
P. N. mondées, models mo\Nol ronal (o\éa Aisch.) rodda 
G. qwodéwy ToOAKGY ToAAG wy, TOANEWY 
D. modéor, -€oct, -€esut mod otot ToAN|CL 
A. modéas [7oXers |] moh\ovs mod\ds 


§ 25. a. NUMERALS 240: (és) e@s.208 d, ula 194¢, ovdevds 973 b; rpets 
218 ; rérrapes 169 a, Técoapor 157 ; (ovde els) oddels, wndeis, no One, 128 a, 
late M. and N. (ovre eis, urjre eis) ovdeis, ovbév, unOeis, unbév, 161 b. 

b. Dialectic Forms: 1: Mase. N. Ep. ees 185, Hes. Th. 145, Dor. 4s 
131d, Inse. Heracl. ; Fem. Ion. pln, -7s, ovSeuén, 197 a, Hipp., Ep. (fr. 
old tos) id, cijs, in, idv, A. 437, II. 178, A. 174, & 4385; also Neut. i@ Z. 
422; Pl. Ion. ovdapol, undapol, -al, -d, none, -Gr, -oict, -ator, -ovs, -ds (v. 1. 
ovdauéas 135a, Hdt. 4. 114), Hdt. 1. 18, 143, &c. 2: Ep. Du. dow I. 236, 
Pl. dovol, -ai, -d, -oto1, -ots, -ovs, -ds, M. 455, 464, A. 7, 6. 129, 526; Ion. 
Pl. dvav Hdt. 1. 94, dvoto. Ib. 82. 3: Dor. N. A. rots Inse., Poet. D. 
rpioiot Hippon. Fr. 8. 4: Ion. réoospes Hdt. 2. 30, 31, Dor. réropes or 
rérropes, Theoc. 14. 16, Tim. 96 b, Aol. and Ep. wlovpes e. 70 ; Foet. or 
late D. rérpact Hes. Fr. 47. 5. 


26. 


PARTiCIPLES. 


a. Present. 


» 
xiv. AcTIVE PARTICIPLES. 


31 


b. 2 Aorist, -p. Form. 





6 (solvens) 7 (loosing) 75 = (cleariny) 6 (having put) 7 Td 
L , ~ _ , 
S.N. Advov Avovga doy luens Geis Ocioa ev 
G. Avovros Avovons luentis Gevros Oeians 
D. dvovte Avovon luenti Oévtt —- Orkin 
A. Rtovra  dvovaay luentem Oévra = Oetocav 
P.N. Avovres Avovoeat Avovra luentes,-ia Oévres Ocioa Oevra 
G. Avdvr@avy Avovtadv luentium 6é€vrav Oewrav 
D. Avovat Avoicats luentibus  @eior Geioats 
A. Avovras Avoveas luentes Gevras Oeioas 
~D.N.- Avovre Avovoa Oévre beioa 
G. Avdvrow Avovoay Gévrow Oeioaw 
e. Present Cont acted. _ d. Liquid Future. 
6 (vivens) 4 (living) 76 6 (dictiiras) 7 (about to say) Te 
~ wb lol ~ 4 | Sea > ° 2 a 
S.N.  (awv)av ((dov)ara  §(dov)av épawv €:o)ca  épodv 
G. ((do)a@vros §(aov)eans épodvros  épovirns 
D. §(do)ayvre S(aov)drn épodvrt epovion 
A. §(do)@7a §(dov)aca €potvra = Epodoar 
P.N. ({do)arvres ((dov)Scar §(do)arvTa €potvres ézo3car €epotyta 
G. ((adjavrov ¢(aov)wrav E€potvTwy  épovo dv 
D. §(do)ase ((aov)@sas €p00ce épovioars 
A. ((do)avras §(aodt)Sods €potvras époavoas 
D.N. ((do)@re fa0v)aca €pobyre  €potoa 
G. §(ad)évrow ((aot)asaw €povvrow épovoau 
e. 1 Aorist. f. 2 Aorist. 
6 (having loose’) 7 T) 6 (having left) 7 Td 
ee Pe ae ny uv a 
.N. Avoas Avoadoa Advoav Alrrev Aurovca = Aurrov 
G. Avoavtos Avoaons Aumdvros Arrovens 
P.N. Avoavres Avoaica HAvcavra Auemdvres Aurodocar AuwdvTa 
D. rAvoact Aveacats Auwovar crravoas 
g. 2 Aorist, -pc Form. 
6 (hivny given) 4 r 6 (having centered) 4 TO 
, ~ t a SS 
S. N. dots dotoa Sov us dvea duv 
G. ddvros Sovons Svvtos dvans 
P.N. ddvtes dotoa Odovra Suvres dtoat dvyta 
D. dovcr dovaas dvat dvaas 
h. Perfect. i. Perfect Contracted. 
6 (sciens) 7 (knowing) 7d 6 (stans) % (standing) rd 
°’ , lod lal 
S.N. eiSas cidvia eidds ETHOS éoTaoa €OTwS, EaTOS 
G. eiddros eidvids EOT@TOS ETTwONS 
P.N. ciddtes elSviat  iddra €OTOTES E0T@TAL €aTwTA 
D. ciddct  eidvias éoT@ot éoTwooa.s 
§ 26. PARTICIPLES 234. 1: Ad(ovTs)wv, Ada(avTs)as, Oels, Svs, 205 ; 


dovs 205 a; el5(oTs)@s 214a; Avovoa, AVoaca, 233 b ; eldvia, EsrGoa, éords, 
233c,a; ((dwr)av, fOca, (Gvros, éor(ads)as, €or (ad)@ros, 120 ; ép(éwv)av, 
‘v(€ov)otca, ép(éov)ody, 152, 121. —O. E. Adowv, AvOels, NeAT Kas, 37. 


PRONOUNS. 


§ 27. 


" e 

27. xv. SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 

The forms marked with the sign; are enclitic when used without emphasis. The shorter 
forms, ov, sol, wé, are only so used. The initials affixed to dialectic forms denote, 
JE. Holic, B. Boeotic, D. Doric, E. Epic, I. Ionic, O. Old, P. Poetic. The plural nos 
and vos are placed beside the dual for comparison. 


a. PERSONAL. 











1 Pers rats 2. Pere. oe wu. eee Be. of him, her, it. 
S. Nom. éye E20 ou ti * 
Gen. €ov, povj mei govj tui a sul 
Dat. uot, pot; mihi colj tibi olf sibi 
Aec. eye, pe; me oe j té éj sé 
P. Nom. nets we “Dpets you odets they 
Gen. juaov “UP@V opav 
Dat. npiv “ppv opiat vy} 
Ace. nas ‘vpas opas[neut.cdpéa] 
D. N. A. va nos ope Vos PA: opa€| 
Y n sand aunt a Ae >, 
G. D. vey nostrum od@y  vestrum lodwiv] 
e. PERSONAL PRONOUNS: ANALYSIS, 248, 246. 
Stem. Conn.! Flexible 
1 2 3. | Vow.} Ending. Uncontracted and Contract Forms. 
S. N. p- c- ‘- 
G. py éu- o- “-  |-c | -0 éu(€o)od a(éo)oB (Eojav 
D.p-,éu-o- “= [-e | -t éu(et)ot a(etjot (er )ot 
A. p-, ee o- “= f-e- | * éué oé€ é 
PLN. fp-  dp- ob-|-e- | -es nu(ées)ets tu(ees)ets o(ecs)ets 
G.jp-  tp- op-|-e- | -wv | nu(éwr)av vu(éwv)ev op(éwv)av 
D.qp-  bp- od-| -€-(t) | -iv, -i(v | qu(eiv)tv du(ew)iv opto 
A. ijpe te o-|-e- | -Ss[n.-&] | qu(das)as tu(éas)as op(éas)as|-éo] 
D.N.v- ob- oh-|-w- | -¢ | v(Ge)o cH(Ge)d cpu 
G. v- op- Th-|-w- | -iv lv(div)ov cd(@v)ov cpaty 





f. Forms in Homer AND Heroporus. Those following the sign }j are 
not in Herodotus, and those in brackets are not in Homer. The sign ~ 
denotes synizesis in Homer. 

S. N. éyo@ Il eyav ou | r3vy 
om 


G. Ewéo, Ewed, wed; ||Eueto, | c€oj oedj l|oeto, wé0er, | €dj I|Eoj elo, eer j Or 





ewe bev TEELO Féoj Fed] Fevo, Feber] 

D. éuol, Heol} gol, Tol; ||TEety otj || €0% * or Fol] Feot 

A. éué, péj o€j ej pirj|| €é> or Fé] Fed 
P. N. [nuées] mets |\duwes [dudes] duets \l¥uwes | [opets] 

G. nea \| nuwelov vudwr || buelwy o pew j || 7petwr, opiw 

D. mye ju v, LLY, pyc (v duty || Buiv» Yuuli(v, Dupe opiot(r] opr] lop 

A. nuéds, -éas || fuds,dupe| budds, -éas || Buse opeiis| eas ope; \lopers 
D. N. ||vai llopai, ods as, cpas] [me cota, 

G. Ilpow \| ope 

D. ||pow \lopdiv, oper H opty} 

A. ||p@i, vs li THA, TPH lopadj coe j 


. 





1 Pers. M. (of myself) F. 
we D ewavTou : 
: enauT@ 


D 
A. éyavurov 


P.G.  nuay atray 
D. nw avrois 
A 


3 Pers. M., of hi irself. 
8. GG. éavrod, avuTov 
D. éavta, avuT@ 
A. €avrov, avurov 
P.G. é€avtay, avtayv 
D. éavtois,  avrois 
A. €avtovs,  avtovs 


(2) 
rs 


€p.auTns 
> rod 
e“auTh 
> , 
€MauTny 
U@V AUTO 
at > r 
yp avrois  juiy avrais 
. mpas avtovs nas avtas 


SUBSTANTIVE. 3a 


b. REFLEXIVE. 
- 2 Pers. M. (of thyself) F 
weavTov, g@avTov ceavrips, cavuTis 
TEAUTO, TavT@O EauTh, goavuTn 
/ / ‘ 
geavToV, GavTov GeEavTyY, davTny 
pov avrov 
vpiy avrais 
tpas avtas 


, of uself. 


rn > an 
UL@V AUTOV 
hel > r 
Upiy avTots 
~ > 4 
vpas auTous 


F., of herself. 


EauTTSs avrns 
€auTy, avuTn ; 
¢ / ¢ a ¢ , (3 , 
€QuTNYV, QuTHnV €avTO, avuTo 
€ ~ 
éauTav, QUT@V 
i, r 
éaurais, auTals 
CFE ¢ & eo 
€auras, auTas €avuTa, avuTa 


P. G. pay aitay, D. cic adrtots -ais, A. opas abrovs -as 


c. RECIPROCAL. 


M. (of on? another) F. N. M. N. BS 

Pe ABNwr GiXplov Dideeraninne rani 
D. dddnros = aAANAas G. adAndrow adAnAaw 
A. dddAndovs adAndas aAAnAG 


d. INDEFINITE 


M. F. N., such a one. M. 

S.N. 6,79, 7d Sdetva P. of  Seives 
G. tov, ths  Sewwos Tov Oeway 
D. 76 TH Sei S 

t ‘ ‘ - \ = 
A. roy, tiv, TO Seiva tous Oetvas 





g. 
N. iwy, id B. 
G. éuéos, éueds, Euods, pe- 
Géyj Dz 
D. éulv d., éuv B. 
A 


P.N. ‘dues D. [ az. 

ats TuEwy, -@v D., duwewy 

D. quiy p., duiv D., &upe- 

A. ‘dué D. [ouy m. 
D.N. vide zB. 

h. REFLEXIVE 244, 248: 


-q* 2 Pers. gewuTob, js, -@, -7, -OV, “hy : 
-Ww, -5, Pl. -Gv, -éwv, -o'ot, -Got, -ovs, -ds, -4* Hdt. 


ADDITIONAL Forms. 


ro D., Tov tu, B : 
TEO, rebj TEOS| Tedsj|Fe0evj B., éo0s D. B., 
TEouUs, TEOU D. €clo E. 

Ti D. B. Fo!j 2., iy ori D., OB. 
ré te, TU] Tiv D. Féj B., viv] D. P. 

jes D. 

Umewy HB. 
butv, buw D. P. 


piv{ pir, D., Godt &. 
due, Uupe D. 


Véj D., dope m. 


New Ion. 1 Pers. émewur od, | i$, -@, “1, -bv, 
3 Pers. éwurod, -7s, -Q, -7, -dv, 
Dor. 3 Pers. a’ravrou 


Or -w, -@s, -@, -a, -ov, -av, -o, Pl. -wy, -dv, -ols, -as, -ovs or -ws, -as, -a. 


: 


fol. Fav7& for airod, Alc. 88 [74]. 
i. -RectprocaL 244:- Dor. 


Pind. ?. 
GR. TAB. 


o* 
a 


See 131 e, 130.¢, 197 c, 246d. 
a\AdAwv 130a, Theoe. 14. 46, &ddddoror 


4, 397, &c. Ep. Dual dddjdouy 201 b, K. 65. 


34 PRONOUNS. § 28. 


28. xvi. AbDJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 


I. DEFINITE. 


a. Article. b. Relative. c. Icerative. 
M. (the) F. N. M.(qui) F.(who) N. M.(ipse) F.(very,same) N. 
S.N. 6 a ds 7.066 avtés an ~~ add 
G. tod Hs au as avTov — avTns 
D. ro ™ @ 7 av7@ abtn 
A. tov = Thy ov nv avTov — avn 
PsN. «oi ais ta ol aa "a avtot avtai avra 
G. tev TOV @v @v QuTo@V auTav 
D. rots Tals ois ais avuTo.s avtais 
A. tovs tas ovs dis avTovs —avTas 
D.N. ro Ta @ "a auT@ aura 
G. tow Tap ow = atv avTow ~—s auTaw 
d. Demonstrative. 
M. (this) F. N. M. (hic) F. (this) N. 
S.N. ode hic de hee dd hoc ovTos avutn TOUTO 
G. rovde Tho be TOUTOU TavTns 
D. r@de THOE TOUT® TaUTN 
A. rovde Tnvoe TOUTOV§ —- TavTnV 
P.N. ofSe hi aide he rade hec ovTot avtrat ~ TavTa 
G. tavde T@VOE TOUT@V TOUT@Y 
D. roicde Taiobe Tovrots TavTas 
A. tovade raade TouTous TavTas 
D.N. rade rade TOUT@ TavTa 
G. roivde Taide TovTow  TavTauy 


e. Possessive. 


S. 1 P. éuds meus, my 2 P. ods tuus, thy 3 P. és suus, his, her, us 
P; ueTepos our bpérepos your oerepos their 


§ 28. i. ApsECTIVE Pronouns 234. 4, 249s. Those of Dec. 2 and 1 
have in general the dialectic forms belonging to those declensions (20, 
201, 197s, 131d): as, Ep. roto, av’roto, rotiv: Old rdwy, adrdwy, Toto, 
Taiol, Toolde, avroia.* lon. Tho, THs, THolde, Hort, a’ryoe* Dor. 7d, avTa, 
TwS, d, ad, dris, Tas, adTas, Tade, Ta’Tay, Tav, avrav~: Mol. Tols, Tals. 

j. Article 250: 6, 74d, 199; Tw, Totv, 234e. Dialectic Forms: Old 
Nom. Pl. roi A. 447, Hdt. 8. 68. 1, Theoc. 1. 80, Aisch. Pers. 424, ral 
Yr. 5, Pind. O. 13. 25, Ar. Eq. 1329. 

k. Relative 250: 6199. D. F.: Ep. Gen. dov a. 70, éys Il. 208, § 135. 


1. Iterative 251: atrd 199. So decline dos alius, other, and éxetvos 
ille, that (ketvos P. I., B. 37, Hdt. 3. 74, xijvos m., Sap. 2. 1, Tivos D., 
Theoc. 1. 4). D. F.: M. avréov, -éy, -€wv, -€orsr, -€ous, F. -én, -éns, -€D, 
-énv, -€wv, -éno., -éas, New lon, 














§ 28. ADJECTIVE. 35 
IJ. INDEFINITE. 
f. Simple Indefinite. g. Interrogative. h. Relative Indefinite. 
Lat. aliquis, ullus quis ? quicumque, quisquis 
M.F.(any,some) N. M.F.(who?)N.  M. (whoever) F. N. 
Go , e v 
Nae TIS Th Tis ti ooTis yris =O Tt 
G.  rivds, Tod TiVOS, TOU ovTivos, OToOU hotwvos 
D. rwi, To Til, TO @TWt,  sTw nTUve 
A. Tiva Tiva ovTiva nvriva 
P,N. tivés tid, tives iva  otriwes airwes dtiva, 
G. twav |[dtra rive QvTivav, Ora@v Q@vTivey [atTa 
D. tii Tigt oiotiat, OTols aiorior 
A. twas tivas ovottvas doteivas 
DLN. - rwe Tive QOTLVE ative 
G. tivoiv Tivo. olvTivowy alvTivowy 
m. Demonstrative 252: otros, airy, 252b. Decline rodcde, -ade, 


-dvde, and ro.obros, -atirn, -o0rov or -obro (199 a), talis, such, rordade (282 a) 
and rogovros tantus, so much, TydiKdcde and TnrLKodTos so old, Tuvvodros 
tdntillus, so small. D. F.: for r&vée, rotcde, by a kind of double declen- 
sion, Poet. ravdewy Alc. 127 Bk., Ep. rotcdeor d. 93, Trotcderor(y K. 462, 
B. 47 ; rovréw, Tovréwy, 255 b ; Totrot, ratrar, 255 a. 


Paragogic Declension (252 c) : 


S.N. 68 Hot TOOL ovT oot avrie Toul 
G. rovol To Ot TouTovl TauTnol 
D. Twi TNO TOUT wi TaUTHE 
A. Tovdl THvel Tourovl Traut nvl 

P.N.  oldi aidi Taol ovToul avratt raul 
G. Twvrdi, &e. TrouTwvi, &c. 


n. Possessive 252. D. F.: 1 Pers. Pl. ‘duds or duds 0., Z. 414, Asch. 
Ch. 428, ‘auérepos p., Theoc. 2. 31, dumos, dupeérepos m., Alc. 103, 104 ; 
Du. vwirepos E., O. 39: 2 Pers. S. reds D. E., y. 122, Asch. Pr. 162 ; 
Pl. ‘duds 0., a. 375, vuuos m. ; Da. cdwirepos E., A. 216: 3 Pers. 8. és 
p. 1., I’. 3338, Hdt. 1. 205, Soph. Aj. 442, éds £. D.,ea. 409, Theoc. 17. 
50, Fés m. ; Pl. opéso., A. 534. 


o. Indefinite 253s: Tis 208d, 6 rT or 6,71 255 3 Toto; Growt, 253. 


Forms of tis, ris, and érus = 8or7cs, in Homer and Herodotus, marked 
as in 27f: 


Ns. Tis at ris’ ol lOres 6 re \\b r7e 
G.  Té0, Ted Ted |lréo drev ||é7TE0, OrTev 
D. réy |lr@ [réq] drew 
A. Twa Ttlva \lOr wa 
P.N. rwés TWd tives Thva \|Oruwa 
G.  [réwr] TEWY OTEwV 
D. [réacr] réowt| oréouce [f. -énor] 
A. Twas ldcoa Tlvas | \|Srevas oon 


p- For Correlative Pronouns, see 53. 


* 


36 COMPARISON AND CONJUGATION. 


29. 2B. 


1. Old Greek and Latin Forms. 


2. Common Greek Form. 


§ 29, 


ANALYSIS OF COMPARISON. 


3. Second 


Greek Form. 4. Common Latin Form. 5, Common English Form. 





BASE. | CONNECT- DrEGREE-SIGN. EXAMPLES. 
IVE, Comp sup. Comp. Sup. 
1, Root or a T VéaTos 
Pos. Stem. (u)i m minzmus 
2. Pos. Stem. te) wep = TUT WaAKpITEpOS PAKpITATOS 
ra) VEWTEPOS VEWTATOS 
au didaltepos oiraltatos 
€S, S axparéorepos axkpatéoTaros 
us Ladiorepos AadicraTos 
i peAavTEpOS pedavTaros 
3. Root. (I)t ov OT iot@v HSurros 
4. Pos. Stem. i or ssim | longior longissimus 
5. Positive. e r st longer longest 
c. TABLES OF CONJUGATION. be 
390. 1. Distinctions Cuassiriep (265 s). 
a. VOICES. 
SUBJECTIVE. OBJECTIVE. 
TI act I am acted upon 
by myself by another 
{Simple Performance of | (Both Performance and Recep- | (Simple Recep- 
the act) : tion) : tion of the act): 
ACTIVE. MIDDLE, Reflexive PASSIVE. 
of rearaat Sere 
Intransitive: Transitive: | directly: indirectly : 

Spapov,  eravoa, eave dpny, eiAdpny, érraveny, 
cucurrl, I stopped I stopped my- I took for my-| I was stopped 
I ran. another. | self, I ceased. self, I chose. by another. 

b. TENSES. 
I, PRimary. 11, SECONDARY. 
Time. 1 Present. 2. Future. 3. Past, 

lations. 

1. Def- PRESENT. IMPERFECT. 
inite. -ypadw scribo, . éypadov scribébam, 


Lam writing. 
2. indef- 
inite. sa 
T write. 


3. Com- 
plete. 


PERFECT. 


yéeypade scripsi, 
T have written. 


LT shalt be writing. 


FUTURE. 
ypaipew scribam, 
I shall write. 
FUTURE PERFECT. 
TeTavronat dlesiero, 
I shall have ceased. 


Lf was writing. 
AORIST. 
éypaypa scripsi, 

I wrote. 
PLUPERFECT. 
éyeypadetv scripseram, 
I had written, 


§ 32. DISTINCTIONS AND ELEMENTS. 37 


c. MODES. 


I. DISTINCT. 
A. INTELLECTIVE. 


1. Decided, ov Actual. 2. Undecided, ov Contingent. 
a, Present Contingence., B. Past Contingence, 
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. OPTATIVE. 
ypadw scribo, ypadbw scribam, ypadotpe scriberem, 
L am writing. I may write. L night write. 
B, VOutrive 
IMPERATIVE. 
ypade scribe, 
Write. 
II. INCORPORATED. 
A. Substantive. B. Adjective, 
INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
ypadey scribere, ypadwv scribens, 
To write. Writing. 


31. wu. ForMATION oF THE TENSES. 


PREFIXES. TENSES. AFFIXES. 
Active. Middle. Passive. 
PRESENT, @, [LL CHEL, POL 
Augm. IMPERFECT, ov, v Ch V, pYV 
FUTURE, ow TONAL Ojoropat 
2 FUTURE, HOowar 
Augm. AORIST, oo oouny Onv 
Augm. 2 AORIST, ov, v ; Opry, By nv 
Redupl. Perrecr, Ka. pce 
Redupl. 2 PERFECT, a 
Augm. Redupl. PLUPERFECT, Kev | pny 
Augin. Redupl. 2 PLUPERFECT, ev \ 
Redupl. Fururr Perrect, [ce] | copa 


32. wm. ANALYSIS OF THE VERB. 


I. PREFIXES (2775). 


The AvucMENT, prefixed to Secondary Tenses in the Indicative. 
The REDUPLICATION, prefixed to Complete Tenscs in all the Modes. 


II. THE STEM (344s), including, 


PREFORMATIVES, additions prefixed to the Root. 
The Root, the primitive element of the Verb. 
LETTERS INSERTED or CHANGED in the Root. 
AFFORMATIVES, additions affixed to the Root. 


Ill. AFFIXES (285s), including, 
g. TENSE-SIGNS. 
o(e), Future and Aorist, Active and | 6ys, Future Passive. 


oe 


mo ES 


Middle ; Future Perfect. ns, 2 Future Passive. 
x, Perfect and Plupertect Active. *, Present and Imperfect ; Perfect 
Q<(07), Aorist Passive. and Pluperfect Passive ; 2 Pers 


e(n), 2 Aorist Passive. fect and Pluperfect Active. 


38 CONJUGATION. — ANALYSIS. § 32. 


h. CONNECTING VOWELS (290s). 
Indicative. in, Aorist Passive ; -st Form Active. 
0,€, (w, ec), Pres., Impf., Fut., Fut. Perf. ov(orn), Pres., Fut., Perf., Fut. Perf. 
we), Aor. Act. and Mid.; Perf. Act. | av(eed, eve), Aorist Act. and Mid. 


e(e), Pluperfect Active. Ore “4 ipl 
eS Aorist, Perfect, and Pluperfect Imperative, Inj, Sa 


Passive ; -yt Form e(o), Lmv. Present, Future, Future 
: ; 


: j Inf. Perfect ; Perfect Ac- 
@, 1(7)s Subjunctive. Age Ae : He. He erfect Ac 


Optative. &(o), Aorist Active and Middle. 
t, General Sign ; -pt Form Middle. | *, Perf. and Aor, Pass. ; -ye Form. 


i. FLEXIBLE ENDINGS (295 s). 
A. SUBJECTIVE. : 
Sing. 1 2 8 Naas a oe Be 8 Dat 7.8 





p p p ; pn po np po pan 
Pri. -p(ut,*)  -s(c Oa) -T(o1,*) | -wev -Te -vt(vCl,dox) -TOV -TOV 
Sec. -p(v,ut,*) -s(c0a) -7(*) -ev TE -VT(V, EY, 07) -TOv -THV 
Lat. -m(*) -s(sti) -t -mts -tis -nt(runt, re) 
p pm pn npmn pm ou pn pmn 
Imyv. -0(67,s,€,»,*) -Twe “TE -VTWY,-TwTUVY | -TOV -TeV 
L. -*(to) -to -té -nto 
Paver sree. rd 
Jnf. -Vy-VOL, -b Part. -vt-s (r-s) 
L. -7é(se) -nt-s -tir-ts 
B. OBJECTIVE. 
Sing. 1 2 3 Bige 2 3 Du. 2 3 
pV pv pv p vn pyn npv pvu pvn 
Pri, -poour -o3ar(ac)-trar | -weOi -0be = -vrat(drac) -78ov -cbov 
Sec, -pyv -wo(0)  -To -pOa -08e = -vTo(aTo) -cBov -cOnv 
Lat. -(mr)r -ris(re) -tir -mtr -mint -nttir 
pv pym pvn pymn pyvm n  pvn_pymn 
Imvy. -70(0) -o8 -oe -78wv,-ciwctv -c§ov -cbwy 
3 Bs -r&(tor) -tor -mini  -ntir | 
Vee rv d d 
Inf. -o Bar Part.-prev-os Verb.-t-ds ~Té-05 
L. -ri(i, ier, rier) -t-tis(sus) -nd-ts — 


j. Add to the list, v pAnAGoaic in the 3d Person, after € or simple t 
(163) ; LETTERS INSERTED between the stem and affix (as o, ny, € 307, 
311); and also, in compound verbs, a preceding PREPOSITION (390). 


33. Norges. a. In 32i, the nremenrs of the Flexible Endings are 
mostly marked, according to their force, with small letters placed above : 
yo, 0, +, with p, as signs of person (246, 271 b, c, e. 2); v, € a, with n, 
as signs of nwmber (271 b, ce, e); at, 0, 6, «0, qv, ev, with v, as signs of 
votce (271 e, 272a, b) ; @, with m, as a sign of mode (272 e); v and t, with 
r, as signs of relation (272 a, 12); + and ré, with d, as suffixes of derivation 
(272 b) ; while letters unmarked are, for the most part, simply euphonie. 

b, The TRANSLATION in 34, applies, except in the Imperative, to the 
Ist Person singular, and must be varied for the other persons and num- 
bers. It is read across thus : Pres. Ind. Act. J am stopping another, Mid. 
I am stopping myself, &c.; while the different forms of the Pres. and Impf. 
may be also rendered, Z stop, 7 stopped, &e. Some words are printed in 
Roman letters as explanatory or, in some combinations, inadmissible. 


SYNOPSIS AND TRANSLATION, 39 


§ 34, 


Pres. Ind. 

Imperf. 

Pres. Sub. 
Opt. 


Imv. 


Inf. 
Par. 


Ind. 
Opt. 
Inf. 

Par. 
Ind. 
Sub. 
Opt. 


Fut. 


Aor. 


Imv. 


Inf. 
Par. 


Perf. Ind. 

Pluperf. 

Pert. Sub. 
Opt. 


Imy. 


Inf. 
Par. 
Ber. to, 
Opt. 
Inf. 
Par. 


Iv. Synopsis AND TRANSLATION OF THE VERB sata, to stop. 


Common Forms of Translation. 


Iam )) (Act.) stopping another (I stop, 
I was | stopped, may stop, d&c.). 
I nay or can be | (Mad.) séopping myself, or ceas- 


ing, (I cease, ceased, may 
cease, might cease, &c.). 
(Pass.) stopped (continued). 


I might, should, would, or could be 
Stop, cease, be stopped; or, Be thou 

To stop, to cease ; to be 

Stopping, ceasing, being stopped. 


I shall or will >} = 

I might, should, or would (hereafter) ate pene apo ; 
Hereafter) to = (Mid.) stop mysel7, or cease, 
( (Pass.) be stopped. 


About, or intending to 
I stopped, ceased, was stopped ; or, I did) *(Act.) 
I may or ean | (Mid.) 


stop another. 
stop myself, or cease. 


34. 

Active, Middle. Passive. 

TAv@ TAVOPLOL 

éravov éravopny 

TAv TAV@POL 

TAvOULL TavolLny 

Tave Tavou 

Taverv raver Oar 

TAUOV T.UOBEVOS 

Tavew Tavcopar  mavOycopar 

Taveop.  mavootunvy  mav0yooipyny 

TAUTEY mavoerOar mavOnoerOar 

TAvewY Tavodpevos mav0nodpevos 

éravoa éravedpny  éeravOnv 

TAUow TAavewopot Tav0a 

Travoop. tavrcainyny mavdelny 

TavoOV TATA Tavenre 

TAVT AL ravoarGa. mav0fvar 

TAUTAS Tmavedpevos mavOels 
TréTavKa Tre AUP 
émrem aUKELV érrerravpyv 
TeTAvK@ TETAUNEVOS @ 
TemTavKOULL Ter aupevos elyv 
TéT UKE Ter Aveo 
qreTavKEVaL Trerato Bar 
TET AUKOS TETAUPEVOS 
TeTavkKas Cropat Teravropar 
Teravkas évoipnvy teravrolwyy 
meraukas toeoOar treravcer ar 
TWETAVKHS EoSpevosS TrEeTavodpevos 


I might, should, would, or could f (Pass.) be stopped. 
Stop, cease, be stopped (at once) ; or, Do 


T J \@> The translations of the Perfect 
whe ; and Pluperfect belong also to the 
Stopping, ceasing, stopped. Aorist. 


I have 

I had 

I may or can have (Act.) stopped another. 

I inight, should, would, or could have }(Mid.) stopped myself, or ceased. 
Do thou have (Pass.) been stopped. 

To have 

Having 


I shall have 

1 should or would (hereafter) have 
(Hereafter) to have 

About or intending to have 


(Act.) stopped another. 
(Mid.) stopped myself, or ceased. 
(Pass.) been stopped. 






Se hee a eo See nel? A ' 
SN 7 Be i, é lie: Sad ean . ra! > 
ey eee 
4 “oS a 
anes eee 
40 CONJUGATION. “Sa 
35. v. Supsective ArrixEs 
a. Nupr. b. EUPHONIC. 
Pres. (2 Aor.) Impf. Present. (2Aor.) Imperf. 
F. C.F. ae 
Tad. S. 1 (u)pt (o-u)@  (o-m)o 
2s (e-s)eug 1-8 
3 (r)o% (€-T et i-t 
tery al Mev o-pev = 1-mmus 
= Le 
eg 2 Te €-TE 1-tis 
o 3 (vT,voi)aov (o-vr)ovet u-nt 
 D.2 tov €-TOV 
F. c. F. 
Ind. S. 1 (u)v (o-u)ov éba-m 
2 Ss €-S eba-s 
4 3 (r)* - (ere eba-t 
e be kil ev o-pev eba-mus 
- 2 TE e-te  eba-tis © 
8 3 ov (o-vr)ov eba-nt | — 
® 3 
sD. 2 TOY €-TOV 
3 THY é-THv 
Sub. 8. 1 (w-w)o  a-m 
2 (y-s)qs a-s 
3 (n-7)q a-t : 
ae ES | w-pey —- 4-mus 
= 2 n-Te a-tis 
dé 3 (w-yT)wor a-nt : 
Saat a q-TOV 
C.F. Crees 
Oy SR Sp | (n-v Ou-pu re-mn 
2 (n-s ol-s_ ere-s 
: 3 (yn ou ere-t 
—_ = a 
ge (y-pev, t-pev Ol-pev ere-mus 
cc 2 (n-re t-Te ou-te ere-tis 
S 3 (n-cay, t-cav ou-ev ere-nt 
o 
See BE (n-Toy, t-Tov Ol-Tov 
3 Lq-THY, (-THV of-Tyy 
Imy. S. 2 (061, 5, € (e-O)e é 
3 Tw é-7@ i-to 
P. 2 te €-TE i-te 
3 TATA, é-TaTGay, 
tes vTov 6-vTev u-nto 
D. 2 tov €-Toy 
3 TeV é-Tev 
es Infin. var (e-v)e &-re i 
Partic. N.  —vt-s (o-vr-s)wv (e-nt-s)ens 
: vo-u& (o-vo-a)overa . 
= tenhy ) -* (0-vr)ov 
7 G. —vt-os o-vT-os —e-nt-is 
: vo-4S (o-va-ns)obons 
us 5 
* 
. 





-— 


§ 35, 


SUBJECTIVE 


AFFIXES. 


AND COMPARED WITH THE LATIN. 


d. Aorist 
ACTIVE. 


— 
5 
jon 
TR 
. 


wn 


6s 


CWwWwNrFwWwWNrY NY WNe 


Primary. 


T. C. F. 
o-& 
T-a-S 
o-€ 

O-G.- [Lev 
o-A-TE 
o-a-v 
o-c-TOV 
o-k-THV 


T-Q 


whore 


fa 
O-W-p.EV 
o-1-TE 
o-0-o1 


© bore 


o 
be 


o-1-TOV 


Opt. S. 
o-al-s, 
o-at, 


7 


onpwnwp wh WNF wWhr 


O--CU-TE 
O-Cu-EV, 


Secondary. 


O-Al-TOV 


w 


— 
5 
ro 


Lom -d-Te 


~ 


o-a-TE 
O-G-TAT 


S-1 
s-i-sti 
s-1-t 
s-1-mus 
s-i-stis 
s-e-runt 


s-eri-m 
o-y-S S-eri-s 
s-eri-t 


O-at-pt S-isse-m 


O-€lLa-S 
D-ELE 


O-Ct-[ev, 


W-€LQ-V 


c-al-THv 


(c- -a- -O)rov 


av, 


o-G-VT@V 


D. 


o-a-ToV 
o-G-TweV 


co bo 


Infin. 


O-a-t S-is-se 


Part. N. (c-a-vr-s)ods 
(c-a-vo-a)oaoa 
(o-a-vT)oav 


G. 
-ar-1S 


O-Q-VYT-CS 


e. PERF., 
2 PERFECT. 
T. ¢. F. 
K-01 
K'-a-s 
K‘-€ 


vii 
v‘-i-sti 
v‘-i-t 
K‘-a-jeev V‘-1-mus 
K'-a-Te v‘-i-stis 


(k‘-a-vr)K‘Goru v‘-e- 


K‘-a-Tov — [runt 
tT. oF. [ 


K*-el-v, K- 


PLUPERF., 
2 PLUPERFECT, 


éra-m 
q ys. 


K'-el-s v‘-era-s 


K*-€L 
K*-€L-[wev 
K°-€L-TE 
K‘-€l-o-ay, 
K'-eL-Tov 
k‘-el-THYV 


K-@  v‘-eri-m 
e-1rs We -erl-s 
K’-y~—sV‘-er1-t 
K‘-@-[ev 
K‘-1-Te 
K‘-@-oU 
K‘-1)-TOV 

T. C. F 


vi. 


era-t 


[oav 
K‘-€- 


‘-ot-pt_V*-isse-m 


K‘-ou-s v‘-isse-S 
K‘-OL -isse-t 
K‘-OU-[ev 
K‘-OL-TE 

K‘-OL-ev 
K‘-OL-TOV 
K‘-ol-THV 


K'-~€ 

K'-€-Tw 

K‘~€-TE 

K'-é-Tar av, 
K‘-d-vT@V 

K‘-€-TOV 

K‘-€-T@YV 


‘2 b snc 
k‘-€-vat V‘-15-se 
(k§-0-7-s)«*s 
(x‘-o-0-a)«‘uta 
(x‘-0-7)K‘d 

Ss 

K'-6-T-05 
K‘-vl-ds 








f. AoRIST PAss., 
2 Aorist Pass. 


T. F 
(O%e-u) On 
O'n-s 
On 


| O'n-jev 


O'n-te 
On-cav 
O'y-Tov 
et A ALY 

G: 
G "eR mE: 
(6%€-n-s) 6°48 
(6*€--7) OQ 
0‘ a-jev 
O%7|-Te 
6Sa-ou 


0°j}-Tov 


(0%e-1n-u) Oelny 

(O%e-1n-s) Bey 

(O%e-1n-7) Bely 

O'ely-pnev, O%ct-pev 

Oe(n-Te, G'et-Te 

Oety-cav, O'et-ev 

6‘eln-Tov, O*et-Tov 

rs Pg Oel-rqv 

(b%e-0 )6eyre 

O'j-Tw 

O‘n-re 

6'y-Tacay, 
Oé-vTwv 

O‘n-Tov 

a4 -TwV 

O'F-var 


(0%e-vr-s) B%els 
(65e-vo-a) Ociora 
(G%e-vr) O*év 
6'é-yr-os 
Oelo-rs 


42 CONJUGATION. § 36. 
36. vi. Oxpsective ArrixEs ANALYZED 
a. NUDE. b. EuPHONIc. 
Pres., Perf. (2 Aor.) Impf., Plup. Present. (2 Aorist.) Imperfect. 
F. Cc. F. 
Ind. S. 1 pou O-LaL O-F 
2 wat(ar) (€-at)y, eb e-ris, -re 
3 TOL €-Tat i-tur 
Pot ea é-peOa i-mur 
5 2 oe e-o0e i-mini 
As 3 VTaL o-vTa. u-ntur 
D. 2 c8ov e-cBov 
F. C. F. 
Ind. 8. 1 pHv 6-pyv éba-r 
2 o0(0) (€-o)ov 
: 3 TO €-TO 
Seed a | pba 6-80 
S 2 oe e-o0e 
3 3 vTo 0-vTO 
ealio2 oor e-o ov 
3 o8ny é-c8nv 
Sub. 8. 1 @-POaL a-r 
2 (y-at)y a-ris,-re 
3 y-Tav a-tur 
Shed ie | 6-pe8a a-mur 
= 2 yn-o8e a-mini 
‘= 3 @-vrar a-ntur 
Ee iT) 29 y-78ov 
0. F. c. F. 
Opt. S. 1 (-pyv of-pyv ére-r 
2 l-o O\-o _—eré-ris, -re 
: 3 -TO Oi-To = ere-tur 
Seay an (-.e00 of-e0a ere-mur 
z 2 u-o- Oe o.-o8_e ere-mini 
8 3 l-VTO o.-vTo ere-ntur 
me 6D. 2 t-o-Bov o.-oBov 
3 (-c nv of-cOnv 
Iny. 8. 2 vo(o) (€-o)ov é-re 
3 cw é-0 Ow i-tor 
P. 2 oe e-o0e i-mini 
3 clacav, é-cPacayv, u-ntor 3 
o8wv é-c8wy 5 = 
D. 2 obey e-cBov a 
3 c8wv é-c8wv Po 
F. ee 
Infin. o8ar e-o8at (é-ri)i oa 
nial 
Part. N. Piet pév-0S é-pev-os as 8 
v-7 O-peEv-7 ed 
Hev-ov, Hév-ov d-pev-ov r= = ? 
G. pév-ov o-pév-ov P&S 
pév-ns o-pév-15 “LY 


43 


AFFIXES, 


7 
4 


OBJECTIVE 


§ 36. 


AND COMPARED WITH THE LATIN. 


8 £1 SEM (Sto) “9B “Gav $V LOE “4 FES 40 (29) ‘TOS JUL ! P00 ‘Amg0 ‘AmsA ‘QGT ‘v ONG favo (12) ‘Ao (10) oD (19DDY 
10a0N ‘1aD») ‘1.900 (1900 “10a0 ‘1a0) "TJ g SB IGEG ® (99 ‘49) “96g ‘x “0 (4) ‘Ge $q 06 8B ‘J ‘9 163 ‘170.0 ‘0 (ov0 ‘00v»0) ‘no (03 
ae o 0.0 13 10 W (13 909) ‘1 w.0 ‘9 BGT whe (79g ‘929) ‘0 16% “Ve FEZ AO” (902) 0 163 ‘FOOT ° (92) 2 *0 99 (9) ‘p e6z $019.0 
ms 16Z °? G1 $9 (59) "SB SOOT “8 99g akg (99) ‘ 16g ‘arm ‘Lm (vay) 9 G1z D “Ve TEz @ (vO ‘rlo) ‘96g ‘a ad (7) "Sug T “eB gOg 
S786 GE SEXY JO SJUUlo[Y PUL sossv[p — *0 G9Z oas “G “F “T “LE OsTe pue ‘q “egg ‘a ‘q “egg UT JUSTIOSULIL OY} 10g “UOTS 
-SIULO JUONboly S$} WOM “LOUULUE OXI] UL @ UTYeT oY} pur { xWJe ay} Jo sar ey} WOLF , yavtt oy} Aq pozyearedas oie ‘(69z%) saswaz 
puoss OY} UL poz{TULO sv “SUBIS-osue} oY} Jog PUL SIo}Jo[ oY, “s}yWoUWETa asaT{} OFT UOISIATp oy} Yarvut suoydAy oy} pure 
‘SONIGNA WIGIXUTL puv “STEMOA DNILOANNOOD ‘SNDIS-ASNAL oJoUep & pur ‘oO ‘1 S[VIFIUT [[VUIS oY} ‘9g pue cg §$ Ul “B 











os 3 
Mm B t ee yw pe en 
Snag rails ue) 8 rk ree es eee 
MEeeeE 205% ZOE bE bE eee Ee: 
Hm soSusdd 333335 3% L OO O¢ 
asl ae ee are a Pg nt b beedee 
1 Se SES PEP PES FOPPr re 
o HO © OooeaDd @& ooo @Ooo Oe ao ooo oD 
io] >a 
H iw 3 n 
nes a > 3 n > 2 
HA 3 a > =| 3 > > > oi, of 3 bod aa a 0 £79 0. 
eH as evyoS& sh§2z0NM3 9 f& B.S oS — 8-8 ..0/8- borer ded ae 
os Foo VOE DD S23 VOE SD 2 E be Sat? aoo & F238 B- 
= Hace SEE bE SSE Zhe Ee TOE THT PRE SECS EE G SERS 
: OF SSS 8 FF Boe ee a eee 88 8. oe od Od 6 eis eee 
zc kbbbbLEb bb bEEbEKEL bbb bbb Eb bb bb bb... b -~6"br5 5 6 
& 
st Me Ye nk > n Pe ew 
AY abedsa 3 >  €s038 , $332 
FE .g28 ESE 3 Fok ASE DS @ §ygo4 
Ss SHKLZE tha b De ea Se a a a b tintin 
lal Uae” a Ree eet ae ee Ra 2°23 3°93 2 oe 2M rl ie Ree ye} 
BE akee week ee eae b bee be 
em 2 = b 
Pp 5 ANMDHNAMDM A HNAMANDNAM FHNMHANMA HAMHAMDANDM ANAM Oo 5 ‘ 
seh eS Rm pet Rao Rn che Grate aia MY Sn a Sl ac 
; od a! = 3 = & + 
° Rs ‘Aieung  & “Arvpuooag D ‘AIVUL Oo ‘Arepuooeg a a 


44 


CONJUGATION. § 37. 


37. GENERAL PARADIGM OF 
(Stem u-, Pass. to be loosed ; Mid. 


A. DEFINITE TENSES. 


VII. 


i. Present, or Definite System: Base X7- 


ACTIVE. 
b. IMPERFECT. 
I was loosing. 


a, PRESENT. 
Lam ivosing. 


Novros,-ovons lucntis 


PASSIVE AND 
c. PRESENT. 
Iam loosed, &e. 


MIDDLE. 
d. IMPERFSCT. 
I was loosed, &e. 


solvo solvébam j solvor, &e. solvébar, &c. 
Ind. S. 1 2\v@ lio Avopat  luor 
2 dAves = luz 3ddn, 7Aver luéris, -re 
2 3 2\veu luéé AVETOL luitur 
< P.1 Avopev lntnys LvdpeOa — ludmer 
& 22\vere luitis 2\ veo Be luiminé 
Ae 3 2Avover' luwnt AYovrar  luwntur 
D. 2 *\verov 2)\ ver Sov 
Ind. S. 1 2@ Tov lua- e\dopyy lud- 
2 €dves [bam é\vou — [be 
are a Eve é\vero 
a 4P. é\vopev é\vd peda 
= a é\ vere ever Oe 
8 5 2é\vov é\vovro 
RD 2 é\verov éierdov 
3 é\véTHV é\véo Ony 
Sub. 8.12.%@  luan Mewar luar 
2 dns luas 3uy ludris, -re 
: 3 2\vy luat AVATaL luatur 
= P.1 Nwepev Indus AvopcOa luamur 
3 2 Avyre luatis Avyode luamint 
hy 3 hvac luaié Niovrar luantur 
D. 2 dAUnToy AUATVov 
Opt. S. 1 vow, lueren Avoltuyyv lugrer 
2 Avorg = lueves Avovo ~—_ luereris,-re 
= 3 Avor ~— lueret AvoTo = lucretur 
amet fl Avousev luerémus \voipeba lucremur 
| 2 AvotTre lueretis Avorede lueremint 
° ¢ , , 
-9 3 Avovev luerent vowTo luerentur 
PD. ss NvouTov AvovoGov 
3 \voltny AvoloOyv 
Imy.S. 2 djoe lue hvov luére 
3 AvéT@ luito vér ba lutior 
P. 2 *\vere luite “ver Ve luimtnt 
3 Avéroray, AvérPoray, 
2\usvtT@v luwnto 2\vérOwv luwntor 
D. 2 *\verov 2\verOov 
3 Avérwv | *\vérBov 
Infin. vew luge Aver Par luz 
Part. N. iwv,-oved,-ovlluens  } Ludpevos, =%, -Ov 


A\vopevou, =ns 


§ 37. 


GENERAL 


CONJUGATION : Avo, solvo, to loose. 


to loose for one’s self, redimo, to ransom.) 








PARADIGM. 


B. Srmp_e INDEFINITE TENSES. 
2, 3. Future and Aorist Systems: Base ddo-. 
ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
e. Future. f. Aorist. - g. FUTURE. h Aorist. 
T shail loose. I loosed. I shall ransom. JT ransomeé 
solvam solvi redimam redém1 
Ind. 2\ve@ = uam Neonat  luar 
2 dAvoes lucs 3rvory,-Avore luéris, -7e 
32rAvoe ~— luet NUoerar luetur 
P. 1 Avoopev luemus Avodpeba luemer 
2 rAvoete luctis Nvareo be = Luemtire 
37rAvoovo lucent Noovrat  lucntur 
D. 2 \tvoerov huoeo boy 
T played. 
Ind. Qioa = list Aicopyny 
2 éhuras — lusisté élucw 
3 €luae® — lusit élucato 
Pel: eiotpev lusimus éLurdpeba, 
éedvoate lusistis é\uoaoe 
2 
3 Eucav luszrunt, é\ucavTo 
D. 2 él\inarov [-re ica boy 
3 é\uodtHv é\uc dao byv 
Sub. 2tow lustrim NT @pLaL 
2 Nieys — luserés voy 
- sf ’ 
3 von _—luserit AVE HTAL 
a | AUT ap hus apela 
2 UOTE ion abe 
3 AVaaar! AVT@VTAL 
D. 2 AUG ATOV voy cov 
Opt. Avororpe Avoarps lusisser | Mueolwny AuTalny 
2 Adoats AU@ais, Avoretas | AVoOLO \vo-ato 
— 3 hboou Srvoat, Avoee® | AVoouTo AVOaLTo 
P. 1 Avooipev AVGaLtwev Auorolwcba, Averatec. 
2 AvUootre AVoaLTeE AvVororo Oe AvoratoOe 
3 Avoovev AvVoaevy, AVoeLay | AUToWwTO AVoatvrTo 
D. 2 Avoourov hUoaLTov hvcotobov AVoratoGoy 
3 Aveoityy Auoalrny LucotacOnv AvTaleOny 
liv. 2\ dorov 3 fora 
3 Auveatw Avedobo 
2 NUoate WoracGe 
3 AveaTacay, Ave décboccy.. 
2 hur avT@v 2vrdolwv 
D. 2 hioaroy Morac cv 
3 AUG aTOV 2vcd.cbay 
Inf. Arev — [2oy! Sdcat! lusisse Avoreo Oar MoracJar 


Par. Nicav,-ovra, dvods,-doa,-iv! 
G. Ad@ovTos,-ovens WoavTes, -CTHS 


uo dpevos,-n, ov AuTiwevos,-n,-07 
Avoroucvav, -yS 


uc es plyov, -7$ 


46 CONJUGATION. — GENERAL PARADIGM. 


4. Perfect System: Base \eNc-. 


C. COMPLETE TENSES. 





$87. 


5. Perfect Passive System : 





ACTIVE. PASSIVE AND 
i. PERFECT. j. PLUPERFECT. | l. PERFECT. m. PLUPERFECT. 
I have loosed. I had loosed. Thave been I'd, §¢ Ihad been Vd, §c. 
solvi solyéram solitus sum,&c.  soldtus ram, &c. 
Ind. S. 1 A€vKe p%pulr EAT par 
2 Aéd\uKas pepulistz héAVTAL 
3 *eduKe® pepulit héAvTAL 
ms P. 1 AeAVKewev hehipeda 
SI 2 NevKaTe *hérvo-Oe 
A 3 AedvKaor' Aé\uvrar 
D. 2 Ae\vkdrov - é\veBov 
Ind. 8. 1 &edikev pepule- Adv py 
2 éXehUKELS (ram. éé\ucro 
a 8 éXNeAVKEL éX€\uTo 
<page | “€NEAUKEL LEV eecvpeda 
z 2 éX\ehvxete [Keoav éhéAvoOe 
9 3 éXe\UKerorayv, édev- éX\é\uvTo 
o 
Pee). 2 ele UxerTov ehé\voBov 
3 eheduxelrnyv eLervo Oy 
Sub. 8. 1 AeXvKw pepulérim Ae\upévos @ 
2 edvKys pepuleris AeAupevos tis 
3 AetvKy pepulerit Ae\upévos F 
rm PP. 1 edvkopev Aelupévor Opev 
q 2 NeAUKHTE Nehupévor Are 
S 3 dedvkac! Aeupévor dork 
D. 2 AedvKyTOV Aehupéva Frov 
Opt. S. 1 Aelxorps pepulissem Aedupévos ely 
2 Aehvxors pepulisses Aedupévos eins 
: 3 ehvxor pepulisset Aedupévos ety 
> / 
Re se | AeAvixorpev Aeupévor elypev 
5 2 AeAvKorTE Aehupévor eine 
3 3 Nevcovev Ae\upévor eiqnoav 
v 
aa ee): 2 AedUKoLTOV Aehupéva elnrov 
3 AeduKoitny Aclupéva einrny 
Imy. S. 2 7A€\uKe éAvTrO 
3 euKéT@ Aecva bw 
P. 2 edvdxere *hér\vo be 
3 eduKérwoay, Adiclacay, 
e\uKdvTev *hericbwv 
D. 2 ded\vKerov hé\uc- ov 
3 e\uKkérov “evo Owv 
Iniin. AeduKévan! pepulisse Aerio Bat! 
Part. N. AetuKas! -via! -ds! Aedupévos! -y,- ov! 
G. AeduKdrTos! -vlas AeAupévov, -7$ 
Ind. k. Future Perfect \e\vKds tropar solvéro, I shall have loosed. 


_— 


§ 3), COMPLETE AND COMPOUND TENSES. — 47 


D. ComprounpD INDEFINITE TENSES. 
Bases AeAS- and Nedvo-. 6. Compound System: Bases \WGe- and AVAyo-. 





MIDDLE. PASSIVE. ; 2 $ a < 
a Sé 
n. Fururt PerFeEct. o. AORIST. p. Furure, Bee a 
I shall have been loosed, §c. | I was loosed. I shall be loosed S se 
solitus ro, redéméro | solitus sum solvar ete es 
t & D C8) 
Ind. Aeicopar AVOAropar "eae 
2 Aedvon, AeAvore AvOAoH, AvoFoe Fe Pon 
3 Aed\voerat AvOAoeTAL Boo 
P. 1 Aeluedpeba Avon ods pe0a 8 pat 
2 Aeioreo Ge AvOjAoeo Ge Ortho Ae 
3 Ae\voovTar AvoArovTar Sees 
D. 2 Aevoer Pov AvOqoer Boy > 3 a) 
co te = 
Ind. €Onv a7 o8 
2 2vOns AGS 
7 + O° q 
3 €v0n Beant 
co 
i | €\vOnpev of o™ 
2 avOnTe BSe® 
aged HS os 
3 evOqnoav ae 
D. 2 a&vOnrov sen? 
> D = : 
3 éuOqTHv £¢ es 
Sub. v0 aa's 
2 AvOs a a 
3 voy oes 
ee huOGpev Cree 
2 2vO Are oo. b 
3 vbacu! sas 
D. 2 hu@frov See srs 
S485 
Opt. AeAverolyny AvOelqv Avoyoolpny aes. 
2 Aedvworo AvOelns AvOACoLo 26 3 
@ e\veorro AvGety vOAcotTO SS |e 
P. 1 Aelucolpeba AvOelnpe , AvOetper AVOHTolpeOa ay ee 
2 Ae\vcore Ge AvOelnre, AvOctre Arvsjoorebe SHES 
3 Ae\vVooLvTo AvOeine av, A\vbetev AvOAcowTo Sass 
D. 2 Aedi’corebov Avvely tov, Avbetrov AvOAcoLTBov cea : 3 
3 AetverolcOnv AvVa ATHY, AvoelryHv AVR TolcOqv Se 
Imy. One SEY g 
3 AvoATH ~ S SF op 
P. 2 One Ras 
3 A\voATocay, $2 hs 
2\uvWévrav emcee 
, nathog 
D. 2 Onto eS 
3 AveATeV iT E ie 
‘ BS a os 
Inf. AedvoeoBar AvOjvar! AvOjoer Bar 3 A eh 
a 
Par. Aehvedpevos,-n,-ov| AvOels! -etora! -v!_ AvOnodpevos,-y,-ov| ,-.2 2 5 
cao 
G. Aehuropévov,-ns | A\vOévTos! -elons  AvOycopévor, -ns sng 


q. Verbals \¥rds! soliitus, solibilis, loosed, loosable ; d%réos! solvendus. 


48 CONJUGATION, —- SECOND TENSES. § 38, 


SECOND TENSES. 


38. E. 


7. 2 Aorist System. 
r. 2 Aoz. Aot. t. 


8. 2 Perfect Syst. 


u. 2 Perrect ACTIVE. 


9. 2 Comp. Syst. 


2 Aoz. Mippir. w. 2 AORIST PASSIVE. 





L left. I remained. I trust, pret. Iwas worn. 
* oyYU , ae life wv a 
Ind. 72. drov liqui é\irépyy mrér o.0& Lido érpcByv tritus sum 
2 é\ures é\izrov qéiro.0as érpiBys 
3 hue é\larero 2arém ode érpiBy 
p. 1 éAtropev — édcropeBa arem LO dpuev ér pi Brnwev 
2 é\lrere é\trreo Ge ater olfareE ér pi Bye 
3 22\urov é\lrovro meroldacr érpiBioav 
D. 2 @direrov = EN reo Dov are olOGTOV ér pi Burov 
3 é\urérny e\urré Iv ér piBaTHv 
Sub. Aza Nir@uar mem olbw TpiBa 
2 Alrys "ity tmero:Ons TpiBqs 
3. iy iwyrar trem olOy TpiBy 
P.1 Nropev DArropeda tre olOwLev TpiBapev 
2 NrnyrTe MaryoGe treroid qTE 27 pibrre 
3 Niroois NlrevTaL tre ol0wor' Tpipaor' 
D.2 Nianrov  Niryno8ov Trem oL0 nTOV TpiByrov 
Opt. Abou = uroluny mreroloust, -olny TpiBelny 
2 Xlrovs Aliovo mem olors, -olns TpipEtys 
3 Alor AlrouTo Tero0or, -oln TpiBely 
P. 1 Alrowupev = DAsrolweba are of ouev TpiBelnpev, -etwev 
Z dbroure Meroe de trem oiVoure TpiBelyre, -etTE 
3 Alovey NrowwTo qrem o/0ovev TpuBelyoay, -etev 
D. 2 Xirorrov Xiorobov trem oiPouToy TpiBelytov, -etTov _ 
3 Nuroitrny NAurolodnv iret ovOolr ny TpiBaAnryy, -elrHy 
Imy. le hurod! 2 rirowbe TplBn@e 
3 urér@ Nuria da wer ovléT@ TpLBHTe 
Pp. 2 Dlwere Nlreode trem olbere 27 piBnre 
3 hirérorav, lurérdwrayv, | merobéroray, TpiBHTATay, 
2\urévrayv *)uréoDwv ter olOovTwv 27 piBévT@v 
D. 2 Alwerov  Afreo9ov trem olfeToV TplBytov 
3 Nurétov *rwér Pav wer olétrav TpLBATOV 
Inf. Auetv! \uréo Oar! Terolévau! Tpubhvar! 
Par. dry! Aur Spevos mero0as!-vial-ds! | rpiBels!-etoa! -éy! 
Theme Aglare (s. Aur-, eur-, vy. 2 Puup. Act. x. 2 For. Pass. 
347 h) linquo, to Jeave, 50; F. érerolGey TpLBROOWaL 
f If Z Q1¢ 2 ’ 
Aet po, AM te Nehourra, 312 b; étremro! Oeus TpiByooiwny 
uray i" decl. 26f; accent érerro!Oe TpipHoer Oar 
- > , 
780 b, 781 b, 782. érreroiPeuev, &c. TpiByodspevos 








_ § 38. y. The Szconp TENnsEs, which have no place in the regular con- 
Jugation, are here supplied from the verbs Xelaw, welOw, and TpiBw (39). 
See 289, 303, 336s. Pret. wéoi0a 268, 338 b, 312 b, 317 b, 318 5 meron 


Goinv 293 c. 


A 39. e. Mure VERBS 270c: rpi8w 347 g, rdoow 349i, 169 a, welOw 
347 h, opt foo 349 8 ; Tpl(B-ow)bo, éra(y-ca)§a, mézrer(O-co)oo, memet(O-cbat)- 
w0ar, 151; dpc(ow, ew)o, 305a; rérpu(B-xa)ba, Téra(y-Ka)Xa, wpl(d-Keuw)= 


wor 
oa) 
Ww 


MUTE VERBS. 49 


39. vi. CuAssES or Verbs. A. Mouorz. 


& LABIAL: tpi8o b, PALATAL: tdoow 


C. LINGUAL: mei 














| : Stem 7,(8-, rpiB- ; to rub.| rdy-, Taco-; arrange. | wid-,re0-; persuade 
4 Pres. A. tpi8o téro | TATT@, TATTO TeiOa 
P. & M. rpiBopa Tdgoopmat, TaTTowat | meiOopuat 
Impf. A. érpiBov | €ragooy, €rattov ém etGov 
P. & M. erpiBdpuny eTacoouny, eratropny) emeOdpnv 
Fut. <A. rpipe Taso TEeiow 
Mid. rpiyvouat Taeopat Teig oat 
1 Aor. A. érpuva éraéa ereioa 
Mid. érpuprapny eTa&apny ET ELT GEN 
2 0r, A. €AaBov took nyayov led emov poet. 
Mid. ehaBdounv nyayopny emOdpunv 
1 Pf. A. rerpida trivi TéTaya Temelka 
1 Pl. A. ererpidpew eTEeTAyeELy emremreiKelV 
mrt A. Aé€Aora BS r medevya figi nerrotla 38 
okt. -A. e\eAolrrewy emrepevyety ememroiGewv 
Pf. P. Ind. rérpizpat TéeTaypar TETTELT LAL 
2 rerpupat TeTa&at TETELT AL 
3 TeTpintat TETAKTAL TETELTTAL 
- Pp. 1 rerpippeda _ TeTaypeba neneiopeba 
| 2 retpipbe TéTaye memreto Ge 
| 3 TeTpiypevor ecol’| TeTaxarat TET Ela Evol elas 
. Imy. rérpufo TeTa&o TETELTO 
: 3 terpipéw TeTaylo meTreio Ow 
p.2 rerpipbe Te TA Ge nenetobe 
3 tetpipOwcay, TeTayCwoay, aweve. cOwoay, 
teTpip boy TeTAaXOav meTetaOwv 
Inf. rerpipda ! TevaxOa |! netreic Oat | 
Par. rerpippevos ! TeTaypevos ! meveropevos ! 
Pl. P. Ind. ererpippny eTeTaypuny ememreio ny 
2 erétpiwo eTéeTa&o emeTrELTO 
: 3 eTérpinro €TETAKTO ETETELOTO 
Pp. 1 éererpippeda | eretaypeda erneTreto pela 
2 €rerpipe | ererayOe enemevtOe 
3 TeTpiupevornoay | ereraxato TETELG [LEVOL OAV 
Fut. Pf rerpiroua | TevTa&opat AeA Topat 
1 Aor. P. érpip@nv eTaxOnv éreia On 
1 Fut. P. trpepOjcopa | TaxOjocopat mevo Orn oopat 
2 Aor. P. erpi8nv oitener —_—|:_ éraynv rare edpadnv r.orl. 
2 Fat. P. rpeBjoopa | Tayroopat [slept 


GR. 





Verbals rpumrds, tpurréos 


TAKTOS, TAKTEOS 


, 
TLOTOS, WELTTEOS 





Kev, 149; rérpu(B-par)ppar, émeret(O-unvopny, 148 ; rérpe(B-rac)arrat, 
€réra(y-T0)KTO, met(O-re0s) ores, ET pi(B-Onv) Pony, Ta(y-0)xXOjoouae, wpl(d-0)- 
oOnv, 147 ; rérpu(B-cOe)hOe, rerd(y-cOw) 9m, 158 ; Terpiupévor (-au, -a) qoay, 
Teraywévot (-at, -a) eloi or TeTdxaTat, 300 hb, ce, 158; dpigov, wpixa, 277 ¢, 
278 a, 280a. Tenses supplied from other Verbs ; ¢AaSov 351. 2; iyavyor, 
TAR. 8 


D 


50 VERBS. —- MUTE, LIQUID. 


§ 39 


Mote VERBS. 40. B. Liquip VERBS. 








d. LINGUAL: épife | a. dyyéAA@ nuntio b. daive ostendo 
6pid-, d2f-; to bound. \ayyed-, ayyerr-; toannounce. ¢ytv-, paw-; to show, 
Pres. A. 6pi¢w finio ayyew paive 

P. & M. dpigopae ayyéAAopat cpaivopat 
Impf. A. @pigov ityyedAov édbatvov 

P. & M. apicéuny nyyeAopnv edatvopnv 
Deore Ac apira Hyyeha ednva 

Mid. wpirayny nyyeAdpnv ecbnvaunv 
2 Aor. A. eidov saw ifyyedov rarer €Barov threw 
Mid. eLOdpnv nyyeAopunv eBaddounv 
1 Pf A. &pixa iyyyedKa mepayKa 
1 Pl. A. apixew nyye dew émepayKely 
2 PR A. otda 46a dA@Aa peril mepnva as mid, 
2 Pl. A: ydew OA@A€EwW emepyvew 
Perf. P. dpropae iryyeApat mepac pat 
Plup. P. apiopny ryyeAuny erepaopny 
1 Aor. P. opiaOny ny yErOny epavOnv 
1 Fut. P. épecOnoopae ayyehOnoopat avOnoopat 
Pee Ors Ps nyyedny late epayny as mid. 
2 FuteP, [oréos' ayyehjnoopat davncopat 
Verbals dprorés, dpe- dyyeArés, ayyeATEos gavtds, avréos 
For. A. égica, Fut. Act. Fut. Mid. Perf. Pass. & Mid. 
ye ayyeAXO ayyedovdpat Jnd. népacpat 
Opt. épiooue, Ind. para pavovpat ; 2 repaveat 
Sprote “ paveis avn, pavet 3 mechavrat 
Inf. dpicety, 3 pavet cbavetrat Pp, 1 mepaopeba : 
Gpteiy P. lqdavotpev avovpeba 2 méparde [eiot 
Par. dpicay, ~ paveire paveiabe 3 wepacpevot 
épiar 3 pavovae avovvrat Imv. medavao 
Bor. Msataouaee Opt. Pavotpe -oiny pavoiany z meparda z 
apianpae 2 pavois, “ois pavoio P. mepuvde, C. 
Ontedplaatune 3 pavot, -oin pavoiro Inf. wepavdar! 
épioipny | pavoipev — havoiueba Par, wethacpévos! 
Inf. 6pioeo Oat, = pavoire avoir be Plup. Pass. & Mid. 
dpteio Bat . Nees eh ea emepacpnv 
Par. Oper dpevos, e Inf. pavetv paveio Oa execbavoo 
Optovpevos' Par. havav avovpevos exrecbavro, Xe. 





fr. dyw ago, lead, 284 e, g; mépevya, fr. pedyw fugio, flee, 50 ; NeAjoomat 
shall have forgotien, fr. NavOdvw 50 ; édpdOnv 342. 3, 351. 23 eldov 358. 
— QO. EK. ypdgw write, tpérw turn, kiwrw cut, Timtw strike, héxw plait, 
déxouar receive, mpdocw do, podgw tell, rdocw fushion, 50; Kouifw, -icw, 
iQ, KEeKiutKka, -topat, éxoulcOnv, kowords, bring ; cretiw hasten. 

§ 40. c. Liquip Verbs: dyyéA\w 3491, daivew 347 h ; 


A€w)A@, Hav, &p(av-ca)nva, iyyerda, 


mwépa(v-ca)yKa 150 ; 


T 


152; 


épnva 312a; 


ayye(A-ow, 


pasr(éea) de -(éets)ets, -(€o)oduer, 
-(€e)etre, -(€ov)odar, - “(éo)otue, -(éev) dv, 121, ef. hai ; pavoiny 293 b; 


wépa(v-aropar 150d ; 


wépav-oas 


§ 42. DOUBLE-CONSONANT, PURE. 51 


41. CC. DovuBLE-CoNSONANT VERBS. 


a. meu mitto b. omevde libo c. av& or av&dra auceo 
weum-3; send. omevo-; pour. av-, avédv-; increase. 
Pres. A. réprro dpx@ OTEVOW av&o, aisiva 
P.& M. wépropac lead oméevdopat av€ouat, avt€avopat 
Impf. A. émeurov — jpyov éomevoov nosov, nv&avov 
P. & M. énepropny eomevddunv nv&dounv, nrvEavopunv 
Fut: A. meno apé@ oTEeio@ av&io@ ped\Ano@ 
Mid. wZpWopae oreioopmat av&noopat 
Aor. A. éreppa = npEa éomeoa nvEnoa wWnoa 
Mid. emepwWadpny eoneloauny nrénoduny 
1 Pf. A. weroppa jpxa éomecxa late nuénka 7 ppnKka. 
1 P) A. ememoppe eoTreiKely nvr Kew 
2 Pt -A AéAaprra blaze nemrovla 6dada smell 
2 Pl A. edNeddprrew emer Ov Oe tv oda@deuw 
Perf. P. mémeppat jpypae €oTrero pat nvEnuar 
Plup. P. éxeméppnv €omeio puny nvuénuny 
Aor. P. éméppénv ifpyOnv eomreiaOnv nv&énOnv 
Pit. P. meppenoopat oneto Onoopae avénOnoopat 
Verbals mepmrds, neumréos OTELOTEOS avénros, alénréos 


Perfect Passive. (d. éAéyxw to confute.) Pluperfect Passive. 


Ind. méneppar eAndeypat ETE TE [LAN eAndeypunv 
2 memepnvyat eAreyEat ere neyo eAnrey&o 
3 meneumrar eAnAreyKTat em eTELTTO eAndeyKTO 
p. 1 eméppeba eAnheypeba erreveppcOa eAn\eypeba 
2 mémeppe eAijAeyx Ge emer enpee ednreyx Oe [cay 
3 memeppevote oi eAndeypevor ciai memeppevor noav eAndeypevoe 7- 
Imv. zémepyyo ednrey&o Pie Lae Pik, bart. 
2 meneppda eAnr<yx Ow merreng Oat! memepmpevos | 


P. 3 wéeneupde, Xe. ednreyxe, Ke. eAnreyyGar! — eAndeypevos! 


42. D. Pure Verss. 1. ConrTRAct. 


1. In -dw: tyzdw honodro 2. In -é@: @idéw imo 3. In -d@: dyAdw declaro 


S. riyuc-; to honor. S. dire-; to love. S. dndo-; to manifest. 


156b; wédpalv-cle)vOe 158 ; Sdwda, fr. SAAT destroy, 351. 4, 281 ¢ ; ; &Ba- 
dor, fr. BadrAw 50. —O. EF. orev send, kabaipw purify, dépw flay, ome pio 
sow, plelpw destroy, pralvw stain, telvw stretch, Klve bend, xpivw judge, 
mrvvw wash, Téuvw cut, BadrAw throw, pévw remain, viww distribute, 50. 


§ 41. e. DousBLe-CoNsONANT VERBS: wémouda 312¢; mére(uT- 
pat)ppar, eAnreyuar, 148 a; om(evd- ow)elorar, éom(evd-u, EVOL) ELT Pall, 151, 
156, 148 ; @omerxa 50; avédvw 351. 2; avéjow 311a; déd\aura, a ianeaas 
bdwoa, fr. Adumrw, waoxw suffer, fw, 50; weddhow, HWnoa, Appynka, fr. 
perrAw delay, épw boil, &piw go away, 31la, 50. —O. E. kdurrw bend, 
oplyyw bind, réprw please, wafw clang, Bloxw feed, dxPouar be weared. 


52 CONJUGATION. § 42. 
DEFINITE 
a. PRESENT ACTIVE. 
I honor, live, —_—ilove, TUN, manifest. 
(nd. rip(ao)ed (i = pid(Ew)@ béw OnA(do)@ 
2 ti(aecs)as (ns  puir(eeusecs Geis dyA(deus)ots 
3 Tu(aena @ Pir(eet)et Get OnA(Ger)ot 
p. 1 riypldo)o-pev Caper pird(év)od-pev O€opev OnXd(d0)od-pev 
2 Tipde)a-TeE (ire ir(eelet Te Oeire — SnA(de)ov-Te 
3 tyu(dov)G-o1f (dat ird(€ov)od-ov' O€ovar' SnA(dov)ov-ce 
Sub. Tiu(aw)a (a pirlew)@ béa OnA(6w)O 
2 tiulans'as Gs pir(ens)ns dens dnA(dys)ots 
TYLiay Gy pedlEn)n Gen dn A(6n)ot 


Tin(aw)o pev Copev pir(ew)@ -uev Oéwpev OndX(dw)a-pev 
(an)a- A(€n)n-TE Bénre  SyA(6n)o-Te 

TLA\AN /a-TE Cnre — pX(En)n 1 NOT 

tyu(dw)d-ov% Coa dir(eo)d-ovf Oé€wor' SnA(de@)a-oe' 


— 
2, 
WNRewWNWt WNWYE why: 


TUL(AoL)a “Lt, “nv dir(Cor)ot-pt, -oinv SnA(dor)ot-pt, -oinv 
Tyu(dous)os, -ans PuA(Eors)ots, -oins dnA(dots)ots, -oins 
TUL AOL), “on gur(Evt)ot, —-oi'n dnA(6or)ot, — -oin 

P. a Q- LEV, “ON LEV ir(éor)ot-pev,-oinnev — OnA(ot)ot-pev,-oinwev 
Tiy(dou@-re, -@nte  iA(Eor)ot-Te, -oinTE On\(dot)ot-Te, -oinre 
TUYL(doL)@ EV pir(€or)oi-ev OnA(dot) ot-ev 

Imy. tip(ae)a @) ir(ecer Get dnA(oe)ov 


3 ryuladia-tro (yro gir(eéjei-to  Ocitw  dnX(o€)ov-T@ 

p. 2 rip(de\a-re Gyre, cird(eejei-re  Oeire,  SnA(Oe)od-re 
3 ryslasja-roaav, Ke. ir(eéjet-roaav, Xe. — SnA(oe)ov-racay, 
Tip(ad)@-VTOV Pir(€d)ov-vrav dnA(00)ov-vrav 


Inf. typ(dew av = Gv — uN(Eew)etv ~— Bet On\(6etv)ovv 


Par. tin(dwv)ov = av — iN (Ewv) av Oéawv dnA(O@v)av 
Ti(aov)@-oa dud(eov)ov-ca dnA(6ov)ov-oa 
Tys(aov)Ov dud(éov)oby dnA(oov)odv 


b. IMPERFECT ACTIVE. 


s. 1 ériu(aov)ov eCav eir(eov)ouy beov  édnd(oov)ouv 
2 érip(aes)as ens eir(ees)ers Bers ednA(oes)ous 
3 erip(ac)a ey € pir(ee)ee eOeu €d7A(oe)ou 

v. 1 erips(do)d-pev eCdpev ecpir(éo)ov-pev eOéopev &dnd(60)0v-pev 
2 erus(de)a-re entre edir(ce)et-re  eOcitre  ednd(de)ov-TE 
3 érip(aov)ay e€f{wav eid(eov)ovy ebeov  €dnd(cov)ouv 


§ 42. e. ConrracT VERBS 290b, 309, 120s, 7; Teu(dw)@, Tiu(do)@uer, 
aad. TuuL(dor)@ut, 120 ¢ ; ; rue (ders) as, riu(de)are, Tou (dns) Qs, Teue(dn) Oe 
re, 120a, 118d; grd(éw' OTL, ‘Ged(Eou) od, PiA(€o.)oto, 12le; Pidr(€o)otuat, 
pid (éetet, puriée)etran, 121la, b ; Pirlén)y, pedr(En) Aras, 121 d ; dnr\(dwv)Ov, . 
dnd(dov)odca, dyd(dors)ots, 121¢; ; Ond(ders)ots, dy A(dy)ot, 123; d4A(oe)ov, 
€57\ (oov)ovv, 121 b; dnA(dn@obe, 120d; Tin(dew)av, Sydr(dew)odv, 309 c ; 
Tiwnv, pidroins, Sndoln (in this second form of the Opt., the parts shown 
above take the place of all that follows the parentheses in the first form), 
293 b,c; S(dews)ns, S(dy)y, efae)n, 120g; Odw, Oels, 309 b; Tiwtow, Oy- 





§ 42. . CONTRACT VERBS. 53 


TENSES. 
c. PRESENT PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 
I an honored, loved, s» manifested, &c. 
Ind. rip(ao)d-pac @ir(éo)od-pat dnA(60)o0-pwae 
2 ruyr(an a gir(en)n, pir(eeret dnA(On)ot 
3 Tys(ae)a-rae dur(€e)et-rae dnA(6e)od-rat 
Pp. 1 tiplad)o-peba Pir(co)ov-peba dnA(00)0v-peOa 
2 rip(ae)a-obe pir(€c)ei-o be dn\(d¢e)od-a Ge 
3 Tys(ao)o-vrat PiA(€o)ov-vrat OnX(00)od-vrat 
Sub.  tip(aw)d-par Pir(Ew)d-pat dnA(6w)d-pat 
2 ryp(dy)a prlén)h SyA(Oy)ot 
3 tTyslan\a-rat pir(En)n-rat dnX(6n)o-rae 
Pp. 1 riplaw)a-peba Pid(ew)o-peOa dnAX(o@\a-eba 
2 ru(an)a-obe dir(én)n-o Oe dnX(6n)o-o Ge 
3 Tiylaw)o-vrat pir(Ew)@-vrat dnA(6w)6-vrae 
Opt. rip(aoie-pnv diX(coi)oi-wyny dnA(o01)o!-uny 
2  Tep(dor@-o dir(Eor)ot-o dnA(dot)ot-o 
3 Tus(dot)@-To dur(€or)ot-ro OnX(G0t)ot-To 
P.1 rep(avi)a-peba diX(coi)oi-peba dnX(ool)oi-peOa 
2. rip(do.)@-obe didr(€or)ot-0 be dnA(oot)vt-o Be 
3 TyL(dou\o-vTo did(€ou)ot-vro dnA(Go1)ot-vTo 
Imyv. tip(dov)é dir(Eov)od dnA(oov)od 
3 Ttulaéja-cbw dir(ce)ei-c Oa OnX(o€)ov cba 
P.2 tip(de)a-obe ir(€e)et-obe OnA(de\ 0d-a be 
3 tiy(ae)a-cbwcar, Pid(ce)ei-cbwcar, OnX(0é)ov-cbacapr, 
Tys(aé)a-cbwv ir(cé)et-c bar ~ OnA(oe)ov-cbwv 
Inf. rip(de)a-cbat pir(ec)et-o Oat dnA(de)od-o Oat 
Par.  rip(ad)o-pevos did(ed)ov-pevos 617A (06)ov-pevos 
Ti(ao)w-pevn did(co)ov-pEvn dnA(00)ov-pEvn 
Ti(ad)a-jLevOV dtX(€0)ov-pevov OnA(00)ov-pevoy 
d. IMPERFECT PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 
s. 1 érip(ad)o-pnv és tA(e0)ov-pnv €OnA(00)ov-pnv 
2 éru(aov)o ediA(Eou)ov €dyA(Cov)ov 
3 ériulde)a-ro ecbiX(€€)€t-To ednX(de)ov-To 
Pp. 1 ériplad)o-peba eqiX(e0)ov-peba €6nX(00)ov-peba 
2 érip(de)a-obe epir(éc)et-o be €dnd(de)od-a be 
3 éts(do)@-vTo e€diA(€0)od-vro €dnX(00)ov-vTo 


pitow, épitnza, dedjrAwka, 310; éréd\eca 31003; mrrevow 345 ; wrevooduae 
305d ; rerédecmat, ErrevoOnv, 307 a,b; €X(dow)@, TeA(Eow)@, 305 bd; ze- 
mpdcouat fr. (mpa-) mimpdoKkw sell, 50; Kex\jooua fr. kadéw, -éow, CALL, 
342. 2, 50; dedjooua fr. déw bind, 319c, 309 b; accent 772.—O. E. 
vikdw conquer, drrdw roast ; divdw thirst, rewdw hunger, 120g; reipaw 
try, édw permit, avidw vex, axpodoua hear, 310, 279¢; omdw draw, yerdw 
laugh, 310 ¢, e, 307 a; alréw ask, picéw hate, olkéw inhabit, jryéouas lead, 
piméouat imitor, imitate; ¢éw boil, aldéouar respect, 310 c, 807 a, 309b; 
mrnpow fill, xpvcdw gild ; pryéw shiver, 324b; dpdw plough, 310¢, 50. 


54 


Fut. “A. 

Mid. 
Mor. oA. 

Mid. 
Pert. A. 
Plup. A. 
Peri. 
Plup. P: 
ett urs 
ALOP. €45 
Vig hh ed a 
Verbals 


Pres. A. 
P..& M. 
Impf. A. 
P.& M. 
UL eA: 

Mid. 
Aor. A. 

Mid. 
Perf, A. 
Plup. A. 
Per WL, 
Ping: P; 
Mutoret: 
AOncal. 
iat ok. 
Verbals 


A th. 
Fut. 


GREEK 


AND LATIN 


CONTRACT VERBS. 


§ 42 


f. INDEFINITE AND COMPLETE TENSES. 


TLLNT@ 
TLNoToMaL 
eTipnoa 
eTLUNo any 
TeTiUNKa 
ETETL[LTKELY 
TeTiNpar 
eTETLUNUNY 
TETLULN OPAL 
erunOny 
TiysnOnoopat 
TULNTOS, TYANTEOS 


@. OTHER 


Onp(aw)e hunt 
Onp‘ do’ @-pmat 
€Onp‘aov) av 
€Onp ‘ad, o-ynv 
Onpacw 
Onpacopat 
eOnpaca 
eOnpacdauny 
TeOnpaxa 
€reOnpakewy 
TeOnpauat 
€reOnpayny 
TET Pac OMat 
€Onpabny 
Onpadnoouat 
Onparos, Onparéos 


prnow 
girjoopa 
epidnoa 
e:pidnoaunv 
meidnka 
emepiAnKey 
mepidnpuat 
erebidnpunv 
medina opat 
eparyOnv 
pirynOnoopat 
prnros, pirnreos 


EXAMPLES. 
TEA(EW)O finish 


TeA(€0)0v-pat 
> 4 \ 
€T€ (€or ouy 
> , 4 
eTeEA(€0)ou-pnv 

ol Lol 
TEAETW, TEAD 
TeAETopal, TeAOUPAL 
eTeAeca 
3 , 
eTeAeoapny 
TeTe NEKa 
> , 
ETETENEKELV 
TeTeNeopar 
ereTeh eo puny 

kekAnoopar 
eTeA eo Onv 
, 

TehesOnoopat 
TEAETTOS, TEAETTEOS 


dnA@oe 
dn\@oopat 
ednooa 
edn\aeoauny 
dednA@Ka 
edeOn\@ketv 
ded A@par 
edednA@pnv 
dednA@oopat 
edn @Ony 
OnA@Onoopat 
dnords, Snwréos 


mréw sail 
emAeov 


mAevow late 
meV Opal, TWAEVTOU- 
em\evoa [pae 


iz 
TeTAEVKA 
> td 
€TETAEUKELY 
méTAEVo pal 
emeTrAEVO PNY 
deOjoopat 
ez\evo Onv late 
/ 
mrevoOncopat late 
mEVOTEOS 


EX(Go@, dw) @, EAS. EG, EAGpev, Wc.; Aue Or EA@nv> ehav: ehav. 
TEA(ETW, €w)@, TeAeEts, TeAEL, WC.; TeAOtpe OL TeAOinv’ TeeEly* TEAOD. 


43. ANALOGIES FROM LATIN CONTRACT VERBS. 


1. In -(ao)o: ama-. 


Ind. Pr. am(ao)o love 
2 am(ais)ds 
3 am(ait)a¢ 
Pp. 1 am(ai)@mus 
2 am(ai)dtis 
3 am(atint)ant 
Impf. am(aé)ébam 
Sub. Pr. am(aam)em 
Impf. am/(aé)dérem 


2. In -eo: mone-. 
ACTIVE VOICE. 


monéo warn 
mon(eis)és 
mon(eit) 2 
mon(ei)émus 
mon(ei)étis 
mon(eiint)ent 
mon(eé)ébam 


moneam 
mon(eé)érem 


3. In -20: audi-. 


audio hear 
aud (iis)is 
aud (1it)% 
aud (ii)?mus 
audii) itis 
audiunt 
audiébam 


audiam 
aud (ié)trem 


§ 45. BARYTONES IN -@ AND -pu. 55 
Imv.s.2 am(ae)d mon(eé)é aud (ié)z 
2,3 am(ai)dto mon(ei)éto aud(ii)zto 
p. 2 am(ai)dte mon(e1)éte aud (ii)zte 
3 am/(atijanto mon(eti)ento audiunto 
Inf. Pr. am/(aé)dre mon(eé)ére aud (ié)ire 
Par. Pr. am/(aens)ans mon(eens)ens audiens 
PASSIVE VOICE. 
Ind. Pr. am(aor)or monéor audior 
2 am (at) aris, -re mon(eé)éris-re, aud(ié)zris, -re 
3 am(ai)dtur mon(ei)étur aud (ii)ttur 
rp. 1 am(ai)@mur mon(ei)@mur aud(ii)zmur 
2 am(ai)@mini mon(el)émini aud(ii)7mini 
3  am(aii)antur mon(ciijentur audiuntur 
Impf. am(ae)a@bar mon(eé)ébar audiébar 
Sub. Pr. am/(aar)er monear audiar 
Impf. am(aé)drer mon(eé)2rer aud(ié)zrer 
Imy.s.2 am(aé)ére mon(eé)ére aud(ié)ire 
2,3 am(ai)dtor mon(ei)2étor aud(ii)ttor 
p. 2° am(ai)@mini mon(ei)émini aud (ii)?mini 
3 am(aii)antor mon(eiijentor audiuntor 
Inf. Pr. am(aé)a@ri mon(eé)éri aud (ié) iri 


44. Pure VERBS. UI. 
S. Bovrev-, to plan; 


BARYTONES IN -a. 


oe-, shake; 6V-, O0-, sacrifice; xat-, ka-, &c., burn. 


Pres. A. BovAevo wEL@ Gio (“v) Kal@, O. A. Kaw 
P. & M. Bovredvopar oeloua Ovopat Kaiopat 

Impf. A. eSovrevov €oeLov éOvov éxatov, €xaov 
P. & M. eBovdrevouny EC ELOMLNY eOvouny exardunv 

Fut. <A. Bovrcicw oelc@ vow Kavo@ 

Mid. Bovdretoopat weioopat Ovo opat Kavoopat 
Aor. A. éBotAevca éoetoa éOvca éxavoa, P. €kea 
Mid. €BovdAevoduny evetoapuny eOvoduny exavodpny 

Perf. A. BeBotvdrevka oeoelKa TeOvKa KEKQUKG 

Plup. A. éBeBovdevceuw EO ET ELKELY eteOvuKely —- EKEKAUKELY 
Perf. P. BeBovevpat oeoELo pat TeGvpat KeKaUpLat 
Plup. P. eBeBovdrevpny eoecciouny ereOvpnv —- €keKavyLnv 
Aor. P. éBovdevdnv éceia Onv ervOnv éxavOny, exany 
Fut. P. Bovrevénoopac ocewcOnoopac tvOncopat KavOnoopa 
Verbals Bovdeutds, -réos oevords, -Téos OvrTE€os KauTos OF -aTds 


45.. Pure VERBS. 


1. tornpe @. ord-, iora-) stdituo, to set up, station (Pf. and 2 Aor., 
to STAND); 2. riOnue (Oe-, riBe-) pono, to put, place; 3. didape (do-, 
did0-) do, to give ; 4. deixvipe (Secx-, Secxvd-) indico,to point out, show. 


§ 44. a. BARYTONE VERBS 309a: BeBotrNevwa, céoeccuat, 307 b, d; 
Biow, TéEDUKa 3100; érvOny 1593; Kalw (s. KaF-, Kau-, Ka-, Ke-, Ka-, Kat-) 
345, 341, 347 g, h. —O. E. watdedw educate ; risredw trust ; tlw poet., 


iI. VERBS IN -pu. 


56 


PURE VERBS. 


a. PRESENT ACTIVE. 


§ 45. 


DEFINITE 


wv vA « Jb 
Ind. tornpe TiOnt Oid@pe Setxviut, -Va 
nfs ne fo yt, 
y 7 16 8 , - 
2 torns riOns didas deixvis 
3 tatnoes riOnoe' didwot' deikvice' 
av v , , / v 
Pp. | torduev Tidepev didopev Oeixkvipev 
2 torate TiGete didoTE O€(KYUTE 
3 iorace Tieaar’, did0aae', Oecxvuact’, 
Tidetot didodar' Seckvice' 
Sub. ioré TtOa 10a OetKYU@ 
2 iorns tions dias Seckvins 
iorh i p tT 
3 tot TiOn 6160 Secxvun 
rp. | iorépev TiO@pev dudapev decxvuajev 
2 tornre TiOnre dv0aTe Sevxvonre 
3 igréce' Tact’ Oda‘ derxvv@ce' 
Opt. icrainy TLOeinv didoiny [Svdanv]  Secxvvouye 
2 torains Tieins dedoins Serxvvots 
‘ c / / , tg 
3 toTain Tein 6:00in Oerkyvot 
Pp. 1 iorainpey, -aijLev TOeinuer, ~€ipey didoinper, ~oLpev Seixvvowpen 
2Qiorainre, -aire  reOeinre, -etre  Otdoinre, -otre  Oetkvyvorre 
3 iorainoav,-aiev TtOeinoay,-eiev Sudoinaay,-otev —Oetkyvotev 
Imv. torn Tider didov Seiki, -ve 
r; ee <4 
3 iorare@ TLOET@ 6106T@ SetkvuT@ 
9 ce ’ ‘ , 
Pp. 2 torare Tidere didote Ocixvute 
9 ¢ / 4 , , 
3 ioTaTe@car, TiOeTwoay, 6.dd6Twacay, OetxvUT@aay, 
4 
ioTavT@y TOevTav d:dd6vT@v SexvivTwy 
Inf. ioravat! TiGevat! Orddvat! Secxvuvat ! 
Par. ioras! ribeis | dtdovs ! Secxvis! -vav 
ioraga ! TiOcioa! ddovca! Secxvica ! 
ub (ore vb 
ioray! Tiber! d:ddv ! Sevxvoy ! 
b. IMPERFECT ACTIVE. 
Ind. torny eriOnv, eriOovr edidav, edidovy edeikvuv, edeiKvUov 
ad > / ’ , > / ’ , B] , - > , v 
2 torns eriOns, €Tiders €Oi0ws, €dideus EOELKVUS, EOELKYUES 
3 ton eriOn, é€ridet edida, €didov edeikvu, €deixvue® 
a vy > ‘ > &D > / v 
p. l torapev — €riOepev edidopev edeiKvUpev 
3! oe , / > / > , 
LOTATE etidere edlOore edeikvuTe 
3 ad > (6 > re > , 
iotagay = er iGeray ediOogay edeikvvoay, -vov 











honor ; xedevw command, maiw strike, 307 b3; KX\elw shut, cohotw maim, 
307 e, 50; daxpiw weep, kwrtw (UV) hinder ; kNalw weep, 50. 

§ 45. e. VERBS IN -pt 313s: Stems, S0- 8:80-, Oe- TOe-, 357. 1, ora- 
iora- 357. 3, Sex- Sexvu- 351. 3; stem-mark lengthened 314. Affixes 
35a, 36a, 9, 382i, 2958; (lora-u) lorynpr, toryy, 296 ; (icra-r) toryor, 
torn, 298 ; lor(a-vr, aver, aacijaor, TiOcacr 300 a, 156 ; delxvume or derxviw 
3154; ior(d-w)a, ior(d-ys)is, Bys, 55(d-y)@, 50, yr, TLO(é-w) Oya, 316 a ; 
ioralny, Secxvborput, 293, Sedymv, Seanv, 316 b, ioratuer, Ociwer, 293a; tor(a-e)n, 
rlOce-e)er, Oés, dbs, or 7H, 500, 297 c ; iordvar, Sdvat, 301 ; ior(a-vr-s)ds, 
Bds, TiO(e-vr-s)els, yvovs, 156, 26, loraca, dldovea, 233 b ; edidouy, ériders, 


i 


—— a 


_ 
> 
. 
4 





§ 45, 


TENSES, 


C. 


Ind. torapac 
2 iatacat 
3 a 
iorarat 
Pp. | iordpeba 
2 iaracGe 
a 
3 toravrat 


Sub. icrdpar 
2 torn 
3 iornrat 
Pp. 1 icr@peda 
2 iornobe 
3 igr@vrat 
Opt. ioraiuny 
2 iotaio 
3 igtairo 
p. | ioraipeda 
2 iaraicbe 
3 iotuivto 


Imv. fordoo, isto 
3 taracé 
icracOw 
Pp. 2 iorace 
c ¢ , 
3 ioraabwcar, 
ictacOwv 


Inf. forac@a 


Par. iordapevos 
iorapevn 


iordpevoy 


A 
Ind. icrayny 
lad A 
2 toraco, iatw 
3 toraro 
Pp. | iorapeba 
2 ioracbe 
3 ao 
ioTavTo 


VERBS IN -MI. 


PRESENT PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 


ld 
ridepat 
ridecat, Tin 
riGerau 
riéueba 
tibecbe 

, 
riGevrat 


TOG pat 
TO 
TtOntat 
TUapeba 
Tina be 
TiO@vrat 


Tieiunv, tiOoiunv 
TGeio, tiOoto 
TiWeiro,  TtiOotTo 
TiWeipeba, TiOoipeba 
tileiabe, TiOoicbe 
Tibeivto §~—- TL otvTO 


tideco, TiOov 

TiOéecba 

Tidea Ge 

Tec bwcar, 
Tie Oav 


ribecOat 


4 
TuOémevos 
TuOepevn 
TUO€wevoy 


didopae 
didocat 
didorau 
Oddpeba 
did00 Ge 
didovrat 


6d@pae 
6100 
dtd@rTat 
dudapeba 
Ouda@abe 
Oud@vTat 


dudotunv 
d.d0t0 
d.d0iTO 
OcdotpeGa 
d.d0tc Ge 


Od0lvTo 


didoa0, didov 
61608 
did00 be 


OuddcGwaay, 


6tdd0bav 
didoa Gat 


Ovddpevos 
dudopevn 
Otddpevoy 


IMPERFECT PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 


> ¢ > , 
érGéuny edcOdpunv 
eribeco, €riGov €didog0, €didou 
>’ , 5 , 
eriGeto €0i00TO 
erOéueba edddpeba 
eriGeu Oe edl0o00 Ge 
ke 8 baw 
éridevto €didovTo 


57 


Selxvtpat 
Oeikvvcat 
Oe(kvuTat 
Secxvupeba 
Seixvucbe 
OeikyvuvTai 


Secxyv@pat 
Secxvy 
Sevxvinrat 
Secxvuapeba 
Secxvina be 
SevxvU@vrTae 


Secxvvoluny 
SerKvvoLo 
decxvvolto 
derxvvoipeda 
decxvvoug Ge 
OeckvvowTo 


OelKvUTO 
decxva ba 
Seixkvva be 
decxvucbwcap, 
detkvva Gav 


Oeikvua bat 


SerkvUpevos 
Seckvupevn 

, 
SetkvUpevov 


’ 4% 
eOetkvupny 

? / 
edeikvuco 

> / 
edeiKvUTO 

’ ’ 
edecxyvupeba 

> , 
edeixvua Ge 

> / 
edeiKvUYTO 





315b; toracav 300; ridecat Tidy (late, Pall. Ep. 79), toraco icrw, €0(eco)ov, 
d(oc0)od, 297 e, hh; rifoiuyv, Ooiuny, 315¢; accent 772 g, h, 780 a, 781, 
782 b.— O. E. riuadnuc pleo, fill, riwarpnut burn, dvivnue benefit, Kixpnue 
lend ; dyauat admire, dtvapat be able, kpéuauar hang, wdpvawa poet., fight ; 
dlfquat Ep. & Jon., seek: bvouae Ep., blame ; dyvipu break, fevyvve jungo, 


join, Savvis gird, Xv destroy, Cuvips swear, wipyvipu fasten. 


See 50. 


2 Aor. (see also above) 313 b, 314¢, d: &8nv, éoBnv, &yvwy, (forms par- 
tially given in 45h), éduv, pay, 2 A. of Baivw go, oBévvims quench, yryvw- 
oKW ENOSco, KNOW, ddvw enter, sink, didpdoxw run, 50 ; émpiduny (s. wpta-) 
as 2 A. of avéouar buy, 50; ord 297d; ordvrwr, yrovrwv, 314; Ona, 


Gh rTAR. 37 


58 PURE VERBS. § 45. 
INDEFINITE AND 
f. Fut. A. ornocw now doce deiEo 
Mid. ornoopa Onoopat Sooopar dei€ouat 
1 Aor. A. éornoa €6nxa 3066 = wa ederEa 
Mid. é€ornoduny €Onkauny Kp. edecEapny 
Perf. A. éstnka 46 réOetka 310b d€daxa dederya 
Plup. A. é€o7tnxeww, eiornxe ereOeixerv ededaxew  €dedeiyev 
F. Pf. A. éornéo 319 b 
h. Second Aorist 
Ind. €orny = €B nv (€Anxa e€a8nv (edaxa eyvav eddy sank 
2€otns  €Bns €Onxas €oBns  edaxas eyvas dus 
3 €aTn €Bn eOnke‘) €a Bn eOwke’) &yv@ edu 
p. 1 €ornpev eOepnev eOomev eOupev 
2 €ornte eGete edore edute 
3 €otnaay eOecav edogav educap 
Sub. ora Ba 66 6o ye diva 
2 ots Bns Ons das yvas duys 
3 OTN Bn On 6 ya éun 
Pp. lordpev Bopev Odpev dapyev yrouev Svapev 
2ornre  PBnre Onre déte yore Ovnre 
3 oTact Bact‘ bdce' dda yraot’ dvear‘ 
Opt. crainvy Bainv Geinv Soinv [denv] Suvnv Ep. 
2 arains Bains Geins Soins duns 
3 oTtain Bain Gein Soin dun 


p. 1 orainuev, craipev 
2 orainte, oraire, 
3 oTainoay, oratev 
Imv. orn [ora] 
OTNTO 
Pp. 2 ornte 
3 oTnT@cay, 
OTavT@Y 


Byvae 
Bas 


Inf. orjvat 
Par. otras 


Geinuev, Octpev 

Oeinre, Oeire 

Geinaay, Oetev 

bés 

béra 

bére 

bérwoay, 
dévrwv 


Oeivar oBnvat 
Geis Beis 


Soinuev, Sotwev 
Sointe, Sotre 
doinaay, dotev 
dds -yuad 
ddto yveTo 
ddte -yvare 
ddTacay, 
SovTwv 


Sovvar yvavat 


Sovs yvovs 


SuUnpev, Sdpev 

Sunre, ddre 

dunaar, dvev 

d00t 

dvT@ 

Ovre 

dvT@cay, 
Ovvrev 


— Sdvae 


dvs 


Zeuev, Oervat, Ziwxa, Couer, Sodvar, 306 b, c, 314d; diy 316c; Sp(dys)as 
120h; mpiwuat, plato, 783 b. — O. E. errr, pOnv, exrny, érrapny, 
écx\nv, Edo or Hrwv, €Biwy, 2 A. of rrAa- endure, POdvw anticipate, méro- 


pear fly, oxé\rAw dry, adioxouar be taken, Bidw vivo, live, 50. 


§ 45. j. Srtecr Homeric Forms oF torypt, tlOnpt, type, SlSapr, Ke. 


ACTIVE. Pres. Jnd. 


s. 2 le?s E. 880, Scdors (ins, didws, Bek.), 335, ri- 


Onoba, Sido.cAa (Sidwoda Bek.), 297 b; 3 rife?, ie? B. 752, dido?, 335 a ; 
P. 3 Oéovor (Oéwot Bek.) 335a; Sub. 8. 3 iffioe N. 234, § 328 b; mv. tora 
335 a, didwOe 335d; Inf. iéuey A. 351, ifwevar N. 114, riOnuevar, didodvat, 
333 c, 335d: Impf. s. 1 lew (tq Bek.) «. 88, § 8315 b; 3 toracke r. 574, 
§ 332 g, rider (ridm Bek.) A. 441, § 284a, 315b; P. 3 ridev a, 112, tev M. 
33 (v. 1. Evy-toy A. 273), €5id0v, 330 b: Fut. Ind. s. 3 dv-éoe o. 265, § 310d ; 
P. 1 ddwoouer (s. d50-) v. 358 ; Lnf. hoéuer T. 361, hoéuevar . 877, Onoe- 
pevat M. 35, dwoéuevar 5. 7, § 333d, didwoew w. 314: 1 Aor. orijoa 6. 582, 


§ 45. VERBS IN -MI. 59 
COMPLETE TENSES. 
g. Perf. P. gora@uar 310d = ret dedopat dedevypat 
Plup. P. éorapny ereOeiuny edeOopuny ededelypnv 
F. Pf. P. €orn€opat 319 b dede(Fouar |. 
Aor. P. éora6ny ereOnv 159 d edoOnv edety On 
Fut. P. arab copa teOnoopa doOrjacopar detyOnjocopat 


Verbals aratds, otaréos Oeros, Geréos Soros, Sotéos Setkrds, SeckrEos 


ACTIVE. i. SeconD Aorist MIDDLE. 
Ind. edpav ran empidpny bought  ébéunv edounv 
2 €dpas eT piw éGou €Oou 
3. €dpa emplaro éOero €O0To 
P.1 edpauev em piapeOa eOene0a edopeba 
2 &dparte emptaa Ge eGea be edoabe 
3 edpacav em piavTo edevro €OovTo 
Sub. dpe Tpiw@pat Gamat dapat 
2 dpas mpin 67 6@ 
3 dpa mpinrat Onrat darat 
Pp. 1 dpapev mpropeba Oapeba da@peda 
2 dpare mpina Ge OnoGe da06¢€ 
3 dpeact‘ Tpl@vrat O@avrat davrat 
Opt. dpainv Tptaipny Oeiuny, Ooipny — Soiunv 
2 Spains Tplato eto,  Gvio, Soto 
3 Spain TpiatTo Ociro = Xe. dotro 
P.1 dpainuer, Spaipev mptaipeba beineba Soipeba 
2 Spainre, Spaire | mpiacbe Ociabe dotabe 
3 Opainoay, Spatev | mpiawto Geivro doivto 
Imv. dpa Tplaco, Tplo 60d Sov 
3 Opato mpiac Ow 6é0ba doa bw 
P.2 Spare mptag be 6éa0e doa be 
3 dpdrwcar, mpiacbacar, 6écOacar, dd0bacayr, 
Opavrwy mpiao Cav bécbwy déabev 
Inf. Spavar mpiac Oat bécba do06at 
Par. Spas Tplajevos Oépevos Oopevos 


O&xa 0. 649, § 284a, &yxa P. 708, § 135: 





Perf. Ind. Pp. 2 éoryre 835 d 5 





Inf. éordpev p. 261, éorcdpevar N. 56, § 333; Part. éordéros T. 79, éorewra 
N. 261, § 325d: 2 Aor. Ind. s. 1 ory A. 744, § 284, ddcKkov, 3 oTdoKer, 3322; 
P. 3 orav, crav I. 193, pur, 330 b, éordoay M. 56, § 335 d, Oécav B. a 
€cav 6. 681, Sécav A. 162, § 284a, ‘Sub. (822 a, c, 323. c, 324.¢, 328 b) s. 

Beiw, Oeiw, mR A. 567, aes GA 2 ornns, Oeins or Ons, naniegs WV. 487; 3 noes 
Bin, Bén UL. 94, 852, Gein or_Oijn, én II. 590, ety or in €. 471, How O. 359, 
dun, Owr., dwnow: VY. 1 oréwmev, cTelowev, O!wuev, Oclopev, SwWowev 3 oT1)- 
wot or arelwot, Sdwow- D. 3 orjerov; Inf. orhueva K. 55, Oéuev, Oéuevar, 
&uev A. 94, dduev, Sduevar, yubpevac, 333.c. Mippuer. Pres. Jmv. tcraco, 
torao Bek., K. 291, § 297 e; Part. riOjuevov 335d: Impf. Pv. 3 rldevro H. 
475: Fut. s. 2 Ojceac 5. 163, § 823 c: 1 Aor. s. 3 Onkaro K. 31, § 806 b: 
2 Aor. Ind. s. 3 0éro T.. 310, &ro 6. 76, § 2844; D. 3 O2cOnv x. 141; Sud. 
8. 1 Oeiouar 323; 2 Ofjac (v. 1. eins) T. 403 ; Tine. Géo k. 3833, Bed 323 C. 


60 PURE VERBS. — -MI FORMS, § 45. 


VERBS IN -MI (continued). 


ACTIVE VOICE. 


k. tps mitto l. ejué sum mM. ett €0, ire 
S. é-, ie-; to send. S. éo-, é-; to be. S. ‘i-; to go. 
Present. 2 Aorist. Present Present. 
Ind. type (7Ka ety j sum eit 0 
2 ins hKas [eis j]Jee es [ets] e¢ is 
3 inate’ Ke‘) eoTt |‘ est elou’ it 
p. 1 tepey €ipev €opev; sumus tev imus 
2 tere eire €oTe | estis tre itis 
3 faot', tetors ~=—s etry (AKav) eta |‘ sunt tao’ = eunt 
Dp, 2 leroy eiroy, 3 eitny = €o TOV j trov 
Sub. ia & ® sim to eam 
2 ifs HS ns sis ins seas 
3 iF 7 7 sit in eat - 
Pp. 1 idpey Opev Opev simus topper eanmmus 
2 inte ire nTe sitis inte eatis 
3 toot aoe‘ aoe sint twat’ eant 
D. 2 ogee HTOV TOV troy 
Opt. beiny [tocue] etn einy essem Coupe, loiny 
2 ieins Eins eins esses tors __—siires 
3 tein ety ety esset tou iret 
P. 1 icinwev, icipev empny, cipev einer, eipev tonev 
2 ieinre, ieire eure, ele ebyre, etre toure 
3 leinoay, ietev eiqoay, elev etyoay, elev tocev 
D. 2 icinror, ietrov einroy, ciroy elroy, etrov tovrov 
3 teuntny, leirny einrny, eirny —einrny, etrny ioirny 
Imy. tee és io es ie [ei?] i 
3 lero eT@ éoT@ [Tw] esto ire ito 
a a 7 a 
p. 2 tere €TE €OTE este ire ite 
3 ieraoay, éTwoay, éotwoay, sunto irecav, eunto 
iévr@v evT@V EOT@Y, Vs OVTOV idvr@v, irev 
p. 2 terov €rov €oTov trov 
3 lérev €Tov éoTov trav 
Inf. iévae! eivat eivae esse iévat! ire 
Par. icis! eis ov fens] iov! _iens 
icioa! iev!  eioa, ev ovoa, op iovoa! idy! 
Imperfect. hopes Imperfect. 
Ind. iy, [tour] jiew Fut. foo, oor, 6. Tay, ih Hunv new, za ibam 
2 t ass teus Hoew, Horov 2 [js] hoa ets, ject Oa 
ie: in, tee 1 Aor. fa (Ind. 3 1 erat ee’ 
P. : icpev only) 306 it? BEY | HELMED, jeer 
2 tere Re Fe 2 nre, nore yeiTe, re 
3 teray Perf. Waeihe febnet tis, 3 ie erant fecay, noav 
D. 2 terov cixos 31OB D2 Hrov, forov Fetrov, TOV 
3 lérny Plup. eikew 3 tv, noTny  neitny, HTHY 


is ig he 


§ 45. ‘THMI, EIMI, EIMI, KEIMAL. 
PASSIVE AND MIDDLE VOICES, 
n. Of dpe. o. OF eli, to be. 
Present. 2 Aorist. Future. 
Ind. cepa e(uny Eropat 
2 tecat €Lo0 EON, ETEL 
3 terau €lTO [€oerat| eotat 
P.1 téueba eiueba éodpeba 
2 tecbe eiaGe éoeobe 
3 tevtat eivTo €oovrTas 
Sub. fdpac appar 
2. i7 7 
ei yi 
ira rac 
Pp. 1 idpeda @peOa 
2 inode nobe 
2 i@vrat @vTat 
Opt. ieiuyy, iofuny etuny, oiuny eootpuny 
2 icio, ioto, 10, oto évoLo 
3 feiro &e. €iro, otro éaotTo 
P.1  feipueda ciucOa, oiueba ecoipeba 
| 2 icio@e eiobe, ota Oe éco.r be 
3. leivTo €ivTO, owwTo - €GotvTo 
Imv. eco, tov ou 
3 téabw felelo) 
p.2 tecde éabe 
3 tea@woar, éabacar, 
iévOwv .  €abov 
Inf. tecOa €abat egeo Oat 
Par.  iguevos Epevos eodmevos 
Imperfect. 
Ind. temny Fut. M. io opat p. To elu to go, some as- 
2 eer COU 1A. M. nKapny sign a Middle, teuac to 
; yes 6 ub, rf etpar hasten, Imperf. iéunv. 
a 2 i ’ rR Ep a Others write these tenses 
hae oak a lige Ld with a rough breathing, 
3. tevro Fut. P. €6jcopac Be ceris AU ag hae 
p.2 tecOov Verb- § érds me ; i pes tre 
3 ieoOnv als | éréos rts tee 


342. 1: 
ay, yee’, 163; 


olny, 315 ec, 772 g. 





61 


q. Ketpuaz, to lie. 


Present. 
Kelpat 
Keloat 
KEe(TaL 
/ 
keiueba 
Keia Ge 
KELVTQe 
KE@pAL * 
’ 
ken 
kKenrTat 
ld 
Keopeba 
, 
Keno Oe 
KE@VTAL 


, 
KEOLMNV 
KEOLO 
KE€OLTO 

4 
Keoipeba 
Keoto be 
KEOLTO . 


KELOO 
, 
Kelo Ow 
Keio be 
Keita Owoay, 
Keio Owv 


Keto Gat 


Keipevos 


Imperfect. 
eKELLNV 
EKELTO 
€KELTO 
’ , 
exeijreba 
» 
éxetabe 
€KELVTO 
Future. 
Keioopat 





§ 45. r. Stems é- te- 357. 3, éo- é- 345, l-, ha-, 314 a, Kee-, contr. ke-, 
Uynpr, cf. TLO mt: (ieaot) tetor, Att. id@or, 122, 120f; 
tew 315 b; A. eluev, etuny, elOqy, 279 c; eipt, ely, 50 ; éorl 298 a; loinv 
293 ¢ ; 0, el, 297 d, lévrwy 313 ¢, érrwv, irwr, 300 e ; 40a, qettOa, 297 D5. 
(jet) fuer 118d, 121d; deren Ep., A. 211, éorat nude 
(the only Att. "form) 303 a; dialectic forms 50 ; 
ons, 50; pai, pnoba, 297 b, d; (kéenar) Keyan, cf. rieuat- Kéwat, Ke- 
Hdt. has ‘the uncontracted Kéerat, éxéero, xéecOar, &ec. 
t. Forms marked with the sign ; may be enclitic. 


tom 315 ¢ 5 


dnt, ef. tor ni jul, 


ee 


62 PURE VERBS. —-MI FORM. § 45. 


VERBS IN -pe: u. ype firi, to say (s. pa-). 


Pres. Ind. Subj. Opt. Imy. Inf. IMPrF. 
S.1 dyulj nui po ainv paiva &ehny, Hv 
2 hys, ons pis pains Padi] or Pade edns, &pnoba 
3 pnotj’ on gain, paro Part. én, 9 } 
P.1 paper} pope We. r. in Att. Zaye 
2 date | pire care as ecare 
3 pact |‘ pace patocav, pavtov epacay 


Fut. @jow, Aor. épyoa. Mri. and Pass., little used in Att.: Pres. 
ie pdcba, Pt. papevos + Impf epapny Perf. Imv. mehacOw+ Aor. 
P. épaOnv: Verb. dards, paréos. — See 45r, t, 50. 


46. FE. PRETERITIVES. 


a. otda novi, J know (s. t8-, etd-, eide-). 
b] 


2 Perr. Ind. Subj. Opt. Imy. 2 PLup. 
S. 1  oida €10@ eldeinv noew, 70n 
2 oidas, otc ba eiOns eideins ict noes, 70NS, 
devo 8a, 70no0a 
3 olde «(On eidein, toto noe’, 78n 
P.1 otddpev, topev = eiS@prev—s We. deeper, 2 obey 
2 oltdare, tore elOnre tore 7 O€LTE, Hore 
3 oldaot', icaous — eid da istwoav decav, noav 


Inf. etSévae! Part. eidms! Fut. etoouar: less Att. Put. eidja@ and Aor. 
elSnoa: Verb. iaréos. — See dpaw 50. : 


b. dédSocxa or Sédra timeo, I am afraid (s. di-, Set-). 


2 Perr. Ind. Subj. Opt. Imy. Inf. 2 PLuP. 
S.1 6d¢dta dedio  dedueinv Seduevae! = Se Siew 
2 Sed.as Sedins Sedveins dedi Part. edediets 
3 deduce dedin,  Sedvein,  Seditw Sedi@s! — SeDiet 
P.l dedmpev ve. ite, tae ededupev 
2 déduTe dedure ededure 
3 dediaon' deditacapy edédicav 


1 Perf. d€douxa, 1 Plup. edeSoikew, Fut. dSefcoua Ep. chiefly, deiow 
late, Aor. éderca. — See deidw 50. ) 


§ 46. e. PRETERITIVES 268, 3178: ot8a, SéSorKa, tornKka, 320 b ; 
(oi6-c6a nude, 151) ofcAa, wdecOa, 297 b; (tuev O. 32, § 148) tomer, 
(7jd-nev) youer, Seder, Erramev, 820a; dediacc 156a; eib0, éore, eldeinv 
(so dedveinvy ? as fr. base Sedte-, Pl. Phedr. 351 a), coralny, (15-60) tic Ot, 
éoTtdvat, 320c; éorws 320 d 5 qoew, Hon, 278d, 21c; éorhxew 280 a, 
Att. also elo HKew | 279 cc; par KdOnpar (Kard, Suc) 280 a, 161 b (having 
forms from both é- and é5-, or see 307 e) ; cf. Lat. séde-o, and see 141 ; 
(75-rat) Forat, Foro, 147; KaOGuar, kaSoiuny, 317 c ; Huevos 780 Cc; axd@neo, 
Kabjoo, 282b, 783 a, 771 ¢. — O. E. ré0vnxa am dead, BiByKa stand, pé- 
ova am eager, dvwya command, 320e,f. . 


Tne 


§ 47. PRETERITIVES. FORMS OF THE STEM. 63 


c. Rua and rdOnpat sedeo, TI sit (s. €é-, 8-). 
PrerFecr MIDDLE. 


Indicative. Subj. Opt. Imperative. 
S.1 fai  xaénpar Kabopuat KaOoipny 
2 foa KaOnoa Kady KaOoto oo KaOnoo 
3 fora KdOnra Kadnrat Ka€oiro job Kana ba, 
1 Sa jpeBa KaOnueda = xabwpeba = kaboipeba Xe. 
2 nobe Kdbnode xabnobe kabciabe habe 
3 fvrac KdOnvrar = kada@vrac~—aBowwTo jnobwcav, 7oGwv 
Infin. 7oOa KabjoOas Part mpevos Kabnpevos 
PLUPERFECT MIDDLE. 
S. 1 pny exabhpnv, ka€nunv P.1 fyeba exabnpeba, Kabnpeba 
2 noo exaOnoo, Kabjoo 2 fobe exaOnobe, xabrobe 
3 oto exadnto, Kabnoro, 3 hvto  exaOnvto, KaOnvto 
KaOnro 


Fut. Pf. ca$noopar late. — See ifm 50. 


d. €atnka sto, I stand (45 f). 


First AND SECOND PERFECT. 


Indicative. Subjunctive. Opt. Imv. Infin. 
ud cat , 
S. 1 €ornka * ECTHKO EOTO €oTainv éotynkevat! |. 
9 td — c / *k ¢ , ba ad € ‘ ! 
eoTnkas éoTnkys égtains cota&e éoravar! 
3 Ld ‘ Dc ¢ , * € t o , P rt, 
EOTHKE, EOTIKN; éotain, €oTdT@ art. 
P.l &e. eordpev Xe. €ordpev Ne. éaTnkas! 
9 o > Af é bo! 26 i 
€aTare éotate éotas! 261 
3 éoract‘ éotact' EOTATwWOAaY, ECTAYT@Y 
1 PLUPERFECT. 2 PLUPERFECT. 
, v 
S. 1 €ornkew, ciornce iP. éornxeipev S. * P.. d€ordpey 
2 éoTnKews, elornKets EDTIKELTE = eoTate 
, , a o 
3 €oTHKEl, eloTnKet éotynkeaay, XC. Ge eoracay 


47. 1x. ‘RELATION OF THE TENSES AND FORMS OF THE STEM. 


1. DomaAIn oF THE OLD STEM: hGO- ss Ly-- Stix- 
Second Aorist System : EXGBov d eiakov 
Second Compound System : eLvyny eSdxnv 

2. DOMAIN oF THE MippLE STEM: = AnO- fevy- 8yk- 
Perfect Passive System : Anoua fevyuac  déBnyuae 
First Compound System : eAnoOny eLevyOnv €8Hx On 
Second Perfect System : éAn ba 
First Perfect System : éfevya d€dnxa 
First Aorist System : yoo éfevéa enka 
Future System : AAow fevew OjEouat 

3. DoMAIN oF THE NEw STEM: havOdv- —_ Levyvi- Sakv- 
Present System : avOdvw fevryT pt ddr 


"19.0393\0 “nO.032ADP . 10.037 "WO] “1709-029 
‘mgolidiau .vgol 19, 
‘m@gonndo .vvgovy “diy 
"109.0390X. . 1109.09 “I0] “1109.00 ‘109.090 */uy 
"1n9.09%) ‘ADgopOLLy . Ang.0 “10(] ‘Alig.o E°2(T 
‘oLdomanls . oLAOM ‘oLAMO ‘dq foLAm foLA0oD 
97170 . 1WLAOM “p.LA%9 “dy ‘Lae ‘LA0D 
"1m.Lae | *0.L09¥7 0.103\A0g/9 . 0.1707 UO] fOLAO 
peda pangs, OLN? ‘p10? “UOT foray “LAD 
"0102 InLN9¥ . 010 “MLD ‘UOT fora “VLA G 
9.037199 “npoosnohp . nga “qoog “oged T 
“IVUNTA 


§ 48, 


yng VnaLon . 1a‘ na'dy athe “ols 
‘oagop inagod n2ga7! . 09 pees “UOT £039 ‘171039 
0n.0.02 Vly 2g alana . o'r “diy ‘0.0 ‘10.0 
“pd. ‘w3p19 “pppdha Dp “10q 
"ODL0}1L3 “ons 3399 ‘onprndha - op “uoy ‘o 
‘o19u.0 ‘o19d9 . ov “diy 
‘aasndh ‘nsyuz2 .n3 “lO, BR “UOT 
‘oaSndh ‘oay.u2 ‘oaaaha ..03 “UOT ‘ao 
“p0nXavy “poshnd 1n037u . 10.03 ‘[O]] 
‘ain!| “rolug}.2 amaay «rob. long “2 “Woy “Lz 
-9vopolan ‘alrloxosyau . Auroy0°104] 
‘annjoaak ‘anrlgny ‘annlnang aon ‘10g ‘aud 
-smrlo3\9 nrlosand . volo "u0y ‘nao 
‘rorlq039 . vorlaa.0 “laoo 10] ‘ynrlo.0 
~rmrinagod . ro1laa Loc R “UOT “reo “vo? T 
‘UVIODNIS 
“HATLOULIO 


CONJUGATION. 


TABLES OF 





| Munley ‘sormngiag «Sore “dry ‘so1o 15 


sot] ‘vomp.taipa ‘nommgl ‘vomodo 
-v.00n “.0m0 ‘v.omo ‘dy “v.01 “n..n0” 
M.1\ 0.910X2 . DM'IRTT “0.010°[05]7 “0.000 
“normya'singird . 0.010 ‘S170 “Tony “v.00 ‘sn 
‘aearrirond §4gdo . Acme ‘amo “diy fam ‘amp 
-a3d3 ‘amzanp “anaVohhp - A? “UOT {Ae 
-94 ‘mavng3g . al ‘ars "OWT 2 “1OC] ‘Az 
-alorpag | amhid ‘amaug . Am “loc A129 
“yon rmarnluarsn « roar: Any ‘139 ‘ar99 
“ypaan | alrhro ‘aldo . aly: 10] 

*ADDILAD ‘anpdo . avn ‘doy fan ‘ax 
"7104 | "2739990" ‘119297 . A137 “UOT *AI2 
-9nl93p ‘aanla 3p : voaarla ‘aarla “Yo0q 
‘ada ‘ap alidna . al: [OW ® Lo, 
‘1naa | ‘aandoh ‘aax00g . Ad “LO” ‘A12 
-99 nasnlugXin . voaad “Touy x “dy 
‘and ‘asnlgidy . asd diy 2 “I0(T 


Vd 


‘auytap ‘aipps ‘aigongarl .a “lous ‘va *fuy 
"ADOIDOINO faliaek oe ab Avo "xeTy ‘A> fa 
‘asgdahl, ‘aoahg ‘aay ‘ant02 . A prC ‘avo 
‘ankdoa ‘anxludia ‘anxmaha . AN “xe, VW ‘1.0 
‘mornjdyay Gommd .1.010 [OWT “1.0n 
19039103 00310] . 1.073 ‘UOT ‘1.0 


"2Lanrda 1LAn3\IP .« LAI IO(T 


"72.003d0ND 7.90310L . 1.003 “WOT “1.000 “1.0003 


7.00] "1LADNIA TLAYAIIU «LAD “LO(T 


-pde‘momoogd .1.000.0M0 “dry ‘1.00 ‘1.00010 
"7.010.070 *11010LUNdY . 1.010 "TOR “1.000 
‘aLamaan “1a0X2 “Qranp .1LA “10 “1.04 & 








ELS TE ae ae ae 


‘ata0loariaa ‘919979 . 3439 “dy Lh ‘qngy Z% 
‘axniog Saaniodjahp . astlo “dry ‘aarlee -gngy 
‘san ‘san’pyj0g9g ‘sarlodga . Sad “10g ‘asl [ 
“IVUNTd 


‘mchrg “okogou “clihp .r.ok day Bh -engy 
0h 91919 T4Lkg7L .1w “1Oq] “0 g 
‘sda ‘sbpriap ‘sbpdo . sbo “dy 
‘SUX ‘slinlyor ‘slida ‘sido . 8% ‘10cq ‘Sb ‘S19 
"sagojdno ‘sahay ‘sahyenp . $9 “locy ‘S19 
"09019X2 “ngni0yp” “npoiuy>a .vp0 PIO ‘SZ 
‘omak Sejag 5°02 Soe 99 “doy 
"m3g ‘m2anp ‘maga, .m3 “uoy ‘o 
‘mle “iting, “irlmy2g9 .atlo ‘diy fo ‘qngy 
‘gagusuy ‘bell .W “yV PIO 
‘pauligrt “nagh . > ‘uoy ‘ar ‘dng 
-0.00 “AON ODPIILO . AOXOVO *19}] 
‘aovon| “n30gh2 ‘n3z17/9N? . 03°10] “WO “LOW 
-pAl . An> “10(] Y “UOT ‘aor ‘uoy ‘Aw ‘Aon 
‘anau| "92 “ol. ‘099749 . 0 “UOT 
‘aox03da ‘aox0aX2 . AoXo *1oz] ‘a “Jduty 
‘m2d9 ‘maand ‘m3yahhp . m3 ‘uoy ‘o 
‘m3IM/oy ‘MZn¥IQg . M3 “IO” ‘Oo 
‘oprieu ‘9.070 ‘mod .@ “I10(j ‘ “Jn 
‘maya “modi {19NI9d . 079 “dn fo 63 
‘exmaroaanl ‘modo . ol) ‘00 ‘dq 
“m3dX ‘maLi0d ‘mado . 3 ‘woT ‘om ‘on 
‘muy py anilyyh arid . rl pio ‘oe ig “PUT 
“UVINONIS 
"TALLOULIAG 








64 


(8 [ZG) QIaV], IVHANGDH “v 


‘SWHUO,T OLLOWIVIG’ *X ‘QP 





DIALECTIC FORMS. 


- 
b. REFERRED TO AU@ AS A 


ACTIVE. 
Pres. Ind. 
S. 2 Aves, AUVs D. 326a 
AvetsPa 0. 297 b 
3 Avot? E. 328 b 
AU D. 130 ¢ 
P. 1 Avoues D. 328 a 
3 AvovTt D. 328 a 
Avoiot M. 328 c 
Pres. Sub, 
vay E. 328 b 
vyo0a E. 297 b 
UNCLE. -TLD. 328 b 
vouev E. 326d 
vwmes D. 328 a 
vere BE. 826d 
vovTi D. 328 a 
Pres. Opt. 
Y AvortOa &. 297 b 
hvaav AL. 330 a 
Pres. Inf. 


Soee = ee 


Avev, AUnY D. 326 a 


Avévev BE. D. 333d 
Avévevar BE. 333d 
Pres. Part. 

F. \voiwa &. 1310 
Avwa LAC. 334 
Imperfect. 

Avov cv. 284 a 

AvesKoy IT. 332 

Nvogay AL. 330 a 

Avery A. 299d 

[é]\verov B. 299 d 

é\véTay D. 328 a 
Fut. Ind. 
Ava, -e?s, -e2, &C. D.325b 
1 Aor. Ind. 
S. 1 Adoa 0. 284a 
AVoacKov IT. 332 


. 
-3€ 
2é 
3 


[é]\doov E. 327 a 
1 Aor. Part. 
Avoats,-awwa H.131d 
Perf. Ind. 
S. 1 AeAvKw,-75 D. 326b 
P. 3 AedAvKarTe D. 328 a 
AeAUKaAGL P. 328 C 
AéAuKay AL. 330 a 
Perf. Inf. 
eAUKELY, -NY D. BH. 326 b 
Perf. Part. 
AeAVKWY D. H. 3826b 
Plup. Ind. 
S. 1 AeAvKeaI.,-7 0.291 ¢ 
é\éAuKov E. 326 b 
2 NeNUKEaS I., -yS O. 
291¢ [163 
3 NedvKee(v I., -Et(y P. 
2 Aor. Ind. 
(\dAurovy, -es, -€ E.. 284 e 
P. 3 éduray AL. 327 b 
2 Aor. Inf. 
Aurdéew I. 323d 
Nuri D. 326 a) 


PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 
Pres. Ind. 
S. 2 Aveae I. 323 a 
hwerat HEL. 331 c¢ 
P. 1 AvépecOa P. 299 a 
Pres. Sub. 
S. 2 Adyar 1. 331 a 
Aveat E. 326d 
3 Averar EB. 326d 
P. 1 Avduecba E. 299 a 


Pres. Opt. 
P. 3 Avolaro I. 329 a 


Pres. Imyv. 


S. 2 AveoI., ev 1.D.323 











MOopeEL. 
Imperfect. 

S. 1 Avipyv 0. 284 a 
éuduav D. 828 a 
Aveckdunv IT. 332 

2 [€]\veoI.,-ev1.D.223 
3 [é}\WerOov E. 299d 
é€AvécGuy D. 328 a 
Fut. M. Ind. 
AvoeHuae, -7, &e., D.325b 
S. 2 Avoeat I. 323 a 
Aor. M. Ind. 

S. 1 Avoduny 0. 284a 
éehLugduav D. 328 a 
Avoackouny IT. 332 

2 [é]Avoao I. 322 b 
éX\Uoa D. 322 e 
Aor. M. Opt. 
P. 3 Avoaiaro 1. 329 a 
Perf. Ind. 
S. 2 AéAvae E. 331 D 


P. 3 AeAVaTat I. 329 a 
Perf. Opt. 

P.3 XeXdvTo FE. 317 c 
Pluperfeet. 

P. 3 [é€]AeAvaro I. 829 a 
Aor, P. Ind. : 

P. 3 €\v@ev P. 330 b 
Aor. P. Sub. 

S. 1 Av6éw 1., -clw FE. 


323a,c [3823¢ 
2 Av@eins or -iyns E. 
3 dufein or -777 E.323 6 
P. 1 AvOdwyer 1. 323 a 
2 AvGeieTe E. 3236 
3 AvOéwot 1. 823. a 
Aor. P. Inf. 
AVEnY A., -jmev D. 33 
AvOjuevat KE. 333 b 
2 Aor. M. 
[é]Avuqv, -co E. 313 b 


3h 


ce. Various Forms or Contract VERBS (321 5). 





Uncontracted, Contracted. Variously Protracted. 
dpdiw, dpéw I. 6p& épbw, pevowww, Pt. épbuw A. 350 
opdet, Opan Opa opda, pevowdaa, Inf. dvrucav N. 215 
Opdoum Opayue ops@ut, Pdouu, Mid. 2 aircdwo v. 135 
dpdovea dpadca 6pdwoa, vareTdwoa, paywiwoa O. 542 
dpdovres,-éovres I. dpGvTes Opdwyres, dpéwvTes I., NBWorTes Kk. 6 
dpdec Oar 6pacbat ~- dpdacbarc. 4, wrvdacPar a. 39 
JELKEW vetk@ vecxetw, Inf. welew o. 34, Pt. vecxelwy o. 9 
vetkén VELK) verxely p. 189, vecke(nor A. 579, Bein Z. 507 
idpbovra idpotvra = idpwovra, barvwovras, Fem. idpwovca 
dp5ovaet dpotac aplwot, Opt. dytswev, Mid. dntswvro 


66 


49. XI. 


I. PRIME STEMS (a; 


Roots, (a1) giving rise, and (a?) not 


giving rise to Modified Stems. 


II. 


b. By Precession: bl. Of & to e. 
b*. Of €oro tor. 
b?. Of & to a, &c. 
cl. By Contraction. 
Ce; By Syncope in the Theme. 


ce, 2 in the 2 Aorist. 
er. ee i in Other Tenses. 
c By Metathesis in the Theme. 


ce, ee in the 2 Aorist. 


TI. 


A. By LENGTHENING A SHORT 
VOWEL. 
g. To the cognate Long Vowel. 
h. To a Diphthong. 


' B. By Appine SYLLABLES OR 
LETTERS. 
I. BY ANNEXING OR 
CONSONANTS. 
i,j, 1. The Conson. I ; uniting with, 
it, A Palatal Mute 
2 A Lingual Mute 


INSERTING 


to form oo, 


i, A Labial Mute anh 

j1. A Lingual Mute 

+2 

j*. A Palatal Mute to form f. 


j*. A Labial Mute 
d to form AA. 
: zl, Alone. 
z*, With a Vowel. 
. Alone. 
. With a Vowel. 
. With preceding Conso- 
nant dropped. 
. With Transposition. 
. With the « dropped. 
. With preceding Vowel 
lengthened. 
k’. With Precess. of a Vowel. 
n. v:; nl. v annexed. 


J 
J 
j®. A Double Palatal 
J 
] 


IV. ADOPTED STEMS (x; 


CONJUGATION. 


MODIFIED STEMS. 





MODIFIED STEMS. 








§ 49, 


CLASSES AND NOTATION OF STEMS. 


340). 


Derived Stems, (a?) giving rise, and 
(a*) not giving rise to Mod. St. 


1. EUPHONIC (341s). 


c’. By Metathesis in Other Tenses. 
c8. By Antithesis. 

. To avoid Double Aspiration. 

. From Use of both Sm. & R. Forms. 
el, By dropping a Consonant. 

e?. By adding a Consonant. 

f!, By dropping the Digamma. 

f?. By changing the Digamma. 

f, By changing or dropping c. 


2. EMPHATIC (346s). 


n?. With preceding V. lengthened. 
n°, y inserted. 
n*, ay annexed. 

n>, With v inserted. 

n®. With cv lengthened. 
me vv annexed, 

Becoming vvv after a short V. 
no A Lingual or Liquid dropped. 


n°, ve annexed. 


t. +: tl Alone. 
t?. With a Vowel. 
q. 9: qt. Alone. 


q°’. With a Vowel. 
q®. With preceding Vowel 
lengthened. 
o. Other Consonants : 
o7. With a Vowel. 


II. BY ANNEXING VOWELS. 
u. By annexing a. 
u?. With change of an € to @. 
v. By annexing €. 
v2. With change of an € to o. 
w. By annexing other Vowels. 
III. BY PREFIXING SYLLABLES OR 
LETTERS. ¢ 
p- Various Preformatives. 
r. Reduplication: r!. Proper. 
r2, Attic. 
r°, Improper. 


ol. Alone. 


358). 


ae 





§ 50. ALPHABETIC LIST. 67 
§50. xi. CatTaLocur or VERBS. 
Notes. a. The following Catalogue contains the principal IRREGULAR 


Verss, and some verbs which are not usually so termed; while many 
COGNATES are added (338d). Whatever is enclosed in brackets will be 
understood to be DIALECTIC ; and to occur in the Epic (commonly in 
Homer), unless specially ascribed to another dialect or another author. 
The dialects are commonly denoted by initials, as in § 27; and the sign + 
marks the rare occurrence of a word beyond the range noted (85 ¢, d). 
Some of the less familiar forms are referred to passages where they occur. 

b. The REGULAR TENSE-SYSTEMS in use, represented by their leading 
forms, are arranged in the same order as in § 37; while the Future and 
Perfect usually cited in parsing are printed in full-face type, and the sEc- 
OND TENSES are introduced by name. The abbreviations chiefly used in 
naming the tenses are ‘‘pr., ipf., f., ao. (la., 2a.), pf., plp., and 3f.” 
The voices and modes are denoted by italics: as, A., a., M., m., P., p.; 
ind., sub., opt., imv., inf., pt. The persons and numbers are marked 
thus: 1s., lp., 1d., 2s., &c. The abbreviation m. (Jf), p. (P.); ao., 
or f., annexed to a form, shows that the corresponding middle, passive, 
aorist, or futwre is also formed after the same analogy ; and the voices be- 
longing to the aorist system are then indicated, if they are not the same 
with those of the future system. 

ce. STEMS are marked by hyphens affixed ; and the small letters placed 
immediately after these, or after the themes, denote varieties of stems 
according to the notation in § 49 and 340-358. A small © prefixed to a 
word marks it as having been found only in composition: as, © qvexa, 
found in é€7-yvexa. The abbreviations 1., r., po., cp., ct., and v. Z., stand 
for late, rare, poetic, compounded, contracted, and various reading. Less 


important forms or marks are sometimes omitted. See § 51. 


A. 


aa- hurt, mislead; m. 38. dara 
T. 91; ao. daca, ct. doa, m.; adoOnv. 
Aug. 'a- 279 f.] 
 [aBpordgomev, see duaprdavw. | 

ayadrw (1, dyar-) adorn, M. glory; 
ayare, Hyna- WyddOnv 1. 

d&yaparadmire ; [aydaoopat, 5.181, ] 
ao.; usu., as mid., HydoOny, f. 1. Cog. 
ayagw po., [dydoua, dyatoua,| ad- 
mvrire, envy, &c. 

ayyédrw (1, dyyed-), annownce ; see 
40. 

ayelpw (h, dyep-) collect ; [ayepot- 
por Or. Sib.,] Hyeipa [m., 2a. a-yeps- 
Env, pt. syne. aypduevos| ; aytyepka 
L, -uacl. [plp. 3 p. aynyéparo A. 211, 
HyépOnv, A. 57. Cog. dyépouas, tyye- 
péBomar, v. Ll. ipyepéowan. | 

Gyvupe (n’, Fay-, dy-f) break, usu. 
ep. W. kata: Sdfw, gata 279 b[Héa, V. 
392]; 2pf. °daya [érya 1. | am broken, 
Slayuar }., 2a. edynv [Ep. a, or a 2]. 
It has some forms as if from éay-: 





ao. pt.° edéas Lys.100.5, f. © éd&ec Mat. 
12.20. [Ao.opt. (karFagéats, caFFatacs, 
136, 142) xavdfars Hes. Op. 664. | 

&yw ago, lead, bring; &&, m. 
(sometimes as pass.), #EaV., 2a. Wya- 
you m.284g; HXa, later dyjoxa312d, 
Hyuat, AxOnvt. Cog. hryéouat, [avyivéw. | 

[a8e- be sated ; see dw. | 

Qdo sing; Gropay -cw r., joa: 
noua, AoOnv: ct. fr. po. & 1. delSa, 
deiow M., Eira. 

delpw & deprdfw raise ; see aipw. 

&éEw increase ; see avéw. 

[&npr & dw (d-, de- v) breathe, blow, 
P. dnpac (314b; and y in some other 
forms for the regular €); ao. deca, ct. 
doa, breathed in sleep, slept. Cog. diw, 
aizOw. | 

aidéopar Vv, po.aldouar, respect ; atdé- 
copa. ao.; yerpat, yOécOny f. [Pr. 
imv. aldeto 323 e. | 

aivéw praise, usu. cp. w. él, &¢.; 
alvéow “in [-jow]), ao.; °yvexa, © Fvy- 
par 310d, qvéOqv °f. [Cog. atvnus, 

aivigw, -omar. } 


68 aivupat TABLES. aurrve- § 50. 
[atvupar take, see aipw. | [drcEjow, “adééwr.,] m., ao., [2 a. 
aipéw take, M. choose ; alpjow m., |dadxov 284 e,] 2 a. inf. ddkabety po. 


ao. a. 1.,m.¥.; TPIKe, ~Mcbe [apatpyxa, |r 
-wat, I. |, 83 f. yojooua r., noédny f. 
310 d.: (Fad- x, ad-f, €A- b, ado- w, 
aduox-k?) Qa, eihor mM. 279 c, @, late 
f. & ao. EAS m., efAKa m.: as pass., 
arloxopar be taken, captur ed; aXe- 
TOpat, Qa. éihov & Hwy (‘AdG, -olny, 
-Ovat, -ovs) ; ; étdwxa & ffroxa. 

aipe (h, dep- , Syne. ap-) raise, M. 
win ; "Ap M., Hpa Mm. (ape, | Gate, 
dpov, &c.), 2a. HpdunvCadpwuat, &c.) 
po.; TpKa, -uar, -Onvf. Po. & 1. delpw 
m. [déppw ®. 171a]; ’apo (ct. fr. 
dep®) m., Hepa m.; Hepuat [plp. dwpro 
312d], HépOnv. Cog. dpvupar, [aive- 
par n®, nepéOoua, depracu. | 

aig Pavopar (n4, aic@-), oes 
perceive ; aicOAropar 3ila, 2a. 7505- 

pny - qo Oy par, HoOnOnv & ~dvOny f. a 

[atoOw & oileo breathe ; see dns. | 

dioow il, grow c!, rush pPO.chses 
di—w, dw, ao. a. [m. r.3 atx Onv. | 

’atw audio, hear, po. orl.; ipf."aiov 
279 f, Hiov 1., [ém-aioa 1.] 

[dx- or dx- acuo, sharpen, pf. pt. 
dxaxudvos sharpened, 148 b, &. 12.] 

[dxaxlto (z, dx-, dxax- 17) afflict, 
M. sorrow; axaxhow 311 c¢, ao. r., 
usu. 2a. #Kaxov m. 284 f.; axaxnuae 
pret. (8 p. dxnxédara, plp. dxaxnaro 
or -elaro M. 179, § 329a, pt. axay7- 
pevos 2. 550, or adxnxéuevos, H. 364). 
Cog. dxouat, dixvuuat, be grieved; Pt. 
dx ew, dxetor, sorrowing. | 

akovw (h, dxo-) hear ; cKOUT OPAL, 
-owl., #eovoa: [dxouca D.,| 2 pf. akh- 
koa, 2 plp. nxnkiew 281d, Frovopacl., 
-cOnvf. Cog. axpodouat, [axoud gw. | 

[adAdAkw ward off ; see adéEw. | 

GAdopart wander, po. + [addw322c]; 
[°ddjoopar or -yodunv, Hes. Se. 409 ; 
GAdAnpa+ pret. 284a,| 7ARAnv. Po. 
cog. ayrevw, ddalvw, |jAalvw, 7rAG- 
cK, HacKa sw. | 

G\Saive (n®, ddd-) alo, nowrish, 
po.; l. #Adnva or -noa, [2 a. #Adavor. 
Cog. addjoxw alesco, grow. | 

drew (h, ddip-) anoint, M.; ddel- 
Yo m., a0.; “dAAAupa or -expa, ad7)- 
Ayupmar or -eyupar Th. 4. 68, preipOnvf., 
2a. nrLpyy yr. 

GAéEw r. (k >, dNex-, dAK-c3) &aréxw 2, 
ward off, M. defend one’s self, requite ; 








. 353 a. [Cog. l. dhdAkw, -Kjow. | 
Geto (f7, ddeF-, dde- f 1) wert, 
po. [MZ ddevouct & adéopar shun ; 
adkevew, 20. d., m. Y. [nrevdunv & 
-edunv 306a]. Pr. dmv. ddev, by 
apocope for deve, Ausch. Pr. 568 v. 7. 
Po. cog. ddvoKw (k?, ddux-), f. dd\vEw 
M.,20.; dducKa fo, [druoKkdve, adeelvw. | 
axes grind; ad(éow)@ xr. 305d, 
tera: AANAEKA pO. V., -eopwat OF -EMat, 
nrécOnvl. Cog. adiGwr., [adytpedo. | 
[&AGopat become healed, HB. & 1.; 
SahOjoopar, ao. 1.; °nrAPécOnv. Cog. 
aOaivw & -loxw or -joKw, cure; f. 
aOjow 1.) 
adlv8w roll ; see kvNivéw. 
adickopat be captured ; see aipéw. 
[adAttalvw & -rpalve (n®, 0, ddi7-) 
we E.+, M/.; ddirynoar., 2 a. HrtTov 
; pf. ot. GNUTHLEVOS guilty. 
rere or -trw (i1, adday-) 
change, M. barter; dA\dXa—Ew m., a0. ; 


CHdAaxa, -ayuat, -dxOnv f., usu. in 


Att. prose 2 a. nAAdynpr f. 

&dAopar (1, dA-) salio 141, leap ; 
adotpat, PAduny, comm. (exe. in Jnd.) 
2a. nrdunv [2 8. ddoo, 3s. Gdro, pt. 
ddpevos, 326 e, 167 ec]: 

adicka, -Kd{o, & -Kave, see ddetw. 

dAvw (i) be excited, po.+. [Cog. 
advcow, f. -Ew, ddvobaivw, aduKTréw 
Oe a pret., 284a), diduxrdge, 
Hdt. 9. 

addave (n4, adg-) find, po.;[2 a. 
Aor, opt. 3 p. dhpow for -ovev, 135, 
v. 383 0 1] 

cpoptréve (n*, duapr-) err, miss ; 
pe gishitaks 5” ivae +, a0. a. 1. +, 
2 8; Taproy ° pe ~HOl, -Onv : 
[2 a. (aupor- of 167 ¢, duBpor- or 
aBpoTt- 146 b) Aufporov. Cog. 1 a. 
sub. 1 p. ¢Bpord&ouev 326d, K. 65.] 

apBrloKe k7 & ©duBrdw cause mis- 
carriage ; ew Brdow 1., ao., 2a. © Hu- 
Brwr 1. ; °#pBroxa, Owen. ow, 

[apépSo & dpelpw (0, h, dmep-), de- 
prive; dpépow, ao. ad. +, m. 1.; 
nuépOnv +.] 

dutrrdaktoKe (k*, dumdax-), miss, 
err, po.; 2a. Humdakov, pt. amrdaxcy 
171, Eur. Ale. 241 ; 7umAdKnmac 311, 
Esch. Sup. 916. 


[aparvu- take breath ; see rvéw. | 


: ries 


a 





§ 50. 


apuve@ 


épive avert, defend (cf. munio), 
M. repel, requite ; &pvva n., Ayiva 
M., 2a. hpdvabov 353 a. 

audryvoéw dowbi ; see yeyveokw. 

audio By tio dispute ; ; see Baivw. 

avatvouar (h, dvav-) refuse; ao. 
Hyyvapny. 

av-alloxw & dv-adéw (ddo-, k7) 
expend ; Qvartdo, nm. 1., dvidtwoa ; 
dyprexa, -uat, -Onvf. In the aug. 


age 


a is often retained, esp. in the a 


Att.: dvdd\woa, dvidwxa, Th. 7. 83, 
2.64; & in comp. w. kara, thre aug. 
is rarely on the prep. ava: xarnvd- 
Awaa, Isoc. 201 b. See 279 f, 282 b. 
For the simple verb, see aipéw. 

avddve (n4, Fad-, a6- f) plexse, po. 
& 1.3 ipf. #vdavor, Beeb: & éjvda- 
vov, 279 b, e; G8how, 2a. éaSov Hat. 
sis 151, edadov 142, 7. 28 ; &8yka r., 
2 p. é daa B. Cog. Aw q. v. 

[aveb- grow, akin to dvOéw- 2 pf. 
°Hvoba, 312b: dv-ivobev rises, p. 270; 
ém-ev-jvobe grows upon, B. 219. E 

dvolyw & -olyvuye open ; see otyw. 

dvtw & also Att. dvite t (acc. to 
Sag a-), accomplish, M.; dvurw 
M.,20.; HvvuKa, -cuat, -cO ny f. [Nude 
pr. Waa ; ipf. Avro €. 243, "avuyes 
& "avuro Theoc. ] Cog. dvw m., po. 

dveye command, po. & 1.3; avete, 

o.; 2 pf. &vwya pret. & unaugm. 
{nude 1 p. dywyuzev 320, Hom. Ap. 
528], dmv. dvaye & dvwxh 320f. 
[Cog. dywyéw H. 394 v. L. ] See 326c. 

atravpde, amovpas, see emaupéw. 

[dmaploxw (k*, daadp-) deceive ; 
dmraphow 311, ao. r., 2a. Hradov+, 
m. See drrw. | 

dmexPdvonm & dwéxSonar, be hat- 
ed ; see &x0w. 

dare (t, ad-, 147) fasten, kindle, 
M. touch ; G&apom.,a0.; jupar, 7POny, 
Cf. 1. [inuac & dpPOnr, Hdt. 1. 86, 19, 
édpOnv 279 b, N. 543. Cog. addw or 
Pe & apdoow, handle, 1. +, m.; 

Capjrw, a0. Apynoa & Hpaca: dma 


ae q. v.] 
aes pray, curse; aparopar 
; ; Chpayan, ©-Anv 1. (Pr. inf, @: 


ie bs yz: 333 e, x. 322. Cog.? pf. pt. 
apn 1év05 onpressed, D. 435. | 

[dsapioxm (k? r?, dp-) fit; fipca 
m., 2a. Harv + m. 284e (nude 
pt. as adj. doucvos) ;] 2 pf. apapa 


VERBS. 








69 


Baive 


[apna] pret. intrans. po. +, [dpipe- 
pat, ApOnv.| Cog. apudfw q. v., dpriw 
& dprivw |dpréoua: 1.] prepare, and 

doéokw (k, dpe-) please, M.; dpéow 
m., 20.3; apnpeka l., npécOny. 

dpiorde dive, with regular forms, 
has in comedy 2 pf. nude 1 p. #picra- 
pev Ar. Fr, 528, inf. npiordvar, § 320: 
and in imitation, demvéw sup, has 
Lr Rpltledd dedecrvdvar Ib. 243. 

ppste & Att. Sppstre (jae 

iiss )adjust, M.; éppdoa, m.1., a0. ; 
ppoxa, -cuat, So Oyy £. See dpaplotor. 

dovupar wii; see aipw. 

dogw aro, plough; ardo0w, ao. ; 
[dpjpowat B. 1.,] 7psOnv: |dpswow 
324 ¢c, dpdupevar 333 e°. | 

apmrdfe j!* seize; éprdace and oft- 
ener GpTdcopat [aomdéw], ao.; tp- 
maka, -cuat (-yuacl.), -cOnvf. [- eal 
Hdt. 2.90 +], 2a. nomaynvf.1. [Nude 
2a. pt. m. (apra-) dpmdpevos 1. 

dptva, “Vve, -€opar, see dpaploxw 

divx & dpyTa t, draw water, M.; 
awoopar 1., Apvoa m.; Anta or 
-vaOny 307 e.. — kpxo lead, see 41. 

aoow rush ; see atrcw. 

avfw [aétw E. 1.+] & at€dve (n4, 
aFe&-, av&-, de&-, f1%) augeo, cncrease; 
see ene F.avéavd in Lxx. Cog. avééwl. 

Jw shout, po.; dio (5), Hvoa. 

ibd & ddbdooe handle; seedrra. 

aXéwv, dXevav, dxvupar & dyopar 
be grieved ; see axaxifw. 

&yPopatde vexed ; dx Séropar 311d; 
HxXOnpar 1., 7X 9€o Onv fi 

[do satiate ;"arwm., doa m.; pr. 
inf. *“apevat 333e7. Cog. sub. 1 Dp: 
eguev T. 402, ao. opt. 3 s. adHoevev 
a. 134, pf. pt. ’addnkéres K. 399, as fr. 
éa- & “adé- become sated ; dgdunet be 
nauseated, 1. D. +.] —See &nu. 


B. 


Baty (n°, Ba-) vado, go ; Bhoopar 
po. exc. in comp., [éB8yoduyv, usu. 
-counv 327 a, | 2a. 2Bny 45h, e, 322¢ 
(imv. BAO, °Ba, 297 ¢, d); BéBnKa 
(2 pf. ind. 3 p. BeBddor B. 134, ct. 
BeBaor Kur. Tro. 835, § 156, swh. éu- 
BeBGor Pl. Phedr. 252 e, inf. PeBarat 
Eur. Heracl. 610, pt. BeBadws, rion Se. 
397, ct. BeBos, PI. Tim. 63c, 2 plp. 
3 p. PéBacay P. 286, § 320 e), ORéBa.- 


70 


Baivo 


yal or -acuary., ©€BdOnv r., ©-doOnv 
or -dvO0nv 1. As trans., cause to go, f. 
SBiow, ao. EBnoa. Cog. © Baw r., 
Baokw po., [BiBdw, BiBnu, BiBdoOe, | 
BiBagw make go 305b. Cp. aude- 
o-Bnréw dispute ; f. -jow m., ao. Hu- 
pu pyrnoa & nudesByrnca ; -nrHnOnv 
(so ipf. -7rovv, 282 b). 

Badd (1, Bar-, Bra-c®") throw, M. ; 
Boro m. (BardrAjow 311 a, Ar. Vesp. 
222), [© BAncouat, 
ov m. [&BAnv, m. EBAnunv, opt. 2s. 
BAjo or Preto b1, N. 288]; Benes 
-wat [BeBdrAnuac 114 a, 311, I. 9], 3f. 
BeBAcopat, EBANOnY f. 

Barre (t, Bagp-) dip, M.; Bao m., 
20.3; BéBaupmat, EBapOny, usu. 2a. aBd- 
py, f. 1 

Bacrdfecarry, po. orl.; Bartdcw, 
&ec., later, Baordéw, &c., 349 a. 

[BeBpdbors (eat), see BiBpwoxw. | 

[Béopor, Pelouar, live ; see Bidw. | 

BiBdto, [BiBdw, -npr, -acdw,| see 
Batvw. 

BiBpadoke (r! k®, Bpo-, cf. voro) 
eat, mostly dial. or 1.; Bpdoopon 1, 
CéBowoa |., [2 a. EBoev 313 bl; Ré- 
Bpaxa (pt. BeBpws 320d, Soph. "Ant. 
1022), BéBpwuar, [3 f. -coptait, | éBpw- 
Onv, f. 1. Cog. Boddw 1., [2 pf. opt. 
BeBpdbos A. 35, or Ay fr. BeBpad-.] 

Bid live, M.; & PrdoKopar ee 
revive, usu. cp. w. dvd: Bracopat, 
-ow l., ao., ottener 2 ao. €Biwv 313 b 
(opt. Beyyp 316 b); BeBloxa, -war, -Onv 

[Cog.. sue (Belowat 134 a) or 
Blouat, also as fut. 305 f, O. 194, X. 


431, Hom. Ap. 528.] See fd. 
Bréarren ( (f; Ba8-) ) hurt ; Brchbe 
m., a0. a, nm. 1.; PEBAaa, -auuas, 


3 f. dopa, sBudOm, & 2a. éBda- 
Bnv f. [Cog. easter segad bigs, 
BrAacrave & r. BAacréw (n+, Vv, 
BdaoT-) sprout, bud; BAacrhoe, ao., 
comm. 2a. €8\acrov ; BeBAdoTHKa 
& eBAdornka 280 ¢. 
BAtrre (i7, Bdcr- for ioe 146 b) 
take honey from the hive; &B\uoa. 
Braoxw (k®, 146 b, HOd- ) go, po.; 
poAodpar, 2a. Euotov +; me pBroxa. 
Bodw boo, shout, M.; Bojnoropar, 
-owl.,ao.a.,m.1.; BeBonwal., -wacl., 
EBonOnv 1.: [E. & 1. ©Badcomat, EBwoa 
m., BéBwuat, EBdcOnv, 131 f.] 
Book feed, M. (cf. pasco, vescor); 


TABLES. 


YT. 335,] 2 a. &Ba-|ao 


ynpaw § 50. 


Bookjow 31la, m.1.,a0.1.; €Booxy- 
Onv, f. 1 

BotrAopar [85Aouac] volo, WILL, 
wish (2s. Bove 297 f); BovARropa ; 
BeBovrnpar, EBovrnOny & 7BovdyOnv 
279 a, f. 1.: [2 pf. apo-BéBovra prefer, 
A. 113.] Cog. Bovretw plan, 44. 
[Bpay- resound ; 2a. éBpaxe 337 a, 
E. 863. | 

Beéxw (b, Bpay-) wet; Bpé§o 1., 
; PéBpeyua, EBpéxOnv, less Att. 
EBpaxnv, f. 1. 

[Bpox- swallow; E3poéa ; © BéBpoya, 
C€BpsxOqv 1., © eBay nv. | 

Bot ydopat (u, Bevx-) roar, 355 u; 
CBevynoopar very l., ao.; 2 pf. Ré- 
Bpvxa pret., éBpux7, Onv. 

Buvéw n!, r. Biw, stop up, M. ; °Bo- 
ow, a0.a., m.1.; BéBvopmat, © EBds Env. 
Cog. Bive & Bite r 


Tr. 


yapéw (v, yau-) marry (ofthe man), 
M. marry (of the woman); yap m. 
152, 1. yaujow m., eynua m., later 
éeydunoa: yeyapynka, -uar, éyaunOnv 
fi l.: [f. m. yauéooerar will provide 
a wife, I. 394 v. .] 

yavupat, l. ydvvupat, rejoice ; 
viccopat 171, 
Anact. 35.] 
[yard shine. ] 

yéyova, yeydare, yeydnew, yelvo- 


‘i [ya- 
=. 504; -yeyavopar 
Cog. yavbe brighten, 








POLL, yevvder, see verse 

yeywovéw [-dvw] & yeyovlokw (vy, 
k2, yeywr- ry) shout; yeyounjo a0. ; 
yéyova pret. (sub. yeyavw, ime. vé- 
ywve 318). 

yeddo laugh; yedaropar, -cw 1., 
ao. a.; °-yeyeXaopat l., evehdaOny, f.l. 
[Cog. ‘yerordeo. | 

[yev- = (&, according to some, Aol. 
for) é\- (see aipéw), in 2a, m. 3s. 
yévto took, =. 476. See also yiyvo- 
as. | 

yevo cause to taste, M. gusto, taste ; 
yevow m., 20.3 yéeyeuuat, eyedoOny 
307 e. [Nude pr. 1 p. yetue0a Theoe. 
14. 51.] 

Lyntte (v, y7@w m. 1.) gaudeo, re- 
Jjoice + ; ynOiow, ao. ;| verte pret. 

Yopaw & oftener ynpaoke k?, grow 
old, M.; ; ynpdow & -doopat, QO. Ay 
2 a. ey hpay po. or L., 313 b (inf. yn 


§ 50. ynpaw 
pavat or -dvar Aisch. Ch. 908); yey#- 
paxa, °eynpabny 1. 

ylyvopar (ri c?, ya-, yev- n! b}), 
or I. & later ylvoua, become; yevh- 
wopar, 2a. éyevduny [nude 3 s. &yevro 
326 e, yévTo Hes. Th. 199]; 2 pf. ye- 
yova |yeyddre, for yéyare, 320, 1345, 
Hom. Batr. 143, yeyddou A. 41, plp. 
3d. éx-yeyarnv x. 138, inf. yeydmev 
333 ¢c, E. 248, pt. yeyaws, I. 456], 
pt. po. yeyws 320d, Soph. Aj. 472, 
yeyévnpar, éyevnOny 1. D. or |., f. r. 
Pf. inf. yeyaxew D. 326b.] Cog. 
i yeydouat326c, yelvouar X. 477 v.1., | 
ao. éyewdunv begat, pa +; yervaw 
beget. Cf. gigno, gnascor. 

yryvacke (k° r, yvo-), or 1. & later 
ywoerkw, gnosco, KNOW, CM. 1.; yva- 
mopar, ao. 1. 1. [av-éyvwoa persuad- 
ed, Hdt.], 2 a. €yvwv, 45h, e (m. opt. 
3s. guy-yvoiro Aisch. Sup. 216); 
éyvaxa, -ouat, -cOnv f. Cog. yrwpil- 
fw, -iow, -10, Eyvwpixa, make known; 
aupryvotw, -jow, doubt, aug. nudry- 
& jugey- 282 b. 

yAvdhw sculpo, carve; yuo 1., 
ao. a@., m. 1.3 yéyAuupmae & @yAumae 
Wc, eyAUPOy 1. &v., 2a. eyAVPnv 1. 
Cf. glubo. Cog. yhadw. 

yous (u, yo-) bewail, M., po. + 
(in Att. only pr. & ipf. m., & pr. p.); 
yonropar, -cw l., ao. 1., 2 a. &yoor Z. 
500; éyo7Onvl. 

yeaa scribo, GRAVE, write, MW.; 
yparpe i., 20.; yéypada (yeypddyka 
1. + 4), yéypaupar (€ypauparl., 280 e), 
3f. yeypdwoua:, éypapOny |., 2a. 
éypadny f. 


A. 


Sa-, teach, learn ; see diddoKw. 

Salvipe (n?, dac7-) feast, entertain, 

0.+, M. [opt. dawiro, -varo, 316 c]; 

atow, m. 1., a0.; édaicOnv. 

Salopor (h, da-) divido, divide, 
ch. po. (pr. & f.), P.; Sdoopar ao.; 
SéSacpar, A. 125 [dédaua, a. 23], 
eddcbnv 1. Cog. daréouac po. I. [ao. 
inf. daréacbar 306, Hes. Op. 765], 
datvign 4. V., datvw, -tEw, rend, po. 

Salo li, daF-, da-) kindle, po. +, 
M.; (2a. €daduny, T. 316 ; 2 pf. Sé5ya 
blaze, pret., T. 18,] dédavuar, Sim. 
Am. 30. 


VERBS. 








dw 71 


Saxve (n1, dax-, Syx- g) bite, 47; 
SHEopar, -Ew]., ao. r., 2a. €daxor; 
Se5n xa 1., Séd5yyuar, €dnxOnvf., 2a. 
éddxnv l. Cog. daxvdgw po. 

Saudto (z, dau-) domo, dame, sub- 
duc, po. +, M.; 8Sapaow [m., dana 
305 b, A. 61], a0.; SeBapana ]., -cuae 
1. [d€dunuar ec’, HE. 878, 3 f. dedujoo- 
feat, Hom. Ap. 543, | édaudoOnpy 0. 231, 
Mem. 4.1.3, €dunOnvpo., A.99, oftener 
2a. €daunv po., T. 94. Po. cog. da- 
paw 1., daparif~w, dayvaw, Sduvnue 
(AZ. dauvauac). 

°Sapbdve (n+, dacd-) sleep, usu. ep. 
Ww. KaTad* 2a. © edapbov, po. Edpador c°, 
YT. 143 ; CScBaipOyka 311, 2 a. “éddp- 
Onv, ©édpabnv r. or |. 

Satéopat divide, po.; see dalouar. 

[S8éato appeared ; see doa-. | 

[Sel8m+ & lw (di-, decd- o h) fear, 
dtouar + frighten ; Selropar, +2, -ow 
]., ] €5ecca - pret. 8€80uKa & 2 pf. S€Bta 
46 b [deidouxa, deldia, 134 a, dedoixw 
D., 826 b]. Cog. dequaivw fear, de- 
diccouat [decdiocouar], vr. dedicxouat, 
Srighten, dinue chase (M. dlewac) po., 
& dwwKw q. Vv. 

Selkvupe & Sexvdw (n7, deck-) in- 
pico, extend the hand to point out, 
show (M. greet with extended hand]; 
SelEw, &c., 45 [in Hdt., fr. dex-,° d€&w, 
deta m., C5€deyuar, °€d€xOnv: Ep. 
deideyuat 134 a, pret., 7. 72]. Cog. 
déxouat . V., dektdouae greet, [dedt- 
cxouat & dewdioxowar greet, deckavdw 
show. | 

Sermrvéw sup : see dpiraw. 

[S€pe bvild, Hom. Merc.87 ;] édequa 
m.; [dédunuace’.| Cog. douéw |. 

Sépkopas b1 sce, po. o7' ].; SépEopar 
]., ao. 1., 2a. €dpaxov c®, m. v.: 5€- 
Sopka pret., édépxOnv [2 a. edpdxnv 
Pind. N. 7. 4]. 

Sépw (b1, dap-), less Att. delpw or 
daipw h, flay, °M. v.; Sepa, eecpa - 
dédapuat, EdapOnv r., 2a. €ddpyy, f. i. 

Sevopar want ; see déw. 

Séxopar receive ; SeEopar ao.; S€- 
Seypar, 3 f. dedéfoua, &déyOny, f. 1. 
[Pr. 3 p. déxarac for déx[ojvra 158, 
M. 147, 2 a. edéyunv, 3260. Cog. 
déxvupat, déxowac 167, Hdt. 9. 91;] 
see deixvime. 

Sé, bind, M., 3809b; 84ow m., 
ao.; S€Sexa (r. -nka 310d), dédeuas, 





“4 2 ) ew 


3 f. dedjoowar 319 ¢, Cyr. 4. 3. 18, 
eséOnv f. Cog. vr. d6nucr}, v. 8. 24. 

Séw (f1, deF-) need, want, M. need, 
heg ; Bere m. 3lic, ao. a. ([358. 
édnoev S. 100]; SebEqKa, -uar, €de7)- 
Onv, t. 1. [Ep. devouar £2, -7rouar, 
éGevnoa, t. 540.) Impers. Se? there is 
necd, 5én, ct. dy 309b, Sdéor, decv, 
déov: dence, Edénce. 

SyAda, -dra,&c., manifest; see 42. 

Sjw shall find ; see ddacxw. 

Startaw regulate, M.; Svarryce, 
d:nrnsu & édinrynoa, SedrytyHKa, Kc., 
pita os 

Staxovew minister ; -hoew, €duacKd- 
vnca, SedraxdvyKka (less Att. dennd- 
vnoa, dedinkdvnxa), &c., 282 ¢.. 

Si8doKkw (k®, da-, dudax-r}o) doveo, 
teach, M.; S88da—Ew m., ao. [eo.ddexnoo. 
311, Hom. Cer. 144]; 8f8aya, -yuar, 
€d.0axOnv, f.1. [Fr. da- disco, learn, 
teach, danoopar 311, 2a. &daov & €é- 
daov 284 e ; deddnxa, 0. 134, 2 pf. de- 
daa, p. 519, dedanua: Hom. Mere. 483, 
Qa. éddnv +. Cog. dedaouar 326 ¢, 
7.316; dnwas fut., shall find, N.260. | 

SlOype bind ; see déw bind. 

C§iSpdaoKkw (rik, dga-) run; © Spa- 
wopat, ao. a. 1., 2 a. C€dpay 45h; 
SeSpana. Cog. dpdreredu, Spackd-|1 
fw: €dpauor, see Tpéxw. See dpaw. 

S{Swpr (r}, do-) do, give, Séea, 
Sé8exa, &c.; see 45. 

[Sitypar seek, HE. & 1., 314 Se &uL%- 
woparao. Cog. dffw M., po. | 

dirps chase, M. flee, po.; see deldw. 

Stoikéw Mange, ~hoe, StoKyKa, 
-wat & vr. bede 3 gene, 282 b. 

Subae thirst, -how, &c. (dup(der) A 
120 g). 

8lw fear, flec ; see deidw. 

Stake pursue, M.; SWE and oft- 
ener Sudtopar, ao. a., 2 a. €dudxadov 
3530; Sdlwya, -yuar 1, ediwx An», 
f. 1. See deldw. 

|Sea-, Sea- 114 b, appear ; ipf. nude 
déaro £. 242; ao. m. dodooaro &. 23, 
sub. dodocerar 326 d, Y. 339. Cog. 
dod fw or dodfw, doubt, imagine, Ap. 
Rh. | 

Soxéw (v, dox-) seem, think ; 8dEw 
ao.; dédoxal., -yuar, €65xOnv1.: ch.po. 
doxjow a0., Sed0KyKa, -uwar, EdoK7jOnv ° 
[pf. m. pt. dedoxnuévos pret., fixed in 
thought, intent, watching, O. 730.) 


TABLES, 


ebro § 50. 


amine. 
Sovméw (e1, ydoure-v) sound heavi- 
ly, ch. po.; dovir_ew, ao. [éydovrnea, 


A. 45], 2 a. ©&doumror 1; 
Twa, €dovr7Ony 1. 

Spacoopar i}, grasp, seize, A. 1.; 

pra a10.; Sé8payyat (dé5apzac 
, Eur. Tro. 745 v, Uys 

Spd do; Spdow ao.; Séépaxa, 
-Guat, vr. -acpat 307 e, €dpacdnv. Cog. 
[ Spastyen, | a7ro- Sidpdoxes make off, run 
ay. 

Spérw (b1, dpam-), po. 1. dpérrw t, 
pluck, M.; Spévowar yio., a0. a. m., 
[2 a. é3paron Pind. P. 4. 231.] 

Sivapat be able (2s. diva 297 h); 
SuvqTopar [ao. +]; Seddvnpar, edv- 
vnonv, il. 1. 35, f. 1., ndvv7Onv 279 a, 
Cyr. 3. 1. 30, less Att. éduvacbmy, 
ViII6. ae 

Sd [ti Hom.] cause to enter, enter 
(cf. in-duo), 8vv@ n41, & less Att. 8v- 
opat, cuter (the causative sense be- 
longs to the fut. & 1 ao. aet., but not 
to the 2 ao., & very rarely to the pf. 
act., V. 8. 23); Sire, Svcopa, a0., 
fade bueny 327 a,] 2a. €d0v 45h; 8€- 
dua, © déduuae 310 d, €d¥Onr f., (2a. 
u esqv Hipp. Cog. Siar, dive.] 


2 pf. 8é8ov- 


KE. 


éa- become sated, ESwev ; see dw. 

édaw permit ; édow m., elaoa 279¢; 
claxa, “att, -Onv. 

éyyudw pledge, M.; 3 eyyuyre, WY- 





\yunoa or eveyinoa* hyyvnka or ey- 
yeyunka, &c.; 282 ¢. 

eyelpw (h, éyep-) rouse, raise, M. 
rise ; éyepo, m. 1., Hyecpa, m. 1., 2 a. 
Hyoouny C3; éyhyepka 1., 2 pf. pret. 
eypiyyopa, wim awake, 281 d [éypiyopGe 
320f; in imitation, dad. 3 p. éypy- 
ybp0act K. 419, inf. mm. é€ypiryopOa 
for éynyép0at, K. 67], eyiyepuat, Wyép- 
Onv, f. 1. Cog. @ypw po., éypyyopéw 
& ypnyopéw 1., [¢-ypmrvopde, eypyoow. | 

éykopidiea praise ; -dow m., evexw- 
placa, éykekoplaka, 282 c. 

€w cat; see eo Ole. 

ELopar seat one’s self, sit ; see » Te. 

eédw p & Cédo, wish ; how 311b, 
HOEnoa & é0é\noa* Oey ka & 1. 
TreBEANKG. Oddw is rare & Mloubtfal 





Cog. [doxetdw watch,| Soxidgfw ex- 


. 
a a a 





§ 50. eOeXw 
in Hom., Hes., & Pind.; & is in gen- 
eral less common than é#éAw, exc. in 
dramatic dialogue. 

€0ffo (z?, Fe0-, €0-) awcustom, M.; 
Cicw, -1@ 305a, elfica 279; elOixa, 
-ouat, -oOny, f. l. Intrans. 2 of, pret. 
eloGa [€wla E. 1.] 312d, am wont, 
[pr. pt. €wv I. 540.] 

elSopar seein, eidov saw ; see dpdw. 

cixatw (z", Fux-, Fecx- h, eli) liken ; 
eixagw, “71., elcasa & nKaca 278d; 
eixaxa 1., -cuar & Yxaopar, -Ony f. 
Jntrans., 2 pf. _ pret. €orka 312b, some- 
times ea or nxa | oixa 1.], seem (nude 
1p. po. éoryuey 148, Soph. Aj. 1239, 
[3 d. ékrov 5. 27, plp. étxtyv A. 104, |] 
irreg. 3 p. elfaoz po. +, Ar. Av. 96, 
sev isascunder opdw), plp. € yx ‘gesiaes 
f. r. el Ar. Nub. 1001, ipf. eike 
520? [Cog. icxw, éloxw q. v.| 

elxw (Feix-) yield ; e€w |°m.], ao., 
2a. elxafov 353.4. 


a. DIALECTIC FoRMS OF 
Pres. Ind. 3 ' 


S.1 ue #. 
2 ets E.1.,€701 P. 


Ewot FE. I. 
»” 
€wvrt D. 


Pres. Opt. 


teis, elg0a BE. |S. 2 etnoba p., exs | 
3 evriD. 8 Zor Bw. 1.‘ [E. 
Pi a0 E. Ly tleln, etn? . 
elués D., &név P. 
3 €dovk ,evti,2- g poe: ads 
tiowp. [ovreD.| 7; 2 dad a 
P.3 edvrw D. 
Pres. Sub. Pres. Inf. 
S. 1 wh. 1., ctw E. | Euev, Evevar F. 
.. tetw p. éuwev E. Dz 
2 tincda FE. “umevat FB. A 
3 NoL,énot, En E.| Huey, eiuev D. 
tinge E. elwevat D.? 
P.1 Gyes dD. tiuev, tuevac F. 
+louev BE. tiupevar EB. 
tiwpes D. tiguevar E. 


VERBS. 


+ et > ‘ 
€lpe & €tpal io 


[etA- (h, Fad-, ad-, EA- b?) volvo, 
roll up, press together, P. etNopat, E. 
203; @ioa 152d, A. 413; geduae 2. 
662, 2a. ea\n?, N. 408. | Cog. el Nw 
or ef Aw, UAW, eihéw or eiA€w [éoréw, 
Pind, Po 414}, -how, eihiw po. +, 
-vow [ao. p. edvaOnv, VY. 393; deriv. 
cha Fao EN OETO, éNicow [eiMoow 
po. & 1.4 ], -i&w (eiduéa 279¢), [ <Ae- 
Nitw, -igw, A. tee — Bw 344. 

eihov took ; see aipéw. 

eiul (€c-) be, & ett (i-, Lat. 1-re) 





go. The Pres. of eine has comm. li 
the zd. (in Att. prose regularly), & 
sometimes in the other modes, the 
sense of the Fut.: eju:, [I am going| 
I shall go. For the eommon “forms 
of these verbs, see 451,m,o,r. Their 
.|chief dialectic forms appear below, 
those preceded by + belonging to eiue 





go, and the others to eiul be : 


elui to be, AND ei: to go. 


Polifues DB. 
+ Howey E. 
2 éare I. [oavt. 
3 €say P. 1., €a- 


| téuev D., var P. 
| 

| Pres. Part. 

| ’ bd ca 37 

| éd ov, eovca, edv, G. 
covTos I. I. 
| 
| 
| 
| 
| 
| 


ci 
edca, €isa, G. ebp- Adssgh ock 
ToS, €’Tos D. Sane It. 
Ca elaTo? E. 
| tHiray EB. I. 
Imperfect. ticav, Hiov E. 
S.1 €a8.1., fa E. |D.3 tirq &. 


éov, envi Ez. | Fut. Ind. 

ye It. [e. ésoouae P. 

tia ear iee €govuat D. 
2 My late, Paste eoooouae D. 

Za Beas telcouae KE. 
3 HEev, Env, Inv EB. : 

Hs D., €oxe It. Aor. Ind. 

+ Hie I. teloduny E. 

THe, te, ele 2 E. téecduny EK. 


FE. 





b. The compar ison of a few cognate tongues will show more clearly that 
the root of eiui to be, was éo-, and will also illustrate the forms of inflec- 


tion. The 
endings (271 d*). 


position and change of vowel (cf. 116), sw, sumus, suit. 


the elements are first given (32 i), an 


of the Sanskrit as- to the es- of the other languages, see 114 a. 
plural, the @ is dropped or transposed. 


is to be pronounced as y. 


The Lithuanian, 


Latin is ‘placed first, as showing least change in the flexible 
The harsh forms es7, esivus, and esnt became, by trans- 


In the Greek, 
For the relation 
In the 
See 271d. In the Slavie, the 7 
which shows the root entire 


d then the veralies 


throughout, is placed last, as a language which yet lives to link the pres- 


ent to the remote past. 
GR. TAB 4 


74 elt TABLES. ep § 50. 


Latin Gothic. Greek. Sanskrit. Old Slavic. Lithuan. 
5S. 1 swm am. éo-p. eiut, A. Eupst asm jesimi esr 
ake is éo-s cis, P.eoat asi jesi esi 
3 est ist éo-T éorl asti jesti esti 
P.1 sumus éo-pev  eguev, D.elués sinas jesmu esme 
2 estis éo-(7s)Te eoTé stha Jjeste este 
3. sunt sind éo-vt eiot, D.€vTE santi sunti esti 


c. In eipt fo be, the o of the root was retained in some forms (before 7, 
0, and p; é€ becoming t i by precession in to@t, 114d). (d) It was dropped 
before o of the Fut. “(Eropan, ef. Lat. ero, 139), and between two vowels, 
which were then contracted: Pr. 3 p. (toda) ¢ caou B., etot, sub. (€ow) Ew 
EK. 1., @, opt. (eouny, cf. L. sim) elny : Ipiat se (augmented nov, hoa, cf. 
273" c, e, and L. eram, 139) ja E., % (Old Att., Ar. Av. 1363), 3s. (joT, 
hoe, 273" c, e) Fev E. 163 b, fv. (e) It was also dropped before vT, € com- 
monly passing | into the kindred é (cf. 114b,c): Pr. 3p. eri D., pt. (err- 
L. ent-, évr-) av, &vTos D., UNV. 3 p. (EvTwv) dyTov. (f) It was contracted, 
as € (142), with @ or q preceding : Pr. ind. (€ouc) etl, (eos) efs EB. I., or 
(both sigmas sparen’ taken up) et, (ecpér) euév E. 1., inf. (écvac) elvan 
(in Lat. the r was assimilated, (es- -re) esse), tmv. (€otw, eerw, cf. 121 e) 
rw 1.; Ipf. 1s. (qov) Fy, 2s. (hes) js l., pl. Ruev, Fre (oftener than fore, 
while in the dual jorov and Horny prevail), foav. See 139s. 


The DIALECTIC or LESS ATTIC FORMS of eipt ¢o be, are (g) forms uncon- 
tracted or like those of verbs in -w (315): éaow B. 125, éovre Archim., &w 
t. 18, wor Hdt. 2. 39, dows I. 284, év-éor Hdt. 7. 6, wv B. 27, fovoa I. 159, 
ésica Pind. P. 4. 471, efoa, efvra, Theoc. 2. 3, 76, (evoa, 156) édoa Tim. 
Loc. 96 a, fia B. 313, fev M. 9; (h) variously protracted : eoot (in imita- 
tion of the other persons) A. 176, wer-elw YL. 47, Egor 328 b, B. 366, ety- 
c0a 297 b, Theog. 715, éys 135, enoba X. 435, env M. 10, Anv A. 808, 
ésxov 332, H. 153, tone Hdt. 1. 196, @coouar 171, A. 267 (€oerat 451, 
A. 211), écoduar 805d, Th. 5. 77; (i) shortened or wnaugmented : euév r., 
Call. Fr. 294, éa 329d, tov A. 762, tcav A. 267; (j) middle forms ; éco 
or sco A. 302, Sap. 1. 28, Funv r. or |., Cyr. 6.1. 9 v. 1. (#webOa Mat. 23. 
30), ake 329 a, v. 106 v. 1.3; (k) infinitives (333): éuev A. 299, Eupevae 
Sap. 2. 2, je or eiuev (v. 1. Hues or ewes ?) Th. 5.77, Theoc. 14. 6, etuevac 
or Haha Art Ach. 775% 3) various forms ; Ee 171 a, Sap. 2. 15, eis (or 
eis Bek.) Il. 515, Hat. 7. 9, eluév E. 873, elués, ues, Fues, 328 a, Theoc. 
15. 73, 9, 14. 29, 3s. evré 169, Theoc. 1. 17, 3 p. evrt 328 a, Th. 5. 77%, 
ésvTw 398 d?, 2s. fs 1., 297 b, 3s. (for) 7s Theoc. 2. 90, Ecerat 457. * 


m. In etps ¢o go, the root ’t-, in the sing. of the Pres. and commonly in 
the Impf. throughout, was lengthened to ¢e- (314), which augmented be- 
came y- (278 d): elus, eis, efor: (qv, ef. 273% ¢, e) na (common | in the Old 
and Mid. Att., Pl. Apol. 22a, and followed in the Ep. by ne M. 371), 
nuev, Wre, Hoav. The Impf., having thus a form resembling that of the 
old Plup. (291 ¢), fell into the analogy of this tense in its subsequent 
development, and has been often so named : jew, Hees, &e. The shorter 
forms of the plur. and dual were, however, more common, except perhaps 
noav, which some deny to the Att. swhile others regard it as the true Att. form. 


The DIALECTIC FORMS of ett Zo go, are (n) regular nude forms: eis Hes. 
Op. 206 (Att. eZ, as if in imitation of eiui to be; eloOa 297, K. 450), (tact, 
156) tor Theog. 716 (v. U. efor), €&-ivar Ath. 580 ¢, icay I. 8, irny A. 347: 
(0) forms with q resolved : (ja) ‘fi Hdt. 1. 42, ijie A. 47, #icav Hat. 1. 
43, qHiov 315, w. 370; (p) with’? lengthened to el, as in the Pr. ind.: etw 
Sophr. 2 [23], kar-elev? Hes, Se. 254, elcouar &. 8, elzato A, 138, éeicaro 
O. 415 3 (q) as from ie-: lel <u 209, and also eink léunv, 45 p, if they 


———T 





§ 50. € (put 


should be thus written ; (1) infinitives (333): 


éo-vémevar x. 480 ; (t) various forms : 


VERBS. 


eTw as) 


tuev A. 170, tumevarc T. 365, 
incba 257 b, K. 67, tyor, twues 328 b, a, 


touev 326d, tev, yowev, 315, B. 872, A. 22 


ettrov said, 2 aor.; see Pnul. 

elpyw (h, Fepy-, épy-) shut out; 
eipEw m., efaa; 2 a. po. elpyabov m. 
353.0; elpyua, -xOnv: |b. 1. épyo & 
tpyvumen?; &foua, évéu, 2 a. épya- 
Oov m.; pyar (€pxara:, -ro, 329a, 
k. 283, P. 354): also éépyw, &c., B 
617.| Cog. Lat. arceo, urgeo ; and 

cipyo & elpyvop (h, nt, Fepy-, €pY-) 
shut in; elp—w, cipta ; clpryua, -xOnv : 
ch. Ion. , “épya, Ok ntw. Epta, EpxOnv. 
The single verb Fépyw (or éFépyw p) 
in Hom., seems to have become eipyw 
& eipyw in the Att., with a distinc- 
tion of sense, which, however, was 
not always observed. 

[etpopar, clowrdw, ask; see épwrdw. | 

feipya dra ; see épvw. | 

[elpw, cipéw, say; see dyut. | 

eipm (f* h, cep-) sero, join, knit 
fipf. or ao. #eepe K. 499] ; Ceipa[° epoca 
152d, Hipp.]; Cetpxa, -war [B. Ecpuan, 
o. 296, 1. ©€auar ?] 

eioa set, placed, 1 a.; see tfw. 

[étorxw & loxw(k >, see efxa fw) liken; 
pret. #iywart, ©Eur. Alc. 1063. ] 

elw9a win wont, pret.; see €0ifw. 

exkrAnoratwholdanassembly, -aow, 
&c.; aug. #Kxd-, éfexd-, &c., 282 ¢. 

éXKatve (n’, €\a-) & r. €Adw drive, 
M.; @\dow, [eXdw 305 b, eXbw 322 ¢] 
€\@, E\agouacl., Hraca m.; éAfAaKa, 
-~wat, -ouat l., [plp. 3 p. éAndAddaro 
or -€daTo 329 a, 7. 86,] 7AAOnY, -cOnv 
°f.1. (Cog. éd\acrpéw FE. I. +.] 

[EASopar (FeA6-) & ééASouat, desire. ] 

ehéyxw examine, confute; déy—o 
ao.; €Anveyuar 41, °#reyuarr., WrAEy- 
xOnv f. 

éd\xw & 1. EXkV@ (Ww, FeAx-, cf. vel- 
lico) pull, draw, M.; @§w, less Att. 
&Akvorw, 7. 1., efAxvoa m., elEa m. L.; 
eiAkuxa, -cual, -cOny f., eihxOny f. 1. 
[Cog. édxéw, -jow: éEdXxvoTa gw. | 

Anvite speak Greek, -iow, Ke.; 
EMAnvicOny or HArnvicOnv 279 f. 

€kmrl{@ (z?, FéAm-) hope, M.; @- 
m(icw)iol., #Amias HAmiKaL., -cuae 
1., -cOmv: [&dtrw give hope, M. & 2 pf. 
pret. odma €. 379, hope, 2 plp. éwr- 
mew 279d, p. 96.] 

é\v0- come ; see Erxomae. 








épéw VoINO, VOMIT; €u(éow)o m., 
Hucoa [junoa?|; eanpeca, -cuar l., 
éucOny f. | 

éptrodaw traffic ; 
hum- or éverr-, 282 ¢. 

éevatpw (h, évap-) kill, po., MW.; 
[évnpa l., m. BE. 59,] 2a. qvapor, Kur. 
And. 1182. Cog., 

evaplia kill, de spoil, po., 3494; 
[évapiéw, 7. 1. | trdpita, Nite Las [-wa, 
Anac. 100]; © jvapermar, © ses 

évetra & evvérra, & 1. évlormra (éver-, 
év:t- b?, éuom- 0), tell, speak (ef. in- 
quam), po.,a.1; [évito & eVLoT How 
311, €.98, dma 1.,] 2a. Exozov [vmv. 
éviomes V, 313 b, y. 101.] Cog. [évi- 
TT +, & évioow i3, chide, 2.a.évéviroy, 
‘wiuramov, 284e;] elzov, see dnui. 

[Céy-yvo00a grow or lic on; see aved-. | 

Cevv ope (n7, Fe-, é€-), vestio, clothe, 
[MZ.; f. ow (Zoo 1 é4 5m 62 aattes 
ao. (troa é. 253, ééooato K. 23) ; pf. 
eluate +7. 72, & éopat, w. 250 :] comm. 
dpdi-evvupe M.; apdpriéow e. 167, 
Att. Cdudia 305), Ar, Eq. 891, dude- 
ésouat Cyr. 4.3.20, judieca m. 282 b, 
Cyr. 1.3.17; judiecua, -cOnyv |. Cog. 
| etvius F. 1.3] 1. dudid fw, -dow’ éode- 
in pt. #oPnuac. 

évoXAéw annoy, -yow, &c.; aug. 
nvwx-, v. l. ivox- or vwx-, 282 b. 

[€od€w press, trowble ; see eid-. } 

éoptatw keep a feast, -iow, &c.; 
aug. éwo- 279d: [doprdgw 1.] 

étr-a.v-op Ode set upright, -arw, &c.; 
aug. crnvwp- 282 b. 

[ém-avpéw r. & ér-avploke r. (v, k%, 
avp-) enjoy, M.; éravpioopat Z. 353, 
éernupduny 1. +, oftener 2 a. éarndpor, 
p. 81,] érnupsunv Eur. Hel. 469. Cog. 
atavpaw take wway, po., ao. dmnupda- 
unv ? [pt. arovpas 114, A. 356, daov- * 
pduevos, Hes. Sc. 173, f. drrovpjoovew 
X. 489 v. 1] 

ért-pédopar & érr-pedéopar care 
for ; see MéAW. 

érr-lorapar understand ; see lornut. 

érw (f%, cer-, on- c*) be after or 
busy with (act. scarce used exc. in 
comp. ), J. &ropar nen Sa follow ; 
ipf. efrov m. 279c; Safe, popar, 
a0. n.?%, 2a. © Zo7rov lowe, cmon, &C.), 


-how, &e.; aug. 


76 ero 
éomiuny (or auat, &c.) & (by redupl. & 
change of initial 7, ceor- éor-, 284e, 
345) ch. po. éordunr (€orwpat, &c.), 
[imv. cre'o 323. ¢; ao. p. Tept-EpOny, 
Hdt. 6. 15.] Cog. r. or 1]. éorw m. 
épdw love, desire, M. po. évdcuar & 
oftenerépapat ; |jpacdury ;| Hpacpar 


l., -cOnvf. Po. cog. épc crevw, Adsch. 
Pr. 893, [éparigw, A. 551.] 


epyatopat work ; pyaropat, elpya- 
cdunv 279 ¢ ; elpyaopar, -cOyvf. Sze 
épdw. 

eoya, Abele epya, see eipyw, elpyw. 

tptw & épSw (f, Fepy- & Fepd-, cf. 
168, épy-) WORK, do, po. & I. (&pdw 
Hdt.), AZ.; p&w, oka. [épéa 2]; [2 pf. 
gopya 312b, plp. expyeww 279d, 6. 693, 
espe 284b, 291 ¢, Hdt. 1.127.] Cog. 
Cpydgouat, péfw, q. V. 

épe(Sw prop, ch. po., M.; epelorw ibe 
Cir., a0.; CHperka & 1. © épypecka, ép7- 
peonar & Tpero pu [3 p. épnpédarar, 
-aTo, 329 a, 3 f. epepetcouar? Hipp., | 
pela Onv. 

épelxw (h, épix-) rend, break, °M.; 
qpecta, m. 1., 2a. Hpexcy 0.3; éprpe- 
yuat, npetxOnv 1. Cog. priyvipe q. V., 
[épéxOw, €. 83.] 

épetrrw (h, éper-) throw down, r. in 
Att. prose ; épetipw, ao. a. Cm., 2a. 
Hpurov fell, E. 47, m. 1.3 [2 pf. Caot-| h 
prima jave jallen, =. 55, | Eprptmpc 
& 1. teas npeipony, [2 a. Hplarnv 
Pind. O. 2. 76.] Cog. plarw throw. 

epéoowi?, row, po. orl. ; [ao. #peca. | 

épevOw & eovdatva (h, n°, épv6-, ef. 
rubeo & Germ. rithen) make red, 
REDDEN, po. or l., AZ.; [épevow? 2. 
329 v. 1., ao. Ib., epvOnval., ao. p. 
opt. ° epevdelnv, Hipp. Cog. énudpalses, 
EpvOpidw, -dow. 

épl{w (j, ép.d- )rixor, contend,[M. + }; 
éplow |., ao. a. m.  Hpuxa.., i ie 
oma. Cog, épiBalve, a0. éatSnva'l. 

Eptdjoacba or eprfjcacba VY. 792 : 
* €ptdpualvw. | 

épmrw (f°, cepm-) serpo, creep, po. 
or 1.3; €prpw, elpya l. 279¢. Cog. ép- 
mv{w po. +, ©-vow, elpruca. 

¢ppw go aon, ef. erro, ruo ; éppr- 
ow 311, a0o.; °HPpyKa. (Cos. ? ao 
dmd-epoa swept away, Z. 348. | 

épvyydve (n°, épvy-) ructo, eriigo, 
belch, ERvoT, [M. & fpetyopat 1. & 
E. +; doedtopat I. ,]a0. L., 2a. Apvyor. 


TABLES. 








eUpioko § 50. 
€ptxw hold back, ch. po. & 1., [ML,; 
epvée, Jao. , [2a. HpdKaov 284e. Cog. 
epvkdye & epucavde, a. 199, x. 429. ] 
épuw & elpve ( Fepu-) draw, ¥ -&1., 
M. draw to one’s self, protect; épvow 
1. (epve 305 f, X. 67) & Ceiptow 1., 
m., eipyvoa m. +3; elptuac & -vopat, 
-voOnv ; see 279c. [Nude pr. & ipf. 
forms (326e): act. inf. eiptwevar 333 ¢, 
Hes. Op. 816; mid. pura: Ap. Rh. 
2. 1208, eipvarar A. 239, pico, -vTO, 
-uvto, X. 507, elpuro, -vvro, II. 542, 
épvcba €. 484, eipvoPa W. 82; puss. 
éptro Hes. Th. 301. Some regard 
these mid. & pass, forms as pr et. pe. 
& plf.] See prouac. 
épXopar (€PX-s édvd- x, éXevd- h) 
go, come ; ipt. npxdunv scarcely in Att., 
exc. in comp. ; cheveropaut scarcely in 
Att. prose, 2 a. bps (po. #Au@or), 
[p. qvOov 168. 3, Theoc. 16. 9, Lae. 
FAcov 169d, pe Lys. 105; for Advba, 
sync. 70a, see 327 b]; 2 pf. €AyjAvea 
[e{AjAovda 134 a, nude 1 p. efAjdAovB- 
pev 326e, y. 81.] For the pr. exe. in 
the ind., the ipf., & the fut., the Att. 
comm. used other verbs, esp ei. 
Eparde (0 07, ép- ) inquire, ask ; ép@- 
TiHow & épijoropat 311, npwrnoa, 2a. 
m. pony lim. reco 323 ce, A. 611]; 
HpoTyka, -uwat, -Onqv. [Ep. & I. elpo- 
pac A. 553 (also 2s. pea Hes. Cert.), 
-hoouar* elpwrdw & -éw 322a, Hdt. 
4. 145; épéw, H. 128 ; epecivw+, Z. 
145. ] 
éoBlw, & po. + tobw & Ba, 2 415, 
Eur. Cye. 245 (€6-, €o0- q1 147, éof- 
w, day- x) edo, EAT; f.2 opat (1. pa- 
youd, edodua ? 305 a), 2 a0. Eparyor ; 
éSrSoxa 312d, iv. 8. 20, (2 pf. €dnda, 
P. 542, éosoonde x: 56, ] © éo#deouan, 
Addo Orv. [Nude pr. inf. €duevac 326 e, 
333.0, N. 36.] 
éoridw feast, entertain, M.; éot- 
dow m., elcridoa 279 c m. 1.3 ’ orrt- 
aKa, “ttt, -Onv, f. 1.: [toric I. 1 Be 
evSe, comm. are sleep ; 
nddov, eBSor, éxdbevdor, 278 d, at) 
ebSijow 311, Cao. ; ; Ceb8qKa 1. 
evepyeTew benefit, -iow, &c.; aug. 


eiplokw (k?, eip-) find, M.; ebpy- 
ow mm. 311b, ao. a. l., 2 a. edpor or 
nipov m. 278d (evedunv 327 b) ; €v- 
enka, -nuat, -€Oy f. 310d, 


. ,evep- & ednp- 283. 2. 





§ 50. €\ Ow 

txGw, ExPalpw, & éxOpatvw (o, n®, 
éx0-), hate, ch. po.; ao. #xOnpa, m 
l., #xOpnva 1. = M. or P. ExOopar & 
éxOaipouat be hateful or hated, f. a 
Bapoduat, pf. 1. AxOnwac> comm. ar- 
XGdvopar n*; -ex8rjoopar 311, 2 a. 
“NX Osun ; -AXOnpa. 

to & icyw (seXx-; éx- £3, éy-d, 
ox- c3, cxe- c®, isx- r3 d) hane, hold 
(have belonging rather to éyw, ew, 
and hold to. toy, oxnow), M.; ipf. 
elxov & toxov 2788; tom. & oxYow 
m., [éoxnoa Y.,] 2a. Ecxov m. (7X, 
sxolnv & Saxo 293 ¢, oxés like 6és|1 
314d, °oxer., sxe, TXHY, mM. TXG- 
pat, &e. ), po. écxeAov, Aisch. Pr. 16 
|°m. Theoe. |, €ryyka [p/.cvv-oxwxws, 
B. 218, as for -oywyws 312d, ef. 281¢, 
159], Pexnuat [plf. 3 p. ér-dxaro 
312d, 329a], éoxéOnv 1. or 1., f. 1. 
Cp. dum-éxw or dum-ioxw 159 d (ipf. 
Mm. humerxdunv 282 b, Pl. Pheedo 87 b); 
dv-éxw (2 a. m. dvecxdunv, oftener 
qverxdunv 282b, po. nvoxdunv 136, 
Q. 518). Cog. Slexvéowar n” or Cic- 
xéouat v (see Uricxvéoua), [icxdvw, 
loxavdw, P. 747, 5723] dxéw bear. 

&po, less Att. Evéw, boil, cook ; 
epjre m. 311, a0.; tpynKa? 1., -war, 
-Ony, f. 1. 


Z. 


{dw, live, see 42a, (nude ipf. &¢yy 
r. Dem. 702. 2, later imv. (76: po. ); 
{yoo m., ao. a; &yxa. The Att. 
preferred ¢éw in the pr. & ipf., but 
elsewhere Bisw q. v. Cog. po. or L., 
§ow, Soph. El. 157, or r. gow. 

fedyvop: (n’7, fvy-, fevy- h, ef. jug- 
um, jung: -0) join, YOKE, M.; teb&o 
M., a0.; °eLevyal., -yuar, “von: £. Ey 
2 a. etivyny ; 47. Cog. (vydw, aryéw. 

Lovvupe (n8, §o-) gird, M.; tara 
m.1.,a0.; €wxa l., -cuar, “coup 307 d. 


i= 


4S (f g, Fad-) please, M. delight 
in; Howl., ao. a. |m. . 353]; jon f. 
Cog. avddvw q.v.; old pt. as adj. (rad- 
evos 148) dio wevos pleased, glad ; 8%- 
vo sweeten, hdvva, Ovo wat 304 b, -Wv Om, 
].-doOnv. 
[HAalvw, HAdokw, see dddopan. | 
pea sit, pret.; see ifw & 46 ¢. 


VERBS. 


OrnoKeo (i! 


Apel say, qv I said; see pnul & 45u. 
[Hpiew bow, sink ; hpioe, ao. +; pf. 
3s. br-euvjuoxe 281d, X. 491. ] 


e. 


OddAw (1, Aad-) bloom, uae ; 
BadArjow 1.311, Lea. © €0 nr. 1.54 20a. 
€0ador r. or 1.; 2 pf. pret. ré6yAa [ pt. 
rebarvia 325¢. Cog. daréw, daréeu, 
Onréw, THlEOdw. | 

Odirrw (t, Oap-) bury; bape ao. ; 
TéHaupat, 3 f. TePdWoum, [eCapOnv 

I.,| 2.a. érdgdyy f. dl. Cf. Boe te 

Savpate wonder, M. pr. 1.; Oav- 
pacropat, less Att. -cw, ao. u., ‘me Ny 
TOavpLaKa, -cUAL, pacaude tes ae vl 
Jwupdsw or Owudfw, 13le. Cog. 
davuatver. | 

[6:- pray for; ao. m. 3 p. Aéccavro 
Pind. N. 5. 18, pt. @ecodpevos Hes. | 

Gelyw (h, Oev-) fendo, strike, smite, 
po.; Oeva, [eAewa, &. 491,] 2a. Eevor. 

Gedo, wish, will; see €0édw. 

Gépw warm, ch. po., A.r. & 1, I. 
Bépopae - [Cépropat 152 d, T 507 : 
2a. p. €0épyy, p. 23.] Cog. [0épuuw, ] 
Gepuatvy. 

Oéw (f12, Oer-) run, see 42a; Oed- 
copat, -cw 1. & r.; ao. & pf. a 
plied by rpéxw, &e. 

Onpdw hunt, -dicw, &c., see 42 g ; 
oftenerin Att. prose, Onpeda, -edow, Ke. 

Otyyave (n>, avy-) tango, TOUCH 
(in Att. prose r. & only 2 a., but 
rather drrouar) ; OfEopar or - Eww, 2a. 
eOvyov, m.1.; 3f. eOl So jects £6iyOnv 1. 

bXiBe g, DIESs ; OAhpo [7. p. 221], 


aora: ; TEPALpa I., a EON PONY, 
later 2 a. EONByY, f. 1.: [PABw I. D. 
168. 2.] 


OvaocKkw (k®, Oav-, Ova- c57) die 
(comm. cp. w. dé in prose, exc. in 
the complete tenses, which are rarely 
cp.); \avodpar (Kkar- Bavodpax po. 156d, 
Kur. Med. 1386), 2a. €@avor ; 7éOynKa 
(2 pf. pl. & du. réOvauer, “are, -0t, 
-arov, iv.2.17, 1.19, X.52, Opt-reBvalap 
x. 98, wmv. réOvade X. 365, inf. reOva- 
vat Th. 8. 92, po. reOv(a-e)advar? Asch. 
Ag. 539, pt. reOvaws, Pind. N. 10. 
139, ct. reOvews 1201 & later Tedvas, 
-doa, -ws & -ds 233.4, 7. 331, vil. 4. 19, 
Hdt. 1. 112, [reduns or -ews 325 d, 
Pr16l,] plp. 3 p. éréOvacay Hel. 6. 


78 Oynckw 


4.16), 3 f. reOvntw & -ouar 319 b. 
See xreivw. Cog. Oavardw put to death, 
Gavardw desire death, 378d. 

Bovdw feast, po., M.; -doopar & 
-yoopar, &c., 310 a. 

Oopetv, Odpvupar, Jeap; see Opdoxw. 

parce disturb: see rapdoow. 

Qpave break ; Cpavowao.; TéOpav- 
ouat (TEOpavmac ?), EOpavacbny, f. 1. 

Opvmrrw (t, Povp-) crush, M. put on 
airs; Opinpw l., m., Cao. a.; TéOpup- 
pat, €OpvgOnv, f. 1., [2 a. © éerpidyy 
d}, T. 363.] Cog. rpuddw. 

Opaokw (k*®, Aop-) leap, ch. po.; 
CPopotpat, 2a. EAopov. Cog. Odpyvupar. 

[Ot rush, rage; “tow ?1., ébica1. 
Cog. Oivw, Oivéw, Ovtw. | 

Qvw (5) sacrifice, M.; Siow m., ao.; 
TéDUKA, -Tuat, ervOnr, f. 1., 159; 44. 


ub 


tare (1, dad-) send, po. (or iddAdw 
d?); Ciara, [Cinra.] Cog. é\Xdouarq.v. 

[tayo shout, +; pf. taxa pret. B. 
316.] Po. cog. laxéw, laxxéw. 

iBeiv, iS€oOar, see, 2 a.; see dpdw. 

iSpdw sudo, sweat (for ct. & pro- 
longed forms, see 324);, i8pdca ao.; 
Wpeekal., -uwarl. Cog.,tiw, Ar. Pax 
85, [I. 1. Wpdu. | 

Spite (v u.) seat, set up, M.; pice 
m., a0.; WpuKa, -vwas, -cOnv & -WvOny 
mt, °P.78, fal, -<Oog: fe que, 

Vepor or tepar Lasten ; see 45 p. 

ttw (j, ced-, €5-f£3, i6- b?, ef. sedeo, 
sido) SEAT, SET, SIT, ch. po. or dial., 
M. (fopar & Ropar sit; ©ttrjow |., ao. 
]., 3lla; f. m. €ropar 151 (ép-éoce- 
oOat I. 455, elcouarl.), ao. eloa m. 
279 c, B. 549, Eur. Iph. T. 946 [pt. 
Celcas, -duevos, Hdt. 3. 126, 1. 66] ; 
tyka 1., pare}, pret., see 46c¢ (2s. 
Kka0-y Acts 23. 3, ef. 331 b), HoOnv ? 
In Att. prose, comm. Kaffe, A. 
-({opar & -éfopar; KaOlora, -1o 305a, 
ii. 1. 4, m. 1, f. m. naOtvoopar & 
KabeSodpar 305a [xabedjoouae l.), ao. 
éxdbica & xabioa 282 b, m., €xabigfn- 
oa l., [kadetoa m. +3] KexdOrxa |., 
KdOnpar 46 .¢ (comic or 1. dmv. KaOov 
Ja. 2.3), 3f. xabjooua, éxabécOny 1., 
f.2 Cog. igdvw, tdpdw q. v. 

Umpe (€-, ‘te- v3) send (ch. in comp. 
& many forms only so found), JZ. 


TABLES. 








kabaipw § 50. 
hasten, desire ; pr. a. ind, 2 s. ag-ets 
Rev. 2. 20, 3 p. cvv-cofor Mat. 13. 13, 
pt. cvv-cdv Rom. 3.11, [iniv. Etv-te, inf. 
ouv-veiv, Theog. 1240, 565 ;] ipf. 1s. 
Clew or Ciny 315 b, 3s. Fp-te 282 b, 
Mk. 1. 34, 3 p. d@-lecay iv. 5. 30, 
jpiecay Hel. 4. 6.11; fow ©m., ia 
Cm. 306, 2 a. Cetuer “m., A. 652, 
Hier. 7. 11; Celka, ii. 3. 13, Sefpar, 
Th. 1. 6 [ind. 3 p. 1. ég@-€wvrac D. ? 
Lk. 5. 23, dv-éwvrac or -éovrar Hdt. 
2.165 v. 1., pt. we-uer-tuévos 282 b, 
167a, Hdt. 6. 1], Set@yv, Eur. Ph. 
1376, °f. Ven. 7. 11. See also 45k, 
n, r,j, 8315.. Some forms are made 
as from shorter themes, fw, &w. 

ixvéopat (n°, ix-), po. ‘tkdve n°, 
[m., & ‘tke,| come, in prose usu. ad- 
cxvéowats Eonar [i> b., Ar. Ach. 
742], ao. a. 1. [tov 327 a], 2a. m. 
ixdunv ; typo. Cog. few 114d, ixe- 
Tevw supplicate. 

tAdokopat (k, cAa-) propitiate [E. 
itdouat & tAapmar]; Adoopar ao. ; iAd- 
aOnv, f. 1. Cog. ikéowar po., ihedouat, 
[& as fr. tAnpe be propitious, pr. ime. 
‘dade 297 d, thyGe 335 d*, pret. sub. 
& opt. iijkw, jKouu, d. 365. | 

Aro roll, [ém-iAAL Fw, | see efd-. 

[ipacow ix, lash ; ao. tuaca, €. 380. ] 

immotpodéw keep horses ; -¥,0w ao. ; 
immotpépyka or -retpdhyka 283 a. 

Urrapar fly; see mérouat. 

[torape know, D.; see oedw. 

tornpe (1°, ora-, cf. Lat. sta-re) 
statuo, set up, STATION, AZ.sto, STAND ; 
TTHTW I., 20., 2a. Eorny ; toryKa 
(1. pf. trans. €oraxa & 1 ao. €ordoa ; 
so some explain ?ordcay M. 56), [2 pf. 
I. éotéare -dot 335, pt. €orews 1201, 
Hat. 2. 38,] °forauar r., &e. See 45, 
46. Cp. ér-lorapar understand (2s. 
ériata 297 h, 1. éwioreat 322 a, Hat. 
7. 135); ém-orioopat ; yarior jOnv 
282 b. Cog. icrave, |. orijikw & éorg- 
cw, Rom. 14. 4, [creduar 326 e. | 

icy, loyvéopat, hold; see éxw. 


K. 


Ka8alpw (h, xadap-) purify, M.; 
Kabaps m., éxdOnpa m., Vv. 7. 35, & 
éxdOapa, (Ee. 18. 8, 15263 Kexdbapka 
l., -mat, éxabdpOny, f. 1., 2a. 1. éxa- 
Odpnv ? 


EO 





§ 50. KaGeCopat 


Kabefopat, KaIn pan, KaOlfw, see ifw. 
Kab-cbdw sleep; see ebdw & 282 b. 
katvupar (n%, xad-, xacd- h) excel, 
po.; Kékacpat, Eur. El. 616 [pt. xe- 
Kadmévos D., 148 b, Pind. O. 1. 42.] 

Katya (h, kav-) kill, in prose usu. 
ep. W. xard, 1. 6. 25 Kava, 2a. éxa- 
vov ; 2 pt. Yr. Kéxova, or xéxava, 114. 
Cog. xreivy. 

Kate (h, xar-, xav-f?, xa- f}, xe- b) 
burn, also Att. ndo g g, 44, 309 b [xjw 
H. 408 v.1.], 27.3 katow, m.1., €xavoa 
[°m. Hdt. 8. 19, éxyna m. or Exera A. 
40, d. 176,] pt. po. xéas, sch. Ag. 
849 5 °xéxavia, -uas, exavOny f. [2 a. 
éxdnv E. 1. +, mw. 13, f. 1] 

Kadéw calo, CALL, JZ; kadéow m., 
[xatéw, I. 383] Att. usu. karo m., 
305 b, éxdheva m.; KéxAnKa c4, -uar 
(opt. 317 ¢), 3 f. KexAjoowat, ex7Onv f. 
Cog. xexAnrKw po., [kdAnue B. 335 b, 
mpo-Kanlfouat o. 203] KAnTredw swin- 
mon ; Khéw, KAN Sw, celebrate. 

KaAtvdSéw roll ; see xudivdw. 

Kopve (n, Kau-) labor ; Kapodpar, 
2a. éxamoy [m.]; Kéxpnka o7, 308 
[ pt. kexunws 325d, Th. 3. 59 7], 

kdprte (t, Kapur) bend, M.; Kaubo 
20. 5 KEM LGLL 148 a, 41, éxdupOyp, f. 1. 
Cog. yarrow po. 

‘kaw burn, not ct.; see Kalu. 

KeSdvvopt, Keddw ; see cxeddvyimue. 

Ketpat (cl, cee-; butaccented without 
regard to the contraction, & deemed 
by some a pret.) Jie (cf. quie-sco), see 
45q,r (2s. xard-xerat 297 h, Hom. 
Mere. 254, 3 s. kéoxero 332d, 3 p. 
Kéarat, -T0,329 a, Kéovrac (as fr. Ke-, 
315) X. 510; sub. 3s. ct. xijrae or 
(xéerat 326d) xetrac 2. 554; old pr. as 
fut. xéw, 7. 342, xelw 7. 340, § 305f]. 

ketpw (h, xap-, xep- b) shear, M.; 
Kep@ 72., Execpa mm. [Exepoa Nr. 152 d, 
N. 546]; °xéxapka 1., -uwas, [1 a. pt. 
kepOeis, Pind. P. 4. 146,] 2 a. éxdony 
I. or l. 

KEKASHjow, ‘exadav, see xd Cw. 

KEKAOHOOMAL, see KndW VEX. 

KéAopat command, po. +, ch. E.; 
KAHToLAL ao. 311 b, 2a. Kexhduny or 
éxexhopnv 284e.. Cog. [xéxrouar L., | 
Kehevux, -eUtw, 307 b. 

Kevtéw (v, xerT-) prick; KkevtThorw 
ao. [inf. xévoar 156 b, V. 337]; Xe. 

Kepayvupt (n°, Kepa-) mix; Kepdow 


VERBS. 





KAive 79 


l., m. 1., ao., [éxpyoa E. 1, 7. 164]; 
Keképaka |., xéxpduar c* & |. Kexépa- 
oma, exoaOnv f., Th. 6.5, & éxepdaOny, 
v. 4. 29: [xepdw E.+, xépace 322 ¢,] 
po., L, or L. xepyvéw & kipynuc n, b. 

KepSatva (n°, xepd-) gain; Kepda- 
vo, éxépdava 152¢, [1. or l. xepdjow 
m., a0. @., 31153] kexepdynka (1. -axa 
or -ayKa), -nuas l., exepddvOnv 1. 

Ket8e (h, xvé-) hide, po.; Ketow 
[°a0., 2a. éxvdov y. 16, § 284e3] 
2 pf. pret. kéxevOa, [kéxevOuarr. Cog. 
Kev@davw, I. 453. 

[KnSa | Ag xad-) vex; Kndqow Cao. 
3lle; 2 pf. pret. Kéxydsa sorrow. | 
M. eg oy sorrow, care; éxnoecadunv 
r., Aisch. Th. 138 ; [8 f. cexadjoouat, 
0. 353. Cp. a-xndéw + neglect, -jow 1., 
dxndera, = mm. 427. | 

Kovnpe spread ; see oKeddvvoue. 

Kivéw, -770w, Xc., move ; M., [& Ki- 
YUE, A. 231.] Cog. tw go, po., [ pt. 
Kiwvs 2a. meT- ~extaBov 353 a, 2. 581. | 

[Kuxdve m.,] Att. Kvyydve, v. 1. Ki- 
xavew (n®, n°, Kex-) find, po.; KX} 
copot, [-cw l., ao. a. 1, m.,] 2a. éxe- 
xov. [Cog. inne cies v; not in 
pr. ind.), m. pt. kexjpuevos 314 b.] 

Klypype lend ; see xpdw. 

Kral (j8, KAay-, KAayy- n°) clan- 
go, scream, CLANG, ch. po.; KkAaygw 
a0., 2a. ekdaryor ; 2 pf. pret. Kéxday- | 
ya, Ven. 3. 9 es Bry 2225-9. 
KexAryovres 326 b, & 30, but -dres 
Bek.], 3 f. xexAdyEouar 319b. Po. cog. 
kKAayyavw +, Krdayyaivw, krayyéw. 

KXalew (h, kAaF-, k\au- £7, crXa- f1) 
weep, also Att. wAdw g, 309b, IZ; 
Kravcopoat, -cw 1. (-ofuar 305d, Ar. 
Pax 1081), also Att. kAatijow or KG 
you 31lc, ékAavoa m. [2 a.? Exddor, 
Theoe. 14. 32]; KéxAavuae (-cuar 1.), 
3 f. xexavooua, exravobny f. 1. 

KAdw break, M.; Kdorw-I. yom.-l., 
ADK Dey Merk; [nude 2a. pe. daro-«\ds 
Anac. 17]; cékNacpuat, exrdoOnp Cf. 

kXelw claudo, shut; Krelow, ao. a. 
Cm.; KéKAeKA, -wae & -cuar 307 e, 
3f. cexreloouat, ExreloOnvf.: [1. rAnte, 
éxdnjioa, &e.;] older Att. KAY@, -7ow. 

KrXéwrw@ (t, KAam-, KXer- b) clepo, 
steal, °M. 1.; KXépo m., a0. a; KE- 
KAoda 312 c, KéxNenpat, exrépOny, 
comm. 2 a, éxA\drn. 

KAtve@ (g, kNiv-) clino, bend, INCLINE, 


SO KAYO 


TABLES. 


Aayxavo § 50. 


M.; KAtva om., Exdva m.; KéxAuKa| answ cr, -KELVOdpal, -KEKPIPOL, a0. d7- 


1., -wat, 304a, ex@ny f. [éxdAvOnv + |, 
2 eC Céxhivny cf. 

KAto hear, po.; ipf. &cAvoy also as 
ao.; nude 2 a. dnv. KOE. A. 37 [Keé- 
KAVA 284e, K. 284, a. pt. crvuevos 
in-clutus ; KékAvka Epich. | 

Kvaw scrape, M.,<e2 120g; Kvroe, 
&c. (exvycOnv 307d). Cog. kvalo, 
kvigw, KvnOw 1., Kvew po. 

Kodov@ main; Kodtcvrew |., a0.; 
KexdAoumat or -cuat 1., exodovOny or 
-cOny, f. 1., 307 .e. 

Kopl{w (j4, xousd-) bring; see 39e. 

KémTw (t, Kor-) cut, M. bewail ; 
Kio, f. 1., ao.; °KéKopa, [2 pf. pt. 
kexoTras N. 60], epee 3 f.- © xexéd- 
Youat, 1.5. 16, 2 a. mnt 

Kopevyupe (n>, Kope-) satiate, ch. 
po., .; [kopéow HdtMe21esmeal: 
Kopéw, 305 b, 323 c, N. 831,] éxdpeca 
[m.; 2 pf. pt. intrans. cexopnws 325 d, 
o. 372,| xexdperuat [-ruae E. 1], 3 f. 
rexopjoopat |., €xopéoOny, f. 1.: Kopéw 
& Kxopéoxw Yr. 

Koptoo (17, xopv0-) arm, po., M.; 


[ao. pt. Kopvocduevos I. 397; Kexopu- 
Guévos 148 b, P. 3 4+.] 
[xotéw + be angry, M.; xoréroo- 


ua? a. 101, ao. a. m.; 2 pt. pe. Ke- 
Kornws 325d, &. 456.] Cog. xoraivw 
po., Aisch. Th. 485. 

Kpadtw (j7, Koay-) ery out, pr. r.5 
Kpdgw |., m. ]., ao. a. 1, 2a. ° éxpa- 
yov v. 1.14; 2 pf. pret. kéKpaya Vii. 
8. 15 (imv. ReEpANOt 320f), 3 f. Ke- 
kpdéouar 319b. Cog. xexpdyw 1. 326, 
kKAGS@ q. V., Kouta: CROAK, KAWSw. 

Kpatva (h, xpav-) fudsil, po. & I. 
eae 135]; Kpave m., Expava, m. 

» Lexpnva, éxpynva, 130 a, 135 ;] pf. 
s 3.8. kéxpavrac Kur. Hipp. 1255 (or 
3p. for -av-yrar?), expdvOny f. 

Kpepavuupe (n°, kpeua-) & 1. Kpepco 
suspend, hang ; Kpepace, Att. kpeno 
[Kpewdw 322 c], Expéuaca m.; Kexpéua- 
ouat l., ExpeudoOnv. Cog. kpéuapat, 
~noowa, iv. 1.23; Kphurnue po. or |. 

Kplto (32, Kpcy- or Kptr- ) CREAK, 
po.; expiéa ]., (2a. 3s. Kptxe or xplye 
Ik: pat he pf. pt. kexpvyores Ar. Av. 
2652). 

ine (g, kpw-) judge, M.; Kplv@ 
m., €xpwa m.; KEKpLKA, Halt, “excplOny 
f. [éxpivOnv], 3040. C p. &tro-Kplvowat 





| 


expwaunv & later -exviOny. 

Jkpeve beat, M.; Kpcvr@m., 40.™M. 5 
KEéKPOUKA, cA & © -g mat, bcpovdbepr, 
307 e. [Cog. kpoalvw stamp, Z. 507. ] 

Kpitrre (t, KpuB- & xpup-) conceal, 
hide, M.; [iter. xptUmracxov 332 e ;] 
Kpvypo 7., a0., 2 a. CExpuBar m. 1., 
Kéxpvda, -upuac,[3f.ckexpdWouar Hijzip., | 
Expupamy, f. 1., later 2a. expogpn/ r. or 
cKpuBny ieee! °«xptBo & Kptpa. 

(KT CO pe ACQuITEe ; KTTTOPAL a0.; 
kéxtr par & less Att. éxrnuar 280 b, 
have acquired, pret. possess (KEKT@MaAL, 
juny or -wunv, 317 ¢), 3 f. Kexrpoopat 
(r. éxr-), éxr7Onv as pass., f. 1. 

kre(v@ (h, xra-, xTay-n, KxTev- b) 
kill (usu. cp. with dad, or card po. ); 
KTevo [xTavéw m., Z. 309], Exrewa, 
2a. po.+ €xravov, po. exrav m. 314d; 
2 pf. °&krova, later 1 pf. O Berane 
Cékraxa, & C dxrévnKa, pf. p. inf. C eK. 
Tava Polyb. 7.7, [exrdOqv] exrdy- 
Onv 1. Cog. Krivvopu b, vi. 3. 5, or 
xrelvoue n®; kalvwq. v. As the pass. 
of xreivw, the Att. comm. used @vycKkw. 


Ktit@ (z, xrt-) build ; KTic, 20. 


l.y M. Po. ¥. , {ota Dt. €U-KTiMEVOS, B. 
501 ;] Kéxrixa or xruca 1, 280 ec, ¢K- 
Tiguat, -oOnp, f. 1. 

Krumew v, sound, crash, ch. po., M.; 
EKTUT NOG, [2 a. €xturov +, 9. 75. i 

KvA(v8o 01, cvAw8ée v, & r. or |. 
xuriw, roll, Af.; Kudww8i%ow 1., © xudi- 
couatl., éxvdioa, ©m. 1.3 KextNiomat, 
éxurlobny f., éxurwd7Onv 1. Cog. ka- 
Awdéw m.; drivdw or -éw, m. 1., © HAt- 
oa, “H#dKka. 

kuvéw (n°, xv-) kiss, po. +; Kira 
lesaos (Kuv7jo omar Y. + a0. ly ee 
mpoo-Kuveée worship, ow, &e. Cog. 
kuéw (-jow), Kvw (2kvoa), KutoK@, COR- 
ceive. 

KDPw 71. ai (g v, Kup-) meet, 
chance, po., I. or 1.3 kbpow ao. 152d, 
& Kvupyjow ao. ; keKtpr]Ka, “Mat. 


A. 


Aayxave (n>, Aax-, Anx- B, AeEYX- 
n® b) ‘obtain by lot; AyjFopar [AdEouar, 
Hdt. 7. 144], 2 a. é\axor [redupl. & 
anise iy e]; e&Anxa 281, dé- 
Noyxa po., I., or Ll. [Nedoyxaoe 328 e} 
134 a], ve EAnXOnY. 


eee eee eee eee 


en 





§ 50. AapBavw 

AapBdvew (n5, AaB-, AnB- g) take, 
M. lay hold of; XA popa, -Yw 1., 
2 a. &haBov m. [redupl. 284 e] ; en 
da. 281, efAnupar & po. ACAnupan, 3 f. 
CKerAn~ouar |., EANPOny f. (CeiAHPOny 
281 b): [Ion. f. Adupouae n, ao.%a. 
mM. Y., MeAABnKa V, ©A€Aappar, Ed p- 
pOnv, Hat. 9. 108, 51, 119, 4. 79: 
Hellen. Ajupouas, 
1. 8, 2.] Po. & 1. cog. Adfuwar & Ad- 
fouar. 

mals shine, M.; Napapeo [© m. 1.], 
ao. a.; 2 pf. pret. edaprra, Ceddu- 
POnv 1., °f. 1. [Cog. Aaurerdw. | 

AavOdva & ch. po. AnPw (n%, g, 
had-) lateo, lie hid, escape notice; M. 
Sorget, in prose usu. cp. w. él: hf cw 
M., 20. a. po.+, m.1., 2 a. ?haBov 
m. [redupl. 284 ei 2 2 pf. AéAn Oa, ré- 
Angpmac [-acwa, EH. 834], 3 f. NeAroo- 
por, Eur. Alc. 198, [ernoOnv °F. 1. +. 
Cog. éx-AnOdvw cause to forget, n. 221. | 

Adore (k 8, \dk-, cf. loquor) sound, 
utter, po. +; Lakhoropat, a0, Zia. 
€\axov m. [redupl. 284 e]; 2 pf. ‘pret. 
MAaka 312a[-nKa, pt. NeAaKvla 325 e]. 
Po. cog. Naxagw Aisch., [Ankéw.] 

[\do, a Dor. pres. = €0éw wish ; 
ind. ct. X@, Aqs, AN, A@mes, Affe, 
A@vtt, &c., 131 ec, 328 a, Ar. Lys., &c. 
Cog. ralowat rh, desire eagerly ; 
pret. eAinuar, M. 106. | 

Aéyo lego, Germ. legen, LAY, 
aie. (Att. only in comp., esp. w. 
ow,) M.; €Ew m., ao., [nude 2 a. 
ééyunv 326 e, . 335, dinv. \€Eo & AéEEO 
327a, I. 617, inf. “AéxOar, pt. ©ré- 
"yuevos *| Cethoya. (° -exa 1.) 281, 312¢, 
Dem. 522. 12 = Eieheveats more Att. 

Cet \eyuat, Th. 2 2.10, éréxOnv, °f. 1., 
usu. in Att. 2 ao. °érAéynv Cf. Some 
have inferred. a second stem, dex-, 
fr. the noun Aéxos, bed. 

Aéyw say, tell (the same in origin 
with the preceding, & borrowing, ch. 
1., some of its special forms), JZ.; 
AéEw m., 20..°m.; €Xexa 1. (classic 
elpnka, see Pnut), NédAceypuat, 3 f. re- 
AéEouat, EhéxOnv f. Cog. rAoyifomar 
reckon. 

AelBw libo, pour, po. etBw e}, II. 
11, 3; &epWa m. 

Aeltrw (h, Au7-) linquo, LEAVE, r. 
Awardvw n5, M. remain {ipf. ére- 
rro 326e, Ap. Rh. 1. 45]; Aetpo m., 


ow Tan. 4° 


VERBS. 


Cé\nupOnv, Acts | 








paopat sl 
ao. lL, 2a. €dcrov m., 38; 2 pf. dée- 
ourra, héerequmar, 3 f. AehelWouar; 
EncibOnr £., 2a. €Alrny 1., +? 


heix@ lingo, Germ. lecken, LICK, 
not in Att. prose ; AefEw 1., ao.; [2 pf. 
pt. edecxuws o}, Hes. Th. 826], 
CédeixOnv 1. Cog. Acyudw, ALXudsw. 

hér@ (b, Aam-) peel, ch. po., AL; 
Cheb ao.; [°A€Aeuuae Epich. 109, ] 
Céad, f. 1 

Aetoow LOOK, po.; Aetow ao. |. 

AjGw, AnPdvea, see abit 

Aniz Opa plunder, ; [Antoo- 
par] 20. : NeAfiopan, [exntzOn.| In 
Att, some would contract the nt into 
q throughout. Cog. Anorevw. 

Auyy-; ao. AtyE twanged (both 
onomatopes), 337 a, A. 125. 

[AtAatopar, AeAinuac ; see Adw.] 

Auptrdve leave, Th. 8.17; see dei. 

Aocopari, r. ercue pray, po. +; 
[edicdenv, AX. 35, 2a. éderduny, LU. 47. | 

Ada & Aotw (f12, AoF-) lavo, wash, 
esp. the body, JZ. bathe (the ct. forms 
from dw, as €dov, Aoduar, AoOTat, &c., 
are the more common ; pr. a. Yr.) ; 
[Aotow] m. i a. m.; NéAoupat, eee 
Onv, -cOnv 1.: Lee v, -€ow 1., m., 
MOeiee22d; 297 | ie Novew. 

Adw [usu. 0 Hom.] loose, see 37, 
48 b ; [iter. ee d) éAAdecKev 332¢, 
136; Qa, mM. ehiuny 313), . 80,114; 
pf. opt. AeA dvTo or -dTo c. 238, $317¢. | 


M. 


palve (hb, pav-) Meade oftener 
patvouat be mad, rave [mavodpat 
r., Hdt. 1. 109,] éunva coe +]; jMe- 


pavnka l., “maw I., 2 pf. pret. pépnve 
am mad, 2a. éudavnv, f. 1. Cog., 
patowar seek, po. +; see udouat. 


pavOdve (n$, uad-) learn; pady- 
copa [ualedua D. 305 a], 2a. Eua- 
Gov ; pepdOnka, -uae 1. 

paopar & patoparh, desire eagerly, 
feel after, po. +; [pacopat Cao., d. 
591]; 2 pf. pret. pépova n b, am 
eager, Aisch. Th. 686, [pl. wéuauer, 
-aTe, -ddo., H. 260, dav. weudrw A. 
304, pt. weuaws A. 40, plp. 3 p. mé- 
pacav B. 863, § 320e, 325d. The 
Dor. has forms as fr. ww-, ch. nude 


or ct., as 8s. wdrar, mv. woo or 
|~weo (Mem. 2. 1. 20), inf. pwaobat 
F 


82 pidopian 


(Pl. Crat. 406 a).] Cog. wayuaw po., 
pvdopat Woo, paivouat rage, &c. 
papvapar fight, po.; sub. dc. wdp- 
vpomat, -aiunv (v. l. -oiue@a 315¢"*), -ao 
O. 475, -ac@a, -duevos ; ipf. éuapvd- 
unv, H. 300, Eur. Ph. 1142. 
paptrrw (t, wap7-) seize, po.; papto 
ao., Ar. Eq: 197, [2 a. ejuapTr ov or 
éuatrov et predupl: 284e); pépaptra. | 
eas , pay-) knead, M.; pogo 
Cm., 20.3 PEWAKG, -YUat, bud Onv po., 
2 a. hye 
paxopar fight [waxéoua, A. 272, 
pt, -erduevos or -eovmevos 134 a, p. 471, 
r. 403]; payéoopar ao., [-éouar, B. 
366] Att. paxotpat, br. & 1. paxtoo- 
Mat a0.; PePaXnper (-erual!), €ua- 
xécOnv f. 1.; 811d. Cf. di-mico. 
pedo & boo protect, rule, po. +; M. 
pesopat care for, devise ; [peStoropar 
311, I. 650.] Cog. ph Sopa q. Vv. 
Of: moderor, medeor, meditor. 
peOtioko (k}, neve) intoxicate, 
379 b, M.; peBtiow |., ao.; enee 
opacl., éuebdobny, t. 1.: peOdwintrans., 
be intoxicated. 
pedidw (weda-, media-) smile ; 
éuerdiaoa [éuetdnoa O. 47]. 
[petpopat (h, wap-, wep- b) obtain, 
I. 616; 2 pf. €ppopa 284d, 1. éupuopor 
as 2a. 326b,] etpappar 281 (as if for 
ge-cuap-mat, €euapuat 141, 142), PL, 
[l. weudpnKa, -mar & wéuoppau. | 
péedArAw be about to, intend, delay ; 
pedAAqow 311, m. 1., €ud\rAnoa & 7uér- 
Anoa 279 a. 
pedo concern (often impers.), J/. 
(in prose ch. cp. w. émi or werd) care 
for, concern; perhow [m. A. 523] 
ao. a.; [2 pf. puna ch. pret., B. 25, ] 
pepedtjKa, -wat [3s, sync. péuBrerau, 
-ro, 146 b, 311d, T. 343, &. 516], 
EuwednOnv °f. Cp. érmédouar & -pe- 
N€opeat v, care for, -~wedjoouar, ao. l., 
-mewérnuat, éreuedHOnv f. Der. pe- 
ANeTaw study, practice. 
Hépova am eager; see udomat. 
peEVa maneo, 7eMAIN, wait ; PEve, 
éuewa’ pepevynka 311 b (2 2 pf. uduova? 
Eur. Iph. A. 1495). Po. cog. ulurw 
r1¢?, Asch. Ag. 74, [upd feo. | 
yrSopar devise, po., ®. 413; ph- 
mopar, ao, Aisch. Pr. 477 ; see uédw. 
Pykaopat ? (g U, “aK-) bleat ; [2 a. 
pt. uaxav o. 98; 2 pt. pret. pt. weuy- 


TABLES. 





vagcow § 50, 


Kos, pmevakvia 325 e, 2 plp. éuéunkov 
326 b.| Like onomatopes, wucdouar, 
BAnxdouat, Bpvxydouat. 

pratve (h, urav-) stain, °A.; pra- 
vo, euiava & less Att. -nva 152¢; 
peplayKa l., -acuae & 1. -aupar 304 b, 
eucavOnv f. [3 p. pudvOnv 330 b, 134, 
A. 146.] 

plyvup. (n7, wy-) & ployw 350, 
misceo, Germ. mischen, MIX, JZ.; 
pLEw [m.,] ao.a., m. ]., [nude 2 a. éuly- 
pny 326 e3] pence L., ~yuat, 3 f. pe- 
piéouat, euixOnv t., 2 a. euiyny f. 
274 b%. [Cog. ubydtone 6.: 279) 

PLY KY ( (rt k5, uva-) remind (cf. 
moneo), MV. re-miniscor, 7€-MEMBER, 
MENTION 3 PVTH7., 20. d., M1. PO. + 5 
pepvn pow memini, remember’, pret. 
268 [2 s. HEmynat, VN; 331 b], sz. 
Xe. peyvGpar, -junv or -wuny, -noo 
[wéuveo 140, 134, Hdt. 5. 105], &c., 
317s, 3 f. pe pvfjoopat, éuyncOny f. 
307 e. The old MW. pvdopar [remem- 
ber, heed, pay attention to, ipt. 3 p. 
€uvwovTo 322, pt. uvwmevos, 5. 106, 
& by like protraction inv. urvweo Ap. 


R. 1. 896] passed into the sense of 


solicit, court, woo (in Att., ep. Ww. 
mpd, vil. 3. 18); éuvnodunr. Cog. 
[urjokw remind ;| pynorevw Woo ; uvn- 
bovevw remember, -cw, e€uvnudvevka 
280. 

plo-yw misceo, mix ; see wlyvume. 

PVGOLAL, LVY Poveda, see Mim7gKW. 

podkotpat, 1. pr. uotéw go; see 
PrwoKw. 

pote, -€0, 1.°-de, suck ; éut(noa. 

pula, -how, &c., say, po. +; [mv- 
Geta, wvbéat, 323 e. 3 

pucdopar (g u, BER ) migio, low, 
bellow, A. 1.5 puKqoopar ao., [2 a. 
ype E. 749 ; 2 pf. pret. pépuKa+, 

. 580.] See unxdopat, & pt. of 

ee shut eyes or lips ; pice |., 
ao. pHépoKa, 310d. Late Ka peves 
for . kaTa-uvw 136, Mat. 13. 15. 


N. 


valw (h, va-) dwell, settle, po.; 
[varcopar, ao. a.] m.; vévacuat L., 
évacOnv. Der. vacerdw po. [puerdwoa 
or -dovoa 322]. 

vaoow i, stuff, pr. 1.; [&vaka, >. 
122 ;| vévacua, Ar., vévaryat 1. +. 





VELKEW 


§ 50. 


[vetkéw, -elw 323.c, chide; vanéoa, 
ao. I’. 59.] 

vepw distribute, pasture, M. possess, 
feed ; vepo m. (1. veutow m., ao., 
dll b), evema m.; “vevépnna, -yar, 
vil. 3. 21, évewHOnv (-é0nv v. 1.), f.1. 
Cog. veudw u*, vowedw, [veuddw. | 

véowar (ct. veDuae D. 136] go, come 
(also as fat. 305 f), po, Cyr. ee 
ll. Po. cog. viccouat, f. vicouas ao. 

pag v, nubilo, gather clouds (cp. 
W. ovy) ; : Svebhow L.; Cvévopa Ar. 

véw (f, veF-) no, nato, swim, 309b; 
VeVTODAL oF veborouar 305 d, iv. 3. 
12, °évevoa ; °vévevxa Pl. Rep. 441 ¢. 
Cos. vnXw ch. po. 

Cyee Hat., heap up; vaow Suid., 
évnga, m.1.; vévnuar, v. 4.27, & -omat 


Ar. Nub. 1293, évj0qv& paanete 307 e. | 


[Coz. vnéw, Oynvéeo.| 

[véw, Hes. Op. 775] & vaPw q3, neo, 
spin; varw, Evnta [in. yn. 198]; vé- 
vyomat l., éviPqv. Cog. vaw? 

vito (j4 , vid- or wiB- 9) & ch. 1. vé- 
wrw t, wash hands or feet, J.; vipw 
M., a0.; véeviruat, [(CévipOnv Hipp., | 
2 f. upjoowacl. Lxx. Cog.? vida, 
po, &c., ningo, snow (cf. nix, nivis). 

VOEW, “Aru, ke. , think ; (1. » for 
oy 131 "f, ] 


EE. 
Eéw scrape ; [%eoa BH. 815] eeoruar, 
-c6nv 1. Cog. Eaivw, Eiw* Evpéw shave. 
Enpatve dri; -avem., a0. a. 152¢ 
[ay-Enpdvn for dva- enpdvy, 136, ©. 
347]; é&jpacuar &c. 304b, aveap. £1: 


0. 


684£o (k°, dax-, ddax-p, cf. ddxvw), 
-€o, -do |. , feel a bite, bite, M.; [dda- 
Ehropcs 311, Hipp. ], aeeduae l.; 
Odayyat. 

GSortropéw travel, S8oTovdw make a 
road ; -hrw, Ke. ; SSourspyKa & S8or- 
Tem dpyKe ° &8omerolnKa, -wat & wdo- 
moinuar> 283 a. 

[68v- be angry, cf. odi; adicdunr+, 
a. 62; 68i8vcpar pret. , €. 423. ] 

8Sdpopar p, &trag. Sdpopar lament ; 
ar sae edipduny ; wdvpOny 1. 

pe its 5 66-) od6ro, oleo, emit ODOR ; 


w [-éow Hipp.| ao., 311; 2 pf. 
+ a [écdw D. B., 170 a, Theoe.] 


VERBS. 


|2a. qvolyny f. 1. 





Opdpyvipe 83 
olyo & ovyvupe n7, open, very I. in 
prose exe, in comp., ch. with dvd. & 
did > otf, =a [ WE ca, 132, Che 436); @ 
Onv. Cp. dv-elyo & dv-olyvupe, ete 
l.; dvol€w, dvéwéa, Th. 2.2, & vr. pvoita 
[avgra po. |, 279 b, 282 b, dite Tales 
dvewKa, 2 pt. avégya ch. 1. dvéwyua:, 
¢hrieeee 4, Hvovypce 1. [av vypou po. |, 
3 f. dvedzouac Hel. 5.1.14, avegyOnv 
(sub. dvorxdw, &c.), AwoixOny f. 1., 
Kven a triple aug- 
ment occurs late: qwémta, AvewyOny, 
Lxx. 

ol8a know, eloopar: see 46 & dpdw. 

oiS-éw, -dvw, l.-dw & -alve, swell, 
M. r.; oi84ow Hipp., ao.; @dyKa. 

oixtelpw h, pity ; oikrepa, wcreipa- 
late olfxrespyow Rom. 9. 15, ao. a. p. 

oivoxoéw, -How, pour wine ; 279 b. 

otopa. opinor, think (nude 1 s. 
otuat, ipf. @unv, 313 e ; 2s. oter 297 f); 
oihoopar 81lc, ao. 1; @ndny, f. L: 
[dtouar 132, E. 644, wioduny (dic- in 
Hom., a. 323), wicOnv. A. (pr. 1s 
only) otw, E. usu. dfw A. 59, Lac. off 
Ar. Lys. 81; in ét- or ai-, usu. &] 

oiorpdw goad, -horw; aug. 278d. 

olxopar go, be gone; otyhoopar 
311; otyxwxa or @xwxa 312d, Soph. 
Aj. 896, @xnxka E.? & 1., otynmas or 
OX Nat, 

dkédAdw (p, KeA-) PUN ashore, Vii. 
5. 12; KéXow ao. po. 152 d, dkeuda. 

odio bdve, r. or l.-alvw (n4, n°, 
duc 0-), slip, slide; dd.cOyow 1., 20. 
ch. 1., 2 ao. duo Bor, Soph. Kl. 746 
ddoOnKa Hipp. & 1. 

OdAvpt (dA- 351. 4) perdo, destroy, 
lose, (po. or 1. exc. in comp., ch. with 
amé,) M. perish; éd€ow 3114, [1. 
d\éw m.| Att. dA@ m., Breca, m. 1, 
2a. m. wddunv [ pt. odAduevos + 134a, 
A. 2]; ©édeXexa, perdidi, 2 pf. pret. 
bw a perli, am wndone, dorecpae lL, 
wrécOny, f. 1. [Cog. d\éxw m. +, A. 
10, ddéw, T. 135 v. 2] 

Opapréa accompany, meet, po. + ; 
[ipf. du. 6uapr ray * 323 f.;] opapryice 
ao., v. 87, [2 a. Guaprov le 

épvops (n7, Op ; bpo- W) swear, OM: 
Opotpat 152 (1. dusow m.), Suooa Cons 
OpaopoKka, -uar & -cuae 307e ( duce 
guatl.), wusOnv & -cOny f.: [Lac. f. 
dutwpuea, 323 f*.] 

Opdpyvupe (17, duopy-) wipe, po. +, 


84 Opdpyvopat 


M.; dpdpEw ©in., ao. Sa. m., 6. 88, 
Pl. Gorg. 5254; ©audspxOnv. 
évivynpr (dva- 357. 2) benefit, W.; 
dvyjow iM. ao. a, m2. 1., 2a.7nf.dvivac?, 
mn, aovipny 814) & -dpny, opt. évatuny, 
[imv. tynoor. 68), inf. dvacPar[-noPat 
1., pt. -jpuevos B. 333] Gynuacl., -Onv. 
{dvepar (dvo-) scorn, E. & 1.3 pr. & 
ipf. nude, ef. didouar 45; dvdcopar 
ao.; Swvdcbnv. Fr. dv-, pr. otverbe 
(134a) Q. 241, & la. dvaro P. 25, 
if these forms are genuine. ] 
émulom or éttiw marry; snicw: 
érvuogpat: according to some, -vt- be- 
fore a vowel, -v- before a consonant. 
épaw (dpa-) see, W., ipf. éwp(aov)av 
279 b, [opéw 1., -6w E., ipf. peor or 
dpwy I., 48 ¢, 322 ;] édpaxa & esp. in 
comedy édpaxa, -uac (later than &p- 
pat, Isoc. Antid.), éwpdOny f. 1: (fr. 
om- x) f. ipopar (2s. der 297 f}, ao. 
r.; 2 pt. érwra po. & 1.+, Spas, 
Esch. Pr. 998, &pOny f.: (fr. FiB- x, 
cf. video) 2 a. etdov, m. ch. po. or I., 
279 c, sub. dw, tOwuar, &e. (imv. ide, 
ido0, or as exclam. (6é, idov); 2 pf. 


ota {I have seen, hence) J know! 


(46, 320, & below); Mid. (ch. po. 
eiSopnar h, seem, resemble, 1a. eicd- 
we, TS 81: 
m. 2s. Spnat 814b, & 343: éooopar 
eA Tuer 

In the pret. otSa, the stem has 
four forms: (1) t8-; touev [t6-pev 
148 b, Al 124], icO:, torw [B. itTw 
Ar. Ach. 911], &c., 320a [also to 
shorten other forms, as below, 134]: 
(2) el8-h; (sed. e{Souer, etdere, 326d, | 
eldévar [tb-uev, lduevar, 333c], eldas 
[édvta, A. 608}, Hdew [w. double aug. 
2s. yeldns X. 280, 38. Heldn ce. 206, 
or -det, or I.-de ?, 3p. Heldew or ndew 
330 b, also (/d-cav) tcay v. 170], f. 
eloopar: (3) ol8- 312b; ofda, oldas 
or otg@a (oidas very r. in Att., Kur. 
Ale. 780; the comic poets sometimes 
blend the two forms into ote@as, also 
Kur. Ion 999 ?): (4) etSe- v ; (el5é-w) 
el6@ [ldéw &. 235], efdeinv, 320€; f. 
eldjow, A. 546, Isoc. 11d [ldnod 
Theoe. 3. 37], ao. 1. 07 1. In the ind. 
plur., the shorter forms were more 
comm. in the pf, & the longer in the 
plp. (also 1. #decav Mk. 14. 40). 
The defects of oféa are ch. supplied 


— 


TABLES. 


(Cog. dpnuae m. 335 D3) 


ae eee 


ore7 


mraivo N 50. 
by yeyraoxw. [Cog. toauit D. (per- 
haps suggested by 3 p. toaov) Pind. 
P. 4. 441, tods, todre 328 a, Theoe. 
15. 146, &c.] With the ind. of otéa, 
ef. the corresponding Sanskrit 1 s. 
véd-a, 2 vétitha, 3 véda ; 1p. vid-ma, 
2 vida, 3 vidus. 

dpéyo [r. dpéyripi nn, X. 37] stretch 
out, REACT (cf. rego, Germ. recken, 
reichen), JZ. reach for, desire, (A. 
ch. po. or 1.;) épé&w m., ao.; [apey- 
wat Hipp., dpwpeypar, IL. 834, ] wpéx- 
|Onv as mid. See 430b. Cog. dpryvd- 
oat, dpexbéw po. 

opi{a j! [ovdpigw 1.] bownd ; see 39. 

Cpvepe (n7, édp-) rouse, po., A. 
arise; pow ao. 152d, [f. m. dpotuar, 
2 a0. dpopov 284e,|] 2 ao. m. epéunv 
{@pro, imv. dpc0; -€0, -ev, Inf. bOat, 
&c. 326 e, 327); 2 pf. épwpa as mid., 
N. 78, 2 plp. @pwpew 281d, Alsch. 
Ag. 653: [fr. épe- v, ipf. deéovro B. 
398, pf. dpwpepat, sub. dpmpyrat N. 
271.] Cog., ch. po., pw, dpww, épo- 
| Ovvw, dpotw: Lat. orior. 

épterow (il, dpux- or épvy- d?) dig ; 
dptéw, ao. v., m. 1. or L, 2a. Spuyov kr; 
| “épdpuxa (I. dpuxa,) -yuar, (plf. dpwp- 
‘or wpwp- 281 d,) wpdyOnv ©f., 2a. 1. 
wpixny or -y7v, f. 
| éodpaivepar & 1. doppdouar (0, 
u, éogpp-) perceive by smell, A. 1.; 
‘oagpryoopat, ao. 1, 2 a. woppdunv 
| [So ppavro ? 327 b, Hdt.]; deppdvOnv. 
[otraw wound, +; ovtiom l., ao., 
:2a. otravy m. 314d, A, 520A 
| otr%Onv, 8. 537.) Cog. otra fw po. 

detrw (h, Cped-) owe, ought, [éepér- 
lw # E. 171la, @. 4623] éperiiow 
ao. 811 b, 2a. &perov (po. & 1. Ede- 
' Nov 284 b, c) expressing wish, (I ought) 
| O that, utinam, (1. as a particle, Gal. 





Aw+ increase, ao. opt. 3s. dpédete 
171a, 325 c?, IL. 651,] & 
dprtoxdve (k? n+, dgd-) owe, in- 
icur; ddAyow 31], ao. r., 2a. Bpror, 
v. 8. 1; @bdAnKa, -uac: 1. pr. Cpr. 








II. 


mal{w (j, racd-, ravy-, 349 a) sport ; 
makotpar 305d, Symp. 9. 2 (1. -Fouat 
& -&w), @rawa (-ta 1.) ; wétravKa (-xa 
1), -opae (-yuae 1), -xOnv 1. 


5.12;) abetdkyka, -Onv. Cog. [dder-- 








§ 50. maiw 

trate strike, M. ; aloe & po. mat- 
how 311, €rawa m.; TéTaKa & |. 
wemainka, ong Soa l., éraicOnp. 
See rUmrw. 

mahtd\d\oyew repeat ; [plp. éradid- 
A6ynro 284b, Hdt. 1. 118.] 

mdddw (1, rad-) shake, ch. po., AZ. ; 
Erna [m. 1., 2a. 3s. nude wddAro 
326 e, O. 645, pt. du-reTradur 284e ;] 
mémahuat, 2a. Sérddnv 1. 

wd- acquire; TWaTOpaL ao. po.; 
mwéraucr pret. possess, ili. 3. 18, 3 f. 
memdcouarr. Cf. potior. 

Tmapayopée fransgress j -yow, Ta- 
peviunoa 282c, & wapnviunoa 279a 
(as if cp. of rapd & dvouéw); mapa- 

vevounka (1. Tapnviunka), eps &e, 

mapoivew act the drunkard ; érapw- 
vyca 282¢; weTapwvyKa, “wa 1, &e. 

Taro iz, sprinkle ; whow, “ao. 
a., m.1.; wéracua l., eanthrOnw: Sf]. 

maoKo (k? 350, rab-, revd- n® b) 
patior, suffer ; eet on 156, (ao. pe. 
po. mnoas?,) 2 a. érabor ; 2 pf. aré- 
mova, Th. 6. 11, [rérosxa Die. Fp: 
wétrogbe 320 f, v, 53, pt. reandulz pe» 
555, § 325 e. } 

[rargopot (v, rar-) eat, taste, Hat. 
2. 373] wdooper po. r., ao. po., 1, 
or 1., y. 9, Soph. Ant. 202; [plp. 
memaguny &, 642). Cf. pascor. 

rave stop, repress, M. cease, PAUSE, 
343 Tavrw m., a0.; TémavKa, -uaH, 
3 f. weravcoua: Soph. Ant. 91, érav- 
Onv (-cOnv 1. or v. 1.), f. r., 2a. 1. 
émanyv “f., Rev. 14. 13. 

me(OQw (h, mi0-) persuade, M. be- 
lieve, obey, 38, 39 ; awelorw 72., a0. ., 
m. 1., [werOjow 284f., 311, & as 
mid. miAjow, p. 369, ao. + A. 398, ] 
2a. €rifov m. po. [rériOov m. 284 f, 
W. 40]; mwérexa, 2 pf. pret. rémrola 
trust, 38. 8, Th. 2. 42, nude imv. r. 
tréreigO. 320, Aisch. Kum. 599, [2 plp. 
1 p. érériOuev B. 341,] wéreoun, 


érelcOnv f. Cog. micredw; Lat. fido. | 1. 


mevaw hunger, mew(der)y 120 ¢; 
-yow (1. -dow) ao.; memelvnka. 
te(pw (h, rap-, mep- b) pierce, po., 
1., or l.; mepa?, ereipa, A. 465; 7é- 
mwappat, 2a. ©érdpny, Hdt. 4. 94. 
mexrew (t%, rex-) pecto, comb, shear, 
po., [welxw h, o. 316; eGo D. 325), 
éreéa l., m.;] éréxOnv, Ar. Nub, 1356, 
meAXa{o (2, weda-), & no. redraw, 


VERBS. 





‘gouae l., 


mipmAne 85 
mehadw q, & (wread- c*!) rd Ou, 
bring or come near, M. pO. 5 Tear w, 
TEAM 305 b, erédaca iv. 2. 3, [2a. m. 
ém\ijunv 314b, 0. 63 5] TEMANUAL POny 
po. érehdoOnv & érhdOyv. Cog. rA7x- 
oidfw, | ridvaw n? b, miva pat, "p, 94] 
TEAW be, po.t, M; [ipf. 3s. ewe 
, M. 11, m. 28. éradceo, -ev, 33, 
éwheTOo, X. 281, 116, pe. rd dpevos. } 
méprra send, 41 ; i. ep. in classic 
prose, he 12/2 ; ; aréurbor, TETTOPA, & 


et 


ale, 

TETAPELY, némporau ; see tropi fw. 

wépdSopar (b, mapd-) pedo, 4. r.; 
Crrapdicopat 311, 2 a. © érapdor ; 
twétropda ; Ar. 

mépOw (b, mapd-) destroy, ravage, 
po. +, [nude pr. inf. p. (rep0-ofat, 
mep-cOat, 151, 158) wépOar I. 708 5] 
TENTH 771., 20. a., [2 a. Empabov om. 
c%, 1, 40.] Usu. trop8éw v2, “00. 

TéEpVT pL sell, po.; see Tumpao Ke. 

wécow (13, re7-), & later rérrw t, 
coquo, cook, digest, M.; mwéipw, ao. a., 
m.?; big Reccaniet er épOny fi 

TeTavvyjse (11°, reTa-) pando, spread, 
expand, (in Att. ch. cp., esp. W. dvd) 
weTaso, “mera 305b, éréraca, m. |. ; 
Cmremetaxa l,, -cwat, usu. rérTaua c+, 
Ar. Nub. 343, emer da Ony. Cog. [nt- 
Ton n® b, X. 392, mitve,| 1. © rerdw. 

mérownt (i. 5. 3) & po: or l. wéra- 
war u, & irrapac v3 02 , lly ; werioo- 
por 311, usu. arricopa 62,020 iin. 
émTnv po. o7 1, mM. dorsi émTa- 
pny * eerdaten ]. Po. cog. mora- 
opot, Ar. Av. 251 [nude 2 s. mriry 
Sap. 20, pt. roryjuevos, Theoe, 29. 30, 
$ 335 b], worjoowar?, wemdrnuat, d. 
222, érornOny: [rwrdoua, rerdouat ?} 

Tmevdopar inquire ; see muvOdvoua. 

whyvune (7, ray-, ryy- g) pango, 
fasten, fix, M. (opt. riyviro 316 ¢); 
awrygw m., a0., [2 a.m. 3s. KaT-érnKTo 
326 e, A. 378 ;] Saérnxa 1., 2 pf. 
rérnya pret. am fixed, V. 135, -Y Wat 
, ernxOny, usu. 2 a. bxdsynit fot. 
hore. 

mipmAnpe (wa-, mi-u-rda r} e*) 
pleo, Jill, (esp. rs w. év,) M.; wdy- 
ow, °m. ]., a0., 2 a. po. SrA sheen 314b 
(opt. Sarnunv Ar. Ach. 236, ime. 
Crdjoo, &c.); °rétAnKa Pl, Apol. 
23e, -cuac or -uat 307 e, 3 f. rerd7- 
érdnacbnyv f. In the com- 
pounds of mivmAnue & wivmrprut, the 


86 TipmrAnpe 


p is usu. omitted after -pam-: éu- 
mim\nut, inv. éurimdryn Ar. Av. 1310 
[éumimAnOe 33507, &. 311, pt. éume- 
mheis Hipp. as fr. wAe-]; so mumdds 
171, Asch. Ch. 360; but ipf. é- 
emiumdnv. Cog. [riwmrdréw I. 322 a, 
miutrdvouat, I. 679, | rAnpdw* wr7Ow 
be full (2 pf. rémdnGa, Theoce. 22. 38), 
whence rAnbiw & rrNOdvw. 

Tipmrpnpe (re, Tpa-, see gel, 
burn, esp. a W. €v3 TmpHow om. 
ao. a@., ©m. ,_ [Empece 134, 130 b, 
Hes. Th. ee -] Carémpnka, ~ ut & 
-opat 807-e, [3 f. Srerpjoouat, Hat. 
6. 9, ] érpycOny, f.1. Cog. © riwrpw?, 
[°mpide, I, 589. ] 

TytCKa, TEM VU MOLL, see 1véw. 

TiVO (n2, mo-, 7i- b?) pdto, bibo, 
drink ; mlopar (usu. 7; Hellen. wie- 
oa: 331), later mioduar, 805 f, a, 2a. 
ewtov (imv. mle & po. wide Ar. Vesp. 
1489, [r. inf. meévae Hipp.,] 813 ¢') ; 
ae TWKAL, 1 €mr ope 310d, érd0ny °F. 
Causal, morifw & 

maroKw rik}, give to drink, po. 
or 1.3 aio, (ao. &. Hipp., m. 1.; ézi- 
oOnv 1. | 

mumparke |. (11k, wepa-, mpa- c?), 
& mépvnpu n® po., sed ; [wepdora, -dw 
321s, &. 454, ao.;] TETPAKA, ~ocul 
[semepnudvos ©, 58], 3 f. werpdoouat, 
Vii. 1. 36, érpadény, f. 1.: in Att., ch. 
supplied in pres. by rwAéw, & in fut. 
& aor. by drodwcouat & areddunv. 

twintew (r} c?, rer-, softened rec-, 
ef. 143b, mre- c*) fall; merodtpar 
305 d []. -ouac], 2 a. recov [érerov 
D. 169 b, éreca m. 1., Rev. 1. 17; 
wémToka 312c, rémrnka l., 2 pf. pe. 
po. [werrews or -nws 325d] mwerrws 
320 d, Soph. Aj. 828. Po. cog. rityw 
or -éw Eur, Sup. 285. 

TAAdLw (j%, mayy-) cause to wan- 
der, po. or |. +, M. mwrafopar wan- 
der ; aThdygouar, érdayéa, m. |.; 
emrdyyOny, a. 2. Usu. mravdw. 

mracow shape, M.; “trAdocw, m. 
]., ao. ii. 6. 26; wémdaka L., -cuae, 
érddcOny, Pl. Rep. 377 °b, Sfx. 

wrEKW (b1, wrax-) plecto, plico, 
PLAIT, twine, M. po. or 1.3 wAEE@ mM. 
]., ao.; [©mérAoya or °-exa 312 ¢, 
Hipp. ] rémdeypar, érréxOnv f., 2 a. 
emhaxyy (v. Ll. -éxnv), f. 1. 

twréw (f1, wreF-, mrev- £2) sail, 


TABLES. 








mpiacbat § 50. 
42.9, 309 b; mretdoopat & whevood- 
uar305d,v. 7. 8, 1. 10, -owl., €rdevca ; 
mémevKa, -opat, -cOnv, f. 1.: [1. & 
po. TAG, tAWcomal, wérrwKa, Ke., 
114, Hdt. 8. 10,5; 2a. row 313 b, 
Cy, 15, pt. emt-rrws Z. 291.] Der. 
wrwtfw, Th. 1. 13, wrotfouae |. 
TARTo (i! »TAAY-, wAny- g) strike 
(pr. ch. ep. w. éx-or ért), AL.; twAVE@, 
m.1., ao., [2 a. wémdyyov m., émé- 
, | arhapyon, 284 e]; 2pf. wéarAnya, vi. 1. 
5, -yuat, 3 f. memdjEoua, Ar. Eq. 
272, érdhyOnv r., 2 a. emdiyny (e- 
eraynv, xat-erAdynv) f.. Cog. éx- 
wAHyvuuat, Th. 4. 125. See rérrw. 
tive (2, rr\tv-) wash clothes (cf. 
ovw, vitw); wAVVS m., Cwrdiva ™M.; 
wémrdvpar, €mdvOnp (1. -tvOnv) f., 304a. 
avéw (fl, aver-, mvev- £7, mvi-, 
142°) breathe, blow, 309 b; amved- 
copat & mvevooduac 305d, Ar. Ran. 
1221, -cw 1., Ervevca ; ©mwétvevKa, 
-cuat or -uae l. [werviuac pret. am 
wise, Q. 877, imv. wérvio 331 b, 
Theog. 29, &c.], °émvedcOnv 1., °F. 1. 
Cp. dva-rvéw recover breath [2 a. 3 s. 
du-mvver, 136, Q. Sm. 9. 470, tmv- 
du-mvve X. 222, nude 2 a. m. Gp- 
voto 314b, w. 349; La. p. dumrviy- 
Onv n}, BE. 697]. Cog. rourviw puff, 
379 c']; mvtokw or tutcow rx} el, 
make wise, ch. E. , Aisch.; [1 a. or ipf. 
3.8, émivugcey &. 249 3] exwtabny I. 
Tvty@ (g, mviy-) Choke, -Vusdutie 
esp. cp. W. dmd+ CavlEm m., a0. a; 
mwémviyuwat, Ar. Vesp. 511, 3 f. ©7e- 
mviéouae l., érvixOny |., 2a. emviryny f 
modéw desid ero, desire, miss, M. rv. 
ToOhow m., eriOnoa & -eoa 310d; 
TerdbnKa ]., -mae 1., €ro0%Onpv 1. 
Trowdopat punish ; -doouat 310 a. 
Tovew, oe (-éowl. +), &e, Zabor. 
mopite (z (2%. Top- ) supply, M.; to- 
plow, -10, m., emdpioa m., 2a. po. 
7 opov [zremope’v, v. 1. wemapetv, 284 e, 
Pind. P. 2° 105¢) memdptKa, -o mat 
(3s. wémrpwrat it is fated, =. 329, pt. 
tmempwuevos, Mem. 2. 1. 33), Sarapl- 
aOnv f. Cog. Topavv. 
TOPT Ae | fasten ; cj. w. a or y, 310. 
Tparow (i}, rpay-) do |1.rpjcow], 
M. exact ; mpage M., A0.; TEMPAXA, 
2 pf. rémparya have far ed, -yuat, 3 f. 
mempdtouat, Ar. Av. 847, ‘tmpdx Om f. 
tplacbar buy ; see 451 & wvéouat, 





§ 50. mpopnteva 


Tpopyteiw, -evow, prophesy ; aug. 
émpog- or mo0ed-, 282c, N.T., Lxx. 

mrdovypit (7, wrap-) sneeze, iii. 
2.9, A. 1.; @rrapa, usu. 2a. érra- 
pov, p. 541, "Tan. Hipp. ]; érrdpnp. 

nrhoow (i1, mra-, mTaK- 0, TTHK- 

g) cower, crouch ; artigo | Re: Tae 
Cérraxoy, Asch. Kum. 252[3 d. cara- 
mryrny 314¢, 9. 136]; errnXe, -1Ka 
1., [2 pf. pt. wemrnas 325d, &. 354, 
ef. twirtw.| Cog. mrwcow, A. 371, 
[rrwoxdsw, A. 372.] 

arioow i*, pinso, pound ; értica, 
Hat. 2. 92; érricpan, -o Om I. 

Trbpopat fear, Be yy 2a. éxripny. 

wrvooew (i1, mrvy- or mruy- d?) 
fold, M.; °mriém*m., ao.; érrvypas, 
Hier. 2. 4, (or weNT- 280 ¢, ) Cémrrv- 
xOn», [2 a. °érriyny Hipp. | 

mrvw (i) spuo, spit; mwrvow m. 
ao. @., Soph. Ant. 653 ; tnrua. |, 
-oOny, "f, 1, (2 a. éxriny Hipp.] 

muvOdvopar (n°, mvd-, mevd- h), 
po. tevOoua, inquire, hear; wevoro- 
av (Yr. -odua 305d), 2 a. érvdduny 
metv0- 284e, Z. 50]; wétrvopar 


P, § 146, 93d. 


patve (h, pav-, pas- ) sprinkle, po. 
& 1. +; pavo, Espava [imv. pdooare 
v. 150], °m. 1.; C€5payKa Lxx., -acuae 
[3 Pp: tapddaras, -T0, 329 al, idubyy, 

parte (t, pap-) stitch; “pda, 
eppaya m.; Eppaupuar, Dem. 1268. 2, 
2a. eppddny, Eur. Bac. 243, °f. 1. 

pelo Gj? » pey- ©, see épdw) do, 
po. +; peo, éppeta Pl. Leg. 642, 
po. <a 171, Eur. And. 838 ; [éppé- 
xOnv, I. 250. } 

péw (£1, pek-, pev- f2, pu- 142°, ef. 
Lat. ruo) flow; pevorop.at, -ow |., 
éppevoa, but more Att. pvycopar, 
éppinv (Ff. & a. p., or f. m. & nude 
2a. a.); ép6vyqna 311 c, Isoc. 159 d. 

pyyvupe (n’, Fpay-, pay- 141, pyy- 
g@) BREAK, J/,; Pago [m.], £bhnka m3 


CZ3snxeL., 2 pf. éppwya am broken, 
312¢, EsSayua Yr., -xOnv r., 2a. €p- 
pay f.: po. & 1. phoow beat. Cog. 
pdoow & apdccw, -Ew, smite; frango. 


ppyen v, shudder, po. +; pryjow 

2 pf. pret. priya P. 175. Cog. 

iryse, -oow, shiver (inf. peryov or 
pryotv 324 b); pplocw q. V.; frigeo. 


VERBS. 





87 


, - 
okedavvd pt 


flare & purréw (t12, pup-) throw; 
fiter. pirrackov 332e;] phpw ao., 
[2 a. éppidor 1.5] BPP ~pyucae [inf 
pepipGat 159 et", 3 f. yeadicat ki, 
-ipOny °f., 2 a. ae f. 1. Cog. pe- 
TTA ew 379 b, épelrw q. Y. 

Pvopat (ch. v) = éptoua draw to 
one’s self, protect (also in og yet. 
in prose) ; pUo~opat, Th. . 63, a0. 3 
EppboOnv 1. Nude ipf. 3 s. &ppiro 
Soph. O. T. 1352, [3 p. piraro 329 a, 
=. 515, pr. inf. pis0ac O. 141; iter. 
2s. pUokxev 332, 323c, Q. 730. | 

povvupe (n°, po-) strengthen; “pdorw 
l., 0.3 &ppwuat (imv.tppwoo farewell, 
Cyr. 4. 5. 33), éppwoOny, Th. 4. 72, f. 1 


a 


caipw (h, gap-) sweep; éonpa, 
Soph. Ant. 409 ; 2 pf. pret. wéonpa 
grin, Ar. Pax 620. Cog. capdw 1. 

codmifea (j°%, cadreyy-) sound @ 
trumpet; éoddrvyéa 571b; late cad- 
tiow (-v@), 1 Cor. 15, 52, ao., °ce- 
odA\miopat & S-vypat, 849 a. 

[rad & ode, save; see cdbfw. 

céaorwi, pack; [°o&iow ao. Hipp., | 
écaka 349a, Ge. 19.11; cécoayua, 
Ib., éodxOny 1. 

e6uk ow sift, 1. & 1.3; éonoa, &e. 

oPévyvp. (n8, oBe-) quench, M. be 
quenched, go oul; cBérw, ao. a. m., 
f. m. ©oByooua 310d, (as mid., 2 a. 
éoByv 45h, 313d", I. 471, & pf. 
°éoBnKa), toBecua, -oOny, f. 1. 

oelw, -Tw, wérrerKa,, &e., shake, 44. 

TeVOPAL & dopa, Ame Vesp. 458, 
(ceF-, cev- £2, ct- 142°, ce- f1, oo- 
114,) rush, hasten, po. (3 8. cedrac 
326e); 2a. m. éovunv 313d; éeovdnv+. 
[A. wevw 1., drive, urge; 1 ao. éo- 
ceva mn. 306a, 171 (1. ©-evoa); pret. 
trovupar 284d, 2a. 3s. dw-ecootd ? 
Hel. 1. 1. 23, Lac. for drecv7. | 


one (g, car-) rot, trans.; ono 
Sao.; 2 pf. intrans. céonta, B. 135, 
Civ. 5. 12, -uua, eondOny I., 2 a. 


éodmny, Hdt. 3. 66, f. 1. 
civopat harm; iii. 4. 16; [ouwh- 
gopwar 311, Hipp., egivduny, 1d.) 


oKarTa (t, cxap-) dig; oKdpo 
apis. 2] eee Isoc. 298 a, -umas, 
Sink Ie 2a. éoxagpyy, “f. 1. 


oKeSdvvipe (n°, oxeda-) scatier (as 


88 oxedavvipe TABLES. Tapaoow § 50. 
sub., O:ackeddvviot, -vTat, 316 ¢) ;!sterno, STREW, ch. po., I., orl, M. 
cKeddcw, -@, 305b, ésxédaca ©m.;! (also 1. cropévviuar); oropéow, Att. 


éoxédacuat, -oOnv, f. 1. Cog., ch. po. 
or 1., oxldvnue n? b, [keddvvime e}, 
Kidvnut +, oxeddw, xeddw, xedalouat. | 
oKéd\dw (b! 1, cxad-) dry, parch, 
ch. po. or 1., AZ. become dry ; TKedho 
1. [€oxnrta WY. 191]; as mid., 2 ao. 
CécxAnv c® (r. Ar. Vesp. 160) & pf. 
éoxAnka, (so f. mm. oxANoomat 1.) 
oKeTTTOMaL t, specio, view; oKepo- 
patao.; tokeppat, 3 f. éoxéYoua, Pl. 
Rep. 392 c¢, éoxépOqv y., 2a. °écké- 
wavy fl In Att, thes pracecipt, 
were usu. supplied by oxotréw v?, of 
which the other tenses were later. 
Cog. cxotedw, [oxomid fw. | 
opde smear, 120g: ésunoa m. 
opvxe (cf. smoke) burn, po. or ly; 
Cécuvéa, I. 653 ; Ugeuuyiatk Cn Oap, 
Theoc. 8. 90, 2 a. Séopiyny d?2. 
cdopat hasten, po.; see cevouat. 
ora draw, -ow, totaka, &c., 307. 
ote(pw (bl h, orap-) spargo, scat- 
ter, sow: omepa, éorecpa |r. 1.]; 
étorrap«a, |., -puar, Ages. 1. 30, -pOnv?, 
2a. éomdpny, Th. 2. 27, f. 1. 
oméviw pour a libation, M. inake 
a treaty ; omelow m. 156, ao. v. 55; 
Clomeka 1., (éorevd-mat, eomevouac 
148, 156) omecouan, Th. 4. 16, -cOnv 1. 
omev0w & otrovdatw, hasten, 114b. 
orate (j7, cray-) drop; ordge |., 
ao.; [Céoraypuat, B. 271, ] °-xOny, 2 a. 
Ceorayny |. 
oreBo or oriBw tread ; oretpa |., 
Sao., Soph. ; €or Bnuar311, 1d. Aj. 874. 
ore Xo h (or orixw) walk, po. or 
.3 (Céoreéa, 6. 277, 2 a. Eorixov IL. 
288. Cog. ortxdouat, B. 92, A. 1. ] 
otéd\do (b1 1, crad-) fit out, send, 
AL; ered, m.1., Zrrevda m.; EoTadka, 
“Amat, Ui. 2.7, -AOnvr., 2a. Eoradny ©f. 
orépye love; oréptw, m. 1., a0. A; 
[2 pf. te-ropy, Hdt. 7. 104, dorep- 
yuwar Emped., | éorépyOnp 1. 
orepéw & oreplare (vowe, 
deprive ; 
v. 262 2); éorépnka, -uat, -Onv f., 2 a. 
po. eorépny f., Eur. Ale. 200, 622. 
Also orép& ?, orépopat be deprived of, 
want, (f. orep®, orepoduar, unless 
these are alw ays ct. pr.) 
[oredpar stand to, 326e ; see torn] 
erépyupe (n 7, orop-, oTope- V) 


oTep-) 


orepyow m., eoTépyoa [-Eca. | 


“oropa, éoripera mr., &. 50 5 éordpe- 
owas l., -o Oy. Also orpdvvope (oT po- 
he oTparw, m.1., (CoTpwwicw r. 
Luc.,) éstpwoa, m. 1.; totpoxa |., 
~[LaLl, Th, 2. 34,8 byl, fa. 
otpédw (b1, orpag- ) twist, turn, M.; 
ortpépw m., 20.; “€orrpodal., éorpap- 
fat, iv. 7. 15, éorpépOny rx. in Att., 
KE. 40, [-4bOnv D.-i.5) Die éorpapay 
f., iii. 5. 1. Cog. orpwpdw & orpopéw 
ch. po., 355a 5; orpeBddow, Tpérw. 
oruyéw (v, orvy-) hate, po., 1., or 
l.; orvyjoopat will be hateful, Soph. 
On Tesbi oe eorbynoa, Eur. Tro. 705, 
[éoruga, X. 502, 2 a. Eorvyov x. 1133] 
errvynka, ~pat ls -Onv, Eur. Ale. 465. 
cupi{a & cvpitre |[-icdw D. 170a] 
pipe, whistle, cf. susurro ; ovpttw m. 
1, a0. a., & ouptorw (-1d) ao. |, 349 a. 


cipw g, drag, M.; cvpa 1., écvpa, 
© Asch. Pr. 1065, m. hy °oéoupka. |., 
°-puat 1, 2a. eatin, Cf. i 


chato & oparre (3491, j, opay-) 
slay ; opdtw, ao. a., ©m. r. 1. 8. 295 
éEcpaypua, dr. 45, LeOns r, Hdtsctasd, 
2a. espaynp f., Eur. Ph. 933: 1. ply. 
espaxew Dio C. See ga-. 
| odddrq (1, cfad-) fallo, trip, de- 
ceive ; THAAG M., EcpPyra, 2 a. Eoga- 
Nov m. 1. ort; %odadrxa |., -Awar, 
-Onv 1. v., 2a. Eoparnv f., Th. 6. 80. 

watw (z, cao-, gw- c!) save, M.; 
caorw m., 20.; c€owKea, Isoc. 410 ¢, 
-wat, oftener -cuat, éowOny f. [Ep. 
oade, -dow, A. 83, &c.; pr. 7mv. 2s. 
& ipf. 3s. (cdoe, ct. cdov, 4, 322 ¢c) 
cdw v. 230, IL. 363, sub. 2s. (cadns, 
caois, oqs, 322c) cdws, 3s. bw, I 
681, 424 (v. l. cdys, oon, as fr. cdw): 
ct. odo t. 430. ] 


T. 


[rTa-, Tay- 0, TAKE, seize, ef. tango, 
relvw: imv. 2 s. (rae, cf. 120g) rH 
=. 219+, 2p. r#re Sophr. 100; 2a. 
pt. terayav 284e, A. 591.] 

tapacow (i!, rapax-) disturb; 
Tapdgw 7., 0. a.; Terapaxe. |. (pret. 
intrans. Térpnxa e7 (-Tpaa-, ct. -Tpn-), 
H. 346], rerdpaypa, erapdxOny f.: 
Opdcowe?!(rpaa, Apa, 159h"), €0paka, 
Asch. Pr. 628, Pl. Parm. 130d, -x On» 


| 





Seo 


a 


§ 50, Tagow 

Taro, -Ew, Téeraxa, (lic. 4. 5, &c., 
arrange, 39; rerdxara, érerdxaro, 
reradioua, Th. 3. 13, 5. 6, 71, °ray7- 
gouarr. |. 

TeOytra (d1, dad-, 312a) be amazed, 
woe pret., po; I., or L., 6 °168 ; 
2a. érapov d!, w. 12. Cf. @drrw. 

relyw (11, Ta-, Tev- b! n) tendo, 
stretch, M.; teva “m., éTEwa m.; TE- 
taxa 304a, -wat, A. 19, éradny f. 
[Cog. ravia +, -vow, &c., nude pr. 
3s. TdvuTa, P. 390, 393; TiTalvw, 
B. 390, ao. pt. rirjqvas. See ra-. | 

TEAEw, -Eow, -d, TeTEMeKa, Pl. Apol. 
20a, &e., finish, 42g. Cog. TedreSsu, 
Teherdw, TeNeVTAW, & probably 

Tté&\dXw (b!1, rad-) perforin, raise, 
({po., exc. in comp., ch. w. dvd, év, or 
éri,) M.; “redo, °m. 1., erecta ©m.; 
Créradka |.; Sréradwar, Cyr. 5.5.3: 
po. TeACw wrise, be, Kur. And. 783. 

Tépve (n, Tau-, Teu- b) cut, [rd- 
pyvw BE. 1. B., Hdt. 2. 65,] AL; tewe 
Cm., 2a. érauov m., T. 94, more Att. 
érexov m., Th. 6. 7; rérpyka 308, 
-wat, 3f. reruyTopaL, ETUNnOnYf. [Cog. 
THHYO, -Ew, ao. a., m. 1, 2a. de 
érTuayov 7. 276; 2a. p. éeruayny II. 
374, -jrynv 1. Heyne & Bekker read 
réuer, as pr., N. 707.] 

réptw (b, raom-) please, satisfy, 
M.; tépipw, m. po., ao. a. [m. v., 2a. 
Mm, éraprounv, Terapriunv 284e, T. 
19 ;] éréppOnv, Mem. 2. 1. 24, f. 1., 
[éerdppOny £. 99, 2 a. érdpmryy, 6. °47, 
sub. 1 p. rpameiouev c®, 323c, 326d, 
I. 441.] 

[repratvw (n°, rep-, Tepo- 0) torreo, 
dry (pr. 1.), AL. & tépropar 7. 124 ; 


répow |. 152d, ao. a. m. 1., éréponva | 


Il. 529 ; 2a. p. érépony §. 98.] 

[rérpov & dretpov, 2 a. as fr. rep- 
Jind, 284 e, a. 218, Hes. Th. 610. ] 

Srerpatvw (ri n*, rpa-), 1. rirpdw 
& °rirpnut, terebro, bore; teqoe |., 
ao. a., °m. |, |°rerpavéw Hdt. 3. 12, 
érérpnva, e. 247,| °m. Ar. Th. 18, 
érérpava 1., 152¢; rérpnua, érphOnv 
& -dvOnv 1: tirpatvw & rerpivw |. or ?. 
Cog. ropéw, TirpdoKw, q. V. 

revo (h, rvx-, Tux- d2) prepare, 
make, po.+, M.; reb&w rm., ao., [2 a. 
Tétukov m. 284e 3; Térevya, as p. mL. 
423, -yuar +, B. 63, 3 f. rerevEoua, 


M. 345, érevxOnv 1. +,] Térvypwar, &. 


VERBS. 


TET O 89 
9, Eur. El. 457, érix@nv. Cog. rirv- 
oxo ¥1 k® po., ruyxdvw, rikrw: [pf. 
inf. TeTevxjo0at to be armed, x. 104.) 

THKw (g, Tax-) melt, THAW ; THE 
[m. Hipp.], érnéa [m. 1.]; 2 pf. 
intrans. réryka, iv. 5. 153 rérnyyae 
L., érjxOny v., 2a. érdxny, f. 1. 

[tve- grieve ; 2 pf. pt. rerinas 325 d, 
I. 13, pf. p. 2d. rerinoOov, pt. reru- 
nwévos, O. 447, 437. | 

TtOnpu (r+, Oe-), put, Ohow, TEéaK2, 
Mein. 4. 4. 19, &e., 45: late riOéa, 
TiIngoua!, €rlOnca. For the pass. (not 
found in Hom.), xefuac is often used. 

tlktw (bt, rex-) beget, bring forth, 
pr. 7. po.; Téopar (po. réEw, ao. .; 
for texetoOat see 305 a), 2 a. Erexor, 
m. po. A. 59; téroxa Ven. 5. 13, 
réreywat (or -oypat ?) 1., éeréxOny, f. 1. 

TiLaw, -now, &c., honor, 42: rere- 
unooune Lys. 189. 11; for f. p., usu. 
Tiynnooua. Cog. Tiw, Tivw, TYynwpéw. 

viva (7 E.; n1, ri-) pay, expiate, 
M., ch. po. or 1., take payment, pun- 
ish; Tow m., ao.; TéTLKA, ©-cuat, 
CéricOy: a'so M. rivuyat (less cor- 
rectly rivvuwar) po., 1., or 1., T. 260, 
(A. 1.) Po. tlw (¢) pay honor to, 
m.¥.; [tiow, ao. + ; pt. TéTiuévos v. 28.] 
tTitpoocKw (11k, rpo-) wound [r. 
Irpwb», b. 293]; tedce [m.], ao. a3 
tétpwxa |., -wa, ii. 5. 33, 3 f. rerpudb- 
gouat |., érpwOnv f. Cog. ropéw. 

TtXaw (c5, Tad-, rada- u, cf. Lat. 
tul-i) endure, dure, ch. po., pr. very 
Hs tTARTOMAL (1. TAATwW & raddsw), 
érhnoa |. [érddacoa, P. 166, m. 1.], 
2a. €rdnv 313 b, A. 94, Cyr. 3.1.2; 
| rér\qKa. Ar. Pl. 280 [2 pf. 1 p. ré- 
Thayer, opt. &e. Terralynv, TéThale, 
| TeTAdvat, TeTANWS, 2 plp. 1 p. érérda- 
per, 320 e, 325d, v. 311, 18, 23, I. 
373.] Cog. rokudw, [érdéw or -evw 1.] 

[ThHYyo, -Ew, cut, po.; see Téuvw. | 

(Cropéw (v, rop-) pierce, pr. r., 
Hom. Merc. 283; °rophew r., ao., 
2 a. éropov, A. 236; rerdpnuas 1.3] 
redupl. f. reropjcw 284g. Cog. To- 
pevw, TLTPOKW, TETPAlVe. 

tpérw (b1, rpam-) turn [1. rpdrel, 
| M.; tpépw m., ao., 2a. [érpamov, HK. 
187| m.; térpopa, Ar. Nub. 858, 
later rérpagda Dinarch. (cf. rpépw), 
Lrérpayina, 3f. °rerpdwouai, erpépOny 
[1. érpdpOny], 2 a. érpdany usu. as 











90 TpeTre 


m., f. 1. Tpérw has the six aorists, 
as, less surely or less simply, ayyéA- 
hw & wAHoow. Po. cog. TEwrdw, Tpo- 
TéwW, 3D a, TpaTéw. 

tpéedw (il!, Opad-, Oped- b) nowr- 
ish |D. rpadw|, M.; (Tpépow 296 b;) 
Ope m., a0., [2 a. E7Tpador usu. 
intrans. y. 28 ;| térpopa y. 237, 1. 
rérpapa Polyb. (cf. rpétw), ré@pap- 
pat (reOpaddGar Pl. Gorg. 525 a, v. 0. 
terp-), €0pépOnv Kur. Hec. 351, oft- 
ener 2a. érpagny, f. 1. 

Ttpexw (d!, Opex-, Spau- x) run; 
Spapotpar (r. dpaud & OpéEw, comic 
C@péEouar Ar.), €OpeEa po. r., 2 a. 
édpamoy ; °SeSpapynka 311, 2 pf. po. 
Cdédpoma, €. 412, Sdedpdunua. Cog. 
Tpoxasw, Vil. 3. 46, (Tpwxdw, dpoudw. | 

tpéw fear, flee; erpeca, i. 9. 6. 
Cog. terreo; rpéuw [Tpouéw v2 +] tre- 
mo, TREMBLE. 

Tpipo g, rub, tplbw, “rérpida Ar. 
Lys. 952, rérpimyae [3 p. Terpidara 
300c, Hdt. 2. 93], &&, 38, 39. Cog. 
Teipw tero ; TpUw, Tpvxw: tribulo. 

tpl{w (j7, rpry-) twitter, gibber, 
no, tor 1, -@. 5 3 erpeta lis 2 pe. 
pret. térpuya, B. 314.. An onoma- 
tope, like rpvgw murmur. 

Tpaye (b® h, tpay-) gnaw, eat raw 
food ; tpd€opar, Symp. 4. 8, [° ézpw- 
éa,] 2a. Erpayov: ©rétpwypat. 

TvyXave (n%, rux-, Tevx- h) hap- 
pen, hit; rev€opar, ao. 1. r., [érv- 
xnoa 311, A. 106,] 2 a. éruxov; Te- 
tixnka, x. 88, Th. 1. 32, later rérev- 
xa, Srérevypae 1., CérevxOnv 1. Cog. 
revxw q. V.; [D. 1 a. éroooa, Pind. ] 

Tunre (t, Tu7-) strike, M. plangor, 
mourn; tumrqow 311, Ar. Pl. 21, 
m. ¥., [rUww 1.,] érupa, N. 529, m., 
later érémrnoa Aristl., 2 a. érumor r. 
Eur. Ion 767 [redupl. 284 e] ; rerv- 
aryka l., réruupat, N. 782, Hat. 3. 
64, rervaryuac l., erumTnOnv & ervpOny 
]., 2a. érérny po. or 1., Q. 421, f.? 
Of the verbs signifying to strike, the 
Att. use of rU77w is especially in the 
pres. system; of wardoow, in the 
aor. act.; & of rAjoow, in the perf. 
pass. & compound systems ; while 
maiw has a freer range of the tenses : 
Ilardéac ) rAnyjvat, to strike or be 
struck, Aristl. Rh. 1. 15. Torre. ., 
kal. . mardéas Lys. 136. 22. 


TABLES. 


ene § 50. 
Tipe (dg, big-) fumigate, smoke ; 
Teva r., TEOUUpat, 2a. Ser¥pyy OF. 


¥. 


[dAdo ululo, HowL, bark, mr. 9:] 
vagkw po., vidoow |L., dr\aKxréw, v. 13, 
Ven. 3. 5, [tiaxdw & braxridw 1. ] 

trr-trxveopat, widertake, promise, 
A. ry. 1.; tro-cyjoopat, 2 a. br- 
ecxounv ; bm-éoxypar, br-eoxeOnvT. : 
po. or I. bricxoua. See éxw. 

“vo rain, 571 d,e; "vem |m. as p. 
Hdt. 2. 14], boa; °iouac 307d, Ven. 
9. 5, tcOnv, Hat. 3. 10. 


®, 


[ha-, dev- b1 n, kill, +; paca l., 
2 a. éredpvov c?, 284e; rédaun, EH. 
531, -opac |., 3 f. repjooua, O. 140: 
l. rwépvw, whence some accent 2 a. 
pt. as pres., wépvwv.| Cog. opagw. 

jen ae epayov, see éobiw eat. 

atva h, dave, épayka © Dinarch., 
&e., show, shine, M. appear, 40; as 


pavecke 3322. Po. cog. [pacivw, . 
2,| f. (paerw) pavO? Ar. Eq. 300 ; 
[paw, pl. p. répara 2, 3 f. repyoeras 
P. 155, cf. pa-;] paé@w, Soph. El. 
824; mipatoxw, dr. 442, Asch. Ag. 23. 
Cog. nul say, Sans. bhami 271 d*. 

pelSopar (h, pid-) spare; heloopar 
ao., [Tepd7joouat, 2a.reprdduny, 284 f ; 
mepiyuat |, 311,] wépeopar |. 

gépRw feed, nourish, M. po.+, Pl. 
Criti. 115a; [2 plp. érepépBec Hom. 
Merc. 105.] Cog. 2, 

geow fero, BEAR, bring, AZ., [ime. 
2p. pépre 326 e:] fr. ot-x, f. ote 
Mm., a0. a. Tr, 1.2, [inf. dva-otece, et. 
dvgrat Hdt. 1.157, cmv. otoe 327 a ;} 
f. p. olc Ojoouae : fr. vex- x, éveyx- n¥, 
1 a. Hveyxa m., 306a, 2 a. HveyKov 
(preferred in inf. & pt.; but scarcely 
used in ind. exe. 1s. po., or in Mv. 
exc. 2s, Where 1 a. is r.: Eyo #rey- 
kov. “Hveyxas ot; Ar. Th. 742), m. 
not in ind. & r. Soph. O. C. 470 ; pf. 
évynvoya 28l1c, 312¢c, Isoc. 128d, 
eviveymat, AvéxOnv f., iv. 7. 12: [fr. 
évex-, E. & I. 1 a. jvecka m., 2 a. 
nvecxov Y. d. 178 3 Séviverypar, Hat. 
\8. 37, ©jvelxOnr.] Cog. dopém v?, 





eT eC 


v. l. 2 a. Epavoy m.+; 2 a. p. iter. 








§ 50. pépw 
-how (1. -€éow), &c. [pr. inf. pophvac 
335b, poprmevar 333e, O. 310] ; dpéw 
(po. 2a. imv. Ppés) ; | évelxouat. | 

devyw (h, puy-) fugio, flee; ped- 
Eopor & -otuar 305d, -gw l., ao. 1, 
||. f. puyoduar 305 a], 2 a. epvyor ; 
2 pf. mépevya, a. 12, | pt. reduyuévos 
a. 18,] épevxOnv 1. Cog. puyyavw 
isch. Pr. 513; [as fr. pugdw, 2 pf. 
pt. mepugires PB. 6, medugnas |., 1 a. 
p. pugnbets 1. ] 

pypt (da-), 45u, 2717s, & haoka, 
fa-ri, (a) say, affirm (this stronger 
sense belonging esp. to dacxw, & the 
fut., aor., & mid. fr. ga-); ipf. épa- 
oxov & (usu. as aor.) pny; MM. pr. 
[2 p. ddcbe x. 562, dmv. pdo 7m. 168, 
pacbw v. 100, inf. ddoOa +, Aisch. 
Per. 700,] pt. dduevos, Hel. 1. 6. 3, 
ipf. épauny ch. po. or |., A. 43; 
fee (opt. 1. r.), €pnoa (tmv. want- 
ing); pf. p. [3 s. méparae Ap. Rh. 
2. 500,| amv. 3s. repdcbw Pl. Tim. 
72e, °épdOny Arist]. Int. 9. 9: (b) 
fr. (Fep- x, cf. Lat. verbum) ép- f, 
pe- c® [pr. a. (1s. only) eipo h, v. 7, 
m.1., ipf. m. «. 542;] f. éo0, Sm. 1.; 
elpnxa 281, -uar, 3 f. elajooua: Th. 
6. 34, ép5nOnv, -é0nv r., [1. elpéO yy, | 
sub. pnda, &e., Hdt. 3. 9, f. pyPjcouat : 
(c) fr. (Fez-, Fec-h) eiw-, 1a. eira 306a 
(ind. 2s. & inv. exc. 2 s., esp. used ; 
opt., inf., & pt. r. in Att.), mm. 1. or 
]., oftener (exc. as above) 2 a. efzov 
(elrw, -oum, -é, -etv, -wv), °m.?1., 
{w. syllabic aug., @Fecrov, éevroy K. 
445, evra Pind. N. 9. 78.] (d) Cog. 
garif~w & pynulfw ch. po.; palvw show, 
q. V.; [eipéw, Hes. Th. 38 ;] épwrdw 
ask, q. v.; [érw |. r.; éor- 0, in pr. 
or 2a. imv. 2 p. éomere B. 484, pr. 
m. érrouat l.;| évérw q. v. 

e. The forms with $ omitted (45 u), 
het (3s. Hor Sap. 48], qv, h, are used 
for greater vivacity or the metre. 
Some refer them to a distinct root, 
akin to the Lat. aio. The subject 
follows, if expressed : fv & éyw, quoth 
I, Ar. Eq. 634; 4 8 és § 518f; 9, 
he spake, A. 219; mat, jul, mat, rai, 
boy! I say, boy! boy! Ar. Nub. 1145. 
(f) The pr. 2s. is usu. written ¢7s, 
as if ct. fr. pais, 120 g, [pfoGa 297 b, 
€.149; 3s. 7 fr. paei or Pyai, 103¢, 
Anac. 41; bD. dari, 3 p. parti, 328.] 


VERBS. 





ppvyw 9] 


(g) Pack is most used in the pt, 
to supply the place of dds (45 u). 
Hom. has only the ipf, N. 100. The 
pr. tad. isesp. rare. (h) The familiar 
forms from ép- & eiw- have associate 
presents, not only as above, but also 
in A€yw, ayopevw (ch. in comp.), &e. 

P0dve (ad E.; n}, pOa-) anticipate, 
M. \.; 0dow, Cyr. 5. 4. 38, oftener 
POjoopar 310d, Th. 8. 12, éplaca, 
Th. 1. 33, 2 a. €pOnv 313 b, A. 58, 
Th. 4. 4, [in. pt. POduevos E. 119 5] 
epOaka, ¢pddcbnp |. 

H0clpw (h, POap-, POep- b) corrupt, 
destroy, esp. cp. W. did, A. ; p8epo 
M., Epberpa, [f. “pOépow, N. 625, ao. 
]., 152d, °P@apdouar 1.;| epOapKa, 
CKur. Med. 226, 2 pf. @p@opa Ib. 
349, EpOapuat, 2a. €POdpny f. Cog, 

dive ni fin. & r. Pbiw, B. 368], 
decay, consume (usu. intrans. exc. mM 
fut. & ao.), ch. po, W.; p¥icoe [i E., 
m.,| ao. a. [m. 1., 2a. ©€pABov? q}, - 
e. 110 v.1.,] 2a. m. épGiuny 313 b, 


iEur. Ale, 414, sub. &e. [pOiwua, 


“ dbbiuny 816 ¢, 3s. POlcOw, bbicAat, | 
poiuevos: €pOixa ]., -uat, v. 340, -Onv. 
Cog. POwiOw po., POwéw 1., Pbéw ? 
Pir€w (v, Pidr-), -how, meplrAnka, 
&c., love, 42: [pidnus 335 b, pirec- 
o0a 297 b, dirjuwevar 333e, X. 265 ; 
la. m. éfidduny 152, E. 61.] 
bdrad-, 2 a. prado burst, Aisch. 
préyo flagro, burn; ddré—w, ©in. 1., 
ao. a. Aisch. Pr. 582; wépdeyuar l., 
EpréxOnv, 2a. “épreynv °f. 1. Der. 
preyédw po., P. 738, proyi fw. 
pokéw v2, -4ow, mepdsByka, &c., 
terrify, M. [& PéBoua BK. 532] fear. 
ppafte (j1, ppad-) tell, M.; dpdcw 
[m.], ao., [2 a. wéppadov, éréppador, 
284e ;| wéppaxa Isoc. 101 a, -opac 
[° reppaduévos 148 b, Hes. Op. 653}, 
edpdcdyv. [Cog. vr. dpaddgw, Pind. | 
ppaccw & rv. dpdyvype (i, n7, 
gppay-| fence, M. dpdyriuar; m. 
Cdpatopar 1., éppata m.; 2 pf. © aé- 
ppaya (or -xa) 1., -yuwar, Th. 1. 82, 
eppaxOny, °f. 1., 2a. éppdynv l., f. 1: 
sometimes written dap for dpa, 145. 
dhpicow (i, ppix-) shudder ; dplto 
l., ao. a, m.1.; 2 pf. pret. wéppixa, 
A. 383, [ pt. reppixovras 326b.] Cog. 
(Fpry-, 139, 141) prvéw q. v. 
dptye g, frigo, roast ; [ppdv§a] ao. ; 


92 ppiye 


méppvypat, Th. 6. 22, éppvxOny 1., 
éppvynv 1. or le: 1. pptcow. Cog. 
doyvupe ni, 1. [pwyw D., pwc I. ; 
épwia & -woa Hipp.;] &e. 

puvrdaoow (i, Pudrak-), -§w, © wepd- 
Aaya, &c., guard, M. beware ; [pr. 
a. Wmv. 2p. Tpo-piraxGe 326e;] 2 pf. 
meptraka |. Lxx. 

dipw g, mix, knead, M.; épipa |. 
[épipoa 152d, o. 21, m. 1.|; mépup- 
Hat, [3 f. reptvpovua 319,| éepvpOny, 
#isch. Ag. 732, 2 a. épipny ©f. 1. 
Cog. pipdw, -dow: [postyw & -voow.| 

otw (v0) produce, M. grow ; dice 
M., a0. t., 2.a0. Epiy (Piw, Piny 316¢, 
piva, pus, cf. €duv 45h) was born or 
made, became, hence am; mépvuxa 
pret., am (by nature), Th. 4. 61, 
ieeseor 326 b, 2 pf. 3p. rediace 
A. 484, sub. °repiw, pt. repviis, e. 
477,] Sépvdnv 1. v., 2a. Epviny, f. 1. 
Cog. pitetw, -etow, & ditiw, -tow, 
plant ; Lat. fui. 

doyant [-yo, -f0,]: see pptrve. 


>. 


© ydtw (j1, xad-, xad- d?) drive back, 
M. ch. £., cedo, retreat (so A. iv. 1. 
16); [Kkexa8Show 284 f, xdoouan, °exa- 
oa, Pind. N. 10. 129, m.+, A. 535, 
2a. xéxadov, m. A. 497.] 

xalve gape, 1. Anth.; see xdoKw. 

xalpw (h, xap-) rejoice, M.; xar- 
pyow 311b, Ar. Pl. 64, ao. 1., xa- 
potua 1. Lxx., [kexapjow, -couat, 
284f, 1 a. éxnpdunry, &. 270, 2 a. 
éxapounv 1, kexapdunv 284e, A. 256 5] 
Kexapynka, Hit. 3. 42, [ pt. cexapnas 
325d, H. 312,| kexdpnuae & xéxappac 
po., Eur. Iph. A. 200, El. 1077, éxa- 
pny, f. 1. Cog. xaplfouat gratify. 

[xav8dvew (n>, xad-, yavd- n3, xevd- 
b) contain, +3 (xevd-comar 156) xel- 
copa, o. 17, 2a. Exadov, A. 24; 2 pf. 
pret. kéxavSa, 6. 96.] Cog.’ 

XacrKw (k3, yav-), |. xaivw h, hisco, 
gape; “Xavotpar [xAjcoua ?], 2 a. 
éxavov, A. 182; 2 pf. pret. Kéexnva 
Ar. Ay. 264. Der. yaoxd gw 379 b. 
~ XéL@ (j, xed-) caco, comic +3 Xe- 
cotpar 305 d, “xéoouarr., Exeva m., 
2a. éxecov yr. 827 a; 2 pf. “Kéxoda, 
Kéxecuar; Ar. 

Xéo (f1, xer-, xev- £7, xt- 1427) 


TABLES. 





xpacw § 50, 
pour, ch. ep. w. éx, év, ovv, &e., IL, 
309b; f. °xéw or xe 305 f, b, m., 
[xevw 8. 222,] La. €xea m. 306,| Exeva 
m., H. 86, 63, 2a. m. exdunv 313b, 
A. 526 ;] SxéexuKa l., -uar, éxvOny f. 
(1. -€@nv f.): also x¥w 1. (xvow, &e.), 
xvvw 1., Acts 9. 22, xevw (pr.) po., 
ch. 1., (exevoa). Cog. xdw q. v. 

XAtdaw u, luxuriate, po. orl.; 2 pf. 
CKexaAtSa. [Cog. xéyAadda pret., Pind.] 

xorAda, -cow, &c., anger; M. xo- 
Adouat [yadopar c21, T. 29, xa@oouat, 
ao. A. 64] be angry ; pret. kexd\wpat, 
a. 69, 3 f. Kexod\woouae VY. 543. 

X6o & later xévvipe n®, heap up ; 
Xéow, a0. a. [m.].] ; “Kéexoxa, Dem. 
1279. 20, -cmat, éxwoOnv f. ; Cyr. 7. 
3.11, 16,17. Cog. xéw q. v. 

[xpatopéw v, avert, help, pr. |. Yr. 5 
Xpatopyoe, T. 296, ao. 2. 62, 2a. 
expatcmov, &. 66; notin Od.] Cog., 

Xpaw (xphow, &c., 310a, 307 e; 
xpders xpps 120g, 1. or |. xpas Hat. 
4, 155, &c.) to supply need, — 

a.) The need of another, by dend- 
ing ; M., qne’s own need, by berrow- 
ing : klyprpe rt, m. Kiypamac> [Xph- 
ow, Hat. 3. 58,] ao. a. m.; KeXpyKa 
]., ©-uat, Dem. 817. 2: 1. Kexypew. 

b.) The need of one who consults 
an oracle, by answering; M. one’s 
own need, by consulting an oracle: 
Xpdw, 12. xpdouar* XPHow N., ao. 
a.; KexpynKa Ll, -cwae or -uar, Hdt. 7. 
141, éxpjoOnv. Po. cog. xp7,fw, Eur. 

c.) One’s own need, by using what 
isrequired: J. ypéepar ypioopar 
ao.; Kéxprpat, Hat. 1. 42, éxpiobnr. 

d. Impers. yph (for xedec or nude 
xpiot, ct. pyui f), it supplies need, 
i. e. it is useful or necessary, it mast 
or ought to be; sub. xpy, opt. (xpe- 
b1) xpetn Asch. Pr. 218, inf. xpivac 
nude, & po. xp7v Eur. Hee. 260, pe. 
neut. & indecl. (xpdov, ct. 120 i) xpe- 
dv Th. 6. 18; ipf. 3 s. éxpiv 163 b, 
oftener xpfv 284¢; xphoe Hat. 7. 8. 
(e) Cp. daré-xpy [1. droxpa Hat. 9. 
79], it fully supplies need, 7 suffices 
or contents ; inf. dmo-xpiv Dem. 52. 
13, ipf. da-éxpn; &ro-xphoe, da- 
éxpnoe. [So I. dm-expéero, Kara-xpq, 
-xphoet, €x-xphoet, Hdt. 8. 14, 1. 164, 
3. 137.] (f) These or corresponding 
forms are also used personally : |Meg, 


§ 51. 


Xpaw 


xpjc0a you must, 297 b 3] am5-xp7n, 


-xpjrous:, Ar. Av. 1603, Pl. 484, | ypu 


[2&-éxpnre Hdt. 8. 70 ;] dzo-xpdoux 
content one’s self, Hdt. 1. 37. 

g. Forms fr. xpd sometimes agree 
in sense w. its cog. xpyte [E. I. xp7- 
tfw, -tow, 132, p. 121, 1. xpytcKoua, 
Hdt. 3. 117] need, wish, 414c: as, 
x79 Soph. Ant. 887 ; po. pret. xéxpn- 
par nerd, wish, Kur. Iph. A. 382, a. 
13, 3 f. Kexptoopa, Theos. 16. 73. 


xpi» anrint, M.; Xie m., ao.;' 


kéxpuxa |. Lxx., -couar or “tae 307 €, 
Cyr. 7. 5. 22, éxpicOny, f. 1. Cog., 
xXprto & 1. xpavviue (z, n°, xpo-) 
touch, color; éxpwoal.; “Kéxpoxa l., 
Kéxpwruat, Kur. Med. 497, éxpaabnv, 
f. 1. Cog. xpotfw po., xpwrifw, xpat- 
vw (X2aF-) Xpdw or xpavw graze. 
[xdopar, be angry; see xoddouan. | 


Vv. 


Yaw, “pjow, &e., rub, 120g. 
Cog. Wax» rub, Yatw touch, padrw 


VERBS. 





@veopat 93 
Woxe breathe, cool ; bw ao.; mwé- 
uxa |. 280c, E~vypwar, -xOnv f., 
Ven. 5. 8, 2 a. éwexny or -ynv d?, 
Aro Nabiial, foi. Mat. 24272: 


2. 


ative g, be in travail, A. 269; 
late div ao., & ddwhow 311, Lxx., 
ao. @. Mm. p. 

O8éw (Vv, w0-) push, M.; ipf. éw- 
Jeov m. 279 b (G0- E., 1., 1, & vr. in 
Att.) ; dro om, & po. wOjow, m. 1., 
éwoa m. [oa m. E. 1., HE. 19], &Onoa 
Cm. 1.; S€ona 1., -cwar, Cyr. 7. 1. 36, 
-oOny f., (1. or L. ®opat, &oOnv.) Der. 
wsrigfoparjustle, Ar. Ach. 42. 

aveonat, v. 3.7, buy (pr. r. as pass. 
Pl. Pheedo 69 b); ipf. éwvedunv 279b 
(@v- 1., 1, & vr. in Att.); @vqropar 
Vil. 2. 38, éwrnoduny or evyncduny ch. 
L.; édvynpar as mid. & pass., Lys. 108. 
26, 211. 1, -Onv as pass.: 2a. fr. mpra- 
x, émpidunv 451, a. 430; 2 s. empl, 
mpiaco, mpiw, Ar. Vesp. 1440, Ach. 


twitch, ynraddw feel after. 870, 34. Cog. mirpdckw sell. 


Sl. Rewanks. a. In using the preceding List, it is important to 
observe carefully the punctuation, as showing with what words the ab- 
breviations, references, and various marks are connected; and also to dis- 
tinguish the small Roman letters of abbreviation (marked by periods, as f., 
l., r., for future, late, rare), from mere letters of reference (not so marked, 
though periods may follow them for punctuation). If the latter immedi- 
ately follow figures, they refer (excepts) to parts of sections or pages ; 
but otherwise, to the notation of stems in § 49, 340s. The articles on 
elul, pnul, and xypdw, have also division-letters. (b) If the abbreviation 1., 
r., E., I., or po. follows ao., f., or m., its force exteuds back to the pre- 
ceding word, unless arrested by [, (, or a comma. 


ce. Thus, in the paragraphs on oré\\w and ofdddw, | first denotes the 
union of consonant I with A in the stem, to form AA; while the follow- 
ing l. marks the form there noted, as date. “Eopadoy preceding is likewise 
so marked, as no comma intervenes, but not creA@: while éoradOny is 
marked as rare, and éog@adOnv as both late and rare. In the article on 
xéw, f1 denotes the dropping of F in the stem ; and f after 305, a part of 
the section so numbered ; while f. following is an abbreviation for future, 
showing that the Aor. éxv@nv and the late éxé@mv have corresponding 
futures, xvOjooua and yeAjcouar. It is also shown, that the Fut. xéw 
has only been found in composition ; and that the Fut. yevw is dialectic, 
oceurring in Homer. The sign + shows that yavddvw, though also enclosed 
in brackets, is not wholly excluded from the Attic (Ar. Ran. 260), The 
references to authors have been usually, but not exclusively, attached to 
the less familiar forms. Before a reference, © marks the word as there 
compound, though sometimes simple. See Notes on page 67. 


Interrog. 
Indefinite tocol, aliquot, some. 


Rel. Ind. 


Diminut. 
Augment. 
Demonst. 


. 


~Re 


Ey M™ Mee 


oe 


. 


COST HD OE WD De 


~ 


~ 


Co e 
,Oa 2 


» 


~» 


~» 


Sg, Seam a coy BL Oe 


on 
. 


TABLES. 


52. D. TABLE 


I. 
1. Cardinal. 


moco.; quot ? how many ? 


omécot, quotquot. 
dco, quot, as many. 
édiyo., pauci, fer. 
mo\Xoi, multi, many. 
Toco, tot, so many. 


els, pla, €v, unus, one. 
Sd0, dw, duo, two. 
Tpets, Tpla, tres, three. 
Técoapes, -a, quatuor, four. | 
mTévTe, quinque, five. 
€&, sex, six. 
érrd, septem, seven. 
6xTa, octo, eight. 
évvéa, novem, nine. 
déxa, decem, fen. 
évSexa, undecim, eleven. 
$Sexa, duodecim, twelve. 
tproKxaldexa, Sexatpeis, tre- 
decim, thirteen. [decim. 
TecoaperKaldexa, quatuor- 
tmevTexatsexa, quindecim. 
exkaldcxa, sexdecim. 
éertaxaldexa, septendecim. 
’ éxtaxaldSexa, duodeviginti. 
évveaxaldexa, undeviginti. 
elkoot(v, vigintiS twenty. 
‘eis Kal elkoot, elkooty eis, 
viginti unus, twenty-one. 
TpidcovTa, triginta, thirty. 
Treroapakovra, quadraginta. 
TevTHKOVTA, quinquaginta. 
eEjkovTa, sexaginta, sixty. 
éBSopnqKovta, septuaginta. 
dySorjkovra, octoginta. 
évevykovTa, nonaginta. 
éxaréyv, centum, a hundred. 
Staxdoron, -at, -a, ducenti. 
Tprakdowot, trecenti. 
TeTpakdoror, quadringenti. 








TevTakooLor, (uingenti. ) 


OF NUMERALS. 


ADJECTIVES. 


2. Ordinal. 


mooros; quotus? which in order? 
or, one of how many ? 

drécros, quotuscumque, whichsoever 
in order. 

d\uyooTbs, one of few. 

To\XoaTés, one of many, or, one fol- 
lowing many. 


TPOTOS, -y, -ov, primus, first. 
Sevrepos, -a, -ov, secundus, second. 
tpitos, -n, -ov, tertius, third. 
téraptos, quartus, fourth. 
Tésmrros, quintus, ji/th. 
éxtos, sextus, sixth. 
€BSonos, septimus, seventh. 
dySo0s, octivus, eighth. 
évatos, nonus, vith. 
Séxatos, decimus, tenth. 
évSéxaros, undecimus, eleventh. 
S8wdéxaros, duodecimus, twelfth. 
tpiokadéxatos, tertius decimus, 
thirteenth. 
Ter oapaxardekaTos, juartus decimus. 
TevTeKALOEKaTOS, quintus decimus. 
éxxardéxatos, sextus decimus. 
érraxadéxatos, septimus decimus. 
éxtwxardéxatos, duodevicesimus. 
évveaxardéxatos, undevicesimus. 
elxoords, Vicesimus, twentieth. 
elxoo-Tos TPOTos, unus et vicesimus, 
twenty-first. 
tpiakoorés, tricesimus, thirtieth. 
Texoapaxoords, quadragesimus. 
TevTHKooTSs, quinquagesimus. 
éEnxoords, sexagesimus, sixtieth. 
éBSopnnKkoords, septuagesimus. 
dySonKkoords, octogesimus. 
évevykoords, nonagesimus. 
éxatoords, centesimus, hundredth. 
Siaxoctocrds, ducentesimus. 
Tpiaxocloorés, trecentesimus. 
TeTpakootoe rds, quadringentesimus. 
TevTakoclorrés, quingentesimus. 


—— 


es is 


§ 52 


600 x’ éaxdorot, sexcenti. 

700 W émrraxdo.o, septingenti. 

800 w éxtakdorot, octingenti. 

900 ZF évaxdoror, nongenti. 
1,000 ja yxtAvor, -at, -a, mille. 
2,000 |B StoylAror, duo millia. 
10,000 .v pdpror, -ar, -a, decem 


NUMERALS. 


jefakootoerds, sexcentesimus. 
emTAKOoLOT TOS, septingentesimus. 
dxTraxoctocrés, octingentesimus. 
évakootogrds, nongentesimus. 
X"Avorrds, millesimus, thousandth. 
SirxtAtoores, bis millesimus. 
puptorrds, decies millesimus, fen- 


millia, ten thousand. thousandth. 
« Stopdprot, viginti millia. 
Pp Sexaxtopipror, centum 

millia, 100 thousand. 


20,000 
100,000 








Stopuptoorés, vicies millesimus. 
Sexaxtopuptoerds, centies millesi- 
mus, hundred-thousandth. 


3. Temporal. 4, Multiple. 
Inter. rocratos; on what day ? Augm. 7o\\am)ois, multiplex. 
1. (adOjpepos, on the same day.) amrA(dos)ots, simplex, simple, single. 
2. Sevrepatos, on the second day. SurAods, duplex, double. 
3. tpitatos, on the third day. tpitdots, triplex, triple. 
4. tetaptaios, on the fourth day. | terpamdots, quadruplex, quadruple. 
5. mwepmratos, on the fifth day. ‘mevtatrAovs, quincuplex, quintuple. 
6. éxraios, on the sixth day. (Eatrots, sextuple. 
7. €B8opatos, on the seventh day. értatdots, septemplex, septuple. 
8. dySoatos, on the eighth day. | Oxtatdots, octuple. 


5. Proportional. II. ADVERBS. 


Inter. rocamddows; how |mocdxis; quoties? 
many fold ? how many times ? 
Dim. d\uydKis, paucies, few 
[ fold.| times. 


Augm. rod\\amddows, many | rod\ddKcs, many times. 


da, semel, once. 

Sls, bis, twice. 

tpls, ter, thrice. 

TeTpakts, quater, fowr 
times. 


(Uros, zequus, equal.) 

SimAdovos, diplus, twof. 

TpiTAdotos, triplus. 

TeTpaTAGcLos, quadru- 
plus, fourfold. 

5. mwevtatAdotos, fivefold. | wevrd«is, quinquies. 

6. éamdac.os, sixfold. éEdikts, sexies. 

7. €wramdactos, septuplus. | érrdxis, septies. 

8 

9 

0 





i 
2. 
3. 
4, 


. oxratAdotos, octuplus. | éKTdxts, octies. 

. évveatrAdotos, ninefold. | évdxis, novies. 
Sexdkts, decies. 
elkoodxts, vicies. 
ékaTovrakts, centies. 


. SexatAdoros, tenfold. 
elkoratAdotos. 
100. éxarovratAdactos. 





1,000. ydAtomrAdctos. 
10,000. pvptomAdctos, 
10,000-fold. 


XtAvd«ts, millies. 
puptakts, decies mil- 
les. 


III. SuBSTANTIVES. 


Twogorys, quantitas, 
quantity, number. 

édrvyérys,  paucitas, 
Jewness. 

mo\Nérys, multitiido. 


évds, povas, monad. 
Suds, duad. 
tptds, triad. 
TETPaS, TETPAKTIS, 
quaternion. 
TELTAS, TEVTAS. 
eds, hexade. 
eras, €BSopds. 
éxtas, dySods. 
évveds, ennead. 
Sexds, decade. 
elkds, score. 
éxatovrds, century. 
XtAuds, chiliad. 
puplas, myriad, 


96 TABLES. § 53. 


53. E. PRONOMINAL 


Obsolete Primitives are printed in capitals. Poetic, Late, and Dialectic Forms are not marked. 
Latin equivalents occupy the 





























Negative. Relative. 
CO Oee—=N — 
ORDERS, ifs iL Live N; VI. 
CLASSES. Interrogative. Indefinite. Ob(Sub jjective. Definite. Indefinite. 
= { Positive, is; Tis, ILOZ ob(uH)res és qui bores 
2 | IlOz ; "AMOZ ov(un)damds domep ‘ONOS 
E } quis / 2 aliquis ov (Hu 7) dels bore quicumaque 
& % | Comparative, ee aa moTeEpos ov(un)dérEpos om dT Epos 
ime | uter ? uter ot(un)domdérepos 
po | Superlative, wéaTos ; [neuter érdoros 
3 Quantity, mdgos ; wooos éoos émécos 
By quantus ? aliquantus quantus quantus 
“& | Quality, — zrofos ; mos  ovrTidavds olos O7rotos 
= 5 qualis? qualis ov(uy)damvsds qualis  qualis 
Fi | Age, Size, amndikos; mnXlxos nALKos émnXtKkos 
ei | Country, zodamrdéds; émrodam és 
Day, TOCTAOS ; orooTa: tos 
(Whence, ddev; wobéy yurrobev 60ev ox aber. 
unde ? ausbev od(un)dausbev  evOev undecum- 
alicunde unde [que 
ot (un) derépwOev orrorépwlev 
_ | Where, Tou ; ov oU(uH)7rou ov, €vO0a = Srrov 
8 dod ot} (un) dauod ocaxod 
a 1 woe ; mobi otros nusquam 661, twa  d7dOc 
ie ubi ? alienbi ov(un)dausAc ubi ubiubi 
moTépwht ; usplam ovderépwht orrorépwOt 
Whither, ro! ; Tot ot (un) damor ot Orrot 
TOGE ; dot ot (un) damsce quo orice 
quo ? aliquo ; quoquo 
By ( TOTEPWCE ; o(un) der éowoe OT oTépwoe 
g 2 seeds or Place i § qua ? 7H oumn N WXe brn 
8 Told; auf ovdémn qua quaqua 
3 mocaxy; aliqua ov(un)dau7 ooax7 orocaxH 
g 3: Manner, &e., TOS ; Tws oU}(uun) mr ws ws ut Omrws 
quomodo? duds — od(un) dads quomodo utcumque 
Tolws , TOTWS olws OTrolws 
TOTEPWS ; ov(un)derépws  qualiter dzordépws 
Tocax as ; ob(ux) rw doax Os 
we ; Tw ov (un) démrw 
General, dre; mwoTé ot (47) ore ore omére 
g quando? aliquan- ot(un)dérore  =quum quanddque 
4 Specific, = rnvixa ; [do [nunquam dla or nvixa 
~ | Various,  jjuos ; ov(un)KeTe Huos, émrel Ownmos 
quando ? &ws, Sppa 
5. Number, TOOAKLS ; ovdevaKkts Oo aKLS OTroogdKts 
quoties ! D quoties quotiesque 











DERIVATIVE Ry moo brns quantitas, mwo.bT ns qualitas, TAuKOTNS, 
éreporns, TavTérns, ouoisrys, lodrns, obdévera, lawors, ddrolworts, dmoiwua, Ke, 





§ 53. 


PRONOMINAL 


CORRELATIVES. 


Of the Negative Forms, the Objective begin with ov-, and the Subjective with p:y-. 
space after or below some words. 








CORRELATIVES. 





7 


























Definite or Demonstrative. Universal. 
—= SSS SS tin XII. 
Vil. VIIl. IX. ». XI. Of Identity, 
Simple. Emphatic. Deictic, Distributive. Collective. Diversity, &c 
6, TOD od ros hic 65e hic mds omnis dus, a’ris 
€xeivos ovToat odl dupw &dXos 
Ne hicce hicce ambo alius 
E-Epos E€KATEPOS appstepos 
alter alteruter uterque 
EKAOTOS avréraros 
rogos tan- TogovrTos Tog ba 6€ 
Tuvvds [tus Tuvvodros Too od Ot 
rotos talis rovodros T0Lbg 6€ TAVTOLOS dwoos 
Exelviwos = ToLovToi T 010g OL omnigenus  ddAdotos 
THALKOS THrLKOUTOs §=©TndLKOabe Ounce 
mavrodamés dddodarés 
avonuepos 
ToGev inde Tovrddev éxdorobev wavT obey 6udbev 
évéev hinc évredev évOévde éxactaxd0ev wavtaxifey§ avrddev 
€xetOev hine hine éxd.repbev undique diAobev 
érépwhev inde inde é€xatépwhev dudorépwlev ddd\axdbev 
év0a hic évrad@a évodde {utrimque mavraxov 600, abrod 
éxe? illic hic hic éxactaxov  ubique adr\axod 
766. ibis ibi ibi é€xdoTobe wavTcOu avTdet 
€xeiOe évravii @de éxagraxi@: mavraxiet a&dXA0Pt 
ETEpwOt hic Exar épwht dpudotépwht adraxdOe 
évOdde eo § évravdot éxagTaxot mavrayor Ouoce 
éxeice hue quocumque avroce auréce 
illue eo éxaotaxoce twavraxice d&ddooE 
ETENWTE éxatépwoe  dudorépwoe addaxdoe _ 
TH ea TAUTY TOE wavTn 6 
éxelvy hac hac ubique ay 
illae éxaoTax7 TAvTAaXi ad\\axH 
TWs, ds ita orws @6de sic TAVTWS bus 
€xelvws ovTwal wot omnino avrws 
Tolws sic ToL@a be mavTolws Oolws 
ETEPWS ita taliter Exarépws dugoréepws woavrTws 
secus TOTAUTAX WS TavTax Ws d&dAws 
TQ, Tbows tot modis ardvu adXolws 
Tére tum EKAOTOTE 1AVTOTE, ddoTeE 
tune semper Scatravrés alias 
THvika TNVLKAUT A T NViKade {semper avrixa 
THOS, voy THmo0TOS THbo be statim 
TéwS, TOPPA at, avlus 
TocdKis § Toocavraxis toties ExagTaKts lodKis 
toties TOUT AKES éxaTepaxis  aupoTrepakis 











DERIVATIVE VERBs. 


ra) 


duordw assimulo, lodw equo, dd\do1dw, Tocbw, modu, 
érepotdw, ovdevitw, dudorepifw, icdfw, duo (w, éxarepéw, dd\ddaow, Ke. 


98 


TABLES. 


§ 54, 


54. F. TABLE OF DERIVATION. 
A. Novuns (868 s). 


J. From Verss: denoting 
1. The Aciion, in -ots, -ota, -tTts, 

-7, -@, -OS (G. -ou), -Tos, -TH, 

-TUS, -ASS, -MN, -os (G. -€0s). 

The Lect or Object, in -ja, -ov. 

The Doer, in -tTys, -ThP, -Tw~, 

(F. -Tpta, -Tetpa, -Tpls, -TUS, 

-€US, -OS, -LOYV. 

4. The Place, Instrument, &c., in 
-THPLOV, -TPOV, -TPd. 

II. From ADJECTIVES : expressing 
the Abstract, in -la (-e:d, -o.d), 
-THS (G. -TNTOS), -TVVN, -OS (G. -€0S), 
-ais (G. -ddos). 

III. From Ornrer Nouns: 

1. Patrials, in -rys (-trns, -4r7s, 


ee 


Ce 





-drns, -idtns, -wwT7ys* F. -7is), 


-eus (F. -ls). 

2. Patronymics, in -(8ys, -é8ys, 
-udSys (F. -ls, -ds, -ids), -ley, 
(F.-udévn, -w7) :— -L80ts (PF. -1d%). 

3. Hemale Appellatives, in, -ts, 
-QLVCL, -ELd, -ooa (-T7a), -A, -y. 

4, Diminutives, in -tov (-iécov, 
-dpiov, -UANov, -bdpiov, -vdror, 
&e.), -loxes (F. -loxn), -ts, 
-L8evs, -y vn, -dxvn, -ados, -edos, 
-thos, -vAXs, -vdos, &c. 

5. Augmentatives, in -wv, -ovld, 
-a&. 

6. Place, Instrument, &c., in -avoy, 
-eov, 3757 N. 


B. ADJECTIVES (3873 s). 


I. From VERBS: in -tkés, -Trptes, 
-pov, active; -rés, -Téos, -vés, 
passive ; -y.os, implying _jit- 
NSS ; -P6S, -ds, -ds. 

II. From Nouns: in -vos (-atos, 
-€LOS, -OlOS, -WOS, -ULOS), per- 
taining to; -tKés, -Kds, -aKéds, 
-aikés, relating to; -€0s, -tvos, 
-EN, material ; -w6s, tdme or 





prevalence ; -tvos, -yVvds, -avds, 

patrial;  -pés, -epés, -npés, 

-ahéos, -nés, -wds, -es, -@dn5, 

Sulness or quality. 

From ADJECTIVES AND AD- 
VERBS : 

1. As from Nouns. 

2. Strengthened Forms: 

parative, Superlative. 


III. 


Com- 


C. Pronouns (58, 2448s, 377). 


D. VERBS (378s). 
I. From Nouns AND ApsecTIves:|I]. From OTHER VERBS: in -oelo, 


in -€@, -evo, -dw, to be or do; -éa, 
-alve, -iva, to make; -lta, -dfo, 
imitative, active, &C.; -\am, -de, 
desiderative; -w with penult 
strengthened, active, Xe. 


desiderative; -{@, -oKw, -dda, 
Srequentative, intensive, inceptive, 
causative, diminutive, &c.; redu- 
plicated. 


E. ApveErss (380 s). 


I, OBLIguE CAsEs oF NoUNS AND 
ADJECTIVES : 

1. Accusatives: of Nouns; Neut. 
Sing. and Plur. of Adjectives 
(esp. Comparatives and Super- 
latives). 

2. Genitives, in -Sev, place whence ; 
-ov, place where ; -ys, &c. 

3. Datives, in -ou, -o8t, -now, -act, 
place where ; -y (-), -q@ (-a), -ar, 
-t, way, manner, place where, 
time when; &e. 





II. DERIVATIVES SIGNIFYING, 
Manner, in -ws, -y8dv, -86v, 
-Syy, -ddny, -ba, -bts, -¢ (t), -el, -§. 
2. Time when, in -re, -{ka, 

3. Place whither, in -ve, -81s. 
4 
I 


book 


. Number, in -d«rs. 
PREPOSITIONAL FORMS AND 
PHRASES : 
1. Prepositions with their Cases. 
. Prepositions without Cases. 
8. Derivatives from Prepositions, 
in -w, -Bev, -Bev, -ros, -Sov, &c. 





§ 55. . ETYMOLOGY. 99 


55. G. SIGNIFICANT ELEMENTS OF LANGUAGE. 


Note. The term ‘‘ things’’ is here used in its large sense, as including every object of 
sense, discourse, or thought; whether persons, material things, or mere abstractions: 
The term ‘‘ actions’ is used for both actions and states. 


Grand The Signs Classes. Orders. Subdivisions. 
Divisions. of Proper. 
Nouns Appellative. 
xt Collect 
, it Commons? oc 
Things, < ‘ ?) Substantial. 
SUBSTANTIVES, i hetraid: 
: | ‘ Substantive { Personal, 
. 4p = IC. "5 
Essential A Connective, &e. 
Elements. Infinitives (Gerunds, Supines). 
: +e Finite Verbs. 
° II. Transitive hee 
Actions vee? Infinitives. 
’ VERBS, Intransitive, l Participles. 
. Definite. 
Articles, Indefinite. 
Cardinal. 
Numerals, Ordinal. 
( Multiple, &c. 
‘ , Possessive. 
Properties Il. i Demonstrative. 
ot ADJECTIVES, G i 
Things Adjective : ganda 
? Braces Interrogative. 
™ | Indefinite. 
Distributive. 
Negative, &c. 
B. Participles. 
Descriptive pa wt Of Quality. 
Elements. Adjectives, » Of Circumstance. 
Of Manner, {( Demonstrative. 
Properties Of Place, Connective. 
of IV. Of Time, Interrogative. 
Actions or ADVERBS, Of Degree, } Indefinite. 
of other Of Number, | Negative. 
Properties, &c. Emphatic, &e. 
p ] ’ 
Relations } V. 
of Nes eal Of Place, Time, Action, Cause, &c. 
Things; § Copulative. 
Cc Coordinate, < Adversative. 
4 sf : | Alternative. 
Connective Dilatincid 
Elements. ‘of VI. Complementary. 
eine a CONJUNCTIONS, { Conditional. 
? Subordinate, 4 Concessive. 
Causal. 
Final, &c. 
D. | Vil 
Instinctive ¢ Emotions, INTERJECTIONS, Of Pleasure, Pain, Address, &c. 
Elements. 


Without its ESSENTIAL ELEMENTS, language could have no existence as rational discourse ; 
without its DESCRIPTIVE ELEMENTS, it would be vague and meagre ; without its CONNECTIVE 
ELEMENTS, it would be disjointed; and without its INSTINCTIVE ELEMENTS, it would want 
sensibility and passion. 





100 TABLES. — SYNTAX. § 56. 


Ill SYNTAX. 
A. GENERAL PRINCIPLES. 


56. A thought expressed in words forms a SENTENCE (sen- 
tentia, thought). Syntax is the doctrine of sentences, as Ery- 
moLoGy, of words, OrTHoEPY, of vocal sounds, and ORTHOG- 
RAPHY, of written characters. 


a. To analyze a sentence is to divide it into its parts, observing their 
cffices and relations. These parts, in Syntax, are of three kinds: %i- 
cluded sentences, commonly called clauses ; phrases, expressive combina- 
tions of words, yet not sentences ; and single words, or those which in 
Etymology are so regarded: ‘He came when it was time’; ‘He came in 
good time’ ; ‘He came seasonably.’ 


I. SENTENTIAL ANALYSIS. 


57. 1. Every complete sentence has two chief or primary 
elements, the SuBsect and PrepicaTE; and may have a third, 
the COMPELLATIVE. 


a. The subject and compellative are those substantives in the sentence 
which denote most directly the persons or things spoken of (subject) or 
addressed (compellative) : ‘ Brethren, virtue ennobles.’ 

b. The term swbstantives is here employed, as commonly in Syntax, to 
include not only nouns, substantive pronouns, and infinitives (55), but 
whatever is used substantively ; as, an adjective or adverb denoting some 
person or thing, a phrase or clause forming an object cf thought or re- 
mark, or any word spoken of as a word: ‘ Now’s the day’; ‘ Above 
twenty came’; ‘Go is a verb.’ See 68a, 70a, 491. 

ce. The predicate is always a verb; and, of more than one, that which 
is most closely related to the subject in the expression of the thought. 
(dl) As the essence of a sentence is predication, the predicate is often taken 
as a representative of the sentence. Thus a word which connects or 
modifies a sentence, is familiarly spoken of as connecting or modifying 
the verb of the sentence: ‘ But perhaps he will go.’ 


2. Sentences have also various minor elements : 


e.) Exponents, words which mark the offices or relations of sentences 
or their parts: ‘ He said that he went to Paris and Rome.’ See 65s. 

f.) Elements that are grammatically tadependent ; as, a participial 
phrase absolute, interjections, &e. : ‘ This said, he fell, alas /’ 

g.) Subordinate elements, or modifiers, which are joined with other 
elements to modify or limit them, i. e. to affect in various ways their 
force or application: ‘ Dear brethren, trwe virtue always ennobles.’ 

h. A word which is modified by another, is termed its principal; and 
this distinction of principals and modifiers applies not only to single 
words, but also to phrases and sentences. 


58. Mopiriers are of three kinds: (1) Worps or Prop- 
ERTY, i. e. Adjectives and Adverbs (55), including all words so 
considered ; (2) Mopiryine Supstantives, including Apposi- 
tives and Adjuncts ; and (3) DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 

a. Mopiryinc Svpsrantives. When, with one name of a person 


a 


§ 59. SENTENTIAL ANALYSIS. 101 


or thing, another is connected for the sake of explanation, specification, 
description, or emphasis, the latter is said to be i apposition with the 
former, and is termed an APposITIVE: ‘Paul the apostle.’ All other 
modifying substantives are termed ADsuNcTS: ‘Saul of Tarsus.’ 

b. When two names for the same person or thing are connected as 
above, that should be regarded as the appositive which is added for the 
sake of modifying the other, whatever may be its position: ‘George the 
King, or ‘ King George.’ It is not, however, always easy to determine 
this ; and two or more names are often so joined that they may be re- 
garded as forming one complex noun: ‘ Charles James Fow.’ 

ce. An ADJUNCT, in respect to form, is either prepositional or nude ; 
that is, it is either joined to its principal by a preposition, which serves 
as an exponent of its relation ; or it is joined immediately, without a prep- 
osition. — In the first case, it is also termed exponential ; and in the sec- 
ond, immediate. In the sentence, ‘Give me the book,’ the adjuncts me 
and book are both nude, or immediate; while in ‘Give the book to 
me,’ the adjunct me (or, prefixing the exponent, to me) is prepositional. 

d. As to its use, an adjunct is regarded either as completing the idea of 
its principal, or as denoting some circumstance respecting it ; and is hence 
distinguished as complementary or circumstantial (more briefly, as a com- 
plement or a circumstance). In ‘The son of Jesse slew Goliath with a 
sling,’ ‘of Jesse’ and ‘Goliath’ are complements of ‘son’ and ‘slew,’ 
which would seem incomplete without them; while the less essential 
‘with a sling’ expresses a circumstance of ‘slew,’ viz. the instrument. 

e. A complement is distinguished as direct or indirect, according to the 
closeness of its relation. This distinction appears especially in the ob- 
jects of verbs, which form the most prominent class of complements. 

f. Among the most prominent circumstances, are those of place, time, 
cause, origin, material, motive, price, manner, means, degree, agency, ke. 

g. There is no line of division between complements and circumstances, 
or between direct and indirect complements ; and many adjuncts may be 
differently classed, according to the view which the mind takes of them. 

h. A MODIFYING CLAUSE performs the office of an adjective, adverb, or 
substantive (appositive or adjunct) in the sentence to which it belongs. 
See 62 b, h. (i) Hence, all modifiers are adjective, adverbial, or substan- 
tive, in their force ; and, as substantive modifiers, when they modify other 
substantives, are akin to. the adjective, but when they modify verbs, ad- 
jectives, or adverbs, to the adverbial, ADJECTIVES and ADVERBS may be 
taken as the ¢ypes of all modifiers. 


59. Some words have a double relation, which may be 
termed COMPLEX MODIFICATION. Thus, 


a. A word modifying a verb, and thus partaking of an adverbial force 
(58 i), may also belong as an adjective, appositive, or adjunct, to the sub- 
ject or a complement of the verb: ‘He is esteemed wise.’ ‘He stood 
erect.’ ‘They made him king.’ An adjective, &c., thus predicated of 
its subject, is termed a predicate adjective, &c. ; while others, joined with- 
out predication, are termed direct or asswmed (393 a, b). An assumed ad- 
jective is also called an epithet. A verb which can thus connect an ap- 
positive to its subject, is termed an appositional verb. : 

b. A clause modifying the predicate is often incorporated in a parti- 
cipial form, and asswmed of the subject: ‘ Fearing this [as he feared this], 
he fled.’ See 62 a, d. 

c. When two adjectives belong to the same substantive, one sometimes 


102 TABLES. — SENTENCES. 3 § 59. 


exerts an adverbial force upon the other, or modifies the substantive taken 
with the other as a complex whole: ‘ Red hot iron’ ; ‘ All good men.’ 

d. An adverb modifying a sentence or phrase, often gives a special em- 
phasis, or bears a special relation to a particular word in the sentence or 
phrase: ‘Bless me, even ME also,’ Gen. 27. 34. ‘He, HE swrely, will go.’ 


60. a. Any element, with all the words which are subordinate to it 
and aid in expressing its idea, forms a logical part bearing the name of its 
element, but distinguished by the addition of ‘part’ ; while the element 
itself is distinguished, if need be, by the addition of ‘word.’ The for- 
mer is also distinguished as ‘logical,’ and the latter as ‘grammatical’ 
(sometimes called the ‘‘ basis” of the logical part). In ‘Good men are 
wise,’ the subject-part, or logical subject (the subject as thought of), is 
‘Good men,’ containing the subject-word, or grammatical subject, ‘men’ ; 
and the predicate-part is ‘are wise,’ containing the predicate-word, or 
grammatical predicate (the word that expresses predication, and has the 
appropriate grammatical form and office) ‘are.’ 

b. The predicate-part may be resolved into the ATTRIBUTE and the 
copuLa. The ATTRIBUTE (attribitus, ascribed) expresses the action, state, 
property, &c., ascribed to the subject; as ‘wise,’ above. The CopULA 
(Lat. tte, bond) is a substantive verb (a verb which simply expresses being), 
uniting the attribute with the subject ; as ‘are,’ above: ‘The sun shines 
[7s SHINING].’ ‘ He fears [is AFRAID].’ 


Il. OFFICES AND RELATIONS OF SENTENCES. 


61. A sentence is INTELLECTIVE (intellectus, wnderstanding) - 
or VOLITIVE (volo, to will), according as it primarily expresses 
an act of the understanding, or an act of the will. 


a. An intellective sentence is DECLARATIVE or INTERROGATIVE, accord- 
ing as it makes a statement, or asks a question: ‘He will go.’ ‘Will he 
go?’ (b) Interrogation is sometimes used rhetorically for strong statement. 
(c) A volitive sentence (also termed IMPERATIVE, from its mode) may 
express command, entreaty, exhortation, permission, or even supposition : 
‘Go.’ (d) A sentence of any one of these forms is termed EXCLAMATORY, 
when used for exclamation: ‘How fast he goes!’ (e) Sentences of all 
these classes may be either POSITIVE or NEGATIVE; i. e. they may affirm 
or deny, require or prohibit, &c.: ‘1 will go.’ ‘Do not go.’ 

f. A declarative or interrogative sentence is ACTUAL, when it has re- 
spect to fact (what ds, or 7s not, &c.) ; but CONTINGENT, when it has re- 
spect to contingency (what may be, or may not be, &c.). See 613s. These 
sentences may be also named from their modes and time (indicative, &c.) 


62. Sentences are connected with each other in four ways: 


a.) By INCORPORATION, in which the verb of one sentence is incorpo- 
rated in another sentence as an infinitive or participle (i. e. as a substan- 
tive or adjective). — Such a sentence, as well as its verb, is termed incor- 
porated, while sentences in which the predicate has a distinct form as a 
finite verb are termed distinct or finite. See 657s. 

b.) By suBoRDINATION, in which one of the sentences, without losing 
its distinct form, belongs to the other as a part or cirewmstance (subject, 
object, condition, reason, result, time, &c.) ; and is therefore termed subor- 
dinate, dependent, or included, while the other is distinguished as the 
chief, principal, or leading sentence or clause. —The two together form a 
COMPLEX SENTENCE: ‘Go, if you wish’; ‘ That he went, is strange.’ 








§ 63. METHODS OF INDICATION. 103 


c.) By coObRDINATION, in which the sentences are joined by a conuec- 
tive, but neither is subordinate to the other. Sentences so connected are 
termed coérdinate, and together form a COMPOUND SENTENCE. See d, e. 

d.) By sIMpLE SUCCESSION, in which one sentence directly follows an- 
other, without a connective (often referred to ellipsis, 68d): ‘ Luther said 
this. He sat down.’—This form may be changed to codrdination, by 
supplying a connective (‘L. said this, and he sat down’); often even to 
subordination (‘ Vhen L. had said this, he sat down’), or the yet closer 
form of incorporation (‘ Having said this, L. sat down’). See 6578, 693. 

e. A sentence is termed SIMPLE, if it is neither complex nor com- 
pound ; and INDEPENDENT, if it is neither incorporated nor subordinate. - 
(f) A sentence which according to its main division is compound, may 
have complex members, and the converse. (g) Parts or a sentence are also 
compound, complex, or simple, according as they consist of portions joined 
by codrdinate conjunctions expressed or understood, of portions joined by 
subordinate conjunctions, or of neither: ‘ Asa and Eli gave more than 
ten dollars to John.’ A sentence containing a compound or complex part 
may usually be resolved into two or more clauses, by supplying words. 

h. A subordinate clause is usually declarative in form. It is termed 
ADJECTIVE (or relative), ADVERBIAL (final, conditional, concessive, causal, 
&c.), Or SUBSTANTIVE (appositive, adjunct, &c.), according to its office or 
connective. See 58h, 66. (i) An incorporated clause, though always 
substantive or adjective in form, is often adverbial in force (665, 674). 

j. An independent sentence, whether simple or compound, with all its 
dependent clauses, forms a PERIOD, which may be further named accord- 
ing to its special character. If a dependent clause expresses a condition 
of the principal, the combination is called a HYPOTHETICAL PERIOD 
(irddecrs, supposition) ; the dependent clause being called the premise, con- 
dition, or protasis (rporelvw, to stretch forth) ; and the principal clause, the 
conclusion, or apodosis (a7odidwu, to give back).—Some of these terms 
are also applied to parts of other complex sentences. 

k. Qvorations, which form so important a class of substantive sen- 
tences, have two forms. In the first and more dramatic form, we simply 
repeat the words of another, without change or incorporation into our 
own discourse: He said, ‘‘I will go.” This is termed OraAtTIo Recta, 
Direct Discourse or Quotation. In the second and more narrative form, 
we make such changes and insert such counectives as will render the quo- 
tation an integral part of our own discourse: He said, that he would go. 
This is termed Oratio OsLiqua, Jndirect Discourse or Quotation (643 s). 
This distinction likewise applies to the thoughts and feelings of another. 

], An incorporated clause does not usually require a separate analysis, 
except where, as in Latin and Greek, an Infinitive takes the place of an- 
other mode in Indirect Discourse. 


rr. Mertrnops or INDICATION. 


G63. ‘The offices and relations of sentences and their parts 
are indicated in three ways: (A) by the form of the words ; 
(B) by the arrangement ; and (c) by separate words, which act 
as szgns or exponents of these offices or relations. 


A. IxpIcaTIoNn By Form. This has four chief objects : 

a.) To mark the connection of appositives, adjectives, pronouns, and 
verbs, with their subjects (i. e. the substantives to which they refer), by a 
correspondence of form, termed AGREEMENT or Concord. See 76, 492s, 


104 TABLES.— SYNTAX, § 63. 


b.) To mark, by appropriate forms, the otfices and relations of swbstan- 
tives. This is don e, in most languages, through the <listinetion of case. 
When the form of a substantive is determined by its dependence upon 
another word, it is said to be governed by that word; and the influence 
exerted upon ‘it is termed GOVERNMENT or REGIMEN. See 76. 

ec.) To mark, by the form of an adjective or adverb, the degree in which 
its property is possessel (COMPARISON, 29, 256 s). 

d.) To mark the offices and relations of sentences, through the form of 
the VERB, the predicating word. See 57 ¢c, 30, 265 s 

e. In agreement, the words which are connected are regarded, by a 
species of personification, as allies; in government, as ruler and ruded. 
(f) Of nde, adjuncts, those only which are complementary (58 ec, d), are 
usually spoken of as governed. Prepositional adjuncts are commonly said 
to be governed by the prepositions ; and are called their complements, ob- 
jects, or, by a happier term, sequents. 

g. In the development of a language, new forms arise to express more 
specifically what has been generally expressed by some older form. This 
older form thus becomes narrowed in its appropriate sphere, and itself 
more specific in its expression. But habit, which is mighty everywhere, 
is peculiarly the arbiter of language ; — 

** Usus, 
Quem penes arbitrium est et jus et norma loquendi’’ ;— 


and, wherever the new distinction is unimportant, there is a tendency to 
employ the old and familiar form in its original extent of meaning. The 
same is true of words and methods of construction. See 70 v. 


64. B. ArrancEMENT. a. Words are arranged for effect upon the 


understanding, the emotions, or the ear: in other words, the arrangement 
of a sentence may have for its object, (1) To exhibit the offices and rela- 
tions of the words ; (2) To present the thought in an impressive manner ; 
(3) To produce an agreeable effect upon the ear. — That order which most 
effectually secures the first object is termed the logical order ; the second, 
the rhetorical order ; the third, the rhythmical order. 

b. In the LOGICAL ORDER, the verd is usually placed after the subject, 
and before the aétribute, if this is distinct from the verb (60 b) ; and (e) 
a word which 7s governed by another is usually placed after it. (d) Words 
are often spoken of in Syntax, as following or preceding others, with refer- 
ence to the logical or usual order, without regard to their actual position. 


65. ©. Usr or Exponents. These mark the offices or relations (1) 
of words (including phrases), or (2) of sentences. 

1. Worp-EXPoNENTS are (a) those which mark the relations of ad- 
juncts (58 ¢), 1. €. PREPOSITIONS (‘‘case-links”’) ; (b) CONJUNCTIONS used 
as In cone (c) INTERJECTIONS marking address or exclamation (O, ah, 
484, 73 e); (d) MODAL SIGNS (modus, manner), i. e. connective adverbs 
of manner used elliptically to limit the application of modifiers (‘I took 
him as a friend,’ 393 ec, 711). The last may be parsed as connective ad- 
verbs by supplying ellipses, but most conveniently as mere signs uniting 
modifiers with their principals. 


66. 2. SeNTENTIAL EXxPoNENTS are either CONNECTIVE (denoting 
the connection of sentences), or CHARACTERISTIC (marking their charac- 
ter, without connecting them). 

a. The CONNECTIVES may simpl y denote the relations of the sentences 
(consJuNCTIONS, ‘‘clause-links,” 700s); or (b) they may also enter into 
their structwre as pronouns or adverbs (CONNECTIVE PRONOUNS or AD- 
vers). ‘A connective pronoun or adverb is cither (c) relative (referring 


om. ip. 





§ 68. FIGURES. — ELLIPSIS. 105 


to an antecedent, 549s), or (d) complementary (introducing a sentence 
used substantively, 563s). Thus, (a) that, if, wntil, though, (c) who 
(73 e) ; (d) what (734). 

Connectives are either (e) primary (directly uniting the sentences), or 
(f) secondary (corresponding to the primary, ‘‘as the eye to the hook”) : 
‘He (f) both reads (e) and writes ;’ ‘(e) Thowgh he feared, (f) yet he went. 

g. The CHARACTERISTIC EXPONENTS (marking sentences as negative, 
interrogative, contingent, &c.) may be adverbs or pronouns: ‘ Who was it?’ 
“Tt was not I.’ ‘I see no man.’ 


B. FIGURES OF SYNTAX. 


67. Those special forms of expression which are termed 
Figures oF SyNTax, may be referred to four great heads, 
E.vuipsis, PLEoNASM, ENALLAGE, and HYPERBATON. 


a. FiGURES OF SYNTAX are associated and blended with those of 
RHETORIC; and some of the latter will be mentioned below. Both 
classes are more common in poetry than in prose; in colloquial, than in 
formal discourse ; and in the language of passion, than in that of narra- 
tive or argument. 

b. The use of wnauthorized constructions is termed soLECISM (from 
Lsroxoa, dwellers in Soli, of Cilicia, famed for their bad Greek) ; of wn- 
authorizd words, BARBARISM (BdpBapos, barbarian) ; of antique words or 
constructions, ARCHAISM (dpxaios, ancient). A form of construction 
specially belonging to a particular language is called an IDIOTISM or 
IDIOM (lé.os, peculiar) ; or, from the name of the language, a Hebraism, 
Hellenism or Grecism, Latinism, Anglicism, &e. 


68. 1. Evvipsis (eAdewns, defect) is the omission of words 
which are required for the most complete and regular expres- 
sion of the sense. 


1. These words are said to be wnderstood. The omission may take 
lace without any other change in the form of the expression ; or it may 
e attended with other changes, respecting either the words which are 

employed, or the forms of those words: ‘Will you go?’ ‘[I will go] 
Certainly’; or ‘Yes’ [= 1 will go]; or, ‘No’ [= not]. See 69a. 
(2) There is a rhetorical figure called Omdssion, in which there is a pre- 
tence of omitting something, which is thus mentioned and often made 
more prominent: ‘ His crime and folly I forbear to mention.’ 

3. Ellipsis exhibits a striking paradox. It is generally true, that, the 
more essential a word is to the grammatical construction of the discourse, 
the more apt it is to be omitted ; for this reason, that it is the more 
readily supplied from the very necessity of the case. Hence the frequent 
omission of the word to which another refers as its subject or by which 
another is governed, of the substantive verb, of the direct object of a 
transitive verb, &c.; in general, of words modified rather than modifiers, 
and of leading rather than subordinate clauses. See 506, 571s, 476, 626. 

4. To ELLIPsIs are usually referred, by grammarians, all abbreviated 
and compendious forms of construction, however familiar (though the 
term Brachylogy [brief expression| would often apply more properly) : as, 

a.) Adjectives used substantively, and adverbs used substantively or ad- 
jectively (506s, 526s): (b) Many forms of inscription, salutation, excla- 
mation, &c. (401, 670): (c) The construction of RESPONSIVES (words in 
the answer, corresponding to interrogatives in the question), and other 

5* 


106 TABLES. — PLEONASM. § 68. 


forms of reply; as, ‘Who saw it?’ ‘J’ [saw it]: (d) AsyNDETON 
(aovvdeTos, NOt bound together), the omission of a conjunction or other con- 
nective ; often greatly promoting energy and vivacity, as in Ceesar’s cele- 
brated despatch, Veni, vidi, vici, J came — saw — conquered. See 707. 
(e) APOSIOPESIS (darooudsanats, the becoming silent), the failure to finish 
a sentence, whether from design, diversion of thought, overpowering emo- 
tion, or any other cause ; as, ‘If you ever do this again So not 
unfrequently after a conditional clause (636 s). 

f.) Most cases of COMPOUND CONSTRUCTION (60). A word referring to 
a compound subject has either the form which is required by add the sub- 
stantives in the subject, taken together, or that which is required by one 
of them, taken singly. In the former construction, named Syllepsis (cvi- 
Anus, taking together), the word is said to agree with all the substantives ; 
in the latter, named Zeugma (fetyua, yoking), it is said to agree with 
one of the substantives, and to be understood with the rest. For ‘M 
heart and my flesh rejoice,’ Ps. 84. 2, an older version has, ‘ My heart and 
my flesh crieth owt.’ See 495s. (g) The term zewgma is used, in general, 
to denote the connection of a word with a number of words, to a part of 
which only it is appropriate in meaning, or in form (while, in sy/lepsis, it 
would suit the whole): ‘You are blind of ear, mind, and eye’ (Soph. O. 
T. 371). Cf. § 572b. 


69. 11. PLEONASM (mAcovacyds, redundance) is the use of 
more words than the sense requires. 


a. Pleonasm may consist in the simple repetition or insertion of words, 
or it may be attended with more important changes in the form of the ex- 
pression (cf. 68. 1; the limits of both Ellipsis and Pleonasm are very in- 
definite). (b) One ‘of its common forms is emphatic repetition, in the same 
or in similar words (the latter specially named Synonymia): ‘ Never, 
never, NEVER!’ ‘Oh, spare me! pardon and forgive !’ 

c. Useless repetition is termed Tautology (ratrodoyia, saying the same 
thing) : (d) a circuitous manner of expression, Periphrasis or Cireumlocu- 
tion (repippacis circumlocutio, roundabout speaking) ; as loss of life, for 
death : (e) the expression of one thing as though it were two, Hendiadys 
(év dua Svotv, one thing by two); as, ‘Whose natwre and property is ever 
to have mercy’: (f) the use of more connectives than are needed, Poly- 
syndeton (rodts, many; cf. 68d); as, ‘Whenne that,’ for ‘when,’ Chawe. 





70. ut. ENALLAGE (évaddayn, exchange) is the use of one 
word or form for another. — 1. As the use of one word for an- 
other, it has respect either to the grammatical office of words, 
or to their signification. 


a. The use of one part of speech for another is termed ANTIMERIA 
(avril, instead of, wépos, part): ‘Now’s the day,’ Burns. Cf. 68 a. 

b. A figure by which a word is ¢awrned from its literal sense, is called 
a TROPE (rpérros, turning). The principal tropes (commonly classed as 
rhetorical figures, 67 a) are mentioned below. (c) The figurative sense of 
a word often becomes so familiar that we employ it without intending or 
being conscious of any figure : ‘a sweet temper,’ ‘works of taste.’ This 
use, In which the word has passed over from its primary to a secondary 
sense, is hence termed transitive (transeo, to pass over). 

d. In Mrrapuor (ueradopa, transfer), a word appropriate to one ob- 
ject is transferred to another, by reason of some analogy between them : 
‘Tell that fox,’ Lk. 18. 32. "(e) Allegories are formed by extending and 


$71; ENALLAGE, HYPERBATON. 107 


combining metaphors. (f) When inanimate or irrational objects are rep- 
resented as persons, the figure is termed Prosopopwia or Personification 
(rpdcwrov persona, person, roréw facio, to make); (g) when a speaker 
turns aside in his discourse so to address them (or to address absent per- 
sons as if present), it is termed Apostrophe (dmocrpépw, to turn from) : 
‘Sing, O heavens ; and be joyful, O earth!’ Is. 49. 13. 

h. METONYMY (uerwrupia, change of name) gives to one object the 
name of another which is related to it: as, crown, throne, and sceptre, for 
sovereigniy. (i) An abstract nown is often used for a concrete, for greater 
strength of expression, especially in apposition: ‘He is my defence.’ 

j. SYNECDOCHE (cuvexdoxy, comprehension) puts a part tor the whole, or 
the whole for a part: keel, for ship ; stecl, for sword. 

k. Irony (elpwvela, dissimulation) is the use of a word for its opposite: 


_ hero, for coward. (1) A seeming contradiction, termed Oxymoron (d&v- 


pwpos, keenly foolish), is sometimes made by uniting words of opposite 
signification ; learned ignorance. 

m. A form of expression beyond the truth is termed Hyperbole (érep- 
Born, throwing beyond); designedly short of it, ZLitotes (Nirérys, sim- 
plicity) ; more agreeable, Huphemism (evpnuocuds, use of good words). 
(n) A play upon words similar in sound but differing in sense, or upon 
the same word used in different senses, is termed Paronomasia (aapevo- 
hacla, compurison of names, pun); and (o) an imitation of the sense by 
the sound, Onomatopeia (dvoparoroita, name-making ; certainly one of 
the most copious of the original sources of language). 


2. TNALLAGE, as the use of one form for another, is specially 
termed, 


p.) SYNESIS (ctveo.s, understanding), when the construction follows 
the sense or the conception of the mind, in disregard of grammatical form 
or of the reality of things (498s): (q) ATTRACTION (attractio), when a 
word is drawn from its appropriate form by the influence of another word 
(500, 552, 71b): (r) HYPALLAGE (i7addayH, interchange), when two 
words interchange constructions (474 a): (t) ANACOLUTHON (dvaxd\ovdos, 
inconsistent), when there is a change of construction, so that two parts of a 
sentence do not agree (402, 504b): (u) VISION (visio, seeing), when the 


' present tense is used in speaking of past or future events, as if they were 





actually occurring before the eye (609): (v) RETENTION (retentio), when 
a form retains from its earlier extent of application a use afterwards 
assigned to another form (392a", 485, 576, 603s, 651s): (w) CHANGE OF 
Number, GENDER, OR PERSON (488s, 501s). 


71. 1v. HyprerBaTon (imepBarés, transposed) is a disregard 
of the common laws of arrangement. It is specially termed, 


a.) INVERSION, or ANASTROPHE (dvacrpod7 inversio, inversion), when 
words in a clause are inverted (chiefly for emphasis, euphony, rhythm, to 
bring similar or contrasted words nearer together, or to mark the connec- 
tion of sentences, 719 a, s). — The name Chiasma (xlacpa, imitation of X) 
is applied, when the arrangement in one pair of 
words or expressions is inverted in a similar 
pair following. 

b.) Prouepsts (rpér\nYus, anticipation), when a word is placed in a clause 
earlier than that to which it properly belongs, or is otherwise anticipated. 
This is commonly due to attraction (70 q, 474, 657). 

_¢.) PARENTHESIS (rapévOects, insertion), when one sentenée is inserted 


: Kindy, words, but 
thoughts’ * unkind.’ 


: One a 


108 TABLES, —~ SYNTAX. Tay pee is 


within another, with which it has no grammatical connection: ‘This, 
mark me, is true.’ — The term may be likewise applied to any interrup- f 
tion of the sense by the insertion of unessential words or clauses. 

d.) Hysrrron PRoTeron (torepov mpdrepor, the last first), when that 
which follows in the order of occurrence or nature, is placed first: ‘1 was 
bred and born,’ Shaks. (e) ConruSED ARRANGEMENT, when this term 
applies. (f) TMESIs, see 388 c. 


C. FORMS OF ANALYSIS AND PARSING. 


72. 1. For SENTENCES. 


1. Describe the Sentence: as, —It is Simple, Complex, or Compound 
[consisting of the Coérd., or Lead’g & Subord. Clauses —]; Pos. or Neg.; 
Infinitive, incorporated in the sentence — as a Substantive. 
Participial, “s Seay ve “¢ «* an Adjective. melee. 
Declarative, (Actual [Indicative, Past, tell 
fol- 





f : 
inteHeriye. Interrogative, (Contingent [Subjunctive, &c. J; 


(Imperative, expressing command, entreaty, exclamatory, &c. ; 
lowing — Ly simple succession, or connected by — to — as a Coordinate 
Sentence, or as a Subordinate Clause, performing the office of a Substan- 
tive, Adjective, or Adverb. Remarks. ; 


Finite, 


2. Analyze the Sentence into its Grammatical or its Logical Parts, or both* 
Adjective 
Adverb 
Appositive 
Adjunct 
duced by —, and] is itself modified by —, and this by —, &e.; or by the 
Dependent Clause —, which performs the office of —, and consists of —. 
(Minor parts independent are the Interjection —, &c.] Remarks. 

Or, more fully, thus: The Pane we. fis —,containing the oon ; 


Bae ek ss —, modified by the rebels | —, consisting of the 


Advertst tee. t—> [introduced by —, and] modified by —, &c. [The Pred- 


icate-Part may be resolved into the Copula —, and the Attribute —.} 


Subject 
The Predicate is —, modified by the 
Compellative 


—, which [is intro- 


73. Wnrirren Anatysis. It is of great benefit, in the study of 
other languages, as of English, so to write the analysis of sentences, that 
the office of each word shall determine its place. Of the several methods 
that have been proposed for this, the following is suggested as the most 
simple in use, that is also minute : j 
a. Write the several sentences under each other, prefixing symbols to | 
mark their general offices and relations, and plaeing conneetives in one 
column, subject-parts in another, predicate-parts in the third, and inde- 
pendent parts in a fourth. Write all modifiers (or their symbols, in the 
case of modifying clauses) weder the words which they modify, but irdent- 
ed, that is, with the line beginning farther to the right. Exponents of 
the use of words are simply written with the words, in the same line. 
Compound parts, according to convenience, are either written as if simple, 
gr with their elements under each other and connected by a brace (which 
may be extended below, to meet a common modifier). Words supplied 





§ 73. ANALYSIS OF SENTENCES. 109 


to complete the grammatical construction are underlined in writing 
(printed below as Italic, or, in Greek, with smaller type); while paren- 
theses or brackets mark the repetition of a word in the scheme, to show 
a double office or relation (especially where a word in the subject or predi- 
cate part serves also as a connective). In complex modification, the inodi- 
fier is sometimes repeated ; but oftener written only once, in the place 
which shows its closest connection or is most convenient, its double office 
being shown, if desired, by a double mark. Space may be gained, if 
wished, by writing the article in the same line with its noun or with an- 
other modifier ; and time, by abbreviating words, or simply writing their 
initials. The article is sometimes even omitted. 

b. For sentences, the following symbols may be used: The capitals A, 
B, C, &e., for independent sentences (sentences of the Ist rank) ; the 
numerals 1, 2, 3, &c., for sentences immediately dependent upon these 
(2d rank) ; the small letters a, b, c, &c., for sentences dependent upon 
the latter (8d rank); the Italics a, b, c, &e., for sentences of the 4th 
rank ; the last letters of the alphabet, z, y, x, &c., for those of the 5th 
rank ; these in Italics, for the 6th rank ; the middle letters, m, n, 0, &e., 
and m, n, 0, &c., for the rare 7th and 8th ranks. If the sentence is in- 
terrogative, the sign ? may be added; if imperative, t; if exclamatory, 
!; if quoted or parenthetic, the usual sign in part,” or ). The members 
of compound sentences, or of those which have prominent parts com- 
pound, may be distinguished by the use of accents (unless a separate no- 
tation is preferred): as A, A’, A”, &c. (read ‘‘A,” ‘*A prime,” ‘A sec- 
ond,” &c.). The different kinds of modifiers may be distinguished by 
any convenient marks, or indices. An adjective modifier is marked below 
with °; an adverbial modifier, with ‘; a substantive modifier, with an 
angle, the opening turned up for an adjunct (¥), and down for an apposi- 
tive (*). Judgment will, of course, be exercised in regard to the extent 
to which, in any exercise, the notation shall be carried. 

ce. When minute analysis is not desired, some of its most important ob- 
jects may be rapidly obtained by symbolizing a period or paragraph, that 
is, by writing the symbols of its sentences in the order of occurrence (the 
symbol being repeated, when a clause is divided), with additional signs 
above or below to mark the offices of the sentences, and such punctuation 
as will best suit their connections. The examples below will be first sym- 
bolized, and then analyzed more fully, with the proposed arrangement and 
notation. —d. From Campbell's Ode to the Rainbow : 


“a CONN. SUBJ. PRED. IND. 
“sg A I ask Arch 
a not* triumphal? 
Se 3 PhilosophyY (1°) 
mo Rs proud? 
= ee to teach” 
pen are me” 
aor ., 
asaxy o> (2”) 
“6 AAS < 1°| (that) | That | fill’st 
Sn ee . oY 
Pa 2 = rio me ° 
<58 =I 28 i 1€ 
ae eo a 
an 
2 as 3 a‘ | (when) | Storms | prepare " 
v 
OE. aetna to part 
22 7 van when* 
ae 2” | (what) | Thou | art ets 
: | what 


110 TABLES. — SENTENCES, § 73. 


e. How long, men of Athens, will you indulge in this guilty and, alas ! 
fatal supineness ? The clouds continually gathering and darkening above — 
us, how can you hope that the storm will not at length burst upon the 
city? Beware of imagining, my fellow-citizens, that this ambitious 
prince and warrior, who delights in the severest toil if it may advance 
his schemes of conquest, will ever rest until he has reached the coveted 
goal, the subjugation of Attica, — that, having conquered the rest of 
Greece, he will cry ‘‘ Enough!” and will offer us terms of honorable 
friendship. It is only through the strangest infatuation, be assured, that 
you can expect to escape, ah foolish dreamers! though all others fall. 


A;B1;C2aa, 2b, 3 ¢, ye 0 ee 
2 ov’ "Rade ate 


CONN. SUBJ. PRED. IND. 
A? You will indulge Men 
long* of Atieaee) 
how‘ 
in supineness” 
this? 
guilty & fatal°jalas 
B? You can hope The clouds [ening® 
how’ gathering & dark- 
(1”) continually* 
1’ |that |The storm will burst above us” 
not* 


at length’ 
upon the city’ 
Ct Ye ie are fellow-citizens 
of imaginin my? 
(av si g’ y 
2’ |that {Prince & warrior will rest 
this® ever" 
ambitious® (b‘) 
(a°) 
a° |(Who) |} Who delights 
in the toilY 
severest? 
oe (a’) 
a’ jif It may advance 
schemes¥ 
his’ 
; of conquest’ 
b‘ juntil |He has reached 
the goal’ 
coveted°[tion* 
the subjuga- 
of Attica’ 
3” Ithat |He will ery 
having conquered? { (c’”’) 
the 3 restY & will offer 
of Greece us¥ 
termsY 
of friendshipY 
honorable® 





§ 73. WRITTEN ANALYSIS- 111 


e” It is 
enough 
D It is 
(44) only’ 
through infatuation 
the strangest® 


Et) Ye be assured 
4* — | that You can expect ah dreamers 
to escape foolish® 
(a°) 
d* though Others fall 
all° 


f. Kyéapxe cal IIpdéeve, cal of &ddox of rapdvres “EXAnves, ovK tore, 6 Te 
movetre. Ki yap twa dddjros waxy cuvdwere, voulfere, ev THE TH TMEepa 
€ué Te KataxexdWerOa, cal vuds od modvd euod UoTepov: Kakws yop Tov 
NET épuv EXdvT wr, TAVTES OUTOL, Ods OPaTE, BdpBapor TroemiwWTEpor Huty Ecov- 
Tat Tov mapa Baoie? dvrwv. ‘*Clearchus and Proxenus, and the other 
Greeks present, you know not what you are doing. For, if you engage 
in any battle with each other, consider that this day both I shall be cut 
down, and you not long after me ; for, our affairs going ill, all these bar- 
barians, whom you see, ; will be worse enemies to us than those with the 
king.” Xen. An.i. 5. 16. 


ae a2a2aw, cee 


2 
CONN. “SUBS. PRED. IND. 
A ‘Tpeis lore Knréapxe kal II pdfeve 
ovK* kal” HAAnves 
Co) ot dAov° g 
(67) | "Luets Trovetre Smears 
& tu 
2t | yap ‘Tpets vou.ttere 
(a") 
av Te | eye Karaxexdiper Oar 
ev ry) pea” 
7Hde° 
(a*, 0°) 
a’ Kal | pds (karaKexdwerGar, &c.) 
vorrepov 
epod” 
TOAD 
ov 
a’ \ Bi “Lets cuvarpere 
paxnyY 
Twa? 
GAAS” 
b’ | yap BapBapor | trovrat T pay wat wv 
TavTEs? mohepidrepor?’ Tav? 
ovroe hpiv’ HpeTepav? 
(z°) tav BapBdpwr éxdvtwv? 
bytav? KaKas* 
trapc. Bact” 
z© |(ovs) =| ‘Tels opare 


ots’ 


112 TABLES. — ANALYSIS AND § 74. 





74. wu. For Greek Worps. 





Proper of the 1 Dec.) Mase. (Decline.) 
i Common Rater ae ‘6 i Kenks abe ei, ~__. (Derived 
* ® Collective 946463 OS A) Newt ? |Comp’d- 
Abstract, &c. Irregular, &c.) Com. 
Nom.) Sing.) the subject of —, 
en sp Stem —, Affix —; the Gen. }oicr governed by —, i R ap ; 
erat &e. J Dual) Gen. of —, &e., J ‘ 
Pos. | 
—— is an ADJECTIVE [in the Comp. } Degree, from — — — (compare), | 
Sup. 


1 


of 2} Terminations (decline) ; osrepouted ae Stem —, Affix —; 





Nom.) Sing.) Mase. agreeing with — 
the ae pn, fem, \ > used substantively, ni Rule. Hemarks. 
Personal \ 1 (Decline.) (Der. —,] 
is a Reflexive Pronovwn, [of the 2{ Pers from ————-—$ [ ons ae ; 
Relative, &c. 3 p-—y 


Nom.) Sing.) Mase.) the subject of — 
Stem —, Affix —; the Gen. } Pir. Fem. i ; agreeing with —} » Rule. 


&e. Dual 
Subject 
Antecedent 


Neut.J gov'd by —, &e. 


[It refers to — as its }, Rule ; and connects —to—.] Remarks. 





Transitive VERB, ‘ 

Teponent 4 CN Tee [Der’d from —,] (Stem — 

uote x ? [(Comp’d of —, | \Stems — —f’ 
ERB in mu, &e., . 


is a 





Pres. Ind. Act. 
[Prefix —,] Affix —; the Impf. } sa : } mia } (vary and inflect) ; 
Fut., &c.) Opt., &e.) Pass. 
(if finite) the 1 Pers. Sing., &c., agreeing with —, 


; Bees depending on — 
(if Inf.) having for its subject —, and actyeet ares ke, Rie 








Nom.) Sing.) Mase. ; bi Remarks, 
(if Part.) the Gen. Plur. } Fem. : uae with —, 
‘ ke. } DualJ Neut,J > Used substantively, &c., 
Interrogative Manner Pos. 
is an Demonstrative ADVERB of Place \ [in the comp. Lege, 
Indefinite, &c. Time, &e. Sup. 


from — (compare); Der. from —, or Comp. of —]; modifying —, Rule. 
[It refers to — as its antecedent, and connects — to —.] Remarks. 








is a PREPosITION [Der. or Comp. —], governing —, and marking its 
relation to — (a relation of place, time, agency, cause, &c.), Rule. Remarks. 





.  Copulative) ,, (Der. —, ] , 
eRe (ONJUNCTION, tae? te 
is @ Final, &c. CondU NCTION FCorny, 1 connecting — to —, (and 





— 
a = 














§ 75. PARSING OF WORDS. 113 


denoting addition, opposition, comparison, dc., or introducing its clause as 
an end, condition, &c., or as used substantively), Rule. Remarks. 





—— is an INTERJECTION [Der. or Comp. —], (expressing emotion, &c.) 
and independent of grammatical construction (684). Remarks. 


795. Nores. a. When declension in full is not desired, give the Nom. 
and Gen. in Substantives and in Adjectives of 1 Term., and the different 
forms of the Nom. in Adjectives of 2 or 3 Term. (b) In conjugating, give 
the Theme, with the corresponding Fut. and Perf. if in use (to which it is 
also well to add the 2 Aor. if used); but sometimes, more fully, the leading 
tense of each system in use. The term ‘‘ vary” is used above in a specific 
sense, to denote giving the different modes of a tense, or, as it is sometimes 
called, giving the synopsis of the tense; and the term ‘‘inflect,” to denote 
giving the numbers and persons (in the Participle, declension, of course, 
takes the place of this). (c) After completing the formula above (which 
will be done with least danger of omission or delay, if a uniform order is 
observed), add such Remarks as may properly be made upon the fori, 
signification, and use of the word ; as, m respect to contraction, euphonic 
changes of consonants, literal or figurative sense, the force or use of the 
number, case, degree, voice, mode, tense, &c. ; citing, from the Grammar, 
the appropriate rule or remark. (d) Some particulars in the forms above, 
which do not apply to all words, are inclosed in brackets ; and some di- 
rections or suggestions, in parentheses. 

e. It is a very useful exercise to write minute analyses of words ; soine- 
times even marking the offices of the different parts of a flexible ending 
(12, 33). E. g., the following verbs (mostly in compound forms), and the 
following compound nouns and adjectives may be written as below : éAv- 
garo, Nedvcaow (37), dpicav (39 d), 7OéAngEV (311 b), KeXevoebeignTe (307 b), 
mepiryjoouat (421), edediddyew (50, diddoxw), yeyovws (50), Tiunodcbwy 
(42); P:Aosodiay (Acc.) philosophy, dvordos (385 a), épyoAdBou (387 a), 
ayvares (386. 4), rupryevécw (383 a), \coB8irAw (386. 1), voobéras (386. 3), 
Gecparoas divinely appointed (383 c). 






























































| PREFIX.'| STEM. | | APFIX STEM AFFIX. 
| rie as 
| | nes E | eo | | B| te 
ial. Hit |e] 8 «s ele 
iS |g gah Beedbir oh Pat seo | oy Pe ee ea Wis ar asd Rn 
ces ll ary 24 Sia] wo] & = Boies hs fi w| a] a 
3i2|38 el ia! A le 2/o/ §& |-s! 21] 2 
I \Z g sisiale|] © | & Be iA 5 3a 8] © | & 
g'2| 8 s12/2/3/ 2 18 ei2| 8 ja 2/38 
5 | = Ke) >(Bu be! Ss; s &p ga i|s| = Fi 12 l & 
ed eae Uh ed B 2| o! a| kis 
Bish es) o-i6 | Sisis| & is S| Sl e:/S| 8/212 
iti be} ae le allie lo] & le ri || A |< Oe a 
€ Ad : g |a |To mr|o | cod|i ja |p 
li 
he ho kK la lvoe |v dv oA ols 
: » , { 
€ dp | 1d o ja |r épy |o | Ad "0 10 
é ie (OE) im jlo le |r iv & WO}. le 
KeA | ev jo || Oe| in| te yo i 
€ € TUP | L ev ot|v 
re Ourl g |o |pae p Bad 
Pm ae NiO fo }-5, o |e 
e |de] dc 8a |x | Ik Je lu Bor | 
| 
/ ve | ie ba 
” Rage ae 5 | 6€ |r |la jus 
Y }i ] TS VOM | 
f yo | /pymn | rn 
r fae lua! Ho ld |oOwv (Qe jo | pa |r lio Jes 








| 
| 
| 


114 TABLES. § 76. 


76. D. CHIEF RULES OF GREEK SYNTAX. 


I, An APposITIVE agrees in case with its subject. § 393. 

II. The Sussect of a FINITE VERB is put in the Nominative. 400. 

Il]. SuBSTANTIVES INDEPENDENT OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION are 
put in the Nominative. 401. 

A. General Rule for the Genitive. THE Potnt or DEPARTURE AND THE 
CAUSE ARE PUT IN THE GENITIVE; or, The GENITIVE is used to ex- 
press that or or FRoM which something i is or is done. 403. 

IV. Words of SEPARATION and DISTINCTION govern the Genitive. 404. 

V. The Comparative DEGREE governs the Genitive. 408. 

VI. The ORIGIN, SOURCE, and MATERIAL are put in the Genitive. 412. 

VII. The rHems of piscoursE or of THOUGHT is put in the Gen. 413. 

VIII. Words of PLENTY and WANT govern the Genitive. 414. 

IX. The wHo ie of which a part is taken is put in the Genitive. 415. 

X. Words of SHARING, BEGINNING, and ToucH govern the Genitive. 424. 

XI. The MOTIVE, REASON, and END IN VIEW are put in the Gen. 429. 

XIJ. Prick, VALUE, MERIT, and CRIME are put in the Genitive. 431. 

XIII. Words of sENSATION and of MENTAL STATE OR ACTION govern the 
Genitive. 432. 

XIV. The rrmMxE and PLAcE in which are put in the Genitive. 433. 

XV. The AUTHOR, AGENT, and GIVER are put in the Genitive. 434. 

XVI. ey ADJUNCT DEFINING A THING OR PROPERTY is put in the Gen- 
itive ; or, A SUBSTANTIVE, ADJECTIVE, or ADVERB, as such, governs 
the Genitive. 435. 

B. a eee govern the Genitive, by virtue of an included substantive, adjective, or 
adverb. 6. 
C. The Ghapounas of Alpha Privative govern the Genitive. 436. 

D. General Rule for the Dative Objective. THe OBsJEcT oF APPROACH 
OR OF INFLUENCE IS PUT IN THE DATIVE; or, An INDIRECT OBJECT 
is put in the Dative; or, The DaTive is used to express that To or 
FOR which something is or is done. 448. 

XVII. Words of NrARNEsS and LIKENESS govern the Dative. 449. 

XVIII. The oBJECT OF INFLUENCE is put in the Dative. 452. 

E. SuBsTANTIVE VERBS take a Dative of the possessor, 459. 

F. General Rule for the Dative Residual. AN ATTENDANT THING OR 
CIRCUMSTANCE, SIMPLY VIEWED AS SUCH, IS PUT IN THE DATIVE. 465. 

XIX. The MEANS and MODE are put in the Dative. 466. 

XX. The TIME and PLACE at which are put in the Dative. 469. 

XXI. The pirecr oBJEcT and the EFFEcT of an action are put in the 
Accusative. 472. 

G. An adjunct simply considered as modifying a verb is putin the Accusative. 472. 
CAUSATIVES govern the Accusative together with the case of the included verb. 473. 
Tf. ADVERBS OF SWEARING are followed by the Accusative. 476, 

XXII. The Accusative is used in specifying to what PART, PROPERTY, &c. 

_ a word or expression applies, 481. 

XXIII. Extent of TIME or SPACE is put in the Accusative. 482. 

XXIV. The Accusative is often used ADVERBIALLY, to express degree, 
manner, order, &e. 483. 

XXV. The ComMpELLATIVE of a sentence is put in the Vocative. 484. 

J. AGREEMENT is commonly according to form, but often rather according to sense. 493. 

XXVI. An ADJECTIVE agrees with its subject in gender, nwmber, and 
case. 504. 

XXVII. A PRONOUN agrees with its subject in gender, number, and per- 
son. 505. 





§ 76. RULES OF SYNTAX. 115 


The RELATIVE commonly takes the case of the antecedent, wnen the relative clause limits 
or defines an antecedent in the Genitive or Dative, and the RELATIVE would properly 
be an. Accusative depending upon a verb. 


K. The repetition of the RELATIVE is commonly avoided, either by ellipsis, or by the 
substitution of a personal pronoun or of a demonstrative. 562. 


XXVIII. The ArricLe is prefixed to SUBSTANTIVE, to mark them as 

definite. 520. 

XXIX. A VERB agrees with its subject in number and person. 568. 

L. The Neuter Prurat has regularly its vers in the singular, 569. 

M. The uses of the Voices are sometimes interchanged. 575. 

The Passive Voice has for its suBsect a complement of the Active, commonly a direct, 
but sometimes an indirect complement. Any other word governed by the Act., and not 
in apposition with this, may remain unchanged with the Pass. THE SUBJECT OF THE 
Active is commonly expressed, with the Pass. , by the Gen. with a preposition. 586. 

XXX. The DEFINITE TENSES express the action as doing at the time ; 
the INDEFINITE, simply as performed in the time ; and the CoMPLETE, 
as complete at the time. In the Jndicative, this time is marked as 

PRESENT or FUTURE by the primary tenses, and as PAST by the sec- 

ondary ; in the other modes, it is not marked. 590. 

N. The uses cf the Tenses are often interchanged. 602. 


XXXI. The INDICATIVE expresses fact ; the SUBJUNCTIVE, present con- 

tingency ; and the OpraTIVE, past contingency. 613. 

O. The SuBsuncrive regularly follows a tense referring to present or future time ; and 
the OprarTIvE, a tense referring to past time. 617. 

P. After a FINAL CONJUNCTION, (a) an object of present forethought is expressed by the 
Subj., or (b) in the Future, by the Jnd.; but (c) an object of past forethought, by 
the Opt., or (d), to mark it as now contrary to fact, by a prior tense of the Ind. 624: 

a> in prohibitions with 7, the PRESENT is put in ‘the Imperative, and the Aorist? in 
the Subjunctive. 628. 

R. In the HYPOTHETICAL PERIOD, (a, b) if the PREMISE is presented as already decided in 
point of fact, it takes the INDIC ATIVE; (c) if it is presented as undecided, but with pres- 
ent expectation of decision, it takes the SUBJUNCTIVE ; (d) otherwise, it takes the OpTa- 
TIVE. In the first case, the CONCLUSION is commonly i in the Ind. or Imv.; in the sec- 
ond, in the Fut. Ind. or an equivalent ; and in the third, in the Opt. with av. 681. 

8. A RELATIVE CLAUSE commonly uses the modes like other sentences to which it is most 
nearly akin. 640. 

T. The Oprative is the finite mode appropriate to Indirect Discourse in past time. 648. 

U. The uses of the Fmire Mopss are often interchanged. 649. 


XXXII. The Imperative is the most direct expression of an act of the 
will. 655. 
XXXIII. The INFINITIVE is construed as a neuter noun. 663. 
XXXIV. The SupjEct oF THE INFINITIVE is put in the Accusative. 666. 
VY. The Inrinitive cften forms an elliptical command, request, counsel, salutation, ex- 
clamation, or question. 670. 
Ww. ee CONNECTIVES are followed by the Infinitive; especially ws, wore, olos, and 
Ogos ‘ 
XXXYV. A PARTICIPLE AND SUBSTANTIVE are put absolute in the Gen- 
itive ; an IMPERSONAL PARTICIPLE, in the Accusative. 675. 


X. A ParriciPte is often preceded by ws or orep, chiefly to mark it as subjective. 680. 

Y. IMPERSONAL VERBALS in -réov, or -réa, (a) govern the same cases as the verbs from 
which they are derived; and (b) have sometimes the agent in the Accusative, instead 
of the Dative. 682. 


. XXXVI. Apverss modify sentences, phrases, and words ; chiefly verbs, 
| : adjectives, and other adverbs. 685. 
NEGATION, as desired, feared, or assumed, uses 7; but otherwise, ov. 686. 
XXXVII. Prepositions govern adjuncts, and mark their relations. 688. 
Z. A Preposition in composition often governs the same case, as when it stands by 
itself. 699. 
XXXVIII. Consuncrions connect sentences and like parts of a sens 
tence. 700. 


The uses of the parTicies are often interchanged. 703. 
The INTERJECTION is independent of grammatical construction. 684 b. 





116 


_t 


2. 


3. 


It is Dactylic 


which are —. 


—— isa 


TABLES. —— PROSODY. 


$7 


IV. PROSODY AND PRONUNCIATION. 


A. TABLE OF FEET. 


The Numeral prefixed to each Class marks the number of Breves in its measure. 


. [ZvAA\aB} Bpaxeia, 
[ZvAAa8n Maxpa, 
Iluppixcos, 
“TauBos, 

Tpoxatos, Xopetos, 

TpiSpaxus, 

. Adxrunres, 
*Avdra.oros, 
Z7roveetos, 
ApgiSpaxus, 

II poxeAcvoparckés, 


. Kpnrixés, 'Audiuaxpos, 


Baxxetos, 
AvtiBaxxevos, 
Tlaiwy a’, 
Ilaiwy B’, 
Tlaiwy y, 
Ilaiwy 6’, 


. XopiayBos, 


? 7 
Avricragros, 
Aciau Bos, 
Acrpéxaros, 


*Iwvixds dd peifovos, 
*"Twuixds am éXdocovos, 


MoXoscds, 


’ ’ , 
. Emirpcros a, 


‘Exitpiros 8’, 
2 s 

Exitpiros 7, 
*Exirpiros 5’, 


. Adxyutos, 


Atorrévéeros, 


Short Syllable, 
Long Syllable, 
Pyrrhic, 
Iambus, Iamb, 
Trochee, Choree, 
Tribrach, 
Dactyl, 
Anapest, 
Spondee, 
Amphibrach, 
Proceleusmatic, 
Cretic, Amphimacer, 
Bacchius, 
Antibacchius, 
Peon I., 
Peon II., 
Peon IIL., 
Peon IV., 
Choriamb, 
Antispast, 
Diiamb, 
Ditrochee, 
Falling Ionic, 
Rising Ionic, 
Molossus, 
Epitrite I., 
Epitrite I1., 
Epitrite III., 
Epitrite IV., 
Dochmius, 
Dispondee, 


~— 


—— — 


Bovhevere. 
EGEXACEL. 
pynoT jpwy. 
éyelpwrTat. 
etm pocwTwr. 
Tryoupévov, 
Bovdevcete. 
€BovXevoun. 
BovXevowvras. 


78. B. MerricaL DeEscRIPTION AND ANALYSIS. 


I. Give a general description of the Metre in which the Poem ts written. 
Il. Describe the particular Verse. 


) Monometer 


) Acatalectic 


) consist- 


Iambic, &c. | Dimeter, &c. | Catalectic, &e. § ’ ing of 


The Cesura is the (Fem. ] 


_ . Penthemim, 
[ Mase. ] Hephthemim, 
Pastoral, &c., 


Ill. Analyze by [Dipodics and Feet. 


Spondee, 


1 Long } 
Dactyl,&c., the 2, &e. Syllable Short | by 


| 2, ao} Feet 
se — 


Position, 
Nature, &c, Bale. 


*% 
? 
—. 


7. 


~ 





- 





~ 


§ 79. PRONUNCIATION. 117 


79. ©. Meruops oF PRONUNCIATION. 


[a. The directions here given do not apply to y before k, y, x, or §, 
where it is regarded as a nasal, having the sound of ng in king: dyyeXos, 
Avyé. Those for a, 4, and @ apply also to g, y, and w. See 137 ¢, 109. 

b. Where consonants or the rough breathing are not specially noticed, 
it will be understood that they have the prevalent sounds of the corre- 
sponding letters in English: thus, B, 8, t, 4, B ¥ 7, Pp, 7? fy» pro- 
nounced like 4, d, z, 7, m, n, p, 7, t, ph, ps, h, in bud, zeal, phantom, rap, 
hops; y, «, hard, like g, k, in keg; 0, & o, sharp, like th, x, s, in sixth. 
The smooth breathing simply marks the absence of the rough. 

e. To avoid confusion, the terms protracted and abrupt are used below 
to mark what are commonly called, in English orthoépy, dong and short 
sounds ; and the term ictus (Lat., stroke, beat), to denote that stress of 
the voice which in English we usually call accent. Any secondary ictus 
needed in long words, may commonly be placed as their formation and 
the ear seem to require. | 


1. ANctENT GreeK Metnop. d. The pronunciation of every lan- 
guage, from the very laws of language, is in a continual process of change, 
more or less rapid. And in respect to the Greek, there is full internal 
evidence, both that its pronunciation had materially changed before its 
orthography became fixed, and that it has materially changed since. 
Therefore, as there is n9 art of embalming sounds, the ancient method can 
now only be inferred, and, in part, with much uncertainty. For the 
probable PEE pate of the simple vowels, see 107. (e) In the diph- 
thongs, the sounds of the two elements seem originally to have been sim- 
ply combined, and uttered with a single impulse of the voice. But the 
mode of representing Greek words in Latin (92b) shows that, in some 
diphthongs, one of these sounds was early lost or became obscure.  (f) 
The consonants seem, in general, to have been pronounced like the cor- 
responding letters in English ; x, however, resembling the German guttu- 
‘al ch more than the English /, and doubled or combined consonants 
being both sounded. —- For probabilities respecting the details of the An- 
cient Method, see ‘‘ History of the Greek Alphabet and Pronunciation,” 
by Professor Sophocles ; from whose Romaic Grammars, the following 
statement of Method 2 has been chiefly condensed. It shows how greatly 
the Greek, like the English, has been affected by the precession of vowels. 


2. Mopern Greek Meruop. g. Vowels: @ like a in father; but 
after the sound of t, more like a in peculiarity: € or av a little longer than 
ein ie: tL, H, Y, €b, OL, v, or vt, like 7 in machine: o or w nearly as o in 
obey : ov like 00 in moon. In ay, ev, qv, wv, the v has the sound of B be- 
fore B, y, 5, {, A, p, v, p, or a vowel; but otherwise, that of bd: gevyw, 
avrés, pronounced PéByw, adrds. 

h. Consonants: B nearly as v (a little softer): y before the sound of ¢ 
or t, a little stronger than y in yes; otherwise guttural, very nearly like 
the German gin Tag: 8 like th in the: « like k (somewhat softened be- 
fore the sound of € ort); but after the sound of ng, like gin go: Nand v 
like Z and 2; but before the sound of 1, like Zi in filial, and ni in onion ; 
while final v in dv, éav, év, wvv, or the article, sounds like ny before « or 
€, and like m before w or W (rdv Kaipdv, ody mdbdee pron. tong-gerdi, (sim- 
bili) : 1, , like p, ps; but after the sound of m, like b, bs: o& like s in 
so; but before B, y, 5, £, A, p, v, p, like z (so even o final in the article, as 
rovs Bact\ets TKS Yijs, pron. tooz-vasilis tiz-yis): + like t; but after y, like 
d (so even in initial +r after Gv, éay, év, ctv, or the article ; as év Tipsy. 


118 TABLES. — PRONUNCIATION. § 79. 


pron. en-dimi): @ nearly as f (a little softer): y like the German ch. 
See a, b. As in English, a consonant doubled is sounded but once. 

i. The rough breathing is silent; and the quantity of a vowel is not 
considered. The écfus is placed according to the written aecent. A pro- 
celitie is pronounced as if a part of the word which it precedes ; and an 
enclitic, as if a part of the word which it follows. The accent of an en- 
clitic is only regarded when the preceding word is accented on the ante- 
penult: thus \éXexrai wor has a secondary ictus on xrat. 


3. ENcLisH MreTHop. j. Modern scholars have pronounced the Greek 
variously ; commonly according to the analogy of their respective Jan- 
guages. Hence the following method, though not closely approaching 
the ‘ancient, has been extensiy vely used in England and this country : 

k. Simple Vowels: 9, v, a, like e in mete, wu in tube, o in note (rurry- 
cwv): €, 0, like e in Jet, o in dot ; but before another vowel, or at the end of 
a word, like e in real and 0 in go (év, héovre, 75) : a and t, in general, like 
a and 7 in English; when protracted, like @ in hale, i in pine; when 
abrupt, like @ in hat, i in pin. At the end of a word, iis always pro- 
tracted ; but a, except in monosyllables, takes the sound of ain era: ari, 


pia, t4é. If a or t receives the ictus, whether primary or secondary, and _ 


is followed by a single consonant or {, it is protracted in the penult, but 
abrupt in any prec eding syllable (except that a is here protracted, if it e 
next vowel is € or t before another vowel) : ifw- marépa, Karapirew * Taiios. 
See c. — P affects an abrupt vowel preceding, in the same way as 7 in 
English : d&pya, “Epy7js, gps. 

i Diphthongs: ox like the affirmative ay; e, e7 in height; ov, ot in vil ; 
vt, ui in quiet ; au, aU in haul; ev and ny, ew in feud, Europe ; ov and av, 
ou in thou: eiéviat, petryou, avrob, vig. See a. 

m. Consonants: & like s in so; but in the middle of a word before BP, 
or at the end after y or o, like z (cr7cas- Kocpiws, is): © and + never like 
sh: xy like ch in chaos: & , like x, ps, in ex, lips; but, when initial, 
like z, s (ZépEns, Yvx7H). Of two initial consonants which cannot both be 
pronounced with ease, the first is silent ; a consonant doubled is sounded 
but once ; and @ is pronounced like p: pra, TTICow, Epp. See a, b. 

n. In diss) yllables, the 1cTUs is on the penult ; in polysyllables, on the 
penult if Zong in quantity, but otherwise on the ‘antepenult. 


4. **CONTINENTAL METHOD.” 0. Many of our scholars prefer a 
method of pronouncing Greek more like that which prevails, though with 
much variety, upon the continent of Europe. This method, in the details 
of which there is not yet full agreement, appears to be taking, in our 
country, a form like the following : 

p- Simple Vowels: a, d, like a in father, fast (nearly as in man) ; n, 6 @ 
in féte, men (or a in machine) ; ; t,t, 7 in machine, pin (or direct); @, 0, oin 
hope, hop (or obey) ; v, ¥, uw in tube, duet, or yet ‘closer, like the French wu. 
Cf. 107. The distinction between vowels long and short by nature should 
be carefully observed : mpGyya+ 67, 6€- *Ipis - - Aéywr- ods, cvSs. 

q. Diphthongs: av like the affirmative ay (by some closer, like ai in 
aisle) ; a, et in height ; o, of In oil; w, wee in Queen ; OY, OU in loud ; ev, 
mv, eu in “feud ; ov, wv, ou in soup: eldviar, airod, devvyot, via. Seea. 

tr. Consonants : ¢ like (by some, like a soft dz): x, by some, like ch 
in chaos; by others, like the German guttural ch: xequdfw. Every con- 
sonant should be pronounced, and with a uniform sound except an (a) ; I's 
doubling of a consonant should be, at least, slightly marke 

should be rougher than p: pra, rrjcow, BoEXXLOP, éppw. See b 

t. The ictus is placed according to the written accent. 


























§ 80. GREEK APPENDIX. By 


80. TIAPAPTHMA ‘EAAHNIKON. 


fa. “OPOOTPAPIA. Zrovyeta elements, ypdppara letters; érionua. 
Povievta vowels: Bpaxéa short, waxpad long, dixpova doubtful, dipPoyyoe 
diphthongs. 2Ztpdova consonants: hyptowva semivowels, vypd liquids, 
ctiugpwva irda double consonants; &peva mutes, YiAd smooth, wéca mid- 
dle, dacéa rough. ZvAAaBH syllable ; xpdvos quantity. 

B. ITIvevpara breathings: Sac’ rough, Yiddv smooth. Tpocwdtar 
(révor) accents: deta acute, Bapeta grave, mepromwpervy circumflex. Brey- 
pal points: redela orvyui period, uéon orryuy colon, broorvyuH comma. | 

y ETYMOAOTIA. Ta tod Adyou oroixeta Adyorrar Gde+ [Kira] 
UpSpov, Svopa, érlOerov, dvrwvupla, phwa: [dkdira] érippnpa, mpolecis, 
civSerpos, emipavypa. [Krlois, cvyxpiois, cugvyla. | 

8. Tod dvoparos ai mradces dvoudfovrar [evdetac] dpO% 7} dvopacriKh, 
kKAnTiKh, [wAdyiae] yevexr, SotiKh, aitrariky (179): ra dé rpla yévy (174), 
dpowevixdy, OnAvxdv, otdérepov: [rd dé rpia TpdcwTa, TPaTOV, SevTEpov, 
tplrov.| Tpurdots 6 éorly woatrws 6 dpiOuds, dn\ad) Evixds, Svixds, mAN- 
OuytiKds (178). Tod émiBérov of Badwol Adyovrar OeTiKds, ovyKpLTLKds, 
brrepOerikds (256). 

e. Tpels éxer Stabécas 76 Pipa, évepyntikhy, peony, TadynTiKAY (266) * 
kal év éxdoTn Siabéce révre Siaxplvovrat éykAloes, ov Téocapes ev Trapep- 
datial, dptorixi, droraKktik?), evKTLK}, TpooTaKTiKh, ula dé dmrapép- 
gatos: uépos dé Tov pyuards éore kal  peroxhH (269). Ol yxpovor rod pA- 
patos Néyovrat Gbe (267)* éverras, waparatixds, péddwv, [pet ddlyov 
pédAwv,] ddptoros, mapaxelpevos [i) ovvTedikds], bmepruvTedtKds. [Ad- 
Enots cud\AaBixh) Kal xpovixy, avadimractacpos, 277. | 

 t. SYNTAZID. Adyos dvoudferar dPpoois NéEewr axéparov Sndrodoa 
dudvoray. “Yaroxelyevov Aéyerar 7d epi ob 6 Nbyos* Kal KaTYHYyopovmevoy 7} 
KaTHYySpHpa, 7d Kata Tov Uroxetuévov eyiuevoy (56b). Ard wdvou Tob 
phparos xarryyopeiral re. — MetraBarixd carobvrar ra phuara Ta Todvde 
évépyerav Syndovvra, iris €& avayKys els mpdowroyv 7} mpayua Siddopov trod 
broxeyévov, TO Tapa Ypauparixois avTikelevov [object] hey5uevov, mera- 
Balver (58 c). 

y. Llapepparixod pjuaros 7d broxeluevor Tiberar kar dvopactikhy (400): 
kal ravTry Tvppevel 7d pjua Kar apOpdv re Kal mpdowmov (568). — II\e- 
dévev bvrwy t&y Tod piuaros broxemmévww Kal érepoTpocdtwyv, TiPerar Td 
phua kard 7d érikparéorepov’ wig O° del Td mMpatov 7d SevTepov mpdowror, 
kal Tobro Td tplrov (496 d). 

0. Zyfpa “Arrucov. EldOdor wévroe of “Arrixol wAyOvvtucijy dvopa- 
oTikiy ovderépay PHpate EviK@ maparilévar (569). 

t. THs amapagidarov 7d broxeluevov riderar kar altvatiKhy (670). 

k. Td ériQerov kal 7 peroy?) cuudwvotcr Tots els & dvadéporrar dvduact, 
kara yévos, apOpov, mra@ovv (504). — TloA\Gy r&v dvoudrwy vrwr, riOerat 
7d érlOerov i} weToX TANGvVTLKGS* Eri Lev apiywv, elre Spoyevav eclre 


120 TABLES. —- GREEK RULES. § 80. 


érepoyevav (223 a), kar odSérepov yévos: él d¢ emrpitxov, TOV pev Spoye- 
vav, KaTd TO Tots dvipact Kowdy yévos, Tv dé Erepoyevav, KaTd Td émKpa- 
TéaTepov (496). 

dX. “H dvadopuch Acyoudvyn dvrovupla cuupwvel TH EauTIs HYOuvpevo Kara 
yévos kal dpvOpov Kal medowtmoy (505). — Te cvvraxtix@ dé oxjuare 6 Ka- 
Nelrae EXErs 7) eerErs, EAkerar 7 dvtwvuula els Tiw mrGow Tod Ayoupevou * 
dvrictpépus & éc@ bre kal 7 dvTwvupla Eker 7d Tyovmevory (554 a, c). 

p. Ovduara, Ta wey pos Td adtTd TPOTwTOV i TPAYHA dvapepouera, 
opotoTTatws TiOevrar* Tofro dé évoparwv mpdcGerts kadeirat (393). Ta 
dé mpos Stadopa dANw Addo Urordocerat él yevikfs (435 a). 

v. Tevixy owrdocorrat éridera xal phuata Ta mAnpdoews (414), pweE- 
Eews (424), eurreiplas, éripedelas, pvqprys (452), émuruylas (426 s), herdods 
(405 b) onwarrixd, kal Ta TovTOLs évaytia: mpds dé ék Tov ériférwr, TA els 
-LKds Aryoura (444), Ta Ex TOD d- OTEepyTLKOD cUvOeTa (436 b), kal Td Tapa- 
Gerixa (406 s), Ta ovyKpiTiKa Sndad}) Kal brepGeriKa, Kal TovTas dvddoya. ° 
éx 0€ Tay pnudrov, Ta apxrKa (407) kai bwapKTiKa (437), Ta evdpEews 7 AF- 
Eews onuavrixa (425, 405), cal ra TOV aiebArewy, tiv TOD pw (432 a, h). 

€& Aotiuxy outdooovra: Eridera kal phuata, TA OpordTHTOS, dvadoylas, 
mpooeyyloews, pi~ews, evavTidtyTos, Sunyhoews, Sdcews TnuavTiKd, Ta TE 
mrruxtyy 7) €xOprcry mpds twa Siabeorv dydodvra (450s). 

o. Ainatiky cwrdccovra Ta ldlws 7) duéows peraBatika pjuata (472). 
Avmdy airiatixn cuvrdocovrar Ta tkerevtTiKd, TA TadevTiKa, Ta evBUCEws 3). 
exSvcews cnuavTixad, Ta Thy evvoiav Exovra Tod ed 7} KaKwS Eyetv 7) Trotety 
(480 c). : 

w. ‘O ypévos Sade 7} ev & yiveral TL, éxpéperar SoriKy 7) yevKy, elTe 
ampobérw cire éumrpobére [without or with a preposition, 433, 469, 487]. 


p- brrov igrarat 7) ee ae Soruciis (469), Sua poate 
‘O ré1T0s omdbey rr, éxpép- « VEVOKNS (0B Te kal 
Bu ov \ ae rind pe $ Gc! am pobér ou. 
omrsoe aittatiKis (472 g), 
o. Td alrioy dia yeverss (410s). 
dia SoTiKs (466 a). 
Td 8pyavoy dé of yiverai TL, dca Soriktjs (466). 
Ope af oes | alee, | 
%) ; 
To kard te & airvatukfs (481). 
Td moody rérov 7) xpdvou 5° alrvaricfs (482). 
Td woody ém dvra\\aydr did -yevikfs (431). 


tT. TH dprotixy, ws Oerixdy re xal BéBarov rapicrwon, mpéret TO aAro- 
gatikdy OT: rails dé Aoutrats Tav éykAloewv, al odk dvTws TL bv wapioTaot, 
GdAG TL btroT LOE pevoV 7) TpoTTAGOdspevoy 7) evKTdY, mpére: TO MH (731 a). 


END OF TABLES. 


INTRODUCTION. 


81. Tue Ancient Greeks were divided into three principal 
races : the Ionic, of which the Attic was a branch, the Doric, 
and the A%olic. These races spoke the same general language, 
but with many dialectic peculiarities. 


This was one of that great Indo-European family of languages, to which 
the chief tongues of India, Persia, and Europe have belonged, and to 
which the highest rank among the languages of the world has commonly 
been assigned ; and even in this family, it has usually been placed first in 
respect to beauty of form and of embalmed literature. Its grammar pre- 
sents striking and beautiful analogies to the Sanskrit, Latin, and other 
languages of this family. 

82. The Ancient Greek Laneuacr (commonly called sim- 
ply the Greek) has accordingly been divided by grammarians 
into four principal DiaLects, the Arric, lonic, Doric, and 
ASOLIC. 

Of these the Attic and Ionic were far the most refined, and had far the 
greatest unity within themselves. The Doric and Molic were not only 
much ruder, but, as the dialects of races widely extended and united by 
no common bond of literature, abounded in local diversities. Some of 
the varieties of the Doric or Aolic were separated from each other by dif- 
ferences scarcely less marked than those which distinguished them in 
common from the other dialects. Of the Molic, the principal varieties 
were the Lesbian, the Beeotian, and the Thessalian. The Doric, aceord- 
ing as it was more or less removed from the Attic and Ionic, was char- 
acterized as the stricter or the milder Doric : the former prevailing in the 
Laconic, Tarentine, Cretan, Cyrenian, and some other varieties ; the lat- 
ter in the Corinthian, Syracusan, Megarian, Delphian, Rhodian, and some 
others. 


83. The Greek colonies upon the coast of Asia Minor and 
the adjacent islands, from various causes, took the lead of the 
mother country in refinement ; and the first development of 
Greek literature which secured permanence for its productions 
was among the Asiatic Jonians. This development was Epic 

Porrry, and we have, doubtless, its choicest strains remaining 
to us in the still unsurpassed Homeric poems. 


The language of these poems, often called Hpic and Homeric, is the old 
Ionic, with those modifications and additions which a wandering bard 


REY. Gh. 6 





122 INTRODUCTION. § 85. 


would insensibly gather up, as he sang from city to city, and those poetic 
licenses which are always allowed to early minstrelsy, when as yet the 
language is unfixed and critics are unknown. Epic Poetry was followed 
in lonia by the Elegiac, of which Callinus of Ephesus and Mimnermus of 
Colophon were two great masters ; and this again by lonie Prose, in which 
the two principal names are Herodotus and Hippocrates, who chose this 
refined dialect, although themselves of Doric descent. In distinction 
from the Old Ionic of the Epic poets, the language of the Elegiac poets 
may be termed the Middle Jonic, and that of the prose-writers, the New 
lonic. . 

84. The next dialect which attained distinction in litera- 
ture was the Aolic of Lesbos, in which the lyric strains of 
Alczeus and Sappho were sung. But its distinction was short- 
lived, and we have scarce any remains of the dialect except 
some brief fragments. There arose later among the Afolians 
of Boeeotia another school of Lyric Poetry, of which the most 
illustrious ornament was Pindar ; who is commonly said, how- 
ever, but loosely, to have written in the Doric. 

Writing for the public festivals of Greece, Pindar rejected the peculiar- 
ities of his rude native tongue, and wrote in a dialect of which the basis 
consisted of words and forms common to the Dorie and Aolic, but which 
was greatly enriched from the now universally familiar Epic. 

85. Meanwhile, the Athenians, a branch of the Ionian race, 
were gradually rising to such political and commercial impor- 
tance, and to such intellectual pre-eminence among the states 
of Greece, that their dialect, the Attic, adorned by such drama- 
tists as /Mschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, Aristophanes, and 
Menander, by such historians as Thucydides and Xenophon, 
by such philosophers as Plato and Aristotle, and by such ora- 
tors as Lysias, Alschines, and Demosthenes, became at length 
the standard language of the Greeks, and, as such, was adopted 
by the educated classes in all the states. It became the gen- 
eral medium of intercourse, and, with a few exceptions, the 
universal language of composition. Its diffusion was especially 
promoted by the conquests of the Macedonians, who adopted it 
as their court language. 

a. As its use extended, it naturally lost some of its peculiarities, and 
received many additions ; and thus diffused and modified, it ceased to be 
regarded as the language of a particular state, and received the appellation 
of the Common Diatect or LANGUAGE. The Attiz and Common dialects, 
therefore, do not differ in any essential feature, and may properly be re- 
garded, the one as the earlier and pure, the other as the later and impure, 
form of the same dialect. In this dialect, either in its earlier or later 
form, we find written nearly the whole that remains to us of ancient 
Greek literature. It may claim, therefore, to be regarded, notwithstanding 
a few splendid compositions in the other dialects, as the national language 
of Greece ; and its acquisition should form the commencement and the 
basis of Greek study, 





is. a 








4 87. DIALECTS. 123 


b. The pure Attic has been divided into three periods : the Old, used 
by Thucydides, the Tragedians, and Aristophanes ; the Middle, used by 
Xenophon, Isocrates, and Plato ; and the New, used by Demosthenes, and 
the other Orators of his time, and the later Comedians. ‘The period of 
the Common dialect may be regarded as commencing with the subjection 
of Athens to the Macedonians ; and the great Aristotle, as the connecting 
link in the transition. 

c. The exceptions to the universality acquired by the Attic dialect are 
found almost entirely in poetry. Here the later writers felt constrained 
to imitate the language of the great early models. The Epic poet never 
felt at liberty to depart from the dialect of Homer. Indeed, the old Epic 
language was regarded by subsequent poets in all departments as a sacred 
tongue, the language of the gods, from which they might enrich their 
several compositions. The Molic and Doric held such a place in Lyric 
Poetry, that even upon the Attic stage an Molo-Doric hue was given to 
the lyric portions by the use of the long a, which formed so marked a 
characteristic of those dialects, and which, by its openness of sound, was 
so favorable to musical effect. The Dramatic was the only department of 
poetry in which the Attic was the standard dialect. 


d. The culture of the Athenians was so liberal, and their intercourse 
with other states so extensive, that not only Attic poets, but even prose- 
writers, felt at liberty to borrow some forms of expression which belonged 
more strictly to other dialects. 


86. Of the Doric dialect, in proportion to its wide extent, 
we have very scanty remains ; and of most of its varieties our 
knowledge is derived from passages in Attic writers, from mon- 
uments, and from the works of grammarians. In Greece it- 
self, it seems scarcely to have been applied to any other branch 
of literature than Lyric Poetry. In the more refined Dorian 
colonies of Italy and Sicily, it was employed in Philosophy by 
the Pythagoreans (Archytas, Timeus, &c.), in Mathematics 
by the great Archimides, in Comedy by Epicharmus and his 
successors, and in Pastoral Poetry (which was confined to this 
dialect) by Theocritus, Bion, and Moschus. 


87. In this grammar, an attempt is made to exhibit first 
and distinctly, under each head, the language in its standard 
form, that is, the Attic and the purer Common Greek ; and 
afterwards to specify the important dialectic peculiarities. It 
will not, however, be understood that everything which is 
ascribed to one of the dialects prevails in that dialect through- 
out, or is found in no other. 

a. This applies especially to the Doric and olic, which, with great 
variety within themselves (§ 82), are closely akin to each other ; so that 
some (as Maittaire) have treated of both under the general head of Doric ; 
and in the following grammar some forms will be simply mentioned as 
belonging to one of these dialects, that also occur in the other. By the 
term Aolic, as employed by grammarians, is commonly denoted the culti. 
vated Molic of Lesbos ; as the term Ionic is usyally confined to the lan. 


124 INTRODUCTION. § 87, 


guage spoken (though, according to Herodotus, with four varieties) by the 
Jonians of Asia Minor and the adjacent islands. — 

b. Grammar flourished among the Greeks only in the decline of their 
language, and the Greek grammarians usually treated the dialects with 
little precision. Whatever they found in the old lonie of Homer that 
seemed to them more akin to the later-cultivated Holic, Doric, or even 
Attic, than to the new Ionic, they did not hesitate to ascribe to those dia- 
lects. Even in the common language, whatever appeared to them irreg- 
ular or peculiar, they usually referred to one of the old dialects, terming 
the regular form xowdy, common, though perhaps this form was either 
wholly unused, or was found only as a dialectic variety. On the other 
hand, some critics used the epithet «owds as a term of reproach, designat- 
ing by it that which was not pure Attic. 

88. The wide diffusion of the Greek by the Macedonian 
conquerors, and subsequently the conquest of the Greek world 
by the Romans, much affected the purity of the later language, 
which became especially degenerate in the Byzantine period. 

a. The Macedonians, who had previously spoken a rude and semi- 
barbarous dialect of the Greek, retained and diffused some of the peculi- 
arities of their native tongue. These are termed Macedonic, or, some- 
times, from Alexandria, the principal seat of Macedonian, and indeed of 
later Greek culture, Alexandrine. Words and forms borrowed from the 
language of the Romans are called Latinisms. 

b. The Greek, as the common language of the civilized world, was em- 


ployed in the translation of the Jewish Scriptures, and the composition of 


the Christian. When so employed by native Jews, it naturally received 
a strong Hebrew coloring; and, as a Jew speaking Greek was called 
‘EAAnvior ys (from é\Anvifw, to speak Greek), this form of the language has 
been termed the Hellenistic (or by some the Ecclesiastical) dialect. Its 
peculiarities naturally passed more or less into the writings of the fa- 
thers, and through the diffusion of Christianity exerted a great general 
influence. 

c. From the very laws of speech, the Greek was affected, more or less, 
by the language of each new country into which it penetrated. Of neces- 
sity, therefore, notwithstanding the careful compositions of such scholars 
as Arrian, Lucian, and lian, and the precepts of a class of critics, called 
Atticists, it was continually becoming more and more impure. 

89. Since the destruction of the Eastern Empire by the 
. Turks, the fusion of the Byzantine and Ecclesiastical Greek 
' with the popular dialects of the different districts and islands 
of Greece has produced the MoprERN GREEK, or, as it is often 
called, by a name derived from the Roman Empire in the East, 
the Romaic. This language has been especially cultivated and 
refined within the present century, and has now a large body 
of original and translated literature. 

The Greek, therefore, in its various forms, has never ceased 
to be a living language ; and it offers to the student a series 
of compositions, not only including many of the highest pro- 
ductions of genius, but extending through a period of nearly 
three thousand years, 


* 
ee ee 





BOOK L. 


ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. 


Tpayudrov re cvvbécets 
"Eéedpov adrois. 
Prometheus of schylus. 


CHAPTER I. 


CHARACTERS. 


90. THE Greek language is written with 
twenty-four letters, two breathings, three accents, four 
marks of punctuation, and a few other characters. 


I. For the Lerrers (called the Alphabet from Alpha, Beta, 
just as we speak of “the A, B, C”’), see Table, § 1. 


Remarks. 1. Dousre Forms. Sigma final is written s; not 
final, o: as, ordots. Many editors, without authority from manu- 
scripts, use the final form at the end of any word compounded with 
another: as, mposesspepecs. The other double forms are used indif- 
ferently : as, Bn& or 67nOt. 

2. Licatures. Two or more letters are often united, except in 
recent editions, into one character, called a ligature (ligattira, tte) : 
as, e for ov, s (named ort or oriypa) for or. For the principal liga- 
tures, see § 3. 


91. 3. Numerat Power. To denote numbers under a thou- 
sand, the Greeks employed the letters of the alphabet, and three 
obsolete letters termed Hpiséma (érionpoy, sign, mark), as shown in 
§ 1, with the mark (’) over them: as, a’ 1, ¢’ 10, 18’ 12, pkey 123. 
The first eight letters, with Vau, represented the nine units; the next 
eight, with Koppa, the nine tens; and the last eight, with San, 
the nine hundreds. The thousands were denoted by the same let- 
ters with the mark beneath: as, €’ 5, ¢ 5,000, «Ky or xy 23,000, 
awoa’ 1871. 

a. Sometimes the Greek letters, like our own, denote ordinal numbers, 
according to their own order in the alphabet. In this way the books of 
Homer are marked : as, “I\tddos A, Z, 2, The Iliad, Books 1, 6, 24. 





126 CHARACTERS, § 91. 


b. Vau, in one of its forms (©), resembles the ligature for er. Hence — 


some editors confound them, and employ =T, as the large form of Vau, 
to denote 6. 

c. In some old inscriptions, numbers are written by using the initials 
of the old “Ios one ($ 25), IHévre five, Aéxa ten, Hexarév (98 b) a hundred, 
Xidioc a thousand, and Mipro ten thousand. II drawn around another 
numeral multiplies it by five. Thus, MX XbFAAATIT = 62,176. 


92. 4. Roman Lerrers. By the side of the Greek letters in 
§ 1, are placed the Roman letters which take their place when Greek 
words are transferred into Latin or English: as, Kuxkww Cyclops. 

a. The letter y becomes 7, when followed by another palatal ; but, 
otherwise, g (137 c): as, dyyedos, Lat. angelus, Eng. angel, ovyxor7 
syncope, Adpuvyé larynx, Aljiva gina. 

b. The diphthong a becomes & ; o, ©; &, 7 or € (before a consonant 
almost always i); ov, @; and w, yi: as, Paidpos Phedrus, Bowria 
Beeotia, Ne?dos Nilus, Aapetos Darius, M7éera Medéa, Motca Misa, 
Ei\eiGua llithyia. A few words ending in -ata and -ove are excepted : as, 
Maia Maia, Tpoia Troia or Troja; so also Atas Ajax. For a, y, @, see 
109. 


93. II. The Breatuines are the Smootn or Sort (spiritug 
lenis: ’), and the Rovueu (spiritus asper: ‘), also called the 


ASPIRATE (aspiro, to breathe). The first denotes a gentle emis- 
sion of the breath, such as is needed before the utterance of 


any initial vowel, but in most languages is not marked; the 


second, a strong emission, such as in English is represented 
by kh. 
a. The rough breathing becomes, in Latin and English, h, while the 


smooth is not written: as, “Exrwp Hector, *Epvé Eryx, ‘Péa Rhea (the h. 


being placed after the 7 by the same inaccuracy as after the w in our 
while, pronounced hwile ; since in both cases the breathing introduces the 
word). 

b. One of the breathings is placed over every initial vowel. For its 
place over a diphthong, see 110. 

ce. An initial v has always the rough breathing to assist in its utterance 
(as in English an initial long w is always preceded by the sound of y ; 
thus, és, duets, as, in English, use, pronounced yuse, union) ; except in 
the Aolic dialect, and in the Epic forms Uupes, Bum, Bupe. 

d. An initial p requires, for its proper vibration or rolling, a strong 
aspiration, and is therefore always marked with the rough breathing : as, 
péw. When p is doubled, the first p has the smooth breathing, and the 
second the rough (in Latin rrh) : as, Wivssos Pyrrhus. Some excellent 
editors, however, notwithstanding old usage and Latin analogy, now write 
pp without the breathings: thus, Ilvppos. 

e. Except over pp, the breathings are now written onty over initial let- 
ters ; though in some inscriptions the aspirate is found in the middle of 
words, and the Latin has such forms as enh aris, polyhistor, Polyhymnia, 
from évvipls, modvicrwp, Wodtpma. Sce 141 a. 


94. III. The Accents are the Acute (’), the Grave (* ), 
aud the Ent stahanses © Se ior their use, see Fras 
owe:s only. 











eee, eT ae ee oe eee 


fe 
ma oy ‘ 
a 


8 97. HISTORY OF ORTHOGRAPHY. 127 


95. IV. The Marks of Punctuation are the Comma (, ); 
the Coton (-), taking the place of our colon and semicolon ; 
the Prriop (.); and the Nore or INTERROGATION (;), which 
has the form of ours (7) inverted. 


To these come editors have judiciously added the Nore or EXcLaMa- 
TION (!). 

96. VY. Orum2 Caaracter3. a. Coronis and APOSTROPHE. 
The mark (’), which at the beginning of a word is the smooth 
breathing, over the middle is the CoRONIS (kopevis, crooked 
mark), or mark of crasis, and at the end, the APoSTROPHE 
(124 b, 127): as, ratra for ta curd, a\N eyo for adda eyo. 

b. The Hypurx, Diznesis, Dasu, and Manks oF PARENTHESIS and 
QUOTATION are use in printing Greek as in English. 

ce. Among the other signs used by critics a and editors are BRACKETS [], 
to enclose words of doubtful authenticity ; the paper (+ or —), to 
mark verses or words as faulty ; the Asterisk (*), to denote that gome- 
thing is wanting in the text ; and Marks OF QUANTITY, Viz. (~), to 
mark a vowel or syllable as long ; (“), as short; (3 or ~™), as ctther long 
or short. 

d. The HypopiasToLe (irodtacron%, separation beneath) is a mark like 
a comma, placed, for distinction’s sake, after some forms of the article 
and relative pronoun, when followed by the enclitics ré and ri: as, 6,7, 
76,Te, 6,71, to distinguish them from the particles dre, rére, drt. It is now 
commonly and w isely omitted, and the enclitic merely separated by a 
space. 


HISTORY OF GREEK ORTHOGRAPHY. 


97. That the Greek alphabet was borrowed from the Pha- 
nician is abundantly established both by historical and by 
internal evidence. 


a. According to common tradition, letters were first brought into 
Greece by Cadmus, a Pheenician, who founded Thebes long before the 
Trojan war. In illustration, we present in § 2 the common Hebrew 
alphabet, which is substantially the same with the old Pheenician, placing 
by the side the corresponding Greek letters, and also the Latin, which 
have been adopted for our own language. In all these alphabets, how- 
ever, there was much change in the forms of the letters. It will be 
noticed that most of the names in the Oriental alphabet, when transferred 
to the Greek, require modification in accordance with the law respecting 
final letters (160), and that this is commonly effected by adding a. 

b. These names, which seem meaningless in the Greek, were in the 
original alphabet significant, denoting visible objects ; and the letters 
representing the first sounds in the names seem to have been formed 
in imitation of these objects. The words Aleph, Beth, and Gimel, for 
example, signify ov, house, and camel ; and characters to represent their 
initial sounds, A, B, G, were obtained by rudely imitating the head of an 
ox, a house, and a camel. Such appears to have been the origin of alpha- 
betic writing ; though afterwards, for the convenience of the writer, the 
frms of the letters were so modified that much of the original resemblance 
as lost. 








128 HISTORY OF ORTHOGRAPHY. § 98. 


98. This borrowed alphabet received in the course of time 
important modifications. 


a. The original Pheenician alphabet had no proper* vowels. The 
Greeks, therefore, employed as such those letters which, as representing 
various breathings or aspirate sounds, were nearest akin to vowels ; viz. 
A, EK, F, H, J, and O. This transition appears to have taken place in no- 
arbitrary manner, but in general as follows: A, as the deepest and most 
open breathing, naturally passed into the deepest and most open of the 
vowels ; E and H, as weaker and stronger forms of the more open palatal 
breathing, became signs of the sherter and longer sounds of the more open 
palatal vowel ¢; in like manner, the closer palatal breathing I passed into 
the closer vowel 7, and the labial breathing F into the labial vowel wu 
(compare 7 and y, or in some languages j, and also w and v or w) ; O ap- 
pears to have been originally a nasal breathing, and was hence employed 
to represent the vowel most akin to a nasal, o. 

b. The aspirate use of F still continued for a time in Greek, as perma- 
nently in Latin ; and, in its vowel use, it became somewhat changed in 
form, and was put at the end of the old alphabet. The aspirate use of H 
prevailed sill later, even to the period of the highest Greek refinement, 
and when at length it had wholly yielded to the vowel use, the gram- 
marian Aristophanes of Byzantium, who flourished at the court of Alexan- 
dria about 200 years B. C., is said to have divided the old character into 
the two marks, F for the rough, and 1 for the smooth breathing. These 
marks were abbreviated to , , or ', and were afterwards rounded to their 
present forms, ‘’. To the same Aristophanes has been ascribed the first - 
use of marks of accent and punctuation. To the vowels E and T, later 
grammarians applied the term YiAdv, meaning either smooth in distinction 
from the aspirate use above, or stmple in distinction from diphthongs 
which acquired at length the same sound (a: = e, oc = v, cf. 79 g). 

ce. To the Phenician alphabet the Greeks added the aspirates @ and X, 
the double consonant VY, and the sign for long 0, Q, naturally placing 
them at the end. In distinction, the short 0 was now termed "O ptxpdr, 
small O; and the long 0,*Q péya, great O. The names of the other new 
letters were formed by simply adding a vowel to aid in sounding them :- 
thus, &7, Xi, as, in English, be, ce. 

d. In the softening of the language, the labial breathing F, and also ? 
and @, which weie only rougher forms of K and 2, fell into disuse, and 
these letters were retained only as numeral characters ; F and ? in their 
proper places in the alphabet, but 7 at the end. The Latin pistes. 
which ours here follows, dropped 7, but retained the other two, F and Q, 
in their proper places. 

San has also been named Zaum? (150 a), as the S which partook of 
the form of w. This falling out, its place in the alphabetic order was 
occupied by the other sibilant =, and the place of = again by &. 

e. F (also named from its form the Digamma, i. e. the double Gamma) 
is still found upon some inscriptions and coins, and performs an important 
office in the explanation of the forms of the language. Its restoration by 
Bentley to the Homeric poems has removed so many apparent hiatuses 
and irregularities of metre, that we cannot doubt its existence in the time 
of Homer, though apparently even then beginning to lose its power. It 
has been called the Holic Digamma, as longest retained by the Aolians. 

f. The alphabet was completed, according to tradition, by the poet 
Simonides of Ceos, about the time of the Persian War. In its complete 
form it was first adopted by the lonians (83), and hence termed IwKd 





§ 100. FIGURES. 129 


yeduyzara. In Attic inscriptions it was first used in the archonship of 
Euclides, B. C. 403. The alphabet of twenty-one letters, which the 
Athenians had before used, was termed, in distinction, Atrixa ypdupara. 

g. The Greeks first wrote, like the Pheenicians, from right to left ; and 
then alternately from left to right and right to left (as it was termed, 
Bovorpop705y, i. e. as the ox turns with the plough). In this mode the 
laws of Solon were written. Herodotus, however (II. 36), speaks of the 
method of writing from left to right as the established custom of the 
Greeks in his time. Till a very late period, the Greeks wrote entirely in 
capitals, and without marking the division of words. The small cursive 
character first appears in manuscripts in the eighth century, though there 
is evidence of its having been used earlier in the transactions of common 
life. 

h. That there should be great variety in the orthography of the dialects 
results of necessity from the fact, that in each dialect words were written 
as they were pronounced. The Greeks had no standard of orthography 
until the prevalence of the Common dialect (85 a). 


CTL TER LT: 


FIGURES AFFECTING LETTERS AND SOUNDS. 


99. The letters and sounds in words are subject to many 
changes, called ricuREs, as affecting the form of the word. 


a. These changes may be either euphonic, poctic, or dialectic. 

Speech is easiest and most agreeable, when there is a due alternation of 
vowels and consonants, and no needless expenditure of breath ; when 
successive sounds are so related to each other in respect to the organs used 
and the mode of using them, that the voice passes readily from one to 
another ; when words begin and end easily and agreeably ; and when the 
discourse has a proper flow and rhythm. Hence, 

b. Euphonic changes are chiefly to avoid hiatus (the succession of dis- 
tinct vowels without an intervening consonant) ; to reduce the openness 
of vowels (107, 114—116) ; to secure a proper rhythm ; and to prevent 
excessive or undesirable combinations of consonants, and difficult or less 
agreeable modes of beginning and ending words. 


100. In the earliest Greek of which we have traces, the 
prevalent method of preventing hiatus was by the insertion of 
consonants ; particularly F and 3 (as in Latin », 6, and 7), but 
also A, , &c. In the progress of the language, these inserted 
consonants extensively dropped out, and the more rapid method 
by contraction prevailed. — 

a. In some cases, vowels were simply omitted to prevent hiatus, or to 
promote rapidity of speech. 


b. Compare, in Latin, the use and omission of v in the complete tenses, 
as amavissem and amassem ; of 6 in the Dative plural, as -abws and -is 


REV. GR. 6° I 


130 ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. —Ficurn3.  § 100. 


° he Fes : oAe 

in Declension 1, -obws and -is in Dec. 2, -ibus and -is in Dee. 3; of r 
in the Genitive pl. and in the Infinitive, as -arwm and -wm, -orwm and 
-um, -erum, in Dec. 1, 2, 5; -wm, -wwm, in Dee. 3, 43 amare, amari, 
regere, regi, in the Infinitive. 

101. To give to the discourse a proper flow and rhythm, 
especially in “poetry, syllables are lengtnened or shortened, 
united or resolved. 

a. Syllables are lengthened by changing short vowels to long, or by 
adding consonants ; and are shortened by changing long vowels to short, 
or by dropping consonants. 

102. To prevent undesirable combinations of consonants, 
or modes of beginning and ending words, letters are dropped, 
added, changed, and transposed. 

a. The names be'ow ending in -thesis and -@resis are derived from com- 


pounds of ridnu, to put, and aipéw, to take. 
b. Inapplying the figures, the common form of a word is sometimes taken 


as the standard, when this may itself have undergone some change from- 


the original. Thus dm is considered an apocopate form of dé, from, 
though dé may perhaps be the earlier form. Compare the Lat. ad. 


L103. Ficures (see § 6). Addition and Subtraction. a. Pro- 
thesis (apo, before ; less properly Prosthesis) adds one or more let- 
ters at the beginning of a word; Epenthesis (emi, to, ev in), in the 
middle ; and Paragoge (mapaywyn, a bringing beside), at the end: as, 
xG€s eybés, heri, 2 yester day ; avpos avdpos (18) eikoot eikoow, twenty. 

b. By the extension of a vowel is meant its repetition, either in whole 
or in part, either before or after: as, € éé, himself, gas Pows, light, 
% 7, or. 

ce. Apheeresis (amo, from) takes one or more letters from the be- 
ginning of a word; Syncope (auyxonn, abridgment), from the middie ; 


and Apocope (drroxom a cutting g of). from the end: as, XeiBa ciBw, 


libo, to pour ; marépos watpos, patris (18) ; ava ay, up. 

d. One form of Apocope has received the special name of Apostrophe 
or Eiision (117). 

104. Exchange. Metathesis (uerd. among, interchangeably), or 
Transposition, changes the order of letters; and Antithesis (avr, in- 
stead of) substitutes one letter for another : as, @SapOov €8pabov, raccw 
TATTO. 


a. When one letter thus becomes the same with an adjoining letter, 
the change is called Assimilation : as, cwdeyw cvdAdéyw, to collect. 


105. Union, kc. a. Syneresis (ctv, together) unites two vow- 
els (and thus two syllables) into one; and Divresis (Sed, apart), or 
Resolution, divides one vowel into two O: as, voos vous, mind; mais 
mais, boy. 

b. Syneresis is divided into Contraction, Crasis, and Synizesis (117). 

c. Systole (svorodn, a drawing in) shortens a long vowel; and 
Diastole (SsacroAn, a drawing out) lengthens a short one: as, éraipos 
érapos, comrade, Eevos Eeivos, stranger. For Precession, see 107, 113s. 





ae SO ee ee 


ee ee 











§ 107. VOWELS. — PRECESSION. 131 


CHAPTER III. 


VOWELS. 


106. The Greek has jive simple vowels, and seven 
diphthongs. Each of the simple vowels may be 
either long or short, and each of the diphthongs 
may have either a long or short prepositive, or 
first vowel. 


a. Of three vowels, the short and long sounds are represented by 
the same letters (4, a; t,¢; U, 0); but of the other two, whose long 
sounds occur far more frequently, by different letters (€, 7; 5, @). 

b. When speaking of letters, and not of sounds, we say that the 
Greek has seven vowels; and call € and o the short vowels, because 
they always represent short sounds, y and the long vowels, because 
they always represent long sounds, and a, 4, and v the doubtful vow- 
els, because their form leaves it doubtful whether the sound is long 
or short. 


107. There is strong evidence, that, in general, these vowels 
were pronounced nearly as follows: a like a in fav, fast (not as in 
fate); n, ¢, like e in they, then (not as in mete); ¢ like zt in machine, 
pin (not as in pine); ao, o, like o in note, obey ; v like wu in rule, full 
(afterwards becoming closer, more like u in tube, or the still closer 
French wu or German ti). They may hence be thus placed upon a 
scale of precession or attenuation. 


son bY the tongue: Least 
aa} 


Seale of attenuat A: * Opening. 
Entire 


tt 
Cnuation by the lips Opening. 


a. In general, s and v are termed the c/ose,and the others the open vows 
els ; but a is more open than € and o, and t is somewhat closer than v. 

b. There is a strong tendency, in the progress of language, towards the 
attenuation, or closer pronunciation, of the open, especially the long open 
vowels (99). This change would be represented on the scale above by a 
moving forward of the vowel from the left to the right ; and hence has 
been called precession (preecessio, going forward). Thus the open a of the 
old Greek became y in the refined Ionic ; and this again in the Modern 
Greek has passed (as also v, €, 9, ot, and vt) into the closer sound of t. 


132 DIPHTHONGS. SYLLABICATION. § 108. 


108. In the Greek diphthongs, the voice always passes 
from a more open to a closer sound ; and the subjunctive, or 
last vowel, is always ¢ or v. 

a. A short prepositive left time for the full utterance of the subjunc- 
tive vowel, and the diphthong was then termed proper, as really combin- 
ing two sounds ; but a dong prepositive nearly or quite crowded out the 
sound of the subjunctive, and the diphthong was then termed improper, 
as though diphthongal only in appearance. 

b. These combinations can be only seven, or, counting separately the 
proper and improper diphthongs, fowrteen. Of these, wv scarcely occurs, 
except in the Ionic dialect. 


109. After a long, 7, and , the subjunctive « so lost its 
sound, that it was at last merely written beneath the pre- 
positive, if this was a small letter, and was then termed Jota 
subscript (subscriptus, written beneath). With capitals, it still 
remains in the line, but is not sounded. It is not represented 
in Latin, except that, in a few compounds of #67, @ becomes @. 
Thus, ““Acdys or addins Haidés, Opyaca Thressa, “He or 9, where, 
"Q16n or @dn Gdée, song ; but tpay@dia trageedia, tragedy. 

a. Kditors vary in the use of thet subscript, from different views of ety- 
mology, &c. : as, contract infinitive ryudv or tyuav, adverbial datives dry 
or bin, ‘AOjvyot or ’AOHvnor. So some have improperly written épyva, 
mépyva (40, as if made directly from daivw, instead of the root gay-), and 
other like forms. 

b. The t in these diphthongs appears to have been either written in 
the line or (often) wholly omitted, till about the twelfth century, when it 
began to be written beneath. 


110. In diphthongs, except the three just mentioned (a, y, 
and ), the breathings and accents are written over the second 
vowel, and thus often mark the union of the two vowels : as, 
atrn herself, but airy cry ; nda he spoke, but fice he shouted ; 
Aiyewy (4) Heemon, but “Acdys (a). 

a. If two vowels which might form a diphthong are pronounced sep- 
arately, the second is commonly marked, as above, with a dieresis ; 
though the place of a breathing, accent, or v often renders this needless, 
and it is then omitted by some : as in durH, ly Ove, AneSoluny (109). 

b. In the table (4), the vowels, simple and compound, are divided into 
classes, according to the simple sound which is their sole or leading ele- 
ment, as A sownds, &c. ; and into orders, according to the length of this 
sound, or its combination with other sounds, as short vowels, &ec. Vow- 
els of the same class are termed cognate ; and those of the same order, co- 
ordinate. 

111. Syuiasication. In Greek, a word has as many syl- 
lables as it has simple vowels or diphthongs: oear has 
four. 

a. The last syllable in a word is termed the wléima (ultimus, Jast) ; the 


last but one, the penultima or penult (pene, almost) ; and the last but 
two, the antepenultima or antepenult (ante, before), 








§ 114. EUPHONIC CHANGES, — PRECESSION, ist 


b. In the syllabication of a word, any consonant between two vowels 
is now joined by most editors with the latter ; and so even two or more 
consonants, -— unless the first is a liquid, or the same with the second, or 
a smooth mute before its cognate rough, when it is joined with the former 
vowel (except in the case of py) : as, é-Wn-pl-ome-Oa, d-oTpd-1Tw, €-uv7}- 
gOnv - but ép~yov, dv-rpov, ay-xt (137 ¢), twos, Tdo-ow, Bax-xos. 

e. Words joined by crasis or elision are here regarded as a single word : 
as, d\-N’ of-5° d-re* $0, in composition, é-md-veiue (éri, dvd, ei). But the 
elements of a compound word not so joined are here treated as separate 
words : as, cuv-elo-euu. 


112. A vowel preceded by a consonant is said to be zmpure 
(impiirus, mixed, sc. with the consonant sound) ; otherwise, it 
is said to be pure. 


a. The same distinction is made in affixes beginning with a vowel ; 
and even the word itself and its stem are termed pure or impure, accord- 
ing as these affixes are preceded by a vowel or consonant. ‘Thus, in ovds 
(14) the o and affix cs are pure, and the same term, by an extension of its 
use, is applied to the word and its stem ov- ; while in yurdés (17) the o and 
03 are impure, and the word itself and its stem yu7- are so termed. 


113. ‘The Greek vowels are subject to a great 
number of Eupnonitc CHANGES, which may be 
referred, for the most part, to two great heads, 
the PrEcEssION oF VOWELS, and the UNION or 
SYLLABLES. 


a. These changes, besides their agreeable effect, diminish the effort in 
speaking, by reducing the volume of sound employed, or by preventing 
hiatus and lessening the number of syllables. 


I, PRECESSION OF VOWELS. 


114. The great tendency in Greek to the 
attenuation of vowel sounds shows itself, 
1.) In the interchange of vowels. 


a. Precession especially affects a, as the most open of the 
vowels, changing it, when short, to e and o; and, when long, 
to yn, and sometiines to o. 


b. Hence, these three vowels may be regarded as kindred, and are 
often interchanged in the formation and inflection of words. Thus, in the 
verbs rpérw to turn, orpépw to twist, we find the stem in three forms, 
Tpamw- Tpew- TpoT-, oTpap- oTpep- oTpop-, as in the Eng. speak, spake, 
spoken, or in the equivalent Germ., where precession is earried still 
further, spreche, spricht, sprach, gesprochen ; and in piyyvius to break, we 
find the forms pay- pny- pwy- (cf. frango, fregi). The change extends to 
diphthongs: thus, in veiw to persuade, the forms med- and od- 
oreviw to hasten, crovdy haste ; werdyaca and weodyea, interior. 

e. This interchange is also illustrated by the connecting vowels in- 


134 VOWELS. —— PRECESSION. § 114. 


serted in the inrection of words. Thus, in Dec. 1, the connecting vowel 
is a, but in Cec 2 o, for which in one case € appears (12). In the In- 
(lizative active, the ccnnecting vowel in the Aorist and Perfect is a (pass- 
inz, however, into € in the 3d pers. sing. ; compare the Imperative \dgor) ; 
while in the Present, Imperfect, and Future, it is o before a liquid, but 
(therwise ¢. So, in the Aor. optative, we find both at and eva. See 35. 

d. The change of « to the closer « abounds especially in 
stems of the third declension: as, mode- modus, city. Cf. neo 
and poet. “ikw, to come. The use of v for o or @ is especially 
Holic : as, dvowa dvupa, name, xeAwvn xeAvYN, tortoise. 

e. Precession appears extensively in the comparison of the dialects, 
and of the Modern Greek with the Ancient (130, 107 b). 


115. 2.) In the lengthening of the short 


vowels, and in the general laws of contraction. 
Thus, 


a. The long vowel is regarded as the short vowel doubled; that 
1s, @, n, @, 0, l = Ga, ee, 00, tv, t~ In the formation of words, there- 
fore, the lengthening of a short vowel, or the union of two short 
vowels of the same class, should produce the cognate long. The 
close vowels obey this law: as, Xuos Xtos, a Chian, payad tC vii. 3. 
32, (vvd)uBpixa, I have insulted. Cf. Lat. otii oti, curruum currim. 
Bat through precession, which especially affects the long open vow- 
eis, d, unless it follows e. ¢, p, or po, is usually lengthened, not to 4, 
but to the closer 7; and ee and oo commonly form, not 7 and @, but 
the closer diphthongs et and ov, which are hence termed the corre- 
sponding diphthongs of e and o. Cf. Lat. amaam amem (43). 

b. Contraction more frequently exhibits some attenuation of 
vowel sound. See 118s. This naturally appears less in the earlier 
than in the later contractions, and less in the ruder than in the more 
refined dialects. See 121 e, 131. 

c. Compare the law for the formation of diphthongs, requiring the 
voice to pass from a more open to a closer sound (108). 


116. In Latin inflection, through precession and the interchange 
of kindred vowels, ¢ takes extensively the place of a; 7 of €, e&, 0, ov, at, 
and evena; and w of o and @; and they are often similarly contracted. 
This must be kept in mind, in comparing affixes and contractions. Thus, 
-as -es, -es -is, -wv -um, Dec. 3; -ais -is, Dec. 1 ; -ot -i, -ovg -is, -os -us, 
-ov um, Dec. 2; and in verbs, -ets, -e (Boeot. -ts, -t), -is, -it, -opev (Dor. 
-opes) -imus, -ere -itis, -erat -itur, -ovrat -untur, -a (in Perf. and Aor.) -i, 
-ag@a -isti. See 13, 36. 


I]. UNION OF SYLLABLES. 
117. ‘he most important changes belonging 
to this head are, A. Contraction, which unites 


two successive vowels in the same word; B. Cra- 
SIS (xpaos, nungling), which unites the jimal and 











§ 120. UNION OF SYLLABLES. — CONTRACTION. 135 


tutial vowels of successive and closely connected 
words; and C. AposTrRoPHE or Exision, which 
simply drops a final vowel before a word begin- 
ning with a vowel. 


a. All these forms may occur in the composition of words. 

b. In poetry, two vowels are often united in pronunciation, which are 
written separately. This union is termed synizisis (cuvifnots, placing to- 
gether), or synecphonésis (cwvexpwvynots, pronouncing together). Here, the 
first vowel (which may have commonly had a kind of semivowel force, 
like our y and w) is in most instances an # vowel; more rarely t, a, 
&e. KH. g. (using a mark employed by grammarians) 7é)\€ds (as if pron. 
polyos). 


A. CONTRACTION. 


118. Contraction takes place in three ways; (a) by semple 
union, When « or v simply unites with the preceding vowel to 
form a diphthong, as of o ; (b) by wnton with precession, when 
the second vowel passes into « or v, and then forms a diph- 
thong with the preceding, as ce et, 00 ov ; and (c) by absorption, 
when one vowel is simply lost in the other, which, if before 
short, now of course becomes long (including the case in which 
both vowels are of the same class, 115 a), as ea 7, oa , Ga a. 

d. In the following general rules, a, €, and y are regarded as including 
the cognate diphthongs int. For the mode of writing t, when contracted 
with a long, y, or w, or absorbed in these, see 109. 

e. In the examples below, and in others similarly printed, the letters 
or syllables which receive the change are inclosed in parentheses, and the 
result of the change follows in full-face type ; so that, in reading the forms 
of the word before and after the change, we first omit the full-face letters, 
and then the letters in the parentheses ; thus, p{@¢)aoros is an abridged 
mode of representing that ‘‘ Gt becomes @, as pdioros pdaTos.” 


119. GENERAL Rutes. I. Two vowels which 
can form a diphthong unite without further 
change: as, 

yev(stje, Ax(dtot (19); pldi)acros easiest, Op(ni)nooa, A(wi)@oros 
best, véx{ut)v. (Epic), yja(cc)ar (so Thiersch, Bekker, Kiihner in his latest 
grammar, &c., while others have written yjoq, as if « were absorbed). 

120. II. (a) a, before an # sound (§ 4), absorbs 
it; but, (b) after an / or another A sound, is it- 
self absorbed. (c) a, or (d) 7, with an O sound, 
forms w. ‘Thus, 


_ (a) riu(ae)a, Teu(der)G, Tyu(an)are, Tyu(dn)a@ (42) ; (b) yév(ea)n, yép(aa)a 
(19), Av(eac)n, AV(na)y (37); (Cc) THu(do)@mer, TLU(dw)o, Tiu(doL)@, 


136 VOWELS. — RULES OF CONTRACTION, § 120 


riu(dou)@ (42), 7X (da) a, ‘ip( (wa)w (19), (ova)aréds (17; while, in the 
Nom. sing., ofas becomes ods by an absorption of the a, or by precession 
from the Dor. @s) ; (d) dyA(bn)are (42), d6(6n)@ (45), v(no)wdds toothless. 
Cf. Lat. lyr(aé)d, am(aé)dre, am(ae)a@bam, am Ne c(6a)ogo, am/(ai)adte 
(116). 

e. In Dec. 1, and the plural and dual of the common Dee. 2, contrac- 
tion imitates the forms of uncontracted words ; but in the Attic Dec. 2 
(200), it has throughout : as, xpvo(éa)# and durd(dn)h, -Hs, -7, -fv, -at, 
&c. (23 ; cf. gin, 15); éor(éa)a (16) ; dy7p(aa)w (22). 

f. After a vowel, ea commonly becomes a ; as Iespar(éa)& (220 e), “Hpa- 
Kré (ea) & (19) ; but ‘adjectiv es in Ne and ~vis vary in the neuter pl. : as, 
from vy«7s sound, evpurs clever, ty(éa)a and -f, ebpu(éa)o and -). 

g. In the purer Attic, 7 takes the place of & in the contract forms of 
four every-day verbs: wewdw to hunger, divdw to thirst, xpdw to supply 
need, and dw to live: as, mew(der)n, xalde hate Add xvdw to scratch, 
oudw to smear, and Waw to rub. 

h. In the liquid Aorist, and in the Suh netae and Imperative of 
verbs in -pt, ae and an commonly become u unless t or p precedes : as, 
épnva, ériava (152) ; ior(dy)n, dp(an)a, tor(ae)n (45). 

i. When a long is contracted with an O etn there is usually inserted 
before the an e, which, however, is not treated i in the accentuation as a 
distinct syllable (ef. 117 b) a8; Habs (vws) vecss (16), MevédA(dos)ews, ‘ATpel- 
Oa (197c). Sosometimes, chiefly in the Ion. (135 a, 322), when the a 
is short. 


121. III. (a) ce becomes a. (b) € or o, with o, 
forms ov; but (c) with other O sounds 1s absorbed. 
(d) In other combinations not already given (119, 


120), ¢ is absorbed. ‘Thus, 


(a) pir(ee)er, pir(éec)et (42), mod(ees)erg (19), KA(etes)ets (207) ; (b) pe 
A(o)otuar, S4A(oe)ov (42), ’Om(ders)ots (17), v(dos)ous (16) ; (c) Pid(éw)a, 
pir(€or)ot, pindonos Smd(dw) 6, Pik) ot, dyA(dou)od ( (42), éoT (€w)@, 
v(dq)@ (16); (d) pr(én)Are, Prien) A (42), Tyu( Hees) Fs, Tyu(Hev) Av (207 c), 
éxO(ve)d (19), (éav)atrod (27). 

e. In the dual of Dec. 3, e€ becomes y: as, yév(ee)y (19). So, in the 
older Attic writers, in the Nom. plur. of nouns in -evs : as, tamées immijs 
(by some incorrectly written -7s, 109 a) Th. 6. 68, instead of the common 
imme’s. Cf. Lat. rée 12, mon(éé)ére. For (o€) vt, see 233 ¢. 

f. With the absorption of <«, compare that of 7 in Lat. (116), as shown 
im 13; 43. 


122. Specian Russ. 1. a, taking the place of » before o 
(156) is contracted like e: as, in the affixes of the Accusative 
l., (-ovs -oas) -ovs, (-avs -aas) -ds (13; cf. Lat. -oms -ds, -ams 
-as). Hence, in Dec. 3, the contract Nom. and Ace. pl. agree 
in form: as, médees and wédeas modes, iyOves and ixOtas ixOds 
(19), peifous (22) ; cf. Acc. Béas Bois, oias ots (19). So, in Lat., 
Nom. and Acc. pl. sues, fructus, res. See 156. 
a. By a similar contraction with Béas Bods, we find also véas vads (19), 


ypdas ypats ; and in late writers, even Nom. pl. vais. For xoéds xoas, 
see 220 e ; for KAnjuns, OtdrAns, 205 c. 








§ 125. ORASIS. 137 


123. 2. Ina few cases, the first vowel of a diphthong in ¢ 
is absorbed, and the « retained. Thus, (a) in verbs in -éw (not 
wp), occ and on become os: as, dyddee dyAot, dyAdy SyAoi (42). 
(b) In the 2d pers. sing., the affix -eac becomes not only -y 
(120 b), but, as a special Attic form, -er: as, Aveae Ady and 
Aver (37). (c) In a very few roots, ae becomes at, as deckis 
aikns, unseemly. 


d. For special contractions in the affixes of declension, see 7, 13 ; in 
the augment and reduplication, 7, 278 s. 

e. REMARK. Contraction is omitted in many words in which it might 
take place according to the preceding rules, particularly in nouns of the 
third declension, and in dissyllabie verbs in -é ; and other forms of con- 
traction occur in the dialects, or rarely in the common language. 


B.. Crasis. 


124. Crasis (1), for the most part, follows the 
laws of contraction, disregardmg however an 
t final, which according to the best usage is not 
even subscribed. But often (2), without respect 
to these laws, a final, or (5) an initial vowel is 
entirely absorbed. 


a. See examples below of these three forms, chiefly marked with cor- 
responding numbers. The first word, as the less important, is commonly 
most affected. Hence the rule above respecting t. 

b. Crasis prevails most in Attic poetry. It is commonly indicated (96) 
by the coronis (’), except when this mark is excluded by the rough 
breathing : as, Tdud, o}z0i. When an initial vowel has been simply ab- 
sorbed, the words are more frequently separated in writing : as, of ‘nol. 
The same is sometimes done, when a final vowel has been absorbed. 
Hence, cases are often referred to apheresis and apostrophe, which prop- 
erly belong to crasis. For the change of a smooth mute to its cognate 
rough, when the second word is aspirated, see 161. For the accent, see 
Prosody, 773. 


125. The principal words in which the final vowel is sub- 
ject to crasis are the following : 

a.) The article ; in which (as in the particle roi, 126 y) the 
second form prevails before a: as, 

(1) 6 éx, becoming by crasis ob«* 6 éri, obtri: of éuol, obuol- 6 dprs, obpus: 
TH un, THUN. (2) 6 dvhp, avijp (less Att. dvip) + TH avdpl, Tavdpl* H aperh, 
aperH* al ayabal, ayabal- Tod adrod, ravTo0: Tod juerépou, Ojuerepov. (3) 
6 oivos, Gros’ of éuol, of uol+ Tod tdaros, Povdaros. 

a. The neuter forms 76 and rd are especially subject to crasis : as (1) 
70 évavriov, Totvavriov* 7d ludriov, Boiudriov: 7d Udwp, Ootdwp* Ta Sma, 
4@mha. (2) 7d dAnOés, TaAnOEs. (3) TA alrxpd, Tdoxpd. 

db. In erasis with the article, @re90s, other, retains the old form &7epos: 


138 VOWELS. — CRASIS. : § 125. 


as, (2) 6 éresos, drepos TO erepov, Odrepov: Tod érdpov, Oarépov* TH ETEpy, 
Oar Epw. ; 

126. £8.) The conjunction cai, and: as, 

(1) kal &, kdv: Kal év, kav: Kal repos, xdrepos ° a eira, KaTa* Kal 6, XW" 
kal ol, xp. (2) Kaled, cel: kal cv, kod: Kal vd, xdmd. (2, 3) Kal  dyxouca, 
XAYKXovoeda. 

.) The preposition apo (chiefiy in composition before ¢ and o 

Ye Dt a eee 
unaspirated) ; the cnxterjection & (especially before a); and a 
few other particles : as, 

tpoédwxa mpovdwKka, mpdomros mpodmros (€-, dm-)* mpd &pyou, mpotpyou ° 
@ ayabé, @ yabé:. & dvOpwire, @/Opwre* 770t dpa, Ardpa* wévroe dv, wevray * 
ovTo dpa, ovrapa * el exouut, ef wi) Xow’ wh elpw, wh bow undérw év, 
endérw v: mov éorw, Tod ory. 

6.) Some forms of the pronouns : as, 

éyw oi€a, éy@ia: yw otuar, éy@uar* pol €ddxer, uovddKer* col écTw, codoTW* 


5a 


d épSpet, obpdoer* ob Evexa, otvexa’ Srov évexa, dOotveca: & dv, dv & eué, ame. 
C. Apostrrorne, or Eisron. 


127. Apostrophe affects the short vowels 4, e, %, 


and o (in monosyllables only e); and sometimes, 


in poetry, a in verbal affixes (chiefly passive) 
where it is treated as short in accentuation : as, 


Tid or éxei’ alvvyy’ 6 mpoorddov kd\vw Eur. Hel. 788. Knyatoer dpa 


(kravcerat dpa) Ar. Th. 916. *Epxed’ cs (€pxerat, 161) Ib. 1178. Koda 
éeore (koddoa, Inf. act.) Nub. 7. In Tragic dialogue, the elision of at 
is rare : AewpOAoow 745n Soph. Ph. 1071. 

a. For the sign of apostrophe (’), which has the same name with the 
figure, see 96. For the accentuation, see Prosody. 


128. Elision is most common, 

a. In the prepositions, and other particles of constant use : 
as, dd’ éavrod (dvd, 161), én exeivov, Kat éué, GAN eye, Gp’ ody, ¥ 
ovdev, pad’ av, 60 6 (dTe 6), Tay’ Gv. So, in composition (where 
the sign’ is omitted), dvépyoua, Suehavvw, maperpt, dumexo (apgt 
Zya, 159 a), 6 
EX@, Lo ), oTayv. 

b. Ina few pronouns, and in some phrases of frequent oc- 
currence : as, rotr dAdo, tate #Sn+ yevor av, 08 dmov (€ate), 
Aéyouw’ av, ot8 drt, yw eyo. 

129. a. Elision is less frequent in t, than in the other short vowels 
above mentioned. Particularly, it is not elided by the Attics in zepé, 
dxpt, méxpe ($ 164), or bre (Ww hich might then be confounded with 6re) ; 
or, except rarely in poetry, in the Dat. sing., which might then be con- 
founded with the Acc. The forms which take v paragogie (1 63) are not 


elided in prose, except éori: and in the Dat. pl., not even in Attic poetry. 
b. Elision is least frequent in Ionic prose. In Attic prose, it is found 





: 
| 





§ 130. ELISION. DIALECTIC VARIATIONS. 139 


chiefly in a few words, but these often recurring. In poetry, where hiatus 
is more carefully avoided and the metre so governs, its use is far more ex- 


tended ; and here an especial freedom belongs to Comic and Epic verse 


(135 b). In respect to its use or omission in prose, much seems to depend 
upon the rhythm of the sentence, the emphasis, the pauses, and the taste 
of the writer. ‘There is, also, in this respect, a great difference among 
manuscripts ; and doubtless in Greek, as in English, a vowel was often 
written which was elided in speaking. 

ce. On some points in crasis and elision, critics differ. Thus, some 
regard the enclitics ol, coi, and roi, and the possessive pronoun od, as 
affected by elision in Attic poetry; but others, only by crasis. See 
124 b. 

d. Both elision and the absorption of a vowel by crasis may occur at 
those minor punctuation-marks which the voice disregards ; and in poe- 
try, are sometimes permitted at the more important marks, even where 
the speaker is changed : as, v}) Al’, épy Mem. 2. 7. 4; #Ew> ‘rl rovrors 
Eur. Rh. 157 ; rovm’ gu. Hl. @ Id. Or. 1345. 


DIALECTIC VARIATIONS. 


130. The dialectic variations in the vowels may be mostly 
referred to the heads of PRecrssion, UNIoN or RESOLUTION, 
QUANTITY, and INSERTION or OMISSION. 


I. Precesston prevailed most in the soft Ionic, and least in 
the rough Doric and Aolic ; while the Attic, which blended 
strength and refinement, held a middle place. E. g. 


a. Long a, for the most part, is retained in the Dor. and Mol., but in 
the Ion. passes into y ; while the Att. preserves a mean: as, Dor. ‘apuépa, 
Att. juépa, Ion. nuépn: Dor. dauos, raya, ok’iras, Att. and Ion. djuos, 
anyn, oxiryns: Dor. and Att. sofia, rpéiyua, Ion. codin, mpfyua. So, 
even in diphthongs, Ion. vyis, ypnis, for vais, ypats, and in Dat. pl. of 
Dec. 1, -yot, -ns, for -aur, -ats. The use of long a produced, in great 
measure, the Dor. feature called riarecacuds, broad pronunciation, which 
was imitated by the Attics in the lyric parts of their drama (85 c). 

b. Short @ is retained by the Dor. and Aol. in some words, where, in 
the Att., it passes into e€; and in some (particularly verbs in -dw) by the 


Att., where it becomes € in the.Ion. Thus, Dor. rpdgw, ppdol, bd, yd, 


Att. tpépw, ppeci, dre, yé+ Att. opdw, réccapes, dponv, lon. dpéw, Téc- 
gepes, pony. 

e. As the long of € and o, or the contraction of ¢€ and oo or o¢, the 
stricter Dor. prefers the long vowels y and @ to the closer diphthongs e 
and ov; while, on the other hand, the Ion. is particularly fond of pro- 
tracting € to a, and o to ov or o. Thus, Dor. yp, dros: Gen. of 
Dec. 2, r® wpavd~- Inf. edpiv, drvev + for yelp, doddos, Tod ovpavod, evpetv, 
trvotv. Ion. Eeivos, wotvos, moln, for Eévos, wdvos, oa. Att. Kdpos, dvoua * 
Ton. Kodpos, otvoua + Dor. k@pos, avoua. Both the Dor. and Ion. have év 
for otv, therefore, contracted from édér. 

d. Other examples of precession or the interchange of kindred vowels 
(114) are the following ; in some of which, contrary to the general law of 
the dialects, the Ion. has a more open sound than the Att., or the Att. 
than the Dor. or Mol. : Att. ‘del, ‘Gerds, éorid, Oaxos, Ion. alet, alerés, 
lerin, 0xos+ Old Att. kdw, kddw, Ion. and Com. xalw, kraiw + Ion. tpd= 





: 
5.5 


140 VOWELS. . $130. — 


Tw, uéyabos, ueca8pin, dpiweew, Att. Tpérw, wéyebos, peonuppla, oppwbeos 
Dor. and Ep. ai, Att. ef - Dor. Gricxw, Ion. and Att. @rioxw, Hol. Gral- 
oxw- Att. orpatés, Spaxéws, épxerév, créua, Hol. orporés, Bpoxews, Spwe- 
Toy, orUza. For nouns in -is, see 217. 


131. II. Uwstoy or Resotutiox. A. The Conrracricn 
of vowels prevailed most in the vivacious Attic, and least nm 
the luxurious Ionic. By the poets, it is often employed or 
omitted according to the demands of the metre. There are 
also dialectic differences in the mode of contraction, which, for 
the most part, may be explained by precession. Eg. = #e. 

a. In contracting a with an © sound, the Dor. often prefers é to the 
closer @ ; in Dec. 1, regularly. Thus, Dor. “Arpeiéa, tay Ovpay (20 a), 
Toerestde, WewavTl, TPaTos, Mevédas, for “AtpeiSov (uncontracted -do), Tay 
Oupay (den), Tloce:dGy (-dwv), rewarri (-dovrt), zpGros (-ar0s), Mer2kews 
(-dos). ca 

b. For the contraction of «, and co or o¢, see 130¢. With the Ionics 
and some of the Dorics, the favorite contraction of eo and cov is into ev, 
instead of ov. This use of ev for ov sometimes extends to cases where this 
diphthong results from a different contraction. Thus, dutciuer, Grred, 
éued, Gépeus, for dt\otuer (-€ouer), prrov (-éov), énod (); oe (-€0s) - 
édixaiev, €dixaievy, Sixacedot, in Hdt. for é€dcxaiov (-ve), €6cxaiour (-cov), 
eiralio: (-dougt) - Awreivra 5a 283, for Awroivra (-berra). 

ce. The Dorics (but not Pindar), contrary to the general law of the dialect, : 
commonly contract a withan Z sound following, into 9 : as, épern, oryip, 
As, from épcrae, orydew, ddys. Cf. 120¢. 


pouos, for ras Tysds, Tols y5uovs- Nom. sing. of adj. and part. péAass, 
Topas, éxowa, for pédGaS, tipas, Exovca- 3d pers. pl of verbs, i 
xptarowt, for ¢aci, xpixrover. The Dor. has here great variety, both 
employing the simple long vowels, the short vowels (as though y 
simply dropped before o), the common diphthongs of contraction (122), 
and the Hol. diphthongs : thus, Acc* pL Téypas and réxvés Theoe. 21.1 
Tous Avxovs and tas Avxos Theoc. 4. 11; els and fs, one; Motca, Mare 
(Theoe.), Moica (Pind.), and Laconic Maa - Nom. sing. of part. ¢pdeas — 
Pind. OL 2. 108, iécica Ib. 73. So, likewise, ot for ov before o in dxoisw 
Theoc. 11. 78 ; = &ido for diéov (45 a), Pind. O-% 136. 


form @: fev for taizvé, éuavrod, lon. twits, Euewvrod, from 76 abré, 
éuéo atrou. We find also Ion. Gwiua, rpwipa (yet better tpGpua), for Gaipa, 


f. The Ion. in a few cases employs contraction where the Att. omits it, 
particularly of oy into @: as, ipés, Buca, Gwoa, Bwbéw, ii for 
lepos, €Binoa, évinsa, Bonféw, éyGorxorra. 

132. B. Vowels which appear only as diphthongs in the — 
Attic are often RESOLVED in the other dialects, especially the 
Tonic and olic, into separate sounds: as, ed, Ep. év, well In 
the Ionic, the resolution of et, with e prolonged, “ike ni, is — 
especially common : as, BagsAniy. xAnis, for Bagideia, eheisg 


§ 156. DIALECTIC VARIATIONS. 141 


a. The fondness of the Ion. for a concurrence of vowels leads it, in 
some cases, to change v to a (138) after a vowel (which, if previously a, 
now becomes ¢): as, “Apicraydea, eduvéaro, for Apicraydpay, édvvavro. 


133. C. In Crasis, the Doric and Ionic often differ from 
the Attic by uniting the o of the article with a and ax initial, to 
form and @: as, Td adyGés, TOANOES + Of Avdpes, Gvdpes* of ainé- 
Ao, @7dAot. 

a. A few crases in Hom. and Hdt. are written by most editors with the 
coronis or the smooth breathing in place of the rough : as, 6 dpicros, dpi- 
oros A. 288 ; dadtrés, wirds E. 396; of GAXNoL, @AXor* 6 dvOpwros, dvOpwros. 
Other dialectic crases are, Dor. 6 @\agos, ddagos: 6 €&, wE* Kal éx, KNK* Kal 
eime, ky7e* Lon. 6 €repos, otrez0s. The crases in Hdt., and the very few in 
Hom., begin chiefly with the article. 

b. The concurrence of vowels in Hom. is often only apparent, as they 
were once separated by a Digamma ; which, of course, forbade either con- 
traction, crasis, or elision. 

134. Ill. Quantity. For a short vowel in the Attic, the 
other dialects often employ a long vowel or diphthong, and the 
converse: as, Ion. diuAnowos for Coe ter Ion. evpén, damddeEts, 
pelwov, €oowv, for evpet1, awdderkis, peitwr, Hoowy: Dor. and Ep. 
€rapos for éraipos+ ASol. AXxaos, dpxdos, for ’AAKaios, dpxaios. See 
130 e, 131 d. 

a. The poets, especially the Epic, often lengthen or shorten a vowel 
according to the metre. <A short vowel, when lengthened in Epic verse, 
usually passes into a cognate diphthong : as, ei\jovdas A. 202, mapat 
B. 711, mvery EB. 697, ev a. 162, for €hyAvOas, rapd, von, év. 

135. IV. Appirion or Omission. Vowels are often em- 
ployed in one dialect which are omitted in another ; and here, 
as elsewhere, a peculiar freedom belongs to the poets, especial- 
ly the Epic. These often add or drop a vowel, and often 
double a vowel or insert the half of it (i. e. the short for the 
long, 103), for the sake of the metre, particularly in contract 
verbs : as, 

évi and elvi for év: 7\é O. 128, for preé B. 243; Kpjnvov ééXOwp, for 
Kpivov €hdwp, A. 41, Pdavderv, 7Bamwoa, opdw, dpdas, yedwovres, pbws, éé, 
éeixoot, Hé, for pdvbev, NBGca, 690, dpas, yeh@vres, POs, &, elxoor, 4H. 

a. The Jon. is especially fond of the insertion of €: as, Gen. pl. dv- 
bpéwv, abréwy, for dvdpGv, &c.; 2 Aor. inf. ebpéew, Auréew, for evpeiv, 
hetrety. 

b. The use of elision is extended in the dialects : as, in Hom., to the 
enclitics pol, coi, rol, jd (by apheresis for dpa) ; to t in 6re and in the 
Dat., both sing. and pl. ; to the affix of declension -at in d&e?’ dddvac 
A. 272; and, as some think, to xai (x éréoa occurs Anac. 438. 7). 


136. In the Dor., Mol., and Ep., a particle often omits its 
final vowel before a consonant, with such assimilation of the 
preceding consonant as euphony may require : chiefly dpa, dvd, 
kata, mipa, 2nd qori+ rarely dé, bad, and (in Atol.) mepi + as, 


142 CONSONANTS. § 136. 


dp opwe, Au Bwuotct, dyxpiots, dvords (166 a), Kad diva, kar pddapa 
(159 f), Kan kepadijs, Kay yoru, kaxxedar, Kap psov, Kdurov, KamplEas, rap 
Znvi, wor Tév, amméuwer, UBBddrEW, ep TH. 

a. When three consonants are thus brought together, the first is some- 
times rejected : as, kdxrave, duvdoer, for kdkxrave, dupvdoe. So, some- 
times in the Doric, even before a single consonant : as, KaBaivwy. 

b. In some of these words, the final vowel was probably a euphonic ad- 
dition to the original form (102 b). Compare dé and t7é (which has also 
the poetic form vai) with the Lat. a and swb. The old form mpér, in 
accordance with the rule (160), became apdés and zpori, whence the Dor. 
and Ep. ori. . 

c. From the close connection of the preposition with the following 
word, these cases are not regarded as making any exception to the rule in 
160. Compare 165d. The two words are often written together, even 
when there is no composition : as, kaddvvauw, morrdév. 

d. Some of these forms even passed into the Att. and into Ion. prose : 
as, katOdv7s Eur. Or. 308, duBaradv Mem. 3. 3. 2, dumavovrac Hdt. 1. 181. 


CHAPTER IV- 


CONSONANTS. 


137. The Greek has eighteen CONSONANTS, 
represented by seventeen letters. 


a. In § 4, these consonants are arranged in CLASSES according to the 
organs which give them their distinctive character, as LABIALS, or lip- 
consonants, PALATALS, or palate-consonants, and LINGUALS, or tongue- 
consonants. They are also arranged in ORDERS, according to the method 
in which they are made by these and assisting organs, as SMOOPH MUTES, 
made by a simple closure of the organs ; MIDDLE MUTES, so called as in- 
termediate between the smooth and rough ; ROUGH MUTES, or ASPIRATES, 
in which the breath is sent strongly through the organs partially closed ; 
SPIRANTS (spirans, breathing), similarly formed, but with the organs more 
open, — one of these specially called a sibilant, from its hissing sound ; 
DOUBLE CONSONANTS, or compound sibilants, so named as combining a 
mute and simple sibilant ; NAsSALS, in which the passage through the 
mouth is closed, and the voice is sent through the nose ; and FLUENTS 
(fluens, flowing), so named from their flowing so easily with other con- 
sonant sounds ; while the nasals and fluents, all flowing sounds of various 
kind and degree, are classed together as Lrqurps ; and all the consonants, 
except the MUTES (dwmb in comparison with the others), are called sEMI- 
VOWELS, as intermediate in vocality between the vowels and mutes. 

b. Consonants of the same class are termed cognate ; and those of the 
same order, co-ordinate. The classes are sometimes named from the let- 
ters standing at the head: as, the mw class, Xe. ; so, mw, K, and + metes. 
Some use the term gutfwral instead of palatal, and dental instead of lin- 
gual. Euphonic, dialectic, and other interchanges of consonants are most 
frequent.in cognates ; and then, in co-ordinates. 





§ 140. OLD SEMIVOWELS. 145 


ec. The letter y performs a doubie office. When followed by another 
palatal, it is a nasal ; otherwise, a middie mute. Asa nasal it has n for 
its corresponding Roman letter ; as a middle mute, g (92a). 

d. The double consonants were formed by the union of a mute with ¢ ; 
in W and € the mute preceding, and in { the o: as, yums yy, Kopaxs 
Kdpaé (17), O7Bacde O7Bafe, to Thebes. 

e. The rough breathing might be regarded as a consonant of the same 
general class with the spirants, but more open. 

138. The early Greek speech appears to have had four 
semivowels which were not yet as fixed in their character as 
the consonants afterwards became, and which had correspond- 
ing vowels into which they often passed when the later laws 
of euphony forbade their use: viz., 3, corresponding to ¢; N, 
corresponding to a; F, corresponding to v, as v in Latin and w 
in English to uw ; and a palatal spirant corresponding tou, as 7 
in Latin and y in English to 2, yet partaking perhaps, some- 
what more than these consonants, of the nature of a sibilant. 


a. The last seems to have had no character distinct from that of the 
vowel t (cf. 98 a), just as in the old Latin alphabet ¢ and 7 were written 
alike, and wandv. It will here be distinguished, so far as this seems im- 

ortant, by the use of the capital I, which should then be pronounced nearly 
ike the semivowel y, or i in valiant. It may be distinguished, in speak- 
ing, as the consonant, spirant, or semivowel I. Capitals are also some- 
times used to distinguish other consonants in an early unfixed state. 

b. Some have represented the consonant I by 7 or y ; but these letters 
are plainly foreign to the Greek. 

ce. There is naturally much difference of opinion in respect to the ex- 
tent to which these early elements of the language prevailed. 


139. In the progress of the language, these old semivowels 
met with various fortunes : 


1.) They became fixed as consonants: the old 3 as o (Lat. s; yet 
in Lat. formation extensively represented by r); the old N as pv 
(often in Lat. as m, which, however, ecthlipsis shows to have been 
a very weak consonant); F, especially in the older or less refined 
dialects, as 8B or d (in Lat. as v, f, or b, sometimes also in Eng. as 
10) : as, oUs Sus, SWINE (cf. 141), Avpay lyram, LyRE, Bpdd@v ALol. for 
pddav, of ROSES, Sap. 69 (19). 

a. Cf. Bovowat volo, to WILL, ts and Bia vis, force, Bidw vivo, to live, 
dépw fero, to BEAR, pdvat fari, to say, pwp fur, thief. 


140. 2.) They were simply dropped: as, between two vowels, 
F regularly, = often, and N and I sometimes: as, dFov adv ovum, 
. egg, Boras Boas boves, yeveros yéveos generis, Aveoat Aveau lueris or 
luere, €Adow eda, peifova pecCoa, mAElwy TAE€wY More. 
a. Sorina few, and § in many words, of Dec. 3. See 207, 217. 
b. The two vowels were then often contracted : as, Bots, yévous (19), 
Avy or Aver (37), EAS (42), welfw (22). 
e, Compare the omission of corresponding letters between two vowels, 
in Latin :. of v in the complete tenses, as audivi audii, amavisse amasse ; 
of ry in the Gen. pl., as nummorum nummum ; of m by the common 





144 CONSONANTS. — OLD SEMIVOWELS. § 140, 


metrical ecthlipsis ; and of 7 in such forms as reice for rejice, Virg. Ec. 3. 
96. See 100 b. 


141. 3.) They were changed into common breathings. So, be- 
fore an initial vowel, F regularly, and = in some words: as, Feozepa 
éamépa vespera, evening, ride ew video, to see, Fowos otvos vinum, 
WINE, Feap éap ver, Spring ; avs and ds sus, SWINE, ovoTnpe torn Sisto, 
to STAND, €& SeX, SIX, émta Septem, SEVEN, dds sal, SALT, tmrép super, 
over. Also F before initial p: as, Fpnyvupe pryvope frango, to BREAK. 

a. So in the rude Laconic, the rough breathing is supposed to have 
taken the place of e when dropped from the middle of some words : as, 
pa (u@d) for wodca MUSE, waa (raa) for aca all, Ar. Lys. 1298, 995, 


142. 4.) They were changed into their corresponding vowels. 
So F regularly, except as above; and the others in many forma- 
tions: as, vars vais navis, ship, Bor Bov (19); yumv yima (160 e); 
davow dhavéw havo (152); dlwy WSiwv. mrelwv relay (260 s); 75ela 
noeia (233); but for (eF) ev, sometimes v (see 217 b, 50 pee). 

a. Here contraction often takes place, as in most of the examples 
above ; and, after a liquid, € and t are sometimes transposed and con- 
tracted with the preceding vowel: as, qyyedoa Hyyerha (152 b), pyrops 
pyrwp (153) ; xeplwv xelpwr, duevlwy apelvwy (261), wedavla wédawa (233). 


143. The PALATAL SPIRANT, or consonant 1, with a con- 
sonant preceding, received yet other changes: thus, 


a.) With A, it was assimilated: as. wadIov paddov more. Cf. Lat. 
melius ;-and also dAXos alius, other, ddXopar salio, to leap, 

b.) It united with + to form o or ot: as, navtla ravea raaa (233), 
mAovtlos mAovatos rich, aBavacia (from a€avaros) immortality. Hence, 
we often find o for r before «. 

c.) It united with a palatal or lingual mute (or, rarely, with a la- 
bial mute or a double palatal) to form oa (in later Attic rr) or ¢: as, 
nklov joowy Or ArTev, Taylo Tdoow. Kopvblwm Kopvoce, Tenlw Teco, 
ayxlov dogov: ddiylov odifav, eAmblw eArif@, vuplo vite, cadneyylo 
cadtifo. See 233, 261 b, 349. 

d. The latter changes show such sibilant force in this element of the 
language, that some have regarded it as o ; while, on the other hand, 
some have not distinguished it from the vowel t. 

e. Compare, in Eng., diurnal and journal, and the union of the y 
sound with ¢ and d to produce sounds like those of ch and J, as in nature, 
educate. Compare also ¢vyéy with Lat. jugum, Germ. joch, and Eng. 
yoke. 

144. Liquins, from their flowing, semivowel character, 
often affect or are affected by adjoining vowels : 

1. Syncope. In some stems, the adjoining vowel is syncopated : 
as, pntépos pntpds (210), piper@ piv to remain, #AvOov HAOov I came, 
kexadnka kexAnka I have called. See also 140 for the syneope of the 
liquid. 


145. 2. Metathesis. In some cases, a liquid is transposed with 
a vowel, which is then often contracted with another vowel, or 





ie hl ead 


§ 148. LIQUIDS. _EUPHONIC CHANGES. 145 


otherwise changed. In some of these, the liquid is evidently fleeing 
from combination with a following consonant. Thus, @dpaos Opaces 
boldness, BeBdnka (stem Bad- Bra-) I have thrown, rétpyka (s. rep- 
Tyue-) I have cul, 6paoxe (s. Gop- Opo-) to leap. See also 142 a, 

a. In the Dat. pl. of syncopated liquids of Dec. 3, and of dorip star, 
€ is transposed with p or v, and changed to a: as, marepor warpdot, dpevor 
djgvdst (18). The same preference of p for the more open vowel appears 
here, as in 115 a and in the English rule compared with mule. 


146. 3. Epenthesis, &c. a. When a simple vowel is brought by 
inflection or composition before an initial p, a smooth p is inserted : 
aS, Eppoca, appwaotos, emippavvopt, from pavvipe to strengthen (é-, a-, 
and éxi prefixed); but evpwaros (the diphthong ed prefixed). 

hb. When, by syncope or metathesis, a nasal is brought before X 
or p, the cognate middle mute is inserted or substituted: as, dvépos 
(dvpos) avdpés (18), peonuepra peonuSpia midday; BrooKw (Ss. pod- 
fdo- BXo-) to go, Bpords (x. wopt- por- Bpor-) Mortalis, MORTAL. 


147. ‘The following laws, mostly euphonic, are 
opserved in the formation and connection of 
words. 


A. In tar Formation or Worps. 


T. Before a LINGUAL MUTE, a Jabal or palatal 
or 


mute becomes co-ordinate (157b); and a dngual 
mule, o: as, | 


rérpi(Br)wrat, téra(yr)era:, mére(Oriorar, Kout(ér)oris (39); ypa- 
(prjmrss written, Tu(xT)KTSs Made, Web{dr)orys liar ; E(wd)S8ox0s seventh, 
8(xcd)ySoos eighth, yod(pa)B8yv, Bavi(xd)ySnv- érpi(BO\d8nv, érdi(yO)xOnv, 
Er G0) any, éxoul(dOjrIny (39); edei(KO)Y¥9nv (45), €dei(rO)b9nv, wvoud- 
(rO\r9nv. Cf. Lat. scri(bt)pétus, reigt)cfus, tra(ht)ctus, clau/dt)strum. 

a. Two lingual mutes may remain together, if both belong to the stem : 
as, TdtTw to arrange, ArOis Attic. 


148. Il. Before pw, a labial mute becomes pz; 
a pulatal mute, y; and a hngual mule, o: as, 


Térpu(Bu)pwar, méme(Ou)opar, cexduc(Sujopar (39) ; déder(Ku)ypac (45) ; 
he*(ru)ppa remnant, yed(pu)ppa letter, rérv(xu)ypat, wvoua(ru)opar. Cf. 
Lat. se(em)gimen. 

| a. If two p’s or two y's are thus brought before p, one of them is 
dropped ; as, wézre(ump, mup)ppa, EAHAE(YXM, YM) ywae (41). 

b. This rule has exceptions, when the p does not belong to an affix of 
inflection, as adxu% point, ACME, dpaxun drachma, drachm, daruds vapor, 
pv0ubs rhythm ; and in the dialects, even when it does so belong, as in 
Hom. t6pnev we know, érériOuer, kexopvOuévos, dxaypévos. 

e. In some words, a labial mute becomes p before v or before another 
labial mute : as, ce(8)pw5s revered, cru(py)pvss firm, TU(PB)pRos tonrb. 

REY: GR, 7 J 








146 | CONSONANTS. § 149. 


149. Ili. Before the /ense-sign nx, a@ labial or 
palatal mute wnites with it in the cognate rough, 
and a dingual mute is dropped: as, , 

rérpu(Bxalpa, téra(yKxa)Ka, méme(Oxa)ka, Kexduc(dca)Ka (39); éédet 
(kxa)ya (45), Kéxo(rKa)pa, yéypa(pia)pa, decida(xxa) Ya, evdua(rKa)Ka. 


150. IV. »v, before a (a) labial or (b) palatal, is 
changed into the cognate nasal (4, 1387 b); and (e) 
before a guid, 1s assimilated (104 a): as, 

(a) ou(vir)pardoxw, €vB)pSadrrw, cv(vp)phépw, é(vyu)ppeva, Evy) prpoxos - 
(b) é (vi) yeaew, ou(vy)yyerys, cu(vx)yKXarpwo, ev SyEe (c) &vA)AAoyos, 
su(vp)ppdmrw. Cf. Lat. i(ap)mpello, imbibo, ‘imnmitto, co(nl)dZoco, cor- 
rumpo. 

d. Before » in the Perfect passive, vy commonly becomes o or is 
omitted: as, TEPa (Vit) Pat (40), xéchowae (Pf. of cr\tvw to bend). 

e. Before « in the Perfect active, v was commonly omitted, or the form 
avoided, except by later writers: as, xéxpexa (Pf. of xptvw to judge) : ; wépay- 
Ka, Dinarch, 92. 4. 

f. In applying Rule IV., enclitics are regarded as distinet words: 
thus, dvrep, rivye. We find, however, final v sometimes changed upon 
old inscriptions (as, on the other hand, cases where the rule is disregard- 
ed): thus, MEM®2YXA2, for wév Yuxyds (Insc. Potid.) ; so, ATKAT, 
TOAAOTON, and even EXZ AMOI (ef. 155, 166), for av kal, rov Ndyor, & 
ZU. 


151. V. No consonant should stand before o, ex- 
cept o itself. This principle, from. the great use 
of o in formation, requires many changes : 


1.) Before o, a labial or palatal mute unites with it in the 
cognate double consonant ; and a lingual mute is dropped : as, 

yi(rs)s, PrE(Bs)p, Kdpa(xsrE, al(ys)&, Cpl(xs)—, cwua(rovor, édzl(ds)s, 
Kdpu(Os)s (17) 5 ypd(pow)po. Cf. Lat. du(es)z, re(gs)2, tra(hsi)ai, ar(ts)s, 
lapi(ds)s. 

a. It will be seen that some of these changes are simply orthographic. 


152. 2.) In the Future and Aorist of liquid verbs, the 
tense-sign o is changed into e« ; which (a) in the /utwre is con- 
tracted with the following vowel, but (b) in the Aorist is trans- 


posed and contracted w ‘ith the preceding vowel. See 138, 
142: ' . 

Thus, in the Fut. and Aor. of ayyé\\w to announce, véuw to distribute, 
kplvw to judge, whivw to wash, and béow to lay, — 

(a) dyyed(ow, éw), veu(ow, €w)&, kpuiow, Ew) B, TALY(Tw, €w)B, Sep(ow, €w)d° 
(b) Hry(edoa, ceda)era, &(euoa, ceeua)epa, exp(woa, ceva)iva, érd(uvoa, vera) 
vya, €d(epoa, eepa)epa. 

c. Here ae commonly passes into y, unless + or p precedes (120 h) : as, 
dalvw to show, oPdddw to trip, realvw to fatten, repalvw to complete (s. pav-, 
opar-, miav-, mepav-); Aor. pnva (not &pyva, 109 a), rpyra, ériava, 


§ 157. EUPHONIC CHANGES. 147 


érépiva. But icxvaivw to make lean, xepiaivw to gain, xotalyw to hollow 
out, NevKalvw to whiten, dpyaivw, to enrage, reraivw to ripen, atrw to raise, 
and d\Aouat to leap, have here @ (in the two last becoming y in the Ind. 
through the augment: jfjpa, Subj. *dsw); Tetpaivw, to bore, has y; and 
onuaivw to give a signal, waivw to stain, and kafaipw to purify, both q 
and @ The use of & in the liquid Aor. increased in the later Greek. 

d. A few poetic verbs retain the old forms with © : as, xé\\w to land, 
Ktaw to meet, dpviue to rouse, dipw to knead, F. and A. KkéX\ow, &xedoa, 
épsw, Goa, &c. Add these forms, mostly from Hom., j#poa, édoa, époa, 
Gépromat, Kpéow, exepoa, diapGépow, Hepoa. 


153. 3.) In the Nominative, the affix -s after p, and some- 
times after v, is transposed as e, and absorbed (118 c) by the 
preceding vowel : as, 

v (aps, aep)ap starling ; war(eps, €€2)Hp, pryr(ops, oco)wp (18) ; rar(avs, 
aeviay pean ; Sa eev)hv, Saiu(ovs, oev)wy (18). Cf. Lat. fu(rs)r, 
pate(rs)7, orato(rs)r ; lie(us)n, deemo({ns)n. 

a. Except in Buc wife, where o is simply dropped. 


154. . 4.) In liquids of Dec. 3, v is simply dropped before 
-ot in the Dative plural : as, 

péra(vor)or (23) ; Amé(voror, Salwo(var)or, pu(vor)ol (18). For the Dat. 
pl. of syncopated liquids and dormp, see 145 a. 


155. 5.) In adjectives (not participles) in es, »v becomes o 
before o in the feminine, and is simply dropped before ov in the 
Dat. pl. : as, xaplevoa xXapieooa, XuplevTat xaplect (23). 

a. So v is simply dropped in some derivatives and compounds: as, 
(swprov-cvvn) cwppocvyn discretion, ayaorovos howling (fr. crévw and dyar, 
which also drops v, in composition, before k and p, as. a@yaxXeurds). 


156. 6.) Otherwise, » before o is changed into a, which is 
then contracted with the preceding vowel (142, 122): as 


Nom. Sing. Masc. and Fem., and Dat. Pl. wéd(avs, aas)as, m(avrs, 
avs, 151. 1, aas)as, r(avoa, 233, aaca)aoa, m(avrot, avol, aaci)aor (23) ; 
O(evrs, evs, eas)els, O(evoa, caca)etora, Olevrovjetor, d(ovrs)ovs, S(ovoa)odca, 
S(ovrorjotor, d(vvrs)¥3, dora, Sto (26) ; (ws) pis (18): Verbs in 3d Pers. Pl. 
lgr(avot, aaci)aor, TiO (evor)édor Tibetor, d:d(over)daor Sidotor, decxv(vvar) ba- 
or decxvdor, Uvor)aor (45) : Fut. or(eviow, cacw)etow, r(evdc,eas)etoouar. 

a. The forms ridédor, did5dor, and decxvidor were used by the Attics for 
the most part, and face uniformly, without contraction. 

b. In nouns, if v8 precede o, the v is retained : as, (€\p8s) é\uws 
worm, Eduu(vOor)ver (yet others, €\utse). It is also retained in some 
forms i in -vat and derivatives in -ots, from verbs in -vw, as répavoar from 
daivw (40), ddpuvois from ddpivw to ripen. Add the Homeric kévoa, WV. 
337. For év, ctv, raw, may, and dy, see 166. 

ce. In the rough Argive and Cretan, v seems to have been extensively 
retained before o : as, évs, TiOévs, for eis, TeBels. Cf. Lat. mens, regens. 


157. 7.) In cases not mentioned above, the combinations 
Ao and po were permitted to stand ; except as o radical after p 
was softened in the later Attic to p: as, dds SALT, sea; aponu 
male, Oapaos boldness, xépon temple, cheek, New Att. dppnv, @ap- 


148 CONSONANTS. -— EUPHONIC CHANGES. § 157, 


pos, képpyn. The combination po does not appear in classic 
Greek. 

158. VI. Between two consonants, o inflective 
is dropped, and v 1s changed to a (102): as, 

Ter pl (Ba0)pOar, rérpepVe, rerd(yoO) Xda (39, 147) ; EPOd{pvT)parar (142). 
This rule applies to cases where the first paced. is not removed by pre- 
vious rules. 


a. So, In composition, 60(ccr)erovos lamentable, dvoroséw to revile ; and 
some write compounds like rpoooxwy with only one o. 


159. VII. If rough mutes begin two successive 


syllables, the jirst is often changed into its cog- 


nate smooth, especially (a) in reduplecations, or (b) 
when both letters are radical; but (c) in the see- 
ond person singular of the Aorist imperative passive, 
the second rough mute is changed: as, 


(a) (pep)arepirnxa (42); (xex)KeXenmae ° *(Ge8 yee vee (44); (0c0)rlO@yuc 
(45); (b) (@pex)rprxss (17); (@ax)rayus swift, (Opex) Tpexen to run, 
(Izep)tpépw to nourish ; (c) AV(AnOr)Oyte (37). 

d. So duréyw (audi éxw) to cover; and in Aor. pass., éré@nv (45), érv- 
Onv (44) ; but here in most words the aspiration remains, as even €0pépO ny, 
EDEAXOAnY, Ke. 

e. Upon the same principle, éxw becomes éxw* and whenever p is 
reduplicated, the first p becomes smooth, and, as it then cannot stand at 
the beginning of a word (93 d), is transposed : as, pépt pa éijtpa. Yet 
we find, by a softening of the second p, fpeputwuéva §. 59, pepamriouéva 
Anaer. Fr. 105, pepipdar Pindsir 281. 

f. So, to avoid excessive aspiration, a rough mute is never preceded by 
the same rough mute, but, instead of it, ‘by the cognate smooth : as, 
Largs Sappho, Baxyos Bacchus, "ArOis (147 a) ; and, upon the same 
principle, IIvgfos (93d). See also the Epic car p@ddapa, xaxxedat (136). 
In the common rein age, even a middle mute is not doubled. The con- 
sonants chiefly doubled are the semivowels, and + in tr used for oo 
(169 a). 

g. Aspiration is sometimes transferred : as, wa0oxw wacxw to suffer. 
See also 167 b. 

h. The tendency of p to aspiration may even affect a preceding mute : 
as, Opdoow from trapdcow, to trouble, ppoiusov (wpd, olwos) preface. 

i. Some other cases may be added, in which mutes acquire or lose 
aspiration : as, Bpvxw and Bpixw, to gnash, xpUBda and xpida, secretly. 
See 167. 


160. VIII. The semivowels », p, and s are the 
only consonants that may end a word. Any other 
consonant, therefore, falling at the end of a word, 
is either (a) dropped, or (b) changed into ene of 
these, or (c) assumes a vowel : 


§ 163. MOVABLE LETTERS. 149 


gGu(ar)a, Har(ar)as, Kép(ar)as (17); edT(ou)ov, Ad(oun)orpr, edu(er)e, 
E\u(ovr)ov, O(ovr)ov, Av(eP)e (37) ; TiO(nu)npr, ErlA(nu)nv, €d/5(wr)w, 
or (nO)ASr, S(0)ds (45) ; wéA(er)t mel, honey, yad(axr)a lac, milk ; o(wr)as 
light ; Voc. m(a:d)at, boy / yiv(ack)ar, woman! Cf. Lat. co(rd)r. 

d. Both the assumption and the change appear in -ov for -r, and -vort 
for -vr, in the 3d pers. of verbs: as, ior(yr)you, ior(avr)dor (45, 143 b, 
156). In applying this rule and the note below, § and W are considered 
as combinations ending with s (137 d). 

e. A word can end with two consonants, only when the last 
iso: as, ds: yor (yuTs), até (ays), kdpaé (17). Hence the jfor- 
mative v of the Accusative is changed into a (142) after a con- 
sonant, except in a few cases, in which a lingual mute preced- 
ing v is dropped : as, 

yi(rvyra, Kdoa(xv)ka, 1O(dv)8a° Kde?(dv)v and -8a, Kdpv(6v)v and -0a 
(17). 

f. As final p and t or @ so extensively pass into v and s, they may be 
considered as having the same corresponding vowels: viz. a correspond- 
ing to final p, and ¢ to final + or @ (138). 

g. Such cries as (op 6 Asch. Sup. 827, and dm dm Ar. Ran. 208, and 
such foreign names as “Acudy, Opordd, and “AdNwAadr in Hdt., and Gevd 
and Nyté in Plato, cannot be regarded as exceptions to the laws of Greek 
words. See also 165 c. 


B. In ture Connection oF Worps. 


161. I. When a smooth mute is brought by 
(a) crasis or (b) elsion before the rough breathing, it 
unites with it to form the cognate rough : as, 

(a) Kal 6, yw: Kal olf, x3° Td budriov, Ooludriov Tod érépov, Oarépov* Srov 
&vexa, Ootvexa* (b) ard 06, ap ob + viKra S\qv, vbxXO’ SAnv + and in composi- 
tion, addinue (amd, inuc), dexnuepos (déxa, Huépa), EPOnnEpos (Errd, Nuépa). 

e. So in some compounds, even with an intervening p: as, ¢poddos 
(wpb, 065s), Ppovp5s (pd, dpdw), TéEOpimmov (rérrapes, immos). Cf. 159 h. 

162. II. Some words and forms end either 
with or without a final consonant according to eu- 
phony, emphasis, or rhythm. 

a. Such consonants are termed movat/e ; and in grammars and lexicons 
are often marked thus: efze(v), or eire(v. In most cases, these conso- 
nants appear not to belong to the original form, but to have been assumed. 
In some cases, however, the reverse appears to be true ; and some cases 
are doubtful. Before the digamma, they were of course not needed to 
prevent hiatus : daté roc E. 4; od réOey A. 114, 

163. 1.) Datives plural in c, and verbs of the third person 
tn € or simple 1, assume v at the end of a sentence, or when the 
next word begins with a vowel : as, 


Ilaot yap etre ro0ro* but, Hizey aird raow. 
Tlaot Néyoust rotro* but, dow aird Néyoncep. 


150 CONSONANTS. — FINAL LETTERS. § 163, 


a. So, likewise, adverbs of place in -ov (properly datives plural), the 
adverb mépvaor, last year, the numeral-etxoos (commonly), the demonstra- 
tive -. preceded by o (sometimes), the Epic case-ending -gt, and the 


Epic particles xé, vi, and vdcde: as, 7 Udatacdow nyemovia’ elkoow. 


ery. 

b. So, also, in a few instances, chiefly poetic, the Plup. and Impf. 
3d Pers. in -e (contracted from -ee) : as, qoew év Eur. Ton 1187, ‘aemol- 
Gew, ovK Ar. Nub. 1347, BeBAjxew vrép F. 412; mpoorer ; Ovdérwa bt os 
Pl. 696, Foxew etapa T. 388. The form w "ith v became the common form 
in the Tmpf. 3d Pers. jv, was, and éxpjv or xpiv, ought, even before a 
consonant : as, #v 6é 1. 2. 3, éxpiv ratra Cyr. 5. 5. 9. 

c. The v thus assumed is often called v paragogic (in Greek, v épedxv- 
orxdy, attached). It is sometimes employed by the poets before a con- 
sonant to make a syllable long by position ; and in most kinds of verse, 
is used at the end of a line. In Ionic prose it is generally neglected ; but 
in Attic prose it is sometimes found even before a consonant in the mid- 
dle of a sentence, while, on the other hand, it is sometimes omitted in 
closely connected discourse, even where we point with a period. 


164. 2.) The adverb otras, thus, commonly loses o before 
a consonant ; and aypr and HEXpL, until, often assume it before 
a vowel: as,ovrw hyaiv: pexpus ov. 

a. Some other words have poetic or dialectic forms, in which a final y 
or s is dropped or assumed : as, local adverbs in -@ev (poet., chiefly Ep., 
-Qc), numeral adverbs in -xts (lon. -«t), duis, dvrixpus, arpéuas, adiis, 
éuras, wadw, dpvw(s, éyw(v, evOu(s, (O0(s, wernyv(s. 


C. Sprecrat Ru tes. 


165. a. The preposition e&, out of, has the form éx before 
any consonant : as, €K KAKOV, EKTEVO, EKyEAAw, EOETOS, EKLATTO. 


b. So in Hom. the compounds a7éé, dé&, bréE, and commonly mapéé + 
but not wdpeE in Hdt. : as, bre xaxod N. 89; but mdpeé dé Hdt. 1. 14; 
mapeée Thy M. 276. 

c. The adverb ov, not, before a vowel, has the form ok, 
which becomes ovy before the rough breathing: as, od dyow, 
ovk évertw, ovx vet, ovxere (which is imitated by py, not, in 
pnkere). 

d. In these words, é« and ov« may perhaps be regarded as the original 
forms. That in certain situations these forms are retained is owing to 
their close connection as proclitics, or in composition, with the following 
word, and therefore forms no real exception to the rule in 160. When 
orthotone, they conform to the rule, the one by assuming s, and the other 
by dropping k, except as it also takes the form ovyxi. 


166. In composition, the preposition év, zm, regularly re- 
tains its »v before p and o ; ovv, with, drops its » before o fol- 
lowed by another consonant, and before ¢; but before o@ fol- 
towed by a vowel, changes »v to o; while wddw, again, and ray, 
all, vary in their forms: as, évpdrt@, evoeia, évpvOpos, yet also 


lage? tg 


§ 169, DIALECTIC VARIATIONS. 151 


eppvOuos * avornua (for otvarnua), cvtvyis: cvocetw (for cuvcedto), 
guooitia* madivoxios and waXickios, radioovtos, madippoos, mavaodos 
and maccogos. 

a. The Epic dv for dvd (136) here imitates év: as, dvords, dvoxeros. 


DIALECTIC VARIATIONS. 


167. A. The dialects often cnterchange consonants : chiefly, 


1. CognatE MuTes (137 b): as, Ion. aires, déxouat, for abdis, déxo- 
uar* Alol. durt for dudi. Compare dudw and ambo, both, dyxw and ango, 
to choke, xixvos and cygnus, swan, uicyw and misceo, to mix. 

a. The Mol. and Jon. were both far less inclined than the Att. to aspi- 
ration (cf. 93c). In the new Ion. the smooth mute remains before the 
rough breathing (161, 165): a3, dw ct, dexjyepos, ovx te. In some 
compounds, this passed into the Att. : as, dmy\uwrns (amd, #\e0s). 

b. Aspiration is sometimes transposed: as, Ion. xiOwv, év@aira, évbed- 
tev, Kadxndwv, for xiT wv, évrad0a, évrei0ev, Xakrjduv. 

c. The dialects also varied in the use of the breathings. In place of 
the rough, the Aolic seems commonly, and the Epic often, to have used 
the smooth breathing or the digamma. In Homer we find the smooth 
for the rough particularly in words which are strengthened in some other 
way : as, eUxndos, oddos, obpos, Hédcos, Vues, for Exndos, SAos, Spos, HALos, 
bets. 


168. 2.) Co-orDINATE MuTEs (137 b): as, Ion. « for @ in inter- 
rogative and indefinite pronouns and adverbs: thus, xotos, kod, xoré, for 
mwoios, 7o0, woré* Dor., « for tT in réka, dxa, Tdxa, for wére, dre, TdTe, and 
in similar adverbs of time ; Mol. wéure for révre quinque, five, pyp for Oyp 
fera, wild beast ; Dor. y\épapov for Brépapov, 5a for v7, ddedds for dBeN4s, 
Spvixos for Spvidos. Compare Advcos and lupus, wolf, yAuKds and dulcis, 
sweet, ris and quis, who? and Lat. bis, bellum, fr. duis, duellum. 

3.) Liquips: as, Dor. jvOov, Bévricros, divraros, for #AOov, BéATLCTOS, 
gidraros * lon. and Att. trAevuwr for rvevuwv pulmo, dung; Ion. uly, Dor. 
viv. Cf. delpioy lilium, LILY. 

a. The interchange of X with another lingual appears in ‘Odvaceds 
Ulixes, Sdxpvoy lacrima. 


169. 4.) o with other letters. E. g. 

a. The Dor., Ion., and Old Att. ow passes, for the most part, in the 
later Att., into tr: as, Tdcow TdrTw (39), y\ésoa yOrra, tongue. Sor 
Att. for initial o in a few words : as, onpepov riyepov, to-day. 

b. Dor. +t for o: as, Ilorecddv, érerov, etxart, for Ilocesday, erecor, 
etxoot. This appears especially in the 2d personal pronoun, and in the 
3d pers. of verbs: as, rv, Té, for ov, oé (Lat. tu, te); garl, parti, 
péporrt, for Pyci, pact, pépovor (Lat. ferunt). See 160d. 

ce. Dor. o for v, and v foro: as, évdos for &dov intus, within, évri for 
éori est, is; and in the verb-ending of lst pers. pl. -pes for -pev (Lat. 
*MUS), a3 Néyoues for Neyduev (Lat. legimus). 

The Laconic often changes @ to o, and final s to p: as, wadedp Ar. 
Lys. 988, cvdp, cé\w, for madaris, eds, OEXw + wip for mais (Lat. puer, ef. 
Marcipor). Compare the marked correspondence of o and the Lat. 7; 
and in Lat., arbos and arbor, honos and honor. For Lac. uaa, waa, see 
Wa, 


152 CONSONANTS, — DIALECTIC VARIATIONS. § L170. 


170. 5.) The DovuBLE CoNsONANTS with other letters : as, old Evy, 
later and common ovv (in the Lat. cwm the o has been omitted instead 
of the k) HEol. Yard for Darga: Mol. cxévos, cxigos, for févos, Eidos - 
Dor. Wé, wiv, for opé, cpiv: Ion. dtEbs, rprEds, for dusods, Tproods. 

a. For t, we find, in the ol. and Dor., v8, 88, and 8: as, todos, pe- 
Nodw (137 d), walddw, udeda, Aevs, for dfos, werifw, malfw, wafa, Zevs. 

b. Interchanges of consonants are sometimes poetic rather than dia- 
leetic, or simply took place in the progress of the language. 


171. B. Consonants are often doubled, inserted, omuitted, 
and transposed by the poets, especially the Epic, for the sake 
of the metre: as, 


éhraBov, ppdocouat, véxvoot, dooos, Srmws, Cddee, for €aBov, Ke. ; 
mrToreuos, mTdus, ixOd, vavuuvos, adrddapvos, for mdeuos, médts, dixe, 
vevunos, dmddhauos: epefov, "Odvoets, “Axtrevs, pdpvyes, for éeppefor, 
‘Odvacevs, "AxidreUs, pdpuvyyos * Kpadin, kdpricros, Bdpducros, drapmés, for 
Kapoia, KpdTicros, Bpddioros, atparrés. 

a. Similar changes are also dialectic, or took place in the progress of 
the language. LE. g., the Holic, instead of lengthening a vowel before a 
liquid, often made the sy. Mable long by doubling the liquid : as, gps for 
elul to be, oréppw for ovelipw to sow, xplyvw for Kpives to Judge, ésredXa for 
Aor. ésrecha. Not unfrequently, ‘that which is poetic in one dialect is 
used in the prose of another. 


THRESHOLD TO Book II. b. ‘*GREEK presents the MOST PERFECT 
SPECIMEN of an @iflectional, or synthetic language A language which gets 
rid of inflections as far as possible, and substitutes separate words for each 
part of the conception, is called an analytic language ; and next to the 
Chinese, which has never attained to synthesis at all, few languages are 
more analytic than the English. A synthetic language will express in 
one word what requires many words for its expression In an analytic lan- 
guage: e. g. weptAnoopo, J shall have been loved, Ich werde geliebt wor- 
den sein : @xero, abierat, 77 s’en était alle. 

c. ‘* The advantage of a synthetic language lies in its compactness, pre- 
cision, and beauty of form; analytic languages are clumsier, but they 
possibly admit of greater accuracy of expression, and are less liable to 
misconception. If they are inferior instruments for the imagination, they 
better serve the purposes of reason. Splendid efflorescence is followed by 
ripe fruit. . The tendency of all languages, at least in historie times, 
from synthesis to analysis, e: g. from case-inflections to the use of prepo- 
sitions, and from tense-inflections to the use of auxiliaries. This ten- 
deney may be seen by comparing any modern language with its ancestor, 
e. g. Italian with Latin, Modern with Ancient Greek, Bengali with San- 
skrit, Persian with Zend, German with Gothic, or English with Anglo- 
Saxon. 

d. ‘‘It is most important to observe that no inflection ts arbitrary. 
Among all the richly multitudinous forms assumed by the Greek and 
Latin verbs, there is not one which does not follow some definite and 
ascertainable law. Parsing loses its difficulty and repulsiveness, when it 
is once understood that there is a definite recurrence of the same forms in 
the same meaning, and that the distorted shape assumed by some words 
is not due to arbitrary license, but to regular and well understood laws of 
phonetic corruption.” — Farrar’s Greck Syntax (from § 7-14 of Pt. T.). 





BOOK If. 


ee vein. OGY. 


ow t 
Evea mwrepdevra. 
Homer. 


172. Etymology treats of the INFLECTION and 
ForMATION OF Worbs: the former including 
DECLENSION, COMPARISON, and CONJUGATION ; 
and the latter, DERIVATION and COMPOSITION. 


a. INFLECTION is variation in the form of a word to distinguish its 
different offices or relations (inflecto, to bend to, change). A word which 
is inflected has two parts: the one constituting its essence, and receiving 
no change except as euphony or emphasis may require ; the other eirewm- 
stantial, and varying according to its different offices and connections. 
The former is called the essential part, or, by a botanical figure, the stem 
or Roor ; and the latter, from its producing the various forms of inflec- 
tion, the inflective part. 

b. It is now common to lmit the term root to primitive elements in 
the formation of words, while the term stem is not thus limited. Syl- 
lables or letters belonging to the root are termed radical ; and others, 
Sormative. 

ce. Syllables or letters belonging to the stem are called essential ; and 
others, inflective. Of the latter, those which precede the stem are termed 
PREFIXES ; and those which follow it, AFFIXES. Affixes are of two kinds: 
open, or vowel affixes, those which begin with a vowel ; and close, or con- 
sonant affixes, those which begin with a consonant. 


d. The last letter, or sometimes letters, of the stem, as marking its 
character, are called the STEM-MARK or CHARACTERISTIC ; and from this, 
words and stems are named mute, liquid, double-consonant, labial, pure 
(112 a), &c. 


e. By the THEME of a word, is meant that form which is first given in 
grammatical inflection: as commonly, in declension, the Nominative 
singular, and, if the word has the different genders, the masculine ; in 
comparison, the Positive ; in conjugation, the first person singular of the 
Present indicative active, or, if the verb is deponent, middle (though some 
prefer the Present infinitive). 


Serr Gk 7." 


154 DECLENSION, § 173. 


CHAPTER I. 
PRINCIPLES OF DECLENSION. 


173. The two classes of SUBSTANTIVES (includ- 
ing Nouns and Substantive Pronouns) and ADJEc- 
TIVES (including the Article, Adjectives commonly 
so called, Adjective Pronouns, and Participles) are 
declined to mark three distinctions, GENDER, Num- 
BER, and CASE. 

a. Adjectives receive these distinctions merely for the sake of conform- 
ing to the substantives to which they belong. 

b. In grammars and lexicons, these distinctions are often marked by 
the appropriate forms of the article (with the interjection 6 for the Voea- 
tive) : thus, in 6 rayulas, or Tauias, 6, steward, the noun is marked as 


masculine and in the Nom. sing. ; while in 6, 7 tpogés, nurse, it is marked 
as of the common gender, and in ra cdxa, figs, as neuter. 


174, A. GENDER. The Greek has three gen- 
ders; the MascuLing, FEMININE, and NEUTER. 


a. Nouns which are both masculine and feminine are said to be of the 
common gender. In the case of most animals, it is seldom important to 
distinguish the gender. Hence in Greek, for the most part, the names 
of animals, instead of being common, have but a single gender, which is 
used indifferently for both sexes. Such nouns are termed epicene (€ézikot- 
vos, promiscuous). Thus, 6 AvKos wolf, 7 adore fox, whether the male 
or the female is spoken of. 

b. In words in which the feminine may either have a common form 
with the masculine or a distinct form, the Attic sometimes prefers the 
common form, where the Jonic and Common dialects prefer the distinct 
form : as, 6, 7 eds, god, goddess, and # Ged or Céawa, goddess. So, like- 
wise, in adjectives. 

ce. Words which change their forms to denote change of gender are 
termed movable ; and this change is termed motion; as, 6 Bactheds king, 
H Pacirera queen ; 6 ogpds, wise, 7 copy, Td coer. 


175. The masculine gender belongs properly to words de- 
noting males; the feminine, to words denoting females; and 
the neuter, to words denoting neither males nor females. In 
Greek, however, the names of most things without life are 
masculine or feminine, either from the real or fancied posses- 
sion of masculine or feminine qualities, or from a similarity in 
their formation to other nouns of these genders. 

Thus, for the most part, the names of winds and rivers 
(from their power and violence), and also of the months, are 





a 


LB ie GENDER. 155 


masculine; and the names of trees, plants, countries, islands, 
and cztves (regarded as mothers of their products or inhabitants) 
are feminine; while nouns denoting mere products, or imply- 
ing inferiority (even though names of persons), especially dimen- 
utives, are neuter. as, 

6 dveuwos wind, 6 Boppas Boreas, 6 rorauds river, 6 Netdos the Nile, 6 wih 
month, 6 ExarouBawwy June-July; 7 ovxi fig-tree, ) undéa apple-trec, 
7 dumedos vine, ) BYBos papyrus, y xwpa country, n Atyurros Egypt, 
% vicos island, 7 Xduos Sainos, y ores city, n Aaxedaiuav Lacedemon ; rd 


cdxov fig, Td unrov apple, Td Téxvov child, 7d avdpdrodov slave, Td yUvator, 
dim. of yur) woman, 7d watdiov little boy or girl. 


176. The gender of nouns, when not determined by the 
8 guification, may be, for the most part, inferred from the form 
of the theme or stem, according to the following rules : 

I. In the First DEcLENSION (15), all words in -as and -ns are 
masculine ; and all in-a and -n, feminine : as, 6 Tapias, 6 rountns > 
1) TpareCa, 7 TyuN. 

1J. In the seconp DECLENSION (16), most words in -os and 
-os are masculine, but some are feminine or common; words in 
-ov and -oy are neuter: as, 6 xopds, 6 veas* 7 vangos. 7 Ews dawn ; 


e 
6, 1 Oeds god, 6, 9 apkxros bear ; TO @dy, Td dvayewy chamber. 


a. Except when the diminutive form in -ov is given to feminine proper 
names: as, 7 Aedvriov, 7 LAvKépiov. 


177. Ill. Inthe THirD DECLENSION (17 s), 


a.) All words in -evs are masculine; all in - and -avus, femi- 
nine; and all in -a, -t, -v, -os, and -op, neuter : QS, 6 immsts, 6 du- 
gopevs amphora ; H nx®, 9 vais+ Td copa, Td pert honey, rd daotu, 
TO yevos, TO HTop heart. 

b.) All abstracts in -rns and -ts, and most other words in -cs 
are feminine : as, 7) yAvkurns sweetness, 7 Sdvapes power, 4 roinars 
poesy, 1) pis, ) TALS. 

c.) All dabials and palatals, and all liquids (except a few in 
which p is the stem-mark) are either masculine or feminine. 
Except palatals, they are more frequently masculine. 

d.) Nouns in which the stem ends 

1.) in “WT-, -GY-, -€V-, OF -VT-, are masculine: as, 0 yéXws, -wros, laugh- 
ler; 0 Taidy, -dvos, pan; 6 \yuHY, -évos* 6 Néwy, -ovTos, 6 ddovs, 6 ylyas, 
0 iuds, -dvros, thong. Except ré ots, dds, ear, Td POs, pwrds, light (both 
contracts), 7 pp7y, ppeves, mind, 0, n ad7v, -évos, gland ; and a few names 
of cities (175) : as, 7 Papvods, -obvros, Rhamnus. 

2.) in -8-, -0-, or two palatals, feminine: as, 4) \aurds, -d50s, torch, 
n Epis, -Ldos, strife, 7 xAauds, -Vvdos, cloak ;  Kipus, -vO0s, helinet ; } odd- 
mvyé, ~Lyyos, trumpet. Except 6, # mais, matdés, child, 6 rovs, 1odés, Soot ; 
6, 7) bps, -tos, bird ; 0 vy, Avyxds, Lynx, and a few other double palatals. 

3.) in -at-, or -&-, neuter as, 7d Hrap, -aros, Td Képas, -@ros, Td yépas, 


-@os. 


156 DECLENSION, —- NUMBER. CASE § 178. 


173. 5B. Numper. The Greek has three num- 
bers; the SrnecuLAR, denoting one ; the PLURAL, 
denoting more than one; and the DuAL (dualis, from 
duo, ¢wo), a variety of the plural, which may be 
employed when only ¢wo are spoken of. 


Thus, the singular dv@pwios signifies man, the plural évOpwro, men 
(whether two or more), and the dual av@pa7rw, two men. 

a. The dual is most used in the Attic and Homeric Greek. The olie 
dialect (as the Latin, which it approaches the most nearly of the Greek 
diale :ts) and the Hellenistic Greek show scarce a trace of the dual (the 
New Testament, like the Modern Greek, none), except in 6¥o, tvo, and 
dudw, both (Lat. duo, wambo). The fulness of its dual formation is one of 
the marked features of the Sanskrit. 


179. ©. Case. The Greek has five cases: the 
NoMINATIVE, GENITIVE, DATIVE, ACCUSATIVE, and 
VocaTIVE. See 801. 


a. From the general character of the relations which they denote, the 
Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative are termed the direct, and the 
Genitive and Dative, the indirect cases. The cases are also distinguished 
as subjective, objective, and residual. Yor their general classification, see 


10 ; for equivalent Latin and English forms, see 14; for the particulars. 


of their use, see Syntax. 


b. The Nominative and Vocative are also termed casus recti, the right 
cases, and the other three, casus obliqui, the oblique cases. 


180. D. Metrnops or Deciension. Words 
are declined, in Greek, by annexing to the stem 
certain AFFIXES (172.a,c), which mark the dis- 
tinctions of gender, number, and case. There 
are three sets of these affixes; and hence arise 
three distinct methods of declining words, called 
the FIRST, SECOND, and THIRD DECLENSIONS. 


a, The first of these methods applies only to masculine and femi- 
nine words; but the second and third, to words of all the genders. 
In some of the cases, however, the affixes vary, in the same declen- 
sion, according to the gender; so that, to know how a word is de- 
clined, it is necessary to ascertain three things: 1. its stem, 2. the 
declension to which it belongs ; and 3. its gender (173 b, 174 8). 

b. If the theme (172 e) and gender do not determine the stem 
and declension, these are commonly shown, as in Latin, by adding 
the Genitive singular, or its ending. Jf the Genitive singular ends in 
-as or -ys, or in -ov from a theme in -as or -ns, the word is of the first 
declension ; if it ends in -ov from a theme in -os or -ov, the word is of 
the second declension ; if it ends in -os, the word is of the third declen- 





§ 183. METHODS. GENERAL RULES. 157 


sion. The stem is obtained by throwing off the affix of the Genitive ; 
or it may be obtained by throwing off any afhix beginning with 
a vowel, 

Thus the nouns, 6 raulas steward, 4 oixla house, ) yOooa tongue, 6 dj- 
fos people, and 6 “Apa Arab, make in the Gen. rauiov, ofxias, yAwoons, 
Sjuov, and “ApaBos. From these genitives we ascertain that raulas, olxia, 
and yAésou belong to Dec. 1, duos to Dec. 2, and “Apay to Dec. 3. By 
throwing off the affixes -ouv, -as, -ys, and -os, we obtain the stems rauc-, 
olkt-, yYAwoo-, Onu-, and “ApaB-. The words are then declined by annexing 
to these stems the affixes in § 11. 


181. Each declension observes the following 


GenerAt Rutes. 1. The masculine and feminine affixes are 
the same, except in the Vominative and Genitive singular of the 
Jjirst declension. ‘The neuter has also the same affixes, except 
in the direct cases, singular and plural. 

2. In neuters, the three direct cases have the same form, and 
in the plural always end in a. 

3. The dual has but two forms: one for the direct, and the 
other for the znderect cases. 

4. In the feminine stngultr of the first declension, and in 
the plural of all words, the Vocative has the same form with the 
‘Nominative. 

182. a. The use of the Voe. asa distinct form is still further lim- 
ited. Few substantives or adjectives, except proper names and personal 
appellatives or epithets, are suiliciently employed in address to require 
a separate form for this purpose. Hence a distinct Voc. is scarce found 
in the perticiple, pronoun, article, or numeral, In respect to other words, 
the following may be added : 

b. Masculines of Dec. 1 are commonly names or epithets of persons, 
and therefore form the Voc. sing. 

ce. In Dee. 2, the distinct form of the Voc. is commonly used, except 
_ for euphony or rhythm : as,°Q ¢idos, & didos, my friend! my friend ! Ar. 
Nub. 1167. Pitos &® Mevédvte A. 189. “Hédcss re T'. 277. To avoid the 
double €, 0e5s, god (like dews in Latin), has, in classic writers, no distinct 
Voc. ; yet Océ St. Mat. 27. 46. 

d. In Dee. 3, few words, except proper names and personal epee re 
and epithets, have a distinct Voc. ; and even in those which have, the 
Nom. is sometimes employed in its stead, especially by Att. writers : thus, 
"Q waoa wédt Ar. Ach. 971; but “Q wdbds Soph. Phil. 1213. Atay Soph. 
Aj. 89; but ’*Q giN Aias Tb. 529. In many words of this declension, the 
Voe. cannot be formed without such a mutilation of the stemas scarcely 
to leave it intelligible (160). 


183. The Table (12) exhibits the affixes as resolved into 
their two classes of ELements: I. Fiexipue Enpineas, which 
are significant additions, marking distinctions of number, case, 
and gender; and II. Connectina Vowets, which are chiefly 
euphonic in their origin, and serve to unite the flexible endings 
with the atem, 


158 DECLENSION, — AFFIXES, § 183. 


a. These elements, when there is no danger of mistake, may be more 
briefly called Flexives and Connectives. The alfixes are termed ewphonic, 
when they have connecting vowels, and nude (nudus, naked), when they 
want them. Where the connectives were followed by other vowels, con- 
traction took place in one or another of its forms, though not always 
according to the common laws. See 7, 13. 


b. From the softening use or harsher want of connecting vowels, Dee. 1 
and 2 are sometimes distinguished as Huphonic, Weak, or Vowel Declen- 
sions (Dec. 1, the A-Declension; and Dec. 2, the O-Declension) ; and 
Dec. 3, as the Nude, Strong, or Consonant Declension (the flexive here 
being often attached to a cousonant). 


184. The tables (11—13) show, that, in regular declen- 


s10n, 


a.) The flexive of the Nom. sing. masc. and (except in Dee. 1) fem. is 
always s. 

b.) The Dat. has always t: in the sing., ending with this vowel ; in 
the plur., joining it with o, and in the dual, with v. 

c.) The Acc. sing. (except in neuters of Dec. 3) always ends in y, or its 
corresponding vowel a (138) ; and the Acc. pl. mase. and fem. is always 
formed by adding gs to the Acc. sing. (122, 156). 

d.) The Gen. pl. and dual always ends in v; which, in the plur., is 
preceded by @, and in the dual by an t diphthong. 

e.) In Dec. 1 and 2, the affixes are all open (172 ¢) and constitute a dis-_ 
tinct syllable. In Dec. 3, three of the affixes, o, v, and ov, are close, and 
of these the two iirst, having no vowel, must unite with the last syllable 
of the stem. 

f.) In the singular of Dec. 3, the direct cases neut., and the Voc. masce. 
and fem., have no affixes. 

g.) Words of Dec. 1 and 2 are parisyllabic (par, equal), that is, have 
the same number of syllables in all their cases ; but words of Dec. 3 are 
imparisyllabic, that is, have more syllables in some of their cases than in 
others. 


185. The three Greek and first three Latin declensions 
correspond. The fourth and fifth declensions in Latin are con- 
tract varieties of the third. 


The resemblance of Latin to Greek declension is striking, both in its 
general rules and in many of its special methods. We observe, in exam- 
ining the comparative table (13), 

a.) That final v in Greek corresponds to m in Lat., since » could not 
end a Greek word (160). 

b.) That the Lat. Dat., where it differs from the Ablative (the old In- 
direct Case, 186f), is only a later form, ¢ having passed into the closer ¢ 
by precession. 

ce.) The euphonic insertion of 7 and 6 in Latin declension, as also great- 
ly in Latin conjugation, to prevent hiatus (100 b). 

d.) The correspondence of the Greek o or » and the Latin w, in forms 
where 0 appears in the earlier Latin itself: as, avos, servom ; later avus, 
servum. See 116. 


§ 186. HISTORY. 159 


HISTORY OF GREEK DECLENSION. 


186. a. The early history of Greek declension is beyond the period 
not merely of written records, but even of tradition. It can be traced, 
therefore, only by the way-marks which have been left upon the language 
itself, and by the aid of comparative philology. The following view of 
the subject has much evidence in its support, and serves to explain the 
general phenomena of Greek declension, and of the use of the numbers 
and cases. We might add, of Latin declension also ; for the declension- 
system of the two languages is so essentially identical, that it must have 
been mainly developed before the geographical separation of the two races. 
See 13, 185. 

b. Greek declension was progressive. At first, the simple stem was used, 
as in some languages even at the present day, without any change to denote 
nuinber or case: thus, ix@v fish, yir vultwre, whether one or more were 
spokea of. Then the plwral number was marked, by affixing to the stem 
e (the equivalent of our plural sign s, 138), the simple root, of course, now 
becoming singular, as each new formation limits the use of prior forms : 
thus, 

Sing. (x00 fish, yor vulture; Plur. iy@ve fishes, yore vultures. 

c. The next step was to make a separate form to express the indirect, 
as distinguished from the direct relations. This was done by annexing t 
to the root, and this form became plural by adding one of the common 
signs of the plural, v. We have now the distinction of case : thus, 


Singular. Plural. 
Direct Case, éxOU, yur ° ix Ove, yore. 
Indirect Case, ly@vi, yumi - ix viv, yuriy. 


d. Each of these cases was afterwards subdivided. (A.) From the 
Direct Case were separated, in the masculine and feminine genders, two 
new cases, the one to express the subject, and the other the direct object, 
of an action, i. e. the Nominative and Accusative cases. 

The Nominative was formed by adding sg, as the sign of the subject, to 
the old Direct forms: thus, Sing. ixdvs, yirs + Pur. iydves, vores. 

The Accusative was formed by adding to the stem, as the sign of the 
direct object, v, which in the plural took one of the common signs of the 
plural, s: thus, Sing. iy@vv, yirv: Plur. ixédvs, yirvs: or, by the eu- 
phonic change of v into its corresponding vowel (138, 160 e), Sing. yéra, 
Plur. (x@vas, yirras. 

e. (B.) From the Indirect Case was separated a new case to express the 
subjective, as distinguished from the objective relations, i. e. the Genitive. 
This was formed by affixing 8, or commonly, with a euphonic vowel, 09. 
At least, the different forms of the Genitive which later occur point to this 
as a common origin. In the plural, this took the plural affix v: thus, 
ofv. But by the laws of euphony which afterwards prevailed, neither 6 nor 
€v could end a word (160). Therefore, @ either was changed to s, or was 
dropped, or assumed the vowel ¢ (commonly written, with v paragogic, 
ev, 154) ; and o€v became ov by the absorption of the 6 (as if ¢, cf. 160f). 
Thus 09 became os, 0, or oev ; and of, wv. 

f. The old Indirect Case remained as a Dative, without change, except 
that a new plural was formed by annexing the dative sign t (c.) to the 
Nominative plural. 

In Latin, the old Indirect Case (the Ablative) retained no small share 
of its subjective offices ; and in the singular, the Dative became extensively 


a 


iis 


160 DECLENSION. § 186. 


distinct 1 torm, through the precession of the final vowel: as, Abl. lyra, 
sue, re; Dat. lyre, sui, rei. In the plural, the old Indirect Case re- 
mained, witheut distinction of form, as both Ablative and Dative. 

g. The plural had now throughout a new form, but the old form had 
so attached itself to various names of incessant use, that in most of the 
dialects it was still preserved. But these household plurals, which could 
not be shaken off, would be principally such as referred to objects double 
by nature or custom, as the eyes, hands, feet, shoes, wings, &c. Hence 
this form came at length to be appropriated to a dual sense, though in 
the time of Homer this restriction of its use seems not as yet to have been 
fully made. The old Direct Case singular, which had the simple form of 
the stem, was likewise retained as a case of address (Vocative), in words 
in which there was occasion for such a form, and the laws of euphony 
allowed it. In the plural, the Vocative had never any form distinet from 
the Nominative. We have now the three numbers, and the five cases, 
which, with the euphonic changes already mentioned, appear thus ; 


S. Nom. -s ix dvs yours (yoy) P. N.V. -es ix Oves vores 


Gen. -os ix@vos yumés Gen. -wy lydvav yur Gv 
ee ix Ovi yur Dat. -eor lydveor yoreot 
Ace. -v, -a lx Ody yora (x Ov¥or) (‘yu pi) 
Voc. * ix Ov Acc. -as ly@vas yoras 
D. Dir. -e ixéve vyire Indir. -w lydviv (ix@vow) yurrly (yurrotv) 


h. For the sake of completeness, we have added in the table above two 
later modifications : viz., the common shorter Dat. pl., formed by drop- 
ping € (unless one chooses to form it from the Dat. sing. by inserting the 
plural sign o, a sign so extensively employed in our own and other lan- 
guages) ; and the Indirect Case dual prolonged by inserting 0, after the 
analogy of the Gen. sing. and pl. 

i. In the Latin, the dual disappeared except in duo and ambo (178 a). 


187. a. We have exhibited above the primitive nude declension, 
now called the third, but entitled to be called the jirst. Subsequently 
two other modes of declension sprang up, more euphonic in their char- 
acter, having connecting vowels, which united the flexible endings to the 
root ; the one having o, now called the second declension ; and the other, 
a, now called the first (189). These declensions chose rather to drop than 
to change the final 6 of the Gen. sing., apparently to avoid confusion with 
the Nom. ; and likewise to retain the old Direct Case as a Nom. pl., which 
became afterwards distinguished from the dual by a different mode of con- 
traction, its more frequent use leading to precession. In all the affixes 
of these declensions in which two vowels came together, contraction natu- 
rally took place (183 a) ; and in the Dat. pl. a shorter form became the 
more common one, made either by dropping t from the longer form, or by 
adding the plural sign s to the Dat. sing. For € in the Voe., instead of 
o, see 1l4c. We give as an example of Dec. 2, 6 Adyos, word, and of 
Dec. 1, 6 Traulas, steward. 


S. N. Ady(o-s)os rayl(a-s)as P.N. Ndy(o-e Jou Taul(a-e )ar 
G. Ady(o-o)ov Taui(a-o)ov G. Ady(o-wv)ov Tapt(d-wv) OV 
D. Ady(o-4)@ = Taul(a-c)a D. ddy(o-eat, ovcr)org Taul(a-eot, ator)arg 
A. éy(o-v)ov Tapyi(a-v)av A. éy(o-as)ous TO jul (A-AS) AS 
V. Ady(o Je = Tapi(a )a V. as Nom. 


D. N. A. V. ASy(o-e)m  rayi(a-e)a = G. D. Xoy(o-wloww = rapt(a-w)arw. 





§ 189. . HISTORY. 161 


b. In the Nom. and Ace. sing. of these declensions, the primitive di- 
rect form, without ¢ or v appended, was sometimes retained: as, Nom. 
Ovéorc, immérc& (197 b), 6° Acc, ved, &», “A@w (199).: So the neuters 7d, 
&\Xo, a’rd, éxetvo, 5 (199) ; unless these came from old forms ending, like 
the Lat. id, illud, istud, quid, quod, and aliud, in a lingual mute, which 
later laws of euphony forbade. 

¢. The Lat. Dec. 1 and 2 have Gen. sing. forms, both with and with- 
out a final s; as, familias, aulai, mensee ; illius, ejus, totius, servi. 


188. We have thus far treated specially of the masculine gender. 
In the neuter (which occurs only in the second and third declensions), 
since things without life have no voluntary action, the distinction of sub- 
ject and object is obviously of far less consequence, and therefore in this 
gender the separation of the Nom., Acc., and Voc. was never made. The 
place of these three cases continued to be supplied by a single Direct Case, 
which in the singular of Dec. 3 was the simple stem, and in the singular 
of Dec. 2 had the Acc. form, which suited the odjective character of the 
gender. In the plural, it took the same form in both declensions, simply 
appending, instead of the old e, & (which, as the corresponding vowel of v, 
is more objective in its character, 138) ; and without a connecting vowel, 
which was not here needed. The striking analogy of the Latin through- 
out will be here observed. We give, as examples, 76 ddxpvu (poet.) tear, of 
Dec. 3, and 7d cixov jig, of Dec. 2. 


8S. N. A.V. ddaxpu o0x-ov P. N. A.V. dSdxpu-a =o Ox-a 
Gen. OdKpu-os ovxK-ov Gen. daxpv-wy obK-wy 
Dat. Odxpu-t = o0K-@ Dat. Odxpv-o1  avx-o1s 


D. N. A.V. ddxpu-e 9 atix-w D. G. D.  daxpt-ow ctx-ow 


189. a. The declension which is first in name was probably last in 
_ development, and appears to have arisen in the effort to obtain a distinct 
form for the feminine. This may have taken place somewhat thus. 
A distinction was made in the theme by appending, instead of the strong 
flexive s, the softer and more objective v. As this could not remain after 
a consonant, it passed, as in the Acc. of Dec. 3, into the corresponding a, 
to which again in the Acc. v was affixed as the sign of case. The a be- 
came thus a connecting vowel, and was so adopted throughout. With 
; this view of it, the theme has no flexible ending. The a united with all 
the open flexives, forming long vowels or diphthongs. Through analogy, 
or to render the distinctive sign of this declension more prominent, a was 
also lengthened, in many words, in the remaining forms: viz., those of 
the direct cases singular. For distinction from the theme, the form os 
was preferred in the Gen. sing. Thus, 7 oixia, house : 


N.V. Sing. olxi(a Ja Pl. ol<iac Du. olsia 


Gen. olxt(a-os)as olki@y olxtaw 
Dat. olxt(a-c )a olxiats olxiaw 
| Ace. oiki(a-v )av oikias olxla 


b. As, however, this declension, containing no neuters, was more dis- 
tinctively a personal declension than either of the others, it afterwards 
received many maseuline derivatives referring to persons, and thus be- 
came less peculiarly a feminine declension than the Lat. Dec. 1. An ex- 

ample of these masculines, vayéas, has been anticipated for comparison 
with Dec. 2. These were distinguished from the feminines by the use of 
the strong flexive s in the theme, and the consequent omission of the final 


REV. GR. K 





Mos 8 


162 FORMS IN -®I, -6I, -CEN, &o. § 189. 


consonant in the Gen. sing. (187 a). For the precession which so pre- 
vailed in the sing. of this declension, see 195. 


190. The prevention of hiatus by the insertion of aspirate conso- 
nants (the successors of the digamma or used like it), and by different 
modes of contraction (100), has given an especial variety of form, in the 
Jirst and second declensions, to the Dative singular, which, as the primi- 
tive Indirect Case (186 c), originally performed the offices of both the 
Genitive and the Dative. Thus, we find, 

1.) Thee appended with the insertion of , a natural successor of the 
digamma. This form is Epic, and from its being used as both Gen. and 
Dat., and in Dec. 2 even as plural, is evidently of great antiquity. It 
does not occur in names of persons, and is chiefly used where local rela- 
tions are spoken of. E. g. 

Dec. 1. && etvigu, from the bed, y. 405 ; ard vevp7gpw (163 a) 6. 300 ; 
pe Binge wiOjoas, trusting to his strength, X. 107 ; kepadtgw érel hd Bev 
II. 762; ws dpyrpn porjrpndyw apiyyn B. 363; xepolv re Bindi Te pw. 246 ; 
du jot pawouevnpy I. 618, 682; Kparepide Bindw ®. 501; éréondu II. 734 ; 
Cdangpw t. 238. 

Dec. 2. “Iheipe xdura relxea, the famed walls of (or at) Troy, ®. 295 ; 
daxpvogr wAo0ev, were filled with tears, P. 696 ; dro raccadddgu, 2. 268 ; 
éx twovropw w. 8&3; dd trraréos mrvogw N. 588; émi desiogw N. 308; 
map avTode ph. 802 ; dud dcreodu p. 45 ; Ocoduy uijorwp drddavros H. 366. 
So écxapogpw e. 59, and xorvAndovddw e. 433, as of Dec. 2, while the 
themes in use are éoxdpy of Dec. 1, and coruAndwv of Dec. 3. 

a. The @ is likewise inserted in the Dative plural of a few words of 
Dec. 3, chiefly neuters in -os ; and here serves to lengthen the preceding 
syllable. These forms were also used as both Gen. and Dat., and some- 
times with the force of the singular: as, car’ dpecgu, down the mountains, 
A. 452; drd orjbecgpy, from the breast, Z. 214 ; rpdcd ixmow kai dxeopw 
E. 107; ovv dxeoge Il. 811; Speci A. 474 (cf. A. 479); vd xpdreogu, 
under the head, K. 156 ; ’EpéBeopw (probably the correct form for ‘Epé- 
Bevogw I. 572, &c.) ; cmd vadds (o here diopped), from the ships, Il. 246. 

b. Compare with tkes2 forms in -dt, the Lat. Datives tibi, sibi, nobis, 
vobis, deabus, civibus, rebus, and the Latin adverbs of place in -d7: as, 
abi, alibi, utribi, from is, alius, uter. The forms in -ydt when used as 
Datives are often written incorrectly with an t subscript (-y¢t, 109 a), as 
though gt had been added to the complete Dat. form. 


191. 2.) The u appended with the insertion of 6. This form be- 
came adverbial (chiefly poetic), denoting the place where: as, otkoOe at 
home, do elsewhere, avrobr, 01, Kopwe:. 1t was mostly confined to 
Dec. 2; and, in the few instances in which it was made from nouns of 
other declensions, it still imitated the forms of this. Traces of its old use 
as the Indirect Case still remain in Homer: thus, Gen. “I\c66: apo, before 
Troy, 9. 561, ovpaveds po TI. 8, 6c mpo £36; Dat. xnpod I. 300, 
o. 3/0. 

3.) The t appended with the insertion of y. This appears in the Epie 
Axe (less properly written 7x2, cf. 190 b), for the adverbial Dative 9, where, 
A. 607. 

4.) The t contracted with the preceding vowel into at or ov (119). 
This simpler mode of contraction now scarcely appears except in adverbial 
Datives: as, yauwal humi, on the grownd, oixor at home (but ofxw to a house ; 
ef. Lat. domi and domus), rédor, IcOuot, of, dra. Yet év Io@uot Simon. 
I'r. 209 ; év Ipravorot Insc. Cret. ; ro? ddu0c Inse. Beeot. 


Ub bile geek 


§ 194. FIRST DECLENSION. . 163 


5.) The common form, in which the t is absorbed by the preceding 
vowel : as, Avp(a-t)q, ofk(o-c)w, “Iodug, TO Sjuy. 


192. The forms of the Genitive in -o8ev or -9ev (186 e) remained in 
the common language only as adverbs, denoting the place whence : as, 
olxobev from home, a ober, avrodev, ‘AO jy aber. As examples of their use 
as decided Genitives, may be cited da’ ovpavdber, From heaven, 9. 365, é€& 
Aictunbev ©. 304, é& adodev B. 335, Arddev O. 489 ; and the pronominal 
forms éu/6er, adver, EGev (27), which even occur in Attic poets. 


CAA PT ERs rl: 


DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 


193. The declension of adjectives is also here treated, so 
far as it corresponds with the declension of nouns. See 229. 


I. THE FIRST DECLENSION. 


(For the affixes and paradigms, see 11-15, 20; for the gender, 176.) 


194. The original affixes of Dec. 1 all had a as a connect- 
ing vowel (187, 189). In most of these, the a, if not contract- 
ed with a vowel following (183 a), was itself made long. Short 
a, however, remained in the singular, 

1.) In the direct cases of feminines whose stem ended in g, 
a double consonant, AA, or aw: as, povoa, povoay, rpare(a (15), 
yAaéooa (or yAarra, 169 a) tongue, dipa thirst, dd€a opinion, dpr- 
ha contest, A€awa lioness. 


a. Add a few others in -Aa and -va; as, rad\a rest, Exrdvd viper, mé- 
pyuvd care, décrowd mistress; and a very few in which p. or a mute pre- 
cedes a; as, TOAUd courage, dxavOd thorn, dtarr& mode of life. 

b. Add many feminines in -a pure and -pa, mostly having a diph- 
thong in the penult, and easily recognized by the accent. The principal 
classes are, (a) Polysyllables in -eva and -ova, except abstracts in -e.a from 
verbs in -evw; as, ad7jOed truth, etvod good-will, Bacired queen, but 
Baoeid reign, from Baci\ebw: (8) Female designations in -tpva ; as, 
Wddrpid female musician: (y) Dissylables and some polysyllabic names 
of places in -a1a ; as, paid good mother, Ioriad: (5) Words in -wa ; as, 
uvid fly: (e) Most words in -pa, whose penult i is lengthened by a diph- 
thong (except av), by 0, or by £6; as, udxarpd sword, yépupa bridge, 
Tg A 

c. The accent commonly shows the quantity of final a in the theme. | 
Thus, in all proparoxytones and properispomes it must be short by the gen- ° 
eral laws of accent ; while, by a special law of the declension, it is Jong in 
all oxytones, and in all paroxytones in -a, Gen. -as, except the proper 
names Ki#S<, I1v45x, end the numeral wld one. 


164 FIRST DECLENSION., — DIALECTIC FORMS, § 194, 


2.) In the Vocative of nouns in -rns, and of gentiles and com- 
pound verbals in -ns: as, vattns (14), Mepons Persvan, puporr@dns 
(uvpov perfume, madew to sell) perfumer ; Vos. vatra, Mepoa (but 
Tlepons Perses, a man’s name, Voce. fare pupoTr@dd. 


195. In the singular, long a passed, by precession, into 1) 
unless px receded by €, top) BL apo at ieee a) : as, vavTnsy vavrn, 
’Arpeion, povons, povon, @On, gony ie Tapias, Tauia, Gea, Geas, 
Avpa, Avpay (14, 15), idea zdea, ypeia need, xpoa color. 


a. Long a likewise remains in the pures, rod grass, orod porch, you 
field, oid gourd, xaptva walnut-tree, éhaa olive-tree, Navotxdd ; in ddade 
war-cry, éwiBdd, sxavddda, yervadds ; and in some proper names, partic- 
ularly those which are Dorie or foreign, as, Anda, Pidounra, Acawlbas, 
ZUANGs * and it became y after p or po in the words d¢pn 762k, Koan maid- 
en, KOppn (Ion. and Old Att. koga7n, 157) cheek, a@dpn pap, ai0pn clear sky, 
por stream ; in some proper names, as Thons « and in compounds of pe- 
Tpéw, aS yewuéerpyns land-measurcr, geometer. In some words, usage flue- 
tuates between long or short a and N: as, ‘Apdomas Cyr. 6. 1. 31, ’Apa- 
omns Ib. 5. 1. 4, reat? and relyn, hunger, mpturad and mpvurn, stern. 


196. Contracts. A few nouns, in which the stem ends in 
a or e, and feminine adjectives in -ea and -on, are contracted : 
aS, pryaa pvd, “Eppeas ‘Epps, Bopeas Boppas (p doubled), cvxéa oui, 
Jig-tree ; xpvoéa xpvan, Sitd06n SimdH. See 15, 23, 120 e. 


Driavectic Forms. 


197. a. In the affixes of this declension, the Doric dialect retains 
throughout the original a ; while, in the singular, the Jonze has y in most 
of those words in which the Aééic and Common dialects have long a, and 
even in some in which they have short a, particularly derivatives in -eé 
and -ov% (130): as, Dor. gid, @5as, 654, Gddv: Ion. Avpy, vpns, Ypn, 
AVpnv, Taulns (yet Hom: has ded) > Ep. adnbeln, evrdoin, New Ion. dd\7n- 
Onin, uly, for ad\nOecd, e'rrod, wid. 

b. In words in -ys, the primitive Direct Case in -& is sometimes re- 
tained by Hom. and some of the other poets as Nom. (187 b), for the sake 
of the metre or euphony: as, 6 aire Ovéord B. 107 ; iwmord Néorwp 
B. 336 ; évpvora Zevs B. 146 5 Babuutjra Xeipwy Pind. 'N. 3. 92. Com- 
pare Lat. nauta, seriba. So in feminines in -y, the poets sometimes re- 
tain the old short a in the Voc. : as, wwyudd Pity T. 130 ; *Q Aled, Sapph. 
66 [44]. On the other hand, Altra Ap. Rh. 3. 386, for Aljrd, Voc. of 
Aljrns. 

ce. The old Gen. affixes, -Go and Gey, which often occur in the Epie 
writers, were contracted as follows: (1) In the Ion., they were regularly 
contracted into -@ and -wv, with the insertion of ¢ after a consonant, but 
commonly in the poets with synizesis (120i, 117 b) : as, "Arpeld(do, w)ew, 
"Arperd(dwv, &v)éwy + Bopédo Bopéw, ‘Epueiw O. 214, éiiuuediw A. 47. (2) 
In the Dor., & absorbed the following vowel, and the affixes became & 
and av (131 a): as, ‘Arpeld(ao)é, "Ar ped (dav) av. (3) In the Att., Go and 
Gov were contracted into ov (by precession from , 115) and ev: as, 

"Arpeld(ao, wou, "Arperd(dwv) av. 


§ 2009. SECOND DECLENSION. 165 


d. In some maseulines, chiefly proper names, the later lon. has ¢& in 
the Ace. for nv: as Acwvidea Hdt. 8. 15 (-nv Id. 7. 206), deordred Id. 1. 
11 (so, in some editions, Ace. pl. -etis for -Gs : as, deomdreds Ib. 111). 


198. a. The Dat. pl. in Hom. commonly ends in -got or -ys before 
a vowel (which may be referred to apostrophe) : as Genow A. 638, Bens eis 
I. 158. Ima few instances, -yqs precedes a consonant : as, ons kat A. 179, 
mwérpys mpds n. 279. We even tind Geats €. 119, dxrats M. 284, and ma- 
oats x. 471 ; where some would change -ats to -ys. 

b. Antique, Ion., and Dor. forms are sometimes found in Att. writers ; 
particularly, 

1.) The Dor. Gen. in -d, from some nouns in -as, mostly proper names : 
as, dpriBoOnpas, fowler, VwBpvas, KadXas: G. dprviGobjpa, VwBpva Cyr. 5. 
2. 14 (['wBpvou Ib. 2), KaddXia Ages. 8. 3 (Kaddiov Symp. 3. 3). So all 
contracts in -Gs: as, Bopids, G. Poppa. 

2.) The Ion. Gen. in -ew, from a few proper names in -ys: as THpys, 
KauBiens* G. Tipew Th. 2. 29, KauBioew Cyr. 1. 2. 1 (KauBvcovu Ib. 8. 
5. 27). 

3). The old Dat. pl. in -a:ov, which is frequent in the poets. So, in 
Plato, réxvaior Leg. 920 e, Hudpacoe Pheedr. 276 b. 

ce. For Epic forms in -dt, -x, and -ev, see 190-192; for Dor. and 
£ol. forms of the Acc. pl., 131 d. 


Il. THE SECOND DECLENSION. 


(For the affixes. and paradigms, see 11-14, 16, 20; for the gender, 176.) 


199. The flexible endings of the Nominative and Accusa- 
tive singular are wanting (187 b), 

1.) In the theme of the article: thus, 6 for 6s. Compare 
Lat. 2lle, apse, este, que. 

2.) In the neuter of the article and of the pronouns addos, 
avros, execvos, and és: thus, ro, GAo, avro, exeivo, 6, for Tov, 
didXov, XC. 

a. In ecrasis with the article (125), and in composition with the defini- 


tives Tolos, rdc0s, TyXikos, and T¥vvos, the neuter avrd more frequently be- 
comes a’rév: thus, ra’rév and ravré, for 76 a’rd* Tovodrov and rovotro. 


3.) Frequently in the Accusative of the Attic declension 
(200), particularly in 7 &&s dawn, 4) ddos threshing-floor, 6 Xa- 
yos hare, 1) Kews, 7) Kas, ) Tews, 6 “AOws: thus, Acc. ém (only), 
Adyov and Aayw, "Adw. So, in the adjectives dynpws (22), dva- 
mrews full, agioxpews competent. 


200. Conrracts. If the stem-mark (172d) is aq, e, or 9, 
it may be contracted with the affix. See dynpaos (22), dareoy, 
voos (16); and also 120c,e,i, 121. The contract declension 
in -ws and -ov, from -aos and -aov, is termed by grammarians 
the Attic Declension from its prevalence among Attic writers, 
although it is far from being peculiar to them (87 b). 





166 SECOND DECLENSION. — DIALECTIC FORMS.. § 200. 


a. If the stem-mark is long a, ¢ is inserted after the contraction (120 i): 
as, vdds (vws) vews (16), vaod (yw) vew, vay (vw) vem, vady (vwr) vedy: PI. 
vaol (vw) vew, &c. For the accent, see Prosody, 772 d. 

b. The number of words belonging to the Attic declension is small. 
In some of them, the uncontracted form does not occur, or occurs only 
with some change. Thus etyews, fertile, is the contract form of evyaos 
(fr. (yaa)y7, poet. yata, earth), in place of which we find the protracted 
evvyacos and evvyetos. 


Diatectic Forms. 


201. a. The affix of the Gen. sing. -o-o (13), which was commonly 
contracted to -ov, or, in the Hol. and stricter Dor., to -w (130 c), was often 
prolonged by the poets, especially the Epic (sometimes even by the Tragic 
in lyric portions), to -ovo (called the Thessalian form, and not receiving 
elision) : thus, mwdévrov “Ikapiowo B. 145; dimou bwndro?o a. 126; ofo0 déuor0 
a. 330; Oeod Pind. O. 2. 37; Oeoto Ib. 6. 60; weyddw Atos Ale. 1 [20]; 
€pxouevoro Id. 87 [28]; morauoto...’Avdrw Theoc. 1. 68 ; wadtax& xéprovo 
Id. 4. 18. 

b. A single contraction, with the insertion of € (120i), gives the Epic 
genitives Iler(doo)eao A. 327, Ileve\(aoo)éwo (v. 1. -éo1o) =. 489. The 
poetic doubling of t gives the Epic dual form in -ovty (so always in Hom.). 

ce. The new Ion. has Gen. forms with ¢€ inserted : as, rupéwy Hdt. 2. 
36, Dovoéwy Id. 5. 35. In some proper names in -os, these imitate Dec. 1: 
as, Kpotoos, Kpoicew Hdt. 8. 122 (Kpoicov 1. 6) ; Barrew, KreouBpdrew, 
Id. 4. 160; 5. 32. 

d. The old Dat. pl. in -otot is common in the poets of all classes, and 
in Ion. prose. So, even in Plato, @eotc. Leg. 955 e. 

e. For Epic or old forms in -dé¢, -o8t, -ot, and -o8ev, see 190s ; for the 
Dor. and Aiol. Acc. pl., 131 d. 

f. Contracts in -ovs from -oos occur in Hom. and Hdt., though rarely : 
as, vods x. 240 (here only in Hom.), e’vov Hdt. 6. 105. In words in -€os, 
-cov, Hom. sometimes protracts the € to a (134 a), and sometimes employs 
synizesis (117 b). 


Ill. THE THIRD DECLENSION. 
(For the affixes and paradigms, see 11-14, 17-21; for the gender, 177.) 


202. In this declension, the Nominative, though regarded 
as the theme of the word, seldom exhibits the stem in its sim- 
ple distinct form. This form must therefore be learned from 


the Genitive, or from some case which has an open affix 
(172 c). 


a. Special attention must be given to the euphonic changes which occur 
in those cases which have either close affixes, or no affixes ; that is, in the 
Nom. and Voe. sing., in the Acc. sing. in -v (where the stem receives the 
same changes as in the theme), and in the Dat. pl. 

b. The change of v, the original flexive of the Acc. sing., into a, was so 
extensively required in this declension by the rule (160 e), that a became 
the prevailing affix, and was often used even after a vowel. It will there- 
fore be understood that the allix is a, if no statement is made to the con- 
trary. 


§ 205. THIRD DECLENSION. — MUTES. 167 


Words of Dec. 3 are divided, according to the stem-mark, or 
characteristic, into Murs, Liquips, and Purss (172 d). 


A. Motes (17). 


203. Lapiats AND Patarats. ‘These are all masculine or 
feminine (177 c¢). Except in the irregular yyy, the theme 
ends in p or & (151), and the Voc. has no distinct form 
(182 d). 


a. Tv}, woman, wife, which has its theme after the form of Dec. 1, 
and is accented as if dissyllabic throughout, is thus declined: 8S. N. yur7, 
G. yuvatxéds (accented as if pronounced yvatkés), D. yuvaski, A. yuvatka, 
V. yivar: P.N. yuvatkes, G. yuvacx@v, D. yuvaki, A. yuvaixas: D. N. yu- 
vaixe, G. yuvacxotv. The old grammarians have also cited from Comic 
writers the forms, A. yuvjv, P. N. yuval, A. yuvds, according to Dec. 1. 

b. In the stem @pty-, 8 becomes t, except where x is changed (159 b). 
In 4 d\dr7é, -exos, fox, the € of the stem is lengthened in the theme. 


204. Linevats. In these, the characteristic lingual can- 
not remain in any case which has either a close affix or no affix 
(202 a) ; and if another consonant is thus brought before « or 
to the end of a word, further change may be required : as, 


édrl(ds)s, Kdpu(Os)s, mar(dorjol, Kre?(dv)v, (rad)rat, cOu(ar)a , Néo(vr)v 
(17) ; €Auc(vAs)vs (156 b) ; P&(r)s, Hra(r)p (17): dva(krs, xs)&, dv(axr)a, 
ddua(prs)p, A€(ovrs, ovs, oev)wv, E(ovTar)ovor (17). Cf. Lat. eta(ts)s, 
frau(ds)s, par(ts)s. 

a. Barytones in -ts and -vs form the Acc. sing. both in -v and less fre- 
quently in -a : as, pus, kdpus (17), 6, 4 dps bird, h xdpus grace ; Acc. epu, 
dpvw (160 e), and poet. épida, dpvia, commonly Xdpira as the name of a 
goddess, but otherwise xdpw. So xXels (17), 6 yéAws laughter, and the 
compounds of rovs foot, have both forms: kdelv and xetda, yédAwra and 
yéhuw ; see Oidirous, dimous (21, 22). Add 6 gpws love, and mds (poet. for 
mais, 105): in later poets, épwy, waiv. In oxytones, the accent served to 
prevent the lingual from falling away, and thus to forbid the form in -v. 

b. If a distinct Voc. is needed, linguals obtain this by dropping the 
stem-mark (160 a): as, mat, Méov (17) ; “Aprews Diana, vedus girl, rupav- 
vis sovereignty, V. “Apreu, ved, Tupavvi Soph. O. T. 380. A few proper 
names in -Gs, -avros, then change v as in the theme : as, “Ar\ds, lo\vdd- 
pas, V.”ArX(avt, av, aa)d, To\vdduad Hel. 6.1.5. The Voc. form dva is 
used only in addressing a god, as Zed dva I’. 351, Soph. O. C. 1485 ; 
otherwise, ® dvaé or Svat (126). 

205. Srems IN -vr-- When, by the dropping of 7, »v is 
brought before s in the theme, the s is changed, if an O vowel 
precedes ; but otherwise the v: as, A€(ovrs, ovs, oev)@v, yiylarts, 
avs, aas)Gs (17, 153, 156) ; Av(orrs)av, O(evrs)eis, AUcas, dvs (26). 

a. Except ddods (17), and participles from verbs in -wpu: as, dtdovs, 
Sovs, fr. didwue (45). Yet lon. dda Hdt. 6. 107. 

b. Some Latin names received into the Greek have -ns in the theme, 
instead of -as: as, KAjuns, -evros, Clemens, Ovddns, -evros, Valens. 


ec. The host of words whose stems end -vt- may conveniently be made 
into a separate class (Liquid-Mutes), by taking vr as the stem-mark. 





168 THIRD DECLENSION, —- MUTES. § 206. 


206. Neuter Linauats. In these the stem-mark is always 
7, which, in the theme, is commonly dropped after pa, but 
otherwise gives place to s or p (160): as, odp‘ar)a, plar)ds, 
kép(ar)as, hm(ar)ap (17); eid{or)ds (26) ; diheup(ar)ap and -a, unguent. 
Cf. Lat. poém(at)a, co(rd)r. 

a. The t is also omitted in wéA(cr)e mel, honey ; in yad(axr)a lac, milk, 
which also drops « ; and in yév(ar)v genu, knee, and dép(ar)v spear, which 
have also v in place of a (cf. 224c). In the poet. ju(ar)ap day, p takes 
the place of t after pa ; and in bd(ar)wp water, cx(ar)op filth, wp takes the 
place of ar. 


207. Contract Linevats. a. A few linguals drop the stem-mark 
(140 a) before some or all of the open affixes, and are then contracted : as, 
k\etdas (Kelas) Kreis * Kep(aTOS, aos)ws (17) ; 7d Tépas, prodigy, P. N. ré- 
para tépad, G. Tepdtwy repay: 6 xpus, skin, S. D. xp(wrl, wi)@ (in the 
phrase év xyp2). So, in Hom., from 6 tépés sudor, sweat, 6 yéhws laughter, 
6 pws love, S. D. lip(Gru)e, yédAw, épw- A. lip(@ra, wa)a, yého. 

b. These neuters are contracted in the stem: ofs, ards, ear, fr. the old 
otas, otaros (17) ; ordap orp, tallow, G. oréaros ornrés* ppéap well, G. 
ppéatos (“&) dpnrds. See 120 b, c. 

c. So, usually, nouns and adjectives in -es, -evtos, preceded by o or 4: 
as, Om(oevrs, devs)ots, -(de)otvros (17), 6 wAak(ders)ods cake ; Tyu(Hecs)qs or 
fs (109 a), Tiyu(je)ooa, Tru(fev)Fv, honored. Add some in -ts, -t80s : as, 
n Sats Sas torch, wapyts rapys cheek, mwts pws blister. 


B. Liquins (18). 


208. MascuniInE AND FEMININE Liquips. In these the 
stem always ends in » or p, except in ds (6 sal, salt, 4 sea), of 
which the singular is rare in Attic prose. For the euphonic 
changes in the theme and Dat. pl. see 153, 154, 156, 145 a. 
In -vs of the theme, (a) the s is changed after an £ or O vowel ; 
(b) the v, after « or v3; and (c) after a, in nouns the s, but in 
adjectives the v: as, 


“ (a) Auwlevs, eev)4Vv, Salu(ovs)wv (18) ; 6 al(wys)dv svevum, age, 6 u(nvs)qv 
mensis, MONTH ; (b) f(wvs, cas)ts (18), 6 Ppx(ivs)ds Phorcys ; (c) mat(avs) 
(18), wéA(avs)as (23). 

d. Except 6 krels, xrevss, comb; els, évds, one (25) ; the Ion. 6 pels (as 
fr. s. wev-, yet G. unvds) for unv month, Hdt. 2. 82; and 6 udcour, -ivos, 
wooden tower. In the pronoun rvs (28), v is simply omitted in the theme. 

e. Most words in -ts and -vs have a second, but less classic form, in 
-w and -vy: as, pis and piv, Pédpxus and Pépxuy, 6 dedpis and deddiv del- 
phin, DOLPHIN. 

f. In the Voc. of ‘Amd\X\wr, -wvos, Apollo, Mocedav, -Gvos, Neptune, 
O owT%p, -fpos, savior, ddnp, -épos, brother-in-law, and of the personal 
words in 210, the natural tone of address has thrown back the accent as 
far as possible, and shortened the last syllable of the stem if long : “Azrod- 
Nov, Ildcedov, oGrep, ddep, dvep, marep, Ovyarep, Ajunrep. If the accent 
is not thrown back, oxytone nouns retaining v or p in the theme have no 
distinet Voc. : as, AuHv, 6, 7) alOnp, -épos, ETHER. 


§ 212. LIQUIDS. PURES. 169 


209. Neuter Liquips. <A few nouns in which the stem 
ends in p are neuter. They are, for the most part, confined to 
the singular; and require, in their declension, no euphonic 
changes of letters. E. g. wip, rupdés (14; v lengthened in the 
monosyllabic stem), vexrap, -apos, nectar. 


a. In éap (Feag) ver, spring, and the poetic xéap cor, heart, contraction 
takes place in the stem: N. éap, poet. jo, G. and D. éapos, éapi, oftener 
pos, Hpc* N. xéap, in Hom. always xfjp, D. xjoc. 


210. Synoopatep Liquips. I. In a few familiar liquids, 
a short vowel is syncopated before the stem-mark : viz., 


a. In these three, the syncope takes place before all the open affixes : 
avip (Ss. dveo-, syne. dvp-, dvdp-, 146b) man; kbov (s. kvov, syne. Kup-) 
canis, dog, also syncopated in Dat. pl. ; apvds (s. dper-, syne. dov-) lamb’s, 
of which the Nom. sing. is not used, but in its place, duris agnus, of 
Dec. 2. See 18. 

b. These five are syncopated in the Gen. and Dat. sing. : warhp (18; s. 
Tarep-, TaTp-) FATHER; pyTHP MOTHER, G. unrépos unrpds, D. wnrépe 
entpi; 60yurnp DAUGHTER, Ouya(répos)tpds, Ovya(rép)tpl 7) yaorhp 
stomach, yao(répos)tpés, yao(rép)tpl> 7 Anpatynp Ceres, Anuy(repos)tpos, 
Ajun{rept)tpt, also Acc. Ajun(repa)tpa. 

ec. In these words, the poets sometimes neglect the syncope, and some- 
times employ it in other cases than those which are specified. For the 
Dat. pl., see 145a. Taornp has not only yaorpds (Dio C. 54. 22), but 
also in Hipp. yaorjpot. 

d. Compare Lat. pater, pa(ter)¢ris ; mater, ma(ter)tris ; caro, carnis. 


211. Comparatives in -ey often drop the v before a and e in 
the sing. and pl, and are then contracted (140 b) : as, 

pelfova pelf(oa)w, welfoves uelf(oes)ovs, wei fovas wetfous (22). Both forms 
are freely used, and even together : as, dueivovas kai xpeirrovs i. 7. 3. 

a. A like contraction occurs in a few other words, particularly in the 
Ace. of ‘Aé\\wv and Ioceddy (itself contr. fr. Iocesddwv, 131 a) : “Ad)- 
Awva “AridAN(wa)e (iii. 1. 6), HocevdGva Iloce:dd. See for both forms, of 
which the shorter is especially used with the article, Pl. Crat. 402 d, e, 
404d, 405d. So, likewise, 6 xuxedy mixed drink, Acc. xuke@va, and poet. 
Kuke@ (Kk. 316, kuxerd A. 624) 3 7 YArjxwv pennyroyal, A. yrixwra, yAIYw 
(Ar. Ach. 874) ; and by a like syncope of p, 6 iyvw&p ichor ; A. ixGpa and 
(only E. 416) iyo. 


C. Pures (19). 


212. The euphonic changes in the declension of pures may 
_ be mostly referred, (I.) to a special law of Greek declension, 
and (fI.) to contraction. 


I. Sprcran LAw oF Greek Deciension. The 
short vowels, « and o, can never remain in the stem, either 
before the affixes -s and -v, or at the end of a word. 
Hence, © 

REY. GR. 8 








170 THIRD DECLENSION. — PURES. § 213, 


213. A.) Before the affixes -s and -», e be- 


comes 7, 4, v, or ev; and o becomes @ or ov; as 
follows : 


1.) a. In masculine nouns, ¢ becomes ev in semple, and n in 
compound words : as, 


Simple, 6 trmevs, -éws (19 ; stem tm7e-), Baotdev’s king, Onoe’s Theseus ; 
compound, Xwxparns, -eos (19; fr. o&s entire, and xpdros strength), “Apt- 
ororé\ns, Anuocbévys (observe the difference in accentuation). 

Except the simples “Apns, -eos, Mars, 6 ons, ceds, moth ; and the fol- 
lowing, in which e becomes v or t, 6 wijxus, -ews, A. mixuv (19), 6 wédexus 
axe, 0 wpéoBus elder (properly an adj.) ; 6 xcs, -ews, viper, 6 dis serpent, 
mpvtavs president, and also Kémus, Kdpts, wdpis, and épxus. 

b. In feminine and common nouns, « becomes 4: as, 7 woAts, 

¢ c , e ¢ , 
-eos, A. modu (19), 7 Suvapis power ; 6,  pavtis prophet. 

c. In adjectives, « becomes v in simple, and y in compound 
words : as, 


Simple, dvs, -éos, A. ndvv (23), yruKts sweet, d&0s sharp; compound, 
axparys, éos (a& not, kparos strength), weak, adnOijs true, ebredys cheap, Tpt- 
npyns having three banks of oars, or, as a substantive (vats, vessel, being 
understood), trireme. 

Except a few simple adjectives, in which € becomes y : as, cagas, -éos 
(22), wArnjons full, tyins healthy, Pevdys false. 

d. If the last element of a compound ends in -evs, -ts, or -vs, its form is 
commonly retained: as in dpx-tepev’s high-priest, pidd-rodts (Gen. -Ews, 
-Ldos, or -tos, 218) patriotic, di-rnxus two cubits long (yet contracted in 
neut. pl., as if formed in -yns, 219: diur7x(ea)y iv. 2. 28). 


214. 2.) In monosyllables, o becomes ov ; otherwise o: as, 
Bots, Bods, A. Botv (19), 6 xovs, xods, heap of earth; but 7 aides, 
-dos, shame. 

a. This rule applies also to Jinguals in which o precedes the stem- 
mark : as, wovs, wodds (17), and its compounds Oddérous, diarous (21, 22) ; 
but elds, -dros (26). ; } 

b. In feminine nouns of more than one syllable, in which the stem ends 
in o, the affix s is absorbed, as if € (142a). Thus from the stem 7x0- is 
formed the theme 7x(0s, 0€) (19). So 7 etd, -dos, persuasion, % Ayre, 
-bos, Latona, &e. Except, as above, aidws, and the lonic 7 ws dawn. In 
these words in - and -és, the plural and dual are very rare, and only 


formed according to Dec. 2: as, Nex, N. pl. Aexof Orph. H. 2. 10 ; eixovs, 
(224 a). 


215. B.) In cases which have no affix, e char- 
acteristic becomes 4, v, or ev, or else assumes a eu- 
phonic s; and o characteristic becomes ot or ov; as 
follows : 


a.) If the theme ends in -ys, « becomes es ; but, otherwise, 
is changed as in the theme: thus, Nom. neut. and Voc. cages 
(22), 450 (23) ; Voc. Saxpares, rod, wHxv, tamed (19). 








lod 


§ 217. CHANGES OF STEM-MARK. 171 


b.) In the theme of neuter nouns, e assumes s, becoming 
itself o (114 b): as, 7d yévos, -eos (19), ro retxos, -eos, wall, rd 
eOvos nation, To dpos mountain. 

Except 70 dorv, -eos, town (19), the Epic 7d Gi, -e0s, flock, and a few 
foreign names of natural productions in -t, as 7d mézept, -ews, piper, 
PEPPER. 

ce.) In the Vocative, o becomes oi, if the theme ends in - or 
-os ; but ov, if it ends in -ovs : as, nxot (19), aidot (fr. aidas, 214); 
Bov (19) ; and in like manner, OfSimrov (21, 214 a). 


216. a. After the analogy of « and o, a characteristic be- 
comes av in 74 vais (s. va) ship, H ypats, ypads, old woman ; and 
assumes s in the theme of neuwters: as, td yépas, -aos (19), 7d 
yinpas, -aos, old age. 

For the declension of vats, see 19, 21, 222f. That of ypats agrees with 
the Dor. forms of vais, as first given, while, in the Acc. pl., it contracts 
ypaas into ypads (122 a). 

b. In the Accusative singular of pures, the inflective v be- 
comes a (202b), except when the theme ends in -as, -ts, -vs, -avs, 
OF -ovs: aS, Apwa, nxda, imméa (19); caféa (22); but from 6 das, 
stone, «is, ois (contracted from dis), méAus, ixOvs, mhxvs, vats, Bors, 
ndvs, Acc. Adv* Kiv, otv, wid, ixOdv, mHXUY, vadtv, Bovv (19) ; Hdd» 
(23). 

ce. Proper names in ns, -eos, for the most part, admit both forms of the 
Ace. : as, Dwxpdrys (19), A. Dwxpdry (Plat.), Dwxparny (Xen.) ; 6”“Apys, 
Mars, A “Apn and “Apny ("Apea Soph. O. T. 190). So pws, A. Howy 

. Hdt. 1. 167 (jowa 2. 143). 


d. When the stem-mark is changed to a diphthong before -s 
in the theme, the same change is made before -o- in the Dative 
plural ; as, immetor, Bovai, vavai (19). 

217. ‘These changes appear to have chiefly resulted from 
the earlier mode of preventing hiatus in declension, viz., by 
attaching consonant elements to the stem (100, 190). 


Of these, the most prominent seem to have been, for masculines and 
neuters, F and = ; and for feminines, the softer A, which in many words 
acquired a permanent place (see f below). With this exception, these in- 
serted consonants, in the refining of the language, were (a) simply dropped 
between two vowels (140 ; hence, except as above, 216d, in the Dat. pl, 
originally ending in -eot, 186 f) ; and A throughout. If not between two 
vowels, the F became v (142), which (b) formed a diphthong with an open 
vowel preceding, but (c) was absorbed by a close one ; while the = (d) re- 
mained where there was no affix (139), but (e) before the affixes -s and -v 
was absorbed, as if ¢, by the preceding vowel (142). Before the A, (f) a 
could remain, but there was a tendency in ¢ before a lingual to pass by 
precession into t (114d), so remarkable that in this whole declension 
there is scarce an instance of € before a characteristic lingual mute. 
ee in -¢-, on losing the inserted A, took two forms as below (g, h). 

us, 








172 THIRD DECLENSION. — PURES. § 217. 


(a) Boros Bods bovis, iyO(vFos)Vos, lrm(eFes)ées * yév(eZos)eos (fr. yévos ; 
cf. Lat. géniis, gen®ris, 139), yép(aZos)aos (19) ; AcFos Atés (21; cf. Lat. 
divus and dius, and bowm for bovum), 75( eros)éos (23) ; cad(eZos)éog (22). 

(b) Bors Bods, Bory Boty, Bor Bod, tmm(ers)ets, ein lamedo., vaFs 
vads navis, vavol (19). In adjectives, and in a few masculine and neuter 
nouns, short v takes the place | of ev: as, ders Hus, Ho(er)v (23) ; 
THX (EFS Us, Tixty, THY, dor (eF)¥ (19). 

* (ec) dyOurs ix 6s, ixO(vF)v, but Dat. ar ixO¥or; KuFs (or xls, Kiihn.) kts (19). 

(d) Nom. neut. capeX cadés (22), vyév(eX)os (€ passing into a kindred 
vowel, 114b), yép(az)as (19) ; Vou. ZwKpar(eZ)es (19). The peculiar 
form of the Voc. of 7xw and aldeds (215 c) may have arisen from the change 
of s to its corresponding ¢, and then contraction with precession (142, 
118 b) ; thus, 7x(o2, oe)ot (cf. 214 b). 

(e) capdeZs capris (22), Uwxpdr(eZs)ys (19), ald(oDs)é&s (214), 6 wvds wds 
mis, mouse, G. wvDos wvds miiris (a). For 7x, see 214 b; ef. Ayo? (d). 

(f) “EAXds, -ddos, Greece, Meyapis, -t60s, Megaris. Meyape-, Megarian, 
had two forms, Meyaper- masc., and with precession MeyapcA- fem.; from 
the former we have Meyapevs, -éws, Megarian man, and from the latter 
(8 retained and becoming the stem-mark), Meyapis, -idos, Megarian woman 
or land. This became the prevalent mode of declining feminines in -ts, 
if we except the large class of abstract nouns in -ots. Especially many 
feminine adjectives, or words which are properly such, are thus declined. 

(g) The Nom., Acc., and Voe. sing. took the vowel of precession t, 
while € remained in the other cases : as, réA(eAs)us, rdA(eAos)ews, adder, 
mow, ode * modes, &e. (19). This became the usual form of feminine 
pures in -ts, in the Attic and Common Greek. 

(h) Precession took place throughout. This became the regular form 
of feminine pures in -ts in the Ionic (130): thus, Ion. N. ~%s, G. -tos, 
D. -i, commonly contracted into i A. -, V. -t; Pl. N. -tes, sometimes 
contr. into -is, G. -iwv, D. toi, A. -ias, commonly contr. into -is: as, 
modus, mddcos, 7dNI, riko modes, -Lwy, moduot, wodzeas, -is. The t was also 
the prevalent vowel in the Doric : thus, Dor. més, médcos, 75Xt and 76- 
Net, TOA * TddLES, ToAwy, ToANeoo. aNd wddeoL, wduas. 

i. From the classes of words in which they were used, F appears to 
have been earlier in its prevalence than A; and thisthan =. See 213, 214, 


218. As might have been expected, the three last forms 
(f, g, h} ars far from being kept entirely separate ; and are not 
wholly restricted to feminines (213 a,b, 215 b). Thus, 


1.) Some words exhibit both the lingual and the pure inflection, the 
latter especially in the Ionic and Doric, which were less averse than the 
Attic to hiatus (131s): as, 7 rp5ms keel, G. rpdmews, Tpdmios, and rpdmidos * 
particularly proper names, as *Ious, G. -.dos, -cos Hdt. 2. 41, D. -cde, “lot 
Ib. 59 ; Oéris, G. Oéridos O. 370, D. Oéri Z. 407. Compare 207, 211. 

2.) In some pures in -ts, the Attic adopts, in whole or in part (par- 
ticularly in the Gen. sing.), the Ionic forms: as, 7 TUpoes turris, tower, 
G. rvpovos vii. 8. 12, but Pl. N. tupoes iv. 4. 2, tupcewv Hel. 4. 7. 6, 
tupoeot Cyr. 7.5.10; 6 méous spouse, Gr. -vos, D. -ec* 4 pdyadis, -Los, 
a kind of harp, D. wayad vii. 3. 32; 6, % riypes tigris, tiger, G. rlyptos, 
and in later writers riypidos, Pl. N. riypes, G. riypewy* some proper 
names, as 6 Lvévveois, G. -vos, i. 2. 12, 6 “Ipis, G. -vos vi. 2.1; and the 
adjectives tépis intelligent, vijsris abstemious. In like manner, %, 6 éyxe- 
Aus (217 b) anguilla, eel, G. éyxédvos, Pl. N. éyxérers, G. eyxé\ewy * 7d 
mémept (215 b), G. -ews and -tos, 





§ 220. CONTRACTION, Vig 


219. II. Contraction. Most pures in -as, -ns, 
-os, and -w are contracted in al/ the cases that 
have open affixes ; but others, for the most part, 
only in the Wom. and Ace. pl. and Dat. sing. ; and 
some, if at all, only in the Acc. pi. 


a. See 19, and also cagyjs (which % tpejpys and like words, properly 
adjectives, follow, 213), wyejs, and Hdvs (22, 23). The common con- 
tractions are given in the tables ; and also some in brackets which are 
rare or doubtful. The contractions there shown are sometimes omitted, 
and others sometimes occur ; especially in the poets. For the general 
laws, see 118 s. 

b. Of nouns in -w, the uncontracted form scarcely occurs, even in the 
poets and dialects. So, in aldws and ws (214 b): G. -(o0s)ods, D. -o7, 
A. -@, V. -ot. Cf., in Lat., Dido, G. -diis (92 b), D. A. V. -do. 

ce. In proper names in -kdéns, cont. -KA‘js (fr. kAéos renown), the Dat. 
and sometimes Acc. sing. are doubly contracted. See ‘Hpaxdéns (19) ; 
and for its Attic forms, Mem. 2. 1. 21-26. For the later Voc. “HpaxXes, 
used in exclamations, cf. 208 f. 

d. For the earlier contraction of the Nom. pl. of nouns in -evs into fs, 
see 121e. The uncontracted Onsées occurs (with “Hpaxdées after the Ion. 
form, 222d) Pl. Theat. 169 b. 

e. It is not as often that we wish to pass rapidly over a noun which is 
the subject of a sentence, as over one which is a mere olject. Hence, as 
we observe from the tables, the Nominative plural is less frequently con- 
tracted than the Accusative. 

f. Compare the contracts in -vs, -vos, with the Lat. Dec. 4: 
dpxvs, net, -Vos, -ul, -uy* Pl. -(ves)Us, -vwv, -vot,  -(vas)vs. 
arciis, bow, -(tlis)is, -ui, -twm; Pl. -(ues)as, -wuwm, -ubus, -(ues)is. 

g. Of Latin contracts in the nude declension, the three great classes 
are those with 7- characteristic, corresponding to the Greek e- (the earlier 
e showing itself in the neut. sing., and often in the fem. theme), as avis, 
rupes, mare, mitis; those with u-, corresponding to the Greek v-, as 
Sructus, cornu (Dec. 4) ; and those with e-, as res (Dec. 5, a declension 
of mixed analogies). 


220. In the Attic and Common Greek, the endings -eos, 
-ea, and -eas, instead of the common contraction, receive in cer- 
tain words a peculiar change, which lengthens the last vowel. 
This change takes place, 

a.) In the Gen. sing. of nouns in -ts, -vs and -evs, and some- 
times of nouns in -c and -v: as, wddis, G. méAeos ToAEwS, TIYXUS, 
-ews, immevs, -éws, dotv, -eos and -ews (19) ; wémept, -ews (215 b). 
Also 6 “Apns (213 a), G. "Apeos and “Apeas (as if from a second 
theme “Apevs, cited by grammarians from Alczeus). 

b.) In the Ace. sing. and pl. of nouns in -evs: as, inmeds, 
Ace. sing. inméa inméa, pl. inméas imnéas. 

e. This change appears to be simply a less perfect, and, from the words 


in which it occurs (those which had dropped F or A, 217 i), an earlier 
mode of contraction. From the accentuation of such words as wé\ews, it 


’ 


~ eee 


174 THIRD DECLENSION. § 220. 


is evident that the € (as in Mevé\ews, 120 i) has not the full force of a dis- 
tinct syllable ; while the use of the poets shows that it has not wholly 
lost its syllabic power. We may infer that it commonly united as a spe- 
cies of semivowel (like our y or w, 117 b) with the vowel following, and 
thus lengthened it. 

d._ The poets sometimes complete the contraction by synizesis: as, Ba- 
ouréws Eur. Ale. 240, “Axv\Néa Id. Iph. A. 1341. Instances also occur, in 
the Attic poets, of the unchanged Gen. in -eos, of the Ace. in -e& and 
-ea3, and of the Acc. sing. regularly contracted into #: as, Nyeéos Eur. 
Ton 1082, édeos Id. Hec. 866 ; dovéd Ib. 882 ; EvyypadH Ar. Ach. 1150, 
‘Odvoo} Eur. Rh. 708, and even iepj Id. Ale. 25. The regularly con- 
tracted Acc. pl. in -es, instead of -ed&s, is sometimes found in Attic writ- 
ers, and became in the later Greek the common form : Baciets Mem. 3. 
9,10. 

e. If another vowel precedes, the € is commonly absorbed by the -qs, -a, 
and -&s: as, Hepaceds Pireeus, G. Ileip(aréws)aras, A. Ierp(acéa)ara > yods 
(224 f). 

f. Grammarians give the name Aitic Genitive to the form in -ews ; and 
also to the Gen. pl. in -ewv when accented upon the antepenult, the accent 
then showing a like use of €; as, réNewy (19). The regularly contracted 
anxav occurs iv. 7. 16. 

The Gen. in -ews is also found in a few adjectives in -ts (213 d) ; in 
jyucus, half (G. -eos ; later -ews and -ous, and also Neut. pl. -(ea)y) ; and, 
in later writers, in other adjectives in -vs (thus, Bpayéws Plut.). 


Diatectic Forms, 


221. (A.) Dialectic changes affecting the AFFIX. 


a. In the poets, especially the Epic, the Acc. sing. sometimes ends in 
-a, in words in which it has commonly -v; as, evpéa Z. 291, vija or véa, 
mona, for edptv, vabv, modw* tx@va Theoc. 21. 45. On the other hand, 
the New Ion. often forms the Acc. of nouns in - or -és, -dos, in -otv (in 
the Aéol. and stricter Dor. -wv, 130 c) : as, Id Jo, Anrw Latona, qos dawn, 
A. ‘Totv Hdt. 1.1, Ayrotv, joty (Aardy Insc. Cret., ‘Hpwv Sapph. 75, 
or 91). 

b. In the Gen. pl., the Ion. sometimes changes -ev to -ewv (135 a, ef. 
201 c¢) ; and perhaps the Dor., to -av: as, xnvéwy Hdt. 2. 45, uupiadéwr, 
avipéwy, for ynvev, wupiddwr, dvdpdv: aiydy for aiyav (2) Theoc. 8. 49. 

c. In the Dat. pl., for the common affix -o.(v, the poets often employ 
the old or prolonged forms -eot, -erot, and -7ot (186 f, h, 171). Hom. 
uses the four forms, though -eou rarely. The forms -eoot and -eou are 
also common in Dor. and Aol. prose ; and -eot is used in Ion. prose after 
the stem-mark v. Thus, xepoiv A. 14, xelpeoor I. 271, xelpece T. 468 ; 
moot H. 745, mwoooi B. 44, wéidecow TV. 407 ; érecw B. 73, erecar 6. 597, 
énéesow B. 753; datrupdveot Hdt. 6.57. So, F dropped between two 
vowels (217 a), Bosoor B. 481, vdeoou Pind. P. 4. 98, dpuorheroe A. 227. 

d. In the Dual, the Epic prolongs -ow (as in Dec. 2, 201 b) to -ovty : 
thus, rodowy FZ. 228, Leipjvoiy pw. 52. 


222. (B.) Dialectic changes affecting the srr, either sim- 
ply or in connection with the affix. 


a. Many changes result from dialectic preferences of vowels (1308) : as, 
Ion. Owpné, vnds, ypnts, for Odpat, &c.: Dor. womdv, dKirads, vaes, for 





Le 


§ 222. DIALECTIC FORMS. 175 


mou, &c. ; xHp for yelp; as, Bas, dxGs, for obs, Bods, Hyovs ; for Kets 
key, Dor. (xAadFis clavis) kAdits, lon. KAnts, Old Att. Krys. 

b. The dialects and poets vary greatly in the extent to which they em- 
ploy contraction, and in the mode of contraction (131). The Epic has 
here especial license. In the poets, contractions are often made by syni- 
zesis (117 b), which are not written. In respect to the usage of Homer, 
we remark as follows: (1) In the Gen. sing., contraction is commonly 
omitted, except in nouns in -é and -ds, G. -dos. In a few instances, -€o0s is 
contracted intg -evs (131 b), or synizesis occurs : as, EpéBeus ©. 368, Oépeus 
9. 118 ; Iin\éos A. 489, wédtos B. 811. (2) In the Dat. sing., both the 
contracted and uncontracted forms are freely used in most words: as, 
yioat and yar or vipa (119), reixet and Teixer, Howi and fow H. 458. 
See 21. The endings -w, -v, and -ot are almost always contracted : as, 
Kyyjort A. G40, véxvs IT. 526, jot I. 618. (8) The endings -ea, -ewy, and 
-eas are commonly uncontracted, except by _synizesis : as,@eoedda I. 27, 
adyea Q. 7, véa t. 283; ornbewy K. 95; modéas A. 559. So wédias 0. 560; 
but Tvd9 A. 384, Odveq 7. 136 (21; so Baorkh Oracle in Hdt. 7. 220). 
(4) The ending -«s is used both with and, oftener, without contraction : 
as, mpwromayeis veorevxées H. 194. (5) The neut. plur. ending -aa, with 
scarce an exception, is contracted or drops one a (cf. d): as, xépa, déza, 
yépa B. 237. The form with the single short a sometimes occurs in the 
Attic poets: as, epéé Ar. Pax 192. (6) For the Homeric forms of ofs, 
see 21. Those of ods (17) and ypats ($ 216 a) are, N. ods, G. ovaros ° 
P. N. ovara, D. ottaci, doi: N. ypniis, ypnits, D. ypni, V. vpn, vend (the 
Gen. and Acc. supplied by ypains and ypaiav of Dec. 1). 

c. In common nouns in -ebs, the characteristic €F before a vowel regu- 
larly becomes y, in the Epic : as, lamijos, immfes (21 ; imme?s A. 151, and 
Baoirets Hes. Op. 246, are doubtful). Doubtful examples of this change 
appear in Hdt. (Bacrjos, Baoidja, 7. 137, &c.) ; while the regular inflec- 
tion of these nouns in Ion. prose, and in the Dor., is in -€os, &c. In 
proper names in -ets, the Epic has much freedom in using the long or 
short vowel according to the metre. So in “Apys and més (21). These 
Ep. and lon. forms are not wholly unknown to Att. poetry, or even prose 
(85 c, d): as, Baowdjas Eur. Ph. 829, contr. Baordjs Asch. Aj. 390. 

In words whose root ends in ee-, the Epic often unites these vowels 
into y (as regularly in proper names in -«Kdéys), or into e ; but sometimes 
Sh hea the first € into e or y. In many instances, the root is shortened 

y the poets, or in dialectic prose, by dropping one «. E. g., forms of 
kéos, fame, and of its compounds in -ens, «rete Hes. Th. 100, «déa I. 
189, éiixdetas K. 281, evxdéas Pind. O. 2. 163, dxdneis M. 318, dyakdfos 
II. 738, dvoxr\éé B. 115 (so étippetos Z. 508, brepdda P. 330, but émcdeées 
Hdt. 4. 130; see oméos and Ildrpoxdos, 21) ; ‘Hpaxdéys Hes. Th. 318, 
Hadt. 2. 43 (‘Hpaxdjjs Ib. 145), Pind. O. 6.115; G. ‘Hpaxdfos 2. 266, 
“Hpaxdéos Hdt. 2. 43, Pind. O. 3. 20; D. ‘Hpaxdfi 6. 224, Pind. I. 5. 47, 
“Hpaxdéi Hdt. 2. 145, “Hpaxde? Pind. P. 9.151; A. ‘Hpaxdja &. 324, 
“Hpaxdéd Hdt. 2. 43, Pind. O. 10. 20, ‘Hpaxrénv Theoe. 13. 73. 

e. In xépas and répas (207), the + is commonly omitted in dialectic 
Greek ; and then in these, as in other neuters in -as, -aos, the later Ionic 
often changes a into ¢€ (130 b), except in the theme : as, xépeos, xépet, Ké- 
pea, Kepéwy, Tépeos, yépea, Hdt. For the Ion. and Dor. forms of words in 
“ts, -ews, alld -ts, -tS0s, see 217, 218. 

f. In vais (vaFs, navis, 217 b, 19, 21), the original a remains throughout 
in the Dor. ; but in the lon. passes by precession either into y, or with 
short quantity, especially in the later lon., intoe. The Att. retains the 
a in the diphthong av, but has otherwise y or ¢ (the latter having appar- 


aiken ee, 


176 IRREGULAR NOUNS. — METAPLASTS. § 222. 


ently been inserted in the Gen. sing. and pl. after the contraction of do 
and dw, 120i; and the Gen. dual having followed the analogy of the 
other numbers). In the Att. poets, the Ion. forms occur rarely, the Dor. 
oftener : as, vnds Kur. Iph. T. 1385, vaéds Soph. Ant. 715. 


IV. IRREGULAR NOUNS. 


223. Irregularities in the declension of nouns, which have 
not been already noticed, may be chiefly referred to two heads: 
varrety of declension, and defect of declension. 


A. VARIETY OF DECLENSION. 


a. A noun may vary, (1.) in its stem; (2.) in its method of 
declension ; and (3.) in its gender (180). In the first case, it 
is termed a metaplast (uerandaotés, transformed) ; in the second, 
a heteroclite (érepéxditos, of different declensions) ; in the third, 
heterogeneous (érepoyerns, of different genders). 


b. Words which have distinct double forms, either throughout or in 
part, are termed redundant. Those, on the other hand, that want some 
of the usual forms, are termed defective. 

c. The lists which follow are designed both to exemplify the different 
kinds of irregularity, or anomaly, and likewise to present, in classes, the 
principal anomalous nouns (some of which might have been also placed 
under other heads, as doubly irregular). 


224. 1. METAPLASTS. 


Metaplasm has mostly arisen from a change of the stem, in the progress 
of the language, for the sake of euphony or emphasis, chiefly by the pre- 
cession of an open vowel, or the addition of a consonant to prevent hiatus ; 
while, at the same time, forms have remained from the old stem, espe- 
cially in the poets and in the dialects. The double stem may be, 

a.) In ov- and in o- (cf. 140, 211): 7 &yBdv, -dvos, nightingale ; from 
the stem dndo-, G. dndods Soph. Aj. 629, D. dndot Ar. Av. 679: 4 BAR- 
xov, lon. yARxXwr, -wvos and (s. BAnxo-) -ods, pennyroyal : n Topya, -ois, 
and Topydév, -dvos, Gorgon (A. pl. Topyov’s, 214 b, Hes. Th. 274) : 7 etkay, 
-dvos, image ; (s. exo-) G. efxobs Eur. Hel. 77, A. elk Hdt. 7. 69; Pl. A. 
elxovs Ar. Nub. 559: % Yedt8av, -dvos, swallow; (s. xedudo-) V. xedtOo? 
Ar. Av. 1411. 

b.) In a- and in -e (€- esp. Ton., 222 e) : 7d Bpéras, -eos, wooden image, — 
poet. : 7d Kvéhas, darkness, G. Ep. xvépaog, Att. xvépous Ar. Eccl. 291, 
later xvéparos Polyb., D. xvépar Cyr. 4. 2. 15: 7d kas, fleece, poet., 7. 
47; Pl. N. xwea v. 8, D. xdbeor y. 38: 7d ot8as, floor, poet., G. ovdeos, 
D. ovdet ober, in Hom. 


c.) In F- and Far-: 7d ydvv, ydvaros, genu, KNEE, and 76 8Sépv, -aros 
(s. dopF-, dop- 140, dopv- 142, Sovp- 145, Soprar-, Sopar-, doupar-), spear. 
For the forms of ddpv (late theme dodpas Antiphil. 9), see 21. Those 
which occur of yévv correspond : Ion. and poet. yowvaros, -aTa, -dTwv, -ace 
(-agou v. 1. I. 488) ; also poet. youvds, yotva, youvwr, and yévwv Sap. 14 
[25], yovverou. : 





§ 225. HETEROCLITES. 177 


d.) With and without a- final: 6 kddws, cable, (s. kada-, Att. Dec. 2), 
G. kddw + Ion. KdXos, -ov, e. 260 and Hdt. ; in later Ep., Pl. cddwes, &c., 
Ap. Rh. 2. 725: 6 XAayés, hare (s. Naya-, Att. Dec. 2), G. Aaya: Ion. 
Aayés, -o8, Hdt., also Pl. N. Aayot Soph. Fr. 113, A. Dor. (131d) Aayéds 


‘Hes. Sc. 302; Ep. \aywds, -o8, K. 361: 6 dphas and épdéds, a sea-fish, 


G. dppwe and dpgov. 

e. Lingual and Pure: 6, 4 dpvis, bird, G. dpvidos (Dor. dprixos, 168), 
D. dpvidi, A. dpviv and dprvida: Pl. dpvifes, &c. ; (s. dpve-) N. dpvis, A. dpyu, 
Pl. N. dpvers, G. dpvewy, A. dpvers and dpvis (218); also 7d dpveov, -ov: 
6 oHs, moth, G. cess and later onrds: 6 POdis, contr. POors, cake, G. PAords* 
PL. N. POders, A. POders and POo%s Ar. Pl. 677 ; also 7 POois, -td0s : 6 Xpas, 
skin, surface, -wrés, -wri (xp@, 207 a), &c. ; Ion. and poet. G. xpods, D. 
xpot, A. xpda. 

f.) Variously Double : Sopv§(5os)ots and -éds Ar. Pax 447, -o0, spear- 
maker : Lebs (s. Zer-, AcF-, Zav-) ; see 21, and cf. Lat. Jupiter (Zed marep 
I. 276), Jovis, divus: 6 Oepdtrev, -ovros, attendant ; poet. A. 0épara, N. 
pl. 6épames Eur. Ion 94: 6, ) paptis (Aol. and late udprip), -ipos, wit- 
ness; A. udptupa, rarer paptiv, D. pl. udprioe: Kp. 6 udprupos, -ov, 7. 
423 : 6 ZapmwySav, -dvos and -ovros, V. Lapwijdov E. 633: 7 opad€, -cyyos, 
weal, Ep., B. 267, Y. 716: 7d tos, -eos -ovs Cyr. 4. 2. 26, light, 
poet. ; contr. ds, pwris: 6, 7) hapvyé, -vyyos, poet. -iyos «. 373, throat : 
6 Pépkus, -Vos and -ivos, Phorcys: 7 xelp, hand, G. xewpds and yxepds, Ke. 
(for the common forms, see 18 ; for the rest, the poets and Ion. prose) : 
6 Xots, a measure, G. yo5s, &c., like Bods (19) ; from s. yoe-, the better 
Att. G. xoéws xods, A. xoéd xod, Pl. D. yoetor, A. xodds yods (120f): 
To Xpéos (Ep. xpefos), -eous, debt; fr. s. xpae-, N. (xpdos, xpGs) xpéws, 
G. (xpdeos, xpious, xp@s) xpéws (120 i). 

g. ) Opis, Themis, as a common noun, right, law, G. O€usdos, Ep. 
Oéuoros B. 68, lon. O€uos Hdt. 2. 50, Dor. Oduiros Pind. O. 13. 11, also 
Pl. Rep. 380a. In the Attic, @éu:s occurs mostly in certain forms of ex- 
pression, where it is used without declension, as an adjective or neuter 
noun : thus, déus éori, it is lawful; pact... Oéus etvar, they say that it 
is lawful, Pl. Gorg. 505d; 7d uh Odus, that which is not lawful, Aisch. 
Sup. 335. 

h. 4 wvv€ (s. ruxy-, as in adj. ruxvés, crowded ; by met., from the dif- 
ficulty of appending ¢ in the theme, mvux-), G. muxvds and later mvuxés. 


i. Poetic, mostly Epic, forms (with the themes to which they are 
referred or allied, in parentheses): A. pl. Ai®tomfjas A. 423 (6 Al@ioy, 
-oros, Ethiopian) ; 7 8s Hes. Op. 354 (ddous gift) ; G. AuBés Asch. Ch. 
292, A. NiBa Id. Fr. 49 (7 ALBds Libation) ; 6 Ais O. 275, A. Nev A. 480 
(Aéwr lion) ; D. pact Y. 500, A. udorw o. 182 () udorié scourge); al 
orayes Ap. Rh. 4. 626 (crayuv drop) ; 7d vos, D. der Hes. Op. 61 (wp 
water). 


j. Many prolonged forms are used in poetry or dialectic prose: as, 
"AOnvala, ceXnvala, dvaryKxaln, Hepcepdveca, nveddreva, for "AOnva Minerva, 
gediyn moon, avayKn necessity, epoepsvn Proserpina, Inveddrn. 


225. 2. Hererociires. 


a. Of the Frrst and Seconp Drcienstions. Some personal nowns 
have forms both in -os and in -¢ or -as, particularly compounds of &pyx@ 
(where the form in -os is usually more Att.) : as, 6 yupraolapxos and 
-dpxns, gymnasiarch ; 6 ddodéoxns and -os, prater. 


REY. cr. 8* 


178 IRREGULAR NOUNS. —-HETEROCLITE.  — §: 225, 


e 


b. Of the First and Tutrp DEcLENSIONS : 6 “Av8ns, -ou, poet. “Azdys, 
Hades ; Dec. 8, Ep. G.”"Avdos, D. "Ave + also poet. “Atvdwveds, -éws, Ion. 
-fos: % yuvh (203 a): 6 AGas, contr. Ads, lapis, stone, G. Ados M. 462, 
and Adov Soph. O. C. 196, D. Aa, A. Aday, Adv, and Ada Call. Fr. 104, Pl. 
N. des, &c. : 6 pdKys, mushroom, G. wiKnros and pixov : Oislaevs (21): 
 ) wrvyh, -js, and mostly Ep. rrvé, -vx6s, fold: h pptxy, -ys, poet. Pplé, 
-ixds, shudder, ripple. 

c. Some personal derivatives have double forms in -rys, -rov, and in 
-THP, -THPOS, OF -TwWP, -TOpes : as, olknT Hs, olkyTHp, and olkirwp, dweller ; 
Onparys or OnpevTis, -7np, OY -wp, hunter. 


d. Add some proper names, mostly in -ys, of which a part admit a 
double formation throughout, as Oars, Oddew (198. 2; late -of) and Od- 
Anros* but others only in part: as, Trocadpéprns, -ovs, but & Tiscadépyyn 
ll. 5.35; Urpe~uddyns, -ov, but ® Zrpeviades Ar. Nub. 1206; Anunrnp, 
A. -rpa (210 b) and -rpav Pl. Crat. 404b. Some refer to this head the 
double Ace. in 216 c. 


e. Add, also, the Epic D. pl. @yxad(Serou D. 555 (4) dyxddn arm) ; 
D. adxl (always in the phrase axl rerodds) E. 299 (adxy might) ; m &p- 
wat Hes. Op. 354 (aprayy robbery) ; G. Satrys, &c., y. 44, also darrvos 
X. 496 (% dais, -rds, feast); A. taxa A. 601 (7% lwxy battle-din); Acc. kpéKa 
Hes. Op. 536 () xpdxn woof) ; G. vyodwv Call. Del. 66 (7 vijcos island) ; 
D. topive 0. 56 (iouiy battle) ; A. @tya (only in diyasde, to flight) O. 157 
(h pvyh flight). 

f. Of the Second and Tuirp DECLENSIONS: 7d Sdxkpvov and poet. 
ddxpu (14), lacrima (168 a), fear, G. daxptov, D. daxptw: Pl. N. ddxpva, 
G. daxptwr, D. Saxptors and Sdxpvor Th. 7. 75: 7d Sévbpey, -ov, and Jon. - 
dévdpeov, tree; Dec. 8, D. dévipe, A. dévdpos Hdt. 6. 79; Pl. N. dévdpn, 
D. more Attic form 6évdpect iv. 8. 2, Th. 2. 75, but dévdpois iv. 7. 9: 
6 iktivos, -ov, hawk; Dec. 3, rarer A. txrwa Ar. Fr. 525, N. pl. txrives 
Paus. 5.14: 6 KAd8os, -ov, twig; Dec. 3, poet. D. radi, A. xAdda, Pl. D. 
KvAddeot Ar. Av. 239, A. kAddas : 6 Kotwwvds, -o0, sharcr ; Dec. 3, Pl. N. 
kowa@ves Oyr. 8. 1. 25, A. xowdvas Ib. 7. 5. 35 (kowwvods 36): 7d Kplvov, 
-ov, lily; Dec. 3, Pl. N. xpivea Hdt. 2. 92, D. xpiveot Ar. Nub. 911: 
0 pdoovv, -Tvos, wooden tower, D. wdcovu v. 4. 26; Dec. 2, D. pl. pooarvors 
Ib. : 6 Sveapos and 7d 8vepov, dream (fr. dvap, 228 a),G. dvelpov and dvelpa- 
ros* Pl. évelpara and sometimes dveipa: ILatpoxdcs (21): 7d wip, mupds 
(14), fire; Dec. 2, Pl. N. riipd, watch-fires, D. ripots vii. 2. 18: 6 otlyos, 
-ov, row; Dec. 3, poet. fem. G. orixds Il. 173, Pl. N. orixes, A. orixas 
Ar. Eq. 163: 6 vids (21): 6, ) ptAaég, -axos, poet. and lon. 6 PiAakos, -ov, 
guard: 6pép, Yapds, and later Wapos, -ov, starling. 


g. Some contracts in -ovs of Dec. 2 have also forms, mostly late, like 
those of Bods (19) : as, 6 vods mind, 6 rods voyage, G. vods, 1 Cor. 14. 19, 
mods Acts 27. 9, D. vot Rom. 7. 25 ; 7 rpdxous ewer, D. pl. mpdxovor Ar. 
Nub. 272. 


h. Some verbals have double forms in -os, -ov, and -ets, -€ws, or -THP, 
~THpos : as, 6 rousrds and roumeds, guide, 6 rpopds and rpogeds, nowrisher, 
6 larpds and poet. larnp, healer. 

i. Add the poetic D. pl. dv8pamd8ecau H. 475 (7d dvdpdmodov slave) ; 
6 Spwds Hes. Op. 428 (Suds, -wis, servant) ; 6 pos Z. 315, A. pov I. 92 
(pws, -wros, love); G. pl. pydrdrav Lyc. 106 (7d Aor sheep); A. otka, 
only in ofkade, “homeward, Hom., and even in Att. prose, vii. 7. 57 
(6 otkos house) ; Ta Tpocatara o. 192, D. rpoowracr H. 212 (rpdowror, 


face). 


) 


§ 226. HETEROGENEOUS. 179 


j. Of the Artic SEconpD and Tuirp DECLENSIONS: 7 GAs threshing- 
floor, G. Gdw, ddwvos, and poet. ddrwos* also Ep. 7 ddwH: 6 dpxvepeds. 
-éws, and dpxtépews or -lepws, -w, Hdt. 2. 37, high-priest ; 7 €ws dawn (s. a-), 
G. éw, D. , A. éw (199) ; Dor. ‘dus (s. ‘do-), G. a(dos)ots * Ion. jus, G. 
nods, D. jot, A. 7 and jody (221 a) ; 6 phtpws, -wos and rarely -w, mater- 
nal uncle, Pl. wirpwes* 6 Mivas, -w and -wos, Minos ; 6 warps, -wos and 
-w, patruus, paternal uncle, Pl. rdrpwes* 6 taws (pron. by the Athenians 
taws, Athen. ix. 397e; see 93e), -@ and -@vos, peacock, Pl. N. ray, raol, 
and raves: 6 TUpss and Tuday, -w and -Gvos, whirlwind. 


226. 3. Hererocenrous Nouns. 


The names of things without life naturally vary in gender, according 
to the conceptions formed by the mind (175). Hence there are many 
words in which two genders are associated, either throughout or in part ; 
chiefly the neuter, as the natural gender of things without life, with the 
masculine or feminine, the genders of personification. LE. g. 


a. Of Dec. I. 4 tidpa or 6 ritpas Hdt. 1. 132, tiara or tiaras, turban. 


b. Of Dec. Il. 6 Seopsds band, Pl. rad decud, of decuol, and poet. ra 
déouara* 7d tvysv and 6 fvyd5s, yoke, Pl. ra Guyd* 6 Oeopds (Dor. TeOuds) 
institute, Pl. ot Oecuol and ra Oecud: 6 Adyvos lamp, Pl. ra A¥xva and of 
AUxvor* 7d v@rTov and 6 varos, back, Pl. ra vOra* 6 otros corn, Pl. ra 
gira TOoTadSdvov stadium, Pl. ra orddia and of orddioc: 6 cTabpds station, 
balance, P). of crabuoiand ra orabud stations, ra crabud balances: 6 Tdp- 
tapos (7 Pind. P. 1. 29), Pl. ra Tdprapa, Tartarus, Tartara. 

e. Things, when viewed collectively, seem least akin to persons ; and 
other masculines and feminines occur with which a neuter pl. is associated 
(chiefly in the poets and dialects) : 6 dpiués thicket, 6 éravXos stall, 6 “tbs 
arrow, h xéXev0os way, 0 Kv«dos circle, 6 pUros filth, and others. 

d. Of Duc. III. 76 dop, dopos, poet., sword; A. pl. dopas? p. 222: 
TO TAGs, -eos, and less common 4 rAnOds, -vos, fulness: 7d Kdoad and 
(Soph. Ph. 1457) kpara, head, poet., G. xparés (rs, Eur. El. 140), D. 
Kpari and xap¢ Soph. El. 445, A. like N. and also mase. xpaza Soph. Ph. 
1207, pl. xpadras Kur. Ph. 1149. The following forms are found in Homer 
(while some non-Att. poets have even forms fr. cdépy or xdépa as a fem. of 
Dec, 1, as xapy Theog. 1018 ; so kapay Alsop. 94) : 


S. N. A. xdipn, cap II. 392, 


G. Kdpyros Kapharos kpardés Kpadros kpnOevr. 588 Kadpivou 
D. xdpnteO. 75 Kapyndre Kpdrip.99 xpddrex. 218 Mar. 12 
P.N. A. xdpa Cer. 12 xapjara xparad. 92° xpddra T. 93 kdpynva 
G. P. 437 = kparwrv x. 309 Kap Tver 
». kpaol, kpdreodu, K. 152, 156 A. 44 


e. Of Dec. I. and Il. 76 Spéravov and 7 dperdvn, sickle ;  éomépa, 
Ep. 6 &ozrepos, vespera and vesper, evening (also ra éomepa p. 191) : ) wAavy 
and 6 mAdvos, error ; i wAevpa and 7d rreupdr, rib ; 6 Pboyyds and h Pboy- 
YH, voice ; 7 Xdpa and 6 xGpos, space. 

f. Of Dec. I. and III. 7 BAGBy and 7d BAdBos, -e0s, injury; ) Spa and 
70 dipos, thirst ; ) van and 70 varos, dell ; 7rd wdB0s and 7 rdOy, suffer- 
ing ; ) oKady and'7d cKddos, scapha, SKIFF ; 7) oréyn and 7d oréyos, roof. 

g. Of Dec. Il. and III. 6 derhp, -épos, and rd derpov, astrum, STAR $ 
6 byos (Dor. dxx0os), -ov, Td dxOs, -eos, and Td dynua, -aros, carriage ; 6and 
70 oKdTos (also 7 oKxoria), darkness ; 6 and 7d oKdtos, cup. 


180 DEFECTIVE NOUNS. § 227. 


B. Derect or DEcLENSION. 


227. «a. Some nouns receive xo declension, as the names of 
the letters, some foreign proper names, and a few other words, 
chiefly foreign : thus, 7d, rot, rH GAda* 6, Tod, TO, TOv *ABpadp * 
Ta, Tov, 7@ macya, passover. A word of this kind is termed z- 
declinable, or an aptote (drrwros, without cases). 

b. A few shortened or foreign proper names, whose stem 
ends with a vowel, receive s in the Nom., v in the Ace., and, 
if the vowel admits it, an iota subscript in the Dat., but have 
no further declension : as, 


Trots (21) ii. 1. 8; 6 Atovis (fr. Aciviicos, Bacchus), A. Atoviv, G. D. 
V. AtovS: 6 Mnvas (fr. Myvddwpos) Th. 5. 19, D. Myvg, A. Myvay, G. V. 
Myvi: 6 Mackas, D. Mdoxg, A. Mdoxay, G.V. Mdoxa, i. 5. 4; 6 “Iavvijs 
2 Tim. 3. 8, D. ‘law, A. ’Iaviv, G.V.’lavv9: 6’ Incots, Jesus, A. Inootr, 
G. D. V. “Inaod. 


c. Many nouns are defective in number. Thus, 


1. Many nouns, from their signification, want the plural: as, 6, 7 alO%p, 
ether, 76 €\qov oleum, OIL, 7) TaxuT7s, swiftness. Proper and abstract 
nouns do not require a plural, except when employed as common nouns. 

2. The names of festivals, some names of cities, and a few other words 
want the singular : as, Ta Acoviicra the feast of Bacchus, ai A@jvar Athéne, 
Athens, ot Aedpot Delphi, ol érnoiac the trade-winds. 


228. Some nouns are employed only in particular cases, 
and these, it may be, occurring only in certain forms of ex- 
pression : as, 


a. Neut. Nom. and Acc. : 6vap sleep, dream, wrap waking, reality ; 
ddedos advantage ; Téexpap and Ep. réxuwp, mark: Poet., Sénas instar, body, 
form; 80s pleasure ; 8 (s. Swu-, 160) A. 426 (rd 5Gua domus, house), 
pl. Hes. Th. 933 ; xpi (s. xpi0-, cf. Bpi, pd, 238 b) O. 564 (7 xpt0% barley) ; 
&rde (s. adgir-) Hom. Cer. 208 (dAgirov barley-meal) ; yradu hollow, 
Hes. Op. 531 ; pu Philet. (7d prov wool). 

b. Neut. Altra with oil, indecl., chiefly as Dat. ¢ 227; Du. N. and A. 
doce cyes, poet., M. 466, Pl. dccwv, dcc0s, Eur. Hee. 915, 1105. 

c. Fem. G. padns (uacxdry, ala, axilla, am-pit), in the phrase bd uaddns, 
under the arm, secretly, Hel. 2. 3. 23 (also bard uddnp late); D. Sat (7) battle, 
Kp., N. 286 (kindred A. dd Call. Fr. 248) ; A. érrlAny (émrixAqots, -ews, 
surname) Pl. Tim. 38c; A. vida nivem, snow, Hes. Op. 533 (whence 
vias, -d0os, snow-flake). 

d. Dat. Xtrt, Ep., =. 352, A. sing. or pl. Aira O. 441 (7d vor linum, 
LINEN) ; Voc. mase. and fem. & péXe, my friend, in familiar address, Ar. 
Lys. 157 ; Voc. ® rév or ray (also written & ray or Grav), my good sir (6 
érns, -ov, comrade), Attic, Pl. Apol. 25 ¢. 

e. A word which is only employed in a single case, is termed a monoptote 
(udvos single, mr@ots case) ; in two cases, a diptote ; in three, a triptote ; in 
four, a tetraptote. 


: 


§ 231, ADJECTIVES. 181 


os NS ag a Se 
DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 


(For paradigms, see 22 — 26, 28.) 


229. Adjectives are declined like substantives, 


| except so far as they vary their form to denote 


variation of gender (175s). In this respect, they 
are divided into three classes, adjectives of one, of 
two, and of three ternunations. 


a. In adjectives of more than one termination, the masculine is regard- 
ed as the primary gender, and the stem, theme, and declension of the 
masculine, as the general stem, theme, and declension of the word. The 
mode of declining an adjective is commonly marked by subjoining to the 
theme the other forms of the Nom. sing., or their endings ; and, if neces- 
gary, the form of the Gen. sing. Thus, dd:xos, -ov+ cadis, -és + udpos, 
-d, -ov* 0, 7 O:ovs, -od0s, TO Sitrovs. 


230. I. ApdsecTives or OnE TeErmiINaTION are declined 
precisely lixe nouns, and therefore require no separate rules or 
paradigms. They are chiefly confined to the masculine and 
feininine genders, or even to one of these. E. g. 


Dec. 1, 0 yevvddas, -ov, noble, o povias, -ov, solitary, 0 éOedovThs, -0v, ° 
voluntary : Dec. 3, 0 yuzrjs, -fros, light-arined ; ) wards, -d60s, frantic, 
n warpis, -idos, native, ) Tpwds, -ddos, Trojan; 0, h ayvus, -Gros, unknown, 
0, 7 amass, -atdos, childless, 0, 7 Spouds, -ddos, running, 0, 7 HAE, -uKos, of 
the same age, 0, ) nusOvis, -jros, half dead. 

a. In indirect cases of Dec. 3, where all the genders have the same 
form, such adjectives are sometimes employed in poetry (rarely in prose) 
as neuter: as, wandow Avoojnuacw, with frantic ravings, Eur. Or. 270 ; 
dpouad: KHrAW, with swift limb, Id. Hel. 1301 5 dxuAre TO cHuare Paus. 6. 
15. 3. <A neuter is sometimes supplied from a kindred or derived root : 
as, 0, 7 dpmak, -ayos, rapacious, Td apmaKTiKoy. 


231. II. In Apsectives or Two Terminations (22), the 
masculine and feminine agree, but the neuter differs in those 
cases which have special neuter affixes. 


a. It is only in Dec. 2 and 3 that adjectives can have a neuter (176 s) ; 
and in Dee. 3, labials and palatals do not form it, on account of the maim- 
ing of the stem which this would require (160). 

b. The neuter must have two distinct forms, and can have only two, 
one for the direct cases sing., and the other for the direct cases pl. (181). 
Hence, every complete adjective must have two terminations. A neut. 
yl. is sometimes given, though rarely, to adjectives which do not form the 
neut. sing. : as, 7/Kea marpos dwdropa, ‘fatherless,’ Eur. Here. 114. 





182 ADJECTIVES, § 231. 


ce. In dimovs (22), and similar compounds of rods, foot, the neut. sing., 
on account of the difficulty of forming it from the stem, is formed from 
the theme, after the analogy of contracts of Dec. 2 (23): thus, 0, 7 rpl- 
mous, -od0s, three-footed, To tpirovv. Some of these compounds have sec- 
ondary, chiefly poetic, forms in Dec. 2: as, rpiwos X. 164, “Ips deddozros, 
‘storm-footed,’ O. 409, wovAvmov Ar. Fr. 235. 

232. III. Apsecrives or THREE TERMINATIONS (238) dif- 
fer from those of two in having a distinct form for the feminine. 
It is only in Dec. 1 that the feminine has a separate form. 
These adjectives, therefore, are of two’ declensions, adding the 
feminine forms of the first to the masculine and neuter of the 
second or third ; as follows : 

Rute |. If the theme belongs to the second 
declension, the feminine affixes of the first are an- 
nexed to the siuple stem. 


a. Ifthe stem ends in e, 1s, p, or po, the feminine is declined 
like 6ea- otherwise, like @6y (15): as, popa, papas: copy, copis: 
xpuced, diddy (23); irsos, -a, -ov, friendly, aOpdos, -a, -ov, dense; 
adds, -1, -6v, beautiful; dies divus, divine, F. dia, Ep. and Lyr. 
dia a. 14. 


b. The first example is accented in 23, as in the older Attic : ua@pos. 
In the later Attic and Common Greek, it became an oxytone : pwpos. 


233. RuLte Ul. If the theme belongs to the 
third declension, the feminine affixes of the first are 
annexed to the slem modified by the consonant I; as 


follows : 

a. After e or a liquid, I became «, which was contracted, 
either directly or through transposition, with the preceding 
vowel (142 a) : as, 9de- (jSeI-) ndeia, pedav- (peAavI-) péedAawwa (23); 
mep- (mepl-) miecpa fat. 

b. The I united with a preceding r to form o (143b): as, 
TAvT- (ravrI- Tavo-) maca, xaptevt- (xaptevti- yaptevo-) xapiecoa 
(23, 155, 156); Avovr- (Avove-) Advovaa, Oevr- (Oeva-) Ocioa, Suvt- 
(Suvc-) Sica (26). 

c. In perfect participles, this o united, as e, with a preceding 
o, to form vi: as, eidSor- (eidorI- eidSoa- eidoe-, 142) eidvia (26). 

a. The o remained, if the o had already been contracted with another 
vowel : as, éoraor- éorwr- éorGca (26). Here the neuter has not only the — 
contracted éor(ads)ds, but also the syncopated éords. 

B. Before the ending -& of Dec. 1, the nice Greek ear preferred a diph- 
thong to o preceded by a short vowel (194. 1, bh). But this diphthong — 
must not be ev, as the concurrence of open sounds thus produced seems — 
also to have been displeasing. Hence the contraction, in this case, of ce 
into the closer diphthong uw. 











§ 254. OF THREE TERMINATIONS. 183 


d. Ifthe stem, after these changes, ends in c or p, the femi- 
nine is declined like pvia- but, if it ends in o or », like potca 
or tpamefa : as, ndetd, ndelas+ macad, mdons* pédawa, pedaivns (23); 
mieipd, meipas. See 1d, 14. 

e. For the fem. termination -eé&, the shorter -é& (a added to the simple 
stem) is commonly used in Ion. prose, and sometimes in Ep. and other 
poetry (sometimes s Ion.-éy, especially in Hipp.) : = BaGex, evpea Hdt. 1. 
178, Baleny Ib. 75, Badens E, 147 (but BaGe.n; B. 92), akéa B. 786, ddéa 
Theoe. 3. 20, taxeGy Theog. 715. So, very rarely, even in Attic prose, 
as some think. On the other hand, the poets, in a few instances, pr olong 
-éa of the neut. pl. to -eta for the sake of the metre (134 a): as, d&€Za Hes. 
Se. 348, adeia Soph. Tr..122 (so oxcoew tor ox:dev, Ap. Rh. 2. 404, daxpu- 
dew Id. 4.1291). © 


234. Of those words which belong to the general class of 
ADJECTIVES (173), the following have three terminations : 


1. ) All participles . > aS, Avr, Geis, AVoas, eidas (26). 


a. In participles, which partake of the verb and the adjective, a distine- 
tion must be made between the stem, affix, canyeeting vowel, and flexible 
ending of conjugation, and those of declension : thus, in Gen. Avovros, the 
stem of conjugation is Xv-, and the affix -ovros~ while the stem of declen- 
sion is Avovr-, and the affix -0S. 

2.) All comparatives and superlatives in -os : a8, copwrepos, -G, 
-ov, wiser ; copatatos, -n, -ov, wisest. 

3.) All numerals, except cardinals from 2 to 100 inclusive : 
as, Staxdarot, -at, -a, two hundred, rpiros, -n, -ov, third. 

4.) The article and adjective pronouns (28), except tis (ris). 

5.) Of adjectives commonly so called, semples in -os, -ers, and 
-vs, with some others: as, papos, codds, xapiers, dvs, was, we Aas 
(23) : €x@v, -ovaa, -ov, willing ; Tadas, -awa, -av, wretched ; TEPNY, 
-ewa, -ev, tender (23 d). 

b. For the most part, simples in -og have three terminations, and com- 
pounds, but two. Yet some compounds have three, and many simples, 
particularly derivatives in -eos, -tos, and -tpos, have but two. Derivatives 
from compound verbs, as being themselves uncompounded, especially 
those in -tKds, -Tds, and -réos, have more commonly three terminations. 
A distinct fem. is most found in oxytones, and least in proparoxytones. 
In many words, usage is variable (d, e, f). 

e. Adjectives in -ws, of the Attic Dec. 2, have but two terminations : 
as, dynpws (22), 0, f etvyews, Td evyewr, fertile. For mXéws, see 236. 

d. In words in which the fem. has commonly a distinct form, the form 
of the mase. is sometimes employed in its stead: as, Adjectives in -os 
(particularly in Att. writers, 174b), 67d0s Eur. Med. 1197, gaddos Id. 
Hipp. 435, Th. 6. 21, dvayxaiov Th. 1. 2, kduros B. 742 ; Adjectives in 
-vs and -es (chiefly in the poets), 7dvs w. 369, adéa Theoe. 20. 8, Andis 
T. 97, movity K. 27, yevedv Onrvv, female scx, Eur, Med. 1083, dvepoévrwy 
alyidwy Asch. Ch. 592 ; Comparatives, Superlatives, Participles, and Pro- 
nouns (all rarely, except in the dual, e), dar opwr Epos Th. 5. 110, duvceuBo- 
Awraros Id. 3. 101, 6Xowraros 6. 442, riWévres Asch. Ag. 560, rahaxodaes 
Soph. El. 614, O. C. 751, 


4 


184 ADJECTIVES. § 234. 


e. This use of the masc. form for the fem. is particularly frequent in 
the dual, in which, from its limited use, the distinction of gender is least 
important: as, Tw xe%pe, the two hands, vi. 1. 8 (the fem. form ra is 
especially rare, Soph. Ant. 769) ; rovrw rw huepa, these two days, Cyr. 1. 
2.11; rovrow 5) Tov xwnzéow Pl. Leg. 898 a; S00 Twe Eorov lé€a &pxovre 
kat dyovre, oly éroueGa’...  tovrw PI. Pheedr. 237d; lé0vre cal rabotca 
Soph. O. C. 1676 ; mAnyevre O. 455. 

f. On the other hand, a distinct form is sometimes given to the fem. in 
words in which it is commonly the same with the masce.: as, d@avdrn K. 
404, Isocr. 192b, atroyzara: iv. 3. 8, duaddxn Dem. 1206. 10, Onpodovy 
Theog. 11, modvéévay Pind. N. 3. 3, modvrmyrn Ar. Pax 978, for the 
common 7 d0davaros, &c. This use is especially Epic and Lyric. 


235. To some adjectives, feminine forms are supplied from 
a kindred or derived stem. ‘These forms may be either re- 
quired to complete the adjective, or they may be only special 
feminines, used (particularly in poetry and the dialects) by the 
side of forms of the common gender (174b). The feminines 
thus supplied most frequently end in -ts, G. -Sos (217 f), but 
also in -as, G. -ados, in -eva, -ecpa, &c. Thus, 


a. Masculines in -ys of Dec. 1, and in -ets of Dec. 3, have often cor- 
responding feminines in -ts, -t80s._ These words are chiefly patrials and 
gentiles, or other personal designations, and are commonly used as sub- 
stantives. Thus, 0 roXirns, -ov, belonging to a city (eot rodtrae Asch. Th. 
253), citizen, 7 moNtris, -cdos* o ixérns, 7 ixéris, suppliant; o XKveys, 
Hn UKvOus, Scythian ; 0 Meyapevs, -éws, ) Meyapis, Megarian. 

b. The compounds of éros year (in -ys, -es of Dec. 3, but sometimes in 
-ns, G. -ov of Dec. 1), have often a special fem. in -ts, -v80s : as, 0, % érre- 
TS, TO émTéres, seven years old, and 4 émréris, -os + Tov é&€rn Kal Thy E&E- 
Tw Pl. Leg. 7940; Tas tpraxovrovres crovdds Th. 1. 23, but rpraxovrouri- 
dwy crovddy Ib. 87. 

c. Some compounds in -ys, -es have a poetic (particularly Epic) fem. in 
“EL: as, pvyevys, -és, carly-born, 7 jpryéveca A. 477 ; HOvereca, Hes. Th. 
965, Oecrierreca Soph. O. T. 463, wouvoyéveca, Ap. Rh. 3. 847. 

d. Add o, 7 riwy, and % qie:pa, Td wiov, faut ; 0 mpéoBus, old, venerable, 
fem., chiefly poet., mpéoBu, mpéoBerpa, and mpecBris- 0, 7 wdKap, and 
H wdxatpa, blessed, poet. ; 0, 7) mpoppwr, and Ep. 4 mpodpacca K. 290, 
kind ; 0, ) ebrdtwp, 7 evrarepa and evrarépera, Z. 292, of noble sire; and 
some others. 


236. Irrecutar ApJectives. Among the adjectives which 
deserve special notice are the following : 


a. péyas great, and mwodts much (24). In these adjectives, the Nom. 
and Ace. sing. masc. and neut. are formed from the stems peya- and moXe-, 
according to Dec. 3. The other cases are formed from the stems peyah- 
and zodA-, according to Dee. 1 and 2. The Voc. pueyddXe oceurs once, 
Esch. Th. 822. From its signification, zodvs has no dual. In Hdt., the 
forms from zro\Xos prevail throughout, yet not to the entire exclusion of 
the other forms. The Epic forms (24g) sometimes occur in the Attic 
poets. 

b. 6 wAéws, 7 TE, TO wEwY, full. The masc. and neut. are formed 
from s. mda-, according to the Attic Dec. 2 (200) ; the fem. is formed from 
s. wie- (with Nom. pl. wA¢g in imitation of mase., according to some 


¥ 
fe " ? pr ng A 


§ 238. IRREGULAR DECLENSION. 185 


editors, Soph. El. 1405). Ion. wdéos plenus, Ep. mhetos, -7, -ov. So, 
likewise, in Att. writers, the neut. pl. w\éa Cyr. 7. 4. 6, and the pl. 
compounds éumdeo, éxrdea Cyr. 6. 2. 7, wepirdea Ib. 33 (but xmdew Ib. 
1. 6. 7). In like manner idea Pl. Phedo 95a, N. pl. from frews, -wv, 
contr. from fAaos, -ov. 

c. dmpaos (24; by some written mpzos, 109 a), mild, borrows fem. and 
plur. forms from zpais, which occurs Pind. Py. 3. 125, while the lon. 
neut. rpyv is found Hom. Mar. 10. 

d. 6, 4 @&s, 75 cGv, safe. In this adj., contract forms from s. ca- are 

Dlended with forms from s. ow- (contr. from gao-), belonging partly to 
Dee. 2, and partly to Dec. 3. Thus, 
0, 7) id 
S. N. (caos)oas Ar. oGos ill. 1. 32 oda Hel. } (caov)oay vil. 6. 

A. (caov)eav Th. cov Lys. 109. 3 cay Dem. { oGov Hdt. [32. 
) ag ii. 2. 21 cB, (odes) os Dem. cGa Hat. (caa)oa Kur. 

A. Luc. cwous, (cdas) Hs Dem. 93. 24. o@a Hel.1.1.24. 


In Hom., forms from o4os prevail, 7. 300. With the above may be 
compared the Homeric (faos) ¢us E. 87, Acc. (dv II. 445, = fwds, Swir, 
living (ili. 4. 5). 

237. a. Some adjectives vary in the mode of declension 
from the same stem: as, 


Dec. 1 and 3, xedXawtray Soph. Aj. 954, and xe\avadrecce Pind. P. 4. 
377, dark ; Dee. 2and 3, dddorwp accursed, ddacr5poow Soph. Ant. 974 ; 
ev’rpixov Eur. Here. 933, e’rpixes Ven. 4. 6, well-haired ; edwids Eur. Or. 
918, A. sing. evS7a Soph. Ant. 530 (also 7 edwzis Id. Tr. 523), beautiful ; 
povdumuxov Eur. Hel. 1567, wovdumrucas Id. Ale. 428, wnmated. See 
below, and 235 d. 

b. In compounds of yéAws laughter, and Képas horn, we find both the 
Att. Dec. 2 and Dec. 3: as, ¢iddyedws, -wv, G. -w and -wros, laughter- 
loving, Bovxepw mapCévov, ‘ heifer-horned,’ Aisch. Pr. 588. Shorter forms 
also occur, according to the common Dec. 2: as, vijxepoe horinless, Hes. 
Op. 527. 

c. Adjectives in -ts vary in declension like substantives (118). 

d. Among other examples of varied inflection, we notice the Homeric 
o évs B. 819, and ws Il. 464, good, brave, rd éb, eS, and 7b, G. éjos A. 393 
(cf. 222.c), A. éjv and Hiv, G. pl. neuter éawy 2. 528 ; 0 éolrpos A. 266, 
trusty, Pl. épinpes, épinpas, T'. 47, 378 ; 0 woAdspnvos A. 257, rich in sheep, 
Vl. woddZinves I. 154 (cf. rodvapm, 238d) ; aimds drcOpos N. 773, “IXcov 
air O. 71, “Idcos airewyH N. 773, w5dAw almq N. 625, alma péedpa O. 369, 
Iljdacov aimjesoay . 87 ; apyfAte I’. 419, dpyére A. 818, dpyfra and dp- 
yéra ; apyipeov D. 50, dpyvpoy % 621; widtw... edrelyeov A. 129, ridw 
evreixea Il. 57; Tpolny éorBdrAaxa I. 74, Tpolny épiBwror I. 329; woAditAas 
€. 171, wo\urAjuwy o. 319, wodUrAnrot X. 38. 

e. Examples of adjectives of double formation, or of synonymous adjec- 
tives with different forms, might be greatly multiplied. Cf., in Lat., 
hilaris and hilarus, cheerful, inquies and -étus, restless, opulens and -entus, 

| opulent, precox, -coquis, and -coquus, precocious. 
| 238. Among DEFECTIVE ADJECTIVES, we notice, 

a.) The following, chiefly poetic: 0,  d8axpus, 7d ddaxpu, tearless, 
Ace. déaxouy (the other cases supplied by dddxpires, -ov) ; so woAtSaxpus 
tearful ; o xpéoBus (for fem. see 235d) old, as subst. elder, ambassador 
(in the last sense G. mpéoBews Ar. Ach. 93), A. rpécBuv, V. mpéoBv: PI. 
mpécBers, mpecBies Hes. Sc. 245, elders, ambassadors, G. rpéoBewv, D. 





186 NUMERALS. § 238, 


mpéaBeor, mpecBedow Lyc. 1056, A. rpéoBers, Du. rpéoBy Ar. Fr. 495 (the 
plur. in the sense of ambassadors was in common use ; otherwise, the 
word was almost exclusively poetic, and its place supplied by 0 rpecBirns, 
old man, and o mpesBevryjs, ambassador) ; ppotSes, -y, -ov, gone, which, 
with the Nom. throughout, has the Gen. @povdou Soph. Aj. 264. 

b.) Poetic feminines and neuters, which have no corresponding mase. : 
as, 7 wotvia A. 357 (sometimes wirve v. G1) revered, Tiv wérmav, al mérviat 
(yet w5rv.e Orph. H. 10. 20) ; 7 @dAaa rich, H. 475 ; dv8podérepa man- 
destroying, Misch. Th. 314; kvdSvdverpa ennobling, A. 225; ebpuvdyua wide- 
streeted, A. 52; edpvodeins X. 52; tarwoddcea crested, P. 295; dupiddoecav O. 
309; 7) kg and Awwon, u. 79, y. 293 (akin to detos smooth) ; 7d Bpt (s. Bpr6-) 
Hes. ap. Strab. 364 (Bpidds heavy) ; 7d Oa (s. fa6-) Soph. Fr. 932 (paécos 
easy ; cf. 64, xpt, 228 a) ; ra pa and éwinpa, pleasing, y. 164, A. 572. 

c.) Poetic plwrals which have no corresponding sing. : as, of Oapées K. 
264, and tapdés A. 387 (yet rappi’s Aisch. Th. 535), -e2ar, -éa, thick, 
Srequent ; épurapparcs . . . toe II. 370 ; of whées A. 395, rods rréas B. 
129 = mw. €oves, mEovas, MOTE. 

d.) Poetic oblique cases which have no corresponding Nom. : as, Tod 
SuvrSapaptres unhappily wedded, Asch. Ag. 1319; kadAvytvatkes having 
beautiful women, Sapph. [135], ‘EAAdéa Kaddcydvacka B. 683 ; wodtapye 
Ovésty B. 106; modvdéviperciv Eur. Bac. 560; tipxépGra wérpay Ar. 
Nub. 597 ; xéput, xépna, also Pl. xépnes, xépya or xépera, A. 80, A. 400, 
&c. (as fr. xep- hand, 224f; under the hand of, subject), inferior, worse. 


CHAPTER 1% 


NUMERALS. 


239. I. Noumerau Apsectives. Of numeral adjectives, the 
principal are, (1) the CaRDINAL, answering the question, méco; 
how many ? (2) the OrpINAL, answering the question, méeros; 
which ir order ? or, one of how many ? (3) the TEMPORAL, an- 
swering the question, wogrtatos ; on what day ? or, rn how many 
days ? (4) the Muutipie (multiplex, having many folds), show- 
ing to what extent anything is complecated ; and (5) the Pro- 
PORTIONAL, showing the proporteon which one thing bears to 
another. 


a. See 52 for the most common numerals, with some of the interroga- 
tives, indefinites, diminutives, &c., which correspond to them. 


240. 1. Carprat. The first four cardinals (25), and those 
above 100 are declined; the latter as adjectives of Dec. 2 and 1. 
The rest are indeclinable. Cf. the Lat. cardinals. 

a. Efs, from its signification, is used only in the sing. ; édw, only in 
the dual and pl. ; and the other cardinals only in the pl., except with col- 
lective nouns in such expressions as domls pupia kal rerpexoota, 10,400 in- 
Jantry, 1. 7. 10, trmov éxrakirxiriny, 8,000 horse, Hdt. 7. 85. 








ome ADJECTIVES. ADVERES. 187 


b. Efs has two stems, év- and pi-. Its compounds ovdels and pndels 
(written, with more strength, ovdé efs, unde cfs) have a plur. of the mase. 
or comm. gender. 

e. The common form of the second cardinal is Sto, shortened from the 
regular dJ¥w. The Dat. pl. dvoi, found in late writers and Hipp., also 
oceurs (?) Th. 8. 101. Both dvo (d¥w) and dudw, both (which is placed in 
25, as partaking of the nature of a nwmeral, with that of an emphatic 
pronoun), are sometimes indecl. (in Hom. never otherwise) : as, d¥o m)é- 
Oowy 1. 2. 23, vavsi dvo Th. 5. 4 (so rarely in Att. poets or with a dual 
noun, and oftener in the Gen. than in the Dat.) ; d¥0 poupdws K. 253, ddw 
kay5vecou N. 407, xepolv dw dudw Hom. Cer. 15. 

d. In the derivatives from évvéa, évva-, for éva-, is a less classic form. 

e. In rescapecxaidexa, and the later dexaréooapes, Sexarpets, the pets 
and récoapes are declined: dexarpe’s, dexarpia, dexarpidv* rots Teccapotkal- 
dexa. Yet we sometimes find recoaperxaidexa, and later even recocapaxal- 
dexa used as indeclinable ; as in Hdt. 1. 86, Mem. 2. 7.2. The com- 
pounds from 13 to 19, both cardinal and ordinal, are often written sep- 
arately : as, Tpeis xa! dékai. 5. 5, rpla cai déka Hdt. 1. 119, résoapes kai 
déxa > Tpirov kal déxarov Th. 5. 56, réraprov cai déxarov, Ib. 81, wévre 4 
éxxaidexa Cyr. 1. 4. 16, méurryn 7) &xry kal Cexity Hel. 4. 6.6; also & 
kal elkoorév Th. 8. 109. 

f. The cardinals become collective or distributive by composition with 
aty~ as, cbvdvo bini, two together, or two at a time, vi. 3. 2, clvrpes terni, 
t. 429, cuvdHdexa duodéni, Eur. Tro. 1076. The distributive sense is also 
expressed by means of the prepositions avd, card, and, in some connec- 
tions, efs and émi~ as, €: \dxous ava éExardv dvdpas, 6 companies, cach 100 
men, iii. 4. 21 ; xara TeTpaxicxedlous, 4,000 at a time, ili. 5. 8; els Exardy, 
100 deep, Cyr. 6. 3. 23 ; émi rerrdpwvr, 4 decp, i. 2. 15. 

The numeral pvpcor, 10,000, is distinguished from jupiot, pl. of pu- 
plos vast, countless, with which it was originally one, by the gccent. 


2. The Orpryat Noumpers are all derived from the cardinal, ex- 
cept mperos, and are all of Dec. 2 and 1. They all end iu -ros (Eng. 
-th), except devrepos, €;35op08, and dydoos + and those from 20, up- 
wards, all end in -oards (Lat. -esimus). Cf the formation of ordinals 
in Lat. and Eng. 


3. The Tremporar Numsers are formed from the ordinals by 
changing the final -os into -atos, -@, -ov: as, Tpiros rptratos, Vv. 3. 2, 
méumtos meumtaios, Vi. 4.9. From apéros, no temporal number is 
formed. Its place is supplied by avOnuepos, -o 


4. The Moutriete Numsers en‘ in -rAdos, BeREeEeeA -wAovs (Lat. 
-plex), and are declined like dumAdos, dimAovs (23). 


5. The Proportionan Numpers have donble forms, in -Adaovos, 
-G, -ov (Lat. -plus), and, more rarely, -mAacioy, -ov. G. -ovos. Thus 
the ratio of 2 to 1 is expressed by durAdovos duplus, or diuaAaciov 
(but dis roraitn Th. 6. 37); and that of 10 to 1, by dexamwAdows or 
SexarAagiov. ‘ihe ratio of 1 to 1, or of equality, is expressed by teos 
(Ep. vos), -n, - 

241. II. Noumerat Apverss. a. The numeral adverbs which 
reply to the interrogative moodxis ; how many times ? all end in -dkes 
(Lat. -ies), except the three first: as, dexdxis decies, ten times, évvea- 
katetkootkavemTaxoolomAactakis 729 times, Pl. Rep. 578 e. 


188 NUMERALS. — SUBSTANTIVES. § 241. 


b. These adverbs are employed in the formation of the higher cardinal 
and ordinal numbers: as, ducxidvoe bis mille, 2,000, mevraxtcxedooréds 
5,000¢h ; also writteneseparately, as rerpdxis yaa xiduoe Th. 6. 31. 

c. Other numeral adverbs relate to division, order, place, manner, 
&c.: as, diya or duyH, poct. dux Ga, in two divisions, reixa, -xn, OF -xOa, 
in 3 divisions ; Sedtepov secondly, tpiroy thirdly ; tptxyov in 3 places, 
mevraxod in 5 places ; mevraxyas in 5 ways, E€axa@s in 6 ways ; dixdbev 
Jrom 2 sides, rpixdev from 3 sides, 

UI. Numerat Supsrantives. These, for the most part, end in 
-ds, -ados, and are employed both as abstract and as collective nouns. 
Thus, 7 pupeds may signify, either the number 10,000, considered ab- 
stractly, or a collection of 10,000, These numerals often take the 
place of the cardinals, particularly in the expression of the higher 
numbers: as, déka pupiddes, ten myriads —= 100,000, i. 7. 10; éxarov 
pupiddes, a million. 


242. a. When numerals are combined, the less commonly pre- 
cedes with cai: but often the greater with or without kat: as, 


mévre Kal elxoow, five and twenty, 1. 4. 2; rpidxovra cal mévte, thirty and 
jive, Ib. ; terrapdkxovta mwévre, forty-five, v. 5. 53; crabuct Tpets Kal éve- 
VIKOVTA, Tapacdyyat WEVTE Kal TPLAKO. TA Kal WEVTAKGOLOL, TTAOLCL TEVTHKOVTA 
kal éfaxioxiAcoe Kal pvptot, li. 2. 6 ; oraOuol dtaxSovot dexarévTe, TWapacay- 
yau xidvon Exatov TevTHKovTa TWEVTE, TTdOLa TpLoMUpLA TeTpaKLoxXidia EEaKdoLa 
mevTjKovra, Vil. 8. 26. See v. 5. 4, and § 240e. 

b. From the division of the Greek month into decades, the days were 
often designated as follows ; unvis BondpopGvos exry éml déxa, wpon the 
[6th after 10] 16th of the month Boédromion, Dem. 261. 12; avOerrnprdvos 
éxtyn éml dexdry, Id. 279.17 ; Bondpourdvos Exrn mer elxdda, ‘the 26th,’ Id. 
265. 5. This mode of combining numbers by a preposition was extended 
by the poets and later writers: as, rplros ye yévvay mpds déx dhdaow Yo- 
vats, Asch. Pr. 773. 

ce. Instead of adding eight or nine, subtraction is often employed : as, 
vijes . . . pds déovoa: tecoapdxovra, forty ships wanting one [40 — 1 = 39], 
Th. 8. 7; vavol dvotv deovoats revrjxovra [50 — 2 = 48] Ib. 25; évods d€éov 
elxostov éros Th. 8. 6 (cf. dydoov Kal déxarov éros 7. 18) ; later, éEjKovra évds 
déovros. . . rn, sixty years, one wanting, Plut. Pomp. 79. In like man- 
ner, Tplaxociwy amodéovra uvpia Th. 2. 13. 

d. In fractions, the denominator may be expressed ; or, if it is only 
greater by one than the numerator, it may be understood : as, Tay wévTe 
Tas Sto pwotpas, 2, Th. 1. 10, r&v dv0 pepar, of 2, |b. 104, Ta wévre mépn, 2. 

e. The combinations of fractions with whoie numbers are variously ex- 
pressed : thus, (a) rpia judapecxd, three half-darics, i. e. 14 daries, i. 3. 
21: (8) Particularly in Herodotus, rpirov qyurtddavrov, the third talent a 
half one, i. e. 24 talents (so Germ. dritthalb), Hat. 1. 50 ; €B8douov querd- 
havrov + réraprov Hurrddavrov = Tddavra déxa, 64 + 34 = 10, Ib. (ef. Lat. 
sestertius, fr. semis-tertius) : (vy) Less classic, dv0 kal nuicecay uray, dw Kal 
Huiov dpaxuai, Poll. 9. 56, 62: (6) émirpurov, a third in addition, i. e. 14, 
eee 3.93; émlmeuwmror, 14, Ib.: (6) jurddcor, half as much again, i. e. 
Pei) 3. Al, 





| ee 


‘vy et 


§ 245. SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 189 


IAP TE RV. 


PRONOUNS. e 


I. SUBSTANTIVE (27). 


243. 1. PersonaL, eyo, ov, of. These pronouns have 
special laws of declension. 


a. The analysis of these pronouns (27 e) shows that the numbers vary in 
the stem ; that the connective is € in the sing. and pl., and @ in the dual ; 
that the Acc. sing. has no flexive (the primitive Direct Case remaining as 
Ace., while the Nom., in the 1st and 2d Persons, has the peculiar forms 
éy# and ov, and in the 3d, from its reflexive use, early disappeared ; com- 
pare the Latin) ; that the Dat. pl. has the flexive of the old Indirect Case 
(186 c), except in the form odior, where the connective ¢, in imitation of 
other forms of this case, becomes t; and that, in the contraction of the 
connectives and fiexives, € passes into its kindred o in the Dat. sing. 
(114b). The dual of the 3d Pers. was distinguished from that of the 2d, 
by the accent (pointing, as it were, to a more distant object), and by 
remaining uncontracted. 

b. The pronoun of is used both as a simple personal pronoun, and as a 
reflexive ; but in the common language not greatly in either sense. See 
Syntax. To complete its inflection, the Ep. o@wé and cpwiv, and the Ion. 
odéa are added in 27 a. 


244. 2. REFLEXIVE, éyavtov. ceavtov, éavtod. These pro- 
nouns, from their nature, want the Nom., and the two first 
also the neuter. They are formed by joining the personal pro- 
nouns with adtds. 


a. In the plur. of the 1st and 2d Persons, and often of the 3d, the two 
elements remain distinct : nudv airdy. Otherwise, the old Direct Case 
of the personal pronoun unites with the forms of a’rés; while, in the Ist 
Pers., and often in the other two, contraction takes place : (éwe-avrod) 
éuavTov, c€-auvToU cauTod, €-avTov avrod. 


3. Recrprocat. This pronoun is formed by doubling dos, 
other: add\nd@v, for ddAd\Awv. From its nature, it wants the 
Nom. and the sing., and is not common in the dual. 


245. 4. INDEFINITE, 6 dciva. This pronoun may be termed, 
with almost equal propriety, definite and indefinite. 


a. It is used to designate a particular person or thing, which the speaker 
either cannot, or does not care to name ; in the language of Matthia, it 
‘*‘indelinitely expresses a definite person or thing”: Tov detva yeyvworecs ; 
Da you know Mr. So and So? Ar. Th. 620. ‘O detva rod deivos rdv Setva 
elsayyé\Xet, A. B., the son of C. D., impeaches E. F., Dem. 167. 24. In 
the sing. this pronoun is of the three genders ; in the plur. it is mase. 
only, and wants the Dat. It is sometimes indeclinable : as, rod Seva Ar. 

u. 622, 


190 SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. § 245. 


b. The article is an essential part of this pronoun ; and it were better 
written as a single word, é8etva. It appears to be simply an extension of 
the demonstrative dde, by adding -wv- or -twa, which gives to it an in- 
definite force (cf. 253 b), making it a demonstrative indefinite. When -tw- 
was appended, it received a double declension ; when -tva, it had only 
the declension of the article. It belongs properly to the colloquial Attic, 
and first appears in Apistophanes. 


246. History. a. The distinction of person, like those of case and 
number (186 b, c), appears to have been at first only twofold, merely sep- 
arating the person speaking from all other persons, whether spoken to or 
spoken of. We find traces of this early use not only in the roots common 
to the 2d and 3d Persons, but also in the dual forms of the verb common to 
these persons. 


b. The most natural way of designating one’s self by gesture is to bring 
home the hand ; of designating another, to stretch it out towards him. The 
voice here follows the analogy of the hand. To denote ourselves, we 
naturally keep the voice at home as much as is consistent with enunciation ; 
while we denote another by a forcible emission of it, a pointing, as it were, 
of the voice towards the person. The former of these is accomplished by 
closing the lips and murmuring within, that is, by uttering m, which 
hence became the great root of the 1st personal pronouns: pé, Lat. and 
languages derived from it, Saxon, &e., me, Germ. mich, Sans. md, Zend 
mdm ; verb-endings -pt, -pet, Lat. -m, -nvus, -inwr, Sans. -mi, -mas, &e. 
The latter is accomplished by sending the voice out forcibly through a 
narrow aperture. This, according to the place of the aperture, and the 
mode of emission, may produce either a sibilant, a lingual, or a strong 
breathing. Hence we tind al these as roots of the 2d and 3d personal 
pronouns: oé, é, Fé: Art. 6, 7d verb-endings, -s, -t, -Té, -Tov, -7at, -TaL, 
-7@e* Lat. te, sc, vos, hic, -s, -t, -tis, -tur; Sans. tvd, sa, tat, -si, -ti, -tha, 
-sé, -té@; Eng. thou, he, she, the, -cth, -s, &c. In the progress of language, 
these two persons were separated, and their forms becaine, for the most 
part, distinct, although founded, in general, upon common roots. 


c. The p- of the 1st Pers. passed in the old plur. (which afterwards be- 
came the dual, 186 g) into the kindred v- (cf. Lat. nos) ; and in the sing., 
when pronounced with emphasis, assumed an initial & (cf. Aol. dogs, 
dope), which passed by precession into e«. In the new plur., the idea of 
plurality was conveyed by doubling the p (duu-, in the Ep. and Aol. 
dupes, due, Xe.) ; or more commonly by doubling the & to ym (115 a), 
pronounced with the rough breathing (fp-, in nue?s, &e.), or, in the Dor., 
to & (‘Gp-, in ‘aués, &c.), 

d. From this the new plur. of the 2d Pers. appears to have been formed, 
by changing, for propriety of expression, a, the deepest of the vowels, into 
v, the most protrusive (jpp-, in the Ep. and Aol. tues, &e. ; and “dp-, in 
wyuets, &c.). With the exception of this imitative plural, the plur. and 
dual of the 2d and 3d Persons have the same root, in which plurality is 
expressed by joining two of the signs of these persons (7@- = © + F, the 
latter remaining in the Lat. vos). In the separation of the two persons, 
the sign o- became appropriated to the pronoun of the 2d Pers. (but in 
the Dor., t-, as in the Lat., and also in the verb-endings -te¢, -Tov, -tis) ; 
and the rough breathing to that of the 3d Pers. (in an early state of the 
language, this was F-, 247 a; in Lat. it became s-; while in the article 
we find both the rough breathing and t-, and in verb-endings of the 3d 
Pers. both o, and more frequently +). 


§ 247. HISTORY. DIALECTIC FORMS. 191 


e. In the Nom. sing., the subjective force appears to have been ex- 
pressed by peculiar modes of strengthening ; in the Ist Pers. by a double 
prefix to the p, thus, é-y-o-» (the y being “inserted simply to prevent hia- 
tus), or, as p cannot end a word, éyov, w hich would pass, by the familiar 
change of v to its corresponding vowel and contraction (142), into (éyoa) 
eyo (cf. Sans. aham, Zend azem, Dor. and Ep. éywy, Boeot. iov, id, Lat. ego, 
Ital. io, Germ. ich, Engl. J, and the verb-ending of the 1st Pers. -@, Lat. 
-0) 5 in the 2d Pers. by aflixing F, which with the preceding € passed into J 
in the common Greek (cf. 217 b), but in the Bot. into ov (cf. Lat. ¢i, 
92 b) ; in the 3d Pers. perhaps by affixing A, before which precession took 
place (217 f), so that the form became FA, ‘and from this, tA or tA, and, 
by dropping the A, ¢ or ¢ (this obsolete form is cited by Apollonius ; ef. 
Lat. is, ea, id). With this Nom. there appears to have been associated 
an Ace. & or ww, of which wiv and viv are strengthened forms. For the 
other substantive pronouns, see 244, 245. 


247. Diavecrs. The dialectic forms of the PERsonaL PRo- 
NOUNS arise chiefly, 


a.) From variation of stem: as, Dor. and Mol. t- for o- (169 b; some- 
times Ep., or even Jon.), rv tu, Sap. 1. 13, 7ré te, Theoc. 1. 5, rot A. 28, 
Hat. 1. 9; Aol. and Ep. F- for the rough breathing, ré Alc. 56 [84], Fo? 
Sap. 2. 1 (so originally in Hom., 98 e, 162 a) ; Dor. ‘“Gp-, dpp-, Adol. and 
Ep. app-, dyp- (130 a, 167 c), for qp-, dp-, auav, auiy Theoc. 2. 158, 5. 
106, aué Ar. Lys. 95; Dor. $-, -, Mol. avg-, for op-, piv Call. Di. 125, 
yiv Sophr. 83, yé Theoc. 4. 3, dodge Sap. 98 [40], dope Ale. 92 [80], 
(d, e 
b.) From want of contraction, or from peculiar contraction (131 b) : éuéo 
K. 124, oéo Hat. 1. 8, réo Alem. 16, Zo B. 239; muées Hat. 2. 6, dudes 
Id. 6.11; ynuéoy I. 101, apéwy Theoc. 8. 25, dupéwy Ale. 77, tuéwy Hdt. 
3. 50, vupéwv Alc. 77, opewv Hat. 1. 31; nuéas Ib. 30, btuéas B. 75, opeas 
Hat. 1. ks vee Cor. 16, opwi A. 8 ; (with precession, in imitation of the 
Gen.) vai A. 418, opi r 336 ; pir X, 88, opdw A. 257, cpwiy A. 338: 
éued A. 88, wed Hat. 7. 209, ee0dd. 1. 9, eb T. 464, red - éud, 6 (ef. 20 b), 
rot Cor. 2 (246 e). 
e.) From lengthening or repeating the connective (184 a, 1385): éuefo A. 
(174, ceto T’. 137, cio A. 400 3 nueiwy EB. 258, bueiwy A. 348, cheiwy A. 535, 
opeias v. 213: é€ T. 171, é0o¢ N. 495, éeto (v. 1. éof0) Ap. Rh. 1. 1032, 
teeio (Vv. |. reoto) 8. 37, Teod Sophr. 76. 
: d.) From want of a connective: aués Alem. 58, duues ®. 452, dues Ar. 
: Ach. 760, tupes A. 274; duuw N. 379, tue Z. 77, vuw K. 551, opty A. 
| 73,0¢ T. 300. 

e.) From the retention of primitive forms having no flexive: du’, bué, 
tuwe, Ar. Lys. 95, 87, 1076, duwe A. 59, Yuwe V. 412, ome A. 111. 

f.) From the use of different endings sas, Gen. Ep. -Oev (192), éueder, 
cébev, EOev, A. 525, 180, 114, pé0ev Sophr. 46; Gen. Dor. and Beeot. -os 
(186 e), éuéos and cont. diate) tevs, Epich., _réos Sophr. 75, €uous, Teobs, 
éovs (c), Cor. ; Dat. sing. Dor. and Beeot. -tv, éuév Theoc. 2. 144, retv 6. 
619, rv Pind. O. 5. 16, ét Cor., w or & Hes. Fr. 66; Ace. sing. -v, uly 
A. 29, Hdt. 1. 9, viv Pind. O. 1. 40 (246 e), so Dor. riv Theoe. 11. 39 at 
pl. -ov(v, duperw Ale. 91 [78]. 

g.) From the retraction of the accent, or shortening the last syllable, or 
both ; and also from an extension of enclitic use: ijuly (v. 1. nutv) A. 147, 
iw (v. 1. buiv) a. 373, uw (v. 1. qutv) d. 344, Fuas (v. 1. qud's) mr. 372, 
tuéev (v. 1. tuéwv) O. 494 ; chewy Z. 311, adeus B. 96, opas EB. 567. Cf. i. 

h.) Add the strengthened Nom. forms éyav A. 76 (in Hom. only before 





192 ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. § 247. 


a vowel), tUvn E. 485 (so Dor. éyavy, as if the particle v4, truly, were 
added to the pronoun ; cf. éywye, ave) ; the Boeot. Nom. iwv, tw (246 e), 
strengthened iwvya (130 b) Cor. 12, idvya Ar. Ach. 898 ; the Dor. Nom. 
Tv used also as Acc. (cf. 186 ce) Theoc. 1. 56; and the Ion. Acc. neut. pl. 
ogpea Hat. 1. 46. 

i. Some of these forms are also found in the Attic poets: as, éydv 
“isch. Pers. 931; éwefev Kur. Or. 986, céGev Id. Ale. 51, @0ev Asch. Sup. 
66 ; viv (often, and without distinction of number or gender) Id. Pr. 55, 
Soph. El. 436, wiv (rarely) Aisch. Th. 453, Soph. Tr. 388, o@2 (often ; 
also in sing.) Id. Ant. 44; tume Ib. 846, duty Aisch. Eum. 347 ; new or 
juw Soph. El. 17, 41, daw or buw Id. Ant. 308, juas Id. Aj. 21, Suas Ib. 
1274 (v. l. nuds, buds), cpas Ib. 839. This retraction of the accent be- 
longs especially to Sophocles. 


248. Reriexive Pronouns. In these the New Ionic compounds 
the Genitive of the personal pronouns with the forms of a’rés, contracting 
oav into wv (13le): éue(o-av)wurod, éuewuris, guewuTr@. In Hom., the 
elements are always distinct : as, €w airév 4. 271, col adr@T. 51, é abrip 
=. 162. The Dor. doubles aivés to make the forms aitavrov, &c., which 
occur chiefly in Pythagorean fragments. Apollonius cites the sportive 
Nom. éuaurés from the Metceci of the comedian Plato. 


II. ADJECTIVE (28). 


249. All the pronouns which are declined in 28, may be 
traced back to a common foundation in an old DEFINITIVE, 
which had two roots, the rough breathing and r- (cf. 246 b, d), 
and which performed the offices both of an artecle and of a 
demonstrative, personal, and relative pronoun, 

a. To this definitive the Greeks gave the name dp@pov, artus, jotnt, 
from its giving connection to discourse, by marking the person or thing 
spoken of as one which had been spoken of before, or which was about to 
be spoken of further, or which was familiar to the mind. The Greek 


name dp@pov became, in Latin, ARTICULUS, small joint, from which has 
come the English name, «article. 


b. This definitive, when used as a demonstrative, or simply as the 


definite article, naturally precedes the name of the person or thing spoken 
of ; but when used as a relative, usually follows it : as, obrés éorw Oo avinp 
év cides, this is THE man WHOM you saw; 1d pidov 8 avbet, THE rose 
WHICH blooms. Hence, in the former use, it was termed the prepositive, 
and in the latter, the postpositive artiele. When prepositive, it was so 
closely connected with the following word that its aspirated forms became 
proclitic. Compare the different uses of the Germ. der, the Anglo-Saxon 
sé, the Eng. that, &e. 

c. In the progress of the language, the forms of this old DEFINITIVE 


became specially appropriated, though with many exceptions in the dia- - 


lects and poets, and some even in Attic prose (see Syntax) ; and other 
pronouns arose from it by derivation and composition. The forms 
Tés and 7H of the Nom. sing. became obsolete. Special care is required 
in distinguishing the forms of 6, és, of, ris, and ris. Forms which have 
the same letters may be often distinguished by the accentuation (see 
Prosody) : as, of, of, of Special care is also required in distinguishing 
the forms of obros, those of avrés, the combined forms of 6 adrés, the same, 
and the contracted forms of éavrod, 


* 








oS S. —— 











§ 253. DEFINITE. ) 193 
A. DeFInitr. 


250. 1. ArrTICcLE, 6, 4.76. The preposztive article, or, as it 
is commonly termed simply, the article, unites the proclitic 
aspirated forms of the old definitive, 6, 7}. of, ai, with the r- 
forms of the neuter, the oblique cases, and the dual. 

2. RELATIVE, os, 7, 06. The postpositeve article, or, as it is 
“now commonly termed, the relative pronoun, has the orthotone 
aspirated forms of the old definitive. See 786, 788 g. 


251. 3. ITERATIVE, atrés, -7, -6. This pronoun appears to 
be compounded of the particle at, again, back, and the old 
definitive rés (249 c). It is hence a PRONOUN OF RETURN (or, 
as it may be termed, an ¢terative pronoun), marking the return 
of the mind to the same person or thing. 

a. The article and avrés are often united by crasis (125): as, abrés, the 
same, Tadrdov (199 a) or ravré (lon. rwird Hdt. 1. 53, $131 e), radrod, rav- 
Td, for 6 a’rés, 70 avré, TOO avdrov, Ta a’ra. 


252. 4. Demonstrative. The primary demonstratives 
are obros, this, compounded of the article and ards: 6é¢, thes, 
compounded of the article (declined as usual) and de, an in- 
separable particle marking direction towards ; and éxeivos, that, 
derived from éxei, there (28 1). 

a. The definitives of quality, quantity, and age, rotos talis, such, 
tocos tantus, so much, rnXikos so ol, and rivyas tantulus, so small, are 
strengthened, in the same manner as the article, by composition with 
autos and de thus, roovros and toidade, just such, rorottos and to- 
adobe, just so much, tnAtkovtos and tyAikdade, Tuvvodtos. ‘These com- 
pound pronouns are commonly employed, instead of the simple 
(which are chiefly poetic), even when there is no special emphasis. 

b. In these compounds with adrds, if the affix of the first element 
has an O vowel, it unites with ad- to form ov; but otherwise, wt is ab- 
sorbed: as, (6 adris) otros, (y a’tn) avtn, (Tod adrov) TovTov, (THs 
auTns) TavTns, (oi aitoi) otToL, (ai av’tai) avtat, (rev a’T@y) TOUT@Y: 
(réa0s aités) ToToUTOS, (Tdan adTH) TOGTaUTN. 

ce. To demonstratives, for the sake of stronger expression, an ¢ is 
affixed, which is always long and acute, and before which a short 
vowel is dropped, and a long vowel or diphthong regarded as short: 
aS, oUTOGL, avTHt, TouTi, hicce, Fr. celui-ci, this here (28); éxecvoat illic, 
Fr. celui-la, that there ; 681, rocovtoat. 

d. This t paragogic is Attic, and belongs especially to the style of con- 
versation and popular discourse. It was also affixed to adverbs : as, ov- 
Twol, wl, vuvi, éevravOl, évrevfevi. So, in comic language, even with an 
inserted particle, vuymevi Ar. Av. 448, évyeravOi Id. Th. 646, évwevrevderi 
Ath. 269f. See 163a. 


5. PossessivE. The possessive pronouns are derived in 
Greek, as in other languages, from the personal; and are 


REY. GR. 9 M 


194 ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. § 253, 


arranged in 28 according to the person and number of the pro: 
nouns from which they are formed. 
e. ‘Hyérepos has a distinct Voc. 0. 31: @ wdrep huérepe Kpovidy. 


B. INDEFINITE. 


253. 1. The SIMPLE INDEFINITE is ris, which has two stems : 
rw-, declined throughout after Dec. 3; and re-, declined in the 
Gen. and Dat. only, after Dec. 2 (except that the Gen. sing. 
imitates the personal pronouns) with contraction: thus, 


ris, Ti (the v omitted as in the theme, 208 d), rivés, &c. : G. ré0 rou Cyr. 
8. 5. 7, rod; Soph. O. T. 1435, D. réw rw A. 299, i. 9. 7, 7¢ ; Soph. El. 
679 ; and, in the compound, érovi. 9. 21, Asch. Pr. 170, érq@ ii. 6. 23, 
Pl. G. drewy bruv vii. 6. 24, D. dréors dros Soph. Tr. 1119, drove Ar. Eq. 
758 (so, rarely, roto. ; Soph. Tr. 984). See c, and 254 b. 


2. The INTERROGATIVES in Greek are simply the indefinites 
with a change of accent. See Syntax, 563 s. 


a. Thus, the forms of the indefinite rls (except the peculiar drra, which 
is rarely used except in connection with an adjective, and which is never 
used interrogatively) are enclitic ; while those of the interrogative vis are 
orthotone, and never take the grave accent. In lexicons and grammars, 
for the sake of distinction, the forms tis and 7i of the indefinite are writ- 
ten with the grave accent, or without an accent. See 784 a, 787 b. 

b. The stems te- and tivy- may be traced back to the great pronominal 
root t-, here rendered indefinite by the additions made. The definite and 
positive would naturally be denoted by the shorter form, to express the 
decision of the mind ; but the indefinite and uncertain by a prolonged 
form, to express the doubt and hesitation with which the mind dwells 
upon it. Cf. 245, 272 d. 

ce. The short t of zis, and the omission of v in 7i, suggest an inter- 
mediate root tt-, formed from te- by precession, and afterwards increased 
by v (cf. 218). To this intermediate root may be referred, according to 
Dee. 2, the Mol. riw ; Sapph. 55 [84], rlowew Id. 109 [113]; and the Dor. 
neut. pl. (ria) od (cf. 143 b) Ar. Ach. 757. 


254. 3. The composition of és with ris forms the RELATIVE 
INDEFINITE dates, whoever, of which both parts are declined in 
those forms which have the root rw, but the latter only in 
those which have the root re-; thus, odtivos, but éreo érov. 


a. Of the double forms of the Gen. and Dat., the longer prevail in Attic 
prose, and the shorter in Attic poetry. 

b. The form éooa, Att. drra (169 a) appears to be compounded of & and 
the Dor. cd (253). In certain connections, it passed into a simple in- 
definite, and then, by a softer pronunciation, became dooa, drta* ota 
drra Cyr. 3. 3.8; dooa A. 554, drra Pl. Gorg. 497 a. Cf. 255. 

c. In é7ca space is used to distinguish it from the conjunction 671. 
See 96d. Some editors thus separate other forms of this compound. 


255. Diatectic Forms. a. Article (28 i, j). With of and al of 
the Nom. pl., the old forms rof and rai are also used, especially for the 
sake of metre, euphony, or emphasis, in the Dor. and Ion. (chiefly the 


ee i a 


§ 257. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 195 


Ep.) ; and, rarely, even in Att. poetry. Soin the compound ofros, N. pl. 
Touro, Ta0rac, Sophr. 54, 88. 

b. Iterative. The New Ion. often inserts ¢ in a’rés and its compounds, 
before a long vowel in the affix (135 a, 281). This belongs especially to 
Hippocrates and his imitator Aretzus ; in Hdt., it is chiefly confined to 
the forms in -@ and -@v of adds and obros: as, a’réw, atréwv and avray, 
Hdt. 1. 133, adréwy rovréwy Ib, 2. 3. 

ce. Demonstrative (281, m). The shorter xetvos is also used by the Att. 
poets for the sake of the metre ; and, according to some, even occurs in 
Att. prose, as Hel. 2. 3. 48. The Dor. r7jvos, from the root t-, is thought 
by some less distant in its reference. 

d. Possessive. Some of the forms in 28 n also occur in Att. poetry: as, 
ds, Teds (in Tragic Chorus), duds or duds (sometimes used for éuds, as in 
Eng. our for my). 

e. Indefinite. For dialectic forms, see 28 0, 253c. Hom. and Hdt. 
have also regular forms from doris. Some references are added: é8res 
(= doris, but the first part undeclined) T. 279 (Scres I’. 167), 8 rre (171) 
@. 408, reo Hdt. 1. 58, rev (131 b) B. 388, réo; B. 225, red; Hdt. 5. 106, 
érreo a. 124, drev Hdt. 1. 119, Srrev p. 121, rew II. 227, réw; Hat. 1. 
117, drew Ib. 95, drwa 0. 204 (SvTwa B. 188), pl. drwa (v. 1. riva) X. 450 
(drwa A. 289), réwy Hdt. 5. 57, Téwy ; Q. 387, drewy x. 39, réoroe Hat. 9. 
97, réowwt; Id. 1. 37, éréourw O. 491, bréyow Hdt. 2. 66 v.1, dooa 7. 218, 
drwas O. 492 (oborwas A. 240), dooa Hdt. 1. 138. ° 


Cit AXP Te Ree Ver. 
COMPARISON. 


256. ADJECTIVES and ApvERBS have, in Greek, 
three degrees of comparison, the PosiTivE, Com- 
PARATIVE, and SUPERLATIVE. 


_ a, Comparative and superlative forms may be analyzed into the BASE, 
which is commonly the stem of the positive ; the CONNECTIVE, which 
varies according to euphony, metre, and other influences; and the 
DEGREE-SIGN, to which, in the adjective, are also attached the AFFIXES 
OF DECLENSION. See 29. 


I. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 


A. By -repos, -tatos. 


257. In adjectives, the comparative is usually 
formed in -tepos, -a, -ov, and the superlative in 
-ratos, -n, -ov. In receiving these affixes, the end- 
ings of the theme are changed as follows : 

1.) -os, preceded by a long syllable, becomes 
-o-; by a short syllable, -o-: as, 





196 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. | § 257. 


Koddos light, Koup5Tepos, -, -ov, KoupsTaros, -y, -OV. 
copds wise, copwrepos wiser, copsraros wisest. 

a. A syllable before a mute and liquid is here regarded as long: as, 
opodpds vehement, cpodpsrepos, -dTaros. 

b. The change to -- takes place to avoid the succession of too many 
short syllables. Epic verse admits only two short syllables in succes: 
sion. Some exceptions to the rule occur in the poets for the sake of the 
metre : as, kaxofewwrepos v. 376, Adpwraros B. 350, ditipmrepoy P. 446 ; 
dvororuwrepa Eur. Ph. 1348, evrexvwrare Id. Hec. 620. Some except 
kevos empty, and orevds narrow (as having also the forms xewés and oret- 
vis), even in prose. 

ce. Adjectives contracted in the theme are commonly contracted in the 
Comp. and Sup. : as, roppupeos roppupots, purple, moppup(ed)drepos, wop- 
pup(ew)araros * aéidxp(aos)ews worthy, -xpedrepos, -xpewraros. 


d. In a few words, -os is dropped ; and, in a few, it becomes 
-al-, -€o-, OF -ta- : as, commonly, 


Tahads ancient, mahalrepos, -alraros* so yepards old, cxoXatos at leis- 
wre, wepatos opposite ; tdos dear, plidrepos, pidratos~ (-os -at-) ptdos 
Sriendly, pidairepos, -altaros+ iovyes quiet, jovyalrepos, -airaros: so 
eVdwos serene, idvos private, toos equal, wéoos medius, MIDDLE, épOpwos at 
dawn, 80s late, wyolos near, mpdios carly : (-os -co-) é5pwpévos strong, 
éppwpuevéorepos, -Estatos * so dkparos unmixed, dopevos glad, értmesdos level, 
and contracts in -oos, as &mXd(dbos)ots simple, amd(oéc)overepos, -ovcTaros * 
(-os -ts-) Addos talkative, A\aXtorepos, -lcraros * so éWopdyos dainty. 

e. Mécos, and véos novus, NEw, have old superlatives of limited and 
chiefly poetic use in -atos: uécaros midmost, Ar. Vesp. 1502, Ep. uéo- 
caros O. 223, véaros novissimus, last, A. 712, Soph. Ant. 627, Ep. veiaros, 
B. 824. Cf. éryaros, (rpdaros) rp@ros, traros (262d) ; and Poet. utyaros 
inmost, miuaros last. 


258. 2.) -es, and -ns of Dec. 5, become -ec- ; 
and -vs becomes -v-: as, | 


xaples agreeable, yapiéorepos, -éoraros: Todp(jets)ys daring, Tod- 
M(néo)horaros (207 c) Soph. Ph. 984; cadhs evident, capéorepos, -éora- 
Tos * mévns poor, wevécrepos, -EstaTos* d€ts sharp, déUTEpos, -UTaTos. 

a. In adjectives of Dec. 1, -4s becomes -to-: as, meovéxTns, -ov, COov- 
etous, mrEeovextTicTaros. 


259. 4.) In adjectives of other endings, -repos 
and -ratos are either added to the simple stem, or 
to the stem increased by -eo-, -uc-, -o-, OY -w-: as, 


Tddas, -avos, wretched, taddvrepos, -ratos: so pédas black, pdxap, 
blessed, wakdpraros * (-eo-) cwppwy, -ovos, discreet, owppovéorepos, -Erra- 
Tos * so most adjectives in -wv, also dpAré, -cxos, elderly, dpndtKéoTepos * 
(-to-) dpraé, -ayos, rapax, rapacious, aprayloraros + (-w-) émlyapts, -tTos, 
pleasing, émyapiterepos, -eTaros: BAGE slack, BAaxwrepos, -wraros (v. 1. 
-o- or -ts-) Mem. 3. 13. 4; 4.2.40. - 

a. No part of inflection is less strictly bound by rule than comparison 
(while the poets have here, as elsewhere, especial freedom) ; and the forms 
above stated are sometimes interchanged or varied from regard to metre, 
euphony, brevity, &c. : as, cxo\adrepor i. 5. 9; Hovxwrepos, Soph. Ant. 














§ 261. SECOND FORM. 197 


1089 ; dr(Jos)ovs unfit for sea, drdowrepos, Th. 7. 60 ; evdrvodrepos, Eq. 
1. 10; dirAdos duplus, DOUBLE, diurddrepos, Mat. 23. 15; omovdaios 
earnest, -atoratos, Hdt. 1. 133, -ardraros, Id. 2. 86, rrwxds poor, -drepos 
and -iorepos, Ar. Ach. 425 ; bBpicrns insolent, -rérepos, -réraros, v. 8. 3, 
22; emdrjouwy forgetful, émdnoudtaros, Ar. Nub. 790; rérwy ripe, me- 
mairepos Aisch. Fr. 244; dyapis disagreeable, dxapicrepos v. 392; tvs 
straight, iOivrara, for the sake of the metre, 2. 508; gaewds, shining, 
-votepos, X. 610, dadvraros v. 93. 


B. By -ioy, -toros. 


260. A few adjectives are compared by -/w» 
and -tcros, commonly adding these to the root of 
the word. 


a. In adducing examples, a noun or verb will sometimes be introduced, 
as showing well the base: kakés bad, xaxiwy, kdxicros: 48bs pleasant 
(48 to please), ndiwv, -ccros - aloypdés shameful (atoyos shame), aicxiwv, 
-xoTos * so €xOpds hostile, xvdpds glorious, poet., and in Sup. olkrpés piti- 
able (&x8os hatred, w08os glory, otkros pity), éxOiwv, Kvdiwv, otkrioros * 
GAyevos painful (dAyos pain), ddyiwv, -yoTos * KepSad€os gainful (Képdos 
- gain), poet. kepdiwy, -dicros: Kadds beautiful (Kaddos beauty), Kadrlwv, 
-oTos* (BeXt-, akin to Bédos, weapon ?), Bedriwy melior, better, BéArioros 
best. 

b. This was an early method of comparison, retained in a few common 
words, and in poetic forms of some others. For the declension of com- 
paratives in -ev, see 22, 211. The t in -fv is regularly long in the Att. 
poets, but short in the Epic and Doric. Yet #étov Eur. Sup. 1101. 


261. The different forms of the Comp. in -ov are well ex- 
plained by reference to -Iwy as their common origin, and to the 
various changes of the consonant I. Thus, we notice, besides 
the use of the corresponding vowel 4, 


a.) Contraction (sometimes with transposition), or omission between 
two vowels (142, 140): as, wots much (base rode-, sync. m)e-), melwy 
or mhewy more, mreioros most, Lat. plus, plurimus ; paxpés small (ue-) 
peiwy minor, rare poet. wetoros minimus ; patos casy (fd-) pdwr, paoros 
(Ion. pytwy, pyioros, 6. 565) ; (Aw-, akin to Dor. X& to desire, neut. pl. 
Awia desirable, Theoc. 26. 32) Awtwy, B. 169, Att. \dwv, vi. 2. 15, N@TTOS; 
(ap-, dpe-, in dpery virtus, valour, virtuc) dpetwv poet., braver, better, dpu- 
aros best ; (apev-, cf. amcenus) dyelvwv better ; (xep- or xerp-, 238 d) xelpwr 
(Ep. xepetwy A. 114) inferior, worse, yelpioros. 

b.) The change into oo (rr) or £ (143 ¢), the preceding vowel, if short, 
now becoming long by nature: as, T&xds swift, (Pax-, 159b; PayIwv) 
Odoowy or Odtrwy, TaxXLoTos: édayds Ep., small, éddocwv, éddxuoTOs * 
pakpds long (udk-, unk-), udoowr poet., unxicros: Kparvis Ep., strong, 
(kparlwy) xpeicowv, xpdtisros (kpéoowr, Hdt. 1. 66, xdprioros, A. 266, 
§ 134, 171) ; éXtyos Little, ddigwv Kp., édAvcyoros + péyas magnus, great, 
pelfwv major (lon. wéfwy Hdt. 1. 202), wéyicros maximus. 

c. Some Comparatives have a double form in -tov and -ccwv: as, 
Bpadus bardus, slow, Bpadiwy, Hes. Op. 526, Bpdoowy K. 226 ; waxvs pin- 
guis, fat, maxylwy Arat. 785, mdoowr, §. 230. 

d. Of the Comp. forms wAelwv and mAéwv, the Attic uses more the 


198 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. § 261. 


former, especially in the contracted cases ; but in the neut. sing., prefers 
méov, especially as an adverb. It sometimes syncopates welov to weir, 
but only in such phrases as Aciv } piipior, more than 10,000. Hdt. pre- 
fers w\éwv, often contracting €o to ev: as, mhedv, medvos. The Epic 
varies according to the metre. 

e. Most adjec: tives compared by -ov, -totos, have also forms, often more 
common, in -Tepos, -Tatos* as, adyeuvds, HaKpos, pexpds, -6repos, -éTaTos * 
Bpadvs, maxts, Taxvs, -UTepos, -Uratos: Bé\repos and BéAraros, Aisch. ; 
giros, pirtaros, Cyr. 4. 3. 2, pirairepos, i. 9. 29, diddrepos, Mem. 3. 11. 
18 ; d@iNiav 7. 351, piduoros, Soph. Aj. 842. Other adjectives compared 
in both ways are alaoxpds, €xOpés, olxr pos, kaxés, Padus deep, Beaxvs short, 
yructs duleis, sweet, mpecBis old, dkts swift, &e. 

f. New poetic or late comparatives are made by changing -@v into 
-STepos OF -TEepos * as, xelpwv xerpitepos, O. 513, yeperdrepos, B. 248, jetd- 
TEpos, duewsrepos, apeLdTepos, perfdTrepos, 3 Ep. Joh. 4; Awtrepos, a. 376, 
pyirepos, X. 258 ; so pytrara r. 577. 


C. IrreGuLtar ComMPaARISON. 


262. Many adjectives (a) are defective or redundant in com- 
parison ; and some comparatives and superlatives are formed 
(b) from positives which are not in use, (c) from words which are 
themselves comparatives or superlatives, or (d) from other parts 
of speech. Some of these are usually referred to positives in 
use, which have a similar signification. Thus, 


(a) Only those words which express properties that may exist in dif. 
ferent degr ees, are compared ; except in a modified sense, for hyperbole, or 
for comic effect: as, movos alone, povetaros alonest, most emphatically 
alone, Ar. Pl. 182. See cand d. 

(b) Several forms, not strictly synonymous, are commonly referred to 
ayadds, good: thus, ayads, duelvwn, Gperros ° Bedriwy, Bé\rieTos * kpeio- 
Twv, KpaTLOTOS * gx, A@OTOS * poet. PEPTEPOS, pépraros and Pépioros (late 
d-yabdraros, Diod. 16. 85). So, xelpov and yelpuoros are referred to KaKds * 
hoowy, Hxioros, to Kakds or pixpds* éAdcowv, éXdxioTos, to piKpds oF 
6Alyos. See 260 a, 261 a, b. 

(c) Double Comparison. %€ryaros last, extreme, éoxarwrepos (Ore yap 
Tov éoxdrouv écxaTwrepov ely dv re Arist]. Metaph. 10. 4), ésxarwraros, 
Hel. 2. 3. 49; é\dyuorros least, é\ayiordrepos less than the least, Ephes. 
3. 8; mparos first, mpwrioros first of all, B. 228 ; mpérepos before, comic 
mpotepaitrepos Ar. Eq. 1164, 

KAEQN. ‘Opas ; éyw cot mpdrepos éxpépw didpor. 
AAAAN, ’AXN od rpdrefav, d\n’ éya mporepairepos. 

(d) Comparatives and Superlatives from other parts of speech. Bacrdeds 
king, BaoiedTepos more kingly, a greater king, 1. 160, Baowedraros the 
greatest king, 1. 69; ératpes friend, éraipdraros best friend, PL Gorg. 
487 1; Kdérrys thicf, krerricraros most adroit thief, Ar. Plut. 27 ; Ktov 
dog, xtvtepos more dog-like, more impudent, ©. 483, Kxiévraros K. 508 ; 
airés himself, airérepos Epich. 2 (1), adréraros (ipsissumus Plant. Trin. 
4. 2) his very self, Ar. Plut. 83; &yye or &yxov near, dyxdrepos nearer, 
Hdt. 7. 175, d&yxeoros Soph. O. T. 919 ; dv wp, avwrepos upper, dvwraros 
uppermost, Hdt. 2. 125 (cf. 263 ; so xatw down, -wrepos, -wraros, Cyr. 6. 
1. 52; and late forms fr. é&w without, éow within, and mpéow forward, 

Ewrepos exterior, &c.) ; Apéj.a. quietly, npewéstrepos more quiet, Cyr. 7. 5. 


as eae 


§ 204. OF ADVERBS. — HISTORY. ive 


63; mpotpyou of importance, mpodpyatrepos more important, Pl. Gorg. 
458 c, mpovpyiairaros > é€ ex, out of, érxaros (104) extrémus, wttermost ; 
mad pre, before, rpérepos prior, former, mp&ros (257 e) prinus, first ; itrép 
super, OVER, Uréprepos superior, brépraros and Uraros suprémus, highest ; 
td (2?) sub, sus-, below, tsrepos later, toraros last. 

e. We find explanations of the formations in d, in the use of preposi- 
tions as adverbs, and of adverbs as adjectives ; in the fact that many 
nouns were originally adjectives ; and in the still more important fact, 
that in the earliest period of language there was as yet no grammatical 
distinetion of the different parts of speech. Add, as poetic forms which 
may be traced to nouns, x7dcoros, I. 642, xoupdregos, A. 316, prylwy, -toros, 
A. 325, wbxaros, uvxoiraros d. 146, drXérepos, -rarTos, B. 707, xpucorepos, 
Sap. 39 [96], &c. ; and, to adverbs, dddprepos, V. 311, véprepos, Kur. Ph. 
1020, dmiorepos, -ratos, 0. 342, wapoirepos, -ratos, VY. 459, mepairepes, Pind. 
O. 9. 159, U firer0s, Theoc. 8. 46, dYiwv Pind. Fr. 232, tyioros, Asch. Pr. 
720, &e. 


II. COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 


263. Adverbs derived from adjectives are com- 
monly compared by taking the neuter singular com- 
parawe, and the neuter plural superlative of these 
adjectives ; but other adverbs by -tépw and -taTo : 
as, 


cous (fr. copss, 257) wiscly, copdrepoy more wiscly, copwrata most 
wisely ; cabas (capis, 258) evidently, capéorepov, capéorara: aioypas 
(aloxpbs, 260 a) basely, atcxtov, alcxicra: tayxéws (raxvs, 261 b) quickly, 
Odcoov, Odrrov, TdxicTa* dvw wp, avwrépw, dvwrdtw: éxds afar, poet. 
and lon. éxacrépw, éxacrdatw. 

a, Adverbs from which adjectives are formed are sometimes compared 
in the first method : as, 6é lute, rpwi carly, dyrairepoy, -rara, &c. (257 d) 
So para very, uaddov (143 a), wddcoTa. 

b. The adverbial Sup. has sometimes the neut. sing. form, chiefly when 
denoting time or place : as, mp@rov kal toraroy, first and last, Pl. Menex. 
247 a. 

e. The adverbial termination -ws is sometimes given to the Comp. ; 
and, rarely, to the Sup.: as, xaXerwrépws more severely, Th. 2. 50, wecgd- 
vos Th. 4. 19, Evvrouwrdtws most concisely, Soph. O. C. 1579. 

d. Some adverbs vary in their comparison : as, éyyts near, éyyurépw, 
eyyutdrw: éyyirepov, éyyitara: less Att. éyyiov, éyywora* &yye or ayyod 
poet. and Ion., near, docov A. 335 (148), dyxicra Aisch. Sup. 1036, 
aoootépw (cf. 261 f) p. 572, dyxordrw Hat. 2. 24. 


: 264. Hisrory or Comparison. a. So far as we can trace com- 
_ parison in the Greek, it appears to have commenced with an emphatic 
' annexation of the old article, in its strong form tos, to the stem of the 
positive, with a connecting vowel where needed : as, vé-a-ros, THE new 
one, 1. e. the newest ; wéo-a-ros, THE middle one (257 e). So, in numer- 
als, rpi-ros Néyos, THE No. 3 book. 
b. This form was then strengthened by doubling the root of the 
article: -rr-os. And now two forms arose. The first r became o: 
«ot-os (147) ; or a euphonic vowel was inserted : -tat-os. Connectives 


en” LP =e ee oe 


200 CONJUGATION. § 264. 


were also prefixed according to need or preference. Thus from tXos, ¢i- 
Aurros, and ¢Pi\taros or Pitaltaros: among ordinals, xiAvortds. The 
Latin shows the ¢ in a few of the first numerals, but preferred as the 
superlative sign 7 (perhaps akin to 7m in magnus, “éyas), Which was after- 
wards strengthened by s, with a connecting vowel, to sim, or to prevent 
the succession of too many short syllables, ssim : quartus, sextus, minimus, 
decimus, ma(gs)ximus, millesimus, altissimus. The t appears in German 
ordinals, and, aspirated, in English ordinals ; while the s¢ appears both in 
Germ. ordinals, and in the Germ. and Eng. superlative : vierte, fourth, 
hundertste, hundredth, weiseste, wisest. 

ce. The comparative distinguishes or separates one person or thing from 
another in respect to the possession of some quality ; and this separation 
has been extensively expressed by a liquid prolongation of the adjective. 
In Greek, both v and p were used for this purpose, with a connecting 
vowel, viz. o before v (cf. 114 ¢), and e before p. After the analogy of 
the superlative, I (ort) was prefixed to -ov- ; and tT, with the preceding 
connective, to -ep-: pidtwv, pidrepos, diiattepos. The two Greek forms 
are mingled in the Lat. -ior ; and the r appears also in the Germ. and 
Eng. : longior, linger, longer. ‘The Sanskrit has analogies to the forms 
of both Greek and Lat. comparison. Its prevalent form is Comp. -taras 
(-repos), Sup. -tamas (-Ta-ros, -i-77s). 


CHAP T.ER Waa 


GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF CONJUGATION. 


265. Verbs are conjugated, in Greek, to mark 
five distinctions: Voice, Tensz, Mopr, NuMBER, 
and Person. Of these distinctions, the first shows 
how the action of a verb is related to its subject ; 
the second, how it is related to time; and the 
third, how it is related to the mind of the speaker, 
or to some other action. The two remaining dis- 
tinctions merely show the number and person of 
the subject. See 802. 


a. These distinctions are marked by PREFIXES, by AFFIXES, and also, 
to some extent, by CHANGES IN THE STEM. For a general view of the 
(listinctions, see 80; for the particulars, see Syntax. For the prefixes 
and affixes, see 31s, and Chapters VIII. and IX. ; for changes in the 
stem, see 49 and Ch. X. 


266. A. Voice. The Greek has three voices: 
the Active, Mippix, and Passive (30a). 


§ 267. VOICE. TENSE. - (201 


a. The Middle is so called as cntermediate between the 
Active and Passive, representing the subject of the verb not 
only as acting, but also as, more or less directly, acted upon : 
as, from Aove, to wash, éhoveaunv L washed myself, I bathed. 


b. The meddle and passive voices have a common form, ex- 
cept in the Future and dorst. In Etymology, this form is 
usually spoken of simply as passzve, or as mzddle. Even in the 
Future and Aorist, the distinction in sense between the two 
voices is not always preserved. 

c. The reflexive sense of the middle voice often becomes so 
indistinct, that this voice does not differ from the actzve in its 
use. Hence, in many verbs, either wholly or in part, the mid- 
dle voice takes the place of the active. This is particularly 
frequent in the Future. When it occurs in the theme (172 e), 
the verb is termed deponenit (depdnens, as if putting of its 
proper sense to take that of another voice). E. g. 

1.) Verbs, in which the theme has the active, and the Future has the 


middle form: dxotw to hear, dxotsouacs Baivw go, Brhoouar: yryrecKw 
know, yeoooua: eiul be, @ooxar- pavOdvw learn, wabjoouat. 

2.) Deponent Verbs: aic@dvouat to perceive, BovrNouat will, yiyropae 
become, Séxouar receive, divauat be able, H5oua rejoice, otojar think. 

d. A Deponent Verb is termed deponent middle, or deponent passive, 
according as its Aorist has the middle or the passive form. 


e. The traces of a middle voice in Latin appear in the large number of 
deponent verbs, and in the use of the passive voice in some verbs : as, 
volator, Z roll mysel/, wallow, revertor, J turn myself back, return, 
mereor, J merit for myself. 


267. B. Tense. The Greek has seven tenses: 
the PRESENT, LwperRFEcT, Future, Aorist, PER- 
FECT, PLUPERFECT, and FuTuRE PERFECT. 


a. Tenses may be classified in two ways: I. with respect to 
the t2me which is spoken of; II. with respect to the relation 
which the action bears to this time. 


b. I. The teme which is spoken of is cither, 1. present, 
2. future, or 3. past. The reference to time is most distinct 
in the Indicative. In this mode, those tenses which refer to 
present or future time are termed PRIMARY or CHIEF TENSES ; 
and those which refer to past time, SECONDARY or HISTORICAL 


| TENSES. 


c. II. The action is related to the time, either, 1. as doting at 
the time, 2. as done in the time, or 3. as complete at the time. 
The tenses which denote the first of these relations are termed 
DEFINITE ; the second, INDEFINITE; and the third, COMPLETE, 


REY. Gk. 9* 


202 CONJUGATION. — TENSE. § 267. 


These constitute three great FoRMATIONS, or classes of forms, 
in the Greek verb. 

d. The Aorist (dépioros indefinite) represents an action 
simply as performed. Its place is chiefly supplied in the Latin 
by the Perfect. Thus é¢ypawa scripsi, f wrote. 

e. Of the Future Perfect (also called the Third Future, and 
in old grammars the Paulo-post Future), the simple form is 
found in only a few verbs ; and, with this exception, this tense 
and those which are marked in 30 as wanting, viz. the zndefinete 
present and the definite future, are supplied by forms belong- 
ing to other tenses, or by participles combined with auxiliary 
verbs. 


f. For the general formation of the Greek tenses, see 31. 
In respect to the details of formation, they are naturally asso- 
ciated in six systems: |. the Present, or Definite System, in- 
cluding the Pres. and Impf.; 2. the Luture System, including 
the Fut. “Act. and Mid.; 3. the Aorist System, including the 
Aor. Act. and Mid.; 4. the Perfect (or Perf. Act.) System, in- 
cluding the Perf. and Plup. Act. ; 5. the Perfect Passive System, 
including the Perf. and Plup. Pass. and Mid., and the Fut. 
Perf.; and 6. the Compound System, including the Aor. and 
Fut. Pass., which are formed with an auxiliary (274). Of these 
systems, the Ist belongs to the great DEFINITE FORMATION ; 
the 2d, 3d, and 6th, to the rNpEFINITE; and the 4th and 5th, 
to the compLete. For the so-called second systems, see 289 b. 


268. In some verbs the sense of the complete tenses, by a 
natural transition, passes into that of other tenses ; and the 
PrrFect becomes, in signification, a Present ; the PLUPERFECT, 
an Imperfect or Aorist; and the Future PERFECT, 2 common 
Future. Thus, terns (45) to station, Perf. éornea (I have sta- 
tioned myself) I stand, Plup. €ornkeyv I stood, Fut. Perf. éorn&e 
LT shall stand ; pupynoxw to remind, Perf. Pass. peuynuar (1 have 
been reminded) I remember, Plup. éuenrnuny I remembered, Fut. 
Perf. pepynoopar TL shall remember. 

a. In a few of these verbs, the Pres. is not used, and the Prrr. is 
regarded as the theme. Such verbs, as having a preterite tense for the 
theme, are termed PRETERITIVE. In like manner, those Perfect systems 


in which the Perf. is used in the sense of the Pres. may be termed, for 
convenience, preteritive systems ; and even a Perf. so used, a Preteritive. 


269. ©. Mopr. The Greek has six modes: 
the INDICATIVE, SUBJUNCTIVE, OrTaTIvE, I4PERA- 
TIVE, INFINITIVE, and PARTICIPLE. 


§ 270. MODE. NUMBER AND PERSON. 203 


a. For a table of these modes, classified according to the character 
of the sentences which they form, see 30 c. 

b. In the regular inflection of the Greek verb, the Pres. and Aor. 
have all the modes; but the Fut. and the Fut. Perf. want the Sub- 
junctive and Imperative; and the Perf., for the most part, wants 
the Subjunctive and Optative, except as supplied by compound forms, 
and likewise, in the active voice, the Imperative. 

ce. The tenses of the Subjunctive and Optative are related to each 
other as present and past, or as primary and secondary, tenses (267 b); 
and some have therefore chosen to consider them as only different 
tenses of a general conjunctive, or contingent mode, calling the Pres. 
and Perf. Opt. the Imperfect and Pluperfect Conjunctive. With this 
change, the number and general offices of the Greek modes are the 
same with those of the Latin, and the correspondence between the 
Greek conjunctive and the English potential modes becomes more 
obvious. In the Infinitive and Participle, the forms called Present 
and Perfect belong also to the Imperfect and Pluperfect. Without 
changing familiar names, the relations of the modes and tenses are 
illustrated by the arrangement in 37. The Imperative, from its very 
signification, cannot belong to a past tense. 

d. The passive verbal adjectives in -rés and -réos (Lat. -tus and 
-ndus), as closely akin to participles, are often included in tables of 
inflection. In the form of the stem, they commonly agree with the 
Aor. in -@nv, except as a preceding mute is changed before +r (147): 
as, Operréos, fr. rpecbw to nourish, Aor. e@pepOnv. 


270. D. NumBeER AND Person. The numbers 
and persons of verbs correspond to those of nouns 
and pronouns (265). 


a. The Imperative, from its signification, wants the first person ; 
the Infinitive, from its character as partaking of the nature of an ab- 
stract noun, wants the distinctions of number and person altogether ; 
and the Participle, as partaking of the nature of an adjective, has the 
distinctions of gender and case, instead of person. 

b. The Ist Pers. sing. of the Pres. ind., is commonly regarded as 
the THeme of a verb (172 e); while, in adding its meaning, the Eng. 
Inf. is more frequently used: as, Avw to loose (yet also, I loose, or 
simply, loose). The stem is obtained by throwing off the affix of the 
theme, or it may be obtained from any form of the verb, by throwing 
off the prefix and affix, and allowing for euphonic changes. A verb is 
conjugated by adding to the stem the prefixes and affixes in 35 and 36. 

e. Verbs are divided, according to the stem-mark, or characteristic, 
into Mure, Liqgum, DoustE Consonant, and Pure Verbs; and, ac- 
cording to the affix in the theme, into VERBS IN -w, and VERBS IN -pu. 
For a full paradigm of regular conjugation, see va (37); for shorter 
paradigms of the several classes of verbs, see 39 s. 

d. In \dJw, the v is short in the Perf., the Plup., and the Compound 
System ; but otherwise, long in the common language. In Homer, it is 
commonly short in the Pres. and Impf. 





204 CONJUGATION. — HISTORY. § 271. 


HISTORY OF GREEK CONJUGATION. 


271. a. The early history of Greek conjugation can be traced only 
in the same way with that of declension (186). The following view is 
offered as one which has much in its support, and which serves to explain 
the general phenomena of the Greek verb, with those of the Latin in large 
part. 

b. Greek conjugation, like declensiun (186 b), was progressive. At 
first, the root was used, as in nouns, without inflection. The first dis- 
tinction appears to have been that of person, which was, at first, only 
twofold, affixing p, to express the first person, and a lingual or sibilant to 
express the other two. Of this second pronominal affix, the simplest and 
most demonstrative form appears to have been -t (cf. 246, 249). By unit- 
ing these affixes with the root ¢a-, to say, we have the forms, dap, J or 
we say, par, you, he, she, or they say. A plural was then formed by 
affixing the plural sign v (186 ¢), with the insertion of € to assist in the 
utterance. ‘Thus, 


1 Person, Sing. gap 2 and 3 Persons, S. gar 
Plur. gapev P. patev 

ce. Upon the separation of the 2d and 3d Persons (246 d), the 2d, as 
being less demonstrative, took in the sing. the softer form s (in some 
cases, 7@ or 8, in both which forms the @ would, by the subsequent laws 
of euphony, pass into s, unless dropped or sustained by an assumed vowel, 
160) ; while in the plur. there was a new formation (ef. 186), in which 
plurality was marked in the 2d Pers. by affixing e (ef. 186 b), and in the 
od Pers. by inserting v (cf. -e-t, 186 h). The old plur. now became, as in 
nouns (186 g), a dual, and the system of numbers and persons was com- 
plete. We subjoin, for comparison of endings, a Latin subjunctive, 
though here, as in the Dorie, final s is used as a plural sign (186 d, 169 ¢) : 


1 Pers. 2 Pers. ; 3 Pers. 
Sing. gap  dicam pas , dicas par — dicat 
Plur. gdapev dicamus pare  cdlicatis gavr  dicant 
Dual dapev parev parey 


d. The distinction of tense, like those of number, case, and person 
(186, 246), was at first only twofold, simply distinguishing a past action 
from a present or future one. This was naturally done by prefixing e- (in 
Sans. d-), to express, as it were, the throwing back of the action into past 
time ; and this expression was aided by the throwing back of the accent 
(see 277). With the prefixing of ¢-, a distinction was also made between 
the 2d and 3d Persons dual (perhaps because, the more remote the action, 
the more important becomes the specific designation of the subject). In 
the 3d Pers. the inserted € (b) was lengthened to y, while in the 2d Pers., 
as in both the 2d and 3d Persons of the unaugmented tense, it passed into 
the kindred o (114). We have now two tenses, the unaugmented Primary 
Tense, which supplied the place of both the Present pa Future, and 
the augmented Secondary Tense, which expressed past action both defi- 
nitely and indefinitely, and supplied the place of all the past tenses (267). 
The Latin extended its past tense by insertion, instead of prefix. Thus, 


PRIMARY TENSE. SECONDARY TENSE. 

fer. ta... 3. F- : a 2F. ae. 
S. gap gas gar eépap dictham pas dicébas épar dicébat 
P. papev dare avr edapev dicehdmus épare dicchatis épavr dicebant 
D. dapev patov patov épapev épatov épatyy 


OT i. PERSON, NUMBER, TENSE, VOICE. 205 
] ] > 


These personal endings remained in Latin with little change. In Greek 
they were prolonged, shortened, and otherwise varied (275). In Sanskrit 
they were especially prolonged in the primary inflection ; while in the 
secondary, the augment had a general tendency to keep them short, or 
even to make them shorter. To show this, and the similarity of Greek 
and Sanskrit conjugation, the corresponding forms of a Sanskrit verb are 
added : bha, to shine, = da- in daivw, pdos, Ke. 


Pres. 1 P. aP. 5d age Impr. 1 7. 2 EY SP 
S. bham7 pbhasz bhati abhane abhas abhat 
P. bhamas  bhatha bhantz abhama  abhata abhan 
D. bhavas bhathas bhatas abhava abhatan. abhatadm 


e. At first, there was no distinction of voice. The affix merely showed 
the connection of the person with the action, but did not distinguish his 
relation to it as agent or object. This distinction seems to have arisen as 
follows. A transitive action passes immediately from the agent, but its 
effect often continues long upon the object. This continuance would 
naturally be denoted by prolonging the affix. Thus, if I may be par- 
doned such an illustration, while the striker simply says with vivacity 
turrop, J strike, the one struck rubs his head and cries trurropat, tuptom- 
ah-ee, J am struck. Hence the objective form was distinguished from the 
subjective (285), simply by the prolongation of the affix (cf. the passive in 
Lat., Sans., &c.). This took place in various ways, but all affecting the 
personal and not the numeral element of the affix (321) : 

1.) If the affix ended with a sign of person, it was prolonged by annex- 
ing, in the Primary Tense, at ; but in the Secondary Tense (on account 
of the augment, which had a natural tendency to shorten the affix), the 
shorter 0, except in the Ist Pers., where a species of reduplication seems 
to have taken place (-pyp, passing of course into -pyv, 160). Thus, -p 
became -por and -pyv; -s,-car and -oo ; -t, -Tar, and -To; -wr, -vrat, 
and -vro. 

2.) If the affix ended with a sign of number, the preceding sign of 
person took a longer form. In the 2d and 3d Persons, this was o@ (which 
might be considered as arising from the rt by the addition of 6, since 7 
must pass into o8, 147; i. e. by a doubling of the lingual). The 1st 
Pers., in imitation of the others, inserted @ (or, if a long syllable was 
wanted by the poets, o8), after which either o was inserted, to aid in the 
utterance, or, what became the common form, the final v passed into its 
corresponding vowel a (142). Thus, -té, -tov, -Tyv became -oe, -o Gov, 
-cOyv ; and -pev became -peOov or commonly -peOa (-peoa). In respect 
to the form -peOov, see 299 b. 

3.) In the Latin prolongation, 7 was extensively used (inserted in the 
2d Pers. sing., but otherwise annexed) ; on the addition of which, and s 
preceding fell away, and sometimes s final. The form -mdni is peculiar. 
See the inflection of lego below. After this objective formation, the forms 
above became simply subjective, or active. 


Oss. Prim. TENSE. Ops. Src. TENSE. 
LP 2B; 3 P. 1 Pj QF: 3 P. 
S.  papar para parar épapnv éeépaco épato 
P. gdapeda dace pavTar épapeda  epacbe épavTo 
D. gapeda gacbov dacbov épapea épardov édacbny 


f. It will be observed, that all the affixes above begin with a consonant. 
_ While, therefore, they could be readily attached to roots ending with a 


=~ 


206 CONJUGATION. —— HISTORY. § 271. 
. 

vowel, euphony required that, in their attachment to the far greater num- 
ber of roots ending with a consonant, a connecting vowel should be inserted. 
This vowel, which was purely euphonic in its origin, was, doubtless, also 
from euphonic preference, -o- before a liquid, but otherwise -¢e- (114 ec). 
Yor the change to 7 and w in the Latin primary tense, see 116. As an 
example of euphonie inflection (in distinction from which the inflection 
without connecting vowels is termed nude, 183 a), we select the root Aey-, 
leg-, Germ. legen, to lay. In Latin the euphonic inflection so prevailed, 
that we find only very scanty traces of the nude. 


SUBJECTIVE. OBJECTIVE. 
2 Be is yA i Aa So GF leks 2 Ee 3 P. 
Prim. S. Aey-op -€S -€T Aey-OpaL EOL ~€T CL 
leg-o[ | -ts -it leg-or -eris,-re —--ttur 
P. dey-opev “TE = -OVT Ney-opeba  -erGe -OVTOL 
leg-imus  -itis = -unt leg-imur = -tmini -untur 
D. dey-opev -eTov -erov  ey-opeba -eobov -er Gov 
Sec. S. édey-op -€S -€T é\ey-opyy = -coro -€TO 
leg-ebam  -ébas — -ébat leg-2bar -cbaris,-re -ebatur 
P. éd\ey-opev -ere = -ovT-—s Eeery-opeOa, = - ee -OVTO 
leg-ebamus -ebatis -ébant leg-ebamur -chamini  -ebantur 
D. é\ey-opev -erov -ernv éey-opeOa = -eo Dov -ec Onv 


272. a. The distinction of mode in the inflection of verbs commences 
with that of person ; for the very attachment of personal affixes makes a 
distinction between a personal mode (i. e. the verb used as finite) and a 
non-personal mode (i. e. the verb used as an infinitive or participle). The 
latter had doubtless, at first, no affix. But the Infinitive is in its use a 
substantive, commonly sustaining the office, either of a direct, or yet more 
frequently indirect object of another word. Hence it naturally took the 
objective endings of nouns. Of these the simplest and the earliest in its 
objective force appears to have been v (186d, 188s), which was, accord- 
ingly, affixed to the Inf., to express in general the objective character of 
this mode. To pwre roots this affix was attached directly ; but to impure 
roots with the insertion of € to assist the utterance. Thus the Inf. of ¢a- 
was dav ; and of dey-, Neyer. Subsequently, to mark more specifically 
the prevalent relation of the Inf., that of indirect object, the dative affix 
of Dec. 1 (13) was added to these forms: gdavat, Neyevat. Voice appears 
to have been distinguished by the insertion, in these forms, of «8 (before 
which the v fell away, cf. 151, 154s), after the analogy of 271. 2: thus, 
Act. (or Subject.) Form, davar, Neyevac + Mid. and Pass. (or Obj.) Form, 
(pav-cO-at) pacbat, (Aeyev-c9-at) Neyer Oat. 

b. But the verb is also used as an adjective, and, as such, receives 
declension. The stem of this declension, in the Act. (or Subject.) Form, 
may be derived from the original form of the non-personal mode in -y, by 
adding +, which is used so extensively in the formation of verbal substan- 
tives and adjectives: thus, gay davr-, or, with the aflix of declension 
(11), davr-s, Neyer Neyorr-s (the kindred o preferred to € before v, 114 ¢). 
The Mid. and Pass. (or Obj.) form of the Participle may be derived from 
the same by a reduplication analogous to that in 271. 1 (since the Ace. 
affix, 186 d, is strictly a nasal, which could be either p or v, according to 
euphonic preference: Bopéav, but Lat. boream): thus, gav papev-os, 
Aeyev Neyomer-os. 

ce. But an older Objective Participle, afterwards becoming rather a 
verbal adjective, was formed by simply adding t-os to the root. In Lat- 


: 


§ 272. VOICE, MODE. 207 


in, this form was retained as the common passive participle ; while the 
common active participle also corresponded to the Greek. Thus, Aeyovr-s 
legent-s, \eyr-os legt-us. The Lat. Inf. appears to have first had the form 
of the old Indirect Case (the Ablative), from which a Dative form in 7 was 
afterwards separated as objective, leaving the form in ¢ subjective. A 
euphonic 7 was commonly inserted in these forms, while the passive idea 
was sometimes made more prominent by the affix er (cf. 271. 3). We have 
now the single non-personal mode developed into a system of Infinitives 
and Participles : thus, 


SUBJECTIVE. OBJECTIVE. 
Inf. gdavat, reyevar legere gpacbat, eyerOar fari, leg[er]i 
Par. gays, Neyours legents papmevos, Neyouevos, eyTos legtus 


d. In the personal mode, a threefold distinction arose. Doubt leads to 
hesitation in closing a word or sentence ; and hence the idea of contingence 
was naturally expressed by dwelling upon the connecting vowel (or upon 
the final vowel of the root), as if it were a matter of question whether the 
verb ought to be united with its subject. 

1.) The strongest expression of contingence, that of past contingence, 
protracted the connecting vowel, or final vowel of the root, to the cognate 
diphthong int (4), and thus formed what is termed the Optative mode, 
which, as denoting past time, takes the secondary affixes: égau dam, 
épauny parunv, éeyou evyour, EXeyounv Neyournv. In Lat., the prolonga- 
tion of the form took place in the same way as in the Inf. : legere, lege- 
rem, legerer. 

2.) The weaker expression of contingence, that of present contiingence, 
as less needed, seems to have arisen later, after the conjugation with the 
connecting vowels -o- and -e- had become established as the prevailing 
analogy of the language ; and to have consisted simply in prolonging these 
vowels to -- and -y- (in the Lat. Pres., a throughout), attaching the same 
affixes to all verbs. This weaker form, termed the Swbjunctive mode (yet 
see 269 c), as belonging to present time, takes the primary affixes. Thus, 
eyou Aeywu, Aeyouat Aeywuat, pau pawy, papa Pawar. 

3.) The original mode now became an Indicative, expressing the actual, 
in distinction from the contingent. 

e. A fourth mode arose for the expression of command. This obviously 
required no 1st Pers. ; and in the 2d, it required no essential change, as 
the tone of voice would sufficiently indicate the intent of the speaker. 
There would, however, be a preference of short forms, as the language of 
direct command is laconic : hence, we find in the objective inflection -oo 
rather than -oat, and in the subjective, a tendency to drop the affix of 
the 2d Pers. sng. The 3d Pers., on the other hand, has throughout 
a peculiar form, in which the affix is emphaticallygprolonged. This is 
done in the sing. subjective by adding : thus, -rw\(Lat. -to). In the 
objective inflection, -rw naturally becomes -c@@ (271. 2 ; in Lat., by ad- 
dition, -tor, 271.3). The old plur., afterwards the dual, was formed by 
adding the plur. sign v (271 b): -twv, -cdwv. The new plur. was still 
further strengthened by prefixing v (which in the obj. form would make no 
change, ef. 272), or by adding the later plur. ending wav (275 c) instead 
of v: -vTwy or -Tecay, (-vcOwr) -cPwv or -o8moray: while in Lat. (as in 
some Dor. forms, 328 d), the plural 7 was simply prefixed to the sing. -to 
or -tor. In the 2d.Pers. sing. subjective, it is convenient to regard -@ as 
the proper flexible ending (271c). Thus, Imperative Act. @a8, data: 
gate, paytav or daracav: datov, datwv: Obj. Paco, parw: pace, 
garb or pParfwray: dar8ov, par8av. 


~ 


208 CONJUGATION. — HISTORY. § 272. 


f. The system of Greek and Latin modes may now be fully shown by 
adding to the personal forms above (now Indicative), and the Infinitive 
and Participle, the new Conjunctive and Imperative forms : 


SUBJECTIVE INFLECTION. OBJECTIVE INFLECTION. 
Conjunctive Primary Tense. 

LP. 2 P. SPs pT oes 2s 3 P, 
Aey-ap 4S WT AeY-@PAL  -NoaL “TOL 
leg-am ~~ -as -at leg-ar -dris, -re -atur 

P. Aey-wpev --NTE -wvtT, &c. dey-wpeda -node -ovTat, &c. 
Conjunctive Secondary Tense. 
Aey-Olp, = - OLS -OLT AeYy-OLLNY  -OLoO -OLTO 
leg-erem _-eres -cret leg-erer -ereris,-re -eréetur 
P. ey-ousev -oure -o.wT, Kc. ey-orpeBa  -orre -o.vTo, &c. 
Imperative. 

ytd of ye 27. BS a 
dey-€8 -€TO Ney-€o-0 -<r Ow 
leg-e -ito leg-ere -itor 

P. dey-ere -OVTOV, -ETOOTAY Aey-eo Ge -erbav, -erboorayv 
leg-ite -wnto leg-imini -untor 
ey-erTOv = -ETOV Ney-er8ov -erbav 


273. a. We have, as yet, but two tenses, the Primary, denoting 
present and futwre time, and the Secondary, denoting past time, both 
definitely and indefinitely. In afew verbs, mostly poetic, the formation 
appears never to have proceeded further. In other verbs, more specific 
tenses were developed from these, as follows : 


b. In most verbs, the Future was distinguished from the Present, and 
the Aorist (the indefinite past) from the Imperfect (the definite past), by 
new forms, in which the greater energy of the Fut. and Aor. was expressed 
by a o added to the stem (cf. 186d; derived by some from éa-, the root 
of eiut to be) ; and consequently, if the old Primary and Secondary Tenses 
remained, they remained as Present and Imperfect. The Fut. followed 
throughout the inflection of the Pres., except that it wanted the Subjunce- 
tive and Imperative, which were less needed in this tense. The Aor. had 
all the modes, following in general the inflection of the Pres. and Impf., 
except that it wanted p in the 1st Pers. sing. ind. act. as well as t in the 
3d, had a as its distinctive vowel, and simply appended the later affix -at 
in the Inf. act. (272): thus, omitting the plur. and dual, 


SUBJECTIVE INFLECTION. 


Indicative. Subjunctive. Optative. Imperative. Infinitive. 

1 é\eyou Aeyou Neyo ; Neyo 

2 édeyous eyons Neyorats Neyoru8 Participle. 

3 éd\eyoe AeyYouT NeyYoaT AeyraTw ANeyoavTs 
OBJECTIVE INFLECTION. 

Indicative. Subjunctive. | Optative. | Imperative. Infinitive. 
1 é\eyoapny Aeyowpar eyoatpny Neyrao Bat 
2 éheyraco Neyornoar Neyorairo Neyraco Participle. 
3 é\eyoarTo NeyonTar NeyoaTo NcyoarOw Neyoapevos 





§ 273. FUTURE AND AORIST. COMPLETE TENSES. 209 


c. The use of a as a connective in the Aor. may have arisen in the fol- 
lowing way, akin to that suggested for Dec. 1 (189): The flexive p of the 
1 Pers. sing. appended directiy to the tense-stem could not remain, and 
passed into its corresponding vowel a. This was then adopted as the con- 
necting vowel required in the tense (except in the 3 Pers. sing. of the 
Ind., where r may perhaps have given place in like manner to the cor- 
responding ¢, and in the Subjunctive, 272. 2). If we now class the a and e 
with connectives, these persons are left without flexible endings ; and the 

“want of them, without the lengthening of a vowel as in the present, is 
thus readily explained. The Latin furnishes a close analogy ii its form 
in -7, which was both Aor. and Perf. : scripsi, J wrote or have written. 
The Sanskrit Aor., on the other hand, retained or resumed the flexive m 
of the Ist Pers., as well as the ¢ of the 3d: S. 1 adiksham é@decEa dixi, 
I showed, 2 adikshas @5ecéas dixisti, 3 adikshat édece dixit. Some prefer, 
in Greek, to regard the flexives p and ¢ as here simply dropped (169). 

d. In many verbs, by a change of stem, a new Pres. and Impf. were 
formed, which expressed more specifically the action as doing; and in 
some of these verbs, the old Secondary Tense, with the cognate forms in 
the other modes, remained as an Aorist (called, for distinction’s sake, the 
Second Aorist, 289); and in a few, the old Primary, as a Future (305 f). 

e. The complete tenses appear to have been later in their development. 
These tenses, in their precise import, represent the state conseyuent upon 
the completion of an action (rhv émistoN iw yéypapa, I have the letter writ- 
ten), or in other words they represent the action as done, but its effect 
remaining. This idea was naturally expressed by an initial reduplication 
(280). These tenses admit a threefold distinction of time, and may ex- 
press either present, past, or future completeness. The present complete 
tense (the Perfect) naturally took the primary endings ; the past complete 
tense (the Pluperfect), the augment and the secondary endings ; and the 
future complete tense (the Future Perfect), the common future affixes. 
In the Perf. and Plup., the odjective endings were atfixed without a con- 
necting vowel; and, of course, with many euphonic changes : as, re-rpiB- 
pat TéTPlupal, TE-TAY-waL, We-7ELO-pat Wémeccuat (39). The subjective end- 
ings appear to have been at first appended in the same way: thus, Perf. 
Ind. yeypad-u, Inf. yeypad-vat, Part. yeypad-vrs. But all these forms 
were forbidden by euphony. Hence in the Ind. -p became -a ; and after 
this change the inflection of the Ind. proceeded according to the analogy 
of the Aor., except so far as the primary form differs from the secondary : 
yeypap-u yeypad-a, a-s, -€, -a-wev, -a-Te, -a-vT, -a-Tov. In the Part., v 
also became a, which by precession passed into o (114 ; indeed, in Dec. 3 
no masculine or feminine noun has a stem ending in -at-, 177. 3): ye- 
ypagp-ors. The v in the Inf., instead of a similar change (as it was fol- 
lowed by a), took -e- before it: yeypad-evar. In the Plup. act., there 
was a kind of double augment, prefixing ¢, both to the reduplication, and 
also to the connecting vowel of the Perf., making the connective of the 
Plup. ea (derived by some from the Impf. of efuéi to be): é-yeypad-ea. 
This ea remained in the Ionic ; but in the old Attic was contracted into 
m, Which afterwards passed by precession into «. The flexive y was then 
added in the 1 Pers., according to the general analogy. 

f. The fuller tense-system of the Latin has marked analogies to the 
Greek : as in the old futures capso, fa(c-so)xo ; in such Aorist-Perfects as 
di(c-si)xt, scri(b-si)psi, lw(d-si)st ; in such reduplicated forms as cucurri, 
pependi, poposci, &c. Yet it has such marked differences, that it is 
difficult not to believe that its development was in large measure sub- 
sequent to the separation of the two races. Its Fut. was much less 


REV. Gh. N 


car ab ee 





210 CONJUGATION, —— HISTORY. § 273. 


developed, and quite differently. Its Aor. and Perf. united ; and except 
in the Perf. ind. act. (not excepted by all), and the Part. pass. in -tws 
(-sus ; 272 c), its complete tenses were made not by simple formation, but 
with the auxiliary swm, the elements uniting in the Act., but remaining 
distinct in the Pass. : dixi, dix-eram, dix-ero, dix-ervm (cf. 139. 1), dix- 
assem (cf. 116), dix-dsse ; dictus swm, &c. 


27%. a. The middle and passive voices were at first undistinguished. 
The form simply showed that the subject was affected by the action, but 
did not determine whether the action were his own or that of another. In 
the definite and complete tenses, the action is so represented, that this 
would be commonly understood without special designation. But in the 
indefinite tenses, there would be greater need of marking the distinction. 
Hence, a special Aor. and Fut. passive were formed by employing the verb 
ejut, to be, as an auxiliary, and compounding its past and future tenses 
with the old passive participle in -res (the augment being prefixed in the 
Aor., as in other past tenses, and, either from the influence of analogy or 
from preference of sound, the + passing into 6, and in most of the forms 
€ into ym): as, weumr-ds sent, weumt-ds Hv, €-réupd-nv I was sent, weumr-ds 
érouat, meupO-joouat I shall be sent. In some verbs a smoother form was 
obtained (called the Second Aorist and Future), by simply compounding 
the tenses of efuf with an early stem. This was chiefly done in impure 
verbs, which had not already second aorists in other voices : thus, é-rplB- 
nv, TpLB-jooumat (39). 

b. The old objective Aor. and Fut. now became middle, and the two 
voices were so far distinct. They had still, however, so much in common, 
that it is not wonderful that this distinction was not always observed 
(266 b). In the Latin, this separation of middle and passive voices does not — 
appear. It was so late in the Greek that the Fut. Pass. formation is rep- 
resented in Homer by one or two Second Futures only : uryjoecOar K. 365. 

ce. The system of Greek conjugation was now complete, having three 
persons, three numbers, three voices, six modes, if the Subj. and Opt. are 
separated, and seven tenses, without including the so-called second tenses. 


275. Subsequent modifications were chiefly euphonic : 

a. By a law which became so established in the language as not to 
allow exception (160), and which strikingly distinguishes Greek from 
Latin inflection, the endings p, 7, and 6 could not remain. They were, 
therefore, either dropped, changed, prolonged, or both changed and pro- 
longed : as, éheyer deve, eyou (-oa, 160 f, 120) Aéyw, Aeyouuw Aéyouue, 
dar pyoi (143 b). 

b. In some forms, o fell out between two vowels, which were then 
usually contracted (140): as, é\éy(eoo, €o)ov, \éy(ouro)oro. 

c. A new form of the 3 Pers. plur. secondary was formed by changing 
-r of the sing. into -wav (i. e. by changing 7 final into ¢, 160), and thea 
affixing the plural sign v, instead of prefixing it, with the needed union- 
vowel, which here, as after o in the Aor., was a, 160, 273 b): thus, 
3 Sing. édar, Pl. €pacay. Cf. the prolonged form in -erunt, in the Lat. 
Perf. (139. 1). 

d. In the Greek verb, there is a great tendeney to lengthen a short 
vowel before an affix beginning with a single consonant (it being already 
long by position before those beginning with two consonants). J* is 
natural that this should appear especially in the shorter forms ; hence, in 
the subjective more than in the objective, and in the sing. more than in 
the plur. or dual: thus, dau dau pnul, gas dis, par pyol (a); but Pl. 


§ 277. EUPHONIC CHANGES. PREFIXES. 211 


piuer: pny, piuev daevos. For the forms of dni found in use, see 
45u, 50. 


276. a. We observe THREE CORRESPONDING PERIODS in declension 
and in conjugation. The oldest inflection in both, that of Dec. 3, and of 
the nude Pres. and Impf. (followed by the Perf. and Plup. pass.), was 
without connecting vowels. The next in order, that of Dec. 2, and of the 
euphonic Pres. and Impf. (followed by the Fut.), took the connecting 
vowels o and ¢ (Lat. 0 and wu, e and 7) ; while the latest form of simple in- 
flection, that of Dec. 1, and of the Aor. and Perf. act. systems, made use 
of a (Lat. a or 7) asa connective. And of both nouns and verbs, there 
were those which mingled or fluctuated between different methods of in- 
flection. Variety of formation appears especially in the Aor. and Perf. 
act. systems. 

b. In the Perf. and Plup. act., we find remains of the original nude 
formation, but only where the flexible ending has a vowel of its own. 
These abound most in the old Epic, but are also found in the Attic. The 
inflection with the connecting vowel, however, so became the established 
analogy of the language, that pure verbs, no less than impure, adopted it. 
But now the attachment of the open affixes to pure stems produced hiatus, 
and to prevent this, « was inserted. This insertion appears to have been 
just commencing in the Homeric period. It afterwards became the 
prevalent law of the language, extending, through the force of analogy, to 
unpure, as well as to pure roots. The harsh combination of consonants 
was now avoided by dropping a lingual mute, and commonly v, before k, 
and by softening « after a labial or palatal mute to an aspiration, which 
then united with the mute. We have thus a series of euphonic devices, 
to meet the alternate demands of pure and impure stems ; and, as the 
result, four successive formations: 1. the primitive nude formation ; 2. 
the formation in -a, -av; 3. the formation in -xa, -Kev after a vowel ; 
4. the formation in -xa, -kav after a consonant (after a labial or palatal 
mute, softened to -a, -eiv, 149). The last formation nowhere appears in 
Hom., and the third only in a few words. The forms with the inserted k 
are distinguished as the First Perf. and Plup. ; and those without it, al- 
though older, as the Second. See 289, b, c. 


CBAs? DE Re Vil: 


- PREFIXES OF CONJUGATION. 


277. The Greek verb has two prefixes: the 
_ AvGMENT and the ReDUPLICATION (32). 
I. The AvementT (augmentum, merease) pre- 
fixes e- in the SECONDARY TENSES of the Jndica- 
tive, to denote past time (271 d). 


a. If the verb begins with a consonant, the e- constitutes a 
distinct syllable, and the augment is termed SYLLABIC: as, 


212 PREFIXES OF CONJUGATION. —- AUGMENT. § 277. 


Avw to loose, yrapit{w recognize, pinta throw ; Impf. €dAdov, éyva- 
pigov, éppurrov (146) ; Aor. édtoa, eyvapica, eppupa. . 

b. Ifthe verb begins with a vowel, the e- unites with it, and 
the augment is termed TEMPORAL. 

c. The syllabic augment is so named, because it increases the number 
of syllables ; the temporal (temporalis, from tempus, time), because it in- 
creases the time, or quantity, of an initial short vowel. For the syllabic 


augment before a vowel, see 279 b. The breathing of an initial vowel re- 
mains the same after the augment. 


278. RuLes ror THE TemporaL AuGMENT (7). a. The 
prefix e- unites with a to form n, and i the other vowels, if 
short, to form the cognate long vowels : 

*adiKéw to injure, aBA€w contend, emri{e ae tkeTevo supplicate, dp0dw 
erect, ‘UBpi{w insult ; Impf. (a) hdixovy, HOXouv, ( (€€) Ame for, (é¢)’txérevov, 
(2o)SoGou, (éu)” TBputov « Aor. 7diknoa, HOAnoa, HAmioa, tkérevoa, &e. 

b. In like manner, the e- unites with the prepositive of the 
diphthong at, and also of av and o not followed by a vowel in 
the stem : as, 

_ aitéw to ask, aifdave increase, olktl{@ pit y, orepar think ; Impf. (éar) 
qyrouv (109), nvEavov, akrifov, wiunv: Aor. Frnoa, niénoa, @xtica, wHOnv. 

c. In other cases, the e- is absorbed by the initial vowel or 
diphthong, without producing any change : as, 

Hyéopar to lead, apedéw profit, exw yield, oiwvlfopar augur, oirdte 
wound ; Impf. (én) tryovunp, wpédouy, elkov, olwrigiunv, o’ragov * Aor. 7Yn- 
oduny, d@édqea, etéa, olwvicdunv, ovTaca. 

d. But in verbs beginning with ev, a few beginning with ot, eixd{e fo 
conjecture, and avatyw to dry, usage is variable: as, evkafov and in Att. 
also 7jKafov, avdvOny and nidvOnv: edyopar pray, evédunv and nvédunv - 
oiotpde goad, olctpyoa or dorpyca Kur. Bac. 32. i is also changed in 
yew and jdew (45 m, 46 a). 


279. a. The verbs BovAopa to will, divapa to be able, and 
péAXw fo purpose, sometimes add the temporal to the syllabic 
augment, particularly in the later Attic : as, 

EBovrouny and 7pBovrdunv, eduvHOnv and 7duvAOnr, Ewedrov and FHuedrov. 
Like forms are found from drodav’w enjoy, and mapavouéw transgress. 

b. In a few verbs beginning with a vowel, the e- constitutes 
a distinct syllable, with, sometimes, a double augment : as, 


dyvipe to break, gata: dvolyw to open, dvéyryov (278 b), dvéwta. Add 
adlokopar to be captured, avbdve (Ion. and poet.) please, Opdw sce, olpéw 
mingo, &0éw push, dvéopar buy, and some poetic, chiefly Epic, forms: as, 
ewpwory bet A. 3. 


c. In a few verbs beginning with e, the usual contraction of 
ee into e takes place (121): as, 
édw to permit, elwy, eldoa. Add e0i{w to accustom, leew roll, xo 


draw, trw be occupied with, _pyatopor work, tprw and ‘eprbgia serpo, creep, 
éotideo cirtertain, txw hawe ; the Aorists fdov took, etca (lon. and poet.) 


——7 


e2ol, REDUPLICATION. 213 


set, eluev, eiunv, etOnv (45k, n); and Plup. elorjxew fr. Perf. orga (45 f) 
stand. So ei from éi (119) in the Aor. efdov, eldéunv (s. 16-, 50), I saw. 

d. An initial ¢ followed by o unites with this vowel, instead of uniting 
with the augment : as, éoprate to celebrate a feast, (€e0)éopragov. So, in 
the Plup., éskew, and the poet. és\rew, édpyew, fr. Perf. €ouxa seem, 
toda hope, topya have wrought. 

e. The forms in b, c, and d are to be referred, in part at least, to an 
original digamma or o (140): as, éragav éaéav y. 298, iv 2. 20; (éFa) 
éavdave Hdt. 9. 5, éjvdave y. 143, (éFa)éade Hdt. 1. 151, (€FFa)edadev 
(cf. 171, 217) &. 340 ; éveprov (cé}etprov Soph. O. C. 147, (écer)etorjxew 
(cf. 141). In a very few cases, a form resembling the augmented is found 
out of the Indicative : as, Part. xar-edéas Lys. 100. 5. 

f. An initial a, chiefly when followed by a vowel, remains in the aug- 
mented tenses of a very few verbs, mostly poetic: as, atlw to hear, diov 


(yet émjice Hdt. 9. 93). See dvadioxw (50). So €ddAnvicOny (that the 


word “E\Ayv may not be disguised), Th. 2. 68, and in poetry éfdunr, xae- 
founv, Asch. Eum. 3, Pr. 229. In these words ¢ is long by position. 


280. Il. The Repurrication (reduplico, éo re- 
double) doubles the initial letter of the COMPLETE 


TENSES im all the modes, to denote completed action 
(273 e). 

a. Rue. If the verb begins with a szngle consonant, or with 
a mute and liquid (except yv), the initial consonant is repeated, 
with the insertion of ¢; but otherwise, the reduplication has 
the same form with the augment. In the PLUPERFEcT, the 
augment is prefixed to the reduplication, except when this has 
the same form with the augment. ‘Thus, 

Ate to loose, Perf. €dZca, Plup. é\édvcew + ypddw write, yéypaga, 
eyeypagew dridéw love, wedirnxa (159 a), éredirjcew: parpwdé prate, 
éppaywinka (159 e), é6sapwdyncew * yrwpl{o (277 a), éyvdpixa, eyvwplew * 
{nAdw emulate, Efprwxa ebdSopar lic, Epevsuar- orehavdw crown, éore- 
gavwxa* Abdikéw (278 a), HdlkynKa, HOixjxew+ adkdvw (278b), nvEnuac - 
Hyéopar (278 c), Hynua* opdw (279 b), Espada, Ewpdxew * épyatopar (279 c), 
elpyacuat’ elxa, elxew (45k). 

b. In a few cases, the first of two other consonants is repeated, espe- 
cially if there has been syncope: as, rerdwviue to spread (s. wera-, wra-) 
TénmTayar* piviokw remind, péuynuar’ kTdouac acquire, xéxrnuat, 1. 7. 3, 
but also @crnuat (properly lon., as Hdt. 2. 42, yet also Aisch. Pr. 795, 
Pl. Prot. 340 d, e). 

c. Verbs beginning with Bd, yA, and a few others vary: as, BAacrdyw 
to bud, BeBasrnxa and €B\dorynKka: yidw carve, yéyhupmar and éyummac. 
For éotxa, oAra, éopya, cf. 279 b, d; and for the Pret. olda know, 278 d. 

281. a. In five verbs beginning with a liquid, ¢- or éi- 
commonly takes the place of the regular reduplication, through 
euphonic change : 

AayXdve to obtain by lot, ethnxa and Aédoyxa, et Anypar’ AapBdve take, 
elAnpa, etAnupat and AéAnupar* €éyw collect, etdoxa, eleyuar and déde- 
yuat* pelpopar share, eiuapuat, eludpunv’ s. pe- sy, elpnka, elipnuat. 

b. Some of these forms seem to have arisen from an omitted consonant 
(the roagh breathing in efuapuas, as in éornxa, pointing to an original & ; 





214 PREFIXES OF CONJUGATION. — COMPOUND VERBS. § 281, 


ef. 141, 279 e). They were sometimes imitated by late writers in the Aor. 
Pass.: mapecknpOnoay Dion. H. 168. 3. 

c. Some verbs which begin with &, e, or o, followed by a sin- 
ele consonant, prefix to the usual reduplication the two first 
letters of the root : as, ddeipw to anoint, addndupa, adnridev, adp- 
Aryupars eAavyw drive, éAndaka, eAnAakewv + Gpvcow dig, dpapuyxa. 

d. This prefix is termed by grammarians, though not very appropri- 
ately (87 b), the Attic Reduplication. It seldom receives an augment in 
the Plup. (c), except in the verb dkote to hear: éxyjxoa, commonly 7Kn- 
koew (Hdt. dxnxdev) ; so wpwpucro vii. 8. 14. This reduplication prefers 
a short vowel in the penult: as, dd7jdupa, though #recpa* éAjAvOa, Pf. of 
Epxouat (50). In éypryopa (éyeipw wake), v. 7. 10, the second consonant is 
also prefixed ; and in the Ep. éuvjuixe (qudw bow) X. 491, € lengthened 
by an inserted consonant is used, instead of repeating %. 

e. When the augment and reduplication have a common form, this 
form is not to be explained in both upon the same principle. Thus, in 
the Aor. éyvwpica (277 a) € is prefixed to denote past time, but in the 
Perf. éyvwprxa (280) it is a euphonic substitute for the full redupl. ye-. 
In like manner, analogy would lead us to regard the Aor. #dixnoa (278 a) 
as contracted from éadcxyoa, but the Perf. 76/cnxa (280), as contracted from 
dadixnxa, the initial vowel being doubled to denote completeness of action. 
Some irregularities in the reduplication appear to have arisen from an 
imitation of the augment : as, éwpdxa (280 a). 


282. III. Prerixes 1n Composition. 1. Verbs compounded 
with a preposition, receive the augment and reduplication after 
the preposition : thus, rpooypddw to ascribe, mpooéypapov, mpooye- 
ypapa: e&edavvw drive out, é&nravvov, éEehndaka. 

a. Before the prefix ¢-, prepositions ending in a consonant which is 
changed in the theme, resume that consonant ; and those ending in a 
vowel, except wept and mpé, regularly suffer elision (128). The final vowel 
of wpé often unites with the e- by crasis (126 y). Thus, é48dddw to throw 
in (150), évéBaddov: &kBddrw throw out (165), é&€BadrXov + aroBddw throw 
away, améBaddov: ameprBddtrw throw around, meptéBaddov: mpoBdddr\w 
throw before, mpoéBaddov and mpotBadXovr. 

b. A few verbs receive their prefixes before the preposition ; a few re- 
ceive them both before and after ; and a few are variable: as, émlorapar 
to understand, jrirdunv: évoydéw trouble, qvoxdouw, hvaxdrnka* Kalevdo 
sleep, éxdfevbor, kabnddov, and xabebdov (278 d). These exceptions to the 
rule are chiefly in those compounds in which the simple verb is not in 
common use, so that the composition is lost sight of. 

c. Some derivative verbs, resembling compounds in their form, follow 
the same analogy : as, Stairdw to regulate (from diacra mode of life), diy- 
Thoa and édiyjrnoa, Seduyrnxa > exkAnoratw hold an assembly (éxxyola), 
éfexnolafov, nxx\nolafov, and éxxAnolafov (étexxAnolacay v. 1. Th. 8. 93) ; 
éemoratéw command (émirdrns), éreordre: ii. 8. 11; maporvéw act the 
drunkard (rdpowos), érapyvnoa v. 8. 4; éyyvdw pledge (evyytn), yyewr, 
vii. 1. 22, éveytwv, &c. 


283. 2. Verbs in which dve-, 2dl, precedes a vowel which 


the augment changes (§ 278), commonly receive their prefixes 
after this particle : as, dvcapeotéw to be displeased, dvanpécrour. 


. 





§ 284. DIALECTIC USE. 215 


So, sometimes, with «d, well: evepyeréw benefit, evepyérovy and 
ednpyerouv. 


3. Other verbs in which there is composition, receive the 
augment and reduplication at the beginning : as, Noyoraew to 
fable, éhoyorotovwys Svotvyéw fare ill, eSvotixnca, Sedvatiynka ° 
evTuxXéw prosper, evTvxovy OY nUTvxovv (278d); Svowréw shame, 
_eOve@mrour. 


a. With, however, doubtful or rare variations ; as in some compounds 
of movéw: wdoreroinuevyn (Vv. 1. wooroinuévn) v. 38. 1. So immorerpépnka, 
Lycurg. 167. 31. y 


DIALECTIC USE. 


284. a. It was long before the use of the augment as the sign of 
past time became fully established in the Greek. In the old poets it 
appears as a kind of optional sign, which might be used or omitted at 
pleasure: thus, @@yxev, Ojxe, A. 2, 55; ds paro, ws dato, A. 33, 188 ; 
éBare, Bare, A. 473, 480; dpwper, pupa, D. 493, 498. Hom. regularly 
omits it with the dual in -tnv. The omission of the reduplication is rare 
in Hom., chiefly found in some preteritive forms : as, “dywya command, 
a. 269 (so retained in Hat. and Att. poets), @ruar wear, w. 250, &pxarae 
II. 481. But in the Att. redupl., he does not always lengthen the second 
vowel : as, d\dAnuac V. 74, ddd AvKrnuae K. 94. 

b. This license continued in Ionic prose in respect to the temporal auq- 
ment, and the augment of the Plup., and was even extended to the re- 
duplication when it had the same form with the temporal augment : as, 
dyov, fyyov, Hdt. 1. 70, 3. 47; dm7ddake, dradddocero, Id. 1. 16, 17; 
amehavvovro, dm avvoy, Id. 7. 210, 211 ; dédoxro Id. 5. 96 ; dpOn, &Waro, 
aupevns, épyafovro, Karépyaoro, xareipyacuévov Id. 1. 19, 86, 66, 128. 
So, more rarely, in respect to the syl/abic augment, and the reduplication 
having the same form : as, vee or éviee Hdt. 1. 155 ; mapecxevddaro, ma- 
oy aren Id. 7. 218, 219 ; and even, for euphony’s sake, éradiA\byyTro 
Id. 1. 118. 

e. In respect to the augment of the Pluperfect, and of the impersonal 
éxpfjv, this freedom remained even in Attic prose : as, #5 rereheuT HKeL, 
dmodedpdxer, vi. 4. 11, 13, diaBeBHxer vii. 3. 20 (this omission of the aug- 
ment occurs chiefly after a vowel) ; éxpqv Cyr. 8. 1. 1, oftener xpjv Rep. 
A. 3. 6. Of the poets, the lyric approached the nearest to the freedom of 
the old Epic, while the dramatic, in the iambic trimeter, were confined 
the most closely to the usage of Attic prose. Yet even here cases occur 
of the omission of the syllabic augment (though not undisputed by crit- 
ics), chiefly in the narratives of messengers (kindred to Epic recital) and 
at the beginning of a verse: as, xrUrnoe Soph. O. C. 1606, pliynoay 1607, 
Owiigev 1624, kddrec 1626. 

d. For such forms as épefov y. 56, epetev B. 274, &prWe Mosch. 3. 32, 
and for such as €deev A. 33, \daBe O. 371, Eupaber p. 226, &veov ®. 11, 
ésoeva E. 208, see 171. For Perf. efuarr. 72, ‘@inkws, K. 98, ‘donuévos 
€. 2, ef. 279¢, f. For the Dor. d@yov for fyov (Theoc. 13. 70), &c., see 
130a. For pepyrwuéva, &c., see 159e. On the other hand, we find, 
after the analogy of verbs beginning with 6, uuope A. 278, éoounar N. 79. 
For dSeidexro I. 224, Seldocxa A. 555, deldce D. 34, elouxviac D. 418, see 
134a. For xexAjjicra: and éxAjiorac Ap. Rh. 4. 618, 990, see 280 c. 


alee, pay 


216 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. § 284. 


e. In the Epic language, the 2 Aor. act. and mid. often receives the 
reduplication, which remains through all the modes, while the Ind. ad- 
mits the augment in addition (especially in case of the Att. redupl.) : as, 
dédae 0. 448, xexduw A. 168, KexvOwor §. 303, ANeAdxwot H. 80, AeXaBEoOar 
6. 3888, NeAdOovro A. 127, NeXdxovro Hom. Mere. 145, weudmorew Hes. Se. 
252, aumemahwy I’. 355, rerayov A. 591, rervxovro A. 467, rerumévres Call. 
Di. 61 ; with the angment sometimes added, xéxXero A. 508, éxéxdero Z. 
66, mérAnyov 0. 264, érérAnyov E. 504, réppade &. 500, erédpadov K. 
127, réruev Z. 374, ererwev 515, rérwomer Theoc. 25. 61, répve N. 362, 
érepve A. 397; Att. Redupl. #yayev A. 179, aydyero X. 116, &dadxe VY. 
185, dpapov M. 105, #oape A. 110, évévirrev (v. 1. evévurrev or évéuorev) O. 
546, VY. 473, @pope B. 146. These are redu uplicated at the end of the 
stem : jvimdm-ov from s. évur-, B. 245, and av«d«-ov from épux-, E. 321. 


f. With some of these 2 ee forms, reduplicated Futures are associat- 
ed: as, xexadwy A. 334, Kexadjoee d. 153 ; memidomev A. 100, remiforo 
K, 204, memiOyow X. 223 ; wedidoluny ct. O77, tepiojoetat O. 215 ; : Kexa- 
povTo Ul. 600, Kexapnocuev O. 98, Kexaproerar p. 266 ; Hxaxe II. 822, aKkd- 
xovro 1. 342, dxaxynoes Hom. Mere. 286. 


g. Some af these reduplicated forms occur in Attic poetry : as, dpdpev 
Soph. El. 147, xexdduevos, erepve, Id. O. T. 159, 1497, é&aragday Eur. Ion 
704, reropjow Ar. Pax 381. “Hyayov, and, less frequent, jyayouny re- 
mained even in Attic prose: as, i. 3. 17, Eq. 4.1. 


CHAPTER le 
AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. 


I. CLASSIFICATION AND ANALYSIS. 


285. The ArrrxEs of the Greek verb may be 
divided into two great CLASSES (30 8): 


I. The Sussectrive, belonging to all the tenses 
of the ACTIVE VOICE, and to the Aorist passe. ° 


II. The Oxnsective, belonging to all the tenses 
of the MIDDLE VOICE, and to the Future passwve. 


a. The affixes of the Aor. pass. are subjective, as derived from the Im ob 
of the verb eiui, to be ; and those of the Fut. pass. are objective, as 

rived from the Fut. of this verb (274). Of the affixes which are not thus 
derived, the subjective represent the subject of the verb as the doer of the 
action, and the ob Wective, as, more or less directly, its object (30 a). 


286. The affixes of the verb may likewise be 
divided into the following ORDERS: 


* eat J 


§ 289. TENSE-SIGNS. 217 


1. The Primary, belonging to the primary tenses of the In- 
dicative mode, and to all the tenses of the Subjunctive. 


2. The Srconpary, belonging to the secondary tenses of the 
‘ndicative, and to all the tenses of the Optative (267 b, 269 c). 


3. The ImprErative, belonging to the Imperative mode. 
4. The Inrinitive, belonging to the Infinitive mode. 
5. The ParrticipiaL, belonging to the Participle. 


-287. These affixes may be resolved into the ° 
pilowing ELEMENTS: A. TENsE-Srans, B. Con- 
SECTING VOWELS, and C. FLEXIBLE ENDINGS. 


a. See 32. When there is no danger of mistake, these elements may 
Le sumply called signs, connectives, and flexives or endings. 


A. Trnse-Siens (82 g). 


288. The fense-signs are letters or syllables 


which are added to the stem in particular tenses, 


and to which the flexible endings are appended, 
either immediately or with connecting vowels. 


In the Fut. and Aor., act. and mid., and in the Mut. Perf., 
the tense-sign is -o-; in the Perf. and Plup. act., it is -*«-; in 
the Aor. puss., it is -Oe-; in the Put. pass., it is -Ono-; in the 
other tenses, it is wanting : 

hU-c-w, Av s-dunv, EAV-c-ouaL* Aédu-K-a, éXNEAU-K-ELy * Av-Oe-inv + Av- 
Onr-onar* V-w, EdAv-duny, AéAv-pat, EheAV-wHV (37). 

a. The sign -0<-, before a vowel, is contracted with it ; other- 
wise, except before vr, it becomes -67- (275d): dv/(bé-0)6a, 
Au‘ Oe inv) Ocinv > dv-Oé-vrw@v, u( Oe vts)Oels + EAV-On-v, AV-On-TL, Av-OF- 
vat (39, 37). 


289. ‘The letters « and 6, of the tense-signs, are sometimes 
omitted. Tenses wanting these letters are termed second ; and, 
in distinction, tenses which have them, though commonly later 
forms, are termed first: as, 1 Perf. mwéweua, 2 Perf. réroba - 
1 Plup. ememetxew, 2 Plup. ememoidew (39); 1 Aor. pass. nyyédOny, 
2 Aor. pass. nyyeAnv: 1 Fut. pass. dyyeA@nooua, 2 Fut. pass. 
dyyeAnoouna (40). See § 274, 276 b. 

a. The tense in the active and middle voices, which is termed the See- 
ond Aorist, is simply an old Present System retained (except the Pres. 
ind.) in an aorist sense, after the formation of a new Present System from 
a later form of the stem (273 d): thus, é\urov and éAcrdéuny (38) are formed 
from the old stem Autr-, in precisely the same way as @Aeuroy and éecrbuqv 
from the new stem Aer-. 

REY. Gk. 10 


eae ae ae LS 
mah >" 


218 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. —— TENSE-SIGNS, § 289. 


b. We have thus, in the three voices, six additional tense-forms, con- 
stituting three systems: viz. (distinguishing the systems in the same way 
as their tenses), the Skvconp Aorist SystEM, the SECOND PERFECT 
SysTEM, and the Seconp Compounp System. The last is found chiefly 
in impure verbs, which want the 2 Aor. System. 

c. The regular or first tenses will be usually spoken of, where no dis- 
tinction is required, simply as the Aorist, the Perfect, &c. ; and their sys- 
tems, as the Aorist System, the Perfect System, &c. 

d. In each system, the form first presented in the tables and rules of 
inflection is regarded as the leading form: and whatever appears in this 
form of any verb in respect to the stem, or the tense-sign, or the wnion of 
the affix with the stem, will be understood as belonging also to the other 
forms of the system, if nothing appears to the contrary. 

e. In each tense, the stem, with the tense-sign and reduplication, if 
these are present, is termed the base of the tense, or the tense-stem ; as in 
the Pres. of Avw, Av-; in the Fut., Ave-; in the Perf. act., NedXuK-. 

f. The regular additions which are made to the base in the Fut. and 
Fut. Perf. throughout, and in the Subjunctive of every tense, are the 
same as in the Pres.: as, AJ-w AUo-w, AU-ers AUT-E1s + AV-omas AUo-omas 
AvOjo-owat NeAV-ouar > Subj. Av-w AVo-w NeNUK-w. 


B. Connectina Vowets (32h), ion 


290. The connecting vowels serve to unite the 
flexible endings with the stem or tense-sign, and — 
assist in marking the distinctions of mode and 
tense. 


a. The d4or., Perf., and Plwp. pass. have no connecting vowel in the 
Ind., Imy., Inf., and Part. With this exception, the regular formation 
is according to the following rules. But wherever these admit either an 
A vowel or another vowel, it will be understood that the 4 vowel belongs 
to the Aorist (273 b, ce), and the other vowel to the remaining tenses ; and 
that, wherever they admit either an O or an # vowel, the O vowel is used 
before a liquid, and the # vowel before other letters (114 ¢). 


b. The connective is regularly contracted with an a, €, or o preceding ; 
and also with the flexives -t, -at, and -o, except in the Optative. 


291. 1. In the Inpicattvs, the connective is -a- in the Aor. 
and Perf., -e- in the Plup., and -o- or -e- in the other tenses : 
Aor. €dvo-a-pev, édvo-d-pnv + Pf. Aedve-a-re + Plup. eAedvu-ec-v+ Pr. 
Av-o pev, Av-e-re> Impf. €Av-o-v, Edrv-e-s + Fut. Ado-o-pat, Ave-e-rae* 
Fut. Perf. XeAvo-6 peda, AedAto-€-oHe. 

a. In the sing. of the Pres. and Fut. act., the connectives, by simple 
protraction or the absorption of the flexives, became -@- and -e-: Av(o-u, 
0-a)w, AUow, AU(E-s)ets, AUoers, AU(E-T, €-€)et, AUT. See 275a,d, 160f, 
120s. 


b. In the 3 Sing. of the Aor. and Perf. act., -e- takes the place of -a-: 
and in the 3 Plur. of the Plup., it commonly takes the place of -e-: 
&\vo-c, AAV K-€ (273 C, e) 5 AeAUK-€-cay oY AeAUK-Et-TAaP. 





—a oe 


§ 293. CONNECTING VOWELS. 219 


e. The original connective of the Plup. was -ea-, which remained in the 
Ton. (273 e): as, 7dea =. 71, Hat. 2- 150, éreOjreas w. 90, Aédce B. 832, 
nocev W. 29, éyeydvee Hdt. 1. 11, ouvndéare Id. 9. 58. An early contrac- 
tion into -7- is especially old Att., but also occurs in the Ep. and Dor. : 
as, 1 Sing. 767 Soph. Ant. 18, ézerdévOn Ar. Eccl. 650 ; 28. 9dys Soph. 
Ant. 447, ydnc0a 7. 93; 3S. #5n A. 70, Soph. O. T. 1525, éded4On Theoe. 
10. 38. By precession (114s) -y- passed into -a-, which became the com- 
mon connective, and in the 3 Sing. is already found in Hom. (arising from 
~€€) : as, €orjKer D. 557, éorijxew, adrod (v retained from the form in ~€eV, 
163 b) W. 691 ; so AeAolwrer Theoc. 1. 139. In the 3 Plur., the connect. 
ing @ in -~ay seems to have so supplied the place of an a preceding that 
the form -eray prevailed, the longer -acav being mostly late. So, in 
2 Pl., ndere for Adecre, Eur. Bac. 1345; 1 Pl. fSeuev v. 1. Soph. O. T. 1232. 


292. 2. The Sunsuncrive takes the connectives of the 
Pres. ind., lengthening -o- to -o- and -e- to -n- (§ 272. 2): Ind, 
and Subj. Av @, Avo-w: AVews AV NS, Av-ee AU H, AV-0 pev AV-w-pev, 
Av ere Un Te, Avlo-varjovor AV(w-var)wou AV O-pat AV-w-pat, Avo e- 
Tat Avo 7 Tat. 


293. 3. The Oprartive has, for its connective, « (the general 
sign of the mode, 272. 1), either alone or with other vowels. 


Ruxnz. If the tense has no connecting vowel in the Ind., and 
its base ends in a, e, or 0, then the Opt. has -cy- in the subjective 
forms, and simply -t- in the objective ; in other cases, it has -at- 
oY -o-: Avdety v (37): iora-in-v, icra-t-uny, TUOe in-v, TiOe-i-pnv, Si- 
60-in-v, did0-t-pnv (45) ; Avo apt, Avo-ai-pyp « Av-ou-pt, Av of-pyv, Ado- 
orpt, AvOno oi pyv, AeAvo-oi pv: ‘-or-pt, Serxrd Ot-pt, Oerkvu of pny 
(45 a, c, m). 

a. In Optatives in -inv, the n is often omitted in the plural and 
dual, especially in the 3 Plur., where the longer form is much less 
used in classic Greek: foraipev, riOcire, didotev, ioratrov (45); AvOciev 
(37); but mapadoincay ii. 1. 10, cwOeinoav Cyr. 8. 1. 2. 

b. In contract active forms, the connective -ou often assumes 7 in 
the Pres., and sometimes in the Fut.: @sAé-o1-pu, contr. idot-pe or 
prroin-v (42); havoips or havoiny (40). 

e. The form of the Opt. in -otny, for -ouws, is called the Attic Optative, 
as especially used by Att. writers, though not confined to them : evwp am 
Hdt. 1. 89, of.oinre Theoc. 12. 28. It is most employed in the sing., 
where it is the common form in contracts in -éw and -é, and still more in 
those in -éw. In the 3 Plur. it is very rare: doxolyoav Asch. 41. 29. It 
is also found in the 2 Perf., as wero0o!n (38) Ar. Ach. 940, mpoednrvBolns 
Cyr. 2. 4. 17 ; and in the 2 Aor. of the simple verb éyw to have, though 
its compounds have commonly the form in -Ount* ocxoin Cyr. 7. 1. 36, 
karaoxos Mem. 3. 11. 11. So doinv (45m) Symp. 4. 16, and some very 
rare forms : as, 1 Pf. éddoxoln Crat. ap. Ath. 305 b., 2 Aor. aryayoinv Sap. 
[117]. 

d. The Aor. opt. act. has, in the 2 and 3 Sing. and the 3 Plural, a 
second and far more common form, in which the connective is that 
of the Ind. with e prefixed: as, Néa-eva-s, Nio-ete, AbG -ELa-P. 





220 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. — CONNECTIVES. § 293. 


e. This form, like many other remains of old usage, was termed by 
grammarians 4olic. It was little used in the Dor. It greatly prevailed 
in the Att. and Ion., but not exclusively : jreivecas I’. 52, wavoece Hdt. 3. 
30, voulcee Th. 2. 35, ayyetdecey Theoc. 12. 19, dpEecay Th. 6. 11; riny- 
get ddéoat CE B. 4; yjoas Pl. Gorg. 477 b, Xeect isch. Ag. 170, $00: 
caev Th. 8. 49, drodéfacev Hdt. 8. 35. 

f. The Opt. avoided the immediate attachment of the short flexives -y 
and -vr to t, and in various ways. Before -vr, € was inserted : as, vot-ev, 
Avoat-ev (300). Before -v, 4 was inserted, which was then continued 
through the singular, and sometimes even passed into the plur. and dual ; 
or the protracted -pt was used rather than -v (296); or after e in the Aor. 
(by precession for -at-, 114), the -v seems to have passed into a, which 
was then adopted as part of the connective (cf. 273 ¢, e), and so remained, 
after this form of the 1 Sing. went into disuse. Even in thte longer mid- 
dle form, a similar change of v appears in the Ion. and poet. -ofaro, -alaro 
for -o.wre, -a:vro. These prolonged forms of the Opt. may have been 
used both from euphonic preference, and as strengthening the expression 
of contingency (272 d). 


294. 4. In the Imperative, the connective is -a-, -e-, or -o-; 
in the INFINITIVE, it is -a- or -e-; in the PARTICIPLE, it is -a- or 
-o-: Avo a Tw, Avo-d-cOav, Av-é-Tw, AV €-obe, AV O VT@V* Avo-a-cbat, 
hoo at, Av-e-cOat, NeAvK € vat+ Avo d pevos, AvG(a-yTs\ds, hua 6 pevos, 
Avio vTs)w@v, AeAvK(o-TS as. 

a. In the Imv., -a- passes into the kindred -o- before the flexive -v 
(114 b, c, 297 c): ABs(aA, av)ov. 


b. In the Inf. of the Pres. and Fut. act., -e- is lengthened to -e- 
(275 d) : Nv(e-v)e-v, AVo-EL-v. 


C. Frexrste ENpInas. 


295. The flexible endings (flexibilis, changeable) 
are the chief instruments of conjugation, marking 
by their changes the distinctions of person, number, 
voice, and, in part, of Zense and mode. 3 


a. In the finite modes they are essentially pronouns, affixed instead of 
being, as in English, prefixed (271 b). They are exhibited in 321, accord- 
ing to the classification in 285s ; and are repeated below. 

>. Where the secondary endings differ from the primary, they are usu- 
ally shorter, on account of the augment (271. 1). 


296. 1 Sina: -n (ju, », *)3 -pat, -unv. The flexive -p, 
after -a- connective, and, in primary forms, after -o- and -w- con- 
nective, is wanting ; after -o- and -a-, and in the nude Present 
(303 a), it becomes -w:; in other cases, it becomes v (275 a): 
as, 

é\io-a, AEM K-a, 75-€a 75 (46 a) 5 AV(o-w)@, AV(w-n)e@ * AU-ot-pt, AUo-at- 
pu (2931), torn-me (45) 3 @dd-o- Y, €\eli'x-eu-v (273 e), E\vOn-v, vOeln-v* 
piroly-v, pavoly-v (293 b) ; tarny, isratyv (45), Cf. Lat. Zu(o-m)o, lwé. 


§ 297, 7 FLEXIBLE ENDINGS. 221 


a. In those cases in which the flexive -p is usually said to be wanting, 
it may still be regarded as virtually present in a vowel into which it has 
been changed or absorbed ; and so, in some cases, the flexive -r of the 
3 Pers. See 273 c, e, 291 a. 

b. In the Opt., -y, for -~1, occurs very rarely for the sake of the metre: 
Tpépow Eur. Fr. Inc. 152. 


297. 2 SinG. : -o (c6a), -0 (61, s, €, », *) 3 -oat,-oo. a. For 
-s, a stronger form was -o6a (271 ¢; cf. -stz in Lat. Perf, and 
the Eng. and Germ. -s¢). 


b. This was retained as the common form in jjc6a, épnoOa (451, u), and 
oic0a (46a); and was good Attic in 7decOa, HdnoOa (46a), and jewa 
(45m). Other examples are furnished by the poets (particularly in the 
Subj., by Hom.) : as, €0é\no0a A. 554, elrnoba T. 250; Bddowba O. 571, 
kNalowa Q. 619; TiOnoba ct. 404, dld2c8a T. 270; eyersOa, pirercOa, Sap. 
89, €0é\no6a Theoc. 29. 4, xpfjcda Ar. Ach. 778. This form, like many 
others belonging to the old language, is termed by grammarians olic. 


c. The Imv. flexive -6 is dropped after -e- connective ; with 
-a- connective, it becomes -ov ; after a short vowel in the stem, it 
becomes -s in the 2 Aor., but in the Pres. unites as e with the 
preceding vowel ; in other cases, it becomes -@ (275 a, 160 f) : 
as, 


AO(e-A)e (cf. Lat. luc) ; NGc(a-O)ov (294a; cf..169c) ; Ads, dbs, és (45h); 
tor(a-0, a-e, 120 h)n, rlO(e-e)er, 5/5(0-e)ov, Seixv(u-e)v (45 a) ; TplBy-A (38), 
AVOn-Te (159 c) 3 ywoO, 5paGe (45h) ; toOr, 5€5c6c (46). 

d. Pyui and eiuc form the Pres. imv. in -0.: P70, °%H%. The poets 
and late writers sometimes give this form to yet other Presents in -pu ; 
and they sometimes shorten 676: and o76, in composition, to Ba and 
ora, perhaps it to ef: dpvi'Oe rouse, Z. 363, thee be gracious, Theoe. 15. 
143 ; xaraBa descend, Ar. Ran. 35, dvdora Acts 12. 7, éfee (perhaps as 
Fut. of command) Ar. Nub. 638. 

e. In the flexives -ca and -oo, ¢ is dropped between two vow- 
els, except in the Perf. and Plup. pass., and sometimes the nude 
Pres. and Impf. (275 b) : as, 

hU(e-cat, €-ar)y or Aver (123 b); Av(e-o)ov, EAU(e-0)ov, EAVT(a-0)w (120s) ; 
U-got-0, Avo-at-o* HéAv-cat, AéAv-co, éAéAv-Go* Lora-cat, tcra-co and 
ior (a-o)w, riGe-cat and ri6(e-at)y, €0(€-0)ov, dé50-co and 4/d(0-0)ov, d(o-0)od 
(45 ¢, d, i). 

f. The contraction of -eat into -e is a special Attic form, which was 
much used by pure writers, especially the more colloquial, and which, 
after yielding in other words to the common contraction into -y, remained 
in BovAa, ote, and der, as the only good Attic. 


g. The use of -ot for -a-o in the Aor. imv. seems to be an irregular con- 
traction with precession (118 b): Adc(a-co, a-o)at. The tripling of the 
form \vow was thus avoided, while the three forms in -oat varied in ac- 
centuation. 

h. In verbs in -pt, -cat remained more frequently than -vo, and with 
only rare exceptions : as, poet. éricra Aisch. Eum. 86, dvvg or dvvy (115) 
Soph. Ph. 798, 7é@y (45). Other exceptional cases occur, both of the 
retention and omission of the o, especially in the poets. 


me ser. ee 
222 CONJUGATION. — FLEXIBLE ENDINGS. § 298. 


298. 3 SING.: -r (ot, *) -T@ 5 -Tat, -To, -7Ow. The flexive -r 
becomes -o. in the nude Pres., but elsewhere is omitted : as, 

isr(n-T)yor, torn, Sidwor, €didw (45 a, bd) 5 dv(e-7)e, AV(E-7, €-€)et, EAuce. 
See 275 a, 296 a. 

a. In éori (45 1), -te is naturally preferred to -ov after o. 


299. 1 anv 2 PLuR., wirn THE DUAL: -pev, -peOa (pea) ; 
-re, -00e 3 -rov, -cOov ; -tnv, -cOnv 3 -twv, -cOwv. a. The 1 Pers. is 
the same in the plur. and dual, having, for its subjectwe ending, 
-pev, and for its objective, -peOa (poct. -weoOa, 271. 2): Avo-pev, 
Avo-neGa or, for the sake of the metre, Avo-peoOa. 

b. The 1 Dual primary had a special form in -peOoy (271. 2), of which 
only three classical examples have been found, all occurring in poetry be- 
fore a vowel : mwepidwueOov VY. 485, edXelupeOov Soph. El. 950, dpucmePor 
Id. Ph. 1079 (the two last at the end of a line). Two examples more are 
ascribed by Athenzeus (98 a) to a word-hunter (6v24aToOjpas), Whose affec- 
tation is a subject of ridicule. 

c. The 2 Plur. always ends in -e. The 2 Dual is obtained 
by changing this vowel into -ov; and the 3 Dual, by changing 
it into -ov in the primary inflection, into -nv in the secondary, 
and into -wv in the zmperative: 2 Pl. \ve-re, eAve re 2 Du. Ave- 
Tov, édve-rov: 3 Du. Averov, éAverny, AvEToY. 

d. The 2 and 3 Dual secondary were not always distinct in form : as, 
in Hom. 3 Pers. érevxerov N. 346, QwpjocecPov N. 301; in Attic, 2 Pers. 
eixérqv Soph. O. T. 1511, 7AXaEer gv Eur. Alc. 661, evpérny, erednunsar yy 
Pl. Kuthyd. 273 e. 


300. 3 PLUR.: -pr (vot, Vy €V, gay), -vT@v OY -Twoay , -vTat, 
-vT0, -cOwv or -cbwcav. a. The flexive -v7, in the primary tenses, 
becomes -vov. In the secondary, after -o- or -a- connective, it be- 
comes -y ; after a diphthong in the Opt., -ev ; but, otherwise, 
-cav (270 a, C). 

NU(o-vot, o-acrovor, AUToVTL, NEAUK(a-voL)GoL, AVwor* ioTaot, TiHetor 
(45 a) ; €dd-o-v, &dc-a-v > Avow-ev, NUoat-ev, uOel-ev > EXehUKE-cay, ENVO7- | 
cay, toTa-cav, éornoay, &Oe-cay (45 b, h). See 160, 143 b, 156, 293 f. 

b. In the Perf. and Plup. pass. of zmpure verbs, the 3d Pers. — 
pl. is either formed in -arat and -ato (158) or, more commonly, 
supplied by the Part. with efoi and joay (451): as, epOdp-ara 
Th. 3. 13, from POcipw (8. POup-) to waste, terpippevor eal, weer 
opevor Hoav (39 , 

ce. The forms in -atat and -aro are termed Jonic. Before these end. 
ings, a labial or palatal mute must be rowgh (, x), and a lingual, middle 
(8) : as, from rpérw (s. tpam-) to turn, (rerpam-vrat) rerpdgdarac Pl. Rep. 
533b; from rdoow (39; reray-vrac) rerdxaTat iv. 8. 5, érerdxaro Th. 7. 4. 

See 338 f. 

d. In the Imy., the older and shorter forms in -vreav and 

-cOav (termed Attic, 87 b), are the more common (272 e). 


§ 304, _ UNION OF STEM AND AFFIXES. 223 


e. The forms in -woav do not oceur in Hom., and scarcely in Hat. or 
the Dramatists : ésrwoavy Hdt. 1. 147. They may have been later pre- 
ferred, as distinct in form from the Part. and 3 Du. In the less frequent 
éstwy Cyr. 4. 6. 10, and irwy Asch. Kum. 32 (451, m), the old plural 
form remained without change (272e). 


S01. INFINITIVE: -y, -va, -«; -c6a. The subjective ending, 
after -e.- connective, is -v; after -a- connective, -.; but otherwise, 
~vat : Av-ev-v, AVo-et-v* Ado-a-t (290 b) 5 AeAvKé-vat, AVOA-var* iord- 
vat, Secxvv vat, Oei-vat, Sod-vac (49). 

a. In the Pres. and Fut. act., the old form of the Inf. in -e-v prevailed, 
and obtained an t in the prolonged connective, in lieu of the Dat. sign v 
annexed in other forms. See 272a. 


302. PaArTIcIPLE: -vr-s (t-s) ; -wev-os. For the change of v 
to a connecting vowel in the Perf. act., see 273 e; for the de- 
clension of the Part., 26, 232s; for the Verbals in -ros and -réos, 
269 d, 272 c¢. 


303. Remarks. a. Affixes and forms which have no connecting 
vowel are termed nude; and others euphonic (183a). Tenses are so 
termed according to the affixes of the Ind. The REGULAR AFFIXES of the 
verb are those which are assigned to the tenses in 35 and 36, the nude 
Pres. and Inpf. and the Second Tenses excepted. These affixes are open 
in the Pres. and Impf., and c/ose in the other tenses (172c). The 2 Aor. 
act. and mid. has the affixes of the Impf. ind., and of the Pres. in the 
other modes (289 a), with some variation of accent and, in the nude form, 
of euphonic change (38, 297 c). The other Second Tenses have the affixes 
of the First, with the omission noted in 35, 36, 289. In 38, a supple- 
ment of these tenses is added to the general paradigm. 

b. In the study of the Greek verb, the forms should be analyzed 
throughout, and the force of their parts carefully observed. The inflec- 
tion should be repeated, not by a simple act of memory, but by an intel- 
ligent combination of the elements ; which, few in number, produce a 
great and beautiful variety of forms. 

c. Besides the full paradigm in 37, a briefer paradigm of strictly regu- 
lar conjugation is presented in zavw (34), though less approved forms with 
an inserted o also occur (307 e). The leading forms of translation are add- 
ed, which the student will apply, with the requisite changes, to other 
verbs, while the details will appear more fully in Syntax. 


II. UNION WITH THE STEM. 


A. Consonant CHANGES. 


304 JI. When the close affixes follow a consonant, 
changes are often required by general laws: as, 


Tpl(B-cw) po, €ra(y-ca)Ea, mémer(O-car)oar (151) ; rpe(B-ros)wrds (147) ; 
érerpl(B-unv) pany (148); érerd(y-Kew) Kev (149) ; érepd(v-Kew) yKerv (150) ; 
a(v-cw)va, p(av-ca)nva (152). See d9s. 


224 CONJUGATION. —- CONTRACT FUTURE. § 304 


a. In the liquid verbs xXlvw to bend, xptvw to judge, «relvw to slay, 
relvw to stretch, and wXbve to wash, v is omitted before the affixes which 
remain close (152) ; except sometimes in poetry for the sake of the metre, 
and in late writers: KékAywat, €xNlOny (€xAlvOn Z. 468) ; Kéxpixa, éxplOny 
(xpwOévre 0. 48). See 50. In these words, v seems not to have belonged 
to the root. 

b. In other verbs, v characteristic, before p, more frequently becomes 
o, but sometimes becomes p or is dropped: as, tépacuar (40) ; Enpatve 
to dry, é&jpacuat, éEnpauyat, and late é&jpauat. So late Pf. A. rerpaxv«a, 
BeBpadvxa, fr. rpaxivw roughen, Bpadivw delay (150 e). 


305, 2. Future TENSE-SIGN, -o-. In the Fu- 
TURE ACTIVE and MIDDLE, changes affecting the 
tense-sign often bring together two vowels, which 
are then contracted : 


a. Attic Future. In Futures in -tcw from verbs in -if@ of 
more than two syllables, the -o- becomes -e-: as, 


KOU(t-oW, L-EW)LO, KOUL(t-T0, L-E0)LoTuat, KoL(t-oe, t-E€)LEto Oat, KoU(t-cwr)LOV 
(89 d) ; ka@cetv ii. 1. 4. So in kabéfopar to sit, Fut. (s. €6-) cafe(d-c0, 5-€0) 
Sotuac* and a few poet. or later forms: as, re(k-ce)Ketc@ac Hom. Ven. 
127, pa(@-co, O-e0, 131 b)Oeduac Theoc. 11. 60. See rixrw, parddavw, 
éobiw, wivw, in 50. For a like change in liquid Futures, see 152. 

b. Some Futures in -acw and -éow drop the -o-: as, : 

€\atve or éddw to drive, F. éX(a-ow, d-w)&, EX(does)Gs, e\(doew)av or 
édav, éX(dowr)ov* Ted(é-cw, é-w)O, TeA(Ecer)et, TEA(E-co, €é-o)ODuar (42 g) 5 
xXéo pour, F. x(éow)éw, x(éoers, éers)ets, x(€ool~ouae (cf. 309b). So in 
KaNéw CALL, paxopar fight, apdrévvope clothe ; in all verbs in -dvvdpu, 
as oxeddvvimue scatter ; and sometimes in verbs in -dé{e, particularly BiBa fw 
make go. : : 

c. This form of Futures in -ioa, -€ow, and tow, is termed the Aftic 
Future, from its prevalence in Attic writers. It is not, however, confined 
to them ; nor do they employ it without exception : xrepl@ Z. 334; Kara- 
yectv, Suxdv, Hdt. 1. 86, 97 ; éAdoovras vil. 7. 55, redécovow Cyr. 8. 6. 3, 
koutiow Ar. Pl. 768. It is rare in the Opt. : Badsofungy Ar. Pl. 90. Some 
recognize a contract Fut. in a few cases where perhaps the Pres. is used as 
Fut., or a different reading is to be preferred : as, épywotre for épnudeere, 
Th. 3. 58. 


d. Doric Futurs. <A few verbs, in the Put. mid. with an 


active sense, sometimes add e to -o-, after the Doric form 
(325 b): as, 

twhéw to sail, F. rrevcouar and mrev(ce0)rotua* hevtyw flee, pevéouat 
and gevéoduar. Other Att. examples are kdatw weep, véw no, swim, tattle 
sport, wlrtw fall, mvéw blow, xéfw caco, wuvOdvopar inquire. In Hom. 
this form is found in éocetrac B. 393. 

e. The Liquid, Att., and Dor. Futures, from their formation, are in- 
flected like the contract Pres. (42). In a few verbs, the Pres. and Att. 
Fut. have the same form: é€A@, TeX, Kadd. 

f. In a few verbs, the o/d Pres. remained as a Fut., after the formation 
of a new Pres.; or the poets used the same form as both Pres. and Fut. 
(273 a, d): as, éoOlw to cat, F. €douar «. 869, Ar. Nub. 121; alive drink, 


§ 508.  AORIST TENSE-SIGN. INSERTION. METATHESIS. 225 


F. riowa: Cyr. 1. 3.9, x. 160 ; avdo accomplish, éptw draw, raviw stretch, 
also as Fut. A. 365, 454, ¢. 174. For xyevw as Fut., 6. 222, see 50. 


306. 3. Aorist Trense-Sicn. a. The sign of the Aor. is 
omitted in eira sazd, veya bore, €xea poured, éxea poet., burned ; 
and in a few Epic forms, as éoceva E. 208. See dni, hepa, xéw, 
Kai@, Teva, adevw, Saréouat, in 50. For the Liq. Aor., see 152. 

b. The Aor. borrows the Perf. tense-sign in ¢6nxa, éoxa, and 
fa (45). 

These Aorists are used by classic writers only in the Ind., and chiefly 
in the Sing. and 3 Plur., the other forms being supplied by the 2 Aor. : 
éddxate vii. 7.10. In the Middle, the Att. has only the Ind. hxdunv 

(Eur. El. 622) ; while other dialects add é@ynxdunv, K. 31, Onxdmevos Pind. 
P. 4. 52. Late writers extend the use of forms with « in these verbs, and 
sometimes substitute forms with o: Subj. dwxwo. Asop. 78 ; duoyn Jn. 
LY 2: 

e. These peculiar forms in -xa, called 1 Aor. from the connective a, are 
euphonic extensions of the 2 Aor., after the analogy of the Perf. The fiex- 
ive -», passed into a, which became a connecting vowel ; and then x was 
inserted to prevent hiatus (cf. 273¢, e, 276b): €0(y-», n-a)n-K-a, 2Onxas, 
ZOnxe, €Onxav + @6(w-v)wxa, (7v) Axa. This form became common only 
where the flexive had no vowel, i. e. in the Sing. and in the 3d Pers. pl. ; 
and was properly confined to the Ind. act., although a few middle forms 
are found after the same analogy. The nude form disappeared in the Ind. 
act. sing., but remained elsewhere. Cf. 276 b. 


307. 4. INSERTION OF c. In many pure verbs, 
o is inserted before the regular passive affixes be- 
ginning with p, 7, or 0. 

a. This insertion is usual after a short vowel, and (b) fre- 
quent after a diphthong ; but (c) not after a sémple long vowel. 
(d) Exceptions, however, occur both ways ; and (e) some verbs 
are variable. Thus, 

(a) omaw to draw, Pass. Pf. éomd-c-uat, éoraca, eora-c-rat, éord- 
o-uweba, €ora-c-névos, A. éord-c-Onv, I. cra-c-Ojooua* TeTéde-o-pal, eTe- 
éaOnv, TeNeoTéos (42 B) ; (b) céoer-c-uar, EselcOnv, cecards (44) ; éremdev- 
o-ynv (42g); KedXebw command, kexédev-c-pat, KexthevoTat, exeedoOny * 
(c) reriunuat, Pirnrds, EOnAWOqy (42f) 5; (d) AEAVuaL, EAVONY (37) ; BeBov- 
Aevyar, €BovrevOny (44) ; ydw heap, Kéxw-o-wat, ExwaOnv ; (e) Sede do, dé- 
Spapuat, rarely dédpacuar, €dpdcOnv: Krelw shut, xéxrecuac and Kéxecopat, 
éxreloOnv* pépyynpa. remember, éuvyjcOnv: wéravpar, émavdnv and érav- 
cOny (303 c) ; Xpdopar use, Kkéxpynuat, éexphrOnv. 

f. The ¢ is attracted most strongly by 8. When o is thus inserted in 
the Perf. or Plup., the 3 Plur. wants the simple form (300 b): écmracpévoe 
elgi, cevetotpévoe Hoar. 

308. 5. Meraruesis. In a few liquid verbs, the concur- 
rence of consonants is avoided by transposing the stem-mark 
(145 ; cf. 152): as, Badd to throw, kdpyeo labor, répve cut; Pf. 
BéBAnxa, Kexpnka, tétpyKa, for BeBadrka, We.; BeBAnpar, éBANOnY, 
TeTpHoopa, eTuHOny. 

REV. GR. 10* 


226 CONJUGATION. — UNION OF STEM AND AFFIX. § 309. 


B. Voweut CHANGES. 


309. 1. Contraction. The regular open af- 
fixes are contracted with a, e, or o preceding. 


a. Werbs in which this contraction takes place are termed ConTRACT 
Verss or, from the accent of the theme, Perispomena. In distinction, 
other verbs are termed Barytone Verbs (768). The three classes of Con- 
tract Verbs may be distinguished, from the stem-mark, as 4 Verbs, 
E Verbs, and O Verbs. See 7, 42, 120s, 290 b, 303 a. The Latin has 
also three classes of contracts : 4 Verbs (1 Conj.), H Verbs (2 Conj.), and 
I Verbs (4 Conj. ; « here corresponding to the Greek o, as in some other 
formations, 116). See 43. 

b. The verbs xd» to burn, and KX\a&» weep, which have likewise the 
forms kaiw and xdalw, are not contracted. Dissyllabie Verbs in -é@ ad- 
mit only the contractions into e: as, wAéw sail, wéers wets, wréer Te?, 
whéouev, héeTE TheiTe, Téovot. Except S€w bind (thus distinguished from 
déw necd), Td Sobv, T@ Sodvre Pl. Crat. 419a, b; and a few doubtful or 
rare cases, as kay 67 (v. lL. det; fr. dém need) Ar. Pl. 216, Ran. 265 ; éyxys 
(fr. xéw pour) Ar. Vesp. 616. 

c. The Inf. is now commonly regarded as contracted from the old form 
in -ev (272) : Tyu(a-ev) av, rather than reu(a-euv)av, pir(e-ev)etv, Ond(0-ev) ody. 
See 109a. The contract Ind. and Subj. of verbs in -é@ agree in form. 


310. 2. Vowrt LENGTHENED. Before the 
regular close affixes, a short vowel is commonly 
lengthened (a becoming », unless preceded by e¢, 4, 
p, or po, 115 a): as, 


TULLE, Tiunow, TeTlunxa, ETiunOny: drréw, EdpiAnoa, Pryoouat, repidy- 
pat, mepirjcouat’ Syrdw, ednrwoduny, dednrouny, SnwOjoouar (42) ; 
tiw honor, poet., Ticw, érica: iw produce, ptcw, TéepTxa* edo, edow, 
elioa* éoridw, eloridka (279 c) ; Onpaw, éOnpdOny (42 2) ; dxpodopar hear, 
aKpodoouat. 

a. A few verbs vary from the rule in respect to the use of & or 7: thus, 
& becomes n, in titpd bore, and tenses from xpa- to supply need (F. tpH- 
TW, XPHTw, XpHoouar) ; G, in twrovvaopar avenge one’s self, wa- acquire (Tot- 
vicouat, wéradua); & and n, in So.wdw feast, wopirdw fasten, and adodo 
thresh : Oowdcowar Eur. Cycl. 550, éxOownoouar Asch. Pr. 1025. 

b. In the Perf. of rlOnpu and type, € becomes a+ TéPerxa, TEVEruat, etka, 
efuat (45). 


c. In some verbs, the short vowel is retained ; and (d) some 
are variable; as, 


(c) omrdw to draw, ordow, ésrixa: tedéw, érédrcoa, rerédecpar (42 g) ; 
dpdw plow, apbow, npbOnv: (d) 8éw bind, Show, @dnoa, Sédexa, Sédepar * 
Oi, Oicw, ré0¥Ka (44) ; Abw (37) ; Bbw sink, Siow, 5éd7Ka, EdVOnY. 

e. Verbs in -évvipe and -évvvpr, and stems in Aq-, or in v- after a short 
syllable, for the most part retain the short vowel: as, oxedavvipe scatter, 
oKed(aow, 305 b)a, éoxéddca* Kopévvipe satiate, éxdpera, xexdperuat* yeAaw 
laugh, yekaoouat, éyeddcOnv: *aviw accomplish, avicw, WwiKa. 

f. The short vowel is least retained before o in the tense-sign, and 
most before 6. 





§ 312. VOWEL CHANGES. 227 


311. 3. VoweL INsErTED. The regular close 
affixes are annexed with the wasertion of n, 


a.) To double consonant stems, except those which end in a 
labial or palatal mute not preceded by o, and those which end in 
a lingual mute preceded by a liquid; as, 

atte, avé-n-cw, nvé-n-uar, nvé-7-Onv: &ipw to boil, HY-n-ca> Bpw go 
away, Appnea pedo delay, wehdjow (41); S{@ smell, Sfnoa* Péookw 
Seed, Booxjow: but wéptre, réupw Upxo, jpta> omrévda, orelcw (41) ; 
mép0w destroy, poet., répow. The stems here excepted might be referred. 
to the class of simple mute stems, by taking the last consonant only for 
the stem-mark. 

b.) To Lguid stems in which a diphthong precedes the stem- 
mark ; and to a few in which e precedes : as, 

BotAopar to will, Bovd-7-comat, BeBovr-yn-uwar* Yalpw rejoice, xatpjow * 
€0éXw or BiAw wish, EVeAjow or Oed7ow* pedo concern, éuédnoa, EwedHOny > 

 €p- inquire, Epjoouars pévw remain, vépw distribute, F. werd, veo, but 
PE. weuévnxa, vevéunxa (cf. 150 e). 

c.) To a few other stems : as, 

Séa to need, Se-1)-cw, Sedé-n-xa + ev8w sleep, ebdjcw* olopar think, oljco- 
Mat, giOnv: olyopar depart, oixjcouat. 

In a few verbs, € is inserted instead of y (cf. 310c): as, &yPopar Zo 
be vexed, ax9-é-coma, nx0éo-Onv* paxopar fight, wax(éco)odpuae (305 b), 
EUAXETAUNY, MEUAK UAL. 

e. In most of these cases, the vowel is obviously inserted for the sake 
of euphony, to prevent undesired combinations of consonants. That the 
vowel should be commonly , rather than ¢, results from 310. 


312. 4. In the Seconp Prrrect System, the 
common affixes are annexed with these changes 
in the preceding syllable : 


a.) Short a,c, or v, before a single consonant, is lengthened 
(a commonly becoming yn, unless preceded by e or p, 115a): 
as, 

atv, (s. piv-) répnva, érepivew (40) ; O4AAw to bloom, TéOnra* but 
Kpaf{e cry out, (Kpiy-) Kéxpaya+> AdoKw sound, (Ad«-) Att. MéAdKa, Hp. 
hédnka* Kpl{w creak, (xpiy-) Kéxprya* poundopar bellow, (uiic-) péuixa. 
After the Att. reduplication, the short vowel commonly remains: as, 
é€AjdvOa (281d, 134 a). 

b.) ¢ becomes o, and « (lengthened from 7%) becomes a : as, 
kreivw to kell, (krev-) éxrova+ Sepxopar see, poet,, dédopxa* Deira 
(Aim-, Aeu-) leave, dedoura, memoBa (39); Korma, €opya, orca, oida 
(280 c). 

ce. This change ofan Z to an O vowel is also found in Ayyvipe to break, 
2 Pf. {pwya ; andin the 1 Perf. System of a few verbs : as, rpétrw to turn, 
rérpopa* Krérrw steal, Kéxhopa* wéptrw, wérouda (41) ; SéorKka (46 b). 

d. A few Perfects obtain an O vowel in the penult by a less simple 
change or by insertion ; and in a few dialectic forms, the change or inser- 


228 CONJUGATION. —--MI FORM. § 312, 


tion appears in the Pass. : as, &ye fo lead, Pf. #xa, later ay7-o-xa* éo Blo, 
poet. édw, eat, €545-0-Ka, Ep. édjdouar- otyopar (311 c), ofy-w-Ka or @ywKa 
(278d) ; (€0-) etw8a J am wont, pret.; Pass. dwproy. 272, for fepro, ému- 
xaro M. 340, ddéwvrar Mat. 9. 2 (see delpw, exw, nut, 50). 


C. -—MI Form (45). 


313. In some verbs, chiefly pure with a short stem» 
mark, the Present and Imperfect are nude (303). 


a. From the affix in the theme, these verbs are named 
VERBS IN -ws (270); and this mode of inflection is called the 
-pe form, a name extended to the nude inflection of all tenses 
which have regularly a connecting vowel. 


b. The 2 Aorist from a pure stem commonly retains the 
primitive nude form, whatever may be the form of the theme : 
as, ¢Bnv, edpav, éyvev, evv (45h). 

ec. Ifastem in t- otherwise takes this form, it has commonly a con- 
nective before a flexive beginning with v: é-6-vrwy, t-é-vat, (i-o-vrs) law 
(45m). So 2 Aor. ériov I drank, though the poet. Imv. wi@c occurs. 

d. The verbs in -pu are few in number, but include some of the most 
common words in the language. They are subject to many defects and 
irregularities. The most complete in their inflection are lornut, riOnut, 
inut, and didwuc (45). Nude Pres. and 2 Aor. systems are also found to- 
gether in édvivype to benefit, oBévvipr extinguish, and a few poetic, chiefly 
Epic, forms. 

e. For the 1 Sing. otepar J think, Impf. wiunv, the nude forms ofuar, 
@unv, are commonly used, especially when the verb is parenthetic : wad, 
oluat, épGvres TovTov, greatly desiring this, methinks, iii. 1. 29. 


314. Before the nude affixes, the short stem-mark 
as lengthened (& becoming , unless preceded by p, 
115; and %, e«), 

a.) In the Indicative sing. of the Pres. and Impf. act.: as, 

iornut, TLOns, Sidwor, Selkviwe (s. lord-, Tibe-, did0-, Secxvi-) ; torny, érl- 
Onv, edldws, édeixvd> eiue (s. “-), ef, efoe (45a, b,m). So the Ep. dqu 
blow, in most of its forms. 

b.) In a few Middle forms, mostly poetic : as, 

dignuat to seek, throughout ; dvjunr, érdijunv, 2 A. of dvivnus benejit, 
miumadnut fill. 

c.) In the 2 Aor. act. throughout, except before vr (275 d) : 
as, 

éorny, Cdpav, &yvwy, &d0v (s. ord-, Spa-, yvo-, dY-) ; éornuev, orHO, oTH- 
vat, Opavat, &yrwoay, yO, Sivar; ordvTwy, yvovrwy, yv(ovrs)ots (45 h). 

d. Exc. The short vowel remains in the 2 Aor. of rl@nus, didwpr, and 
inus, except in the Inf., where it is changed to its corresponding diph- 
thong (115 a) : ewer, douer, eluev (s. Oe-, 5o-, é-, augmented el-, 279 ¢ ; 
for the sing., see 306 ¢) ; @és, 55s, és + (Oevrs) Gels: Ocivar, Sodvat, elvas 


§ 317. COMPLETE TENSES. 229 


(45h, k). These Inf. forms may have arisen from contraction with an 
-e- connective : O(e-e)etvar, S(o-e)odvar. Cf. i-é-vac (45m). Except, also, 
the poet. xray slew, and Ep. otrav wounded. 


315. The forms of verbs in -» sometimes take 
the place of the -us forms: particularly, 


a.) In verbs in -vpr, which may be regarded as having a second but less 
Attic theme in -to: duriw, Secxvdovor (a frequent form in the 3 Plur. 
Pres.), vi. 1. 31, 2. 2, decxvder Cyr. 6. 1. 7, Seixvve Pl. Pheedr. 228 e, dec- 
xview Mem. 1. 3. 1; so Impf., chiefly in Sing. and 3 Plur. (@uyvoy Th. 5. 
19). This form was rare in the Pass. and Mid.: carewryrvovro vii. 2. 3. 

b.) In the sing. of the Impf. act., if the stem-mark is € oro. The con- 
tract forms in 45b are the more common, except érifovy. So ters, tec 
(45k). We even find by imitation (or precession from ¢, 115), 1 Sing. 
tew (npiew Pl. Euthyd. 293 a) ; also 3 Plur. 7piow Ise. 60. 19, dredidow 
Acts 4. 33. 

ce.) In the Opt. mid., by the frequent use of -ov- for -e- when not in the 
initial: syllable: rioluny, toiunv (45, n) ; and, in composition, 2 Aor. 
cuv0otro, mpootro, 1. 9. 7, 10, émiBoivro iii. 4.1. So even v. Ll. kpéuoode, 
papvolueda, for Kpéuaicbe, papvaiueda, Ar. Vesp. 298, dX. 513; aud Opt. 
act. dpiorre Pl. Apol. 29d, ddiovey Hel. 6. 4. 3 (45k). 


316. a. The Subj. of verbs in -m agrees with the common 
form, except in contracting ay into 7, and on into @ (120h, 
123 a): as, 

tor (d-w), tor (d- -4S) 1133 tor(d-n)Rre, tor (d-w)auat, lor (d-n)q ° TLO(é-w)a, 
79 (é-1s) As * 51d(d-w)@, 515(5-ys) Os, 5(5-w)@uar, 5(5-y)o. 

b. In like manner, @y is sometimes found in the Opt. for orn ; chief- 
ly, but not wholly, in the later Greek : as, ddqn &. 183 (adoinv X. 253), 
Bigyy (2 Aor., thus distinguished from the Att. Pres., 293) Ar. Ran. 
177, Pl. Gorg. 512 .e. 

c. In a few instances, the Subj. and Opt. of verbs in -vpu are irregularly 
formed, or supplied by "the Ind. : thus, used as Subj., dsacxedavvicr, dia- 
oxeddyvurat Pl. Pheed. 77 d, b, tbwwrat w. 89 (in these cases some think 

or vw contracted into 3) ; Opt. (having the common -p form, with t 
absorbed, 293) d(u-c)dnv (45 h), dun o. 348, pin Theoc. 15. 94, éxdduev II. 
99, ripyv(u- -)0To PL Pheed. 118 a, eacred): 665, dawivaro (for -OvTo) o. 
248, So P6tuny (as for pOeuyy) k. 51, pOtro X. 330. In some of these 
cases, some would write vt for d (119), or the Subj. -dy for the Opt. -dy. 

d. In the Opt. act., the forms without n (293 a) naturally prevail more 
in the longer Pres., than in the shorter 2 Aor. 

e. For further remarks on particular verbs in -p1, see 50. See 820, 326e. 


D. Compiete TENSES. 


317. The complete tenses are wholly wanting in many 
verbs. They are more used in the passive than in the active 
system, and more by /ater than by earlier writers. The use 
of their simple forms is chiefly limited, except in preteritive 
systems (268), to the Purr. anp PLup. 1Npic., INF., and rarr., 


230 





other needed forms being commonly supplied e ‘the Pm 
PART. with the auxiliary eiui. | 

a. The Perr. suss. and opt. are chiefly so supplied : Subj. : 
AeAucas &, AeAvpevos @- Opt. AeAucas cinv, AeAupevos ety. 


b. The Perf. act. may also form these modes by inflection, especially | 
when used as a Pres.: as, éorixw, vi. 5. 10, és7@, Pl. Gorg. 468b, | 
éctainvy, ¥. 101, éediw, Rep. A (46 d, b), wemocoiny (293 c); elk 
guecw Pl. "Pol. 269 c, wexrwxot Vv. 7. 26, wewotjxoe Th. 8. 108, BeSdrjxorey 
Id. 2. 48. 

c. In the Perf. pass., these modes have a simple form in only a few 
pure verbs: as, kraopar to acquire, ppvqoKe remind, xadée call ; Pf. P. 
or M. xéxrnuct I have acquired, I possess, péuynuat I remember, xéxdnyat 
I have been called, I am named (268); Subj. KEKT(-@) @uat, KEKT]), KERTH 
Tat Symp. 1. 8, AM Pl. Phil. 31a; Opt. kext (n-type, kexTqro Pl. 
Leg. 731 ¢, weprpuny Q. 745, weprygro Ar. PL 991, xex\nunv, xexhgo Soph. 
Ph. 119 (292, 293) ; also KEKT( T-ovoum, Kexr Geicle Eur. Herael. 282, 
peuwgumy, peuy ri. 7.5 (v. 1. peuvgo, wéuvoo), peuvgro Cyr. 1. 6. 3 (ef. 
315c). So Subj. (Sar-, Bra-; Teu-, Tue-, 308) BeBrHoPe Andoc. 22. 41, 
Tetuzobor v.1. PI. ‘Rep. 564¢, épwpyrac N. 271; Opt. deX(v-t)tv70 (cf. 
316 c) c. 238. See xd@nua (46 c). | 

318. The Perf., in its proper sense, may have the IMPERA- 
TIVE in the 3 Pers. ; but otherwise, this mode belongs only to 
those Perfects which are used in a Present sense (268, 46). 

a. In the active voice, the Perf. imv. is very rare, except in the nude 
form of the 2 Perf. (320) : dvaye, Kexpayere (320 f), yéyove Eur. Or. 1220, 


BeBnxérw Luc. Hist. Sc. 45, éoxérw Ib. 49. The Imv. act. AéAvce is in- 
serted in 37, not as itself used, but to represent such forms as these. 


: 


319. The simple form of the Future Perrect is found in ~ 
only a small number of verbs; and is especially rare in liquids, — 
in verbs beginning with a vowel, in verbs in -~s, and im those — 
which form the Perf. a: in -cpar: meduvpoecba Pind. N. 1. 
104, cipnoerac Cyr. 7. 1. 9, AcAnjoerae (Pf. AeAnopat) Eur. Ale. . 
198. See b. 

a. The Fut. Perf. is frequent in those verbs only in which it is used as" : 













a common Future (268). Its Participle is scarcely found in classic Greek : 
wemonheunobpevoy ¥. 1. Th. 7. 25. 

b. Of the active form, only two examples belong to Attic prose, both 
formed from preteritives, and both giving rise to equivalent middle forms : 
Pf. éorqxa I stand, réGvnxa I am dead, Fut. Pf. éorgge and éorqjzopae 
I shall stand, reOvijEw and rebvitopat. ‘Other examples of the Tor PE Pf 
mid. with the Perf. act. are xéxdayya I scream, xexhd-ytouar Ar. Vi 
930, xéxpaya I cry, xexpdfouac Ar. Ran. 265. For other examples 0: 
reduplicated Fut. act., see 284 f, g. 

c. The Fut. Perf. unites the base of the Perf. with Future affixes ; ais c 
a vowel lengthened before the tense-sign -o- in the Fut. is also length- 
ened in the Fut. Perf. : as, dé bind, 840, 6é5euar, Gedjoouar. dicw, dé 
ATywat, AeAToopar (37). + 


320. Nuve Forms. a. In the 2 Perr. and Puvp., the 
connecting vowel is sometimes omitted in the Jnd. plur. a 





; 
; 


*. 


: 
z 
_ 
a 








DIALECTIC FORMS. 231 


dual (276 b). When this omission takes place, then commonly, 
(b) the Ind. sing. is supplied by forms from a longer base (cf. 
306 c); which forms likewise occur in the plur. and dual, but 
less frequently ; (c) the Subj., Opt., Imp., and Inf. are formed 
after the analogy of verbs tn -; (d) the Part. is contracted, if 
the characteristic is a oro. Thus, 

(a) Zora-pev, S5édt-uev, (i5-uev, 148) tzuer ii. 4. 6, (i5-re, 147) izre, (i8- 
vot, & becoming o in imitation of the other persons) izadoc- (b) Ecrnxa, 
éorixew, Gédorxa, ota (bases éora-, €s7yx- ; dedt-, Sedoux- ; i5-, ol5-, eide-) ; 
éarixacw A. 434, éstixecay .. . Ecracav Cyr. 8. 3. 9, édedoixesay iii. 5. 
18, ofjaper Pl. Ale. 141 e; (c) éo7@- éorainy, cideiny- Exrabt, dédih, Oc 
ii. 1. 13; éordva: iv. 5. 7, dediévar (313 c), eidévar - (d) éor(a-ds)as 1. 3. 2, 
BeBp(o-ws)es, 2 Pi. Pt. of S:Speioxw cat. See 46. 

e. The Perfects of @vjoxw fo die, Baivw go, and r\a- bear, 7éOynxa, Bé- 
Bnxa, and rérAnxa have associated nude forms, partly poet., closely akin 
to those of €ornxa. So yéyova, 2 Pf. of yiyrvoua to become, and uéuora, 
pret., I am eager, have nude poet. forms from the shorter bases yeya-, 
peua-. 

*f. Ina few nude poet: forms of impure verbs, tT passes into @: d&vaya 
I command, pret., Imv. dvwye Eur. Or. 119, and dvwy@ Id. Ale. 1044, 
averyérw B. 195, and dvd(y-Tw)y8e A. 189, dvuyere Y. 132, and dwyGe 
Eur. Rh. 987 ; xéxpaya (319b), Jmv. xéxpax6c Ar. Vesp. 198, xexpd-yere 
Ib. 415, and xéxpa(y-re)y@e Ar. Ach. 335 ; éyelp@ rouse, 2 Pf. éypiryopa 
I am awake, Imv. 2 pl. éypiyyopGe =. 299 ; warye suger, 2 Pf. réroréa, 
2 pl. xér(ov0-re, ovoGe, 147, 159 g, 151 s)oobe T. 99. See 159i, 274a. 
The 2 Sing. form in -& may have had some influence in the change. 

g. Remark. The state consequent upon the completion of an action is 
more prominent, conscious, and durable in the recipient than in the agené 
.(273 e, 271 e). Hence the Perf. Pass. System has a more complete and 
uniform development than the Perf. Act. System, and is also more com- 
mon. See 276b, 317s. 


DIALECTIC FORMS (48). 


A. CoNTRACTION. 


321. Forms which are contracted in the Attic (and which 
are also commonly contracted in the Doric, but often with a 
different vowel of contraction) more frequently remain wncon- 
tracted in Ionic prose, while the Epic has great freedom in the 
employment of either uncontracted, contracted, or variously pro- 
tracted forms. , 

a. Here belong, particularly, Contract Verbs in -de, -éw, and -de (309), 
the Liguid, Att., and Dor. Fut. (305), the Aor. Pass. Subj. (288 a), the 
Subj. of Verbs in -p. (316), and the 2 Sing. in -at and -o (297e). In 
these forms, the first vowel is commonly either (I.) a, (II.) ¢, or (III.) o. 
Of these, ¢€ is far the most frequently uncontracted. 

b. The Att. poets sometimes omit the contraction ; and sometimes 


here, as elsewhere, adopt dialectic forms (85 d). 


232 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. § 322. 


322. I. Tur First vowrLa. a. In the Iontc, thea is commonly 
contracted or changed into € (a change sometimes found in the Dor., 130 b,d); 
and when a with an O vowel is contracted into , € is often inserted (135, 
120i). Thus we find, as various readings, dp@vres, dpéovres, and dpéwvTes, 
Hdt. 1. 82, 99. So wpdopev, v. 1. Ewpduer, Id. 1. 120, xpéeoOar, v. 1. xp7- 
cOat, 1. 47, xpdcOar 7. 141, éxpéwvro 3. 57, éxpéovrTo 6. 46, xpéw (for 
xpdov) 1.155; #reov H. 423, xpewuevos Wy. 834, dpéwy Alem. 83 [53]; 
Subj. of Verbs in -pu, duvewueba Hdt. 4. 97, 2 Aor. oréwor Id. 3. 15, Béw- 
pev 7. 50, xréwuev x. 216. Seec. (b) In the 2 Sing., the termination 
-ao commonly remains: as, éxpjoao Hdt. 1. 117, éricrao 7. 209. 

c. In the Epic, extended forms are made by doubling the vowel of con- 
traction, either in whole, or in part (i. e. by inserting one of its elements, 
or its corresponding short vowel, commonly o with @, and & with a, 135) ; 
and sometimes by prolonging a short vowel, particularly e used for a to 
€L: as, opdw, contr. op@ I’. 234, extended opdw E. 244, dpdwre A. 347, cpd- 
woat A. 9, dp(deis)Gs A. 202, opdas H. 448, dpacbar X. 156, dpdacbar zr. 
107, dvridwoay A. 31, doxarda B. 293, éuvdovro B. 686, yeAdwrres o. 40, 
yerwovres (v. l. yeXolwvres) o. 111, dddw (Imv. for dddov, -w) €. 377; 
praac0ar a. 39, wevowaw N. 79 (uevolveov M. 59), pevownyor O. 82, SpwHwor 
0. 324 ; dpwome 317, NBwowe H. 157 (H8que 133) ; vacerawon (-aovoy Bek.) 
T. 387; xépae I. 203, for xépae* Att. Fut. (8305 b) éXéwou N. 315, éddav 
e. 290, xpeudw H. 83: 2 Aor. Subj. of Verbs in -pt, orjys P. 30, ory o. 
334, orin EH. 598, orelouer O. 297 (créwuev A. 348), orjwor (creiwor Bek.) 
P. 95, orjerov o. 183, Betw Z. 113. (d) So in Ion. prose, in imitation of 
the Ep., xkoudwor Hdt. 4. 191, qyopdwvro 6.11; Dor. koudwvrt Theoc. 4. 
57. (e) If the flexive begins with +, a is not prefixed : as in op@-re, opa-Tat. 
In*adra: Hes. Se. 101, for drar, & is simply resolved into G& (115 a). 

f. The Doric sometimes contracts a with an O sound following into 
a; and commonly a with an # sound following into q (131 a, ¢c): as, 
mwewavte Theoc. 15, 148, dcarewaues Ar. Ach. 751; 1 Aor. 2 sing. éraéa@ 
Theoc. 4. 28, for érjéao, -w, Hoa Ar. Ach. 913 ; roduwys Theoe. 5. 35, Ajs 
64, dpfre 110, ovyfv Ar. Ach. 778, épdry 800. The latter contraction ap- 
pears in some Ion. prose-writers (as Hipp.; so @umeArac Hdt. 4. 75); and 
in some Ep. Du. forms, as svAjrnv N. 202, dourjrnvy M. 266. 


323. II. Tur rirst Vowet e. a. In Ionic Prose, contraction 
is commonly omitted, except as eo and eov often become ev: as, Tovéw 
Hdt. 1. 38, woréers 39, éroiee 22, roreduevos 73, mocevmevos 68, movevor 131, 
movevua aéceduevos 9. 111; Fut. onuavéw Id. 1. 75, xepdavéers 35, Epéwv 5, 
duuvedor 9.63; Aor. Subj. dirapebéw Id. 3. 65; pavéwor 1. 41, Oéwor 4. 
71 (316 a) ; 2 Sing. Bove, TevEear, Id. 1. 90, éyéveo 35, bev 7. 209, &Eeo 
(for Imy. é-ov, 45 n) 5. 39. (b) In like manner, eo, used for ao (322 a), 
may become ev: as, elpdrevy Hat. 3. 140, efpwredvras 62. So in the Dor., 
njpwrevv Theoc. 1. 81; yeredvre 90, dpetca 3. 18. 

e. The Epic commonly omits contraction, if the last vowel is @, @, ot, 
m, or y (except in the Aor. pass. subj., and in the Perf. subj. ef6@) ; but 
otherwise employs or omits it according to the metre (€o and eov, when 
contracted, regularly becoming ev ; yet érdp0ow vy. 1. A. 308, dvepplarrouw 
v. 78, wovroropovens X. 11). Synizesis is frequent when € precedes a long O 
vowel, and sometimes occurs in eov, and even in ew. The Ep., also, often 

rotracts € to «, and sometimes doubles the vowel of contraction 4. 
hus, Pir€or 0. 305 (yet Piroln 6. 692, and Popoln 4. 320), Prréwper 0. 42, 
pirénow o. 70, meipnOGuev X. 381, cl5G A. 515, eldéw a. 236 ; pire? B. 197, 
prec I, 342, Esper P. 86, &spee N. 539, on 7. 254, Eoear A. 563, Covent D. 
95, €ootat €. 333; Ppdfeo HB. 440, Pedgev 5. 395, vbird-Oev o. 310, Kddeov 


= 


‘ 
ae _ 


ne |. 


§ 325. CONTRACTION. TENSE-SIGNS. 233 


A. 477, xddeor 6. 550, xadedvro B. 684; verxeiw A. 359, éredelero A. 5, 
épe‘ouev 62, oreto K. 285 ; Aor. Pass. Subj. dauelw o. 54, daurys, v. 1. da- 
peiys, 1. 436, dauyere, v. 1. Sauelere, H. 72; 2 Aor. Subj. of Verbs in 
-p, Oeiw I. 83 (6éw Hdt. 1. 108), Gein (Om Bek.) x. 301, avy B. 34, 0éw- 
pev w. 485, Gelowev A. 143, Oeiouar D. 409. 

d. After the analogy of the contract Pres., the Ion. often extends the 
2 Aor. Inf. in -etv, as if formed by contraction, to -éev: as, idéew, puyé- 
ew, édéew, VY. 463, B. 393 (gvyety 401), A. 205, Hdt. 1. 32, 1, 36, midew 
A. 363 (rety 0. 70), radéew Hat. 1. 32. 

e. In the Ion., ee followed by a distinct vowel, sometimes becomes e, 
or loses one €: as, pv0(é-eac)etar 6. 180, wvféar 8. 202, vetac A. 114, aid(é- 
eo)eto 2. 503, rwd(é-e0)€o 6. 811, poBéo Hdt. 7. 52 (poBed 1. 9), PoBéear, 
v. 1. doBéa:, Id. 1. 39; Fut. evdpavéar Id. 4. 9. A similar omission of o 
appears in dvaxowéo Theog. 73. On the other hand, the Ion. sometimes 
renders impure verbs pure, by the insertion of its favorite e: as, évee Hdt. 
1. 48, éveixee (v. 1. éverye) 118. 

f. For the Doric contraction of €o and eov into ev, and, in the stricter 
Dor., of e€ into yn, see 131 b, 130: édéyev Theoe. 1. 86, udxev 113, éfsew 
2. 89, eica 76; woin Ar. Lys. 1318. So, in Hom., duapryrny (-7dnv Bek.) 
N. 584, daecdjrny X. 313 ; and rarely, in the Att. poets, the contraction 
into ev: as, wo\etzevar Esch. Pr. 645, buvetoac Eur. Med. 422. (g) Some 
varieties of the Dor. change 0 into to or ta, and ew into ww: as, woyloues 
Ar. Lys. 1002, éraviw 198, for noy(éo)otuer, érawd. So duswueba Ib. 183, 
for du(eo)ovueba. 


324. III. Tur First vowrr o. a. Here the Ionic and Doric 
usually employ contraction, following the common rules, except that the 
lon. sometimes uses ev for ov, and the Dor. @ and q for ov and ot (131 b, 
130 c): as, dixaceDor Hdt. 1. 133, edcxalevy 6. 15, olxecedvrac 1. 4, oreda- 
veovrat 8. 59 ; brvay Ar. Lys. 143, waoriyav Epich. 19 [1]. 

b. The Dor. @ is likewise used by other dialects in ptyde fo be cold, 
and in the Ion. t8pé@ sweat: as, pryav Ar. Vesp. 446 (p:yoiv Cyr. 5. 1. 
11), pey@ Pl. Gorg. 517d ; idpGoar A. 598. 

c. The Epic sometimes protracts the o to @, and sometimes employs 
the combination cw after the analogy of verbs in -de (322 c) : as, idpdovra 
>. 372, iSpdovea A. 119, brvdovras €. 48 ; dpdwow 1.108, Syniswvro N. 675, 
Snidwev 5. 226 ; 2 Aor. Subj. of Verbs in -pi, yrww & 118, ddow A. 405, 
bay mw. 216, Snow A. 324 (6 por 129), Swouey H. 299 (SGuev VY. 537), dww- 
ow A. 137. 


B. Tense-Siens, anp Unton or Srem anp AFFIX. 


325. a. In verbs in -fe, the Dor. commonly employs € for o, in the 
Fut. and Aor.: as, xa@itas Theoc. 1. 12, for xaficas from Kxabifw, yaplén 
5. 71, €xductav Pind. N. 2. 31. This change appears also in a few other 
verbs in which short a precedes : as, yeAdéas (fr. yeNdw, 310 e) Theoe. 7. 
42, €pGata (PPdvw) 2.115. Similar forms sometimes occur in other poets 
besides the Dor., for the sake of the metre : as, cperepiEduevov Asch. Sup. 
39, midéec Ar. Lys. 380, expdvEae (PAUw) Ap. Rh. 1. 275. 

b. In the Fut. act. and mid., the Dor. commonly adds to the tense- 
sign ¢, which is then contracted with the connecting vowel : as, (a-cé-w) 
go Theoe. 1. 145, (g-cé-ouar) doeduar 3. 38, wonoe?s 3. 9, déq 1. 11, reu- 
wet 6. 31, defe?rac Call. Lav. 116, ypuAdcEetre Ar. Ach. 746, meipaceiobe 
748, for dow, dooum, &e. See § 305d, 323 f. 


i a 


. 
: 
; 


234 CONJUGATION. — DIALECTS. § 325, 


ce. Lor the doubling of o by the poets, especially the Ep., to make a 
short vowel long by position (kadéocero A. 54, duoccov 76, ihdooeat 147), 
and for é@éAevev after the Mol. form, B. 334, see 171. 

d. The omission of the tense-sign -x- is extended, particularly in the 
Epic ; where we specially notice the Perf. Participles in -@s pure, from 
which some suppose F to have been dropped (140). In these, the vowel 
preceding -&és 1s more frequently lengthened ; and the Part. is then de- 
clined in -déTos or -@ros, according to the metre. If the preceding vowel 
remains short, the form in -@tes is commonly required by the verse. 
Thus, BeBapnires y. 139, Kexuniras A. 801, xexun@ra x. 31, wemrnares &. 
474, mwemrecra ®. 503, weudires B. 818, weud ares 543. See 320. 

e. In the fem. of the Perf. Part., the Ep. sometimes shortens the ante- 
penult on account of the verse: as, AeAdKvia pw. 85 (NeAnKws X. 141), 
pepaxutae A. 435 (ueunkas K. 362), dpapvias I’. 331, reOadviav I. 208. 

f. The Dor. preference of a, and the Ion., of n, appear in the formation 
of the tenses, as elsewhere: thus, Dor. é¢dva, Pind. I. 4. 4, ériuaoa, Id. 
O. 1. 86; Ion. émeipnva, x. 175, ijoouat, c. 520 (152, 310). The later 
Dor., froin the influence of analogy, has sometimes & for y, even in verbs 
in -éw: as, pitac® Theoe. 3. 19, ddoas 5. 118 (so Aor. Pass. éréaray 4. 58). 
The Dor. and Aol. preference of y to e, in protracting ¢, also appears in 
these verbs (130 c, 134 a): as, dduxjer Sap. 1. 20; but rereler £. 234. 


C. ConnecTING VOWELS. 
e 


326. a. For the 2 Sing. and Inf. affixes -eg and -ewv, the Dor. has 
sometimes the old short forms -es and -ev (291 a, 294 b) ; and sometimes 
prolongs these to -yns and -yv: as, cuplades, cuplodev, Theoe. 1. 3, 14, 
Booker, duédyes, 4. 2, 3, yaptev Pind. O. 1. 5, tpddev Ar. Ach. 788 ; ed- 
piv, xalpnv, eir7jv, Theoc. 11. 4, 14. 1, 19, €0é\no6a Id. 29. 4. So dynv 
pap..119. 

b. The Dor. and Kol. sometimes give to the Perf. the connecting vowel 
of the Pres. (276 a), especially in the Inf.: as, dedoixnw Theoc. 15. 58, for 
d€5ocxa, memdvOns (a) 10.1, dmdan 4. 7, remolOe 5. 28 ; Inf. dedvKew Id. 1. 
102, yeydxew Pind. O. 6. 83, reOvdxny Sap. 2. 15; Part. xexAddovras 
Pind. P. 4. 318, reppixovras 325. Instances likewise occur, in the Ep., 
of the Perf. passing over into the form of the Pres., and of the Plup. into 
that of the Impf.: as, xexAyyyovres M. 125, éspryovre Hes. Se. 228 ; eudun- 
kov t. 439, emépixov Hes. Th. 152. 

c. In this way new verbs arose, not confined to the Ep.: as, fr. dvwya, 
dvwyw order, O. 43, Hdt. 7. 104, Impf. qvwyov I. 578 (jvaryeov H. 394), 
F. dvwiw a. 404, A. Howta, Hes. Sc. 479 ; fr. dAexa, dAéxw destroy, Z. 172, 
Soph. Ant. 1286; fr. yéywva, yeywréw and yeywricxw cry aloud. So fr. 
yéya- (320 e), exyeydovrac Hom. Ven. 198 (as Fut., ef. 305 f). 

d. Where the Ind. has a short connective, the Ep. often retains this in 
the Subj. (272. 2), for the sake of the metre: as, dyelpowev A. 142, tomer, 
evelpouev B. 440, POcsuecOa HB. 87, pOlerac T. 173, wloyear B. 232, etdouev 
A. 363, eldere O. 18, vewerroere O. 115, AdBeTov K. 545. 

e. The poets, especially the Epic, much extended the use of nude af- 
fixes in the Pres., Impf., and 2 Aor.; introducing them into euphonic 
systems, and even using them after a diphthong or a consonant, chiefly 
in the Pass. and Mid.: as, dvte, éptw, raviw (305 f), Pres. rdvtrar P. 393, 
. &pvcOar €. 484; Impf. qi'ro €. 243, “avuro, *dvupes, Theoc 2.92, 7. 10; 
cetw shake, otev- stand, purpose, cedrac Soph. Tr. 645, oredrar T. 88, 
oretvrat Asch. Pers. 49, oredro dX. 583; dépw bear, Pvrtdoow watch, 










§ 329. CONNECTING VOWELS. FLEXIBLE ENDINGS. 235 


Imy. ¢épre I. 171, (s. dudak-) PvdraxGe (cf. 320f) Hom. Ap. 538 ; &dXo- 
par leap, ylyvopor become, Séxopar receive, plyvipe mix, Spvopr rorse ; 
2 Aor. Ind. ddro A. 532, @yevro Theoc. 1. 88, édéyuny ct. 518, 6éxro O. 88, 
éutxto a. 433, @pro Aisch. Ag. 987; Imv. défo T. 10, déxGe Ap. Rh. 4. 
1554, dpco A: 204; Inf. 5éx Oar A. 23, dpOar O. 474; Pt. déyuevos B. 794, 
Spuevos Soph. O. T. 177. 


327. The 1 and 2 Aor. forms are united, 


a.) In poetic, chiefly Ep., Aorists which have the tense-sign -o- with 
the connectives -o- and -e-: as, Balvw go, Siw sink, tkw come, ot-(pépw) 
bear, Spvipr rouse ; Aor. Ind. éBjcero v. 75, dicero H. 465, tEov E. 473 ; 
Imv. Bhoeo BE. 109, diceo II. 129, otoe x. 106, Ar. Ran. 482, olcérw T. 
173, dpceo I’. 250, contr. dpcev A. 264. 

b.) In forms, chiefly Alexandrine and Hellenistic, which attach the 
connectives and flexives of the 1 Aor. to 2 Aor. bases: as, €X\@- (¢pxouar) 
come, €d- (aipéw) take, ebp- (ebpicxw) find, dadp- (dc¢paivw) smell ; Aor. 
HrOare Mt. 25. 36, #AOav Acts 12. 10, dvechdro Ib. 7. 21, evparo Ap. Rh. 
4, 1133, dcg@pavro Hdt. 1. 80. See 306. 

c. These tenses of mixed formation are usually classed as 1 or 2 Aor., 
according to the connective: 1 A. #\Oav, 2 A. ior. . 


D. Fuexiste Enpinas. 


328. a. 1 anp3 Persons. The old flexives -r and -vr, prolonged 
to -r. and -ytt, remained in the Dor., which had also -pes for -pev (Lat. ¢, 
nt, mus ; 169 b, c): as, dari Theoc. 1. 51, ri@nri 3. 48, pavri 2. 45, gu- 
Agovre 16. 101, wijxavre 1. 43, Aéyorvre Pind. O. 2. 51, rpéWorre 6. 36; 
eldoues Theoc. 2. 25, dedoixames 1. 16 (Pind. uses the form -pev). For the 
Dor. -pav, -rav, -c ay (= -uny, -rnv, -cOnv), see 130a: épduav Theoe. 2. 
102, xrnodobay Pind. O. 9. 70. 

b. Epic forms of the Subjunctive, with -p and -r prolonged to -y. and 
-o1, are not unfrequent : as, eféAwue A. 549, TeXwue EH. 279, txwue I. 414, 
wut Z. 63, €0édyow (better €6éAnow, 109 a) A. 408, mavoynor 6. 191, Oéy- 
ow =. 601 ; so Dor. €0édyre (a) v. 1. Theoc. 16. 28. Some have regarded 
this form of the 3 Sing. as sometimes Ind., then writing it -you, as éynor, 
pepyot rT. 111; while as Subj. they write it -gov. <A similar form of the 
Opt., questioned by some, is rapadOatnor K. 346. 

c. The dropping of -r gives deixvd for Seixvior, Hes. Op. 524; anda 
different mode of contraction, such Mol. forms as xpvrroow Alec. 7 [1], 
ordéoot Pind. P. 9. 110, gdaci Sap. 35 [88]; while in such rare cases as 
Aehoyxdot r. 304, repixdor n. 114, a is shortened by poetic license. 

d. In the Imy. 3 plur., a third form is found in Dor. inscriptions, 
made by prefixing v to the flex. ending of the Sing. (cf. 271) : as, ro- 
ovvrw (compare Lat. faciwnto), (dddvo0w, cf. 272 e) 51ddc0w, Insc. Coreyr. 


329. The change of v into a (142) is extended, especially in 
the Jon. 


a. Here, the 3 Plur. endings -Grat and -dro, for -vrat, -vro (300 c), are 
usual in the Opt., and the Perf. and Plup. ind., and are also employed in 
the Impf., 2 Aor., and nude Pres. ind. Before these endings, a short 
vowel in the stem is not lengthened (310), except in the poets for the sake 
of the metre, the connective -e- is used instead of -o- (290 a), a and some- 
times e. becoine €, and consonants are changed according to 300c. Thus, 
oixéarar Hdt. 1. 142, for gxnvrac: éarac I’. 134, Hdt. 2. 86, elarac (134 a) 





236 CONJUGATION. — DIALECTS. § 329. 


B. 137, @aro H. 414, elaro I. 149, for Fvrar, Fvro+ mepoBharo P. 206 ; 
eBouN(o-vro)éato Hdt. 1. 4, daixéaro 152, é€unxay(d-o-vro\éaro (a changed 
to ¢, and one € dropped, 322a, 323 e); duv(a-vrarjéaran Id. 2. 142, edtvearo 
4, 114,:dvarerréarar 9. 9; K(er-v)éarar A. 659, Kelarac 2. 527, exéaro 
Hdt. 1. 167, xelfaro $. 418, daroxexNéaro Hdt. 9. 50 (so, with an interven- 
ing consonant, éepnpééarar VY. 284, épypédaro 7. 95, from épetdw) ; rerpi- 
para (TpiB-, 39) Hdt. 2. 93, Eedéyarar (r. decx-, lon. dex-) 65 (yet daixaras 
7. 209, § 167), xexwpidaras 1. 140, eoxevddaro 7. 67 (so, as if from verbs in 
-Lo, EdnAddaro n. 86, dknyédara P. 637, é6pddarar v. 354, -ro M. 431, €ora- 
Addaro v. 1. Hdt. 7. 89) ; BovAolaro Hdt. 1. 3, recpparo 68, yevoataro 2. 47. 
(b) The Opt. forms in -aro are likewise used by the Att. poets: as, de&al- 
aro Soph. (id. C. 44, reupaiaro 602, zudoiaro 921, alcbavclaro Ar. Pax 
209, épyacalaro Av. 1147. 

c. In a few cases, the poets seem to have simply dropped v between 
two consonants, in the 3 Plur.: as, cexeiu(av-vra)avtar ppéves Pind. P. 9. 
57, Kxéxpavrat cumpopat (v. 1. -pd) Eur. Hipp. 1255, 6€60(«-vrar)kror. . 
gvyai Id. Bac. 1350. Cf. 158. 

d. For the Impf. é7i@nv and #y, the Jon. has éridea Hdt. 3. 155, and 
fa 8. 313, unaugmented éa A. 321, Hdt. 2.19. So éas Hdt. 1. 187, fev 
A. 381, dare Hdt. 4. 119, gacay 9. 31. Cf. 273 ¢, e, 806c¢. 


330. The flexives of the 3 Puur. are interchanged, espe- 
cially in the Alex. and Hellen. Greek, and the Ep. and Dor. 
poets : thus, 


a.) Alex. and Hellen., -éy for -dov of the Perf., and -cav for -v or -ev: 
as, mépptcav Lyc. 252, éyywxav Jn. 17.7 (so &opyav Hom. Batr. 179).; 
ecxdfooay Lyc. 21, #ocay Ps. 79. 1, edodvofcavy Rom. 3. 13 ; etrowav 
Ps. 35. 25, mowjcatcav Deut. 1. 44. 

b.) In the Ep. and Dor. poets (sometimes imitated by the Att.), the 
older -v for -vav (275): as, Aor. Pass. #yepbev for ayépOnoay, A. 57, 
Tpdipev 251, pdavOev 200, epiia bev Theoc. 7. 60, ddvev Pind. O. 10. 101, 
éxdpecOev Ar. Pax 1283, ékpupGev Kur. Hipp. 1247 ; -pu Form, éoray A. 
535 (€ornoav N. 488), tev M. 33, ridev Pind. P. 3. 114, @dcdov Hom. Cer. 
437, éyvov Pind. P. 4. 214, and éyvwy Ib. 9. 137, épi'v e. 481; Plup. 
3 pl., jeldew Ap. Rh. 4. 1700, dew 2. 65. 


S31. 2 Pers. a. In the Subj. 2 sing., the uncontracted -yat (or 
shorter -eat, 326 d) commonly remains in the Ep., and sometimes in Ion. 
prose : as, tcynat Z. 148, ténac Hdt. 4. 9. Cf. 3238. 

b. The Ep. sometimes drops o in the Perf. and Plup. pass.: as, wéurnat 
®, 442, contr. uéuvy O. 18, Theoc. 21. 41, BéBAnar E. 284, €oovo I. 585. 

ce. On the other hand, in the S. S., we find the o retained in some con- 
tract forms, and in the Presents having the sense of the Fut. wiowa, pa- 
youat (305 f): as, kavxy(decar)aoat Rom. 2. 17, ddvvaéoar Lk. 16. 25, mie- 
oat, payeoa Id. 17. 8. 


332. Ivrerative Form. a. The Ep., to express with more 
emphasis the idea of repeated or continued action, or sometimes 
perhaps for metrical effect, often formed the Impf. and Aor. in 
-OKOY, -oKOuND. 

b. This form, called the ¢terative (itéro, to repeat), and akin to the Lat. 
formation in -sco, also appears in Ion. prose, and rarely in Dor. and Att. 


poets. (c) Of the connectives of the Impf. and Aor., it used -e- and -a- 
(290 a), (d) sometimes dropping the -e- after a or ¢, and (e) rarely using 


§ 335. FLEXIBLE ENDINGS. VERBS IN -MI. 237 


-a- for -e-. (f) It was almost strictly confined to the Ind. sing. and 
3 plur. (vixdoxopey X. 512, epdoxere x. 35), where it was inflected as an 
Impf. (-oxov, -oxes, -oxe, &c.), but commonly without the augment, which 
was now less needed (cf, Lat., 271d). (g) Before the -ok-, a short vowel 
was not lengthened. Thus, 

(c, f) Impf. éxeorxoy I was in the habit of carrying, N. 257, éxeokes E. 
472, éyerxe 125, Hdt. 6. 12, 3 pl. éveoxoy 6. 627, for etxov, -es, -€, -ov ; 
bpaiverxev she kept weaving, B. 104, addverxev 105, mwéumecke, -eoKor, 
Hdt. 1. 100, pfpecxe Theoc. 25, 138, raueverxe Soph. Ant. 950, raveoke 
963, waxéoxero H. 140, wedéoxeo X. 433, emoryéoxovro v. 7 ; 2 Aor. Werke 
TD. 217, \dBeoxe Hat. 4. 78, edd Beoxor 130, yevéoxero X. 208, ddAécKeTO 586 ; 
1 Aor. (only poet.), orpévacxov D. 546, doacke X. 599, uvnodoxero A. 566 ; 
(d) éacxes for elas, T. 295, varerdackoy (135) B. 539, xadéeoxe §. 402, xadé- 
oxero O. 338, (&xetro) xéoxero (as fr. xéowat, cf. 329 a) p. 41; (e) pimracKor 
O. 23, kptmrracxe 8. 272; (g) dicxey O. 271, (€dwv) Sdckov I. 331, (Fv) 
écxov H. 153, éoxev Aisch. Per. 656, (epdvn) pavecxer A. 64, (€o77, S. oTa-) 
ordcKey I’. 217. 


333. Inrinirrve. a. Inthe Inf, instead of -vat, the Dor. and Hol. 
commonly retain the old ending -v (272 a), or, with the Ep., reduplicate 
this ending to -pev (cf. 272 b), which may be still farther prolonged (chief- 
ly by the poets) to -pevar. 

b. Thus the Aol. forms the Aor. pass. inf. in -ynv, the Dor. in -fpev, 
and the Ep. (which also employs the common form) in -fpevar : as, wedv- 
aOnv Alc. 28 [29], AacPjuev Theoc. 2.18, wrynwevar Z. 161, opowdjuwevac 
Aartey, 

e. In other tenses, the nwde Inf. has commonly in the Dor. the form 
-pev, in the Aol. -v and -pevar, and in the Ep. -vat, -pev, and -pevar : as, 
Géuev Theoc. 5. 21, Pind. O. 6. 5, d. 315, Oéuevac Insc. Cum., B. 285, 
Pind. O. 14. 15, Oetvar A. 26 (cf. A. 57), dduev Pind. O. 1. 55, dduev Th. 
5. 77, A. 379, ddpevar a. 317, dodvar 316, yopevar'411 ; vixdv (335 b) Alc. 
86 (15]; reAvduev O. 497, TeOvduevar 02. 225, tOuev A. 719, tSuevar N. 273. 
So éorduevac Hdt. 1.17. Before -pev and -pevat, a short vowel in the 
2 Aor. does not pass into a diphthong (314 d). 

d. In like manner the non-Attic poets employ, for -ew (originally -ev, 
294 b), the prolonged -éuev and -€usvat: as, dxou(ev)éuev A. 547, Pind. O. 
3. 44, Theoc. 8. 83, dxovéuevar d. 380, dééuey YW. 111, d&euevar 50, yodw- 
oéuev A. 78, eXMéuevac 151. So in the Perf., as some think, rerdyyéuev 
Il. 728, dvwyéuevy N. 56. For the Perf. inf. in -ev or -nv, see 326 b. The 
common form in -€évat is said to occur first in Hdt. 

e. Verbs in -é and -éw have a contract form in -fpevar: as, yo(d-ev)h- 
tee EZ. 502, wewhmevat v. 137, cad(é-ev)hpevar K. 125, wevOquevar o. 174. 

et duevar, fr. dw, &. 70. In aywéuevar v. 213, fr. dywéw, and dpdumevac 
Hes. Op. 22, fr. dpdw, the connective is omitted. 


334. Parricirte. For the Fem. -ovoa, the Laconic uses -wa : as, 
exdum(otca)a@a, KeGa, Oupca(fovcdv, 170 a)88wav, Ar. Lys. 1297, 1299, 
1313. See l4la. For the Mol. contraction into at and ot in the Part., 
see 131d: xipyars Alc. 27, pias Pind. P. 1. 86, OpéWaioa 8. 37, Eevéauoa 
Sap. 1. 9, éxo.wa 77 [76], Theoc. 1. 96. 


EK. VERBS IN -pe. 


335. a. The Ton. and Dor. employ more freely than the Att. the 
forms with a connecting vowel (315), especially in the Pres. sing. of verbs 





238 STEM OF THE VERB. § 335. 


whose characteristic is € or o: as, TuHe?s Pind. P. 8. 14, rifet a. 192, Hdt. - 
1. 133, didots I. 164, did0? 519, Hat. 1. 107, d:d00cw B. 255 ; tora Hat. 4a 
103, Imv: xaélora I. 202 ; pobgouct (unreduplL., for por iédot) A. 291 ; 
Inf. cuvetv Theog. 565, d:dGv (324 a) Theoc. 29. 9. 

b. On the other hand, the Aol., Dor., and Ep. retain the form in -pt 
in some verbs, which in the Att. and in Ion. prose have only the form in 
-w: as, KddAnut Sap. 1. 16, dpnue 2.11, Pirnuce 79 [23], atvnus Hes. Op. 
681, viknuc Theoc. 7. 40, for caréw, dpdw, &e. 3 popivar B. 107. 

c. The lon. changes a characteristic before another a@ to e (ef. 322 a), 
and sometimes inserts € before a (135 a): as, tor(aaor, 156)éa@ou Hat. 5. 
71, duvéarac (329 a), ioréarro Hdt. 4. 166. So, in the nude Perf., éorédax 
Hdt. 1. 200, éoréare 5. 49. 

d. The Ep. sometimes differs from the common language in the length 
of the stem-mark (314): as, Inf. riOjuevar Y. 247, didodvar 2. 425, fev- 
yvouev II. 145, for ri eva, &c.; Part. riOjuevov K. 34; Imv. trn@, Aldo 
ry. 380 (so nude Pf. éxtnre A. 248, 246; v. 1. 2 Aor. éornre) : 2 Aor. Ba- 
cay M. 469, Barny A. 327, for éBnoar, &e, See 134. 


CHAPTER X 


STEM OF THE VERB. 


336. The stem of the Greek verb, although 
not properly varied by inflection, yet recewed many 
changes in the progress of the language. These — 
changes affected the different tenses unequally, so 
that there are but few primitive verbs in which the 
stem appears in only a single form. 


a. The earliest form in which the stem of a verb appears is briefly called 
the prime or old stem; and other forms, later or modified stems. If a later 
form appears in the Present System, this is called the new stem ; and any 
intermediate forms, middle stems. 

b. The 2 Aor. and 2 Compound Systems are widely distinguished from 
the others by their attachment to the original form of the stem ; and the 
Pres. System no less by its inclination to depart from this form. The 
other systems differ comparatively little from each other in the form of 
the stem. If the verb has three stems, they are commonly formed from 
the middle. If it has only two stems, they are sometimes formed from the 
earlier, sometimes from the Zater, and are sometimes divided: as, in réo- . 
ow (39), old stem TaAYy- er dyn Térayuat €rdxOnv Téraxa éraka TaEw, NeW 
stem taco- tdocow ; in ites to rot, 0. 8. Tam- écdrny, N. S. THT- céonu- 
poe éeonpony céonra érnva ony onmw; in detyo flee, 0. s. uy- Epuyor 
mw puyua, n. 8. pevy- epe’xOny wégevya Epevé a pevioua pevyw. 

c. The tenses may be arranged, with respect to the degree in which 
they exhibit the departure of the stem from its original form, as in 47 ; 
which shows a general table (with a few exceptions) for verbs having three 
forms of the stem. 





mo i. ey 


§ 338. DEFECTIVE AND REDUNDANT VERBS. 239 


d. In some verbs of three stems, the preference of an adjoining p for 
the open a (145 a) has kept the stem from change in the Perf. pass., and 
even in the Perf. act.: as, in @8elpw to destroy (stems p8ap-, hbep-, pbetp-), 
épbapuat, €pOapxa + telve stretch, rérduat, reraxa. So, from the influence 
of A, oréAX@ send, eoradpat, Ecradka. 


e. The changes in the stem were, for the most part, the result of time 
and use. Hence, those tenses which were earliest and most employed 
were most affected by them, and the latest tenses the least. They appear 
most of all in the Pres. System (of which the 2 Aor. System was the an- 
tique form), less in the Fut. and 1 Aor. Systems, and least in the Perf. 
and Compound Systems. 


337. Many verbs are DEFECTIVE, either from the want of a 
complete formation, or from the desuse of some of their forms. 


a. In both cases, the defect is often supplied by other verbs having the 
same signification. In the poets, especially the older, we find many frag- 
ments of verbs belonging to the earlier language. These occur often in 
but a single tense, and sometimes in only a single form of that tense : as, 
3 Sing. @8paxe rang, A. 420, dédro (s. dea-) appeared, §. 242, éxdavocev 
breathed, X. 467, Ntyée twanged, A. 125. 

b. Many forms, however, were doubtless used, or might have been 
used, which do not occur in the remains of Greek literature. If one form 
of a tense-system is found, it is usual to infer the existence of the other 
common forms of that system in the same voice. 


338. On the other hand, many verbs are REDUNDANT, 
either through a double formation from the same stem, or the 
use of forms from dzfferent stems. It should be observed, how- 
ever, that two or more forms of the same tense, with few ex- 
ceptions, either, 


(a) Belong to different periods, dialects, or styles of composition: thus, 
xreivw, and later xrivviue (50), to kill; rdoow, and later radrrw (39), 
A. P. éraxOnv, and later érdynv: Kcaiw (44), A. P. éxav@ny, and Ion. éxany: 
muvOdvoua, and poet. mevOouae (50), inquire; welOw (39), 4. rea, and 
poet. EGov. 

(b) Differ in their wse : thus, 1 Pf. rérecxa, transitive, T have persuad- 
ed, 2 Pf. wémoila, intransitive, J trust (89); mépayxa I have shown, 
mepnva 1 have appeared (40); 1 A. éoryoa, trans., I placed, 2 A. éorny 
intrans., J stood (45). The second tenses are more inclined than the jirst 
to an intransitive use. From the prevalence of this use in the 2d Perf. 
and Plup., these tenses were formerly called the Perf. and Plup. middle. 


Or, (c) Are supplementary to each other. See 306 b, 320. 


d. From the various changes which take place in the stem, many verbs, 
together with their common themes, have others, either older, derived, or 
collateral. In regard to some forms, it seems doubtful whether they should 
| be rather viewed as redundant forms of the same verb, or as the forms of 
| distinct but kindred verbs. Themes derived from the same root are 
termed cognate. 


e. Defective and redundant verbs, and those having more than one 
stem, are all irregular in the largest application of that term. But, from 
the great number of such verbs, the term is fanviliarly applied only in the 
more marked and less analogical cases. 


240 THE VERB. —— PRIME AND MODIFIED STEMS. § 359. 


339. The changes in the stem of the Greek 
verb are of three kinds, EUPHONIC, EMPHATIC, and 
ADOPTIVE. 


a. The same or similar terms are applied to the modified stems which 
result ; while special names have also been given to some of their more 
common forms. 

b. The dialects increase greatly the number of these changes, especially 
of the euphonic: as, tdoow, new Att. ratTw (169 a) ; opdw, Ion. dpéw 
(B22 a); per({w, matf{w, Dor. pedlodw, walddw (170 a). 

c. In the following sections of this chapter, and in some of the tables, 
small Roman letters, and figures annexed, are used to mark classes of 
stems and their subdivisions : as, a, al, b?. For the sake of apter nota- 
tion, there will be a few departures from strict alphabetic order. Not a 
few stems belong to different classes, as exhibiting more than one kind of 
change. 


I. Primr STEMS (a). 


340. 1. Prime Stems may be roots, either (a’) giving rise 
to modified stems, or (a?) remaining alone ; or they may be 
derived stems, either (u°) giving rise to other stems, or (a*) re- 
maining alone. 


Thus, (a!) the root tt-, to pay (itself found in the poet. Pres. riw), gives 
rise to the stems tiv- and tivv-, used in the later Presents rivyw and poet. 
Tiviuat ; while (a?) the root éArr-, to cause to hope, remains alone in the 
Ep. verb é\7w. But these verbs have derivatives in the nouns éAmis | 
hope, and riu% honor ; and from these are taken derived stems for new 
verbs: viz., (a) &dmv8-, giving rise to éXmf- in the Pres. éAmigw to hope ; 
and (at) tiza-, the only stem cf the verb tiudw to honor. 

2. Most verbs which have only the prime stein are derivative pure 
verbs : as, Tyndw, Pir€w, Snddw (42). 

3. Most roots are monosyllabic, and have a short vowel. Hence these 
became rules for the stem of the 2 Aor.; and some changes appear even 
in this stem, either for conformity to these rules, or to enable the tense 
to take the old nude inflection (313 b). See 342. 2, 3, 353a. A very 
few forms from stems otherwise modified are used as 2 Aorists: as, 2 A. 
ércpov, commonly érepoy (341), cut; émddynv and, except in compounds, 
éetAnyny, was struck. See 327. 

4. The 2 Aor. System (except in a few defective forms, 337 a) belongs 
only to verbs which have more than one stem ; and so, with very few ex- 
ceptions, the 2 Compound System. Few verbs have both systems (289 b), 
and comparatively few have either ; though among these are some of the 
most common verbs in the language, so that 2 Aorists, especially in the 
active voice, are of frequent occurrence greatly beyond proportion to their 
number. 


I]. EupHonic STEMS. 
341. Euphonic changes in the stem are chiefly the following : 


b. Precession (Attenuated Stems). In some stems, a vowel 
is changed by precession, (b*) @ becoming e, (b?) € or o, ¢ (chief- 
ly when consonants are annexed to the stem). (b%) a, @, de. : as, 





§ 345. EUPHONIC STEMS. 241 


(bl) 2 Aor. P. éSapmy, Pr. A. Sépw flay; éewExny, whéxw plait; érpa- 
ayy, Tpemrw turn; (b*) 2 A. érexov, Pr. tletw bring forth, beget; apBrSw 
and épBAloKkw miscarry ; (b®) 2 A. érpdyoyr, Pr. (rpay-) tpdyw cat. Cf. 
the changes of a to ¢, of d and @ to 7, of w toi, of a and au to u, &e., in 


- Latin compound verbs : as, fwllo, refello ; cado, accido. 


342. c. Contraction, Syncopr, MeEtTatHssis, ANTITHESIS 
(103 s). 

1. Some stems (c!) are contracted: as, aelSw GSw sing, dtocw doow 
rush, Krylw KkAyw old Att. (later KAelw, cf. 222a) shut. Cf. Lat. demo, 
coyo, nolo, prendo. 

2. Some stems are (c*) syncopxted in the theme, chiefly in cases of redu- 
plication ; (c*) others, in the 2 dor. (340. 3); and (c#) others, in other 
tenses : as, (c?) 2 A. eyeviuny, Pr. (yeyev-) ylyvoua: become (cf. Lat. gigle]- 
20) 5 €xetoy (Dor.), whartw fall ; pévw and poet. plpvw remain ; (c*) (€yep-, 
éyp- -) 7yab.nv awoke, (ev8-, dO-) 7)ADor came ; (c*) kadéw CALL, Pf. (KAe-) 
K-K\nKka, KéexAnuat. Cf. Lat. per[rilgo, swr[rilgo. 

3. In some stems there is transposition, chiefly by changing the place 
of a liquid. This occurs (c®) in the theme; (c®) in the 2 Aor.; (c’) in 
other tenses : as, (c°) 2 A. €opov, Pr. (8p0-) Opwoxw leap; Savor, (Ova-) 
Ovicxw die; (c°) (rad-, trrXa-) Erdyny endured, (wxad-, oxda-) ExxAnv became 
dry, (Sapx-) Zopuxor saw, €Sap0ny and <BadInv (39 c) slept (340. 3); (c") Be- 
PAnxa, Kéxunka (308). Of, Lat. cerno, sperno, Pf. crevi, sprevi. 

4. (c’) The substitution of one letter for another is chiefly presented 
under other heads (341, 343, &c.). 

343. d. OMITTING OR ADDING ASPIRATION. 1. Some stems 
(d*) are changed to avoid a double aspiration : as, (Apep-) tpépa, 
(Opex-) tpéxa, (Ex-) exw, (Ge-) eréOnv, (Ou-) érdOnv (159 b, d, e). 

2. A few stems (d?) have both aspirated and unaspirated forms : as, 
Bpvxw and Bpdxw (159i); Pixw cool, 2 A. P. Epi yay and epdyn. 

344. e. In some stems, a consonant is (e') dropped or (e?) 
added for the sake of euphony or the metre : as, 

yiyvouat, become, (yvo-, ytyvo-) yeyveoxw [@]nosco, KNOW, later softened 
forms yivouas, Yvaokw ; AePw, poet. &Bw, pour ; (ySourre-) Sovtréw sound 
heavily, 1 A. Docarmice L 8. 18, A. 504, ydovmrncay A. 45. In other verbs, 
the insertion of a consonant, especially v, renders a syllable long, and thus 
relieves the succession of short syllables, particularly in objective forms : 


as, muvOdvouat inquire, Kepdvyius mix, wiprdrnue fill, Impf. érvvOdviueba, 
exepdvviro, éexiumharo. See 351. 2.33 357. 1. 


345. f. (Digamma Verbs, &c.) In some verbs, the (f?) 
dropping or (f?) change of F, or (f*) of ¢, has led to different 


forms of the stem (140s): as, 


(w\er-, me- f!, rdev- £7) wA€éw, wrEdcouat (42 2); (OeF-) Bw run, Ceico- 
par: véw swim, vedcouar: (xXEF-, X€E-, XEU-, xU-) Xéw pour, Aor. éxea, Ep. 
éxeva, A. P. exd) ny ; Kalw (44): (cex-, ox- c, oxe- c°, éx- 141, ex: d!) éyw 
hive, F. (éx-cw) tw, 2 A. Eoxov, Imv. oyés+ (cen-, on-c, é-, ceor- 
2840, ésr-) érw be busy with, 2 A. ror, éomdsuny, poet. eomrduny. 

a. The Digamma Verbs may be compared with the verbs in Latin end- 
ing in -vo and -veo, in which the stem has also various forms : Jiv0, jatum, 
to “help ; liivo, lautun 1, wash: céveo, cautum, beware ; moiveo, motum, 
move ; volvo, volatum, roll ; fervo and Jerveo, fervi and ferbui, boil. 


eerwvcnr, il P 


~~ a wa eT. he eee 


242 THE VERB, — EMPHATIC STEMS. § 346. 


III. EmPpnHatic, oR PROTRACTED STEMS. 

346. Most impure stems and many pure stems 
are PROTRACTED in the Present System, to express 
with more emphasis the idea of continued, or per- 
haps, in some cases, of ¢ransidive action. This pro- 
traction takes place, (A.) by lengthening short 
vowels ; (B.) by adding syllables or letters. 


347. A. By LENGTHENING SHORT VOWELS ; 
either (g) to cognate LONG VOWELS (Long Vowel 
Stems); or (h) to piputHones (Diphihong Stems); 


as follows : | 

(1.) In mute verbs, & becomes n ; in liguid verbs, and in some 
mute verbs, tand v are semply lengthened ; in other cases, the 
short vowel is usually changed to a diphthong. (2.) In mute 
verbs, the change commonly extends to all the regular tenses 
(303 a). Thus, 

(2) 2A. P. éodarny, eTaKy, Pr. oqtw rot, thw melt ; éxdtvyy, KAtvw 
bend ; érpiBny, tpiBw (39) ; eovpny, cipw drag ; erty, TIdw Sumigate. 

(h) Fut. pave, Kabdpd, Pr. dalvw (40), kabalpw purify ; wmep@, omelpw 
sow; tTevO, telvw stretch ; 2 A. &dXttrov, émruBov, Pr. Aelrw, melOw (38 s) ; 
épvyor, dedyw fice ; Pf. dxijxoa (ako-), Pr. akotw hear. 

a. Some refer these changes, in part, to the addition of I, with trans- 
position and contraction (348, 142). 


348. Lb. By ADDING SYLLABLES OR LETTERS. 
These may be anexed, inserted, or prefixed (32 ¢, 
e, 1): 

1. The CONSONANTS ANNEXED or INSERTED are the consonant 
I (with the resulting changes, 143), ox, », 7, 6, &e. 


349. [ora Form. i. The consonant I unites (i') with a: 
palatal mute, or less frequently (i?) with a lingual or (1°) labial 
mute, to form oa (in later Att. rr, 169 a): as, 

(1) 2 A. P. érayyy, épayny, Pr. Tao ow or TaTTH (39), paoow knead ; 
ovduK-, duidcow guard ; Tapax-, Tapacow disturb ; (i?) BAYr-, Shira | 
take honey ; &ppos-, apporrw or Gppdtw jit ; Kopt6-, poet. Koptoow arm ; 
(i?) F. (wer-cw) réyw, Pr. wéoow or wéttw cook. | 

j. The I unites (j') with a lingual mute, or less frequently 
(j?) with a palatal mute, (j*) a double palatal, or (j*) a ie 4 
mute, to form ¢: as, 

(j*) ppad-, ppdgw fell ; dvopir-, dvopdtw name; (j?) 2 A. sepiiyen, | 
erpityny, Pr. Kpatw cry, ohat or opatrw slay ; oTevaX-, TTevalw grown ; 
(j®) KAayy-, KAaLw clang; cadtryy-, cadAmiLw blow a trumpet ; (j*) vid-, 
vigw, later vlrrtw, wash, | 








§ 351. IOTA, INCEPTIVE, AND NASAL FORMS. 243 


1 (for k, see 350). The I unites with A, to form AA: as, 


F. B&AG, TH&AG, oTEAS, Pr. BaAXw throw, eHadAdw deceive, eTAAw send. 
Some regard the liquid as here simply doubled to make a long syllable. 
This doubling was extended in the Molic (171a). Cf. Lat. pello, pepili ; 
percello, perctli. 

a. Palatals in -{@ are mostly onom~topes (words formed to imitate 
sounds). Some verbs in -{@ or -cow have both palatal and jingual forms. 

B. Linguals in -{@ are very numerous, particularly those in -({@. They 
are mostly derivatives, wauting the second tenses and, by reason of 
euphonic changes, nowhere showing the stem in its prime form. This 
may often, however, be ascertained from a cognate word. It ends most 
frequently in 8, and may be assumed to do so, if the contrary does not 
appear: as, 6p.d-, dpef- (39 d). 

y- Most linguals in -{@ may be practically regarded as having but a 
single form of the stem, with { as the stem-mark. And in some, (z) the 
stem may be regarded as having for an added consonant simply {, either 
(21) alone or (z?) with a vowel (the modified stem marked with z, to avoid 
double notation) : as, (z!) mptw, and later mpt{w, to saw; ovrdw and ot- 
Ta{w wound, poet.; (22) 2 A. éropov, Pr. mopltw furnish. The euphonic 
changes of lingual mutes would then, of course, apply to { (147s). 

8. With these forms in -cow and -{, compare the Lat. derived forms 
in -sso; as, incedo, incesso; quatio, quasso; capio, capesso; ‘Arrikifa, 
Atticisso. 

350. k (for 1, see 349). Inceprtive Form. In this form, 
-ox- is annexed, (k*) either alone, or (k?) with a vowel, com- 
monly «. When -oe- alone is added, (k*) a consonant preceding 
is dropped or (k*) transposed, or (k*) rarely unites with the a, 
excluding the «; while a vowel preceding, particularly o, (k®) 
may be lengthened or (k") changed tor. Thus, 

(kt) F. apécw, pebtiow, Pr. dpérkw please, peOtokw intoxicate ; (k?) 2 A. 
evpov, Pr. etpickw find ; (k®) éxavov, xadonw (151) gape; tAakoy, Mackw 
sound, utter, poet.; émaoy, (racx-, 151, 159g) waoyw suffer; (k4, 6) 
Gopor, (Popck-) Opdoxw leap, Cavoy, (Aavox-) OvioKw die (342. 8) ; (k) 
ahex-, (adexox-) BAW ward off; (k") apBAsSw and &pBAlonw (341) ; 2 A. 
(Gho-) Edtwr, aXloKopar to be taken. So from ry. pry-, with transposition, 
may be formed (uycx-) ployw mix; ef. Lat. misceo, (mics)mixtum. 

_ a. These verbs correspond in form and sometimes in force to the Lat. 
unceptives In -sco: as, ynpdocw senesco, grow old, iBdcxw pubesco, become 
of age, yryvecKw gnosco, gain knowledge, diddoxw cause to learn, disco, 
learn. ‘The Ep. iterative form is also kindred (332). See 379 b. 

351. n. Nasat Form. In this, v is added, either alone, 
or with a vowel (chiefly as -av-, -vv-, or -ve-). 

1. When -»- alone is added, (n*) it commonly follows the 
former stem-mark, which, (n?) if a short vowel, often becomes 
a long vowel or diphthong; but (u®) sometimes precedes it 
(chiefly a in a few poetic forms) : as, 

(n!) 2 A. éakov, Pr. Saxvw dite (47); Exapov, Kdpve labor; erepor, 
répve cut; (n®) éxtov, mivw, drink, (8%-) &iv, 8ivw enter ; (B&-) Bn, 
Balvw go; &kaw, commonly &Aatvw, drive; (n3) F. Sapadsw, poet. Pr. 


244 STEM OF THE VERB. § 351. 


Sapvdaw or ddurynus subdue ; (wepti-, wepva-) répyynuc poet., sell ; poet. kepaw 
and (kipva- b?) kipynue mix. Cf. the Lat. Presents strengthened by the 
addition of 2: as, cerno, sperno, crevi, sprevi (342. 3); lino, sino, litum, 
situm ; jindo, seindo, fidi, scidi. 


2. There are three ways of adding -av-: (n*) without further 
change, chiefly to double-consonant stems (already long) ; (n°) 
with y enserted before a characteristic mute, to lengthen a short 
syllable (344) ; (n°) with -av- prolonged to -aw- or -av-: as, 

(n*) avéw and avkdvw (41); 2 A. €BAacror, Bacravw bud ; eapbor, 
Sapbavw sicep; Huapror, duaprdve err; (n°) €\&@ov, havOdvw Lie hid ; 
Eéuabov, pavOivw learn; éraPor, hapBdver ( (150) take ; érvyXor, TUYXave 


huippen ; (n°) (6op-) do ppouny, doppatvouat smell ; Kepd-, KepSalyw gain; 
éxtxov, Ep. xtyavw, Att. kuyydvw n°, v. lL. xtyavo, find. 


3. When -vv- is added, the preceding syllable is by rule 
long. Hence, while -yv- can be (n’) annexed without further 
change to consonants (chiefly palatals and liquids), (n®) the v 2s 
doubled after a short vowel (o also becoming @): as, 


(n’) 2A. epty7, plyvo, uu mingle ; érrapov, wrapviuar sneere ; olyw and 
olyvou open ; }', dpow, Spvipu rouse ; (ay-) d&w, &yvdue break ; (n°) Kepa- 
gW, Kepavvidue mix; oPéow, oPevijus extinguish ; kopécw, Kopévy due 
satiate ; ({o-) fwow, {évvoue gird ; Xow, and later yovviuc, heap wp. For 
the inflection of these verbs, see 313s, 315 a. 

4. (n°) After a diphthong (securing in itself a long syllable), a lingual 
or liquid is dropped before -vv-: as, Satr-, Salyduc feast ; xretvw, later 
KTelvyuue kill. In dddTue (6A-, dAvv-) destroy, v is assimilated. 

5. (n!°) A few stems receive ~VE-: as, 2 A. tkduny, tkvéoua, and poet. 
“ixave n®, come; 1 A. ékioa, Kvvéw kiss ; Bow and Pivéw stop up. 


352. t (for o, see 354). Tau Form. In this, r is added, 
either (t1) alone, chiefly to labial stems, or (t?) with a vowel : 
as, 

(t!) 2 A. éxdany, kéarw cut; ertany, timrw beat ; BACB ay, Bree 
(147) hurt ; expopny, KpvTTw hide ; EBaday, Barre dip ; Eppayy, patrw 
stitch ; érexor, tiktw (341) ; dviw and aviTw accomplish ; (t?) epplny, 
plrrw and purréw throw ; 1 A, (twex-) €refa, wextéw comb; 2 A. (ép-) Hpd- 
env, épwrdaw ask. Cf. Lat. pecto, flecto, necto, plecto. 


353. q (for p, see 356). THera Form. In this form, 
which is chiefly poetic, @ is annexed, (q’) either alone, or (q?) 
with a vowel, commonly a or e. (q®) A short vowel in the 
stem is oftener lengthened before 6. ‘Thus, 


(q1) meXdw and medaOw approach, poet.; (q2) pdr€éyw, poet. breyebw, 
burn; (@adr-) A4r\rw 1, poet. BaréOw flowrish ; Vite poet. Pbivvdw, con- 
sume ; %8w, poet. (256. 147) @r@w, comm. ae Olu, eat; (q°) véw and vAbw 
spin ; (mha-, 236 b) wAHOw and mh Ovo be full. 

a. A few verbs obtain, in this form, a 2 Aor. with a short penult 
(340. 38): as, dkoxw pursue, eSubed ov - elices yield, etkabov ; etpyw exclude, 
eipyabor, elpyabbuny ° dives ward on; hutvabov, -buny ; éo-yov and poet. 
écxeOov had, held (cf. jwirdrov, épixdxov, 284 e). These extended Aorists, 
which are chiefly poet., are regarded by some as Present Systems, wanting 
the ECS. indic., and are commonly so accented. 


§ 357. N, T, A, E, W&C., ANNEXED. REDUPLICATION. 245 


354. o. A few stems Soe other consonants, either (0!) 
alone, or (0?) with vowels: as, 

(01) cpep-, apepdw and aR h, deprive, poet.; Stw and Sew h, fear, 
Ep.; tpvw and TPVXW Wear out ; Rae and waXe rub ; véw and poet. vaxw 
swim ; (07) &w to be sated, Ep. A. (&8e-) "adnoa - & 9a and éx8alpw hate, 
mostly poet.; K¥ALw, KudyBw pe: and kvAtvdéw, roll. 


355. u,v, w (for r and t, see 357, 352). IL. 
VoweL Form. VOWELS ANNEXED to protract the 
stem are chiefly (u) a and (v) e, but (w) some- 


times others : as, 

(u) 2 A. &yoor, yodw bewail ; Eptkov, pikdouar low ; epaKov, pynKkdoua 
bleat ; 2 Pf. BeBpvyxa, Bpoxdopac roar (onomatopes, as also BAnxdouat, 
balo, ‘Germ. bliken, bleat) ; (v) yeynOa, yubéw poet., rejoice ; 2 A. &krutrop, 
Ktutréw crash ; F. (SoK-) d5Ew, Soxéw seem, think ; (0-) dow, ww push ; 
ET peNOMaL and eripenéouar take care of ; (w) edkw, late cdo draw 3 (dp-, 
duvu-n", duo-) Opvdue swear, F. dpdow. Cf. Lat. sectum, secare, to cut; 
doctum, doceo, teach; captum, capio, take; ventum, venio, come, &c. 

a. (u*, v2) When a is affixed, € in the preceding syllable usually be- 
comes  ; but when e is affixed, 0: as, tpétw, poet. Tpwrdw and tpoTéw, 
turn ; orpedu, chiefly poet. orpadéw and orpopéew, twist ; vépw and 
vopdaw distribute ; (oxer-) oxérroua t, and oKoméw, view. 

B. This addition of vowels appears to be also in part euphonic. For 
vowels added with consonants, see 349 s. 


356. p, r (for q, see 3535). TL. Prerorma- 
TIves lengthening the stem consist chiefly of (x) 
three kinds of reduplication ; and (p) the few others 
may be rather eaphoime than emphatic : as, 


(p) omatpw and aomalpw gasp ; Svpouar and é8dpouar lament ; dKé\do, 
for Ké\Aw, cone to land. 

357. yr. Repupiicatep Stems. Reduplication in the stem 
is most frequent in verbs in -ys and -cxco. It is of three kinds : 

1. (rt) Proprr, prefixing the first letter with -i- (rarely with 
-e-) to stems beginning with a single consonant, with a mute and 
liquid, or with py-: as, 

(80-, 880-) Sidwur, (Be-, AcHe-, 159 a) TlOnue (45) ; (Xpa-, xixpa-) klypnue © 
lend ; (wha-, mi-p-tAa-, 344) miurdrnue fill, (rpa-) riumpynuc burn; 2 Ae 
Baov poet., S8dacKw teach ; épay (45 h), BiB odoe run ; (yvo-) even, 
yyvackw ks, know ; tpadw Ep. , and titp@oKw, wound ; F. (rpa-) tpijcw, 
Tetpalvw bore. Cf. Lat. gigno, sisto. 

2. (x?) Arric, prefixing the two first letters to ini eee 
ning with a short vowel followed by a single consonant : 

(ap-) dpaptoxw fit, poet.; (ayx-, dyay-, 159 a) dxayltw ds Ep. 
So, with the familiar vowel of reduplication , in place of the initial vowel 
repeated, (éva-) dviwyuu benefit ; drdddw and arirdddw rear, poet. 


3. (r®) ImpRoPER, simply prefixing « with the rough breathing 


246 FORMATION OF WORDS. § 357. 


to stems not included above: as, (ora-, cusra-, 141) torn, (é, 
i-€) ine (45); 2 A. enrduny, inrapa fly. 

a, Keduplication in the stem resembles that in the Perfect, except that 
the closer t takes the place of ¢, and that the Att. Redupl. does not also 
lengthen the initial vowel. Cf. di6wus and dléwxa, iornue and éoryKa, 
dpapicxw and its Pf. dpdpa. 


IV. Aporprep STEMS. 
(For t, see 352; u, v, w, 355; z, 349 y.) 


358, x. Some themes, to complete their inflec- 
tion, adopt tenses from stems that appear to be 
radically distinct : as, 

aipéw take, 2 A. (éd-) ef ov + Epyouat come, F. (édvO-, éXevd- h) edevoouat, 
2 Pf. edprvOa - éoOiw eat, 2 A. payor: dpdw see, F. (6m-) SYouar, 2 A. 
(i8-, 279 c) eidov: tpéxw run, 2 A. papov: dépw bear, F. otcw, Pf. 
(€vex-) evjvoxa : dvéouar buy, 2 A. émprduny (45 i). 

a. Nore. For general views of the CLASSES OF STEMS, and their 


RELATION TO THE TENSES, see 47, 49; for a CATALOGUE OF ILLUSTRA- 
TIVE VERBS, see 50. 


CHAPTER Xdg 
FORMATION OF WORDS. 


359. a. The Greek, like all other original languages, is the 
development, according to certain natural laws, of a small nwm- 
ber of germs, or primary elements. ‘These elements (termed by 
botanic figure roots or radicals) have a significance which is not 
arbitrary, but founded upon instinctive principles of the human 
constitution. 

b. If a word contains only one radical, either with or with- 
out formative elements (172), it is termed sample ; but, if 
more than one, compound. Of simple words containing the same 
radical, that which appears to have been the earliest is called 
the primitive ; and the others, derivatives. 

e. Of those words which are commonly distinguished as primitive and 
derivative, some are directly related to each other as parent and child ; 
while others are merely formations from the same vadlicade which, however, 
may have a simpler form in the one than in the other. It is important to 
observe this distinction, though the same language is commonly, for the 
sake of convenience, employed in both cases. The parent of a word is 
sometimes called zs primitive, even when it is itself the child of an older 


word. So the term stem is sometimes extended to the essence of a word 
which is not inflected (172 a). 


/ 


§ 361. PRIMITIVES AND DERIVATIVES. > 247 


d. The much agitated question, whether the radicals of language are 
nouns or verbs, has no propriety, inasmuch as the origin of these radicals 
was prior to grammatical distinctions, and the same radical was used as 
noun, adjective, verb, &c., as the case might require. When, however, 
a verb or a nown can with equal ease be taken as the primitive, the verd is 
more frequently so regarded. So, if an adjective and nown have the same 
stem, precedence is usually given to the adjective. Thus dépyw to lead is 
commonly esteemed the primitive, rather than apyés leader ; and (Babe-) 
Babds deep, rather than Baos depth. 

e. In tracing derivations, it is sometimes convenient to asswme a theme, 
either as a primitive, or as a link of connection. We must, however, be 
cautious in pronouncing that to have been essential in the actual forma- 
tion of the language, which we find convenient in explaining that forma- 
tion. 

f. Some trace derivation farther back than others, or trace it different- 
ly ; and hence regard that as a derived stem, which others consider a root. 
In some cases, we cannot go beyond a word, or stem, which is yet doubt- 
less derived, the simpler forms of the root having perished, or the word 
having been borrowed from another language. The evident roots of the 
Greek have commonly but one syllable and a short vowel (340. 3); and, if 
two consonants are combined in them, one is commonly a liquid or o: as 
in tpérw to turn, Upxw to lead, erdw to draw. 


360. The stem of a primitive sometimes remains unchanged 
in a derivative ; but it is commonly modzfied, chiefly by annex- 
ing significant syllables or letters. These are termed afforma- 
tives ; while the afformative, with the affix of the theme if this 
is added, may be distinguished as the suffix. 


Thus, in dporpov plough and dvrpov ransom, the stems a&po- and Av- of the 
verbs dpdéw to plough, Jw to loose, are modified by the addition of the affor- 
mative -tp-, Which denotes instrument or means ; and thus give rise to the 
new stems apotp- and Avtp-, to which again the affix of inflection -ov is 
added, making the themes dpo-rp-ov and dv-rp-ov. These words are more 
briefly said to be formed by adding to the primitive stems the suffix 
-Tpov. 

* The force of afformatives, as of words, is often extended beyond their 
original significance. 

b. The general distinction between inflection and derivation may be 
thus briefly stated : that the former expresses variation in the relations 
of an idea ; but the latter in the idea itself; while composition wnites the 

ideas of different words. 


361. Derivation shows also many euphonic changes, espe- 
cially such as take place before the affixes of verbs: thus, 

a.) Changes of consonants: as, tp{(8-r)arrns rubber, ta(y-ce)Ets arrange- 
ment, me(O-rix)oriKds persuasive. Cf. 304. 

b.) Precession or the use of a kindred vowel: as, (BaotXe-) Bacidevs 
king, Baoidtkds kingly ; A€yw to speak, Adyos speech; deltrw to leave, do- 
mos remaining, aphy to help, apwyds helpful. Cf. 312. 

ce.) The lengthening of a short vowel, or the insertion of © or y: as, 
movéw to compose, wointrs poet ; oelw to shake, ca-o-p5s a shaking, shock ; 
atéw to increase, adv§-y-tTrkds augmentative. Cf. 307, 310, 311. Even an 
initial vowel is sometimes lengthened; as, 700s (€0w) usage, wped€w (Spe- 
Aos) to help. 


248 . DERIVATION. § 361. 


d.) Contraction, Syncope, Metathesis, &c.: as, dewcua Gouna song ; adn- 
Ons truc, (ad\nbe-ca) aA7jOea truth ; Kaew to call, (kre-) KAnTHp summoner ; 
Teuvw ‘to cul, Tu®ors cutting. Cf. 342. 

e, A union-vowel is often inserted. Before some suffixes, this is so 
uniform that it is commonly treated as part of the suffix. Other suffixes 
vary in this respect : as, 0dv-a-ros death, b-e-rds rain, Kkwxvd-rbs wailing. 


I. FORMATION OF SIMPLE WORDS. 


362. Simple words are divided in respect to their forma- 
tion into three classes: (a) those which consist of the mere 
radical, without change, except for euphony or emphasis ; (b) 
those which have, in addition, merely the affixes of inflection ; 
(c) those which receive further modifications. 


d. The Rules and Remarks which follow have respect chiefly to the 
last class. Some of the rarer modes of formation are left for lexicons and 
observation. 

e. Words derived from verbs are called VERBALS ; from nowns (whether 
substantive or adjective, according to the old classification), DENOMINA- 
TIVES ; from pronowns, PRONOMINALS. 

f. Many derivative nouns are properly adjectives used substantively. 


A. Novuns. 


363. I. From Verss. Nouns formed from verbs (or from 
common radicals, 359 c) denote, 


1.) The acTion or ABSTRACT IDEA of the verb. These are 
formed by adding to the stem of the verb, 


a.) -ous (Gen. -cews, fem.), or -ola (Gen. -olds, f.): as, pywé-ouar to 
imitate, utun-ovs imitation ; mpdoow (vr. wpay-) to act, wpa(y-ous)—ts action ; 
Ovw to sacrifice, Ovoia sacrifice ; Soxyudagw to try, doxuacia trial. Here -o- 
appears to have come from -t-, which remained in a few words where c 
preceded, and a few others: as, rioris faith, wioris inquiry, dumwres ebb- 
ing. See 143b, 298; and cf. Lat. verbals in -tio and -sio, as actio, 
divisio. 

b.) -n, -a (G. -4s, -ds, f.): as, pevyw (r. puy-) to flee, puy-y flight ; 
Tp:pw to nour ish, Tpopy nourishment ; xaipw (rv. Xxap- -) to rejoice, xap-a jo Ys 
Pbetow to corrupt, p0opa corruption. ‘Some verbs in -edw have abstracts in 
-ela (194 b. a): as, madedw to tnstruct, madelad tinstruction. 

c.) -og (G. -ov, m.): as, hey-w to speak, hoy-os speech ; o1eipw to sow, 
ordpos sowing ; méw to sail, wrbos sailing, voyage. 

d. -ros (G. -Tov, m. ), -rm (G. -rys, f.) and Ion. -ris (G. -rUos, f.) : as, 
Kwkv-w to wail, kwKv-rbs wailing ; Bidw to live, Brorh and Bloros life ; wéedw 
to care, eee care ; dpxéouat to dance, lon. épynoris dancing. Cf. Lat. 
verbals in -¢us and sus, as cantus, cursus. 

e.) -}s (G. -pod, m.), or -pyn (G. -pys, f.): as, 6dvp-ouae to lament, 
ddup-uds lamentation ; mé-uvn-par to remember, urh-un remembrance ; bin 
(pnui) fama, report. Exceptions to 148 here occur, especially in the use 
of @ and x before -f0s: as, KAavOuds weeping, aiyuds drought. 

f.) -os (G. -e€os, n.): as, x7d-oua to care, xfd-os care. Cf. Lat. -us 
(frigus). 


§ 366. NOUNS. 249 


g. Other suffixes appear in 6 yéd\ws, -wros, laughter, bdeOpos destruc- 
tion ; ) adynddv pain (cf. Lat. cupido), Sivaps, -ews, power, €drls, -l6os, 
hope, wev0s persuasion, aidds, -dos, shame, wXynomovy saticty, xapts, -tTos, 
favor ; the Ep. ravoewh? cessation, éhrwpy hope ; &c. See 386 d. 

h. From the tendency of abstracts to pass into coneretes, verbals of 
Class 1 often express not so much the action itself, as an effect, object, 
circumstance, &c., of the action, and thus blend with other classes: as, 
ypauph line, Séo.s gift, \dxos share. So pvdaxh, watch, may signify not 
only the act of watching (Keep watch), but also the time (The third watch 
of the night), the place (He is in the watch), and even the persons concerned 
‘Call the watch). The watch which keeps the time for us meanwhile, was 
not known to the Greeks. 


364. 2.) The errnct, or opsect of the action. These are 
formed by adding to the stem of the verb, 


a.) -pa (G. -paros, n.): as, mpdoow to do, rpay-ua (rd rempaypevov fac- 
tum, thing done) deed ; ypddw to write, ypdupa (To yeypaumevoy scriptum, 
thing written) letter ; oreipw to sow, orépya thing sown, seed. . Ct. Lat. 
verbals in -men : as, agmen, that which is led, train ; volimen, roll. 

b. Other suffixes appear in 7d dGpov gift, wéradov leaf, BéXeuvov missile ; 
7 ayedn herd (those led) ; &c. See also 363 h. 


365. 3.) The porr. These are formed by adding to the 
stem of the verb, 


a.) -tys (G. -rov, m.): as, Oed-ouae to behold, Oed-rhs beholder ; movew 
to compose, mwoinrys poeta, poet ; xrifw to found, xrisrns founder. 

b.) -rhp (G. -rijpos, m.) or -rwp (G. -Topos, m.): as, didwue (r. 50-), to 
give, do-r7p dator, giver; cdfw to save, cwrhp servator, savior ; Yr. pe-, to 
speak, pj-twp orator, speaker. Cf. Lat. verbals in -tor, and Eng. in -er, 
-ster (songster). (c) The feminines corresponding to Classes a. and b. end 
in -Tpva or -repd (proparoxytone, G. -Gs), or in -tpts or -tis (G. -t80s) : 
as, mowjrpia poetria, poetess, cwreipa servatrix, female deliverer ; addyris 
and -rip, flute-player, atdyrpls and -rpia, flute-girl ; rpopyrns prophet, 
mpopirtis prophetess. Cf. Lat. -trix (oratrix, victrix). 

d.) -evs (G. -éws,m.): as, ypdd-w to paint, ypad-evs painter ; POeipw to 
corrupt, pbopeds corrupter ; Kelpw to shave, xouped’s barber. 

e.) -ds (G. -od, m. f.): as, dpx-w to lead, apx-ds leader ; Tpépw to nour- 
ish, rpopds nurse ; deldw to sing, dqudds minstrel. 

f.) -pov (G. -povos, m.): as, tyé-ouac to lead, tye-udv leader ; datw to 
distribute, daiuwy, distributer, deity. 

g. Other suffixes appear in 6 réxrwy, -ovos, workman, Oeparwv attendant, 
Tpoxis, runner, &c. 

h. Some verbals of Class 3 are applied to things: as, palw to beat, pat- 
arip beater, hammer, {worrp girdle, anrns wind (blower), euBorevs stopper, 
tvevjwv lungs (breathers). 


366. 4.) The PLACE, INSTRUMENT, or other means or cir- 
cumstances of the action. These are formed by adding to the 
stem of the verb, . 

a.) -thptov (G. -ov, n.), more frequently expressing place: as, dxpod- 
ouat to hear, axpoa-ryjprov auditorium, place of hearing, auditory ; diuKaocr?- 
prov (dixafw) court of justice ; morjpiov (rivw) poculum, drinking-cup. Cf. 
374 b, 875 N.; and Lat. -torium. 6 ee 

REY. Gr. 11% 


250 DERIVATION. § 366. 


b.) -tpov (G. -ov, n.), or -Tpa& (G. -ds, f.), more frequently expressirg 
means: as, ébw to curry, Ebarpov and Evorpa currycomb, a&porpov aratrum, 
plough (360), Adrpov (Avw) ransom (means of releasing), épxjorpa (dpy¢o- 
pat) orchestra. Cf. Lat. -trwm, -bra, (latebra, hiding-place), &e. 

ce. Other suffixes appear in 76 k\e?Opov bar, mrepiv wing, Brépapw eyo- 
lid, Spéravov and -dvyn sickle; 6 orcpavos crown ; 7 dpa seat, Koirn bed, 
Oupery altar; &e. 

d. Norr. Suffixes of verbals are annexed, in general, with the same 
euphonic changes as the similar affixes of inflection (361): i. e. those be- 
ginning with o follow the analogy of -o of the Fut. or -oat of the Perf. 
pass.; those beginning with p and t, of -par and -rat of the Perf. pass. ; 
and those beginning with a vowel, of the 2d Perf. It is convenient to re- 
member, that verbal nouns following the Ist Pers. sing. of the Perf. pass. 
more frequently denote the thing done; the 2d, the doing ; and the 3d, 
the doer. Thus, 


me-moln-at, me-Toln-oAl, W€-T0iN-TAL, 
moln-Ma, poem, Toln-ols, Poesy, Toln-THS, poet. 


367. II. From AnJectives. Nouns formed from adjec- 
tives (or from common radicals, 359 ¢) usually express the 
ABSTRACT of the adjective, and are formed in, 


a.) -la (G. -lds, f.), or oftener, if the stem ends in € or 0, -t& forming, 
with the stem-mark, -e& or -ovt: as, cop-ds wise, cop-ld sapient-ia, wis- 
dom ; evdaiuwv, -ov-os, happy, evdamov-ia happiness ; adnOns, -€-os, true, 
arA7jGed truth ; evvo-os, contr. etvous, kind, etvous kindness. See 194b, ce, 
375a; and cf. Lat. -da (miseria, concordia). 

b.) -rys (G. -ryros, f.), from adjectives in -es and -vs: as, tcos equal, 
icérns equalitas, equality ; raxvs swift, raxuTys celeritas, swiftness. Cf. 
Lat. -tas, -tia, -ties, -tudo (mollitia, mollities, altitudo). 

c.) -cvvy (G. -xs, f.), from adjectives in -os and -av: as, dixacos just, 
dxavoov’rn justice ; cHppwv discreet, cwppoctvy discretion. 

d.) -os (G. -eos, n.), chiefly from adjectives in -vs: as, Badds deep, 
Bados depth ; etpts broad, ebpos breadth ; raxvs (b), Taxos speed. 

e.) -as (G. -d80s, f.), from numerals: as, dvo two, dvds duad ; rpids. 


368. III. From Oruer Nouns. Nouns derived from 
other nouns are chiefly, 


1.) Parriaxs, and similar words denoting persons related to 
some object. ‘These end in, 


- a.) -tys (G. -rov, m.) and -tts (G. -ri80s, f.; 235 a), with the preceding 

vowel long in patrials (-irys, -ATys, -arys, -Larys, -LéTys) and also in other 
nouns in urns, -tTis : as, VUBapis Sybaris, VvBapiryns, a man of S., a Sy- 
barite, ZvBapiris, a woman of S.; Alywihrns, Wucarns, Zrapridrys, Dire- 
AwwTrys, a man of Algina, &c.; wdrus city, woXirys citizen, moNiris female 
citizen ; tdEov bow, rokbrns archer, Toédsris archeress. 

b.) -ebs (G. -éws, m.) and -ts (G. -(80s, f.; 217f): as, Méyapa Megara, 
Meyapev’s Megarian man, Meyapls M. woman; pdpwaxov drug, papyaxed’s 
dealer in drugs, sorcerer, papwaxls sorceress ; trmos equus, horse, trmeds 
eques, horseman, knight. 


c. A PATRIAL NOUN (patria, native land) denotes a person belonging 
to a particular cowntry ; a GENTILE NOUN (gens, nation), one belonging 
to a particular nation. Adjectives have like distinctions. 


§ 371. NOUNS, 251 


369. 2.) Patronymics (so called from containing the fa- 
ther’s or an ancestor’s name, rarpds dvoza). These end in, 


a.) -8ys (G. -Sov, m.) and -s (G. -80s, f.), preceded by -d- if from 
names in -tos or of Dec. 1, but otherwise by -t- (-(8ys uniting with a pre- 
ceding € or 0) : as, Bopéds Boreas, Bopeddns son of B., Bopeds daughter of 
B.; Oésrwos, Oerriddns, Oecrids * Iplamwos, Upiautdns, Ipiapis: Kéxpoy, 
Kexporidys, Kexpomis > IIn evs, -éws, ndeldns Pelides ; “Hpaxdeidns (19 b) ; 
Ayr, -b0s, Anrotins. The Ep. often uses the form in -tadys after a long 
syllable, for the sake of the metre : Pnpyriddns, B. 763 ; InArniddys, A. 1, 
also IIn\etdns, v. 1. -eldns, 223. 

b.) -tov (G. -fwvos, rarely -fovos,m.) and -tavy or -tvy (G. -ns, f.), 
only poetic : as, Kpivos Saturn, Kpoviwy, -iwvos or tovos, son of S., A. 397; 
IImAevs, IIpdetwy, v. 1. -etwv, A. 188 ; ’Axpiotos, “Axpicidvn, daughter of A., 
E. 319; “Adpnoros, Adpynzrivn E. 412. The poets even blend the forms 
a. and b., as in ‘Iameriovidys son of Japetus, Hes. Th. 614 ; and use other 
freedoms: as, fr. AevxadNiwy and Aduros, Aevcadidns, M. 117, Aaueriéns, 
O. 526. 

c. Patronymics appear to have been, in their origin, diminutives : 
Ii piauténs little Priam. Cf. 371d. Akin to the above are a few words in 
-tSéos, contr. -\8ets, — son, -.5éa, contr. -.84, — daughter: as, Ovyarpt- 
dots, -167, daughter's son, — daughter, adedpidots, -1d7, nephew, niece ; 
also a few such comic derivatives as k\errldns son of a thief, Pherecr. Inc. 
79. See Ar. Ach. 595s. 


370. 3.) Fremate AppELuatives. These end in, ig 


a.) -ts (G. -80s), chiefly from masculines of Dec. 1, and from those in 
-eUs : as, deordtns master, decréris mistress (also décrowa, cf. b). See 
235 a. 

b.) -atva (G. -ns), chiefly from masculines in -av: as, \éwy, -ovros, 
leo, Zion, Aéawa lewna, lioness ; réxrwv, -ovos, artisan, téxrawa* AdKwr, 
-wos, Spartan, Adxawa. Also from some in -os: as, eds god, Oéawa 
goddess (174 b) ; AvKos wolf, Adxawa. Cf. Lat. gallina, regina. 

c.) -ed (G. -elas) : as, Bacideds rex, king, Bacihea regina, queen; lepeds 
priest, i€peca priestess. Cf. 235 c¢. 

d.) -cod (-tTd, 169a; G. -ns), from several endings of Dec. 3: as, 
Kircé, -cxos, Cilician, Kit(icla, 143 coon: dvaz, -xros, sovereign, évacca* 
Ons, -rbs, hireling, 07(tTIa)\ooa: AiBus, -vos, Lybian, AliBvoca. 

e.) -a, -y, &c.: as, Ged goddess (cf. b) ; ddedpds brother, adedph sister. 
See also 235, 365 c, 368, 369. 


371. 4.) Diminutives (sometimes expressing affection, often 
contempt). These end in, 


a.) -tov (G. -lov, n.), with a syllable often prefixed (-(8ov, -dpvov, 
-tA\ov, -t8proy, -bdrov, &c.) ; (b) -loKkos (G. -ov, m.), -(oKn (G. -ns, f.) : as, 
mats puer, child, Diminutives, racdtoy little child, maidtcxos, wadapickos, 
puerulus, puellus, puerctilus, young boy, little boy, madioxn puella, puel- 
lila, young or little girl, raddprov, mardapld.ov, madapUrNov, mardicKd prov * 
Hetpag youth, peipdkov, petpaxidvov, merpaktdAdov, pecpaxudAld.ov, pecpaxt- 
gKos, pepaxicxn Kdpn girl, xdbptov, koploxn, KoploKtov, Kopidiov, Kopdovov (for 
-dptov, on account of the preceding p), copacidiov + vijcos island, vnovdptov * 
fGov animal, (fwid.ov) Fwd.ov, (wddpiov, Fwipiov. “Q Lw«pares, & Vwxpari- 
diov, O Socrates ! dear Socky / Ar. Nub. 222. 

c.) -ts (G. -(80s and -t8os, f.): as, mivaé tabula, table, rwakis, -ldos, 


252 DERIVATION. § 371. 


tabella, tablet ; vijoos isle, vnots, -t80s, islet ; xpivn fons, fountain, kpyvis, 
-tdos, fonticulus. 

d.) -wWets (G. -€ws, m.; of the young of animals): as, derdés eagle, aert- 
devs caglet ; hays hare, \aybevs ; also vids, viideds grandson. 

e.) -tyvn, -akvn, ~tios, -Xos, -én, -tAos, -vANs, -UAos, -vAn, &c.: as, 
modus city, modtxvn* mifos wine-jar, wiOdxvn: Kdxkos kernel, eaiane 
oxomds peak, oxéredos scoptlus ; vémos nubes, cloud, vepédy nebiila ; vav- 
Tns sailor, vavridos nautilus (little sailor); dxavOls finch, axavOvdXls * 
é_ws, -wros, love, épwrvdos Dor., darling, Theoc. 3. 7; xdyxn concha, 
muscle, Koyxt\n conchiila. Cf. Lat. diminutives in -dlus, -dlus, -ellus, 
-ctlus, -a, -wm. 

f. Some diminutives (especially in -vov) have lost their peculiar force : 
thus, @7p, commonly in prose Oyplov wild beast. Some proper names have 
diminutive forms, sometimes made by abbreviation: as, MéyAXos (uéyas 
great), Opacuddos (Bpacds bold), Acovis, Mnvas (227 b). 


372. 5.) AUGMENTATIVES, words implying znerease or large- 
ness, either of number, size, or degree. These end in, 


a.) -wv (G. -wvos,m.). This ending may express either a place, an 
animal, or a person, in which any thing exists 7 numbers, or in large 
size or degree: as, dumeNos vine, dime hoy vinétum, vineyard, tary (trmos) 
equile, horse-stable, avdpcr, yuvaikav (avnp, yun) apartments for men, 
women, oivwy (oivos) wine-cellar ; xeidos Lip, xevhdv, a fish with a long 
snout ; yvddos jaw, ya bev glutton ; wdros breadth, Uhdrev. As a desig- 
nation of place, -wvia is also used : as, podwrla (pddov) rosétum, rose-bed. 
Cf* Lat. Nast -Onis, Big-nose, capito, fronto, &e. 

b.) -a§ (G. -Gkos, m.), applied, like the preceding, to persons and ani- 
mals, but ilehae in its expression : as, rAodros wealth, wovragé a rich 
churl. So AdBpos greedy, Md Bpaé sea-wolf. Cf. Lat. adj. loguax, rapax. 


B. ADJECTIVES. 


373. Adjectives derived from verbs express, in general, relations 
(active or passive in their character) to the actions or states denoted by the 
verbs ; and those derived from nowns express relations to the persons or 
things denoted by the nouns. But, from their very nature, relations are 
distinguished with less precision than. thing gs or actions ; and, to some ex- 
tent, the offices stated below blend with each other. 


374. I. From Verss. These end in, 


a.) -tkds, -h, -dv, active: as, dpyw to rule, apy-txds able to rule; ypagdw 
to describe, ypadixds descriptive, graphic. ‘This ending is more frequently 
preceded by v (cf. 365 a, b): as, mounrixds (rovéw) poetic. But see 375 b. 

b. ) ~THPLOS, -G, -ov, active (rhp + vos, 365 b, 375 a): as, cwfw to save, 
gwrnp, Twrhp.os saving, preservative. Cf. Lat. ora-tor-ius. 

c.) -tpos, -ov (or -n, -ov), implying jitness, both active and passive, and 
annexed after the analogy of different verbal nouns: as, Teépw, Tpoph 
(363 b), tpdd-quos fitted to impart or to receive nowrishment, nutritious, vig- 
Orous ; xphotwos (xpdouat, xphows) fit for use. Cf. the various senses of 
Pveros. 

d.) -pev, -pov (G. -povos), active: as, éheéw to pity, édey-uwv compas- 
sionate ; uvhuwv (uéuvnuat) mindful ; vohuwv (vodw) thoughtful. 

e.) -7d6s, -h, -dv, passive, signifying that which ts done, either as a mat- 
ter of fact (like the Lat. Part. in -/ws or -sus), or more commonly as @ 


§ 375. ADJECTIVES. 253 


matter of habit or possibility : as, opdw to sce, dpa-rds visus, seen, visibi- 
lis, visible ; pidnréds amatus, amabilis. See 269d, 272c. 

f.) -ré0s, -d, -ov, passive (269 d), expressing necessity or obligation (like 
the Lat. Part. in -ndus) : as, movéw to make, rovyn-réos faciendus (Cic. has 
the sportive facteon), that is to be made. Often in neut. as impers. : 
ypamréov scribendum. 

g.) -vds, -4, -év, passive (compare the Part. in -pevos): as, céBw to 
revere, (ceB- “vos, 148 c) ENVIS revercd, mobewss (robéw) longed for. 

h.) -pds (-d, -dv), -ds (G. -dSos), -bs, &c.: as, xahdw to slacken, xada- 
pos slack ; pépw to bear, popas fruitful ; Néyw to choose, oyas ‘chosen s 
Nou Ss (Netw) remaining. 


375. II. From Nouns. These have the following end- 
ings, with, in general, the significations that are annexed : 


a.) -tos, pertaining to ; if a vowel precedes, commonly uniting with it 
in a diphthong (-atos, -evos, -o10s, -wos, -vios), and often, without respect 
to this, assuming the form -evos (lon. -ytos, 132), especially from names 
of persons and animals (iv. 5. 31). Many patrials (properly adjectives, 
but often used substantively) belong to this class. Thus, ovpavds heaven, 
ovpdav-tos coelestis, pertaining to heaven, heavenly, povios (pdvos) of murder, 
murderous, éviavavos (éviaurés, 143 b) annuus, for a year, Midryovos (Midn- 
tos) Milesius; dyopatos (ayopd) forensis, “A@nvatos (AO fvat) Athenian ; 
Getos (Ge-ds) divine, Bao trevos (Bacthevs, -€- ws), Ion. BacrAnjios, regius, royal, 
"Apyetos Argivus ; éqos (€ws), lon. jotos (ws, -5-0s), of the morning ; whyxuos 
(7ijxus) of a cubit's length ; avOpsrevos (dvOpwros) humanus, O7jpecos (A7p) 
ferinus, ‘Oujperos (“Ounpos) Homeric. Cf. Lat. -cus and -ivus. 

Nore. From the neuter of these adjectives has come a class of sub- 
stantives denoting an appropriated budlding or other place, instrument, 
&c.: as, ry (A@nva) Athéneum, Ongetor, Movcetov Mustum, temple 
of Minerva, of Theseus, of the Muses, xovpetov (koupevs) barber's shop, Ypap.- 
[arelov (ypaupareds) writing-tablet. Cf. 366. 

b.) -tds, -4, -dv (commonly -xds or -&xds after t or v, while -ates often 
makes -dixés), relating to. These adjectives in -«Kés are often formed from 
words that are themselves derivative. They apply to things rather than 
to persons. When used of the latter, they commonly signify related to in 
quality, or fit for, and are mostly ‘derfed from personal appellations. 
Thus, réxvn art, texv-cxds relating to art, artistic, moeusxds (demos) bel- 
licus, military ; vedvi-kds (vedvias) 4 youthful, Aipus Libyan, AcBuxbs per- 
taining to the Lib yans ; KoplyOcos Corinthian, Kopw@iaxés, omovderaxds 
(s7ovdetos) spondaie ; “Axatds Achcean, "Axaixds, and less Att. "Axatikéds - 
mount hs poet, monrixds poctic, moncrexts (xoXirns) civilis, civicus, oTpaTnyi- 
K3s (orparyés) jit for a general. See 374a; and cf. Lat. -icws, -tlis. 

¢.) -€0S, -a, -ov, and ztvos, -N; -Ov (proparoxytone), denoting material, 
-en : as, xpiods gold, xpic-eos aur-éus, golden, apytpeos argenteus ; £0\-wos 
(EVAov) wooden, xédpivos (xédpos) cedrinus, of cedar. Cf. Lat. cus, -inus. 

d.) -tvds, seldom -tvds, expressing time or prevalence: as, jp-wos (Ap) 
vernus, vernal, redwos (médov) level, dpewds (dpos, -e-os) montanus, moun- 
tainous. 

e.) -tvos, -nvds, -dvés, patrials, from names of cities and countries out 
of Greece: as, Tapavr-ivos (Tdpas, -avros) Twrentine, Kugixnvds (Kvgixos) 
Cyzicene, Dapbraves (Zz dpdets) Sardian. Cf. Lat. Latinus, Romanus, &e. 

f.) -pés, mihi -npds, -adé€os, -nAds, -wAds, -es (-eood, -ev, G. -evros), 
-odys (-es, G . -€0s, contr., as most think, fr. -o-edys, fr. eidos form), &c., 
expressing fulness, quality, &e.: as, alsxpds (atoxos) shameful, poBepss 
(p5Bos) fearful, wovnpos (wévos) painful, Oapsadéos (Odpaos) cowrageous, 


254 DERIVATION. — PRONOUNS. § 375. 


amar nds (ardrn) deceitful, perdwnrés (pedw) parsimonious, vAners (An) 


woody, mupdecs (dp, -upds) fiery, xaplers (xdprs) grace, opnxwdns (sP7é) 
wasp-like, Yaumwdns (Papos) sandy. 


376. III. From Apsectives AnD ADvERBS. a. From some 
adjectives and adverbs, derivatives are formed in the same man- 
ner as from nouns: thus, caOapds clean, kaOapros cleanly ; €dev- 
Oépios (€dedOepos liber) liberalis, /iberal; Ondv«ds (Ojrvs), feminine ; 
ovriWavds (ovris) worthless, A. 293 ; puxxddos (yexxds Dor. for pexpéds) 
parvulus, teny (371 e), Mosch. 1. 13; yOeouwds (xOés) hesternus, 
of yesterday ; Sevrepaios (Sevrépa, 8c. qépa) on the second day 
(240. 3). 

b. The adjective has in Greek, as in other languages, two 
strengthened forms, of which one may be termed dual, apply- 
ing to an object as one of two, and the other plural, applying 
to an object as one of a number (commonly more than two). 
The most obvious examples of these strengthened forms are 
the comparative and superlative degrees, commonly so called. 


c. Other examples of the comparative or dual strengthened form are, 
(1) the correlatives wérepos; whether of the two? morepds, repos (formed 
from the 3d Pers. pron. as the positive, or, as some think, from the 
numeral eis) one of the two, otdérepos, dwdrepos, éxdtepos, dupdrepos (see 53, 
and compare the Lat. uter, neuter, alter, and the Eng. whether, either, 
neither, other) ; (2) the following, implying a consideration of two objects or 
relations : SeEvrepés (poet. ) dexter, right (rather than left), apurrepds sinister, 
left, Sevrepos second, tuérepos noster, our (rather than yours), tmérepos 
vester, your (and, extending the analogy, opérepos their). 


d. Other examples of the superlative or plural strengthened form are, 
(1) the correlatives récros; which in order? or, one of how many? omédaros, 
€xacrtos (58) ; (2) all ordinals except devrepos ; see 240. 2, 264. 


C. PEonouae 


377. For the formation of the most common pronouns, see 
244s. The Greek abounds in correlative pronouns and ad- 
verbs (53). 


a. In respect to many of these, it will be observed that, when they be- 
gin with a-, they are indefinite, or interrogative (with a change of accent) ; 
with t-, definite or demonstrative ; with the rough breathing, relative 
definite ; and with 6t-, relative indefinite : as, wocos ; how much ? rocés 
of a certain quantity, rdc0s, Tocodros, and roadade (252 a), so much, bcos 
as much, érboos how much soever ; wire; when? roré at some time, rére 
then, dre when, ordre whensoever. 


b. The regular themes from these pronominal stems would be més, 7és, 
és, and dros. But of these only és is found, though the article has most 
éf its forms as from rés (249s). The radical T- (lon. x-, 168) corresponds 
to the Sans. k- and the Lat. qu-; and ém- (Ion. 6x-) is simply the combi- 
nation of this with the relative. 


§ 379. VERBS. 255 


D. VERBS. 


378. I. From Nouns anp Apssctives. Of these the chicf 
endings and prevailing significations are as follows : 


a.) -éw, -evw, and (mostly from nouns of Dec. 1) -de, to be or do that 
which is pointed out by the primitive: as, didos friend, pir-éw to be a 
Friend, love, eidamovéw (evdaiuwv, -ovos) to be prosperous, woNewéw (1dXe- 
pos) bello, wage war; dovev (Sotdos) servo, to be a slave, serve, Bacitevw 
(Baoudevs) regno, reign, xopevw (xopss) dance; Toudw (rdApua) audeo, be 
bold, dare, Timdw (ryuH) honor. So from superlatives: as, dpiucredw to be 
best. Cf. Lat. -eo, -(ao)o. 

b.) -é@ (mostly from words of Dec. 2), -atvw and -ivw (mostly from 
adjectives), to make, that which is pointed out by the primitive : as, 6#\os 
evident, dnr-dw to make evident, dovdw (3000s) make one a slave, enslave, 
puerbu (xpuads) make golden, gild, TTEpsw (wreptv) make winged, furnish 
with wings; NevKalyw (devkss) whiten, cnuatvw (cia) signify, ndvvw (Hdvs) 
sweeten. 

ce.) -({w, and (chiefly when formed from words which have a or y in the 
last syllable, or when preceded by t, ef. 369 a, 375 b) -at ; from names 
of persons or animals, imitative (denoting the adoption of the manners, 
language, opinions, party, &c.); from other words, used in various senses, 
but mostly active: as, Mné-é tw (Mjjd0s) to tmitate or Savor the Medes, ‘EX- 
Anvifw speak Greek, Awl fm and Awpidgw live, talk, sing, or dress like the 
Dorians, Piva tw be of Philip's party, ddwrekifw (4dadrnt) play the fox ; 
tourifw (rodros) make rich, evdatmovifw esteem happy, Oepifw (B¢pos) har- 
vest, épifw (Epis) contend, éopragw (éoprn) make a feast, duced fw (dixn) judge, 
Oavpdgw (Patua) wonder. Cf. Lat. patrisso (pater), Grecisso. 

d.) -tdw, rarely -dw, expressing desire (Desideratives), or morbid state : 
as, wabnriys disciple, uaPnr-taw to wish to become a disciple, Ar. Nub. 183 ; 
oTparyyiaw (orparnyos) desire military command, vil. 1. 33; @avardw 
(@dvaros) d-sire death, Pl. Pheedo 64b ; ordnuidw (ord*yyv) be splenetic. 

e. -@ with simply a strengthening of the penult, more frequently 
active ; as, Kabdpdés pure, xadalpo to purifr Y, TotktANw (qotKtdos) and aldAhw 
(ai5dos) variegate, wardoow (uardxds) soften, decmdfw (deomrdrns) be lord, 
Koxxb fw (kéxxvé) cry cuckoo. 

f. Other endings appear in xoviw (xéms) to bedust, Saxpiw (ddxpu) weep, 
pevfw (ped) and oluwfw (otwor) wail, oixrelpw (otkros) pity, brvaoow (Umrvos) 
be drowsy, sleep, &c. 


379. II. From Otuer Verss. ‘These are 


a.) Desideratives, formed in -oetw, from the Fut.: as, yeddw to laugh, 
yeracelw wish to laugh, Pl. Pheedo 64b, modeuncetw (rod\euéw) wish for 
war, Th. i. 33. Cf. Lat. desideratives fr. the Fut. Part.: as, esurio /r. 
esiirus. 

b.) Various prolonged forms in -fa, -oKw, -AAw, &c., sometimes frequen- 
tative or intensive, as, pirtw jacio, to throw, purrdfw jacto, throw to and fro, 
oTévw sigh, crevafw sigh deeply, airéw ask, airigw beg ; sometimes incep- 
tive (350.4), as, 7Bdw to be of age, HBdoxw become of age ; sometimes causa- 
tive, as, webiw to be intoxicated, weOvaKxw intoxicate ; sometimes diminutive, 
as, éfarardw cheat, é£arariddw (cf. 371) cheat a little, humbug, Ar. Eq. 
1144; but often scarce differing in force from the primitive form (336 s). 
Cf. Lat. facesso (facio), despatch, scribillo (seribo), scribble, &c. 

ce.) A few forms, chiefly poetic, in which reduplication, more or less 
regular, gives a transitive or intensive sense; as, wivw to drink, mimioxw 


4 


7) a ee ee 
ee . 


256 DERIVATION. § 379, 


give to drink ; patouat (ua-) seek, warudw pant for, Soph. Aj. 50; pipw 
fluw, poppitpw dash, ®. 325 ; rvéw breathe, rourviw puff, A. 600 ; dz-, sce, 
érimevw gaze at, A. 3871. See 357. Cf. Lat. tinnio, tintinnio, tinkle. 


E. ADVERBS. 


380. Most adverbs belong to the following classes : 


I. Osniique Cases or Nouns anp ADJECTIVES, employed as 
circumstantial adjuncts (see Syntax). With an adjective thus 
employed, a noun is strictly to be supplied. Many of these 
oblique cases have antique forms, and many belong to themes 
that are not in use. Thus, 


a.) ACCUSATIVES : as, dwpedy as a gift, gratis, dxun at the moment, 
xdpw in gratiam, for the sake of, dixny instar, like ; and the Neut. sing. 
and pl. of adjectives, especially Comparatives and Superlatives (263). 

b.) GENITIVES, (1) in -Oev(192), denoting the place whence ; (2) in 
-ov, denoting the place where : as, ob [sc. rémrov or xwplov] in which place, 
where, airot there, ouod in the same place, ovdauod nowhere ; (3) in -ys: 
as, alpyns (and éfaipvys, 382 a; so Lat. repente and derepente) of a sudden, 
efjs (and épegjjs, 382 a) in order ; (4) mpotxds (wpolé) of gift, gratis, Kc. 

c.) DATIVES, (1) in -ov, -06t of Dec. 2 sing., and in -ynor(y, -dor(v, of 
Dec. 1 pl., denoting the place where (in adverbs in -ov derived from pro- 
nouns, this commonly passes into the idea of whither ; cf. the familiar use 
of where, there, &c., in Eng.) : as, “A@jvnow at Athens, Wdarataot at Pla- 
toece, Ovpaar at the door ; (2) in -y (-y), -@ (-a), -av of Dec. 1, and in -t of 
Dec.. 3, denoting way, place where, or time when: as, rabry [sc. dd@] in 
this way, thus, [sc. xépa] in this place, here, wavrax7y every way, every- 
where, resp on foot, dia privately, xauat humi, on the ground, wddat in 
olden time, &xnre by the will of, the (ts, 190) with might, A. 38, dyxe near, 
jpe carly, I. 360. 

d. For the old Dat. forms -ou, -o8t, -at, and -yow (for which -dou was 
common after ¢€, t, or p, 115 a), see 187, 191, 198. The adverbial Dat. is 
usually written with t subse., when it has the same form in common 
Greek with a noun or adj. so written, and some carry the use of this 
v still farther (109 a). 

e. Some pronominal or kindred adverbs are strengthened by the inser- 
tion of -Gy-: as, dAAaxyod and d\d\ax elsewhere, wavtaxh (Cc), mocaxGs ; 
in how many ways (381a)? See 58; and cf. 191. 3. The insertion of 
-ak- in numeral adverbs (381. 4) may be akin to this. 

f. Some adverbs, originally dative forms or akin to these, have -s or -v 
movable (163a, 164): as adverbs of place in -ou(v, numerals in -dxe(s, 
mépvot(v, abvOc(s, otrw(s (cf. rd and wws). These suggest that other ad- 
verbs in -as, -ts, &e. may have been of dative origin or analogy, as so 
many Lat. adverbs in -e, -o, te-r, &c., appear to have been of ablative. 


381. II. Derivatives sicniryine, (1.) MANNER, in, 


a.) -ws, from adjectives. The adverb may be formed by changing v of 
the Gen. pl. into ¢: as, copds, G. pl. copav, wise, copSs sapienter, wisely ; 
raxvs, Taxéwy, swift, Taxéws swiftly ; capds (cadis, -éwv, Gv), lon. ca- 
péws, manifeste, evidently : fr. adj. pronouns and participles, @s, és, éré- 
pws* mperdvrws, elkdTws, TeTAYMEVUS. 

b.) -n86v or -Sov (perhaps kindred with e?dos, form), chiefly from 
nouns ; -8yv or -a8yy, chiefly from verbs (those in -a$yv conforming to 








$383, ° ADVERBS. aye 


366d; and -8a: as, tAWOnddv (rivOos) like bricks, Hdt. 2. 96, Borpudév 
(B5rpus) in clusters, B. 89, ayednddv gregatim, in herds, avagpavddy or -da 
(avadaivw) openly, xpvBdnv or -6a (xptmTTw) secretly, ocmopddny (o7eipw) 
sparsim, scaticringly, puiydnv, -da, or -ddnv, mistim. These appear to be 
Acc. forms (cf. 380 a): Sing. fem. -3yv, neut. -dov and pl. -6a. Cf. Lat. 
-tim (-sim), -atim. 

e. -t or -ef, especially from imitative verbs (378 ¢ ; -{w becoming -or/), 
and in compounds of 4- privative, airés, and mwas~ as, Mnduori like the 
Medes, “EXX\nuori in the Greek language; dpss0i (wc 05s) without pay, 
dpaxel and duayynrel, or -l, without battle, abroxerpi (xelp) with one’s own 
hand, mavinuet (Siuos) with the whole people. These appear to be Dat. 
forms (cf. 380 ¢). 

d.) -€ mostly from palatal stems: as, dva-ulyviue (r. wry-, 351. 3) to 
mix up, avaulé confusedly, pellmell, maparda4§& (wap-ahrAdoow) alternately, 
6a& and 60dE (ddxvw, ddovs, 351. 1, 17 c) by biting. 


(2.) Time WHEN, in -re (Dor. -ca, 168), or, for more specific 
expression, in -ika: as, dAddre (dAdos) at another time, adrixa 
(avrés) at the very moment. See 58. 


(3.) PLACE WHITHER, in -ce (which appears to be a softened 
form of -de, 382a, or at least kindred with it): as, weddce to the 
ground, Eur. Bac. 137, = medovde Soph. Tr. 786 ; éxeice thither, 
érépace to the other side. See 58. ; 


Nore. The Ep. and Dor. -8s has now the force of -8, now of -Sov 
(b) : xauddis (= xaudge) to the ground, H. 16; dmoiBndis (= duorBnddr) 
im turn, Z. 506. 


(4.) NuMBER, in -dks, &c. See 241. 


382. III. PrepositionaL Forms anp PHRASES: as, 


a.) Prepositions with their Cases, (mpd épyov) rpotfpyou before the work, 
to the purpose, wapaxpiua upon the affair, immediately, (dc 5) ded on ac- 
count of which, wherefore, (év wod&y 66) éurodwv in the way of the feet, 
O7nBafe (from O7Bas and -de, an inseparable preposition denoting direction 
towards, 137 d), poet. O7jBacde VY. 679, to Thebes, “AOivate to Athens, Ov- 
page foras, out. 

___b. Prepositions used without Cases, rpés [sc. rovrw] in addition to this, 
besides, Msch. Pr. 73 ; év [sc. rovras] meanwhile, Soph. O. I. 27; perd 
in the midst, B. 446. 

ce. Derivatives from Prepositions, dvw (dvd) up, xdrw down, elow, tw, 
mpoow, later mippw porro ; évdov (381), évrds intus, éxrdés extra, mépt 
(381 d) circum. 

d. These adverbs in -o, with Comparattves and Superlatives in -répo 
Va -TaTe, as wellas rw yet, dricw behind, Sb thus, &c., have the Dat. 

orm. 









\ Il. FORMATION OF COMPOUND WORDS. 


383. In the union of two words to form a compound, 


A.) The First worp has commonly its stem-form with sim- 
ply euphonic or imitative changes. These changes, besides 
those which the general rules of orthoépy require, consist chiefly, 

REY. GR. me) 


258 COMPOSITION. $ § 383, 


a.) In the addition of a wnion-vowel (termed the composition-vowel), 
which, after a substantive or adjective, is commonly -o-, but sometimes 
-N-) -G@-, -t-, -ol-, or -at-; and, after a verb, -o-, -€-, or -t-: as, bv0-o- 
ypagpos hae -os, ypdgw) fable-writer, mad-o- roe twats -66s, TptBw) in- 
structor, dtx-o-déyos (dix-n, Méyw) advocate, Pavar-n-pdpos death-bringing, 
rood -virritp foot-bath, wup-t-yevns fire-born, 66-o1-répos wayfarer, mer-at- 
modos half-gray, N. 361 ; devw-o-rakia (Neiw-w, Takis) leaving one’s post, 
apx-é-xopos (apx-w) chorus-leading, tepm-t-xépavvos (tépm-w) delighting tr 
thunder, A. 419. 

b.) In the contraction of this vowel with an adjoining vowel : as, (dpe- 
-Barns, fr. dpos, -e-os, and Balvw) dpeiBarns mountain-ranging, (va&-o-Kédpos, 
{r. va-ds and Kopéw, 1201) vewxdpos temple-sweeper, (ya-o-merpia) yewmeTpla 
geometry. A vowel so contracted appears especially in some words which 
have dropped F or o: as, xax-o-Fepyds o. 54 (Bek.), xaxodpyos evil-doer, 
(paBd-o-cexos) paBdobxos staff-bearer. Cf. 279 e, 345. 

c.) In the addition of «, commonly connected by a union-vowel either 
to the succeeding or preceding word, and sometimes even to both: as, 
mav-o-dveuwos (Tav-w, dveuos) wind-allaying, piwaoms (pimtw, 352) shield- 
dropper, coward, tede-o-pdpos (rédos, -€-0s, pépw) fulfilling, 0é-c-paros 
(Ge-os, pnut) divinely appointed, Kepacpdpos horned, dd-ct-rTedhs (dd-w, 
TéXos) tncome-paying, vav-ol-mopos navigable, (m.y-co-Onp, 351. 3) utEoOHp 
half-beast ; Qe-oc-exOpia impiety, pep-éo-Bios life-bringing ; Tap-eol-xpws 
(réuyw, 340. 3) flesh-cutting, A. 511; modt-oco-véuos (c doubled to make a 
long syllable) city-ruling, AXsch. Cho. 864. In some of these cases, the | 
o@ appears to have been borrowed from the theme or the Dat. pl. of nouns; 
and in others, from the Aor. of verbs, or a verbal {as expressive of energy, 
273 b, 363 a). 

d.) In using a shorter form, ‘sometimes, perhaps, suggested by the 
theme, or another stem: as, aiu-o-Bapys (aiua, -aros, Bartw) blood- 
bathed, ra&v-drrns (23 c) all-seeing, av0-o- -popos (dvOos, -e-os) fllower-bearing, 
id-6-Trovos (pire- -w fr. pid-os) labor-loving, piic-owos (picé-w) wine-hating, 
puat-pdvos (ualv-w) blood-stained, ai-rddos (ait, aiyés) goat-herd. So, for 
jyuucus half, the old short stem 7ju- is commonly used : tuc-Ovas half- 
dead, nut-ovos mule. 

e.) In conforming to the theme with respect to vowel-change, &c.: as, 
Bov-KdXos (Bots, Bo-ds) ox-herd (cf. Bo-Gmis, Bé-c-mopos), vav-ryyés ship- 
wright, wodi-apxos ruler of a city, 750-hoyos sweet-speaking. 

f.) It results from these changes or from direct adoption, that the first 
word has sometimes the form of one of the cases: as, Nom. vixy-pdpos 
bringing victory, dyopa-véuos clerk of the market ; Gen. veds-orxos ship- 
house ; Dat. vuxri-rddos roaming by night, Eur. Ion 718, recxeot-rdyrns 
wall-approacher, BE. 31; Acc. dorv-vduos city-ruling, pwo-pdpos light- 
bringing. See also c, and 388 b. 

g.) The mode in which the constituent words are united often depends, 


especially in verse, upon the quantity of the syllables which compose 
them. 


384. If the first word is a particle, it is commonly u 
changed except by the general laws of euphony. 


a. For crasis in mpé, see 1267; for elision in prepositions, 127 
Andi, like wept, often retains its vowel. In the other repositions, the 
elision is rarely omitted, except in the Ion., particulayial in the Ep. be- 
fore some words which begin with the digamma: as, daoFeurety, broFel- 
xew, I. 309, T. 266 (Bek.). The Att. has a few such cases as é7rveckijs, 
€ropkéw, éemrécac9ar Cyr. 6. 4. 6. For elision before a consonant, see 136. 





§ 386. FIRST AND LAST WORDS. 259 


385. Some particles occur only in composition, and are 
hence called cnseparable. Of these the most important are, 


a.) &@-, commonly denoting privation or negation, and then called a- 
privative, as, d-rats without children, d-copos unwise ; but sometimes de- 
noting wnion, likeness, or intensity (the result of concentration), and then | 
termed a- copulative, as, a-xddovdos (xéXevOos way) going the same way, 
following, a-dehpds (dehpus) brother, a-rddavyTos (Tddavrov talentum) of 
like weight, d-Bpowos (Bpéuw) loud-shouting, d-revns (reivw) strained ; 
while this prefix appears to be sometimes euphonic (356). °A- privative 
has commonly its full form av- before a vowel, except where F or & has 
been lost ; and is akin to dvev without, to the Lat. in-, and to the Eng. 
and Germ. wn-: dv-omXos (dvev drdwv) in-ermis, wn-armed, a-Kéxwv A. 557 
'(Bek.), Att. dkwv, unwilling, d-iimvos (bavos fr. cvrvos somnus) in-somnis, 
sleep-less. ’A- copulative (also a-, as in d-ras all together) appears to be 
akin to dua together. 

b.) vy-, akin to av- privative (Lat. and Old Eng. ne): as, v7-rowos 
(rowh) un-avenged, (vn-avenos) vivewos wind-less, calm, (vn-ovumos) vavusos 
name-less. 

c.) 8ve-, dl, mis-, wn-: as, dva-pnuos ill-omened, dva-tvxylia mis- 
fortune, Svo-dainev wn-happy, Avorapis accursed Paris, 1. 39. 

d.) The intensive apr- (kindred with dpe-, 261a), by precession épt-, 
ta- and 8a-, all mostly poetic : as, dpi-daxpus very tearful, Asch. Per. 947, 
€pl-dovros loud-sounding, T. 50, §a-adovros per-dives, very rich, Hdt. 1. 
82, da-oxos thick-shaded, «. 470. Za- may be regarded as an Mol. form 
of dua per, through (Ia, gd Theoc. 29. 6; § 143 c), and Sa- as a syn- 
copated form of the same. Cf. per used as an intensive. 





386. B.) The form of the Last worp depends upon the 
part of speech to which the compound belongs. 


1. If the compound is a NOUN or ADJECTIVE, it commonly 
takes the most obvious form which is appropriate to the class 
of words to which it belongs. 


a. Often the last word, if itself a nown or adjective, undergoes no 
change : as, dud-dovdos con-servus, fellow-slave, waxpd-xe.p longi-manus, 
long-armed, &-rats child-less, rav-cogos all-wise. In some compounds, 4 
passes into the kindred w (114b), -pa into -pev, or -¥s into -ns: as, 
a-ratwp (rarnp) fatherless, ow-ppwyv (ppv) discreet ; wodv-rpayuwv (rpa- 
yya) busy ; modexns (wKis, 213 c) swift-footed. 

b. If the last element is a verb, the compound adjective or masculine 
substantive ends commonly in, 


1.) -og. This ending (which is-far the most common) has both an 
active and a passive sense, distinguished, for the most part, by the accent, 
which, if the penult is short, the active compound commonly takes upon 
the penult, but the passive upon the antepenult: as, dco-Bd5dos (AlBos, 
BaddX\w) throwing stones, Th. 6. 69, \x8d-Bodos stoned, Eur. Ph. 1063. 

2.) -ns (-es, G. -e0s) : as, ed-mperns becoming, ait-apxys self-suficing. 

3.) -ys or -as (G. -ov), and -np or -wp, denoting the agent (365): as, 
vou.o-bérns legislator, wupo-rwrns (194. 2), dpv.B0-Oypas bird-catcher, undo- 
Bortp shepherd, D. 529, wasd-ohétwp child-murderer. 

4.) -s: as, d-yvus, -Gros (yvo-, 357. 1) unknown, a-durs, -jros untamed, 
vouwo-pidaé (pudax-, 3491) guardian of the laws. 





260 COMPOSITION. § 386. 


ce. In compounds of this class, if the last word begins with 4, ¢, or o, 
followed by a single consonant, this vowel is commonly lengthened to y 
or w: as, oTparnyds (oTpdros, dyw) general, dvojdaros (dva-, EMavvw) hard 
Sor driving, dvéavuuos (d-, évoua, 114d) nameless. The Att. uses the Dor. 
a in some compounds of dyw: as, hoxayds captain, i. 7. 2. 

d. A derivative from a verb compounded with a preposition has usually 
the same form with the corresponding derivative from the simple verb : 
as, avTi-mpakis counter-action, wepi-rdoos a sailing round, ovy-ypauua com- 
position, ovy-ypagpets author (363 a,c, 364, 365d). Derivation from 
other words often gives the compound, especially if an abstract noun, a 
different form from the corresponding simple: as, tpop7 (363 b), but 
immro-rpodia horse-keeping ; tix luck, (a-ruxjs un-lucky) a-ruxia ill-luck. 
For such compound abstracts, -ta is a favorite ending. Cf. 387, 388 d. 


387. wu. Ifthe compound is a VERB, it is important to ob- 
serve that, with few exceptions, verbs are compounded directly 
and without change with prepositions only ; and that, in other 
cases, compound verbs have the form of derivatives from com- 
pound nouns or adjectives existing or assumed. 


a. Thus, AawBavw, to take, unites directly with the prep. ava up, to 
form dvahauBavw to take up; but it cannot so unite with the noun épyov 
work, and hence the idea to take work, contract, is expressed by épyo- 
aBéw, derived from the compound verbal épyo-AdBos contractor. So the 
verb compounded of tos horse, and tpédw to feed, is trrorpopéw from 
immotpopos horse-kceper. Sometimes the form of the verb happens not to 
be changed in passing through the compound verbal: thus, from gtros 
and mow, is formed otro-rods bread-maker, and from this again guro- 
moew to make bread. 

b. The exceptions are chiefly poetic: as, daxpu-xéwy tear-shedding, 
ZEsch. Th. 919, a-riw to slight, Theog. 621, dvo-Ovjcxev Eur. El. 843. 


388. a. Words formed by the direct union of others (as épyoAdBos, 
irmotpopos, 387 a) are called direct compounds; and derivatives from 
these (as épyoaBéw, irmorpopew) are called indirect compounds (the term 
compound extended beyond its strictest sense). 

b. When the component words are joined without change except from 
the general laws of orthoépy, the composition is termed loose (Gr. rapaGects 
putting side by side), as liable to separation ; but when they are joined 
with further change, it is termed close (Gr. ctvOeos putting together), as 
forming an inseparable word : thus, loose, or parathetic compounds, dva- 
auBdvw, Ardc-Kopor sons of Jupiter, ‘EAAho-movros sea of Helle, ’Apyt-piros 
dear to Mars ; close, or synthetic compounds, épyo-AdBos, otro-mowws. See 
387 a, 383 s. 

c. Loose compounds are sometimes separated by other words, especially 
particles. This figure is called 7'mesis (rufors cutting). Thus, ard Xoe- 
yor duivar (= dovydv draudvac), to ward off death, A. 67; é« dé rydjoas, 
and leaping forth, Kur. Hee. 1172. 

d. The loose connection of the preposition with its verb (as if a modi- 
fying adverb) also explains 387 a, the intervention of prefixes (282), and 


the position, permitted by the Epic, of the preposition after its verb: as, — 


ddéoas dao, for drodécas, having lost, t. 534. 

e. A compound is distinguished as dowble, triple, quadruple, &e., ac- 
cording to the number of words of which it is composed ; as, double, 
bmoppéew to flow under; triple, brexpéw flow from under; quadruple, 


an th iim 








§ 390. VARIOUS DISTINCTIONS. — LOOSE COMPOUNDS. 261 


imexrrpopew flow forth from under, §¢. 87. The extent to which the Greek 
permitted composition was sportively illustrated by Aristophanes in a 
eventy-cight-syllable compound, which follows, with Dr. Donaldson’s 
translation : \emado-reuwayxo-cehaxo-yaheo-Kpavio-herWavo-dpiu-vT OT pluLpsuaT o- 
oipio-mapaolv. 1. mpaco]-wediTo- KaTakexumevo - KLyX - ETL - KOTTUHO - parro- 
MEPLOTEN-ANEKT pvov-omT -ey KEhado-KvyKdo-7Te€EL0-Aaywo-otpao-Bagy-Tpayavo- 
mrepvy-wy, “a fricassee consisting of shellfish-saltfish-skate-shark-remain- 
ders-of-heads-besprinkled-with-sharp-sauce-of-laserpitium-leek-and-honey- 
thrushes-besides- black birds-pigeons-doves-roasted - cocks - brains - wagtails- 
eushats-haresflesh-steeped-in-a-sauce-of-boiled-new-wine-with-the-cartilages- 
and-wings,” Eccl. 1169 s. 


389. There is a loose form of composition, in which a 
PRONOUN or PARTICLE is attached to a word with which it is 
sometimes really and sometimes only apparently combined in 
sense; 


1. The orthography here varies, the words being sometimes written 
together, especially if the last is an enclitic, and sometimes separately. 

2. Among the chief words that are thus affixed to others are, 

a. The INDEFINITE PRONOUN Tis: as, doris (or ds Tes) whoever, ovres 
no one, eiris if any one. Cf. Lat. quisquis, nequis, siquis. 

The following PARTICLES: b. &v (Ep. xé or xév, Dor. xd), contingent 
or indefinite: as, ds dv whoever, drav or br dv, dméray, érerddy (érel 57 dv), 
whenever, whensoever, &c. 

ec. yé (Dor. ya) at least, emphatic: as, éywye (accent drawn back) J at 
least, cvye you surely, totrd ye this certainly, éel ye since at least. See 
247 h, and cf. Lat. egomet, tumet, equidem. 

d. 8% now (shorter form of 45): as, doris 64 whoever now, viv 64 just 
10W. 

e. SHwote (57 wore) ever now: as, doricdyrore whosoever now ? th dH- 
more; what in the world ? 

f. 4 surely, indeed: as, rin (Att. rq) or Ti #; why surely? dij be- 
cause indeed, ére.y or eel 4 since indeed. 
| g. otv (contr. fr. é5v, i being so ; see elul, 50) then, therefore, yet, often 
added to an indefinite pronoun or adverb to strengthen the expression of 
indefiniteness : as, édcTicodv whoever then, émwodnrorody howsoever now 
then. 

h. ép (shorter form of wep!) very, particularly, just : as, 8omrep who in 
particular, @rrep just as, oldcrep, Srimep, 6GevTep. Cf. Lat. parwmper. 

i. woré at any time, ever, often added to interrogatives to strengthen 
the expression : as, ri word ésrt rodro ; [what at any time is this ?] what 
tn the world is this? or, what can this be? Ep. rimre (syne. fr. ré wore) 
A. 202. 

j. té, the simplest sign of connection, and hence often joined to other 
connective words, before their use was established, to mark them as such. 
In the Ep. and Ion. this is found to a great extent: and even with an 
intervening particle, as és pa re O. 411, rdwep re Hdt. 1. 74. In the 
Att. it has remained in Gre and ore, as, olds te able, possible, and é’ 
gre on condition that. 

3. With some of the forms above, compare the Lat. guicwmque, quan- 
documque, quisque, uterque, wbique, quisnam ? quisquam, utpote, &c. 





S90. For the mutual and external relations of the elements of com- 
pound words, see 722 s, 





‘- 


’ 
Ls 





MvOous vpaiverv. 
Homer. 

























391% SYNTAX, as the DOCTRINE OF SENTENCES, 
treats either of the offices and relations of words 
as arranged in sentences, or of the offices and 


relations of these sentences themselves. 


a. For a general view of the PRINCIPLES, TERMS, and DEFINITIONS of 
Syntax, see 56s. 


392. The Greek is one of those languages whose syntax 
exhibits the greatest freedom and variety. Among the causes 
of this are, 


a.) The great extent to which, from the fulness, freedom, and original- 
ity of its etymological development, it can employ at pleasure either 
generic or specific, earlier or later, forms of expression. ‘The figure of 
RETENTION has an especially large office in Greek syntax. See 63 g, 70v- 

b.) The extended period through which the masterpieces of Greek 
literature were successively produced. Between the poems of Homer and 
the orations of Demosthenes, how many centuries elapsed, each of which 
had its own special idioms, while the glorious Epic never became properly 
obsolete, but was still cherished as a source of wealth for later composi- 
tions (85). It was as if our own writers might borrow, not only from 
the olden style of Shakspeare, but with equal freedom from the antique 
dialect of Chaucer. 

c.) The prevalence of different dialects in states intimately connected 
with each other by commerce, by alliances, and by national festivals ; 
and also in different departments of literature, without respect to local 
distinctions (85 c, 86). It cannot be thought strange, that forms of ex- 
pression appropriate to the different dialects should have been sometimes 
interchanged or commingled ; or that the laws of syntax should have 
acquired less rigidity in the Greek, than in languages which have but a 
single cultivated dialect. 

d.) The vividness of conception and emotion, the spirit of freedom, the 
versatility, the love of variety, and the passion for beauty, which so pre- 
eminently characterized the Greek mind, and left their impress upon 
its productions. The Greek language was the development in speech of 
these characteristics, the vivacious, free, versatile, varied, and beautif 
expression of Greek genius and taste. 


§ 395. SYNTAX. RULE I. — APPOSITION. 263 


CHAPTER I. 
SYNTAX OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 


I. AGREEMENT OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 


393. Ruiz I. An ApposiTIvE agrees in case 
with its subject. — Apposition may be 


(a) Direct: Ilapicaris . . ) patnp, Parysatis, the mother, i. 1. 4. 
(b) Predicate: Ta 5¢ 40a foav otheyyldes, and the prizes were flesh- 
combs, i. 2.10. “Hs airiv carpdmny éroince, of which he had made him 
satrap, i. 1.2. “Ovoua atr@ evar’ Aya0wva Pl. Prot. 315e. (c) Modal: 
AaBew Tiscapépyyny ws ptrov, taking T. as a friend, i. 1.2. (ad) Parti- 
tive: Oro: . . GAAos Ada Ayer, these say, one one thing, and another 
another, ii. 1.15. (e) Of generic and specific terms, especially of com- 
mon and proper nouns: ‘O Riatuybios totais, the river Meander, i. 2. 7. 
“Avopes otpatiatar, gentlemen soldiers, i. 3. 3. (f) Of a noun and a pro- 
noun : “AAkiBiddys . . KaKetvos 7udAnoer, A., he als) neglected, Mem..1. 2. 
24. (g) Of a sentence and word (396), &c. 

h. Appositives, more frequently, agree with their subjects in gender 
and nwimber, as well as in case: ‘Emvaga, 7 Zvevvéoios yuvd, Tod Kidlcwv 
Bacthéws, L., the wife of S., the king of the Cilicians, 1. 2.12. Zogai- 
vetov .. kal Lwxpdrny . ., Eévous dvras kal Tovrovs i. 1. 11. . 


394. a. Exists. The appositive or the subject may be omitted, 
when it can be supplied from the connection : Adios 6 IloAverpdrov [se. 
vids], L., the son of P., ili. 3. 20. OeuoroxdAFs Hew rapa oé (sc. yw], J 
T., have come to thee, Th. 1. 137. 

b. The sign of modal apposition (commonly ws, as) is often omitted : 
Arpbépas, as etxov cxemacuara, the skins which they had as coverings, i. 5. 
10. Kyéapxov . . mapexddeoe s¥uBovdov i. 6.5. Aneta micbdv TddavTov 
li. 2. 20. 

ce. SyNEsIs. An appositive sometimes agrees with a subject which is 
implied in another word: "A®nvaios ay modews ris meylorns, being an 
Athenian, a city the greatest, Pl. Apol. 29 d (here 4\ews agrees with ’A0n- 
vav, of Athens, implied in’A@nvaios). “Adixovro eis Kottwpa, médtw ‘EX- 
Anvida, Dwwréwy atrolkovs [referring to roXiras, implied in wddw] v. 5. 3; 
ef. iv. 8. 22, v. 3. 2. Zbv rod mpéoBews Ar. Ach. 93. Topyelnv xepariv 
dewoto meh@pov r. 634. Tuuwm, hominis simplicis, pectus, Cic. 


395. a. In parTITIVE APPOSITION, the statement of the parts is 
not always complete ; and sometimes the appositive denotes that which is 
closely related to the subject, rather than properly the same person or 
thing, even in part. With a participle, it may take the place of the Gen. 


{ . . * 
absolute, in expressing some circwmstance, as cause, manner, &c. Thus, 


Ol E’vupaxor Ta SUo pépy . . éoéBaror, the allies, two thirds of them, in- 
waded, Th. 2. 47. Hivpdexra 5é ra mpdOvpa airay, doivixos wev al Oipar 
reroinuévat, their portals are easily set on fire, the doors being made of the 
palm-tree, Cyr. 7. 5. 22. “Ado rplrov &ppa éfiyero, pouwrkiow kararenra- 
pévos of Urrmou Ib. 8. 8. 12. "Odupuds words, “Paynd kAalovoa, Mat. 2. 18. 


264 SYNTAX. R. I, —~ APPOSITION. § 395. 


b. Hence by a poetic, especially Epic, construction, an appositive is 
used to specify the part affected: Botder mévov por THd€ mpocGetva Xept ; 
do you wish to impose labor on me, viz. on this hand? Kur. Heracl. 63. 
Dddvos EuBaN éExdory xapdSly, imparted strength [to each one, to the heart] 
to the heart of each one, A. 11. “Ayapéuvovr fvdave Bup@ A. 24. Medes we 
. . xetpa, let go my hand, Soph. Ph. 1301. Iotév ce &ros piyev Epxos dddv- 
tw, what language has escaped the hedge of yowr teeth ! a. 64. 

c. Some relations may be expressed either by an appositive or an ad- 
junct ; and one of these constructions is sometimes used where the other 
would seem more appropriate: Tovrou 76 edpos dto whéOpa, of this the 
breadth is two plethra, i. 2.5; but, Tod 6€ Mapavou 7d ebpés éorw etkoot 
kal révre today, and the breadth of the M. is twenty-five feet, Ib. 8. Tlora- 
pos. . efpos dvo wAEBpwv Ib. 23; but, Tddpos.., 7d pev efpos dpyurart 
mévrei. 7.14. Aéxa pvat elopopa- but, Avoiy pvatv rpdcodov, Vect. 3. 9, 
10. “Bore 6€ ) xwpa. . ws etxoor oTaddror v. 3. 11. Ild\w Tpolny éirel- 
xeov A. 129; but, Tpolns tepdv rroNiepov a. 2. 


396. a. A word, in apposition with a sentence not used substantively, 
is commonly in the Accusative, as expressing the effect of the action ; but 
is sometimes in the Nominative, as if an inscription marking the character 
of the sentence : ‘Pier . . dd ripyou, Avypdv OAeBpov, will hurl thee from 
a tower, a sad fate, Q. 735. Xrépn pralverat, w5dec T Svedos Kal Gedy ati- 


pla, our garlands are profaned, a dishonor to the city, and an insult to the 


gods, Kur. Heracl. 72. ‘EXévnv xrdvwuer, Mevédhew AbtHV mixpay Id. Or. 
1105. Td 6é rdvTwv péyotov . ., Ti wev ov xwpav adfavouévny opas, but 
the greatest thing of all, you see your own territory inereasing, Cyr. 5. 5. 
24. Td Aoltobrov dé, Opvyxds GOA wy KaxGv, SovAN yuryn ypads ENAGS eloa- 
dizouac Eur. Tro. 489. “Hud 6é yervrwudvov, t3 TOD Kap@doTrorod, otd 
ol yeiroves oPddpa Tt alcOdvovrar, ‘as the comic poet says,’ Pl. Ale. 121 d. 
Evdacpovoins, probdy 7dicrwv ACywv, ‘as a reward for,’ Eur. El. 231. 

b. This use of the Nom. and Acc. may be often explained by attraction 
to the subject or object of the verb. Cf. 395 a. 

c. ANACOLUTHON. Apposition is sometimes prevented by a change of 
construction : as, Myrpi 7’, "HplBouav \éyw, to my mother, Hribea I mean 
(for Myrpi 7 ’EpiBoig, to my mother E.), Soph. Aj. 569. See also 402. 


II. USE OF THE CASES. 


397. Cases serve to distinguish the relations 
of substantives. These relations are regarded, in 
Greek, (1.) as either DIRECT or INDIRECT, and (IL) 
as either subjective, objective, or residual. 

1. Of these distinctions, the first is chiefly founded upon the 
directness with which the substantive is related to the verb of 
the sentence. The principal DIRECT RELATIONS are those of 
the subject and direct object of the verb, and that of direct ad- 


dress. Other relations are, for the most part, regarded as 
INDIRECT. 


u. The second distinction is founded upon the kind or char- 
acter of tne relation. The relation is, 








~-§ 309. USE OF THE CASES. 265 


1. Sussective, when the substantive denotes the SouRCE, or 
SUBJECT, of motion, action, or influence; or, in other words, 
THAT FROM which ANY THING COMES. 


2. OpsEectTive, when the substantive denotes the END, or OB- 
JECT, of motion, action, or tnfiuence ; or, in other words, THAT 
TO WHICH ANY THING GOES. 


3. Resmpuat (residuus, remaining), when it is not referred 
to either of the two preceding classes. 


398. a. The latter of the two distinctions appears to have had 
its origin in the relations af place, which relations are both the ear- 
liecst understood, and, through life, the most familiar to the mind. 
These relations are of two kinds; those of motion, and those of 
REST. 

b. Motion may be considered with respect either to its souRcE or 
its END; and both of these inay be regarded either as direct or tn- 
direct. We may regard as the prrect source of motion, that which 
produces the motion, or, in other words, that which moves; as 
the inprrect sources, that from which the motion proceeds; as the 
piRrEcT END, that which receives the motion, or that to or into which 
the motion immediately goes ; and as the 1NpIRECT END, that towards 
which the motion tends. 

ce. By a natural analogy, the relations of action and influence in 
general, whether subjective or objective, may be referred to the rela- 
tions of motion; while the relations which remain without being 
thus referred may be classed together as relations of rest. These 
residual relations, or relations of rest, may likewise be divided, ac- 
cording to their office in the sentence (397), into the direct and the 
indirect. 

d We have, thus, six kinds of relation, each of which, with a sin- 
gle exception, is represented in Greek by an appropriate case, denot- 
ing in general as follows: 


1. Drreot Revations. 


1. Subjective. Toe Nomryative. That which acts. 
2. Objective.- Tue Accusative. That which is acted upon. 
3. Residual. Tue Vocative. That which is addressed. 


i. Inprrect ReELarrons. 


1. Subjective. Tne Genitive. That from which any thing proceeds. 
2. Objective. Tie Dative, That towards which any thing tends, 
3. Residual. Tne Dative. That with which any thing is associated. 


| 399. a. For the historical development of the Greek cases, see 
186s. From the primitive indirect case (which remained as the Dat.}, a 
special form was separated to express the subjective relations, but none to 
express the oljective. The primitive form, therefore, continued to express 
the objective relations, as well as all those relations which, from any cause, 
were not referred to either of these two classes ; and hence the Dat. is 
both an objective and a residual case. 
REY. cn. 12 


. 


266 SYNTAX. R. IL, III, — NOMINATIVE. § 399, 


b. In the Latin case-system, which so closely resembles the Greek, 
there is a partial separation of the édirect objective and residual, or, as 
they are termed in Lat., DATIVE and ABLATIVE cases. This separation, 
however, does not appear at ail in the Plural or in Dee. 2, and, wher- 
ever it occurs, may be explained by the mere precession or contraction of 
final vowels. 

‘¢. A more important difference between the two languages appears 10 
the extensive use of the Lat. ABLATIVE. The Romans were more con- 
trolled than the Greeks by the power of habit, while they were less eb- 
servant of the minuter shades of thought, and niceties of relation. Hence, 
even after the full development of the Lat. case-system, the primitive im- 
direct case continued to retain, as it were by the mere force of possession, 
many of the subjective relations. It is interesting to observe how the old 
Ablative, the once undisputed lord of the whole domain of indirect rela- 
tions, appears to have contested every inch of ground with the new claim- 
ant that came forward in the younger Genitive. But we must leave the 
particulars of the contest to the Latin grammarian, and content ourselves 
with merely referring to two or three familiar illustrations. Thus, in 
Lat., the Gen. (as well as the Dat.) was excluded from all prepositional 
adj unets, because in these the relation was sufficiently defined by the prep- 
osition. The Gen. of price secured a few words, but was obliged to leave 
all others to the Abl. After words of plenty and want, the use of the two 
cases was more nearly equal. In the construction of one substantive as the 
complement of another, the Gen. prevailed, yet even here the Abl. not un- 
frequently maintained its ground, if an adjective was joined with it as an 
ally. In some constructions, the use of the Gen. was only a poetic license, 
in imitation of the Greek. 

dl. As most verbs express action, and the Active is the leading voice, 
the use of the NoMINATIVE as the subject of a finite verb became so 
established, that it extended to verbs of state as well as of action, and to 
the Passive no less than the Active voice. 

e. The Nominative, from its high office as denoting the subject of 
discourse, became the leading case, and was regarded as the representative 
of the word in all its furms (its theme, 172e). Hence it was employed 
when the word was spoken of as a word, or was used without grammatical 
construction (401). 

f. There are no dividing lines either between DIRECT and INDIRECT, or 
between subjective, objective, and residual relations. Some relations seem 
to fall with equal propriety under two, or even three heads, according to 
the view which the mind takes of them. Hence the use of the cases not 
only varies in different languages, and in different dialects of the same 
language, but even in the same dialect, and in the compositions of the 
same author. 

g. A case may sustain the same relation to more than one word in the 
sentence : as, Kpéa épovres Ho@.ov, they boiled and ate flesh, ii. 1. 6. 


A. THE NOMINATIVE. 


400. Rue Il. The SusBsect oF A FINITE VERB 


is put in the Nominative: as, 


"Hrrecdn d¢ éredevrnce Aapetos, kal karéorn els riv Bacidelav Apratépens, 
Tircadépyys diaBddrec tiv Kipov, and when now Darius was dead, a 


Artaxerxes was established in the royal authority, Tissaphernes accuses 


Cyrus, i,.1. 3. 





a 





3 402. INDEPENDENT. 267 


401. Ruue II. SuBsTANTIVES INDEPENDENT 
OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION are put in the 


Nominative. 


Notre. The Nom. thus employed is termed the Nominative indepen- 
dent or absolute (absolitus, released, free, sc. from grammatical fetters). 
See 399e. This use might be often explained by ellipsis (68 b). 

To this rule may he referred the use of the Nominative, 


a.) In the inscription of names, titles, and divisions : as, Kv- 
pou "AvaBacis Cyri. Expeditio, Zhe Hxpedition of Cyrus ; 
BitBXiov Uparoy Liber Primus, Book First. 

b.) In exclamations: as, @addatra, Oddarra, the Sea! 
the Sea! iv. 7. 24. °Q Svordd\aw eyo, O wretched me! Kur. 
Iph. A. 1315. °Q qidrarov Povnpa Soph. Ph. 234, 

c.) In address. — The appropriate case of address is the 
Voce. (186g). But there is often no distinct form for this 
case, and even when there is, the Nom. is sometimes employed 
in its stead (182). 

1. The Nom. is particularly used, when the address is exclamatory or 
descriptive, or when the compellative is the same with the subject of the 
sentence : ‘Imtas 6 xaNis Te kal copds, O Hippias, the noble and the wise ! 
| Pl. Hipp. Maj. 281a. Xatpe, 6 Bacrreds Mat. 27. 29. Cf. Audi tu, 
populus Romanus, Liv. 1. 24. 

2. To the head of descriptive address belong those authoritative, con- 
temptuous, and familvar forms, in which the person who is addressed is 
described or designated as if he were a third person (and in which ofros is 
often used) : Oi dé oixérar, . . ériecde, but the servants, do you put, Pl. 
Cony. 218 b. ‘O dadnpeds . . obros *AtroMAdSwpos, ov mepiuevets ; The Pha- 
lerian there, Apollodorus, stop! wowt you? Ib. 172a. 

3. In forms of address which are both direct, and likewise descriptive 
or exclamatory, the Voc. and Nom. may be associated : IIpdfeve kai of 
&\Xot of trapsvres “EAAnves, O Proxenus and the other Grecks present, i. 5. 
16. Kpte, vids AaS'5 Mat. 20. 30. *Q pfros, & bthe Baxyre Eur. Cycl. 
73. °Q ovros, Atay Soph. Aj. 89. Ovros &, mo? cov 148 alpes, Séorrorta ; 
Eur. Hel. 1627. 


402. AwnacotutHon, &c. From the office of the Nom. in 
denoting the subject of discourse, and from its independent 
use, it is sometimes employed where the construction would 
demand a different case: as, 


' a.) In the introduction of a sentence : ‘Ypets dé, . . viv 6) xarpds byt 
Soxet elvat; You then, .. does it now seem to you to be just the time ? vii. 
6. 37. “Emdiudy 6 Kipos. ., gogev aire, Cyrus desiring, . . it seemed 
best to him, Cyr. 7. 5. 37. ‘O yap Mavorfs ofros, . . od oldamer rh yéeyovev 
avr Acts 7. 40. Kai évradda waxdpuevor cal Bactreds cal Kipos, cai ot 
dud avrovs brep éxarépwy, dmdco uev TOV dudl Bacirtéa awéOvyckor i. 8. 27. 

b.) In specification, repetition, or description: ”"“Addovs 5 6 wéyas . . 
Ne?hos éreuwev: Dovorigkavys, UInyaorayav, x. 7. r., and others the vast 
Nile hath sent ; Susiskdnes, P., d&z., Asch. Per. 33. Ovydarnp meyadz- 





268 SYNTAX. R. A., IV. — GENITIVE. § 402. 


ropos "Herlwvos, Herlwy, 6s gvaey Z. 395. Ta wept Ivdov br apxporépov 
Kata Kpdros éroXenetro: “AOnvator uv. . meperdéovres Th. 4. 23. Adyou 
dD év dAdhAoror €f5500uv Kaxol, Ptrdak édéyxwv pidaxa Soph. Ant. 259. 
— The two last examples may perhaps be referred to 395 a, or 3964 


c.) In speaking of names or words as such: Upoceiinpe rhv rGp rovy- 
pay Kowhy érwvuuiay ovKodéavrns, he has obtained the convmon appellation 
of the vile, ‘‘sycophant,” Aischin. 41. 15. Llapeyyva 6 Kipos civOnua, 
Zeds Evppayos kal jyepav, Cyrus gave out as the pass-word, ‘‘ Jove our ~ 
Ally and Leader,” Cyr. 3. 3. 58. 


B. THE GENITIVE. 


403. ‘HAT FROM WHICH ANY THING PROCEEDS 
(398 d) may be resolved into (1.) That from which 
any thing proceeds, as us POINT OF DEPARTURE; and 
(u1.) Lhat from which any thing proceeds, as its CAUSE. 
Hence the Greek Genitive is either (1.) the GENTI- 
TIVE OF DEPARTURE, or (1.) the GENITIVE OF 
Cause; and we have the following general rule 
for subjective adjuncts (397) : 


Rute A. THE Point or DEPARTURE AND THE 
CAUSE ARE PUT IN THE GENITIVE. 


a. The Genitive of departure is commonly expressed in English by 
the preposition from ; and the Genitive of cause, by the preposition of. 
The former is commonly expressed in Latin by the Ablative ; and the 
latter partly by the Gen., and partly by the Abl. (b) Hence, in general, 


The GENITIVE is used to express that OF or 


FROM which something is or is done. 


c. The relations here denoted are, however, sometimes translated by 
other prepositions, and sometimes without a preposition. 


1. GENITIVE OF DEPARTURE. 


404. Departure may be either in place, in time, or in 
character. . Hence, 


Rute IV. Words of SEPARATION and DISTINC- 
TION govern the Genitive. 


a. There is no line of division between the two classes of words which 
are mentioned in this rule. Many words which are commonly used to 
denote distinction of character referred originally to separation of place 
(cf. 398). And, on the other hand, words which usually denote separa- 
tion of place, are often employed, by a metaphorical or transitive use, to 
express departure or difference in other respects. 


§ 406. OF SEPARATION AND DISTINCTION. 269 


(1.) Genitive of Separation. 


405. a. Words of sEPARATION include those of removal and 
distance, of exclusion and restraint, of cessation and failure, of 
abstinence and release, of deliverance and escape, of protection and 
Treedom, &¢. : as, 


XwplferGar adrAprwv, to be separated from each other, Pl. Conv. 192 c¢. 
Xwpls roy ddd\wv, apart from the rest, i. 4.13. Zayaros Slxa Cyr. 8. 7. 
20. Avéryov adA7jrwv, were distant from each other, i. 10. 4. Ildppo. . 
avrov, far from him, i. 3. 12. Ei Oaddarrns elpyowro, if they should be ex- 
cluded from the sea, Hel. 7.1. 8. Kodtoeve 708 xalew, he would prevent 
them from burning, i. 6. 2. Tod mpds éué rodéuov travracbat, to cease 
From the war against me, i. 6. 6. Odros uéev atrod Hpaprev, this man 
missed him, i. 5. 12.. "Haréoryopev rod daxptew, we refrained from weep- 
ing, Pl. Phedoll7e. Xecar xaxot, to save from evil, Soph. Ph. 919. 
*Aritkerov pdpov, will escape death, 1d. Ant. 488. Avo dvdpas eu rod wh 
Katadovat, will keep two men from sinking, ili. 5.11. "EXedOepor révwy, 
EhevOepor . . EvpvocOéws, ‘free from,’ Eur. Heracl. 873. So dréyw to be 
distant, voopifw separate, broxwpéw retire, B\dwtw hinder (a. 195), Arye, 
TeevTdw, cease, TPddNouat, WevSouat, miss, bw loose, Exw refrain, édev- 
Gepow free, xaBatpw cleanse ; kaBapbs, ayvis, pure ; éXevOepia frecdom, émi- 
Kovpnua, wpdBrnua, protection, jovxla rest; dvev without; the poet. vicgs 
apart, éxds, Tire, THOM, afar; &c. In imitation of the Greek, Abstinéto 
trarum, Operum solitis, Liber laborum, Sceleris purus, Hor. 

b. Words of sPARING imply refraining from, and those of CONCEDING, 
RESIGNING, REMITTING, and SURRENDERING, imply parting with, or re- 
tiring from. Hence, rv pev buerépwv 750 por helSeorOar, it is my pleasure 
to spare your property, Cyr. 3. 2. 28. Kadxetvos trexapynoev ait @ Tod Opé- 
vov, and he [Sophocles] conceded to him [Aischylus] the throne, Ar. Ran. 
790. Tis dpyijs avévres, resigning your anger, Ib. 700. Tis trav ‘EXAH- 
vow édevbepias . . Tapaywpioat Piiirry, to surrender to Philip the free- 
dom of the Grecks, Dem. Cor. 247. 24. So etxw, treixw, cvyxwpéw, to 
yteld, apedéw, to be unsparing, &c. 

ce. The Gen. denoting that from which motion proceeds is, in prose, 
‘commonly joined to words not in themselves expressing separation by a prep- 
osition ; but in poetry, often without a preposition (cf. 450 b): Aduor.. 
hépoveay, bringing from the house, Soph. Hl. 324. Tovode ratdas yijs 
édav, to drive these children from the land, Kur. Med. 70. Baépwr toracbe, 
rise from your seats, Soph. O. T. 142. Td 7° ovpavod wéonpa Eur. Iph. T. 
1384. (d) So that from which action begins: "Tuvnoav Ards apxipuevat, 
they sang beginning from Jove, Pind. N. 5. 48. “Ap&dmevor Tod ydpov ¢. 
142. For adverbs in -Oev, properly genitives, see 192. 

e. In a few rare phrases, the Gen. without a preposition denotes that 
from which time is computed (forward or back): Mer éAlyov 6é Tovrea, 
and {after a little from these things] a little after these things, Hel. 1. 1. 2. 
Tpirw . . ret rovtéwy, in the third year [from] before these things, Hdt. 6. 

(40. Acurépw dé éret routéwv, ‘{from] after,’ lb. 46. 


(2.) Genitive of Distinction. 


406. a. Words of vistrxcrion include those of difference 
and exception, of superiority and mferiority, &e.: as, 


YY = 
; 


270 SYNTAX. R. V., VI. — GENiTIVE, § 406. 


Avaprorar réxvys, is distinct from the art, Pl. Polit. 260¢. "Hréxrpov 
ovdev dréhepev, differcd in nothing from amber, ii. 8.15. Tdoat wAty Me- 
Ayrou, ali except Miletus, i. 1. 6. Avadopov trav &\X\wv médewv, superior 
to the other states, Mem. 4. 4.15. lldovrou dperh EvéorynKev Pl. Rep. 
550e. “Hrepov dé 7d 750 rob dyaGod, ‘other than,’ ‘different from,’ PI. 
Gorg. 500d. So Gddos other, with dddotos, éddérpL0s, aotbw 3 epioods 
exceeding, With mwepiccetw ; diadepivtws differently, &e. 

b. Aciropar, to be left behind | from or by, 405, 434 b], to come short of, 
governs the Gen. in these, and various derived or kindred senses : I1\7ee 
.. Tpov A\epGevres, [left behind us] inferior to us in number, vii. 7. 31. 
Kipxoe medevav ov waxpdy deherupévor, ‘not left far behind,’ ‘closely pursu- 
ing,’ Aisch. Pr. 857. Kal ris Bios yor ood Neeyumery Pidos ; ‘ bereft of,’ 
Soph. Ant. 548. Zrpardv.. Tov Aeetupevoy Eopds, ‘left from or by,’ 
“isch. Ag. 517. Dvépas Nevroueva, devoid of understanding, Soph. EI. 
47 4. 


~ 407. Words of sUPERIORITY include, 
1.) Words of authority, power, precedence, and pre-eminence : 


"AvOpdrav Epxeyv, to rule men, Cyr. 1.1. 3. *Eyxparets . . rdvruv, 
sovereign over all, v. 4.15. “Hyetro roi orparevuaros, led the army, iv. 
1. 6. IIperBevey rv rod Gv rédewv, to take rank of most cities, Pl. Leg. 
752 e. fs Nyéouat, nyenovetw, to lead, Secmifw, Secroréw, Kupiedw, to be 
lord, Bacitedw reign, orparnyéw command, carparetw, émitpoTEevw, TULar- 
véw, rule as satrap, &c., émictatéw have charge of ; Kparos power ; axparys 
without power over, &c. Cf. Regnavit populorum, or. ; Urbis potiri, 
Sall.; Mentis compos, Cte. See also 442. 

Ilot ov orparnyeis Tovde ; wot dé col NeGy 
"Kéeort avaooew av 6d tyeir’ olkober ; 
Urdprns avacouv HrOes, ovx 7uGv kparav. Soph. Aj. 1099. 


408. 2.) Adjectives and adverbs in the comparative degree 
(as denoting the possession of a property in a higher degree), 
and words derived from them. 


Rute V. The Comparative DEGREE governs 


the Genitive: as, 


Kpelrrovi éavrod, more powerful than himself, i. 2. 26. Téav timmy 
érpexov Oarrov, they ran faster than the horses, i. 5. 2. °Ewod torepov, 
[later than] after me, i. 5. 16. ‘Yorépnoe ris udxns, came after the battle, 
1.7.12. TH torepala ris udxns Pl. Menex. 240¢. Todvrov Setrepov Pl. 
Leg. 894d. ’Avwtépw ray pwacddv i. 4.17. “HrrdépeOa airod Cyr. 5. 3. 
33. Tiuats roiTwy émdeoventetre iii. 1. 37. 

a. So the other degrees, if used in the sense of the tiie es : Leto 
.. paKapratos, more completely happy than you, X. 482. patds pou iy 
Jn. 1.15. See 406. 


409. 3.) Multiple and proportional words (240) : as, 


TiodAatrAaclous judy aitradv, many times your own number, iii. 2. 14. 
Als técws éué xreivas d6eAPHS (Soav Kur. El. 1092. “Hpxero dé diacpety 
Gde- play adele TorpGrov awd mwavrods potpay: pera 62 rabrnv, adyjper S- 
twraclav ra’rys: Tiv 5 ad rpirny, hprorlav perv ris devrépas, TprTAactav 
5e ras mpwrns terdprnvy Se, ris devréopas Suh: wéuaryy dé, tTpimdyy Tis 





§ 412. OF CAUSE. — OF ORIGIN AND MATERIAL. 271 


tpirns: Tiv 8 éxrny, THs mpwrns dxtatrAaclay: EBS5uny dé, ErraKkareKo- 
catkaciay ris mpwrns (a.b = 2a. c= 14b= 30a. d= 2b. = 8e. 
f= 8a. 9 = 27a) Pl. Tim. 35 b,c. 


1. GENITIVE OF CAUSE. 


410. ‘To the head of Cause may be referred, 
(A) That from which any thing is DERIVED, MADE, 
SUPPLIED, or TAKEN; (/) That which exerts an 
influence, as an EXCITEMENT, OCCASION, or CON- 
pition ; (C@’) That which produces any thing, as 
its ACTIVE Or EFFICIENT CAUSE; and (2) That 
which CoNSTITUTES any thing WHAT IT Is. 


a. In the first of these divisions, the prevailing idea is that of sowrce ; 
in the second, that of influence ; in the third, that of action ; and in the 
fourth, that of property. Or we may say, in general, that the first divis- 
ion presents the material cause ; ths second, the motive cause ; the third, 
the efficient cawse ; and the fourth, the constituent cause. It scarcely 
needs to be remarked, that the four divisions are continually blending 
with each other in their branches and analogies. 


411. A. That from which any thing is DE- 
RIVED, MADE, SUPPLIED, or TAKEN. To this divis- 
ion belong, (1) the Gemtive of Origin, (2) the Gen- 
tive of Material, (3) the Grentive of Supply, and (4) 
the Genitive of the Whole, or the Gemtive Partitive. 


1 and 2. Genitive of Origin and of Material. 


412. Rute VI. The oriciIn, sourcE, and 


MATERIAL are put in the Genitive: as, 


Aapelov cal Ilapvodri8os yiyvovra: ratdes S00, of D. and P. are born 
two children, i.1.1. Tot & épuy, from him I sprang, Eur. Iph. T. 4. 
Ti drodavoass dy ris apxfs ; what advantage should you derive from your 
authority ? Cyr. 7. 5. 56. Polvixos wey al Ovpar wemonuévar, the doors 
being made of the palm-tree, Ib. 22. TMepicrep} . . avPwv, crowned [from] 
with flowers, Soph. El. 895. Towotrav yuév éore mpoydsvey iii. 2. 13. 
Nipoys rexvoce: waida Eur. Med. 804. Tov jdicrwy moray droda’serat 
Cyr. 7. 5. 81. Xpnpatrev drvjcoua: Eur. Hel. 935. Evdwyod rod Adyou 
Pl. Rep. 352b. Tijs xebadfs df Ar. Eccl. 524. Oivos howitkey ii. 3. 
14 (cf. i. 5.10). Aiuvny.. féovcay USaros Pl. Phedo1l3a. Me@vobels 
Tov véxtapos Pl. Conv. 203b. Adyov buds Avoias eicria; Pl. Pheedr. 227 b. 

a. The Gen. of sowrce or material occurs, especially in the Epic poets, 
for other forms of construction, particularly the instrumental Dat. : as, 
IIpjoar dé trupds Sytoco Oiperpa, burn the gates with raging fire [from fire, 
as the source}, B. 415. Xetpas vepduevos rods adds, having washed his 
hands {with water from] in the foaming sea, B. 261. AoverOac éiippetos 
motapoto Z. 508. ITLvupds pekiooéuey H. 410. "EEdy pds por Xerpds ed 
Géc0a rade, * with a-single blow,’ Eur. Herc. 938. 


272 SYNTAX. R. VII, Vill, IX. — GENITIVE. § 413. 


413. That of which one discourses or thinks may be regarded as the 
material of his discourse or thoughts ; thus we speak of the matter of dis- 
course, a matter of complaint, the subject-matter of a composition, &e. 
Hence, not unfrequently, both in immediate dependence upon another 
word, and even in the introduction of a sentence, 


Rute VIl. The THEME OF DISCOURSE OR OF 
THOUGHT is put in the Genitive : as, 


Tod to€dtov od Kahds ever Neveu, St, Kk. T. r., UH ts not well to say of 
the bowman, that, dc., Pl. Rep. 439b. Arabedmevos atray, dony per yw- 
pay. . €xorev, observing in respect to them, how great a country they have, 
lil, 1.19. Tijs dé yuvarkds, ef . . Kaxorore?, but in respect to the wife, if 
she manages ill, ic. 8. 11. Kndtov cov, hearing of thee, Soph. O. C. 307. 
Ti dé trmwy ote ; what do you think of horses? Pl. Rep. 459b. Oicba.. 
Kuvav, Ore Todro pice: a’T&y Td 00s, ‘you know of dogs,’ Ib. 375e. Tod 
Meyapéwv wijdioua Th. 1. 140 (= 7d rept M. WHdicpa 139). Tis 6é ois 
epevos, ev cou dédocxa Kur. And. 361. So with ¢pdgw to tell, put say, 
épwrdw inquire, xpaw respond (of an oracle), wavOdvw learn, cxoméw con- 
sider, voéw think ; ayyedia message, 000s fable, Epornos inquiry (queestio 
animorum, Cic.) ; &c. 

a. For the Gen. of the theme may be often substituted another case, 
more frequently the Nom., in the succeeding clause : Ei 6 ) yuvi, xaxo- 
moet, if the wife manages il. 


414. 3. Genitive of Supply. 


Supply may be either abundant or defective. Hence, 
Rute VIII. Words of PLENTY and WANT goy- 


ern the Genitive: as, 


a. OF PLENTY. Onoiwy wAhoys, full of beasts, i. 2.7. Mera cirou, 
full of corn, i. 4.19. ArchOépas . . éwlywrdacav xdprov, they filled the 
skins with hay, i. 5.10. Todrwv &dis, enough of these things, v. 7. 12. 
Aacéos . . dévipwr, thick with trees, ii. 4. 14. IDdoure. . pitwy, he is 
rich in friends, vii. 7. 42. So wréws full, wrovoros, poet. dpverts, rich ; 
TANOW, yéuw, to be full, etropéw abound, Bpiw teem ; wrypbw, peotdw, fill, 
kopévviue satiate, cdrrw stuff ; &dnv enough ; etropia abundance ; &e.: and 
Lat. plenus, dives, impleo, &c. 

b. Or WANT. ‘AvOpwrwv &tropav, wanting in men, i. 7. 3. Tevdo- 
vytay . . Set, there is need of slingers, iii. 8.16. Otwv dv éXrldwy éuaurov 
orepyoap, of what hopes I should deprive myself, ii. 5. 10. Muds 8€ov- 
war Tecoapdxovra, 40 less 1 ($ 242c). Piwv eponpos, devoid of friends, 
Kur. Med. 513. Zod pdvy Ib. 52. Tlévys . . pidtov, poor in friends, Pl. 
Ep. 332¢. So évdehs wanting, é\\urhs deficient, xevds empty, dppavis be- 
rofl, yuuvss naked, Wirss bare ; wévouat to be poor, dmopéw, oravifw, lack ; 
épnu.sw, movsw, xnpbw, bereave, yuuviw, Wirdw, strip; dmopia, évdea, xpela, 
want ; &c.: and Lat. indigus, inops, pauper, egeo, &e. 

c. The Gen. which belongs to S€onar and xprifw as verbs of want may 
be retained by them in the derived senses, to desire, to request, to entreat : 
Odrtivos av dénobe, whatever you may desire, i. 4.15. Atwatwv detcPar, 
to request what is reasonable, Cyr. 8. 3. 20. Maxpod xpngew Blov, to desire 
long life, Soph. Aj. 473. 


§ 417. OF THEME, OF SUPPLY. PARTITIVE. 273 


4. Genitive Partitive. 


415. Rute TX. The wHo.ek oF WHICH A PART 
IS TAKEN is put in the Genitive : as, 


“Hpicy rod dou orpareipatos, half of the whole army, vi. 2. 10, 


a. This Gen. has received the names of the Gen. of the whole, and the 
Gen. partitive ; the former from its denoting the whole, and the latter 
from the conception of this whole as divided into parts, of which the. 
mind takes up one or more (partio ov partior, ¢o divide, from pars, part). 


416. The partitive construction may be employed, 

a.) To express quantity, degree, condition, place, time, &c., 
considered as a limitation of a general idea, or as a part of an 
extended whole (especially with a neuter adjective or an ad- 
verb) : 


Mixpov 5 varvov Aax wv, obtaining a little [of] sleep, iii. 1.11. Ev row- 
ovTw. . TOD KwdUYOU TpoctdvTos, in such imminent danger [in such a degree 
of], i. 7. 5. ‘O & eis 7000’ UBpews éd7jrvGev, ‘to such a pitch of insolence,’ 
Dem. 51.1. Ot pév év rovTw rapackevis Roav, in this state of prepara- 
tion, Th. 2.17. "Hv pécov huépas, it was midday, i. 8. 8. His 755° qué- 
pas, to this [time of day] point of time, Eur. Alc. 9. Zuvémrecov és roiro 
dvaykns Th. 1. 49. “Emi péya éxwpynoav duvduews Ib. 118. His év potpas 
Eur. And. 1172. See 420a,b. Cf. Lat. hoc negoti, id temporis, illud 
etatis, tantum fidei. 

Norr. A neuter demonstrative pronoun is oftenest found in this con- 
struction, when governed by a preposition. 


b.) In presenting the whole as the sum of all the parts; in 
denoting the whole and a part; and in denying of all the 
parts : 


"Ey rots dya0otor 62 wavt’ &vectw codias, in the good dwell all the quali- 
ties of wisdom, Eur. Alc. 601. °Ev wavtt xaxod, in the [whole] extreme of 
evil, Pl. Rep. 579b. Ot weév AOnvaios év waytl 5) dOuutas fioav Th. 7. 55. 
“Hptddtoy . . od mpérepov épepov, half [and the whole of what] as much 
again as they before received, i. 3. 21. Totrwy. . odSéva ofda, I know 
none of these, Cyr. 7. 5. 45. OvStv darodeirovres mpoOvulas Th. 8. 22. 
Cf. Cuncta terrarum, Hor. ; Nihil rerum, Cie. 


417. a. The whole is sometimes put in the case which belongs to 
the part, the part agreeing with the whole instead of governing it ; chiefly 
when different parts are successively mentioned (cf. 393 d, 395 a): “Axov- 
ouey Dpas . . évious cKyvoiv év Tals oikias, we hear that you, some of yous 
quarter in the houses [for bjuav évious], v. 5. 11. Atduua réxea wérepos dpa 
morepoy aiudger ; ‘which of the two?’ Eur. Ph. 1289. Oixtat, ai wev wod- 
Aal érertuxecay, ddlyar 5€ weptfoay, the houses, the most had been demol- 
ished, and few remained, Th. 1. 89. Od yap rdpov »& Td KacryvhTo 
| Kpéwv, rav wév rporioas, riv & driudoas éxer; Soph. Ant. 21. In the fol- 
lowing example, the second part has three subdivisions : Kal oi gévou, of 
Mev. . dwoxwpotow: ol dé, .. ot piv. . dmépxovra, of B&.., elo 8’ of 
ED, dasha. 

b. Itis often at the option of the writer whether he will employ the 
Gen. partitive or a simpler form of construction ; and one form is some- 


REV. GR. 13° R 





274 SYNTAX. R. 1X. — GENITIVE PARTITIVS, § 417. 


times found, where the other would rather have been expected. The two 
forms are sometimes combined : Hir ofy Oeds, etre Bpotav Fv, whether he 
was a god, or one of mortals, Soph. El. 199. Ilob res Oeav 7) Salpwv éra- 
pwyds ; Eur. Hec. 164. Otde. . paivovor rwes Salpoves, 7} Oeav Tar ovpa- 
view Id. El. 1233. 


418. According to Rule IX., a word referring to a part, 
whether substantive, adjective, adverb, or verb, may take with it 
a Gen. denoting the whole. Thus, 


I, SuUBSTANTIVES: TO rpirov pépos Tob . . immod, the third part of the 
cavalry, Cyr. 2.1. 6. Tév meXTacTGy Tis avhp, a certain man of the tar- 
geteers, iv. 8. 4. Tpdxovra puprddas orparias i. 4. 5. Tod dpiorov av- 
Opwrav dor.dot Hdt. 1. 24. 

a. When place is designated by mentioning both the cowntry and the 
town, the former, as the whole, may be put in the Gen., and may precede 
the latter: Ol ’AOnvaio. éorpdrevoay TFs Oercadtas emi Pdpaoaror, the A. 
marched to Pharsalus [of | in Thessaly, Th. 1.111. ‘Qpptcavro rijs Xeppo- 
vioov év Eneobvri, touched upon the Cherronese at Eleiis {at E., a town of 
the C.], Hel. 2.1. 20. “Agixero rijs “Arrikfis és Olvdnv mpGrov, came 
upon Attica first at Ginoé, Th. 2. 18. 

b. The Gen., in all cases in which it is strictly partitive, may be re- 
garded as properly depending upon a substantive denoting the part ; and 
therefore the use of this Gen. in connection with adjectives, verbs, and 
adverbs may be referred to ellipsis or synesis : Tay &\\wv ‘ENAjver twés 
[sc. dvdpes]. “Héexvuawé re [sc. wépos] ris padayyos, ‘some part of the 
line,’ i. 8. 18 (419; ef. pépos re Tis evrakias i. 5. 8). lot 5 avrdr [se. 
motapol Twes], ods od’ av mavTdmact SiaBainre. Iodduov, cal wdxns ov me- 
rip [se. wepos] airy (421a; cf. dya0od twos peréorat . . wépos Cyr. 2. 3. 6). 
T'jjs ye ovdanod,/ i. e. év ovdevi uéper Tis yijs (420 a). 

c. If the substantive denoting the part is expressed, and that denoting 
the whole is a form of the same word, the latter is commonly omitted : 
T pets dvdpes TOv yepa:répwr [sc. dvdpGv], three men of the more aged, v. 7. 
17. Avo r&v mpecBuTatwr orparnyol, li. 2. 37. 


419. II. Ansxcrives. a. The Article, and Adjective Pronouns: 
Tovs ucv airdv améxrewe, tots 6° €&éBarer, slew some of them, and banished 
others, i. 1. 7. Tév &d\rwv ‘ENAjvwv tivés, some of the other Greeks, i. 7. 
8. Ilap ékdorov trav iyyeudvwr, from each of the leaders, i. 6. 2. So és, 
Barts, &AXos, 85e, obTOS, ToLodTos, TocodTos, Tis; &c. See 416a, N. 

b. <Adjectives of Number: Ets rav atparnyav, one of the generals, vii. 
2.29. ‘Hudr 8 otSels, none of us (416 b), iii. 1. 16. Tods tpets. . rar 
daxrvidwy Ar. Vesp. 95. ITLodAa r&v brogvylwv i. 5. 5. 

c. Superlatives, and words derived from them (by virtue of the inelud- 
ed adjective, cf. 408); and the other degrees when kindred in force : ’Ev 
rots dplo-rois Ilepr dv, among the best of the Persians, i. 6.1. Tar. . dv- 
Opdrrwy aproredoavres [= dpioror yevduevor], being the best of the men, Mem. 
3.5.10. Od devrépwy mpwretovory Ages. i. 3. *Q hlda yuvatkay, O [be- 
loved of] dearest of women, Eur. Ale. 460. Ata yuvacxay 6. 405. Aadala 
devialwy Kupets, wretched of the wretched art thow ! Soph. El. 849. “Erewov 
Tis vis Thv wodAnyv Th. 2. 56. ’Eml wietorov avOpwrwv Th. 1.1. Tis 
vis 7 aplotry Ib. 2. Thy apelva rv pwoipdv Luc. D. D. 1. 

d. Participles: Xdvv rois wapotor rv mist av, with those present of his 
faithful attendants, i. 5.15. Kal r&v &\d\wv rov BovAspevoy i. 3. 9. 

e. Other Adjectives : *Exwv r&v érisbopud\dkwv Tos hploes, having half 
of the rear-guard, iv. 2.9. Tods dyabots Trav dvOpwirwv, the good among 





§ 422. WITH SUBSTANTIVES, ADJECTIVES, ADVERBS, VERBS. 275 


men, Ar. Pl. 495. Td Aovwdyv ris Hudpas ili. 4. 6. Tay &d\dov oxevdy ra 
tmepiTTa iii. 2. 28. ' 

f. Those adjectives which are most frequently employed to denote a 
part are termed partitives. A neuter adjective used substantively is often 
so employed. See 416a. 


420. III. Apverns. a. Of Place and Time, used literally or fig- 
uratively (416 a): Ov5 Sov yijs éouev olda, J know not where on earth 
{upon what part of the earth] we are, Ar. Av. 9. Tndod yap olkd ray 
aypav, I dwell [in a remote part of the country] far from town, Ar. Nub. 
138. “Evrat0a #5n ef ris jrixias, you are now at that point of life, Pl. 
Rep. 328c. ‘Omnvixa. . rijs dpas, at whatever point of time, iii. 5. 18. 
IIpdéow 5¢ rod rorauod mpoBalvew, to advance far into the river, iv. 3. 28. 
Ildppo ris jucpas, far in the day, Hel. 7. 2.19. Tijs ye otSapod Pl. Rep. 
592b. Ovx« dpas tv ef xaxod; ‘in what depth of evil,’ Soph. Aj. 386. 
Ilod ror «i dpevay; ‘in what state of mind?’ Soph. El. 390. Ot wpoed7d\ubev 
aceyeias, ‘to whata pitch of insolence,’ Dem. 42. 24. So 06, ravrayod, rot, 
Biro, dddoM, Sedpo, widev ; rpwt early, dwé late, a’rixa, myvixa, Ke. Cf. 
Lat. ubi terrarum, nusquam gentium, quo loci, tunc temporis, eo furoris. 

b. Of State or Condition, especially with the verbs éx@ and 4x (416 a): 
Ths ruxns yap @8’ éxw, I am thus in [have myself in this state of | fortune, 
Eur. Hel. 857. IRLws of eyes 65éns ; [in what state of opinion] of what 
opinion are you? Pl. Rep. 456d. ‘Os roddr etxov, [as they were of foot] 
with all their speed, Hat. 6.116. Ids aydvos Hrouerv ; how do we come 
on tn the strife [with what progress of the strife]? Kur. El. 751. Xpnud- 
Tow ed Hxovres, being well off in property, Hdt. 5. 62. ‘Os épyis éxw Soph. 
O. T. 345. “Orav . . tyvevas ris xy at’rds airod Pl. Rep. 571d. So 
otTws, Bde, wratTws, dws, ouds, KaAds, Kak@s, mweTpiws, ixavds, &e. 

Nore. In such rare cases as Auvvducis Te recs peyddys (thou hast come 
to great power, Hdt. 7. 157), the adverb seems to have been attracted into 
the form of an adjective. 

ce. Of the Superlative Degree: ’Adasvéertata ravrwy ériuwpetro, he pun- 
ished most unsparingly of all [he of all, 418 b] i. 9. 13. TporeunOfvae 
padiora 77 “EAAjvwr i. 6.5. Ol ev éyybtara Tay ToNeulww ii. 2. 17. 


421. IV. Verps. The Genitive partitive, in connection 
with a verb, may perform the office either of a subject, an ap- 
positive, or a complement ; taking the place of any case which 
the verb would require, if referring to the whole. See 418 b. 


1.) The Gen. Partitive as a Subject. (a) Of a Finite Verb: Eiot & ai- 
tov, ods 00d ay. . duaBalyre, there are some of them, which you could not 
poss, li. 5. 18. Tlodgpov, cal paxns od periv airy, of war and battle, 
there fell to her no share, Cyr. 7. 2. 28 (so with mpoojxer, 4. 2. 20). Tar 
dé Daplwv . . EwOeuevor . . SuéByoay Th. 1.115. (b) Of an Infinitive: 
‘Exuwyvivac pay, that some of them mingled, iii. 5. 16. "Quero mpoohxew 
ovdevl apxijs, he thought that [a share of | authority belonged to no one, Cyr. 
8.1. 37. Aoxe? dixacov elvar, rior Toy apyav weretvar Rep. A. 1. 2. 


422. 2.) The Gen. Partitive in the place of an Appositive is most 
common with substantive verbs, but is likewise found with other verbs, 
particularly those of reckoning, esteeming, and making : Ov. éya rotrav 
elul, I anv not one of these, Cyr. 8. 3. 45. “Eriyxave . . BovAfjs dv, he hap- 
pened to be one of the council, Th. 3.70. "Tas pakdpev dpiOuetra, Hylas 
ts numbered as one of the blest, Theoc. 13. 72. Motouchs . . TLOnS héyous ; 
do you make letters a part of music? Pl. Rep. 376 e. 


276 SYNTAX, R. X., XI. — GENITIVE PARTITIVE,  § 423, 


423. 3.) The Genitive Partitive is used as a Complement, 


a. Generally, with any verb, when its action affects not the 
whole object, but a part only : as, 


AaBivras Tob BapBapicod erparod, taking a part of the barbarian army, 
i. 5.7. Tov kyplov.. épayor, ate of the honeycombs, iv. 8. 20. “Adguets 
dé Trav aixparatwv, sending some of the captives, vil. 4. 5. Xewpicodos 
wéuret Tav €x THs KwuNns oKEWouevous iv. 5. 22. Kai rhs re ys éreuov Th. 
2. 56. Ilapolias ris @ipas, opening the door a little, Ar. Pax 30. 


424. 8.) Particularly, with verbs which, in their ordinary 
use, Imply dwided or partial action. 


Nore. The Gen. partitive may be connected with other parts of speech 
upon the same principle. Hence the rule is expressed in a general form. 


RuLE X. Words of SHARING, BEGINNING, and 
TOUCH govern the Genitive. 


1, Words of sHarinG include those of partaking (part- 
taking), unparting, obtaining by distribution, &c. Thus, 

Tov kwédvev peréyey, to share in [have a share of ] the dangers, Hel. 2. 
4.9. Tijode kowwwva tixys, [ partake of this fortune, Eur. Med. 303. 
Tav eippoovar petad 8dvtes, imparting our joys, Gic. 9.12. Mevovexret 
Tav etppocvvay 6 Tvpavvos, ‘has less of,’ Hier. 1. 29. Tod AAtov weove- 
KTotvra, ‘ bearing more of,’ Cyr. 1. 6. 25. EiupBadderar. . rovde delua- 
ros Kur. Med. 284. “Ayah dé ovAXAarpia Tar ev eipqvy wévwr, BeBaia dé 
Toy év TOKMUW TbppaXos épywrv, aplaTn dé Pirias Kowwwvds Mem. 2. 1. 32. 
So cuvaipouat, cvANauBdavw, weTaapBdvw, weTarayxdvw, kowdoua, to take 
partin; Siadidwme distribute, érapkéw impart ; icduowpos sharing equally ; 
kowwvia participation ; &c. Servom sui participat consilii, Plaut. 


425. 2. The BEGINNING is, of course, only part of the work. 
Hence, 


Tod dé Néyou Hpxeto, he commenced his address, iii. 2. 7. Pvyis épyev, 
to begin flight, 1b. 17. So é&dpxyw, xardpxyw, brdapxw, xabyyéouat, to be- 
gin; apxy beginning ; &e. These words sometimes imply precedence (be- 
ginning for others to follow ; 407). 

a. The partitive idea appears also in such expressions as Mecotor. . 
THs wopeias, being in the middle of the way, Pl. Pol. 265b; Mecotvre. . 
THs avaBdo.os Hdt. 1. 181. 


426. 3. ToucH may be regarded as a species of partial 
action, affecting only the point of contact. To this head be- 
long, either by direct connection or by obvious analogy, verbs 
of laying hold of, hitting, meeting with, &c. Thus, 


"“Anrer Oat ris kdppns, to touch the hay, i. 5.10. *"HartdapBdverar adrod 
ris trvos, lays hold of his shield-rim, iv. 7. 12. @epatrdXa trvyxave, hits 
P., Cyr. 8. 3. 28. *Avipdy ayabay raidds travtqoas, having met with the 
son, of brave heroes, Soph. Ph. 719. Méocov dovpds Xv T. 78. So Ocy- 
ydvw, patw, to touch, auBdvoua, avri\auBdvoua, take hold of, dpaccouat 
seize, é&ixvéouar, epixvéouat, reach ; poet. avrdw, avridw, kupéw meet with ; 
fyomar, dvréxopar, keep hold of, cling to, dvaBaivw go on board (B. 416) ; 


— 


§ 429, OF MOTIVE, REASON, OR END IN VIEW. . 277 


davoros, dbixros, free from the touch of ; &e. Cf. *‘ Lest his hand reach 
of the tree of life,” Milton. 

a. Hence, the part taken hold of is put in the Gen., in connection with 
cther forms of construction: “EA\aBov rijs {avns Tov ‘Opdvrny, trey took 
Orontes by the girdic, i. 6. 10. Ni. . pavew yxepds Kur. Herc. 968. 
*"Ayew Tis hvias Tov troy Eq. 6. 9. Keépns ére Inrelwva A. 197. Tip 
pev Kpeuaorny avxévos Soph. Ant. 1221. 

b. To the analogy of verbs of touch may be referred expressions like 
the following: Ts kepadfs xaréaye, he broke [was fractured in] his head, 
Ar. Ach. 1180. ZuverpiBy ris xepadys Ar. Pax 71. Kparivoy cuvrpipar 
Ths xepadhs avrfs, that C. had broken her head, Isoc. 381a. Cf. 476. 





427. 4. Several words of obtaining, attaining, and receiving, 
govern the Genitive, from their referring primarily either to 
distribution or to touch. Thus, 

"Iva Tis mpornxovons molpas hayyavy, that it may receive its proper por- 
tion, Pl. Leg. 903 e. Kdnpovopety ovdevis, to inherit nothing, Dem. 1065. 
25. Tov dixaiwy tvyxavety, to obtain your rights, vii. 1. 30. Ovnrod péev 
omparos érvxes, AODANATOY 5¢ VYXH® Isoc. 22b. Tddov avridcas, 
Soph. El. 868. i 6é res xupet yuvarkds éoO\js, edrvxet Kur. Cr. 2. 

a. The student can hardly fail to have remarked the great variety of 
metaphorical and transitive meanings in which words of sharing and of 
touch are employed, not only in Greek, but likewise in our own and in 
other languages. 


428. 6. That which exerts an influence as an 
EXCITEMENT, OCCASION, or CONDITION. To this 
division belong the following rules, respecting, 
1. the motive, reason, and end in view; 2. price, value, 
meru, and crime; 3. the sensible and mental object ; 
and 4. time and place. 


a. The Gen. so employed is often translated by other prepositions than 
of and from, especially by for ; and sometimes without a preposition. 


1. Genitive of Motive, §c. 


429. Rute XI. The morive, REASON, and 
END IN VIEW are put in the Genitive. 


To this rule may be referred the use of the Gen., both in 
regular construction and in eaclamation, to express the person 
or thing, on account of which, in consequence of which, for the 
sake of which, in honor of which, or to affect which, any thing 
is done, said, felt, or existing. Thus, 

a. Wirth VerRBs : Mto600 trnperotvres, serving [from, or on account 
of | for hire, Cyr. 6. 2. 37. Tobrov ce . . &rG, on this account I envy 
you, Ib. 8. 4. 23. Mydév abtrav xarabels, paying nothing for them, Ib. 3. 


1. 37. PtKov deioas . . 7) Xadrod, fearing [on account of | for a friend or 
even himself, Soph. O. T. 234. Tadrns ixvotuai oe, I bescech you for her 


278 SYNTAX. R&R. XL, XIl., XIII. — GEN. OF MOTIVE, &e. § 429. 


sake, Kur. Or. 671. ‘Ixeredw ce travie youvarav, ‘by these knees,’ Id. 
Hec. 752. Zrreicov dyalod Salpovos, ‘in honor of,’ Ar. Eq. 106.  IIpo- 
WeMOTAL THS TAapauTixa Sovis, ‘for the sake of present pleasure,’ Dem. 
34. 23. “Hypawa. ., Tod wy Twas tnrioa, * in order that none may in- 
quire,’ Th. 1. 23. ’Hé7jAGev 6 om elpwy Tov ome pat, ‘to sow,’ Mat. 13. 3. 
Anr@ ce Tod vod, THs dé Serlas ory Soph. El. 1027. *Ayyedins olxve- 
oxe O. 640. So with plovew envy, dyauat, Oavnatvw, admire, evdamovifw, 
paxapl{w, esteem happy, oixreipw pity, dpyifouar, Oupdomat, yaderaivw, be 
angry, pynotkakéw bear ill-will, Tyswpéopat take vengeance, alive, érrawéw, 
praise, méupoua blame, or eves sigh, aA\doow exchange, mpaTTw exact, 
épeiiw owe, &c. Cf. Proficiscitur cognoscende antiquitatis, Zac. A. 2. 
59 ; Sume cyathos amici, Hor. 

b. WITH ADJECTIVES : Evdaiuev . . Tod TpoTrov, happy [by reason of ] 
From his character, Pl. Phedo 58 e. *Q paxdpie ris teyvys, Blessed in thy 
trade! Ar. Av. 1423. “Q rddaw' éyo obey Soph. El. 1209. *Q duvord- 
awa Tis éujs adOadlas Kur. Med. 1028. Cerebri felicem, Hor. 

ce. With ADVERBS: Ilev@cxa@s dé €xovcay Tod adeApod, in mourning for 
her brother, Cyr. 5.2.7. Xarer&s dépew airav Th. 2. 62. Kadd@s rra- 
patAov Keira, it lies well for the voyage, Th. 1. 36. Ilapé8ovu xpycipnws 
éfew Th. 3. 92. 

d. Wirn Nouns: ‘Qdtvas atrot mpocBardv, causing pangs on his ac- 
count, Soph. Tr. 41. DTevelov ro88 . . \urds, entreaties by this beard, Kur. 
Or. 290. Tpolas puicos, hatred on accownt of Troy, lb. 432. 

e. WitTH INTERJECTIONS: Ped Tod avSpés, Alas for the noble man / 
Cyr. 3. 1. 39. Ala? kakov Eur. Here. 899, Oiwoe Sépapros Ib. 1374. 
‘Oa. . oTpatredpatos Aisch. Per. 116. ‘Tarraraag Trav Kakov Ar. Eq. 1. 

f. IN SIMPLE EXCLAMATION : Tis TOXNS, My ill-luck ! Cyr. 2. 2. 3. 
Ths pwoptas, What folly ! Ar. Nub. 818. *Q Zeb Bacrded, 79s NewrdtH TOs 
Tay ppevav Ib. 153. “AmodXov arorpérate, Toe Xaophpatos Ar. Ay. 61. 


430. a. The Genitive of the END IN View is put with 
some words of direction, claim, and dispute. Words of direc- 
tion include those of aiming at, throwing at, going towards, and 
reaching after. Thus, 


‘AvOpwruv oroxater Oar, to take aim at men, Cyr. 1. 6. 29. Adrod xep- 
uddas. . &pumrov, they threw stones at him, Eur. Bac. 1096. Eaed Tlen- 
Aypns mérea at, to flr y straight for Pellene, Ar. Av. 1421. Ths yap airg 
éotw boris THs apxns avTirovetrar ; for who is there that disputes with him 
the sovereignty [makes for the sovereignty in opposition to him]? ii. 1. 11. 
Baoiwexijs peTamovoupevous Tréxvns, laying claim to the kingly art, Pl. Pol. 
289e. *Lévat rod mpdcw, to go farther [for that which is farther on], i. 3. 
1. So with dkovrigw, rotevw, inur, to shoot, rpéxw run, dpéyoua reach for, 
érualouat poet., feel or seck for, audicBnréw contend for; 10v(s lon., 
straight for; &e. 

b. The student cannot fail to remark the ease with which verbs of 
motion pass into those of simple effort and desire (432 e). Thus, tepar, 
and, more commonly, éplepar, to send one’s self to, rush to, strive for, seek, 
desire ; dpéyopar, to reach after, strive for, seek, court, desire : Adéns édte- 
pevors, eager for glory, Cyr. 3. 3. 10. Téuevot exdeov Soph. Tr. 514. 
’OpéEac Oar Tis dutrlas avrod, to seek his company, Mem. 1. 2.15. Zwxpd- 
Tous wpexOnrny Ib. 16. Tits dpéyec@ac Hier. 7. 3. 


§ 432. OF PRICE, &C. OF SENSIBLE OBJECT, &C. 279 
2. Genitive of Price, Merit, §c. 


431. Rue XII. Prick, VALUE, MERIT, and 
CRIME are put in the Genitive. 


a. Prick: “Immov, dy. . dmédoto revrjxovra Sapexav, the horse, which 
he had sold for fifty darics, vii. 8. 6. Adga dé xpnpateayv ok wvynry, glory 
is not to be bought for money, Isoc. 21 b. “Audiroxov . . dredUrpwoe Ta- 
Advreyv évyéa, he released A. for nine talents, Dem. 159. 13. ILécov ddd- 
oxe.; for how much does he teach? Pl. Apol. 20b. ILodXod rots dors 
érwiouwv Mem. 1. 2. 60. Cf. Lat. tanti, quanti, assis, &c., expressing price 
or value. 

b. VALUE AND MERIT: “Aévoc rijs €Xevdeplas, worthy of freedom, i. 7. 3. 
IfodX0d dévos rH orpatia, worth much to the arn, iv. 1. 28. Tihs délas 
Tiyacbat, to estimate at the true desert, Pl. Apol. 36e. Tiywdrar. . Oavd- 
Tov, he puts his estimate [of the desert of the crime] at death, lb. b. II pé- 
Tov. . Saipovos Todo, suited to my fate, Soph. Aj. 534 (the Dat. more 
common with mpérw, § 453). Ilperdvrws tav mpativrwv Pl. Menex. 239 c. 
So with dé&isw to deem worthy, dgiws in a manner worthy of, avazios un- 
worthy, xardé.os, right worthy ; moéouat, TlOnus, to estimate; &e. Cf. 
Magni estimabat pecuniam, Cic.; Salitis dignus, Plaut. 

ce. CriME: “AoeBelas devyovra, accused of impiety, Pl. Apol. 35d. 
Awwfouat ce BSeXrlas, LT will prosecute you for cowardice, Ar. Kq. 368. 
"Evoxos . . Aeumoraglov, guilty of desertion, Lys. 140. 1. So with airedo- 
Mat, €TmatTidouat, to accuse, ypddoua indict, elodyw, tbrdyw, éméEeyu, éres- 
EpXomar, EmitkymTouat, Kadoduat, prosecute, arraign, dikdfw, kpivw, judge, 
arickouat, dpicxdvw, be convicted ; bwetOivos liable ; &c.: and, in Lat., 
with acciso, arguo, condemno, absolvo ; reus, insons ; &e. 

d. The Gen. (chiefly @avdrov) is sometimes used to express the punish- 
ment (regarded either as the desert of the crime, or as the end in view in 
judicial proceedings): Oavdrov dé obra xpivover, these pronounce sentence 
of death |adjudge worthy of], Cyr. 1. 2.14. ‘Lafyov Cavarov, ‘on a capi- 
tal charge,’ Hel. 2.3. 12. “AvOpdrwy xarayynpis dT wv Oavarov 7) dvyfis 
Pl. Rep. 558 a. “Evoyoe Seopod yeyivao. Dem. 1229.11. Seeb. Cf. 
Damnatus laboris, Hor. 


3. Genitive of Sensible or Mental Object. 


432. The object of sensation, thought, or emotion may be 


regarded as its exciting cause, and, in this view, may be put in 
the Genitive. Hence, 


Rute XUI. Words of sensation, and of MEN- 
TAL STATE Or ACTION govern the Genitive : as, 
a. Ov SENSATION: Zirov éyedoavro, tasted of food, iii. 1.3. Olvov.. 


bodppatver Sar, to smell wine, V. 8. 3. OoptBou HKovere Sid TOV Tdewy lév- 


ros, ‘heard a murmur,’ i. 8. 16. Ovdels 2 rerore Swxpdrovs oddéev dceBes 
ovde dviovov ot're mpadrrovros eldev, ov're Aéyovros Hkovcev, ‘saw 8S. doing, 
or heard him saying,’ Mem. 1. 1. 11. Tetoat ris Ovpas, [taste of ] knock 
at the door, Ar. Ran. 462. So yedw to give a taste, dxpodouat, KrXbw poet., 
sai : lath not tasting, avixoos not hearing ; &c. For words of touch, 
see ‘ 


280 SYNTAX. R. XIIJ., XIV. — GEN. OF MENTAL OBJECT. § 432, 


b. Or PERCEPTION, KNOWLEDGE, REFLECTION, EXPERIENCE, and 
Hasit : ErBovdfjs ovx yoOdvero, he did not perceive the plot, i. 1. 8. 
"AMjrwr Evvieray, wnderstood each other, Th. 1. 3. “Ev@vpod dé cal ray 
elddtwy, consider those who know, Mem. 3. 6.17. Ileapdpevor ravrys rijs 
tdtews, making trial of this order, ili. 2. 38. Tav rexav hudy repay, to 
[try] attack owr walls, Th. 7.12. TplBwv ov lrmixijs, practised in horse- 
manship, Ar. Vesp. 1429. Oéd\w & &idpis wadAov 7 Wodds Kaxdy elvac 
ZAAsch. Sup. 453. Elévas exw rijs vOdde NéEews Pl. Apol. 17d. Madyns éb 
elSére B. 824 (Pugne sciens, Hor.). So metpa trial, experience, with éu- 
mepos, €umelpws, éumerpia, éumeipéw, depos, amelpws, dmeipla, amelparos, 
-ws 3 émioThuwy acquainted, averioT how, ayvas, adans, ignorant, amaléev- 
Tos uninstructed ; idudrns [a common person] unskilled, idwwrebw to be w.; 
€0ds, HOds, accustomed, anjOns unaccustomed, &c.: and Lat. gnarus, ignarus, 
conscius, nescius, prudens, inscius, peritus, insuétus, &c. Cf. ‘* Intelli- 
gent of seasons,” ‘‘ Divine of something ill,” Jit. 

c. Or Memory: Tovrwy ovdels pépvyrat, these things no one remembers, 
v. 8. 25. Totrwv éuépvyto, made mention of these, vii. 5. 8. My ava- 
pyqAoys Kaxav, do not remind me of my woes, Eur. Ale. 1045. Tar mapobe 
pev Noyw AabapeBa, let us forget the former words, Enr. Hipp. 288. So 
pynwovedw, piuvyjoKomat, to remember, ériavOavipat, émirAnPouat, forget, pt- 
pvjoKkw, UToupyyncKw, remind, éxynPavw and érir7Ow, cause to forget ; pvp- 
pov mindful, duvjpov, émdjonewv forgetful; uvhun memory, A7On oblivion; 
&c. Cf. Lat. memini, recordor, obliviscor, moneo, memor, immemor, &c.; 
Labérum decipitur, Hor. 

d. OF CARE AND ConcERN: K7vSeorOar ZevOou, to care for Seuthes, vii. 
5. 5. Tovrov cou det péderv, of this [there must be to you a care] you must 
take care, Cyr. 1. 6.16. “Apedetv tudv airy, to be careless of ourselves, 
i. 3. 11. Mi perapére cor rijs éuijs dwpeds, that it may not repent thee 
(old Eng.) of thy gift to me, Cyr. 8. 3. 32 (repentance or regret being after- 
concern). Pvdraccopévous Tar vedv, careful of the ships, Th. 4.11. So 
éruedopuat to take care, ppovriiw give heed, évrpéropat, adéyw poet., regard, 
Tpovoew, poopdw, provide, dvywpéw care little, ddpovrisréw disregard, ka- 
tappovéw despise; émryedjs careful, dpedys careless; émyédera, Ppdvtis, 
Kjdos, care, attention, duédrea neglect ; dvax&s attentively ; &c.: and Lat. 
anxius, providus, improvidus, seciirus, poenitet, &c. 

e. OF DrstrE: "Epavres rovrou, desiring this, iii. 1. 29. Xpyudrwv 
érOvpet, [sets his mind upon, cf. 480 b] desires booty, iii. 2. 39. Trx6- 
psevos Tod (jv, eager for life, Pl. Phedo 117a. Tlevqoas xpyudrwvr, hun- 
gering for wealth, Cyr. 8. 8. 39. Tlddus édevOeplas Suphoaca, ‘ thirsting 
for freedom,’ Pl. Rep. 562¢c. So xicodw, and the poet. €douat, ipelpw, 
Araloua, Aimroua, to long for; mpd0duos, EmcOuunrixds, desirous, dioepws 
wretchedly desiring, &c.: and Lat. avidus, cupidus, studidsus, &c. See 
414 ¢, 430 b. 

f. Or Various Emorion: “Ayapat Arjjuaros, I admire the spirit, Kur. 
Rhes. 244. ‘Yudv. . Oavpdto, J wonder at you, Hel. 2. 3. 53. Ods ov 
ay avacyérbar aitod Bacidevorvros, who would not endure him as their 
king, ii. 2.1. “Qu éyd cau od hbovhow, which I shall not grudge to you, 
Cyr. 8. 4.16. Mydé wor POovijoys evyudrwyr, ‘deny,’ or ‘reject,’ Aisch. Pr. 
583. Ov peyalpw rode cor Swpruaros, ‘ grudge,’ Ib. 626. 

g. The idea of hearing passes, by an easy transition, into that of 
obedience (obédio, to give ear to, listen to, obey, fr. ob and audio). Hence, 
words of obedience often govern the Gen. (cf. 455 g): Tovrous . . Baothéws 
ovk dxoverv, that these did not obey [or were not subject to] the king, il. 5. 
16. Oi dé Kapdobyor ore kaotvrwv mhkovov, the C. neither [listened to 
them calling] regarded their calls, iv. 1. 9. ‘Yahxoo. trav Mogovvoixwr, 


§ 433. OF TIME AND PLACE. 281 


subject to the M., v. 5.1. So xaraxovw to obey, Tapakovu disregard, avn- 


KovgTéw, poet. vnxovotéw, disobey ; karjKoos obedient, avumijxoos disobedient ; 
even, rarely, weifouat to obey, ameew, poet. aeivew, disobey, ebvaevOys obe- 
dient, dricros disobedient ; &c. 

h. Verbs of styht commonly govern the Acc.; and many verbs which 
are followed by the Gen. according to this rule, sometimes or often take 
the Acc. (especially of a neuter ‘adjective) : Hidopev rods rodeulous, we 
have seen the enemy, vi. 5. 10. Kite bom, I hear a cry, Kur. Or. 1325. 
AicBivovrar éxarra, ‘perceive,’ Mem. 1. 4.5. See 472b, 478 b. 

i. The Gen. is the more freely used gris a participle agrees with it ; 
and there may sometimes be doubt whether the Gen. is used according to 
this rule, or put absolute with the participle. 


4. Genitive of Time and Place. 


433. The time and place in which any thing is done may 
be regarded as essential conditions of the action, or as co- 
operating to produce it. Hence, 


Rute XIV. The time and PLACE IN WHICH 
are put in the Genitive (cf. 469, 482): as, 


a. TIME : “Qvxero Tis vuxtés, he went in the night, vii. 2.17. Ts Se- 
Ans 6é fev, to come in the evening, |b. 16. “Héidvtes 5 Exdorns hpépas, 
going out {in each day] every day, vi. 6.1. Jove? 5& robro modAdts TOG 
Eyvds, ‘many times [in the] a month,’ Cyr. 1. 2. 9. Hive vuxrds déou 71, 
eire kal hpépas, “whether [in the] by night or by day,’ ili. 1. 40. Bast 
Aevs od paxetrac déxa Hhucpay (cf. ev. . ravras Ta‘s 74épass), the king will 
not fight [within] for ten days, i. 7. 18. HHoddod xpdvov, Maxpod xpévou, 
Xpsvov suxvob, for a long time, i, 9. 25.3 &c. “BE érav dAouros Ar. Lys. 
280. Ovxére Tod outros [sc. xpdvouv] racxomer, ‘in future,’ Dem. 44. 12. 
“Qaore rijs hpépas GAns Su7pGov. ., ddAd SelAns apixorro iii. 3. 11. Tod 
avtod Bépovs, Tod 5 ériyvyvouévov Siren Th. 2. 66, 69. Cf. Eng. 
0 nights. 

b. PLAcE: Adrod [sc. T5rou| pelvavres, remaining in that place, i. 10. 


17. Tis 6¢ "Iwvias . . alisxypdyv veviucrat, in Ionia it has been deemed 


base, Pl. Conv. 182b. KaréxNewav. . MaxeSovlas “AOnvatoe Iepdixxar, 
the A. shut up P. in M., Th. 5. 83. *H odx ”Apyeos ihev : was he not in 
A.? y. 251. Tévd’ civedéiw teyéwv, ‘within the walls,’ Eur. Ph. 451. 
"EuBarevew marpidos, to step [in] on my native land, Soph. O. T. 825. 
Ilorépas ris xepds ; * Ey Seba cov. On which hand? On the y right. Fur. 
Cycl. 681. ‘Opa Tupas vewp} Bdarpvxov, ‘on the tomb,’ fost El. 900. 
Négos 5’ od paivero waons yatns, ‘[in] over the whole land,’ i B722G0E 
the Lat. Gen. ef place (perhaps a modified form of the Dat. ) : i aes &e. 

ec. This use of the Gen., to denote the place where, rarely occurs in 
prose, except in those adverbs of place which are properly genitives 
(380 b) : 08, adrod, duod, ovdamod, &e. Cf. 469 d. 

d. This Gen. is sometimes employed, chiefly in the Epic, to denote the 
place upon, over, or through which any thing moves: "Epxy>ovrac tredlovo, 
they advance {in| upon the plain, B. 801. Ilctov érmiorera, it flows 
over the plains, Soph. O. C. 689. “Edxéwevar vetoto Babetns 1HKTOV dporpov, 
‘through the deep fallow,’ K. 353. ‘Emerdxvvov THs O00, ‘ on the way,’ 
Th. 4. 47. Tlotas [sc. 6500] cicevéyxwow abriv, ‘by what way,’ Lk. 5. 19. 

e. The ideas of place and time are combined in some expressions which 


282 SYNTAX. R, XV., XVI.— GENITIVE ACTIVE. § 433. 


relate to journeying (Fr. journée, a day’s-march, fr. Lat. diurnus, fr. dies, 
day) : ‘Emraxatéexa yap cra®pav ray éyyuTdrw ovdev etxouer, ‘{in] during 
the last seventeen day’s-marches,’ ii. 2. 11. ‘Hyepevovras. . maxpds Ke- 
AevGov Aisch. Cho. 710. 

f. The idea of cause appears especially in such expressions as Adgew. . 
Tpla hurdapecka Tov unvis, to pay three half-darics a month, i. 3. 21. 

g. Some of the examples under this rule have been re:erred by some 
to the partitive use of the Genitive. 


434. (C. That which produces any thing, as 
its ACTIVE Or EFFICIENT CAUSE; or, in other 
words, that 67 which, as its author, agent, or ger, 
any thing is made, written, sad, done, bestowed, &c., 
or from which any thing is obtained, heard, learned, 
inquired, requested, demanded, &ce. 


To this division, which must obviously refer chiefly to persons, belongs 
the following rule, which will of course be understood as applying only to 
adjuncts. 


Genitive Active. 


RuLE XV. The AUTHOR, AGENT, and GIVER 
are put in the Genitive: as, 


a. With Verbs of Obtaining, Receiving, Hearing, Learning, Inquiring, 
Requesting, &c.: Taira dé wou ruxévres, obtaining this of you, vi. 6. 32. 
"Epo dxovcerbe wacav riv adjOecav, you shall hear from me the whole 
truth, Pl. Apol. 17b. Mdde 6é pov kai rade, learn from me this also, 
Cyr. 1. 6. 44. ITLuv@dvou 6¢ rév Eévev, inquire of the strangers, isch. Cho. 
848. Adovra 6€ wov kal rodro, ‘request of you,’ vi. 6. 33. TLatdbs édé- 
Earo xeipt Kbreddov A. 596. 20d. . aire? wOPov Soph. O. C. 1161. 

b. With Passive Verbs and Verbals : II\yeis @vyarpds rijs éuijs, smit- 
ten by my daughter, Eur. Or. 497. Zoayels Aiylobov, slain by 4., Id. 
El. 123. Tov fhow ruxaduevos Soph. Aj. 1853. Tlolas peptpyns . . varo- 
otpagels ; by what solicitude oppressed ? Id. O. T. 728. nSevds mpoo7- 
yopos, accosted by no one, Ib. 1437. PiXov dkravTos, unwept of friends, 
Soph. Ant. 847. Kelvys didaxrd Id. El. 343. “Ayamrnrots Ocod, beloved 
of God, Rom. 1- 7, — This use of the Gen. is rare in prose, and is most 
frequent with the Participle or Verbal. Cf. Mens interrita leti, Ov. ; 
Hiemis invietrs, Si. ; and the common use of of with the Pass. in old 
and poet. Eng. : ‘‘ Unwhipped of justice,” Shaks. 

ce. With Substantives : Elevohavros Kipov AvdBacis, Xenophon's Ex- 
pedition of Cyrus. Tats rév véwv Timats aydddNovrat, they delight in the 
honors paid them by the young, Mem. 2. 1. 33. “Hpas dXarelats, wander- 
ings caused by Juno, Aisch. Pr. 900. ILodépev Pbopd, destruction by 
wars, Pl. Leg. 741a. Kuowara.. dvépeay, B. 396. 


435. D. That which constTiTuTES any thing 
WHAT it Is. ‘To this head may be referred what- 
ever serves to complete the idea of a thing or prop- 





§ 436. GENITIVE CONSTITUENT. 283 


erty, by adding some distinction or characteristic. 
Hence, 


Genitive Constituent. 


Rute XVI. An ADJUNCT DEFINING A THING 
OR PROPERTY is put in the Genitive : as, 


Td Mévevos orpdrevua, the army of Meno, i. 2. 21. 

a. Substantives simply denote things (including persons) ; and adjec- 
tives and adverbs, propertics. Hence, if an adjunct is simply viewed as 
modifying a substantive, adjective, or adverb, it is put in the Gen.; and 
Rule XVI. might be thus expressed : 


A SupsTantive, ADJECTIVE, or ADVERB, as 
such, governs the Genitive. 


b. If, on the other hand, the particular nature of the modification ts to 
be expressed, another case may be required ; so that the same substantive, 
adjective, or adverb may either be followed by the Gen. as the generic 
case, or by the Dat. or Acc. as a more specific case. See 392a, 442 a, 
444, 463, 472f. 

ce. In many instances, the use of the Gen. may either be referred to 
this general rule, or to the more specific rules which have preceded. 
How often has the old brief rule been cited, ‘‘One substantive governs 
another in the Genitive.” 

d. The Gen. modifying a substantive (termed the Attributive, or Ad- 
nominal Genitive) has an office akin to that of the adjective ; which, in- 
deed, may often take its place (437 e, 440, 443 c). 


436. a. The THING OR PROPERTY DEFINED may he either distinctly 
expressed by its appropriate word, or may be tnvolved in another word : 
as Bacwdevs in Bacrredw (442), rAnoiov in mrAnotd Sw (445 ¢), Kivddvos in Kw- 
duvedw (446d). Hence, 


Rute B. A word may govern the Genitive, by virtue of an 
included substantive, adjective, or adverb. 


b. Adjectives in which a substantive is compounded with 4- privative 
(385), have often a Gen. defining the substantive : as, ['jpws &Avta, frec 
Srom the pains of age, Soph. O. C. 1519. See 446b. Hence the special 
rule, 


Rutz C. The compounds of Alpha Privatwe govern the 
Genitive ; or, in the Latin rhyme, 
Semper Alpha Privativum Poni facit Genitivum. 


c. The verbs 8{@ to smell, rvéw to breathe, and mpooPdddw to emit, may 
take a Gen. defining a noun implied in these verbs or understood with 
them : “Ofove. witrys, they smell of pitch [emit the smell of pitch], Ar. 
Ach. 190. Mipov rvéov, breathing of myrrh, Soph. Fr. 147. Bporot ue 
mporéBanre, the scent of a mortal strikes me, Ar. Pax 180. ‘Qs dU jor rpoo- 
émveuvoe xoipelwy Kpeav Ar. Ran. 338. 

d. Some adverbs govern the Gen., as originally substantives. (380), or 
by virtue of an included substantive : Todde rod PdBou yap, on accownt 


284 SYNTAX. R. XVI. — GENITIVE CONSTITUENT. § 436, 


of this fear, Soph. El. 427. Tavrys tvexa rijs rapidov, on account of this 
pass, i. 4. 5. So dixnv, d€uas poet., after the manner or form of, like, 
Exnre poet., by the will of, kixrw around, &c. Cf. Lat. gratia, ergo, instar. 

437. A Genitive defining a substantive (a) is often con- 
nected with it through an appositional verb. Less frequently, 
(b) its connection is modified or strengthened by an adjective or 
adverb. 'These constructions may be often explained by ellipsis. 
Thus, 

(a.) IIpdéevos . . Hv [sc. dvOpwrros] ér&v ws tpidxovta, P. was [a man] of 
about 30 years, ii. 6. 20. See 440, 443, and cf. 422. (b.) ‘Iepds 6 x@pos 


Ths Apréusios, the spot is sacred to Diana [consecrated to be Diana’s], v. 3. 
13. “I8lwv éavrod xrnudrwvr, of his own acquisitions, Pl. Menex. 247 b. 


Tov epwra rotrov mérepa Kowdv ole. civar wdvrwy avOpirav ; do you think 


that this desire is common to all men [all men’s in common]? Pl. Conv. 
205 a. So with olxetos own, érixwpios customary, &e. Cf. the Lat. sacer, 
proprius, communis, with the Gen.; the Eng. own; &c. 

c. The Gen. is often used in emphatic periphrasis, particularly with ypipa 
thing (446 a) and, by the poets, with évopa name, dénas body, Kapa head, 
oXipa form, and similar words :°Q @idrarov. . dvoua Loduveixous, O dear- 
est [name of P.] P., Eur. Ph. 1702.  Aé€uas’Ayapuéuvovos, for’ Ayapéuvova, 
Id. Hec. 723. °Q Pidrrarov yuvarxds Ioxdorns xdpa Soph. O. T. 950. 

d. A substantive governing the Gen., or (e) the Gen. itself, is some- 
times used instead of an adjective, especially by the poets and Hellenistic 
writers: (d) Xpuobv.. érar, the gold of words, for*Ern xpuca, golden words, 
Ar. Pl. 268. Bly Tevxporo, the [might of T.] mighty T., ¥. 859. *Q wnrpds 
éujs wéBas Asch. Pr. 1091. ’Emi rdovrou &dyAdrytt, in [the uncertainty 
of] uncertain riches, 1 Tim. 6.17. Cf. Artificis scelus, Virg.; Her Magj- 
esty, His Grace. (e) Tas hovytas Bloros, a life of quiet [= iouxos Bio- 
tos, a quiet life], Kur. Bac. 3888. I1d0y a&riptas, [passions of baseness] 
base passions, Rom. 1. 26. ’Axpoarhs émuAnopovijs, a forgetful hearer, 
Ja. 1.25. See 440. 


438. Euipsis. a. A substantive governing the Gen. is 
often understood, particularly words denoting domestic relation 
or abode (vids son, oixos house, &c.), and such as the context sup- 
plies : as, , 

Troos 6 Tau, Glus, the son of Tamos, ii. 1.3. ‘O 6¢ Matas rfjs”Ar)hav- 
ros [sc. Ovyarpés], the son of M., the daughter of A., Luc. D. D. 24. Bup- 
olvns ris ‘Imrtou [sc. yuvacxés,] B., the wife of H., Ar. Eq. 449. Powray 
els didackddov [sc. olkor], resorting to the house of a teacher, Pl. Ale. 109d. 
’Es ro Ilirrddov, to Pittalus’s, Ar. Ach. 1222. ’Ev “Aoxdnmod [se. lep@ 
temple) Mem. 3. 13. 3. Els Tpopwviov [sc. dvrpov cave] Ar. Nub. 508. 
Tév év Aduyjrov xaxév Eur. Alc. 761 (cf. Ev’ Adunrov Sdmous 68). “Ev “Ac- 
dov Soph. Ant. 654 (cf. Eiv"Acdov d5uos 1241). Cf. Hectoris Andromache, 
Hector’s [wife] A., Virg.; Ad Veste, to Vesta’s [temple], Hor.: John Peters 
[originally for J., Peter’s son], To St. Paul’s [Church]. Ks 

Nort. The ellipsis of words of abode is chiefly with the prepositions 
eis, év, and é&. 

b. Instead of simple ellipsis, the possessor is sometimes put in the case 
belonging to the thing possessed, chiefly in comparison: as, “Apwara. . 
Spo exelvp [= rots éxelvov dpuact], chariots like [him] his (chariots), Cyr. 
6. 1. 50 (cf. [“Appara] éuoa tots Kipov 2.7). Qmdicuévor. . Tots avrois 





§ 442, OF PROPERTY. OF RELATION. 285 


Kipe bros, equipped in armor the same with [Cyrus] C.’s (armor), Cyr. 
7.1.2. “Bxouev chpara ixavdrepa tovtwv, we have bodies better able than 
[they] theirs, iii. 1. 23. Mid e&iowons raoSe |= 1a ravde Kaka] Tots €mois 
kaxols Soph. O. T. 1507. Kéuar Xaptrerow ouota P. 51. 


439. An adjunct defining a THING either expresses a prop- 
erty of that thing, or points out another thing related to it. An 
adjunct defining a PROPERTY points out a thing related to that 
property. Hence the CONSTITUENT GENITIVE is either, (1) the 
Genitive of Property, or (2) the Genetwe of Lelation. 


1. Genitive of Property. 


440. a. The GENITIVE OF PROPERTY expresses dimension, 
age, quality, &c. (often expressed by an adjective, 435 d): 


Iloraudv bvra 7d ebpos wEOpov i. 4. 9, a river being [of] a plethron in 
width (cf. Moraudv 7d efpos wAeOpratoy i. 5. 4, and see 395). Holy elkoow 
érav ecivar, before he was [of 20 years] 20 years old, Mem. 1. 2. 40. [Tet- 
xs] edpos elkoot toSav, tos dé éxatdy- ijKos 5 édéyero eivar elkoore 
mapacayyev ii. 4.12. Se 437 a. 

b. Except in the predicate, the Gen. of strict quality is chiefly poetic 
or Hellenistic (437 e) : Tovrov rot tpdtrov mus eiut, [am somehow of this 
turn, Ar. Pl. 246. "Ooo. rijs airs yuopns Foav, as many as were of the 
same mind, Th. 1.113. Tod@’ 6p& roddod wévov, I sce it (a work) of 
much difficulty, Eur. Ph. 719. Zrodida . . rpudas [= Tpupepav |, a [dress 
of daintiness| dainty dress, Kur. Ph. 1491. Toodvd Exers rédpns mpdow- 
mov, ‘face of impudence,’ Soph. O. T. 533. Cf. the commonness of this 
construction in Eng. and, combined with an adjective, in Lat.: A man 
of wisdom, Vir summe sapientie. 


2. Genitive of Relation. 


441. The GENITIVE OF RELATION, in its full extent, in- 
cludes much that has been already adduced, under other and 
more specific heads. The relations which remain to be con- 
sidered are chiefly, (a) those of domestic, social, and civil life ; 
(8) those of possession and ownership ; (y) that of the object of 
an action to the action or agent ; (8) those of time and place ; 
(ec) those of specification, explanation, and emphasis ; while yet 
others are left for observation. 

The Genitives expressing these relations may be termed, (a) the Gen. 


ef social relation, (B) the Gen. possessive, (y) the Gen. objective, (8) the 
Gen. of local or temporal relation, (€) the Gen. of specification, &c. 


442. «a. Genitive or Soctan RELATION. ‘O rijs Bacthéws yuvat- 
Kds ddekdis, the brother of the king's wife, ii. 3.17. Aovdouvs Totrav, 
slaves of these, i. 9.15. Bacredwy [= Bacired’s dv, 4364] adtrayv, being 
their king, v. 6. 37 (see also 407). Teirwy . . ris “EAAABos, a neighbor of 
Hreece, iil. 2. 4. Tods éxelvov éxPicrovs, . . rods Kipov pidous, lis woist 
Joes, the friends of C., iii. 2.5. Cf. 450.a, 456. 


286 SYNTAX. R. XVI.— GENITIVE OF RELATION. § 442, 


a. To this analogy may be referred the use of the Gen. for the Dat., 
with some adjectives denoting near connection or correspondence (even com- 
pounds of ovv, opot, &c.): Bvyyevijs rod Kupou, related to Cyrus, or 
a relative of Cyrus, Cyr. 5.1.24. Zeds opéortios Bporav, Jupiter dwelling 
with mortals, Soph. Fr. 401. Totrwv avrippotev, cownterpoising these, 
Dem. 12. 6. Ts todporp’ aijp, air, coextensive with the earth, Soph. El. 
87. So with cuuguys connate, ciupwvos accordant, civoixos dwelling with, 
cuvwvumos, ouavumos, of like name, ouictoros, axddovfos, accompanying, 
did doxos succceding, duotos like, ddekpds akin, wpdcgopos fitting, &c. Cf. 
Lat. equalis, similis, par, familidris, &c., with Gen.; and 450a, 451. 

b. In some of the examples falling under this head (which is not 
strictly confined to persons), an adjective may be regarded as used sub- 
stantively. 


443. 8. GeniTIVE PossessiveE. a. The Genitive posses- 
sive denotes that to which any thing belongs as a possession, 
power, right, duty, office, quality, characteristic, &c. Thus, 


Ta Lvevvéoros Bacidera, the palace of S., i. 2. 23. *Hoav al Iwyxal 1o- 
Aes Tiroadépvovs, the Lonian cities belonged to T., i. 1. 6. Tav perv yap 
VLKOYTOV TO KaTaKalvey, TOY O€ ArTwpPEvwv 7d amrobvicKkew ori, for it is 
the part of victors to kill, but of the vanquished to die, ii. 2. 89. Ildds. . 
TIadAdSos kexrynuévn, a city called Minerva’s, Eur. lon 8. “Hy tpev ad- 
Ttav éGednonTe yevécOar, ‘your own men,’ Zz. e. ‘independent,’ Dem. 42. 
10. Tis wéAews dvras, true to the state, Isoc. 185 b. Ov Kpéovtos. . ye- 
ypdouat, I shall not be registered as Creon’s, Soph. O. T. 411. Myo & uh 
“Ovyes trowd ceavTts, nor make yours what you did not touch, Id. Ant. 546. 

b. A neuter adjective used substantively takes the Gen. possessive, in 
connection with some verbs of praise, blame, wonder, and the like: Todro 
ératva Aynowdou, I commend this in Agesilaus [this characteristic of 
Agesilaus], Ages. 8. 4. “Ev cov 8é50uKxa, one thing lof you] in you I fear, 
Eur. And. 362. “°O pépdovrat uddiora hudy, what they most blame in us, 
Th. 1.84. So with dyauat admire, Pavud gw wonder at, dudxw inypeach, &e. 

ce. An adjective sometimes supplies the place of the Gen. possessive 
(435 d): Td Bacitevcov [= Baoréws] onuciov, the king's ensign, 1. 10. 12. 
Td Kupevov orpardredor, the camp of Cyrus, Ib. 1. See 375a, 

d. The Gen. possessive is the converse of the Gen. of property, the one 
denoting that which possesses, and the other, that which is possessed. 


444. y. Genitive Opsective. If an action, instead of 
being predicated by a verb, is simply presented in a substan- 
tive, adjective, or adverb, then its object is usually expressed — 
by the Genitive (instead of an Acc., Dat., or preposition with 
its case, as with a verb, 435 a,b). In Eng., various preposi- 
tions are used in translating this Gen. Thus, 


a. Genitive of the Direct Object: ‘O ppotpapxos Tas pudakas e€erafer, 
the commander reviews the guards, He. 9.15; but, Kopos ééraciy moretrae 
tov “EdAAjvev, C. makes a review of the Greeks, i. 7.1; Tév rowtrwv 
épyov éEeracrixdy, fitted to review such matters, Mem. 1. 1. 7. “Ie ydmou 

. 6A prot Hlrov, O marriage destructive of friends! Asch. Ag. 1156 (ef. 
Zroyyos @kerev ypadyhv 1329). AdOpa dé rav orpatiwtrav, without the 
knowledge of the soldiers, i. 3. 8 (cf. Aabetvy atrdv drehOdv 17). Kptoha 
Tov *A®ynvatwv Th. 1.101. "Aperfjs diddoxados Pl. Meno 93 ¢. Kopi 
didackadias Mem. 3. 4. 4. Ardagkarixdvy . . woptas Pl. Euthyph. 3¢ 


LS ee 


— «§ 445. POSSESSIVE, OBJECTIVE, LOCAL, &C. 287 


Arxarooivys didackadefa Cyr. 1. 2. 15 (cf. Acddoxover . . cwhpoorivny 8). 
"Awad Kaxov vii. 7. 33. Cf. Cererem ferunt, Hor.; Ferax Cereris, Ov. 

b. Genitive of the Indirect Object : BvyeoOar rots . . Beots, to pray to the 
gods, iv. 3.13; but, Ocav edvyads, prayers to the gods, Pl. Pheedr. 244 e. 
Tiv tav kpecodveyv dovrciay, subjection to the stronger, Th. 1. 8. (cf. Ty 
yy dovAedoas 81). “EmBovdevtod orparot, of a plotter against the host, 
Soph. Aj. 726 (cf. "EmiBovdevor attG i. 1. 3). Lpipacis. . rod &Opotte, 
pretext for assembling, i. 1. 7. 

ce. Genitive for a preposition with its case : ’AréBn és tiv yfv, descended 
upon the land, Hel. 1. 1. 18; but, ‘Ev droBdoe rijs yas, in a descent upon 
the land, Th. 1. 108. Nécrov yalys E. 344 (cf. Noorjoas oixdvde EH. 687). 

d. In like manner, the Gen. is employed with nouns, to denote rela- 
tions, which, with the corresponding adjectives, are denoted by the Dat. : 
THs Tav “EAAjvev evvoias, from good-will to the Greeks, iv. 7. 20 (cf. Bv- 
vous 5é wot wy vii. 3. 20). “Avdpds evdudvecay Soph. O. C. 631 (cf. Himer7 
wore Id. Ant. 212). 

e. A participle may so perform the office of a substantive or common 
adjective, as to take the Gen. objective: "OT éxetvov Tekdv, his father, Kur. 
EL. 335. Ovddels Epwros To0d’ edaiver a@pedov, ‘as helper of this desire,’ 
Soph. O. C. 436. 

f. To the Gen. of the direct object may be referred the Gen. with atrvos 
and its derivatives : ‘O €uds épws rovrou airios, my desire is {causative of | 
the cause of this, ii. 5. 22. Ot rod wodéuov airtwraro., the chief authors of 
the war, Hel. 4. 4. 2. Todrwyr od od airia, you are not responsible for this, 
(Ke. 8. 2. Tod rarpés rovs airious, those guilty towards my father, Asch. 
Cho. 273. Tovrov Zwkparny .. airiara, for this he blames S. [makes 8S. 
the author of this], Mem. 1. 2. 26. Cf. 429, 431. 

g. The Gen. in its more active uses (when employed to denote agent, 
possessor, &c.) has received the special designation of the Gen. subjective, 
in distinction from the Gen. objective. They may both modify the same 
word: Thv ILéXomos pév ardons LleXotrovyqoov Karddnyu, Pelops's seizure 
of ali Peloponnesus, lsoc. 249.a. Adjectives taking the place of the Gen. 
are, in like manner, used both subjectively and objectively. 


445. §. Genitive or Locan or Temporat RELATION. a. With 
Substantives : Térov éh€ovs, place for pity, Polyb. 1. 88. Tépua ris ow- 
typlas, the goal of safety, Soph. O. C. 725. Tod worapot dibs, channel 
of the river, Cyr. 7. 5. 16. Trav hyepav 655r, « three days’ march, ii. 2. 
12. ‘H wpa rot érovs, the time of year, Me. 4. 13. “Opn Sdprrovo, time 
Jor supper, —. 407. Tedeurhy rot Blov, end of life, i. 1.1. Tprdv pnvav 
pucbdby, three months’ pay, Ib. 10. 

b. With Adjectives. ’Evavrios torac’ épeto, stand opposed to me, N. 448. 
Td pécov r&v rayxéwv, the [middle] distance between the walls, i. 4. 4. 
Dapov 75 dpaia, now of proper age for marriage, Cyr. 4. 6.9. Tédecov 
. . aperas, [having reached the end of] complete in excellence, Pl. Leg. 643d. 
 ¢. With Adverbs. The Gen. is used with many adverbs of place and 
time : "Eyyis rapadeicov, near a park, ii. 4.14. "Eyyis puplwv, nearly 
10,000, v. 7.9. °“Exrds rod reixous, without the wall, Mag. Eq. 7. 4. 
"Exrés édlywr, except a few (406), Hel. 1. 6. 35. Méypu éorépas, until 
evening, Cyr. 1. 4. 23. So with dyxu, cxed5v, near ; duporépwhev on both 
sides, dvrlov, évavriov, avrimépas, over against ; dvw, dvwhev, trepbev, above; 
dxp. until ; etow, évdov, evrbs, within ; éumoddv in the way ; evepbe, vépde, 
kdtw, beneath; &vbev Kal évOev, on this side and that, é&js next to, tw with- 
out, perakd between, bricbev behind ; rapoev, rdpos, mpdcbev, eumpoaber, 
before ; wédhas, tAnoiov, near (hence, rrAnoid{w to come near, 436 a), &e. 


288 SYNTAX. R. D., XVII. — DATIVE. § 446. 


446. « GENITIVE OF SPECIFICATION, EXPLANATION, or 
Empuasis. This makes the statement more precise or em- 
phatic, by adding a more specific name, or by showing in what 
sense or with what special application (am respect to what) the 
statement is made, or by repetition, &c. 


Norse. In some of these uses, the Gen. rather denotes a relation be- 
tween two expressions for the same thing, than between two different things. 
In some cases, an appositive might be substituted for it ; and in others, 
we might regard the Gen. as in apposition with a substantive implied 
(395 c, 394 ¢). 

a. With Substantives. Tpotyns rrodle@por, city or Troy (895c¢; cf. urbs 
Rome). Oavdrov redevrdy, the end [of life] im death, or simply, death, 
Eur. Med. 152 (cf. § 445 a). T'vpdvvov xpijua, a [thing of a tyrant] vile 
tyrant, Pl. Rep. 567e. ‘Yds xpijua péyiorov, a monster of a boar, Hdt. 
1. 36. Acad rip rijs ddehpijs ariuiav ris Kavydoptas, on account of his 
sister's being denied the honor of bearing the sacred basket, Pl. Hipparch. 
229 c. 

b. With Adjectives. Newraros .. yévoro, youngest of birth, T. 409. 
TTAnyav a0gor, free from the punishment of blows (436 b), Ar. Nub. 1413. 
“Amats O€ eluc appévwv tral8wv, I am childless [of ]as to male children, Cyr. 
4.6.2. “Adiros btroyv, [friendless of ] destitute of friends, Eur. Hel. 524. 
Opacs ef troddod [sc. Opdcous], you are very audacious [bold with much 
boldness], Ar. Nub. 915. Tu@dds 6€ ray &AX@V Gtravtev, blind [of] as to 
all things else, Symp. 4.12. Av6din ppevoav Aisch. Pr. 908. *Q réxea 
matpos dmdropa Id. Herc. 114. Xpnpdrov. . ddwpédraros Th. 2. 65. 

c. With Adverbs. ‘AcdadGs Tis detp 6808, safely as to his jowrney 
hither, Soph. O. C. 1165. Cf. 420 b, 429 c. 

d. With Verbs (436 a). Tis érwBedtas . . xwdvvetovra [= ev xivdivy 
évra], being in danger of the prescribed fine, Dem. 835. 14. Tadov. . 
ariudoas, having denied the honor of burial, Soph. Ant. 21. “Ov é6g@adyod 
drdwoer, whom he made blind of eye, a. 69. 

e. With words of number or quantity, the Gen. is often used to specify 
the class or kind: Kariény ddebpav, two quarts of flowr, i. 5. 6. Tddar- 
Tov apyuplov, ii. 2. 20. Boav ayérny, a herd of oxen, O. 323. 


447. GeNneRAL Remark. Great care is requisite in dis- 
tinguishing the various uses of the Genitive, inasmuch as, 


a.) The Gen. may have different uses in connection with the same 
word : as, with dxodw and xdvw (418, 432 a, 4344), déouas (414 0, 434 a), 
dfw (412, 436 c), wreovexréw (408, 424), aepirrds (406, 419 e), wdppw (405, 
420 a).— The use of the Gen. with substantives is especially various 
435). 

* A word may have two or more adjuncts in the Gen. expressing dif- 
ferent relations : as "AvdBaots (484 c), carddnyw (444 g), driulay (446 a). 


C. Tuer Dative OBJECTIVE. 


448. ‘THAT TOWARDS WHICH ANY THING TENDS 
may be resolved into (1.) That towards which any 
thing tends, as an OBJECT OF APPROACH ; and (II.) 
That towards which any thing tends, as an OBJECT OF 





| $450. oBsECTIVE. — OF APPROACH. — OF NEARNESS. 28$ 


INFLUENCE. Hence the Dative Objective is either 
(1.) the Dative or ApproACH, or (11.) the DATIVE 
OF INFLUENCE; and we have the following general 


INFLUENCE IS PUT IN THE DATIVE; 


or, in other words, since neither approach nor influence are 
revarded as direct action, 


An INDIRECT OBJECT IS PUT IN THE DATIVE. 


a. The Dat. of approach is commonly expressed in English by the prep- 
osition to, and the Dat. of influence, by the prepositions to and for ; 
both, in Latin, by the Dative. An imitation of 403 b would give to the 
rule this form : 


The Dative is used to express that TO or FOR 
which something is or is done. 


rule: 
Rute D. Tue Opsect or APPROACH OR OF 

b. The relations here denoted are, however, sometimes translated by 
other prepositions, especially by with ; and sometimes without a prepo- 
sition. 

c. The Dat. of approach may denote either person or thing ; the Dat. of 
influence oftener denotes person. - 

d. The DATIVE OBJECTIVE is the converse of the GENITIVE ; the Dat. 
of approach contrasting with the Gen. of departure, and the Dat. of in- 
Jluence with the Gen. of cause. See 397, 398, 403. 


I. DATIVE oF APPROACH. 


449. Approach, like its opposite, departure (404), may be 


either in place, in time, or in character. Hence, 
Rute XVII. Words of NEARNESS and LIKENESS 


govern the Dative. 


a. Words of likeness are related to those of nearness, in the same man- 
ner as words of cistinction are related to those of separation ; and near- 
ness, like separation, may be either literal or figurative (404 a). 

b. For the Gen. after some words of nearness and likeness, see 442, 445. 





(1.) Dative of Nearness. 


450. a. Words of nearness may imply either being near, 
coming near, or bringing near ; and to this class may be referred 
words of wnion and mixture, of companionship and intercourse, 
of meeting and following, of sending to and bringing to, &c.: as, 

Ilekdoot . . 77 eloddy, to approach the entrance, iv. 2. 38. Ow kepdcas 
airiy, having mixed it with wine, i. 2.18. “Enpovras tutv, they will fol- 
low you, iii. 1. 36. AvaSoyos Kredvipw, successor to C., vii. 2. 5. Telrav 
ok 7H EXAd&:, I dwell a neighbor to Greece, ii. 3.18 (cf. 442). ’Eopevero 

REV. GR. 13 8 


290 SYNTAX. R, XVII, XVIII. — DATIVE OF LIKENESS. § 450. 


. Epa Ticoadépver, marched in company with T., ii. 4. 9. "Aguxvobvrat € pa 
oa TELE PA, they come [together with the day] at daybreak, iv.i. 5. Kewo- 
vol Huty TOD Tonuxvion, sharers with us in the town (424), Pl. Rep. 370 d. 
*Amavra TQ Revopayre Hixveiéns, EL. meets X., vii. 8.1. Atdrogpdlkovto, 
came to him, i. 2. 4. Kpotow éoehOctv, to occur to [the mind of] C., Hdt. 
1. 86 (Venit mihi in mentem, Cic.). So rAnodfw, evyifw, to approach ; 
#xw come to, belong to, with xa6jkw, mpoojkw; plyvipe mingle, Cuiréw 
associite, kowwvéw, Kowdonat, meTexw, partake with, Eeviouar become a guest 
of, akodovbéw follow, diadéxouat succeed, KataddXdoow reconcile, cméveopar 
nake a treaty with ;: oixetos tutinate, axddovbos following, outhynriys associate ; 
Kowwvia participation, Siadoxy succession ; éeyyts, wédas, wAnolov, near, é&fs 
next to, ouod together with, &c.: and Lat. propinquo ; propinquus, proxi- 
mus, vicinus, finitimus ; proxime, obviam ; &c. Cf. 442a, 445. 

b. So words which become words of nearness thr ough their application : 
Kupy iévar, to go to C., i. 2. 26. Els Néyous airois . . HAVov, came to them 
[into] for conference, iii. 1. 29. Iltwrovros rédy, falling to the ground, 
Soph. El. 747. Tléprev avT@ dy yedov, sending a messenger to him, i. 3. 8. 
AGpa &yovres at7T@ vil. 3.16. Atr@rd xépas dpéEar, to reach him the horn, 
Ib. 29. TvuBw xéovea Asch. Ch. 87. IIpoxarkeooaro xdpun, he had 
challenged to the fight, H. 218. Cf. It eelo clamor, Virg.; Misi Curio, 
Cic. ; and see 405 ¢. 

c. Traffic is a species of intercourse : hence, Iécov rptopal oor 7a xo1- 
ptdra ; how can I trade with you for your pigs? Ar. Ach. 812 (431a). 
‘Ovicopat oot, I will buy of you, 1b. 815. 

d. A substantive is sometimes repeated in the Dat., with an ellipsis, to 
express succession : “ANd hévw Pdvos Oldumrdda Sdmov drecer, but slaughter 
upon slaughter [slaughter following slaughter] has destroyed the house of 
Cidipus, Hur. Ph. 1496. Mh rixrewo drav &rats Soph. El. 235. 


(2.) Dative of Likeness. 


451. a. Words of likeness include those of resemblance, 
assimilation, comparison, cdentity, equality, &c. : as, 

“Oporot ros dddoats, like the rest, vi. 6. 16. Prrosdpy bev Eorkas, you 
resemble a philosopher, vag Bae Bye dé beB fev ovK elkacrev, but me he 
did not liken to a god, Apol. 15. Td adqéeés ie Td avTd TH ArOlep eivat, 
he thought sincerity to be the same with folly, il. 6. 22. “Icous » + TOUTOLS 
aprOuoy, equal to these in number, Mag. Kq. ii. 3. “Os éuol pias eyéveT ex 
Barpos, who was born from [one mother with me] the same mother with 
mine, Eur. Ph. 151. So eidouar poet., to resemble, icdw equalize ; eupepys, 
Tporpepys, mapamAnotos, elkeXos, like, adeidds akin, mpoowdds according ; 
mapatAnolws, woatTws, in like manner; &c.: and Lat. assimilo, comparo, 
similis, equalis, par, &c. Idem facit occidenti, Hor. See 438 b, 442 a. 

b. Many derivatives or compounds of cv, duod, ouotos, and tvs, govern 
the Dat. by this rule. 


u. DATIVE oF INFLUENCE. 


452. The Dative of Influence expresses a person 
or thing which is affected by an action, property, 
&c., without being directly acted upon. 








9 454. DATIVE OF INFLUENCE: ADDRESS, ADVANTAGE, &c. 291 


Nore. Influence has every varicty and degree. On the one hand, it 
may be so immediate, that it can scarcely be distinguished from direct 
ection, and the Dat. expressing it is used interchangeably with the Acc.; 
and, on the other hand, it may be so remote, that it can scarcely be ap- 
preciated, and the Dat. expressing it might have been omitted without 
impairing the sense. 


Rute XVII. The opsect or INFLUENCE is put 
in the Dative. 
The Dative is governed, according to this rule, by, 


a.) Words of ADDRESS, including those of cad/ and command, 
of conversation and reply, of declaration and confession, of ex- 
hortation and message, of oath and promise, of reproach and 
threatening, Ke. : 


Obros Kiaw etrev, this man said to C.,1. 6.2. Knredpyw éBda, called 
out to C., 1. 8.12. Avadrexévres adAMAaLS, having conversed with each 
other, ii. 5. 42. “Adhynorat rovry, ri cor Grrexpivapyy, relate to this man 
what I answered you, vii. 2. 26. Avra pavtevtds, pointed out to him by 
oracle, vi. 1. 22. So éyw to say, Nadéw talk, Ppdgw tell, ederigw shout, 
Wiupifw whisper, kehedw command, dtaxehevoua exhort, dvaipéw respond, 
Knpvoow proclaim, ayyé\X\w announce, Cuvipe Swear, UTigxvéouwat pronise, 
évedifw reproach, ro:dopéouat rail at, wéudouat blame (see also h), dmecdéw 
threaten, amevrety forbid, aivéw assent ; mapaxédevors exhortation; &c.: and 
Lat. loquor, narro, jubeo, nuncio, exprobro, minor, &c. 


453. b.) Words of ADVANTAGE and DISADVANTAGE, includ- 
ing those of benefit and injury, of assistance and service, of favor 
and fidelity, of necessity and sufficiency, of fitness and unfitness, 
of convenience and trouble, of ease and difficulty, of safety and 
danger, &c. : 


Xpjcipsa. . ros Kpnol, useful to the Cretans, iii. 4.17. Kopelrtw éav- 
TQ, better to himself, iii. 1. 4. Keipdv éorw adr}, it is the worse for him, 
vii. 6. 4. “AvOpwrowcw Shedhpara, benefits to men, Asch. Pr. 501. iros 
apryewv, to succor friends, Cyr. 1. 5. 13. Ilaptcaris . . bripxe TH Kipy, 
P. favored C., i. 1. 4. “Ey run éumodév eius ; am I in the way [to] of 
any one? v. 7.10. TH HArrKia empere, it swited his age, i. 9. 6. "OQ. wor 2. 
54, Ot wo Eur. Hee. 192, "Id wx Ib. 181, Woe to me! Alas! (Hei mihi! 
Ve mihi! Jer.) So dAvoirehéw, cupdépw, wpedréw, to benefit, Nupaivouae 
injure, Bonbéw, émixoupéw, assist, Sovevw, trnperéw, serve, apKkéw suffice, 
apusttw fit, evoxréw trouble, rynwpéw avenge, yaptfoua gratify, det it ts 
necessary; ayabds good, xaxds evil, rpscgopos, broupyéss, serviceable, eduevys 
Javorable, misrdbs faithful, ixavds sufficient, éro.wos ready, xaderds difficult, 
acpadhs safe, émixivdvvos dangerous ; Bonbds helper, BojOera help, émixod- 
pnua protection; mperdvrws suitably ; &c.: and Lat. faveo, noceo, auxilior, 
servio, ministro ; utilis, fidus, facilis, difficilis, propitius, molestus, &c. 

Norr. The Dat. denoting a person or thing to whose advantage or 
disadvantage any thing is or is done, has been termed Dativus Commodi, 
or Jncommodi. 


454. c.) Words of appraRANce, including those of seeming, 
showing, clearness, obscurity, &e. : 


292 SYNTAX. R. XVIII, E.— DATIVE OF INFLUENCE. § 454, 





Ido. 8Hrov éyévero, it became evident to all, Hel. 6. 4. 20. “Adndov 
uev mavrt, obscure to every one, vi. 1. 21. "Hy kal rots dows davys oldcmrep 
éol Soxets eivat, if you appear to others such us you seem to me to be, Cyr. 
6. 4. 3. So dndr\dw, pavepdw, to manifest, deixvipn point out ; capys, pave- 
pis, evident, aparys tnvisible ; &c.: Lat. appareo, videor, ostendo, monstro ; 
manifestus, obsctirus, &c. 


d.) Words of CAUSE, DESTINY, OBLIGATION, and VALUE: 


"Ayaday airor arrows, aathors of good to each other (444 f), Cyr. 8. 5. 
24. Ilémpwrar col, tt is fated to you, Asch. Pr. 815. Tots orpariracs | 
adpethero pucbds, pay was due to the soldiers, 1. 2.11. Baodet dv roddod : 
Gaia yévowro (431 b), would be worth much to the king, ii. 1. 14. “A£vos 

- Oavdrou TH Toe, meriting death [to] from the city, Mem. 1.1. 1. “Lyi 
eloeTar Xapty, will recognize an oblig gation to you, 1. 4.15. So dmwéxemat 


to be reserved, mévw await, etuaprac it is allotted, &e.: Lat. destino, debeo, 
&e. 


e.) Words of civine, including those of granting, offering, 
paying, distributing, supplying, &e. : 


ABopt co. euaurdv, IT give myself to you, Cyr. 4. 6. 2. Avaveipar ToIs 
otparyyots, to distribute to the generals, vii. 5. 2. Eizrep éuol éréXer Te 
LevOns, if S. paid me anything, vii. 6. 16. Owpaxes adrots érropteOnoav, 
breastplates were furnished them, iii. 3. 20. Oceots dwojuara, gifts to the 
gods, Ar. Nub. 305. So dwpéouac to give, mapéxw, mpocpépw, offer, tivw 
pay, peptfw distribute; dbors gift, dornp giver, uobo0ddrns paymaster ; &e.: 
Lat. do, tribuo, largior, offero, solvo, divido, &e. 


455. f.) Words of opposition, including those of contention, 
dispute, enmity, resistance, rivalry, warfare, &e. : 


Ady byiv dvrirdtar, to oppose to you famine, ii. 5. 19. "Epltovrd. ot 
mepl copias, contending with him in skill, i. 2. 8. Tlad\dde 7 Epwv, a dis- 
pute with P., Kur. Iph. A. 183. * Ayrton i iévat Tots Trodemsous, to go against 
the enemy, i. 8.17. Tdpavvos das éxOpds Edevdepia Kal viuo:s évayrlos, 
every tyrant is a foe to freedom, and an enemy to laws, Dem. 72. 2. Ovdeis 
atT@ euaxeto, no one fought with him, i. 8. 23. "EmBovhi} éuol, a plot 
against me, Vv. 6. 29. So é€vavyridouar to oppose, amravrdw encounter, avOi- 
oTapat, thioraua, withstand, dupiuBynréw, dvruroréoma (430 a), dispute, 
oracia¢w rebel, roreuéw make war, dicdgouat go to law, worifoua, justle ; 
avrimopos opposite, dddé6rpios averse, wodéusos hostile; dvriroyla dispute ; 
&c.: Lat. adversor, obsto, resisto, dissentio ; contrarius, inimicus ; &e. 


g.) Words of YIELDING, SUBJECTION, and WORSHIP, including 
those of homage, obedience (cf. 432 g), prayer, sacrifice, &e. : 


IIdvra rots Beots Yroya, all things are subject to the gods, ii. 5. 7. *Epot 
od Oédere mrelOer Bar, you are not willing to obey me, i. 8. 6. “Edy mot we- 
abate, if you will listen. to mé, i. 4.14. EtyeoOar rots . . Oeots, to pray 
to the gods, iv. 3. 138. "“H@ve r@ Ad, sacrificed to Jupiter, vii. 6. 44. 
"Opxynodpevor Geotcw Ar. Lys. 1277. So etkw, wapaxwpéw, troxwpéw, bpl- 
eval, to yield, submit, weBapyéw, vraxovw, obey, drevOéw, driaréw, disobey, 
dpdoua pray, opayidfoua sacrifice ; baroxelpios subject, bwijKxoos obedient ; 
Ovaia sacrifice ; &c.: Lat. cedo, obedio, pareo, supplico, sacrifico, &e. ** To 
whom ye obey,” Lom. 6. 16. 


§ 459. — OF AGENT, POSSESSOR, &C. 293 


456. h. Words expressing a MENTAL ACT or FEELING, 
which is regarded as going out towards an object ; as those of 
friendship and hatred, pleasure and displeasure, joy and sorrow, 
contentment and envy, belief and unbelief, trust and distrust, &e. 
Thus, 


Kiow didalrepov, more friendly to C.,i. 9. 29. Tovros Ho8n Kopos, 
C. was pleased with these, i. 9. 26. “Qu éuol xaderratvere, for which you 
are angry with me (429 a), vii. 6. 32. Kalpes .. Piros ayahors, you 
delight in good friends, Mem. 2. 6. 35. Lrépyev rots rapotow, to be con- 
tent with things present, Isoc. 159e. ’Earlortevov yap atr@, for they trusted 
him, i. 2.2. ‘Huiv amorrety, to distrust us, ii. 5.15. Ty roxy eXttloas, 
hoping in fortune, Th. 3. 97. So dyamdw to be content, dyavaxréw, dx Go- 
pat, be displeased, dpytfoua be angry, dOupéw, xarerds pépw, be dejected, 
dmropéw be at a loss, wetOouar believe, trust, svyyryveokw forgive, Pbovew 
envy, grudge, Oavudtw wonder (432f); evvous, kakivous, well-, ill-disposed ; 
etvoix@s, with good-will; &c.: Lat. credo, fido, ignosco, irascor, succenseo ; 
amicus, benevolus; &c. See 466 a. 


457. i.) Words expressing the acT or POWER OF EXCITING 
EMOTION : as pleasure, displeasure, care, fear, &c. : 


*Apéoxew wuiv, to please you, Cyr. 3. 3. 89. “ArmexPaver Gar rors orpa- 
Tiubrais, to displease the soldiers, ii. 6.19. “Euol pednoe, i shall be [a 
care to me] my care, i. 4. 16. “QO didrraroy péeAnpa dwuaow, O dearest care 
to the house, (isch. Ch. 235. Merapédre por, tt is a regret to me, I repent, 
Cyr. 5. 3. 6. See 432d. So dvidvw please ; 750s pleasant, Aumnpos griev- 
ous, poBepds frightful; &c.: Lat. placeo, displiceo ; jucundus, tristis, 
odidsus ; &c. 


458. j.) VERBAL ADJECTIVES in -rés and -réos. With these 
the Dat. is used to express relation to an agent (for which, in 
Eng., to or for can be used, though other forms of expression 
are frequent) : 


Oavpacrdv ras, wonderful to all, iv. 2.15. “Iva poe ebrpaxtdérepov 7, 
that ut nay be more practicable for me, or easier for me to effect, ii. 3. 20. 
Tots otkor {nAwrdv, [enviable to] an object of envy to those at home, i. 7. 4. 
Tlorayds . . quiv éore SiaBaréos, there is a river for us to cross [to be crossed 
by us], ii. 4.6. “Hy .. rdvra wowntia, everything [is for us to do] 
should be done by us, iii. 1. 35. ?Oednréa cou 7 wddus Coriv Mem. 3. 6. 3. 
Cf. Lat. Dat. with Verbals in -bilis and -dus. 

Norte. So rarely other verbals: Totor dvorvyotow edxrala beds, a god- 
dess to be invoked by the wretched, Kur. Or. 214. ‘Odds tropedorpos avOpu- 
mos, ‘passable by men,” Cyr. 7. 5. 16. 


459. k.) Susstantive Verps implying possesszon (in forms 
of expression which may be variously translated). 


Rute E. Substantive Verbs take a Dative of the Possessor : 


*Evraida Kipw Bacirera tv, here [there was a palace to C.] C. had a pal- 
ace,i. 2.7. Tots dé provia wer tv, they had a suspicion, or they suspected, 
i. 3.21. ‘Yadpye yap viv juiv ovdédv, we have now nothing, ii. 2. 11. 
"Avan 4 wou[se. €or], I am now compelled, i. 3.5. dds. . 7 dvoua 
Lurrdkn, a city [to which there was the name] named S., ii. 4. 138.  Apé- 


294 SYNTAX. R. XVIIl.— DATIVE OF INFLUENCE. § 409. 


fos éyéveTo Trois crpatiwrais, [to the soldiers there came to be a running] 
the soldiers began to run, i. 2.17. “Koti dvOperw . . Brérew, [it is toa 
man to look] @ man can look, Symp. 4. 58. “Hyévero xa) “EAAju Kal 
BapBdpw .. mopevecOat, both Greek and barbarian could go, i. 9.13. Nov 
oo tear .. dvdpl yevéoOar, ‘it is in your power,’ vii. 1. 21. Ovdevds 
quity perety ili. 1. 20 (see 421). Tk yap éor’ “Kpexfet kal kodouo's ; what 
has H. to do with jackdaws [what belongs to E., and also to jackdaws] ? 
Ar. Eq. 1022. Té €uol cal cot; Jn. 2. 4. Cf. Lat. Dat. with est and deest. 

Nore. The relation is sometimes defined by a participle or adjective 
of mental state, joined with the Dat.: “Exetvw BovAopév trait cori, these 
things are [to him willing] according to his will, or agreeable to him, Hel. 
4.1. 11. Hi co. mSopévw éoriv, if it is your pleaswre, Pl. Phedo 78 b. 
“Hy 6€ od TO’Aynoirdy aX0opnévw Taira, ‘displeasing to A.,’ Hel. 5. 3. 13. 
Nixig mpoodexopéve jv, were as N. had expected, Th. 6. 46. °“Ewol 6é kev 


dopéve ein, wt would be to my joy, &. 108. Quibus bellum volentibus 
erat, Tac. 


460. 1.) And, in general, words expressing any action, 
property, &c., which is represented as being to or for some 
person or thing: 


‘IIporivw oo, I drink to you, vii. 3. 26. Kevorddiov airots érotncar, 
they made for them a cenotaph, vi. 4.9. Méytorov xdcpov dvdpt, the yreat- 
est ornament to a man, 1. 9. 23. “Opa hv damrcévar Tots rodeutors, it was time 
Sor the enemy to withdraw, iii. 4. 34. “Eyw cwrd rede; I be silent for 
this fellow? Ar. Ran. 1134. Zrpdrevua air@ cuvehéyero i. 1. 9. Idee 
kowdv, common to all, ili. 1. 48. Aocrdv por elretv, left for me to say, iii. 
2.29. Ilarp@a dpiv oixia Pl. Charm. 157 e. ‘Iudria rH yuvackt, garments 
for his wife, vii. 3. 27. “H dé [se. 655s ru] dtaBdvre Tov worapéy ili. 5. 15. 


Kaxas éyw yuvatcas vidot orvy® Soph. Ant. 571. Avan te ppevav xepoiv 


te movos Kur. Hipp. 189. 


461. m. A Dative or THE AGENT is sometimes joined with 


passive verbs, chiefly with the Perfect and Pluperfect : 


Ildv0’ qpty metoinrat, all things have been done by us, i. 8.12. El dé re 
kahov . . erérpaxto bpiv, if any honor had been gained by you, vil. 6. 32. 
Tad rupa Kexavuéva-eln TH DebOy vii. 2. 18. Tots “HAAnot pucotvro, would 
be hated by the Greeks [hateful to them], Th. 3. 64. Tots dé Kepxvpatots 

. ox EwpGvro Th. 1. 51. Carmina scripta mihi sunt, Ov.; Neque cer- 
nitur wlli, Virg. 

Notr. This use seems to have come chiefly from the possessive use of 
the Dat. (459). Thus, ro676 woe yéyparrat, hoc mihi est scriptum, [this is 


to me written, I have this written] I have written this, or this has been 


written by me. So the possessive has passed into the active idea, in the 
use of the auxiliary in our own and in other languages: J have it written, 
I have written it (Germ. Ich habe geschrieben, Fr. J'ai écrit, &c.). 


462. Remarks. 1. The remoter relations expressed by 
the Dat. (452 Nn.) are various, having respect to place, time, 
sensation, thought, feeling, expression, action, &c. They may be 
expressed (a) directly by a substantive in the Dat., with which 
(b) a participle is often joined ; (c) by the participle with its 


subject omitted ; or (d) by an elliptical form of construction, 


in which the Dat. is preceded by as, as: 


~ 


—6§ 464. REMOTER RELATIONS. 295 


Tlédus év bef éomd€ovtt [sc. Twi or col], a city on the right to one sau- 
ing in, or as you sail in, Th. 1. 24 (cf. vi. 4. 1). “Hy 8 fuap Hin devrepov 
mwréovri por, zt was now the second day of my voyage [to me sailing], Soph. 
Ph. 354. Tis xpévos rote’ éoriv obtehndrvOus ; ‘since this event,’ Soph. 
O. T. 735. Td nev Ewer &arropévw cOua ov diryav Oeppov jv, ‘to the ex- 
ternal touch,’ Th. 2. 49. Ef yevvaios, as idvre (sc. paiver}, ‘as you ap- 
year to one beholding,’ ‘in appearance,’ Soph. O. C. 75. Kairor g eye 
Tiunoa Tots hpovotery ef, ‘ [for] in the judgment of the wise,’ Soph. Ant. 
904. Kpéwv yap Fv fn\wrds, ws epol [sc. éddxec], ‘as it seemed to me,’ ‘in 
my opinion,’ Ib. 1161. To wer oby voonua, mo\ha Kal GAXa TapadvrdyTe 
. ., To00rov Fv, ‘[to one omitting] to omit,’ Th. 2. 51. Oceds yap exowser 
pe, TOSe 5° ofxouat, ‘so far as lay in him,’ Soph. Aj. 1128. Maxpay yap, 
is yépovtt, mpovorddys 665y, ‘for an old man [as journeys are to an old 
man],’ Id. O. C. 20. . 

e. The Dat. is termed ETHICAL, when it is introduced, not as an essen- 
tial part of the sentence, but to render it more emphatic or subjective, by 
referring to some one as interested (76cxés, relating to the state of mind). 
The pronouns of the 1st and 2d Pers. are especially so used: Méuvnod pot, 
undérore dvaudvey, remember [for me], J pray you, never to defer, Cyr. 1. 
6.10. Nowe? dé por mpdras orédos, the whole nation is sick {for me], alas ! 
Soph. O. T. 170. Otuat wou. . wxqoew, L think {I shall excel for you] 
you will find me excelling, Cyr. 1. 3.15. Ti oor wabhoopar; what shall 
I learn for you? Ar. Nub. 111. Cf. Quid mihi Celsus agit, Hor. ; At ¢ibi 
venit ad me, Cic.; Quid sibi vult ? Id.: ‘“‘ He steps me to her trencher,” 
“‘ Here’s a skull now hath lain yow i’ the earth,” Shaks. 

f. The use of the Dat. with a participle in defining time especially pre- 
vails in Hdt.: Qvopévo of . . 6 HArLos duavpwOn, while he was sacrificing, the 
sun was eclipsed, Hdt. 9.10. Molpr otikw jv érea elvaxoora TETENEVTHKOTL, 
M. had not yet been dead 90 years, 1b. 2. 18. 


463. 2. Words governing the Gen. sometimes take a Dat. 
in its stead, to express the exertion of an influence : 


*‘Hyetro 5’ avrois 6 kwudpxns, and the bailiff led the way for them, 1. e. 
guided them, iv. 6. 2. ’"Eotparhyqore Aakedaipmoviows és OeccaNinv, he led 
the L. into T'., Hdt. 6. 72. Tadiowr. . avaroa, I am lord [to] of the T., 
a. 181. Aapdv yap ovx Hoke Oeois, he will not long rule the gods, Aisch. 
Pr. 940. Ti tipavvov avOpwros wsvyv, the only sovereign [to] over men, 
Eur. Hee. 816. Totow adetdero vicriunov juap, he took away [for] from 
them the day of return, a. 9. Omar. . S€xro déras, she accepted a cup 
[for] from Themis, O. 87. Hipyev rexotoy pqrpt wohéusoy ddpv Asch. Th. 
A16. Tlédhevyev Amis rGvdé por, ‘has fled [for] from me,’ Eur. Heracl. 
452. Ta dxpa huiv. . mpoxatadapBavey i. 3. 16. Tupdvvors éxrrodav 
peOicraco Kur. Ph. 40. Oi yap Bd€rovres Trois rupdois Hyodpeba Ar. Pl. 
15. Nec mihi te eripient, Ov. Cf. 405, 407, 472 b. 


464. 3. A Dat. depending upon a verb is often used instead 
of a Gen. depending upon a substantive : 


OL. . trot abrots Sédevrau, the horses are tied for them, = ot trot av- 
tov dédevra, their horses are tied, iii. 4. 35. Tots BapBapots trav re mesa 
dméBavov roddoi, [for] of the barbarians, many of the foot were slain, iil. 4. 
5. ‘H.. rod ravrds apy Xeprodhw evraida xaredvOy vi. 2. 12 (cf. “H re 
Xeprodhov apy roO wavrds karehvOy vi. 3.1). ’Emevdy avdrots of BdpBapot 
éx ris xwpas arjAdov Th. 1. 89. Cui corpus porrigitur, Virg. — Some 
explain in this way constructions which seem better referred to 395 b. 


296 SYNTAX. R. F., XIX. — DATIVE RESIDUAL. § 464. 


a. The Dat. for the Gen. is sometimes joined directly with a substan- 
tive, chiefly the Dat. of a personal pronoun : Oi 6é ode Bées . . ob rapeyi- 
vovro, {the oxen for them] their oxen did not come, Hdt. 1. 31. To dé ot 
ovvowa eivar, ‘her name,’ Ib. 1. Ta 6é por rabjuara lb. 207. — This 
usage, found esp. in Hdt., appears to have resulted from the preceding, 
and often differs from it simply in the order of the words. See also b. 

b. A Dat. is sometimes joined with a substantive, where the sense is 
more fully expressed by supplying a participle or adjective : Tovds tmep- 
Bavre Aiuoy Téras, the Getw [presenting themselves to one that has crossed 
the H.] beyond the Haemus, Th. 2. 96. “AwéBrere . . mpds Thy véay hpiv 
modu, look upon the new state [planned] for us, Pl. Rep. 431 b. 

c. Except as above, substantives governing the Dat. are commonly 
derived from verbs or adjectives so construed. This use of the Dat. often 
distinguishes the relations of different persons or things, or otherwise gives 
clearness or emphasis (4385 b): “Emlt caradovAdoe: T&y ‘EdAjvov ’ASyvatots, 
for the subjection of the Greeks to the A., Th. 3.10. Tots dtrous Bo7jPecar, 
assistance To friends, Pl. Ale. 116a, Ilept gidlas rots *A@nvators Th. 5. 5. 
Traditio alicujus rei alteri, Cie, 


D. THe Dative RESIDUAL. 


465. The Dative Residual is used in expressing 
adjuncts, which are not viewed as either saljective 
or objective (397s). It simply denotes mdirect rela- 
tion, without specifying the character of that rela- 
tion; or, in other words, it denotes mere association 
or connection. Hence we have the general rule: 


Rute F. An ATTENDANT THING OR CIRCUM- 
STANCE, SIMPLY VIEWED AS SUCH, IS PUT IN THE 
DATIVE. 


a. In accordance with this rule, the Dat. is sometimes used in express- 
ing an adjunct, which, upon a more exact discrimination of its character, 
would be expressed either by the Gen. or Acc. (399a, f). 

b. The Dative Resipuau is commonly expressed in Lat. by the 4dla- 
tive ; in Eng. most frequently by the preposition with, but likewise by the 
prepositions at, in, by, through, &e. Cf. 403 a, 448 a. 

c. The Dative Residual may be resolved into (1.) the In- 
STRUMENTAL and Mopau Dative, and (u.) the TEMPoRAL and 
Loca Dative. 


1. INSTRUMENTAL AND Mopatu Dative. 


466. Rute XIX. The MEANS and MODE are 
put in the Dative. 


INSTRUMENTALITY and MopE may be either external or internat, and 
MODE may apply either to action or condition. Hence, to these heads may 
be referred, 





§ 468. INSTRUMENTAL AND MODAL. 297 


1.) The instrument, force, or other means, with which any 
thing is done, or through which it comes to pass : 


*"Axovrifer Tis Tadt@, one shoots with a dart, i. 8. 27. Dyedlars diaBai- 
vovres, crossing with rafts, i. 5.10. ‘Qrdiopévor Odpak., armed with breast- 
plates, i. 8.6. Kuwyjoes rp copart, movements with the body, Pl. Leg. 
631c. Adpots ériua, honored with gifts, i. 9.14. “Eqetrovro . . trrma, 
pursued with cavalry, vii. 6. 29. Oavarw (nuodr, to punish with death, 
Cyr. 6. 3. 27. ’Arofvyrxet vdow, dies through disease, vii. 2. 32. HKivola 
éropévous, following through good-will, ii. 6.13. T@ wo dovpard 7 éort, 
through which, 380] wherefore I have spears, N. 264. IapedOetv ovk hv 

ta, it was impossible to pass by force, i. 4. 4. ‘Térw & erva, let it rain 
with] pea-sowp, Nicoph. 13 (cf. Lacte pluisse, Liv.; Let the sky rain po- 
tatoes, Falstaff). See Cyr. 4. 3.18. Fame confecti, Cic. 

a. MEANS and CAUSE, to some extent, cover the same ground. Hence 
some of the examples above, and others like them, might be referred to a 
DATIVE oF CAusE (for which the Gen. could be used, 465a). Some 
refer to this head some of the constructions in 456. 

b. Xpaopar, to wse [to supply one’s need with, 50], takes the Dat. 
(originally of means): TQ dw cite xpjoera, he will use meat as bread 
(394 b), Mem. 3. 14. 4. “Expijro trois Eévous, ‘employed,’ i. 3.18. Tots 
Urtros dpicra xpjoOa, ‘manage,’i. 9.5. Xeapove xpnoduevoy, having met 
with a storm, Dem. 293. 3. Cf. Lat. Abl. with ator, ab-utor. (c) So the 
compounds dzo-xpdoua, &c.; and sometimes vopl{w, after the analogy of 
xpdouar: Povy. . voulfovor, use the language, Hdt. 4.117. Ovolars.. 
voulfovres, observing sacrifices, Th. 2. 38. HvoeBelqa . . eviurfov Id. 3. 82. 


467. 2.) a. The way or manner, in which any thing is done 
or affected, together with attendant circumstances; and also (b) 
the respect in which any thing is taken or applied : 


(a) Ob yap Kpavyy, a\d\a otyy .. mpoonecav, they advanced not with 
clamor, but in silence, i. 8.11. “Qoep dpyy exédeuvce, he commanded, as 
in anger, i. 5. 8. “Edatvwv . . potvtt to tre, riding with his horse in 
@ sweat, i. 8.1. Totrw rp tpdtrw eropevdycar, in this manner they marched, 
iii. 4. 23. Tlopevdyevor . . ry 080, ‘by the route,’ Ib. 30. Apope bet 
i, 8.18. Tas Bla rpdgecs Pl. Pol. 280d. Iérero mvougs dvéuoro M. 207. 
For adverbial datives of manner, see 380c. Aqua mente pati, Ov.; recta, 
cito, repente. 

(b) ASa ye Hudy NecpOevres, inferior to us in [respect to] number 
(406 b). TH hwvy rpaxvs, rough in voice, ii. 6.9. lds. . OdWaxos 
évépart, ‘by name,’ i. 4.11. TH émipedela mepretvar i. 9. 24. “Evi dé 
pivy mpoéxovor oi immets, ‘in one respect,’ iii. 2. 19. ‘Pliny pév uédav eoxe 
k. 304. Pietate filius, consiliis parens, Cic. 

e. The pronoun atrds is sometimes joined to the dative of an associated 
object to give emphasis ; and the preposition otv, which is otherwise com- 
mon with such adjuncts, is then usually omitted : My quads atrats rais 
Tpinpert karadvcy, lest he should sink us, triremes and all [with the tri- 
remes themselves], i. 3. 17. Tpcjpers abrots tmANnpdpacr duepOdpnoar, 
‘with the crews themselves,’ Isoc. 176 b. Cf. &. 498 and Y. 482. 


468. 3.) The measure of difference, especially with the 
Comparative : 


*Eviaut@ mpecBurepos, older by a year, Ar. Ran. 18. IIéAt Aoyluw 
‘Eddas yéyove dobeverrépn, Greece has become weaker by an illustrious city, 
REV. GR. 13* 


298 SYNTAX. R. XX., XXI,.— DAT. OF TIME, &O. § 468. 


Hdt. 6. 106. Aéka éreow mpd rijs ev Ladaptnu vavuaxtas, ‘[by] ten years 
before, Pl. Leg. 698c. Xpévm uerére:ta ro\A@ Hdt. 2.110. So often a 
neut. adjective (uaxp@ by far, odtyw by little, &c.) : OF woAA@ Se Uorepor, 
not [later by much] long after, li. 5. 32. “Oow dé waddov risTevo, TorotTw 
LadXov atrop&, [by how much] the more I believe, [by so much] the more I 
am at @ loss, Pl. Rep. 368 b. Seei. 5. 9. Minor anno, Hor. ; Superat 
capite, Virg.; Eo magis, Cie. 


1. TemMPporRAL AND Locat DaAtTIve. 


469. Rute XX. The TIME and PLACE 4AT WHICH 
are put in the Dative (cf. 433, 482): as, 


a. TIME (in prose, chiefly in stating some day, night, month, season, 
year, or festival, as the time at which an event occurred) : TH rpwrn dé 
Hpépa adixovro, the first day, they came, iv. 8.1. Ty torepata otk epavn- 
cay ot rohéutot, ovde TH TPiTy- TH Oe TeTAPTH, vUKTOs mpoceNOdrTeEs, the next 
day the enemy did not appear, nor the third, but on the fourth, having ap- 
proached in the night (433), iii. 4. 87. TQS’ emidvre Era, @ Hv ’Odvureas, 
q 70 ordd.ov évixa Kpoxivas, the following year, in which was the Olympic 
at which C. won the foot-race, Hel. 2. 3. 1. TH ércotvon vu«rl, Tpirw pyvt, 
TO 8 atrd xpdve, Xpdvw rorég, Ib. 2. 1. 22; 1. 4. 21, 2.18; 4.1. 34. 
“Opa érovs Th. 2. 52. Nuxrds &épory@ O. 324. Die quinto decessit, Nep. 

b. PLACE (in prose, chiefly in adverbs of place which are properly da- 
tives, 380c; and in stating some town or Attic deme, as the place at which 
an event occurred) : rav’rvy and r7d¢e [sc. xwWpa] in this region, here, iv. 5. 
36, vii. 2. 13; qrep where, ii. 2. 21; KiKAw in a circuit, around, 1. 5. 4; 
oiko at home, i. 1.10. Ta rpdmaa ra re Mapabove cal Daraptve cal 
ITAaratais, the victories at M. and S. and P., Pl. Menex. 245a. Ovparor 
keyuevov, Lying at the door, Soph. O. C. 401. Lots érav crGow radors, ‘at 
thy tomb,’ Ib. 411. Keiywevov wéSm AiyioOov Eur. El. 763. Mipver aypo 
A. 188. Hide puy@ I. 663. “BdAabs ofkia vaiwy I. 595. Leds fywevos Ov- 
Atpro VY. 388. Ai®épr vaiwy B. 412. Natus Tibure, Hor. 

c. This Dat., while a¢ expresses its general idea, is often translated by 
in, on, &c.; or without a preposition. 

d. To the LocAL DATIVE may be referred the use of the Dat., chiefly 
poetic, to denote persons among whom, or in whom any thing occurs: Ad- 
vauw avOpatrors exe, to have power among men, Kur. Bac. 310. “Apumpe- 
wéa Tpwerow, distinguished among the T., Z. 477. Ovdx dv e&evpors enor 
duaprias dvedos, ‘in me,’ Soph. O. C. 966. Ola cal “Opnpe Acoujdns dé- 
yet, ‘in Homer,’ Pl. Rep. 389 e. 

e. In some expressions, the idea of time or place seems to blend with 
that of means or mode: Bufdvriov yap éXav TH rporépa Tapovela, having 
taken B. at (or by) his previous coming, Th. 1. 128. *Kxelvy rp eo Bory ov 
kataBivat Id, 2,20. evxea. . Exwv @poroiy, P. 472. 


E. Tae Accusative. 


470. The local idea upon which the uses of 
the Accusative are based (398), appears to be the 
idea of that into which an action goes. 


§ 172. ACCUSATIVE OF DIRECT OBJECT, &C. 299 


a. Locally viewed, as the Gen. is the Whence-Case, the Vat. Residuat 
the Where-Case, and the Dat. Objective the Whither-Case, so the Acc. is 
the Whereinto-Case (10). 

b. Under the local form of conception, an action 1s conceived of as 
going towards or to an indvrect olject, but into a direct object ; or, in famil- 
lar grammatical language, this is regarded as the recetver of the action. 
(c) In another view, the action passes into its effect. (d) It goes, ina 
special sense, into the part affected. And (e), in going through an object, 
it necessarily goes into successive parts. Hence, 


471. Upon this general idea, are based (1.) the Accusative 
of Durect Object, (u.) the Acc. of Hifect, (1.) the Ace. of 
Specification (specifying the particular part, property, dc. affect- 
ed), and (tv.) the Acc. of Hatent (denoting the space, tume, &e. 
through which anything extends). (v.) In some uses, which 
may be referred to these heads or to its generic office (472 a), 
the Acc. has been termed Adverbial. 


a. The uses of the Acc., to some extent, blend with each other (as 1. 
and II.), or with the uses of other cases. The ideas of to and inio espe- 
cially blend, since if an action goes fully to an object, it usually passes 
into it by its effect. (b) For the Acc. as absolute, or the subject of the [n- 
Jinitive and Verbal in -réov, see “* Use of the Modes.” 


1, 1. Accusative or Direct Opsect AND EFFEct. 


472. Rute XXI. The prrecr opsect and the 
EFFECT of an action are put in the Accusative: as, 


AaBdv Tircadhépynv, taking T., 1.1.2. Hiphynv rojou, to make 
peace, Ages. 1. 7. “Lwwmreve redevthv, i. 1. 1. “O 5& Kipos taodaBaw 
Tovs devyovTas, cvlA\dfas oTparevpa erodcspxec Midyrov Ib. 7. 

a. The term action is here used to denote that which is signified by a 
verb ; since the verb, from its prevalent use, is grammatically regarded 
and treated as the word of action (cf. 435 a). And as the direct is more 
generic than the indirect, it results that 


(Rute G.) An adjunct simply considered as modifying a verb 
is put in the Accusative. Hence, 


b. Many verbs may take the Acc. as the generic case, which, according 
to preceding rules, govern the Gen. or Dat. as more specific cases : TIpo- 
€xovery of immeis nuds, the cavairy surpass us (406), iii. 2.19. Karfipye 
hiyor, beyan a discourse (425), Pl. Euthyd. 283 b. MeraSotev avrois rv- 
povs (424), iv. 5. 5 (cf. 6). Zé ainbéoOar, to perceive you (432), ii. 5. 4. 
Pidous apedeiv, to benefit friends (453), Cyr. 1. 4. 25. “Edy te évoxAQ Tuas, 
uf anything troubles us (453), Mem. 3. 8. 2. “Exropa ete, spake to H. 
(452 a), M. 60. Xalpw dé o’ edrvyoivra (456), Eur. Rh. 390. See e. 

c. The same principle applies to circumstantial adjuncts (485 e). (d) 
This generic use of the Acc. is far more frequent in respect to things than 
persons, since the relations of the former are less varied and require less 
eareful discrimination. For like reason, and also to distinguish the gen- 
der (181. 1), it is most frequent of all in the neuter adjective used sub- 
stantively (478 a, 483). (e) It is sometimes chosen for distinction from 


300 SYNTAX, R, XXI, — ACCUSATIVE. § 472. 


a Gen. or Dat. modifying the same verb: as cov @avudgw (432 f), but rov- 
Tou o€ Oauudgw (429 a\, or Todrd cov Caupdgw (443 b). 

f. As many Greek verbs govern the Gen. or Dat. while the correspond- 
ing verls in King. govern the Objective case ; so many verbs governing the - 
Acc. in Greek are translated into Eng. with a preposition : “Opvupr Geods 
kal deds, I swear by gods and goddesses, vi. 6. 17. “Huds. . 8 mov, 
doing well by wus, ii. 3. 23. ‘O 6é ciydos Sbvarar érrd dBodods, the siglus 
as equivalent to seven oboli, i. 5. 6. Mayas Cagpetre, you have no fear of 
battles, iii. 2. 20. PvAatrrépevov. . Nuads, guarding against us, ii. 5. 3. 
Po Bov Xopevov, dancing in honor of Phwbus, Pind. 1. 1. 8. So alcxdvouar 
to be ashamed of or before, drodtépackw run away from, pevyw fice from, 
ervopxéw swear falsely by, wévw wait for, rréw sail over, &c. See b, g. 

g. With verbs of motion, the place where it ends is commonly expressed 
with a preposition ; but sometimes, chiefly in the poets, as a direct ob- 
ject : “Adigerar témov bAGSy, will come to a woody spot, Ven. 10. 6. Ze 
réwpat pass, to send you into the light, Eur. Ale. 456. Kyion 6’ otpavoy 
fixe, the savor ascended to heaven, A. 317. “EBay véas y. 162. Adpovs 
oreixew Soph. O. C. 643. Llvpyous yijis ErXevoe Eur. Med. 7. “Hs té- 
Aos wodivras Ib. 920. Kexdjaro [sc. e@etv] BovAnv K. 195. Cf. Romam 
redit, Liv.; Ite domum, Virg. (h) This construction applies less frequently 
to persons: Mvyorijpas adixero, came to the suitors, a. 332. Ttva xpew 
. . txers to whom does the need cone? B. 28 (so with yiyvera, as = tke, 3. 
634). See 450 b. 

i. The poets sometimes even join an Acc. of the place with verbs of 
standing, sitting, or lying (as implying occupation): “Eornke mérpar, 
stands on a rock, Kur. Sup. 987. Tpimroda xa8l{av PorBos Ib. 956. Toop 

. dvrwa ketrat Soph. Ph. 144. Cf. “* He sits a horse well.” 

j. This rule primarily applies only to the adjuncts of verbs (a). Verbal 
adjectives and nowns, however, sometimes take the Acc. by virtue of the 
included verb: Zé. . Hv—wos, able to escape you, Soph. Ant. 788 ; ef. "H 
un pbyw ce; Id. El. 1503. Takers. . olpwyav . .’Ayauéuvova, you pine 
with wailing for [bewailing] 4., Ib. 123. Td re peréwpa hpovtirrhs, @ 
student of the heavens, Pl. Apol. 18 b; cf. Tov perewpwv ppovricrys Symp. 
6. 6. "Hfdpvw civar ra cpwrwueva, ‘to deny,’ Pl. Charm. 158¢. Xoas 
mpotropmrds Asch. Ch. 23. See also 477 a. 

k. A specification with \éyw is sometimes its direct object, and some- 
times follows the preceding construction : Ipocéxpovea avOpmmrw rovnpg 
.., Avipotlova r\eyw, Thad a quarrel with a bad nan, Imean A., Dem. 
701. 24 (or "Av8periov \eyw, with A., I mean). 

1. The Greek and the Latin use of the cases with verbs have (a) striking 
analogies, but also (8) marked differences : (a) as in the double construc- 
tion of dwpéowar and dono (and also our present) : SwpetcPar trmov Kips, 
donare equum Cyro, to present a horse to Cyrus ; or dwpetcOar Kopov irre, 
donare Cyrum equo, to present Cyrus with a horse.  epi8addXw and eir- 
cumdo, to surround, have a similar double eunstruction. (B) ‘pas . . 
(eS, vestri misereor, Pl. Conv. 173 ¢. Oivou yever@ar (432), vinum gus- 
tare. Ilei@ovres av@pwovs, persuadentes hominibus, Cyr. 1. 5. 9. Pirors 
dpyyew (453), amicos juvare. 

473. a. Causatives govern the Acc., together with the 
case of the included verb: as, 

Mi v dvapvyneys Kacey, do not remind me of [cause me to remember| 
my woes (432c), Kur. Ale. 1045. Tada tuads érdrioa, I have made you 


drink milk, 1 Cor. 3. 2. "Avapvarew yap buds kal rods. . xwdtvous (472 b) 
iil. 2. 11. Tovds ratdas . . yevorréov aiwaros (432 a) Pl. Rep. 537 a. 








" » sas ‘ 


g 476. OF DIRECT OBJECT AND EFFECT. 301 


b. The verbs Set and yp4 are sometimes construed by the poets as 
causatives: Xé det Upounbews, you have need of [it needs you of | a Pro- 
metheus, Aisch. Pr. 86 (414b). Ti yap pw eee ratdwy; Eur. Suppl. 789 
(cf. Bot re yap maidwy ri det Id. Med. 565, § 453). Zeyp. . aldods, you 
have need of modesty, y. 14., So xpew éorac (as if a Fut. of xp7, 475 b) 
@, 322. Cf. the construction of the Lat. miseret, poenitet, pudet, &c. 


47%. Arrraction. a. A word which is properly construed other- 
wise, sometimes becomes the direct object of a verb by attraction, espe- 
cially in the poets. This sometimes results in hypallage (an interchange 
of construction) : Ei dé w @& det Adyous E£Apyes [= por Noyous or Adywr], 
if you had always bequn your addresses to me thus, Soph. El. 556. Aeoard- 
Tay yoous . . Kardpéw, I will begin lamentations for my master, Kur, And. 
1199. Vina cadis onerarat, Virg. See 476. 3, 479. 

b. A verb, of which the proper object or effect is a distinct sentence, 
often takes the subject (or some other prominent word) of that sentence in 
the Acc., by attraction : “Hider adrév, b71 wéoor xo, he knew [him] that 
he occupied the centre, i. 8. 21. Tvvatka Néryovow, bre xdOnrat, they say 
that the woman is sitting, Cyr. 7. 3.5. Oidd oe ris ef Lk. 4. 34. See lil. 
5. 14, 18; iv. 5. 29, 7. 11. Illum, ut vivat, optant, Ter. ‘‘ Conceal me 
what lam,” Shaks. (c) Nor is this anticipation confined to the Ace. : 
BapBdpwy éreuedeiro, ws modeuetv re ixavol elnoav, he took care that the bar- 
barians should be prepared for war, i. 1. 5. See 402a. 


475. Pernrirurasis. a. The place of a verb is often supplied by an 
Ace. of the kindred noun joined with such verbs as tovéw (or more fre- 
quently mocéoua:), &yo, exw, TiOnpr, &c.: Kopos éféracw Kal dpiOpdv Trav 
“EMAjvwr eroinoey [= é&jrace kal npiOunoe Tods "EXAqvas], C. made a review 
and numbering of [= reviewed and numbered] the Greeks, i. 2.9. Tip 
mopeiay €rozeiro 1. 7. 20. 

b. These and like periphrases sometimes take an Acc. by virtue of the 
implied verb: ’Av8paro8a dpray hy roinoduevos [= apricas], having made 
seizure of slaves, Th. 8. 62. Xia ridels (= onuaivwv) .. vlenv, giving a 
signal of victory, 8.171. Tebvdvar 7H P58 Tors OnBalovs, to be mortally 
afraid of the T., Dem. 366. 26. Cf. 473 b, 472j, 395. 


476. Euipsis. 1. The verb which governs the Acc. is 
sometimes omitted ; particularly, 


a.) In EMPHATIC ADDRESS or EXCLAMATION: Odros, ® o€ To [sc. Nevo 
or Kah], You there, ho! you I mean, Ar. Av. 274 (401. 2). dy, ot 
Thy vevovoay es wedov Kapa, prijs, 7) Karapvel wh Sedpaxevan rade; Soph. Ant. 
441. “Im, ld, Neyelas pdpov dnd5vos [sc. 7098], oh, oh [I long] for the fate 
of the melodious nightingale / Asch. Ag. 1146. En quatuor aras, Virg. 

b.) In ENTREATY: Mh, mpds oe Gedy [sc. ikeredw], TANS we Mmpododvat, 
T beseech you by the gods, do not forsake me, Kur. Alc. 275. Observe the 
hyperbaton, which is freyuent in earnest entreaty ; and cf. Per omnes te 
deos oro, Hor. Ode 1. 8. 1; Per te ego deos oro, Ter. Andr. 3. 3. 6. 

c.) In PROHIBITION: M} tprBas ére [sc. moce?re], No more delays! 

Soph. Ant. 577. M7 poe puplovs, unde dicpuplovs Eévous [sc. Aéve], Dowt 
talk to me of your 10,000 or 20,000 mercenaries, Dem. 45. 11. 
d.) In SWEARING: Ov, 76v5" "Odvprtrov [sc. duviw, 472 f], No / by this 
_ Olympus! Soph. Ant. 758. Ov, rav Ais aorparay Id. El. 1063. — By 
this ellipsis may be explained the use of the Acc. with the particles v4, 
vat, and pa (of which the two first are afirmative, and the last, unless 
preceded by vai, commonly negative), according to the following rule ; 


302 SYNTAX. R. XXI, — ACCUSATIVE OF THE EFFECT. § 476. 


Rute H. ADVERBS OF SWEARING are followed by the Acc. : 


Ni Ala, Yes, by Jupiter! i. 7.9. Nal rd Due vi. 6. 84. “AAG, wa 
Tous Beovs, ovk &ywye avrovs diwkw, but, by the gods, I will not pursue them, 
i. 4.8. Nat wa Ala, Yes, indeed / v. 8. 6. 

e.) Some familiar verbs : ‘O rdv kavbvuv [st. xv ; in later writers], he 
with the cloak, Luc. D. C. 9. 

2. The Acc. required by a transitive verb is sometimes omitted: cf. 
AvareXéoat Ti od5v, to finish the way, iv. 5. 11, and mpéds tiwp BotdorTO 
duarehéoari. 5. 7 3 EXatvovros rov tov, riding his horse, and Ilapedav- 
vovros, Cyr. 8. 3. 28, 29. Avxcos #Aace i. 10. 15. 

3. An elliptical or unusual construction of a verb and Ace. is sometimes 
_ employed, especially by the poets, for energy or brevity of expression : 
Piddtyra . . Tauwper, let us strike friendship [a victim in pledge of friend- 
ship], I’. 94 (cf. foedus ferire). “Hxewpe [= xelpwv ezole| modtKepwr pivov 
Soph. Aj. 55. Teéyyer daxptwy dxvav Id. Tr. 849. Cf. 4748, 479. 


Accusative of the Effect. 


477. The Errect of a verb includes whatever the agent 
does or makes. Hence any verb may take an Acc. expressing 
or defining its action. The Acc. thus employed may be either 
(1) a noun kindred, in its origin or signification, to the verb ; 
or (2) a neuter adjective used substantively; or (3) a noun simply 
defining or characterizing the action. 


1. KiInDRED Nown (with this, the verb is often translated by a more 
general word): Evrixnoav rotro 76 ettbynpa, they had [succeeded] gained 
this success, vi. 8. 6. Pvdrakds Puddéew, to keep guard, ii. 6.10. ‘Qs 
axlvdvvov Blov fGuer, how secure a life we live, Eur. Med. 248. Tauetv 
yapov révde Ib. 587. Ti mpooyedGre tov mavicrarov yédwv ; why do you 
smile upon me that last smile? Ib. 1041. Méynv euaxovro M. 175. 
Mi0ov devres A. 552. “Yew v8wp Ar. Nub, 1280. Aetdoowr poviov Sépypa 
dpdxovros Aisch. Per. 79. “ENOoe tiv O8dv iii. 1. 6. Tpémerar tpipacias 
6Sovs Hdt. 6. 119. “Exdpnoav xapov weyddnv Mat. 2. 10. Vitam vivere, 
Somniavi somnium, Pugnam pugnabo, Plaut. 

a. In like manner, an adjective sometimes takes an Acc. of the kindred 
noun (cf. 472) : Lodds ay rh éxelvwv coplav, being wise with their wis- 
dom, Pl. Apol. 22e. Kakovs raécav xaxiav Pl. Rep. 490d. 

b. It will be observed, that usually an adjective is joined with the Ace. 
of the kindred noun, and the whole phrase is an emphatic substitution for 
an adverb : ‘Qs dxlydivoy Biov fGuev = ‘Os dxwdvvws (Quer. This adjective 
not unfrequently occurs with an ellipsis of the noun: Td Ilepotkdy apxetro 
[sc. dpynual, he danced the Persian [dance], vi. 1.10. ‘Qs Babdy [se. 
dmvov] exoujOns Luc. D. Mar. 2. Hence appears to have chiefly arisen 
the construction in 478. 


478. 2. Nuvurer ApsECTIVE (commonly translated by supplying 
a noun, or by an adverb): Tovatra uev remolnxe, such acts has he com- 
mitted, or thus has he acted, i. 6.9. Aéyes otk axdprotra, you speak 
pleasantly enough, ii. 1.13. KaAéarov Brére [sc. Brena], he looks {a 
thievish look] thievish, Ar. Vesp. 900. Tl atrdxpioyn; what will you 
with him? or how will you use him (466 b)? Cyr. 1. 4.13. Ta Adware 
vce i. 2.10. Mn8ty yeviecOar i. 9.7. Méya ppovijoas iii. 1. 27. “Ave- 
kpayeé ve todepikdy, he shouted the war-ery, vil. 8. 33 


§ 480. DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 303 


a. This construction of the neuter adjective is very extensive in its use, 
and often occurs where a substantive would be constructed differently 
(472 d) : Oodpaiver tt; Tod ixous, ‘Do you smell any thing git os The 
cold,’ Ar. Pl. 896. Td8e HEVTOL mreovexT av ovK ToxiveTo, ev pev TH Oeper 
roo AAlov, év 6€ TH XEmGu TOD bxous Ages. 5. 3. It is closely allied to 
the adverbial use of the neuter adjective, “and often explains it (483). 


479. 3. Derinitive Noun. ‘H Bovdh.. éBdre~e vary, the senate 
looked mustard, Ar. Eq. 629. Mévea mveiovres, breathing courage, I. 8 
(“ breathing united force,” Milt.). ‘“Peirw ydda, let it flow milk, Theoe. 
5. 124, *Ayyedtyy poe A. 140. ’HaAmldas Néywv i. 2.11. Newkyjxare 
vavpaxlas Th. 7. 6 IloANas paxas irrnvra Isoc. 7Le. Néorimov 5° 
&Oos dha Eur. ci 1153. "Hywvifovro orabdiov iv. 8. 27. 


Double Accusative. 


480. 1. A word may take as many adjuncts, in the same 
or different cases, as the sense requires. Thus, 


2. Many verbs govern TWo accusATIVES, which may be, 


a.) The pirEcT oBJECT and the EFFECT, in apposition with each other 
(393) ; as with verbs of making, appointing, choosing, esteeming, naming, 
dividing, &c.: Bacihéa ce érrolynoay, they made you king, Vi, fea: =rpa- 
THyov de abriv amédeake, he had appointed him general, i. 1. 2. Tar épa e€ue 
éxaheire, you called me father, vii. 6. 38. Ods of Zvpor Oeovs évoprtov, 
‘esteemed gods,’ i. 4. 9. Kdpos 7d orpdrevua Karéverpe Saddexa LEPN, C. 
divided the army into twelve parts (893 d), Cyr. 7. 5. 13. “Oorts & av éav- 
Tov &yrar orparnyoyv v. 7. 28. “Hy kal Satay érik\now kadéovoiv LD. 487. 
Ods iyeubvas mbdewy erradedoar%e Pl. Rep. 546 b. 

Nore. The infinitive etvat is sometimes used with these verbs: Noulifw 
yup vas éuol eivar cal marpida cal didovs, ‘I deem you to be,’ i. 3. 6. 
Dodiorhv 674 Toe dvoudfovar. . Tov dvdpa eivar Pl. Prot. 311 e. 

b.) The pirecr opsect and the EFFECT, not in apposition ; as with 
verbs of doing, saying, &e. (a neuter adj. often expressing the effect, 478 a): 
Wi ris re ayadv 7) kaxov trovnoeev adrdv, if any one had done him any good 
or evil, i. 9. 11. "H8txhoapev rodrov ovdév, we have done him no wrong, 
vii. 6. 22. “Atroticacbat dixny éxOpovs, to wreak vengeance on his foes, 
Eur. Heracl. 852. “Orav.. ddAndous Ta éoxara Néyoory, when they say 
the worst things of each other, Mem. 2. 2. 9. ee yyy ovdcv ce Soph. 
O. C. 1145. Tocodrov EXxOos éx8alpw a’ éyw So El. 1034. Meédyrés pe 
éypaparo rv ypad wv ravryy Pl. Apol. 19a. Pie. pe OvoeTUXETTEpOV Ya- 
pov Eur. Tro. 357. 


e.) Two opsects differently related, but which are both regarded as 
DIRECT; as with verbs of asking and requiring, of clothing and wnelothing, 
of concealing and depriving, of persuading and teaching, &c.: Ktpov airety 
mroia, to ask vessels of Cyrus, or to ask Cyrus for vessels, i. 3.14. Tov 
Ojmov bua xa‘ vay prio Xoy, they clad your people in a mantle, Ar. Lys. 
1156. M7ro pe Kpoys tovro, do not hide this from me, Misch. Pr. 625. 
"Huds dé dro repet Tov pucbdv, but ws he robs of our pay, vii. 6. 9. Ze 
SiSdeKev tiv orparnyiay, to teach you the military art, Mem. 3.1.5. Zé 
tavra wu) melBwv Soph. O. C. 797. Kiperes yf évoua ; vt. 3864. Tedq TOUS 
karamd<ovras é€éeyov Hschin. 69. 29. .’ExSdov ‘ue xonornpiay eoO ira 
Misch. Ag. 1269. “Audw Oupdr darn tpa %. 17. “Os ce kwrvoe 7d Spar 
Soph. Ph. 1241. Xpda vitero. . ddunv £. 224. AtarplByow ‘Axaiovs dv 





304 SYNTAX. R. XXII, &C. — ACCUSATIVE. § 480. 


yapov B. 204. See also 473. Posce deos veniam, Virg.; Te litteras do- 


ceam ? Cie. 
Notr. When a verb has two direct objects, one commonly denotes 
person, and the other, thing. 


mI. ACCUSATIVE OF SPECIFICATION. 


481. Rute XXII. The Accusative is used in 
specifying to what PART, PROPERTY, &c., a word or 
expression applies : 

The force of this Acc. is expressed in Eng. by as to (kard, secundum), 
though other forms of translation are more frequent : Tw yetpe dedenévor, 
[bound as to the hands] with his hands bownd, vi. 1. 8. Tloramds, Kvdvos 
dvopa, edpos dvo0 TAEOpwr, a river, Cydnus by name, two plethra in breadth, 
i, 2. 23. Idvta xpdricros, best in every thing, i. 9. 2 (ef. 416 b). “Arro- 
Tunbevres Tas Kebadds, beheaded, ii. 6. 1, 29. Oavudova Td KddXos, of 
wonderful beauty, li. 8.15. "Hé&vévar, yoopnv euhy, wéddec, in my opin- 
ion,’ Ar. Pax 232. Tov Sdxrvdov ddyet Pl. Rep. 462d. Acecvol 62 payny 
“isch. Pers. 27. ddw riv od8tv airiay vii. 1. 25. “Ooa d€ wor xphoipor 
éore ii. 5. 23. See 485e. Capita velamur, Nudus membra, Virg.; Ani- 
mum incensus Liv. 

Nore. This use of the Acc. is often termed synecdoche, from its analogy 
to the rhetorical figure bearing that name. 

a. When a verb is in this way followed by two accusatives, the con- 
struction (which is most frequent in Epic poetry) may be often referred to 
partitive apposition : Tévye. . Aim’ doréa Ouuds T. 406. See 395 b. 

b. An Acc. of specification sometimes introduces a sentence: Ta per 
yap twapedOdvra, tueis uev Kipov niéjoare, as to the past, you have exalted 
C., Cyr. 8. 6. 23. Tods &ypovdépous Tovrous, . . dvelin pepécOwoar Pl. Leg. 
761e.—This form of construction may be often explained by anacolithon 
or ellipsis. 


Iv. ACCUSATIVE OF EXTENT. 


482. Rute XXIII. Extent OF TIME OR 
SPACE 1s put in the Accusative : as, 


a. TIME: “Euewev hpépas érrd, mansit dies septem, he remained 
[through] seven days, i. 2. 6. "Eddxpve woddv Xpdvov, he wept a long time, 
1.3.2. "“Ezdeov hydépav cal vixra vi. 1. 14. Hixoow ery yeyorws, vigintt 
annos natus, twenty years old, Mem. 8. 6. 1. “Os ré0vnxe ratra rpla érn, 
‘these three years,’ Lys. 109. 12. (b) So sometimes repeated time, as 
implying extent: Thy dpyv érayw'ew ope atyas, to bring them goats at 
the proper hour (each day), Hdt. 2. 2. (c) In stating a period ending witb. 
the present, an ordinal number is often used : "Evarny huépay yeyaunue- 
vnv, having been married [the ninth day] nine days, iv. 5. 24. Aéxarov 
alxudgers ros, you are warring the tenth year, Eur. Rh. 444. 

d. Spacn: ’EgedNatver da Ppvylas otabpov éva, wapardyyas dxru, he 
advances through P. one day’s-march, eight parasangs, i. 2. 6. Mupias 
éueye Kara yijs épyuds yevicOar, that I may be 10,000 fathoms wnder 
ground, vii 1.30. Td Bédos at’rév cal Burddcrov [sc. dudornual PeperOat, 
that their missile is sent double the distance, iii. 3. 16. Muxpoy mpoiévres 


y 


—————E 


—_ —. ——) 













§ 484. OF SPECIFICATION, EXTENT, &(@. VOCATIVE. 305 


ii. 1.6. <Acimero. . dovpds épwhv VY. 529. ‘Aroréure ri raxlorny O86, 
sends {through| by the quickest road, i. 2. 20. Tov KiPatpdvos rérrov, 
through the region of C., Soph. O. T. 1134. Magnum spatium abessent, 
Ces. 

e. In the simple designation of time and place, the GENITIVE common- 
ly expresses the time and place in which (433), the Dative, at which 
(469), and the Accusative, through which; the Gen. and Acc. differing 
like iv and throwgh, but both containing the idea of extension ; the Dat., 
like af, not containing this idea, but simply presenting the when or where 
as if a point in time or space. To some extent, however, the offices of the 
cases blend with each other ; and the more on account of their generic 
uses. See 485. 


vy. ADVERBIAL ACCUSATIVE. 


483. Rute XXIV. The Accusative is often 
used ADVERBIALLY, to express degree, manner, order, 
&e.: as, . 


TovSe tov tpdrov, in this way, or thus, 1.1.9. Kipxyny. . myjoouae 
mavTas tpdTovs, ‘every way,’ Ar. Pl. 302. TédAos dé ceive, [at the end] 
Jinally he said, ii. 3. 26. ?Apyiyv wip rrovrfoa, ‘in the first place,’ ‘ at 
all (with negatives),’ vii. 7. 28. "Hptv ydpuv, for my sake, Kur. Hee. 874. 
Kaipoy 5° ép7cecs, ‘ opportunely,’ Soph. Aj. 34. So wépas tn fine, raxos 
quickly, narny in vain, dwplay unseasonably, rpspacw, épeew, under pre- 
text of, ke. See 380a, 485e. Cf. id genus, magnam partem, nihil. 

a. This rule applies especially to the Acc. newt. of adjectives, both sing. 
and plur.: Td dpyxatoy, formerly, i. 1.6. Ta wiv. ., ra 5¢, partly .., 
partly, iv. 1.14. Murxpdy éféguye 76 wh KararerpwOjva i. 3. 2.. Tuxsv, 
perhaps, vi. 1. 20. Cf. cetera, illud hore, multum. See 263, and ef. the 
Comp. in Lat. adverbs. 

b. An Acc. newt. pronown is sometimes used to denote that on account 
of which something is done (especially an end in view) : Tat? éyw éorev- 
dov, [on account of these things] therefore I made haste, iv. 1. 21. “A 6’ 
HrOov, what I came for, Soph. O. C. 1291. Tl ra rupa xaracBécear, 
‘why,’ vi. 3. 25. “OQ Eur. Hec. 13, 16 I. 176, wherefore. Aira raira 
kal vov Rw PI. Prot. 310e. ’Exetvo 6é d00u0, re wor doxe? Mem. iv. 3.15. 
Cf. quid? why? (c) So with xpfpa, thing, expressed : Ti xpijua xetoae ; 
why do you lie there? Eur. Heracl. 633. 

d. An adjective may be used adverbially in the Acc. fem., with an 
ellipsis of o86v way, or @payv season: XuvrdrrecOa thy taxleryy, to form 
[in the quickest way] immediately, i. 3.14. Trav mpdryy rpéxew xp7, we 
must first run, Ar. Th. 662. So paxpdav a long way, dddr\nv kal dddnv one 
way and another, thy &ddws [the way leading elsewhere] to no purpose, &c. 


F. Tue Vocative. 


484. Rute XXV. The CompELLATIVE of a 
sentence is put in the Vocative. 


a. The usual sign of address, in Greek, as in so many lan- 
guages, is @. It is commonly employed in prose, except (b) in 
REV. GR. T 


ene ws 


306 SYNTAX. R. XXV.— VOCATIVE. REMARKS, &0. § 484. 


abrupt or familiar address ; and (c) is frequent in poetry. (d) 
It is commonly followed by the emphatic word in the address, 
unless (e) this has already preceded ; and is (f) sometimes 
doubled for special emphasis. 


(a) °Q Parive, Oavudsw, O Phalinus, I wonder, ii. 1.10. (b) KX€éapxe 
kal IIpdgeve, . . odx tore 6 re rovetre, Clearchus and Proxenus, you know not 
what you do, i. 5. 16. (c) *Q'Axred A. 74. (d) °Q Oavpactdrare dvOpw- 
me, O most wonderful man, iii. 1. 27. *Q Kdkvore dvOpmrwv Apiae ii. 5. 
39. (e) QOavpac’ & Kpirwy Pl. Euthyd. 271¢. (f) *Q réxvov & yervatov 
Soph. Ph. 799. 

g. The term of respectful address to a company of men is &vdpes, with 
which may be likewise connected a more specific appellation : “Opare uév, 
@ dvdpes, you sce, gentlemen, iii. 2. 4. “Avdpes orpari@rat, un Oavudsere, 
fellow-soldiers, do not wonder, i. 3. 3. °Q dvdpes"EXXnves ii. 3. 18. 

h. See 186 g, 182, 401 c, 485 a. 


REMARKS ON THE CASES. 


485. It is important to distinguish not only the specific 
offices of the cases, but also their generic uses. Thus, 


a. The Nom. is the generic case for substantives independent of gram- 
matical construction (401) ; while the Voce. is the specific case for address, 
and the other cases are also used in exclamations (429 e, f, 453, 476a). —- 
Hence the union of the Nom. and Voce. is not deemed a violation of the 
laws of agreement. An appositive with a Voc. is usually in the Nom. 
(401 c) ; while a few Voc. forms for Nom. occur in the poets, from attrac- 
tion, or imitation of address : "OABte x@pe yévoro [for bABt0s, K@pe, y.], may 
you be happy, boy, Theoc. 17. 66. *Ex\7Ons ”"IpBpace, thow wast called Im- 
brasus [addressed “IuBpace], Call. Fr. Cf. Sic venias hodierne, Tibull.; 
Jane libentius audis, Hor. 

b. The Gen. is the generic case for the adjuncts of substantives, adjec- 
tives, and adverbs ; and thus may even express direct or indirect oljects, 
more specifically expressed by the Acc. or Dat. (435, 444). 

ce. The Dat. is the generic case for a thing or circumstance simply 
viewed as an accompaniment (465). 

d. The Ace. is the generic case for the adjuncts of verbs, and thus ex- 
presses much which is also expressed by the Dat. or Gen. (472a, b). It 
often expresses as simple object, what is expressed by the Dat. as the object 
of approach or influence, or by the Gen. as the point of departure or the 
cause: “Adapetcbat rods évoixodvras"EAAnvas Thy viv, to deprive the Greck 
inhabitants of their land (480 c), 1. 8. 4 ; “O rotow dadeidero viotiuov Ruap 
(463) ; Tév &AXAv ddatpotuevoe ypjuata, taking money from others (405), 
Mem. 1.5.3. Also, with a Gen. of the thing, or with a preposition (487), 
"Adatpodvrat . . abTods dé ris w@edelas, deprive themselves of the benefit, 
Ven. 6.4; "Amd rijs dpyiis Thy axadipnv adedécOat, to take away the nettle 
Strom his temper, Ar. Vesp. 883 (with ék, Ven. 12. 9). dye oe (472), 
395 b) ; Ilépevyey . . por (463) ; Néoov redevyévar, to have escaped from 
disease, Soph. Ph. 1044 ; @uydew.. dm’ adrijs uw. 120; "Ex Cavdroto pu- 
yovra 1. 21; PevEerOac trek xaxod O. 700. So the Acc. of effect may be 
supplied by another case : ’Axivdtvov Bloy {Guev (477. 1). Zaoav aBraBet 
Blo, living with unharmed life (modal Dat., 467), Soph. El. 650. 

e. Ifa cirewmstance is merely viewed as modifying a verb, it is put in 
the Acc.; if simply viewed as an accompaniment, in the Dat.; but if 








§ 488. GENERIC CASES. NUMBERS. 307 


viewed as having some causal relation, in the Gen. These differences of 
view, and the prevalence of different analogies, have led to much variety 
of construction. Thus, (a) MANNER: dv adroy tpdtov vi. 5. 6, Toe airg 
tpdétw iv. 2. 13, in the same manner (483, 467). (B) MEASURE OF DIF- 
FERENCE : Ouuoerdécrepor 5€ wort, much more spirited (483), iv. 5. 36 ; 
TIo\A@ 5é torepoy (468) ; Toootrovi. 8.13; Toootvtwi. 5.9. (y) RE- 
spEcT: IIAq90s ws dicxidvor, about 2,000 im number, iv. 2. 2; Kvdvos 
bvopa (481) ; [TAA . . AecpOdvres, Odaxos dvdpare (467 b) ; Newraros 
. . yovoro (446b; cf. 413). (8) Parr AFFECTED: Tw Xeétpe dedenévor 
(481) ; Vavew yxetpds, to take by the hand (426 a). (€) Time: To Aoumdv 
ii. 2. 5, Tod Aowrod (433 a), afterwards; Tédos, at last (483); Xpove 
moré eirev, [with time] at length he said, Hel. 4. 1. 34. (¢) CAUSE: 
Totr’ édixdunv, on this account I came (483 b), Soph. O. T. 1005 ; Totrov 
ge. . (mr (429 a) ; To, wherefore (466). 


486. The construction belonging to a word in its primary sense and 
form (a) is extensively retained in figurative or secondary senses, and in 
composition (414 c, 427, 432g, &c.) ; but (b) is often changed to another 
more appropriate. Thus, (c) many verbs become transitive through a sec- 
ondary sense, or through composition with a preposition, even though the 
preposition may not itself govern the Acc.: Kivdivov ééotnoayv, they 
shrunk from danger, Dem. 460. 2. In the same way, (d) other verbs from 
transitive become intransitive : Oikrw év8are, you may [give in} yield to 
pity, Th. 3. 37. 


487. a. Most of the relations expressed by the cases may be more 
definitely expressed by the aid of prepositions. This definiteness was 
naturally more sought in prose than in poetry, and more in the later than 
in the earlier Greek. 

b. The use of a preposition, or of one case rather than another, often 
avoids ambiguity, or distinguishes from other adjuncts, or gives emphasis, 
or favors the metre, or promotes euphony, &c. See 464 c. 


IlJ. USE OF THE NUMBERS, GENDERS, AND PERSONS. 


488. Numbers. 1. The Sincunar is sometimes used for 
the Plural in the Greek, as in other languages, to give to the 
expression greater individuality or unity : Tov "EdAnva, the Greek 
(= the Greeks), Hdt. 1. 69. Tov wor€uov, the enemy, Th. 5. 9. 
"Epret Sdkpvov dupdtev amo, the tear trickles from my eyes, Soph. 
El. 1231. Tiprdnp edOds dupa Saxpiov Ib. 906. 


Nore. A nation is oftener so denoted, if its power is held by a mon- 
arch. 


a. <A chorus, from its unity and the action of the corypheus as its rep- 
resentative, is more frequently denoted by the singular (sometimes inter- 
changed with the plural) : “‘Hptv puév on wav rerdéevrar Bédos, pevw dé, 
every shaft has now been shot by us, and | wait, Asch. Eum. 676. *Q €etvor, 
Kh Or adicnOG wot murevoas Soph. O. C. 174. (b) So the dual for the 
two semichoruses or their leaders, Aejooerov rdvra, do you both look 
everywhere, Aisch. Eum. 255. Cf. 494a. 

e. Some imperatives, used like interjections, are singular, though more 
ran one are addressed : "Aye 5}, dxotcare, Come now, hear, Apol. 14. 


Loar in ee SS 
i: * 
j + ea 


308 SYNTAX. — NUMBERS AND GENDERS. § 488, 


BovAeobe, elré wor, do you wish, tell me, Dem. 43. 7. So l6é behold, To, 
pépe come, &c. Age, intro abite, Plaut. 

d. In Greek, as in Eng., some nouns related individually to more than 
one, may be either singular or plural: Kpdrioroe . . riv uy, strongest 
in heart, Th. 2. 40 (or ras uyas, <n their hearts; cf. Mem. 4. 1. 2). 


489. 2. The use of the PLuRaL for the Singular is particular- 
ly frequent in Greek, especially in abstract nouns, in neuter ad- 
jectives used substantively, in the names of things composed of 
distinct parts, and in vague expressions for persons or things. 


a. This use is due to some complexity or indefiniteness of conception, 
preventing strict singleness of view. It often renders the expression more 
comprehensive or general ; sometimes more emphatic, courteous, or mod- 
est. Wyn xal Oddy Kal mévous dépe, to endure cold, and heat, and 
labor [in repeated instances], iii. 1. 23. Ta Se€a rod Képdros, the right 
[portions] of the wing, i. 8. 4. Ta Zvevvécios Bacthaa, the palace [royal 
buildings] of Syennesis, i. 2. 23; cf. iv. 4. 2, 7. Rov rotcde ré€ots, with 
this bow, Soph. Ph. 1335 ; cf. Tééov ride 288. Xdda ToKetow eixitws Ov- 
uoupévos, forgive parents (like this mother) justly excited, Eur. Hee. 403. 

b. An individual sometimes speaks of himself in the plwral (with which 
the sing. may be combined), as if others were associated with him, especially 
in poetry ; and (c) a woman speaking of herself in this indefinite way, uses 
the masculine of the plur., as the generic gender (490 b): (b) AtSotpe8a 
yap Ta Nedreypueva por, Lain ashamed of what I have said, Kur. Hipp. 244. 
Tatra repacdpeba dinyicacbat, these things we will endeavor to relate (the 
author’s plural), Cyr. 1. 1. 6. “Ikeredopev . . tpoomltvav, I beseech you, 
failing down, Eur. Here. 1206. “Hdcov paprupéperOa Spac” a dpay od 
BotAopat Ib. 858. (c) Hyets xrevoduer, otarep eEepioauer, [ will slay, who 
bore them, Id. Med. 1241. Tlecovued’, et xph, rarpl tTysmpodpevor, J will 
fall, if it must be, avenging my futher, Soph. El. 399. So a chorus of 
women (488 a) uses the masc. sing., Ked@ov Aeirouae Eur. Hipp. 1105. 

d. The plural for the sing. in neuter adjectives used substantively is 
especially frequent in their appositive use, in adjective pronouns, and in 
verbals in -réos and -tés+ “Oray pév te &yabdy éxwor, mapaxadodel we emi 
Tatra, whenever they have anything good, they invite me to {these things] 
this, Symp. 4. 50. IIdrpoxNos, bs cot rarpis Wv Ta HidTata, P., who was 
thy father’s best-beloved, Soph. Ph. 434. Ods od mapadoréa rots APnvators 
éotiv, whom we must not give up to the A., Th. 1. 86. Tverd yuvakiv 
[éorw], women can be trusted, X. 456. OvKx*Iwves tabe eiciv, [these things 
are] there are here no Ionians, Th. 6. 77. ’Awd\\wv Tad” Fv. . 6. . TEAOD, 
it was A. that brought to pass, Soph. O. T. 1329. ILodepnréa elvar Th. 1. 
88. Cf. 491 c, 502. 

e. The plural or dual may be used with a singular compellative, to in- 
clude more than the person directly addressed : *Q téxvov, # waperroy ; 
.. LIpoweOer’, & mat, rarpi. My child, are you both here ? Come to a fa- 
ther's arnis. Soph. O. C. 1102. "Ir, én, tpets, & ‘HpvrmlSa Hel. 4. 1. 11. 


490. Genpers. 1. The Mascutine is the generic gender 
for persons as such ; and hence is not only used when males are 
included, but even for females only in some indefinite or general 
forms of expression (489 ¢). See Mem. 2. 7. 2s. 


a. Where there are different forms for the two sexes, the masce. is also 
the form common to both : Ot carol, the beautiful (whether men or women). 
Twd' dde\pad, this brother and sister, Eur. Hec. 896. 





§ 492. AGREEMENT WITH THE SUBSTANTIVE. 309 


b. When the mase. is applied to a woman, the expression becomes still 
more indefinite if the plural is used: Evv ots rT ov yphy mw duihGr, consort- 
ing with those |= her] with whom I ought not, Soph. O. T. 1184 (didipus 
shrinks from pointing out his mother more plainly). “H oretpos otca p5- 
oxos ovK dvéterac Tixrovras &AXovs, ‘ will not endure others [= another] 
bearing children,’ Eur. And. 711. See 489 a, c. 


491. %. The Neursr is the generic gender for objects of 
thought considered without respect to personality (simply as 
things) ; and hence may even apply to persons so considered. 
See 489 d, 175, 371 a. 


a. Infinitives, clauses used substantively, and words or phrases spoken of 
as such, are naturally regarded as neuter: Ov TO {fv wepi welorou tovn- 
Téov, a\Ad Td ed Lv, not TO LIVE ts to be valued most highly, but TO LIVE 
WELL, Pl. Crito 48 b. Arov fy bre éyyds mov Bacireds hy, it was evident 
that the king was somewhere near, ii. 3. 6. To MH xal rd OT wporie- 
peva, the Not and the No prefixed, Pl. Soph. 257b. XpioOa. . 7H kad 
airé, to use the phrase xa’ abrd, Ib. 252 ¢. 


b. So clauses, phrases, or words, not used substantively, are accounted 
as neuter in any reference that may be made to them: ’EvySpetoapev, 
brep Huds kal dvamveicat éroinoe, we ambushed, which enabled us to take 
breath, iv. 1. 22. Ppdvipdss re cal dyabds 6 ddixos, 6 dé dixaros oddérepa, 
the unjust man is both wise and good, and the just man neither of these, Pl. 
Rep. 349 d. 

e. As infinitives and clauses so often want strict singleness of concep- 
tion and even of form, attributes and pronouns referring to them are often 
plural (489 a): “ASivara jv ércyerpe’v, it was impossible to undertake, Th. 
1.125. “HBo7Pncay rH Aaxedaiuon, cal tatra [sc. éroinoar] eldires, they 
aidid L., and that [they did] knowing, Ages. 1. 88. Zé uév row atra xp} 
moev, KNaiew é\ewas, you must do as much as this, weep piteously, Ar. 
Th. 1062. Acdo0ypéva. . ride karOaveiv, it is decreed that she shall die, 
Soph. Ant. 576. — This form of the attribute seems to have had its origin 
in apposition (489 d). 

d. Grammarians often speak of a word, with an ellipsis of the name of 
its class : “ory 6 [sc. civderuos| AMAd dvTl Tod 8é, the [conjunction] adrAa 
is instead of 8€ Soph. O. C. 237, Schol. Aetzrec 7 [sc. rpd0ecrs] 8rd, [the 
preposition] Sia is wanting, Ib. 1291, Schol. 


AGREEMENT IN NUMBER, GENDER, &C. 


492. The following table presents, for comparison, the gen- 
eral rules of agreement : 


- An APPOSITIVE ) agrees CASE. 

_ An ADJECTIVE with GENDER, NuMBER, and CASE. 

_A Pronoun its sub- ) GENDER, NuMBER, and PERSON. 
A VERB ject in NUMBER, and PERSON. 


a. These rules have the same general foundation, and to a great extent 
the same modifications and exceptions. 

b. The agreement of an attribute with its subject is far less strict than 
that of an epithet ; and the agreement of the pronoun is still less strict. 





310 SYNTAX. R. J. — AGREEMENT. § 493. 


c. The use of the masculine form as feminine in adjectives and pro- 
nouns of three terminations (234 d, e) is not to be regarded as an excep- 
tion to the laws of agreement : "Qo7ep ei Td xetpe, As 0 Beds éml Td cUANapL- 
Bdave aAAHAow Exroincer, abepéeva TovTov TpdrowTo mpds Td Siakwhvew 
GAA, as if the two hands, which God made to assist each other, leaving 
this should turn to obstructing each other, Mem. 2. 3. 18. 


493. Rune J. Agreement is commonly according to form, 
but often rather according to sense. See 70 p. - 
a. The different forms of agreement are interchanged or combined, 


according as the conception varies, or for the sake of emphasis, euphony, 
metre, &c. 


494. 1. The Duat and Puurat, as different modes of de- 
noting two (178), very often agree with each other, or are 
interchanged : 

Ilatdes 600 two children, Tw mwatde the two children, i.1.1. Tov dvdpdv 
vi. 6. 29, rw dvdpe 30, Tovs dvdpas, . . ToUTwWY, . . TH Avdpe 31, &c. II poc- 
érpexov do veavioxw, two young men came running up, iv. 8.10. *Bye- 
Aacarnv obv dudw BréParres els d\AHArAW, both laughed, looking at each 
other, Pl. Euthyd. 273d. Avvduers bé dudirepar éordv, O5Ea Te kal émioriun 
Pl. Rep. 478 b. 

Xeav 5 evodoin Leds, Ta6° ef TeA€tTEe or 
Oaviv7, érel ot wor FavTi ¥ abOis eerov. 
Médeo Ge 5° in, xalperdv re. Soph. O. C. 1435. 

a. In the old poetic language, a few passages occur in which the Dual 
appears to retain its application to more than two (186 g, 271c): Hdvée re 
kal ov, I[5dapye, cat AiOwy Adurre re Sie, viv wo Ti Komedhy atrotiyeroy O. 
185. Ileibecbe . ., ndQerov, Adoavre Bocias Hom. Ap. 486. Some think 


that the Dual is never thus used, except when two pairs or sets are spoken 
of. Cf. 488 b. 


495. 2. In compouND constTRUCTION, both syllepsis and 
zeugma are common. See 68 f. 
a. They are even found together: Kdpés re cal ) orparia wraphdOe, cal 


éyévovto cicw, Cyrus and his army passed, and came within, i. 7. 16. TO 
5 ote yur) kal varia Téxva. . Taplorarar ovdé yavuvTat uw. 42. 


496. In syuiupsis, (a) the combined number may be the 
dual, if only two are spoken of; but is otherwise the plural 
(with an exception in the verb, 569 b).— (b) For persons of 
both sexes, the combined gender is the masculine (490) ; (ce) for 
things, or persons and things,* it is the neuter (though it may 
be another gender, if all the subjects agree in that). —(d) The — 
combined person, as in Lat. and Eng., is the jirst, if that is mn- 
cluded in the subjects ; the second, if that is included and not 
the first ; but otherwise the third. Thus, 


* Classed together as objects of thought (491). Zeugma, however, is 
here more common. 





¢ 498. DUAL AND PLURAL, COMPOUND CONSTRUCTION, sc. 311 


(a) Dwxpdrer Oprrnta yevonévw Kocrias re cat’ AdkiBiddns wrelora KaKds 
Thy wit éroincartny, C. and A., who had been associates of S., brought 
very many evils upon the city, Mem. 1. 2.12. ’AtoNeAoltracw huds Zevias 
kat Iaciwy, X. and P. have left us, i. 4. 8. ‘Qs dé eiSé€tryv aAAHAOVS 77 
yuh xal 6’ ABpaddras, howdtovTo adAnAovs Cyr. 6.1.47. (b) Hide rarépa 
Te Kai unrépa Kal ddeXpods kal Thy éavrod yuvatka alypadeorous yeyevnpe~ 
vous, he saw father, and raciner, and brothers, and his own wife taken cap- 
tive, Cyr. 3.1. 6. (c) IWAivOor kal EdNa Kal Képamos ardxTws ev éspippéeva 
ovdév XYpjowa éorry, bricks, wood, and tiles, thrown together in confusion, 
are of no use, Mem. 3.1.7. ‘H kadXorn.. mwodstela Te Kal 6 KdddoTOS 
“avip Nova av huty ein diehOety, the noblest polity and the noblest man would 
be [themes] left for us to discuss, Pl. Rep. 562a. “Acdddecav cal evxdevay, 
& otre karaonrerat, security and glory, which never decay, Cyr. 8. 2. 22. 
(d) “Ey® xal om. . wemAHypeOa, LT and you both are smitten, Eur. Ale. 
404. Ov8 ov pdvos oddé of col Pidor. . foyere Pl. Leg. 888 b. ‘O Aéywr 
duets Te of kpiral piow dvOpwrivyny txopev, [1] the speaker and you the 
judges have a human nature, Pl. Tim. 29. 

e. Syllepsis is sometimes found, where the relation of the subjects to 
each other is disjunctive: Ei dé « “Apns &pywor udyns 7} PoiBos, if Mars 
should begin the fight, or Phabus, T. 188. Kai wv 006’ 6 Wdo’rwros Kiwy 
odre. . dv Xdpwv toyov, and neither the dog of Pluto nor Charon should 
stay me, Kur. Alc. 360. Si quid Socrates aut Aristippus fecerint, C%e. 


497. In zEuGMA, the agreement is sometimes with the most 
promiment substantive, sometimes with the nearest : as, 


Baowded’s 6é kal of oly ait® StdKev eommlrre, the king and those with 
him, pursuing, attack, i. 10. 1 (cf. duaprdgovcr 2). “Amadrdayévres trodéuwv 
kal kwdvverv Kat Tapaxys, els hy. . Kabéorauer, delivered from the wars, 
perils, and trouble, in which we are now involved, Isoc. 163 b. ‘Era 
6Borods kal numoBsrrov *Arrixodts, seven Attic oboli and a half, i. 5. 6. 
Ilatéas 7) yuvatkas cvvappofotaas Cyr. 7. 5. 60. M*ytpds re cat rod vod 
matpds Soph. O. T. 417. So Kotpw dé xpwévre Siw Kal revryjxovra Bh- 
tHv, two chosen youths and fifty went, 0. 48. Filia et unus e filiis captus 
est, Ces. 

a. Zeugma is the common construction of the adjective used as an 
epithet. It is least frequent in the pronoun. 

b. In the constriction of the verb, zeugma is especially frequent when 
the verb precedes or directly follows the first subject : Ké20uv &rotépverar 
n Kepar?) Kal xelp 4 Sekid, the head of C. is cut off, and the right hand, 
i, 10.1. Dv re yap “EAAnv el cai quets, for you are a Greek, and we also, 
ii. 1.16. "“Esreppe ye “Apiatos xal Aprdogos, murrol dvtes Kipw kai buy 
e¥vor, Kal KeXevovor pudrdrrecOa ii. 4. 16. Dixit hoc Zosippus et His- 
menias, Cic. (c) The poetic use of the second order in syllepsis has been 
named, from the poet Aleman, 2yjjua ’AAKuwavexdv + ‘Pods Xiusecs cvupBar- 
Aerov 75 Ukdpuavdpos, the S. and S. unite their streams, E. 774. See 496e. 

498. 3. Synesis. The agreement is sometimes with a 
subject vmplied in another word, especially a Genitive implied in 
an adjective (commonly a possessive) : 

Td civ [= cod] pévys Sépnua, tuum solius donum, [your gift alone] the 
gift of you alone, Rink Tr. 775. Tawa [= éuod] Svoerqvov kad, the ills 
of wretched me, Id. O. C. 344. Tijs euijs érevoddou, dv unr dxvetre, of my 
approach, whom do not fear, Ib. 730. Tots huerépors [= judy] atrav Pi- 
os, owr own friends, vii. 1. 29. “Avupévaios, av [i. e. Juevaiwy| w exphv 


~ PTT eee’ 


312 SYNTAX. R. J, — AGREEMENT. § 498. 


tuxelv, without the bridal song, which ought to have been mine, Eur. Hee. 
416. See 394¢. Fortunas meas, gui haberem, Ter. Nostros vidisti flen- 
tis ocellos (cf. 499 b), Ov. 

a. So with an implied Dat., ‘Ayerépov [= uty] wérmov xrewois AaBSa- 
KlSatoiv, the doom for us, the famed race of Labdacus (454d), Soph. Ant. 
860. “Huotow [= éuol, 395 b] docos ouixra mpoonte . . eiovdoteog, a nvist 
has suffused my eyes, beholding, Aisch. Pr. 144. 


499. 4. Words may also agree according to sense, 


a.) With Collective Nouns, and other words used collectively : Td wh#- 
fos efpydloavto, the majority voted, Th. 1. 125. Td Apxadcixdv émdurexdr, 
av hpxe KiNedvwp, the Arcadian infantry, whom C. commanded, iv. 8. 18. 
Multitudo abeunt, Liv. See f. 

b.) With the plural used as singular (especially hpets for éyd) ; and 
with the singular used as plural, or so modified as to render the idea plu- 
ral: IlewévOauev, i}. . Keviv karéoxov édrlda, we have suffered, [yes 1] who 
cherished a vain hope, Kur. Iph. A. 985 (see 489 b). TLoAvopkevxpévy Dd- 
Ao, (the city) Sold besieged, Hdt. 5.115. "Opus . . dmroppo.Bdet . . BeBpa- 
res, the bird {= birds] screams, having eaten, Soph. Ant. 1021. Anuwoobévys 
pera Tov Evotparnyav.. omévSovTar, D. with his colleagues makes a truce, 
Th. 3. 109. Absente nobis, Zer.; Demosthenes cum ceteris erant ex- 
pulsi, Vep. 

c.) Nouns figuratively used to denote persons, and others in which the 
gender does not follow the sex: Tid épvos . . katOavdvra, this scion [son] 
slain, Eur. Bac. 1307. Medéa Woxyd, 8s. . oO, wretched soul, who was 
pleased, Soph. Ph. 714. Ta 7é\n xataBavras, the authorities having gone 
down, Th. 4. 15. °Q dtd\rar’, & repicod TipnOels réxvov, O dearest, O most 
fondly cherished son, Eur. Tro. 735. Koddtkodaye Bowridiov, my little 
roll-eating Beotian, Ar. Ach. 872 (§ 175). Capita conjurationis csi sunt, 
Liv. 

d.) With a noun forming a periphrasis with a genitive or adjective : 
Pirtar’ Alyicbov Bia, dearest majesty of A7., Aisch. Ch. 893. *“HA@dv. . 
Bin ‘HpakAnein, the mighty Hercules coming, A. 690. “Axotw pbdyyov épvi- 
Ow, kak» KAaLovTas olorpw, I hear the cry of birds screaming with mad 
fury, Soph. Ant. 1001. To 6é r&v mpecBurépwv judy éxeivous ab Sewpody- 
Tes, didyew Hyovpeba Pl. Leg. 657 d. 

e.) In general, with words for which others might have been used, or 
* with which others are implied (as inhabitants with places, crews with ves- 
sels, troops with commanders, &c.): Idca 6é yévva [= dads] Ppvyar. . 
Sicev, the whole race of the Phrygians, about to offer, Eur. Tro. 531. Pev- 
yer. . és Képxipay, dv atrav evepyérns, he flees to Corcyra, being a benefactor 
of theirs, Th. 1.136. Tevrjxovra rpinpers . . ox etddéres, 50 triremes (came 
ashore), not knowing, Ib. 110. Thy rétw.. dvTas Th. 3. 79. Bacwreds ~ 
.., ob 0 aptrdfovres, the king [with his troops]. ., and they plundering, 
i. 10. 4 (cf. 5, and Ticoadépyns . . avtrots 7). Latium Capuaque agro 
mulctati, Liv. 

f. A double construction sometimes occurs, chiefly with intervening 
words. Thus, a collective noun may take a singular with reference to the 
united whole, and then a plural with reference to the individuals compos- 
ing that whole ; &c.: ‘H d€ Bovhh jovxiay etyev, dpaca. ., Kal odK dyvo- 
otvtes, the senate remained quiet, seeing .., and not ignorant, Hel. 2. 3. 55. 
“Eero ads, épntudey dé, the people sat down and were hushed, B. 99. 
AésBos . . améoty dm’ ’AOnvalwy, Bovdybévres, Lesbus revolted from the 
A., having wished, Th. 3. 2. Juventus ruit certantque, Virg. 





13 


bee) 


§ 501. SYNESIS, ATTRACTION, &¢. 


500. 5. Arrraction. An APPosITIvVE often attracts from 
the regular form of agreement: 


Td uécov Tay TerxG@y oav oradior gpeis, the distance between the walls 
was three stadix,i. 4.4. ‘Earl ridas- .. Roav 62 ratra (for airat) dvo telyn, 
£) the gules ; now these were two walls, i. 4. 4. At O7Bac Atyutros éxade- 
eto, Thebes was called Egypt, Hdt. 2.15. ,Ot yap 6p0aduol, kaddvo-roy 
by [for dvres}, the eyes, being a most beautiful object (502), Pl. Rep. 420 e. 
Aixn.. . wads ob KaXdy, 6 ravra udpwxe; Id. Leg. 937d. Amantium ire 
amoris integratio est, T’er.; Animal quem vocainus hominem, Cic. 


a. This construction occurs chiefly where the true subject is more 
remote or in a different clause ; and might be often referred to ellipsis or 
inversion : “Eorias, 03 [sc. xwpiov| ovre dowwrepov xaptov, the hearth, than 
wiich [spot] there is no holier spot, Cyr. 7. 5. 56. "Herroy dé dt0 Adho 
 ldexr€vn b pyr, I. [is] consists of two high hills, i. e. two high hills [are] 
constitute I., Th. 3. 112. 

b. The attraction is sometimes from an appositive to its subject : “Hdtos 
.. Tavrey haumpdtatos, the sun, the brightest [sc. thing] of all things, 
Mem. 4. 7. 8 (where the more regular A\aumpéraroy, in the gender of the 
Gen. partitive, might also have been used). Indus fluminum maximus, 
Cie. 

e. A word is sometimes attracted from its true subject by a noun gov- 
erning the latter, chiefly in the poets: Tdde vetkos dvéaG7 Ebvapoy [for 
Euvaiuwv], this (kindred strife] strife of kindred men, Soph. Ant. 793. Hévwy 
mpos GAXnv éstiav ropetsouat, I will go to the hearth of other hosts, Kur. Ale. 
538. Meé)dava crodudv rémdwy Tb. 215. “A réxvww dir’ bis. . BAarrotoa 
Soph. O. T. 1375. —In such eases, the Gen. with the word which gov- 
erns it may often be regarded as forming a coneplea idea, which the adjec- 
tive modifies : Odds mats wadds, ay [son's son} grandson, Kur. And. 584. 


501. 6. Caance or Number. The number is often changed 
for the sake of endividualizing or generalizing the expression, 
especially when a distributive or indefinite pronoun is used : 


"Adydovs 5° éxédeve Aeyew, Sua Ti Exarros érhiyn, he bade the rest say, 
on what accownt each one had been struck, v. 8.12. “Hv dé tig rovrwy Te 
mapaBatver, (nulay avtois éerdderay, if any one transgresses any of these 
laws, they have set a penalty for [them] him, Cyr. 1. 2. 2. Atrovpyds, 
olmep kal wdvor cwdfovcr viv, a worker, [one of those] who alone preserve the 
land, Kur. Or. 920. “AdnOhs jv dldos, .. wv dpiuds od words Id. Sup. 
867. “Os ay kdpry tov olkerdv, TobTwV cor ériuedynréoy TdvTaVv, Srws 
Ocoatredntar, whosoever of the servants may fall sick, of all these you must 
take care, so that they may recover, Hic. 7. 387. “Ooris 5° dduxveiro. ., 
mayTas .. dweméureroi. 1. 5. “Aowdferar wavras, @ dy repitvyxdvy PI. 
tep. 566d. “Opa wavra wey dv8pa cBevvivra 7d Top, Suvapévous dé ovKére 
KkarahaBéew Hdt. 1. 87. Odes exouu7On, ob wdvov robs droA\w\éras tev- 
Ootvres Hel. 2. 2.3. See 499a, f. Quisquis amas, hoc cedite, Prop. 


a. When the subject is divided or distributed, the verb sometimes agrees 
with the whole, and sometimes with one of the parts: “Orn ivavro éxa- 
aros, where they each could, iv. 2.12. “Averatovro bé, rou ériyyavev 
Exacros, they rested where each one happened to be, iii. 1. 38. IHdvres dé 
cbrot kata €0vn, év mhaoiw mArjper avOpwrwv Exacrov Td EOvos eropevero i. 
8. 9. “AdXos wpds ddAov StéBadrAov Hel. 2. 3. 23. See 393d. Pictores 
quisque vult, Cic.; Quisque pro se gueruntur, Liv, 

REV. Gr. 14 


314 SYNTAX. R. XXVI., XXVII.— ADJECTIVE. -§ 502. 


502. 7. NEUTER ADJECTIVES are used in connection with 
words of different gender and number (commonly as apposi- 
tives ; cf. 489 d, 491); 

PoBepdratov 5 epyuia, solitude is the most terrible thing, ii. 5. 9 (cf. 
=uuBovr? tepov xXptipa Pl. Theag. 122 b). “Huovye pfAtarov wédis, to me 
the state is the dearest object, Kur. Med. 329. Tl of tatré éorw ; what 
then [are these things] is this? ii. 1. 22. Kplvaca & dordy rev éuav ra 
BedXrata, having selected the best of my citizens, Aisch. Kum. 487. Muxjvac 
puxpov jv, Mycence was a sinall affair, Th. 1.10. Ilpés rév od8ev [sec. dvra], 
against him that is nothing, Eur. Ph. 598. Thy padty els 7d endév Soph. 
Kl. 1166. Mors est extremum, Cie. —(a) In these cases, an adjective agree- 
ing in gender and number with the substantive would either express 
a different idea, or would express the same idea with less emphasis.  (b) 
This use often appears in the construction of the pronoun. 


503. 8. A CHANGE OF PERSON sometimes takes place, 


a.) From the union of direct and indirect modes of speaking, especially 
in quotation : “Ayotr’ av udravov a&vdp’ éxroéav, ds. . kdkxravov, take out of 
the way a senseless man, me, who have slain, Soph. Ant. 1339. “En €0€- 
hew... Eyw yap, én, otda. He said that he was willing... For I know, 
said he. iv. 1. 27. Ovdx éxas otros dvinp . . ds Nady Hyecpa B. 40. 

b.) From a speaker’s addressing a company, now as one with them, and 
now as distinct from them: AavOdvew tpas eis donv Tapax iv n wots Hav 
kadéornkey: éolfkare yap .., olrwes TeOdKapev Isoc. 141d. 


CHAPTER se 


SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE AND PRONOUN. 


I. AGREEMENT. 


(See 492s: for the union of the Dual and Plural, 494 ; for Compound 
Construction, 495s; for Synesis, 498s; for Attraction, 500; for change 
of Number and Person, 501 s.) 


504. Rute XXVI. An ADJECTIVE agrees with 
its subject in gender, number, and case. 


a. The word adjective is here used in its largest sense (173): Tapddeos 
péyas dyplwv Onpiwy wAhpys, a large park full of wild beasts, i. 2.7. Tlddw 
oikoupévny, weydAny cal eddalpova, an inhabited city, large and flourishing, 
Ib. ‘Td ratde dporépa, both the children, i. 1.1. Tokdras Kpfjras S1a- 
kooious, 200 Cretan archers, i. 2.9. Tatryy tiv médw Ib. 24. Geovds 
mavras Kal wacoas*(490 a), all the gods and goddesses, vi. 1. 31. 

b. ANACOLUTHON. An adjective sometimes differs in case from its sub- 
ject, through a change of construction. This occurs chiefly in the participle, 
as less closely joined to the subject, and especially with intervening 
words : “Edogev abtois [= eWndicavro]. ., émuxadodvres, it seemed best to 
them [they voted], alleging, Th. 3. 36. “Hv dé youn rod “Apioréws 
[= edo r5 Apiore?]. ., Cxovte cv TQ icOuQ emernpeiv, it was the purpose 


§ 5006, AGREEMENT OF THE PRONOUN, 315 


of A., keeping (his army) on the isthmus, to watch, Th. 1.62. Aidds pw exer 
[= aldodua:| év 7 3 rituw Tvyxdvovea, [am ashamed, being in this state, 
Eur. Hee. 970. “Yaeori por Opdoos [= Opdoos w exer]. . eA¥oveay Soph. 
El. 479. ‘“Byptv = 71d4, 464] 0 aire xarexrkds6n pidov jrop, SardyTwy 
POS5yyov t. 256. Populo visum. ., rati, Sadi. Cf. 402. 


505. Rute XXVIF A Pronown agrees with 
its subject in gender, number, and person. 


a. By the subject of a pronoun is meant the sustantive which tt repre- 
ents. The rule, therefore, has respect either to substantive pronouns, or to 
adjective pronouns used substantively. The construction of adjective pro- 
nouns as adjectives belongs to RuLE XXVI., and even their substantive 
use is explained by ellipsis (506). Thus, Baotdeds ris wév rpds EavTov 
[i. e. Baci\éa] ériBoudfjs otc yoOavero, the king did not perceive the, plot 
against himself, i. 1. 8. “Ard ris apxijs, 7s [sc. dpy7js] ad’rdr carpdmny 
éroinse, from the government, of which [government] he had made him 
satrap, 1b. 2. ILads rov &8edpdy, ws eriBovredo: aira. ‘O dé welderas, Ib. 3. 
"Ypas.., Secu ésré iv. 6.14. Oavuacrdy roveis, 8s. . didws Mem. 2. 7. 13. 
Mir’ 7NO.ov wjr ardfova prlvecba:.., ed5xer 5’ dv dudsrepa radra, to ap- 
pear neither foolish nor boastful ; but he would seem both of these (491 b), 
Mem. 1. 1. 5. 

b. A pronoun, for the sake of perspicuity or emphasis, is often used in 
anticipation cr repetition of tts subject, or is itself repeated : Tt yap tobrov 
PaKkapLiTEpoy, TOO YQ plxOjvau; for what is happier than this, to mingle 
with the earth ? Cyr. 8. 7. 25. Ketvo xadXiov, réxvov, icdrnra Tiyudy, that 
is nobler, my son, to honor equality, Kur. Ph. 535. ’Avyias dé 6Apxas kat 
Lwpdrys 6 “Axatds, cal Toitw drebavérny, ‘these also died,’ ii. 6. 30. 
Baoidéa . . de? abrov dusoat ii. 4. 7. Otuae décor. . exew av eridetEai wor 
(ic. 3.16. “Hort yap tis 0d} mpsow Zardprns mods Tis Eur. And. 733. 
(c) Intervening clauses often lead to this repetition. 

d. Homer often uses the personal pron. ov, with its noun following : 
“H piv éyeper Navorkdav ev’rer\ov, who aroused [her] the well-clad N., 
§. 48. “Hy dpa oi Gepdrwy exe trousive Nady N. 600. Cf. § 516b. 


I]. OBSERVATIONS ON THE ADJECTIVE. 


506. 1. Eniipsts. The subject of the adjective is often 
omitted, especially if it is a familiar word, or supplied by the 
context. . The words most frequently omitted are, 


a.) MASCULINE, avfp or kv8pwiros, man, xpsvos time: Duvrdéae 6é &xa- 
' orov Tovs €avTod (sc. dvdpas], that each one should arrange his own [men], 
i. 2.15. Td rods kaxods kohafew Kal rods dyabovds riuav, to punish the bad 
and honor the good, Mem. 3. 4. 8 (Oi dyafol dvdpes 2.1. 20). ‘Hydoas 
tpeis- ev @[sc. xpbvw] Kopos daréxrewev, three days; in which [time] C. 
slew, 1. 2. 20. Cf. ev rodrw i. 10. 6, and év rovrw 7 xpsyw iv. 2. 17. 

___b.) FEMININE, yov} woman, yi or Xdpa, land, 686s way, Hpépa dry, 
xelp hand, youn opinion, potpa portion, téxvy art, Ga serson : ‘A Ké- 
higoa [sc. yuv7] i. 2.12. ILopeverOar ds da didlas, to march as through 
a friendly region, ii. 3, 27 (cf. ets pitavy vv v. 1.13; and see 469 b). Tv 
our hv [sc. d6dv] wopevodueda, we shall march the rest of the way, iii. 4. 46 
(see 483d). Ty rplry [sc. nuépa, 469 a]. ’Ey deEa [sc. xecpi], on the right, 
1.5.1. “Ex rijs vixwons [sc. yrijns] erparrov rdvra, ‘according to the 


316 SYNTAX. R. XXVI., XXVIJ. — ADJECTIVE. § 506. 


vote of the majority,’ vi. 1. 18. "Azdéd rijs tons [se. wotpas|, on equal terms, 
Th. 1.15. ‘H rerpwuévyn, destiny, Kur. Hec. 43. “H larpixy, the healing 
art, Cc. 1. 1 (cf. rhv iarpexiy réxvnv Cyr. 1. 6. 15). “Awd mpdrns [se. 
dpas|, from the first, Th. 1. 77. 

c.) NEUTER, TpGypa or Xpipa, affair, thing, pépos part, mABos col- 
lection, body, erpdreva military force, Képas wing of an army, Ywptov 
place, ground, yéves or el8os, class, sort; nature: Ta huérepa, owr affairs, 
1. 3. 9 (cf. TL’ Odpucay mpdyuara vii. 2. 32). “Héexduawe re [sc. wépos| ris 
padrayyos, ‘a certain part of the line,’ i. 8.18. Td Kowdv [se. rhi,Oos], 
the [public body] council, v. 6. 27. Td dé evwvumor, the left, i. 2. 15 (cf. 
TO evdvupov Kképas i. 8. 4). "Ev rm duar@ [sc. xwplw], on the level ground, 
iv. 2. 16 (see 380 b). See 478, 507. : 

d. In cases of familiar ellipsis, the adjective is commonly said to be 
used substantively. The substantive use becomes especially prominent in 
such expressions as, To?s u2v duerépors Sucpevéor, your foes, Hel. 5. 2. 33 ; 
Tis €urs kexrnuévns, my mistress, Ar. Eccl. 1126 (ef. 444 e). 

e. The substantive omitted is sometimes contained or implied in an- 
other word : "Auvydddworv €x T&v mixp@v [sc. duvyéddor], of almonds (the 
bitter kind), iv. 4.13. Zyuivyn.., emt 6€ 7Q Tpitw [sc. onuetw|, ‘on the 
third signal,’ ii. 2. 4. Tewpyety rov wév moddqv [se. yiv] Ar. Eecl. 592. 
Aapjoerat odds [rdnyas|, he shall be beaten with many stripes, Lk. 12. 
47. 

f. Many words which are commonly employed as substantives are 
properly adjectives, or may be used as such: ‘Opdvrns dé Ilépons avip, 
Orontes, a Persian man, i. 6.1. *Avdpa veavlay Cyr. 2. 2. 6. Neavlas 
Abyous, [young] rash words, Eur. Alc. 679. “EAAny’ és ofkov, to a Greek 
home, Kur. Med. 1331. Zrodjv y “EdAynva Id. Heracl. 130. “EAAados 
vis Soph. Ph. 256. Zrparcés ‘EAAdBos Eur. Rh. 233. Tvvatka Tpwata 
Td. And. 867. Tuxn 6 cwthp, protecting fortune, Asch. Ag. 664. — 
These words, as substantives, are commonly appellations of persons or 
countries, avnp, yuvy, yh, &c., being understood. 

g. There seems to be a double ellipsis in the phrase of kingly dignity, 
év terépov [sc. olkov dwuacw, 438], in our palace, at our court, Hat. 1. 
Sh py poe 


507. 2. Use or tHe Neuter. The substantive use of the 
neuter adjective exhibits itself in a variety of forms : 


a. In the sing., a neuter adjective with the article has often the force 
of an abstract, or (b) collective noun ; while (ec) the plur. rather denotes 
particulars of the kind specified : (a) Td 5 aaAoty Kal Td GAnBs Evduufe 
7d abd TO HAC eivar, but [the sincere and true thing] sincerity and truth 
he thought to be the same with |the foolish] folly, ii. 6.22. Zdv T@ Stxalo 
(cf. werd ddcxtas) Ib. 18. Td yaderdy ia nh xaderdrns| Tod wvevparos, 
the [rough nature] rowghness of the wind, iv. 5. 4. Td morév [= 7% zi- 
orts| Th. 1. 68. Tod mepryapots ris vixns, the transport of victory, Id. 7. 
73. TS 7 éudy medOupov, my zeal, Eur. Med. 178. To StaddAdooovre 
THs yvouns, the [differing] difference of opinion, Th. 8. 10 (Thue. is espe- 
cially fond of this use of the Part.). Td wer Se8rds adrod, his [being afraid] 
Jear, Id. 1. 36. Justum colere, Cic. (b) Td @AAv [sc. yévos], the female 
sex, Kur. Here. 536. Td “EAAnvexdy ray, the whole Greek race, Hat. 7. 
139. Td trav [sc. orpdrevual, the cavalry, Mag. Eq. 1.19. 'Td’Ap- 
kadixov OmAuTiKSv (499 a). Neuters in -txéy are especially so used. (ce) Ta 
.. Eddnvixd, the Affairs of Greece, Th. 1. 97. Ta Tpwixd, the Trojan 
War, Ib. 12, Ta Atkaa, Lycea, the Lycwan rites, i. 2. 10. 


§ 509. NEUTER USED SUBSTANTIVELY. 317 


d. Neuter adjectives (both with and without the article) are used with 
prepositions to form many adverbial phrases : ’Am6 Tob abroudrou, of their 
own accord,i. 2.17. “Hy ye 72 davepy, openly, i. 3. 21. Aca raxéwyr, 
rapidly, 1.5.9. "Ex rév dwardy iv. 2. 23. Kara ra’rd, in the same 
way, V. 4. 22. Ad mavrés, throughout, vii. 8.11. Cf. de integro, in pri- 
mis, per mutua, sine dubio. 

e. The neuters wAetov or wA€ov, petov or Etatrov, Scov, pydév, and ti 
are sometimes used as indeclinable adjectives or substantives ; and (f) from 
this, sometimes pass into an adverbial use: Mupiddas wAetov 7) dwdexa, 
myriads more than twelve in number, v. 6. 9 (cf. Kpires wrelous 7} éEjKovra 
iv. 8. 27). “Adup, od pstov dvoty cradiow, the Halys, not less than two sta- 
dia in breadth, v. 6.9. Poiviée Oequediwoas ov petov 7 wePpcators Cyr. 7. 5. 11, 
*"Arroxteivouct TGy avdpay ov pelov mevraxociovs, non minus quingentos, vi. 
4, 24. povpods map ait@ ovk edattrov rerpaxicxiNiwy Hel. 4. 2. 5 (cf. 
Lopevdovira ... ovk €harrovs Terpaxooiwy Ib. 16). Wedracral bcov | = 7o- 
cobra b00.| diaxsoro, targeteers as many as (or about) two hundred, vii. 2. 
20 (cf. “Hyets rorotro bvres BOovs od dpas ii. 1. 16). “Améyou Scov rapa- 
oayynv, ‘about a parasang,’ iv. 5.10. Ipds8ara dcov Oiuara, sheep [as 
many as the sacrifices would be] enough for sacrifice, vii. 8.19. Aifous 
. . dc0v pvaatous Kal m)elov kai wetov Mag. Eq. 1. 16. Ovddev ay rod p dev 
avréarns brép, being a nothing, thou hast contended for one that is nothing, 
Soph. Aj. 1231. Kpeioow ray 7d wnicv, better than those that are nothing, 
Eur. Tro. 412. Aoxotvrwy civar tl, appearing to be something, 1. e. of some 
consequence, Pl. Gorg. 472a. (g) If pydév and tri did not here remain 
without change, they would be confounded with the masc., and the ex- 
pressions would lose their peculiar force. (h) Cf. the Lat. use of plus, 
amplius, minus. So rarely in the plur. form: Hapauéver nuépas mrelw 7} 
tpeis Pl. Menex. 335 b. 


508. 3. An adjective (a) sometimes agrees with a substan- 
tive, instead of governing it in the Genitive partitive ; and (b) 
often so governs it, instead of agreeing with it. In the latter 
construction, the adjective is either in the same gender with the 
substantive, or else in the neuter (commonly the newt. sing.). 


Thus, 


(a) Hep) péoas w«ras, sub mediam noctem, about midnight [the middle 
of the night], i. 7. 1 (cf. év uéow vuxrdy Cyr. 5. 3. 52). Aca péeons dé 777s 
md\ews, per urbem mediam, i. 2. 23. Td &do orpdrevwa, ceterum exer- 
citum, the rest of the army, lb. 25. ’Ev 5’ &kpovor Bas r5o1, going on [the 
extremities of the feet] tiptoc, Eur. Ion 1166. — The substantive and ad- 
jective are thus more closely united. 

(b) Mnde Td orovdaia TOV Tpayparey [for rpdyyuata], unde Tods eb ppo- 
vovras Tay avOpstwyv [for dvOpwrous], neither virtwous actions [the virtu- 
ous of actions], nor wise men [the wise of men], Isoc. 24d. Aapapé- 
tyTds 7, [something of distinction] some distinction, Th. 7. 69. ‘ABpa 
mapnidos, |softnesses of cheek] soft check, Bur. Ph. 1486. "Aonua . . Bots 
Soph. Ant. 1209. — Greater prominence and distinctness of expression, 
and sometimes a species of independence or abstractness (507 a), are thus 
given to the adjective. 


509. 4. Adjectives are often used for adverbs and adjuncts, 


and, by the poets, even for appositives, and dependent clauses ; 
to express, 


Swe) ne SS 


318 SYNTAX. — ADJECTIVES FOR ADVERBS, &C. § 509. 


a.) Time: IIporépa Kupou . . ddixero, she arrived before C., i. 2. 25. 
TedXcutaday éyarérawev, at last he became angry, iv. 5. 16. So often ad- 
jectives in -ates (240. 3): “Adixvodvrar. . tpirato. [= 7H Tpiry Huépe, 
469 al, they arrive on the third day, v. 3. 2. Qui creatur annuus, Ces. 

b.) PLACE: Dknvoduev trralOptor [= bd rhs alPplas iv. 4. 14], we en- 
camp in the open air, v. 5.21. Ae&vav peeyybuevor, screaming on the right, 
vi. 1. 23. QOvpatov olyveiv, to go abroad, Soph. El. 313. ‘EGjuec6’ ébéotior 
Id. O. T. 32. So demonstrative pronouns (especially 68¢ in- poetry) : 
Ilo\Ad 8 6p6 ratra |= ravry, 469 b] mpdsBara, I sce here many sheep, iii. 
5. 9. ‘Os avip 88¢, as the man is here, Soph. O. C. 32. “O8? eiw Opéorys, 
here am TI, Orestes, Eur. Or. 380. “H8’ éraddv éx diuwv tis epyerac 
Id. Ale. 137. “Ipos éxetvos . . Horat, L.-sits there, o. 239. Domesticus 
otior, Hor. 

c.) MANNER: ZuveBddXovro . . wbdres Exotoar, citics contributed will- 
ingly, i. 1. 9 (Exovoiws tahatrwpav Mem. 2. 1.18). *Edéééavro Hdéws Kal 
evOvs elrovro &cpevor, sequebantur leti, vii. 2.9. "“Avicas tpéxe, run 
with all speed, Ar. Pl. 229. Tods vexpods treomév8ous dmediéocay Hel. 2. 
4.19. Venit Telamon properus, Ov. 

d.) Errect: Hidypov | = &ore evpnpor civai] . . Kolunoov ordua, hush 
your mouth to silence [so that it should be silent], Ausch. Ag. 1247. 
Meltov’ éxrev® Abyor, I will extend the tale to greater length, Soph. Tr. 
679. Zd.Kal dixalwy a&lkovs Ppévas mapacme¢s Id. Ant. 791. Xépa to€jpy 

. ordicas Kur. Ale. 35. Premit placida eequora, Virg. 

e.) VARIOUS RELATIONS AND CIRCUMSTANCES: “AAXou 62 Foav éfa- 
KioxtAvoe ta7rets, ‘besides,’ i. 7. 11. ExbAwar weroijpwévar, made of wood, 
v. 2.5. “Av8dpo¢Odpovu [= dvdpds Plapértos| . . aluaros, homicidal blood, 
Soph. Ant. 1022. IloAvSaxpuv ddovay, the joy of many tears, Eur. El. 
126. “O€dyepr [= d&et xepav] ov xrimwm Asch. Ch. 23. Tlapparép 
[= mrdvrwv pwirep] re vy Id. Pr. 90. “Edevos déptorépavtis [= dpioros 
udvris| Soph. Ph. 13838. Sextus nullus discedit, Cie. 

f. This use of the adjective gives to the sentence a closer union of 
parts ; and often a greater energy or vivacity, by binding to the subject, 
or to an adjunct, what would otherwise for the most part be only con- 
nected with the verb. It sometimes modifies the sense. Compare rp@rov 
Tovs Beods éraw® (see Cyr. 4. 1. 2), primum deos laxdo, first (before doing 
anything else), J praise the gods, with wpatos rods Ceods eraw®, primus 
deos laudo, J first (before any one else) praise the gods, and mearovs Tovs 
Oeods €raw®, primos deos laudo, J praise the Govs first (before praising 
others). In like manner are distinguished, pévov rods Geods érawe, pes 
T. 0. €., and pdvovus 7. 0. é€. (solum, solus, solos). (g) Sometimes, chiefly 
in the poets, the adjective simply forms an emphatic pleonasm. 

h. The use of the adjective for a Gen. modifying a substantive (both 
subjective and objective, 444 g) is very extensive ; and, in some instances, 
a Genitive and its adjective appear to have been changed into two adjectives 
agreeing with the governing substantive : IIiévtidy 7’ Aiyatev’ [for révrou 
tT’ Alyaiou| é’ dxrdv, upon the coast of the Aigéan Sea, Eur. Ale. 595. 
TTorapia veotépa re [for rorauod veprépou] kéma, with the oar of the nether 
stream, Ib. 459. 

i. Derivative and compound adjectives are formed in Greek with great 
freedom, and the latter, especially among the poets, often appear to have 
taken the place of a simple adjective or noun, by a species of emphatic 
or graphic pleonasm: Movdparvkas [= pdvous] madous, singly-bridled 
[= single] horses, Eur. Alc. 428. “AyéAats Rovvépots [= Boar] Soph. O. 
T. 26. (j) The poets often repeat a noun in composition with a- priva- 
tive or a similar word, to express emphatically the idea of negation or of 


§ 511, USE OF DEGREES. 319 


evil: Mirnp &phrop, our [unmotherly mother] mother, yet no mother, 
Soph. El. 1154. Vduov &yapov Eur. Hel. 690 (/nnuptis nuptiis, Cic. de 
Or. 3. 58). “Q wdrep aivétatep Asch. Ch. 315. (k) Negative compounds 
are also used for emphatic pleonasm: Tvwrd xovk dyvwrd mot, things known 
and not unknown to me, Soph. O. T. 58. 


TI. USE OF THE DEGREES (256s). 


(The following observations apply both to ADJECTIVES and ADVERBS.) 


510. 1. Words are compared not only by znflection, but 
also by the use of adverbs denoting more and most : an, 


M4ov Piro, magis gratum, more agreeable, Soph. Ph. 886. Tovds ud- 
icra Pirous, the most friendly, vii. 8.11. *“Qmwdetora uGpot Soph. El. 1326. 

a. The two methods are sometimes united for emphasis or perspicuity 
(cf. 262 c, 512): Oavav 5 ay etn paddov eituyéotepos 7) (Gr, dying he 
would be happier, far happier than living, Ear. Hee. 377.  ILodd oby 
Kpeitrov . . paddov 4, much betier . . |vather] than, iv. 6. 11 (cf. [b. 12). 
Médtora Savitatos, fur most formidable, Th. 7. 42. °Q péyrorov éx Biorn 
yivar Eur. Med. 1323. ‘‘ My love’s more richer than my tongue,” Shaks. ; 
‘The most straitest sect,” Acts. 

b. So the Comp. and Sup. are united :°Q racay xelva whEov dupa éd- 
Gotc éx@iora, ‘more than all others, most hateful,’ Soph. El. 201. 


511. 2. The comparative is commonly construed with the 
particle #, than, or with the Genitive of distinction ; and the 
SUPERLATIVE, with the Genztive partitive : as, 


Piodca avriv uiddov Hj . .Apraképénv, loving him more than A. (magis 
quam), i. 1. 4. “Immwy @arrov (408), equis celerius. “Apicros Ileprav 
(419 c), optimis Persarum. 

a. The Comp. is sometimes construed with other particles, which com- 
monly strengthen the expression through the union of two forms of con- 
struction (cf. 510 a): KddXtov . . wpd Tod devyew, more honorable than to 
jice {honorable in preference to fleeing], Pl. Pheedo 99a. ILépa 70d déov- 
Tos copwrepot, wiser than is proper | wise beyond what is proper], Pl. Gorg. 
487d. Ilpds aravras . . reiw, anore [in comparison with all] than all, 
Th. 7. 58. So with rapa beyond, irép above, avri instead of, ért wpon ; 
mply before, ws until ; adrAd but, jv beyond. Ante alios immanior, Virg. 

b. The construction of the Gen. with the Comp. is often elliptical : 
"AO\wrepdv éore pi} Vyrots wHpatos wi) vyiel Wuyy cuvorkxeiv, it is more 
wretched to live with a diseased sowl than [to live with] a diseased body, 
Pl. Gorg. 479 b. T\eiwv xpdvos, bv de? fo dpéoxew rots kdtw, Trav évOdde 
Soph. Ant. 74. See 438b. This elliptic comparison has been termed 
- Comparatio Compendiaria. 

By a mixture of the two methods of construction which belong to the 
Comp., -— (c) When a numeral, or other word of quantity, follows wietov, 
petoy, or €Aarrov, 4 is sometimes omitted, though the Gen. is not em- 
ployed (the Comp. being now construed as an adverb) : ’Amoxrelvovct Tp 
dvipa@y ov uetov revraxocious, ‘not less than 500’ (507 e). (d) To the Gen. 
governed by the Comp., a specification is sometimes annexed with 4: Té 
Tov) dy etipnu ebpov edruvxécrepoy, 7) maida yhuar Baoiéws ; what happier 

ortune could I have found than this, [than] to wed the daughter of a king? 
Eur. Med. 553. Tov votv 7 dpelvw rav ppevaav, 7) viv péper Soph. Ant. 1090. 


320 SYNTAX, —- ADJECTIVE AND ADVERB. § 511, 


See also 513 g. (e) The Gen., very rarely, follows 4, instead of the appro- 
priate case : OU mpojer rAéov Tis Nucpas, 7) déka 7) dweexa GTadlov, he did 
not advance farther in a day, than 10 or 12 stadia, (482) Hel. 4. 6. 5. 

f. The construction of the Comp. with the Gen. is chiefly where 4 wouid 
be followed by the Nom. or Acc. 


512. 3. The positive is sometimes added to the superlative 
for the sake of emphasis : as, 


°Q kaxay kaxore, O vilest of the vile, Soph. O. T. 334. ’Ayaddv tarméwy 
Kpariaros ay immevs, ‘the best of good horsemen,’ Cyr, 1. 3. 15. 
"EPM. °Q. . prapé, cal mapplage, cal praporare, 
Ilds Setp avijOes, O prapav praporare ; 
Ti col ror gor dvoy'; ovx épets; TP. Miaporaros. Ar. Pax 182. 

a. By doubling the Pos. or the Sup., we obtain similar forms of expres- 
sion, the one less and the other even more emphatic than the above : 
"Appyt appnrwv, horrible of the horrible, Soph. O. T. 465. Aechala dec- 
Aaiwy (419 c). “Eoxar éoxadrwv xaxd, Id. Ph. 65 (ef. 262, 510 a). “O 5} 
Ooxel év Tots weyloTos wéytoTov eivac Pl. Crat. 427 e. 

b. From the doubling of the Sup., as in the last example, appears to 
have arisen the phrase évy tots, which is used to modify the Sup.; and, as 
an adverbial expression, without change of gender : “Ev ro?s [se. mpwro:s] 
mparo, [among the first also first] among the very first, Th. 1. 6. “Ev rotot 
[@ecorcrois| Peirarov, marvellous in the highest degree, Hdt. 7. 137. “Ev 
Tots wAetoTae 6} vines Th. 3.17. °Ev rots yaderdrara dcfyov Id. 7. 71. ’Ev 
rots wdduora, ut qui maxime, Pl. Crito 52a. 

c. The nwmeral eis is sometimes used with the Sup., to render the idea 
of individuality prominent : as, A@pa dé mXeloTa ..., eis ye Gv avnp, Ehap- 
Bave, he received the most presents, [at least being one man] for a single in- 
dividual, i. 9. 22. Urbem unam mihi amicissimam, Cie. 

d. The Greeks are fond of expressing the Sup. negatively : as, Ovx ixt- 
cra [= pddora], not the least, especially, Mem. 1. 2. 23. “Avdpav ov rGv 
dduvarwrdrewy Th. 1.5. Méyicrov 6é cal odx Axiora Id. 7. 44. 


513. 4. Certain special forms of comparison deserve notice: 


as, 

a.) The Comp., with a Gen. expressing hope, duty, power of description, 
&c.: Metfor éAridos, majus spe, [greater than our hope] above hope, Aisch. 
Ag. 266. Ma@)vov rod déovros, [more than is proper] too much, Mem. 4. 3. 8. 
Kpeiccov Noyou, beyond description, Th. 2. 50. Opinione celerius, Cie. 

b.) The Comp. followed by 4 kard, or sometimes 4 mpés- as, Meifw, 7 
xara Sdxpua [sc. é€orw], [greater than is in accordance with tears] too great 
for tears, Th. 7. 75. *Evdeearépws . . 7) rpds ri éEovotay Th. 4. 39. Minor, 
quam pro tumultu, cedes, Zac. (c) Sometimes with an Inf. added : Metfw 
.. Kar éus cal oé é&evpetv, too great for me and you to discover, Pl. Crat. 
392 b. 

d.) The Comp. followed by # @o-re (or ds) and the Inf. (sometimes an- 
other mode) : Boax’repa jxdvrefov 7) ws e&cxvetobat, they shot [a shorter dis- 
tance, than they must that they may reach] foo short a distance to reach, 
iii. 8. 7. Met¢or 7) dore pépew Mem. 3. 5. 17. Mefdvws i) ds dee, more 
violently than [as] he was wont, Hdt. 6.107. Meigw. . 4 as r@ Ady@ Tes 
ay etzrot, too great for the power of words, Dem. 68. 20. Melgova . . } as 
él Ieoldas, greater than as [it would be] if against the P., i. 2. 4. 
(ec) We likewise find the Inf. without @ore or @s, and also the Pos. 
for the Comp.; Td yap réanua perfor 7) pépew, for the malady is too great 


§ 515. COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE. 321 


to bear, Soph. O. T. 1293.. Tamew} tudy 4 didvora eyKaprepely, your mind 
is too weak to persevere, Th. 2. 61. WYuxpdv, pn, wore Novoacbar Eoriy, 
“too cold for bathing,’ Mem. 3. 13. 3. 

f.) The Comp. and Sup. (for the most part joined with atrdés) followed 
by a reflexive pronown, to denote the comparison of an object with itself ; 
the Comp. representing it as above what it has been or would be in other 
circumstances, and the Sup. representing it as at its highest point : ’Ap- 
Operdrepos yiyverat aitds avrod, he becomes more manly [himself than him- 
self] than he was before, Pl. Rep. 411 ¢. “Iv avrés abrot rvyxdvy Bédricros 
av, where he {happens to be the best spec imen of himself ] can do his best, 
Kur. Ant. 20. Awardrepot avrol avrav éyiyvovro Th. 3. 11. “Ore dexvéd- 
Taros cavrod Taira jz0a Mem. 1. 2. 46. (g) To the Comp. thus con- 
strued, a specification is sometimes annexed with 4 (511d): Adroi éavray 
[dap Saredrepol elow], emedav udOwow, 7) mplv wabetv, they have themselves 
more confidence when they have learned, than they had before learning, P1. 
Prot. 350 a. 

h.) Two comparatives connected by 4, to denote that the one property 
exists in a higher degree than the other: Zrparyyol mXeloves 7} Bedrioves, 
generals more numerous than good, Ar. Ach. 1078. Lp3500mos wadXov 7 oo- 
gwrépa Uur. Med. 485. But also IpoOdszws paddov 7) hirws, with more 
eagerness than good-will, Asch. Ag. 1591. Concio fuit verior quam gra- 
tior, Liv.; Magis audacter quam parate, Cic. 

i.) The omission of paiddoy before 4: BovAow’ eyw Nady odor Euwevar [se. 
HGNov |} }) amohécOa, I wish the people to be safe, rather than perish, A. 117, 
*Bysol mexpds TéIvynKev 4) Kelvous yNuKvs, his death has been more bitter to me 
than sweet to them, Soph. Aj. 965. Ipsorum quam Annibalis interest, Liv. 


514. 5. The comparative and superlative are often used 
urthout an express object of comparison. In this case, the SUPER- 
LATIVS zncreases the force of the positive, while the COMPARATIVE 
may either encrease or diminish it, according to the object of 
comparison which is implied. Thus, 

"2 Bavpacrarate dvOpwre, O most wonderful man, iii. 1. 27. Tih rayi- 

‘orny, wnmediately, iii. 3.16. Idebo [sc. rod déovros] éXexrar, [more 
than is proper] too much has been, said, Kur. Ale. 706 (cf. 513a). Ned- 
TEpos ay és Td dpxew, being too young for the command, Th. 6.12. Ma- 
Kpdotepov . . dinyijoacba, wt is [longer than it might be] rather long to 
relate, P\. Conv. 203 a. | Médos eUTovor, cypouKkdrepoy, an energetic strain, 
somewhat rough, Ar. Ach, 673. Tis r@v amrepotrépwy, one of the more in- 
experienced, v. i. 8. Vir clarissimus, Cic.; Liberius vivebat, Nep.; Se- 
nectus est loquacior, Cic. 

a. The Comp. and Sup., when used without direct comparison, are said 
to be used absolutely ; otherwise, relatively. In the former use, the Comp. 
is often translated into Eng. by the simple Pos., or by the Pos. with too 
or rather ; and the Sup. (‘‘ Superlative of Eminence”), by the Pos. with 
very. See 513 e, 515. 


515. 6. The degrees are more freely interchanged and 
mixed, than in English. It may be however remarked in gen- 
eral, that the use of a higher degree for a lower renders the 
discourse more emphatic, and the converse, less so. Thus, 


Tatrny podiora [for mond waiddov| Tis Képns domdgerat, this she chooses 
far rather Faden the virgin, Eur. Iph. A. 1594. “AgvoNoyérarov ray mpo- 


REV. GR. 14* 


322 SYNTAX. — ARTICLE. — EARLY USE, $515, — 


yevyernuévwv, [the most remarkable of those which had preceded it] more 
remarkable than any which had preceded it, Th. 1.1. ’Q BéXrvete ray 
cavrod dikwy Ar. Pl. 631 (cf. Comitum pulcherrima). ”“Oxvupopéraros 
ddNwv A. 505. ‘Hudy 6 yepatrepos [for yepairaros}, the oldest of us (though 
none of them were old), Cyr. 5. 1. 6. “Avéxpayov wayres ws éAlyas [ se. 3A7- 
yas] raiser, they all cried out that he had given him too few blows, v. 8. 
12 (cf. 514). Oi mwodAol, the [many] most, Mem. 1. 1. 19 (cf. Oi wAetorer 
Ib. 11 ; Tots wAeloon Hel. 2. 3. 34). Of 6 yepatresor, but the [older] old 
men, Cyr. 1. 2. 4. Ti vedtepov . . yéyover, what new thing has happened, 
Pl. Euthyph. 2a (so xawérepov), Newrépwy riwes er:Ouyobtyres mpayuaruv, 
‘a revolution, Hel. 5. 2. 9 (Novarum rerum avidi, Sall.). IloA\a dy od 
BeAtvov avrots crépecOa, ‘not well for them,’ Cyr. 5. 1. 12 (so, especially 
in negation or interrogation, duewov, Kpeirrov, KdANov, KUdtOv, HOvov, XElpor, 
&c.). See 408 a, 419. 
‘¢ Adam, the goodliest man of men since born, 
His sons, the fairest of her daughters Eve.”  Jfilton. 


IV. USE OF THE ARTICLE. 


A. Broap USE. 


516. 1. Ertc. The article (6, 4, 7d) appears, in the Epic 
language, aS & GENERAL DEFINITIVE, performing the office not 
only of an article as usually understood, but still more frequently 
of a demonstrative, personal, or relative pronoun (249 8): as, 


‘O yépwr, the old man, A. 33; Tad 7 drowa déxecOat, accept this ransom, 
20; Td cdr pévos, that wrath of thine, 207 ; ‘O yap AdOe, for he came, 12 ; 
Tév, whom, 36; Ta ev ronliwy €& érpabomev, Ta SédacTar, 125. 

Nore. These uses are intimately allied, inasmuch as, — (a) The art., as 
usually understood, is simply a less emphatic form of the demonstr. pron.; 
and so, for the most part, the personal pron. of the 3 Pers. (but used as a 
substantive). Cf. ‘* 7hat man whom you see,” and ‘‘ 7’e man whom you 
see”; ‘* Those that love me,” and ‘‘ Zem that love me,” Prov. 8. 17, 21. 
(8) The demoustr. pron. used connectively becomes a relative: * Blessed 
are they that mourn.” — (y) We cannot, therefore, expect to draw a precise 
line of division between the use of the article as such, and its use as @ pro- 
noun. (8) Observe the resemblance in form between the English article 
the, and the pronouns that, this, they, &c.; the derivation of the definite 
art. in the French, Italian, Spanish, &c., from the Lat. demonstr. dle ; 
and the extensive use of the German article der, die, das: Der Knabe den 
wir lobten, der hat’s gethan, the boy whom we praised, he has done it. 


In Epic poetry, — (a) The article, in its proper use as such, is commonly 
not expressed. The same omission prevails to a great extent in other 
kinds of elevated poetry. (b) When used asa personal pronoun, it is most 
frequently connected with the same particles as in Attic Greek (518) ; and 
is not unfrequently followed in the same sentence by the substantive to 
which it refers: ‘H & éomero IladXds, and she, Pallas, followed, a. 125. 
Ai & éméuvéay ’Abyvaty re xal“Hpy A. 20. Cf. 505d. (ce) As a demon- 
strative, it sometimes follows its substantive before a relative : DuvOecidwy 
Taov, ds éréredXe, those instructions which he gave, B. 319. (ad) The article 
when used as a personal or demonstrative pronoun has sometimes, from 
its position (518f), or for the sake of the metre, the same form in the 





§ 519. USE AS A PRONOUN. 323 


Nom. with the common relative : “Os yap devraros #\Ocv, for he returned 
last, a. 286. Myo’ ds diya Z. 59. “O yap yépas éorl Oavivtwr, for this is 
the honor of the dead, &. 9. 


517. 2. Ionic anp Doric. In the later Jon. -and in the 
Dor. writers, this extended use of the article was, in great 
measure, retained. I. ¢. in Hdt., the relative has in the Nom. 
sing. and pl. the forms és, 7, rd, of, ai, ra+ and has elsewhere the 
t- forms of the article, except after prepositions which suffer 
elision, in the phrases of time, év @, é& ob, és 6 (or of), péexpe (Or 
a 8, and i doubtful readings 
aypt) ov, and in some doubtful readings. 


518. 3. Artic. The use of the article as a demonstrative 
and personal pronoun remained in Attic Greek, (a) in connec- 
tion with pév and 6¢; (b) in poetry with ydp; and (c) as the 
subject of a verb, after «ai, and : 


(a) “O 8&[sc. ddeAp)s] weiPerar, and he [the brother] ts persuaded, i. 1. 8. 
Oi piv dyxovro, Kéapyos dé repieueve, they went, but C. stayed, ii. 1. 6. 
"Ex 8 ray (the common order after a prep.) udduor eye, and of them I 
most, Soph. O. C. 741. (b) ‘O yao péyioros avro's ruyxadver Jopvidvey, for 
he {Phanoteus] ts the greatest of their allies, Soph. El. 45. Ts yap zé- 
gpixa wnrpds Id. O. T. 1082. Td yap. . ordmov pépos, for this is a rare 
lot, Fur. Ale. 473. (c) Kat rdv droxpivacba Néyerar, and it is said that 
he answered, Cyr. 4. 2.13. Kat rdv cededoa Ib. 1. 3. 9. 

d. The article with pév and 8€ is commonly used for contradistinction, 
and we may translate 6 piv. ., 6 8€, this. ., that, the one. ., the other, 
one. ., another, &e.: 'O pev paiverat, 6 6é cwdpove?, the one is mad, the other 
as rational, Pl. Phiedr. 2440. Oi ev duwmkovres . ., of 5° apwdforres, these 
pursuing .., and those plundering, i. 10. 4. ’Ev wév dpa rots cunpwvotyuer, 
ev 6é Tots 03, in some things we agree, and in others not, Pl. Phedr. 263 b. 
‘O wey Foxe, of bé EreiPovro, he commanded, and the rest obeyed, ii. 2. 5. 
Tp wev.., TH 5, here. ., there, iv. 8.10 (469b). Ta w& re paxdpuevor, 
Ta 6é kal dvarraviuevo, ‘{as to some things . . as to others] partly . . part- 
ly, ‘now. . now,’ iv. 1. 14 (488 a). 

e. ‘O 8€, when used as a pronoun in the Nom. (even without 6 pév pre- 
ceding), commonly denotes a different subject from that of the preceding 
sentence. The exceptions belong especially to the Epic and Ionic. 

f. The proclitics in the nominative (0, h, oi, at) require, from the very 
laws of accent, that the particle, in connection with which they are used, 
should follow them. If, therefore, it precedes, they become orthotone, or, 
in other words, take the forms which commonly belong to the relative 
pronown (250). This change takes place with kat uniformly, and with 8€ 
when it follows 7 for py (45 u): Kal és eOatuace, and he wondered, i. 8. 
16. Kai of efor vii. 6. 4. "H 6° és, 6 TAavcwr, said he, i. e. Glauco, Pl. 
Rep. 327 b. *H 6’ #, said she, Id. Conv. 205¢. So, later, “Os pév rewa, 
és Bi meOver, one is hungry, another drunken, 1 Cor. 11. 21. 


519. In its r- forms, this use of the article also occurs, (a) 
before the relatives és, écos, and ofos ; (b) in some special forms 
of expression ; and (¢) sometimes, through poetic imitation of 
the earlier Greek ; while (d) the tragedians even give these 
forms to the relative pronoun : 


324 SYNTAX. R, XXVIII. — ARTICLE, § 519. 


(a) Tot 6 gor, of that which is, Pl. Phedo 92d. Kal rov &s gn, he 
who said, Lys. 167.15. Ipocijxe: kal prcety Tods otéomep obTos, it 1s proper 
to hate {those such as] such men as this, Dem. 618. 9.  Ilept rexvGv Trav 
éorat wep) radrd edor PI. Soph. 241 e. — In this construction, which occurs 
chiefly in Plato and the orators, the sentence introduced by the relative 
may be regarded as a defining clause, to which the article is prefixed (see 
523). 

(b) ILpé rod (also written rporod) before this ; te therefore (cf. 466. 1) ; 
76 ye, followed by 8rt: the article doubled with kat or 4: Ips rod ais 
jjoOa, you were once a child, Pl. Ale. 109¢. Ot mpd Tod Piro, former 
Friends, Kur. Med. 696. Tw. . cxerréov, therefore we must consider, PI. 
Thewt. 179d. T6 ye ed ofda, 67. ., this I well know, that. ., Pl. Euthyd. 
291a. Hird kal 7d eroincey dvOpwros obrosi, otk av arébavev, if this man 
had done this and that, he would not have died, Dem. 308. 3. “Agixvoduat 
ws Tov kal tév, I go to this one and that, Lys. 94. 3. With the article. 
again repeated : "Eder yap To Kal Td rorfoa, Kal Td wh Torta, for this and 
that we ought to have done, and this not to have done, Dem. 128. 16. Kw- 
duvetew . ., Srws uw) TA TA YevyjceTat, GAN Srws TA, ‘not these or those, 
but TrHEss,’ Id. 1457. 16. The nominative 8 Kal 8s (518 f) oceurs, Hdt. 
4, 68. 

(c) Tov. . pbicov, him destroy, Soph. O. T. 200. Tatv por pédrecbar, 
take cure of these for me, lb. 1466, “Aorépas, drav pbivwow, avTodds Te 
tov, ‘their risings,’ Asch. Ag. 7. 

(d) Kretvaca tots od xpiy xraveiv, having slain those whom she ought 
not to slay, Kur. And. 810. Tov Oedv, rdv viv péyes, the god, whom you 
now blame, 1b. Bac. 712. (e) This substitution of the r- for the aspirated 
forms (250) in tragedy, scarce occurs, except to avoid hiatus, or lengthen a 
short syllable. 

f. On the other hand, the aspirated forms are sometimes found with 
pév and 8é for the r- forms (518 a, d) : I1d\evs “EAA nvidas, As pev dvaipar, 
cis Ads 8€ rods fvydéas xardywv, ‘some destroying, and to others,’ Dem. 
248.18. “As pev xareianpe riders. ., Twas 8€ wopGet Id. 282.11. Otis 
piv. ., Tots 8€é, to some. ., to others, Kur. Iph. T. 419. So, ‘Oré perv. ., 
éré dé, sometimes . ., at other times, Th. 7. 27. “Oré 6é Ven. 5. & 





B. Tur ARTICLE PROPER. 


520. Rute XXVIII. The Arricrz is prefixed 
tO SUBSTANTIVES, to mark them as defile. 


a. The Greek article, in its specific and later developed use as an article 
proper, corresponds in general to the definite article in our own and other 
modern languages. It is often, however, when used substantively, and 
sometimes when used adjectively, translated into Eng. by a demonstrative 
pronoun (527, 523 h). With a participle following, it is most frequently 
translated by a relative and verb, preceded, if no antecedent is expressed, 
by a personal or demonstrative pronoun (527). It is often omitted in 
translation, especially with proper names, abstract nouns, nouns used ge- 
nerieally, and pronouns (522, 524, 531); and must be often supplied in 
. translation when not expressed (533). In Lat., it is only partially rep- 
resented by adjective pronouns: ‘‘ Noster sermo articulos non desiderat, 
ideoque in alias partes orationis sparguntur.” Qudnéil., 1. 4. 19. 

b. The article may be separated from its substantive by words modify 
ing the latter (523 a), by particles which cannot stand first in the clause 


$522. GENERIC ARTICLE. 325 


(as pév, S€, yap, ye, ré, 84), by the pronoun tls in Tonic, and sometimes 
by other words : Tay ris llepréwy, one of the Persians, Hdt. 1. 85. 
ce. A substantive used ind2finilely wants the article : KaNds yap @noav- 
pos, map avdpl crovdalw xdpis dpeiouevn, a favor due from a good man ts 
an excellent treasure, Isoc. 8b. See 548 a. 


521. A substantive used DEFINITELY is either employed in 
its full extent, to denote that which is known, or, if not employed 
in its full extent, denotes a definite part. 


a. Compare, ‘‘ Man is mortal,” where man is used in its full extent of 
application, to denote every individual of a known race, and is therefore 
definite ; ‘‘ The man whom we saw,” where man is not used in its full ex- 
tent of application, but is yet definite as denoting a particular and known 
individual ; and ‘‘If a man love me” (Jn. 14. 23), where man is indefi- 
nite, simply denoting any one of the race. 

b. The article, according as it is joined with the substantive in the first 
or the second of these uses, is distinguished as the generic or the limiting 
article. 

l. Generic Article. 


522. <A substantive employed in us full extent, to 
denote that which is known, may be, 


a.) A substantive used generically, i. e. denoting a whole class or kind ; 
as 7 yuvyj, women (for the whole sex), of dvOpwiror, men (all men), of “A@7- 
vatot, the Athenians (the whole nation) : ‘O dvOpwios “ dvOpwmros” dvoud- 
cOy, man (Fr. Vhomme, Germ. der Mensch, &c.) was named dvOpwros, Pl. 
Crat. 399. Tay “EAXqvev 6é éxwy émXiras . . Tpiaxociovs, ‘ of Greeks,’ 
i. 1.2. See 533c. (b) To this head may be referred substantives used 
distributively, which consequently take the article: Kiépos trucyvetrac. . 
Tpla jrdaperks TOD pPyVvds TWOTpATLATY, C. promises three half-darics [the 
month to the soldier| @ month to erch soldier, i. 3. 21. If &kaeros, each, 
is expressed, the article may be used or omitted : “Exagroy 7d €0vos (523 b), 
each nation, i. 8.9. “Hxacroy ackdy iii. 5. 10. 

ce.) A substantive expressing an abstract idea ; as 4 dpery, virtue (Fr. 
la vertu) : “H cwdpocivn, kal 7 éyxpdreca, Kal ) add«h Cyr. 7. 5. 75 (533 ¢). 

d.) An infinitive or clause used substantively, or a word spoken of as 
such ; Ava 7d hoPeioSar, through fear, v. 1. 13. Td dvoua 6 &vOpwros, the 
name évOpwiros Pl. Crat. 399 ¢ (the article conforming by attraction to the 
noun following, inasmuch as the word évoua expressed sufficiently shows 
that dv@pw7os is spoken of merely as a word ; cf. 491 a, 500). 

e.) The name of a monadic object (one which exists singly in nature, or 
is so regarded ; povadixss single) ; as 6 Hdw0s, the sun,  cedivn, the moon: 
“Exe Tpoply 7H Yi dd r00 obpavod, the earth receives nutriment from the 
heavens, Hic. 17. 10. See 533. 

f.) The name of an art er science : ‘H tarpuxi cal 7) xadkevruch Kal 7 
TekToviky, medicine and brasiery and carpentry, ic. 1. 1. See 533 ¢. 

g.) A proper name, which has been before mentioned or dinplied, or 
which is well known : Aca Ppvyias:. . ris Ppvylas ridw, through Phrygia; 
.. acity of said P., i. 2. 6,7. KOpos rhv Kittooar els ryv Kiduxlay dro- 
méumer, Cyrus sends the Cilician queen to Cilicia, i. 2. 20. ‘Trép rijs ‘EA- 
Addos, in behalf of Greece (their native land), i. 3. 4. Observe the use 
and omission of the article in 418 a; and see 523h, 533 a. 

h. Proper names appear the rather to‘take the article, from their being 


‘A 
4 


326 SYNTAX. — ARTICLE. § 522. 


so extensively, in their origin, either adjectives used substantively (506 f), 
or common nouns used distinctively (530), Thus, “H ‘Eddds [se. v7], [the 
Greek land] Greece, Fr. la Grece (cf. England, the land of the Angles, Fr. 
L’Angleterre ; Scotland) ; Tijs Muaias, of Mysia, vii. 8. 8, but T7 Muoig 
x pa, i. 2.10; ‘O ‘EAAjorrovros, the [sea of Helle] Hellespont ; “O Ierexdi,s 
[sc. avy], [the Hlustrious Man] Pericles ; ‘O Pidermos, [the Horse-lover] 
Philip ; “Avha Mveds 70 yévos kal totvous rotro éxwv v. 2. 29. (i) The 
adjective construction is frequent in the names of rivers ; and is some- 
times found in other names of places, where the gender and number per- 
mit : ‘O Malavdpos morayds i. 2. 7 (cf. The Connecticut river). Thy Mé- 
Onv widkw Th. 4. 130. Thy BorBnv riwrny Ib. 1. 58. 


2. Limiting Article. 


523. 1. A substantive not employed in its full ea- 
tent may be rendered defile by a limiting word, 


phrase, or clause. 


a. (ORDER OF Description.) A limiting word or phrase is usually 
placed, either (1) betaveen the article and its substantive, or (2) after the sub- 
stantive with the article repeated, or (3) as in the second order, but with the 
article omitted before the substantive ; while these different positions may 
be repeated or combined : ‘O ayaOds dvip, or 6 dvip 6 dyads, or dviip 6 aya- 
65s, the good man. To BactXerov onuetov (443.¢). Tods nev yap kivas Tos 
xaXerovs, savage dogs, v. 8. 24. LZrabuav trav eyyurdrw ii. 2.11. Td 
mepi Tov Iepacd retyos Hel. 4. 8.9. Td tis rod Ealvovros tTéxvys epyor, 
the work of the carder’s art, Pl. Pol. 28la. ’Ev rats cadmas rats barép rod 
medlov Tod mapa Tov Kevrpirny iv. 8.1. Tas peyddas Hdovas Kal Ta éyald 
Ta peydda Cyr. 3. 3. 8. 

b. (ORDER OF STATEMENT.) On the other hand, words and phrases 


not belonging to the definition or description of the substantive, but to ~ 


that which is said about it in the sentence, regularly either (4) precede the 
article, or (5) follow the substantive without a repetition of the article : 
*"Ayabds 6 avip or 6 dvip ayabds [sc. ecru], the man is good. “Ort Kevds 6 
pipos etn, Kal oi dpxovres oa@or, that the fear was groundless, and the gen- 
erals safe, ii. 2.21. Wirt éxov rhy xepariy, having the head bare, i. 8. 6. 
‘[8potvre 7Q im (467 a). “Eeobe tryendve 7@ ‘Hpaxde?, follow Hercules 
as leader, vi. 5. 24 (cf. Ta ‘“Hyeudue “Hpaxnde? vi. 2.15). “Ev rp d-yope péoy, 
in the midst of the forwm, Dem. 848. 13 (508a; but Td péoov oridos, the 
centre division, i. 8. 13). Td xépas éxdrepor vil. 1. 23. 

c. A modifying Genitive has, however, much freedom of position, and 
other adjuncts are less strictly bound by these rules than adjectives or 
appositives. A limiting Genitive not only takes the first three orders 
according to the rule, but often the 5th order, and sometimes (chiefly for 
emphasis) the 4¢h ; while the Gen. partitive, which regularly takes the 
order of statement, sometimes takes an order of description : (1) Thy ray 
BapBdpwr dirlav, the friendship of the barbarians, i. 3. 5. (2) Thr @vya- 
Tépa Thv Baoidéws ii. 4. 8. (3) ’Eml oxnvhy livres rhv Zevoparvros, going to 
the tent of X., vi. 4. 19. (4) Tod d€ Kixdov % meplodos, the length of the 
circuit, iii. 4. 11. (5) Ty reXevry rod Biov i. 9. 30. (1) Tots “EAAjror 
twrovowwrdros Th. 1. 25. (d) A prepositional adjunct takes the 5th order 
more freely after a verbal, or when another modifier has taken the place 
between the article and substantive : ‘H Evyxomd) éx« Trav dypav és 7d dorv, 


£524, LIMITING ARTICLE. 327 


the crowding from the country into the city, Th. 2. 52. Tis rev yuvarkGv 
didias wpds Tods dvdsas, the love of wives to their husbands. Hier. 3. 3. 

e. Some modifiers may be placed in either of the two classes (b), accord- 
ing to the view which 1s taken of them : Ilaécay riv 665y, all the way, 1. 5. 
9 (or Tiv wacav*0dlv, the whole way ; without the art., waca wév odds, every 
way, 1.5.9). Ot mdvres dvOpwro, Ildvres of dvOpwra, all men, v. 6. 7; 
(He. 17. 3 (wdvras avOpwmous Cyr. 7. 5. 52). So das, cUuras, bos whole. 

f. The use of the article with some adjectives, in representing a part as 
definite, should be observed : ’Audixparns kai &AXov, A. and others, iv. 2. 
17. ‘“Eopev@noav, 7 ot GAXou, ‘the others,’ ‘the rest,’ Ib. 10. “AAXo dé 
orpareupa, and another army, i. 1.9. ‘Td &ddo orparevua, the rest of the 
army, i. 2. 25. IlLodd rod orparetuaros, ‘much of,’ iv. 1.11. Td peév 
6) Todd Tod “EANyyixod, ‘the greater part,’ i. 4. 18. IDodXol, many, iv. 
6. 26. Tods moddcis, the [many]} most, Ib. 24. ’OXlyou dwébvnckov, few 
died, iv. 2. 7: Il\eiw rovTwy drrodaver 6 dyXos 7) of Odyo., ‘the few,’ ‘ the 
aristocracy,’ Rep. A. 2. 10. So often with superlatives and ordinals. See 
419, 515. 

g. A clause limiting a substantive commonly begins with the relative 
pronoun ; and is usually placed according to order 5th, by which the im- 
mediate junction of the article proper and the relative (originally one, 
249s) is avoided. If it precedes the substantive, it commonly excludes 
the article. Thus, “Awd rijs dpxifs, fs adrov carpdmny éroince (505 a). 
Otro, ods Cpate, BapBapo, these barbarians whom you sze (524 b), i. 5. 16. 

h. A proper name followed by an article in agreement with it, is rarely 
preceded by another, except with special demonstrative force : Kopov rév 
apxatov, UC. the elder, i. 9.1. But, ‘O 6& Didavds 6’ AuBoaxrdrns, but that 
Silanus the Ambraciot (who had been the chief soothsayer of the army), 
vi. 4. 13. 

i. In the third order, the substantive is sometimes first introduced as 
indefinite, and then defined ; and this subsequent definition sometimes 
respects simply the kind or class. Kpiyn 4) Midov xadouuévn, a fountain 
[that called Midas’s] which was called the fountain of Midas, i. 2. 18. 
IfodXol dé orpovOoi of meyddor, and many struthi, the large ones, i. e. 
ostriches, i. 5.2. Kadpva .. moda rd mdaréa, ‘of the broad kind,’ v. 4. 29. 

j. When the substantive is preceded or followed by successive modifica- 
tions, the article is sometimes repeated with each : ’Ev 77 Tod Aus rH peyl- 
arn éopty, tn the greatest feast of Jupiter, Th. 1.126. Ta re relyn rae 
éauTa@y Ta waKkpa ameréesay, they completed their own long walls, Ib. 108. 

k. A modification is sometimes divided between two positions (oftenest 
the Ist and 5th): Tots dhvaci Oeois ta Te dvelpara, to the gods who had 
sent the dream, iv. 3.13. Tov tav &dAdov Odvaroy otpatnyay, ii. 6. 29. 
Ilepray rods dpicrous tav wept adrov érrd i. 6. 4. 

524. Remarks. 1. It is common to employ the article 
even when the substantive is rendered definite (a) by a posses- 
sive or (b) demonstrative pronoun : 

(a) ‘O éuds marip, my father, i. 6. 6. “Ouua rodudy [= 7d eusv, 125], 
Cyr. 8. 7. 26. Thy juerépay xwpar iv. 8.6. To viuw 73 buerépy vii. 3. 39. 

(b) The pronouns odros and 88, as themselves beginning with the 
article (252), do not take it immediately before them, and éxetvos follows 
their analogy. These pronouns are therefore placed according to 523 b, 
except when separated from the article by another modifier : Tav’ras ras 
modes, these citics, Tivde tiv rpérov, “Exelvys ris hu€pas, Tov dvdpa rodror, 
i.1.8,9; 7.18; 6.9. ‘O pév avyp 58 Apol. 29. ‘H orev) atrn d6és, 
this narrow way, iv. 2. 6. 


‘oe Pa) ae ae a © 


328 SYNTAX. — LIMITING ARTICLE. § 524. 


ce. In prose, when the article is omdtted with a demonstrative pronoun 
and a common noun (except as in 533, and in some special deictic uses, 
543s), the pronown is regularly employed as a subject, and the nown as an 
attribute : "Hisri ev yap trevia atrn caps, this is manifest poverty, Ke. 8. 
2 (cf. Airy H &vdera, this want, lb.). Attn ab Gdn rpidacas Fv, this again 
was another pretext, i.1. 7. Kivnows yap atrn peylorn . . éyéveto Th. 1. 1. 


525. 2. Upon the same principle, the article is prefixed 
to words and phrases, which are joined with a proper name or a 
personal pronoun to give definiteness or emphatic distinction : 


Tov Baoirevdovra ‘Apracépény, [the reigning Artaxerxes] Artawerxes the 
king, 1.1.4. Mévwv 6 Oertadds i. 2.6. Zd.. 6 mperPiraros Cyr. 4. 5. 
17 (cf. 401. 1). “H roadaw’ éyd, J, the wretched one (by eminence) Soph. 
KE]. 1138. Tov doeBA we Id. O. T. 1441. ’Odexduav 6 tédas Soph. Tr. 
1015. ‘O tAnpev. . Few Eur. And. 1070. 

a. If, on the other hand, no distinction is designed, the article is omitted : 
mevopav AOnvaios, X., an Athenian, i. 8.15. Iaraytas dvhp Iépons Ib. 1. 
"Eyo rddas, I, unhappy man, Soph. O. C. 747. ’"AgéAkopar SUornvos Ib. 844. 


526. 3. An adverb preceded by an article has often the 
force of an adjective. This construction may be explained by 
supposing the ellipsis of a participle, commonly év or yevdpevos : 


Tov viv xpivor, the [now time] present time, vi. 6. 13 (Tév dvta viv xpé6- 
voy Hur, Ion 1349). “Kv r@ mpéoVev [sc. yevouévw] Noyw il. 1. 1. Tod rére 
Baovéws, the then king, Cyr. 4. 6. 3. Thv thpepov nudpay iv. 6.9. Tov 
mavu Ilepixdéous, the great P., Mem. 3. 5.1. Tijs otxade 6600 iii. 1.. 2. 

a. Soa prep. with its case: Tot év Aeddots xpnornplov, the Delphic ora- 
cle, Cyr. 7. 3.15. “Apuevia . . ) mpbs éotrépav, Western Armenia, iv. 4. 4. 

b. This adjective may again, like any other adjective, be used either 
substantively or adverbially (527 s, 529). 

527. 4. The substantive which is modified is often omitted, 
as a familiar word or supplied by the context ; and in the former 
case, the article is commonly regarded as used substantively with 
the word or phrase following (506 d, 520 a) : 

Tay mapa Baoiéws [se. dvdpdv], of those from the king, i. 1. 5. Tar 
wept tThv Onpav, the hunters, Pl. Soph. 220d. Td wépav rod rorapod, the 
opposite side of the river, iii. 5. 2. Ti 7d cwdbov etn, what it was that pre- 
vented, iv. 7. 4. ‘O undev dv, he that is nothing (507 e), Soph. Aj. 767. 

a. The phrases of apt and of arept, followed by the name of a person, 
commonly include the person himself, with his attendants or associates ; 
and sometimes, by a species of vague periphrasis, denote little more than 
_ the person merely: Ot 6é audi Ticcadpépryy, [those about T.] 7. and those 
with him, iii. 5. 1 (ef. Ticoapépyns cal of dv ait Ib. 3). Ot epi Zevo- 
povra, Xenophon with his men, vii. 4. 16. Ot pév wepl rods KopwAious, 
the Corinthians with their allies, Hel. 4. 2.14. Oi wept Kéxpoma [i. e. Keé- 
kpow] Mem. 3. 5. 10. So Ot pera ’Apcatov i. 10. 1. 

528. 5. When the neuter article is used substantively with 
a word or phrase following, (a) the precise idea (as, in English, 
of ‘thing’ or ‘things’) must be determined from the connection, 
and (b) not unfrequently the whole expression may be regarded 
as a periphrasis for an included substantive : 


7 a i 


§ 530. PREVIOUS MENTION, CONNECTION, &C. 329 


(a) Ta rob yipws, the evils of old age, Apol. 6. Ta rept Ipokévou, the 
fie of Proxenus, ii. 5. 37. “Hv rots éwdve,[in the above] tn the preceding 
narrative, vi. 3.1. Ta wap éxol €\éz0at avrl rdy oko, to prefer remain- 
ing with me to returning home, i. 7. 4. Td rav adeéwy, the habit of fisher- 
men, Gic. 16.7. Acd:éva: 7d Trav tratdwy, to have the boyish fear, Id. Phiedo 
77 (478). Td rod Nodoxdéous, what “s said by S., Id. Rep. 829c. Of. 507. 

(b) Td rijs tuxys, the course of fortune, = y tixn, fortune, Kur. Alc. 
785. Td rdv mvevudrwyr, the state of the winds, = ru mveduara, Dem. 49. 7. 
Ta rhs dpyis = 7) 6py7, Th. 2. 60. “Hrqver ra Basitéws, extolled the king, 
Hel. 7. 1. 38. ‘Qs 5) od cidpwv, raya [rd Era = Lyw] 8’ ody! cegpova 
Id. And. 235. Cf. 507, 499d. 


529. 6. The NEUTER AccusATIVE of the article is often used 
in forming adverbial phrases, in connection with, 


a.) Adjectives (483 a): Td rpdroy, at first, i. 10.10. Ta mpara, first, 
Soph. Tr. 757. 0 mp5repov, before, iv. 4. 14. Td madarsy iii. 4. 7. 

b.) Adverbs (526 b): Td dda [se. dr], [as to that which was of old] 
anciently, Pl. Phedr. 251b. Td mpicGer, before, i. 10.10. Tod wpiv Eur. 
Ale. 977. Todurarw, back, vi. 6. 38. Td wdurav Pl. Tim. 41 b. 

c.) Prepositions followed by their cases : To amo rodde, [as to that after 
this] henceforth, Cyr. 5.1. 6. Td mds éorépay, to the west, vi. 4. 4. 


530. u. A substantive not employed in us full 
eatent may also be definite (a) from previous men- 
tion, mutual understanding, general notoriety, or emphatic 
distinction ; (b) trom contrast ; and (c), in general, 


from the connection in which it is employed : as, 

(a) Ooptfov Hxovce . ., kal jrero rhs 6 OSpuBos etn, he heard a noise, and 
inquired what THE NOISE was, 1. 8.16. "Ore BfpEns torevoy dyetpas Tihv 
avaplOn.nrov otpatiay 7\Gev, ‘that innumerable army,’ iii. 2. 13. Tov 
&vdpa opG, J see THE MAN [i. e. Artaxerxes], i. 8. 26. “Avaxadobvres TOV 
mpoooTny, exclaiming, ‘the traitor !’ vi. 6. 7. 

(b) Contrast may give a degree of definiteness to expressions which are 
otherwise quite indefinite ; and may even lead to the employment of the 
article with the indefinite pronoun tis: "Immous. ., Tods pév TIVas 74) 
Erol, TOUS BE TH Kredpxw xarareAeyuudvous, horses, some with me, and others 
left by C., iii. 3.19. So with numerals denoting part of a whole: ‘Ev 
éxdoTw Tpets dvdpas, Gv ot piv Sto ExBdvres eis rdEw eOevTo Ta Oa, 6 BE cis 
éueve, ‘of whom two. ., but the third,’ v. 4. 11. Ta 8to pépy, [the two 
parts from three, 242 d] two thirds, Th. 2.47. Cf. 518 a. 

(c) “Enre:d) dé éredevrnoe Aapetos, cal xaréorn eis Tv Bacidelav Apra- 
&épEns, ‘had succeeded to the throne [se. of Persia],’ i. 1. 3. 

d. A substantive is often definite as denoting that which is natural, 
usual, necessary, proper, &c., in the circumstances : "Ev pev rp dpirrepa 
xewpl TO Sdpv Exwy, ev 6é 77H Seka BaxTyplav, (Clearchus) having in the left 
hand his spear, and in the right a staff (the spear a part of his regular 
equipment, but not the staf’), ii. 3. 11. See e. 

e. With substantives which are rendered definite by the connection, 
a possessive or genitive pronoun is often implied in the article : Ticoadépyns 
diaBddree Tov Kopoy awpds tov a8eApdv, 7’. accuses CU. to [the] his brother, i. 
1.3. Kopds re kararndjcas drd Tod Upparos Tov Odpaka evdédu, Kal dva- 
Bas érl tov Urwov Ta wadtA cis Tas xetpas Chae, U., leaping from his 
chariot, put on his breastplate, &c., i. 8. 3. So, familiarly, in French. 


330 SYNTAX. — ARTICLE. § 53%. 


531. From a reference to something which precedes or is 
mutually understood, or for emphasis, the article may be even 
joined, (a) with an interrogative pronoun, (b) a personal pro- 
noun, (c) a pronoun of quality or quantity : 


(a) Ad\Na.. OA\w co. . dinyijoacOa... Ta wota; ‘TF will relate to you 
other things.” ‘‘{[The what ?] What are they?” Ce. 10.1. IIdoyxer be 
Oavpacrév. Tart; ‘He has met with something wonderful.” ‘*What is 
it?” Ar. Pax 696. (b) Ev@vs hpev od mapaBddrdes ;. . Ilapa tivas rods 
tpas ; ‘Will you not come straight tous?” ‘**[To the you being whom] 
Who are you?” Pl. Lys. 203 b. Tov epé, the me, i. e. me, of whom you 
speck, Id. Phil. 20a. Tov éavrév, [the himself] his great self, 1d. Pheedr. 
258 a. (c) Td Tovotrov dvap, such a dream as this, ili. 1.13. Thy tHrr- 
Kattyny dpxjv Pl. Leg. 755 b. —So even with a pronoun already combined 
with the article: Td re @itepov kal 7d Tairéy (125) Pl. Tim. 44 b. 

d. The article is often joined with a rownd number used for comparison 
or general statement (especially with épot) : Ei wev tov prplav edridwr 
pia Tes buy éort, tf you have one chance in [the] ten thousand, ii. 1. 19. 
IleAraoral 6é audi tots StoxAlovs, targetcers about [the] two thousand, i. 
2.9. His ra exarov dpuara Cyr. 6. 1. 50. — The number is thus present- 
ed as familiar to the mind, or as a deiinite standard. 


532. Osservations. 1. The article is sometimes found 
without a substantive, through anacolithon or aposiopeésis - 


‘H ray a&\dwr ‘EAA jvwv , elre xpi) Kaxloy cir Byvoway . . eieiy, the 
, whether I should say cowardice or folly of the rest of the Greeks, 
Dem. 231. 21. Ma rév ——, ov ot ye, not you, by (the name of the 
god omitted, as the old grammarians say, through reverence). Pl. Gorg. 
466 e. 











533. 2. Omission oF THE ARTICLE. With substantives 
which will be readily recognized as definite without the article, 
it is often omitted ; particularly with 

a.) Proper names, and other names resembling these from their being fa- 
miliar titles of persons or otherwise specially appropriated (522). AcaBan- 
New Tov Kipov, SvAd\auBdver Kipor, pds Kipov, Ipds tov Kopov, O dé Ko- 
pos, Kipos 6é, i. 1. 3, 6, 7, 10; 2. 5. Els ryv Kutcxlav, Els Kedcxlay, i. 2. 
20, 21. “Aua HAlw ddvorri, “Aua TO pAlw Svomévy, ii. 2. 18, 16. “Ore Bo- 
péas . . péper, voros dé v. 7. 7. (b) Hence Bacwdeds, in its familiar 
application to the King of Persia, commonly wants the article: Baohevs, 
Ilapa Baodéws, “Eml Baoihéa, "Evixuev tov Bacrdéa, ii. 4. 1, 8, 4. 

c.) Abstract nouns, names of arts and sciences, and nouns used gener- 
ically (522): Ktpos . ., tipos dé, Td edpos. ., Kal 7d bos, in breadth . ., 
» and in height, ii. 4.12; iii. 4.10. Avdpeia, cal cwppootyn, Kat dixaroctvy 
Pl. Phedo 69b. Tewpyiav re cal rhv rodent réxvnv he. 4. 4. Oceoce- 
Péoraroyv . . tawv &vOpwiros Pl. Leg. 902 b. Ldv To's Oeots, Zdv Oeots, Ipis 
Tiv OeGy, IIpds Ceadv, iii. 1. 23, 24; vii. 7.7; v. 7. 5. Distributively, 
“Eva amd dvds, one from [a tribe] each tribe, Hel. 2. 4. 24. 

d.) Familiar designations of place, time, and related persons or objects ; 
His 76 dor, His dorv, into the city [‘‘into town”), Hel. 2. 4.1, 7. Ent 
tais Ovpats, El @dpais, at [the door] court, Cyr. 8. 1. 33, 34. “Ama rq 
Hpépa, “Ana juéog, at daybreak, iv. 1.5; vi. 8. 6. “Hos (€omépa) eyé- 
vero, it was morning (evening), ii. 4. 24; iv. 7. 27. So with wins city, 
ayops forum, retxos wall, aypss country, y} land, 0dacca sex, ctkos house, 


§ 534, | USE AND OMISSION. 331 


woe night, @xp spring, warip father, whrnp mother, yuvyn wife, mats child, 
coun body, Wux7 soul, deEvd (apiotepa), right (left) hand, movs foot, dipv 
spear, agmis shield, &c. 

e. " Ordinals and Superlatives (523 f) : Kat tptrov éros TY Tone €TE- 
Aevra, ‘the third year,’ Th. 2. 103. His ‘Iocovs, ris Koduxlas éoyarny mi- 
Awi. 4. 1. 

f. The article is more freely omitted, as in Eng., when two or more 
nouns are coupled together ; and also after a preposition or governing 
adverb : “HXiov re kal cedins cal dorpwv kal yijs kal alddpos kal dépos Kat 
mupos kal UdaTos Kal woe Kai évavTod, of sun, moon, stars, &c., Pl. Crat. 
408 d (Tov Hdcov, “H cedyvyn, Ta dorpa, &c., Ib. 408s). Oavydorat 7d Kadd- 
Ros kal TO péyebos, wonderful for beauty and size, ii. 3, 15. ‘Lard xdddovus 
Kal weyéOous adiyynrov Cyr. 8. 7. 22. Tots dpxouvor rijs Oaddoons, .. Tots 
Ths vis, to those that rule the sea (the land), Rep. A. 2.4. Tots wév xara 
Oddarrav dpxovow, . . Tots dé kara viv Ib. 5 

If two substantives are placed in comparison, the article is common- 
ly joined with both, or with neither: Ovddémore . . \votredéoTeEpoy dOtKia 
Oikacoovrns, injustice is never more gainful than justice, Pl. Rep. 354 a. 
Avotredéorepov 4 adixia Tis Sixatocvvns Ib. b. 

h. It will be observed that the generic article is most freely omitted in 
Greek, as it also is least used in English. Cf. its prevalence in French. 


534. 3. The subject of the sentence, from its distinctive prominence, 
has the article more frequently than an adjunct; while a predicate ap- 
positive commonly wants it, as simply denoting that the subject is one (or 
more) of a class. Hence the article is often useful in distinguishing the 
subject, and sometimes appears to be used especially for this purpose : My 
pvyn ely 7 &dobos, lest the departure should be a fight, vii. 8. 16. *Eyard- 
ptov 0 fw rd Xwploy i. 4.6. Ta Sls wévre déka eoriv, twice five is ten, 
Mem. 4. 4. 7. Ot puptor tatmets oddév cdo 7) ptprol elow dvOpwrror ili. 2. 
18. Ocds Hv 6 Adyos Jn. 1. 1. 


Tis 0 oidev, ef rd LA mdv eore KaTOavely, 
To katOaveiv 62 Cv Kdtw voulferar. Eur. Pol. Fr. 7. 


2 


4. When words or phrases are coupled by conjunctions, they are more 
elgsely united in conception, if only a single article is used ; less closely, 
if the article is repeated: Tovs ricrods kal edvous kat BeBatous, the faithful, 
Sriendly, and steadfast, i. 9. 30. Tar ENjvev kal trav BapBdpwr, of the 
Greeks and of the barbarians, i. 2. 14. 

5. The insertion or omission of the article often depends, both in 
poetry and prose, upon emphasis, euphony, or rhythm ; and upon those 
nice distinctions in the expression of owr ideas, which, though they may be 
readily felt, are often transferred with difficulty from one language to an- 
other. Its omission, in many cases, doubtless comes from the retention 
of earlier usage (516 a). In general, the insertion of the article promotes 
the perspicwity, and its omission, the vivacity of discourse. It is, con- 
sequently, more employed in philosophical than in rhetorical composition, 
and far more in prose than in poetry. It should be remarked, however, 
that there is perhaps none of the minutiz of language in which manu- 
scripts differ more, than in respect to its insertion or omission, especially 
with proper names. 


te: 


332 SYNTAX. —- PRONOUNS. § 535. 


V. OBSERVATIONS ON THE PRONOUNS. 


535. a. Of the observations which follow, many apply 
equally to PRONOUNS and ADVERBS of the same classes. 


b. In the use of pronouns, especially those first presented below, it is 
important to distinguish between the stronger and weaker forms of ex- 
pression ; that is, between those forms which are more distinctive, emphat- 
ac, or prominent, and those which are Jess so. 


c. As pronouns are used so largely for distinction, the choice or rejec- 
tion of a form in a particular instance depends greatly upon the wse of 
other pronouns in the connection. ‘The use of the pronouns is likewise 
much influenced in poetry by the metre, and even in prose, to some ex- 
tent, by euphony and rhythn. 


d. From the natural tendency in the progress of language to greater 
distinctiveness of expression, the stronger forms prevail more in the later 
than in the earlier Greek. Observe the New Testament use. 


A, Prrsonat, RErLEXxIvE, AND PossEssiIvVE (27s). 


536. 1. The PreRsonaAL PRONOUNS (a) are commonly omit- 
ted in the Nom. (as implied in the affixes of the verb, 271), 
except for emphasis or distinctness of reference. (b) If needed 
in the Nom. of the 3d Pers., they are supplied by the article, 
or, as a stronger form, by the demonstrative pronoun. (c) They 
are also omitted in the other cases, when understood from the 
connection, more freely than in English. (d) In the weaker 
form for these cases, they are enclitic in the Ist and 2d Per- 
sons sing., and are commonly supplied in the 3d Person by 
aités; while (e), in the stronger form, they are orthotone 
throughout, and are supplied in the 3d Pers. by the artecle*or 
still stronger demonstrative. Thus, 

"Aravra soa drédwxd wor, érel kal od enol dmédecEas Toy dvdpa, I gave 
you back everything safe, when you also had shown to me the man, v. 8. 7. 
"O 8é éumrium\ds ardvrev Thy ywouny dréreure (sc. abrovs], and he dismissed 
them, satisfying the wish of all, i. 7. 8. Ovre od éxelvas pireis, ore éxet- 
vat oé, neither do you love them, nor they you, Mem. 2. 7.9. “H8 ; oby 
Oaveirat, she then will die, Soph. Ant. 751. "Hy& uév, & dvdpes, Hn vpas 
€raw@: Orws dé kal twets eye erawéoere, Ewol wedjoet, 7) perc pe Kupov 
vouigere i. 4.16. Tovrea cvyyerijevos 6 Kopos, yydo0n Te avrov, Kal didw- 
cw air@ i. 1.9. See 518, 530¢. Natura tw ili pater es, consiliis ego, 
Ter. 

537. 2. In REFLEX REFERENCE, the distinctive and emphatic 
forms are those of the so-called reflewives (244); while the 
forms of the common personal pronouns and of airés are also 
used as weaker forms, chiefly when the reference is both i- 
direct and unemphatic. 





§ 538. PERSONAL, REFLEXIVE, AND POSSESSIVE. 333 


*Epavte ye Soxd cvverdévat, to myself at least I seem to be conscious, vii. 6. 

ll. AlsxvvecOai por doxd, [1 seem to myself to be] J feel ashamed, i. 7. 4. 
‘Opivras, . . dv ero tiorsy ot ecivar, Taxd a’rov etpe Kipw pidrairepor, 4 
éavto, O. soon found the man whom he believed to be faithful to him, more 
a friend to C. than to himself (O.), i. 9. 29. KeXevouvot d:acdcavra avrots 
Ta MpsBara, TA wey adTdv AaBety, TA be Odlow darodotvat, they bid him save 
the sheep for them, taking some himself, and returning them the rest, vi. 6. 
5. “Apedely Hav abray, to neglect ourselves, i. 8.11. Lapédocay of rav- 
Tes THUS AVTOUS, ‘ surrendered themselves,’ Th. 7. 82. 
a. Ifa pronoun used reflerively and its subject are both related the most 
closely to the same verb or participle, the former is termed a direct reflex- 
ive ; (b) but otherwise, indirect : (a) Ods éyw.. xaredéunv éuot, which I 
laid up for myself, i. 3.3. ‘Agimmedver érl ri éavtod oxynviv, he rides 
back to his own tent, i. 5.12. (b) Ipdrrere orotov dv re bptv oinobe war- 
ora cuudépew, do whatever you think will most benefit yourselves, ii. 2. 2. 
Aéyerat Amd\Awv exdetpar Mapcvay . . épigfovrd ot, A. is said to have flayed 
M., who contended with him, i. 2. 8. Zod pév Hyovpevos airas emcfnutous 
elvat ocavt@ Mem. 2. 7. 9. 

c. A common reflexive or personal pronoun is sometimes used for the 
reciprocal pronoun : “Hpiv aitots duadefducda, we will confer with each 
other, Dem. 1169. 5. “Empdéauev .. mpds hpas elpqynv, we made peace 
with each other, Dem. 20.16. Povobvres Eavtots pucotow adddAjdovs Mem. 
2. 6. 20. Bovd\erde . . attav ruvO.verOar; Dem. 43. 6. (539d). Collo- 
quimur inter nos, Cie. 


538. 3. In the stronger form, (a) the Gen. possessive of the 
personal pronoun is commonly supplied in the Ist and 2d Per- 
sons, and sometimes in the 3d, by the possesseve adjective 
(252. 5); and (b) so, of the reflerive plural, with the addition 
of avrav, while (c) a like substitution in the sing. is poetic : 


(a) "Hyds d2 dde\p5s, frater meus, a brother of mine (ef. rov ddekpSy, 
fratrem, 530¢), i. 7. 9. Tovds hwerépovs Pirous, ow friends, Ib. 7. Tov 
ay réxvwy, his children, Soph. Tr. 266. (b) Tos hperépors atrav d/dos 
(498). “Amom)edoa: ard Tijs ohitépas adtay, to sail from their own land, 
Rep, A. 2. 5. (c) "Edy (€dv) adrod xpe%s, my (his) own interest, B. 45; 
a. 409. To?s oto avrod, suis ipsius, Soph. O. T. 1248. 

d. This substitution is sometimes made for the Gen. in its other uses 
with substantives, even the Gen. objective (444 g): Td cdv déxos, the mar- 
riage you talk of, Soph. Ant. 573. Zday épw, & ‘Edévn, ‘the dispute for 
you, Kur. Hel. 1160. iia 77 o7, love to you, vii. 7. 29. Mi peraue- 
New cor Tis Euts Owpeds, that you may not regret your present to me, Cyr. 
8. 3. 32. Zs re w50os (Desiderio tuo, Ter.), longing for you, , 202. 

e. In Attic prose, the only possessive pronoun for the 3 Pers. is opére- 
pos, which is used reflexively, and with no great frequency ; while the 
poetic or dialectic 8s, éds, and ods (28 e, n) are very rarely used except 

- as reflexive. 

- f. The weaker form of the Gen., from its want of distinctive emphasis, 
is rarely preceded by the article, and therefore follows the rule of position 
in 524b; while the stronger form of the Gen., and the possessive adjective 
follow the rule in 523a: T3 camari adrod, Td peév Exvt0d cOua, lis (own) 
body, i. 9. 23. “H éxelvay b8os cal ) Hwerépa vropia iii. 1. 21. *Aré- 
wes pé pov Tov deorsryy Ar. Pl. 12. Todv Biov Tov épavrod Pl. Gorg. 488 a. 
‘TH yao wdda: tpav dios, our ancicnt nature, Pl. Conv. 189d. (g) The 
Gen. of adrés, however, in its stronger, and especially its reflexive uses, 


. 


334 SYNTAX. — PRONOUNS. — OY. §.538. 


may take the position of €avrot : Adrol cal ol abrav orpariGrat, they them- 
selves and their men, vi. 2.14. “ExéXever. . OéoOar Ta Sra Tepl Thy at-" 
Tov oxnvyp (cf. els Thy ExvTOd oxnvyy) i. 6. 4. 


539. 4. The third person being expressed demonstratively 
in other ways, the pronoun od became simply a retrospective 
pronoun, 1. e. a pronoun referring to a person or thing pre- 
viously mentioned. 


As such, it performed the office both (a) of an wnemphatie reflexive, and 
(b) of a simple personal pronoun ; rarely (c), in Epic, of a general reflexive, 
without respect to person. (d) This last use appears oftener in its deriva- 
tives (even in the Attic, in éavrot and odérepos). — (a) See 537. 2, a. 
(b) Zuvépacdy ot, they agreed with him, Cyr. 3. 2. 26. Aéyew re éxé\evev 
avrovs, Stu ovdev dy Hrrov odes aydyour, bade them say, that they could 
lead no less, vii. 5. 9. IpotréOy olor dédyos Hel. 1.7.5. (ec) Eto pev 
otd’ 7Badv arigoua, I tremble not in the least for [one’s self] myself, Ap. 
Rh. 2. 635. Bovdevoure wera olor, ‘among yourselves,’ K. 398 (Sov- 
Aevovot Bek.). (d) Adpuacw oto dvdccois, may you rule [one’s own] your 
own house, a. 402. pecly jow [= éuats] v. 320. Act quads dvepéoOat 
éavtous, we ought to ask ourselves, Pl. Phedo 78b. Kndalw. . adr apds 
abvthv Soph. El. 283. Ovde yap rhv éavtot ot ye Wux hv opads, nor do you 
see your own soul, Mem. 1. 4. 9. Eizep irép cwrnpias attav [= tudv av- 
Tav] ppovrigere Dem. 9. 13. Hbpyoere was attovs uaprykiras, ‘ your- 
selves,’ Hel. 1. 7. 19. Tav ogerépwv Ppoupiwy, our fortresses, Cyr. 6. 1. 
10. Sui juris sumus, Pawll. 


e. Some of the forms of od are used with great latitude of number and 
gender. Thus, (a) ply and viv commonly sing., but also plur. (especially 
viy) ; viv, him Aisch. Pr. 333, her Kur. Hec. 515, 7 Soph. Tr. 145, them, 
masc. Soph. O. T. 868, fem. Id. O. C. 43, neut. Alsch. Pr.-55 ; piv, them, 
Ap. Rh. 2. 8. (8) edé properly plur., but also (especially in the tragie 
poets) sing.; opé, them, masc. A. 111, fem. Soph. O. T. 1505, him Aisch. 
Pr. 9, her Eur. Alc. 834. (y) ety rarely sing.: Hom. H. 18. 19, Asch. 
Per. 759. (8) € commonly sing. masc. and fem., but sing. neut. A. 236, 
plur. Hom. Ven. 268. (e) So the derived possessives : éés, their, Hes. Op. 
58 ; odérepos, his Id. Sc. 90, Pind. O. 13. 86, my (cf. d) Theoe. 25. 163, 
thy Id. 22. 67 ; egwitepos (from both 2 and 3 Pers. dual), Ais, Ap. Rh. 1. 
643. 

f. The place of od as a reflexive is commonly supplied in Attic prose by 
éavtotd, and as a simple personal pronoun, by avrés. The plural occurs 
far oftener than the singular, which, except the Dat., is in Attic prose 
very rare. The disuse of the Nom. sing. of this pronoun (246 e) is ex- 
plained by its reflexive character. 


B. AYTOS (251, 28 c). 
540. The pronoun airés marks a return of the mind to the 
same person or thing. This return takes place, 


a.) In speaking of REFLEX ACTION or RELATION. Hence airés 
is used with the personal pronouns in forming the REFLEXIVES. 
See 244. 


§ 541. AYTOS. 335 


b.) In designating a person or thing as THE SAME which has 
been previously mentioned or observed. When thus employed, 
avrds (like the corresponding same in English), being used for 
distinction, is preceded by the article (523 a) : 

‘O abrés dvip, rarely 6 dvhp 6 airés or dvyp 6 avrés, idem vir, the same 
man. TH dé aira juéoa, and upon the same day, i. 5. 12. Otros dé 6 av- 


ros, and this same person, Vii. 3. 3. ’Exetva ra adtd Mem. 4. 4. 6. Tatra 
éracxov iii. 4. 28 ($ 125). See 451. 


c.) For the sake of EMPHASIS, one of the most familiar modes 
of expressing which is repetition. When airéds is thus employed 
in connection with the article, it is placed in the order of state- 
ment (523 b) : 


Adrds 6 dvi, less freyuently 6 dvp avrés, vir ipse, the man himself. 
Adros Mévwy éBotero, Meno himself wished tt, ii. 1. 5. Kipos rapedatywv 
a’ros obv Iiypntvi. 8.12. Avra ra dd Tay oixiay Evra, the very wood 
From the houses, ii. 2.16. Kal OeoceBéorarov airs éort mavTwy Swwy dy- 
Opwimos, ‘the very most religious,’ Pl. Leg. 902 b. See ili. 2. 4. 

d. The emphatic atrés is joined with pronouns in both their stronger 
and their weaker forms (commonly preceding them) ; and (e) is often used 
in the Nom. with a pronoun wnderstood. (d) AtdT@ por gocxev, AUTO epor 
. . dd&er, it scems (shall seem) to myself, Pl. Pheedo 60¢, 91a. Adrod Tov- 
Tov évexev, on this very account, iv. 1. 22. Ot dé orpariGrat, ol re adTob 
éxe(vou Kai of dddot, ‘ both his own,’ i. 3. 7. Adrol &kacrot pavodyras Cyr. 
6. 2. 4. Soin adverbs: Adrod ravry, in this very place, on the spot, Hdt. 
1.214, “Ev0d5 aidrod Ar. Pl. 1187. (ce) Adrés ob éraidevoas, Aros éraidev- 
cas, you yourself educated, (Ec. 7. 4, 7. Avrol xatovew, they themselves 
burn, iii. 5. 5. Adrés elu, dv frets ii. 4.16. “lao@ae adros 7d Trpadud 
not, ‘ that he himself healed,’ i. 8. 26. 

f. In like manner, airds is used without another pronoun expressed, 
in the oblique cases of the third person: AGpa dyovtes aire Te Kal TH Yyu- 
vatxt, bringing presents both for himself and for his wife, vii. 3.16. “Eareu- . 
yey. . orpatiitas ods Mévwy eixe, cal adrév, ‘and M. himself,’ i. 2. 20. 
(g) From the gradual extension of this use to cases in which there was no 
special emphasis, appears to have arisen the familiar employment of adrdés 
in the oblique cases, as the convmon pronoun of the third person (536 da). 
In this unemphatic use, adrés must not begin a clause. 

h. Sometimes (chiefly in the Epic), ards occurs in the oblique cases, 
with the ellipsis of a pron. of the Ist or 2d Pers.: Adray yap drwriped’ 
appadinaw, we were undone by our own folly, x. 27. Awthy (sc. cé] & 27. 

i. In the later Greek (e. g. the S. S.), atrés sometimes appears in the 
Nom., simply as a strong pronoun of the 8d Pers.: “Ore adrot mapaxdy7- 
covrat, for they shall be comforted, Mat. 5. 4. 

j. The emphasis of atrdés sometimes lies in mere contradistinction : 
Aira ovyS: . . Tay Bporois dé miuara dxovcare, ‘those things I omit, but 
hear,’ Alsch. Pr. 442. “Os, ® wat, oé 7 ov« éxav Kdkravov, cé T adrday, 
‘both you, my son, and you too, my wife,’ Soph. Ant. 1340. 


S41. The emphatic force of airés has led to some special 
uses (see also 467 ¢) : 


a.) Xwpet adds, he goes [himself only] alone (solus), iv. 7. 11. <Adrot 
yap éoper, for we are by ourselves, Pl. Leg. 836 b. Adrods rods orparyyovs 





336 SYNTAX. —- PRONOUNS. — § 541. 


dmoxanésas, having called the generals apart, vii. 3. 35.  (b) Y.dTol "EXX7- 
ves, o0 pmucoBdpBapor, ‘pure Greeks,’ Pl. Menex. 245d. (c) “AAXd tis abros 
irw, ‘of his own accord,’ sponte, P. 254. (d) Ovx« adrd dexacoodyny émrat- 
voovres, not praising justice in and of itself, Pl. Rep. 363a. (e) Updos aire 
Ty oTpaTevuart, [by the army itself ] close to the army, i. 8. 14. “Lmép av- 
Tov Tod éavray atparevuaros, ‘directly above,’ iii. 4. 41. (f) Adrés épa 
(Pythagorean), ipse dixit, [himself the Master said it. See Ar. Nub. 219. 
(g) After an ordinal: Iepixdéovs 8exatrov abtot orpatnyobvros, P. com- 
manding [himself the tenth] with nine colleagues (Fr. lui dixiéme), Th. 1. 
116 (cf. “Apxesrpdrov... wer &dA\wy Séxa otparyyobvros Ib. 57). *“Hpxe 
Awateds . . telros avros Id. 8. 35. But, atrés omitted : Aapefos . . KaBav 
avrTip [i. e. Thy apxiv] €BSon0s, ‘with six confederates,’ Pl. Leg. 695 c¢. 
Cf. "Ivddv rorapdv, bs kpoxodel\ous SedTEpOs OVTOS ToTauay mdvTwY Tapexe- 
rat, the river Indus which [the second this of all rivers], with one other 
r.ver only, breeds crocodiles, Hdt. 4. 44. 

h.) A reflexive is frequently preceded by airés, agreeing with the same 
subject ; and the two pronouns are often brought into close connection, in 
disregard of the natural order: ’Amoxretvar héyeTar adTds TH EavTOD xeELpl- 
"Aprayépony, he is said [himself] with his own hand to have slain A., i. 8. 
24. Alcxwvers rhrw Tiv airds airod, you disgrace your own city (539 d), 
Soph. O. C. 929. Tots 7 abrds abtrot riuacw Baptverar Asch. Ag. 836. 
Totov madatoTip viv mapackevdgerat, em aires atto Id. Pr. 920. See 


513 f. . 
C. Demonstrative (28, 252). 


542. 1. Of the primary demonstratives, the more distant 
and emphatic is éxeivos, ille, that; the nearer and more familiar 
is ovros or d0e, hic, thes : 

Kay éxelvous doxq, kal rovrous KaxGs rovjoovat, tf those should wish u, 
they will even injure these, Pl. Phedr. 231 ¢. ; 

a. The two may be combined to mark the connection of the MORE 
REMOTE with the NEARER; as of the past with the present, of a saying with 
_ its dlustration, of that which has been mentioned with that which 7s pres- 
ent before us, &c.: Totr’ [sc. éori] éxetv’ obyw ‘Aeyor, this is that which I 
said, Ar. Ach. 41. Totr éxetvo, nrao8’ éErafpous, this [is] verifies that pre- 
cept, ‘‘Gain friends,” Eur. Or. 804. 48’ éxe?vo Id. Med. 98. “Hd gor 
éxeivyn Tobpyoy 7) Eeipryacuévyn Soph. Ant. 884. Hue illa Charybdis, Virg. 

b. Ovros sometimes marks the ordinary or familiar, and éxetvos the 
extraordinary : "Exovres tovTovs Te TodS ToduTENEs XiTavas, having on the 
rich tunics which they are in the habit of wearing, i. 5. 8. Tov’ Apuoretdny 
éxetvoy, that remarkable A., Dem. 34. 20. Ile Demosthenes, Cie. 

c. In the Epic, dye (also written 8 ye) is much used with reference to a 
preceding subject, to give it prominence ; sometimes in the second of 
two closely connected clauses: Harhp 6 éuds. ., Swer Sy 7 TéOvnKe, my 
Sather, he is living or dead, B. 131. °Ex Ildd\ou d&er dgtvropas nuabderros, 
7) Bye Kal Zardprndev, he will bring allies from sandy Pylos, or even from 
Sparta he, B. 326. Nune dextra ingeminans ictus, nune éle sinistra, Virg. 


543. u. The pronouns ofros and 6d have in general the 
same force, and the choice between them often depends upon 
euphony or rhythm: Tovtw gurciv xpy, Tode xp) mavras oeBeev, 
these we must love, these all must revere, Soph. El. 981. Yet 
they are not without distinction. 


§ 546. DEMONSTRATIVE. 337 


a. Ovros, as formed by composition with airds, is properly a pronoun 
of identification or emphatic designation (it may be regarded as a weaker 
form of 0 aires, the same, 540b); while 88, arising from composition 
with 8¢, is strictly a deictic pronoun (decxrixds, from deixviue to point out), 
pointing to an object as before us (see 252). Hence, 


544. 1.) For reference to that which precedes or is con- 
tained in a subordinate clause, obros is commonly used ; but for 
reference to that which follows and is not contained in a sub- 
ordinate clause, 68¢ : 


Texunjptoy 6¢ rovrov kal ré8e, and of this (which has been stated), this 
(which follows) ts also a proof, i. 9. 29. *Hal rovrors Revopdv rae clzre, 
to this Xenophon replied as follows, ii. 5. 41. Ovrot, ois dpaire, BapBapor 
(5232). Totro mp&rov jpdra, rirepov AGov ety, ‘this, whether,’ &e., iii. 1.7. 

To the retrospective character of ovros may be referred, 


a.) Its use preceded by kal, in making an addition to a sentence, the 
pronoun either serving as a repetition of a substantive in the sentence, or, 
in the xeuter Acc. or Nom. (commonly plur., 491 c¢), of the sentence itself : 
Zévous wpotjxer gor twoddov’s SéxetOar, Kai TovTovs [sc. déxecAar] weyado- 
mper@s, it becomes you to entertain many guests, and these magnificently, 
Cic. 2. 5. “BBonPncav ry Aaxedaiuon, Kal tadra [sc. éroincay] eidéres 
(491 c). Aedbrake rhv wbdw, kal ratTa dreixiorov otcav Ages. 2. 24. 

b.) The use of totro and tratra in assent: Aci trdpyew Kal duvarods. 
-..”Eori tatra. ‘They ought also to be competent.” ‘‘This is so.” PI. 
Rep. 412¢. Hiclwuevr. Tatrd vuy [sc. roduev or éotw]. ‘* Let us go in.” 
** Ves.” Ar. Vesp. 1008. So Kal roird ye, "Eorw ottrws, Pl.; Towtra 
Kur. Fl. 644 (§ 547); &c. 

c.) In general, the frequent use of otros in the repetition of its subject 
(505 b). 


545. 2.) “Ode surpasses in demonstrative vivacity; but-obros 
in emphatic force and in the extent of rts substantive use : 


"H rovde ppdfes ; Totrov, dvrep elsopas. ‘‘Is THIS the man you speak 
of?” ‘*The VERY MAN, whom you behold.” Soph. O. T. 1120. dv 
Toiod¢ Tois mapoda viv, with these who are now present, ii. 3.19. ‘Huds 
Tovadse \aPirres, taking us who are here, Th. 1. 53. 

a. To the deictic power of 83¢ may be referred the very frequent use of 
this pronoun by the Epic and Dramatic poets for an adverb of place (509 b), 
especially by the latter, in bringing a new person upon the stage ; and 
perhaps, in no small degree, the general fact, that it is far more exten- 
sively employed in poetry than in prose. 


546. 3.) In the emphatic designation of the jirst and_sec- 
ond persons by a demonstrative, (a) the first person, as the nearer 
object, is regularly denoted by 68¢ (the speaker pointing, as it 
were, to himself, 543.a); and (b) the second, by otros, which 
expresses ¢mpatience, authority, contempt, familiarity, &c., and 
(c) is used in address, both with and without od (401. 3): 

(a) Mh Oviicx’ irép Tod8’ GvBpds, odd" éyx mpd cod, do not you die for this 
man [for me], nor yet I for you, Kur. Ale. 690. THodé ye fwons eri, while 
LI am yet alive, Soph. Tr. 305. Rov rySe. . yxepl, with this hand of mine, 
Id. Ant. 43. TaSe [= tyue?s, 502] Alsch. Pers. 1. Hie homo = ego, 

REY, GR. 15 Vv 


338 SYNTAX.— PRONOUNS. -§ 546. 


Plaut. (b) Otro avip ot matcerar Prvapayv, this man [you] will not 
cease trifling, Pl. Gorg. 489 b. (ec) Ovros ot, & rpécBv, Heus tu, senex, 
[This you, or You there, 509 bj, Ho there / old man / Soph. O. T. 1121. 
Avry od, mo? orpéper; Ar. Th. 610. Otros, ri ceuvdv. . Bréres ; Fel- 
low ! why that solemn look ? Eur. Ale. 773 (§ 478). 

d. “OS8e avap for éy is frequent in tragedy. This, and ovres avip for 
ov, are used without the article (cf. avyp 66, this fellow, Soph. O. T. 
1160). In respect to nearer or more distant reference, compare 88¢, otros, 
éxetvos, with the Lat. hic, iste, ile, the Ital. questo, cotesto, quello, &e. 


547. ut. Other compounds of atrdés and de (252) are dis- 
tinguished in like manner with odros and 66¢ : 


‘O K8pos dxovcas Tod Tw8ptov to.atra, towdSe mpds atrdv éhete (544) 
Cyr. 5. 2. 31. ‘O pév otras cimer ii. 3. 23. Kréapxos mev ofy roratra 
eime Ticoadépyns 5¢ ade drnucidby ii. 5.15. Ovrws éorl dewds évyew, 
dore ce retoat Ib. ‘Hyuets trowotrou dvres, dcous od dpas ii. 1. 16. ‘Hyels 
too olde dvres evix@uev Tov Bactdéa (545) ii. 4. 4. 


D. Inverinite (28, 253 s). 


548. Of the indefinite pronouns, the most extensive in its 
use 18 tls, which is the semplest expression of indefiniteness or 
general reference. 


a. Ts is variously translated: any, some, certain, a, one, &e.; Lat. 
aliquis, nullus, quispiam, quidam, &c.; while it may be sometimes omit- 
ted in translation. It may be regarded as the Greek indefinite article ; 
not commonly expressed, however, unless some prominence is given to the 
idea of indefiniteness. See iv. 3. 11, and 520 c. 

b. Tis more frequently follows the word with which it is most closely 
joined ; but may also precede it, yet not so as to commence a sentence. 
Sometimes, however, it begins a clause ; and sometimes separates closely 
connected words : Té ody, Tis dv etal, radra Néyers ; Why then, one might 
say, do you mention these things? Dem. 13. 6. Taév BapBapwr twes tr- 
méwy, some of the barbarian horsemen, i. 5. 32. See 520 b. . 

ce. The singular rls commonly refers to an individual (some one, a cer- 
tain one) ; but sometimes to more than one (some, 488), or even to any 
one concerned (every one). The extent of the reference is sometimes marked 
by eis (ovdels, wndeis), Exaoros, as, 4 ovdels, Kc. “AvOpwirds Tig Hpwrnee, 
a certain man asked, ii. 4.15. Oedv tis, some one of the gods, v. 2. 24. 
Mice? tis éxewov, there are those who hate him, Dem. 42.17. Et wé tus 
Sddpu OnidcOw, let cach one sharpen well his spear, B. 382. “Hxaords tis 
poBovpevos, cach one fearing, Cyr. 6. 1. 42. ILas dé ris. . &y yé tT, dv 
eihjpet, Edwpetro, and every one presented at least some one thing of what 
he had taken, Cyr. 5. 5. 39. Aéyee tis eis Soph. Ant. 269 (so Ovde Pirtwy 
tis médas ovdels Eur. Ale. 79). “H tia 4 otSéva ofda, L know [either 
some one or none] scarcely an individual, Cyr. 7. 5. 45. Adverbially, 
ovdéy re (Mem. 1. 2. 42), wndév 71, not [as to any one thing] at all, ov wavu 
Tt vi. 1. 26, &. Unus aliquis, Cie. 

d. Ts often marks indefiniteness of natwre, character, quality, quantity, 
number, degree, &e. “O cogiorhs tvyxdver dv Eumopds tis 7% Kdanros, the 
sophist is [a certain] a kind of trader or huckster, Pl. Prot. 313¢. “Eye 
Tis, ws orxe, Suouabys, I am, methinks, somewhat stupid, Pi. Rep. 358 a. 
‘Orolwy twav iyuav ervxov, what sort of persons they found us, v. 5. 15. 





EO 


— $550. INDEFINITE AND RELATIVE. 339 


Mixpsv re pépos, quite a smail part, Cyr. 1. 6. 14. ’ON{you Twes dvres, 
being [some few] but few, iv. 1.10. ‘Hyépas wev éBdouyjxovTd Twas, some 
(i. e. about) seventy days, Th. 7. 87. “Hrrév re awéGavev ; did he die at all 
the less? v. 8.11. So, adverbially, ma\Xdv re somewhat more, cxeddsv Te 
preity near, Siapepsvrws ri Th. 1. 138, quite remarkably, &c. 

e. Tis may be used to give a certain vagueness to a proper name, or a 
noun having the article : llapa Xdowvl ru, with a certain Charon, Hel. 
5. 4.3. Tods adroévras xeupl rimwpev tivds, to punish the murderers, [any 


that were so] whosoever they were, Soph. O. T. 107. 


f. Tis is sometimes emp/atic, and may be then written as orthotone (yet 
editors here differ) : Hixecs tis civar, you boasted that you were somebody, 
Eur. El. 939 (so Acts 5. 36 ; Vis esse aliquis, Juv.). “Hdoge tL elmetv, he 
seemed to say something (of moment, dicere aliquid), Pl. Amat. 133 ¢. 
Some (as Hermann) have thought that 71s so used may begin a sentence. 

g. An indefinite form of expression is sometimes employed for a definite : 
Ilot tis tpéWera ; whither can one [= 1] turn, Ar. Th. 603. Toor’ els aviuy 
rovmos épyerai tr, this specch is coming to grief for some one{= you], 
Soph. Aj. 1138. (h) So a definite for an indefinite, as tdous dv, you [= one] 
might see, Pl. Conv. 177 ¢. See 503. 


EK. Reative. 


549. 1. Relatives refer to an antecedent cither as definite 
or as tudefinite ; and are, hence, divided into the DEFINITE and 
the INDEFINITE RELATIVES : 


*"HeNiov bs ravT Epopi, of the Sun, who secth all things, \. 109. Todrov, 
Svaep eicopas, this very man whom you sce, Soph. O. T. 1120. “Hyeudva 


aireivy Kidpoy, Sorts . . amdée:, to ask C. for some guide who would conduct 
them, i. 3. 14. 


a. INDEFINITE RELATIVES are formed, either from the definite relatives 
by adding tis or a particle (commonly &v), or from the simple indefinites 
by prefixing 8s (in the shortened form 6-): éc7:s or és dv whoever, dro%os 
of what kind soever, oricos how much soever, érire whensoever. See 
254, 377, 389. (b) The use of an indefinite relative is sometimes explained 
by resolving it into an indefinite pronoun and a relative, the indefinite 
part seeming to belong more strictly to the antecedent clause : “Horw 8 te 
ge Holknoa ; is there augit in which I have wronged you? i. 6.7. See 
550 b. 


550. wu. For one relative, another is sometimes used as a 
simpler, more familiar, or more expressive form. This use may 
be sometimes explained by e//ipsis. Thus, 


a.) A DEFINITE for an indefinite relative : Ovs éwpa é0édovras kwduved- 
ew, Tovrovs kal dpxovras érrole., whomsoever he saw willing to incur danger, 
these he made rulers, i. 9. 14. 

b.) An INDEFINITE for a definite relative : ‘Opare & rhv Tiwrahépvous 
dmistiav, Saris Néywr .., see the perfidy of T., [one] a man who saying. ., 
iii. 2. 4. Noe?s éxetvov, Svriv’ dpriws podey éediéuetOa ; do you know that 
man, the one whose coming we just now desired? Soph. O. T. 1054. Ovx 
aloxiverOe . ., oltivés dudoavres .. drrokwéxaTe ii. 5. 39. See 549 b., 
—The use of an indefinite relative referring to a definite antecedent be- 
longs particularly to those cases in which the relative clause is added, not 


340 SYNTAX. — RELATIVE PRONOUNS. § 550. 


to distinguish, but to characterize, thus representing the antecedent as one 
of a cluss. 7 

c.) A SIMPLER RELATIVE for one of quantity, quality, &c.: ’EmOipmets 
ro.avTas ObEns Fs [= olas] woddol rvyxavovaw, to desire such glory [which] 
as many obtain, lsoc. 408d. Trcxatras . . Hv [= TAlknv], so great as, 
Ib. “Hworep dy 7s 8s [= Tovobros olos] et, asslony as you are what [= such 
as] you are, Pl. Pheedr. 243. *Qv ye 8s efus Id. Theset. 197 a. Innocentia 
est affectio talis, quee noceat nemini, C%e. 

d.) A RELATIVE OF QUANTITY, QUALITY, &c., for a simpler relative : 
Tatra. . xpi moet, 80a [for a, or sc. Tooatra] 6 Oeds exéNevcer, you mast 
do these things, [as many as] which the god has commanded, iii. 1. 7. 
Ildv, So0ov éyw eduvduny, all [as much as] that I could, vii. 6. 86. “Eara 
yap nucpas, Soaomep eropevOnoar iv. 3. 2. 

e.) A RELATIVE ADVERB for a relative pronoun, chiefly in designations 
of place, time, and manner: His xwpiov, 80ev Spovrar Od4darray, to a place 
{whence} from which they would behold the sea, iv. 7. 20. “Ev ra dpet, 
évOatrep éeoxjvovy iv. 8. 25. Td airs oxjua. . womep, the same order as, 
i. 10. 10. Kum necassit, unde natus esset, C%e. 

f. After the plural of mas all, Sorts and &s &v are regularly used in the 
singular, and cot, 6mdcou, and ot in the plural: ’Acwdgera: wdvtas, @ av 
mepitvyxavyn, he salutes all [whomsoever] whom he may meet, Pl. Rep. 
566d. IZldow, ots éruyxaver, éBia, he shouted to all whom he met, i. 8. 1. 
*Exavoy mdvta, 80a Kavoywa ewowr, they burned [all things, as many as] 
whatever they saw combustible, vi. 3.19. Kalew dravra, 6Tw évrvyxdvorev 
Ib. 15. “E@arrov rdvras, omdcovus éredduBave TO Képas Vi. 5. 5. 


551. wi. Extresis. A word which belongs both to the 
antecedent and to the relative clause, is commonly expressed 
in but one ; more frequently in the earlier clause, yet often in 
the Jater ; while it may be omitted in both, if it is a word which 
will be readily supplied : as, 


a.) A VERB or PARTICIPLE : "O rz dv d€y [sc. waoxew], weloopar, J will 
suffer whatever I must {suffer], i. 8. 6. ‘Qs éuod obv tévros, barn dv kal byes 
[se. tre] Ib. 

b.) A Preposttion : ’Ev rpicl . . reow, [se. év] ofs émerodd fer, tn three 
yours, in which he has the upper hand, Dem. 117. 16. 


ce.) The SuspsecT oF THE RELATIVE. Relative pronouns belong to the 
class of adjectives (173), and, as such, agree with a substantive expressed 
or understood ; while a form of this substantive, or of one corresponding 
to it, is also the antecedent of the relative : Oidréds éorw 6 dvip, dv eides 
&vdpa, this is the man [which man] whom you saw. * But elliptie forms 
are far more common: Odréds éorw 6 avip, dv ides, Obrébs Eorw, bv eides dv- 
dpa, Orbs éorw, dv eldes- or, with the antecedent clause preceding (an 
order more frequent in Greek than in Eng.), “Ov eides, obrds eorw, “Ov ides 
divdpa, otrés €or, &c. Thus, 

"Ard ris apxis, Hs [sc. dpxfs] atrov carpdany éroince (505 a). “Amo- 
méuvat mpos éavrov [sc. 7d orpdtevua,] 5 elye orpdrevpa, to send back to 
him the force which he had (what force he had], i. 2. 1. Képos 6¢ &éxwv ods 
elpnxa, C. having the men whom I have mentioned, Ib. 5. “Erepou yap elow, 
otow evyouat Beots, the gods to whom I pray are different, Ar. Ran. 889. 
His 5¢ jv ddixovro Kapyy, [sc. alirn  kaun] peyddn Te Fv iv. 4. 2. AaBdv- 
res [sc. rocovrous Bods, | dcr joav Boes vii. 8. 16. Ut placerent quas fecis- 
set fabulas, Zer. Haetis quam petistis facultatem, Cos. 














§ 553. ELLIPSIS, ATTRACTION. 34] 


d.) If the relative and its subject are in the same clause, the latter is 
commonly put at the end, as though the rest of the clause were regarded 
as modifying it like an adjective. See 523g. (e) The adjective character 
of a relative clause is sonietimes made more prominent by placing it be- 
tween a substantive and its article : Tods orovoved4qTr08” pets Ferre wrrere 
orparnyous, [the WHAT SORT YOU SENT OUT generals] the generals such as 
you sent out, Dem. 276. 10. 

f. A demonstrative or indefinite pronoun or adverb is very often omitted 
in the antecedent clause, as implied by the relative ; but the simple ellipsis 
of the relative pronown itself, which is so common in Eng., is not allowed 
in the Greek. Compare the ellipses in, Zdv [sc. rovrocs] ofs udduora pe- 
Nets, with those {sc. whom] you love best (cum lis quos), i. 9. 25. Hidévac 
Thy Siva ep ods dv iwow, to know the strength of those they may go 
against, v. 1. 8. 


g. Indefinite relatives are often used elliptically in expressing a condi- 
tion or circumstance: Add’, Hrs éori, give it [to her, being whoever she is, 
z. €. let her be whoever she may], whoever she may be, Soph. El. 1123. 
Aovdevouev Geos, 8 Tu ror’ eicly of Geot Kur. Or. 418. Quoquo modo se res 
habeat, Cie. (h) This has led to their use as mere indefinites (commonly 
with oty or 84): Md’ 6vtiwa0ty pio Gdv [ = pio Pdr Twa, baorts obv ely] rpoo- 
arhoas, not demanding any pay whatever [it might be], vil. 6. 27. "“H 
GN otiody, or any thing else whatever, Cyr. 1. 6. 22. ‘Oracoty (drws 
574), quocumque modo, in any way whatever, Ib. 2.1. 27. “Orov 8) 7a- 
peyyuncavros, some one [whoever it might have been] having suggested tt, 
iv. 7. 25. Ei ris ddcxoin omrotépovs Cyr. 3. 2. 23. Compare the indefinite 
uses of quis, gui, and their compounds. 


i. Observe the ellipses in such expressions as (a) 8@at Hpépar (united, 
donuepat), quot diebus or quotidie, [on as many days as there are] daily, 
dco. pives, quot mensibus, monthly : 'EdevOepiay doar Hepat [v. 1. do7- 
Hépat] mpordexduevor, expecting freedom daily, Th. 8. 64 ("Oooar. . Auépac 
ex Ards elow €. 93). “Oa ery (océrm), quot annis, Rep. A. 3. 4. (B) ‘Qkd- 
popos . . €oceat, ol” ayopevers, you will be short-lived, [according to such 
things as] from what you say, =. 95. “Avaxra xbdos Ad Bev, otov dKoucer, 
rage seized the king, for what he heard, Z. 166. (y) Otos éxeivou Ovpds 
tirépBios, ox EGeAjoeL, with [such a spirit as is] that violent spirit of his, 
he will not be willing, =. 262. Quee tua virtus, expugnabis, Hor. 


552. iv. Arrraction. The intimate relation of clauses 
connected by a relative pronoun or a kindred particle, often pro- 
duces an ATTRACTION, sometimes simply affecting the position or 


form of particular words, and sometimes even uniting the two 
clauses into one. Thus, 


553. 1.) Vransfer. A word or phrase is often made a 
part of the relative, instead of the antecedent, clause ; and some- 
times the two clauses are blended in their arrangement : 


“Eorw Sry &ddq [for ddXos Sry] . . welw émirpéres ; ts there [to whom 
else] any other to whom you entrust more ? ic. 3.12. Adyous dxoucor, ots 
got Svotuxets ijkw pépwr, hear the sad tidings which I bring you, Bur. 
Or. 853. Hime raid’, dv €& ews yepds TLoAvSwpov . . exes, ef &, ‘tell me 
of my son P., whom you have,’ Eur. Hec. 986. O6ro., éwel eb0€ws Fo0ovro 
TO Tpaypua, amexwpnoay, these, when they understood the matter, immedt- 
ately withdrew, Hel. 3. 2. 4 (cf. Cyr. 1.5. 4). Tadrny 7 licv Odrrovear, 


i 


342 SYNTAX, —- RELATIVE PRONOUNS. § 553. 


dv od Tov vexpov dzeiras Soph. Ant. 404. “Ov ey@ darexepddioa “lodvyny, 
obrés ecrw Mk. 6.16. is "Apyeviay HEew, Hs “Opdvras qpxe TwodAijs Kal 
evSatpovos [for mohAiy Kal eddaiuova] iii. 5.17. See 554s. Verbis, que 
magna volant, Virg. 

a. The sUPERLATIVE is often so placed, particularly in expressions of 
(b) time and (c) possibility ; and with a frequent ellipsis of the word de- 
noting possibility : 

(a) Aodrov, dy cixe murrétaroyv, éreuwey (De servis, quem habuit fidelis- 
simum, misit, Vep.), he sent the most faithful servant that he had. “Apxe- 
cOat érrictamat, &s Tis Kal céANos podLCOTA dvOpwrwvr, I know how to obey [as 
even any other man knows at the best] as well as any other man, i. 3. 15. 


(b) ILepacéuea rapeiva, Stav taxiora. dcampatwueba [for 7. TaxioTa, 
bray 6.], we shall endeavor to be present | most quickly when] as soon as we 
have accomplished, Cyr. 4. 5. 33. ‘Ered 7prOe TAXLOTA, dTédoTO, WS SOON US 
he had come, he sold, vii. 2. 6. ‘Qs tayvora ews trédawer, ’Gtovro i 1¥;. 328, 
Cf. quum (ut, ubi) primum. 


(c) “Hyayov . . 6mécous Eyw trelotovs eduvdunr, I have brought [the 
most that] as many as I could, Cyr. 4. 5. 29. “Exwy iméas ds ay dtvqrat 
tAdorous, bring ging [hor semen so as he could the most] as many horse as 
he could, 1. 6. 3. “Iva ds wAetoro.. . dow, that there may be as many as 
possible, lil. 2. 28. AauBdvew. . Str melorrous, to take as many as pos- 
sible, 1. 1. 6 (8tt the newt. of Boris, according to whatever may be, or is 
possible ; though words denoting possibility are not expressed with it). 
‘Os pddiora edvvaro ET (KPUTTT OMEVOS, [concealing it as he best could] as 
secretly as he could, i. 1. 6. “EXatvev &s duvardv Fv TAXLOTA, riding as 
Jast as was possible, Cyr. 5. 4. 3. “He duvardv pddtora. | i, 3.15. ‘Qs pa- 
Nora Cyr. 1. 6. 19, quam maxime, as much as possible. ‘Qs rdxucra i. 3. 
14, “Ore TaxuorTa Vil. 2. 8, “Ocov rax.cTa Soph. El. 1433, quam celerrime, 
as quickly as possible. Quam potest longissime, Plaut.; Quam maximas, 
quam sepissime, Cie. 

d. In the more elliptic of these constructions, és, 61, Sires, &e., are 
treated simply as adverbs strengthening the superlative. 


554. 2.) Assimilation. a,b. The reLative often takes the 
case of its antecedent ; (c) far less frequently, the ANTECEDENT, 
the case of a relative ‘following. 


ReMARK. The former, from its special frequency in Attic Gram, has 
been distinguished as Attic, and the datter as /nverse Attraction, or As- 
similation. 


(a) Attic Attraction. This is the common construction, when the rela- 
tive clause limits or defines an antecedent in the Gen..or Dat., and the 
relative would properly be an Ace. depending upon a verb: Awd r&v 15- 
ewy, av [for ds] eee, fr om the cities which he persuaded, Th. 7.1. Zodv 
Tors Onaavpors, ols 6 marip Karédurev, with the treasures which my Sather 
left, Cyr. 3. 1. 38. “Apxovras émrole. 7S KareoTpepero xweasi. 9.14. Te 
avipl, @ dv Enobe, relcoua i. 3.15. Tovrwr, dv od Serroway xanels |for 
& ov decroivas, 393 b] Ce. 2.1. Xeipdvds ye dvros otov Aéyers V. 8. 3. 
Midwy wevro., Bowv éwoaka Cyr. 1, 3, 2. Cf. Tots xrjveow A. . EaBov 
iv. 7.17. Judice, quo nosti, Hor. 

Nore. If this ANTECEDENT is a demonstrative pronoun, it is commonly 
omitted (551 f): Zvv [se. robros] ofs exw, with those whom I have, vii. 3. 
48. “HE [se. rocovrwy] olwy éxw Soph. El. 1379. Quibus quisque poterat 
elatis, Liv. 


§ 556. ASSIMILATION, CONDENSATION. 343 


(b) The Dat. and even Nom. are rarely attracted in like manner : *Qv 
[= éxeivwy, ots] jricrer, roddovs, many of those whom he distrusted, Cyr. 
5. 4. 39. BrdrresOa dg av [= Trovrwv, &] huiv mapecxevaora, to be in- 
jured by those things which have been prepared by ws {in respect to which 
preparation has been made by us], Th. 7. 67. — When the subject of a 
verb is attracted, the verb, if retained, becomes impersonal. 


(c) Inverse Attraction. The antecedent is here treated, except in position, 
as if a part of the relative clause ; and sometimes omits an article, as if 
supplied by the relative (cf. 523g): “Avethev atr@ 6 *Amd\Xwv Oeois ols 
[= rods Beods, ofs] ber Cvew, Apollo made known to him [to what gods] the 
gods ti whom he must sacrifice, iii. 1.6. Tarde [= Aide] 5° doep eico- 
pas, . . xwpodc. mpds oé, these whom you behold, come to you, Soph. Tr. 
283. Adyos 5 ds éurémruxer dpriws éuol . ., cuupBarod yrounv, give heed 
to [what tale] the tale which just met me, 1d. O. C. 1150. ‘“Avdavouvca wey 
guy} ToNtrav [= moNiras] Gv ddixero xPbva Eur. Med. 11. So, in respect 
to the omission of the article, Duvéreupev airy orpatidtas ovs Mévwy elxe, . 
he sent with her (what soldiers] the soldiers which M. had, i. 2.20. Urbem 
quam statuo, vestra est, Virg. ‘‘ When him we serve’s away,” Shaks. 

d. Assimilation appears also in adverbs: ‘Ex 62 yijs, &bev [= of] apov- 

_xeito, from the ground [whence] where tt lay, Soph. Tr. 701. Acexoutfovro 
evOds Sbev [= évredOer of | ireteOevTo mratdas, they immediately brought over 
their children from the places whither they had conveyed them, Th. 1. 89. 
Inverse, Bjvat xetBev [= xetoe], G0ev ep iter, to return thither, whence he 
came, Soph. O. C. 1227. Kal édAdoce [= ddAdaxod], doe av ddixyn, ayar7- 
govol ce Pl. Crito 45 b. 


555. 3.) Condensation. The two clauses may be condensed 
into one by the omission of a substantive verb either (a) from the 
antecedent clause or (8) from the relative clause. 


(a) FRoM THE ANTECEDENT CLAUSE. a. After a demonstrative pro- 
noun or article, the RELATIVE is also omitted, and the ANTECEDENT takes 
its place in the construction. This form of condensation is particularly 
frequent in questions, exclamations, and denials, especially with the poets : 
Ti 766° avdas [= Ti €or rdde, 6 avdas]; what is this, which you say ? Kur. 
Ale. 106. Ti rofr dpyatoy éwéres xaxby ; what is this old evil of which 
you speak ? Soph. O. T. 1033. Otay éydvav rivd' epicas ! what a viper is 
this, which thou hast produced ! Kur. lon 1262. Tooro pev ovdév Oavpacrov 
Aéyers Pl. Prot. 318 b. Kardv yé por rovverdos éEwveidicas, the reproach 
which you have cast upon me is an honor, Kur. Iph. A. 305. Quis ille 
sprevisset, who he was that had despised, Tac. 

b. An exclamation without a verb and a relative clause may be united 
in like manner: Tovds éuds ide rarip Oavarous aixets [= "2 Odvaro: aixeis, 
obs ide marip Ends]! the cruel death my father saw! Soph. El. 205. 

ce. Expressions like the following are still more elliptical : "Ev@a 4 Tpt- 
arupyla |= é€o7l xwplovy, 6 T.| Kadetra, where there is a place, which is 
called Tripyrgia, Hel. 5.1.10. ’Ev @ kadoduev rd {Hv, in which is that 
which we call LiFE, Pl. Phedo 107 ec. 


556. (8) From THE RELATIVE CLAUSE. a. This occurs chiefly 
with a relative of comparison (otos, 8c0s, or 7Alkos), which then, with 
any substantive or adjective in agreement, is assimilated to the cor- 
responding demonstrative (expressed or understood) ; and the whole is 
construed as an adjective, sometimes even taking the article before it : 
Xapiféuevov olw ool av8pl [= dvdpi rowotry, olos od ct], obliging a man 


344 SYNTAX. —- RELATIVE PRONOUNS. § 556, 


such as you are [a sucH AS you man], Mem. 2. 9. 3. Oi 6é otol arep tpets 
dvdpes, but [the sucH As you men] men like you, Cyr. 6. 2. 2 (ef. Tovs ofoe 
odros dvOpwmrovs Dem. 421. 16). “Ovros rob rdyou otov Seavorarov |= Tot. 
ovTou, oils €or Cewdraros|, the cold being {such as is most dreadful] of the 
most intense kind, Pl. Conv. 220b. Maxa:plov Scov Evqdnv [= Tocodror, 
bon €o7l Evijdy|, aw knife as large as a dagger, iv. 7.16. EHixds dvdpa xu@dr, 
HAtkov Oovkvd(Synv [= rydcxodrov, Mrlkos O. éoriv|, e€oXéoOar, ‘a man as 
old as T.,’ Ar. Ach. 703. Aewdv totow AAlkovot vov Id. Eccl. 465. So 
Tod repitrob dvros ovzx obTeEp TAS TpLddos Pl. Pheedo 104a. — But if a sub- 
stantive following otos as above is in a different number, it remains in the 
Nominative: Neavias & otovs [= rTovovrous, ofos] ov, young men such as 
you, Ar. Ach. 601. Tév olwvmep aitrds dvrwy, Hel. 1. 4. 16. 

b. Some constructions may be explained either by the ellipsis of a sub- 
\stantive verb, or by the change of a finite verb to an infinitive depending 
upon this adjective : “Omws . . st) Tovotrot €covrat of modirat, olor movnpod 
Twos 7 alcxpod épyov épiecOat, that the citizens should not be such as |they 
would be] to desire any wrong or base act [or, such as would desire], Cyr. 
1. 2. 3. Tovodrous av@pwrrous, otovs peOvabévras dpxetcOa, such men as to 
dance intoxicated, Dem. 23. 16. Evdamovias .. Tocotrov, 6cov Soxety, so 
much of happiness as just to appear, Soph. O. T. 1190. “Ocov pdvory yetoa- 
cba éavT@ katadirwv, leaving for himself only [so much as] sufficient to 
taste, Vii. 3. 22. “Oca wévroe 45 Soxeiv adr@, but [according to so much 
as now seemed to him,] so far as he could now judge, Th. 6. 25. So“O re 
kd eldévat, quod ego sciam, so far as I know, Ar. Eccl. 350. 

ce. Through their frequent use as above, with the ellipsis of the cor- 

responding demonstratives, otes and 8e@os (particularly the former with 
Té, 389) came to be treated as mere adjectives of quality or quantity : 
Oiol re évecOe uty cupmpadéa ;. . ‘Ixavol éouer. ‘‘ Shall you be [such as 
to} able to co-operate with us?” ‘Weare able.” v. 4.9. Ovx ofov re jy. . 
dudxewv, [the state of things was not such as it should be to pursue] 7 was 
not possible to pursue, iii. 3.9. Adyous olovs els Ta OtxacTHpia, speeches 
{such as for] adapted to courts of justice, Pl. Euthyd. 272a. Ov yap jp 
wpa ota Td mediov dpdew, it was not a proper time to irrigate the plain, il. 
3. 13. 

d. In this construction, 800s is especially used in the neuter form 8eov, 
as indeclinable ; and often substantively or adverbially (507 e) : “Ocov bcov 
oriiny, w mere, mere bit, Ar. Vesp. 213. “EXeliero rijs vuxros 6cov cKoral- 
ous died Oeiv, enough of the night remained for them to cross in the dark, iv. 
1. 5. “Ocov droginv, sufficiently for subsistence, Th. 1. 2. Tov wéddXovra kat 
bcov ob rapbyra wédenov, the approaching and [only not, tantum non] alZ 
but present war, Th. 1. 36. Muxpdv écov dcov Heb. 10. 37. 

e. Compare the elliptic uses, in the Epic, of the corresponding demon- 
stratives: TépBov .. émeixéa totov [= Totov ofds coTw emeckys|, a tomb 
such as ts fitting, Y. 246. Oaud rotov, quite often, a. 209. “Os rd wév ddXo 
Tocov dott jv, which [as to so much as the rest of its body] in every other 
part was red, ¥. 454. Ainv récov, in the extreme, 6. 371. 


557. 4.) A RELATIVE PRONOUN may take the place of 
a definitive (personal or demonstrative pronoun, or article), and 
a connectwe particle. 


a.) When the DEFINITIVE belongs to the jirst clause. In this kind of 
attraction, the pronoun is commonly either governed by a preposition or ad- 
verb, or is itself used adverbially : "E¢ @ [= én robrw, ore] wh xalew Tas 
kwuas, upon this condition, that they should not burn the villages, iv. 2. 19 





§ 559. CONDENSATION, COMBINATIONS. 345 | 


(ef. “Emi rotcde, sre Th. 3. 114). “Ep © te [= Emi To’Tw, dare] dota 
oudnéyev, in order that we might collect transports, vi. 6. 22. Méxpe ob 
[= Tod xpévov, bre] eidov, wntil [the time when] they saw, v. 4. 16 (cf. Mé- 
xpt TocovTov, ws Th. 1. 90). Meéxpe (dxpr) of | = Tod xwplov, évOa], to the 
region where, as far as, i. 7.6. ‘HE drov (06, of Te), ex quo, since, vii. 8. 4. 
*AvO dv, Otvexa, “Oovvexa (126 5), [for this that] because, Soph. Ant. 1068, 
Ph. 585, Aj. 123. “Hue, in this respect that, Mem. 2.1.18. Ipoed@dvres 
Scov av dox7n xarpds eivar, advancing [so far that] watil i may seem to be 
time, vi. 3. 14. 


a. The Attic poets sometimes use ovvexa, and Hdt. péxpe ov (8tov), as 
compound adverbs governing the Gen.: T'uvackés otvexa, for the sake of a 
woman, Aisch. Ag. 823. Méxpe drev wrAnOapns ayopis, until the time of 
full market, Hdt. 2. 173. 


558. 8.) When the pErrnitrive belongs to the second clause: Tis 
otrw paiverar, Saris [= wore Exetvos| od Bov\eTal cor Pidos eivar; who is so 
mad that he does not wish to be your friend? ii. 5.12. “Amdpwr ert. ., 
oitives eéhovar, it is the part of those without resource [that they should 
wish | to wish, ii. 5. 21. Ovx« écrw ottrw padpos, Ss Oavety epa, there is no 
one 89 mad as to cowrt death, Soph. Ant. 220. Tam mente captus, qui 
neget, Cic. “Hyoduar wéya Texurpiov dpxovros doers elvat, @ dy ExdyTes 
érwvrat, I think it a great proof of the excellence of a leader, if men follow 
him willingly, Cc. 4. 19. 


a. Akin to this construction is the extensive use of the relative in ex- 
planation, or the assignment of reason or purpose : Oavuacrov Tovets, 8s. . 
didws, you act strangely, [who give] that you give, or in giving (qui des), 
Mem. 2. 7.13. “Orda xrévrat, ots auuvodvra Tovs ddixobvras,. they prepare 
arms, {with which they will repel] that with these they may repel assailants, 
Ib. 1.14. Kal rider réuor tw’, Sets cnuave?, send some one to the city, 
to give notice, Kur. Iph. T. 1208. “Ayyedov Fav, Ss dyyetdece yuvacki, they 
sent a messenger to tell the woman (qui nunciaret), o. 458. Equitatum 
premittit, qui videant, Cws. 

b. RELATIVE ADVERBS likewise exhibit this form of attraction : Evéat- 
pow. . OS [= Ore ows] ddeSs kal yervaiws éredevTa, happy that he died so 
fearlessly and nobly, P|. Phiedo 58 e. 


559. 5.) This attraction so unites some words, that the | 
combinations are treated as complex pronouns or adverbs (see 


556) : 

a.) “Kort with a relative, the verb remaining wrchanged, whatever 
might be its appropriate number, tense, or mode: ésrw of (ai, &, dv, ols, 
ais, ols, ds* in questions olrwes ; &c.), sunt qui, [there are who] some ; 
éorw bre or éc8’ bre, est quando, [there is when] sometimes, ii. 6. 9 5 éorw 
&vOa, est ubi, in some places, Cyr. 7. 4. 15 ; éorw drov (ds, brws, h, SOev, 
&c.). IpotBdddovro mpécBers rpSrov wev Xewpicopov . ., tore &’ of cal He- 
vopavra, they proposed as ambassadors, first C., and some also [there were 
also some who proposed] X., vi. 2. 6. "Hotw otorwas dvOpmrwv rebav- 
bakas; are there any men whom you have admired? Mem. 1. 4. 2. Cf. 
Hisi yap rwes airay of awerpdrovro Th. 3. 24; “Hoav dé of cal rip mpoceé- 
gepov v. 2.14; and, with the sing. for the plur. in the Imperfect also, 
“Hy 6¢ rovrwv Tay orabuay ods wavy paxpods Hravvev 1. 5. 7. Cf. 570. 

Nore. a. From a similar union of évt [= éveor:] with the relative, have 
arisen the compounds vor some, and évtore sometimes. (B) The ellipsis 
sometimes extends to the verb itself : “Omwou [for srw Srov], Lac. 10. 4. 

REV. GR. 15* 


346 SYNTAX. R K.— RELATIVE PRONOUNS. § 559. 


b.) The relative followed by BovAe, and agreeing with the antecedent 
in any case (cf. Lat. qui-vis, qwi-libet): Iept Ilo\vyverov, 7) &dXov Stov 
|= drwa] PovrAa, respecting P., or any other one whom you please, Pl. 
Ion 583a. Oia rovrwy ds Bove eipyaora, ‘any one of these,’ Id. Gorg. 
517 b. Ta déka, 7) Satis BovrAe drdAos dpOuds Id. Crat. 432 a. 

c.) “Oris od (sometimes ds ov) after otdets or tle: Oidels Sorts odK 
apézerat, there is no one, who will not refrain (nemo non), Ven. 12. 14 (ef. 
Ovdels Fv, Boris ovK wero Hel. 7. 5. 26). Oddels Ss odxl ravd' dverdie?, 
every one of these will reproach, Soph. O. T. 373. Ovddéva ktvdvvov [= ov- 
dels kivdtvos fv, | dvrw’ odx bréuewar, there was no danger which they did 
not mect, Dem. 295. 7. Tiva otecbe évriwa od. . dwoorjnocecbar; Th. 3. 39. 
Ovdevds Srcv ov, Ovdevi brw ov, Pl. Prot. 317c, Meno 70c. Observe the 
order in Ovéels éxeivoy Tay orpatiwray batts odK« edeEwwoaro Hel. 5. 1. 3. 


560. Remark. Forms oF coMPARISoN are especially liable to 
attraction and ellipsis (cf. 438 b, 511 b): Mévoe re dvres Spovw erparror, 
&trep |= eExeivos, darep| dy mer &dAwy dvtes, ‘ [like things, which] things 
like to those which’ (ef. édem qui),v. 4. 84. “Eav wev 4) mpadits 7 Tapa 
tAnola, olamep Kal mpdalev Expiro Tots Eévois i. 3. 18. ‘Toowotrov pdvor ce 
eylyvwoKor, 80ov [= cov TovTo, Sri] Hxovov’ AOnvatoy eivat, ‘so far as this, 
that I heard,’ iii. 1. 45. Tov pev dvdpa torotroyv eyiyvwoxor, 8tt |= door 
TovTo, Gri] eis Hudy ein V. 8. 8. “Emel vw r&vde mreioTov @xtTica Bémove, 
Sowrep Kai Ppovelv oidev udvy, ‘inasmuch as,’ Soph. Tr. 312. 


5Gl. v. A RELATIVE sometimes introduces a clause which 
(a) has another connective or a participle absolute, or which (b) 
is properly codrdinate (as imperative, interrogative, &c.); and, 
on the other hand, a coORDINATE CLAUSE sometimes (c) takes 
the place of a relative clause, or (d) is used in continuation of it: 


(a) Todd ay elrrety exovev OUvOc01 viv, & Té7 eb mpoeldovTo, ovK av amra- 
Aovro, the Olynthians could now mention many things, which had they then 
foreseen, they would not have perished, Dem. 128. 17. “Os éred: xaré- 
pabev. ., éxetvos. . Wvdyxace, [when who perceived . ., he compelled] who, 
when he perceived . ., compelled, Lac. 10. 4. Ots édv [= ol, cEdv adrors} 
mdvra éxew Ta Tov TodTaV, ovdey Exaev Pl. Rep. 466a. Cf. 566. Que 
quum ita sint, Cie. 

(b) Toaira Pjuar wavrixal dudpecay* @v évrpérou od pundév, such things 
were decrecd by prophetic voices ; to which do you pay no regard, Soph. O. 
T. 723. Wiigov aud qudr. ..“H xpwet ri xpjua; ‘* The vote concerning 
us.” ‘| Which will decide what #] And what will this decide?” Eur. Or, 
756. Kdricov.. puddkous, of A\eysvTwv, station guards, and let them say, 
Hdt. 1. 89. Compare the far greater frequency with which guz is so used 
in Latin. 

(c) “E&erdoat . . ’Odvecdéa, i} Vicvpov, 7 &dovs evplous dv Tes elrrot, to ex- 
amine Ulysses, or Sisyphus, or [one might mention ten thousand others] 
ten thousand others whom one might mention, Pl. Apol. 41 b. 

(d) Kipoy 5¢ weraréurerae dd ris dpxhs, hs abrov carpdmrny erolyce, Kal 
orparnyov O¢ abroy dwédeke i. 1. 2. This construction is adopted chiefly 
to avoid the repetition of the relative, in accordance with the following 
special rule. 


562. Rute K. The repetition of the relative is commonly 
avoided, either by ellipsis, or by the substitution of a personal 
pronoun or of a demonstrative : as, 





§ 564. COMPLEMENTARY AND INTERROGATIVE. 347 


"Aptatos 52, Sv ucts 7OéNomey Bacidéa Kabiordvat, kal [sc. @] dWKauer kal 
[se. wap 08] €d\dBouey mista, A., whom we wished to make king, and toa 
whom we gave and from whom we received pledges, iii. 2. 5. ‘O dvip &s 
cuwvebipa huiv, Kal ov poor pdda eddxers Oavudfew adrdv, the man who hunted 
with us, and whom you seemed to me greatly to admire, Cyr. 3. 1. 38. 
“Huds dé, ols xndeucv pev ovdels mdpectw, éorparevoamev O€ ill. 1. 17. 
*Exeivo: Tolvuy, ois od éxapifovd’ oi héyovres, 006’ Epirovv adbtrouvs Dem. 35. 3. 
Ady. "Ey@a Bacireds re wéyas Siatray roéerat, Kal TOY xpnudTwy oi Onoauvpol 
évOatra cior, where the great king resides, and his treasures are [there], 
Hat. 5. 49. Que nee haberemus, nec his uteremur, Cic. 

a. The relative is sometimes strengthened by a personal pronoun or a 
demonstrative in the same clause ; especially, after a Hebrew idiom, in the 
Hellenistic : “Hv ypiv o édavvew tHVvde, whom you ought to drive [her], 
Eur. And. 650. Ois €640y adrots dédicjoa, to whom it was given [to them] 
to hurt, Rev. 7. 2. Odtyrs, ota od yéyove ToavTy Mk. 13.19. “Orov 
Tpéperat éxet Rev, 12. 14. ‘* Which that is,” Chaue. 


F. CoMPLEMENTARY AND INTERROGATIVE. 


563. 1. From the connective, and, at the same time, zn- 
definite character of the complementary pronouns and adverbs, 
their proper. forms are such as belong to ¢ndefinite relatives 
(549 a). But, when there is no danger of mistake, there is 
often employed, for the greater brevity and vivacity, in place 
of the full compound form, one or the other element, either the 
relative or the indefinite. Of these, the latter is far the more 
frequently used, but with this distinction from the «definite in 
us proper sense, that the accentuation of the compound form is 
retained, as far as possible. Thus, 

boris, Tis, bs, quis, who, what ; ordscos, bcos, 8o0s, quantus, how nuch ; 
ordre, bre, dre, quando, when ; S10, mot, of, quo, whither ; &e. 

II piv 5X0» eivar, 6 te of dAXNow"EANnvEs arroxpwvodvrat, IIpiv 5jrov eivac, rl 
moijoovow ot Got oTpatiGrat, before it is known what the other Greeks will 
answer (soldiers will do), i. 4. 14,18. ‘Qs Sydoly, ods Tug i. 9. 28. 
"Hpero, tis 6 O5puBos etn, "Hpero, 8 tu ein 7d civOnua, he asked what the 
noise (watchword) was, i. 8.16. Arcdyrwow ppevdv, Satis T adyOhs ert, 
8s re w) Pidos Eur. Hipp. 924. ‘Opdv, év otors ecper iii. 1. 15. 

564. 2. The indefinites thus employed and accented are 
termed in Etymology, from the most prominent of their offices, 
INTERROGATIVES (253. 2, 377). As complementary words, they 
were employed in indirect question; and hence appears to have 
arisen their use as direct interrogatives, through an ellipsis. 

Thus, from the indirect question, Elwré, tiva yrwunv execs rept ris mo- 
pelas, sy, what opinion you have concerning the march (ii. 2. 10), by the 
omission of eiaé, comes the direct question, Tlva yrdunry éxers mepl Tis mo- 
pelas ; what opinion have you concerning the march? So, from Aééare oby 
mpos me, th ev vp &xere, tell me, therefore, what you have in mind (iii. 3. 2), 
comes, Tt év vo éxere ; what have you in mind ? 


a. In other languages, as the Lat., with those derived from it, and the 
Eng., the complementary use of the simple relatives has prevailed ; and 


348 _ SYNTAX, — PRONOUNS. § 564. 


hence, in these languages, the general identity of the relatives and the inter- 
rogatives. Thus, qui, quando, ubi, unde, who, which, when, where, &e., 
are both relative and interrogative. 

b. In direct question, the Greek employs only one of the two shorter 
forms above mentioned, but in exclamation it employs both : Otuo, wd- 
Tep, tleizas/ oid w elpyacar! O my father, what have you said ! how you 
treat me! Soph. Tr. 1203. IlLotoy geures / B. 85. “Ore rpdyuara execs / 
how much trouble you have / Cyr. 1. 3. 4. 

c. The neuter tt unites with several particles to form elliptical ques- 
tions ; which, with various specific offices, serve in general to promote the 
vigor and vivacity of the discourse, commonly introducing other questions: 
Ti yap [sc. ori, or Néyere]; . . Eurroduv eiur; What, indeed? Am I in the 
way? v. 7.10. Ti ofv; What then? v. 8.11. Ti 6é; Tl dyn; Ti dqra; 
Ti dai; Ti uy; Xen. Cf. Quid enim ? Quid ergo ? Quid vero ? 

d. A COMPLEMENTARY PRONOUN or ADVERB, used as am echo to an in- 
terrogative, has, for distinction’s sake, its full form: Ts yap ef; [se. “Bpw- 
ras|"Oors ; Hodtrns xpnorés. ‘‘Who are you?” [Do you ask] wHo? 
A good citizen.” Ar. Ach. 594. Otros, rl moe?s;"O te word; ** Ho! 
what are you doing?” ‘‘What am I doing?” Id. Ran. 198. ITs av 
Tatra ¥ ere Evyxwpoipev; “Orras; Pl. Leg. 662a. 


565. 3. Conpensation. a. Expressions like @avpaordv 
gat daos (dcov, as, &c.), zt s wonderful how much, &e., may be 
condensed into complex adjectives or adverbs: Oavpacros écos, 
Oavpacrov dcov, Oavpacras ws, we. (cf. 555, 559): 


Oavpacrijv Sony repli oé mpoluulay tye, it is wonderful how much re- 
gard he has for you (mirum quantum studium), Pl. Ale. 15la. Mera 
idpGros Savuacrot doov Id. Rep. 350d. Oavpacras as éreicOnv, I was 
wonderfully convinced, 1d. Phedo 92a. “Aphyavov Sc0ov xpdvov, an im- 
conceivably long time, Ib. 80c. *Aphxavev zc otoy Id. Charm. 155¢. 
“Yaepvas as xaipw Id. Conv. 173c. Immane quantum discrepat, Hor, 

b. A complementary word may take the place of a connective particle 
and a demonstrative (ef. 558): Karoxrelpwy riv Tre yuvatxa, otov avdpds 
[= re rotovrou dvdpds| ctepotro, commiscrating the wife [what a husband 
she had lost] that she had lost such a husband, Cyr. 7. 3. 13. 


566. The Greek idiom (a) admits a greater freedom than 
the English, in the construction and position of both INTERROGA- 
TIVE and COMPLEMENTARY WORDS, especially in connecting them 
with dependent words and clauses ; and even (b) allows the 
use of more than one in the same clause : 


(a) Tl. . dav rowodvra, Tadra karéyvwxas avrod ; [having seen him do- 
ing what, do you] what have you seen him do, that you thus judge of him? 
Mem. 1. 3.10. "“Orav tl roijowot, vomets atrods cod ppovrifew ; [when 
they have done what, will you think] what must they do, before you will 
think that they care for you, lb. 4. 14. “Iva rl [se. yévnrac] ratra déyets ; 
[that what may be] with what intent, or why, do you say this? 1d. Apol. 
26d (so ws ri;)"Orr 6} rl ye [sc. €or]; [because there is what ?] why so? 
Pl. Charm. 161¢. Hir’ é\avvopévwv, cal bBpigoudvwv, Kal tl xaxdy odxXL 
wacxdvTwv, Taca 7 olkovpévyn eat) yéyove mpodoray, ‘what evil not sufler- 
ing?’ i. e. ‘suffering every evil,’ Dem. 241. 28. Ov dteNoyloavro brép ota 
meronkoTwy dvOpdrwv kwiuvetdcovor Id. 259. 1. “Héior av dxotcoatun dvo- 
pa, tls ows €orl Sewds Aéyew il. 5. 15. Cf. 561 a. 


== 


§ 567. “AAAOS AND “ETEPO®. 349 


(b) Ts trivos aris ori, yevjoerat pavepsy, it will become evident who is 
guilty (and) of what, Dem. 249. 8. Ths wodev eis; who wre you (and) 
whence? a. 170. LLorepos cipa mérepov aiudéer ; which will slay {which| 
the other? Eur. Ph. 1288. <Aedocere, . . ota mpds olwy dvipov maoxw, see 
what I suffer fron what men, Soph. Ant 940. 


G. "AAAOS AND "ETEPOS. 


567. These pronouns are not only used retrospectively, but, 
also prospectively and distributively : that is, they may denote, 
not only a different person or thing from one which has heen 
mentioned, but also, from one which zs to be mentioned ; or 
they may, in general, denote a difference among the several 
individuals or parties which compose the whole number spoken 
of ; but érepos commonly with reference to two objects or sets 
of objects only. Compare alius and alter. 


For modes of translation, see the following examples of &AXos, &repos, 
and their derivatives, as used, (a) RETROSPECTIVELY. ‘Ikavdy épyov évb 
Evew kpéa, AAAw drrar, dAXw dé LyOdv EWew, GAAw ora, It is work enough 
Sor one man to boil meat, for another to roast it, te., Cyr. 8. 2.6. Mei- 
vavres 0é TAUTHV Thy Huépav, TH GAA éropevovro, ‘on the next,” iii. 4. 1 
(so 77 érépy Cyr. 4.6.10). (b) ProspecrivELy. Zvdv &Adots re irmedoe 
mpos Tots €autay, with other cavalry besides their own, Mag. Eq. 7. 2. Ov- 
dev &AXO pokturres i) Onwcavres, having done nothing else than ravage, Hel. 
7.4.17. “Hirépas rws trav elwfirwv, in some way other than the usual, PI. 
Pol. 295d. (c¢) ProsrpectiveLy and RerrospecTivELy. ”“AdXos &dXov 
elAxe, one drew up another (alius alium), v. 2.15. ‘O eTEpOS Tov ETEpov 
maie, the one strikes the other (alter alterum), vi. 1.5. Tér’ d\dos, &AN00’ 
&repos, now one, and then the other, Soph. El. 739. “Adore Kal &dore, 
qow and then, ii. 4. 26. (d) Disrriputtvety. “Addo &Adobev, [dlitfer- 
ent persons in different directions] some in this direction, and others tn that, 
1.10.13. Ofro.. . &AdAos GAa Adyex, these say, one one thing, and another 
another (393 d, 489 d). "“Addorte GAAY droBaivwr, landing, now here, and 
then there, Hel. 1. 5. 20. Hixagov d¢ &Adow GAs, alii aliter, i. 6. 11. 
Luppopa dé Erépovs érépa miéfer Kur. Ale. 893. 

e. The Greek idiom oddly permits these pronouns (esp. &AdAos) to be 
used with reference to a larger class than the grammatical subject ex- 
presses : Bées . . kal mpdBara adda, oxen wind [other sheep ! @. ¢. other ani- 
mals, viz. sheep] also sheep, vii. 3. 48. “Exrodev &AXA@v prnoripwy, (Mi- 
nerva was placed) apart from [the other suitors] the rest, the suitors, a. 132. 
“Hyovro dé kal €repor dv0 Kkaxovpyo oly aire, and with hini were led two 
others, malefactors, Lk. 23. 32. See 509 e, 515. 

f. The neuter &ddXo is often used prospectively with tt, tl, od8€y, or 
pydév, with the ellipsis of a verb, commoniy Tove, tpaTow, TaTXa, eipt, 
or ylyvopat: Ti dAdo obrox [se. eroinoay] i éreBovevoay ; what else have 
they done but plot against us? Th. 3. 89. Ovddév dAdo 7. . EOeGro, he did 
nothing but gaze, Cyr. 1. 4. 24. El. . udev dddo 7 perevéyxos Ib. 6. 39. 
"“Orws amiyvoa 7 Tod &dXo Te [SCc. rpdocew] 7) Kpately, that there inight be 
10 hope of anything but conquering, Th. 3. 85. 

g. Hence the phrase of confident interrogation, &ddo tt [sc. orw] H, or 
the # omitted, &AXAo tt (also written dAdorx), nonne, [is it any thing else 
fiwold is it not certain that: "AXXo re I) ovdév K@dUEL ; ts Ut nol certain that 
iwthing forbids? iv. 7. 5. “AXXo Tt oby of ye pehoxepdeis pirovot TO Képoos ; 
ao not then, surely, the covetous love yadn ? VP). Hipparch. 226 e. 


390 SYNTAX. R. XXIX., L. — VERB. § 568. 


CHAPTER TII. 
SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 


J. AGREEMENT OF THE VERB. 


(See also 492s; for the union of Dual and Pl., 494; for Compound Con- 
struction, 495s; for Synesis, 498s; for Attraction, 500; tor change of Num- 
ber and Person, 501, 503; for construction with the Gen. Pa irtitive, 421.) 


568. Rute XXIX. A VeERB agrees with its 
subject in number and person: as, 


"Hyw Ajpoua, I shall take, i. 7. 9. Xv pas, tu vides, ii. 1. 12. "Hoeé- 
ver Aapetos, D. was sick; ‘Tpuels ddéere, you will seem; Avecyérnv To pa- 
Aayye, the two lines were apart; 1.1.1; 4.15; 8.17. But, 


969. Rute L. The Neuter Piura has regularly its 


VERB in the sezgular: as, 

Ta érirjdeca éwédurre, provisions failed, iv. 7.1. Iola & buty wdpertiy, 
you have vessels, v. 6. 20. 

a. Exceptions to Rule L not unfrequently occur ; chiefly, when things 
that have life are denoted, or when the idea of plurality is prominent, or 
in the non-Attic poets for the sake of the metre. "Evrai@a tjoav ra Dvev- 
véoos Pacineva, here was the palace of S. (489), i. 2. 23 (BaciNea hy 7). 
‘Yrogvvyia vépouwro ii. 2.15 (‘T. édavvero iv. 7. 24). Ta réXn. - Eerepnpay, 
the magistrates sent forth, Th. 4. 88 (T. tréoxero 1. 58). Savepa fjoav kal 
immu kal dvOpmrwv ixvn Todd i. 7.17. "Hoay dé radra 8vo rely i. 4. 4. 
“Epya yévovto A. 310. Aodpa wéontre vedv, kal ordpra héAvvrat B. 135. 
** Good things cometh,” Old Homily. 

b. A compound subject with which a neut. pl. adjective agrees, is here 
commonly treated as if itself a single neuter plural (for examples, see 
496 c) ; and sometimes even one with which such an adjective simply 
might agree: IIdxvar kal xddafae kal epvoiBar.. ylyverar, frosts, hail, and 
mildew come, Pl. Cony. 188 b. 

ec. A few passages occur, in which this rule applies to the dual asa 
form of the plural (494): “Ooce daterar, the eyes burn, §. 131. 

d. The agreement under this rule is according to sense (493). A neuter 
plural subject, as denoting things without life, is not usually associated in 
the mind with the idea of individual (¢. ¢. plural) action. ‘* In truth,” 
said Coleridge, ‘‘ there may be mu/éeity in things, but there can be only 
plurality in persons.” An influence was also, doubtless, exerted in the 
Greek by the frequent use of the neuter plural as in 489. The old gram- 
marians termed this construction 2xfua’Arrecdv ; and that in 570, Zxyjua 
Tlwéapixiv or Borwriop. 


570. When the verb precedes, it is sometimes singular, as 
if its subject were as yet wndeter mined, though a mase. or fem. 


plural follows. In Attic, this use is almost confined to @ gore and 
jv (cf. the use of 2 est and aya in Fr., and of ¢é ts in Eng.). 





§ 571. AGREEMENT, — ELLIPSIS. 351 


"Hort 5é érri orddcor €& “ABiSov és Thy dravtioy, it is seven studia from 
Abydos to the opposite shore, Hat. 7. 34. “Hote. . dpxovrés te kal Sjuos } 
are there both rulers and people ? Pl. Rep. 4620¢. Plyvntrar. . apyal re kai 
yauo Ib. 363a. "Hv 0° dudladexroe kNiwaxes Soph. Tr. 520. "Hote rodrw 
OirTw Tw Biw (cf. 569 c¢) Pl. Gorg. 500d. See 559 a. 

a. A few other examples of the Nom. pl. masc. or fem. with a verb in 
the sing. occur in the poets: “Yuvor. . réarerat, hymns become, Pind. Ol. 
11. 4. Koéyuacr carevijvobev Hon. Cer. 280. 


571. Exuresis, &c. 1. The supsectr of the verb is com- 
monly omitted, (a) if it is sufficiently indicated by the affix of 
the verb with the context, and is without emphasis ; or (b), if it 
is a pronoun of the third person, referring to an agent emplied 
in the verb itself, or (c) to persons in general, or (d) vaguely to 
some power, thing, or condition of things. In the last case, 
the verb is commonly termed ¢mpersonal. Thus, 


(a) “Emel 6€ jobéver Aapetos . ., CBovrero, when Darius was sick, he 
wished, i. 1.1. My Oavpatgere, dre yarerGs hépw i. 3. 3. See 536. 


(b) "Emel éoadavyée (sc. 6 cadmrvy«r7s], [when the trumpeter blew] aé the 
sound of the trumpet, 1. 2. 17 (cf. iv. 3. 32). “Heypuge rots "EAXAnox [se. 6 
Kypué|, proclamation was made to the Greeks, iil. 4. 36. Tov viuov byuiv 
avrov avayvemerar (sc. 6 ypauuareds) the clerk: shall read to you the law 
itself, Dem. 465. 14. Otvoyoee [sc. 6 oivoxdos] p. 142. 

(c) Aéyouriv, dacilv, dicunt, aiunt, they (men, people) say. Tobroy 
mabey thaoav (cf. Tofeviijvai ris €\éyero) i. 8. 20. “Omrep mdoyovow év 
TOs Meyarots aya@o., as men are affected in great crises, Th. 7. 69. Odvre 
dipa avradicety det, . . OTiovy TATYY, tt is not right, then, for one to return 
an injury, whatever he may suffer, Pl. Crito 49 e. 


(d) “Yeu, vider, pluit, ningit, @ rains, it snows. Emel cuverxdtace, 
when it grew dark, Cyr. 4. 5. 5, “Owe ty, tt was late, ii. 2. 16. ‘Os touxey, 
ut videtur, ws i seems, vi. 1. 30. Mayyns 8st, there is need of « battle, ii. 
8. 5 (see 473 b). Meer por rovrwy, [there is to mea care] [ take care of 
these, (ic. 11. 9 (432d, 457). Merapéde wor, me peenitet, ZT repent, Cyr. 
5. 3.6. Kand@s torat vii. 3. 43. "HdnqAwoe 5é Mem. 1. 2. 32. 

e. An impersonal verb, from its very nature, is in the 3d pers. sing.; 
and an adjective joined with it is in the newt. stng., or in the neut. plir. 
Jor the sing. (489d, 491 c.) As it expresses an action or state without 
predicating it of any particular person or thing, its force may be commonly 
expressed by a kindred noun with a substantive (or other appropriate) verb: 
Act [= xpela éoriv| \6ywv, opus est verbis, there is need of words, Cyr. 6. 
1.7. WUapecxevacro, preparation had been made, Th. 4. 67. The opeya- 
tions of nature commonly expressed impersonally are sometimes referred, 
especially by the poets, to a personal agent : “Lec ode 6 Oeds Hdt. 3. 117. 
"Ye 5° dpa Zevs, Jupiter rained, M. 25. 

f. A verb is often tntroduced as impersonal, of which the subject is 
afterwards expressed in an Jnf. or distinct clause : "E8déKe ait 75n ropev- 
ec0a, it now seemed best to him to march, i. 2.1. Ovdx tv AaBetv, [it was 
not for any one » take them] 7d was not possible to take them, 1. 5. 2. 
"Eteoriy byiv misr AaBeiv, it is permitted you ta take pledges (licet vobis), 
ii. 3. 26. AAov iy, bre evyyts wov Baoideds jy ii. 3. 6. "Hyévero . . ro- 
pevteoOari. 9. 13. (g) An attraction often takes place, by which this im- 
personal form of construction becomes personal (prolepsis). See 573. 


352 SYNTAX. R. XXIX.— ELLIPSIS OF VERBS. § 571. 


h. Personal and impersonal constructions are so blended and inter- 
changed, that it is often difficult to determine, whether a verb is to be 
regarded in a particular instance as personal or impersonal, and whether 
au neuter pronoun or adjective connected with it is to be regarded as Nom. 
or Acc.: Té de? adrav airety ; [what needs him, or what does it need him, 
478] what need is there that he should ask ? ii. 1. 10. 


572. 2. The SUBSTANTIVE VERB is very often omitted, espe- 
cially if it is merely a copula; most freely in the forms é¢ori and 
etait. Its omission is particularly frequent with verbals wm -reos, 
in general remarks and relative clauses, and with such words as 
avaykn, xpewy, eikds, Oeurs, Karpds, Opa, OnAos, ETormos, mpdOvpos, Ppov- 
Sos, duvards, oids te, padios, yaderos : 


Tobtro ov monréov [sc. éotiv], hoc non faciendum, this must not be done, 
i. 3.15. ‘O uéyas ddBos od pdriuos, great prosperity is not permanent, Kur. 
Or. 340. Tlorapov, 06 70 ebdpos ordd.ov (cf. ob Hv 7d edpos), a river, of which 
the width was a stade, 1.4.1. “Opa déyew, tt ts time to say, 1. 3. 12. 
Avoxpiotous eivat avayKn araxrous dvras (cf. avayKn yap é€orw) iil. 4. 19. 
‘Qs 76 eikés iii. 1. 21. Afrov ydp ii. 4.19. Cf. 555s, 559c, 565a. Quot 
homines, tot sententiz, ‘‘ Many men, many minds,” Jer. 

a. Other verbs may be omitted, if supplhed by the context, or readily 
tinderstood from the connection ; especially in familiar expressions, and 
familiar verbs, as of coming, gotng, doing, saying, giving, &e.: Ovre ov 
éxelvas pidets, ore éxetvar oé [sc. didodor, 536]. “H duata ror Body [se. €d- 
xec], ‘‘ The cart before the horse,” Luc. D. M. 6. 2. *Q pire Patdpe, wot 67 
kal widev; Dear P., whither now (are you going) and whence (do you 
come)? Pl. Phedr. 227a. See 567 f. 


b. A verb expressed sometimes suggests a different, and even an oppo- 
site verb: ’AueAjoas Gvmep of modXol [sc. ériuédovrac], neglecting what the 
most seck, P|. Apol. 36 b. 


573. 3. Personal for Impersonal Construction. a. A verb, 
of which the proper subject is an /njinitive or distinct clause, 
often takes for a Nom. the swhject of that Inf. or clause (see 
571g). In this case, (b) the Inf. sometimes becomes a Part. ; 
and (c) an adjective may be sometimes translated by an ad- 
verb. Thus, 


(a) Aéyerat “Ad\Awr éxdeZpar Mapovav, A. is said to have flayed M., 
= héyerat, Amdd\Xwva exdetpac Mapovar, it ts said, that A. flayed M., 1. 2. 
8 (cf. 1. 8.7). Tocodrov dpxa cot capyvioa, it is enough that I communt- 
cate so much to you, Aisch. Pr. 621. Iloddol 5é érrlSoEou . . welcerPar, many 
are likely to suffer [it is probable that they will], Hdt. 6.12. AfAor joay, 
dre €mekeloovrat, it was evident that they would attack, v. 2. 26. Alkatds 
eipu eyo kodd few, tt ts just that I punish, Ar. Nub. 1434. Tovds cogods. . 
modo S€w [= roddod dei Eue] Barpdxous Aéyew, [much is wanting for me 
to call] Zam far from calling the wise frogs, Pl. Thert. 161 b. So ayyéA- 
Nera wt is reported, duoroyeirat tt is agreed, Soxe?, Eorxe, tt seems, cumBaiver 
it happens, xaO?jxer it belongs, NavOdver it is wnobserved, avayKaidy earw, tt 
is necessary, &e. Dicar deduxisse, Hor.; Videor inihi perspicere, Cie. — 
This construction, which gives greater prominence to the personal subject, 
is found also in Eng. (as above) and in other languages. 


_— 


§ 576. PERSONAL CONSTRUCTION. VOICES. 393 


(b) ‘O perv ofy mpecBirepos mapav ériyxave [= ériyxave Tov mpecBUrepoy 
mapeivat|, the elder happened [being] to be present, 1. e. it happened that the 
elder was present, i. 1. 2. “Apxéow OvqoKove’ ey, it will be enough that I 
die, Soph. Ant. 547. “Andis [se. edu] vorote’ éyw Id. O. T. 1061. 

(c) Atos Fv avidpevos, it was manifest that he was grieved, or, he was 
manifestly grieved, 1.2.11. Zrépywv dé havepds pev jv ovdéva, he evidently 
loved no one, i. 6. 23. "“Evdndos éyiyvero ériBovdedwy Ib. 

d. This construction may occur in a dependent clause, and (e) is not 
confined to the finite verb ; while (f) sometimes the two modes of con- 
struction are combined : (d) “Hoay 5° airac rerpaxdova, ws éhéyovto, dua- 
fat, these wagons were 400, as [they were said to be] was said, 1. 10. 18. 
(e) Adrod dXlyou Sefoavros katarevobjqvar, when he had wanted little of 
being stoned to death, i. 5. 14. (f) "Hdogev atr@, Bpovrijs yevouévyns, oKy- 
m@Tos Tecelv eis THv TaTpyay olxlay, kal €x TovTOU AdumecOat Tacav, ‘a 
thunderbolt seemed to fall, and [it seemed] that the whole house blazed.’ 
yo a) 


574. 4. The verb py is often separated from its subject by some of 
the words quoted ; and is often thrown in pleonastically : ‘‘ HG Néyeus,” Epy, 
“® Ziupia,’ o KéBys, ‘* You speak well, S.,” said C., Pl. Pheedo 77 ec. 
"“Arroxplverat 6 Xewpicopos: ‘‘ BNépor,” Edn, ‘‘apds Ta Opn,” C. answers : 
** Look,” said he, ‘‘to the mountains,” iv. 1. 20. See v. 1. 2; vi. 1. 31. 


- Il. USE OF THE VOICES. 


(For a general view, see 80, 266.) 


575. Rute M. The uses of the voices are sometimes 
interchanged. 


1. A transition of meaning sometimes gives to one voice the 
force of another voice of a different verb. Thus we find, 


a.) The active for the passive: Ed dxov to hear agreeably, and hence, 
from the bewitching sweetness of praise, to be spoken well of : eb dxovew 
imd.. . avOpdiruww, to be praised by men (bene audire), vii. 7. 23. Kakds 
akovoas, male audiens, spoken ill of, Symp. 4. 64. Krew dvadxis, to be 
called a coward, Aisch. Pr. 868. “AréBavev id Nixdvipov, he [died] was 
killed by N., v. 1.15. Otrws éddo, it was thus taken, iii. 4. 12. See 
kreivw, aipéw, 50, “Hxmlarew éx Indorowjcou bd Mijdwy, to [fall out] be 
driven out of P. by the Medes, Hdt. 8.141. "Evyov . . td rod Siuov, 
they [fled] were banished by the people, 1d. 5. 30. ’AceBelas dbedyovra 
(431 ¢). Karacras ip’ tuar, appointed by you, Dem. 49. 11. 

b.) The mipp ix for the active: Kérrw snvite, kémropar smite one’s self 
through grief, hence bewail : korres’ "Adwow Ar. Lys. 396. Tirw pay, 
tivopar fuke payment, punish: ticacba ddetrnv T. 28. See 5798. 

¢.) The MIDDLE for the passive: ’AméXovto br re Trav Todculwr, they 
[perished] were destroyed by the enemy, v. 3. 3. "Axodoopat xaxds, I shall 
be called vile, Soph. O.'C. 988 (cf. a). 

d.) The passtvE for the middle: ’Hxmdayetod ce, [struck out of my 
wits by fear] fearing you, Soph. El. 1045. “Ow arvxOels, alarmed at the 
sight, Z. 468. 


576. 2. As the middle and passive had at first the same 
form throughout, and were afterwards separated in the Aor. 
REV. GR. w 


) 


| 





304 SYNTAX. R. M. — VOICES. § 576, 


and Fut. only (scarcely in the latter till after the age of Homer), - 
it was but natural that the earlier freedom of use should some- | 
times prevail, especially in poetry, over the later distinction — 
(266 b, 274). This occurs chiefly in the use of a shorter for a 
longer form ; viz. 

a.) In the use of the Future MIDDLE for the Future passive (oftener 
in pures than in mutes, rarely in the contract Fut., 305): Oi dé dyaol 
TtiunnoovTar, the good will be honored, Th. 2. 87 (riunOjoovrar 6. 80). Pr- 
Anoeat, you will be kindly received, a. 123. Hipkdpeba, we shall be ex- 
cluded, vi. 6. 16. ‘Y2d r@v imréwv od BAdypovras, ‘ will not be harmed,’ 
Th. 6. 64. ’Ove8reto Oc, you will be taunted, Soph. O. T. 1500. Maom- 
yooerat, orpepAdoerat, dedjoeTar, exxavOjoera ToPOarAuw Pl. Rep. 361 e. 
— Not in verbs in which the Fut. mid. supplies the place of the Fut. active. 

b.) In the use of the Aorist PASSIVE for the Aorist middle. This 
occurs chiefly in deponents (266¢), and in other verbs in which the proper 
passive is wanting or rare : as (M. marking verbs which have also an Aor. 
mid., less common or differing in sense), (a) Deponents Passive, &yapat M. 
(7ya00n Te adrév, he admired him, i. 1. 9, rov 5 6 yépwr Aydooato, him 
the old man admired, 1.181), RovAcpar will, Suvapar M. be able, éwiore- 
par waderstand, olopar M. think ; (B) Other Verbs, 8€@ (denOfvat . . Kv- 
pov, to have requested C., i. 2. 14), patve M. madden, orpédw M. turn, 
datvw M. show (40). See 50. 

c. A few verbs belonging under b, extend the middle force to a Fut. 
pass.: Siaréyopar (duahéEouat Isoc. 233 ce, diakexOjoouat Id. 195e, L will 
discourse), &x@opat M., 48a M. (OvK dxOecOjon mor; . . Hodycouar. 
“Will you not be displeased with me?” ‘*I shall be pleased.” Cyr. 8. 4. 
10s.), aiS€opar M. respect, Svavogopar M. purpose, émtpéAopar M. care for, 
€papar M. Jove (no Fut. mid.). 

d. The use of the Aor. mid. as passive (except through simple transi- 
tion of meaning, 575) is rare. It scarcely occurs, except in the 2 Aor. 
(originally the Impf. mid. and pass., 273 d) : Aovupt rumels 7) BAfpevos 79, 
struck by a spear or shot by an arrow, A. 191. Karéoyero épwrt, was 
smitten with love, Eur. Hipp. 27. K-rapévowo, slain, X. 75. 


A. ACTIVE. 


577. In many verbs, the active voice is both transitive, 
and intransitive or reflexive, in its use; or both causative and 
emmediate. (a) In some, the double use belongs to the same 
tenses ; but (b) in others, to different tenses, the intransitive 
sense falling especially to the complete tenses and 2 Aor. 
(c) In some verbs, the intransitive or reflexive use may be 
explained through the ellipsis of a noun or pronoun (476, 2). 
Thus, 

(a) Urpépavres 7d dynua, turning the corps, Lac. 11. 9. Zrpépavres 
épevyov, turning they fled, iv. 8. 32 (cf. orpapévres Epevyov ili. 5. 1). 
Tipdtrey ra BéAricra, to do what is best, Mem. 4. 5. 8. Ed mparrevv, to 
do well [prosper], vii. 6.11. Avotay.. wate, make L. stop, Pl. Pheedr. 257. 
TIave, rade, stop, stop! Ar. Vesp. 37. See 486. So bend, burn, move, &e. 

(b) Tods Adxous kablorare, station your companies, Cyr. 6. 3. 26. IIpo- 
porakas Katacthoavtes, having stationed sentinels, iit. 2.1. Karé 
eis Ti Bacirelay, His riv Bacidelav kabéoryKey, was (is) estuwblished on the 


§ 579. ACTIVE AND MIDDLE. 355 


throne, i. 1. 3, Cyr. 5. 2. 27. ’Arrodddexev, has destroyed, il. 1. 38. 
*Amodokev, has perished, Symp. 1.15. See also, for intrans. 2 Aor. and 
1 Pf., Baivw, bbw, cBévvint, cKEXAw, PU, 50; and for intrans. 2 Pf., chiefly 
preteritive, dyvuu., éyeipw, ualvw, dpvipt, welOw, wiyyvuml, Tpdoow, pryyrumt, 
ont, THxwW, paivw, 50. Seee. 

(c) Ta’ry pév ovk iyyev, he did not [lead his army] advance wn this direc- 
tion, i. 10. 6 (ef. &youus 7d orpdrevwa vii. 2. 25). “Arye 5%, come now, ii. 
2.10. ‘Hvredfev éeAavve, thence he [moves forth his army] marches, i. 2. 
7 (cf. é&j\avve thy crpariay Hdt. 7. 38). ‘“Héovy Sovs [sc. éavrév], giving 
-fhimself] wp to pleasure, Eur. Ph. 21. Otrw dé éxa, thus [it has itself] 
the matter stands, v. 6.12. Htyov dewds, they were badly off, vi. 4. 23 
(420 b). IILpovéxev [sc. rdv vobv], to give attention, Mem. 4. 5. 6. Bad’ 
és kopaxas/ [throw yourself to the crows] go to the dogs! Ar. Pl. 782 
(Pasces corvos, Hor.). *E8hdAwoe, showed itsclf, ii. 2.18. See 476. 2. 

d. “Ex used reflexively with an adverb is commonly equivalent to eipt 
with an adjective : “A@vuws éxovres = "AOtuoe dvres, being disheartencd, ili. 
1. 3. Hvvoik&s Exovev = Hvvoixol etnoav i. 1. 5. The poets even join éxw 
with an adjective : "Ex’ #jovxos, [hold still] be quiet, Eur. Med. 550. 

e. Ina division of uses, the stronger transitive sense naturally fell to 
the strengthened stem (346), leaving the intransitive to the imperfect of 
the old stem, i. e. the 2 Aor. (273d). The complete tenses were also 
more inclined than the rest to an intransitive use (often preteritive), be- 
cause the state consequent upon the completion of an action is more promi- 
nent and durable in an intransitive than in a transitive subject. This 
appears especially in the older 2 Perfect. Cf. 320g. 


B. MIDDLE. 


578. The middle voice, like the active, may be either tran- 
sitive or intransitive. Its reflexive sense is far from being uni- 
form either in kind or force. It not only varies in different 
verbs, but often in the same verb when used in different con- 
nections ; and is extensively not expressed in translation, but 
left to be understood. It is, 


a.) Direct; so that the middle is equivalent to the active with the 
Ace. of a reflexive pronoun : Aotror [= dover éavrdv], lavatur, he is wash- 
ing himself, or bathing, Cyr. 1. 3.11. IIdvres wev arelhovro, they all 
anointed themselves, Hel. 4. 5. 4. "Harubepopévyny, bearing herself on, 
i. e. rushing on, i. 9. 6. Tv ddlxwv aarexsopevos, refraining [holding 
himself] from injustice, Mem. 4. 8. 4. Ayopnv, twéAvoea 3 éralpous, 
I loosed myself, then loosed my comrades, t. 463. 


979. bb.) Inprrect; so that the middle is equivalent to the active 
with the Dat. or Gen. of a reflexive pronoun: Urparyyods pév Eérbar 
[= €heiy éavrots] dddous, Ta 5 emirjdeca dyopdter bat, to [take for them- 
selves] choose other generals, and buy (for themselves) provisions, i. 8. 14. 
Ilatda . . c€ movotpar, J make you my son, Cyr. 4. 6. 2. “Ore repli mel- 
arov trovoiro, that he [made it to himself] esteemed it of the utmost con- 
sequence (582y), 1.9. 7. Tplrnv érnydyero yuvaika . . rhyv Sevrépny atro- 
meprpapevos, le took to himself a third wife, having [sent from himself ] 
divorced the second, Hat. 6. 63. Kdpov 6 peraméprerat, he sends for 
Cyrus (to come to himself), i. 1. 2. ToSrov huddrrer Par, tu watch him 
for your own safety, to be on your guard against him, 1. 6.9. ’?Amwé- 


356 SYNTAX. — VOICES. § 579. 


pyvar younr, express your opinion, i. 6.9. Bmracdpevov roy axwaxnp, 
drawing his scynitar, i. 8.29. Oé€cbar ra drdra i. 6. 4. Pepovrar dé 
olkobev . . KwOwva, ws dd TOD ToTrauod dpvoacbar, Cyr. 1. 2. 8. “Azrodi- 
douat [give up for one’s own profit], sel; ratra dtrodopevos, ore Devon 
améSexev ore Quiv Ta yryviueva, having sold these things, he has neither 
paid over the proceeds to S., nor to us, vii. 6. 41. Avopatr, loose for one’s 
self, ransom ; TiOnus or ypadw vduov make a law for another, ri®epar or 
ypahouat viuov make a law for one's self (Mem. 4. 1. 19); Bovdredw give 
counsel to another, BovAevopar give counsel to one’s self, deliberate ; Tipw- 
péw take vengeance for another, avenge, Tipmpéopar take vengeance for one’s 
self, punish. See xpdw 50. 


580. c¢.) RucrprocaL; so that the middle is equivalent to the 
active with a reciprocal pronoun: Maxépevor cal Bacrreds cat Kipos, 
‘fighting with each other,’ 1. 8. 27. ‘Audi Gy etyor diadepdpevor, ‘ quar- 
relling,’ iv. 5.17. AwmAddfavro [rods imovs], exchanged, Cyr. 8. 3. 32. 
— Hence the middle is extensively used in expressing actions which imply 
MUTUAL RELATION ; as those of agreement and contention, of greeting and 
companionship, of intercourse and traffic, of question and answer, &c.: 
ouvrTibena agree, orévdouat [pour out libations together] make a treaty, 
aywvifouar contend, auir\doua vie, udxouar fight, dowd fouat embrace, sa- 
lute, €rouat attend upon, follow, duadéyoua converse, wvéouat buy, muvOd- 
vouat inquire, amoxpivoua answer, &e. 


581. d.) CAUSATIVE ; so that the middle denotes what a person 
procures to be done for himself: ’Eyw yap ce rabra. . &8atdpyv, J had 
you taught these things, Cyr. 1. 6. 2. Owpdxa érovhoato, she had a corse- 
let made, Ib. 6.1. 51. Tpdregdy re Ilepocxhy maperiOero, he had a Per- 
sian table set for him, Th. 1. 130. Dpddpopat [have the name of one taken 
down as a criminal] accuse: of ypayduevor Dwxpdtny Mem. 1.1. 1.  IIpe- 
aBevw go as an ambassador, mperBevopar send an ambassador. Mucddw 
let for hire, pro@dopar [have let to one’s self] hive: wdolov pic Pwodmevos 
vi. 4. 13. “Aroddcovew of Saverrdpevor Tots Savetoact, the borrowers shall 
pay the lenders, Dem. 926. 18. — The active is often so used, as in other 
languages, without the reflex reference : KOpos 5° avrov é&éxove, C. laid tt 
waste (the park), i. 4.10. The law maxim holds in grammar: ‘‘ Qui 
facit per alium, facit per se.” 


582. ¢.) Sunsective; so that the middle represents the action as 
more nearly concerning the subject, than the active (cf. 271e). Thus, 
(a) it may mark the close connection of the agent with that which is 
acted on ; (B) if the active is a causative verb, the middle may form the 
corresponding émmediate ; (y) if the active expresses an external or phys- 
teal action, the middle may express the analogous internal or mental action ; 
(8) if the active represents a person as having a particular office, condi- 
tion, or character, the middle may represent him as making it more his 
own by acting in accordance with it. 

(a) “Exw have (in general), €xopat have hold of, cling to: é&5pe0a abrod, 
we shall keep hold of him, vii. 6. 41. AauBdvw take, A\apPavopar take 
hold of. See 426. (B) Tedw make another taste, yevouar taste for one’s 
self (432a).  Tatvw cause to cease, wavopar cease: ravoe ev TOUTwY To)- 
Aovs Mem. 1. 2. 2; rabra eirav ératcaroi. 3.12. PoBéw frighten, poPé- 
opar fear : moreulous poBjoa iv. 5.17; époBodvro a’révi. 9. 9. Aloxitvw 
put to shame, aioyxvvopar be ashamed ; tornu make to stand, terapor 
stand (45) ; kouudw put to sleep, kousdopar sleep ; dpéyw stretch out, dpéyo- 
por reach after (430 b); wei@w persuade, welBopar believe, obey ; mepariw 








- 9 585. MIDDLE. 357 


“carry across, mepardowar go across ; oré\\w fit out, send, orédopar set ort, 
go: patvw show, datvopar appear. (y) ‘Opigw bound, opltopar define : 
moTauov, .. Os dplver Tiv Apueviay iv. 3.15; Tip Ndoviw dyabdr dpifduevot, 
defining pleasure as a good, Pl. Rep. 505¢. Zkordw view, cKotréopar 
consider (see v. 2. 20); dydA\X\w adorn, ayaddopar pride one’s sel; ppagw 
tell, ppdtopar tell one’s self, reflect. (8) Modiredw, rapsedw, be a citizen 
(steward), woduTev2 par, Tapievopar, act the citizen (steward), manage state 
(or other) affairs: modirevovra tap avrots, being a citizen amony them, 
Hel. 1. 5. 19; of wev rodcrevduevor . . vduous TidevTat, those who administer 
the state make laws, Mem. 2. 1. 14; ramieverOar, to parcel out (as a stew- 
ard), ii. 5. 18. 


583. Remarks. 1. If the reflex action is direct, it is oftener ex- 
pressed by a reflexive pronoun with the active, or sometimes middle ; and 
in other cases, the pronoun is often added to make the expression more 

lain or emphatic : “Exeivos drécpatev éaurdy, he slew himself, Dem. 127. 3. 
Eaurov éruspdéacdat, that he slew himself, i. 8. 29. ’Emwdadeorépay av- 
Thy . . KaTeckevaxev éavr@, he has rendered tt less secure for himself, Dem. 
22.13. “Eaur@ dvoua repimorjoacba, to win a name for himself, v. 6. 17. 
Atedéyorrd re éavrots, they talked to themselves, v. 4. 84. “EmedelEavro dé 
Tas avrav dperds Isoc. 58a. Mereréumero tov Xvéweow mpds éavrdv i. 2. 
26 (cf. 579). Zuveyévovro adrdArjrars, they met each other, Ib. 27. See 537. 


584. 2. As the Future so extensively denotes purpose (what a per- 
son will please himself by doing), it is the most swbjective of the tenses ; 
and hence, in so many verbs (266), the middle here takes the place of 
the active. (a) In some of these, the Fut. act. is not used at all; and 
(b) in others, only as a second, usually later or less common, form. 
(c) In some, the action of the body is thus connected with the state of 
the mind. E. g. (a) yryvwonw and ofda know, pavOdvw learn, eiul be, rd- 
oxw suffer, Ovickw die, K\ayxXdvw and Tvyxdvw obtain ; (b) Bidw live, mvéw 
breathe, amapravw err, deldw fear, TAdw endure, Oavpafw wonder, péw flow, 
Tixrw bear ; (c) axovw hear, dpdw see, ddw sing, Bodw shout, yehdw laugh, 
yodaw wail, kaiw weep, duvips swear, écbiw and Tpwyw eat, mivw drink, 
kaw labor, walfw play, Baivw and Br\WoKw go, véw swim, SidpdoKxw, Oéw, 
and tpéxw, run, pevyw flee, Sudkw pursue, OpdcKw leap, Oryyavw touch, 
apwatw seize, KauBdvw take. See 50. 


585. 3. In many cases, the reflex reference is so obvious, or so in- 
distinct, that it may be either expressed or omitted without affecting the 
sense ; that is, the active or the nviddle may be employed at pleasure : 
IloAd hépovres, Mixpdv hepopévev, bringing much (little), Mem. 3. 14. 1. 
Ilaphayivas Evppdyxous wmonoere* . . piiov twroinoopey Tov Ilapdayéva ° 
you will make the Paphlagonians allies } we will make the Paphlagonian 
a friend ; v. 5, 22 (cf. Ib. 12). “Hydpatov ra émirjdeca i. 5. 10 (cf. 579). 
*Eoayaye yuvaixa, “Konydyero yuvaixa, take (took) a wife, Hdt. 5. 40, 
6. 63. —In some verbs, the use of the mid. form is poetic, especially Epic. 

4. It follows naturally from the distinction between the two voices, 
that the middle is more inclined to take its object in an indirect case than 
the active : ’EXodspour abrév, AUTH édocdopeiro, reproved him, Cyr. 1. 4. 8s. 

5. In the middle, as in the active (577 e), the 2 Aor. is less transitive 
in its use than the 1 Aor.: ’Erpéavro rods . . laréas, they put the cavalry 
to flight, Th. 6. 98. °Es puyhy érpdmovro, they turned to flight, Id. 5. 73. 

6. The active and middle may be often translated by the same Eng. 
word differently used : eddye: feed, feast (trans.), edwxod (intrans.), Cyr. 
5. 5. 42, 1, 2. 6. So érelyw hasten, ryxw melt, &c. See yauéw merry, 50. 


358 SYNTAX. — PASSIVE VOICE. § 586. 


C. PASSIVE. 


586. The passive voice has for its SUBJECT a complement 
of the active, commonly (a) a direct, but sometimes (b) an 7z- 
direct complement. (c) Any other word governed by the 
active, and not in apposition with this, may remaim unchanged 
with the passive. (d) The SUBJECT OF THE ACTIVE is expressed, 
with the passive, by the Gen. with a preposition (commonly tré, 
but sometimes dé, e&, mapd, or mpds), or (e), less frequently, by 
the semple Gen. or Dat., or (f) yet more rarely (chiefly in poetry, 
especially Ep.), by the Dat. with imé. Thus, 

(a) Act. governing Acc. ILepicppetro & atrh brd Tod Mdoka, tt was 
surrounded by the Mascas [= meprépper 5 attiv 6 Maoxas, the M. sur- 
rownded it), i. 5. 4. (b) Act. governing GEN. KaredpovyOnv tm’ abroiy, 
I was despised by them [= xateppovncdryy pov, they despised me,| V1. 
Euthyd. 273 ¢. ‘“HyeuoveterOat td tyudy, to be led by us (407), Th. 3. 61. 
"Ep@o tar dvOparwr, you would be loved by men (482e), Hier. 11. 11. 


Act. governing DAT. Ovxére 6é diretiotuat, GAN Hdn dwerhO &AXors, J am 


no longer threatened, but I now threaten others (452 a), Symp. 4. 31. Ei- 
KéTws TodewotvTat, they are justly attacked (455), Th. 1. 37. Ovdx av Oav- 
pagoto (472e), dd\AA POovoio (Dat.), . . kara’yehg@o (Gen.), you would not be 
admired, but envied, ridiculed, Hier. 11. 6. 

(c) ‘Imméav 6 A\ddos éeverijcOn, the height was filled with horsemen (414), 
i. 10.12. Ei 6adrdrrns eipyowro (405). Aodfvat ot radvras, that these 
should be given to him (454 e), i. 1. 8. Movoikiy . . wadevdeis, musicam 
doctus, having been taught music (480 c), Pl. Menex. 236a. Tumrre: ras 
ioas wAn Yas, you are struck as many blows (477), Ar. Ran. 635. Tototrov 
TuAWa TéuveTar TO TETUNMEVOY, Oloy TO Téuvov Téuver, the thing cut is cut such 
a cut as the cutter cuts, Pl. Gorg. 476d. But Lrparyyov 6é adrdv dzé- 
decEe rdvrwy (480 a), becomes Utparnyds dé rdvrwy dredelxOn, 1. 9. 7. 

(d) ‘Yard dovAov dprecbat, to be ruled [under] by a slave, Pl. Lys. 208 c. 
Tydpa ad’ éxdorwy éhéyovro, opinions were expressed [from] by each, 'Th. 
3. 86. 7Ex Baciéws dedoudvar, given [from] by the king, i. 1. 6. Tapa 
dvr duoroyetrat, ‘Omodoyeirar pds mavrwy, it is conceded by all, i. 9. 1, 
20. (e) See 434b, 461. (f) ‘{7d 7 watpl rePpaumévos, brought up 
[under] by his father, Pl. Rep. 558d. “Epi8nbev ip “Exropt O. 637. 


587. Remarks. 1. When the active has more than one com- 
plement, it is commonly determined which shall be the subject of the 
passive by one or the other of the following preferences: (a) The passive 
prefers, as its subject, a direct to an indirect complement of the active. 
(b) The passive prefers, as its subject, the name of a person to that of 
a thing. If these preferences conflict, sometimes the one prevails, and 
sometimes the other. (a) Odpaxes avrois éroplcOncar, they were furnished 
with breastplates (454 e), iii. 3. 20. (b) Ot rdv “APnvaiwy émireTpapmevor 
tiv purakiy, those of the Athenians who had been intrusted with the guard, 
Th. 1. 126 (cf. rotor éwerérparro ) pudaxh, to whom the guard had been 
intrusted, Hdt. 7.10). Oi Koptv@or ratra érecraduévo, the Corinthians 
having received these directions, Th. 5. 37. 

2. The latter preference often leads to construction by synecdoche (481) : 
"Amorunbévtes Tas Kepadds, cut off as to their heads [= dmrorpnPecay rav 
xepardar, their heads being cut off,| ii. 6. 1 (cf. Képou amoréurerat  kepadh 
i, 10.1). Ta Ora rerpurnuévor, having his ears bored, ili. 1. 31. 





§ 591. RULE XXX.— USE OF THE TENSES. 359 


_ 588. 8. The passive is sometimes the converse of the middie rather 

than of the active; and hence deponents may have a passive: Mur@wbFvae 
6é ov éml rovTw pacay, ‘that they had not been hired,’ i. 3. 1 (581). 
Odpaxas eb cipyarpévas, corselets well made, Mem. 3. 10. 9 (cf. avdpidvras 
Kad@s elpyacuévovy, ‘having made,’ Ib. 2. 6. 6). “HpyaoOqcerat, it shall 
be performed, Soph. Tr. 1218. *“HavAby dé ea, and wool was bought, 
Mem. 2. 7.12. Td Geabéy Th. 3. 38. Brafopevor id tivwv, compelled by 
some, Th. 1. 2. — This passive occurs chietly in the complete tenses (often 
in the Perf. part.) ; and in the dor. (especially when the Aor. mid. is 
also in use). 


589. 4. If an active or middle which has no complement is changed 
to a passive, it becomes, of cowrse, IMPERSONAL (571d); and it may be- 
come so, with an indirect complement: ‘Yafpxro 5° airod, a beginning of 
it had been made [= tripiav avrod, they had begun it}, Th. 1. 938. ITa- 
perkevacrro avrots, preparation had been made by them, Id. 3. 22. Mary 
éuol KexAadvoerar, J shall have wept in vain, Ar. Nub. 1486. Kaxds wé- 
mpaxTat, male actum est, Eur. Med. 364. Compare the far more com- 
mon use in Latin of the passive impersonal. 


IlI. USE OF THE TENSES. 
(For a general view, see 30b, 267.) 


590. RuL—E XXX. The DEFINITE TENSES ex- 
press the action as doing at the time; the IN- 
DEFINITE, simply as performed in the time; and 
the COMPLETE, as complete at the time. In the Jn- 
dicative, this time is marked as PRESENT or FUTURE 
by the primary tenses, and as PAST by the secondary ; 
in the other modes, it is not marked. 


a. Hence the tense forms of the Indicative are distinguished, in gen- 
eral, as chronic (xpos relating to time) ; and those of the other modes, 
as achronic (a- not). The Ind. Pres. and Impf. (more fully named Pres- 
ent Imperfect and Past Imperfect, since that which is doing is still unfin- 
ished) unite, for the other modes, in a tense which is simply dmperfect ; 
and in like manner, the Ind. Perf. and Plup. (which might properly be 
termed Present Perfect and Past Perfect) unite in a tense which is simply 
perfect. Another tense is commonly a Past Aorist (Indefinite, 267 d) in 
the Ind., but simply an Aorist tense in the other modes ; and there are 
two Futures, a Future Aorist or Indefinite, and a Future Perfect, which, 
in respect to absolute time (607), are achronic out of the Indicative. 

b. The greater definiteness of time required by the definite and com- 
plete than by the indefinite tenses is obvious, and is expressed by the 
preposition at, as compared with in. 


A. DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE. 


591. The indefinite tenses present a simple (as it were, a 
momentary) view of the action as an undivided whole; tho 


360 SYNTAX. R. XXX. — TENSES. § 591. 


definite tenses present a more extended view of it as m pro- 
gress (begun, going on, possibly never completed). 


a. The former are distinguished in general as narrative, and the latter 
as descriptive tenses. If action is conceived of as motion in a straight line, 
the definite tenses may be said to present a side view of this line, so that 
it is seen in its full length ; but the indefinite tenses to present only an 
end view of it, so that it appears as a mere point. Thus, 


Definite View : éypade, Indefinite View: éypawe, 
scribebat, he was writing, scripsit, he wrote. 


592. Hence the action is represented, 


1.) By the definite tenses, as continued or prolonged ; but 
by the Aorist, as momentary or transient: or by the former, as 
a habit or continued course of conduct ; but by the latter, as a 
single act: 

Tovds uév ody weXTacTas &éEavTo of BdpBapor kal éudxovTo: éredh dé éy- 
yos foav ol omNira, éTpdtmovTo: Kal of ev meATacTal evOds eltrovTo Sia- 
Kovtes* the burbarians received the targeteers (momentary) and fought with 
them (continued) ; but when now the hoplites were near, they turned to 
jlight (momentary) ; and the targeteers immediately followed purswing 
them (continued) ; v. 4. 24. AaBav. ., txev, having taken (momentary), 
having (continued), i. 1. 2. “Ezrel dé et8ov airiv, olrep mpdcbev mpooekt- 
vouv, kal TITE TPCTEKIVYT EY, when those saw him who previously used to 
bow before him (habit), they bowed even then (single act), i. 6. 10. “Oores 
& aducvetro, . . dwenéwrero, whoever came (from time to time), he sent 
away (course of conduct), i. 1. 5. “Emewdtv dravra dxovonre, kplvarte, kal 
pu mpdrepov TporapPevere, when you have heard all, Judge, and do not be 
previously anticipating, Dem. 44, 2. Avadéyou cai padeiv. 8.5. 

a. Any dwelling of the mind upon the agent, mode, or circumstances of 
an action, or any attempt at graphic description, inclines to the use of the 
definite tenses : ’Amexplvavto (KXéapxos 6° Xeyev), they answered (and Cle- 
archus was the speaker), ii. 8. 21. ‘Opxioavro adv rots dros, Kal HAXovro 
inrd Te kal ov@ws, Kal Tats wayalpats €XPaVTO, they danced in armor, — 
they leaped high and lightly, and flourished their swords, vi. 1. 5. Ob- 
serve their use in the description of character, 1. 9. 28, 11, 6. 2s. — 

b. In the IMPERATIVE, the momentary character of the Aor. is peculi- 
arly favorable to vivacity, energy, and earnestness of expression : “Axkov- 
care oby ov mpos Gear, hear me, then, by the gods! v. 7. 5. Bdépov pos 
Ta bpn, look at the mountains, iv. 1, 20. 

ec. The Aor. sometimes gives more vivacity or force to the sequel of an- 
other tense : “Os Te kal dAxywov dvdpa poet cal ddeldero vixnv, who puts to 
flight the valiant man, and SNATCHES victory from his grasp, P. 177. 
Acvapbelper Te ToAdd Kal HBlkynoev, they work much corruption and harm, 
Pl. Conv. 188 b. IpocBodds nitperifovro, kal d\\ws evOrérpupav xpdvor, 
they were preparing assaults, and otherwise consumed time, Th. 2. 18. 
See 605 b. , 

d. In verbs denoting state, the Aor. usually expresses entrance into the 
state (becoming), and the definite tenses continuance in it (being): Bacr- 
Nedoar dvipa Tupddy, . . ert robTov Bactdebovtos, that a blind man became 
king, and while he was reigning, Hdt. 2. 137. So Bovredw, isxiw, voréw, 





| 





§ 595. _.-- DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE. 361 


mrovréw, I am senator, strong, sick, rich, éBoddevoa, toxvoa, evdonoa, 
émhotryca, J became senator, strong, sick, rich. 


593. 2.) By the definite tenses, as doing at the time of, or 
until another action ; but by the Aorist, simply as done 272 ts 
own time : 

*EropetOnoay craduods rérrapas, iwixa dé rv wéurrov éropevovro, eldov 
Bacirecsy 71, they made four day’s-marches, and while they were making 
the fifth, they saw a palace, iii. 4. 23. Totrov éxédevoe StadvraEar ary 
Ti Te yuvatka* .. Siahvddrrev . . &ws av ards AdBy* him he comnanded 


to guard for him the woman ; to guard her, till he should himself take her ; 
Cyr. 5./1..2 3. 


594. 3.) By the definite tenses, as begun, attempted, 
designed, or imminent (doing, not done) ; but by the Aorist, as 
accomplished (done) : 


Knréapxos robs abrod orparubras éBidtero iévar: of 5é atrév re EBaddov. 
.. Mixpov e&épvye 7d wh katatrerpwOtvar, iorepov 0 érel éyvu, bri ob dur%- 
cera: Brdcacbar. C. attempted to force his soldiers to proceed ; but. they 
began to stone him. He narrowly escaped being stoned to death (the com- 
pletion of their act) ; and afterwards, when he saw that he should not be 
able to prevail by force (to accomplish his attempt). i. 3. 1s. “Hmeov 
adrovs, xa! obs traca, J tried to persuade them, and those whom I succeeded - 
in persuading, Cyr. 5. 5. 22. AGoa Slbwcr, he (is for giving) offers gifts, 
TI. 261. “Oveopévoror Swe Swrivyy, when they proposed to buy, he gave to 
them freely, Hdt. 1. 69. "Exawwépny Eider, dd eexrepev, [ was on the 
point of being slain by the sword, but she (Diana) stole me away, Kur. Iph. 
T. 26. “O qovets, rotnooy taxiov, what thou art doing [going to do], do at 
once, Jn. 13. 27 (Fac, si quid facis, Sen.). 

a. Hence the definite tenses are often used with a negative to deny the 
attempt as well as the accomplishment of an action: KXéapyos otk dveBl- 
Batev émt rdv A\dgor, C. did not undertake to march upon the hill, i. 10. 14. 
Ovdéev wPédiuov eheyev . ., 6 dé Novas Cdekev, he would say nothing useful, 
but the other said, iv. 1. 23. ‘Evel 6é ovdels dvréXeyev, elmer, iii. 2. 38. 

b. A person is often spoken of as having done what he has atteinpted to 
do: ** Alxawa yap révd’ edtuyety xrelvavTa pe ;” ‘Krelvavra; Aevdv y’ 
elmas, ei kal {ns Oavdy.” ‘*Oeds yap éxowfer we, TRIE 5 olxoua.” ‘Is it 
right that he should prosper, having slain me?” ‘‘ Having slain you ? 
You tell a marvel indeed, if, dead, you are yet alive.” ‘‘ For heaven pre- 
serves me, but, so far as lay in him, I am no more.” Soph. Aj. 1126. 

e. The modest artist inscribed on his work, ‘‘ érrotet,”” facie- 
bat, as if he had made an attempt, rather than succeeded. 


595. 4.) By the definite tenses, as irtroductory ; but by 
the Aorist, as conclusive : 


*"Hpdrav Kidpor, . . 6 5° darexplvaro, they asked Cyrus, and he answered, 
i. 3. 20. “Hndeye roudde, he began to speak as follows ; but at the close of 
the speech, Towadra . . etrev, thus he spoke ; Th. 3. 35, 41, 49. "Axov- 
cartes Tabra éwelBovto kal S&éBynoav i. 4.16. Ot" E\Anves EBovdedovTo - 
kal arexplvavro ii. 3. 21. 

a. Verbs of asking, inquiring, convnanding, forbidding, deliberating, 
attempting, endeavoring, besieging, wounding, and some others, are intro- 
ductory in their very nature, and hence incline to the use of the definite 
tenses : Ti det adrdv airety, xal od AaPety EM SvTa ; why must he usk for 


REV. Gh. 16 








362 SYNTAX. &. XXX. — TENSES. § 595. 


them (which of itself accomplishes nothing), and not come and take them 
(which is final)? ii, 1. 10. ILloA\\ods karetitpwokov, cal éxparnoav rap 
"EAAjvwv, they wounded many, and worsted the Greeks, tii. 4. 26. Zudré- 
Eas otpadrevma, érrodudpKe. Midnrov.., cal émeparo kardyew Tovs éxmenTw- 
xéras, ‘besieged M. and endeavored,’ i. 1. 7. 

b. There is no precise line of division between the offices of the definite 
and indefinite tenses. In some cases, it seems to be indifferent which are 
employed. And the definite tenses, as the generic forms (602), often 
occur, where the indefinite would seem to be more strictly appropriate ; 
especially in the earlier Greek. In poetry, the metre seems often to in- 
fluence the choice: cf. BddXeTo, Barero, &c.; Edurev, Netwe B, 428, 106s. 


596. Futurr. The dim, shadowy future has little occasion 
for precise forms to mark the state of the action. It is com- 
monly enough to mark the action svmply as future. 


a. Hence the inflection of most verbs has but a single Fut., the in- 
definite ; leaving the definite and complete Futures, if they require to be 
distinguished from this, to be expressed by a Participle and substantive 
verb (267 e) : ZKdpos apkotod wou orar 7d Aeerdy, Seyros shall hereafler 
content me (continued, 592), Soph. Ph. 459. “Avdpa karexavdvres toec Ge, 
you will have slain a man, vii. 6. 36. Ta déovra éoépeOa éyvexdres, Kal 
byw paralwy awyndAdAgaypévor Dem. 54. 22. 


597. In Greek, as in other languages, the Fut. furnishes indirect 
and variously expressive forms for the IMPERATIVE: (a) Affirmation, “Os 
oby trounoere, kal melfec0é wor, thus [you will do] do, and listen to me, PI. 
Prot. 338 a. IIdvrws dé roito Spdoeas, this do, by all means, Ar. Nub. 
1352. (b) Negation, Ov Kréfers, thow shalt not steal, Rom. 13. 9. Myédev 
Tavs’ épeis, not a word of this! Asch. Th. 250. (ec) Question, “A€ev ris . . 
Tov Boripa; [will] let some one bring the herdman, Soph. O. T. 1069. 
(d) Negative Question, Ovk &EB’ as raxvoTa; Kal. . &pere udvny, [will you 
not] carry her away instantly, and leave her alone, Soph. Ant. 885. 
(e) Doubly Negative Question, OV wh adheres, GAN dKodovOyeers enol ; 
[Won’t you not talk] Don’t talk, but follow me, Ar. Nub. 505. Od uy 
grvapycets, don’t trifle, Ar. Ran. 524. Cf. 629¢, 627 d. — For the Fut. 
with é7ws, in the place of the Imv., see 627. 

f. The Aor. and Pres. ind. have also an imperative force with tl otv 
ov, or tri ob+ Ti of od... theEds wor; why then have you not told me? i. e. 
tell me, Cyr. 2.1. 4. Tk ody ov« épwras; Pl. Lys. 211d. 


598. a. A future action may be represented more expressly as close 
at hand, or as connected with destiny, necessity, will, purpose, expectation, 
&c., by the verbs pédAa, é8é\o or Or, Botropar, Set, xpH, &c., with the 
Inf. This Inf. may be Pres., Aor.,or Fut., according to the view taken 
of the action in respect to definiteness and nearness: Mé\Xw ydp buds b:- 
ddgew, I aim about to teach you, Pl. Apol. 21b. “Emedov dpa ravceu, 
I thought I should stop you, Ar. Ran. 268. ‘O cra@uds Oa euedre xara- 
Avew, the station where he was to halt, i. 8.1. Meddhoavrd te abet, on 
tie point of being puiished, Cyr. 6.1. 40. Ovdx é0é\w édOetv, IT am not 
willing to go, or L will not go, i. 3.10. Ei & €Oedjoer. . dvaBFvae 4 Tv- 
pavvis, Uf the sceptre shall descend, Hdt. 1. 109. Bovrever@ar, & re xph 
moew, ‘what we must do,’ i. 3. 11. 

b, The ideas of destiny, necessity, purpose, &c. are often expressed by 


the simple Fut. Especially is the Fut. Part., both with and without és, 


used continually to express purpose, particularly with verbs of motion : 


j 


veal 


§.599. FUTURE. COMPLETE. 363 


Ti diadépover. ., el ye Tavamover Kal Biphoover ; what advantage have 
they, Uf they must hunger and thirst ? Mem. 2.1.17. Otc@’ ofv 6 Spaces ; 
do you know what you must do? Kur. Cycl. 131. Aet rov ed otparnyh- 
covra exe, he that would command well must have, Mem. 3. 1. 6 (cf. Tov 
péd\Xovra orparnyety lb. 5. 24). LZudrtapBdver Kdoov ws drroxtrevay, he ap- 
prehends C. [as about to put him to death] with the design of putting him 
to death, i. 1. 3. “Hreupé twa épotvra, he sent one to say, ii. 5. 2. Ma- 
Xovpevos ourpe, he advanced to battle, i. 10.10. See 558 a. 

c. Instead of the Fut. Part., the Pres. is sometimes employed to denote 
purpose, according to 594, especially with verbs of motion : Tair’ éxéukd- 
{ov 7APov, I went to avenge this wrong, Kur. Sup. 154. 

d. The Modern Greek has lost the simple form of the Fut.; but is well 
supplied, like the Eng., with compound forms, both definite and indefinite. 


B. COMPLETE. 


599. a. While the indefinite tenses represent the action 
simply as performed im the time contemplated, the complete 
tenses represent it as already finished (as having been already 
performed) at the time contemplated. In the former, the view 
is directed to the action simply; in the latter, it is specially 
directed to the completion of the action, and to the state conse~ 
quent upon its performance. Hence arise two special uses of 
the complete tenses: (b) the one to mark emphatically the 
entire (often immediate) completion or termination of an action ; 
and (c) the other, to express the continuance of the effects of an 
action. Thus, 


(a) Towwdra nev wemolyke, such things has he done, i. 6.9. ’Axnhkoa per 
Totvoud, pynuovedw dé ov, I have heard the name, but do not remember itt, 
Pl. Th wt. 144b. (b) "H gevyew. . 7) raxd Karaxexatoda, cither to flec, 
or to be quickly and utterly consumed, Cyr. 7. 5. 23. (c) ‘O w5denos . . 
meverrépous temoinke, Kal ToAdovs Kwddvous roudvew jvayxace, the war has 
made us poorer (as we still are), and compelled us to meet many dangers 
(now past), Isoc. 163. Eizrov rhv Cdpay xewdetobar, they commanded the 
door [to be closed and to remain so] ¢o be kept closed, Hel. 5. 4. 7. “Ouy- 
pov @ywye pdhiora tTOatpaxa, Homer I have most admired (as I still do), 
Mem. 1. 4. 3. “O yéypada, yéypada Jn. 19. 22. See 600s. Tendentes 
imposuisse, Hor. O. 3. 4. 51. 

d. The Perf. Imv. commands the completeness of the action ; and hence 

. may forbid its continuance, or may command emphatically its full (often 
instant and final) performance: Taird por mpoepho%a, let so much have 
been premised by me, Isoc. 43d. ‘Oplorbe tudv 7 Boaddrys + viv dé. . Bor- 
Ojcare, let your slugyishness have reached its full limits ; and do you now 
assist, Th. 1.71. Tatra. . wewato9w, Jet [so much have been played] the 
sport end here, Pl. Euthyd. 278d. TherepdcO., let a full trial be made, 
Ar. Vesp. 1129. ‘Qporoyho Se juty Pl. Rep. 485 a. 

e. The proper use of the Perf. Imy. in its simple form scarce extends 
beyond the 3 sing. pass. A very few exceptional cases may be added, 
unless these belong rather to the preteritive use (318): [éravoo, [have 
done] stop (at once)! or (pret., cf. 601¢) be silent / Dem. 721. 6. ‘Hut 
mioTa OeGy werolngo, give us (once for all) a solemn pledge, Cyr. 4. 2. 7. 


364 SYNTAX. R, XXX.— TENSES. — COMPLETE. § 599, 


f. Compare the three classes of tenses in examples like these : Thy dyo- 
pay elow dverkevacay, kal ai mvdar éxékdetvTo, kal érl Toy TeLxav Srha 
épatvero, they removed the market into the city, and the gates were kept 
closed, and arms appeared wpon the walls, vi. 2. 8. ‘O péev ANnorhs obroct 

. €s Tov IlupipheyeOovra épPeBANoOw, 0 dé lepscvdos bd Tis Xiwatpas Sra- 
onmacOntw, 6 dé Tipayvos.. Urd T&y yuTav. . kepéobw 7d Hap, let this 
bandit be tossed (at once and finally) tnto the Pyriphlegethon, and the 
temple-robber be torn in pieces by Chimera, and the tyrants liver be the 
duily feast of the vultures, Luc. D. M. 30. 


GOO. a. As the object of the complete tenses is to ascribe the conse- 
quences of the action, rather than narrate it, the transition in § 268 is 
natural and easy ; and we find verbs in different stages of the transition. 
Compare the Pres., Aor., and Preteritive, in examples like the following: 
OvyacKke, J am dying, Eur. Alc. 284; Tebvaorv of Oavdvres, those who 
have died (the past event) are dead (the state consequent upon the event), 
Ib. 541. (b) The preteritive use has a far wider extent than is commonly 
recognized. In some verbs, however, it is dialectic or doubtful: éBeB7jxKer, 
he went, Z. 513 ; BeBiKer, she ascended, or had now ascended, A. 221; Be- 
BrAnKe, he hit, or had hit, EB. 66, 394, 661. 

c. For the same reason, the complete tenses are more used in the pas- 
sive forms than in the active (817s), and the Perf. is most frequent in the 
passive Participle, which often approaches a mere adjective use. Some 
modern languages, as the English, French, and German, have no simple 
forms either of the passive, or of the complete tenses, except the Perf. Part. 


d. The Perf. is sometimes called a past, and sometimes a present tense ; 
and neither without reason, since it marks the relation of a past action to 
the present time. The action which it denotes is past ; but the state conse- 
quent, to which it also refers, is present. The tense is therefore in its 
time, as in so many languages in its form, ComMpouND, having both a past 
and a present element. The comparative prominence of these e ements 
varies in different languages, in different words in the same language, and 
in different uses of the same word. We‘remark, in general, that the 
present element has a far greater prominence in the Greek than in the 
Latin or English Perfect. 


GOl. Furure Perrect. a. The Fut. Perf. expresses the 
sense of the Perf. with a change of the time ; that is, it rep- 
resents the state consequent upon the completion of an action 
as future. (b) As it carries the mind at once over the act 
itself to its completion and results, it is sometimes used to ex- 
press a future action as immediate, rapid, or decisive. (c) In 
some verbs these uses pass, more or less decidedly, into a pre- ° 
teritive use (268). 

(a, c) “Hy 6 wh yévyra, wdrnv enol Kexdavorerar, od 5 eyxavdw reObvi- 
fers, if there should not be, I shall have wept in vain, and you will be dead 
with laughter (589), Ar. Nub. 1435. (a) Ov ur ro wédeos eipqoerar alvos, 
your praise (already spoken) shall not have been spoken in vain, Y. 795. 
Ovdels. . mereyypapioerat, d\NX, dorep Fv Td wpGrov, éyyeypaerar, no one 
shall be enrolled (the simple act) elsewhere, but shall remain enrolled (the 
state consequent upon the-act of enrolment) as he was at first, 1d. Kq. 
1370. (b) Ppdge cal wempdkerat, speak and it [shall be done at once] ¢s 
done, Ar. Pl. 1027. Nouifere. . éué re karaxekdeo Oat, cal judas ob woht 





§ 603. INTERCHANGE. — GENERIC USE. 365 


€u03 Uarepor, be assured that I shall be immediately cut down, and you not 
long afier, i. 5. 16. Primus impetus castra ceperit, Liv. (c) Uday eipy- 
cera, tie whole {shall have been] shall be stated, Hdt. 4. 16 (cf. a above). 
Ilerpdoerar, he shail be sold, vii. 1. 36 (the classic Fut. pass. of rurpdokw, 
50; ef. “Exjpvéev 6 Mvdovrros rerpacbat, doris avtouoroin, M. proclaimed 
that every deserter should be sold, Hel. 6. 2.15). “Oray 6h wh c0évw, tre- 
Traveopat, when I have no power, I shall be quiet (cf. 599e), Soph. Ant. 91. 
See psuvjoowac meminero (268), dediyjoerar (576 a). 

d. The reason for an old name of this tense, pazlo-post-future (paulo 
post futurus, soon to be), is obvious. (e) The Latin differs from the Greek 
in forming its Fut. Perf. by inflection in the active, instead of the passive ; 
and also in making much greater use of the tense. 


C. INTERCHANGE. 


602. Rute N. The uses of the TENSES are often inter- 
changed. 


a. This may be referred (1.) to generic wse, especially where the forma- 
tion is defective ; (11.) to gnomic wse ; (111.) to varied use in respect to 
relative and absolute time ; (tv.) to a conception of the mind varying from 
the reality of things, or to the choice of a less direct form of expression. 
For its special prevalence in the Greek, see 392. 

b. From the order in which the Greek tenses were historically devel- 
oped (271s), the Pres., in its widest generic sense, includes all the tenses ; 
the {mpf., all the past tenses ; the Fut., all the future tenses ; the Aor., 
all the indefinite and complete tenses, except those that are future ; and 
the Perf., all the complete tenses. 

c. The distinction of generic and specific belongs not merely to the 
tense-forms, but also to the ideas which these forms represent. Thus the 
idea of PRESENT TIME, which applies specifically only to the passing 
moment, extends in its generic application to any period including this 
moment ; and we speak of the present month, the present century, &c. In 
its widest extent, therefore, it includes all time. (d) Hence general truths 
or statements, existing states or habits, and oft-recurring facts, belong ap- 
propriately to present time: Tlerer rox kdpos UBpuw, satiety begets insolence, 
Theog. 153. Oi wdvres Alytrrioe Oover, all the Egyptians sacrifice, Hat. 
2. 41. <A tense so employed to convey a general truth or statement is 
termed gnomic (yrwpurxds sententious). 


603. 1. Generic Use. 1. Existing tenses are used 
generically to supply the places of those that are wanting. 


a. The place of a Present Indefinite is commonly supplied by the Pres. 
Definite, as the generic present tense ; but (b) sometimes, with stronger 
expression, by the Aor., as the generic indefinite tense. The latter, as the 
tense for the momentary, belongs especially to the vehement utterance of 
lively feeling or quick thought (chiefly in 1 sing.). Thus, (a) Tév dvdpa 
ope, I sce the man, i. 8. 26. (b) "Ho Onv dzecdals, éy€Naca WodoKouriacs / 
L smile at your threats, I laugh at your fury! Ar. Eq. 696. “Hoéyy 
yareory! Hurrah for the lizard! Ar. Nub. 174. ’E8eedpnv 7d pnder ! 
Accipio omen! Welcome to the omen/ Soph. El. 668. Zvydv éwrjvewa. ! 
I bid you hush ! 1b. 1322. Ze. . etwov rijode ys dw repay, ‘I bid you 
peremptorily,’ Eur. Med. 271. So dwémrvoa, Guwéa, &e. See 608 a. 

ce. In some verbs, (a) the Pres. supplies the place of a Fut.; or (B) the 
Impf., of an Aor.: (a) see 305f, 326 ¢, 609¢ ; and etm, véoua, xéw, Bidw, 


366 SYNTAX. R. N, — TENSES, § 603. 


~ 


Gddoxw, Ketuat, in 50. (B) "Hy was, jew went, pny said (pnoa differing 
in sense, 50), &c.: Hépons wév py eivar, he said that he was w Persian, iv. 
4.17 (6 62 etrev Ib. 18). “Arye and awAAOov, deserted, 1. 9. 29. 


GO4. 2. The definite tenses may express continuance (a) through 
a period coming down to their proper time (where we use the Perf. or 
Plup.); or (b) through a period extending on from this time (where the 
Fut. might be used): (a) 2pgy Evvork@ wddrN Ern, J [am] have been living 
with you many years, Ar. Pl. 437. Tair dp épuddrrov wddaz, this then 
you had been guarding against so long, Ar. Eq. 125. OW re mdpos ye e- 
Aeupévos Epyeant, never before have yow come last, «. 448. Annum jam 
audis Cratippum, Cic.; ‘* 7’ ds dinner time at least an hour ago,” Heywood. 
(b) Mévopev éws dv. . AnPOGuev ; [do we wait] shall we wait until we have 
been taken ? Th. 6. 77. Ovd« tore ra éemirHdera, ef why AnYdueOa 7d xwpior, 
there are no provisions (and will be none), wiless we shall take that place, 
Spee 


GOS. 3. Unless the attention is specially directed to the 
effect of an action, the generic Aor. more frequently supplies the 
place of the specific Perf. and Plup. (602 b), as a more familiar, 
more vivacious, and often a shorter or more euphonic form : 


Nuvi 6¢ Oerradois . . €BotPnoe, and now it has aided the Thessalians, 
Dem. 22. 7. Tadryy ri ridw é&éXutrov of évorxodvres, this city its inhab- — 
itants had left, i. 2.24. Nodv & HABov, J have now come, a. 194. . 

a. This use prevails most in the active, as the voice which gives most — 
prominence to the action itself (600 s) ; and is there especially frequent in 
the participle: XwddéEas orpdrevua, éwodrdpxec Midyrov, having collected 
an army, he besieged M., i. 1.7. Totrov &iaBas éSedavver i. 2. 6. 

b. The Aor. is so used in immediate connection with the Perf. or 
Plup., especially as a sequel (cf. 592): “AwoScSpandtes warépas kal pyré- 
pas, of dé Kat Téxva karadiTdvTes, having run away from fathers and moth- 
ers, and others having even left children, vi. 4. 8. ‘Iva we dL0dEys, Gvmep 
ote éXfrva.” “"HdOes dé xara ri ;” ‘* That you may teach me those 
things for which I have come.” ‘‘But you have come for what?” Ar. 
Nub. 238. Ovdx 6 éokeppévos 085° 6 peptsvjoas Dem. 576. 22. | 

c. The use of the Aor. rather than the Plup., especially prevails after — 
temporal and causal connectives, and in other dependent clauses : “Eael 
dé ovvAABov, greke, when they had assembled, he spake, Cyr. 6. 2.13. Td 
"Hyclwv érivecoy évérpnoay, bre vais. . Taper yor, they burned the port of 
the Eleans, because they had furnished ships, Th. 1. 30. “Erpdaovto és 702 
IIdvopuov, 8Gevrep avynyayovro, they fled to P., whence they had sailed, Th. 
2.92. Awd rijs dpxfs, Hs adrov catpdany éwolynoe (505 a). Postquam per- 
venit, poposcit, Ces. ; 

d. Sometimes, however, in late Greek, as in Latin, the Perf. appears as 
an Aor.: *H)\Ge kal Ande 7d BiBdov, he came and took the book, Kev. 5. 7. 
Tlémpaxe rdvra. ., cal ydpace, he sold all and bought it, Matt. 13. 46. 
(e) The Modern Greek, while it has lost the simple Perf. and Plup., still 
retains the simple Aorist. 


‘606. wu. Gyomic Usm. Past and future tenses may be 


used gnromically, as well as the Present (602 c). 


a. If we can say ‘‘ The wisest err” (the most general expression of the 
truth), we can also say ‘‘ The wisest have erred” (the lesson of experience), 
or ‘The wisest will err” (a forethought for the future). Thus, Ilo\Xol de 





i 


§ 609. GENERIC AND GNOMIC USE. — VISION. 367 


dia. Tov WODTOY . . GrdANUVTAL, TOANO! Oe Sid S5Eav . . weydda Kaka werdy- 
Bac, many are ruined by wealth, and many have suffered great evils 
From glory, Mem. 4. 2. 35. ‘O émvecchs avyp . . 7d TeOvdvar od Sewdy HYH- 
wera, the good man will not account death an-evil, Pl. Rep. 387 d. Ror 
@ay’ duds 6 7 depyds avnp & Te TodAdd Eopyus, the indolent and energetic 
[have died] die alike, I. 320. 

b. Gyomic Aorist. Especial force, vividness, or actuality of expres- 
sion is often given to a general statement by the use of the Aor. (cf. 592, 
603 b, 605): “Avhp 8° bray rots voor dxOnrar Evvwyv, Ew worwv erravee Kap 
diay dons,when a man becomes weary of the society of those at home, going 
abroad he {has relieved] relieves his heart at once of its disgust, Eur. Med, 
244. “Oray. . Tis, dorep odTos, loxvon, . . miKpdy wraicua Gravra aveyat- 
tice kal SiédXucev, when one has so acquired power as he Zas done, a slight 
stumble instantly tosses off and scatters the whole, Dem. 20. 25. Tay pav- 
Awy cuvnfeias Odlyos xpbvos Siédvere, a short time dissolves the intimacies of 
the bad, Isoc. 2a. 

c. The general statements in simdles are often expressed by the Aor., 
especially in Homer: “Hpure 6’, ws dre tis dpis Hputev, he fell, as when Fe 
oak falis, 11. 482. See I. 33 : and for Aor. with Pres. or Perf., TI’. 23, 
A. 62, H. 4. (d) A like use of the Fut. is doubtful or rare : ‘Qs 8° dre 
Kuvhoen Zépupos, as when the west-wind shall stir, B. 147 v. 1. (for Kuwjon). 

607. ii. Assoture AND Renative Time. The time of an 
action is absolute, as simply viewed from the time of speaking 
or writing ; but relative, as not so viewed, but from the time 
of another action. 

a. The tense conforms to relative time far oftener in Greek than in 
English : in“EXeyev ore 76 orpdrevpa arodl8wor, he said that he [resigns] 
resigned the army, vil. 6. 3, a7rodidwot conforms to the relative time, as 
the time of saying and resigning was the same, but resigned conforms to 
the absolute time, as the action was past when the author was writing. 
"Edeyov Sri EXtrlLoverry, they said that they hoped, soc. 87a. “Hyvw dre ob 
Suvqcerar, he perceived that he [will] would not be able, i. 3. 2. 


608. tv. Synesis, &c. The relations of time have nothing 
sensible to fix the conceptions of the mind. It ranges there- 
fore with freedom through all time, past, present, and future ; 
and, at pleasure, transfers in thought the events of one period 
to another. 

a. Even if the events are viewed in their proper time, a less direct 
mode of stating them sometimes spares the feelings, or is deemed more 
refined, courteous, or politic. This may have had an influence in leading 
to some interchanges that are usually referred to other causes. (b) If the 
events are themselves imagined or supposed, there is, of course, especial 
freedom in assigning their time. 

609. 1. Vision. That which is past or future is often 
seen in the imagination as present, and is so expressed. This 
figure of speech is called wsion ; and the present tense so used 
is termed (a) the HISTORIC or (b) the PROPHETIC PRESENT, 
according as it expresses the past or the future : 


(a) TQ rpdrw SiddAdvTaL; how does (did) he perish? Soph. El. 679. 


~ Wapuodridos ylyvovras watdes do (412). “Ov exodte, roré, whom he once 


368 SYNTAX. R. N.— TENSES. — SYNESIS. § 609. . 


saved, Bur. El. 416. (b) Mid pdyn ride re mpooxracbe, in one battle you 
(will) win this land, Th. 4. 95. TTLapacyécOw, kayo xataBalve, let him 
produce it, and I descend at once, Dem. 351. 4. — Observe the mixture of 
Pres. and Fut. in oracles: Hdt. 7. 140s, 8. 77. 

ce. That which és to be may be viewed as already on the way : "Eipyerar 
&pa, the hour is coming, Jn. 4. 21. Idd\w épyopar cal trapadtpopar tuds 
Id. 14. 38. Hip. béinvde, Z[am going] shall go to Phthia, A. 169. “Hadev 
yap vedpar, [will return at dawn, =. 136. — This became the regular use 
of the Ind. ei. See 603c, and 50 elu, pxouat. 

d. The Greek has the power of giving to narration a wonderful variety, 
life, and energy, from the freedom with which it can employ and inter- 
change the Aor., Impf., and Historic Pres. Without cireumlocution, it 
can represent an action as continued or momentary ; as attempted or 
accomplished ; a® introductory or conclusive. It can at pleasure retard 
or quicken the progress of the narrative. It can give to it dramatic life 
and reality by exhibiting an action as doing, or epic vivacity and energy 
by dismissing it as done. It can bring a scene forward into the strong 
light of the present, and instantly send it back again into the shade of 
the past. ‘The variety, vivacity, and dramatic life of Greek narrative can 
be preserved but very imperfectly in translation, from the fact that the 
English has no definite tenses, except by circumlocution, and has far less 
freedom than the Greek in uniting the past and present tenses. See i. 10. 
13's, 8. 2385 11-4. 258, 388; iv. 7. 108; vil t,o 


610. 2. a. A present or even future action, in view of the 
nearness or certainty of its completion, may be spoken of as 
already accomplished ; and (b) that which is present or even 
past is sometimes expressed by the Future, as though not yet 
finished, or for the sake of less direct expression (608 a) : 


(a) “Av roro vixGpev, dvl” huiv werolytar, if we conquer this, we have 
accomplished all, i. 8.12. "Anraddper®’ dp, ef kaxdv mpocoloouey véov Ta- 
Aaa, we have perished then, if we are to add a new evil to the old, Eur. 
Med. 78. Si animum habueritis, vicimus, Ziv. (b) Todpdv. . orépy’ 
iSeiv BovAjoopar, J [shall] choose to learn my origin, Soph. O. T. 1076. 
So edfow I [shall] wish, airjoouat, dejooua, I [will] beseech, Eur. Ale. 
164. Otuo, Ti d€€es ; “Os @ dwaddecas/ Alas, what will you say? How 
you have slain me! Kur. Med. 1310 (ré \éEecs for ri Nevers or Ti EXeEas, as 
if a new statement were besought). Il@s gys; ré Aas ; Id. Hel. 780. 


c. A writer sometimes throws himself into the time of the reader 
(chiefly in epistles): "Améoradkd cou rivde tov Noyor, I have sent (= I 
shall send) you this discourse, Isoc. 2b. Mer ’ApraBdgou . ., dv oor Emep- 
Wa, rpacce, arrange with A., whom I [have sent] send to you, Th. 1. 129. 

d. That which belongs to one time may be so stated as to imply the 
opposite concerning another time: IIplv zor tpev, once we were (but are 
no more)! Eur. Tro. 581. Fuimus Troes! Fuit [lium! Virg. 


G11. 3. A past tense may be used, in speaking of that which is pres- 
ent as related to some past opinion, feeling, remark, action, event, or obliga- 
tion: Kumpis odx dp jv beds, Venus [was] is not then a goddess (as we sup- 
posed), Eur. Hipp. 359. AwBnodueba, d 7H wev Sixalw Bédrtov eytyvero, 
ave shall injure that which (as we said) is improved by justice, Pl. Crito 47 d. 
"Iévae o° éxéXevov of crparnyol, the generals [bade] bid you go, Ar. Ach. 
1073. "“Eduv dutyavos, I [was born] am by nature incapable, Soph. 
Ant. 79 (§ 50 ¢tw). Kaprepds éoor, kot Boudry. . trdev dpioros, thow art 





§ 614. RULE XXXI, — USE OF THE MODES. — 369 


strong, and [didst rise to be] art the best in council, I. 54 (so often in Ep. 
the sync. @rheo, -ev, and érero). "“Odedre ev Kipos ¢jv, [C. ought to be 
living] Would that Cyrus were living / ii. 1. 5. Ovdx expiiv mévroe cko- 
nev; ought you not to be considering? Apol. 3. Cf., in English, the 
familiar use of owght, the Impf. of owe, asa Pres. Nunc tempus erat, Hor. 


612. 4. The tense belonging to the effect of an action is sometimes 
used for the tense of the action itself (Pres. and Impf. for Perf. and Plup., 
or Aor.). So commonly in #x«w and otyoua: (I am come, I am gone) ; 
often, as in Eng., in verbs of hearing, learning, and saying ; and some- 
times in others: Eis xahdv fikere, you [are here, having come] have come 
opportunely, iv. 7. 3. Kipos dé odrw ajkev, C. had not yet come, i. 5. 12. 
‘Qs iets dkovopev (audimus), as we have heard [are informed], v. 5. 8. 
Aéyer wév KXedvwp, C. [states] has stated, iii. 2.8. Nukapév re Bacrdéa, 
we have conquered the king [are victorious], ii, 1. 4. “ASucet duds, he ts 
guilty of wronging you, v. 7. 29. “Hoe tere ce, she is thy mother, Kur. 
Jon 1560. So in pavOdvw learn, pevyw flee, rpodidwue betray, &e. 


IV. USE OF THE MODES. 


(For a general view, see 30 ¢, 269.) 


A. INTELLECTIVE. 


613. Rute XXXI. The INDICATIVE expresses 
fact ; the SUBJUNCTIVE, present contingency; and 
the OpraTIVE, past contingency. 


a. The Ind. presents the action as DECIDED IN POINT OF FACT (it 7@s 
or is not, has been or has not been, will be or will not be, &c.), whether this 
decision is declared or asked about, is known or unknown, is according to 
the terms of the statement or contrary to them ; but the Subj. and Opt. 
present the action as UNDECIDED, and have respect to its CONTINGENCY 
or CHANCE (i. e. whether the action may be or may not be, might be or 
might not be, might have been or might not have been, &c.). 


b. The Subj. and Opt. are achronic with respect to the action itself 
(590 a), but have a distinction of time with respect to its contingency. . 
The Subj. expresses present contingency, i. e. some chance at the present 
time that the action will occur ; but the Opt., past contingency, 1. e. some 
chance at some past time that the action would subsequently occur. See 
269 c. 


e. If I say, ‘‘I may sail to-morrow if the weather prove fair,” or, 
**T told John I might sail to-morrow if the weather should prove fair,” 
the time for the sailing itself is the same in both sentences, i. e. future. 
But the former sentence expresses present contingency, because it states 
that there is now a chance of my sailing to-morrow ; while the latter ex- 
presses only past contingency. There was a chance when I spoke to John; 
and that chance may still continue, or circumstances may have so changed 
that there is now no chance at all. 


614. a. If there will be some chance that an event will occur, there 
is of course now some chance that it will occur ; and if there is now some 
chance, then, whether recognized or not, there always has been. Future 

REV. GR. 16* 





370 SYNTAX. R. XXXI,— MODES.— CONTINGENCY. § 614. 


contingency, therefore, is contained in present ; and all contingency, in 
past. 
b. Hence, the past is the generic time for the contingent, as the pres- 
ent for the actual (602 c) ; and whatever is contingent is referred to past 
contingency, unless it is supposed with some degree of present expectation 
or looking forward to a decision, in which case it is referred to present 
contingency. Of a future event, no view can be taken beyond what the 
present affords ; and therefore there can be no practical distinction be- 
tween its present and future contingency. The following are some of the 
most common forms of contingent expression : 

A. PRESENT ConTINGENCcY: J will go, if I can have leave (and | in- 
tend to ask for it). JZ think, that I may go, if I can have leave. I wish, 
that you may go. He reads, that he may learn. | 

B. Past CONTINGENCY. (1) Past supposition: J thought, that I might 
go, f I could have leave. I wished, that you might go. He read, that he 
might learn. (2) Present supposition not implying expectation or the 
looking forward to a decision: I would go, if I should have leave (but 1 
have no thought of asking for it). JZ could go with perfect ease. TI should 
like to go. (3) Present supposition contrary to fact: (a. In regard to the 
ena I would go, if I had leave (but I have none, and therefore do 
not go). (B. In regard to the past.) Z would have gone, if I had had leave 
(but I had none, and therefore did not go). 

c. The range of past contingency is vast ; for there is nothing which it 
is proper for us to suppose at all, of which we may not conceive that there 
was some chance at some distant period in past eternity. 


615. That which is supposed contrary to fact is regularly 
expressed in Greek by the Ind., as already decided (613 a) ; 
while the very act of supposition presents it as having been 
at some tume contingent (614 c). It is therefore thrown back 
into the past as the time of its contingency; and to a time 
prior to that of the opposing fact, as then only could there 
have been a chance in its favor. It is therefore expressed by 
what is termed a prior tense, i. e. a tense of the Ind. referring 
to this prior time. 

a. Supposition contrary to present fact (what now ts) ds regularly ex- 
pressed by the Impf., i. e. the Pres. thrown back into the past; and 
(b) supposition contrary to past fact (what has been), by the Plup. (the 
Perf. thrown back into the past), or (c) oftener by its equivalent Aor: 
Ki wh bets HGere, ErropevdpeOa dv, if you had not come, we should now be 
marching, i. 1. 4. Ki darexptva, tows av. . guepabykn, if you had an- 
swered, I should perhaps have learned, Pl. Euthyph. 14¢. (d) So, ‘* If I 
had time to-day, I would go”; “‘If I had had time yesterday, 1 should 
have gone.” In such sentences, the Greek has regularly the Ind. in both 
premise and conclusion ; but the Latin, the Subj. in both. See 631 b. 


e. Homer sometimes uses here the Opt., after the Lat. analogy: Kal wt 
kev év0’ darddouro . ., ef uw) dp Ed vince, he would have perished there, had — 
she not quick perceived, B. 311. See V. 274. El yap. . ABopt, would I 
were young ! H. 132 (638 b). Eide . . yotvaé’ érouro A. 313. 

f. If there will be no mistake respecting the time, the Impf. may take 
the place of the Aor. or Plup., to mark the act as continued or repeated — 
(592): Ove ay mpoédeyev, ef pw) erlorevev ayledoew, he would not have 


- 


> = »™ 



















§ 617. RULE 0. — LAW OF SEQUENCE. 371 


predicted (thus often), tf he had not believed that his words would prove 
true, Mem. 1.1.5. Cf. 632. 


G16. That which is zndefinite is so far undecided; and 
hence often employs the forms of contingent expression. 
Thus, 


a.) The Subj. and Opt. are used in conditional, relative, and temporal 
clauses referring to the indefinite. See 634, 641. 

b.) The secondary tenses of the Ind. are used with &v to denote in- 
definitely any one of a past series of acts. (c) This construction seems 
especially appropriate to the Aor. as the general expression for a single 
past act (592): IloAAd«is . . Hkovoapev dv te KaK@s buds Bovr\evotamévous, 
we would often hear of your planning anriss [used to hear], Ar. Lys. 510. 
Tire 5 ab év ddXas Av EdeEev, then again he would say among others (so 
eirey dv), Cyr. 7.1.10. (d) The Impf. is so used (even in its iterative 
form, 332); though oftener and more appropriately without &v, as refer- 
ring to the whole series (592, 632): Powréovoa émi tas O’pas Tot Bacihéws 
kXalerke dv, she would go often to the gates of the king and weep, Hat. 3. 
119. Arepdrev av avdrovs ri Néyoev, T would ask them what they meant, 
Pl. Apol. 22b. (e) Different forms are sometimes blended. See 634. 


617. The relation of the Subj. to the present and future, and that 
of the Opt. to the past, lead to the following general rule ; which has, 
however, many exceptions: 


Rote O (Law of Sequence). The Sussunctive regularly fol- 
lows a tense referring to present or future time ; and the Opra- 
TIVE, a tense referring to past time. 


a. In general, therefore, the primary tenses (269) and the Imv. are 
followed by the Subj.; the secondary tenses, by the Opt.; and the Inf. 
and Part., by either, according to the finite tenses whose places they 
occupy, or usually, according to those upon which they themselves 
depend. 

b. In the Att., the Subj. is scarce used, except in dependent clauses 
or those which can be so explained. In the Epic, it is sometimes in- 
dependent, chiefly (with or without &y, 619 f) as a softer, or with a neg@a- 
tive stronger, form for the Fut.: Kat roré tus etaryor (épéec), some one mai 
hereafter say (will say), H. 87, 91. Ovx« &v ror Xpalopnor Bids nought 
can |will] your bow avail, A. 887. Ovdx 00’ obros dvipp, ove’ €ccerat, ovde 
yévyrat, ‘nor will be, nor can be,’ r. 437. Ei 6 xe by OWwaow, yw dé 
kev avros Chopar, ‘I may [will] take,’ A. 137. 

¢. The Greek Subj. is commonly translated by our Potential or Ind., 
rather than by our Subj., which, indeed, is now used far less than form- 
erly. (d) In conditional and relative clauses, the Aor. subj. has often a 
force like that of the Lat. and Eng. Fut. Perf.: ’Ewecdav rdvra akKOVENTE, 
Kpivate, when you shall have heard (audiveritis), de. (592, 1). 

e. The Opt. is scarce used, except in dependent clauses and those 
which can be so explained, or as a conclusion dependent on some premise. 
(f) The translation of the Opt. by a past tense of our Ind. (usually indi- 
cated by the connection) occurs chiefly in relative or temporal clauses 
(649s), indefinite or general premises (634), and Indirect Discourse (643s). 

g. The general relation of the Opt. to the Subj. is the same with that 
of the Impf. and Plup. subjunctive in Lat., or potential in Eng., to the 
Pres. and Perf. (see 34, 37 ; and compare the law of sequence in these 





372 SYNTAX, — MODES, — USE OF “AN, § 617. 


languages). Hence they may be theoretically united in a single contingent 
or conjunctive mode, having the following tenses; Present Definite (Pres, 
Subj.), Past Definite (Pres. Opt.), Present Indefinite (Aor. Subj.), Past 
Indefinite (Aor. Opt.), Present Perfect (Perf. Subj.), Past Perfect (Perf. Opt.), 
Present Future (1. e. Future to the present ; same as Ind., 651 b), Past Fu- 
ture (i. e. Future to the past ; Fut. Opt.), Present Future Perfect (same 
as Ind.), Past Future Periect (Fut. Pf. Opt.). 


618. Use or “av (Ep. xé, 163, Dor. xa). This particle, 
which has no corresponding word in English, is a mark of con- 
tingence, and has two chief uses : 


1.) “Av is joined with (a) the secondary tenses of the Indica- 
tive, (b) the Optative, (c) the Infinitive, and (d) the Participle, 
to mark them as depending on some condition expressed or 
implied. 

(a, b) See 6381 b, d. (ec, d) The Inf. and Part. take &v, when it would 
belong to the finite modes of which they supply the place. See 621. 


619. 2.) "Av is combined with various connectives before 
the subjunctive, thus forming compound connectives, of which 
the parts are sometimes distinct and sometimes united in form: 


a.) With e if (not as whether), uniting to form ééy, by contraction qv 
(so always in Hom., except as xé is used for dv), and sometimes “ay (dis- 
tinguished by position, and commonly by quantity, from simple dy, 621). 
See 631 ¢. 

b.) With Relative Pronouns and Adverbs, and other ‘Temporal Con- 
nectives : és dv, daTis dv Ews dy, (dre dy) bray, (6mére tiv) omdray, (érel dv) 
em ay or em ay, (émrei0i) civ) emeibdns cir dv, hulk dv* mply dy, méxpe dy, dxpe 
dv, éor dv: &e. See 641. 

c.) Sometimes with the final conjunctions Saas, ds, 8ppa (thus ex- 
pressing more distinctly the idea of contingency). See 624 a, e 

d.) That &v was thus combined before the Subj. (which grammatically 
it modifies), and not before the Opt., appears to have been due to the 
later and less strongly marked separation of the Subj. from the Ind. 
forms. See 272, 2. (e) Dialectic, late, or rare exceptions, however, 
occur both ways (especially in the early poets): Et puéya vetkos bpnrat, if 
a mighty contest arise, w. 98, Et cov crepyn0a, if I lose yor, Soph. O. C, 
1443. Tivutar Saris audpry, he punishes whoever may sin, N. 214. OD 
pev Bpaxels apx@o., where brief (words) may suffice, Th. 4.17. “Os ke. . 
doin D @ kK’ EOL, that he might give her to whom he pleased, B. 53. Et 
Kéy uot Wracrain, tf he should promise me, I. 445. 

f. In the Epic, &v is sometimes joined more directly with the Subj. 
See 617 b. 


620. a. In the Epic, ay is often used with the Fut. ind. as with 
the Subj. (chiefly in the form Ké): Kai é ris G5 épéa, and thus would 
(in this case) many a one say, A. 176. Et wev.. COAHCE, Uf he shall 
wish, O. 213.  (b) Rare and disputed cases also occur in the Attic, in 
which &y is used with the Fut.: Iola duvdmer cunpdxy@ xpnodmevor waddov 
- KoAdoreo Ge, by using what auwilian y force you can better chastise them, 

5.13. 08d" av ge Pl. Rep. 615d, v. 7. 

e. Critics deny that &y ever properly belongs to the Imv., or to the 

Pres. or Perf. ind. (d) The insertion or omission of &v for the most part 





ee" 


§ 624, FINAL SENTENCES. Shs 


follows general rules, but in some cases appears to depend upon nice dis- 
tinctions of sense, which it is difficult to convey in translation, or upon 
mere euphony or rhythm. Upon its use in not a few cases, manuscripts 
differ, and critics contend. Verbs with which &y is connected are com- 
monly translated into Eng. by the potential mode. 


G21. The place of dv is after the verb which it modifies ; or far 
oftener, after some prominent or characteristic word which is earlier in 
the sentence: as (a) a leading verb on which its own verb depends 
(especially such a verb as otopar think, Soxa scem, ot8a know, dypt say) ; 
(b) a participle or other word expressing the condition ; (c) an interroga- 
tive, negative, or connective ; (d) any emphatic word. (e) Hence it 
often shows an emphasis upon the word to which it is attached (and from 
which it is not regarded as parted by such particles as pév, 8€, Té, ydo, 
&e., cf. 520b). (f) Between &v and its verb, even another verb some- 
times intervenes. Thus, 

(a) Olowar dy buds ueya dvijoa, T think that you would greatly benefit, 
iii. 1. 88. (b) Aéyovros &v rwos moretoat olecbe ; if one had said it, do 
you think they would have believed? Dem. 71. 4. (c) Ids dv oty eye 7 
Bracatpny ; how cowld I compel? v. 7. 8. (d) Huyevys dv dixatws 7% apo- 
Odrys vopiforto ; would he be justly considered a friend or a traitor ? Hel. 
2. 3. 48. (e, f) Dov buiv pev Av oluae etvar riwios, with you, J think I 
should be honored, i. 3. 6. (c, f) Ov« Av ofda ef Suvalynv, FT know not 
whether I could, Pl. Tim. 26b. (d, f) Xpjowuor dv €dédxour etvar v. 6. 1. 


G22. a. For perspicuity, emphasis, or euphony, &v is often used 
more than once for a single verb ; while (b) near verbs, stmilarly used, 
do not commonly require its repetition : (a) Bras av wamep obros . ., dé- 
your dv, standing as he does, I would say, Cyr. 1. 3.11. See i. 3. 6. 
(b) Karaxdvou dv .., 7) favras.. €or, cal Kkoddoee. ., Kal Trovmoeiev, 
he would slay, or take alive, &c., i. 6.2. See ii. 5.14; iv. 6. 13. 

e. The doubling of &v or ké for a single verb scarce occurs in Homer 
(5. 733) ; but he sometimes combines the two forms: Tovds dv ke Kal 7Oe- 
rAov, whom I should have wished, ¢. 334. 

d. “Av may be used with an ellipsis of its verb: BoBovmevos domep dv 
[sc. poBotro] ed ais [sc. etn], fewring as [he would fear] if [he were] a boy, 
Pl. Gorg. 479a. “Héowo wéev: més 8 ovx dv; Soph. O. T. 937. 

623. The general principles which govern the use of the intellective 
modes will now be applied to particular kinds of sentences, which may be 
termed, from their offices or connectives, final, conditional, relative, tem- 
poral, and complementary. Kinds not hereafter mentioned are indepen- 
dent, or, in general, use the finite modes as if they were. 


1. Linal (after iva, éras, as, wn> ppa poet.). 


624. Ruiz P. After a final conjunction, (a) an object of 
present forethought is expressed by the Suhjunctive, or (b) in the 
Future, by the Zndicatie ; but (c) an object of past forethought, 
by the Optative, or (d), to mark it as now contrary to fact, by 
a prior tense of the Indicative : 


(a) Tpddw (yéypada, yodyw), wa péOys (pavOdvys), scribo (scripsi, 
scribam), ut discas, J write (have written, shall write), that you may learn 


374 SYNTAX. R. P.— MODES, § 624. 


(bc learning). “Iva edSyrte, so that you may know, i. 8. 15. “Eyot dds avr, 
érws. . Sada, give them to me, that I may distribute, Cyr. 1. 4. 10. “Wé- 
HrOov (Aor. for Perf., 605) Sduwv, wh pmol Te péprbnoOe, L have come forth 
from the house, that ye may not blame me, Kur. Med. 214. (With éy, 
619 c) “Ages Huds, Strws Av elSapev, you shall lead us, so that we may 
know (perhaps), Cyr. 5. 2.21. ‘Qs & vy pébys .., dvrdxovoor, listen i 
turn, that you may learn (if you will), ii. 5. 16. “Heras, Spa kev evdy 
co:cw él peydpowow y. 359. See 650. 

(b) Instead of the Subj., the Fut. ind. is here commonly used after 
words of attention, care, or effort, and sometimes after others (regularly 
joined by 81rws, sometimes by as, Spa, or pH): Iloméva det éeripedeto Oat, 
érws oGal Te ErovTar ai oles, a shepherd must take care, |how his flock 
shall be safe] that his flock be safe, Mem. 3. 2.1. Odpovvoy. ., dppa kal 
“Exrwp eoerar, inspire courage, that even H. may know, Il, 242. PoBod- 
par dé, wy. . etphoopev, J fear lest we [shall] may find, Pl. Phil. 13a, — 
After 8mws, as above, the 1 Aor. subj. act. and mid. is especially rare 
(v. 6. 21), as resembling the Future indicative. Cf. 627 a. 

(c) "Eypawa (éypadov, éveypadew), wa paors (pavOdvors), scripsi (scri- 
bebam, scripseram), ut disceres, I wrote (was writing, had written), that 
you might learn (be learning). Pihwv wero SetoOar, ws cuvepyods exon, he 
thought he needed friends, that he might have coworkers, i. 9. 21. “Edo- 
Botvro wh émvBotvro . . of rohguo, they feared that the enemy would attack 
[lest they should], iii. 4.1. Eiodyec (Hist. Pres., 609) dduous, ty &dXos 
py Tis ely TAde, she led me into the tent, that no one else might know it, 
Kur. Hec. 1148. (Fut. Opt. as the past of the Fut. Ind., which is even 
here more common, cf. b, 643 h) Eveped70n & drws of orpari@rat Tovs 1é- 
vous Svvywotvro bropépev, he took care [how] that his men should be able 
to endure toils, Ages. 2. 8. (With &v, 619 e) "Odpa ke. . Oeln, A. 26. 

(d) "Expnv ce Inydoov fetiar rrepdv, dws ehalvov, you ought (rather) 
to have saddled the wing of Pegasus, that you might appear, Ar. Pax 135. 
Ti ov &xrewas evOvds, ws Berka pyrore euautiv; why did you not instant- 
ly slay me, so that I might never have shown myself (as 1 have done) ? 
Soph. O. T. 1891. — This is a specially Attic construction. 


e. The final conjunctions as, Saws, tva, and pa are in their origin 
relatives ; and pq seems to have become a connective through the ellipsis 
of one of these, the fuller form being still often retained : Ovr roceiv, 
Stes. . davely, to act [in that way in which] so that he might appear, Cyr. 
7.3.10. Toddw twa udéns, I write, whereby you may learn (a). Karé- 
ewer, ws uh BonOoiev of Ppoupol, he remained, {in which case the guards 
would not come] that the guards might not come to the rescue, Cyr. 1. 4. 17. 


G25. a. To the English reader, the use of the connectives after 
words of fearing often seems reversed, as in Latin, French, &c.; apprehen- 
sion for being indicated rather than apprehension against : “Orws \d0w, 
dédoxa, metuo ut lateam, [I am apprehensive for this, how I may elude] 
I fear I cannot elude, Kur. Iph. T. 995. A€dorx’ brws wh redvEomat, vereor 
ne inveniam, [I am concerned for this, how I may not find] Z fear that I 
shall find, Ar.. Eq. 112. 

b. Yet words of fear are sometimes followed by a complementary con- 
struction, as in Eng., especially if themselves modified by py: Mn pofod, 
ws amopycets, do not fear that you will want, Cyr. 5. 2. 12s My rpéons, 
brws cé Tis. . dwoomdce. Eur. Heracl. 248. PoBovmevor dé, m&s xpyH Cyr. 
4.5.19. 580s, ef [= mh ov] relow, I have fear [whether I can] that 1 
cannot persuade, Kur. Med. 184. Cf. 630. 





‘ieee Shee 


$ 628. IN FINAL SENTENCES. — ELLIPSIS. R. Q. 375 


626. Etuiesis. <A word of attention, care, or fear is some- 
times to be supplied before ézas or pn: 


"“Orws otv écecbe dvdpes [sc. dpare or émiuedetobe], see then that you be 
men, i. 7. 3. Ae? [sc. cxometv] o, brws . . delEers, you must sce that you 
show, Soph. Aj. 556. “Omws dé ypudEeire, be swre to grunt, Ar. Ach. 746. 
"“Orws wh ovx olds T &couat [sc. dédocxa], I fear that I shall not be able, VP). 
Meno 77a. Mi.. cods duapbelpyn yauous, ah, lest she prevent thy marriage! 
Eur. Ale. 315. “Omws . . undév épets Dem. 370. 22 (cf. Mndev ravd’ Epers, 
§ 597»). 


627. This ellipsis appears to have introduced, 


1.) The use of the Subjunctive or Future Indicative after od 
py, as a future of strong denial : 

OU ydp [se. 580s éori or dédoxa] ce w). . yuao” ovd’ tromredoove, 
[there is no danger that they may know or will suspect you] they surely 
will not know or suspect you, Soph. El. 42 (cf. Ov 580s, un ce aydyw 
Mem. 2. 1. 25). OW ce wh mpoda, there is no danger of my betraying you, 
Soph. O. C. 649. Ouvdels unxéri pelvn, no one will stay longer (cf. BonO7- 
cet), iv. 8. 138. 

a. This use is most frequent in the Fut., and in those forms of the 
Subj. which do not nearly resemble forms of the Ind., as the Aor. Pass. 
and the 2 Aor. Some critics (Dawes, &c.) have hastily excluded it from 
the 1 Aor. subj. act. and mid. Cf. 624 b. 

b. In Indirect Discourse, this use of the Fut. sometimes passes into 
other modes: ‘E@écrisey . . ws ov uo wore tépoovev, he predicted that they 
would never destroy, Soph. Ph. 610. Etre Tecpecias od uy wore . . ef mpd- 
Eav roduv, 7. said that the state would never prosper, Kur. Ph. 1590. 


628. 2.) The use of the Subjunctive as Imperative. 


This oceurs chiefly (a, b) in the 1 Person (where the Imv. is wanting, 
270 a); and (c) in the Aorist with ph (including its compounds), accord- 
ing to this special rule for the 2 and 3 Persons: (RULE Q.) In prohibi- 
tions with pH, the Pres. is put in the Jmv., and the Aor. in the Subj. 
(d) Exceptions to this rule are doubtful in the Pres.; in the Aor., they 
are very rare in the 2 Person, but not in the 3d. Thus, 

(a) M}) dvapévopev. ., GAG tyucts ApEopev [sc. dpare, or dpare dws], 
ne exspectemus, [see that we do not wait] let ws not wait, but ourselves be- 
gin, iil. 1. 24. Ildp0uevoov ws taxiora, und avrod Odve, transport me with 
all speed, and {see that I do not] let me not die here, Soph. Tr. 802. 
(b) This Subj. is often preceded by &ye, dépe, or some other Imv., after 
which a connective might be supplied : “Etoyer’, [sc. ws] avdyv ray ow- 
ev éxuddw, hush, [that I may] let me listen to the voice of those within, 
Eur. Hipp. 567. é€p’, dxovcw, come, let me hear, Hat. 1. 11. 

(c) M} wouqeys radra (se. oxdrec], ne feceris hoc, [see that you do not 
do this] beware of doing this, vii. 1. 8. My Oavpatere, do not be wonder- 
ing (as you now are), i. 3. 3. Mir’ éxvetre, rir’ air’ eros Kaxdv, neither 
be afraid, nor utter an ill word, Soph. O. C. 731. M75’ érlxevOe, M76’ 
émukevorys, do not conceml, 1. 168, 0, 263. Mnédels oléobw, Mndels t1odGBn, 
let no one be thinking (suppose), Isoc. 55 c, 101a. (d) Mnéels. . voproare 
(t8ére), Zet no one think (see), Cyr. 7. 5. 73 (8. 7. 26). Mi wetoov, do not 
disappoint, Ay. Th. 870. Mn. . év@co A. 410. 

e. The reason for the rule may be this: The Pres., as often used to 
arrest an action now doing, requires the most direct form of command ; 


376 SYNTAX. R. R. — MODES. § 628. 


while the Aor., as a more general prohibition, takes the el i = form 
of warning. 


629. a. Another form of ellipsis is found in such expressions as 
‘Qs 6é cuvréuw, but to be concise [I add this ony, Eur. Tro. 441 ; “Iva uh 
é€uauTov Aéyw, not to speak of myself, Luc. D. D. 

b. A final clause may refer elliptically to the ven or even past ; Po- 
Beicbe wh. . viv Sidkepar, you Sear [lest it prove] that I am now affected, 
Pl. Pheedo 84 e. PoBovpeba wy). . hpaprynkapev, we fear that we have 
Jailed, Th. 3. 58. “Opa wh raigwr eheye beware lest [it prove that he was] 
he were speaking in gest, Pl. Theet. 145 b. 


G30. The use of final clauses blends with that of énfinitives and 
complementary clauses ; and one construction is sometimes found where 
another would rather have been expected ; as, (a) Straws, &c. (Ep. and 
late, even tva), after words of entreating, exhorting, promising, command- 
ing, forbidding, wishing, and the like ; (b) Inf. or Complementary Clause 
after words of fear or care; &c.: (a) Alooeo Oar 5é uw avrdv brws vnuepréa 
ely (iva vnuepres éviory), levee him in person [that he may speak] to 
speak the truth, y. 19, 327. *Aanydpeves drrws wh ToOTo dmwoKxpwoluny, you 
Jorbade my answering thus, Pl. Rep. 339 a. OédX@ iva por Gs Mk. 6. 25 
(Mod. Gr. 0€\w va déoys). (b) PoBovpeba acoder Oar, we fear that we 
shall be at disadvantage, Th. 5.105. “Aet twa ereuddovro . - elvan, they 
always took care that one should be, Th. 6. 54. See 625 b. 


ul. Conditional (after ei, ai D. E.; et pn). 


631. Ruiz R. In the HYpoTHETicAL PERIOD, (a, b) if the 
PREMISE is presented as already decided in point of fact, it takes 
the Inpicative ; (c) if it is presented as undecided, but with 
present expectation of decision, it takes the SUBJUNCTIVE ; 
(d) otherwise, it takes the Oprarive. In the first case, the 
CONCLUSION is commonly in the J/ndicative or Imperative ; in 
the second, in the Future Indicatwe or an equivalent ; and in 
the third, in the Optatiwe with av. 


(a, b) If the premise is decided, the conclusion is also decided, so far as 
depends upon the premise ; and is expressed accordingly, unless there is 
some reason, aside from the premise, for a different expression. There 
are here two constructions. 

(Form a.) Ifthe premise is presented as agreeing with fact, or without 
indication on this point, any form of premise or conclusion consistent 
with such an agreement may be used: Ei ypdde, kad@s aoret (Kahds 
 &eu, ypapérw), si scribit, bene facit (bene erit, scribito), ¢f he ts writ- 
ing, he is doing well (it will be well, let him write). Hi €ypae, cards 
éerolnoe (kahés exer), Si scripsit, bene fecit (bene est), 7f he wrote, he did 
well (it is well). Ei ypdapetr, kad@s trovqoe, si scribet, bene faciet, if he 
will write, he will do well. Hi 80xet co, oretye (hécpev), af it seems best 
to you, go (let us sail), Soph. Ant. 98, Ph. 526. "Arodolunv, ZavOlay el 
un prio, may I die if I do not love Xx ., Ar. Ran. 579. Tl 8tadé€pover, ef 
ye wavycovert (598 b). Atoe rAHxrpov, ef payet Ar. Av. 759. 

(Form b.) If the premise is presented as contrary to fact, it takes a 
prior tense of the Indicative ; and the conclusion, a prior tense with dv 
(G15, 618 a): Ti &ypade, cad@s dv errotea, si scriberet, bene faceret (615d), 





§ 633. IN THE HYPOTHETICAL PERIOD. 377 


if he were now writing, he would be doing well. Wi typaape, adds Gv érrol- 
noev (kads dy eye), si scripsisset, bene fecisset (bene esset), if he had 
written (yesterday), he would have done well (it would now be well). Hé 
bev Epwv aropodyras buds, TOOT dv éoxdTOUv: .. Evel dé dp: if I saw 
you in want, I should be considering this ; but since I see; v. 6. 30. OvK 
dv érotnoev ‘Ayacias radra, ef ph ey airiv exéXevora, A. would not have 
done this, if I had not commanded hin, vi. 6. 15. See 615. 

(Form ec.) Here the conclusion, as depending upon a decision yet to be 
made, is properly expressed by the Fut. ind., or some other form referring 
to the future (as the Imv., Opt. of wish, &c.): “Eav ypady (vpn), Kad@s 
mojo, si scribat (scribet), bene faciet, if he write, he will do well. * sav 
{ynTAs Kars, etpjoas Pl. Gorg. 503d. Xpa avrois, éay déy 71, use them, 
if you have any need, Cyr. 5. 4. 30. “Hv .. adé\opar .., adrrodoluny, 
may I perish, if I take, Ar. Ran. 586 (638d). “Hy ébys mor, . . Karp 
dv, if you permit me, I [would] will speak, Soph. El. 554 (637 ¢). “Av 
ToUTO vuKapev, TdvO” july memolqrat (610 a). — For the forms of the con- 
nective, see 619 a. 

(Form d.) If the premise is wndecided and without present expectation 
of decision, the conclusion must also be, so far as depends upon the pre- 
mise ; and both are therefore appropriately expressed by the Optative, 
with dv in the conclusion (618). Ei ypddou (ypdipar), kadd&s Gv trovoly 
(zotjoat), si scribat, bene faciat, if he should write, he would do well. 
OvdE yap Av Mijdoxos . . érratvoly, ef eEchadvorpe Tods evepyéras, M. would 
not approve, if I should drive out owr benefactors, vii.7.11. Oikos & adros, 
el POoyyiw AGPou, cadécrar dv déEcrev, the house itself, could it take w voice, 
would speak most plainly, Aisch. Ag. 37. Ilds av éyd ce Séounr . ., ef Kev 
“Apys otxoto; how could I bind you, if Mars should escape? 6. 352 (619 e). 

e. In forms b and d, &v is regularly used in the conclusion, but not in 
the premise, unless that is itself dependent upon some condition expressed 
or implied (618): Etzep d\\y Tw dvOpdrrwy weBolpyv Ay, Kal col reiPouat, 
if I would trust any other man (should he so affirm), J trust you, Pl. 
Prot. 329 b. 

f. In the conclusion, the omission of &v with a past tense of the Ind. 
is chiefly for the sake of more decided expression ; (g) while its omission 
with the Opt. is almost wholly poetic, and chiefly Epic,: (f) Idvra yap 
karewpydow, for [in that case you secured] you would have secwred all, 
Soph. El. 1022. See 632, 634. (g) Oeds y e0édww .. cawou, a god, 
should he wish, might save, y. 231. See 642 b, 648 ¢. 


632. A past tense of the Ind. (commonly the Impf.) without &v may 
take the place of another form in the conclusion, to express more decidedly 
a habit or series of acts, a continued, unfinished, or threatened act or state, 
some property of an act (as possibility, propriety, necessity, &c.), or some 
feeling respecting an act, even though the particular acts themselves may 
be indefinite, contingent, or unreal (cf. 611): Ovddé& Hvvov, ef wh Tov- 
tous wetcauut, I effected nothing, wnless I should persuade these, Cyr. 5. 5. 
22. “OXdlyov arodpas oydpny, et wy elyov, I came near running off, if I 
could, Pl. Conv. 198c. Ovdé yap, ef wavy mpodupotro, Pddvov jy, nor, if 
he should greatly desire it, was it easy (facile erat), iii. 4.15. "Huoryuvd- 
phy pévro, ef . . €EqrarHOny, I should be ashamed indeed, if I had been 
deceived, vii. 6. 21. *EBovddpnv uev ov épifew, Would I were not con- 
tending / Ar. Ran. 866. Solus cram, si non adesset Amor, Ov. See 634. 


633. a. If the conclusion is itself a dependent clause, its form is 
commonly determined by this dependence, and the condition usually con- 


378 SYNTAX. R. R.— INDEFINITE PREMISE. § 633. 


forms (617) : “Ezopevdunr, wa, ef re S€orto, @hedolny adrév, T went that I 
might aid him, if he should need, i. 3. 4 (624). “EaiBouNevouvow, ws, Hv 
Sivevrat, drokérwcrty, they are plotting to destroy us if they can, iil. 1. 35. 

b. The conclusion has sometimes a second condition, expressed or 
understood, to which its verb conforms: ’Hav 6 éué €\noOe, odk dv Oavpd- 
war, ef Tia evporte, If you elect me, I should not wonder if you should 
Jind, vi. 1. 29. Ei dréN orev . ., Jv pev Bobhovrar, StaBAoovrat iv. 1. 3. 

c. The true conclusion is sometimes implied, rather than expressed, in 
the grammatical apodosis ; or (d) is elliptically contained in it: (ec) Oi & 
@xTetpov, ef dXwcowTo, others pitied them [for what they would suffer], in 
case they should be taken, i. 4. 7. “Lerat, ei re S0vairo BonOfoat, he hastens, 
[to help] if he might in any way help, Cyr. 7. 3.15. Ov why yap piré- 
TyTl Y exebdSavoy, el Tis WorT0, they did not conceal him through friendship, 
(nor would have done so) if any one had seen him, T. 453. (d) Htpypa 
eromnodunv, ev mus duvatunv, I accounted tt a godsend {thought that it would 
be], if I could in any way, i. 8. 18. 

e. A premise may combine different forms, influencing the conclusion 
by their joint effect : Ei d\y09 mpos buds elroume cal elroy cal rire, if I 
should speak the truth to you, and did speak it then, Dem. 274. 28. 

634. INDEFINITE OR GENERAL Premise. If the premise 
refers indefinitely or generally to acts of a certain kind or 
series, (a) it sometimes takes the Indicative, from the general 
decision of the kind or series as a whole ; but oftener the Opta- 
tive or Subjunctive, from the want of definiteness in respect to 
particulars (616), —(b) the Opt. if the kind or series is now 
past, (c) but otherwise the Subj. (d) The conciuston has 
commonly the form appropriate to the kind or series as a 
whole, but (e) sometimes that appropriate to a single act. 
(f) Mixed constructions occur in both premise and conclusion. 
Thus, 

(a, d) Ei ris re érnpdta, aarexplvovro, if any one put any question, they 
yeplied, Th. 7,10. (b, d) Ei re wh péporpev, @tpuvev Pépew, if we should 
fail to bring anything, he, bade us bring tt, Eur. Ale. 755. (¢, d) “Hy 6 
evs Oy Odvaros, ovdels BotrAerar Ovjckerv, if death come near, no one is 
willing to die, Ib. 671. (c, e) “Hy pev yap els petdwrdv eloehOav TiXa, 
evOds kataputév we, if I chance to visit a miser, he forthwith buries me 
(606 b), Ar. Pl. 237. (b, d, e) Hi ris atrv@ Soxoly . . BAakedew, . . erat- 
oev dy, kal dua adrds mporedapBavev, if any one seemed to him to shirk, 
he would give him a blow, and at the same time took hold himself, ii. 3. 11. 


Ei dé rwa open dewdy dvra oixovduov . ., ovdéva Av wiwrore adetdeTo, GAN’ 
del whelw mpocediSov i. 9. 19. 


635. Incorporation. The condition, instead of being ex- 
pressed in a distinct clause, is often incorporated in the con- 
clusion, especially in a participial form : 

Aéyots dv ed hpovev [= ef e& dpovolns], you would speak, if you were a 
friend, Soph. O. T. 570. MaSotc’ épa, I will tell, if I know, Ib. 749. 
Kal xev rotr é0éXowut, Ards ye Si8dvros, dpécOar, this I should like to ob- 
tain, if Jupiter would grant it, a: 390. “Qomep dv Spduor res wept vixns, 
as one would run [if he were running] for victory, i. 5. 8. “AdAws dé otk 
ay rohusev, they would not venture otherwise [if it were not so], v. 4. 34. 


oo’ a eS 





§ 637. PREMISE INCORPORATED OR OMITTED. O79 


636. [Exuirsis. In a hypothetical period, the premise or 
the conclusion is often omitted ; the other part retaining its 
proper form (as also in 635) : 


I. PREMISE OMITTED. Among the conditions most naturally 
supplied, and therefore most frequently omitted, are those of 
inclination with possibility and of possibility with inclination ; 
since these are the two great conditions of human conduct. 


a. Hence the frequent use of the Opt. and past tenses of the Ind. with 
&v (specially termed potential Opt. or Ind.), to denote one of these ideas, 
the other being implied as a condition. Other familiar ideas are also im- 
plied, as of effort, necessity, propriety, occasion, existence, actuality, &c.; 
and (b) the premise is often involved in an independent sentence, or 
otherwise supplied by the context. Thus, (a) Atvato av . . edpet brw av 
xaploaro ; [would you be able if you tried] cowld you find one whom you 
might oblige (if you should wish)? Cyr. 3. 1. 29. Adrol ev dv érropedOn- 
cay, they could themselves have marched [might if they had chosen], iv. 2. 
10. Hitrocre dv, Palnre dv, you may say [might if you were disposed], vii. 
6. 16, 23. Ovd avrdv droxretvar Av eéXounev, no” should we wish to slay 
him (if we could), ii. 3. 23. “Héi7 dv dxotoaus., ZL should most gladly 
hear (if I might), ii. 5.15. Thy édevOepiay €Xotunv dvi. 7. 38. *HBovdd- 
pny ¥ dv, J should have wished, Pl. Phedr. 228 a. (b) Ovre éoOiover 
mhelw 7 Oivavrar péper, Siagpayerev yap dv, they eat no more than they can 
bear, for they would burst (if they did), Cyr. 8. 2. 21. “Ere ofv dv yévovo 
.. piros; would you yet become a friend (if I should now forgive you) ? 
i. 6. 8. See 637. 


637. With the ellipsis of a premise, the Optative with é 
may supply the place (a) of the Imperative, or (b) of the In- 
dicative, especially (c) of the Fut. ind.; (d) or may express 
wish in the form of a question : 


(a) As Imv., it expresses permission, or command in the softened lan- 
guage of permission, or prohibition in the strong form of denying permis- 
sion : eae av ceaurév, you may now betake yourself [might if you 
should wish}, Soph. Ant. 444. Kwpots dv eicw, go within, Id. El. 1491. 
Otc Av Bacidijas cava crow’ exwv ayopevots, ‘you must not harangue,’ 
B. 250. “Ayour’ av udracov dvdpa Soph. Ant. 1339. 

(b) Adro Gv 1d do etn + Oarrov yap dvaddcover, this [would be, if we 
could have it] is the very thing we want ; for they will sooner expend, iv. 
7.7. Atrac 6€ odk &v modal elnoav, these [if counted, would not be] are 
not many, Th. 1. 9. od df7’ av elev of Eévac ; where then [might be] are 
the strangers ? Soph. El. 1450. Einoav 6° dv ofro Kpires, these [if ascer- 
tained, would prove C.] were Cretans, Hdt. 1. 2. — So especially in argu- 
ment: “‘Anunyopla dpa ris éorw h mounrexy.” “Pyul.” ‘* OdKodv pyropexh 
Onunyopia dv ely.” Pl. Gorg. 502d. 

(c) Ovkér’ By kptpaus, no longer [if I might, would I] will I conceal it, 
Ar. Pl. 284. “Ovx dv peBelpny.” “O05 Eywy dgdhooua.” I will not 
let go.” ** Nor will I.” Eur. Iph. A. 310. Kytous dv 47, thou wilt now 
hear, Soph. El. 637. —So especially in the 1st Person. 

(d) Ils &v odolpav ; [how might I die, if I should seek death ?] Woulc 
that I might die! Kur, Ale. 865. Tis dv... 80ly ; O that one would give! 
Soph. O. C. 1100. Ovx« dv... épioato; could you not restrain ? B. 456. 


380 SYNTAX. — MODES. — OPT. AND IND. OF WISH. § 638. 


638. 1. Conciusion omirrep. To this ellipsis may be 
referred the common expression of wish (a) by the Optative, or 
(b) as contrary to fact, by a prior tense of the Indicative (615): 


(a) Ev poe yévorro Pbdyyos [se. Hdoluny dv], [if 1 might have a voice, I 
should be glad] O that I might have a voice / Eur. Hee. 836. Ei yap yévouro 
[sc. kahd@s dv €xor], [for] O if it might be [it would be well]! Cyr. 6. 1. 38. 
Eide ujmore yvoins, [if] O that you might never know ! Soph. O. T. 1068. 
Si nunc se ramus ostendat! Virg. Compare, both here and below, elliptic 
wishes with “7f” in English. 

(b) Eid’ etyes. . BeXrious dpévas [sc. kah@s dv efyev, or Hddunv adv), if you 
but had a better mind! Eur. El. 1061. Ei yap rocatrny divauw etxov, 
would I had such power! Id. Alc. 1072. Very rarely with the connec- 
tive omitted before uy: Mh. . éxpnges Soph. O. C. 1713. 

c. From the great use of these elliptic forms, especially a, the connec- 
tive ei (commonly in the forms et@e, ei yap: or aide, ai yap, D. E.) came to 
be regarded as a particle of wishing, and the Opt. as the appropriate 
mode for the expression of a wish (modus optativus, the wishing mode). 
(d) Hence it was so used without the connective ; and (e) sometimes, as 
a less direct form, took the place of the Imy., especially in the 3 Pers. 
(the two modes being sometimes used together, and these again with the 
Subj.): (d) Myxére taénv, may I no longer live! Ar. Nub. 1255. Oi Geol 
atoticawwro, may the gods requite!/ iii. 2. 6. Ilpdéas 5 6 wh rbyoun, 
vootyoau, ydo Eur. Alc. 1023. (e) “A-yeb’, quets rép uw atrrotpaTrapev 
.+ 9 TUS. . Axidfi twaporatn, Soln de xpdros uéya, undé Te ung Sevéo ba, 
come, let us turn him back, or [may] let one stand by A. and give him 
great strength, nor let him want aught in heart, T. 119 (ef. Soph. Ant. 
151). M) yévotro, yevéorOw dé 6 Ocds addyO7s, ‘God forbid!’ Rom. 3. 4. 

f. “Ay does not belong to this Opt. of direct wish, which is often thus 
distinguished from the Opt. in its other uses: Tévovo ratpds evtuxéorepos, 
Ta 5 GN Guoros* Kal yévov Av od xaxds: may you be happier than your 
father, but otherwise like him ; and you would not then be bad ; Soph. Aj. 
550. 

g. A wish in opposition to fact is also expressed by the 2 Aor., and 
rarely by the Impf., of ddefAw ought (50) ; the particles of wishing being 
often prefixed to add strength: ’OAécOar 5 dperor, [I ought to have per- 
ished] Would that I had perished! Soph. O. T. 1157. “QgeXe pev Kipos 
¢hv (611). Ei’ dperes dyovis 7” Euevar, Would yow were unborn! V. 40. 
‘Qs rplv Spedrov dréc0a, O that I had sooner died / Q. 764 (648 d ; per- 
haps, How I ought to have, &c.). My ror Sedov duretv Soph. Ph. 969. | 
Ei yap Sedov Pl. Crito 44. — In later writers, @pedov and a@dede are 
sometimes used as particles of wishing (even with the Fut., Gal. 5. 12). 

h. A particle of wishing is very rarely joined with the Subj.: Ei. . 
fool ue, may they take me! Soph. Ph. 1092. 


639. a. The conditional form often takes the place of other forms, 
especially from Greek courtesy and moderation of speech (654 a) ; as, after 
verbs of emotion ; in the frequent use of et ts for Sorts, and like substi- 
tutions; &c.: Téde eGatuaca, eb [= bri] .. riOns, this I wonder at, [if]- 
that you place, Pl. Rep. 348 e. “Exasov cat xtddv kal et te dAdo XpHoywov 
iv, they burned both fodder and [if anything] whatever else was of use, 1. 
6.1. Znroto’ HO’, Hv wov’mervyy, it has come seeking, Uf haply ut may 
Jind [= that it may find, or to find], Ar. Nub. 535. 

b. Supposition is sometimes made in the Greek, as in other languages, 
by the Ind. or Imy, (656d) without a conjunction: Kal 67) tjapetkey - 


a 











- 


ele ww a 
J 


§ 642. RULE 8. RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL CLAUSES. 381 


eira TOs . . TwOnobuesOa ; suppose he has consented ; how then shall we be 
saved? Eur. Hel. 1059. For conditional relative clauses, see 641. 


mi. Lelative or Temporal. 


640. Rute S. A RELATIVE CLAUSE commonly uses the 
modes like other sentences to which it is most nearly akin. 


a. From such analogies, some relative clauses have been distinguished 
as conditional relative, final relative, &c. 


641. 1. Conpitronat Retative CiAuses, &c. <A relative or 
temporal clause referring to that which is indefinite or general or not yet 
determined, may be viewed as contingent (616); and then has regularly 
(a) the Subj., if it depends on a primary tense, but (b) the Opt., if it 
depends on a secondary. For the form of the connective, see 619 d. 
(c) Such a clause has commonly a form and force akin to those of an in- 
definite premise (634) ; while its leading clause resembles in form the cor- 
responding conclusion. Thus, 

(a) “O wT av [= édy ri] Bén, weloopar, whatever [if any] evil must be met, 
I will suffer (5514), i. 3. 5. "Aésos pidos, & dv diros 4, he is a valuable 
Friend to whomsoever he may be a friend, Ib. 12. ‘Omorav xaspds 4, féw, 
when it is the proper time, I will come, vii. 3. 86. °“Hmed8av ravra dxov- 
onrte, kpivare (592. 1). “Eos ev dv rapy tis, xpOuari. 4. 8. 

(b) “H@jp-vev dard trmov, omdte [= el ore] yuuvdoar BovrAorTo, he hunted 
on horseback, whenever [if at any time] he might wish to exercise, i. 2. 7. 
PoBoluny 0 av rH ayeusu, & Soln, érecOa, I should fear to follow the guide 
whom he might give us, 1b. 17. "Het ris StdKor, mpodpaudvres Ecracap, 
when any one gave chase, they would run before and stop, i. 5. 2. “Orov 
pev orparyyds oGos ein, . . mapexddovr ili. 1. 32. 

d. Most temporal clauses are also relative (as above) ; and those which 
are not, usually follow the same analogy (introduced by mplv, péxpr, &ypr, 
&e.) : Mh orévage, rply paOys (619 e), do not groan, before you [may] have 
learned, Soph. Ph. 917. Ipiv paBoue Ib. 961. "Avéuevev . ., dare eupa- 
youev, he waited until they [should have] had eaten, Cyr. 8. 1. 44. Méype 
0 av eye Ha, ai crovdal pevivrwr, until I come, let the truce remain, i. 8. 
24. “Axpt dv cxordory Ib. 2. 

e. “Oorts, as requiring no additional mark of indefiniteness, is oftener 
joined with the Ind., than 8s used indefinitely : “Ooris 5 dduxvetro, who- 
ever came, i. 1. 5. See ii. 5. 7. 

f. In Epic similes, as presenting imagined scenes, the Subj. sometimes 
occurs in relative clauses : ‘Qs 62 yuh kAalygor, asa wife may weep, 0. 523. 
“OQsre Nis jiryéveros, bv pa kives . . Slavrar P. 109. 


642. 2. Finau Rewative Cravszs. A relative clause having the 
force of a final clause (558 a) has commonly in Attic the Fwd. (Ind., rare- 
ly Opt. except in Indirect Discourse, 643h); but oftener in Epic the Sulj. 
or Opt. (except Fut.) : “Orda xr&vrat, ofs duvvotvrar Mem., Iéuwor rw’, 
Sores onpavet Eur., “Ayyedov jxav, ds ayyethere 0. 458, § 558 a. "EriOhoee 
papuax, & ev raveyor, he shall apply remedies [which may give] to give 
relief, A. 191. 

a. In such relative clauses in Attic, the Subj. occurs chiefly after ty 
(commonly without &y); and the Opt. chiefly after another Opt.: Ovx 
CSougw éxeivor bro hbyao, they will have no place for refuge {whither 
they may flee], ii. 4. 20 (cf. Ib. 19; i. 7. 7). Tlounrhy ay ody eUpols . ., 
csris piu yevvaioy AdKor, you could not find a poet [who would utter] to 
uiicr a wdle word, Ar. Ran. 96. 


pal 





382 SYNTAX. R. T. — MODES. § 642, 


b. The use of the Opt. without &v after a relative, as above (640s), is 
sometimes extended in poetry (perhaps in prose) to cases where &y would 
regularly be used: Ovx éorw érw pei fova moipay velpoup, there is none to 
whom I should accord greater honor, Aisch. Pr. 291. ‘Qs elarot ris, as one 
might say, Kur. And. 929. 

c. For relative clauses expressing result, cause, &c , see 558. 


Iv. Complementary (Oratio Obliqua, é&e.). 


643. Rute T. The Oprarive is the finite mode appropri- 
ate to Indirect Discourse in past time. Thus, : 


a. Direct Discourse, Aéyer (elev), ‘‘opa” (‘ et8ov,” ‘*dpopar”), he 


says (said), ‘I see” (‘*I saw,” ‘‘I shall see”) ; Indirect Discourse in 
present time, Aéyer 57 Opa (etdev, Sera), he says that he sees (saw, shall 
see) ; Ind. Discourse in past time, Eizev 67: dp@ (ou, Sporto), he said 
that he saw (had seen, should see). “Avypwra, tt BovAowrTo, he asked, 
what they wished (quid vellent), ii. 3. 4 (directly, ri Boece ;). “O Te € 
Tounoot, ot duecnunve, but what he would do, he did not indicate, ii. 1. 23. 
"Hyvoee & te 7d wdOos etn, he knew not what the matter was, iv. 5. 7. 
‘Héavpafov bre ovdamod Kodpos gatvotiro, wondered that C. nowhere appeared, 
i. 10.16. “Eyadérawev ori . . A€you, was angry that he spoke, i. 5. 14. 
AtaBddrder (Hist. Pres.) . ., ws émtBovdcvor i. 1. 3. ‘Os efrev 6 Dadrvupos bre 
oipagouro, ef ju) oiwmiocev, éemipero: “Av 6& otwmad, ovk dp,” epy, 
‘foipmfopat ;” Hel. 2. 3. 56 (c). 


b. In the change from Direct to Indirect Discourse, the tense is not 


commonly changed, even though the mode may be. It continues to ex- 
press relatively (i. e. with reference to the time of the leading verb), the 
same time which it expressed absolutely in Direct Discourse ; while the 
English idiom commonly requires us to translate it according to its abso- 
lute time as now used. See 607, and 6p&, to, dWorro, above ; and ef. 660. 

c. The rule applies not only to leading verbs in the quotation, but to 
others connected with them: “EXeyov . ., drt mavrds d&ia éyou Levdns, 
xeyudw yap ely, they said, that the proposal of S. was worth everything, for 


it was winter, vii. 3. 13 (directly, \éye Z., x. ¥. €oTw). *"Arrexplvaro yap, 


Sri. . Bovredcoiro rept atrav 8 re Sbvaito, he answered that he would pro- 
vide for them what he could, vii. 1. 34 (directly, Bovedoomat 6 re ay dvvw- 
par, § 641a). See 649e. (d) But if a verb so connected expresses the 
writer’s own thought, it must retain the form of Direct Discourse : Tae- 
mrevoe. ., Ws ovK etn 6 Ktpov Spépdis, ddr borep iv, suspected that this 
was not S. the son of C., but the person that he really was, Hdt. 3. 68. 

e. The rule may extend to various dependent clauses, which are thus 
referred to the speech or mind of another : Causal, Exdxtfov, ore . . OUK 
émeEdyor, they reviled him, because (as they complained) he did not lead 
them out, Th. 2. 21 (éreéfyev would have been the writer’s own statement 
of the cause). Relative, "E¢evyov &0a uiyror sipoluny, I fled where (as I 
believed) I should never see, Soph. O. T. 796 (cf. 642). Conditional, 
"Quxrewpor, el GXdcowro (633¢). (f) So rarely even to clauses elliptically 
expressed as independent : ‘Yaéoxero. . Sn\doew dywv, olovro wey Maio 
éExovcvov, he promised to bring and show him, [saying] he hoped rather, with 
his own consent, Soph. Ph. 615. 

g. That which is presented in Indirect Discourse, is not presented as 
fact, but as the statement, thought, or feeling of some person, and con- 
sequently as having some degree of contingency. This seems the greater, 


if allis in the past, to which indeed Indirect Discourse chiefly belongs 5 


f 
| 


§ 646. IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 383 


and the use of the Opt. serves as an express disclaimer of responsibility. 
In the present, this distinction of modes was very limited (647), as far 
less needed and often discourteous. Compare ‘‘ He says that he will go,” 
and ‘* He said that he would go.” 

h. It is only through the Opt. in Greek, as through the Potential in 
Eng., that the Future tense can be carried back into the past ; and it is 
only in Indirect Discourse, and in clauses partaking of its nature, that 
the Fut. Opt. is used. Yet even here the Fut. Ind. is very often pre- 
ferred, and even though associate tenses may take the Opt.: “Omo.or joa 
Oavudfew, dot more TpefpovTat of “ENAnves, kal rh év vq eyorev, they seemed 
to be wondering whither the Greeks [will] would turn, and what they had 
in mind, iii. 5.13. "“Hddxer SHdov eivar, Sri aiphoovrar avrdy, el Tis émt- 
Wyohltor, i seemed evident that they would elect him, if the vote should be 
put, vi. 1. 25. See 645 b. — This remark extends to the Fut. Perf. 

i. When the Subjunctive of Direct Discourse becomes the Opt. in In- 
direct, &v is sometimes retained with a connective (619) : "Exédeve . . pu- 
Narrew, ws Av avrds Bor, he ordered him to guard it, until he should 
himself come, Hel. 5. 4. 47 (directly, puAarTe, ws dv ards éhOw). 


644. The Greek has here an especial love of VARIETY, 
either for its own sake, or for ewphony, or to express in various 
degrees contingency or positiveness of conception ; so that 


1.) Indirect and Direct Discourse are freely blended ; commonly by a 
change to the latter, either (a) after the introductory particle 8tt, or (b) 
in the body of the quotation, chiefly after a relative, a parenthetic clause, 
or one of the larger pauses: (a) Hizoy, dri ‘‘ixavol éopev,” they said, (that 
they were able] ‘‘ We are able,” v. 4.10. "Iows dv etrouev, bre 6°& UDedkpa- 
Tes, ph Oavpuafe,” perhaps they might-say, ‘*O S., do not wonder,” Pl. 
Crito 50c. Cf. Fr. Il dit que “‘oui,” he said ‘‘yes.” (b) "Eaideckvds 8é, 
ws enfes ein, Tyeuiva airety mapa Tovrov, ‘*@ Auvuawiucba Thy mpasu,” 
showing, that it was folly to ask a guide from him, ‘* whose plan (said he) 
we are frustrating,” i. 3.16. *Azexplvaro, 8re ovdév dv rovrwv elrot eis Tv 
orparidv: ** duets dé Ev\déEavres,” py, ‘‘el BoUNeaOe, NéyeTe” V. 6. 37. 


645. 2.) Indirect Discourse (a) retains freely the modes and tenses 
of Direct Discourse ; and often blends them with its own proper forms, 
whether (b) in a leading and dependent verb, or (c) in verbs not so 
related : (a) “HAeyev bre &rr0Sl8acr (607), he said that he [resigns] resigned 
(a compromise between the regular dzo0d:dofy and the direct ‘‘ drodidwue’’). 
‘“Harépow, ti more déyer, I was at a loss, what he meant, Pl. Apol. 21 b. 
‘Yropia wev fv, Ore dyer (cf. Sre 5é él Baordéa dor) i. 3. 21. See 607. 
(b) “Edeyov, bre wept crovddy Hovey, dvdpes of rTwes ixavol trovrar, ‘ that 
they had come respecting a truce, men who [will] would be competent,’ 
ii. 3. 4. See Ib. 6, and § 643h. (c) “EXeyor, bre Kipos péev rébvyxev, 
"Apiatos dé. . A€you, they stated that C. [is] was dead, and that A. said, ii. 
1. 8. Seeii. 2. 15; iii. 5.13; and § 652a. 


G46. In the change from Direct to Indirect Discourse, (a) the Impf. 
and Plup. ind. are usually retained, lest, if changed to the Opt., they 
might be confounded with the Pres. and.Perf. ind. so changed ; and (b) 
they are sometimes even used in Indirect Discourse, instead of these 
tenses. (c) Prior tenses, expressing supposition contrary to fact (615), 
require especially to be retained ; and (d) the Aor. Ind. is usually retained 
es oma clauses of the quotation, for distinction from the Aor. Subj. 

us, 





384 SYNTAX. — SUBJ. AND OPT. OF DOUBT. § 646. 


(a) Eixye yap Névyew, kal bre. . ovveisdyovro, for he could say that they 
had assisted (cf. orparetoawro), Hel. 7. 1. 34. (b) "Ev woddp Oh arropia 
hoav ot “EXAnves, Evvootpevor ev, Ore Ewl Tais Baoitéws Ovpars Toray, . . 
mpovoddaxeray dé avrovs kal ol . . BaépBapa, ‘reflecting that they were at 
the gates of the king, and had been betrayed by the barbarians,’ iii. 1. 2. 
(c) Ivéoiuny . ., ri dv more yvuuny epi éuod elyere, ef . ., ‘what opinion 
you would have of me, if I had . .,’ Dem. 1227. 2. (d) “EXeyor, ws a 
Revopar olxorro. . & tréryero avr@ droAnyouevos, ‘had gone to receive 
what he had promised him,’ vii. 7. 55. 


647. Sussuncrive or Doust (Conjunctivus deliberatiwus). 
a. ln complementary clauses, where doubt respecting the 
future is expressed or implied, the Subjunctive is often used, 
chiefly in the 1 pers. (cf. 628 a). (b) The connective is some- 
times omitted ; and (c) sometimes the leading verb itself. 


(a) Ovk éxw rl A€éyw, non habeo quid dicam, I know not what [I may 
call] to call it, Dem. 124. 24. Oux of6’ ef Xpvodvta rovTw 8a, ‘ whether to 
give to this C.,’ Cyr. 8. 4. 16. “Epwrg 6) w&s we Oamry, he asks how he 
shall bury me, Pl. Phedo 115d. Ovdé re ter, wh. . pevowwnowor, nor 
do we know at all, [whether] that they may not plan, K. 100. (b) Bovd\e 
[sc. ws] AdBowac,; wilt thou [that] I take? Soph. Ph. 761. OQédexs pelvw- 
pe; are you willing we should stay? Soph. El. 80. (ce) “‘Ilapaw& co 
cwmav.” ‘‘[Se. Iapaiwe?s ws] Eya cowrd ;” ‘* I advise you to be silent.” 
“(Do you advise that] Z be silent?” Ar. Ran. 1132. 

d. Hence the Subj. is used in asking what one is to do, can do, &c., 
chiefly in the 1st pers. and the indefinite 3d: [Sc. Bode: ws] Eivtropev 7 
orvyapev, 7) TL dpdooper ; shall we speak or be silent, or what shall we do? 
Eur. Ion 758. lot Bo; ra ora; Ti Ayo; whither can I go? where stop? 
what say? [sc. amop&, I am at a loss whither, &c.] Eur. Ale. 864. “Ap- 
tAAKW TOD cod udpov; must I miss your fate? Soph. Ant. 554. lot ris ody 
bvyy; whither can one flee? Id. Aj. 403. 

e. The Subj. of Doubt is plainly akin in force to the Fut. ind. With 
it &v is rare, and by some denied. 


648. Oprartve or Dovstr. a. Indirect Discourse in past time 
may change this Subj. to an Opt.: ’HBovNevero . . ef wéptrovev, he consulted 
whether they should send, i. 10. 5. "Hadpe: 8 re Xphoarro, he was at a loss 
how to manage, Hel. 7. 4. 89. (b) The connection must distinguish this 
use of the Opt. for the Subj. of present time, from its use in 643a, for the 
Ind. of Direct Discourse. To prevent mistake, the Subj. or Ind, can be 
retained (cf. 646). ; , 

ce. Hence the Opt. is sometimes used without &v in questions, chiefly 
in poetry: Ilot ris P¥you ; whither could one fly? [sc. dmopolyy dv, I should 
be at a loss whither, &c.] Ar. Pl. 488 (cf. 647d). Tis A€yor ; who could 
describe ? Esch. Ch. 595. 

d. A different ellipsis explains the poetic use of the Opt. with @s to 
express wish: [Sc. BovAoluny av] ‘Qs dAouro wayxaxds, O [1 should wish] 
that she might perish miserably ! Eur. Hipp. 407. ‘Qs wh @Odvor o. 859. 


v. Interchange. 


649. Rute U. The uses of the FINITE MODES are often 
interchanged. 





aaa nh is 


7 


§ 651. RULE U. INTERCHANGE OF MODES. 385 


a. Especial freedom belongs here, as elsewhere, to the poets ; partic- 
ularly to Homer, and others who sung before the use of the modes became 
fixed. 

b. The Greek has also great freedom here, as elsewhere, in combining 
different forms of construction (392) ; and (c) one part of a sentence often 
conforms to another, not as this is expressed, but as it might have been 
expressed (anacoluthon) : (b) as ay dplxowwrd tore tvOa Set, ef, érevddy 
Te ayTiKdy, evdds els Tdvavria whéorev ; how could they ever arrive where 
they ought, if, as soon as any thing may oppose, they should sail back, Hel. 
2.3. 31. See 641. (c) Ei uév érawa [= érawotuc] avrov, dtxaiws av pe 
Kal airiaode, if T[commend] should commend him, you would justly blaine 
me, Vil. 6.15. “Hy per dy, ef txorpe [= efxor], . . érovovpyy, J indeed, 
were I able, should procure made, Cyr. 2.1. 9. See 631. 

d. If the form of a leading verb does not agree with the time of its 
action, a dependent verb sometimes conforms to the one, and sometimes to 
the other: Hist. Pres., Tpdgpec . . dre tEow (v. U. Ea), he writes that he 
[would come] will come, i. 6. 3 (cf. 624¢). Opt. of Wish, &c., Te@vainy 
- «, Wa wh evOdde piv, let me die, that I may not remain here, Pl. Apol. 
28d. Hiphyyn . . éxou wéduy, dppa per ddrwWY KapPaLoipL, NAY peace possess 
the city, so that I may be merry with others, Theog. 885.  ITorjoarro (ar), 
twa. . ety (v. 7. ij) ii. 4. 38. Impf. as a prior tense (615 a), “EpoBovmny dv 
opsopa hévyer”, wy. . 86Ew, T should now fear greatly to speak, lest I seem, 
PL Theet. 143¢. .Ovre. . 7dtvar ay mpdrrew, & Potrero, he would not 
be able to do what he wished [= might wish], Mem. 1. 4. 14. 

e. If a dependent verb has another depending upon it, the latter has 
sometimes the form suited to the general dependence of both, and some- 
times the form suited to its own special dependence (that which it would 
have, if the former were independent), See 633, 643¢, 645 b. 


650. 1. Dependent sentences often conform to RELATIVE, 
instead of absolute, time (607) : 


Karéxavoev, va wy Kipos Say, he had burned (the boats), that C. 
[may] might not cross, i. 4.18. “Empascov brws tis Bonbeva Hea, they 
negotiated that some succor [shall] should come, Th. 3. 4. Cf. 652. 
©) ae eee frequent in final clauses, and in Indirect Discourse. 

ee1. 3.17. 


651. wu. Generic Use. This has a varied application to 
the modes : 


1. The InpIcATIVE is the generic mode ; and hence may be used for 
the Subj. or Opt., if it is not deemed important to mark the contingency : 
Xpijodwy 6 re BotAovrar, let them use me as they [may] please, Ar. Nub. 
439. See 645s. —In late Greek, the Ind. even occurs for a final Subj.: 
“Iva avrovs tynAotre, that ye may be zealous for them, Gal. 4. 17. 

a. As the Impf. and Plup. have no separate forms out of the Ind., they 
often remain in this mode, for distinction from the Pres. and Perf., in 
cases where other tenses would take the Opt. or Subj.; especially the 
Impf. expressing a repeated or continued act or state in past time : “ENe- 
yer, drt 6p0Gs yrrovto, Kal aird 7d epyov abrois paptupaly, he said that 
they had blamed him justly, and that the result sustained them, iii. 3. 12 
(directly, priacde, byiv waprupet). See 632, 634, 646. 

b. In applying the rules for the modes, the Fut. and Fut. Perf. ind. 
are also regarded as subjunctive. The future has such an element of un- 
certainty in its own nature, that a separation of the two modes was here 
less important. Compare the Lat., Eng., &c. See.648 h. 

REY. GR. 17 + 


386 SYNTAX. — INTERCHANGE OF MODES. § 652. 


652. 2. The Oprarive is the generic contingent mode, as the earlier 
developed, and as expressing past contingency (614b). It is, hence, 
often used for the Subj., especially to render the expression more general, 
indefinite, vague, or doubtful, or from a reference in the mind to some- 
thing past, distant, or contingent : “Amore:yifer, os caropos ely 7 006s, he is 
building a wall, so that the way might be impassable (for any one), ii. 4. 4. 
Totrov 6° 6x6, tva wh Tadavmopotro, J let him ride, so that he might not 
(at any time) be fatigued, Ar. Ran. 23. 

a. We observe here, as elsewhere, the Greek love of variety, and the 
tendency to drop into a more general form, after the use of one that is 
more special or definite (cf. 592c, 605b): Merépxyouat, ws UBpw SelEouev 
AiyicGou Gets, ysous 7 adelnv, I go, that I may show to the gods the inso- 
lence of ., and [might] utter wailings, Eur. El. 58. i ody eidetev roto 
.., levro ay. ., kal karepydtouvro, if they knew this, they would rush and 
win, Ven. 12. 22. Lrjcopar, H xe hépyor uéya Kpdros, 4 Ke epolwny >. 
308. Ovx dy. . dydpeves, ovdé ke. . dvvetyns 8. 184. See 643h. 


653. 1. The freedom of the mind in its conceptions of 
time affects the MopEs, as well as the tenses (608 s). 


a. Especially is the Subj. often used for the Opt. from a view of the 
past as present (or sometimes, as extending to the present) : "Emirndés ce 
oux éyerpor, va ws Hourra Sidyys, I purposely did not wake you, that you 
may puss your time as pleasantly as possible (forethought continued), Pl. 
Crito 43b. Cf. 650. aig. 

b. Among classic writers, Thucydides is especially fond of using the 
Subj. for the Opt.; and in late Greek this use, from combined influences, 
so prevailed, that at last the latter mode became extinct. 

c. An action that might be expressed by the Subj., is thrown more 
decidedly into the future by the use of the Fut. ind.: Ei wy Kabéges 
yA@coav, ora co. kaxd, tf you will not hold your tongue, evil will befall 
you, Kur. Aig. Fr. 8. Ei wh Anwoueba (604 b). See 624b; and iv. 8. 11. 

654. tv. The contingent is often conceived or spoken of 
as actual; and the actual, as contingent; especially from 
strong assurance or vivid fancy in the former case, and from 
courtesy or modesty in the latter. Cf. 608 a. 

a. The taste, refinement, popular institutions, and civie life of the 
Greeks fostered a spirit of mutual concession and respect, which often led 
them, and especially the Athenians, to express even decided opinions and 
well-known facts, not as if asserted, but as if modestly and courteously 
suggested, and referred to others for a decision. Hence they often used 


the contingent modes, especially the Opt., instead of the Ind.; and the 
Opt., as being still less direct, instead of the Subj. See 637, 639, 652. 


B. VOo.LitiIve. 


655. Rute XXXII. The Imrrrattve is the 
most direct expression of an act of the will. 


a. From the fondness of the Greeks for passing from indiregt to direct 
forms of expression (cf. 644s, 609d), the Imy. is sometimes found in 
dependent clauses : Ovnrds 5 ’Opéorns* wore wh Nav oréve, O. was mortal ; 
so that [do not grieve] you should not grieve to excess, Soph. El. 1172. 


meer: + aie 
j 


§ 657. RULE XXXII. THE IMPERATIVE. 387 


ActEar, bri, Gv pév édievrar, . . nrdobwoay, to show them, that what they 
desire {let them gain] they must gain, Th. 4. 92. Oito0’ 6 8pacov; béve 
thw wérpav* do you know, what [do] you should do? strike the rock ; Ay. 
Ay. 54 (ef. Oic6' ofv 6 Spaces ; Kur. Cycl. 131). Otcdd vu & wor yevér Bw ; 
‘what must be done for me,’ Eur. Iph. T. 1203. See 561 b, 656 e. 


G56. a. In general but earnest address, the 2d Pers. of the Imv. is 
sometimes used with was, or tls, or both, instead of the 3d: Xwpe: detpo 
was brnpérns: Ticeve, Tate: opevddvyy Tis wot ddTw. Come hither every 
man of you! Shoot, smite. Let some one give mea sling. Ar. Av. 1186. 
@®b\arre was Tis Ib. 1191. “Axove was Ar. Th. 372. “Irw tis, elodryyedre 
Eur. Bac. 173. Aperite aliquis ostium, Zev. See 508. 

b. Such familiar imperatives as Gye, hépe, UOr, eimé, and i8€ may be 
used in the singular, as interjections, though more than one are ad- 
dressed ; and in the 2d Pers., though associated verbs are in the 3d: 
“Ave 5h, dxovcare, come now, hear, Apol. 14. Eiré mou, rl wdoxer, ov- 
dpes; Ar. Pax 383. “It. .7is.. 5d7w Ar. Ran. 871. 

ce. An exclamatory Imy. seems to have been sometimes apocopated : 
lad [for wade], rad’! Stop, stop! Ar. Kiq. 821. 

d. An act of the will may respect either the real or the ideal. Hence 
in Greek, as in other languages, the Imv. may be used to express sup- 
position or condition : Hipjobe por, [let it have been said by me] suppose 
me to have swid, Mem. 4. 2.19. ILdodbre, [be rich] suppose that you are 
rich, Soph. Ant. 1168. Kvxdos yeypap8w 6 BI'A, let the circle BGD [have 
been] be described, Kucl. 1. 1. 

e. The Imy. sometimes so proposes as to imply a question : *O wo\hd- 
kts €pwTd, KeloOw viuos, as I often ask, [let it be] shall tt not be established 
as a law? Pi. Leg. 801d. So indirectly, éravepwrG . ., ef mp&rov & T0t8 
quty dpécxov KeloOw Ib. 800 e. 


C. INCORPORATED. 


657. In dependent clauses, the Greek has great freedom 
in the employment of either distinct or incorporated forms, ac- 
cording as a more or less intimate union is desired ; and also 
in respect to the manner of incorporation. Thus (a) a depend- 
ent clause may be preserved entirely distinct ; or (b) its subject 
or most prominent substantive may be incorporated in the lead- 
ing clause, leaving it otherwise distinct ; or (c) its verb may be 
also incorporated as an Jnjinitive, or (d) yet more closely as a 
Participle. 'The union often becomes still closer by an attrac- 
tion, through which (e) the leading verb adopts, for a subject 
or object, the subject of the dependent clause; or the Inf. or 
Part. adopts, for its grammatical subject, either (f) the subject 
or (g) an adjunct of the leading verb. (h) Different forms are 
often combined or blended. E. g., 

(a, b) "HisGero, 8tt 7d Mévwvos orpdrevpa Hin ev Kidexla Fv (v. 0." 
76 te M. orpadrevpa, Ste 75 ev K. fv), he perceived, that the army of Meno 
was now in Cilicia (the army of M., that it was, kc.), i. 2. 21. ITapeckev- 


afovro, Srws . . éoParotow, they prepared [how they should invade, 
624 b] to invade, Th. 2. 99. See 474b, 573a. (ce, d) AlaOavduevos adrods 


ia) 


388 SYNTAX. — INCORPORATE vil 

























péya . . Sbyacrbat, perceiving them to have great influ 
Sivan. . o& alsbéaGau Treipao.evoy, 1 cannot perceive y 
4. IWapecxevdfovro . . orparevey (trodkeqoovres, 
they prepared to make war, Th. 1.115; 2. 7. See 598 
(f) "Hvoud Somev déEvou elvan es mas dElous civar|, we thor 
worthy, Cyr. 7. 5. 72 (cf. vopl fount yap equ ov éorxévae Ib. 
purge. . dvdpa ayabdy aaroxrelvev [= ceavrov dmoxreivovra], 2¢ 
self putting to death a good man, vi. 6. 24. Otmac etvar Tipe 
oivar wey Anpely pe Pl. Charm. 173 a). ‘Op® péev apaptave 
350 (ef. op dé pw epyov dewov e€erpyaopévnv Soph. Tr. 706 
To05’ évexa, BovAdpevos, J speak for this reason, [wishing] that I 2 
Phedo 102d. (g) IpoonKer dpxovre dpovipw etvat, it becomes a 
be prudent, Mag. iq. 7. 1. Eé yap dpovotytos Eupa, cod Ka 
your eye proves that you feel, kindly (677), Asch. Ag. 271. See 66° 
oy Ovx a Kpelttav 70et st TadTa mpovkadeito Tovs auvevTas, 


ied he was inferior, Cyr. 1. 4. a Ilapirnréa . . ponder dur 
vous, .. Syrd@oar Oé, they must come forward, not to make ony 
to show, Th. 2. 72. “Ad\\w re rpdrw TapdoavTes, Kal unyaviy T 
you, both attempting in other ways, and [they brought up] bringt 
engine, Th. 4.100. Aceipyerat, 7d wi repos otoa [for elvat, ( 
separated, so as not to be main land, Th. 6. 1. 
i. The Inf. and Part. may also be used impersonally : Mh 
cut (432d). Merapérov airois, they repenting, Pl. Phaedo il 
J. An especial variety of construction appears with otv 
wake, gouxa, and some other words: Zvvowa éuavT@ codes ¢ dv ( 
pévo, Stt A€yw), J aim conscious that I am wise (that T am not @ 
J speak), | Pi. Apol. 21b, Conv. 216b, Ion 583¢. “Eyd coe obvoee 
.. Tpwt dviordpevov [v. 7. dyrrapéve] (Ke. 3. 7. “Eocxas Baor 
(HSdpevos, SeSrore), you seem to be king (pleased, like one fearing), Cyn 
1. 4. 9, Hel. 6. 3. 8, Pl. Rep. 527d. So “Ouow Foav Carpe brew vl. 
Oaupdtovres, = Baud cover), they seemed to be wondering, iii. 5. 13. 
k. Some verbs may be followed either by the Inf. or the Part., with 
scarcely any difference of meaning, as in some of the examples above ; 
and others, with an obvious difference. In the latter case, the Part. 
commonly denotes that which is less dependent on the action of the lead- 
ing verb, or is a more immediate, positive, or personal object of percep- 
tion : ToSro wey ovK alaxvvouat héyov - To O¢ alcxuvoluny av héyav: JT am 
not ashamed [saying] to say this (which is said) ; but I should be ashamed 
to say that Se from the shame is not said) ; Cyr. 5. 1. 21. “Av dat 9 
pdOwwev apyoi Civ, if we once learn to live in idleness, iii. 2.25 5 “Iva wdOg 
copier ijs av, that he may learn that he is a schemer, Esch. Pr, 61. So. 
yv 2 Tpépew, learn to keep, Soph. Ant. 1089 ; ywaow dm oT oUpEvot, perceive 
that they are distrusted, Cyr. 7. 3. 17. Mewpcbw dvip ayabes elvan, let 
him remember to be a brave man, ili. 2. 39; Méuynuat gov dxotoas, J re- 
member that I heard from you, Cyr. 2. 4. 12. “Hxovoy "AOnvatoy elvat, 
I heard that you were an Athenian, iii. 1. 35. “Hxovoay abtod dovqrav- 
ros, they heard him speaking, Symp. 3. 18. See oka (j). 
l, Infinitives and Participles retain the properties of the verb, so far as 
may consist with their substantive or adjective use. In general, they — 
modify as nouns or adjectives, but are modified as verbs. See 504, 663. 


658. ‘The use of both the incorporated modes is even more — 
extensive in Greek than in English. 
. 












‘4 ITIVE AND PARTICIPLE. 389 
ay 

often translate the Greek Inf. and Part. by finite verbs 
s (that, when, while, as, and, tf, although, because, since, 
bat, &c.). Sometimes, also, from a difference of idiom, the Inf. 
are interchanged in translation : Ilapav érvyxave, happened to be 
i. 1. 2. “Eovero éauriv pireicOa, wished himself beloved, Cyr. 
2 "“Emeué twa épodyra (598 b). 

With dy, the Inf. or Part. commonly supplies the place of the cor- 
ding tense of the Opt., or past tense of the Ind. (618); and is 
translated by our potential mode: Kal & &v rots dddoww edn 
vOAracbar, he said he would advise the rest, I. 684.(directly, av. . 

noaluny I. 417). ‘Qs otrw tmepryevopevos dv, as though he would 

eval, i. 1. 10 (directly, repvyevoiuny dv). Awd 7d wh dvacyéobar 
because they would not have borne it, Hel. i. 4. 20 (directly, avécxovro 
_ “Qore kal idudryy dv yvevar vi. 1. 31. 
In Latin, the Geruwnd and Supine supply in part the place of the 
k Inf.: Tod riety ériOuuia, bibendi desiderio. ’Axodoar dndH (663 g), 
undam auditu. The Latin Participle, from its defective formation, 
ess used than the Greek or English ; and is often absolute in the 
», Where they are used in the Active: ZuAdé~as orpdrevya, exercitu 
0, having collected an army, i.1.7. (c) In Modern Greek the 
‘the Inf. is commonly supplied by a conjunction and finite mode: 
i payo [= classical 0é\w payer], I wish to eat. 

























9. 2. The use of the incorporated modes, particularly the Inf., is 
reat in Indirect Discourse, sometimes (a) continuing through a 
f sentences, or (b) even extending to relative,'and rarely to other 
ary clauses (cf. 661 a); and being interchanged and blended not 
) with other forms of Indirect Discourse, but also (d) with those of 
Discourse. Compare the much greater use of the Lat. Inf. in In- 
Discourse. For the use of the tenses here, see 660b. E. g., 
ee Hdt. 1. 24; Cyr. 1.3.48. (b) “Hon de, érecd}) 08 ee BHvar riv 
y mopeverbar. . els Towov. ., vG. . Ov’ elvar ydouare, he said that, 
when his soul had left the body, it went to a place, in which were two open- 
ings, Pl. Rep. 614b. Aéyouor . ., ws waca dv yi érlurdaro ray édlwy 
Toirwv, el wu) ylverOar, ‘if there did not take place,’ Hdt. 3. 108. 
(c) “AvyéAdec Aepxvddidas, Stu vixwév Te af Aaxedayudsvior, kal ad’raev per 
teOvavat dx7w, D. announces, that the L. have conquered again, and that 
eight of their own men have fallen, Hel. 4. 8.1. ‘Qs wév orparnyioovra 
ue. . pndels tudiv heyérw. ., dS dé. . mwelropar, Let none of you speak of 
me as to take command, but (say rather) that I will obey (680), i. 8. 15. 
(d) “Egy eBéXew ropeverar, . . ‘eya yap,” pn, “‘olda,” he said that he 
wished to go, ‘‘for,” said he, ‘I know,” iv. 1. 27. See i. 3. 20, vii. 1. 
39 ; and cf. § 644. 
e. “Or and ds are sometimes even followed, after intervening words, 
by an Inf. or Part., instead of a finite verb: Eime dé, 811, érevday rdXuoTa 
n orparela AnEy, EVOISs arrotrémpe adrév, he said that, as soon as the cum- 
pwign was ended, he would send him home, iii. 1. 9. Tvods.. &t, ef 
Kal Orocovoty maddov évddcovsct, StadOapyncopévous a’rov’s, ‘that they 
would be destroyed,’ Th. 4. 37. Cf. 644 a. : 
f. The use of the Inf. in Indirect Discourse after verbs of saying, think- 
ing, perceiving, and the like (verba sentiendi et declarandi), is not broadly 
separated from its objective use after verbs of commanding, advising, 
entreating, teaching, learning, wishing, intending, and the like. It ma 
! commonly be distinguished by the use of ‘‘that” in translation, by the 
| use of ért with another mode in equivalent expressions, or by the context. 







390 SYNTAX. —- INCORPORATED MODES. § 659. 


(c) After verbs of promising, hoping, expecting, and the like, the Inf. is 
oftener in the Fut., according to the rule for Indirect Discourse : “Yz- 
oxvovpevos.. Tornoe, promising that you would do, vii. 2. 24 (cf. cverpa- 
revecOat Vii. 7. 31 3 pweurfoOae vii. 6. 88 ; ravcac@ar i. 2. 2). 

h. nl, introducing Indirect Discourse, is regularly followed by the 
Inf.; elroy, by étt or as, and a finite verb ; Aéyw, by either ; but in the 
sense to command, both etrov and Aéyw, by the Inf.: Hirer airo pévey, 
bade him stay, Cyr. 1. 4.18. Yet see 627 b. 


660. a. The Inf. and Part. are achronic in respect to absolute time 
(590, 607). (b) But the Part., the Inf. Fut. and Fut. Perf., and the 
Inf. in Indirect Discourse (cf. 643 b), commonly express the same time 
relatively (i. e. with reference to the verb on which they depend), which 
the same tense of the Ind. would express absolutely. (c) For the use 
here of the Pres. and Perf. as also Impf. and Plup., see 269¢. (d) Other- 
wise the Inf., as in Eng., commonly expresses simply the relation of the 
action to the time (267 c), leaving the time itself to be inferred from the 
connection. This time is often a relative future ; and then the less com- 
mon Fut. Inf. might also be used, to give prominence to the time. Cf. 
624 b, 653c. Thus, 

(b) “Huew A€yov (A€Eas, AéEwv) he went saying (having said, to say). 
Aéyet pay (iSetv, erbar), dicit se videre (vidisse, visurum esse), he says — 
that he sees (saw, shall see). Cf. 643a. (c) ’Iao@at atrés 7d rpatdua prot, 
he says that he himself healed the wound, i. 8. 26 (directly féuyy). Oiéa 
dé Kdxelvw Twdpovotvre, gore Dwxpdre cvvijorny Mem. 1. 2. 18. (d) Bov- 
Aduevor . . xe (droxAjoacba, v. 1. droxd\joecOat), wishing to have (to 
intercept), Th. 8.9; 6. 101 (Thue. is especially inclined to this use of the | 
Fut.). . See 598. 

e. The Aor. Part. sometimes agrees in time with the leading verb, 
chiefly with another Aor. when both refer to a single act, and with such 
verbs as AavOdve, tvyXdve, Pave, and aepropdw: Ti ay eirdv oé Tis 
6p0Gs mpooeltror ; what could one call you and call you rightly? Dem. 
232. 20. ’I8av etSov, [seeing] swrely J saw, Luc. D. Mar. 4. “Aorudynv 
oKaavra elrety Cyr. 1. 3.8. Anoopev érumerdvres, we shall attack by 
surprise, Vii. 8. 43. Ov wy o éya® tmepicopat amedGdvTa, L will not let 
you go, Ar. Ran. 508. See § 677. 


G61. a. Clauses depending upon the Inf. and Part. have usually 
the same form as if these were finite verbs : “Erocuos jv dmorivew el kaTa~ 
yvotev, he was ready to pay, if they should condemn him, soe. 361 e. 
hoPoluny 5 av ro iyyeubu, @ Soly, erecPar (641 b). “Amoméuyar 6 lye 
orparevua, "Exwv obs elpyka (551c¢). But see 659 b. 

b. From the familiar association of the Acc. with the Inf, and the 
Gen. with the Part., words commonly governing other cases are often 
followed by these in connection with an ‘Inf. or Part.: Ypas T poo net 
kal duetvovas . . elvar, it befits you to be [that you should he] braver, ii. 2. 
15 (cf. tutv apootxee Ib. 11, § 450). Ovdev HX 0ETO Aur Sy ToAEpovvTwV, 
he was not at all displeased [they being] with their being at war, 1.1. 8 
(cf. #xOero atr® vii. 5. 7, § 456). “Hpmovros eloopas EHOV, YOU sce me 
going (432), Soph. Tr. 394. (c) Sometimes the Acc. occurs for another 
case with the Part., if its use is analogous to that of the Inf.: “Hod. . 
eddoyotvrd oe, J ain pleased that you bless (456), Soph. Ph. 1314. 

d. In the use of the incorporated modes with adjuncts, there is often 
a union of two constructions: Ti qpav denoerOe xpyoacOat [uniting rf 
hudv Seticer0e and ri dehoecde tiv xpjoacOat| ; [what shall you want of 


§ 663. RULE XXXII. THE INFINITIVE. 391 


us to do with us ?] in what shall you wish to employ us? v. 4.9. "Ay- 
yee 6 Spxw mpooriHels, announce [with an oath, adding it], adding an 
oath, Soph. El. 47. 


662. From the intimate union subsisting between the Inf. or Part., 
and the leading finite verb, a word properly : modifying the one is some- 
times placed in immediate connection with the other. Thus we find 
(a) such adverbs as &pa, airlka, edOts, efaldpvys, petrakd, Suws, kalsrep, 


. &e., joined with the Part. instead of the leading verb ; and sometimes 


(b) a particle joined with the leading verb instead of the. Inf. or Part., 

articularly &v (621), and ov« with pypt: (a) “Awa tar elrav dvéory 
having said this, he at the same time rose], as soon as he had said this, 
he rose, iii. 1. ad Eidv’s ofy pe idcv 6 Képadros jomdgero, invmediately 
upon seeing me, C. saluted me, Pl. Rep. 328c. Meragd ral{wv eicépxerat, 
[playing, meanwhile] he enters in the midst of his play, Pl. Lys. 207 a. 
eedini, Kal yuv7) Tep otc ’ Spas, I come, even though I am a woman, 
Eur. Or. 680. (b) Ov« @pacav iévar, they said they would not go, i. 3. 1. 
"Extpeto avrov, ei dmhurevar. Ov epy [sc. Omdereve]. ‘He said No.’ 
vy. 8. 5. 


1. The Infinitive (Verb-Noun, ‘”Ovopa rot ‘Pnyatos”). 


663. Rute XXXII. The InNFrinitive is con- 
strued as a neuter noun (491 a). Hence, 


(a) The Inf. may be the supsect of any word which would 
agree with a noun, or (b) even of another Inf.; (c) it may 
itself agree as an APPOSITIVE; (d) it may DEPEND upon any 
word which would govern a noun; or (e) it may be used, like 
a noun, to express @ CIRCUMSTANCE; particularly such as are 
denoted by the Gren. of cause, the modal Dat. (466 8), the Ace. 
of specification (481), and the adverbial Acc. (483). (f) The 
ARTICLE is often prefixed to the Inf. to give prominence to its 
substantive character, or to define the relation which it sus- 
tains as a substantive, by marking the case. If the Inf. is gov- 
erned by a preposition, the insertion of the article is Baten it 


(a) Pebyev aur ois doparéarepsy éorw, to fly is safer for them, iii. 2. 19. 
Ovdev ofdv éor [= To.0brév ori, ofov] dKotoat (7d avrov epwrav), there is 
nothing [such as] like hearing (like asking him), Ar. Av. 966, Pl. Gore. 
447¢. (b) Aodjvar avrg odtew TOUS “EAAnvas, that it should be granted to 
him to save the Greeks, ii. 3. 25. (ec) Td yap yr@vac érioriuny mov haPety 
éoru, to learn is to acywire knowledge (534. 3), Pl. Theet. 209e. Ti yap 
ToUTOU maKkaplWTEepov, TOU YH pLxOAvar, Cyr. 8. 7. 25. (d) Oc pudrepoy 
mritvy, warmer for drinking, Mem. 8. 13. 3. ’Emréoxouev Tod Saxpvew 
(405). Mav@dvev yap jouer, we have come to learn, Soph. a et at 
Avvatuny Tapa Bacvréws airaracar, Sodval Hot drocacay vmas li. 8. 18. 
(ce) “HEA\Oev ro oreipar (429 a). ‘Opav oruyvos WY, kal TH porn Tpaxus, 
he was stern in aspect, and rough in woice, ili. 6. 9. “Opocov ovder . ., wHijv 
Svopdorat, nothing is similar, except in name, Eur. Ph. 501. (f) Aca tod 
émvopketv, through perjury, ii. 6. 22. ’Avrt "be Tod dpxerOar vr’ dAdwr, 
dpxew, instead of being riled by others, to rule, Hdt. 1. 210 (yet v. 0. dyri 
dé dpxecOar). “Ev yap t@ xparetv dors kal Td AapBdvev v. 6. 32. © 


392 SYNTAX. R. XXXIIl.— INFINITIVE, § 663. 


In Greek, as in Eng., the Inf. Act. (or Mid.) is often used, where 
the Inf. Pass. might have been used with reference to a nearer, more ex- 
plicit, or more natural subject : "Agios Oavpdoat, worthy to [admire] be 
admired, Th. 1. 138 (cf. Oavudgec@a, Id. 2. 40). Oatua i8éobar, a won- 
der to behold, BH. 725. Kraveiv éuot vw @docav, they gave her to me [to 
slay] to be slain, Kur. Tro. 874. “Axotoar .. dnd, pnOjvar 5’ ovK dovp- 
pbpov, painful to hear, yet not useless to be spoken, Isoe. 265 e. 

h. The Inf. is often named from its special office : as, the Inf. of Direct 
or Indirect Olject, of Effect, of Purpose, of Specification, the Adverbial In- 
Jinitive, &e. 


664. Arrictn with THE InF. a. The prevalent use of the Inf. as 
a direct or indirect object of a verb or adjective, is not commonly dis- 
tinguished by the article ; while its rarer subjective use as a Gen. is usu- 
ally so distinguished. Hence it usually wants the article, where it would 
be naturally translated by the Eng. Inf., and also in Indirect Discourse ; 
but commonly takes it when it modifies a noun, unless the noun is so 
joined with a verb, that the Inf. may seem related to them jointly (as 
together equivalent to some verb, &c.): See examples above. Ipdédaccs 
rod dOpolfeay (444 b). “EdaBov rpdpacw otpatevery, they seized a pretext 
for war, Hel. 3. 5.5. “Iva .. pdBos etn .. orparevew, that they might 
fear to make war, ii. 4. 3 (cf. iii. 1. 18). *AxpoBortfecbar dvdyKn éorl 
[like xpy], dt ts necessary to fight at a distance, Cyr. 2. 1. 7. 

In some cases it seems indifferent whether the Inf. is regarded as 
the subject of a verb, or as depending upon the verb used impersonally.. 
See 571 f,h. In such cases, or when the Inf. is the subject of éort and 
an adjective, it commonly wants the article. A verb which has an Inf. 
for its subject, is usually intransitive or passive. 

c. The article is often prefixed, especially in the tragedians, where it 
would not have been expected, and is often in the Acc. (of direct object, 
effect, or specification), where another case might have been expected. It 
is used the thore freely, if some negation is expressed. Thus, Td dpav ovr 
0énoar, [willed not the doing] were not willing to do it, Soph. O. C. 442. 
“ExBarety wev aidoduar ddxpu, TO wh Saxpdca 5’ abOs aidodua, Tam ashamed 
to drop a tear, yet again not to weep, Bur. Iph. A. 451. Td ovyav ov c0&d 
Ib. 655. “Os ce ckwrXvoer TO Spav, who will prevent thee from doing it (405), 
Soph. Ph. 1241. Tis édridos. . rd wh wabety, the hope of not suffering, 
Id. Ant. 235. Td wey mpocradarrwpetv . . ovdels mpd0ipos Hv, NO one was 
ready {as to] for enduring, Th. 2. 53. 

d. The Inf. with rod as the Gen. of motive is particularly frequent with 
a negative: Tod un twas fnrijou, in order that none may inquire, Th. 1. 
23. (ec) In late, especially Hellenistic, Greek, this Gen. form was more 
loosely used to express result, effect, object, &c.: “Eawore?hat avrots rod azeé- 
xec0a1, to send them word [for their abstaining] to abstain, Acts 15. 20. 
Hemounxdot Tod repirareiv avriv Ib. 3. 12. 

f. Compare the use of the article with the Inf. in German, Italian, 
&e.: 7d pireiv, G'. das Lieben, /¢. il amare, to love. 


665. a. The Inv. or SpecrricaTion and the ADVERBIAL Ir. have 
a large range, and are variously translated. In some of these uses, the 
Inf. is often said, though not in the strict sense of the term (401 N.), to 
be absolute. HK. g.,’Ex deiuards rov vuxrépov, Soxety évol, from some night 
vision, [according to the seeming] as it seems to me, or methinks, Soph. El. 
410. °AXN eixdorat per, 7dvs, but to guess, joyous, 1d. O. T. 82. “*Odtyou 
Seiy welous drexrivacw, have slain [to want little] almost a greater num- 


§ 667. CASE OF ITS SUBJECT. RULE XXXIV. 393 


ber, Hel. 2. 4. 21. So puxpod detv, ddéiyou [sc. dev], plxpov [se. detv], 
almost. ’Hs déov wdpecd’ 65e Kpéwy, 7d mpdooew cal 7d Bovdevev Soph. 
O. T. 1416. For other examples, see 663 e, 664 c. 

b. The use of etvat as the Inf. of specification, or the adverbial Inf., 
will be particularly remarked with éxav, chiefly in negative sentences ; 
and with some adverbs, or prepositions followed by their cases, chiefly pre- 
ceded by té6: Ore cuvOnxas dv Wevdoluny éxav elvat, nor would I break my 
engagements willingly [to be willing], or, so far as depends on my will, 
Cyr. 5. 2. 10 (cf. ‘‘to be sure” = surely). Tod viv eiva, [as to the being, 
or state of affairs, now] for the present, iil. 2. 37. Td wey rrepov elvar, for 
to-day, Pl. Crat. 396d. Td xara rotrov eivat, so far as regards him, i. 6. 
9. Tod ém rovrors eivar, so far as depends on these, Lys. 180. 41. 


666. RuLE XXXIV. The SuBJEcT oF THE In- 


FINITIVE is put in the Accusative: as, 

Oléuevac . . Kdpov ¢jv, supposing [C. to be] that Cyrus was alive, ii. 1. 
1 (ef. the finite Kipos ¢, C. is alive, 400). “H&iov . . dof jvat oi ravras Tas 
modes, he requested that these cities should be given to him, 1. 1. 8. 

a. The subject of the Inf. is very often, either properly or by attraction 
(474, 657 e), the direct object of a preceding verb, and consequently in the 
Acc. Hence has arisen an association between this case and the Inf., 
which has led to this rule. (b) The Inf., on the other hand, extensively 
constitutes an indirect object of the verb or other word on which it 
depends. From the prevalence of this use appears to have arisen the 
resemblance in form of the Greek and Lat. Inf. to the Dat., and the use 
of the prepositions ¢o and zw before the Inf. in Eng. and German (272a, ¢): 
Ilérecxe tov wavrw héyew, had persuaded the prophet [to the saying] to say 
(G@. zu sagen), vi. 4. 14. Tods puyddas éxédevce ov at orpareverOar, he 
urged the exiles [to the serving] to serve with him, i. 2. 2. 


667. a. This rule applies to the subject of the Inf. simply as such. 
(b) Very often, this subject has a prior grammatical relation, which 
determines its form ; (c) even if its two uses are not in immediate connec- 
tion. (d) Still, it is sometimes repeated in the Acc. for more distinct ex- 
pression ; and (e) is oftener so understood. (f) For clearness, emphasis, 
or euphony, it is sometimes repeated in the same case, chiefly in the Nom. 
(g) Attracted and mixed constructions also occur. Thus, 

(b) Kupov éddovro ws mpobupordrov . . yevés dan, they besought C. to be 
as strenuous as possible, Hel. 1. 5. 2. Nov cou eéeorw. . dvSpl yevéo bar 
it is now in your power to become a man, vii. 1. 21. See 657 fog Tiebas 
avTos Td Tpadud, pnot (660¢). (c) Todro 8° éote: éx rod Xaretrds ecivar, 
he effected this by being severe, ii. 6. 9. K*7ptxa mpowéurer avrots \éyorra, 
. . €roipos eivat, he despatches a herald to them, to say that he is ready, Th. 
7. 3. Rettulit esse pronepos, Ov. (d) Otuac dé we dxnxoévat, I think that 
I have heard, Pl. Rep. 400 b. "Evéuioe éwurdy civac Hat. 1. 34. (e) Aco- 
pévov pou mporrdarny [sc. ue] yevérOat, entreating me [that I would be- 
come] to become leader, Cyr. 7. 2. 23. "Edozev avrots, mpopt\akas Kara- 
oTiTAvTaAs [sc. opas] ovyxadeiv, it seemed best to them, having stationed 
sentinels, to convoke, iii. 2.1. (f) "Erourbw cou. . éyd Bovr\ecbar av, 
I swear to you that I would choose, Cyr. 6. 4. 6. (g) "Edmifwr . . ovd" &v 
airs, ovdé oi [for rods, attracted by avrds] ef abrod, ravceca, trusting 
that neither himself, nor his descendants, would lose, Hat. 1. 56. Tovds dé 
amoxplvacba . . avrol dwcew (as if a finite mode had preceded), that these 
answered that they would give, Ib. 2. "Ewvérw ot. . éupévew, . . ws dvee 
(as if ool had preceded), Soph. O. T. 350. See T. 258 s. 


REV. GR. 17* 


394 SYNTAX. R. V., W. — INFINITIVE. § 667. 


h. The subject of the Inf. is very often indefinite ; and is then com- 
monly omitted, though words may be expressed agreeing with it: ‘‘ Ovéda- 
pas dpa det [sc. Twa] dducety.” ‘OU dijra.” ‘ Ovde dStKotpevov dpa dvra- 
duxetv.” ‘* One ought then by no means to injure.” ** Swrely not.” ‘* Not 
then, when injured, to injure in turn.” Pl. Crito 49 b. 


668. Pxieonasm anv Exuipsis. 1. The Infinitive (a) is 
sometimes redundant, and (b) is sometimes omitted : 


(a) Xdpw dvrididwow exe, in return gives [to have] please, Soph. O. 
C. 232. Alrijcoua dé o ov paxpdv yépas Nayetv Id. Aj. 825. (b) His rd 
Badavetov Bov’rAouat [sc. lévac],Z wish to go to the bath, Ar. Ran. 1279. “H¢ 
6 Opdvrns [sc. otrw rorjoat|, Orontes [said that he had so done] assented, 
i. 6.7. Lapayyédnrer eis Ta Stra i. 6. 13. 

ce. The Inf. added for the sake of expressing an idea more fully or pre- 
cisely is termed the Inf. epexeyetic (émeEnynrixds, explaining further). 


669. wu. The Infinitive often depends upon a word which 
is omitted or implied in another word. 


1. This often occurs in Indirect Discourse : 


Oi dé opdrrew éexédXevov: ov yap av Stvacbat mopevOjva [sc. pacar] - 
but they bade him kill them ; for [they said that] they were unable to pro- 
ceed ; iv. 5. 16. *BOnxev, éf’ ots é&etvar, he made conditions, on which he 
suid it was permitted, Dem. 505. 19. Karedpovouv . ., undéva av érixerp7j- 
oa, they despised the foe, (thinking that) no one would attack, Hel. 4. 5. 12. 


670. 2. Rute V. The Inf. often forms an elliptical com- 
mand, request, counsel, salutation, exclamation, or question « 


Zu wor bpdtev [sc. Zed], do you [please to] tell me, Pl. Soph. 262e. 
Tatéa 5’ éuot Moat A. 20 (so esp. in Hom.). Zed warep, 7) Atavra Aaxeiv, 
‘O [grant] that either Ajax may draw the lot,’ H. 179 (cf. Zed dva, 86s 
ricacOa, ‘grant that I may punish,’ I. 351). Tov Iwva Xalpey [se. Ke- 
Aevw], F did Ion hail, Pl. lon 580 a. "Epé mabetv rdde [se. dewvdv éoTt], 
ded / that I should suffer such things [is horrible], alas / Aisch. Kum. $37. 
°Q Bacrred, xbrepov héyev . . 7) oryay [sc. XP7, OF Keevels | ; Hat. 1. 88. 
*A devrol, rio tpev; x. 481. Mene incepto desistere victam ? Virg. 

a. So often in proclamations, laws, &c.: Tods OpgKas aarrévar [se. Keheve- 
rat or det], it is ordered that the Thracians depart, or the T’. must d:, Ar. 
Ach. 172. Ti & hralav duaywaoxew, let the court decide, Dem. 629. 24. 
See v. 3.13. (b) In exclamation, the article is usually prefixed: Ts 
rixns! Td ue viv KrynOévra depo ruxev! My ill-luck! That I should 
happen now to have been summoned hither! Cyr. 2. 2. 3 (429f). See Ar. 
Av. 5. (c) Ina few poetic passages, the Inf. follows ei yap or ele, to ex- 
press wish: Ei yap. . éxéuev [sc. Spedes, 638 g], would thow hadst, n. 311. 
See w. 376. 


671. 3. Rute W. Some connectives are followed by the 
Infinitive ; especially as, Sacre, otos, and daos. 

a. This construction, like similar constructions in our own and other 
languages, is plainly due to ellipsis, though it has extended to cases 
where the ellipsis cannot be yi Sle without cumbering the discourse, 
and has some irregular forms (through attraction, &c.). It is little used 
in Homer. (b) It sometimes occurs where a connective seems needless 5 
and (c) is often parenthetic (chiefly with as). EK. g., 


§ 673. INF. WITH ‘Q3, &C. PARTICIPLE. 395 


(a) “Emewdav 62 onuivyn .., as [sc. onuatvo av] dvaratecbar, when the 
signal is given, as {it would be given] for resting, ii. 2. 4. “Tareddoas ws 
owarrnoat, riding up [so as] to meet him, i. 8.15. Torauds rocotros rd 
BdOos, ws unde ra Sparta brepéxew (550e) iii. 5. 7. Meydda éxrjoaro 
xphpara, ws av eivar Podwrios, she aequired great wealth [as it would be 
accounted, to belong to R.] for a person like R., Hdt. 2.1385. ‘Qs madara 
elvat, considering their antiquity, Th. 1. 21. Bovderat rovety, Bore Tode- 
ety, chooses toil, so as to be [or that he may be] at war, ii. 6. 6. "Exw yap 
Tpinpers, Ware édelv TO Exelywy rotor, ‘so as to take,’ 7. e. ‘so that I can 
take,’ i. 4. 8. °Ed@’ 6 wt xalew, Ed’ & re rota cvddyew (557). Otor.. 
Epiecbat, “Omov doxeiv: see 556b, c,d. (b) Vuxpov dare Novcacbal éorw, 
it is cold [so as to bathe in] for bathing (cf. Novcacbat Wuxpdrepov), Mem. 
3. 13. 3. Ildvu yap mot éuédnoev wore eidévat, IT took much pains [so as to 
know] fo learn, Cyr. 6. 3. 19 (cf. Guede adr@ eldévac Mem. 4. 7.1). *Ezrol- 
noa wore Odéar, I had made [things so result that it should seem] 7¢ seem 
(feceram ut), i. 6. 6. “HOeN Sore yiyvecOar rade, wished that this should 
be, Eur. Hipp. 1327.  (c) ‘Qs 6€ cuvréuws (or cuveddvtt, or &v Bpaxel, 
se. Moy), elzreiv, ut breviter dicam, [I say this so as to speak] to speak 
briefly, Hic. 12. 19, Ages. 5. 8, 7. 1. ‘Qs &os eiretv Pl. Gorg. 450d, ‘Qs 
oyw elrac Hdt. 2. 15, ‘Os elirety Th. 6. 30, [that I may speak the word, 
&c.] so to speak. ‘Qs puxpdy weyddy eixdoa, to compare small with great, 
Th. 4. 36. ‘Qs éue €8 weuricba, so far as I remember correctly, Hat. 2. 125. 

d. Other modes are also used after these connectives, for the sake of 
greater precision, force, actuality, or independence of expression ; while it 
is here the especial office of the Inf. to describe, characterize, or modify 
something that precedes: KaréBawov, ws él riv érepov dvaBaivew [v. 1. 
avaBater], they were descending, so as to ascend the second {that they might 
ascend], iii. 4. 25. Otrws dyvwudvws exere. ., bore. . é\lfere; are you 
so senseless, [that you hope] as to hope? Dem. 25.18. ’Apiatos ddeorhier, 
Gore piros juiv ovdels NehelWerar, A. will depart, so that no friend will be 
left ws, i. 4.5. Kpavyiv wordt érolow..., ore xal rods modeulovs 
akovey: wore. . pvyov: they made so much noise that even the enemy 
heard (characterizing the noise by showing its effect) ; [so that] and there- 
Jore they fled (narrating the result as a fact in the history) ; ii. 2. 17. 
See 655 a. 

e. “Os and @ere, originally relative adverbs of manner, often express 


with the Inf. purpose or consequence ; ws especially the former, and dere 


the latter. See examples above. 


672. f. The Inf. is also used elliptically after 4, than: Meitov 4 
pépew, Metfov 7) wore pépew, [greater than it should be for one to bear it] 
too great to bear (513 d,e). (g) It is sometimes used after aplv (rpédrepov, 
mpooev) H, priusquam, before, torepov 4, after, or 0dvw %, to anticipate, 
with a different ellipsis : "Lorepov . . 4) abrods olxicat, later than [it took 
place that they settled] their own settlement, Th. 6. 4. 


ui. Lhe Participle (Verb-Adjective). 


673. ‘The Participle is either cirewmstantial, complementary, 
definitive, or descriptive, that is, it either expresses some cir- 
cumstance or complement of the leading verb, or defines or de- 
scribes some associated person or thing. 


a. ‘One of the grammarians calls the Gree é ” [partici 
Ine of the gramm: alls the Greeks guvopéroyor” [participle- 
lovers, 658]. — Furrar. LP ‘ 


faa Te, aS we we % 
’ t 


396 SYNTAX. ‘R, XXXV. — PARTICIPLE. § 674, 


674. 1. The CrroumsTantTiaAL ParTIcIPLe is distinguished 
according to the circumstance denoted, as tome, cause, means, 
condition, concession, purpose, consequence, &e. ; and also as (a) 
preliminary, (b) contemporary, or (c) prospective, according as 
its action precedes, is simultaneous with, or follows, that of 
the leading verb. 


d. Itis often translated into Eng. by a finite verb with a connective, 
an infinitive, a circumstantial adjunct, or an adverb (658). The Greek 
usually prefers a participle and verb, where the Eng. uses two verbs 
closely joined by ‘and.’ (e) As a preliminary participle, the Aor. is 
especially used ; though, for brevity, it is often translated by the Eng. 
Pres. The wrospective participle is commonly in the Fut.; and is often 
Pac aes by the Eng. Infinitive. 

E. g., (a) MdvOav" &@av, [having gone] go and learn, Ar. Nub. 89. 
Kopos GrohaBdy Tous pevyovras, ovAdEeEas orpdrevpa, éroudpxet Mi\nror, 
C. received the exiles, and raising an army besieged M., 1.1.7. Mera dé 
Udwvra olydpevoy, after S. had gone (612), Hdt. 1. 34. (b) Ot Ae 
(Gor, who live by plundering, Cyr. 3. 2. 25. Aéyw 6é rods Evexa, Bovdd 
pevos, I say it for this reason, because I wish, Pl. Pheedo 102d. “Hre.. 
omitas tx@v xiALous, he came with 1000 hoplites, i. 2. 6 (so \aBdév Ib. 8, 
dyor, pépwr, = with). Tereutav finally (509 a) ; dpxdpevos, at first, Th. 
4. G4; émixpurrépuevos (553 ¢), or Aady (677), secretly. “O re béor mov- 
obvras pious civar, what they must [doing be] do to be friends, vi. 6. 4 
(cf. iv. 2. 3). (c)"Ereupé twa épotyra, he sent one to say (598). See 635. 

f. For participles expressing condition, see 635. Concession is some- 
times expressed by a finite verb (commonly preceded by kal et or et kat) ; 
but oftener by a participle with an appropriate particle, as kalaep, kal, 
mép, Kalror, ovdé, pndé, &c.: IIpocextvnoay Kxaimep elddres, they did him 
homage, even [knowing] though they knew, i. 6. 10. See 662a. 

g. "Kyeyv, both with and without an "Ace, ., is joined with some verbs, 
chiefly of trifling or delay, to give the idea of persistency (cf. 679 b) : 
Anpets éxwv, you tri fle [holding “on] continually, Pl. Gorg. 497 a. Ilota 
brodyuara prvdpeis éxav; what shoes do you keep trifling about [holding 
on to them]? Ib. 490¢. (h) Ma@dv or maddy, w ith tt or 6 Tt, sometimes 


forms a sarcastic or pia ing ‘why’ or ‘ because’ : Tl yap padoue’ és Tovs . 


Beovs bBpigérnv; [having learned what new notions, &e.| what possessed 
you to insult the gods? Ar. Nub. 1506. Ti wadotoar. . elfaor yuvarkiv ; 
{having met with what, &c.}] what has happened to them that they resemble 
women ? Ib. 340. Taréoa TunToOWUL, 6 TL LAPwY Goods viels oTwWS EpuTeEr, 
“because he begat,’ Pl. Euthyd. 299 a. 

i. A verb is sometimes strengthened or otherwise modified by its own 
participle : “léav eidov (660 e). ‘Yaaxodwy cxodrH bwhKovoa; im obeying, 
have I obeyed leisurely ? Cyr. 8. 4. 9. 


G75. The Circumstantial Participle is often so loosely connected 
with the leading verb, that it is said (though not in the strictest sense of 
the term, 401 N.) to be put absolute. The Greek uses this construction 
far more than the English ; though, from its fuller supply of active parti- 
ciples, less than the Latin (65 98 b). 


Rute XXXV. A PARTICIPLE AND SUBSTAN- 
TIVE are put absolute in the Geniive ; an IMPER- 


SONAL PARTICIPLE, In the Accusative: as, 


ee ae | 





§ 676. CIRCUMSTANTIAL. — ABSOLUTE. 397 


Tottrav eySévtoy, dvéfncar, his dictis, surrexerunt, these things having 
been said, they arose, iii. 3. 1. "AvéBn érl Ta dpn, obSevds KwAtovTOS, he 
ascended. the heights [no one opposing} without opposition, i. 2. 22. “HaAtov 
SivovtTos, as the sun was setting, il. 2.3. vvdd—av rT@aaTpl. ., yaue?, 
[it having seemed well to] with the approval of his father, he marries, Cyr. 
8. 5. 28. Kad&s mapacydy, od EwéByoar, they did not treat, when they 
had a fine opportunity, Th. 5. 14. “A&ndov bv, éréte . . dpaipjoerar, ‘as 
it was uncertain,’ Th. 1. 2. 2lrov dé émAeXourrdtos, oilvou 5é yd’ dogpal- 
vetOa Tapdv, . . ToAeplwy dé érropévev vy. 8. 3. 

a. The Gen. absolute may be referred to the general head of the Gen. 
of Cause (often of time, 433; also of motive, reason, &c.). (b) The tm-. 
personal participle absolute commonly retained the generic Acc., the only 
form in which its proper gender, the neuter, could be distinguished 
(571 e) ; perhaps the rather, because this participle was so often akin to 
the Ace. of time or the adverbial Acc. (c) The Gen. is here more readily 
admitted when the subject is afterwards expressed by a finite clause, than 
when it is expressed by the Inf. (571f): AndAw@évros, dre. . ra wpa- 
yuata éyévero, it having been shown that affairs depended, Th. 1. 74. 
HloayyedOevrav, dre. . mdéovow (491 ¢c) Ib. 116. ILpooray0év wo . . 
dyew, ut having been charged me to convey, Dem. 1210. 5. “Hébv fv, 
when we night live, Pl. Menex. 246d. So Adgav dé raira [sc. wolew, or 
see 502], this resolved on, iv. 1. 13. 

d. The use of the neuter Ace. as absolute is sometimes extended, 
chiefly to “cde ae not agreeing with nouns, or such as are often used 
impersonally upwiy dé ovdév, nothing having been fixed, Th. 4. 125. 
Aloxpov dv TO avTiiéyew, as denial were base, Cyr. 2. 2. 20. Adgsgavra de 
on this having been accepted, Hel, 3. 1. 19 (cf. dogdvrwr O€ Kal TOVTWY, 
Ib. 5. 2. 24). Ilpocfxov atte tod KAjpouv pépos Ise. 51. 36. (e) Other 
genders sometimes appear as if in the Acc. absolute, after ds or aorep 
(680) ; a use which seems due to a verb of thinking or speaking expressed 
or understood, or to the influence of an associate construction : ‘Qs weév 
oTpaTnyycovTa ene. ., NeyéTw, let him speak [of me as to take], as if I 
were to take command (659c; cf. 680c). “AdeXPdv duedodow, worep Ex 
Toray ev yryvopévous plrovs, they neglect brothers, as = Sriends came 
From Sellow-citizens [as thinking them to come], Mem. 2. 3. 3. Eéyero 
dé wpos Tovs Yeovs . ., ws Tovs Geos (repeated) eiddras, he prayed to the 
gods, as knowing, Ib. 1. 3. 2. 

f. The Participle sometimes appears as if absolute in the Nom. or Dat., 
through anacoluthon or other constructions already mentioned: Ae&@ 
Képa tryoupevy, with the right wing leading (467), Th. 2. 90. Tlepudpre be 
7r@ éviavT@ (469) Hel. 3. 2. 25. See 402, 504b. (g) In Modern Greek, 
as in English, the Nom. is the common case for the participle absolute. 


676. a. In the absolute construction, the substantive is sometimes 
omitted, and sometimes, though less frequently, the Part. of the substan- 
tive verb (cf. the rare omission in Latin of the former, and the regular 
omission of the latter) : Ipotévrwy (sc. atrav], épaivero txua, as they were 
advancing, tracks appeared, i. 6.1. Eimrov, épwrijcavtos [sc. adrot], when 
he asked, they replied, iv. 8. 5. Otrw & éxdvrwv [sc. rpayudrwv, 577 cl, 
affairs standing thus, iii. 2.10. “Lovros rodd@ (sc. Tod Oe0d, 571e, 466. 1.], 
in a heavy rain, Hel. 1. 1.16. “Axovros Bacidéws [sc. dvros], rege invito, 
the king [being] wnwilling, 1. 1.19. “Tonynrod twos, some one being guide, 
Soph. O. T. 1260. ‘Qs éuod pdvys wédas Id. O. C. 83. 

b. Absolute and connected constructions of the Part. are, in various 
ways, interchanged and mixed ; the former giving more prominence to 


398 SYNTAX, — PARTICIPLE COMPLEMENTARY. ~  § 676. 


the Part., and sometimes arising from a change of subject ; the latter 
showing more clearly the relation of the Part. to the rest of the sentence: 
AtaBatvdytewy [Sc. adray] wévrot, 6 Tots avtrots érepdvn [= dtaBaivovow 
avtois|, as they were crossing, Glus appeared to them, li. 4. 24. Ad hpas, 
év Td&e Te idvtov (sc. Hudr], by us, while marching i order, v. 8. 13. 
Ilaperkevdfovro, ws ravTn mpocrdvTos Kal SeEdpevor, they prepared for his 
coming that way and for receiving him (680), 1. 10. 6. See vii. 1. 27. 

677. 2. The CompLeMENTARY ParTICIPLE is used with 
verbs of sensation, of mental state and action, of showing and 
informing, of appearance and discovery, of concealment and 
chance, of conduct and success, of permission and endurance, of 
commencement and continuance, of weariness and cessation, of 
anticipation and omission, Xe. 


It may agree with (a) the subject or (b) an adjunct of the leading verb, 
or (c) may be used impersonally ; and (d) is sometimes understood (chiefly 
ov). It is (e) variously translated, sometimes even by an independent 
verb (as expressing the chief idea), while its leading verb is translated by 
an adverb or circumstantial adjunct. E. g., 

(a) AcarpiBovor pederaoar, they continue practising, Cyr. 1. 2. 6. 
*"Eratcavro wrodenotvres, ceascd warring, vi. 1. 28. “Héovrar mparrovres, 
delight in doing, Mem. 2. 1. 33. “Adtxetre . &pyovtes, you do wrong in 
beginning, Th. 1. 53. ’EyOpds @v xupe?t, happens to be a foe, Eur. Ale. 954. 
Acigtw . . copds yeyas, I will show that I have been wise, Id. Med. 548. 
"Hider HSvxnpéevyn Ib. 26. “Ice pévror dvdnros av, know that you are 
senseless, ii. 1. 18. Sensit delapsus, Virg. ‘‘And knew not eating 
death,” Milt. (b) ‘OpGuev roddods mrpocbéovtas, we see many running 
wp, V. 7. 21. “Hrovoe KOpov év Katcxia dvra, he heard [of C. being] that 
C. was in C., i. 4.5. Ovdx érerpéver mapaBalvovor, will not permit them 
to transgress, Isoc. 268e. (c) “Ewpa melovos évdéov, he saw [there being 
need] that there was need of more, vi. 1. 31. Eidévat cvvoteoy, to know 
that it would be advantageous, Dem. 55. 2. (d) Eas toh [se. &v], know 
that you are safe, Soph. O. C. 1210. Le SyrwWocw xaxdy (sc. dvra], ‘prove 
you [to be] vile,’ Ib. 788. Méysoros rvyxaver Id. El. 46. (e) See f.. 

f. A few verbs, as AavOdve fv escape notice, elude, Bava anticipate, 
dviw despatch, Svareltrw leave an interval, may either take complementary 
participles, or be themselves used as circumstantial participles ; and Aay- 
Qdve may express concealment either from others or from one’s self, 
according to its object expressed or understood : Aa@ety airdv dwrehOwr, 
[to elude him departing] to depart without his knowledge, i. 3.17.  Tpe- 
pouevov éavOavev, was secretly maintained, i. 1. 98. “Omws wh AdOys 
ceauTov ayvoay, that you may not be unconsciously ignorant, Mem. 3. 5. 
23. “EddvOave Bioxwr, he was fostering unawares, Hdt. 1. 44. “Orws uh 
pbdowor. . ol Kidtxes katadaBédrres, that the Cilicians might not anticipate 
them tin taking possession, i. 3.14. Ovx dv POdvos . . éyor, you cannot 
tell me too soon, i. e. tell me at once, Mem. 2. 3. 11. Ovx. &pOacav rvGod- 
pevor. ., Kal. . Axov, they no sooner heard than they came, Isoc. 58 b. 
Kv\éWar. . Aaddvras kal dprdcat Pbdcavras, to seize wnobserved and take by 
surprise, iv. 6.11. “Avve mpdtrwr, make haste to do, Ar. Pl. 413. “Awi- 
oas Tpéxe (509 ce) Ib. 229. 

g. The Complementary Part. sometimes occurs with an impersonal ex- 
pression, or with an adjective and verb supplying the place of a simple 
verb. When thus connected, the real subject of the sentence is some- 
times implied in the Part.: Tlo\euotow dpevov tora, it will be better for 


ae 


Soi. DEFINITIVE. WITH EliLly, &C. 399 


them [warring] to go to war, Th. 1. 118. ‘“Eymol mpétrou av udduora émipe- 
Aouévy, it would become me most of all to attend, GEc. 4.1. Meords iv 
Quuovpmevos, I was sated with passion, Soph. O. C. 768. Aros Fv aviw- 
ae (573 .c). ILoAdds Fv Aicoduevos, he was [much] carnest wn besceching, 
Hdt. 9. 91 


678. 3. The Derinitive ParticipLe is equivalent to a 
relative pronoun and jinite verb, and is most frequently trans- 
lated by these. It is often used substantively, and may not 
unfrequently be translated by a noun. (a) It occurs chiefly 
with the article (the proper sign of this use, 520); but (b) 
sometimes without it, if the class only is defined. E. g., 


(a) “O Hynodpevos ovdels éorar, there will be no one who will guide us, 
4. 0, Oi AUT OMOAHTAVT ES, the deserters (cf. ot torepov ér7jpOnoar), i. rd 
13. Tots yewayévors (cf. rots yovetor), the parents, Apol. 20. Tov tepdr 
kahovpevov mddenov, the so-called Sacred War. Th. 1.112. Tov &drwv 
Tov Bovdduevov, of the rest [him that] any one that wished, i. 3. 9. 
(bh) “Aravra yap TroApaor dew palverar, ‘appear fearful to the venturous,’ 
Eur. Ph. 270. Ilerov0évac . . eis BAABnv épov, to have suffered what 
tends to harm, Soph. O. T. 516. (b, a) Acagéper 5¢ maumodv padov wh 
pabivros, Kal 6 yuuvacduevos TOD wh yeyumvacudvov Pl. Leg. 795 b. See 
607 a, 520a, 527. 

“Qy or yevopevos definitive is often omitted. See 526. (d) The 
Part. used substantively sometimes takes the Gen. ora possessive ¢ adjec- 
tive, instead of the proper case of the verb (chiefly in poetry) : “O 7° éxe(- 
vov [= éxeivov] rexav, his father, Eur. El. 335. Tis épiis xexrnuévys 
(506 d). 

e. A DESCRIPTIVE PARTICIPLE is sometimes joined with ett: * 
picews icxiv Syraoas, he was one who exhibited strength of genius, Th i 
138. 

679. The Participle with such verbs as ciui, yiyvoua, eyo, 
epxopar, oixoua, &e., often takes the place of a simple verb, 
either to supply some deficiency in inflection, or for the sake 
of more definite, emphatic, or metrical expression : 

a.) With Substantive Verbs: *Hv .. omev8ov [= éorevier], he was 
seeking, Bur. Hee. 122. Zavra eve édy etvar, to permit me to live, vii. 6. 
30. Elm éxwv iv. 4.18. Mi apodots judas yévyn, do not abandon us, 
Soph. Aj. 1067. Ov ciwrjcas goer; Silence, at once and forever! (597, 
592s) Id. O. T. 1146. Ipérwy épus 1b. 9. (a) The substantive verb is. 
sometimes omitted: Aedoyuév [sc. éoriv], . . rivde xatrOavetvy, ‘it is de- 
cided,’ Soph. Ant. 576. (B) The Perf. Part. with eipt is especially com- 
mon, either to supply the deficiencies in the inflection of the complete 
tenses (300 b, 317s), or to direct the attention more expressly to the 
state consequent upon an action. “Hoav éxremruxéres, were fallen, il. 3. 
3H *Hy be ovdév mremrovOds vi. 1. 6. "Hy d€ wxodounuévor ii. 4. 12. 

b.) “Exo commonly gives or strengthens the idea of possession, continu- 
ance, or persistency (holding on ; ef. “674 @ ¢); and is most frequent with 
the Aor. act. part., and in the dramatists (cf. the auxiliary have, Fr. avoir, 
Germ. haben, &c.): Tora XPLAT a. éx owev SUPT eh we have [many 
things, having seized them] seized many things, i. 3. 14. “A viv karaorpe- 
Wapevos exes, which you now hold by conquest, vii. 7. 27. "Ariudoas exe, 
he has persistently dishonored, Soph. Ant. 22. Kypvéavr’ éxew Ib. 3%. 


400 SYNTAX. R. X., Y.— PARTICIPLE, VERBAL. § 679, 


c.) "Epxopat with the Fut. Part. forms a more immediate Future. 
"Epxouat amrodavotpmevos vurt, I am going to die now, Pl. Theag. 129 a. 


d.) The Part. of a verb of motion with otxopat is a stronger form of 
expression for the simple verb. “Quxero dacav vuxrés, he [departed going 
off] went off in the night, ili. 3.5. *Quyero dredavvwv, rode off, li. 4. 24.” 
So Otxerat Gave Soph. Ph. 414 ; BA devywr, he fled, B. 665. 

e. We sometimes even find two participles joined : Aveomappévous dvras 
"AOnvalwy Tovs Wdovs €diwxor, * being dispersed,’ Hel. 1. 2. 2. 


680. Rure X. A ParTIcIPLeE is often preceded by as or 
éonep, chiefly to mark it as subjective ; 


That is, as expressing the view, opinion, feeling, intention, or statement 
of some one,whether in accordance with or contrary to fact. The Part. 
thus construed may be either (a) dependent or (b) absolute. (ce) It often 
supplies the place of a finite verb or Inf.; and is sometimes complementary 
in force, though circumstantial in form (with words of thinking, saying, 
“AO Re Ua ae 

(a) Ilepexréa év airia efyov as meloavra, they blamed P. as having per- 
suaded [because, as they complained, he had persuaded], Th. 2. 59. ZvA- 
AauBdver Kopov as aroxrevav (598 b). (b) Iapyyyerte . ., as értBovded- 
ovtos Tircadépvous, he gave command, [as he would, T. plotting] as if 7. 
were plotting, i. e. on the ground alleged (whether truly or not), that T. 
was plotting, i. 1. 6. KaraxelueOa, domep éEdv, we lie, as if it were per- 
mitted, iii. 1.14. (c) ‘Os pndev 867’ toc pe, [know me as knowing] de. 
assured that I know nothing, Soph. -Ph. 253. ‘Os twodépov dyros, . . 
amayyed@, I shall report [as I should, war existing] that there is war, ii. 
1. 21. ‘Qs éuo6 ofv iévros, .. otTw Thy yvdunv Exere [so have your opinion, 
as if I were going] be asswred that I shall go, i. 3. 6. “H 6é yeu hr, ws 

. EAdvra [sc. Ta dpuara], the plan was that they should drive (675 d), i. 
8.10. ’Avéxparyor ws ovdév déov vi. 4. 22. 


G8L. So the particles &re, otov, ota, Sore (Ion.), may precede the 
Part., especially in presenting a cause or other circumstance as actual : 
Kipos, dre mats dv. ., Hder0, C., as [he naturally would be] being a boy, 
was pleased, Cyr. 1. 3. 3. Ota 5y mats pirdcropyos av pice, Howdsero 
Ib. 2. “EXevOepiiraros, dre cal THs pioews brapxovons, most noble, as his 
nature also was, Cyr. 6. 4. 4. 


ut. Verbal in -réos (Lat. -ndus). 


682. The passive verbal in -réos, expressing obligation or neces- 
sity, is often used impersonally, in the neut. sing. or plur., with éori- 
-and from some verbs it can be only so used (571 e, 589; cf Lat. 
-dum est). In this use, it is equivalent to the Inf. act. or mid. with 
det Or xpn: Skemréov eoriv [= oxéntecOa dei], considerandum est, i is 
io be considered [= we ought to consider]. Seei.3. 11. "EdéKet dt@x- 
Téov eva, it seemed that they must pursue, iii. 3, 8. Hence it imitates 
this Inf. in two ways, as follows: 





Rute Y. Impersonal verbals in -réov, or -réa, (a) govern the 
same cases as the verbs from which they are derived; and (b) 
have sometimes the agent in the dec., instead of the Dat. (458): 


§ 685. INTERJECTION. ADVERB. R. XXXVI. 401 


(a) ‘Qs wevoréov etn KXedpya, that they must obey Clearchus (455 g), i. 
6.8. Idvra ronréov, we nust do all things (572), ili. 1. 18 (cf. rdvra 
awownréa § 458). Ovs ov mapadoréa Tots *AOnvalors éoriv, whom we must 
not give up to the Athenians, Th. 1. 86. Tvvatkds ovdauds noonréa (408), 
Soph. Ant. 678.~ (b) KaraBaréov obv év wéper Exaortov, cach one therefore 
must descend in turn, Pl. Rep. 520 d. 

c. This verbal is chiefly Attic, belonging especially to the familiar 
style. It is found in Herodotus, but not in Homer. 


683. Constructions are sometimes blended ; as, (a) The émpersonal 
with the personal construction of the verbal: Tas tro8éoes . . émirxeTTrTéat 
[for ras brobéces émioxerrréoy, or ai brobécas éemicxerréat], the positions 
must be examined, P|. Pheedo 107b. (b) The Dat. of the agent with the | 
Acc.: “Hpiv vevoréov. . édmrlfovtas, we must swim, hoping, Pl. Rep. 453 d. 
(c) The verbal with the Jnf.: Eriduuias phys od Kokacréov, . . ewvTa dé 
avras. . érowupatey (sc. dey], you say that one should not repress his desires, 
but, indulging them, provide, Pl. Gorg. 492d. 


Cd Ie ad Saad bal Og Gia 
SYNTAX OF THE PARTICLE. 


684. The parrticrs, in its full extent, includes the Adverb, 
Preposition, Conjunction, and Interjection. 


a. The name is specially given to short and familiar words of these 
classes, chiefly characteristic adverbs and conjunctions (66). It has been 
well said by Dr. Kendrick, that ‘‘an exact knowledge of the particles is 
one of the highest, as well as most indispensable marks of Greek scholar- 
ship”; but the details of their use obviously belong to lexicography 
rather than grammar. In some cases, where their force is readily per- 
ceived, or at least felt, they cannot be well translated into another lan- 
guage, from the want of corresponding particles. 

b. The INTERJECTION is independent of grammatical construction. 
But, as expressing pleaswre or pain (and thus, indirectly, good or evil), 
surprise, &c., or as a sign of address or exclamation (65 ¢), it may itself 
be modified by a Gen. or Dat. (429e, 453), or may introduce a Nom., 
Acc., or Voc. (401 b, 476a, 484). Among the interjections, some of 
which are common to the Greek with our own and other languages, are 
di, a, &, €, 5, &, &, al, ol, wd, dd, lw, iad, lov, ela eja, ped, wd7, evot evoe, 
oval Ve, Tamat pape, arrarai, drorot, €hened. 

c. The other particles are construed as follows. 


A. THE ADVERB. 


685. Rute XXXVI. ApveRBs modify sen- 
tences, phrases, and words ; chiefly verbs, adjectives, 
and other adverbs : as, 

REV. GR. Zo 


402 SYNTAX. —— ADVERBS. — NEGATIVE. § 685. 


TIdAw ipwrncer, again he asked, i. 6. 8. "Op0ia toyupas, very steep, 
i. 2. 21. “Huednuévws paddov, more negligently, i. 7. 19. 

a. If an adverb proper modifies any other part of speech, it is through 
the included idea of a verb, adjective, or adverb: Ts. . mwdAw Kara- 
Bdoews, the descent back, Th. 7. 44 (karaBaivw, to descend). “Eyrecpia 
padrov, through better acquaintance, Ib. (Eurerpos, acquainted). Thy od 
mepiteixiaw, the not blockading, Th. 3. 95, 

b. An adverb modifying a sentence or phrase is usually parsed as 
modifying the verb or leading word of the sentence or phrase ; while it 
may also give a special emphasis or bear a special relation to some other 
word (57d, 59d): ‘Hypets ye vexQuev, we at least are victorious, ii. 1. 4. 
*Apiaios, . . Kal ovTOS .. Tempra, Ariwus, even HE attempts, ili. 2. 5. 
"Kyo piv. . érawGi. 4.16. Ipocextvnoav katrep etddres (674 f). 

c. Some classes of adverbs, specially termed particles, are chiefly CHAR- 
ACTERISTIC in their use (684 a) : as, 

Negative ov, uy, not (regularly preceding the words which they modi- 
fy) ; Interrogative, Direct dpa, H, ov, wy, wav, Indirect et, dpa, Ep. H, a, 
whether, un whether not, Alternative morepov.. % utrum..an, ed. . %, 
eire. . elre, Ep. 7. . H, whether. . or; Contingent dy, xé (618s) ; Con- 
firmative 67 (389d), djra, d7j0ev, dal, H, unv, rol (271), Ep. Onv, indeed, 
truly, surely, forsooth, vat, v7}, wa (476d) ; Emphatic or Intensive yé, yoov 
(yé obv), wép (389), Kat even, obdé, undé, not even; Additive Kai also, ré et 
(889 j) ; Illative, or Inferential, ody (389g), dpa (Ep. fd, dp, 103 c, 136) 
accordingly, then, viv, Ep. vt, now, yap (yé dp) ; Distinctive pueév on the one 
hand, 6é on the other hand. (dad) For some of the chief divisions of ad- 
verbs, see 55, 53 ; for special uses of pronominal adverbs, 535s. 


686. Necative Particues. The general rule for the use 
of ov and yy, whether simple or in composition, is this : — 

Negation, as desired, feared, or assumed, uses pn; but other- 
wise, ov. Hence, 

a. The Subjunctive and Imperative take pi; but (b) the Indicative 
and Optative, only in forms of wishing (638, 648 d), and in final and con- 
ditional clauses (including those in 641, 642). (ce) The Infinitive usually 
takes ph, except in Indirect Discourse ; and (d) the Participle, ov, except 
when it has the office of a conditional or indefinite relative clause (635, 641). 
(ec) So where a participial or infinitive idea is involved. (a) Mi mowqogs, 
Myo’ émixevOe (628¢). (b) Otr av Buvatyny, war émoratpny eye, 
I could not, and may I never be able to say, Soph. Ant. 686. Ei wh ratra 
[€or], ode tdde, if that is not, neither is this, Pl. Pheedo 76e. “A mh 
olSa, ovdé olopar eidévar, what I do not know, I do not think I know, P1. 
Apol. 21d. See 624s, 631s. (c) My Kdérrew, not to steal, Cyr. 1. 2. 2. 
Ov pepvacbal cé pacw, they say that you will not remember (609), i. 7. 5. 
(1) My yeyvopévev rv lep&v, tf the sacrifices were adverse, vi. 4.19. Ta 
BY SvtTa ws ovk SyTa, [to represent] whatever is not as not existing, iv. 4. 
15. (e) Otro: pita ra ph Hira [se. dvra], the displeasing cannot be pleas- 
ing, Eur. Tro. 466. ‘H ph ‘urepia, [not to be experienced] lack of ex- 
perience, Ar. Eccl. 115. Cf. § 685a. 

f. The Epic Subj. for the Fut. ind. naturally takes od (617 b). 

g. After et whether, and in dependent sentences of the form ‘‘ whether 

. or not,” or ‘what. . and whatnot,” both od and ph are used : DxorG- 
prev el huiv mpérer 7) ov, let us consider whether it befits us or not, Pl. Rep. 
551d. Ei yalpecs } pq Pl. Phil. 21b. Acayryrwoxovew, & Te Stvavrat & TE 
pH, they distinguish what they can do and what not, Mem. 4. 2. 26. 


§ 688. INTERROGATIVE. PREPOSITION. RB, XXXVII. 403 


h. After pH, a second negation in the same clause is usually expressed 
by od; and after ov, by pH: Addouxa pr odk exw, I fear lest I may not 
have,i. 7.7. Ovd pi Aadjoes; (597 e.) See 627. 

i. Ov forms combinations with single words (akin to composition), in 
which it may remain where general rules require 44. These often belong 
to the figure Litotes, so prevalent in Greek (70m, cf. 654). EH. g., od 
pn I {do not say] deny (662b), ox édw I forbid, ody Focov [not less] 
more, ov TodXol few, ob cards base, ox Hdéws disagreeably: Hi. . od« eds 
Soph. Aj. 1131. Ei 6% rou od dwoe 2. 296. “Hay . . od pijre Pl. Apol. 25b. 

k. Some other cases occur in which ov appears to be used for pm, 
chiefly to negative a single word, or for stronger or more positive expres- 
sion (especially in contrast); or (1) ph for od, chiefly on account of 
the general character of the sentence, or (m) for the sake of weaker or 
less positive expression: (k) Ziv dé otk dvOpairov Biov, dddAd Tivos wed- 
peovos, to live the life not of a man, but of some mollusk, Pl. Phil. 21 ce. 
(1) "Hav . . ato@y ceavrov uit) elddra, if you perceive yourself ignorant, 
Mem. 3. 5. 23. (in) Cf. 608 a, 654, 

n. Ov is the No of fact; wh, of feeling and conception; or, in philo- 
sophical language, od is the objective, and ph the swhjective negative. ‘‘Od 
negat rem ipsam; p14, cogitationem rei.” — Hermann. For od and pH as 
interrogative particles, see 687. 


687. Inrerrocative Parricres. a. The chief are doa (Post- 
Homeric, a stronger form of &pa, accordingly) and 7 (indeed). (b) These 
do not themselves indicate the answer expected ; while dpa od (or simply 
ov) implies that an answer is expected in the affirmative, but dpa pH 
(or } pH, or simply pq, or pov contracted from py ody), in the negative : 
*Ap ovx dv éml wav €\Oa; would he not resort to every means? iii. 1. 18. 
M7 cor doxotuey ; [we do not seem to you, do we?] do we seem to you? 
Misch. Per. 344. (c) Hence ovkotv, therefore, then, negative interrogation 
passing into assertion : Ovxotv weratcouat, [shall I not, then, cease ?] J 
shall cease, then. Soph. Ant. 91. Ovxotv ixavs éyérw Pl. Pheedr. 274 b. 
Ovxotv, dowbtless, Ar. Pax 394. 


B. Tue PREPOSITION. 


688. Rute XXXVII. PREPOSITIONS govern 
adjuncts, and mark their relations (58 c): as, 


‘Qpparo ard Vdpdewv, al éEedavver Sra rijs Avdlas . . él rdv Matavdpor, 
he set out from Sardis, and marches through L. to the Meander, i. 2. 5. 

a. More particularly, dvri, ad, é€, and apé govern the Genitive; 
év and avy, the Dative; ava and eis, the Accusative ; dui, did, 
katd, petd, and imep, the Genitive and Accusative ; émi, mapa, 
wept, mpds, and ind, the Genitive, Dative, and Accusative. 

b. The Dative sometimes follows dpot, dvd, and perd in the poets ; 
and Gut even in prose, chiefly Ionic: "Audi te woven, about music, 
Hdt. 6. 129; dudi wdevpais Asch. Pr. 71. “Ava re vavel, [up] in ships, 
Eur. Iph. A. 754. Mera mpwérowt, among the first, A. 64. 

ce. The eighteen words above mentioned (with their euphonic, poetic, * 
and dialectic forms, as é« for é& 165, Ev for ovv, 170, évt for év, 
awpott and tort for rpés, 136 b, brat for 7d, 136) are all which are com- 


Erie gee ae ee See 


404 SYNTAX. R. XXXVII. — PREPOSITION. § 688. 


monly termed prepositions in Greek (from the use in 387), though other 
words may have a prepositional force (703a). (d) “Ev and pod, by the 
addition of s (expressing motion or action, cf. 273 b), become (évs, ef. 156, 
154) eis or és, and ampds (689 a, i). His prevails in Att. prose, except 
Thue.; but és in Ion. and Dor.; while the poets may choose according to 
the metre. 

e. To the prepositions governing the Acc., must be added the Ep. suffix ~ 
-5e, fo (cf. 252, 3882): OvAuprdvde, to Olympus, “Ahade, A. 425, 308 (cf. wrpds 
“Odvuptrov 420). “Aidésde [= els "Aidos Sduov, 438 a] H. 330. It is some- 
times used pleonastically : “Ovde dduovde, to his house, a. 88. His ddade, 
tnto the sea, x. 351. For @s, see 711e. 


689. The prepositions have primary reference to the rela- 
tions of place, and are used to express other relations by reason 
of some analogy, either real or fancied (many similar extensions 
of use appearing in our own and other languages). The use 
of the different cases with prepositions may be commonly re- 
ferred with ease to familiar principles in the doctrine of cases. 


E. g., 


1. Puacre. Some prepositions merely show what place is referred to, 
while the relation to this place is marked by the case employed ; so that 
the same preposition may be used with different cases. From the place 
is expressed by the Gen.; to (or, with like sense, to) the place, by the. 
Acc.; in or at the place by the Dat., or sometimes the Gen.; through the 
place, commonly by the Ace. Cf. 398, 433, 470a, e. The following are 
the chief distinctions of PLACE denoted by prepositions, with modes of 
notation : 

a. Within. ’Eyv, Lat. in with Abl., [1N the space within] in: év Majre, 
in M.,i.1. 7. His, Lat. % with Acc., [1NTo the space within] into. es 
medlov, into a plain, i. 2. 22. *HE, ex, [FRoM within] owt of: &« rhs xo- 
pas, out of the land, i. 2.1. Avd, akin to d¥vo and Lat. dis-, [THROUGH the 
space within, dividing it in two] through: with Acc. poet.; dia Koya, 
through the wave, Asch. Sup. 15: commonly with Gen.: dca Ppvylas, [IN 
a line dividing] through Phrygia, i. 2. 6; d¢ é\docovos, [through less] at 
less distance, Th. 3. 51. 

b. With. by cum [IN the place with] with: ovv byuiv, with you, i. 3. 6. 
*Amé ab, [From the place with] from: dm d&dd\prwv, from each other, 1. 8. 
10 ; €Ojpevev awd inmov, he hunted [from a horse] on horseback, 1. 2. 7. 
[‘Qs, to: ws Baotdéa, to the king, i. 2. 4. See 711 ¢.] 

ce. Amid, among, hence with: Mera, akin to wéoos medius, and Germ. 
mit: vexp&v yerd, [IN the midst of ] among the dead, Eur. Hee. 209; pera 
Tp@as, into the midst of the Trojans, A. 460; wer tyra Batve, he went [to 
be among] after, or followed the footsteps, y. 30. Mera mpwrosot (688 b). 

d. Beside. Tlapa uev Kipov, [rrom beside] from Cyrus, i. 9. 29; mapa 
Kipa, [ar the side of] with C., i. 4. 3; mapa Kipov, [ro the side of] to C., 
Ib.; mapa yiv, [rHRouGH the space beside] along the shore, vi. 2. 1; map 
olxiay, [beside] past a house, vii. 4. 18. Seei. 3. 7. 

e. About. “Apel, akin to dudw and Lat. ambo, amb-, on both sides of, 
hence, on different sides of, about: dudpt ra dpa, [THROUGH the region on 
oth sides of] about the borders, Cyr. 2. 4. 16; dul. . wddos, ris the 
region] about the city, Hdt. 8. 104; dudpt mdevpats Aisch. Pr. 71 (Gen. 
and Dat. chiefly poet. and lon., 688b). See 527 a. 

f. Around. ept, akin to Lat. per: wept 7d orparéredov, [THROUGH 


§ 691. TIME, STATE. AQ5 


the eireuit] around the camp, v. 1. 9; ep rots crépvos, around the breast 
(Dat. esp. of parts of the body, weapons, &c.), vil. 4. 4; mept ozeious, 
around the cave, e. 68 (simple Gen. of place poet. and rare). 

g. On, upon, or against (as in cases of resting, leaning, pressing, &c., on 
or against), “Hit rod trmov, [IN a position] on his horse, iii. 4. 49 ; él 
TH Oardrry, upon [by] the sea, i. 4. 1 (the Gen. with éé is the case of 
closer relation, though the distinction does not always appear ; cf. él r@ 

. ToTau@ i. 3. 20, érl Tod woramod iv. 3. 28); dvaBas ep trmov, mounting 
[To a position] on horseback iv. 7. 24; ért @ddarrav, to the seaside, iv. 8. 
22 ; émt Baoiréa lévat, to march [upon] against the king, i. 3. 1. 

h. Over against. *Avrt, akin to Lat. ante, very rare in its local sense : 
dv0’ &v, [IN a position] against [behind] which, iv. 7. 6. 

i. Before. IIpé pre, pro: mpd roday, [tN the way] before the feet, iv. 
6. 12. To mark more active relations, and the idea of fronting, s is added 
to mpd (688d): dyer mpds Bacidéa, he is leading [To a position fronting] 
against the king, i. 3. 21; mpds Neuwéas, [IN the direction fronting] towards 
Nemea, Th. 5. 59; mpds BaBvdrdn, in front of Babylon, Cyr. 7. 5, 13 mpos 
Tots ayyéAots, face to face with the messengers, i. 3. 4. 

j. Over, above. ‘Yamép super: brép.. wérpas, from above the rock, iv. 
7. 4; brép xepadfs, over head, Ages. 2.20; brép rot Ndqou, [over] beyond 
the hill, i. 10. 143 pimréovar brep tiv Guov, they throw it [TO a place over 
and beyond] over the shoulder, Hdt. 4. 188 (the local Acc. rare in Attic). 

k. Under, beneath. ‘Yad sub: bd fiyou, brd audéns, from under the 
yoke, 5, 39; vi. 4. 22; bd yijs, [IN the region] under the earth, Pl. 
Pheedr. 249a ; bd rots didpots, [IN the space] wnder the seats, i. 8. 10 ; 
eiu bd yatav, I shall go [v0 the region] beneath the earth, XZ. 333. 

1. Up. “Ava .. péd\abpov, up to the roof, x. 239; dva Ta bpn, wp 
through the mountains, il. 5. 16; ava wev Tov woraudy, up [along] the 
river, Hdt. 2. 96; ava oxynrrpy, on a sceptre, A. 15 (688 b). 

m. Down. Kara rijs rérpas, down from the rock, iv. 2.17; xara yis, 
[down From] under the earth, vii. 1. 30; xa’ abrov. . NMyxas orjoarte, 
having fixed their lances [down at, 430] against each other, Soph, Ant. 
145 ; xara ptov, down [along] stream, Hdt. 2. 96; card rhv dddv, along 
the way, iv. 2.16; xara Bugdyriov, [along by] near or about Byzantium, 
vii. 2.1; xara viv, by land, v. 4. 1. 


690. 2. Tims. ’Ev Tpioly jucpacs, in three days, iv. 8. 8; év tals 
orovoais, during the truce, iii. 1.1; év rovrw, at this time, i. 8.12. ILapa 
tov Blov, [alongside of | during life, Pl. Leg. 733a. Karta mor, [along] 
during the voyage, Th. 3. 32. Tév xa’ éavrovs, of [those alongside of 
themselves] the men of their time, Mem. 3. 5.10. Ed’ fudy, in our time, 
i. 9.12; éml rovrw, after him, iii. 2. 4. Ava vuxrds (poet. vixra), ava 
vixta, through the night, iv. 6. 22, mw. 284; dt éréwy etxoor, [with an 
interval extending through] after 20 years, Hdt. 6.118. ’“Apod (rept) 
deinv, about evening, ii. 2.14, Th. 4. 69. Nvx@’ varo, sub noctem, at 
nightfall, X. 102 (time, like the orbs that measure it, being conceived 
of as passing over us). IIpd rijs udyns, before the battle, i. 7.13. Mera 
tiv paxny, after the battle, Ib.; wed’ quépay, [after daybreak] by day, iv. 
6.12. "Ard yeveds, from birth, ii. 6. 30. "HE qudpys és hudpny, de die 
in diem, from day to day, Hdt. 9. 8; éx 6é rot dpicrov, [from] after break- 
fast, iv. 6. 21; els rnv éorépay, [into the] at evening, ii. 1. 3. 


691. 3. Srarr. ’Ev rodduw, eis rddewor, ex rodduov, in (into, out 
of ) a state of war, vi. 1. 29; év dpyy, in anger, Th. 2. 21; év éaura, self- 


a7 
possessed, i. 5. 17; €v euol, in my power, Dem, 292. 22; é& icov, [from 


er, JE By i | 
> 


406 SYNTAX. — USES OF THE PREPOSITION. § 691. 


equal ground] on an equality, iil. 4. 47. “Emi ro dbehpd, dependent upon 
his brother, i. 1. 43; 76 émi rotrw, so far as rests on him, vi. 6. 23; é@ 
uty, in our power, v. 5. 20. “Ya6 co, under your power, vii. 7. 32; 
ind opas moicba, to bring under them, Th. 4. 60. “Apel (arepl) Pd8y, 
[about] a fear, Eur. Or. 825; dAisch. Ch. 35. 


692. 4. Comparison. IIpé ye dAdwv, before [more than] others, Pl. 
Menex. 249e. ‘Yaép édmida, above hope, Soph. Ant. 366; vtmép aicar, 
beyond reason, 1. 59. Tlept mdvrwv, superior to all, A. 287 (the greater 
surrounding the less); wept wdelorov, of the utmost importance, 1. 9. 7. 
IIpére xal 8a rdvrwv, shone [through] among all, M. 104. Ilapa ra d\ha 
gga, [by the side of] in comparison with the other animals, Mem. 1. 4. 14; 
map odlyov, of small account, vi. 6. 11. ILpds 7d xdéos adrdy, [brought 
before] in comparison with their fame, Th. 1.10. See § 511a. 

5. Numper, ADDITION, DisTRIBUTION. “Apt rods ducxcdlous (531 a). 
Tlept €Bdoujxovra, about 70, Th. 1. 54. Kata revrijxovra, [according to] 
about 50, Hdt. 6. 79. His xeNovus, to the number of 1,000, i. 8. 5. “Yarép 
Tecoepaxovra dvdpas, above 40 men, Hdt. 5. 64. “Hart rerrdpwy, [the line 
of battle resting on four ranks] four deep, i. 2.15; dvos ert ddvy, mur- 
der upon murder, Eur. Iph. T. 197. ILpds rovrows, in addition to these, 
iii. 4. 13. *Avd éxardv, [according to o7 by the hundred] a hundred each, 
iii. 4.21. Kar’ émavrov, [by the year] yearly, iii. 2. 12; nad’ va, one 
by one, 4. 7. 8; xara @6vn, by nations, i. 8. 9. 


693. 6. Oricrn, Source, MATERIAL, &c. Teyords dard Aapapdrou, 
sprung from D., ii. 1. 3. Ilpds warpés, [from the father] on the father's 
side, Isoc. 835c. ®&s.. €« Ards, a light from Jove, iii. 1. 12; éx EdNwr, 
[out of] of wood, Hdt. 1.194. Aéirety wapad,rovrov, to ask from him, i. 3. 
16. “Odlyor dard ody, few [from] of many, Th. 1.110. Oi. . é« ray 
toreutwy, those [out] of the enemy, i. 7. 18. 

7. Prorectron (defenders stand before, over, around). MdxecOa.. 
mpd yuvakev, to fight [before] for their wives, 0. 56; mpd tua, in your 
behalf, vii. 6. 27. Cf. Eng. fore and for. Maxduevor brrép Kupou, fighting 
[over] in defence of C., i. 9. 81. “Apdvovrat amept réxvav, fight for their 
young, M. 170. “Eydé re trtp LevHou, I in behalf of Seuthes, vii. 7. 3. 


694. 8. Cavsn, Morrvn, Exp, Atm. "Amd rovrov, [from] on ac- 
count of this, Hdt. 2. 42. "HE browias, [out of] from suspicion, ii. 5. 5. 
Ava ricrews, through confidence, iii. 2. 8. Xapas vo, [under the in- 
fluence of] from joy, Aisch. Ag. 541. Atd xatua, [through] by reason of 
the heat, i. 7.6; d¢ tuds, through our agency, vii. 7. 7. Tlept vixys, 
[about] for victory, i. 5. 8. “Emdwov él Xiov, sailed [upon] for Chios 
(430), Hdt. 1. 164; émt @avdrw, for death, v. 7. 34; él delav, for plun- 
der, v. 1. 8. I[\éwy . . peta xadkdv, sailing [after] in quest of copper, 
a. 184. His rdv rédeuor, [tending into] for war, i. 9. 5. IIpds dpicror, 
Sor breakfast, i. 10. 9. 

9. Action. This is commonly conceived of as proceeding owt of the 
agent, or from him, or from his sphere, or from under his influence (éx, 
amd, japd, wpds, td, 586, d, f). 


695. 10. Means, InsrrumENT, MANNER. ’Awd Ayorelas, [from] 
by means of robbery, vii. 7.9. "Ex Blas, by force, Soph. Ph. 563. Ziv 
aixun, with the spear, Asch. Per. 755 ; ody 7G dixaiw, with justice, justly, 
ii. 6. 18. Mer’ dércias, wnjustly, lb. Avda raxéwy, [through quick 
measures] rapidly, i. 5.93; 60 épunvéws, through an interpreter, ii. 3. 17. 
"Ev rédacs, [in] with fetters, iv. 3.8; év tow, evenly, i. 8.11. "Ava xpdros, 


an = 


§ 699. IN COMPOSITION. RULE Z. 407 


up to ones strength] at full speed, i. 10.15. "Eq éavrav, ed’ éavros, 
resting on] by themselves, li. 4. 10; v. 4. 343; él rovros, ow these terms, 
v. 4. 11; émi éevig, [on terms of hospitality] hospitably, vi. i. 3. IIpds 
Biav, [resorting to] by force, Aisch. Pr. 208. ‘Yad pacriywy, under the 
lash, iii. 4. 25. IIpds avdddv, vd. . avdod, Ud Tdv avddéy, to the music of 
the flute, vi. 1. 5, Hdt. 1. 17, Symp. 6. 3. 


696. 11. Connection, Conrormity, SEPARATION, OPPosITIoN, 
SUBSTITUTION. dy Tots Oeots, with the help of the gods, ii. 3. 23. Mer’ 
avrod ficay, were on his side, Th. 3. 56. ITap’ éuoi, [with me] in my 
judgment, Hdt. 1. 32. IIpds rod Képou rpérov, [looking towards] accord- 
ing to the character of C., i. 2. 11; mpds €uod, in favor of me, Dem. 1006. 
28. Kara viuov, according to law, Hel. 1. 7. 15; xara cmovdhy, [accord- 
ing to haste] hastily, vii. 6. 28 ; see 513 b. °Arrd cxorod, aside from the 
mark, Pl. Theet. 179c. ILapa gio, [beside] against nature, Th. 6. 17. 
II pds éaurév, against himself, i. 1. 8. Aéyov kad’ judy, speaking against 
us (cf. 689m), Soph. Ph. 64. “Avtl rodrwy, [over against] in return for 
this, vi. 6. 32; avT éxelvov, instead of him, i. 1. 4. 


697. 12. Arrest, THEME, REFERENCE, SPECIFICATION, &c. Tpds 
Gedy, [before] by the gods, vii. 6. 33. °Avtl raldwy rdvée, [in presence of] 
by these children, Soph. O. C. 1326. “Apol ofs Aéyw adds, I speak 
about your daughter, Kur. Hec. 580; dud tmrovs éxovra, busy about 
horses, Cyr. 7. 5. 52. Ilep\ orovddr, [about] concerning a truce, ii. 3.1; 
mepl ue ddixos, unjust [about] towards me; 1. 6. 8. Kara yrduny, as to 
intellect, Soph. O. T. 1087 ; kar’ dvOpmrwv oKébret, consider in respect to 
men, Pl. Phedo 70d. IIpés ce, towards you, vii. 7. 30; rpds Tatra, in 
view of this, wpon this, i. 6.9. "Hs pidlav, in respect to friendship, ii. 6. 30. 


698. a. In many connections the preposition may be either em- 
ployed or omitted, at pleasure: Kpavy7 roA\y, Zdv rod Kpavyy, with 
great clamor, i. 7. 4; iv. 4.14. “Qomep 5é Tis dyddderar Et OcoceBeia . ., 
otrw Mévwy wyddder0 7H éEarraray Stvacbat ii. 6. 26. See § 487. (b) In 
Greek, as in other languages, prepositions with their cases form many 
adverbial phrases. See 382 a, 695. 

c. In composition, a preposition usually shows its original meaning, or 
one that is easily derived from it: dva(kata, els, éx, dia, mpo)Baivw, to go 
up (down, in, out, through, before) ; karavedw I [nod down] consent, ava- 
vedw, I [nod up] refuse. Its force should be carefully observed, even when 
its special translation is not required. (d) In composition, the older év is 
sometimes used instead of the derived form eis (688 d) : eurimrw, euBdar- 
hw, fall or throw into or upon. 


699. Rute Z. A PREPOSITION IN COMPOSITION often gov- 
erns the same case as when it stands by itself. 


a. A preposition in composition often retains its distinct force and 
government as such, according to this rule. (b) But oftener it seems 
to be regarded as a mere adverb (cf. 703 b), and the compound is con- 
strued just as a simple word would be of the same signification. See 486. 
(c) Hence the preposition may be repeated, or a similar preposition in- 
troduced. (d) This adverbial force is particularly obvious in tmesis, and 
(e) when the preposition is used with an ellipsis of its verb (chiefly éxtt). 
EK. g., (a) Luvéreuppev airy orparioras, he sent with her soldiers, i. 2. 20. 
Hence compounds of kard, against, often take the Gen. (cf. 689m, 696) : 
Karadicdgw éwavrod, I give judgment against myself, vi. 6.15. Ovdevds 


408 SYNTAX. R. XXXVIII. — CONJUNCTIONS. § 699. 


KareyéXa ii. 6. 23. (b) "Emir devoas rab sailing against him, Hel. 1. 6. 
23 (cf. wheiv é atrots Ib. 1.11). (c) “EeipGvro eioBaddew els Tip Kc- 
Lixiav, they attempted to enter [into] C., i. 2. 21. Ilapa dé Baoihéws darfd- 
Oov i. 9. 29. (d) "Ex dé rndjoas. See 888 c. (e) AAN &ve [for évdenae 
ef édpdvev, but [rise] up from the seats, Soph. Aj. 194. HioenOety i 
[for mdpeort}, it is permitted to enter, Eur. Ale. 1114. "Eve [for éveore] 6 

ev TQ lepd xwpw Kal Newow kal don V. 38. U1. See 785. 

f. The preposition, as such, and the general sense of the compound, 
often require the same case, as, particularly, in compounds of dyrl, dad, 
é§, els, mpd, and otv: " Améxovres adrA(prwv, distant from each other (405), 
ii. 4. 10. (g) Verbs compounded with él, wapd, or mpés, denoting ap- 
proach, commonly take the Dat. (449), though the preposition by itself 
would govern the Acc.: Ilpocépyerat T@ Eevohavtt, comes to X., iv. 8. 4 
(cf. épxovrat pds has v. 7. 20). 

h. TmeEsiIs, so called, occurs chiefly in the earlier (especially the Epic) 
Greek, when as yet the union of the preposition and verb had not become 
firmly cemented ; and is here often to be regarded as the adverbial use of 
the preposition (703 b), rather than the division of a word already com- 
pounded. (i) In Att. prose it is very rare, and even in Att. poetry 
(where it is most frequent in the lyric portions), it seldom inserts any- 
thing more than a mere particle or enclitic pronoun between the preposi- 
tion and verb. (j) The preposition sometimes follows the verb ; and i is 
sometimes repeated without the verb.  E. an (h) *Aad hovyor dptvar 
(388 c) A. 67. ’Ard ev cewurov Greoas Hdt. 3. 36. (i) Ard w epberpas, 
Kata 6° &kreavas, you have ruined and slain er ‘Eur. Hipp. 1857. “Avr’ 
ef weloerar Pl. Gorg. 520¢. (j) Tléupavros, & yivar, pera, “having sent 
me for you,’ Eur. Hee. 504, *Arrodet wow, amd dé warépa, destroy the 
city and his Sather, Id. Here. 1055. — So, “Opvuro 5...’ Ayapéurwv, av 
‘[se. apvuto] 6 ‘Oduceds, then rose Agamemnon and [up] Ulysses, 1. 267. 
"EXurov .., Kad’ dé E. 480 (707 ¢). (k) On the other hand, ILapfy kat 
KpirdBoudos, . . hv 6€ kal Krijourmos, Critobilus was present, and there was 
also Ctesippus [present], Pl. Phaedo 59 b. 


C. Tur CONJUNCTION. 


700. RuLtE XXXVIII. ConsuNCTIONS con- 
nect sentences and lke parts of a sentence: as, 


"Hodever Aapetos kal brwmrreve, Darius was sick and apprehended, i. 1.1. 
a. By like parts of a sentence are meant those of like construction, or 
performing like offices in the sentence, and which united by conjunctions 
form compound or complex subjects, predicates, dc. (62g). They are com- 
monly, but not necessarily, of the same part of speech and of similar form. 


701. The chief conjunctions are the following, in two great 
classes according as they are used in codrdination or subordi- 
nation (62) : 


1. CoORDINATE. (a) Copulative (simply coupling) té (8893), kat (the 
stronger and more emphatic), que, et, and; ré..7é, kal. . kal, and 
closest ré kat, both. . and; compounds ote. . ote, ure . . MATE, neque 
“+ neque, neither . . nor (686). (b) Adversative (denoting opposition) 
GAAG, Grap, pévrou, sed, at, but, yet. (c) Distinctive (w eakly adversative, 
often approaching the copulative) S€é but, wand, to which jv corresponds ; 
compounds dé poet. ., (6é and 7puév Ep. ; ovdé, pndé, and not, but not, 


§ 702. COORDINATE AND SUBORDINATE. 409 


neither, nor even. (d) Alternative }, 7é Ep., aut, vel, or ; compounds #re 
Ep. (889j), strengthened #ro: ; }.. 4, qroc.. 4, rarer 7). . Hrov, either. . 
or. 
2. SuBORDINATE. (e) Pinal (denoting purpose, or end) tva, Stes, as, 
dhpa poet., ut, quo, in order that; ph ne, lest. See 624. (f) Conditional 
ei si (cf. 141), ai Dor. and Ep., édv, jy, “av, el xe Ep., if; etzrep siquidem, 
af indeed; ei wy, édv wy, nisi, wrless; elite. . etre, rarer elre. . H, el. 

eire poet., sive. . sive, whether, or. . See 631, 619 a. For é¢' &, ef @re, 
on condition that, see 557a. (g) Concessive (denoting concession, or ad- 
mission) e Kat, Kalet, etsi, even if, though; to which Spas tamen, yet, 
corresponds. See 674f. (h) Zemporal (marking a relation of time) apty 
before, akin to mpd and Lat. prius; mplv 7} priusquam ; péxpr, dxpt, gas, 
gore (és,ré, 389}; Post-Hom.), donec, wrtil. Most temporai connectives are 
relative adverbs (641d). (i) Complementary (66 d) én, 6 Ep., quod, that ; 
as, Stas chiefly poet., [how] that; et (f), 4% Ep., num, whether ; métepov 
(witepa) +H, e.. th, elre.. clre, dpa... 7%, }.. i Ep., utrum.. an, whether 

. or. See 643, 639a. (j) Causal br. quod, quia, because; as, as, 
since; Sre, émel, quoniam, quando, since; Sidte (d¢ 6 rx), ovveKa, O00d- 
vexa, [on account of this that, 557a] becwuse (sometimes used as com- 
plementary, the two classes blending : icc. . otvexa “EAAnvés écper, know 
that we are Greeks, Soph. Ph. 232); yap (yé dpa, at least in accordance 
with this, 685 c) nam, enim, for, since (the yap clause sometimes preced- 
ing or dividing the principal, esp. in Hdt.). Some causal conjunctions, 
as not affecting the mode, are classed by some as coérdinate. (k) Con- 
secutive (denoting result, or consequence) dorre, es, ut, so that (6714, e). 
(1) Comparative % quam, than (511, 513). (m) Hxceptive wmrhv, GAN H 
[other than, nj, e& pa nisi, St. pH (1; after a negative), except, ef wip et 
(714. 2) nisi si, except [if }. 

Nore. In Greek, as in other languages, conjunctions have their origin, 
for the most part at least, in other parts of speech used connectively. 
E. g., (n) Neuter Pronouns, 8, 8, quod, that, as Néyee Ore déer, he 
says [what follows] that he will lead, iv. 7. 20; 8tv ph (m), as ovdels. . 
dre pi) yuvy, no one [that was not] except a woman, Hdt. 1. 181; ddr, 
ovveka, (j) ; aAAG (from neut. pl. of dddos, 483; ef. Lat. ceterwm) other- 
wise, on the contrary, but; GAN % (m), as dpyv’piov wev odk exw, GAN F put- 
xpiv Tt, I have no money [other than] except a little, vii. 7. 53; mwérepov 
utrum, as mérepov Eyovrar Kispw 7) ot, whether they will follow C. or not 
[which of the two], i. 4. 13. (0) RELATIVE ADVERBS, 4s, S7ras, tva, 
dhpa (624e) ; wore, ws until, Ste since. (p) OrHER ADVERBS, toplv, 
péexpt, &xpr, wAHV. (q) NumERALS, pév, 8€ (supposed to be related 
to pula, dvo, hence in the first place, in the second place, c, 685), of 
which pj and 67 are longer forms, and judy, 75é, H wv, Hon, wévroe com- 
pound forms. (r) Vers, et 7f, referred by some to the Imv. éa grant (ei 
estan grant he is writing, 631 a), as if to give (‘Gif ye want a friend,” 
Burns). 


702. a. “On (that, the thing which) is stronger, more positive, di- 
rect, or actual in expression than as (how, the manner in which). Hence, 
in indirect discourse, 8tt chiefly introduces what is simply said and not 
questioned ; as, what is described, or what is said but questioned, or what 
is not said, or what is presented as thought or not thought: Aéye es dzre- 
Komnoay .., kal Sti rePvaor.. aot, he states how they had been beaten off, 
and that others are dead, iv. 2.17. "Evexddouv éuol, as uaddov wédor wot, they 
brought against me the charge (which I do not admit), that J cared more, 
vii. 7. 44. Ov roto Aéya, ws ov Set, I do not say this, that one ought not, 


REV. GR. 18 





410 SYNTAX. — PARTICLES. § 702. 


Cyr. 5. 4. 20. Nopltovor.. as o”°Hdaioros xarxever, they think that Vul- 
can forges, Th. 3. 88. 

b. A conjunction often connects the sentence which it introduces, not 
so much to the preceding sentence as a whole, as to some particular word 
or phrase in it: HpocBddXovot . . Karadurdvres &odov Tois modeulos, eb 
BotAowro dedyay, they attack, leaving w way of escape for the enemy, if 
they should wish to flee, iv. 2. 11. 

ec. In many connections, two forms of construction are equally admis- 
sible, the one with, and the other without, a connective. The two forms 
are sometimes blended. See 511, 644, 659e, 671. A conjunction is 
sometimes used in Greek, where none would be usual in Eng.; e. g., when 
another adjective follows woAts: HoAAd re Kal émerjdeva duehéyovro, they 
conversed on many [and] fit topics, v. 5. 25. 

A twofold construction is sometimes admissible, according as a word is 
regarded as belonging (d) to a compound part of a sentence, or (e) to a 
new sentence: (d) Iovewrépw pev av .. 7) €por edidous, you would give 
to a richer man than I [am], Cyr. 8. 8. 82. "Ex deworépwy 7) trovavbe éow- 
Onoay Th. 7. 77. (e) Tots. . uadrov axudfovow, 7 éyad[sce. dxudgw], ma- 
paw, I exhort those of greater vigor than myself, Isoc. 188 a. “Huay dé 
dwecvov, 7) €ketvor, Td éAAOY rpoopwuévwy Dem. 287. 27. So, even witha 
connective adverb: (d) Kipw. ., domep oxbdaKe yevvalw, dvaxddfovri, O. 
crying out, as a generous hound [barks], Cyr. 1. 4.15. (e) “Egeori 0’, 
womep ‘HyéX\oxos, qucy Néyew Ar. Ran. 303. 


OBSERVATIONS. 


703. 1. Intercuance. In Greek, as in other languages, 
the uses of the PARTICLES are often interchanged. Thus, 


1.) a. Adverbs sometimes take a case, as prepositions ; 
(b) prepositions are sometimes used without a case, as ad- 
verbs, especially in Hom. and Hdt. (apés even in Att. prose) ; 
(c) the same particle is used both as an adverb and as a con- 
junction, or as a connective and a non-connective adverb, e. g. 
cai, d€, pn, mpiv, as (685 ¢, 701): 

(a) See 405s, 486d, 445c, 450. Hom. uses etow and tow as protracted 
forms for eis: "Aydynow tow xduoinv, ‘into the tent’; “Idor elow, ef. els 
*INov * Q. 155, 145, 143. Adverbs so used (chiefly with the Gen.) have 
been called improper prepositions (688 c). (b) Tdde \éyw, dpdow re mpds 
[sc. rovrw], this I say, and will do it [in addition to this] too, Aisch. Pr. 
73, IIpds & érciii. 2.2. “Ev dé [sc. rovrois}, and meanwhile, Soph. O. T. 
27. Ilept, [above others] eminently, 0. 44. (c) K®pov 8& (and) peraméu- 
meTat*.. kal otparryov 8& (on the other hand, also) abrov dwédeée 1. 1. 2. 
Hira dé é\efe, Htra roddol, i. 3. 2, 5.12. Tatra érolovy, péxpt oxéros 
éyévero iv, 2. 4 (cf. 445). Tuvaixds otvexa, [because of ] for the sake of 
a woman, Esch. Ag. 823 (§ 5574; ef. 701)). 

d. In the connection of sentences, mptv is variously used : (a) as a con- 
junction, with a finite mode, or (B) as a preposition, with the Inf. (the 
Subj. and Opt. good Attic only after a negation expressed or implied, and 
here the Inf. rare in Att.); (y) as an adverb with #4 and a finite mode or 
(8) even the Inf. (less Att.), or (€) in Hom. with Se; or () as a correla- 
tive (and so wépos, mpdoOev, mpdrepov) preceding another aptly, chiefly in 
negative clauses and oftenest in the Epic: (a) Mn orévage wply ys 


9 705. INTERCHANGE. CONSTRUCTIO PREGNANS. 411 


(641d). (B) “E@vero rpiv run elmetv, he sacrificed before speaking to any 
one, v. 6. 16. (y) Iply 7. . éyévovro, [sooner than] before they had come, 
Ages. 2.4. (8) IIplv #.. doat, before he satiates, EH. 288. (e) piv ¥ 
bre. . SOxev, watil [when] he gave, M. 437. ({) Ovdé ris érAn mpl Tew 
tow Aelwa, nor did any one dare to drink |previously] before offering, 
H. 480. M.) wpdedev xarad0oa. ., mplv, not to make peace, before, 1.1. 10. 

e. When two prepositions are combined, which occurs most frequently 
in the Epic, either one or both of the prepositions are used adverbially, 
or one of the prepositions with its substantive forms the complement of 
the other: Audi zepl kpiyny, round about the fountain, B. 805. Ac ex 
peydpo.o x. 388. *Amormpd, [forth] far away, Il. 669. Idpef rod. . apyu- 
plov, ‘besides,’ Hdt. 3.91. ‘Ya ék Bedéwr, from beneath the weapons, A. 465. 

f. The prepositions may be regarded as essentially adverbs of place 
used with a complement. Strictly, however, the separation of the parts 
of speech does not belong to the earliest period of language (359 d) ; and 
it continues least complete in the particles, from their defect of inflection. 


704. 2.) One preposition or adverb is often used for an- 
other (or a preposition is used with one case for another), by 
reason of something associated or implied. This construction 
(especially frequent with év, eis, and éx, 689 a) is termed, from 
its elliptic expressiveness, constructio pregnans. Thus, 


A sign of Morion for one of rEsT. (a) PREPOSITION: Of é« rijs dyopas 
. . €pvyov [éx for év, by reason of épvyoy following], those in the market 
jled [from it], i. 2.18. °Ex« maccaddgw xpéuacev pipuryya, he hung the 
lyre on the peg [so that it hung down from it], 6. 67. Oi dad Tay Kara- 
oTpwudTwy Tois axovrios . . Expavro, ‘on the decks,’ Th.-7. 70. ’Eddvy 
Als . . eis dddv, a lion appears [having come into] tn the way, O. 275. Ta- 
phoav eis Ddpders i. 2.2. His dvdyxny xetueOa, we lie [having come into] 
in a state of compulsion, Kur. Iph. T. 620. In lustra jacuisti, Plawt. 
(b) Apverr: Tv Gbo08€v [for evdov] ris eloeveyxdtw, let one of those with- 
in [coming from within] carry in, Ar. Pl. 228. Tot caxay épnuiav etipw ; 
‘Whither can I go fo find?’ Eur. Here. 1157. (c) CAsE: IIpds 76 tip 
kadjpevos, gong to the fire and sitting by it, Ar. Vesp. 773. 

A sign of rest for one of Motion. (d) PREposITIoN: ’Ev yovvace 
mimre, fell [and rested] wpon the knees, KW. 370. *Kv Acuxadia amrjecay, 
had gone to L., Th. 4. 42. *Ev ro rorau@ érecov Ages. 1. 32. Naves in 
littore ejectas, Caes. (e) ApverB: “Owov [for dro] BéBnxer, where [for 
uhither| he has gone, Soph. Tr. 40. ILavrayod mpecBevoouey Ar. Lys. 
1230. Ubi cadaver abjeceris, Tacitus. (f) Case: IIpos mérpyou Baddv, 
dashing upon the rocks, t. 284. 

705. 3.) The Greeks, especially the earlier writers, often 
employ the looser and more generic for the closer and more 
specific connectives (63 g), or instead of other forms of expres- 
sion: as, . 

“Hon T fv ev TOTpiTw crabud, Kal Xeipicodos a’r@ éxaderdvOn, it was 
now the third day, and C. was angry with him [= when it was now, &c.], 
iv. 6.2. “Amewpyxecay pev, duws 8 éddxer, [they were weary indeed, but 
yet] although they were weary, yet it seemed, vi. 5. 80. Th enol Kal col; 
what have I to do with thee (459)? Ovdeuiay elvac cwrnplay eb pt radeiv, 


that there was no escape {but to suffer] from suffering, Hel. 2. 2. 10. 
The student will not fail to remark, —(a) The frequent use, in the Epic, 


412 SYNTAX. — PARTICLES. § 705. 


of 8€ for yap, and in general of coérdination or simple succession, in the 
connection of sentences, for swhordinution (62): Ilidec@’, dudw St vewrépws 
estév, be persuaded, [and] for ye are both younger, A. 259. Nate 6é map 
IIpidy, © 8€[= ds] wv rie, he lived with P., [and he| who honored him, 
O. 551. “H pd wd pot re widow; . . Trains kev, [would you, &c. ?] if you 
would now listen to me, you would ventwre, A. 93. So OvKav moinocere 
ratra; huels. . exretWouer, tf then you will not do this, we shall desert, 
ridt. 4. 118. (b) The frequent use of ydép in specification, where we 
should use that, namely, now, &c.: Todse djdov fv > 7H wev yap mpdcbev 
nuépa. . éxédeve, was plain from this, that on the preceding day he com- 
manded, ii. 83.1. (c) The use of kal after a word of sameness, likeness, 
or anticipation: TH airy yAdoon xpéovrar Kal T'ehwvol, they use the same 
language [and] as the Gretont (eadem ac), Hdt. 4.109. Ovdx opolws memory- 
kaou kal Ounpos, ‘in like manner with H.’ (similiter atque), Pl. lon 531d. 
Cf. 451. Ovx &pPacav rudduevor Kal AKov (677 f). 


706. 1. a. Adverbs and prepositional adjuncts are often used sub- 
stantively or adjectively, in any case required: Substantively, Nom.” Hv 
.. vrép tpurv. . Apxddes, above half were Arcadians, vi. 2.10. GEN. 
"Ex T&v Gphi rods puplous, from the about 10,000, v. 8. 8. Meéype tore, 
until then (445 c), Hdt. 6. 34. Aco. “Oray dé rotrwy dus Exnre, when 
you have enough of this, v. 7.12. His wév &tra€ cal Bpaxdy xpdvor, for 
once and a short time, Dem. 21.1. Adjectively, IleXracral dé apdl rods 
SirxtAtlovs, about 2,000 targeteers, i. 2. 9. See 526s. (b) An adverb and 
a preposition governing it are often written together as a compound word: 
"Eoael, forever, Eur. Sup. 374. “Hyumpooder ili. 4. 2. ITlapaurixa Cyr. 2. 
2. 24. Ipomrada: Ar. Eq. 1155. 


707. i. In the doctrine of particles, especially connec- 
tives, the figures of syntax hold an important place: thus, 


A. ELLIPSIS. 


Ellipsis here consists either (a) in the omission of the par- 
ticles themselves, or (8), far more frequently, in that of words, 
and even whole sentences, related to them. 


a. A particle belonging alike to two parts of a sentence is either (a) ex- 
pressed in both (the most distinct and emphatic form) ; or (b) in the first 
only ; or (c) in the second only (more rarely and chiefly in poetry) ; or 
(1) is sometimes even omitted in both. (e) A like variety obtains in 
respect to other classes of words, and (f) when more than two parts of the 
sentence are affected. (a) "Ev Alyirrw xal év Zixedia, in HL. and in S., 
Mem. 1.4.17. (b) IIpés re Wixn kal Odd17, to cold and heat, Ib. 2. 1. 6. 
"Ev 7@ xpdvy @ buay dxovw, in the time [in which] that I am hearing you, 
Symp. 4. 1 (so comm. with the relative, 551). Els Koréwpa, ré\w “EXA7- 
vida (394 ¢ ; so commonly with an appositive, unless it is more emphatic 
than its subject). (c) “"H dros 4 érl vis, either on sea or land, pm. 27. 
"Te vaods, ic mpds Bwuods Eur. Hec. 146. “Hdoo perv, w&s & ovk dv 
Soph. O. T. 937. IIdpus yap, ovre . . wédus, neither P. nor the city, Aisch. 
Ag. 532. ‘Fearing God nor man,” Milt. (d) “Eyxos BpiOd, wéya, ort- 
Bapov, a spear, heavy, huge, siout, II. 801. (e) Zuwyper, ’Arpéos vié, ob F 
diva défar drrowa Z. 46. See 542c. Ovdev od padrov H ris Gros Exe, 
you have no inors than avy other one, Pl. Theset. 209a. (f) See g. 


§ 710. ELLIPSIS. 413 


g. Copulative conjunctions are often omitted (especially if more than 
two particulars are joined) ; (h) less frequently, those of other classes. 
(i) When not joined by a connective, a clause is sometimes in parenthetic 
or inverted order, or placed in apposition with another clause. (g) Hdéov 
marpiowy, yovéwr, yuvakav, taldwy, from longing for country, parents, 
wives, children, iii. 1. 3. (h) Omviw. . [sc. 71] eOvdunr, I swear [that] 
I sacrificed, vi. 1. 31. (i) Tatra, . . duvime. ., eradov Cyr. v. 4. 31. 
"Adehiuny, duoroya, I rescued him, I confess, vi. 6. 17. 

j. In annexing several particulars, the Eng. more frequently uses the 
copulative with the last only ; but the Greek, with all or none: Il\tivOou 
kal g0\a kal Képamos (496 c). Cf. d, g. 

k. A secondary connective is sometimes used without its primary (66): 
‘Opolous piv pirocdpas, like philosophers indeed [but not philosophers], Pl. 
Rep. 475. 


708. 8. Connected sentences especially abound in ellipsis, 
from the ease with which the omission can be supplied from 
the connection. E. g., observe the frequent ellipses, 


1.) In replies: ‘‘‘Opds we. .;” ‘‘‘Opa.” ‘Do you see me?” *‘T see.” 
Eur. Hipp. 1395. Reply is made in various forms ; as, (a) by repeating 
the most prominent word or part of the question, or a substitute for this, 
with the frequent addition of particles to modify the answer or make it 
more emphatic : (b) by the mere use of particles of different degrees of 
strength ; as Affirmative vai, rdvu ye, wavy pev odv, wavTws Oy, waduoTa, 
kat udha, opidpa ye, &c.; Negative ob (uh), ov djru, ovdauds, Hxiora, &c.: 
(c) by asking another question, or by assigning a reason ; as, 7@s; [how 
can it be so?] by no means, r&s yap od; ri ydp; th wiv; ‘* Adyes ;” 
“Ov yap ppovoitvrad ce BXérw’”’ ‘[Yes] for I see’; Soph. O. T. 625: 
(d) by other forms of expressing assent or dissent ; as pyul, o} Py, ~ore 
ravra, Kal TovTo, éywye, otK éywye, v7) Tov Ala, &c. 

e. Ina dialogue or address, a speaker often commences with a connec- 
tive (most frequently an adversative, distinctive, or causal conjunction), 
from reference to something which has been expressed or which is 
mutually understood : *AXN dpare, but you see, iii. 2.4. "AAG. . Aéyers, 
well, you say, li. 1. 20. “Eye 8 otrw yeyvdonw iv. 6.10. Oter yap cot 
paxetcOa rov ddedpdv; 1.7.9. (f) In like manner, the Voc. is often fol- 
lowed by a connective :°Q yivat, dvoua 8€ cou Ti ect; woman, but what 
is your name? Mem. 2. 1. 26. *Q Kipxn, ris yap. . tryeuovetoer; x. 501. 


709. 2.) Between two connectives: ’ANAG [sc. ravouat] yap kal 
mepaivew dn dpa, but [no more, for] it is now quite time to stop (sed enim), 
lil. 2. 32. “Add yap dédocxa iii. 2. 25. Tlapa rhv Oddarrar Her> Kal [sc. 
TauTy Her] yap ibn joOéver, he went by the sea; [and he so went,] for he 
was now sick, vi. 2.18. Kal yap xal xamvds épaivero ii. 2. 15. — (a) And 
yet, perhaps, in such examples as these, dAAd yap or kal yap may be 
regarded as forming but a single compound connective, or one of the par- 
ticles may be regarded as a mere adverb (703 ¢). 

3.) With adversative and distinctive conjunctions, with which we must 
sometimes supply the opposite of that which has preceded: My} w driwov 
ToS damooreihynre is, GAN dpxémdovror [sc. 5éEacbe], ‘dismiss me not, 
pi Sa me,’ Soph. E] 71. Cf. 572 b. — For ellipsis with #, see 513, 
567 f. 


710. 4.) With conditional conjunctions: Et 5’ (sc. Bovhea] dye, tf 
you will, come, A. 302, and often in Ilom. Ei 6’ é0édeus [sc. dye] ®. 487. 


414 SYNTAX. — PARTICLES. § 710. 


Kt perv ot re exerts pds Huds Néyew [sc. héye 54] + et dé wh [se. Execs], Tues 
mpos cé éxouev* if you have anything to say to us, say it; if not, we have 
to you; vii. 7.15. “Av ev 6 Kopos BovAnrat [kah@s éxer]+ ef 6€ wh Cyr. 
4.5.10. Hi pr dca rov rpiravw, évérecer dy, ‘if it had not been for the 
prytanis,’ Pl. Gorg. 516e. *HeiOovro, whijy et ris Te Exdeev (709. 2) iv. 
1. 14. See 638, 639 a. 


711. 5.) With ds, especially in expressing comparison, design, pre- 
tence, possibility, &c.: Oarrov 7) [sc. obrw Taxv] &s Tis av Gero, quicker than 
[so quick as] one would have thought, i. 5. 8. ‘Qs eis wdxnv mapecxevacpué- 
vos, arrayed as [he would array] for battle, i. 8. 1. *A@polfer, ws em rov- 
rous i. 2.1. “Qozep épyy, éxédevoe i. 5. 8. ‘Os & eixbra rovoduev, kal 74.0" 
evvonoare, but (for a proof) that we are doing right, consider this also, Hel. 
2. 3. 34. ‘Os éx T&v rapévrwr [sc. éd¥varTo], Evvratsuevor Th. 6. 70. ‘Qs 
él Td ToNU, as things are for the most part, commonly, ili. 1. 42. “Qs ady- 
6s, truly, Pl. Pheedo 63a. See 462d, 513d, 553, 565, 671, 680, 702 d, e. 

a. ‘Qs, like our as, is remarkable for the variety of its use. It belongs 
to four classes of conjunctions (701), and also performs various offices as a 
cennective adverb and as a modal sign (65d). (b) It is often used to 
render expressions of quantity less positive : "Exwv [sc. oftw aohXovs] os 
mevraxocious, having such a number as 500, i. e. about 500, 1. 2. 3. 
(c) From its frequent use with the accusative after verbs of motion to ex- 
press the purposed end of the motion (472g), it came at last to be even 
regarded as a preposition, supplying the place of awpés or eis, but chiefly 
before names of persons: Ilopeverar @s Bacwdéa, he goes [as] to the king, 1. 
2.4. ‘Qs rdv Suorov, to the like, p. 217. ; 


712. y. Various ellipses occur with prepositions and adverbs: ‘Tha- 
pal 6é dvtl oxvOpwray [sc. yuvacxGv, or = dvtl Tod elvat cxvOpwrol]| Hoar, Kal 
avrt Spopwuévw EauTas Hdéws aNATAaS Ewpwr, they were cheerful instead of 
[being] downcast, d&c., Mem. 2. 7. 12. Eis [sc. rév xpévov] Gre, for the 
time when, B. 99. Zvdy ols éxw (554). See 557, 699 e, 703 b. 


B. PLEONASM. 


713. Under this head we remark, 


1.) The redundant use of Necatives. This appears chiefly, 


a.) In connection with indefinites, which in a negative sentence are all 
regularly combined with a negative: Ovzore épet ovdels, no one shall 
[never] ever say, i. 8. 5. Ovderl ovdau7 ovdauds ovdeulay kowwviay exer PI. 
Parm. 166a. The rule is different in Lat., and now in Eng.; but, *‘ He 
never yet no vilanie ne sayde,” Chaucer. 

b.) In divided construction, and (c) in the emphatic use of od8€ and 
pndé: Mndev rereirw pyre cuol pare G\\w pndevi, let him pay nothing 
either to me or to any one else, vii. 1. 6. OU wev 5h ovde Todr’ dy res elrrot, 
nor swrely could any one say this, i. 9.13. My rolvuy undé vil. 6. 19. 

d.) In the common (but not necessary) use of pA with the Infinitive, 
after words implying some negation: Navx\jpows atmetwe wh Sidyew, he 
forbade the shipmasters to transport {saying that they should noé trans- 
port], vii. 2.12. “Ege rod wy} xaraddvar, will keep from sinking, iii. 5. 11 
(ef. Zxjow ce wydayv Kur. Or. 263). Kadtovres undauy . . ropiferar vii. 
6. 29 (cf. Kwrtoee Tod Kalew, § 405). ‘H atropla rod wh novydgew, in- 
ability to rest, Th. 2. 49. ?Eparodav rod wi Hd elvaciv. 8.14. (e) Od 
is sometimes used in like manner, with a finite verb after 8tt or @s: “Ap- 
veioOar. ., Ort ov wapiy, to deny that he was present, Rep. A. 2. 17. 


§ 714. _ PLEONASM. 415 


f.) In the use of 7 0d for pA, with the Infinitive (commonly) and Par- 
ticiple (sometimes) after negative and interrogative clauses (sometimes after 
expressions of shame, fer, and the like, from the negation implied). The 
ov (as simply continuing the general negation of the sentence, cf. a, b, c) 
may be here joined with pw, (g) even when this is redundant (d). EK. g., 
(f) Ovdels yé we ay reloecey dvOpHrwv Td wh ovK eOetv, no one could per- 
suade me not to go [no], Ar. Ran. 65. Ov yap av waxpay ixvevov autos, “1 
ovk €xwv Tt cbuBorov, I could not trace tt far of myself, [not having] with- 
out some clew, Soph. O. T. 220. “Qore raow aicxivyy eivar, wh ov cvoTov- 
dafgew, so that all were ashamed not to share his zeal, 1. 8.11. Xanrerai 
AaBeiv . ., uh ov xpbvw, hard to take, [not taken by] except by time, Dem. 
379. 7. (g) OvK evayTiwoomat Td i) ov yeywvetv, I will not refuse to speak, 
isch. Pr. 787. Ti euroddy wh ovyxl . . drobavetv; what prevents our dy- 
dag (quominus moriamur) ? iii. 1.13. (Nore.) In the use of pa od for pA 
as above, the article is not usually prefixed to the Inf. (664), esp. ted. 

h.) In the occasional use of od to strengthen the negative force of %, 
than, chiefly when a negative idea precedes: HéAw éAyv diapGetpar paddov 
% 0% Tovs airtous, to destroy a whole city, rather than [and not rather] the 
guilty ones, Th. 3. 36. Compare Fr. Vous écrivez mieux que vous ne par- 
lez; Ital. Holi era piu ricco che voi non siete. 

Two negatives in the same sentence have their distinct force, when one 
applies to the whole sentence, and the other to a part only ; and so com- 
monly (i) when the first is interrogative, or (j) the second is simple ov or 
ph, after a negative of its own class (686), or (k) the two negatives are of 
different classes: (i) O¥.. od88. . SWvavrar ; are they not even unable ? iii. 
1. 29. (j) OvSels od Eracxe, no one was not affected, Symp. 1. 9. See 
559c¢. (k) Od. . divauat ph yerav, I cannot help laughing, Ar. Ran. 42. 
Odre ovyay, ore ph ovyav Aisch. Pr. 106. See 597e. For apparent ex- 
ceptions, see f, g, 627. 


714. 2.) The repetition of various particles for greater 
clearness or strength of expression, particularly after interven- 
ing clauses, in divided construction, and with important or em- 
phatic words ; but sometimes, especially in poetry, for mere 
euphony or rhythm: 


*"Ekeyev St1, ef wt. . welcovrat, 8tv Karaxavoer, he said that, if they would 
not obey, [that] he would burn, vii. 4. 5. Ovdx Av ixavds elvar ofuat, od? av 
pirov wpedfjoat, ovr Av éxOpdv adéiacba, I do not think I should be able, 
either to aid a friend, or to repel a foe, i. 8. 6. Kak jyiv rare Soxet, dep 
Kal Baowret, we also wre pleased with the same course as the king [also], ii. 
1. 22. °Q réxvov & yervaioy (4841). Ht pip et res bord Bou, wnless [if] per- 
haps one should suppose, Pl. Gorg. 480 b. — And for like reasons, 

3.) The addition of particles to words of similar meaning, and the use 
of needless connectives : Older ofos, [solely] all alone, H. 226. AbOcs 3a. 
Aw, again (once more), Soph. Ph. 342. ‘Ael EwexGs Pl. Leg. 807 e. Tivos 
57) Xaptv tvexa ; for the sake of what? Ib. 701d. *Arrd Bojjs evexa, from 
shouting (so far as this was concerned), Th. 8. 92. EHimov, 8re “* ixavol 
éecpev” (644). See 659e, 671 b, 702 c¢. 

4.) Duplicate éxpressions with particles; as (a) Postrive and Nrca- 
TIVE: Ovk jjxurra, ad\rXG pdduora, not the least, but the most, Hdt. 2. 4. 
"Euod te xovK d\Aov Soph. El. 885. Aééw apds buds kal ovk daroxpi Wouat 
Dem. 108.7. See 509k. (b) Wuoxe and Parr (for special distinction) : 
*Q Zed cal Geot Pl. Prot. 310d. “Exrope perv cal Tpwoit T. 68. Tots wa- 
Onrais avrod cat r@ Ilérpw Mk. 16. 7. 


416 SYNTAX. — PARTICLES. § 715. 


c. ATTRACTION AND ANACOLUTHON. 


715. The influence of aTrRAcTION sometimes passes ever 
beyond a connective : as, 


Ovdév ye ddXo Eotly, oF Epdow oi avOpwmrot, 7) Tod d:yaQod [for 7d dyabdr, 
through the attraction of od], there is nothing else which men love, but the 
good, Pl. Conv. 205e. IIatpds, eizrep twos [for res], obévorros, from a fa- 
ther powerful, if any one was, Soph. Aj. 487. “Hppoxpdrovs kcal ef tov 
tidXov reiOdvTwy, H. and [if there was] perhaps some other one persuading 
(cf. 639), Th. 7. 21. See 667g, 702d. 


716. a. ANACOLUTHON is frequent in the connection of 
sentences, either from inadvertence or from preference (for the 
sake of ease, emphasis, &c.). The clause completing the con- 
struction is often changed in form, or even omitted ; or (b) the 
regular correspondence of particles may be neglected : as, 


(a) ‘Qs. - Koved twos, 8re Kyéavdpos . . wédAdNer HEew [for ws Khe i 
wéANet, or Hxovoa, dre K. wédrer], as L heard from some one, [that] C 
about to come, vi. 4. 18. ‘Avnp 68’ ws gorxev ov vepeiy [for veuet Soph. Tr. 
1238. “AAG why, €p@ yap Kat Tatra, .. olda mer ydp [for ép® yap, otda, 
or €p, oda ydp|ii. 5.12. See iii. 2.11. (b) Kal ei.. # [for xal ei], both 
if.. lor] and if, Th. 6. 64. Te. . &recra dé, both. . [but then] and, v. 

“Awa wev. . kat [for dua d€]i. 9. 16s. Odre.. dé vi. 3. 16. 

c. After a connective, a distinct sentence often takes the place of a part 
of a sentence, and (d) sometimes the reverse: (c) “A\A@ Te Tpdrw meipa- 
cavres, kal unxavi mpoonyayov, both attempting in other ways, and [they 
brought up] bringing wp an engine, Th. 4, 100. : Seeq) 10S 12 sees 
vii. 2. 2. (d) Ilapnuddow . ., ore yap. . diddvres [for edidocar, as if yep 
had been omitted], they slighted them, [not giving] for they did not give, 
Th. 1. 25. (e) So Part. for Inf.: "H dia 76 “etyew, ) GAD etrerotoa, 
either from fleeing or attacking another, Th. 7. 70. 


717. iv. The Greek especially abounds in combinations of 
particles, and in elliptical phrases having the power of particles. 
The use of these sometimes extends farther than their origin 
and structure would strictly warrant. LE. g., 


a. GdAdws re kat, both otherwise and in particular, especially: Ovsev vo- 
pife avdpl, dd\Aws Te Kal dpxovTt, KaNiovy eivac kT fue vil. 7. 41. 

b. 8HAov Stu, ct is evident that, evidently, 6 oi5 br, oi’ m1, cd tz0’ 
érz, and similar phrases, which are often inserted in sentences (quite like 
adverbs), or annexed to them: Ta pév 5) Kupou dor bre orws Exer 1. 3.9. 
Our av duets, e8 015’ Sri, eratcacbe Dem. 72. 24. 

c. et 8& ph, but if not, otherwise, used even after negative sentences : 
My roijons Tadra> ef 56¢ wh, airiav ag fers, do not do this ; ‘otherwise fis @: if 
you do] you will have blame, vii. 1. 8. So et 8€é, as adversative, some- 
times imphes negation : Ei wey BovdAerat, EWéerw * el dé, . . moveirw, if he 
vrishes, let him boil ; if the ah y , let him do, Pl. Euthyd. 285 ¢ 

dl. pH th ye, not to [si ay aught surely] mention, i. e. much less, nedum : 
Oux ém.. Tots irows Ewirdrrew . ., ui) TL ye Sh Tots Oeots Dem. 24. 21. 

e. od yap p GddAd, for it is not otherwise, but, i. e. for indeed: Ov yap 
aX Hh v7 Bia &\xe, for indeed the car th forcibly attracts, Ar. Nub. 232. 

f. od pévToL ddd, ov wiv GAXd, yet no, but, i. e. nevertheless : ‘O trmos 

. pKpov Kaxelvoy cLerpaxiAruwev + ov why aAN dméueuvey 6 Kiépos Cyr. 1. 4. 8. 


§ 718 DIRECT ORDER OF ARRANGEMENT. ALT 


ovx Sri, Ui) Sri, ov pdvoy rt, ovx Sov, OVX Srws, ut Orws, ovx olor, 
I do not say that, not to say that, &c., i. e. not only, or not only not: 
"Axpnoro yap kal yuvartly . ., ut) b7e avdpdor, for they are wseless even to 
women, not to say men, Pl. Rep. 398e. Ovx ore udvos 6 Kpirwr év hovxla 
fw, GANG Kal of Pidoe avrod, ‘not only was C. himself unmolested,’ Mem. 
2. 9. 8. Ov pdvor Sri dvdpes, dANa Kal yuvatkes Pl. Conv. 179 b. Ovx dcov 
ovK HptvavTo, GAN ovd’ écwOnoav Th. 4. 62. Ovx dws SHpa Sods, not only 
bestowing no gifts, vii. 7. 8. My dws dpxeicbar ev pvdu@, adX 00d’ 6p008- 
cba. édtvacbe Cyr. 1. 3.10. (h) Ody Ste is sometimes although [not be- 
cause, denying an inference which might be drawn]: "EyyvGuae wip érid7- 
cecOat, ovx Sri waifer kal Pnow éemirjopwv elvar, I engage that he will not 
forget, though he jests and says that he is forgetful, Pl. Prot. 336 d.* 


CHAP TE Bev | 
ARRANGEMENT. 


‘Such grace can ORDER and CONNECTION give.” 


718. In the direct, or normal order of arrangement, which, 
however, various influences are continually changing or modi- 


fying, 


a.) A general connective or interrogative leads in its sentence: and 
(b) a compellative-part (60), as calling attention, is placed early, if not 
first ; though, as independent, it may have any place which will not 
interfere with the required connection of other words. (c) Of the remain- 
der, the subject-part precedes the predicate-part. (da) Hixponents precede 
the words whose offices or relations they mark (65). E. g., ’AAN éya, & 
Padive, Oavudtw.., but I, Phalinus, wonder, ii. 1. 10. 

MopiFigrs (except as above, a) are thus placed in respect to their 
principals: (e) Adverbs and equivalent words or phrases precede them. 
(f) Other modifiers follow substantives without the article, (g) adjectives, 
and (h) adverbs ; and (i) may either follow or precede verbs. (j) For the 
arrangement with the article, see 520, 523s. (k) Of several modifiers of 
the same word, the more closely related are placed nearer to it (a Dat. of 
person, from more interest in the action, usually nearer than an Acc. of 
thing). HE. g., (e) "Ev tow kat Bpadéws rpocjecar, they advanced evenly 
and slowly, i. 8. 11. See 510. (f, g) Ke@pat woddal, perral cirov, many 
villages, full of corn, i. 4.19. (h) Xepls trav dddwr (405 a). (i) Kip 
Sotvar ypyuara, to give C. money, i. 2.12. (k) AcaBddder Tov Kipov mpds 


* ‘“*PaRTICLES. It would be impossible in any book to tabulate the delicate 
shades of meaning, the subtle, intricate touches of irony or pathos, the indescriba- 
ble grace and power, which the particles lend to many of the grandest passages 
in ancient literature. Indeed these can only be felt at all by a scholarlike ap- 
preciation of the entire context, and of the circumstances which dictated the 

articular expression ; so that in very many instances, not in Greek only but 
in German, and in most languages to a greater or less degree, the force of the 
particles cannot be accurately transferred into a foreign version. In short they 
are often untranslatable, and can only be approximately represented by some 
look, gesture, emphasis, or tone of the voice.’? — Farrar’s Greek Syntax, § 296. 


Bry. Gr. 18* 


418 SYNTAX. — ARRANGEMENT. § 718. 


tov adedpov, traduces C. to his brother, i. 1. 8. Alédwow adr@ puplous da- 
petxous, gives him 10,000 daries, i. 1. 9. 

1.) An infinitive follows the principal verb ; (m) a participle follows or 
precedes it, according to the natural order of the thought. (n) Coérdinate 
sentences follow each other according to the order in which they lie in the 
mind. (0) Substantive and adjective clauses, except the indefinite rela- 
tive (641), follow the words upon which they depend. (p) Adverbial 
clauses may follow or precede the principal clauses, according to the nat- 
ural order of the thought ; and (q) are sometimes inserted in them, for 
the sake of a closer connection. E. g., (1, m) 2vAdéEas orpdrevpo . . 
éreiparo katayeyv, having raised an army, he (then) endeavored to restore, 
i. 1.7. See 571f. (n) ‘O 6é weideral re kal cvAd\auBdver, and he both be- 
lieves and (as a result) apprehends, i. 1. 3. (0, p, q) “Emewdh 5€ Kipos 
€xddet, MaBav vyuds Erropeviuny, va, ev Te O€oiTO, wPedolnv avTov, avO Gy ed 
éradov vw éxeivou i. 8. 4. 

r. An order different from the preceding is termed, in general, indirect, 
varied, or abnormal ; or, more particularly, inverted, divided, purenthetic, 
mixed, confused, &c., as the case may be. See 71. 

t. Ifa complex or compound sentence is so arranged that there is no 
complete sense without the final clause, the structure is often termed 
periodic ; but otherwise, loose: Hi doxet co, oretye (631 a). Xp adrois, 
éav dé Tt (631 c). The Greek well illustrates the progress, in advancing 
civilization, from the looser to the closer connection of thought. Among 
ancient languages the Latin, and among the modern the German, are 
remarkable for the extent to which they exhibit the periodic structure. 


719. The order of the sentence is varied, chiefly, 


a.) To render certain words more emphatic or prominent, or 
(b) through the attraction or repulsion of other words. 


(a) a. The beginning and close of the sentence have a special promi- 
nence ; and of other places, the earlier are in general more favorable to 
emphasis than the later. It is but natural, that a sentence should com- 
mence with that which is most prominent or foremost in the mind, and 
that it should then proceed with that which is closely related to this, or 
next in prominence ; while the last word leaves the freshest impression. 
K. g., Ovarore épe? od8els, NEVER shall any one say, i. 3.5. Majvew decde 

. ovropévyy, sing the fatal wrath, A. 1. “Av8pa jor évvere, Motoa, tro- 
Aitpotrov a. 1. Arma virumque cano, Virg. Ilept ‘Opdvrou rovrovt i. 6. 6. 

6. Any unusual order attracts attention ; and in prose, commonly ex- 
presses emphasis or emotion : Ov« dvOpatrev diopaéy RapBapele not from 
want of mere men, — barbarians, i. 7. 3. Odzep adrds e&vexa i. 9. 21. 
(y) Hence the frequent hyperbaton in earnest adjuration : “Hyty elré & 
mpos Ards MéAnre, tell us, by Zeus, O Melétus, Pl. Apol. 25c. See 476b. 
(8) The address is sometimes emphatically placed before a general con- 
nective ; while a subject is sometimes deferred to be rendered emphatic 
by the adverb kal: “Erop, drap ov pol éoor rarip, but you, Hector, are 
to me father, Z. 429. ‘Pe? dé kal otros, and this also flows, i. 2.8. “HOew- 
pet dé Tov &ywva kal Kipos, and even C. witnessed the games, Ib. 10. 

(b) « The desire of connecting kindred or contrasted words as closely 
as possible often varies the order; while a connection is avoided that 
would offend taste or might lead to mistake: Hapa b&ns otto dépew 
yvuvakds avipl, fo bring from a dear wife to w dear husband, Aisch, Ch. 89. 
Kal érolovy ovtws ovTori. 1. 11. See 541 h, 567d. (¢) If a word modi- 
fying the verb comes early in the sentence, it often attracts the verb to a 


§ 719. VARIED ORDER. 419 


place before the subject : "Evrat0a foav cOuat, here were villages (6), 
i. 4.19. “Harel 62 qoGéver Aapetos, and when D. was sick, i. 1.1. (yn) A 
particle is sometimes attracted from its proper place: Ovx 078’ av ef rret- 
cat, I know not whether I could persuade (reicayu dv, 621 a), Kur. Med. 
941. Kat viv 8tt roduopkotyra, and that they are now besieged, vi. 3. 11. 
"Exipvéer, boris Av GA@.., Ste wempacerat, he proclaimed that whoever 
might be taken should be sold (dre yielding to the attraction of rempdacerat, 
perhaps the rather to avoid dor:s), vii. 1. 36. “Ort or as, that, is not un- 
frequently so placed after a dependent clause: i. 6.2; ii. 2. 20; vil. 1. 11. 


ce.) In conformity to the natural order and connection of the 
thoughts ; or (d) to present sooner an outline of these, some 
details being deferred. Thus, 


(c) Aapelov cai ILapuodri80s yiyvovras matdes Sto (412 ; the well-known 
parents being naturally mentioned before their children). See % (0) A 
word referring or corresponding to what is contained in the preceding sen- 
tence, has commonly a leading place, as introducing the new thought and 
connecting the thoughts: ‘O ev oby rpecBirrepos mapay éeriyxave > Kidpov 
(corresponding to mpecBurepos) 5€ weraméumeTar amd Tijs apxijs, Hs (veter- 
ring to dpxjjs) a’riv catpdrny érolnse* kal orparnyov (corresponding to 
catpdrny) 6¢ abrov dmédeée ravrwy, Soot (referring to mdvTwv) eis Kacrw- 
hod medlov aOpolfovrar. “AvaBalve (the result of weramwéumerac) oty o Ko- 
pos. i. 1.2. (t) When a question is made without an interrogative ex- 
ponent, the predicate, as in Eng., often leads, as the part on which the 
force of the question most directly falls: TéOvnke Pidurmos ; ts P. dead ? 
Dem. 43. 10. (x) A word pointing to a following sentence has naturally 
a late place: AcaBaivovres &8¢, crossing as follows, 1. 5.10. See 544. 

(d) Ryradba agixvetrar Harvaga, 7) Dvevvéocos yuvh, Tob KiAlkwv Bacrréws, 
mapa Kipov, here comes E., the wife of S., king of the Cilicians, to C., 1. 2. 
12. An outline is here first presented in ’Evrad0a (A) ddixvetrac (¢)'E. ; 
then ’E. is defined by 7 2. yuv7, ZX. by rod K. Baowéws, and adixvetrar by 
mapa K. “Ore tpifpers Kove mepurdeotoas ad ‘lwvias eis Kidtxiay Tauoy 
éxovra, Tas Aaxedawoviwy cal a’rod Kvpov i. 2. 21. The early presenta- 
tion of the general idea is often aided, (A) by placing first the shorter of 
two parts of the sentence ; (w) by joining a word with the first of two or 
more words to which it is alike related ; (v) by dividing or separating a 
modifying part, &c.: “E@atvero tyma tartev kal xdmpos, there appeared the 
tracks and dung of horses, i. 6. 1. Bacidera Rv cal rapddeccos wéyas, there 
was a palace wnd extensive park, i. 2. 7. “Imméas éxwv as twevtyKoclovs, 
having about 500 horse, i. 2. 4. MUepoav rots aplorovs raéy rept aro 
émra, the seven noblest of his Persian attendants, i. 6. 4. 


e.) For the symmetry of the sentence; or (f) that it may 
close with a stronger or more important word. E. g., 


Ove yap huets éxelvov ert orpari@ra . ., ot're Exetvos ere Huty uicOoddrns, 
Jor neither are we longer his soldiers, nor he longer owr paymaster, i. 3. 9 
(see €). Ilod\AdKis NSovt Bpaxeia waxpday AYTHY TikTeEL, PLEASURE brief 
long GRIEF often brings (71a). “Os pdvos pev pds Oedy aoeBis, wdvos dé 
mpos avOpwrwv aicypdés, which alone before the gods is impious, and before 
men base, 11. 5. 20. 

g.) For euphony or rhythm, especially in the poets ; (h) for 
variety itself; or (i) for general rhetorical effect. E. g., 

Mdyxnv és, to battle (the metre forbidding és udynv), O. 59. — The in. 


420 SYNTAX. — ARRANGEMENT. § 720. 


fluence of these three causes was very great, and is often quite obvious, 
though its full extent and manner are now beyond our cognizance, espe- 
cially in prose. 


720. From their general want of emphasis, the following words can- 
not stand first in the sentence ; and are therefore termed in distinction 
post-positive (compare 803): the particles &v (not for éav, 619a; Ep. xé), 
dpa (not dpa, 685¢; Ep. pa, dp), ad (poet. abre) again, yap, yé, yoov, 
Sal, 5é, 4 (exc. Ep. 6) yap, 5% rére), S7Gev, Shra, Onv, wéev, pévTor, phy, 
viv (not viv: Ep. vt), obv, wép, Té, Tol, rolvuv (see 685, 701); also tis, 
and the indefinites beginning with aw (the rather for distinction from the 
interrogatives) : ‘O 6€ mwei@erai Te, kal cuANapBaver (718 n). See 518, 548. 

a. When these words naturally lead a sentence or part of a sentence, 
they have commonly the second place or the earliest place allowable ; 
and, from their frequent need of an early position and their lack of prom- 
inence, they are often permitted to separate closely related words ; indeed 
they are often so inserted to give strength or emphasis to such words. 
Enclitic pronouns are sometimes placed in like manner. E. g., “O pév obv 
tpeoBvrepos, the elder, then, i. 1.1. IILpds 6¢ &pxrov, and to the north, 
1.7. 6. “Ex dé tov (518 a). ITIpds ce Oeav (476b). See 520b, 621 e, 
699, i. (b) Some cases in which these words begin inserted clauses are not 
regarded as real exceptions to the rule: Ti ofv, tug dv elror, radra Néyers ; 
(548 b). 'Té ody, dv pain 6 Nédyos Pl. Pheedo 87 a. 


721. a. Variation of place extends to clauses, as well as words and 
phrases : “Ore dé él Baciddéa ayo, . . #xovoev ovdels, but, that he was lead- 
ang against the king, no one heard, i. 8. 21. “Ov etdes, ob rés éotw (551 ¢). 

b. A subject common to a dependent and principal clause often pre- 
cedes the connective: Ot & GAdou érecd) Frov, . . dufpracav, but when 
now the rest had come, they plundered, i. 2. 26. 

c. The adverbs &vexa and yapty commonly follow, but sometimes pre- 
cede or even divide their complements: Tis rpdcbev Evexa rept éue aperjjs, 
on account of their former service to me, i. 4. 8. See 436d, and ef. 719 a. 

d. From the various causes which have been mentioned, it results that 
words are often separated in Greek, which have a close grammatical rela- 
*ion ; and where the corresponding words would be joined in English, if 
not in most languages. 

e. For numerals, with respect to position, see 242 ; personal pronouns, 
538 f; adrdés, 540s; demonstratives, 524; tls, 548b; relatives, 551 ¢, d, 
552s; tpn, 574; &, 484; dv, 621 ; od, pH, 685c; SHAov Str, Xe., 717 b; 
"Arricfs és Olviny, &c., 418 a; Zeugma, 497. — For the minutiz of ar- 
rangement in Attic prose, the student is referred to Professor Short’s 
learned Essay, prefixed to Professor Drisler’s greatly improved edition of 
Yonge’s English-Greek Lexicon. 

f. In proportion to the use which a language makes of inflection to 
mark the offices and relations of words (63), is its freedom of arrangement 
for the impressive and melodious expression of thought and feeling. Our 
own language is consequently among those which are the most closely con- 
fined to the logical order ; and the French is confined even more closely 
than the English. Among those languages which have the greatest free- 
dom, are the Greek and Latin ; and it is to this freedom that we must 
ascribe, in no small degree, the surpassing beauty of classic composition. 
‘“It is impossible to read a page of Demosthenes, or Cicero, or Virgil, 
without seeing the immense rhetorical power which they are able to com- 
mani by a mere variation in the order of construction. It is almost 


7 a 


§ 724. PARTS OF COMPOUND WORDS. 421 


impossible to render in an analytical language the matchless force of such 
expressions as ‘Ev 6¢ pdec cal d\ecoor [P. 647], or 


“Me, me, —adsum qui feci, —in me convertite ferrum, 
O Rutuli!’’?? — arrar. 


722. Postscript to Syntax. Syntactic relations belong not 
only to distinct words, but also to the PARTS OF COMPOUND WORDS 
(3883s). They are here either internal, between the parts them- 
selves; or external, between these parts and other words. 


1. INTERNAL RELATIONS. Of the two elements which commonly 
unite in the compound, one may modify the other as an (a) adjec- 
tive, (b) adverb, (c—g) adjunct, or sometimes (h) appositive; or 
(i) one may belong to the other as an exponent ; or (}) the two may 
be coupled. The same relations appear in compounds of more than 
two-elements. LE. g., 


(a) dxpd-rodus upper city (axpns wodwos Z. 257), citadel ; Kevo-radrov empty 
tomb, cenotaph, vi. 4.9. (b) wxu-wérns swiftly flying, a-yvos unknown. 
(ce) Direct Object : Oavarn-p5pos death-bringing (Odvarov pépwv), vou.o-0érns 
legis-lator. (d) Indirect Object: ic4-0¢0s god-like (isos Oem), mod-Apns 
reaching the feet, i. 8.9. (e) Agent: Acdo-doros given by Zeus (bmd Ars), 
heaven-sent. (f) Instrument: xetpo-7oinros manu-factus, made by hand 
(xeupt), iv. 3.5. (g) Time, Place, Origin, &c.: vuxri-méddos nocti-vagus, 
night-roaming, oixo-yevys born in the house (év otkw), a&d-Aoyos worthy of 
mention (byov), mupi-yevyns fire-born. (h) larpd-pavris physician-scer. 
(i) €v-dokos in repute (év 54&y), dvO-vraros pro-consul. (j) Kado-x-ayabla 
honor and virtue, Mem. 1. 6. 14; @)-yada eggs and milk, Galen. 

k. A modifier or exponent has commonly the first place in a compound, 
except that the object of a verb often follows it: éd-«r7os horse-loving, 
pép-acms shield-bearing, wic-dvOpwmos inisanthropic. 

1. A preposition in composition with a verb modifies it like an adverb; 
while often it also governs another word (699). 


723. 2. Exrernat Revations. An element of a compotind has 
often the same relation to another word, expressed or implied, as if 
it stood by itself. 


a.) It may so govern or be modified (see 436a, b, 699a). (b) It may 
so modify or be governed ; often as a Gen. of property or relation : pjrnp 
kaXi-mrais, a mother of beautiful children (xkad@v aidwv), 6445-rpotos of 
like character, rpt-érns of three year's, wxv-mous celeri-pes, [of swift foot] 
swift-footed, waxpb-xe.p longi-manus, long-armed. In this use it often 
represents the object of an implied verb of possession : axe?s rédas éywv, 
having swift feet. (c) Each part of a compound may have an external 
relation: dudi-xiwv having pillars around it. — See 509 e, i, 708 e. 


724. Turesnotp to Book IV. “Both accent and QUANTITY 
have, and must have some play in all languages. So long as speech is 
dictated by thought and feeling, will men mark the more pregnant words 
and syllables with a superior tension of the voice. And so long as con- 
sonants remain solid, will it take a longer time to get over two of them in 
pronunciation than over one. In Greek, both accent and quantity were 
powerfully developed, so that whereas accent, the intellectual element, 
overbore quantity in prose, in verse on the other hand quantity, the 
musical element, overbore accent.” — Clyde. 


reales Te eee 


BOOK IY. 


PROS ‘Ome 


Trwoons pel\rypa. 
ZEschylus, Eumen. 





CHAPAE Raids 
QUANTITY AND VERSIFICATION. 


725. In Greek all vowels and syllables are divided, in re- 
spect to QUANTITY (i. e. the teme of their utterance according to 
the ancient pronunciation), into long and short ; and the long 
are regarded as having double the time of the short. 


a. Hence the unit in measuring metrical quantity is the short syllable, 
or the breve (brevis, short), and a long vowel or syllable is equal to t2vo 
breves. For the marks of quantity (—~), see 96 c. 

b. Quantity is of two kinds, nawtwral and local. Natural quantity has 
respect to the length of the vowel in ds own nature ; but local quantity, 
to the effect which is produced by the position of the vowel in connection 
with other letters or syllables. In éprv§, guail, both syllables are short 
by nature, i. e. in the natural quantity of the vowels ; but both become 
long by the position of these short vowels before two consonants (137 d). 

c. The quantity of a syllable is always the natural quantity of the 
vowel which it contains, unless some change is produced by position. 
Hence it is usual, in prosody, to regard the vowel as the representative of 
the syllable ; and language is often applied to the vowel which in strict 
propriety belongs only to the syllable. Thus, in dprvé, it is common to 
say that the vowels are long by position ; while, in strict accuracy, the 
quantity of the vowels themselves is not changed, but the syllables become 
long from the time occupied in the utterance of the successive consonants. 


I. NATURAL QUANTITY. 


726. Ruel. eando are short: as in époper. 


Rue 2. 7 and o, diphthongs, and all vowels that are cir- 
cumflexed, or result from contraction or crasis, are long: as in 
ipav, wAeious, Tas, Huiv, wUp* pis, dvs (156); Kav (126). 

r Coe 
{ULE 3. Other vowels are commonly short: as in xAdpvdi. 





§ 730. BY NATURE. 423 


a. All vowels which result from the union of two vowels have, from 
their very nature, a double time. See 115s. (b) To the general rule for 
the doubtful vowels (Rule 3) there are many exceptions ; which renders it 
necessary to observe the ACCENT, the special laws of INFLECTION and 
DERIVATION, the DIALECT, and AUTHORITY, by which is here meant the 
usage of the poets. 


727. A. Accent. From the general rules of accent (770s), 
we learn, that in natural quantity, 


a.) In proparoxytones and properispomes, the last vowel is short : as in 
Gpovpa, divas, wédexus* BOAaE, pases, dedpvé. 

b.) In paroxytones, if the last vowel is short, the vowel of the penuilt is 
also short ; and, on the other hand, if the vowel of the penuit is long, the 
last vowel is also long: as in pawddos, kapkivos, xAapsdos* Anda, poivié, 
KwLUS. 

728. B. Inruection. In the common affixes of declension 
and conjugation, the doubtful vowels are short, except cases of 
contraction, -a in the Sing. of Dec. 1, and aot for vot in the 
nude Present. 


Thus, Dec, 1, Gen. sing. and Ace. pl. -as, Nom. du. -a (18, 122), Aor. 
Pt. -was, -cacd (35 d), PE 3 pl. -kaot (300 a). For special rules in regard 
to the Sing. of Dec. 1, see 194s, 232s; for -éa, -€as in Dec. 3, 220; for 
nude Pres. forms in -aot, 35a, 156; for the dialectic allixes, 20, 48 a. 
For the doubtful vowels in the augment, see 278. 


729. Sprorat Ruius oF Dec. III. 1. The doubtful vowels are 
long in the last syllable of the stem, —(a) If the stem-mark is v: as, 
Tad, _-dvos, derpis, -tvos, Pipkus, -vvos (208) : except in the adjectives ué- 
Ads, -dvos, Td\ds, -dvos (23 b, d), and the pronoun ris, Tivos. (b) In most 
palatals, if a long syllable ‘precede : Owpak, -adkos, udorié, -vyos, mépoué, 
“ixos, xipvé, “Kos. (c) In words in -ts, -v80s, and in some oaytones in 
-is, os: dpvis, -ifos, Kvnuls, -tdos, opparyis, -idos. (d) In a few other 
words: as, Képas, -dros: Wdp, Wapds- ypt, ypurés. — None of these 
words are neuters in -a, -aTos: or pures, except ypats, ypdds, and vats, 
vads: or labials, except a few monosyllables, in which mw is the stem- 
mark, as piy, pirds* yoy, yirds. 

2. Monosyllabic themes are long: kis, Kids+ js, mids: ap, miipds. 
Except the pronoun ris (208d). — In accordance with this analogy, the 
neuter may (23) is lengthened. 

3. Nouns in -awv, “and in -tov, G. ztovos, have commonly the a and t 
long: émdwy, Kiwy, -ovos but AevkaXiwy, -wvos), For comparatives in 
-twv, see 260 b. 


730. Sproat Ruxes or Consveation. 1. Before the opEN AF- 
FIXES (303), — (a) a is short; except in ldouat heal, xdw, krdw (309 b), 
and sometimes in the Epic, and lyric poets for the ‘sake of the metre. 
(b) «is commonly long : Koviw cover with dust, mpiw to saw ; but dtw (¢), 
éotiw, dé6va, exiov from mivw (50). (c) vis variable : aviiw, dw, Ovw (v), 
épprny from péw (50). 

2. Be a the REGULAR CLOSE AFFIXES, — (d) In lingual and liquid 
verbs, the doubtful vowels are short: as, @pioa (39d), Kéxpixa, éxNtOnv 
(304a); except Bpidw weigh down, F. Bpicw. (e) In pure verbs, a is short, 
except when the theme ends in -d@ pure, or -pdw ; vu is commonly long ; 


424 PROSODY. — QUANTITY. § 730. 


and v variable: tomdxa, éoxéddoa (310¢, e), but etaoa, €OnpdOnv (310) ; 
érica (310), but Pbcow, Epbiuny (50) ; dviow, wépixa, Ovow, TéOvKa (310). 

3. Before the AFFIXES OF VERBS IN -pt, the doubtful vowels are short, 
except in the Ind. sing. of the Pres. and Jmpf. act., and in the 2d Aor. 
act.: Selxvijt, delxvipev, Edpav. See 313s. 

4. Before a CONSONANT STEM-MARK, — (f) In the theme, a is common- 
‘ly short, but v and v long: pavOdvw, «iva, ddvpomat; but ixdrw, Te, 
pOww (50). (g) In the guid Fut., and in the 2d Aor. (340. 3), the 
doubtful vowels are short, but in the liquid Aor., and in the 2d Perf., 
they are long : xpiv®, wrivd, Expwa, érdiva (152) 5; EXaBov, Ervxov (351. 2) ; 
érdxny, érpiByy, éotipny (347 g) ; Kéxpdya, Kéxprya, méwika (312 a): except 
2A. édynv (50, dyrine), €djdvOa, &c. (312). 

731. C. Derivation. Rute 4. Derivatives follow the 
quantity of their primitives. 

a. This rule applies to compounds, as well as to simple derivatives. 
In applying the rule, observe 366d. E. g., Onpdw, F. Onpdow, Pf. P. re- 
Onpawars Onpdo sos, Onpadwa, Onparhs, Onpards: evrimos (ev, TYAN). 

b. For the quantity of the different szfixes of derivation, see 54, 363s; 
for t paragogic, 252c. The final t in compound adverbs (381 ¢) is like- 


wise sometimes long. For the lengthening of an initial vowel in the sec- 
ond part of a compound, see 386 c. 


732. D. Diatect. The Doric a for 7 is long; and a, where 
the Ionic uses y, is commonly long (130a). See also 134. 


733. E. Avutuoriry. For doubtful vowels which are long, 
and which are not determined by the rules already given, ob- 
serve the usage of the poets, and the marks of quantity in the 
lexicons. 

a. Familiar examples are "arn destruction, émrddés follower, opparyis seal, 
Tpaxvs rough, prrapos talkative, aixta, outrage, avia (i) grief, axpiBys ea- 
act, a&ivn axe, dtvn whirlpool, Kdépivos oven, Kwéw to move, KXivn bed, Ximés 


yy = 


hunger, pixpos small, vixn victory, 8uidos crowd, ovyy silence, xadiwés bridle, 
dyxupa anchor, yédipa bridge, icxipbs strong, Kivdivos danger, \irn grief, 
mupos wheat, cdr\dw to plunder, "try forest, prr7y tribe, xpiabs gold, pixy soul. 


II. LOCAL QUANTITY. 


734. Rute 5. <A vowel before two consonants or a double 
consonant is long (725 c, 137d): as in dprvé, eAmigovtgs pay. 
_ a. This rule of position holds, as in Latin, if the consonants are wholly 
or partly in the same word with the vowel ; and commonly, also, if they 
are wholly in the next word. 
735. Exception. When the two consonants are @ mute 
followed by a liquid in the same simple word, the quantity of — 
the vowel is often not affected, especially in Attic verse. 


Norr. This exception results from the easy flowing together of the 
mute and liquid, so as to produce the effect of a single consonant. 

a. In the Attic, the quantity of the vowel is commonly not affected, if 
the mute is smooth or rough, or, if middle, is followed by p; but is regu- 


wiser eS 


§ 738. BY POSITION. 425 


larly lengthened before.a middle mute followed by p, v, or AX. Thus, the 
penult is reguiarly short in wém)os, téxvov, wérpos, tyvos, Tupdbs, aypés, 
€dpa- and long in déyua, eva, orpeBdds, as well as in the compound éx- 
peitv. (b) According to Porson, the tragic poets sometimes leave a vowel 
short before the two liquids py. 


736 A short vowel is sometimes lengthened before a single 
consonant or another vowel, especially in Epic poetry. This 
occurs chiefly in the following cases : 


a.) When the consonant may be regarded as doubled in pronunciation. 
This applies mostly to the liquids, and in the case of these (chiefly initial 
p, cf. 146) sometimes extends even to Attic verse: Alodov [as if -odA-] «x. 
36, d€ védos A. 274, modded Aroooudvyn H. 358, ewe pérov Soph. O. T. 847, 
péya pdxos Asch. Pr. 1023 ; "édeucas X. 19, ‘dSynxdres K. 98 (in such cases, 
some double the 8, and others suppose it to have been once 6F). 

b.) Where F has been dropped (138s): ya'p €0ev [Fé0ev, 27 f] I. 419, 
Kév é kives X. 42, mpo's olkov [Fotxov| I. 147. — Yet the Epic sometimes 
gives the digamma, if indeed used, only the force of a breathing (98 e). 

c.) Before a masculine ceswra; and sometimes, without a cesura, by 
the mere force of the arsis (745 c, 741): dvoua.: Otrw t. 366; ard bev 
[réGev] Z. 62, aroépon P. 283, ‘dPdvards ws ¢. 309, Ovyarépa i KE. 371. 

d. In Hexameter verse, one of three successive short syllables, a short 
between two long syllables, and a short syllable at the beginning of a line, 
must of necessity be made long. The second case sometimes occurs in the 
thesis. HK. g., amovéecOar &. 46; “Ackdnwiod dvo B. 731 (cf. *Ackdyme9d 
vidv A. 194), “Hws ‘6 ra 0’ A. 193 ; "Hmesdy (€) X. 379, Aid wey T. 357 (cf. 
Kal dtd 358), “Apes, “Apes E. 31. See other examples above. (e) Hence, 
in this verse, a vowel does not become long before { or o« beginning a 
word of which the first syllable is short and the second long: O7 ré Zd- 
xuvOov B. 634, 7€ cKérapvoy v. 391. 


_ 737. Rue 6. A long vowel or diphthong at the end of a 
word may be shortened, if the next word begins with a vowel. 


a. In the thesis of Hexameter and Pentameter verse, this shortening is 
the general rule : ‘Huerép@ évl olk@ év”Apyet A. 30. les, 6 wev Kredrou, 
665 dp Evptrov, ’Axropiwves B. 621. (b) This rule does not apply to the 
Jambie and Trochaic metres of the drama, as there the hiatus is scarce 
allowed. (c) Rarely, a long vowel or diphthong is shortened before a 
vowel in the same word: éumdioy v. 379, olos (ct) N. 275, retodros Soph. 
Ph. 1049, defAdios Ar. Pl. 850. See also 252. 

d. Some explain this shortening by supposing the long vowel (n, 
w, = ee, 00) or diphthong to be half elided before the following vowel 
(otko év) ; or the subjunctive of the diphthong to be used with a conso- 
nant power (€u7ayor). 


738. Kure 7. The last syllable of every verse is common. 


a. That is, the metrical pause at the end of the verse renders the 
quantity of the last syllable indifferent ; and it may be regarded as either 
long or short according to the metre. This pause also admits a hiatus 
which would be elsewhere avoided. (b) In some kinds of verse, how- 
ever, the scansion is continuous ; i. e. the verses are formed into systems, 
at the end of which only this freedom is allowed, the preceding syllables 
being all subject to the rules of prosody, as though in the middle of a 
verse. 


426 PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION. § 739. 


739. a. In giving the rules of quantity, position should not be ad- 
duced, unless some change has been made from the natural length of the 
vowel. For convenient distinction in metrical analysis, a vowel whose 
quantity is to be referred to Rules 1 and 2 may be said to be long or short 
by nature ; to Rule 38, by the general rule (i. e. for the doubtful vowels) ; 
to Rule 4, by derivation; to Rule 5, by position (t. e. before two con- 
sonants, or a double consonant) ; to Rule 6, by position before a vowel ; 
to Rule 7, at the end of the verse. When the quantity is not determined 
by pon rules, cite special rules; or if these do not apply adduce 
authority (733), cesura, arsis, the necessity of the verse (736d), & 

b. In respect to quantity, both natural and local, the different dialects 
and kinds of poetry vary greatly. The greatest license appears in Epic 
poetry, which arose before the laws and usage of the language became 
fixed ; and the least in the dialogue of comedy, which conformed the 
most closely to the language of common life. Of elegiac, lyric, and tragic 
poetry, the two former approached more nearly to the Epic, and the lat- 
ter to the comic. 


III. VERSIFICATION. 


740. Greek verse is founded upon RHYTHM ; i. e. the regular 
succession of long and short quantities. 


a. Elementary combinations of syllables, showing the rhythm, are 
termed FEET (as if steps in the rhythmic movement) ; regular combina- 
tions of feet, VERSES (versus, a ¢wrn) ; and regular combinations of verses, 
STANZAS, STROPHES, or SYSTEMS (744). For a table of feet, arranged in 
classes according to their metrical length, see 77. Feet of the same class 
are termed tsochronous (icbxpovos, of equal time). 

b. A single foot, taken by itself, is called a monopody (mobs, foot) ; 
a combination of two feet, a dipody; of three, four, five, six, &c., a tri- 
pody, tetrapody, pentapody, hexapody, &c.; of a foot and a half, a triemim 
(rprnutuepys, of three half-parts) ; of two and a half, three and a half, four 
and a half, &c., penthemim, hephthemim, enneémim, &e. See 745c. 

c. The Pyrrhic, lamb, Choree, Spondee, Bacchius, and Peon appear to 
have been so named from their use in the war-dance (ruppixn), in invec- 
tive (idrrw, to assail), in the choral dance (xopés), in solemn rites (orovdn, 
libation), in the worship of Bacchus, in poeans; the Trochee and Proce- 
leusmatic, from their rapid movement (rpéxw to run, mpoxehedw urge for- 
ward) ; the Tribrach, Amphibrach, Amphimacer, Choriamb, Diiamb, Di- 
trochee, and Dispondee, as consisting of three short syllables (Spaxvs, 
short), of a short on each side of a long, of a long on each side of a short 
(waxpés long), of a Choree and Iamb, of two lambs, &c.; the Dactyl, from 
its containing, like the finger (ddxrvdos), one long part and two short 
ones, or from the use of the finger in keeping time or measuring ; the 
Anapest and Antibacchius, as the Dactyl and Bacchius reversed (dvdmrac- 
aros, struck back); the Antisps ist and Dochmius, from their opposite or 
irregular movement (dvricmacros drawn opposite ways, dbxmtos oblique) ; 
the Epitrite, as containing still an addition to the third long foot ; while 
the Cretic, Ionic, and Molossus are of local origin. 


‘*Trdchée | trips from | long té | shért. 
From long to long, in solemn sort, 
Slow Spon|dée stalks ; | strong foot ! yet ill able 
Evér to | c6me tp w ith | Dactyl tri|syllablé. 
lam|bies march | from short | td long. 
‘With a léap | and @ bound | thé sw itt An|apeists ae 


Coleridge. 





§ 742. _ RHYTHM, FEET, ARSIS. 427 


741. The long syllables are naturally pronounced with a 
greater stress of the voice than the short. This stress is 
termed ARSIS, (dpors, elevation), while the alternate weaker tone 
is termed THESIS (O¢o1s, depression). These terms are also ap- 
plied to the parts of the rhythm which are thus pronounced. 


a. The arsis (also termed metrical ictus or rhythmic accent) is here 
marked thus (', ’, or to indicate greater force, 

b. As one long syllable is equal to two short, the partial substitution 
of | _ for _| in the arsis (resolution), and of — for ~ ~ in the thesis (con- 
traction), may be made without affecting the rhythm. In this way, as 
the short syllables have more vivacity, ease, and lightness, and the long 
syllables, more gravity, dignity, and strength, the poet has the power of 
greatly varying the expression of the verse ; while, at the same time, the 
facility of versification is very much increased. 

ce. In the common kinds of verse, the metrical ictus is determined by 
the prevailing foot. Hence in Trochaic and Dactylic verse, every foot 
receives the ictus upon the jirst syllable ; while, in lambic and Anapestic 
verse, every foot receives it upon the second, except the anapzest and pro- 
celeusmatic, which receive it upon the third. (d) In Iambic, Trochaic, 
and Anapzestic verse, the ictus is commonly stronger upon every other 
foot ; and the verse is consequently measured, not by single feet, but by 
dipodies (740 b). 

742. The simplest and most familiar rhythms are those in 
which a long syllable alternates with one, or with two short 
syllables (t1-~+-+~, or +~-1+~-~1~VL). In the latter, 
the thesis is equal in time to the arsis, and the rhythm is 
termed equal or quadruple (-~~ = 4 breves, 725 a); but in 
the former, the thesis is only half the arsis, and the rhythm is 
termed triple (-~ = 3 breves). 

a. Of these, the equal is the more stately in its movement, and the 
more appropriate to those kinds of verse which are farthest removed from 
common discourse ; while the ¢riple has more nearly the movement of com- 
mon conversation, and is hence better adapted to the more familiar kinds 


of-verse, and to dialogue. Even the same rhythm has a different expres- 
sion, according as it begins with the arsis or the thesis. In the former 


case (Dactylic + _~-_-|1t-VL, and Trochaic + | +~), the movement, 
passing from the heavier to the lighter, has more ease, grace, and vivacity ; 
in the latter (Anapestic ~~ +|--~1, and Jambic ~+ |), the move- 


ment, passing from the lighter to the heavier, has more decision, empha- 
sis, and strength. 
b. Other rhythms are formed by doubling the arsis, by prolonging the 
thesis, or by variously compounding simple rhythms. Thus, by doubling 
| ! 


feeerca, we obtain the rhythms —! L110, and tt LL, 
Of these, the first, according to its division into feet, is Cretic L | +04, 
Bacchic ~-11|-1t, or Antibacchic 1/11; and the second, 
momembic 4.,.1)| 11, Antispastic to | tt, Rising 
agers 6) 5.) 1.1. or Falling lonic . | +t. (¢) Verses, 


in which the equal and triple rhythms are united, are termed logaadic 
(Adyos discourse, dowdy song, see a). The most irregular kinds of verse 
are termed polyschematist (rodkvoxnudtioros, multiform) and asynartete 
(douvapryros, disjointed). 








A228 PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION. STA 


743. Verses are named, —(a) From the prevailing foot: Jam- 
bic, Dactylic. (b) From some poet who invented or used them, or 
the species of composition in which they were employed: Alcaic, 
from Alczeus; Sapphic, from Sappho; Heroic, as used in singing the 
deeds of heroes. (c) From the number of measures (i. e. feet, or 
dipodies, 741d) which they contain: monometer (jovdpetpos, of one 
measure), dimeter, trimeter, tetrameter, pentameter, hexameter. (d) From 
their degree of completeness; thus a verse is termed catalectic (kara- 
Anye, to end abruptly), when its last foot is incomplete; brachycata- 
lectic, when it wants a whole foot at the end; acatalectic, when it 
has its just measure; hypercatalectic, when it has one or two sylla- 
bles beyond; hypermeter, when it exceeds in any way its just meas- 
ure; acephalous (adxépados, headless), when it wants a syllable at the 
beginning; anacrusic, basic, or syncopated, when affected as below. 


e. A long or short syllable or pyrrhic is sometimes prefixed to a lyrie 
rhythm beginning with the arsis. This is called an anacrisis (avdxpovots, 
striking up). A similar prefix of greater length is called a basis (a term 
sometimes applied to any monometer; Bdous, step); and a similar affix, 
an ecbasis (stepping out). These additions are often, but not always 
counted in stating the measure of the line. (f) In the drama, exclama- 
tions often occur extra metrum (i. e. not included in the metre): Ped! 
Eur. Alc. 536. Tig; Soph. O. C. 315. Tarawa! Ib. 318. 

g. Metrical syncope is the omission of a thesis in the middle of a 
rhythm ; where we may suppose the time to have been supplied, as in 
modern music, by a rest, or by dwelling longer upon an adjoining arsis. 
See 749 a. 

h. <A catalectic verse is said to be catalectic on one, or more syllables (in 
syllabam, in dissyllabum, &c.), according as the imperfect foot has one, 
or more syllables. Dactylic verses ending with a spondee or trochee (738) 
are by some regarded as acatalectic, and by others as catalectic on two 
syllables ; e. g., the common Hexameter (748). 


744. Metrical composition is either in MONOSTICHS, SYSTEMS, OF 
STANZAS. (a) Monosticus (“ovdatixos, of a single line) consist of the 
same verse repeated, as in Hexameter verse (748), lambic Trimeter 
(756), &c. (b) Systems are formed by the repetition of similar 
rhythms, with continuous scansion (as if a single long line, 738 b) 
and an appropriate close. (c) Sranzas (also called strophes) are 
formed by the union of different kinds of verse. A stanza of two 
lines is called a distich ; of three, a tristich ; of four, a tetrastich. 


d. The most common systems are easily arranged in dimeters, with 
here and there a monometer ; and close with a dimeter catalectic. See 
752,758, 742. 

e. The Greek choral odes were written in stanzas of very varied struct- 
ure, but commonly arranged in duads or triads (sometimes in tetrads or 
pentads). A duad consists of two stanzas, corresponding in metre through- 
out. Of these, the first is termed the strophe (crpopy, turning round, 
stanza), and the’second the antistrophe (avricrpoph, cownter-turn or -stanza). 
A triad consists of a strophe and antistrophe, preceded, divided, or fol- 
lowed by a third stanza of different metre, which according to its place is 
termed protde (apd before, wd ode), mesode (uésos middle), or epode (ért 
after). . Of these, the epode is far the most common. The odes of Pindar 
are written each in a peculiar metre, but nearly all in strophes, anti- 


§ 746. KINDS OF VERSE. CSURA. 429 


strophes, and epodes. In the same ode, the strophes and antistiophes 
are all written in one metre, and the epodes all in a second, different 
from the first. In the drama, on the contrary, the metre of one duad or 
triad is not repeated in a second. 


‘745. Cxsura (credo, to cut) is the cutting of the metre by 
a division in the sense. It may be (a) of the foot, or (b) of the 
verse. In the former, a foot is cut by the ending of a word; 
in the latter, a verse is cut by a pause permitted by the sense. 


e. This pause, which is often slight, is called the cawswral pause ; and 
the syllable preceding any csura, the cwswral syllable. When this syl- 
lable is pronounced with the arsis, the czesura is termed masculine ; with 
the thesis, feminine. A cesura in the second foot is named triemim, from 
the portion of the verse which has preceded (740 b) ; in the third, penthe- 
mim; in the fourth, hephthemimn; &e. 

d. The cxsura of the verse (often called simply the cwsuwra) is more 
frequently, but not necessarily, a ceesura of the foot. A prominent ex- 
ception is the cesura often occurring in Hexameter verse after the fourth 
foot (which is then commonly a dactyl), named the bucolie or pastoral 
ceswra from its prevalence in pastoral poetry. See also 757, 761. (e) When 
a foot-cesura separates the arsis from the thesis, it is hkewise termed a 
cesura of the rhythm. (f) A verse-ceesura is sometimes allowed between 
the parts of a compound word: Kai uw ot|re wedet||yAwooors | mevBots Asch. 
Pre t72: 

g. Composition in verse consists of two series: the metrical series, di- 
vided into feet and verses ; and the significant series, divided into words 
and sentences. These two series must, of cgurse, correspond in their 
great divisions ; but if this correspondence is carried too far, it gives to 
the composition a disconnected, mechanical, and spiritless character. 
The life and beauty of poetry depend essentially upon the skilful and 
varied interweaving of the two series, producing a continuity in the one, 
where there is a division in the other. The cesuras not only contribute 
indispensably to this ; but also show eminently the art of the poet, and 
afford a grateful relief to both voice and ear. ‘ 

h. The coincidence of the divisions of the metrical series with those of 
the significant series is termed diwresis (dtalpeccs, division). The most 
important diewreses are those at the end of verses, systems, or stanzas. 
A foot-divresis occurs whenever the division of words corresponds with 
the division of feet ; so that a verse-cesura may be a foot-divresis (d). 

i. The expression of the verse is affected by the place of the cesura. 
In general, the earlier cesuras give to the verse more vivacity ; the later, 
more gravity. The most frequent cesura is the penthemim. The effect 
of the cxsura in producing metrical variety will be seen by observing that 
the two most common metres, the Hexameter and [ambic Trimeter, are 
divided by the two most common csuras, the penthemim and hephthe- 
mim, into two parts, having the ratio of 5 and 7, of which (with the par- 
tial exception produced by the feminine cesura in the Hexameter), the 
one always begins and ends with the arsis, and the other with the thesis. 


746. a. Hrarvus between words was admitted the most freely in 
Epic poetry, where however it may be often removed by the insertion of 
the digamma (98 e, 99 b). It was the most studiously avoided in Attic 
poetry, especially in the Tragic Trimeter (756), where it was scarce al- 
owe, except after the interrogative rl, and some interjections, or words 
used in exclamation: OU éyé! é@yd! Aisch. Ag. 1257, 


ee Te 


430 PROSODY. —— VERSIFICATION. § 746. 


Synizests (117). b. In Epic poetry synizesis is very frequent, espe- 
cially when the first vowel is €; thus, €d, €g, €ai; €0, €0l, €0U; Ew, Ew: 
IIln\niddew, xpvocéw alvd, A. 1, 15; see 27f, 197 ce, 222b, 323. We find 
more rarely ae; ta, (ai, im, %, 10; 003 va, voi; &c. Synizesis sometimes 
occurs between two words, when the first is 4, 4, 54, wh, émel, or a word 
ending in the affix -yq or -m@: i ovx E. 349, 5% byd00v 7. 261, érrei od 
5. 852, Indetdn €0eN A. 277, aoBéord, odd’ P. 87. 

e. In Attic poetry, synizesis occurs chiefly in the endings -ews, -ewy, -ea 
of Dee. 3 (220d); in a few single words and forms (as #eés Eur. Or. 399) ; 
in the combinations 7 od and pj od, regularly pronounced as one syllable ; 
in some other combinations in which the first word is 4, 4, ph, éret, or 
éyo: wip eldévae Eur, Hipp. 1335, éwel ovdév, éyw eiw Soph. Ph. 585. 

d. In SCANNING, observe not only the division into dipodies and feet, 
but also the arsis or metrical ictus (741), and the verse-cesura (745). 
Unless these are carefully marked, the metrical character and expression 
or the verse are, to a great extent, lost. (e) In the following exhibition of 
metres, the division of feet will be marked by a single bar ( | ); the divis- 
ion of dipodies by a double bar (||); the verse-ceesura by an obelisk (7 ), 
sometimes doubled ( ¢ ) ; and sometimes the omission of a syllable by a 
caret (a). An anacrusis will be denoted by A, and a basis by B; and 
of syllables metrically long or short (whether by nature or position), the 
former will be printed in full-face, and the latter in common Greek type. 
Latin analogies will be less abundantly given, because the common metri- 
cal system in the Latin was avowedly borrowed from the Greek ; though, 
in accordance with the Roman spirit of law, its rules were stricter. 
Horace thus boasts : 

Princeps Holium carmen ad Italos 
Deduxisse modos. — Od. 3. 30. 


A. Dactytic VERSE. 


747. The place of the fundamental dactyl is often supplied 
by a spondee (1_~-~ =+-). See 741 b. 


748. 1. The common HEXAMETER or HEROIC VERSE consists 
of six feet, of which the first four are either dactyls or spon- 
dees, the fifth commgnly a dactyl, and the sixth always a 
spondee. 


a. When the fifth is a spondee, the verse is termed spondaic, and has 
commonly an expression of greater weight or dignity. ‘This oceurs most 
frequently when the verse ends with a word of four syllables. (b) The 
favorite cesura of the verse is the penthemim (the ‘‘herote cwsura”), 
which is almost equally masculine and feminine (745). After this, the 
most frequent cesuras are the masculine hephthemim (often preceded by 
a triemim), and the pastoral (745d). (c) Even when the penthemim is 
not the principal verse-cesura, it is yet seldom wanting as a foot-cesura. 
It is stated, that in the first book of the Iliad, 290 lines have the masea- 
line penthemim, 315 have the feminine, and only 6 have neither. 


d. ScHEME AND EXAMPLES. 
°F 2. 3. 4. 





PRP 


§ 750. DACTYLIC VERSE. 431 


"ANG KajKGs adi|n, t kpare|pdv 5° él | pddov eredrev. A. 25, 
Hi kév | ras dpjvev xvilons t ailyov ve rejAelwv. A. 66. 
Lrépuar é|yov ev | xepoly tT éjxnBddov | AmdAl|A@vos, A. 14. 
Ba 6€ car’ | OvAtp| ovo Kap|qvev, + | Kwduelvos Kip. A. 44. 
Arma vilrimqué cajno ¢ Trd!jee qui | primis ab | oris. Virg. 


Coleridge's *‘ Homeric Hexameter Described and Exenvplified.” 


Strongly it | bears us ajlong ¢ in | swélling and | limitless | billows, 
Nothing be|fore and | nothing be|hind, + but the | sky and the | ocean. 


749. wu. The Execrac Pentamerer consists of two dactylic pen- 
thnemims (740 b), the first containing two dactyls or spondees with 
a ceesural syllable, and the second, two dactyls with a final syllable. 
It commonly alternates with the Hexameter, forming what is termed, 
from its early use in plaintive song, the Elegiac Metre. 


eee ed Pe Sc Ee 
sy ian peal | | 
Hixoud|v@ por | KrXd0, t kalKas 5 dd | kfpas &|AaXke - 
Zol pev | roto, dela, T | oprxpdy, é|pol dé wélya. Theog. 13. 
Néscid | quid ma|jis ft | nascittir | llia}de. Propertius. 
‘In the Hex]ameter | rises f the | fointain’s | silvery | célumn ; 
‘In the Pen|tameter | ayet|falling in | mélody | back. Coleridge. 


a. This verse is strictly a syncopated catalectic hexameter (743) : 
! 


tere | A pt Lt A 

750. 1. Other Dactylic Metres are, (a) Pure, consisting of 
dactyls only; (b) Impure, consisting of dactyls and spondees; 
(c) olic, containing, in place of the first foot, a basis or anacrusis 
(743 e); (d) Logacdie (742), in which dactyls are united with 
trochees. Thus, 

1. Dimeter. 

(a) Mvorodd|xos S5uos. Ar. Nub. 303. 
(b) Avonic (L-_ | +—). Tdrva, | Otpov. Sapph. 1. 4. 
Terrtit | trbém. Hor. Od. 1. 2. 
(b) Hypercat., Dactylic Penthemin. ‘Adpi\evra éjpov. Alsch. Sup. 844. 


2. Trimeter. 
(b) ILodra yap | dor’ dxkd|pavros. Soph. Tr. 112. 


(c) PHERECRATIC (B. | + | +—). "Eddelat pidov | Arop. Pind. O. 1. 6. 
Vix dijraré ca|rinie. Hor. Od. 1.14. 
GLYCONIC. Td ody | Tor rapd|Seyp’ éxwyr, 


(B.|LLL|LoW_) Tov ody | Satuova, | rov ody, & 
TrAdpov | Otéird|Sa, Bpordv. Soph.O.T.1193. 
Possiint | impérijdsits. Hor. Od. 1. 14. 
(d) Marw 6}ra.pi|youn’ dv. Asch. Pr. 907. 
(a) Hypercat. TLoAda Bpo|r@v dia jpeBoud|va. Asch. Sup. 548. 


3. Tetrameter. 
(a) ALCMANIAN. Mao’, dye, | Kaddcdja Ovya|rep Acds. Alem. 36 [4]. 
(b) Spondaic. Zeds rodv|dvopos | audi yulvarkds. Alsch. Ag. 62. 
(c) TAvkd|aixpoy d|pdxavoy | Sprerov. Sapph. 20 [37]. 


“ep ee eee oer ee) ees 


432 PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION. § 750. 


(J) Greater Atcatc (A.| ao Le) LoS 
K4B| Padre | rov yel|pov’, él | pev riBeis. Ale. 27 [34]. 
Dis|sdlvé | frigis, | hgna sti|per focd. Hor. Od. 1. 9. 
LESSER ;ALOAIO. (ou ot oe ee 
Xpvooxd| pa Lept|pw uilyea. Ale. 5 [24]. 
Et folijis vidtijantur | orni. Hor. Od. 2. 9. 
(2) Hypercat. Tov peya|Awv Aavajav tro | kAyfoudvlav. Soph. Aj. 225. 





4, Pentameter. 


(b) “Arpel|8as paxi|pous, t éda|7 Aayo|Salras. Asch. Ag. 128. 
(c) Otvos, | & dire | mat, t \éye|Tat, kal d|AdGea. Theoc. 29. 1. 
(l) *Q wodus, | @ yeve|a Ta|Nawa, | viv ce. Soph. El. 14138. 
SAPPHIC .(. Coe of eee 
Ai 5€ | Sapa | pry déxer, | Ara | SGce. Sapph. 1. 22. 
Jam sa|tis ter|ris nivis | atqué | dire. Hor. Od. 1. 2. 
PHALG@CIAN AB.) Jo) ee a ee 
Tov Aelovroud| av, tov | 6&0] xepa. Theoc. Ep. 20. 





5. Hexameter. 


(a) IIpés ce ye|verddos, | & pidos, | @ doxi|poraros | “HAAdd. Eur. Sup.277. 
(b) *AAN o& | wavrollas Pird|ryros dl|peBduelvar xdpw. Soph. El. 134. 
(c) KéXo|pat ria | rov xapijevra Mé|vwva xa|Neooa. Alc. 49. 

(d)"H radrd|pa rut | trav dvod|Awrov €|Ay Tis | dpxdv. isch. Pr. 165. 


B. ANAP#STIC VERSE. 


751. The place of the fundamental anapest is often sup- 
plied by a spondee or dactyl, and, very rarely, by a proceleu- 


smatic ee a ee eS eee 


752. 1. The Anapestic, from its strong, even movement, was a 
favorite metre for marching songs; and was greatly employed in 
systems, by the dramatic poets, as intermediate between the lambic 
of the common dialogue, and the lyrie metres of the choral odes. 


Nore. The general distinction (to omit modifications and exceptions) 
was this: The Iambic portions of the drama were spoken while the per- 
formers were stationary ; the lyric, while they were dancing ; and the 
Anapwstic, while they were coming in, or going out, or marching to and 
fro. 

a. These systems are scanned continuously (738b), but are usually 
arranged so far as convenient, in dimeters (whence the common name of 
this species of verse, the ANApa&stic Dimerer). They uniformly close 
with the dimeter catalectic, called, from its use in proverbs (wapouulat) the 
poremiac verse (744d). The parcemiac, however, is not confined to the 
close of regular systems. (b) This verse requires a ceswra after each 
(dipody, except in the parcemiac. This ceesura is sometimes deferred, so 
as to follow a short syllable at the beginning of the next dipody : 

“Hrep | dopityt||ros t é7 Hv | Aouwh. Soph. Aj. 146. 


ce. Ina regular system, (a) An anaprest must not follow a dactyl in the 
same dipody, and rarely follows it in successive dipodies. (B) A dactyl 
rarely follows an anapest or spondee in the same dipody. (y) The third 
foot of the pareuise is regularly an anapest (but with an occasional 


§ 755. ANAPESTIC VERSE. 433 


spondee) ; so that the system may close with the cadence of the common 
Hexameter. (d) Less regular systems occur in passages of strong emotion, 
especially grief. 


e. Dimeter Acatalectic. f. Paroemiac. 
fa 2. 3. 4, Ihe 2. 3. 4, 
eee Fy pk a RSS Cd 
Latah AGS iy ee EAM pase | (he) 
oe SB ag ne sass Ks | 

















"AA o 6 | Matas f || wopmattos dvag 
Tlehaoet|: Sipors, t || @v 7 éxli{youay 
ArebSas | karéyov t || med§er{ xs, émel 
Tevvat| os dvijp, 
Aiyed, | rap’ épol || dedskn{oat. Eur. Med. 759. 
Though her éye { shone out, ¢ || yet the lids | were fix’d. Byron. 
I énjter thy gar|jden of ré{ses. Id., from the Romaze. 


753. wu. The combination of the regular dimeter with the pa- 
roemiac (cf. 757, 761) forms the ANapastic TETRAMETER CATALECTIC 
of comedy, also called, from its use by the great master of comic 
verse, the Aristophanic. 


{ Ui { 


eee ye PLS TPC Ut Lt tT Cp: &e 


Ti yap e¥{Satpov f || kal uaxalpvordy f || paddov | viv éo||re Sunac| rod, 
“Hi rpude|parepor, 7 || 4 Salvirepov ft || Laov, | kal tad|\ra yépov| res. 
First in pléas{ure and glée, 7 || who abowind | more than wé ; £ || who with 
hix{ury néar|ler are wéd{ded ? 
Then for pan|ic and frights, Tf || the world throigh | none excites, ¢ || what 
your dijcast does, é’en || tho’ gray-héad{e. 
Ar. Vesp. 550, trans. by Mitchell. 


754. ir. Examples are added, from lyric poetry, of other kinds 
of Anapeestic verse, both common and legawdie (742 c): 


Monom. Hypere. Tpicodvp|riovl||kay. Pind. O. 13. 1. 

Dim. Hypere. Tére pév | repioa||usraros | cal dpio||ros. Eur. Herc. 1018. 
Locaawpic. 1 An.,1 lam. Neuég | dé rpls. Pind. N. 6. 34. 

1 An., 3 Jam. Cat. Maxapt| fowév | ce, rérjrié. Anacreontic. 

1 An., 3 fam. Acxdper|fa kal | Geav | yévos. Ar. Thesm. 312. 

1 An., 4 lam. Cat. Xapitwy | &kalre rév{de kelwov. Pind. O. 4. 14. 
2An.,1Jlam. Td pev’Ap{xi\dyovu | uddos. Pind. O. 9. 1. 

2 An., 2 Iam. Cat. ’Odcyoldpaviav | dkul|xuy. Alsch. Pr. 547. 

2An., 3lam. Zuvéxve|s ddsun{ros 7 | dovd ; | wiOev; Eur. Ion 1447. 
3 An., 2Iam. Aodepov | u2v del | kara mév|ra 84 | tpdmov. Ar. Av. 451. 
4An.,1lam. “Léra|rc ydpwv, | dre trav | duomd|tpiov. Esch. Pr. 558. 


C. JamBic VERSE. 


755. The place of the fundamental iambus may be sup- 
plied by a tribrach (- + = ~~ ~), except at the end of a line. 
To add dignity and variety to the verse, the jirst foot of a di- 
pody (where the arsis is less strong) is very often lengthened 
to a spondee, and not unfrequently to a dactyl or anapeest. 

REY. GR. 19 BB 


434 PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION. § 755. 


a. Comedy admits the anapest in every place except the last of a verse 
or system ; and also tragedy, when it is wholly contained in a proper 
name. 


756. 1. The Jampic Trimeter Acatatectic (also called, from 
the number of its feet, the Senarvus) is the principal metre of 
dramatic dialogue (752). 


a. This verse has for its ceesura the penthemim or, much less frequent- 
ly, the hephthemim. The latter is sometimes anticipated by the elision 
of the syllable after which it would properly fall, forming what has been 
termed by Porson the quasi-ceesura. Lines occur, though rarely, which 
have neither of these ceesuras. 

b. The Tragic Trimeter admits the tribrach in every place but the last ; 
the spondee in the Ist, 3d, and 5th places; the dactyl in the Ist and 3d ; 
and the anapest in the Ist. The feet which are admitted only in proper 
names or in comedy (755 a) are placed, below, in parentheses. 


af 2. 3. 4, 5. 6. = 
c. lambus, «72. lS Mo a Se — BL eee 
Tribrach. Lop o flo t lo |e 
Spondee. — + and gk — + 
Dactel eS =) 


Ananmst, os Bors Se 





*Eyd | 5° droA||uds et|uc t ovy|iyevq | Oedv. Asch. Pr. 14. 
OoptBw | re ricv||vos tT Ké| uae? || mappn| cia, 
TIcBavds | €7' ad||tods + wepi|Gadetv || kako | rev. Eur. Or. 905. | 
"Av8ou| cr yoty || Tov "Iax|xov tf Sv||arep Acaly’pas. Ar. Ran. 320. 
Qué, quo | scélés||ti riit|tis ? t aut || etir déx|téris. Hor. 
Wild-war|bling Najture, t all | abdve || the réach | of ‘Art. Thomson. 





757. uu. The Iameic TerrRaAmMeter Caracectic is peculiar to com- 
edy. It consists of two dimeters, the second catalectic (ef. 753, 761); 
and has commonly a czesura after the first. 


i 7m oe 4, 5. 6. a 8. 

ee ead ! Ie tii) ieee RB ie 
Ry Brees Wann yess | een ees ee eee: Ae | 
pone ee gal — a 
—+~ — LL —t~ in proper | 
tle ale |e tll c+ | oC | 


"Orov | xdpw || 6 Sea|rirys Tt || 6 ods | KéKAy||Ke Seb]p0. Ar. Pl. 260. 
Auré|ra ris|jes 6’er | the hills, ¢ || by grace|ful Hours || atténd}ed. Percival. 


a. This metre (following of course accent and not quantity) is a favorite 
verse of modern Greek poetry. In our own language, it is chiefly used in 
ballads and comic songs. 


758. im. The Iambic verse sometimes occurs in sysTEMS of the 
common form (744 d): 
Taorpt| fe kat || tots év|répots 
al rots | «dXots, 


Xdrws | KodG || Tov dvjdpa. Ar. Eq. 454. 


§ 763. TROCHAIC VERSE. 435 


759. iv. Examples are added, from lyric poetry, of other kinds 
of Iambie verse (for logacedic examples, see 754) : 

Monom. Hypere. ‘Eroi| os tp\vwv. Pind. P. 6. 7. 

Tripody. “YLaeor|ri pot | Opdwos. Soph. El. 479. 

Dim. Cat. Ode | Aéyetv || ’Arpef|5as. Anacreontic. 

Dim. Hypere. v tot, | ov ror || katy] Elalloas. Soph. Ph. 1095. 

Trim. Cat. “Os ai|tv drép'loyoy | c0évos || kparar|5v. Ausch. Pr. 429. 

Tetram. Tav Set| i trra\\rav, Sejrt 5 eb|lpotoayv | rpds at/Palpwv | rdOn. 
Soph. O. C. 1077. 

Scazon (cxdgwy, limping), or CHOLIAMBUS (XwNlauBos, lame Iambus), a 
form of the Trimeter, introduced by Hipponax, and having, for sa- 
tirie or comic effect, a spondee in the last place. 

‘O pou! cotroullds t év{9dd° ‘Imrevag | ketrat. Theoc. Ep. 21. 


D. Trocuaic VERSE. 


760. The place of the fundamental trochee may be sup- 
plied in any part of the verse by a tribrach (+~ = LY ~~). 
The last foot of a dipody (where the ictus is less strong) is 
often lengthened to a spondee or anapest. In proper names, 
the dactyl is admitted in some places. 





761. 1. The Trocnarc Terrameter Catatectic occurs in both 
tragedy and comedy. It consists of two dimeters, the second cata- 
lectic (753, 757); and has commonly a ceesura after the first. 





a a 3. 4, 5, 6. fi 8. 
al ' JL ! bi oa D I La 
TET TRS) Beier ees ck Soave Sen | Looe 

t— aif ni 
| ap Sens | ee 
2) ee 6 ee epee + _ — in proper names.) 


ILoAXa| xd cxollrotvres | Fpas t || els C|rav’ eblipqce| re 
Tots tp!|movs Kal || Thy &:|arav t || opnélv | eudellperrd|tovs. 


Small re|{léction || and in| spéction, t || néeds it, | friénds of || mine, to | sée, 
‘In the | wasps and || us your | chérus, ft || wondrous | stmillari|ty. 
Ar. Vesp. 1101, trans. by Mitchell. 

762. wu. The Trochaic verse sometimes occurs in systems of 

the common form (744 d): 
*Qv ro|Sotpuer, || dv7l | rotTwv 
THvde | vuvi 
Tv Ge|dv mpoolletralre, Ar. Pax 579. 


763. wt. Examples are added, from lyric poetry, of other 
kinds of Trochaic verse (for logacedic examples, see 750) : 


Tripody (IrHyrHauuic). Tdavrpo|pos we|Aeds. Aisch. Th. 294. 

Trim. Aapi|o dallvav évjappdgijar we|SiAm. Pind. O. 3. 9. 

Trim. Cat. ‘Tw yap | év woviirw xu|Bepvaviirat Polat. Ib. 12. 4. 

Tetram. “Kore | por ellav €|xare || pupija mav|ira xéjdevdos. Pind. I. 4.1. 


a. Syncope sometimes explains a seeming interchange of Iambic and 
Trochaic rhythm (748g): Bodv: i, » KAder BBodocrdtar, Ar. Nub.1155, 


436 PROSODY. — LYRIC VERSE. § 764. 


E. Orner METRES. 


764. The metres which remain are Lyric, and for the most part 
admit with great freedom isochronous feet, or the substitution of 
two short syllables for one long, or of one long for two short. Ex- 
amples are given of some of the most important: 

a. Cretic System. Ppdyricov | kal pit 

(L-1) Ilaviixas | etoeBis | mpcéevos, 
Tav dvydda | ph rpoSes. Asch. Sup. 418. 


b. Bacchie Tetram. Tis &x, | ris 68a | rpocérra | uw ddeyyts. 
(rae Esch. Pr. 115. 


L Der asin System, closing, as is frequent, with a bacchius. 
a We Noy 8¢ roy ek | OjueTépov 
Tupvaciov | \éyew re Set 
Kawiv draws | pavqoe. Ar. Vesp. 526. 


S, 


d. Rising Ionic System. Tlemépaxev bev 6 mepot| rods 48y 
Cae —~-+-+) Bacideos | orpards eis &v|rimopov yeljrova xapayv, 
Awostcpw | cxediqa tropl|udv dpehpas. isch. Per. 65. 


. Peonic Tetram. Cat. *Q paxdpe | Adrdueves, t | Os ce waxajplfouer, 
[os TIatdas épv|tevoas dre t | Yerporexvi| K@Tdrous. 
Ar. Vesp. 1275. 


ie) 


765. f. An Antispast, combining an iambic with a trochaie rhythm, 
admits in the first part any foot which is admitted into lambic verse, and 
in the second any foot which is admitted into Trochaic, each with the ap- 
propriate ictus. The addition of a long syllable (which may be resolved 
into two short) forms the Dochmius ; which has consequently a triple ic- 
tus, with great variety of structure (thirty- two forms having been ekki! 
and is adapted to the expression of great agitation. Thus, )2 te 
QoL; 8) 8 Lili; (obo 


Dochmiac System. Me@etrar crpatos | crparsredov \uTrayv, 


(CL LO+) ‘Pet rordvs dd Neds | rpddpouos trméras. 
&e. Aidepia xévis | ne welBer paveio’, 


“Avavdos, caps, | Eruuos dyyeAos. Aisch. Th. 79. 


C TUASPsT hs 
ACCENT. 


766. In every Greek word, one of the three last syllables 
was distinguished by a special tone of the voice. 


1. This tone is commonly spoken of simply as the tone, or the accent. 
Its precise nature we cannot now determine. It seems to have resembled 
what is called accent in English orthoépy, but with important differences. 
That it never receded bey ond the ante penult, shows that the Greeks felt 
the same difficulty in the utterance of a long train of syllables after their 
accent which we feel after ours. See also 788 i i. 


§ 767. PRINCIPLES OF ACCENT. 437 


2. The versification of the ancient Greeks was founded upon quantity 
without regard to accent ; that of the modern Greeks is founded upon ac- 
cent without regard to quantity. We cannot resist the conclusion from 
this, that in the ancient language the distinction of quantity was the 
more prominent to the ear ; while in the modern language the reverse is 
strikingly true (791i). Iti is evident, however, that the distinction of ac- 
cent was the more intellectual in its character, — more marked by the un- 
derstanding, if less by the ear. 

3. The accent, even if not regarded in pronunciation, is still useful, as 
serving, —(a) To distinguish different words, or different senses of the 
same word: elui to be, eiue to go; 6 the, 6 which (249¢) ; wore; when? 
moté once; adda other things, ad\r\4 but; \uBoBdros throwing stones, d.05- 
Boros stoned (386. 1). (b) To distinguish different forms of the same 
word : Opt. éx-Avoa, Inf. éx-Adoa, Imv. €x-Avoa, (387 f, h). (ce) To aid 
in ascertaining quantity (727). (d) To show the original form of a 
word : thus the circumflex over Tiu, PiXG, Sn, marks them as contract 
forms of Tiudw, pirdw, dnAdw. (e) To show how a word is employed in 
the sentence ; as in cases of anastrophe, and where the accent is retained 
by a proclitic or enclitic (785s). 

4. Authorities and critics differ upon some of the minute points of ac- 
centuation, as of other grammatical subjects, in both Greek and English. 


767. a. Ina final or initial, and often in an intermediate 
syllable, a long vowel is treated in accentuation as consisting 
of two vowels (108, 115), and thus forming two tone-places 
(i. e. places in respect to accent). (b) But final -a and -ou in 
affixes are regarded in accentuation as short vowels, except in 
the Optative. 


c. By long vowels, in accentuation, are meant those that are long by 
nature, including diphthongs ; and by short vowels, those that are short 
in natural quantity, without regard to their position (725). 

d. It is not strange that this treatment of final -ar and -ot should have 
at length resulted from the natural hurrying of the voice over such familiar 
endings. It appears not to have prevailed in the earliest form of the lan- 
guage, or in the Doric, which was marked by its closer adherence to old 
usage (790a). The remains of that usage also appear in the acceutuation 
of so many Inf. forms upon the penult (780); though the circumflex is 
not here excluded. The exception in the Opt. is explained by its pro- 
traction to express contingence (272d). 

e. The Greek grammarians adopted an ascending line (’) as the mark 
of an accented place, and a descending line (*) as “the mark of an unac- 
cented place. A syllable in which an unaccented followed an accented 
place was entitled, of course, to a double mark (’* ). 

f. In counting tone-places, the ultima is counted as the first place if 
its vowel is short, but as the first and second if its vowel is long. If the 
ultima forms two places, the penult makes the third, and completes the 
number allowed. If the ultima forms only a single place, then a short 
vowel in the penult forms the second ; and a jong vowel the second and 
third. One of these, however, a long penult often gives up to the ante- 
penult, contenting itself with a single ee Thus the antepenult forms 
the third place, if the ultima and penult are both short by nature ; and 
often also, if the ultima is short and the penult long. No account is 
taken of any place beyond the third, or beyond the accent if this is sooner 


438 PROSODY. — ACCENT. § 767. 


reached. In the following words, which are all accented on the highest 
place, the several places would be thus numbered and marked : 
u 21 21 eee 3 21 321 32 1 8 21 82 1 
Gés, mils, SdAds, S6A0d, SdAOl, Tatpdd, Tddpds, TadpOl, Exotouls, Exddod', 
ae eg 3 21 3821 32° 4 8 21 8 “2a eee 
exdvoal, wohkéovs, wdAtwos, wodAeuol, avOpardls, dvOpambs, “vBoarrol. 
g. It is evidently needless, except for grammatical illustration, to mark 
unaczented syllables, and when the two marks (‘*) fall upon ‘the same 
syllable, it is more convenient in writing to unite them into one (4, or, as 
rounded for greater case in writing, ~v or ~). Dropping, therefore, the 


marks over the unaccented syllables, and uniting the double marks, we 


write thus : 
és, rats, SdXos, SdAov, SdA01, Tavpov, Tatpos, Tatpot, Exovoats, Exotica, 
éxotcoat, Todeuwous, méAcuos, wéAcuor, avOparrots, dvOpwios, dvOpwrror. 


768. <A syllable or vowel is termed grave, if it has no ac- 
cent ; curcumflexed, if it forms an accented followed by an un- 
accented place ; acute, if it forms an accented place not so fol- 
lowed : as the final syllables and vowels in Avpa, vjgos, Aiw* pva, 
THs, OeG, Bod, yuTav, Tind*+ @dn, Td, dv, at&, alyds, epol. 


OXYTONE, ( Acute. 
Perispomg, > if its Ultima is ~ Circumflexed. 
A word is | BaryTong, j | Grave. 


termed PAROXYTONE, | <p: . { Acute. 

: if its Penult is< 4. 
PROPERISPOME, f{ Circumflexed. 
PROPAROXYTONE, if its Antepenult is Acute. 

a. The terms above, and those applied to the marks of accent (94), are 
formed from the Greek and Latin words réves acecentus, tone, 6&vs aciitus, 
sharp, TE PLOT WiLEVOS circumflexus, bent rownd, Bapds gravis, heavy, mapa 
beside, and mpé before. (b) The paroxytones, properispomes, and propur- 
oxytones are all included in the general class of barytdénes. See § 5. 

ce. The oxytones are all accented on the first tone-place ; the perispomes, 
on the second ; and the properispomes and proparoxytones, on the third. 
The paroxytones are accented on the second place, if the last vowel is short ; 
but on the ¢hird, if it is long. See 767. 


769. The accent is termed jinal, when it falls upon the 
ultima. According as it goes back from this, or forward to- 
wards it, it is said to recede or advance. When it recedes as 
far as the general laws permit, it is termed recessive. When it 
retains the same place as in the theme, so far as these laws 
permit, it is termed retentive. 


a. The useful term recessive was introduced by Professor Hadley. — 
Upon the principles which have now been stated, are founded the follow- 
ing general laws. 


I. GENERAL LAws OF ACCENT. 


770. Law I. The acuTe accent cannot recede beyond 
the antepenult; and cau fall upon this, only when the ultima 
is short. 


— 


§ 772. GENERAL LAWS. IN VOWEL CHANGES. 439 


a. Hence the accent of dvoua name, tpdrefa, &yyedos (15s), must ad- 
vance in the Gen. to the second syllable: dviuaros, rparégys, ayyédouv. 
For rpdmefas. d&yyero., see 767 b. 

b. In accentuation, e€ before w in the endings of the Gen. and of the 
Attic Dec. 2is not regarded as forming a distinct syllable (1201, 200, 
220 ce): henee, “Arpeidew, morews, rérAewv * evyews. So, in some compound 
adjectives, even with an intervening liquid: as, Adyedws, BovKepws 
(237 b), 6Usepws- and, according to the same analogy, a few compounds 
of wddar long ago, as Exradat, wpdradar. 

c. Final § and , making position after a short vowel (734), forbid the 
acute on the antepenult, though not the circumflex on the penult (this 
seeming not so great a remove from the end of the word, 767f): hence 
éptparak, -a cos, though épiB» os, fertile. In the old language, as in the 
Doric, the length of the ultima by posdtion as well as by nature seems to 
have been more generally regarded. Even after the dropping of + in the 
3 Pers. pl. of verbs, some forms of the Doric retained the old accentua- 
tion : as, (¢pépovr) Epépor. 


771. Law Il. a. The crrcumriex can only fall upon a 
long vowel. (b) It cannot recede beycnd the penulé ; and can 
fall upon this, only when the last vowel is short, — (ce) being 
the only accent which a penault long by nature can then receive. 


Hence, (a) Bods, uds, was (19, 23), become in the Nom. pl. Bées, paves, 
mavres: (b) wvia, wodca, vicos (15s), in the Gen. wilds, wovons, vicov: 
(c) até, Ono (17s), “Arpeidns (15), in the Nom. pl. atyes, Ojjpes, Arpetdac 
(767 b). For paris, dare, el0e, vaixt, &c., see 787 e. 


II. AcceNT IN VowEL CHANGES. 


772. <A. Contraction. Law III. In contraction, the 
acute followed by the grave produces the circumflex : véos voids, 
daréov darovv (16), riudw time, prr€ey pirciv (42). 

1. Otherwise the accent is not affected by contraction, except as the 
general laws may require: rivae tipo, ruaérw TULdTe, TiuaolunY TLLMENY- 
éorasros €oraros (261, 771c). See 120s. , 

2. Some contract forms are accented as though made by inflection 
without contraction ; or fall into the analogy of other words. Thus, 

In contracts of Dec. 2, — (a) The accent remains throughout upon the 
same syllable as in the theme: edvoos, edydov, cont. edvovs, edvov (Nom. pl. 
etvo or ebvor, 767), kind. (b) The Nom. dual, if accented upon the 
ultima, is always oxytone: vé, dor (16). (ec) Except in the Nom. dual, 
all simple contracts in -ovs or -ovv are perispome: xptseos Ypucots (23), 
kdveov Kavodv, basket. —(d) Oxytones of the Attic Dec. retain throughout 
the accent of the theme: veds, ved, ve (16 ; but some write, in Dat. sing. 
and Gen. and Dat. pl., ved, vey, veds) ; dyjjpws, dyjpw (22). Cf. 120e. 

In contracts of Dec. 3, — (e) The Ace. of nouns in - is oxytone : 74a 

X4 (19a). So Dat. xpwri yxp@ perispome (207a). These cases follow 
the analogy of 775. (f) The contract Gen. pl. of rpejpns (213 ¢), adrdpxns 
self-sufficing, and some compounds in -48ys and -é8ys is made by some 
paroxytone : as, Tpinpéwy tpifpev, airdpkwy, ev7nOwy, evwiwr. 

g.) The Subj. and Opt. pass. of verbs in -p. and preteritives are accented 
by some without regard to their contraction: thus, ri@wuat, rlOy, rlOnrat, 





440 ACCENT IN DECLENSION. § 772. 


Yaraio, didorro (45 .¢) 3 xexrwuat, wéuvnro (317 ¢). (h) This is usual in the 
deponents divawat, érlorapar, kpéuapat, and the 2 aorists dvac@at, mplacbas 
(50). 1t sometimes occurs in the Act. of verbs in -pi: as €&-(y for é&-c7. 

3. In the resolution or extension of a vowel, a circumflex is resolved 
into its acute and grave (767 g): ma?s wdis, pos ddws (105 a, 103 b). 


773. wb. Crasis. In crasis, the accent of the jirst word is lost ; 
while that of the second remains without change, except as required 
by 77lc¢: ravré for 7d adrd, kay for kal dv, kav for Kal év, rédXa for 
ra ddAa (yet some write rd\Aa). See 125s, 


774. o. Apostroruz. The accent of an elided vowel is thrown 
back upon the penult, except in prepositions and conjunctions: deiv 
én for dewa ern, kat eve (kata}, adn eyo (ad\Aa) See 128. Except 
also the enclitics wore and tua, for distinction from awére; and tiva; 

a. In other changes of vowels, or of consonants into vowels, general or 
special laws often require a change of accent: edpén for evpeta (134); €arar 
for #vras (329 a): Képow kepéw kep@ (152). 


III]. AccENT IN INFLECTION. 


775. Law IV. A long affix of declension can only take the 


acute in the direct, and the circumflex in the inderect cases. 


a. Hence, 5%, -fjs, -7, -7v (15) ; xopod, -@, -@v, -ots, -obs (16) ; yumday, . 


-oiv (17). (b) Except in the peculiar datives éwol, mol, cot (27a). See 
also 772d. 


776. Law VY. The accent is RETENTIVE in declension ; but 
RECESSIVE in comparison and conjugation: adv, aod, aa (16); 
kakés, Kakiov, kaxiatos (260 a); Avw, EAvov, AéAvKa (37). 


777. A. Decrension. 1. In Dec. 1, the affix- wy of the Gen. pl. 
is circumflexed, as contracted from -awy (197 c): tpdmela, rpamefav. 

Grammarians except, chiefly, for distinction from other words, 7 agvq 
anchovy, ot érnoia trade-winds, 6 xovvns wild-boar, and 6 xphoryns Usurer ; 
Gen. pl. adpivwv, &c. See also 2. 

2. In adjectives in -os, the feminine is accented throughout, so far as 
the general laws permit, upon the same syllable as the mase.: thus, f- 
dios, pirid, friendly, Pl. pirior, Piheac, Gen. masec. and fem. PiAiwy (as if 
a common form for the two genders, ef. 234b, d; the Dor. Gen. pl. in -ay, 
where the fem. has a special form, being perispome, as Atay, 197 e) ; 
while, from the noun 7 @giAla, friendship, piriat, pPriiav: so KapBdriwae 
iv. 5. 14, as properly an adjective. (a) In other adjectives, the fem. re- 
tains the accent of the theme, but subject to the same changes as in nouns 
of Dec. 1: wéd\as, wédXawa, pmedaivys, medawav (22). Except poetie femi- 
nines in -ea, belonging to adjectives in -hs (235 c): jpvyevys, jpvyévera. 
(b) Observe the accent in ula, wrds, pig, play (25). 


778. 3. In Duc. 3, dissyllabic Genitives and Datives throw the 
accent upon the affix. 
a. Hence, from yi, &e. (17s), yuros, alyi, warpds, dvip&v, xvol, apvi. 


b. Except those which have become dissyllabie by contraction, participles, 
and the Gen. pl. and dwal of these teu nouns, das, Suds, Ods, Kapa, ods, 





§ 782.] IN CONJUGATION. 44] 


mais, is, Tpds, Pps, POs (light), and of the adjective. 72s (also Dat. rac, 
23): wédci adder (19), Eapos pos (209 a) ; Sivros, Oévri, S0ct (26) 3 waldwy, 
gsrwy, Grow (17). (c) The contraction is not regarded in accenting the 
Gen. and Dat. of ofs (19d), ofs, ordap, poéap (207 ; yet see b), and Opaé 
(G. -«ds). (d) Observe the accentuation of oddels (following e@s, 25), ris, 
Tis (28), yuv7 (203 a), Ovydrnp (210 b) ; and of datives in -dow, from liquids 
(145a). (e) The Attics are said to have made the Gen. pl. of numeral 
substantives in -ds perispome : pupradsey, as if contracted from the Ton. 
pupradéwy (221b). (f) See the poetic dovpwy, yovrwr, and ydvwv (21, 224¢). 


779. 4. The natural tone of frequent address gives RECESSIVE 
ACCENT to the Voe. in a few familiar words: as, Dec. 1, deomdérns, master ; 
Dec. 2, ddedpis, brother; Dec. 3, yuv4 (208 a), "Amwdd\d\wy, &e. (208 f) ; 
Voc. déorord, ddeXpe, yivat, “Amwo\Xov. So in compounds in -yyr7n, 
-ratnp: V. dtounrep . 97, aivdaarep Asch. Ch. 315. 

a. In the Voc. sing., -ev and -ou final are always circumflexed : ined, 
Axor (19). 

5. From the tendency to recessive accent in comparatives and com- 
pounds (795), the Voc. and Neut. sing. forms are so accented — (b) In 
most compound paroxytones in -ey and -ys, except those in -dpwr, -wons, 
-WNS, -HpNS, -wons, and -érys: evdaliuwy fortunate, Neut. and Voc. evdar- 
pov av0ddns seif-willed, N. and V. avOades+ “Ayauduywr, V.’Aydweuvor: 
V. Dwxpares, ‘Hpdxdees (19). So a few other neuter adjectives, when used 
adverbially : &AnSes ; really ? rpieres B. 106. (c) In comparatives in -ov: 
Hdiwy, Hotov. 

d. Recessive accent appears also in some Nom. forms in -a for -ys 
(197 b): evpvora. (e) Observe the accentuation of ujrnp, Ovydrnp, Anuy- 
Typ (210b). (f) In the forms in -du, -h, -ev (190s), the accent usually 
falls upon the penult if this is short, but is otherwise retentive. (g) For 
the irregularities and peculiarities in the accentuation of the numerals and 
pronouns, see 25, 27s. 


780. Bb. Consucation has exceptions to the law of reces- 
swe accent ; chiefly in the /nfinitive and Participle (as partak- 
ing of the noun and adjective). 


1. These forms are accented upon the pENULT:— (a) All Infinitives 
in -at not preceded by -8- or -pev- : ADoat, NeAUKEvat, AVOFvar, TIEvae* but 
AVoagOa, TiWecOa (37, 45), Oéuevar (333). (b) The 2 Aor. mid. Inf.: Xe- 
mwécbat (38), amo-dsc0a (451); but mpiacda, wvacOa (50, cf. 782f). 
(c) The Perf. pass. Inf. and Part.: NeAGoOar, NeAvuevos ; except a few pre- 
teritive participles, as jjuevos (46c). In a few Epic forms, this recession 
of the accent extends even to the Inf.: dxdynoOac T. 335, dxaxtevos (50). 
(d) Dialectic infinitives in -pey: d&éuev, NavOjuev (333). 


781. 2. These forms are OXYTONE : — (a) Participles in -s, Gen. 
-Tos, except in the Ist Aor. act.: AeAuvKws, AvOels, iords, Sods: but Adoas 
(37, 45). (b) The 2 Aor. act. Part.: Nerdy (38). (c) The Pres. partici- 
ples (as if 2 Aor.) iby (45m), xudbv (fr. kw go, poet., II. 263), édv E. 1. (50 
efui a). (d) The 2 Aor. Imv. forms eiwé say, €XOé come, edpé find ; and in 
Attic, i€ sce, and \aBé take ; except in composition, as é&-eXOe, elo-cde. 


782. 3.. These forms are PERISPOME : — (a) The 2 Aor. Inf. in -ew: 
Auretv (38), (b) The 2 Pers. in -ov, of the 2 Aor. Imy.: Aurod (38), Gob, 
dod (45 i) ; except in compounds of more than two syllables from verbs in 
=, as dawr5dov, but wpod09. The manuscripts show also some exceptions 
in compound and even in simple verbs in -a. 

REY: Gk. 19% 


44.9 ACCENT IN CONJUGATION AND CONSTRUCTION. § 782. 


Norrs. c. That the final accent in the preceding forms should be 
acute on the theme of the Part., and circumflex on the Inf. (considered as 
a Dat., 666 b), is in accordance with Law LV. (775). (d) The circumflex 
in AvdG, tor, TOGpat, 6B, AvOetev, ioraiev, TiMeto (37, 45), and like Subj. 
and Opt. forms, is due to contraction (772). (e) Monosyllabic forms long 
by nature, except Participles, are generally circumflexed: ef, qv, 7, dv 
(451); ox, oxe-v, oxav (50 Exw). 

f. In those forms in which the accent of the Perf. and 2 Aor. differs 
from that of the Pres., a want of uniformity has sometimes arisen from 
different views in regard to their etymology. Thus, 2 Aor. forms are 
sometimes accented as Pres.: as Inf. efxddew, cy ébew, Pt. eixddwv, cxé0wr, 
for -etv, -Oy (853.a) ; EvecOar (épéoOar Bek.) y. 248. 


783. a. The accent of a verb in composITIon can never recede 
beyond a prefix (789 c) ; or beyond the nearest syllable of the preposition : 
thus, éwéxw (él, Exw, 50), éwetyov, éréoxov, érlaxes. (b) The preteri- 
tive ot8a (46) is treated as without reduplication: ovv-oa. (c) The 
accent of eipf recedes in composition only in the Pres. Ind. and Imy.: 
év-eoTt, map-tche* but é&-éorae (as if syncopated from écerat), wap-@ (as 
contracted, 50 eiut d), map-av. 

d. For the accent in cipl and npt, see 45, 787¢; for Ketpar, 50. 
Other examples of ¢trregular or various accentuation are xph, éxpiy (50 
xpdwd); 1 Aor. Imv. eizrov or ecirdév (50 pyyuic) ; eds or els (50, etui 1), ddov 
as exclam. (50 épdw); forms noticed in 316¢; &e. 

e. The Ionic, in dropping one ¢€ from -éeat, -éeo, does not change the 
accent: thus doBéo (323 e). So Dor. cupicdes, cvpicdev (326 a). 


lV. Accent IN CONSTRUCTION. 


784. A. Grave Accent. Law VI. Oxytones, followed by 
other words in closely connected discourse, soften their tone, 
and are then marked with the grave accent (*): Brparyyov b€ 
avrov améderEe (480). Et ra xadd kal dyaén. 

a. Except the interrogative tls (253 a), and words followed by enclitics 
787). 

» The terms acute and oxytone are still applied to the syllable and 
word, although the tone is softened. Syllables strictly grave are never 
marked, except for grammatical illustration, as in 767. In the applica- 
tion of this law editors vary. The best usage retains the acute accent 
only in the case of unconnected words or phrases, and before the period, 
colon, and such other pauses as require to be distinctly marked in reading. 


785. B. AnastropHe. In prepositions of two short sylla- 
bles, the accent commonly recedes to the penult, when they 
follow the words which they would regularly precede, or take 
the place of compound verbs: thus, 

Lodlas mwépr, about wisdom, Pl. Phil. 49a (the like placing of other prep- 
ositions is poetic) ; BdvOw emi duwijevre E. 479; dd\éoas &tro- for darodéoas, 
having lost, c. 584 ($ 699j); ava, mdpa, tv (699e). This recession is 
termed dvacrpopyH, turning back. 

a. Some so write wept and awd when used adverbially : mépe (rept Bek.), 
execedingly, 1. 53. (b) Grammarians except 6d and avd (except for avd- 





§ 787, ANASTROPHE, PROCLITICS, ENCLITICS. 443 


or7or), to distinguish them from the Acc, Afa, and the Voc. ava (21, 17d). 
(c) If the preposition suffers elision, anastrophe holds only before a pause, 
or for emphasis: doru kdr’+ a’rdp p. 246. (d) Both in anastrophe and 
in the common accentuation of prepositions (794. 5), the attraction of the 
accent towards the word upon which the preposition expresses its force 
will be observed. 


786. C. Procritics. Ten monosyllables, beginning with 
a vowel, are called proclitics (mpoxXwa, to lean forward), because 
they commonly so lean upon the following word as to lose their 
proper accent. They are the aspirated forms of the article, 
6, 7, of, ai, and the particles ov not, eis into, ev in, && out of, e Wf, 
@s as. 


a. These forms of the article are written with the accent, when used in 
Epic as relative, aud by some, when used as personal pronouns: 6. . HAu- 
Ges, who camest, B. 262; 6ydp, but 6 yap Bek., for he, A. 9. (b) The 
proclitics retain their accent when they close a sentence, or in poetry 
follow a word whose relation they denote (718 d), or are followed by an 
enclitic : od djra, no, indeed, but ras yap ot ; how not? ws Bdes, but Bdes 
as x. 299, as kine; éx xaxGv, but caxdy € &. 472, from the base ; et more, 
af ever. (c) The proclitics have been less happily termed atdna (toneless). 


787. D. Encuitics. Law VII. The accent of an enclitic 
falls, as acute, upon the ultima of the preceding word, or upon 
its penult if it is a paroxytone, uniting with any accent already 
upon the syllable : as, 


“AvOpwrot te, héminés-que, and men, detésv por, shiw me; et wore 
(786 b) : Oedy tis (548 c) ; dvjp tus (784a) ; Pidros pov, my friend ;  pa- 
vv pot te mifoo (705a; each enclitic throwing its accent back). — But 
see 788 d. 

Knelitics are so named as leaning in pronunciation upon the preceding 
word (€yxXivw, to lean upon). They are these familiar words of one or 
two syllables: (a) These oblique cases of the personal pronouns : 1 Pers. 
pod, pol, pe: 2 P. cod, col, cé- 3 P. ov, of, €- viv, olor, opé For 
other enclitic forms of the personal pronouns, see 27f, g. (b) The in- 
definite pronoun tis, through all its cases (but not drra); and the in- 
definite adverbs wh, wot, ob, 7H, Tas, TOOl, roy, toré (53). (c) The 
Pres. ind. of eipt to be, and dypt to say, except the 2d Pers. sing. ; and 
even here in the Ep. form eis: vamids els, stultus es, «. 273. (d) The 
particles yé, viv (vi), mép, Té, Tol, with the poetic Oqy, Ké, pa, and the in- 
separable -8é. 

e. Some familiar combinations of this kind are commonly, and others 
sometimes, joined in writing, and viewed as compounds: ere, #rot, wires, 
boris (observe the accent, 28h), ovdérore, dorep, dore. (f) The prep- 
osition -8€, fo (688 e), is always so attached : "O\uurdvde, S5uovde. (g) In 
pronouns and adverbs compounded with -8€ (252, 531x.), the syllable 
preceding -8€ always takes the accent, which is acute or circumflex accord- 
ing to the law in 775. (h) In éya, épol, and épé, the accent is drawn 
back when yé is affixed (389 c) : @ywye, Euovye, Eucye. (i) Hi@e and valyt 
are accented as ending in enclitics ; and olxade (225 i) as a single word. 

j. For a poetic retraction of the accent in some pronouns when they 
are not emphatic (approaching an enclitic use), see 247 g, i. 





444 ACCENT. — ENCLITICS. § 788. 


788. An enclitic retains its accent, (a) At the beginning of a clause 
or verse, or after a parenthetic insertion: ypl yap, for Tsay. (b) After 
the apostrophe: moddol 6 elotv, but they are many. (ce) If it is emphatic 
or strongly reflerive : ob Kipov, adda oé, not C., but vou. (d) If it is a 
dissyllable, preceded by a paroaytone, or by a properispome in -§ or ~ 
(770c): dvdpes twés, some men. (e) If it is a personal pronoun, preceded 
by an orthotone preposition which governs it and is not itself more em- 
phatic: mapa wot, repl cot, mpods “oé: but éml ce }} obv co, against you 
rather than with you, vii. 7, 32.. Yet mpds we (sometimes ce) iti. 2. 2; 
and some exceptions occur, chiefly in the poets, with other prepositions. 

f. When éori is prominent in the sentence, it becomes a paroxytone 
(as at the beginning, when it expresses existence oY possibility, and com- 
monly after such words as 08, ph, aNd, et, Kat, Ort, as, todro) : "Horw ot 
(559 a) ; ore Kap Bdvew, one can take, 1. 5. 3; tTodr’ éarw, tt is so. 

¢. A word which neither /eans upon the following nor upon the pre- 
ceding word, but stands, as it were, erect, is called, in distinction from 
the proclitics and enclitics, an orthotone (ép0érovos, crect in tone). 

h. Most of the rules about enclitics are explained by applying the gen- 
eral principles of accent to the two words considered as united, but with 
the accent on the first word permitted to remain. 

i. Both proclitics and enclitics are more abundant in English than in 
Greek, and these classes of words furnish another strong analogy between 
the Greek and the Eng. accent (766. 1). The words in Eng. which are used 
in translating the Greek proclitics and enclitics are themselves, for the 
most part, either proclitic or enclitic. Thus, in the sentence, Give me the 
book (pron. Géivme thebdok), the pronoun me is enclitic, and the article 
the, proclitic. In the sentence, Jf Johi’s in the house, don’t tell him a 
word of this, the words If, in, the, a, and of are proclitics, and the words 
ds, not, and him, enclitics. 


VY. AccENT IN FORMATION. 


789. Genxprat Principte. In each word, the accent be- 
longs to that syllable won which the attention is most strongly 
aed. — If, from the general laws of language, this syllable 
cannot receive the accent, it draws it as near to itself as pos- 
sible. 

1. In the origin of language, the attention is absorbed by the greater 
distinctions of thought ; but, as these become familiar to the mind, it 
passes to the less, and then to those that are still subordinate. Hence, 
in the progress of a language, its accent is subject to change, as well as 
the form of its words, its vocabulary, and its constructions. In the 
Greek, as in other languages, the accent originally belonged to the sylla- 
bles containing the essential ide as of words, 1. e. to their radical syllables. 
But, in proportion as these became familiar, there was a tendency to 
throw the accent upon those syllables by which these ideas were modified, 
either through inflection, derivation, or composition. Compare ypddw T 
WRITE, with eypapov J WAS writing, yéypada I HAVE written, ypaph the 
ACT of writing, ypapts and ypadetov the INSTRUMENT of writing, ypapets 
the PERSON who writes, ypapuKes SUITED fo writing. 

2. This tendency would of course vary greatly in different classes and 
forms of words. It would naturally be the strongest where the root was 


§ 791. IN FORMATION. 445, 


the most familiar ; or where the formative part was the most significant or 
characteristic. On the other hand, any strengthening of the radical, or 
weakening of the formative part, would have a tendency to produce a con- 
trary effect. 

3. In illustration of these tendencies (which of course are subject to 
the general laws of accent), it will be observed, that, — (a) In neuter 
nouns, the affix, from its inferior importance, very rarely attracts the 
accent (792i, 793d). (b) In demonstrative pronouns, the deictic -de 
always draws the accent to the preceding syllable (787g), and the still 
stronger -t (252.c) always takes it upon itself. (c) In verbs, the accent 
is always attracted by the augment, while it can never pass beyond it 
(783a). (d) The old weak stem of the 2d Aor. yields the accent to the 
affix in several cases where the strengthened stem of the Pres. retains it 
(780s). (e) In derivative adjectives, those endings which express most 
strongly character or relation attract the accent (792s). (f) In composi- 
tion, the accent is usually attracted by that word which defines the other, 
and thus gives its special character to the compound (722k, 795). In the 
active compound verbals, the idea of the action is more prominent than in 
the passive ; and hence appears to have arisen the distinction in 386. 1. 


& 

790. That the different dialects should have often varied in ac- 
cent will occasion no surprise“in those who have compared the pronuncia- 
tion of our own language in different parts of its native isle. That these 
differences are often neglected in our copies of the classics has arisen from 
the late period at which the marks of accent were introduced (93 b), and 
the tendency at that time to conform every thing to the Attic standard. 
From the testimony of the old grammarians we learn, that, — (a) The 
Dorie was characterized by its adherence to general rules and old usage 
(767d, 770c). (b) The Lesbian Aolic was characterized by its tendency 
to throw the accent as far back as possible. In words of more than one 
syllable, it is said to have admitted the accent upon the ultima in prep- 
ositions and conjunctions only. (c) The Attic (which the Ionic appears 
to have more nearly approached) was characterized by an expressive va- 
riety of accent, and a greater inclination to mark the minuter shades of 
thought and species of relation. 


791. The accent of the THEME IN DECLENSION, and of UN- 
INFLECTED woRDS must be learned from special rules and from 
observation. 


Nore. For derivatives, the marks of accent in § 363 —- 382 should be 
carefully noticed. The rules below are not intended for proper names. 


A. Special Rules for Simple Words. 


1.) Or Dec. I. All contracts are perispome : ‘Epufjs, wd. Of other 
words, — (a) Those in -as are paroxytone: rayuias. (b) Most in -ns are 
paroxytone, except verbals in -rys from mute and pure stems of verbs in 
-@, Which are commonly oxytone : “Arpeténs (so all patronymies in -8ys), 
vauTns, Pats, wpopiyrns, mpoorarys:* dikacrys, months. (c) Nouns in 
-a short (194) have recessive accent: puid, uodod, rpdmefa, adjOed. 
(d) Most abstracts in -va, those in -ovvyn, and those in -eta from verbs in 
-ebw (363, 367), are paroxytone: godia, cwppoctyn, madeld. (e) Most 
other verbals in -a long or -y, especially those formed after the analogy 
of the 2 Perf. (366d) or from stems of more than one syllable, are oxy- 
tone: pvyy, POopd, pudaxy. 


446 ACCENT. — IN SIMPLE WORDS. ¥ 792. 


792. 2.) OF Dec. Il. (a) Adjectives in -os preceded by a mute are 
commonly oxytone, especially those in -xos, verbals in -ros, and ordinals 
in -oT0s: Kkaxis, dpxyixss, dparss, elxoords, xaderds, copss, Sodiyds, ayabds. 
So verbal nouns in -og denoting the agent: dpyds, tpop!s. (b) On the 
contrary, in prinvitive nouns with a mute stem, the accent is more frequent- 
ly recessive: xfjos, KpdKos, wodTos, Wduabos. (c) All ordinals not end- 
ing in -wros have recessive accent: ééxaros. (d) Adjectives in -Xes, -pes, 
aud -ves (except those in -ives denoting material or country, 375 ¢, e) are 
commonly oxytone: daarndés, pedwrSs, Wur!s, aioxpss, poBepds, wovnpss, 
Avyupis, xAwpss, ceuvis, wedwds, Kusixynvis, Lapéravis: Etdwos, Tapavrivos. 
(ce) Nouns in -pos with a long penult are commonly oxytone ; while in 
adjectives in -pes the accent is commonly recessive: éduppts, Boudss~ xpr- 
owos. (f) Nouns in -es pure are more frequently oxytone : vals, eds, 
vids, vuss, (g) Verbals in -reos (374 f), numerals in -atos and -thoos 
(240), and most adjectives in -atos from nouns of Dee. 1, in -eves, and in 
-wos, are accented upon the penult: aonréos, durdlos, ayopatos, 61ro%os, 
évos. (h) Adjectives in -eos, in -tos preceded by a consonant, and in -eos 
joined immediately to the root, have commonly recessive accent : OApevos, 
ovpdvios, xptceos. (i) Very few neuters are oxytone ; and in most neuters 
the accent is recessive (789 a): wdptov, mornpiov, Koptd.ov, Spveov, @darov. 
But a diminutive in -tov, forming a dactyd, is commonly paroxytone : 
mavolov. 


793. 3.) Or Dec. III. (a) Nouns in -ay, -eus, -@, -ws -00s, -as 
-ades, -is -tS0s, masculines in -yp, and almost all nouns in which the. 
stem-mark is v preceded by a, €, y, or t, are oxytone: ma:dv, lreds, 7x0, 
aidws, Aaumds, -dOo0s, opparyis, -tdos, 6 maTHp, Amity, -évos, ety Hv, -Hvos, 
deApis, -ivos. (b) Nouns in -ewv, names of months in -@y, and most 
feminines and augmentatives in -wv, are oxytone ; other words in -@v are 
more frequently paroxytone: kuxewy, “AvOeornpiav, xedOwy, dumehwv- 
Kpoviwy, TpiBwv, khvdwy. (ce) Monosyllabic nouns which have the Ace. 
in -a are commonly oxytone ; those which are neuter (see d), and most 
which have the Ace. in -v,perispome : aié, rovs, Onp, Oas- Td POs, TO Ip 
(so likewise the adjective was, may, 23); Bods, vats. (ad) In neuter nouns 
(789 a), in words in -€ and -, in verbals in -rwp, and in nouns in -ts or 
-us with the Gen. in -ews, the accent is recessive : Képas, Tetxos, Boveuma - 
xopaé, kadadpow (770 c) ; dvvaues, wédexus. (ce) Female appellatives in -ts 
(365, 368s) have the accent upon the same syllable as the maseuline, 
except when this is a proparoxytone or dissyllabie barytone (in which case 
the feminine commonly becomes oxytone): avAnris, avdyrpis > moXirys, 
montis * IIpiauldns, IUpiauis: aixuddwros, aixuadwris: Iépons, Iepots. 
(f) Simple adjectives are commonly oxytone, if the stem-mark is a vowel ; 
paroxytone, if it is a consonant: capys, ndvs: médas, Xaplecs (2238). 


794. 4.) Apverps. (a) Adverbs in -ws derived from adjectives 
are, with very few exceptions, accented like the Gen. pl. of their primi- 
tives (38la): cops, Tayéws. (b) Derivative adverhs in -Sov, -8a, -1, -e, 
and -€ are commonly oxytone; those in -8yv, -akts and -, paroxytone 
(381s): rAwAnddv, dvadavid, Mydiori, duaxel, tapadd\a& + oropddny, mor- 
AdKkis, €&w. 


5.) Preposrrions. The eighteen prepositions proper (688 e) are all 
oxytone: ad, card. For the removal or loss of the accent, see 785, 786. 

Nore. For proclitic and enclitic particles, see 786s. The accentua- 
tion of those particles which remain is best learned by observation. 


eis... , IN COMPOUNDS. — ADDENDUM. 447 


B. Rules for Compound Words. 


795. In composition, there is a general tendency to recessive accent. 
But, —(a) Compound adjectives in -ys are more frequently oxytone : as, 
edmper 7s (those in -wSys are paroxytone ; so compounds of 700s, dpxéw, 
and some other words). (b) Compounds in which -os is affixed to the 
stem of a verb united with a noun are commonly oxytone, if the pent is 
long; but if the penailt is short, they are commonly paroxytone when active 
in sense, and proparoxytone when passive (789f): otromouds (387 a) ; AeAo- 
BdXos and ALH5Boros (386. 1). (c) Compound adjectives of Dec. 3, with 
a palatal or lingual stem-mark, in which the latter part is a monosyllable 
derived from a verb, are commonly oxytone ; e. g. those in -odag, -rAxf, 
-pwt, -rpwt, -BAys, -Ovns, “Keys: aroppwé, FuwOvys. (d) Words derived 
from compound words are commonly not accented as though themselves 
compounded ; but their compounds again follow the general rule: thus, 
KaTackeudfw, KatacKevactds (792a), a-KaTacKevaoTos. 





ADDENDUM. 


796. ‘The reasons why we spend so long a time in acquiring a 
mastery over the GREEK LANGUAGE are manifold. We do so partly be- 
cause it is one of the most delicate and perfect instruments for the expres- 
sion of thought which was ever elaborated by the mind of man, and be- 
cause it is therefore admirably adapted, both by its points of resemblance 
to our own and other modern languages, and by its points of difference 
from them, to give us the 1p, or fundamental conception, of all Gram- 
mar; i. e. of those laws which regulate the use of the forms by which we 
express our thoughts. 

** Again, Greek is the key to one of the most astonishing and splendid 
regions of LITERATURE which are open for the intellect to explore, —a 
literature which enshrines works not only of imperishable interest, but 
also of imperishable importance, both directly and historically, for the 
development of human thought. It is the language in which the New 
Testament was first written; “and into which the Old Testament was first 
translated. It was the language spoken by the greatest poets, the greatest 
orators, the greatest historians, the profoundest philosophers, the world 
has ever seen. It was the language of the most ancient, the most elo- 
quent, and in some respects the most important of the Christian fathers. 
It contains the record of institutions and conceptions which lie at the base 
of modern civilization ; and at the same time it contains the record, and 
presents the spectacle, of precisely those virtues in which modern civiliza- 
tion is most deficient. 

**Nor is it an end only ; it is also a means. Even for those who never 
succeed in reaping all the advantages which it places within their reach, 
it has been found to be, in various nations and ages during many hundred 
years, one of the very best instruments for the EXERCISE AND TRAINING 
OF THE MIND. it may have been studied irrationally, pedantically, and 
too exclusively ; but though it is desirable that much should be super- 
added, yet with Latin it will probably ever continue to be — what the 
great German poet Goethe breathed a wi ish that it always should be— 
the BASIS OF ALL HIGHER CULTURE.” — Marrar. 


797. INDEX I.—GREEK. 


The references are here made, as in other parts of the Grammar, to sections 
and their parts. The letter s (from the Lat. sequens) is often added, as else- 
where, to signify and the following ; but is often omitted as needless, where it 
might have been added. The signs < and > represent the forms at the angle 
as arising by contraction or some other change, chiefly euphonic, from the 
forms at the opening, or as used in their stead. The sign x denotes opposition 
or distinction. Dialectic use is marked by an older ‘style of figures in the ref- 
erences (as, 329). For abbreviations, see 798. ‘To increase the practical value 
of the Index, the form or construction of a word is sometimes referred to the 
appropriate rule or remark, although the particular word may not have been 
there cited as an example. The reference is then marked with an accent (’ ). 
The index for the conjugation of verbs is contained in § 50. See 804s. 


A 4,106; <v 138, 142, 
156,9158,. 160; 202°, 
221, 329; cont. as ¢ 
122, 131 d.; <e. 145, 
130b: a<aa, ae, an, 
eG, p0d, 07, S425; 41 20s 
<_ a0, aw 131 a, 197C; 
for 7 130, 197: @ in 
(ont 15° 1308, 191% 18 
dec.11s; neut. pl. 181. 
188 ; Dec. 1. 194, 189 
in cj. 32, 35s ; aor. anc 
pf. 273, 276, 290s: 
changed in s. 341, 347: 
added to s. 855: -a in 
der. 363 b. 

d- cop. 385: priv. 385, 
compounds w. gen. 436. 

@ 109s, 118d, 7, 11s. 

aa, ag, <a, @, 135, 
222, ©, 49°C. 

ayabds cp. 262 b, 260 a, 
261a, b; w. acc. 481’. 

a&ya\Aw mid. 582. 

Gyapat w.ace., gen., 429a, 
443 b, 482 f. 

ayavaktéw w. dat. 456, 
Went. Gr 7 oeM pt. O27 

Gyatréao w. dat. 456, w. 

&yyedos dec. 16. 

&ye imv. 656 b. 

Gyevoros w. gen. 432 a. 

dynpaos, -ws, dec. 22. 

Gyvoéw w. pt. 677’. 

ayvas 386, w. gen. 432b. 

aypds wt. art. 533d. 

&yxt, -od, ep. 262d, 
263d; w. gen. 445. 





&Saxpvs dec. 238 a. 
ddekpds w. gen. 442a, 
w. dat. 451; ddedpe 779. 
-adns in der. 369 a. 
“Adns dec. 225 b; ’At- 
ddcde 688 e 3 438 a. 
&endov cv 675. 
adikéw w. 2 acc. 480 b, 
w. pt. 6774; pres. as 
&Suxos dec. 22. [ pf. 612. 
&Sapos w. gen. 446 b. 
del, alel, 130d; és a. 706. 
-d{ in der. 378 s. 
dydeav dec. 224 a. 
-a8- in 2 aor. 353 a. 
"A Oivate, -nor, 382, 380. 
&OuKros w. gen. 426. 
"A€ws, -w acc. 199. 3. 
av 4, 108; <ai, aa, 
€at, oat, aet, ae 7, 1198, 
123 c; fer ad, a, 130d, 
131d, 134; elided 127: 
-at-incp. 257d; inopt. 
293: -at in 2 pers. for 
-cat 297 e; inaor. imy. 
297 g; in adv. 380c; 
in accent. 767. 
ai, D., E., for ef tf, 7or f. 
aiSas 219 b, 214, 215¢. 
-atva in der. 370 b. 
aivéo w. gen. 429 a. 
-aty in (ler. 378 b. 
aig dec. 17. [375 a. 
-atos, adj. in, 240. 3, 
aims dec. 237d. 
aipéw w. 2 ace. 480 a; 
mid. 579, pass. 588’. 


aicOdvowatw.gen.432b, 
h, w. dep. verb 657, 677. 
aloypds, -pas, cp. 260, 
261e, 263. 
aloytvopat w. acc. 472f, 
w. inf. x pt. 657k. 
aitéw w. 2 acc. 480 c. 
aittos, -douat, W. gen. 
444 f, 431 ¢, dat. 454d. 
-dkts, adv. in, 381. 4. 
daxpnv adv. acc. 380 a. » 
a&xddovGos w. gen. 442a, 
w. dat. 450. 
dxovw w. gen. and ace. 
432¢, h, 434a; as pass. 
5754; pres. as pf. 612; 
w. inf. or pt. 657 k, 677. 
akpodopar w. gen. 432 a. 
&kpos, use 508 a. 
adyeds cp. 260, 261 e. 
-adéos in der. 375 f. 
dus w. gen. 414 a. 
adtcKopar w. gen. 431 ¢, 
w. pt. 677'. 
a@A\Ad 701 b, n, x dAd\a 
766a; introd. 708 e; 
ddAa yap 709, GAX # 
700 m, n. 
dhAdoow w. gen. 429 a. 
GAAHAwY 27, 244. 3. 
dddotos w. gen. 406 a. 
&dXos dec. 281; use 567 ; 
w. gen. 4064; as adv. 
509 e, 567 e; x 6 d\Xos 
523f; Gddo re (#) 567 8; 
d\Xos &\Xov 567 ce, d. 
&dAws Te cai 717 a. 


-atot old dat. pl. 198. 3. [GAs dee. 208. 


§ 797. 


ddorné dec. 203 b. 
GAws dec. 225j. [662. 
dpa w. dat. 450; w. pt. 
Gpaprave w. gen. 405. 
aucivyav compt. 261 a, f, 
262 b. 
duckéew w. gen. 452 cL. 
auyvypev w. gen. 432 c¢. 
auyds clec. 18, 210. 
cpmeX@ w. 2 acc. 480c. 
duvve mid. 579’. 
dbl 688, 689e; oi dul 
527 a. [480 ec’. 
aupievvup,. w. 2 acc. 
aupw dec. 25, 240 c. 
-ay- added to s. 351. 2. 
-Gy < -awy 197 ¢. 
d&vconting. w. ind., opt., 
inf., pt., oy 658 a; w. 
sub. 619 ; "fut. ind, 
620 ; pos. 631, 662 b ; 
repeated 622, omitted 
63le-g; w. pot. opt. 
or ind. 636s; w. ind. 
of habit 616 b; not w. 
opt. of wish 638 f. 
dy conj., < édv, 619 a. 
tiv < dvd 136, 166a. 
dva 688, 6891; se. or 7 Oe 
699e, 785; w. num. 
239 f, 692. 5. 
dvdyan,-a? tov és, 5/28. 
dvakas w. gen. 432d. 
dvayipyqAoKe const. 473. 
dvag, V. dva, 17, 204. 
dyaroe w. gen. 407. 
dvddye w. dat. 457. 
dvev w. gen. 405 a. 
avexouar w. gen. 432f; 
v. pt. 677’. 
ayjp dec. 18, 210, 208 f ; 
in address 484 g ; avyp, 
wynp, 125. 
dvtn ps w. gen. 405 b. 
ayri 688, 689h; avd’ dr, 
because, Boi: $ derivat. 
Jw. gen. 445, w. dat. 455. 
ayTutrové opat w. gen. 430. 
&ytpov clec. 16. 
avi const. 677 f. 
fivw cp. 262d, 263 ; 
-af 372b. [gen. 445. 
iévos, &c., w. gen. 431); 
w. dat. 454 d. 
-a&9 > -€w, -d, -ov, 197 ¢. 
REY. GR. 


dde@mn£ 





w. | &rdp conj. 


GREEK INDEX. 


dats w. gen. 446 b. 
amavraw w. dat. 450 a. 
drag as noun 706, 
aratep, neut. pl. 231 b. 
amreydavopar w. dat. 457. 
amuorréw Ww. (lat. 456. 
umAdos, -ods, dec. 23; 
cp. 257 ¢, d. 
dard 688, 689); 
136b; cp: 263’; 
pass. 586 d. 
amroSiSopat sell, 579, w. 
gen. 431 a. 
a&rodtparkw 472 f. 
a&rokave w. gen. 412. 
*"AmddAwv dec. 208 f, 
2lla.  [w. dat. 456. 
amopéw w. gen. 414); 
amroo repéw w.gen.414b’; 
w. 2 acc. 480. 

“arta, mid. w. gen. 426. 
doa (54, dp) 685 ¢ 5 pos. 
720 ; qv as pres. 611. 
doa (ov,u7) ; 687. [262b. 
apelwv, dpioTos, cp). 261a, 
apéoxw w. dat. 457. 
aphyo w. dat. 453. 


form 
W. 


"Apas 21, 216c¢, 220a. 


&3t- in compos. 385 d. 
anvorepd 506)’, 533d. 
aoirrevw w. gen. 419 ¢. 
aaKéw w. dat. 453 ; per- 
sonally 573. 
dpxus dec. 219 f. 
apporre w. dat. 453. 
apvéopar dre od 713 d. 
apvds dec. 18, 210. 
dépmag 230a; cp. 259. 
dspyv dec. 22, 208 a. 
aoxHv adv. ace. 483. 


&pxw w. gen. 407, 425 ;|B 


pt. as adv. 674 b. 
-ds in der. 241, 374h. 
dooa, dooa (-7TTa), 253a, 
254b, 28. [226 g. 
aornp, -Tpdoe 145a; 
dorv dec. 19, 215 b; 
wt. art. 533 d. 
-ATQL, -ATO < -YTHL, -VTO 
158, 300 b, 329. 
701 b, 
are as, w. pt. 681. 
d&repos = Erepos 125 b. 
"Athas, V."Arda 2048. 
"Artpeldys 369’, dec. 15. 





Wee 449 

atvxéw w. gen. 405, 427, 

av 4,108;<ar, aa, 7, 
142, 122 a. 

av, aifis, pos. 720. 

avproy (7, the morrow) 
526", 

aitika w. pt. 662. 

avrds lec. 28,251, 255b; 
cp. 262d; wse 540s; 
w. dat. of assoc. obj. 
467¢; w. compt. and 
sup. 513f; as pers. 
pron. 540¢3 6 airs 
540b, w. dat. 451; 
Tpirosavrdss, avTisaurod, 
541 g,h3; avrod adv. 
380 b, 433 ¢. 

avTot < éaurod 244. 

dparpéopat const. 485d. 

adedéw w. gen. 405 b. 


&xGopar w. dat. 456 ; 
w. pt. 661 b, 677’. 
&xpr(s) 164; w. gen. 


44563 dype ‘ob 557 Qa. 
-iw in der. 378 a, d. 
-dav> -éwy, -dv,-Gv 197 ¢. 
B 4, 137; <7, ¢, 147; 

ins., or ah Bp < pr, 

“9, 146 b 
Bacikea x Bacirela 

194 b, 370, 363 b. 
Bacideds (sc. 6) 533d ; 

cp. 262 d. 

BPactrkedo w. gen. 407 ; 
aor. x pres. 592d. 
PeArloy, &c., 260, 261e. 
PAGE cp. 259, 
BAdrre w. gen. 405 a. 
BAé-w w. ace. 478s. 
B(y)Anxev dec. 224 a. 
on Géa, &c., w. dat. 453. 
Bopéas, -65ds dec. 15, 

1965 WoBe 1k, 

BovXetww, mid. 579. 
BotrAopat, Bovrer 559 c, 

647 b; Bovioudym 459 N. 
Bods dec. 19, 214s, 217. 
BovrrpopySév 98 ge. 
Bpéras dec. 224 b. 

We 4 She pi aya 
yido dec. 206 a. 
yap 701}; in specif. 

705 b; in reply or intr. 

708¢c,e; anacol. 716a ; 

pos. 720; 6 yaa 518b. 
CC 


450 yaoTnp 


yaornp dec. 210 b, c. 
yé 389 c, 685 b, c; pos. 
720; encl. 787 d, h. 
yelrov const. 442, 450. 
yeddo w. dat. 456’; aor. 

603 b. 
yews dec. 207 ¢; com- 
pounds 237 b. 
yéo w. gen. 414. 
yevos, yepas, dec. 19, 
216 s. (473. 
yetw w. gen., ace., 432a, 
yfjom. 506b; se. 7 533d. 
ylyas dec. 17, 205. 
yiyvopar w. gen. 412, 
437 a3: -w. dat. 449; 
w. pt. 679. [657 k. 
ylyvioKw w. inf. x pt. 
Droits dec. 21, 227 b. 
yévu dec. 224 ¢. 
LTopy, -wy, dec. 224 a. 
your (vé obv) 685 c. 
ypats dec. 216, 222. 6. 
yeaa, mid. 579, 581, w. 
gen., acc, 431 c, 480. 
yupvds w. gen. 414 b. 
yuv7 dec. 203, 779; sc. 
7 533 d. 
yoy dec. 17, 203, 186. 
TwBptas dec. 15, 198.1. 
Ax4,.- 1372 is. nL 465s 
in dec. 217 ; incj. 3498, 
300 ¢, 329 a. 
Sa- 385d: -Sa 3881 b. 
Sanp Ep., V. ddep 208 f. 
‘Satpov dec. 18, 208. 
Sdxpvoy,-pu lec. 14,225 f. 
Sdpap dec. 17, 153 a. 
Savet{o, mid. 581. 
8€ 685, 701 ¢, q ; for yap 
705a; introd. 708e; 
pos. 720: 6 dé 518. 
-S¢ local 688 e, 382, 252; 
enclit. 787 d, f, g. 
Se(kvupe w. pt. 677. 
Seiva clec. 27, 245. 
Sépas dipt. 228a, 437. 
SévSpov, -eov, dec. 225 f. 
SeEva (7) 506 b, 533 d. 
Seopds clec. 226 b. 
Séomrora voc. 779. 
Sedpo w. gen. 420a. 
Séw veed, w. gen. 414); 
w. num. 242¢: Set w. 
acc.473b; w.inf.598a; 





INDEX I. 


ei § 797. 


pxpod [dev], &c., 665 :|"E Adv 4, 98b, 106; 


déopar w. gen. 414¢, 
434 a, 
5H, O70ev, S7jra, dai,685e, 
389, 701 q 3 pos. 673. 
SAAds efuc 573, 677 2; 
djrov [se. éorw] 572; 
dre 717 b. 
Sydow w. pt. 677. [208f. 
Anpatnp dec. 210 b, 
-Syyv, adv. in, 381 b. 
-5ys patronym. 369. 
Sid 688, 689 a. 
Stdyw w. pt. 677’. 
Stadéyopar 580, w. dat. 
45 2a. (677 f. 
Stadelrw, pt. or w. pt. 
StareAéw w. pt. 677". 
Siatp(Bw w. pt. 677 a. 
Stacbépw (-Popos) w. gen. 
406 ; mid. w. dat. 455’. 
SibLoKw w. 2 ace. 480¢; 
mid. 581. 
SiSwp. w. dat. 454e ; 
pres. xX aor. 594. 
Stéx@ w. gen. 405. 
Sikards educ w. inf. 575. 
Sfkynv w. gen. 436 d. 
Stxa w. gen. 405. 
Avovis dec. 227 b. 
Sudte conj. 701). 
SimAdotos w. gen. 409. 
Sitrovs dec. 22, 231 ¢. 
dupdw w. gen. 432 e. 
Siakw w. gen. 431 ¢, 
443 b. 
Soxéw personally 573 ; 


e€<.a114, 291 b, 341, 
130 b, 222e, 224 b, 322; 
<ev 291 b, 134, 233e; 
<o 188, 142, 152s, 
305a 3; in syniz. 117d; 
in cont. 7, 119s: sign 
of pl. 186b, 271¢; 
conn. vow. w.o 114¢, 
in pron. 243, in ej. 
291s, in compos. 383 ; 
in aug. and red. 2778 ; 
tense-s. 2888; changed 
in s. 212s, 310, 312, 
341, 347 ; added to s. 
355, 323.e3 syne. 210, 
342. 2, 323e; ims. in 
cont. 1201, 200a, in 
cj. 311d, in fut. 305d, 
by Ion. 135 a, 197 ¢, 
201 'C, 221 b, 4ee: 

€ acc. 27, 248, 246. 

-ea- in plup. 291 ¢ : -ea, 
-eas, in ace. 220. 

éav (ei dv) 701 f, 619 a. 

gap dec. 209 a. 

éavtod > avrod dec. 27, 
244, 248; use 587s; 
as gen. refl. 539 d. 

édaw w. ov, forbid, 686 i. 

éyyus cp. 263d; w. gen. - 
445¢; w. dat. 450. 

éykparys w. gen. 407. 

éyxedvs dec. 218. 2. 

éy® dec. 27, 243, 246 ; 
use, 536s; éywye787h; 
éya@da, éy@uat, 126d. 


(ws) doxety uot 665, | eBéAXw w. inf. 598; w. 


671¢'; pt. abs. 675 c, d. 
SdXos dec. 14, 11s. 
-Sov, adv. in, 381 b. 
Sdépv dec. 21, 224 c¢. 
ddors, &c., w. dat. 454e. 
Sovrctw w. dat. 455 9’. 
Sovs dec. 26, 205, 233. 
Svvapat w. ace. 4727; 

or -ros, w. rel. 553 ¢. 


sub. 647 b. : 
€0ev for ob 27 f, 247 f. 
el << €l, €€, €€t, Ea, ECt, 
eve, ceca, 7, 11983 <e 
130€, 134, 323¢; <e 
314, 347: in 2 sing. 
297f; in aug. 278 e, 
279 ¢ ; in red, 281 ; in 
plup. 291, 273 e. 


Svo0, Siw, dec. 25, 240 c.|-e, adv. in, 381le. 


dds dec. 26, 205, 233. 

Suo- 385¢; aug. 283. 

Siceows w. gen. 432 e. 
Svopevys w. dat. 456. 
Swpedv adv. ace. 3880 a. 
Swpéopar const. 472 1. 

S@pov dec. 14, 11s. 


ei, elrep, ef wh, elre, el 
kai, ef wy et, 701 f, g, i, 
m,r, 631s, 639a, 6435, 
6741; ef yap, ele, ei, 
in wish 638 ; ef res 639; 
ell. w. ed 5é, ef 6€ wh, &e., 
710,717 ¢; e¢ procl.786. 





§ 797. 


=-€ta- 


-ea- in opt. 293d, e: 
-era in der. 363 b, 367 a, 
370. 

elSas dec. 26, 233 ¢, B. 

ei0e 7871; see el. 

elxate w. dat. 451. 

elxoot(v) 52, 163 a. 

elkw w. dat., gen., 4559, 

eikav dec. 224a. [405 b. 

eipl be x elu go 766. 3; 
enclit. 787c: w. gen. 
491s, 437; w. dat. 
459 ; w. pt. 679 ; auxil. 
285a; om. 572; dy om. 
676s: srw ol, &e.,559 ; 
€ort, qv, w. pl. nom. 
570 ; #v as aor. 603 b, 
as pr. 611: efvat in 
naming, &c., 480 N., as 
inf. of specif. 665. 

elré, -dv, acc. 781, 783 e; 

elpyw w. gen. 405. [656. 

-es, adj. in, 155, 375f ; 
cp. 258. 

eis dec. 24, 240b; w. 
gen. 419b; w. dat. 
451; w. sup. 512¢c; 
w. Tis 548 c. 

eis, és, 688, 689a; w. 
num. 239f, 692. 5; 
proclit. 786; els dre 
712. [480 ce’. 

eis(éx) parte w. 2 acc. 

elow, €sw, w. gen. 445, 
W. acc. 703 a. 

ék < €& 165. 

éxas cp. 263. 

ékxaoros 376d; const. 
501, 548 c. 

éxddw w. 2 acc. 480 c¢. 

éxetvos 281, 252; éxes- 
voot 252c; use 542; 
w. art. 524. 

éxdéyw w. 2 acc. 480 c. 

éxtrodav adv. 352a’. 

éxtds w. gen. 445 c¢. 

éxaov elvar 665 b. 

daocrov,-7rwy,cp.261 b, 
262 b; €\arroy as indec., 
adv., 507 e, f, 511. 

éX\atve as intrans. 577 c. 

éhevbepos, Ke., w. gen. 
405. 

"EAAds, -nv, as adj. 506f. 

é&\Aclrw w. gen. 4059’, 








GREEK. 


414b’; w. inf. or pt. 
657k. 


&pivs dec. 156 b. 
éharifw w. dat. 456. 


éAmls dec. 17, 204. 

épavTod dec. 27, 244, 
248 ; use 537s. 

épos 252. 5; use 538. 

p00, €uol, eué x ov, mol, 
wé, 246 c, 5868, 78758. 





éurrodav adv. 382; w. 
dat. 453’, w. gen. 445c. 
-ev, inf. in, 309 ¢, 326. 
év (éi) 688, 689 a; proclit. 
786 ; in compos. 166, 
698 d; as adv. 703b; 
for eis 704d: &v rots 
w. sup. 512b; & @ 
while 557'; éve for &verre 
699 e, 785 ; Evi 559 a. | 
évd(Sopmr intrans. 486 d. 
évdov, -ofev, -08t, W. gen. 
445¢3; interch. 704. 
évStw w. 2 acc. 480 c’, 
évexa, -xev, W. gen. 436d; 
pos. 721¢. [445 ¢. 
ivBev cal évfev w. gen. 
ivoxAéw w. dat., acc., 
453, 472 b. 
ivoxos w. gen. 431 ¢, d; 
w. dat. 454 d’. 
ivtés w. gen. 445 ¢. 
évrpérroparw. gen. 432d. 
é, éx, 688, 689 a, 165 ; | 
proclit. 786 ; cp. 262d; 
w. pass. 586; for év 
704: é& drov, &c., 557 a. 
gafbvys w. part. 662. 
¢fapXw in hypall. 474. 
Eapvos w. acc. 472). 
eis w. gen. 445, w. 
dat. 450 a. [ 426. 
é(€b)ucvéopar w. gen. 
édv absolute 675’. 
#@ cp. 262d, 263; w. 
gen. 445 ¢, 
gouxa const. 657 j« 
-eos in der. 375 c¢. 
érrawvéw w. gen. 429 a, 
443b; w. 2 acc. 480b’. 
ére((84) w. aor. 605, 
617d; w. ev0éws, ra- 
xora, &e., 553. 1, b. 
ért 688, 689 2; w.num., 





240 f, 692.5; in compos, 


451 


€upos 


699g: éf (re) 5574, 
w. inf. 671; éme 785. 
emGovdn, -evw, w. dat. 

455, 
erOupéw W. gen. 432, 
értkoupew w. dat. 453. 
éemiAnopov cp. 259 a. 
€MlPEATS, -O“ar, W. gen. 
432 d. 
émix@ptos w. gen. 437 b. 
érropat w. dat. 450 a. 
éTrevupos w. gen. 442 a’, 
w. dat. 451’. 
épdo w. gen. 432 e. 
*HpéBeruv 190 a. 
épnpos, -dw, w.gen.414b. 
épt- in compos. 385 d. 
pis, -ifw, w. dat. 455 ; 
dec. 17, 204. 
“Hppéas, -7s, dec. 15,196. 
éppwpévos cp. 257 d. 
epxopat w. kind. ace. 
477, 479 ; w. pt. 598 b, 
c.5: pr. for: fat.,-609-¢: 
edOé oxyt. 781 d. 
épav dec. 26, 152, 121. 
épwrdo w. 2 ace. 480. 
-E€Ol, -egol, -oot, in dat. 
221-G, 
éomépa wt. art. 533 d. 
tore (és, Té) conj. 70Lh. 
éotidw w. gen. 412. 
éotas dec. 26, 233 a. 
éoxatos cp. 262d, c. 
éraipos cy. 262d. 
éresos 376c; use 567 ; 
w. gen. 406. 
ev <eF 142, 217 by <u 
347h; <€0, eov, &c., 
E31 bj 2e2 by $247-b, 
323 cx. fp oim augm. 
278 d, 283. 
edyews clec. 200 b. 
evSatpovitw, -uwr, 
gen. 429a, b. 
evepyeréw w. 2 acc. 480)’. 


W. 


ev00(s) 164; w. gen. 
430 ; w. part. 662. 
edvoos w. dat. 456 ; 


accent. 772 a. 
evtratwp, fem. 235 d. 
edtropéw, -(a, w. gen. 414. 
evplokw w. pt. 677 ; ebpé, 

oxyt. 781. [533 ¢. 
edpos, acc. 481; art. 


a4 


vd 


4 


2 évs 

évs, jus, dec. 237d. 

-etds in der. 365 d, 368 b. 

evxapts dec. 22, 204. 

-evo in der. 378 a. 

evwxéw w. gen. 412. 

épeAxvortikdy (v) 163 ¢. 

éx9pds cp. 260, 261 e. 

éxo reflex. 577 ¢, d, w. 
gen. 420b; w. pt. 679 ;j 
Anpeis exwv 674g; mid. 
w. gen. 426. 

-ew, -€wv, Ion. gen. 197¢, 
198 b, 201 ¢ : ewinaug. 
279d: -€win der.378a; 
< -dw 3224. 

-ews, -ewv, Att. gen. 220. 

€ws dec. 225j, 199. 

F 4, 98e, 100, 188s; 
in dec. 217; incj. 345; 
in pron. 27 f, g, 246s ; 
in pros. 736 b. 

Z4,137d; <mute&l 
143, 261 b, 349. 

fa-, Sa-, insep. 385 d. 

{ae w. kind. ace. 477b; 
w. dat. 485d: dw», 
(Gv, dec. 26. 

-te local 382 a. 

Lets, Zdv, dec. 21, 224 f. 

fém w. gen. 412. 

{yrow w. gen. 429 a. 





Luyds, fuysv, dec. 226 b. 
-{, verbs in, 349, 378s. 
as dec. 236 d. 

a, - ANG etre: GL Lbs 
121 e, 153, 278, 130, 
221d; <ea, na, ay, 
En, on, ae, ne, 7, 1208, 
152 ¢, 278, 131 ¢, 322 e; 
<a, €, 115, 213, 288 a, 
310, 312, 314, 347, 
130¢, 197; <a 195, 
E20, 107, 8325 tie ons et 
130.0, 326.5 -<45," eR, 
21; 2222 © 24 aneeont. 
119s; in plup. 291¢; 
in sub. 292; ins. 311: 
-y in der. 363 b, 380 c. 

y 109s, 118 d, 7: in dee. 
11%. in ‘sub,-292 ;.in 
adv. 380 a. 





4 or, than, 701 4,i,1; 
w.compt. 511, 515, om. 
5lle; # xara, 7) ws, 
&., 518; # od 713h. 


INDEX I. 


q indeed, 685 ¢, 687. 

45° 8s 518 f. [553c. 
jas ady. 380 c¢’; w. sup. 

yyeopar w. gen. 407. 

ijO€ ({oé E.) conj. 701 ¢. 

Somat w. dat. 456 ; in 
dat. 459 N.; w. pt. 677. 

yjdos dipt. 228 a. 

wovs dec. 23, 2138, 217, 
233 5 ep. 260. 

nt <e lon. 132. 

HkLoros sup. 262b: re- 
ora 20, 708 b. 

qko w. adv. and gen. 
420b; -w. dat. 450; 
as perf. 612. 

HAeEe, HAE, VOC. 135. 

madtkos 53; in condens., 





556, 565. 
fpépa, gen. 433, dat. 
469 a, ace. 482; wt. 
art. 583d; om. 507 b. 
qply, nas, &c., 247 g, i. 
tprorvs dec. 220 g ; com- 
pounds 242 e, 
iv <édy 619 a, 631s. 
ymap dec. 17, 206. 
np < €ap, Hpos, 209,778 b. 
“Hpaxdéns dec. 19, 219 ¢, 
7(9£, 222d. 
hpépa-cp. 262d. [777a. 
nHpryevys, -vea 235 ¢, 
Hpws dec. 19, 216. 
-fjs <-ées nom. 121e. 
-ns in form. 386. 2; cp. 
258. | 
-yor, -ns, dat. pl. 198. | 
foowv, -rTwv, compt. | 
262 b. | 
ijovyxos cp. 257d, 259a. | 
ijre, Frou, 701d. | 
HXt old dat. 191. 3. 
HX dec. 19, 2148, 772e, | 
779 a. 
has, dec. 225j, 219 b. 
© 4,137; changes 147s; 
om. before x or ¢ 149, 
151; sign of gen. 186e; 
of pers. 271e, 272e; 
changes 297 ¢; ins. in 
pl. and du, .27le; <r 
in nude pf. 320f; in 
tense-signs -0e-, -An0-, 
274, om, 289; added 
to stem 353. 





dis = Mean 

Oadfjs dec. 225 d. 

Qavarov, use 431d. 

Gicowy (raxts) 261 b. 

G&repov, -ov, 125b. 

Qatpa idéobar 663 g. 

Oavpdyo w. ace. & gen. 
429a, 472 e; w. €f 689. 

Yavpacrdy dcor, &¢., 565. 

Qed dec. 15, 1945. 

Oels dec, 26, 205, 233. 

Céda, see éédw. 

Eps dec., use, 224 ¢. 

-Qev, gen. in, 192, 880b. 

Oeds w. or wt. art. 533 ¢. 

Gepdrrwy dec. 224f. 

NXopds dec. 226 b. 

Gérts dec. 218. 1. 

Oyv 685 c¢; pos. 720; 
encl. 787 d. 

Ohp dec. 18, 208. 

-@., dat. in, 191. 2. 

Oryyéve w. gen. 426. 

Cvicke, tenses, 600 a. 

Opf€ dec. 17, 203 b. 

Buvydérnp dec. 210b, 208 f. 

Oupdopor w. dat. 456. 

Cipate, Cvpac:, 382,380c¢. 

Gwipa < Gadua 131 e. 

I 4,. 106+ 3<e5l pee 
213 8; 217 f, 341; c<cta, 
Le, ul, LF, et, 7,115, 1218, 
217 c, 278; ¢ >t et, Mm 
s. 310, 314, 347 ; usubs. 
109 ; incontr.118s ; in 
crasis 124: sign of dat. 
186 f; conn. vow. 293; 
in red. 857 ; -v in pron. 
352¢, 789b; adv. in, 
381c. [261, 348s. 

I consonant 138s, 233, 

-ta in der. 367, 363, 370. 

*Tavvijs dec. 227 b. 

-tdw in der. 378 d. 

ibé, iOy 
781d. 

-Seds dimin. 371d. 

-(8ys, -.déos, in der. 369. 

iStos w. gen. 487 b. 

tSpas, dec. 207 a. 

tepar w. gen. 430 b. 

tepds w. gen. 437 b. 

-({ in der. 378 s, 349 B. 

-iy- in opt. 293. 

*Incots dec. 227 b. 

LOu(s) 164; Ww. gen. 430. 


imy. 656 b; 


§ 797. 


’ 
“KA 


-Cka, adv. in, 381. 2. 
-.Kos in der. 3748; w. 
gen. 444. 
Uxtwos dec. 225 f. 
-uos in der. 374 ¢. 
Wa 701le, 624¢e; wat; 
566 a. 
-wvos in der. 375, d, e. 
Lo, tw <€0, ew, Dor. 
-tov dimin. 371. [323 f. 
-Los (-avos, &c.) adj. 375. 
i.raevs dec. 19, 21, 2133, 
Sa te 
-is fem. 368s, 217. 
-(okos, -7, dimin. 371. 
iodpoupos w. gen. or dat. 
442 a. 
Yoos & der. w. dat. 451. 
Yorqpt, mid. 582. 
ixO5s dec. 19, 217, 219f, 
-twv, -.cros, in cp. 260s. 
-fwv in der. 369, 729. 3. 
K 4, 137; <vy,x, 147, 
ee ee 10 <r, 7, 
168: tense-sign 288, 
276b; changes w., 
149; om. 289, 32d; 
in aor. 306 b. [ 405. 
KaQslpw, -ao5s, w. gen. 
KaOqKkw w. dat. 455 a. 
kal 701 a, 685; crasis 
126; w. num. 242; w. 
ovros 5442; w. pt. 
674f; for other con- 
nectives, 705: kal rv 
etesjeoise, f5 xal ef 
701g; modvs kat 702¢; 
kal ydp 709; xaimep 
674 f, 662. 
Katpds [éorw] w. inf. 572. 
Kaxds cp. 260s, 261e, 
262 b. 
Kaxodpyos w. gen. 444’, 
Katéw w. 2 acc. 480a; 
mid. w. gen. 431 c¢. 
Kadds cp. 260. 
Kdhws dec. 224d. [437. 
Kapa dec. 226 ; periph. 
kara’ 688, 689m; w. 
num. 240f, 692.5; in 
ep. 5135 ; compounds 
w. gen. 699a: Kay, Kad, 
Kd, «da, &¢., 136. 
kar) \ieow w.dat. 450. 
K2vayiaw w. 2 acc. 480 a. 





GREEK. 


KaTapYXw W. gen. or ace. 
472 b; in hypall. 474. 
KaTadpovéw w. gen. 
432d. [699a', 431 ¢’. 
KaTnyopéw w. 2 gen., 
KQT AKOOS W. gen. or dat. 
432 0, 455 9". 
c<arw cp. 263', 262 d. 
x€(v), kd, 163a; = av 618 ; 
pos. 720; encl. 787 d. 
Kéap dec. 209 a. 
kelua w. acc. 4721. 
Ketvos 28], 255c. 
keXedo w. dat. or ace. & 
inf. 452a, 472b’, 666. 
xevds w. gen. 414; cp. 
257 b. 
Kepdvvups w. dat. 450. 
Képas dec. 17, 207, 222e; 
compounds 237 b. 
Kepdadéas cp. 260. 
Kepadfjs const. 426 b. 
KHdonar w. gen. 432d. 
Knpvowet (6 xjpve) 571d. 


lk: vouvetw w. gen. 446d; 


w. inf. 663d’. 
xis dec. 19, 216b, 217. 
sAd595 dec. 225 f. 
-xhéns 219 c, 222 d. 
«Xels dec. 17, 207, 2224. 
srAém7ys cp, 262 d. 
xAvwm w. gen. 432 a, 
434a’, 413; as pass. 
575 a; as perf. 612’. 
xvitpag dec. 224 b. 
<otvds gram. term 87 b; 
& der., w. gen. & dat. 
424, 437 b, 450: Koww- 
v5s dec. 225 Ff. 
xoTTowat as act. 575 b. 
xdpaké dec. 17, 208. 
xopévyums, w. gen. 414 a. 
xépus dec. 17, 204. 
-Kés, adj., 374a, 375 b. 
Kpatos & der. w.gen. 407. 
Kpeloowyv, KpaTLoTOos, Cp. 
261 b, 262 b. 
kptvov dec. 225 f. 
Kpvmra w. 2 acc. 480 ¢. 
Kpvpa w. gen. 444 a, 
kvdpds cp. 260. 
xvxedv dec. 211 a. 
Kupteva, -os, W. gen. 407. 
dpw, -éw, w. gen. or dat. 
427, 450’; w. pt. 677 a. 


para 453 

Kvav dec. 18, 210; ep. 

Kaas dec. 224b. [262 d. 

kadtw w. gen. 4053 w. 
inf, 713 d. 

A 451873 Wy <n NI, 
150,143 a; changes of 
Ao 152. See 349 1. 

AGas, ds, dec. 21, 225b. 

AayXdve w. gen. 427, 

Aayas dec. 224d. 

AéOpa w. gen. 444a, 

Addos cp. 257 d. 

LopBdve w. gen. 423, 
426; NaBé oxyt. 781. 

AavOdve const. 677 f. 

Aads, News, dec. 200’. 

Aatpebw w. dat. 455 9’. 

Aéyo w. dat. 452 a; w. 
2acc. 480b; w. inf, &., 
659 h: Aéyovew 571 ¢. 

Aeitra w. gen. 405’, 406b. 

Néwy dec. 17, 205. 

Any w. gen. 405; w. pt. 

Alunv dec. 18. — [677'. 

Attra, indecl. 228 b. 

Auirav dec. 26, 781. 

Aur(, -a, dipt. 228d. 

AovSopéw const. 585. 4. 

Aoutrds, gen. 433 a, ace. 
483’; 485 e. 

-dos, adj. in, 375 f. 

Aove, mid. 578. 

Avy§ dec. 17, 203. 

Avpa dec. 14, 194s. 

Abxvos, dec., 226 b. 

Abw w. gen. 405: dw», 
dvaas, dec. 26. 

Adwv,A@rT 0s, 261 a, 262d. 

M 4, 137 ; <T, B, p, ¥; 
8, 148, 150 ; om. 148a; 
changes before, 148 : 
sign of 1 pers. 246, 
271b; changes in ¢j., 
296, 328 b, as a 1604, 
291 a: wo changed 152. 

-wa in der. 364, 366 d. 

pa x vy w. ace. 476d, 
685 ¢ 3 wa Tov — 532. 

payadis dec. 218. 2. 

paKap, -aipa, 235d; ep. 
259. 


paxods cp. 261b,e; ua- 
Ko, by far, 468 : waxpay 
alv. ace.’ 483 d. 

para cp. 263a; “addop, 


454 pada 


pdduora, in ep. 510; 
use in reply 708b; 
paddXov om. 5131. 
peadns, vd, 228 c. 
pavOdave w. gen. 434a, 
413; w.inf. x pt. 657k; 
Tt mabey ; 674h. 
paptus dec. 224 f. 
Mackds dec. 227 b. 
payxowar w. dat., acc., 
455, 477. 
péyas dec. 24, 236; ep., 
261); pel fiay dec. 22, 
211; 
-pe8a,, -werOa, 299: -webor 
299 b, 9c, page 7. 
peOboKe w. gen. 412. 
pelwv cp. 261a; pecovas 
indecl. 507 e, 511 c¢. 
pédras dec. 23, 208 c, 233 ; 
cp. 259. 
psAe monopt. 228 d. 
peAX@ w. inf. 598 a. 
pédrcr & der.w.gen. 432d; 
w. dat. 457: 571d. 
péppopar w. gen., dat., 
ace., 429a, 443b, 452a. 
-pev, -wevat, inf. 333. 
pév, wévrot, 685 c, 701b, 
C,q; pos. 720: 6 wey 
518; ds wév 519 f. 
“Hes for -wev 169 ¢, 328. 
péoros cp. 257d, e; use 
508 : -dw w. gen. 425a., 
pEorrds, - ow, w.gen.414a. 
peta 688, 689¢; péra 
785): compounds Ww. 
gen. 424. 
petaméwrea, mid. 579. 


peratd w. gen. 445¢; 
Ww. part. 662. 

pérerte w. gen., dat., 
421, 459. 


pexpu(s) 164; w. gen. 
445; w. 0b, &e., 557; 


conj. 701 h, 703 c. 
BH bia x ov, 6868; 
redund. 7133; pmédé 


emph., u) ov, 713 ¢, f ; 
nH Th ye, wh) Ore (d1rws), 
717d, g: conj. 701e, 
6248: wndé, wre, Con). 
701 ¢, a. 
pydels dec. 25, 240b; 
unodév as indecl. 507 e. 


INDEX I. 


pykére < wt) Ere 165 €. 
pAAov dec. 16, 11s, 771. 
pHV 685c, 701q3 pos. 
Mryvas dec. 227 b. [72¢. 
pATHp dec. 210 b. 
PATpws dec. 225 j. 
-pt form 45, 313s, 335. 
piyvupe w. dat. 450. 
PuKpds cp. 261a,e, 262b; 
puxpod (deity) 665. 
PiLVATKM W. gen., acc, 
432¢, 473; péuynuat 
w. part. x inf. 657k. 
pty ace. 27 f, 246e, 247 f, 
i; use 539e. 
Mivas dec. 225 j. 
pro Ode, mid. hire 581. 
pvaa, ura, dec. 15, 196. 
p.dvos, -dw, W. gen. 414b. | 
pdptov dec. 16, 770. 
-pos in der. 363¢e, 374c. 
poocuy dec. 225 f. 
pod, wol, ué, encl. 787 : 
x éuod, &e., 246 c, 5368; : 
pot ethical 462 e. 
fotoa, puta, dec. 15. 
pons dec. 225 b. 
pdpror x “vpior, 240 
-pov in der. 374d, 366d. 
pa@o0s dec. 23, 232. | 
N 4, 137; corresp. to a’ 
138,142,156, 158, 202 b, | 
221a, 329; changes 8, 
150s, 166, 304, 168s; 
of vs 152s, 204s, 208: ab. 
v<u160b, 296; <m 
300; w<vl 142a; ¥ 
final 160; movable 
162s: sign of pl. 186¢c, 
271 b, of obj. 186d, 
188s; ininf. 272, 301; 
for -o1, -cav, 3303 Vv, 
av, VU, VE, added to s. 
[685 c. 
val x ud w. ace. 476d, 
vatye accent. 787 i. 
vads, vews, dec. 16, 200. 
vats dec. 19, 21, 216s, 
222 f; vaddi 190 a. 
vav7ys dec. 14, 194s. 
veavlas as adj. 506 f. 
véatos sup. 257 e. 
veos dec. 16, 200, 772 d. 
vq X wad w.ace. 476, 685¢. 
vy- privative 385 b. 


*Odvacevs 


§ 797. 


vijoos dec. 16, 771. 
vikdaw w. 2 ace. 480 b’; 
w. pt. 677’ ; as pf. 612. 
viv acc. 27 g,246e, 247f; 
use 539 e. [480 a. 
vouife w. dat. 466 ¢, 2ace. 
vdos, vois, dec. 16, 225¢. 
-vos, adj. in, 374g, 375. 
voodt(v) 163a; w.gen. 
405. 
VT is s. 205, in pt. 302 ; 
in 3 pl. 300, 328s. 
vi(v) 163 a, 685 ¢; pos. 
720; enel. 787d 
vtE17f; gen., dat. , aCC., 
433, 469, 482. 
vai, vb, 27, 246 ¢. 


|varov, vOros, dec. 226 b. 


B, 4,137; <xo, yo, xo, 
15h for o 170; 3253 
adv. in, 381d. 

Eévos, -ws, W. gen. 432 b. 

Evv = oty 170, 688s. 

"O pixpdv 4, 98c, 106; 
o <oF, ov, 217 a, 1314s 
kind. w. a, e, 114, 312b, 
355a,130d: conn. vow. 
w. € 114c, 12, 243 a, 
32h, 291s, for w in 
sub. 326d; in cont. 
119s; elided 127 ; in 
2 pers. for -co 297e; 
changed ins. 212s, 341, 
347; added tos. 312d, 
355s ; in compos. 383. 

6 art. 28, 249s ; accent, 
786; in crasis 125; rd 
for rd 234e; in form 
és 518 e: wse as pron. 
516s; as art. 520s, 
generic 522, limiting 
523s; w. inf. 663f, 
664; arrangement 523; 
ellipsis 527s, 532s: 
6 pev (56, yap), Kal rév 
(6s) 5183; év rots 512b. 

& neut. 28b; masc. 
786a; = 6re ca i, n. 

dye emph. 542 

85¢ dec.28, 252; use 542s: 
xX obTOos 5438; = adv. 
5450; = ey 5465 w. 
art. 524: ddl 252 ¢. 

ddov5 dlec. 17, 205 a. 


*OSve[ o Jevs dec.21,222. 





§ 797. Btw 


S{w w. gen. 412, 436 c. 

-obev, -08t, 191s, 380. 

OBotvexal 266; use5d7a, 
701). 

Ol < ol, 0€l, 07, O0L, €0L, 
ove, o1a, o€, oa, 7, 1198, 
Bey 13 a5) <0) 130 ¢, 
134, 201a; <ev-in pf. 
312 b: in old dat. 
191. 4, 380¢; in voc. 

_215¢; inaug. 278; in 
opt. 293, 315 sin 
accent. 767. 

ot8a w. pt. 677 ; of5° dre 
717 b; oi00 6 dpacov 
655. 

Oidfaovs dec. 21, 214s. 

-oviv for -ow 201 b, 221d. 

olkade 225i, 787 1. 

oixetos w. gen. 437); 
w. dat. 450. 

otkos om. w. gen. 438. 

oixte(pw w. gen. 429 e. 

olktpds cp. 250. 

olpot 453; w. gen. 429e. 

-ovo Thes. gen. 201. 

olopar > oiuac parenth. 
3l3e; w. gen. 413. 

otos 53; use 549s, 5635; 
in condens. 555s, 565 ; 
in exclam. 564b; w. 
inf. 671: of5s Te 556¢; 
olov, ofa, w. pt. 681. 

Bis, ofs, dec. 19, 21. 

-ovort dat. pl. 187, 201d. 

otxomar as pf. 612 ; 
pt. 679. 

éAlyos cp. 261 b, 262b; 
w. art. 523f: dAlyou 
(Seiv) 665; ddtyw 486. 

éArywpéw w. gen. 432d. 

Sdos w. & wt. art. 523 e. 

‘Opjpe, in Homer, 469d. 

Optdew, -777)5, w. dat. 450. 

Spyupe w. ace. 472f. 

opod & der. w. dat. 450s, 
w. gen. 442a; w. kal 
705¢; 8uordbs eiuc const. 
657}; Suws w. pt. 662. 

dvap dipt. 228 a. 

Svepov, -os, dec. 225 f. 

Svopa in periphr. 437 ¢ ; 
ace., dat., 485 +. 

ém- in pron. & adv. 377. 

dmiodev w. gen. 445 ¢. 


GREEK. 


Strov, dior: od, mol 
ov, of, 53; w. gen. 420; 
interchanged 704. 

*Orrots dec. 17, 207 ¢. 

Stas adv. 53, 559 a, 
624e; conj. 701e, 
624s; in ell. 626. 

Opdw w. drrws, u7}, 626 ; 
w. pt. 677. 

épytfouar w. gen., dat., 
429, 456. 

dpéyopar w. gen. 430 b. 

dperdr old dat. 199 a. 

dpvis dec. 224 e. 

dphavds w. gen. 414 b. 

-os in der. 863, 365, 
367, 386 ; changed in 
cp. 257s. 

opXéopat w. ace. 477 b. 

és rel., dec. 28, 250: 
wse as rel. 5498, as 
complem. 563s ; attr. 
552.8, Att. 554a, in- 
verse 554c¢ ; w. modes 
640s: ds BovrNer 559d: 
Ss as demonst. 518 f, 
519 f: 8s possess. 252. 
5; use 538 s. 

00S 53; use549s,5638; 
in condens. 556, 565 ; 
in exclam. 564b; w: 

inf.671: Seovasindecl. 
or ady. 507e, f, 556d; 
dow 468 : donuépar 5511. 

doo dec. 228 b. 


w. | do-réoy, -odv, dec. 16,772. 


bertis, iris, drov, &c., dee. 
28, 254, 255: use as 
rel. 549s, as complem. 
5638s; x ds 54983 w 
modes 640s: 6 Tt pa- 
Oa (radwv) 674h. 
-oords, num. in, 240. 2. 
sohpalvopar w.gen. 432. 
Ste (6rav 619 b) w. modes 


640s’; w. sup, aor, 
558 b, 605. 
ru 701i, j, n, 6435; 


x ws 702; not elided 
129a; redund. 644, 
659e; repeated 714 ; 
in anacol. 716; pos. 
719 7: w. sup. 553¢; 
6re pH TOL Mm: Ore zi; 
566 a. 


./Obé cp. 263 a; 


455 


mapa 


‘lov <00, €0, 0€, 0a, OF, 


oov, eov, oe, 7, 217 b, 
120s; <o 218s, 347h, 
130¢; <ev, v, 114b, 
134: corr. diph. 115. 
ov, ot, %, dec. 27, 246; 
encl. 787 ; use 539. 
ov > ovk, ovx, oxi, 165, 
685 © sal eae OSes 
interrog. 687 ; redund. 
713; wt. pa 476d: 
ov wy W. subj. or fut. 
597, 627; ov pnw, Xe., 
6861; otre, ovdé, 701a, 
-¢, 713b, ¢ 3 od yap ad- 
Ad, ov wévTor (UHV) adAG, 
ov7x drt (dcor, darws, oiov), 
ovdas dec. 224 b. [717. 
ovdels (ovdé es 240 b) 
24: ovdels Saris oF 559. 
ovKoty therefore 687 c. 
otv < éjv (Gy D., 1.) 889 g, 
685 ¢; pos. 720. 
ovvexa < of &vexa 1265; 
use 557 a, 701j, 703. 
ots < ofas dec. 17, 207, 
P52 Dif 68. C8 
ovtos dec. 28, 252: use 
5428; xéd¢ 543s; in 
repetition, assent, 544 ; 
in address 401. 3, 546 ; 
pl. for sing. 489d; w 
art. 524: ovroal, 252c. 
ovt@(s) 164; x dde 547. 
ddetho w. dat. 454d; 
in wish 6388 g. 
8dedos dipt. 228 a. 
dddtoKave w. gen. 431. 
dppa 701e, 624, 53 Vv. 
w..gen. 








420; w. Fv 571d. 

ow << w 135, 322 ¢, 324.¢. 

-6@ in der. 378 b. 

II 4, 137 ; <8, ¢, 147, 
159,167; changes 147s, 
161, 168 ; in pron. & 
adv. 377 

moavav dec. 18, 208. 

madsevo w. 2 acc. 480 c’. 

mats dec. 17, 204, 778 b. 

moda in accent. 770 b. 

tmadatds cp. 257 d. 

méadv in compos. 166. 

tavy as adj. 526. 

mapa (rapal 134, map 


456 mapa 
136) 686, 689d; in 
ep. Silas Ww. pass. 
586d; incompos.699 g: 
mapa 699e, 785. 
Ifapdprnpa, App., 80. 
Tmoparigepat mid. 581. | 
TapauTiKa 706 b. 
Tapaxprpa 382. [703 e. 


mapet (-€&, -éx) 165 b, 
mapéexo w. dat. acc, 
454e; pt. abs. 675. 


maosv absol. 675. 
wdpos w. gen. 445¢;! 
w. inf. 663 d’; w. mply| 


703 
aas dec. 23,729.2 Eid 
793¢;3 Ww. gen. 416b; 
art.523e; w. vis 54g. 
w. rel. 550 f; w. imv. 
656: may in compos. 
166. [674 h. 
TarKyo 57 5a’; ri raddv; 
waryp dec. 18, 210, 
208 f. [222 d. 
Iidrpoxdos dec. «21, 
wdtpws dec. 225 j. 
Tavo w. gen. 
intrans. 577 a; 
582850 w= opt: 
méravoo 599 e. 
meSlovo gen. 433 d. 


405 ; 
mid. 


677 : 


welOo w. 2 ace. 480¢c; 
mid. 5828; w. dat. | 
455 ¢, 456. | 
qmewdw w. gen. 432 e, 
metpa & der. w. gen. 
432. 
ITapateds dec. 220 e. 
tmékas & der. w. gen. ! 
445¢; w. dat. 450. 


mréQopan, ipf. as pr. 611. 

weptTo w. dat. 450b; 
w. 2acc. 472g. (414). 

mévys cp. 258 ; w. gen. 

evokes w. gen. 429¢. 

we7rept lec. 215 b, 218. 2. 

mép 389h, 685¢; w. pt. 
674f; pos. 720; encl. 
787 d. 

Tépa, Tépay, Ww. gen. 
445’: 7d wépav 527. 
mepl (répié) 688, 689F ; 
not elided 129; asadv. 
703 b: mwépe 785; of 

wept 527 a. 








INDEX I. 


tep.Bdddw const. 472 1. 
Teptopaw w. pt. or inf. 
657k’. [ 406. 
TEepleods, -evw, W. gel. 
tméepvor(v) 163 a. 
myvika ; w. gen. 420 a. 
TAXUS dec. 19, 213 s. 
| whumpnpe w. dat. or gen. 
4124. [423'. 
larly w. ace. or gen. 
tlrrw as pass. 575 a. 
tlov, -epa, 235d, 233 a. 
-TAATLOS, -wv, num. 
240. 5. 
mareacrpds 130 a. 
aAclav, -éwy, -€2oT 0s, -€tv, 
261 a,d; elov as 
indecl. 507 e, 5llc; 
1 NELov, -ecoTa, in cp.510. 
TeovexTém w. gen. & 
dat. 408, 467). 
TeoveKTyS cp. 258 a. 
mrEw w. acc. 472 f, g. 
mréws dec. 236 b ; 
der. w. gen. 414 a. 
wAHGos in acc., dat., 
4857; w. pl. 499 a. 
TAHY w. gen. 406 ; conj. 
701m: wAnyz ef 710, 
tmAHoLoS cp. 257 d. 
-wAéos, num. in, 240. 4. 
TAOVCLOS, -TEW, W. Len., 


& 


Alda. face. 479. 
tTvéo w. gen. 4366, W 
amvvé dec. 224 h. 


wé0ev, 70:2, 700, TOs, 53; 
w. gen. 420. 

qmo.ew w. dlat., Zace., 460, 
480b; mid. 579, 581, 
585; w.gen. 430,431 b; 
in periph. 475. 

tountys 15, 366 d, 791 b. 

WONELEW, -Los, W. dat. 455. 

adds dec. 19, 21, 217 g, 
h} 2226; 

moAureto, mid. 582 4, 

modus dec. 24, 236; w. 
art. -523°'f ; cp. 261; 
w. xal 702c: mwodnod 
431 a, 3o\d@ 468. 

TOPPH, TPOTH, W. gen. 
405, 420 a. 

Topvpeos cp. 257 c. 

TIloweadav dec. 208 f, 
211.4. 


P § 797. 
améats dec. 218. 2. 
TwéoOU ; -@ 431 a, 468’, 
TOTE, TOV, TMS, KC., X 1b- 
Te; &., 53,5638; pos. 
71208 encl. 787 b: aoré 
w. interrog. 389i. [n. 
morepos 3768: -ov 701i, 
mOTvLG, -va, fem. 238 b. 
arovs dec. 17 7, 2148, 231¢. 
m™paos dec. 24, 236 ¢. 
tpdoow 577 a; w. 2acc. 
480, 
Tpétrw w. dat. 453; -wy, 
-ovTws, W. gen. 431 b. 
twperBevwo, mid. 581. 
tpC opus, -erpa, &C., 238 a, 
235d; cp. 261e. 
tolacGar w. gen., dat, 
ace., 450 ¢, 431. - 
aptv const. 703 d. 
apd 688, 6891; in crasis 
126, 382a: cp. 262d; 
w. comp. 51la; wpé rod 
519b; mwpéradac 706b. 
mpoukds,-ka,ady.380a,b. 
mpés (mpotl, mori, mér, 
136) 688, 6891; in ep. 
5lla; w. pass. 586d; 
asadv.703 b ; in compos, 
699¢; in accent. 788e; 
hyperb. 476 b. 
twpocfichAw w.cen.436c. 
Tpoonkel w. gen., dat., 
421,450; -ovabs. 675d. 
tpio8e(v 164 a), mpdre- 
pov, w. gen. 445ce, 408 ; 
w. mplv 708 d. 
TpdTepos cp. 262 ¢, d. 
mpovsyou 382 ; cp. 262d. 
TacHpey, - ppacca, 235d. 
apd Xoos, -ous, dec. 225 g. 
tpwt cp. 263a; w. gen. 
420. 
mparos cp. 262 ¢, d. 
wr for mw (rds) 171. 
arvxn, -&, dec. 225 b. 
TuvOdvop.ar Ww. gen. ee: 
434a; as pf. 612’; 
pt. 677". 
mop dec. 14, 225 f. 
trad€ée sell, w. gen. 431 a. 
wos dv in wish 637d; 
ms in reply 708 ec. 
P 4, 137; aspirated, 
doubled, 93 d, 146, 


§ 797. P 
159e, 171a; final 169; 
<v 150,166; <0 157, 
169d; metath. 145, 
342.3, 171; preference 
for a 145a, 336d: 
changes of px 152s;'! 
4p > HBP, Bp, 146d. | 

p£5v0s ep. 261. 

pe» w. gen., dat., acc., 
412 a’, 479. 

pyTes dec. 18, 153. 

pls dec. 18, 208. 

-pos, adj. in, 375f. | 

a, c ors, 4, 90.1, 137; 
corresp. to e 138, 142, 
1525s; 217 e, 233¢, 297c,; 
305a; final160 ; mova- 
ble 164, 380f; <7, 6, 
8, 8,-147 s, 160, 297 c¢, 
169d; <v 155, 166, 
169¢; 0, o1.,00<mute 
& I 143, 233 b, 261 b, 
349, 253.¢; changes. 
139s, 151s, 203s, 305s, 
169, 325, to breathing 
141; om. bet. 2 vow. | 
or 2 cons. 140, 297 e, | 
305b, 14a, 331 b, 
158, in aor. 306 ; ins. | 
100, 217, in cj. 299 ,307, 
incompos. 383¢ ; doub- 
led 171: 
ject 186 d, of pl. 186 d,| 





of pers. 246, 271 ¢, of | | num. 2408: compounds. 


tense 273 b, 288 : o8< Cl 
70a: -sin der. 369a, 
381, 386. 4. 
wadmiter (sc. 6 0.) 571b. 
capt for ody 98d. 
-cav 3 pl. 275¢, 330a. 
Zaprndav dec. 224 f. 
caps dec. 22, 213 ; 
-#8, -@s, cp. 258, 263. 
-o¢, adv. in, 381. 3. 
weavrod, cavTod, dec. 27, 
244, 248; use 537. 
-velw, verbs in, 379a. 
onpalve, nom. om, 
ons dec. 224e. [571 b. 
-o 8a in 2 pers. 297 b. 
ot< 71,7, 143 b, 298,300. 
-rla,-ots, in der. 366 a. 
airos dec. 226 b. 
-oK- in s. 350, 379 b. 
-rkov, -oxduyy, iter. 332. 
REV. GR. 20 


GREEK. 


oxotréw, mid. 582 y ; 
Srrws, un, 624, 626. 
oop dec. 206 a. 
opodg dec. 224 f. 
ods 252. 5; use 538. 
wodpds dec. 23, 232 ; 
-Os, C}). 257, 263. 
oravifo w. gen. 414b. 
omévSw mid. 580. 


| omeéos dec. 21, 222d. 
-o ox, -7Ta, in der. 370d. 
-oorw, verbs in, 348,378 e. 


oradvov dec. 226 b. 
oraduss dec. 226 b. 


|oracate w. dat. 455. 


wrap dec. 207 b. 
TTépyo w. dat. 456. 
rrepéw w. gen. 414 b. 


lort (© =or) 90. 2, 91 b. 
oriXos dee. 225 f. 


wroxdfopat w. gen. 430. 


| oTpareve, -omat, 585’. 
S; use 


ov dec. 27, 246s 
536s; god, cul, oé, encl.| 
7878; cot ethical 4620: 
ovye 389 c 

ovyyevys w. gen., dat., 
442a, 451. 

ovyy- syvsoxeconst657}. 

cvdrdd» w. 2 ace. 480c’. 

Tuppépw w. dat. 453. 


sign of sub-| ody (Evy 170) 688, 689 b;' 


in compos. 166; w. 
w. dat. 451, 699f; w.gen. 
ovvehovre 671. (424. 
-civy in der. 367 c. 
cuvinnt w. gen. 432 b. 
civoida const. 657 j. 
ois, ds, dec. 14, 141. 


opahdopar w. gen. 405a.. 


;|ThE, sHlor, opty, 27, 
246d, 247; use 539; 
encl. 7878. 

odétepos 252. 5, 588 s. 
a wipe he . 257 a. 


&, opw€, &e., 27,246s. 
dat., 


oxeddv w. gen., 
445 C, 450’. 


UX Apo Arkwavendy497 c; 
"Arrixdy, Lwdapcxdr{ Bot- 


wriov), 569 d. 
cote w. gen. 405 a. 


ZwKxparys dec. 19, 213s. 


o@sa dee. 17, 206. 


-ds, 





457 


Tp) 


W.{@a@s, Gos, dec. 236 d. 


cwrTnp dec. 208 f. 

caHpbpwv cp. 259. 

T 4, 137; changes 147 s, 
160 s, 206, 298, 300, 
167s, 328; om. 149, 
151, 204s, 298, 300, 
222¢; ins.171; <0 167- 
<o 169: sign of per 
demonst., 246, 24. 
BEL by 255 isn ine. 
272 b,c; added to s. 
352; in pron.,adv.,377: 
ch.ase 291a, [194. 2. 

-ta for -rys 197b; voc. 

Tddas cp. 259. 


Tapa = yw 528 b. 
Taplas dec. 15, 195, 187, 
Tav monopt. 228 d. 


Tdprapos dee. 226 b. 


tavry adv. 380¢, 467, 


469 b. 


Tavtdv, Tavrd, 199 a. 
| TAX Us, -Ews, cp. 261 b, e, 


263: rivtraytorny 483d; 
ws raxtoTa, &ec., 553 b,¢. 


| euids, -ay, dec. 225 j. 
|Té-, Tl-, TW-, S. 


indef. 
253: 
-ré, adv. in, 381. 2. 


ré 389 c, 6850, 70la; 


pos. 720; encl. 787d: 
odre, unre, V01 a. 


-reipa fem. 235, 365 b. 


TENEVTAW W. 


405 ; 


gen. 
pt. as adv. 674b. 


téos aly. ace. 483. 
Tépve Ww. gen. part. 423. 


-Téos, verbal in, 269 d, 


374f; w. dat. 458; 
const. 682; sc. éori 
572: 


tépas dec. 207, 222¢. 
Tépyny dec. 234. 5. 


~TEPOS, in, 


257 s. 


-TaTOS, Cp. 


réooapes dec. 25, 240 e. 
TéXVy om. 506 b. 

THe, -d0, w. gen. 405. 
TyAlkos, 


-oUTos, -dade, 


53, 252, 547’. 


tiv dAdws 483 d. 
Tivos Dor. 281, 255 ¢. 


-THp, -THS, in der. 365, 
307 S, 


458 -THpLos 


-THptos, -ov, in der. 
374 b, 366 a. 

tlypts dec. 218. 2. 

7lOnpuw.gen. 422,431b; 
mid. 579. 

Tindw w. gen. 431 b. 

TiuHes, -7s, dec. 207 c. 

Tinwpéw, mid. 579; w. 
gen. 429 a. 

~THS fem. 868 a, 235. 

tls indef. dec. 28, 253, 
255€3 pos. 548 b, 720, 
520); encl. 787 b ; 
affixed 389 a: use 548 ; 
w. pl. 489d, 501; w. 


imv. 656a: tlasindecl.. 


507 e, g. 
tis interrog. dec. 28, 
253,255e ; use 563s; w. 
art. 5381 a; in condens. 
555 : zl yap, ti dé, &e., 
564¢; wa ri 566a;3 ri 
Adgers 6105.5 zh od as 
imy. 597 f. 
Trrcadépynsidec. 225 d. 
TO ye, 70. kal 7d, mpd TOU, 
519b; 7d vip 
665 b Tal, Tai, =ol, al, 
28 j. [pos. 720. 
trol encl. 685¢, 787d; 
Toi0s, -alros, -dade, 53, 
252, 199 a, 547. 
Tofevw. w. gen. 430. 
-ros in der. 240. 2,.363.d, 


374e, 269d; verbal in, ' 


w. dat. 458. 
T600S,- olros, -da5e, 53, 

252, 199 a, 547. 
Tore w. art. 526. 
Tov = Tivos, &c., 28 f, g, 
-tpa in der. 366 b. 
tpatrefa dec. 15, 791 ¢. 
tpets chec. 25, 240 e. 
tpémw mid. 585. 5. 
-Tpta, -rpis, in der. 365 b. 
Tpinpns dec. 213¢, 219 a. 
tplrov jucrddavrov 242 e. 
~Tpov in der. 366 b. 
TpOTs dec. 218. 1. 
<pdTrw p, -ov, -ous, 485 a. 
TVYXGVH w. gen. 426s, 

434 3 w. part. 677. 
Tovvos, -oros, 53, 2522 
cimTa w. 2acc. 480 b’. 
Tipats dec. 218. 2. 





(253. 


INDEX I. 


tupdss w. gen. 446 b. 
tupas dec. 225 j. 


519 b= ton Bad. 
-Twp in der. 365 b. 


ed to s. 355, 


‘bBpreris cp. 259 a. 
‘dyes cont. 120 f. 
vdap dec. 206. 


vw <ul, oo, 119, 233 ¢c. 


vet (6 Oeds) 571d, e; w. 


dat. 466. 


‘vids dec. 21; om. 438. 
‘ups, less Att. -Uw, 315 a. | 
my) pty, Spas, &e., 
bv in der. 378 b. 
omdya Oavadrov 431 d. 
trakota, -7oos, W. gen., 
elva | 


dat., 432 g, 455g. 
Srrap ‘dipt. 228 a. 


LOmdpxw w. gen. 425; w.} 
; dat. 459; w. pt. 677’. 
‘trép (imelp 134’) 688, | 
| 689]; cp. 262d. 


brretiPuvos W. gen. 431 c. 

trynpetys, -Téw, wW. dat. 
453. 

td (bral, br, 136) at, 
689k ; cp. 262d; 
pass. 586. 

tmrddixos w. gen. 431 Cs 

vrroyos, -xelptos, w. dat.. 
455 @ 


“US aly. 213.c; ep. 258. 


torepéw, -(fw, -alos, W. 


gen. 408. 
vaOrTEpos,-TaTOos, cp, 262d. 
© 4, 1382 5:< 9, BOs 


to th(wh)erefore 466, 


"Y WaAdy 4, 98 b, 106; 
| 0-93, 0-930; V<F, 
eF, 138, 142, 217), ¢, 
345 ; <0, W, W, AL, 114d, 
20b; v < vv, UF, ve, 
| va, vi, el, 7,115, 121 8, P8dve, p. or w. pt. 677 f ; 
eae ioe 278 ; v >, evin | 
Ss. 310, 314, 347 ; vadd- | 







247 g, i. 


xelp § 797. 
héptepos, -woros, &e., 
cp. 262 b. 


dépa, mids 578 a, 585: 
pépe 656 b. 


ped 684b; w. gen. 429e. 


gevyo const. 485d; as 
pass. 575 a; as pf. 612. 
oypl w. inf, 59h : ga- 
ov 571c; edn 574; 

ov pnuc 686i. 


w. kat 705 ¢. 
bese P9ots, dec.-224 e. 
Sovew w. gen. dat, 


432 f, 456. 


-pu(v) ‘old dat. 190, 163. 

‘iXos w. gen., dat., 442, 
, 456 ; ep. 257 d, 261 e. 

fee dec. 17, 251, 778. 
Avapets ZyXwv 674 g. 

PoBéw, mid. 5828; or 
PoBos, w. Orws, jah, 
. 6248; om. 626s; w 
mwas, el, 625 b. 


-Dépxvs. dec. 208 e, 224f. 
bpéap dec. 207 b, 778. 


plxn, -&, dec. 225 b. 
Pas (arpé, — olwos) 
159 h. 


povdos 161 c, 238 a. 
poupds. 161 c. 
pe puya-de, 225 e. 


frets const. 472j. 


tAag, lon. -axos, 225f. 
vrdoow, mid. 579. 
Epos w. ace. 472 j. 
vo w. gen. 412. 
ws dec. 17, 206, 2248. 
4, 137 5 ieee 
147,161,168s; changes 
147s, 159, 167; ins, 
191. 3; added to s 


xalpo w. dat. 456; w. 
acc. 472.b,.477 ; w. pt. 
677’. [456, 429 a. 


147,161, 168, 139, t90.; | yaAerraly@ w. dat., gen., 
changes 147 s, 159, 167.| YaXerds w. dat. 453: 


dalvw, mid. 58268; w 
inf. or pt. 657 k’. 
win early cj. 271. 
avepds efus 5728 ¢. 
dos, Pas, dec. 224 f. 
dpuy§ dec. 224 f. 
pelSopor w. gen. 405 b. 


-Os pépw 456. 


xaples dec. 23; ep. 258. 
Xaplfopar w. dat. 453.. 


Xdpts dec. 23a; xdpw 
380a, w. gen. 436d, 
pos. 721 ¢. 


xelp (lec, 18, 224f, 238d; 


a a at 


§ 798 xetp 
om. 506b: xelpw», 
-.oTos, 261, 262.b. 

XAr84v dec. 224. 

XHyxovea 126 p. 

Yoroopat, xwoua, w. 
dat., 456’, 429 a’. 

xopds dec. 16, 775. 

Xots dec. 224f. 

Xpdopar w. dat. acc., 
466 b, 478. 

xpéos dec. 224 f. 

XpeH w. gen., ace., 473 b; 
w. inf. 595: ipf. 611. 

xXprite w. gen. 414 c¢. 

Xe in periph. 446a; 
Ti xphua why 483 ¢. 

XpHomos w. dat. 453. 

Xpovos, gen. 433, dat. 
469, 485, acc. 482. 

xpvceos dec. 23, 772 ¢. 

Xpas dec. 224e, 207 a. 

Xapa, -loy, om. 506 b, c. 

Xopéw & compounds w. 
gen.,dat., 405a, b, 455g. 

xopls,-ifopat,w.gen.405. 

W 4,137; < 19, Bo, go, 
hols =. 0, od, 170. 

Wap, 1. yapos 225 f. 
ave w. gen. 426. 
evSopar w. gen. 405 ; 
w. ace. 478. 


GREEK. 


*Q péya 4, 98c, 106: 
@ <l 00, 0a, O€, 07, OW, 
WA, WE, 10, AW, AOU, aa, 
€0,€W,70,wW, ova, 7, 115, 
120s, 152, 197 ¢, 200, 
208, 278, 130¢, 131d, f, 
20132473 <P e 115, 
213 s, 257 b, 310, 314, 
130¢,325d;<o2117e; 
<4a,7, 114b, 312¢,341; 
<e 355a; for ov, av, 
130¢, 197¢, 2224, 324, 
131e: in cont. 119s; 
in sub. 292; -w in der. 
378 e, 882d; -w & -pr 
forms 270 c, 315, 335. 

» 109s, in cont. 7, 118d, 
119s; in dee. 11s. 

&, 3,684b: in address 
484, 401.3; crasis 126; 
hyperb. 7197: @ poe 
453. 

@Se x ottrws 547, 53. 

wy dec. 15, 195, 775. 

-@Sns in der. 375 f. 

-ov, -wvia in der. 372 a. 

aveopat w.gen., dat.,acc., 
431 a, 450 c. 

wdv dec. 16, 775. 

oom interj. 684, 160¢. 

apa w. dat., inf, 460; 


apedov 459 


se. éorly 572: wpatos 
w. gen. 436", 

-ws, adv. in, 381. 

és proclit.786 ; use711a, 
5S, “704 @ aypy Kage: omn: 
before appos. 394b; w. 
gen. 420b; w. dat. 
462d; w. sup. 553; 
in condens. 558 b, 565 ; 
in excl. 564¢’; w. pt. 
598 b, 680, 675e; final 
624s; complem. 643s, 
x 67. 702a, om. 647b; 
in wish 648d; w. inf. 
671, 513d; w. adv. 
Af wna PLee 
as prep. 711¢; in ell. 
711; anacol. 716: éorw 
ws 559a; ws Ti 566 a. 

aomep 389h; w. pt. 680, 
675°e sy in’ elk TIP: 
womep dv ef 622 d. 

aore 389j,787e; consec. 
701k, 671d; w. imv. 
655; w. inf. 671, 513d. 

aorifomar w. dat. 455 f. 

wv lon. 108b, 131 e. 

apedéw w. dat. 453; w. 
acc. 472 b: -ay w. gen. 
444 e, [638 g. 

@hedov in wish, 611, 


798. INDEX II.— LATIN AND ENGLISH. 


This Index is designed, not only for prominent subjects and words, but also 


for the Greek and Latin authors cited, and for abbreviations. 


The writings of 


Xenophon are commonly cited without naming the author, and the Anabasis 
without even naming the work (by book, chapter, and section, according to the 
usual division: as, iv. 3.12). The Iliad and Odyssey are cited by book-letter 
and verse as numbered by Wolf, Bekker, &c.; a capital referring to the Iliad, 
and a small letter to the Odyssey (A. 25, for Il. iv. 25; 8, 134, for Od. iv. 134). 
in Hesiod, the references are made to the verses of Gaisford; in Pindar, to 
‘iose of Heyne; and in the Dramatists, to those of Dindorf. The Historians are 
commonly cited by book and chapter, according to the usual division; Demos- 
thenes, by the pages and lines of Reiske; the other Orators and Plato (includ- 
ing Timzus Locrus), by the pages and lines or division-letters of Stephens; 
Strabo by the pages, and Athenzeus by the pages and division-letters of Casau- 
bon; the fragments of the Tragedians and Aristophanes, as numbered by Din- 
dorf; those of Alczeus, Sappho, Corinna, Epicharmus, and Sophron, as num- 
bered by Ahrens, with the numbers of other well-known editions (as of Alczeus 
by Matthiz, and of Sappho by Neue) often annexed ; those of Hesiod, Si- 
monides, and Tyrtzeus, according to Gaisford; those of Aleman, according to 
Bergk; those of Pindar, according to Bickh; &c. Figures indicating the 
times at or about which the authors flourished are here subjoined to their 


460 A- INDEX II. AFFI § 798. 


names, from the latest edition of Liddell & Scott’s excellent Lexicon. It will be 
understood that the year before Christ is denoted, unless the number is followed 
by “A. D.’’ For the authors most cited, the dialect and chief department of 
composition are also indicated. These particulars should be carefully noted, 
in judging of the forms and constructions adduced. Titles of works are some- 


times added. 


In most cases, the meaning of the abbreviations used in this work will be 
plain from their familiar use, or from the connection and the following list of 
words; in other cases, special aid will be given below. For some explanations 


applying to the Index itself, see § 797. 


A-DECLENSION 183 b. 
Ablative in Latin 399 b, ec, 465 b. 
Absolute nom. 401; compt. & sup. 
514; time 607; inf. 665; gen., acc. 
Absorption of vowels 118. [(pt.) 675. 
Abstract noun 55, 363, 367, com- 
ound 386 d; in pl. 489; as concrete 
0i, 363 h. 
Acatalectic verse 748. 
Accent 766s; marks 94, 98b,767e,¢: 
principles 766s; uses 766. 8, 727; final, 


recessive, retentive, 769: gen. laws 


770s: in contr. 772, crasis 773, apost. 
774, dec. 775s, cp. 776, cj. 776, 780s, 


compos.783: in construction 784, grave 


784, anastrophe 785, proclitics 786, 
enclitics 787: in formation, hist., 789; 
in dial. 790; in theme 791s; in adv., 
prep-, 794; in compos. 795: final at 
and o 767 b: rhythmic 741. 
Accentual, or tone places 767. 
Accusative 10, 186 d, 398, 485d; 
local idea 470; mark v or a 184¢c; 
changes 122, 160 e, 199, 202 b; in 
appos. w. sent. 396: of DIR. OBJ. and 
EFF. 472s; w. verbs (also gov. gen. 
or dat., of motion, &c.) 472, 485d ; 
w. verbals 472j; w. causatives (so 
Set, xpy) 473; by attr. 474; in periph. 


475; w.verb om. 476; w. adv. of swear- 
ing 476 d; om. 476. 2, 577 c: of effect 


477; of kind. noun (so w. adj.) 477, 
neut. adj. 478, defin. noun 479: double, 
w. verbs of making, doing, choosing, 


naming, saying, asking, clothing, con- 


céaling, teaching, &c.,480: of SPECIF., 
or synecd., 481, 587. 2: of EXTENT 
482: adv., 4838, 380 a: of rel. attracted 
554; rather w. inf. 661 b; subj. of 
inf. 666; abs. 675; w. verbal in téov 
682s ; w. prep. 688s: accent 775s: 
inf. as acc. 663 e, 664 ¢, 665. 

Acephalous verse 748. 

Achronic forms 590 a, 613 b, 660. 

Active Voice 30, 271 e ; for pass. 575; 
trans. and intrans., caus. and immed., 
577; w. or wt. reflex. pron. 588, 577 ¢; 
= mid. 577, 585: Verbals 363, 365, 374; 
w. gen. 444; w. ace. 472). 


See also § 804 s. 


Actual sentence 61f : mode 30¢c, 613 ; 
interch. w. contingent 654. 

Acute accent 94, 767e; > grave 784: 

Additive particle 685c¢. [syll. 768. 

Address 57; voc. 484, nom. 401. 3; 
sign 65 c, 484 a, 684 b. 

Adjective 55, 173; dec. 22s, 229s; 
of 1, 2, 8 term., 230s; irreg. 236; num. 
25, 239; pron. 28, 249: compar. 256: 
der. 373, 509 i; compos. 885 s: SYNT., 
agreement 504,492; anacoluth. 504b; 
subj.om.506,712; adj.as subst. oradv. 
506 d, 509; use of neut. 507, 491, 502, 
w. impers. 570e, bs for sing. 489: pos. 
718 f, s; accent of fem. 777. 2, of theme 
791s: Adj. Clause 62h; pos. 7180. 

Adjunct, prepos. x nude, complem. x 
circumst.,.58. 

Adnominal genitive 435 d. 

Adonic verse 750. 1. 

Adopted stems 358. 

Adverb 55,685 ; num.52, 241, pronom. 
53, 877, charact., neg., interrog., &c., 
685s: cp. 268, 262d; der. 380: synt. 
685, 703s; w. art. = adj. 526; attracted 
554d, 558b; complex 559, 565; as 
prep., as conn. and non-conn., 703; in 
const. preg. 704; used subst. or adj. 
706: pos. 718 e, s; acgent 794, 786s. 

Adverbial clause 62h, pos. 718 p; 
acc. 483, 380, gen., dat., 380; phrases 
529, 698; inf. 655; pt. 674d. 

Adversative conjunctions 701 b. 

Aflianus fi. 150 A. D. 

olic dialect (Aol., m.) 82, 84, 87a; 
opt. 293 e; verse 750; digamma 98 e; 
form 297 b; accent 790. _[tor, § 85. 

Eschines (Aéschin.) fl. 345, Att. ora- 

schylus (Aisch.) fl. 484, Att. tra- 
gedian, § 85: Agamemnon, Choéphori, 
Eumenides, Persze, Prometheus, Sep- 
tem contra Thebas (Th.), Supplices; 

Asodpus, fabulist. [ Fragmenta, 

Affixes, open x close, 172¢ ; nude x 
euph. 183, 303: of dec. 11, 180s, 20, 
analyzed and pial ce 12s: of pers. 
pron. 27 e: of c., subjective x obj., pri- 
mury x sec.,imy., inf., partic., 32,35, 


§ 798. AFFo 


285 s, 48, 321s; nude 290a, 313, 320; 
regular 303; union w. s. 304s. 

Aiformatives 360, 32 f. 

Agent, suff. of, 365; w. pass. gen. 
586, 434, dat. 586, 461, 458, acc. 682b. 

Agesilaus, see Xenophon. 

Agreement 63a, 492s; acc. to form x 
sense 493s; of subst. 393, adj. 504, 
pron. 505, verb 568. 

Alceus (Alc.) fl. 606, Aol. lyrist, § 84: 
Alcaic verse 743, 750. 3. 

Aleman (Alem.) fl. 650, Dor. lyrist : 
Alemanian verse 750. 3. 

Alexandrine dialect 88 a. 

Allegory 70 e. 

Alpha privative 385, 436. 

Alphabet 1, 90 ; hist. 97: Heb. and 
Lat. 2, 92, 97s. 

Alternative adv. 685.¢; conj. 701d. 

Amo, contr. cj. 43. é 

Amphibrach 77, 740 c. 

Anabasis, see Xenophon. 

Anacolithon 70t ; in synt. of appos. 
396 c, nom. 402, adj. and pt. 504b, 
compt. 511, art. 532, fin. verb 644s, 
649 s, 655, inf. and pt. 659, 667 g, ver- 
bal 683, particle 716. 

Anacreon fl. 540, lon. lyrist : poems 
in imitation of, Anacreontica (Anact.): 
Anacreontic verse 754, 759. 

Anacrisis 743 e, 750 ¢. 

Analysis of sentences 57 s, 72s, words 
75e, cp. 29, verb 32, affixes 12s, 27e. 
82, 35s, metres 78. [742,; verse 751. 

Anapest77,740c¢: anapeestic rhythm 

Anastrophe 71a; of accent 785. 

Andocides fl. 415, Att. orator. 

Anomaly, -lous, see Irregular. 

Antecedent, def. or indef., 549 ; in 
clause w. rel. or om. 551; attracted 
553s: clause un, w. rel. clause 555 s. 

Antepenult 111, 767 f, 770. 

Anthologia Greeca (Anth.). 

Antibacchius 77, 740 ¢: -ic rhythm 

Antimachus fl. 405, Ep. poet. [742b. 

Antimeria 70 a. [in Anthol. 

AntipaterThessalonicensis fl. 10 A.D., 

Antiphilus (Antiphil.), epigrams. 

Antispast 77, 740c: -ic verse 742), 

Antistrophe 744 e. [765. 

Antithesis 6, 104 ; or contrast, 71a. 

Aorist 30 b, 267 c, 273s; w.o changed 
or om. 152, 306: second 289, in pures 
313 b; stem 47, 336, 340; accent 780s, 
789d; redupl. 284 e; intrans. 338 b, | 
577e; 1 and 2a. forms united 327: 
synt., x def. and compl. tenses, 5y0s ; 
narrative 590 a; in imv. 592b; as se- 


LATIN & ENGLISH. 


ARTI 461 
quel 592c, 605b; generic use 602 b, 
603,605 ; snomic 606; x ipf. as conting. 
or indef. 615s; X pres. w. #7 628; inf. 
660, 598; pt. 674e, 660e; pass. and 
mid. interch. 576; aor. sub = fut pf. 

Apheresis 6, 103¢, 124b. — [617c. 

Apocope 6, 103 ¢ ; in particles 136. 

Apodosis 62 j; see Conclusion. 

Apollonius Dyscolus fl. 138 A. D., 
grammarian: De Pronomine. 

Apollonius Rhodius fl. 200, Epic poet. 

Apologia (Apol.), see Xenophon. 

Aposiopésis 68 e, 532. 

Apostrophe 6, 103d, 127, 135b; 
accent 774, 788 b: rhetor. 70 g. 

Appellatives 55; der. of fem. 370. 

Apposition, -tive, 58; dir. pred., 
modal, &c., 393; partitive 395, 417: 
synt. 8938; w. sentence 396, w. voc. 
485 a, by synesis 394c: appositional 
verb 59a, 437. 

Aptote 227 a. 

Apud (ap.) = quoted in. 

Aratus fl. 270, didactic poet (Ep.). 

Archaism 67 b. 

Archilochus f1.700, Iambic poet (Ion.). 

Archimédes fl. 250, mathematician 
(Dor. § 86). [§ 86). 

Archytas fl. 400 ?, philosopher (Dor. 

Arcus dec. w. dpxus 219f. —[(Ion.). 

Aretzeus fl. 70? A. D., medical writer 

Argive dialect (Dor.), vs in, 156 c. 

Aristophanes (Ar.) fl. 427, Att. come- 
dian, § 85: Acharnenses, Aves, Eccle- 
siazusx, Equites, Lysistrata, Nubes, 
Pax, Plutus, Ranz, Thesmophoria- 
zuse, Vespee: Aristophanic verse 753. 

Aristoteles (Aristl.) fl. 347, philos- 
opher (§ 85b): De Interpretatione, 
Metaphysica, Rhetorica, &c. 

Arrangement, log., rhet., rhythm., 
64; hyperb. 71; dir. or normal x indir. 
or varied, periodic x loose, 718; why 
varied 719 s. 

Arsis 741; affecting quant. 736 c. 

Article, prepos. x postpos., 28, 249s ; 
in crasis 125; mark of gend., &c., 
173b; proclit. 786: syNT., use as 
gen. defin., Ep. 516, Ion. and Dor.517, 
Att. 518s: as art. proper 520s; generic, 
w. proper names, abstracts, inf., &c., 
522: limiting 523s; order of descrip- 
tion X statement 523; w. pron. 524s, 
531, av’rés 540b; w. num 531d; w. 
adv. 526; w. ell. 527, 532, neut. 5285s; 
W. appt, mepi, 527 a; in contrast, &e., 
530; = poss.pron.530e; markingsubj. 
of sent. 584: repeated 523 b, j, 584. 4; 
omitted 533 s: indefinite (ris) 548 2. 


462 


ASPI 


INDEX II. 


COMP § 798. 


Aspirate mute 4, 137: breathing 93:! Cases, dir. or indir, right or oblique, 


aspiration om. 159, 343, 167; trans- 
ferred 159 g, 161, 167. 

Assimilation 104; of rel. or antec. 

Asterisk (*) 96 c. (554. 

Asynartete verse 742 b. 

Asyndeton 68 d, 707; Eng. x Gr. 707]. 

Attenuation of vowels 107, 114: at- 
tenuated stems 341. 

Atheneus fl. 228 A. D., scholar. 

Atona = Proclitics 786 ¢. 

Attic dialect 82, 85; old, mid., new, 
> Common, 85a, b: dec. 200; gen. 
220f; redupl. 281d, 357.2; opt.293¢; 
imv. 300d; fut. 305; letters 98f: 
accent 790: Atticists 88 c. 

Attraction 70 q: in synt. of appos. 
396 b, acc., &c., 474, agreement 500, 
adj. 508s, pron. 552s, 565, verb 573, 
649 d, inf. and pt. 657, 666s, particle 
715, 702 d; affecting pos. 719, 558, 662. 

Attribute 60b, 492b: attributive 

Audio, contr. cj. 43. — [gen. 435d. 

Augment, syll. x temp., 277; rules 
278s; in compos. 282; in dial. 284; 
in accent 783, 789 ¢. 

Augmentatives, deriv., 372. 

Authority in prosody 726 b, 733. 

Auxiliary verbs 274, 285 a, 317, 598, 
679. [764. 

BaAccHivus 77, 740c: -ic verse 742b, 

Barbarism 67 b. 

Barytone 5, 768: verb 309. 

Base in cp. 29, 256a; in cj. 289 e. 

Basis in versif. 743 e, 750. [(Bek.). 

Bekker’s Edition of Homer, 1858 

Bion fl. 280, pastoral poet (Dor. § 86). 

Beeotie (Beeot., B.) dialect 82. 

Bonus, dec. compared 23. 

Brachycatalectic 743. 

Brachylogy 68. 4. 

Brackets [ ] 96 ec. 

Breathings 4, 93; < F, 2, 141; in 
dial. 167 ¢: marks 98 b. . 

Breve (short syllable) 725 a. 

Bucolic poetry 86; cesura 745 d. 

Byzantine dialect 88 s. 

Cmsar, Latin historian. 

Crestira, of foot, verse, masc., fem., 
&e., ceesural pause, sylL, 745; affect- 
ing quantity 736 c. 

Callimachus fl. 260, poet (Ep. Dor., 
&c.): Epigrammata; Hymni in De- 
lum, Diainam, Jovem, Lavacrum Pal- 
ladis; Fragmenta. 

Callinus fl. 730? elegiac poet (§ 83). 

Cardinal numbers 52, 239 s. 





subjective, obj., or resid, 10, 179, 
397s; affixes 11s, 180s; hist. 186s: 
use 397s, generic 485, in denoting 
place or time 470, 482 e, absolute 675, 
w. prep. 689: Latin 399 b, c. 
Catalectic 743 ; ta syll., &c., 743 h. 
Catullus, Latin poet. 
Causal conjunctions 701 j. 
Causative verbs 379, 577, 581; w. 
acc. 4738. 
Cf. = confer, compare, consult. 
Characteristic 172 d: exponents 66. 
Chiasma 71 a. / 
Chief = principal clauses 626: chie 
= primary tenses 267 b: -ly (ch.). 
Choliambus = Seazon 759. 
Choral odes 744 e. - 
Choree = trochee 77, 740c.  [764. 
Clroriamb 77, 740 ¢: -ic verse 742 b, 
Chorus using sing. 488 a. 
Chronic x achronic forms 590 a.. 
Cicero: De Oratore, &e. 
Circumflex accent 94, 767e, g; 771: 
-flexed syll. or vow. 768; long 771, 726. 
Circumlocution = periphrasis 69 d. . 
Circumstantial adjunct, or circum- 
Cj. = conjugation. [stance, 58d, s. 
Clauses 57; kinds 62, 58h; pos. 
7180, s, 721. [compos. 388 b, 
Clore vowels 107 a: affixes 172¢: 
Cognate vowels 4, 110 b: consonants 
4, 187 b, 167: themes 338 d. 
Collateral 3338 d, 359 ¢. 
Collectives 55; w. pl. 499. 
Comedy, comic (com.), 85s. 
Common dialect 85a: gend. 174: 
commonly (comm. ). 
Comparatio compendiaria 511 b. 
Comparison (cp.) 29 (anal.), 256s ; 
of adj. by -repos, -ratos 257, by -iwv, 
-.atos 260, irreg. 262; of adv., &e. 
263, 262d; double 262c; by use of 
adv. 510: hist. 264; accent 776: Com- 
parative (compt., comp.) W. gen., W. 
n, &e., 408, 511, 513, w. ell. 511 b, 513; 
w. dat. of measure 468; w.reflex. 515 f; 
two, w. 7,°513h; abs., too, as pos., 
514s: Comp. conjunction 47011. 
Compellative 57, 484s :-part 60. 
Complementary adjunct, or comple- 
ment, 58d, e, 63 f: pron., adv., 66 d, 
563s: conjunction 701i: clause 643 s. 
Complete tenses 30h, 267 ¢; hist. 
273 e, 276; redupl. 280; limited us 
esp. in act., 317s, 600¢; auxil. ant 
nude forms 317s, 679 a3 rel. to stem 
47, 336; in dial. 325d, ¢, 326 b, 329s: 








§ 798. COMP LATIN & 


Xx def. and indef. 590, 599: special 
uses 599; in imv. 599d, e; preter. 
268, 600; as pres. or fut. 610; intrans. 
577 e. [and parts 62 b, g. 

Complex modification 59: sentence 

Composition 359, 383 s ; dir. x indir., 
loose x close, double, &c., 387 s; vowel 
883 a; form of Ist word 383, of 2d, 386; 
Clision 128a, 282a; augm. and red. 
282; synt. relations 722; quant. 731; 
accent 789 f, 795, 7&3. 

Compound word 359b; verb 387, 
699: sentence 62.c: vowel (diphthong) 
108: system 267 f: constr. 68 f, 495. 

Concession expr. by pt. or w. con]. 
674 f, 701 g. [631 s; omitted 638. 

Conclusion x premise 62j ; forms of, 

Concord = agreement 63 a. 

Concrete, abstract for, 70 i, 363 h. 

Condensation, 555, 565. 

Condition 627} ; see Premise: Con- 
ditional conj. 701 f; sentences, forms 
of, 631s, rel. 641; for oth. forms, 639. 

Conjugation (cj.), distinctions 30, 
265 s; hist. 271s; anal. 32, 35s, 277s; 
paradigms 37s, 48b; prefixes 277, 
284; affixes 285, 48, 321; stem 47, 
49, 336: quant. 728, 730; accent 776, 
780 s. 

Conjunctions (conj.) 55, 65s, 700, 
classes, origin, 701; generic for spec. 
705; om. 707; introd. 708e; repeated 
714; pos. 718 a, 720. fae9 Cs 

Conjunctive, or contingent, mode, 

Connecting vowels, or connectives, 
of dec. 12 s, 188, ep. 29, 256 s, cj. 32h, 
35s, 290s, 326, compos. 383. 

Connective exponents, conj. x conn. 
ton or ady., primary x sec., 66: pos. 

18 a, 720. 

Consecutive conj. 701k, 671d, e. 

Consonants 4, 137s; in Gr. alph. 
98; old 138; changes 139 s; final 160; 
movable 162; dial. and poet. var. 167s; 
added or om. in s. 217, 344s, 348; af- 
fecting quant. 734s: cons. dec. 183b. 

Construction varied in Gr. 392: per- 
sonal for impers. 573: Constructio 
pregnans 704. 

Contingent sentence 61 f; modes 30 c; 
613s; particle 618, 685c: Contingen- 
cy, pres. X past, fut., 613 s. 

Contraction (cont., ct.) 7, 117s, 131; 
in Dec. 1.196 s, Dec. m1. 200s, Dec. m1. 
207, 211, 219, 222, cp. 261 a, cj. 278s 
(aug.), 805 (fut.), 809, 316, 321, der. 
861d; quant. 726; accent. 772: in 
versif. 741 b: Contract verbs 42, 309, 
in Lat. 43. 

Coérdinate vowels 110b; consonants 


ENGLISH. DEFI 463 


137 b, 168; sentences 62.¢; conjunc- 
tions 701: Coordination 62c ; for subora. 
Copula 60 b ; omitted 572. (705. 

Copulative conjunctions 701 a. 

Corinna fl. 500, Beeotic lyrist. 

Cordnis 96, 124b. e. 

Correlatives, pronominal, 53, 377. 

Corresponding vowels and conso- 
nants 188; connectives 66 f. 

Cp., in § 50 = compounded ; in the 
_Indexes = comparison. [accent 773. 

Crasis 117, 124, 133; quant. 726; 

Cratinus fl. 454, Att. comedian. 

Cretan dialect 82 ; vs in, 156. 

Cretic 77, 740 c¢: verse 742 b, 764. 

Ct. = contracted. 

Cyropedia, see Xenophon. [747. 

DaAcTYL 77, 740c:° -ic verse 742, 

Dative 10, 186f, 190, 398, double 
office 399: has always ¢ 184b; not 
elided 129; pl. in Dec. mr. 154s, 216 d: 
OBJECTIVE 3898, 448s; of APPROACH 
448 s; of nearness (traffic, subst. rep., 
&c.) 449; of likeness 451: of INFLU- 
ENCE 452s, w. words of address 452, 
advantage, &c., 453, appearance, 
cause, destiny, oblig.,val., giving, 454, 
oppos., yielding, &c., 455, mental act 
or feeling, or power of exciting, 456 s, 
w. verbals 458, subst. verb 459, other 
words (to or for) 460; of agent w. pass. 
verbs 461, 586; for remote relations 
(so w. pt., as+ pot, cot, &c., ethical) 
462; for gen. 463s: RESIDUAL 398, 
465 s, 485; instrum. and mod. 466 8; 
of instrument, means (so W. ypdéouat), 
466; of way, manner, respect (so w. 
avtés) 467; of meas. of diff. 468: tem- 
poral and local 469: of rel. attracted 
554 b; w. prep. 688s, w. comp. verbs 
699 f, eg; asadv. 880 c: pos. 718s; ac- 
cent. 775s: implied in an adj. 498 a; 
inf. as dat. 663 e, 666 b. 

Dativus Commodi, Inconvmodi, 453 N. 

Declarative sentence 61. 

Declension 10s, 173s; distinctions 
178; three methods 180; gen. rules 
181; affixes 11s, 183; hist. 186; par- 
adigms compared w. Lat. 14, We.: 
Dec. 1. 14s, 189, 193; Dec. 11. 14, 16, 
187, 199; Dec. 14. 14, 17, 186, 202; 
dial. 20s; irreg. 21, 223; def. 227: 

adj. 22, 229; num. 25, 240s; pt. 26, 
234; pron. 27, 239: quant. 728, ac- 
cent 775s. [verbs 337. 

Defective nouns 227; adj. 238 ; 

Definite tenses 30 b, 267 ¢; x indef. 
590s; descriptive 591a, 592 a; in 
verbs of asking, &c., 595 a; for oth. 
tenses 602s: article 5620: relatives 549. 


464 DEFI 


Definitive, old, 249, 516: noun (ace.) 
479. 

Degrees of compar. 256 ; use 510; 
interch. 515: Degree-sion 256 a, 29. 
Demonstrative pron. and adv. 28, 
58, 252, 377; SYNT. 542; om. bef. rel. 

551f; in attr. 552s; for rel. 562. 

Demosthenes fl. 355, Att. orator, § 85. 

Denominatives in der. 362. 

Dentals = Linguals 4, 187 b. 

Dependent sentences 62 b, 58. 3, h. 

Deponent, mid. x pass., 266 c, 576 b ; 
pass. of, 588. 

Derivation, -tive, 54, 359s; euph. 
changes 861; quant. 731; accent 789s. 

Desiderative verbs 379. 

Dieresis 6, 105; accent 772. 3; 
mark 96 b, 110 a: in versif. 745 h. 

Dialects 81s: variations in orthog. 
and orthoépy 98h, 130, 167, dec. 20s, 
&e., cj. 48, 284, 321, synt. 392 ¢, 
accent 790: Dialectic Forms (D. F.). 

Diastole x Systole 6, 105. 

Digamma = Vau; see F, before Z, 
in Greek Index: verbs 845. 

Diiambus, or Diiamb, 77, 740 ce. 

Dimeter 743, 744 d. [379. 

Diminutives, gend. 175; der. 371, 

Dinarebus fl. 336, Att. orator. 

Dindorf’s Edition (Dind.). 

Dio Cassius fl. 180 A. D., historian. 

Diodorus Siculus fl. 8, historian. 

Diogenes Laértius fl. 200? A. D., 
biographer. 

Diphthongs 4, 106 ; prop. x improp. 
108; corresp. 115 a; resolved 105, 182; 
quant. 526, 7387; in accent. 767. 

Dipody 740 b. — Diptote 228 e. 

Direct cases 10, 179, 397, 186, in 
accent. 775: complement, ob7., 58e: 
discourse, quot., 62k, 648, w. indir. 
644, 659: compounds 388: order 718. 

Dispondee 77, 740 c¢. 

Distich 744 e. 

Distinct sentence, verb, mode, 62a, 
30c; in dependent clauses, x incorp., 
657. 

Distinctive adv. 685¢: conj. 701 ce. 

Distributive pronouns 55, 501. 

Ditrochee 77, 740 ce. 

Divided construction 501 a. 

Division of syllables 111. 

Dochmius 77, 740¢: -iac verse 765. 

Déilus compared w. d5dos 14. 

Donum compared w. d@pov 14. 

Dorie dialect (Dor., p.) 82, 86s: fu- 
ture 805 d, 325 b: accent. 790. 


INDEX II. 


§ 798. 


EURI 


Double accusative 480: consonants 4, 
137 a, d, 170; affecting quant. 725, 
734: d. cons. verbs 41, 270, 811. 

Doubtful vowels 4, 106, 726. 3. 

Duad in versif. 744 e. 

Dual number 178 ; old plur. 186 g, 
271¢; in cj. 299: used w. pl. 494. 

EcBASsIs in versif. 7438 e. 

Ecclesiastical dialect 88 b. 

Elegiac poets 83 : verse 749. 

Elements of the sentence 57: of the 
word 172; in dec. 183, cp. 256, cj. 82, 
der. 359s, compos. 3&3 s. 

Elision, see Apostrophe. 

Ellipsis 68 ; in synt. of appos. 394s, 
gen. 418 b, 438, dat. 450d, 462, acc. 
476, adj. 506, 511b, art. 527, 533, 
pron. 586, 551, 555, 562, 565, verb 571, 
626, 636, 647, inf. 668, pt. 676, 678, 
particle 707. y 

Empedocles fl. 444, philosoph. poet. 

Emphatic changes in s. 346: parti- 
cles 685¢: repetition 69b: position 
719 a. 

Enallage (metaphor, &c.) 70s. 

Enclitics 787 ; accented 788. 

Ending, see Flexible. 

English x Greek 171 b. 

Enneémim 740 b. 

Eo compared with efuc 45 m. 

Epenthesis 6, 103 ; see Insertion. 

Epexegetic inf. 668 e. [83. 

Epic, or Homeric, language (Ep., E.) 

Epicene nouns 174a. [$ 8 

Epicharmus fl. 477, Dor. comedian, 

Episéma 1, 91, 98d. 

Epithet x predicate adj. 59a, 492 b. 

Epitrite 77, 740 c. 

Epode 744 e. . 

Equestri, De Re, see Xenophon. 

Equal, or quadruple, rhythm 742. 

Especially (esp.). 

Essential x inflective 172a, c. 

Ethical dative 462 e. 

Etymology 172s ; tables 9s. 

Euclides fl. 350 2, mathematician. 

Kuphemism 70 m. 

Euphonie changes 99; of vowels 7, 
118s, of consonants 8, 139s, 147s: 
affixes, dee., cj , 183, 187, 308, 271 f. 

Euripides il, 441, Att. tragedian, 
§ 85: Alcestis, Andromache, Baeche, 
Cyclops, Electra, Hecuba, Helena, 
Heraclidee, Herenles Furens, Hippo- 
lytus, lon, Iphigenia in Aulide, Iphi- 
geniain Tauris, Medéa, Orestes, Phoe- 
nissz, Rhesus, Supplices, Troades: 


a 


§ 798. EXCE LATIN & 


Fragmenta(Antiope, Archelaus, Cres- 
see, Peleus, Polyidus, Incerta). 
Except, exception (exc.). 
Exclamation, nom. in, 401 b, gen. 
429f, dat. 453, acc. 4764, pron. or 
adv. 564 b, inf 670, inter). 684 b: ex- 
clamatory sentence 61 d. 
Exempli gratia (e. g.), for example. 
Exponents for words 65, sentences 
66; pos. 718d, 720: exponential ad- 
junct 58 c. [324.¢, 47¢. 
Extension of vowels 103 b, 135, 322¢, 
Extra metrum, exclamations, 743 f. 


Fauna Ionic 77,740¢: rhythm 742. 

Feet 77, 740; interch. 741b, 747, 
751, 755, 760, 764; ictus 741¢; cx- 
sura 745. 

Feminine gender 174s; dec. 189 ; 
in adj. 232; w. mase. form 234; fr. 
kind stem 235: ceswra 745 c. 

Figures affecting letters and sounds 
6, 99: of syntax, of rhetoric, 67s. 

Final consonants 160, movable 162: 
conjunctions 701 e: clauses, modes in, 
624; relative 642: syll. of verse 738: 
accent 769. 

Finite modes, sentences 62a ; synt. 
of, 568s; interch. w. incorporated 
657, 659, 671. 

First tenses and tense systems 289. 

Flexible endings, or flexives, of dec. 
12, 183; of cj. 82i, 295, 328. 

Flourished (of authors ; {l.). 

Fluents (A, p) 4, 137. 

Formation 172, 359 ; of simple words 
362, compound 383; quant. 731; ac- 
cent 789: formative x radical 172 b. 

Fractional numbers 242 d, e. 

Fragment (Fr.). — French (Fr.). 

Frequentative verbs 379. 

From (by inflection, deriv., &c.; fr.). 

Future indef. 30b, 266s, 273s; 
subjective tense 584; wants sub. and 
imy. 269b; liquid 152; Att., Dor., 
305, 325b; redupl. 284f: second 
289: SYNT. 596 s; for imv. 597; gnomic 
606; for pres. or past 610; in final 
clause 624 b; inf. 598, 660; pt. 674e, 
expr. purpose 598 b; opt. 643 h; mid. 
for act. 584, for pass., v. v., 576.4 
in Mod. Gr. 598 d: def. and comp 
596 a: Contingency 614. 

Future Perfect 30b, 267e, 273e, 
819: use 601: Lat. 601e, 617 d. 

GALENUS fl. 163 A.D., medical writer. 

Gender 174; rules 175s: in synt. 
490 s. 

General or indef. premise, 634, 641. 
REY. Gk. 20 * 


C: 
lete 


oe Le 


ENGLISH. GUTT 465 


Generic use 63g, 392a; of cases, 


485, tenses 602 s, modes 651, connec- 
tives 705: time tor fact 602c¢, con- 
tingency 614 b: article 522. 


Genitive 10, 186e, 398, 485b: of 


DEPARTURE, 4038; of separ. 4048; w. 
words of sparing, &c., 405b; of dis- 
tinction 404, 406; w. words of superi- 
ority 407; w. compt. 408, 511; w. mul- 
tiples, &c., 409: of CAUSE 403, 4108; 
of origin and mat. 412, for dat. 412 a; 
of theme, 413: of supply, w. words of 
plenty and want, 414: partitive 415s, 
expr. quantity, &c., 416; w. subst., 
418, expr. country 418a; w. adj., 
art., sup., &c., 419, 511; w. adv. of 
place, time, state, &c., 420; w. verb, as 


subj. 421, as appos. 422, as complem. 


423; w. words of sharing, beginning, 
and touch 424 s; as part taken hold of 
426 a; w. words of obtaining, &c., 427: 
of motive, &c., 428s, w. words of direc- 
tion, claim, dispute, 480; of price, 
value, merit, crime, 431; of punish- 
ment 431d; of sensible and mental ob-. 
ject 432; w. words of obedience 482 ¢; 
of time and place, 433: act. or effic., 
w. verbs of receiving, learning, &c., w. 
pass.verbs, verbals, &c.,434, 586 : con- 
stetuent (adjunct defining thing or prop- 
erty, w. subst., adj., or adv., distinct 
or involved) 435s, 485b, attrib. or 
adnom. 435d; w. compounds of 4- 
priv., W. dgw, &c., 486; w. appos. verb, 
in periphr., w. or for adj., 437; w. 
subs.om., or>case of thing possessed, 
438; of property 439s; of relation 441s; 
social, w. adj. of connect. ,442 ; possess. 
443, w. verbs of praise, wonder, &c., 
443 b; objective, w. verbals, abstracts, 
aittos, &c., 444; of loc. or temp. rela- 
tion 445; of specification, &c., 446: by 
attraction 474 ¢; in pron. 588; rather 
w. pt. 661 b; abs. 675; w. prep. 688s, 
w. comp. verbs 699 a, f; as adv. 3880 b: 
pos. 718s, w. art. 523; accent. 775s: 
implied in an adj. 498; inf. as gen. 
663 e, 664. 
Gentile x patrial noun or adj. 368 c. 
Genu, Genus, dec. compared, 14, 19. 
Gerund, Lat.,= Gr. inf. 658 b. 
Glyconic verse 750. 2. [&c., 606. 
Gnomic use of pres. 602 d, aor., fut., 
Gothic im 50 (ett b). 
Government, or regimen, 63. 
Grammatical x logical parts 60. 
Grave accent 94, 767 e, 784: syllable 
768. [796. 
Greek lang., dial., literat., 81 s, 171 b, 
Guttur, dec. compared 14, 


166 GUTT 


Gutturals = palatals 4, 137b. 

Hor. = Herodotus. 

Hebrew alphabet 2, 97: influence 
88b: Hebraism 67 b. [see Xenophon. 

Hellenica (Hel.), or Historia Greeca, 

Hellenistic dialect (Hellen.) 88 b. 

Hendiadys, tig. of synt., 69 e. 

Hephthemim 740 b, 745¢ 5 antici- 
pated 756 a. [rician. 

Heroddes Atticus fl. 143 A. D., rheto- 

Herodotus (Hdt.) fl. 443, Ion. his- 
torian, § 83. [748. 

Heroic (pic) poetry 83: verse 743, 

Hes. Cert. = Homeri et Hesiodi Cer- 
tamen. 

Hesiodus (Hes.) fl. 800%, poet (Ep.): 
Opera et Dies, Scutum Herculis, The- 

Hesychius, lexicographer. [ogonia. 

Heteroclites 223, 225. 

Heterogeneous nouns 228, 226. 

Hexameter 743, 748: -pody 740 b. 

Hiatus, how avoided, 99s, 117s, 
162, 217; 190; in poetry, 746 a, 737s. 

Hiero, see Xenophon. 

Hippocrates fl. 430, medical writer 
in Ion., § &3. 

Hipponax fl. 546, Ion. satirist, § 759. 

Historic present 609: historical = sec- 
ondary tenses 267 b. 

History of Greek lang. 81, 359, 
orthog. 97, dec. 187, pron. 246, 249s, 
cp. 264, cj. 271, 836, accent 7&9. 

Homeric, or Epic, Dialect 83. 

Homéerus fl. 900%, Ep. poet, § 83: 
Ilias, Odysséa, Hymni (in Apollinem, 
Bacchum, Cererem, Martem, Mercuri- 
um, Venerem), Batrachomyomachia. 

Hioratius, Latin poet. 

Hypallage 70 r, 474 a. 

Hyperbaton 71, 719s. 

Hyperbole, or exaggeration, 70 m. 

Hypercatalectic verse 743. 

Hypermeter verse 743. 

Hypodiastole (, ) 96d. 

Hypothetical period 62 j, 631s. 

Hysteron proteron 71 d. 

IambBus, Iamb, 77, 740c: Jambic 
rhythm 742, verse 755. 

Ibidem (1b.) = in the same work or 
part of a work. 

Ictus in pronune. 79 c: metrical 741. 

Id est (i. e.) = that is. 

Idem (1d.) = the same author. 

Idiotism, or idiom, 67 b. 

lative, or inferential, adverbs 685 c. 

Imitative verbs 378 c. 


INDEX II. 








INFL § 798. 


Immediate = nude adjunct 58¢: im- 
mediate, or included, x causative 
verbs 4738, 582 B. 

Imparisyllabic (Dec. 3) 184f. 

Imperative (imv.) 30 ¢, 269s, 272e, 
655; in perf. 318, 599d; in depend. 
sent. 655a; x sub. W. uy 628: sen- 
tence 61¢. 

Imperfect (impf,,ipf) 30 b, 267,271 4; 
x aor. 591s; xX aor. and plup. as 
conting. or indef. 615 a, 616 b, in wish 
636 b, g; for aor, or plup. 603 ¢, 604, 
612, pres. 611. 

Impersonal verbs 571, pass. 589; inf. 
and pt. 657i; pt. abs. in ace. 675: 
verbal 682. 

Improper diphthong 4, 108: redupl. 
357. 8: preposition 703 a. 

Impure vowel, affix, stem, word, 112. 

Imv. = Imperative. 

Inceptive verbs 350, 379 a. 

Incorporation, -ated sentence, verb, 
mode, X distinct or finite, 62a, 30c, 
657: extensive use 658, in ind. disc. 
659; relation to time 660, to case 661; 

os. 7181, m, 662; accent 780s. See 
nfinitive, Participle. 

Indeclinable (aptote) 227 a. 

Indefinite (indef.) pron. and adv. 27s, 
58, 245, 253, 548: vel. 549: art. 548 a: 
subject of verb 571, inf. 667 h: tenses 
380b, 267¢; x def. 590s, complete 
599; how supplied 603: action 616: 
premise 634. 

Independent sentence 62e : elements 
57 f: nominative 401. 

Indicative (ind.) 30¢, 269, 271s: 
SYNT., X sub. and opt. 613; expr. 
suppos. contrary to fact 615, habit w. 
av 616, purpose 624, wish 68&; in 
hypoth. period €31s, 634s; in indir. 
disc. 643s; generic use 651. 

Indirect cases 10, 179, 186 ¢, 397s: 
complement, obj. 58e: compounds 
388: disc. or quot 62k: order 718r. 

Infinitive 30c, 269, 272; in -ev 309¢e, 
326, -nev, -wevar 333: SYNT. 657s; 
x pt. 657 d,k; wide range 658, 655, 
in indir. disc. 659; relation to time 
660; as neut. noun, w. or wt. art., 
663s; of specif., adv., abs., 665; act. 
= pass. 6639; w acc. 666, other 
cases 667; dat. form 666 b, 782¢; 
redund. or om. 668; as imv., &c., 670; 
w connectives 671. See Incorporated. 

Inferential, or illative, adverbs 685 e. 

Inflection 172; tables 9s; three 
periods 276; not arbitrary 171 d. 

Inflective x essential 172 a, e. 


ba 


§ 798. INSC LATIN & 


Inscriptidnes Beeotica, Corcyrea, 
Cretica, Cuma, Heracleénsis, Poti- 
daica. 

Inseparable particles 385, 252, 688 e. 

Insertion of cons. to prevent hiatus 
99s, 217, 190; of € in contr. 120i; of 
p, mid. mute, 146; for metre 171; of 
o,7, &c., in c- 307, 311; of v ins. 
351. 1; of vowel and o in compos. 383. 

Intellective sentence 61: modes 30¢, 
613 s. 

Intensive verbs 379 b: adv. 685 ¢. 

Interchange, -ed (interch.). 

Interjection 55, 684 b. 

Interrogative pron. or adv. 28 g, 53, 
2538, 564; w. art 531; doubled 566 b; 
pos. 718, 720: particles, dir., indir., 
altern , 685c, 687: sentence 61, ex- 
pressing wish 597. 

Intransitive use of act., esp. in sec- 
ond and complete tenses, 577 b, e, 
338 b. 

Introduction, -tory (introd.), 81. 

Inversion 71 a: inverse attr. 554. 

Tonic dialect (Ion., 1.), old, mid., 
new, 82s: letters 98 f: forms in 3 pl. 
300 d, 329: feet and verse 77, 742b, 
764: accent. 790. 

Tota swhscript 109 : form of verbs 349. 

Ipf., impf., = Imperfect. 

Irony, fig. of rhet., 70k. 

Irregular nouns 223 : adj. 236: ep. 
262: verbs 50, 336s. 

Isveus (Isee.) fl. 380, Att. orator. 

Isochronous feet 740 a. 

Isocrates fl. 380, Att. orator, § 85 b. 

Iterative pron., see avrds : form in cj. 

Ithyphallic verse 763. [332. 

JUVENALIS, Rom. satirist. (477. 

KINDRED vowels 114 b: noun in ace. 

Koppa (Qoph, Q) 1s, 91, 98d. 

Kiihner’s Largest Grammar, New Ed. 
(Kiihn.) 

LABIAL 4, 137 ; changes 147s: in 
Dec. ut. 17, 203: 1. verbs 38s, 270 c. 

Lacedemonidrum Respublica (Lac.), 
see Xenophon. 

Laconic dialect 82, 141 a. 

Language, significant elements 55, 
general synt. 56s; Indo-European 
family 81; synthetic x analytic 171b. 

Last syllable of verse common 738. 

Late (1.), 7. e. during the long périod 
of decline which followed the loss of 
freedom. 

Latin alphabet 2, 138 a; forms of 
Gr. words 92: precess., interch., and 





ENGLISH. META 467 


contr. of vowels 116 s; equivalents of 
Gr. =, N, F, 139; changes of cons. 
100b, 140c¢, 147s, 167s: dec. 13s, 
185, 204, 206, 210d, 219; dual 178 a; 
dat forms 190b; adj. 23, 25; pron. 
27, 247: cp. 29, 264: cj. 821, 35s, 
271s, 273 f; mid. voice 266 e; contr. 
verbs 43, 3099; stem-changes 341, 
345, 349s; fut. pf. 601 e, 617 d: cases 
399 b, c: constructions 405s, 472}, 
&c.: metrical system 746 e. 

Lesbian dialect 82, 84, 87 a, 790 b. 

Letters, Gr., Heb., Lat., 1s, 90, 98: 
names indecl. 227. 

Ligatures, or abbreviations, 3, 90. 2. 

Limiting article 523 s. 

Linguals 4, 137 ; changes of and w., 
147s; in Dee. mt. 17, 204, contr. 207: 
lingual verbs 389, 270. 

Liquids 4, 137 ; changes of and w., 
144s, 168; doubled in Mol. 171 a; in 
Dec. m1. 18, 208: liquid verbs 40, 152, 
311 b, 342. 8, 347. 

Liquid-mutes 205 ec. 

Lithuanian esmi 50 (elué b). 

Litotes 70m, 654, 6361. 

Livius, Latin historian. 

Lobeck ad Phrynichum. Phrynichus 
fl. 180 A. D., grammarian. 

Local quantity 725, 734s. 

Logacedic verse 742 ¢c, 750d, 754. 

Logical parts 60: order 64. , 

Long vowel 4, 106; = 2 short 115, 
725; shortened bef. vowel 737; form- 
ing 2 tone-places 767: syll, by nature 
or pos , 725s. [718 t. 

Loose compounds 388 b: structure 

Lucianus fi. 160? A. D., essayist and 
wit: De Historia Secribenda, Dedrum 
Concilium, Dialogi Dedrum (D. D.), 
Dedrum Marinorum (D. Mar.), Mor- 
tudrum (D. M.), Parasitus. 

Luens, dec. compared 26. [ poet. 

Lycophron (Lyc.) fl. 270, Iambic 

Lycurgus (Lycurg.) fl. 330, Att. 

Lyra, dec. compared 14. [orator. 

Lyric poetry 84, 86; @ in, 85c. 

Lysias fl. 411, Att. orator, § 85. 

MaceEpontc dialect 88. 

Magister IMquitum, see Xenophon. 

Masculine 174; form as fem., esp. in 
du. and pl, 234d, e, 489 c¢, 490: ca- 

Megarian dialect 82. — [swra 745 e. 

Memorabilia Socratis, see Xenophon. 

Menander fl. 322, Att. comedian, 

Mesode in versif. 744 e. [$ 85. 

Metaphor, fig. of rhet., 70 d. 


468 META 


Metaplasm, -asts, 223 s. 

Metathesis 6, 104, 145 ; in cj. 308, 
342; in der. 361d. 

Metonomy, fig. of rhet., 70h. 

Metre 740s: metrical ictus 741: 
series 745 g. 

Middle Mutes 4, 137; ins. 146); 
changes 146s; see B, y, 5: Stem 47, 
3&6: Voice 30, 266; hist. 27le, 274; 
interch. w. pass. or act. 266, 575s, 
584s; trans. or intrans. 578; w. dir. 
reflex. sense 578, indir. 579, recipr. 
580, caus. 581, subjective 582; w. 
refl. pron. 583; w. indir. case 585. 4. 

Mimnermus fl. 630, Elegiac poet, § 83. 

Minor elements of sentences 57. 2. 

Modal sign 65; appos. 393 .¢, 394 b. 

Modern Greek, its pronunc. 79. 2; 
differing from the Ancient in respect 
to the dual 178 a, fut. 598 d, perf. and 
plup. 605 e, opt. 653b, inf. 658 ¢, 
versif. 766. 2, 757 a, &c. See also 630. 

Modes 30c, 265, 269s; hist. 272; 


affixes 286s; conn. vowels 290, 326; 


flex. endings 295, 328: SYNT. 613s; 
intellective 613 s, in final clauses 624, 
conditional 631, rel. or temp. 640, 
complem. 643; law of sequence 617; 
interchenge 649: volitive 655: incor- 
porated 657 s. 

Modified stems 49, 339 a. 

Modifiers 57 g, 58 ; pos. 718s. 

Molossus, foot, 77, 740 c. 

Monadic names w. article 522 e. 

Moneo, contract cj. 43. 

Monometer 743 : Monopody 740 b. 

Monoptote 228 e. 

Monostichs x systems, stanzas, 744. 

Monosyllables, roots 340. 8, 359 f; 
quant. 729.2; accent 782 e, 7&6, 793 c. 

Month, division of, 242 b. [§ 86. 

Moschus fl. 200, Dor. pastoral poet, 

Movable consonants 162: words, 
motion, 174 ¢. 

Multiples 52, 240. 4; w. gen. 409. 

Mutes 4, 137; changes of and w., 
147 s, 16783. and liquid as affect- 
ing quant 735: in Dec. 1. 17, 208: 
in cj. 88s, 270c, 347. 

Names of letters 97. 

Nasals 4, 137; changes of and w., 
139s: nasal form in cj. 351. 

Nature, long or short by, 725s. 

Nauta, dec. compared 14. 

Negative pron. and adv., object. x 
subj., 53, 686; as interrog. or affirm. 
687; redund. w. indef,, inf., &e., 713; 
ov wy W. Sub. or fut. 627: sentence 61e. 


INDEX II. 


OXYM 


§ 798, 


Nepos, Latin biographer. 

Neuter (neut., N.) 174 ; dec. 188; in 
adj. 231: as generic gend. 491, 496c, 
502; pl. w. sing. verb 569; impers. 
571¢e: as adv. or acc. of effect 380 a, 

New stem in cj. 47, 336. [483, 478. 

Nicopho fl. 388, Att. comedian. 

Nominative (nom., N.)10, 186d, 398 s, 
485; for voc. 182, 401 ¢; in appos. w. 
sent. 396: as subject 400, 568; om. 571; 
by attr. 578, 657: independ. 401; in 
anacol. 402; of rel. attracted 554b: 
accent 775, 791s. 

Noun 55; dec. 14s, 193s; deriv. 
563; compos. 3&6; synt. 893s; quant. 
728s; accent 775s, 791. 

Nude affixes, dec., 183, 187, ¢. 303, 
313, 320, 326 e, 335: adjunct 58¢. 
Number 178, 27u ; signs 12, 33a; 

use and interch. 468s, 494s. 

Numera's 25, 52, 239s; how com- 
bined 242; letters as, 1, £1. 

O-DerciEnston (Dee. 11.) 183, 187. 

Obelisk (+) 96. [448, 470s. 

Object 58 e, 63f,; dir. x indir. 397s, 

Objective affixes 36, 285 : voice 271e, 
274: cases 10, 897s; dat. 448s: neg. 
6£6n: gen., adj., 444g. 

Oblique cases 179 b; as ady. 380. 

Odes, choral, 744 e. 

(Hconomicus, see Xenophon. 

Old stem 47, 386. [rhet. 68. 2. 

Omitted (om.): omission as fig. of 

Onomatopeeia 700, 349 a, 355. 

Open vowels 107 a: uffixes 172. 

Optative 30 ¢, 269, 272d, Att., AZol., 
293 .c, e; conn. vow. 2938: SYNT., x 
ind., sub., 613; law of sequence 617; 
in final clauses 624, the hypoth. per. 
631, rel. and temp. clauses 640, 
complem , indir. dise , 648; potential 
636; for imy. or ind., esp. fut, 637 
654; of wish 638, éar d, 648 d; of 
doubt 648; generic conting. mode, for 
sub , 652, 654a: extinction 653 b. 

Oracula Sibyllina (Ep.), from 170 B.C. 
to 250 A. D. {blended 644. 

Oratio recta x obliqua 62k, 643; 

Order, direct or normal x indirect 
or varied 718; why varied 719. 

Ordinals 52, 240. 2; w. adrés 541 ¢. 

Orphica, poems ascribed to Orpheus 
(Ep.): Argonautica, Hymmni, Lithiea. 

Orthography and Orthoépy 1s, 90s; 

Orthotone 5, 788 g. [hist. 97. 

Other Examples (O. E.). 

Ovidius, Latin poet. 

Oxymoron 701. 


P 
4 
| 


Siver ~ OXYT LATIN & 


ENGLISH. POSI 469 


Oxytone 768; w grave mark 784. ;Periphrasis 69d; ‘in synt. of gen. 


PxoNn 77, 740 c: Peeonic verse 764. 

Palatals 4, 137; changes of and w., 
147s, 169s: in Dec. 11. 17, 203: in 
cj. 89, 270 c, 349s. 

Palladas, late poet’ Epigrammata. 

Paragoge 6, 103: paragogic cons. 
162s; « 252d. 

Parathetic, or loose, compounds 388 b. 

Parenthesis, -thetic, 71 ¢. 

Parisyllabic (Dec. 1., 11.) 184 g. 

Parcemiac verse 752 a. 

Paronomasia, fig. of r}et., 70 n. 

Paroxytone 768. 

Parsing, forms of, 74. 

Participle 30c, 269s, 272b, c; dec. 26, 
205, 234: SYNT-., extensiv2 use, 657s, 
673s; as adj., w. anacol , 504; x inf. 
657 d, k; relation to time 669; attract- 
ing ady. 662; circumst., as ady., 674s, 
w. dat. 462, expr. purpose 598b, 674 e, 
condition 635, concession 674 f, abs., 
impers., 675; complem., w. verbs of 
sensation, thought, chance, appear- 
ance, &c , 677; defin., descript., 678; 
w. aux. verb) 679; w. ws, &c., 680: 
accent 760s. See Adjective, Incorp. 

Particles elidel 128 ; in compos. 
3884s, 3&9: SYNT, classes, 6545; 
interch. 703; ellips. 707; pleon. 713; 
attr. 715; anacol. 716; combin. 717. 
pos. 718, 720: accent 785s, 794. See] 


Advyerb, Preposition, Conjunction. | 


Partitive appos. 393d, 395: gen. 
415s: adj. 419f. 

Parts of sentences 56 s. 

Passive Voice 30; hist. 271 e, 274; 
for mid., v. v , 266, 575s; converse of 
mid. 588: how construed 5&6 s, w. gen., 
dat., 586, 434 b, 461; choice of subj. 
587; impers. 589: Verbals 364, 374; 
w. dat. 458. [&e. 

Past, see Tenses, Time, Contingency, 

Pastoral, or bucolic, cesura 745d : 
poetry 86. 

Patrials x gentiles, der., 368, 375 e¢ 

Patronymics, der. 369. 

Paullus, Roman jurist. [601 d 

Paulo-post-future = fut. pf. 267 ¢, 

Pausanias fl. 180 A. D., archeologist. 

Pause cresural 745 ¢ : final 738. 

Pentameter 743, 749: pentapody 
740 b: pentad 744 e. 


_Penthemim 740 b, 745 ce. 


Penult 11la; in accent. 768 s. 

Perfect (perf., pf.), both pres. and 
past 600 d; see Complete. 

Period, hypothetical, 62 j, 6313: 
pericdic x loose structure 718 t. 


and adj. 437 ¢, 499d, ace. 475, art. 
527s, verb 598, 637. 

Perispome 768: verbs 309. 

Person 246, 270; signs 246, 249; in 
cj. 33a, 271: agreement 492, 496; 
change 503, 539 c, 644. 

Personal Pronowns 27, 248, 247; 
hist. 246: w. yé 3889c, T87h; encl. 
787: SYNT, stronger and wenker 
forms, implied in atf. of verb, 536s, 
571; eth. dat. 462 ce: Construction for 
impers. 573. 

Personification, fig. of rhet., 70 f. 

PH,..perL, =2Pertect: 

Phalcecian verse 750. 4. 

Pherecrates fl. 438, Att. comedian : 
Fragmenta Incerta: -ic verse 750. 2. 

Philétas fl. 300, elegiac poet. 

Pheenician alphabet 97. 

Phrases x clauses 56 a. 

Pindarus fl. 490, lyric poet, § 84, 
744e: Isthmia, Nemea, Olympia, 
Pythia, Fragmenta. [toeci. 

Plato fl. 427, Att. comedian: Me- 

Plato fl. 399, Att. philosopher, § 85: 
Alcibiades, Amatores, Apologia, Axi- 
ochus, Charmides, Convivium, Cra- 
tvlus, Critias, Crito, DefinitiGnes, Epi- 
nomis, Euthydémus, Euthyphron, 
Gorgias, Hipparchus, Hippias (Major), 
Ion, Laches, Leges, Lysis, Menexe- 
nus, Meno, Parmenides, Phaedo, Phe- 
drus (Pheedr.), Philébus, Politicus, 
Protagoras, de Republica, Sophista, 
Theaxtétus, Theages, Timeeus: Epis- 
tole (Ep.). [mus, &e. 

|Plautus, Lat. comedian: Trinum- 
Pleonasm 69; in synt. of gen. 446, 

dat. 462 ¢, acc. 477, pron. 505 b, adj. 
509 g, i, ep. 510s, art. 5233, verb 574, 
inf. 668, prep. 699, neg., &c., 713. 
Pluperfect (plup., plp.), aug. 280s ; ca 
>n, et, 291 ©; cont. 615: see Complete. 
Plural (plur., pl, p.) 178, 186, 271 ; 
signs 12, 33a; wanting 227 ¢: interch. 
or joined w. sing. or dual 4&8 s, 494s, 
499 s, 569. 
Plutarchus fl. 80 A. D., biographer 
and philosopher: Pompeius, &c. 
Poetic (poet., po.. P.), poetry, 83 s. 

| Pollux fl. 180 A. D., rhetorician. 

| Polybius fl. 167, historian. 

Polyschematist verse 742 b. 

Polysyndeton 69 f. 

Position of words and clauses 718 s, 
721e: in prosody 725, 734s. 

Positive degree 256 ; joined 9 in‘erel 
W. sup. or compt. 512, 615° sat Sla 





\ 


470 POSS 


Possessive pronoun 28, 252. 5, 538 ; 
w. or implied in art. 524, 530e: gent- 
tive 448. [cles, &c., 720. 

Postpositive article 249 b, 250 : parti- 

Potential opt., ind., 636 a: mode in 
Eng. 269 c, 617 g, 620 d. 

Pratinas fl. 499, Att. dramatist. 

Precession of vowels 107, 1148, 130; 
in contr. 115s; in affix 187, 195; ins. 
of dec. 114 d, 217, of cj. 341; &ec. 

Predicate 57 ; -part, log. x gram., 60 ; 
pds. 713'e, 82 adj, &e,,:69-4, 

Prefixes 172¢; of verbs 82, 277s, 

Preformatives 32 ¢, 356. [284. 

Premise 62]; forms 631; indef. or 
gen. 654; om. 636. 

Preposition 55 ; prop. x improp. 688 e, 
703a; pref. to verb 282, 387; elided 
128; apoc. 136; w. and wt. case as 
adv. 3882, 703: SYNT. 688s, 457; as 
flenoting place, time, &c., 689s; in 
compos., tmesis, 699, 486; constr. 
preg 704; pos., accent, 718 d, 765s, 
794.5. See Particle. [subst. 706. 

Prepositional adjunct 58 c¢; used 

Prepositive vowel 106: article 249 b. 

Present definite 30 b, 267: generic 
tense, gnomic, 602s; historic, pro- 
phetic, 609; for perf. 612; X aor. w. 
py 628: indef, how supplied 6038: 
time as generic 602 ¢, d: contingency 
6183s. See Definite. [ 600. 

Preteritive use, verbs, &c., 46, 268, 

Primary tenses 30b, 267 b, 27158; 
followed by sub. 617: affixes 32 i, 35s, 
286: elements of sent. 57. 

Primitive x derivative 359. 

Principal word 57 h : sentence 62 b. 

Prior tense (impf., aor., plup.) 615. 

Privative, alpha, 385, 436. 

Proceleusmatic 77, 740 ¢, 751. 

Proclitics, or atona, 786. 

Prohibition w. 7 628. 

Prolepsis 71 b, 474 b, 571 g, 657. 

Pronominal correlatives 53, 362 e, 
377. 

Pronoun 55, 27s, 243s, 509, 535s. 
See Article; Substantive, Personal, 
Reflexive, Reciprocal; Adjective, Pos- 
sessive, Iterative (avrdés), Demonstra- 
tive, Indefinite, Relative, Complemen- 
tary, Interrogative, addos, &c. 

Pronunciation, four methods, 79. 

Proode, in versif., 744 e. 

Proparoxytone 768, 770. 

Proper diphthong 4, 108: redupl. 
357: prep. 688 c: name w. or wt. art. 
522 g, 5383.a: properly (prop.). 


INDEX II. 














RESI § 798. 

Properispome 768, 771. 

Propertius, Lat. elegiace poet. 

Property, words of, as modifiers, 58. 

Proportionals 52, 240.5; w. gen. 

Prosody 725 s. [ 409. 

Prosopopceia = personification 70 f. 

Prothesis (or Prosthesis) 6, 103. 

Protracted Stems 346 s. 

Protasis = premise 62 j. 

Pt., part., = participle. 

Punctuation $5, 98 b. 

Pure vowel, affix, stem, word, 112: 
nouns. in Dec. ur. 19, 212s; verbs 
42s, 270¢, 309, 313. 

Pyrrhic, foot, 77, 740 ¢. 

Q. v. = quod vide, which see. 

Quadruple, or equal, rhythm 742. 

Quality, pron. of, 53, 252 a. 

Quantity, natural x local, 725s; in 
dec. 728 s, cj. 728, 730, der. 731: pron. 
of, 58, 252 a. 

(Juasi-cestira 756 a. 

Quintilianus, Rom. rhetorician. 

Quintus Smyrneus fl. 390? A. D., 
Epic poet. 

Vui-vis, qui-libet, = ds Bove 559 b: 

(Juotation or discourse, dir. x indir., 
62k, 643s. 

RADICAL x formative 172 b, 359. 

Rare (v.). [799, 800. 

Reasons for studying Greek 796, 171, 

Kecessive x retentive or final accent 
769. [ef middle, 580. 

Reciprocal pronown 27, 244. 3: wse 

Redundant nouns 233b: verbs 338. 

Redupheation 280, 273 e, 284; Att., 
281d; in compos. 282; in 2 aor. and 
fut. 284e,s: in s., proper, &c., 357. 

Reflexive pronoun 27, 244, 248; use, 
dir. x indir , 537s; w. comp. and sup. 
513f; for recipr. 587¢; in 3 pers. 
539: w. avrdés 541h: sense of middle 
266, 578s. 

Regimen = government 63 b. 

Regular affixes of verb 303, 35s. 

Relative Pronoun and Adverb 28, 53, 
250, 254s, 877: synv., def. x indef, 
549; interch. 550; w. antec. in same 
clause or om. 551: attraction of, 522s; 
transfer 533; assimilation, Att., in- 
verse, 554; condens. 555; rel, for defin. 
and conn. particle 557 ; complex pron., 
ady., 559: w. another conn., &e., 561; 
repetition avoided 562: Clauses, con- 
ditional, final, &c., 640s. [Xenophon. 

Republica Atheniensium, De, see 

Residual cases, 10, 897s: dat. 465s. 





§ 798. RESO LATIN & 


Resolution, see Diwresis: in versif. 
Responsives 68 c, 708. [741 b. 
Retention, fig. of synt., 70 v, 392a. 
Retentive x recessive or final accent 
Rhetoric, figures of, 67 a. (769. 
Rhythm 740s; affecting pos. 718 g ; 
kinds 742; cesura of, 745 e. 764. 

Rising lonic 77, 740c: verse 742 b, 

Romaic, see Modern Greek. 

Roman letters for Greek 1, 92. 

Root 172 b, 340. 3, 359. 

Rough breathing 93 ; w. init. v and p 
93 c,d; <(F, 3, 141, 345; mutes 4, 137; 
changes of and w., 147s, 159, 167; 
see 0, d, x: 

Sau.ustius, Roman historian. 

San, or Sampi, 1, 91, 98 d. 

Sanskrit 81; dual 178a; asmz 50 
(eiuéb), véda 50 (dodw 4), ma, trad, sa, 
&e., 246b, bhami 271d, adiksham 
273 ¢c. [verse 750 4. 

Sappho fl. 611, Aol. lyrist : Sapphic 

Scanning 746d: continuous scansion 
738 b, 744 b. 

Seazon, or Choliambus, 759. 

Scholia, notes of Greek grammarians. 

Scilicet (sc.) = namely. 

Scripta Sacra (S. 8.) : Septuagint 
(Lxx ), Deuteronomy, Psalms, Proy- 
erbs; New Testament, eae Ay (Mat., 
Mt.), Mark (Mk.), Luke (LK ), John 

‘(Jn.), Acts, Romans, Corinthians, Ga- 
latians, Ephesians, James, Revelation. 

Second tenses and systems 289 ; re!. to 
stem 47, 336 b, 340. 4; more inclined 
to intrans. use 338 b, 577 e. 

Secondary tenses 30 b, 267b, 271d, s; 
conting and indef. 615s; followed by 
opt. 617; w. av 618; in hypoth. per. 
631s; expr. wish 638: affixes 32i, 
35 s, 286. 

Semivowels 4, 137 ; four old, 138 ; 
changes of and w., 139s, 147s, 168s. 

Senarius (lam. trim.) 756. 

Seneca, Rom. philosopher. 

Sentence 56 ; parts 57s ; kinds, con- 
nection, 61s; condensed 555, 565; pos. 
718n, s, 721: words in appos. w., 396: 
sentential analysis 57 s, 728; exponents 

Sequence of modes, law of, 615. [66. 

Sequens (3) = following. 

Short vow. and syll. 4, 106, 725s ; 
elided 127; > long in dec. 194, 213 s, 
cp. 257, cj. 275d 288.2, 310, 314, 347, 
compos. 386 ¢ [139s, 151s, 169s 





ENGLISH. SUBS AT] 


and gender, in dec., 12; of degree, in 
cp., 29; of person, number, voice, 
mode, and relation, in cj., 832i, 33; of 
tense 32¢, 35s; see also Number, 
Person, Tenses. 

Silius Italicus, Lat. Epic pees. 

Simonides of Amorgos fl. 693, Iambic 
poet (lon ): of Ceos fl. 525, lyr., § 98 f. 

Simple sentence 62e : vowels x diph- 
thongs 4, 106: words 359; der. 862 s; 
accent 791s: succession 62d; early 
use 705 a. 

Singular (sing. s.) 178; wanting 
227 ¢; interch. or joined w. pl. 488s, 

Slavic jesm? (50 efut b). [499 8, 569. 

Smooth, or soft, breathing 93; AXol. 
and Ep. for rough 93c, 167¢; <(F 
141: mutes 4, 137; changes of and w., 
147 s, 1678. 

Solecism x barbarism 67 b. 

Sophocles fil. 468, Att. tragedian, 
§ 85: Ajax, Antigone, Electra, Cdi- 
pus Colonéus, (Edipus Tyrannus, Phi- 
loctétes, Trachiniw; Fragmenta. 

Sophron fi. 450, Dor. writer of mimes. 

Specification, ace. of, 481 : nom. in, 

Spirants 4,137s. See F,I,2. [402b. 

Spiritus asper, lenis, 93. 

Spondee 77, 740 c¢: -aic verse 748 a. 

Stanza x system 740 a, 744. 

Stem (s.) x root 172; of noun, how 
obtained 180 b: of verb 270 b, 82; old, 
middle, new, w. related tenses, 47, 
336; prime 340, euphonic 341, em- 
phatic, or protracted,346,adopted 358 ; 
changed in der. 360 s. ; 

Stem-mark, or characteristic, 172d. 

Strabo fl. 24, geographer. 

Subject of sentence 57 ; -part, log. x 
gram. 60; pos. 718 ¢, s: of word 63a, 
492, finite verb 400. pass. 586, inf. 666; 
om., subj. of appos. 394, adj. 506, art. 
527, rel. 551 verb 571, pt. 676. 

Subjective cases 10, 397s: gen. 444¢: 
affives 285, 382i, 35: adj. 444 @: sense 
of middle 582: neg. 686 n. 

Subjunctive (sub.) vowel 108 : mode 
380 c, 269, 272d; xX ind., opt., 613, 
269 c, 617 g; rel. to time 613 b; fol- 
lows prim. tenses, how translated, 
= fut. pf., 617; w. dv combined 619; 
in final clauses 624, as fut. 627, as 
imv. 628; in hypoth. per. 631s, as 
indef. prem. 634; in rel and temp. 
clauses 640s; of doubt 647: for opt. 
650, 653, fut 617 b 


Y*1¢ oF . he, MP cea At “ “J . : 5 2 
Sibilants 4, 137s; changes of or w., | Subordination, -ate clause, 62 b, h ; 


Significant clements of language 55. 


see Dependent: ce omjunctions 701. 2. 


Signs of relation or case, number, | Subscript, see | in Greek Index. 


472 SUBS 


Substantive 55, 57s; dec. 173; ep. 
262d; der. 362s; synt. 393s; agree- 
ment 398; use of cases 397, of num- 
bers, &c., 488; see Noun: pron. 27, 
243; synt. 5386: numeral 52, 241: verb 
w. gen. 437; w. dat. 459; om. 572, 
676, 678 c, in conden. 555, 565: clause 
62h, 66 d, 643. 

Succession, Simple, 68 d; early use 

Suffixes in der. 360. [705 a. 

Suidas fl. 1100 2, A. D., lexicographer. 

Sum, cj. compared 451, 50 (elué b). 

Superlative 256s, 510s; w. gen. 
419 c; w. dat. 468; w. positive, éy trois, 
eis, doubled, 512; w. reflex. 513f; 
abs., ‘of eminence,” interch., 514s; 
attr. by rel. 553. 

Supine in Lat. 658 b. 

Sus, dec. compared 14. 

Syllables, division 111; union 117 ; 
quant. 725c; accent 766s: syllabic 
augment 277: syllabication 111. 

Syllepsis x zeugma 68 f, g, 495s. 

Symposium, or Convivium, see Xen- 

Syneeresis 6, 105. [ophon. 

Syncope 6, 103, 140, 144; in Dee. 111. 
207, 210, 217; in fut. 305 b; in s. 342; 
in der. 361d: metrical 748 2, 763 a. 

Synecdoche 70j, 481, 587. 2. 

Synesis 70p; in appos. 394c¢, adj., 
pron., verb, 498s, 569, tense 608s, 
mode 653 s. 

Synizésis, or Synecphonésis, 117 b, 
220 d, 222 b, 323.¢, 746 b, c. 

Syntax 56, 392: general principles 
56s, figures 67, rules 76, Clyde’s 80; 
variety in Greek 392: of subst. 393, 
adj. and pron. 504 art. 516, verb 568, 
particle 684; in compos. 722. 

Synthetic, or close, compos. 388 b. 

System in cj. 267 f; in versif. 740 a, 


Systole x diastole 6, 105. (744. 
Tacitus, Rom. historian : Annales, 
Tau form in cj. 352. [ &c. 


Tautology 69 c. 

Temporal nwmbers 52, 243 : augment 
277 s: conjunctions 701 h: clauses 641. 

Tenses 30 b, 265, 267 ; systems 267 f, 
289 b; formation 31; hist. 271s; signs 
382¢ 288, changed 152, 305s, 325: 
base, or tense-stem 2&9 e; first x sec- 
ond 289, 336 338 b, 340; rel. to stem- 
forms47 336: SYNT.,chronic x achron. 
590; def. x indef narrative x descript. 
591; complete 599; interch , generic 
use, 602s, gnomic 606, according to 
rel. time, svnesis, &c., 607s; prior, 
expr suppos. 615; rel. to sub. and 
opt. 617; in indir disc: 643 b, 660. 


INDEX II. 





VERB 


§ 798. 


Tense-sign, -stem, -system, see Tenses, 

Terentius, Rom. comedian: Andria, 
&e. [229 s, 22s. 

Terminations, adj. of one, two, three, 

Tetrameter 743: tetrapody 740b: 
tetrastich, tetrad, 744 c, e: tetraptote 
228 e. [cj. 270 b. 

Theme 172e; in Dee. 111. 202; in 

Theocritus fl. 280, Dor. pastoral poet, 
§ 86: Bucolica, Epigrammata. 

Theognis fl. 544, Ion. elegiac poet. 

Thesis 741; quant. in, 736d, 737. 

Thessalian dial. 82: gen. 201. 

Theta form in cj. 353. 

Third future, see Future Perfect. 

Thucydides fl. 423, Att. historian, 

Tibullus, Latin poet. [$ 85. 

Timeeus Locrus, philosopher (Dor. 
§ 86). 

Time of verb 267 ; absolute x relative 
607; generic 602 c, 614 b: of vow. and 
syll. 725: cases expr., 482 e, 485 e. 

Tmesis 388 c, 699 d, h, s. 

Tone, or accent, 766s: places 767. 

Tragedy, tragic, 85. 

Transfer by attraction 553. 

Transitive verb 55, 486c¢ ; or intrans. 
577: sense 70 c. 

Transposition, see Metathesis. 

Tribrach®77, 740 c, 755, 760. 

Trimeter 743 ; Iambie 756: tripody 
740 b: tristich, triad, 744¢c,e: tri- 
emim 740b, 745 c: triptote 228 e. 

Trochee 77, 740¢: -aic verse 742, 

Trope, fig. of rhet., 70 b. [760. 

Tyrteeus fl. 650, elegiac poet (Ion.). 

ULTIMA 1llla; in accent. 767s. 

Union of syllables 117s; accent. in, 
772s: u., or compos., vowel 3&3 a. 

Usually (usu.). 

V. 1. = varia lectio, various reading : 
v. v., Vice versa = and the converse. 
Variable stems 49, 336s: varied or- 

der 719. 

Vau, or Digamma, 1, 91, 98; see F, 
before Z, in Greek Index. 

Vectigalia, Venatio, see Xenophon. 

Verb 55, 57¢3 c., distinctions 30, 
265s; classes, in -w X -t, 270 ¢, de- 
ponent 266, irregular, defective, re- 
dundant, &c., 336 s, 878 s, apposition- 
al 59a; hist. 271; forms analyzed 
32, translated 34; prefixes 277; affixes 
35s, 285, 48, 325s; general er 
37, 48b; mute, lig., double-cons., 
pure, 38s, 304s; contract 42, 309, 
43.¢, 3218; in -w 45, 313, 3353 pret- 
eritive 46, 268, 317s; stem 49, 3365 


VERB LATIN 


§ 799. & 


catalogue 50: der. 378; compos. 387: 
SYNT , agreement 568 s, 492s, w. subj. 
om., impers., 571, om. 572; pers. for 
impers. 573: use of voices 575, tenses 
590, modes 613: quant. 728, 730; ac- 
cent 776, 780. 

Verbal 362 ; nown 363, adj. 269d, 
374, adv. 381, compound 883s: w 
gen. 444, dat. 458, acc. 472}; impers. 
682. 

Verse, versification, 740s, 766. 2 ; 
kinds 742s; cesura 745; scanning 
746d; dact. 747, anap 751, iamb. 
755, troch. 760, various 764. 


Virgilius, Latin poet: Ecloge, Ge-! 


orgica, Ainéis. 

Vision, fig. of, 70 u, 609. 

Vocal elements 4, 106s. 

Vocative 10, 179, 186g; same w. 
nom. 181 s, 203, 208 f; in Dec. 1. 194. 2: 
synt. 484s: accent 775, 779. 

Voices 30, 265s; hist. 271 ¢, 274: 
synt , interch., 575s. See Active, Mid- 
dle, Passive. 


ENGLISH. ZEUG 473 


short, doubtful, 4,106; open x close, 

prepos. x subjunct., 107s; pure X im- 

pure 112; precession, kindred, 114; 

union 117s; dial. var. 130; connect. 

| of dec. 12, 183s, of cj. 32 h, 35s, 290. 

326, of compos 383; changes in Dec. 

11. 212 f, in cj. 809 s, 314, 347, in der. 

361¢; vowel form in cj. 3855: quant. 

725s; accent 767 s. 

| WitH (w.). — Without (wt.). 

Writing, mode of, 98 g. 

XENOPHANES fl. 588, philosopher 
and poet (Ion.). 

Xenophon fl. 401, historian, biogra- 
pher, and essayist ( Att., § 85): Agesi- 
jaus, Anabasis, Apologia Socratis, 
Cyropadia, De Re Equestri (Kq ), 
Hellenica (Hel.), or Historia Greeca, 
Hicro, Lacedeemoniorum Respublica, 
Magister Equitum, Memorabilia So- 
cratis, Cconomicus, De Republica 
Atheniensium, Symposium, Vectiga- 
lia, Venatio. 





[655. See Imperative. | ZEND (old Bactrian) mdm 246 b. 
Volitive sentence 61: mode 30c,|Zeugma x syllepsis 68 


f.¢ 


rot) 


495s. 


. ! % 
Vowels, simple x compound, long, | &c., cal ra Nourd(x«. 7. d.), et cetera, 


799. THE GREEK PROBLEM. 


‘What the inhabitants of the small 


city of Athens achieved in philosophy, in poetry, in art, in science, in 
politics, is known to all of us; and our admiration for them increases ten- 
fold if, by a study of other literatures, such as the literatures of India, 
Persia, and China, we are enabled to compare their achievements with 
those of other nations of antiquity. The rudiments of almost everything, 
with the exception of religion, we, the people of Europe, the heirs to a 
fortune accumulated during twenty or thirty centuries of intellectual toil, 
owe to the Greeks ; and, strange as it may sound, but few, 1 think, would 
gainsay it, that to the present day the achievements of these our distant 
ancestors and earliest masters, the songs of Homer, the dialogues of Plato, 
the speeches of Demosthenes, and the statues of Phidias, stand, if not un- 
rivalled, at least unsurpassed by anything that has Leen achieved by their 
descendants and pupils. 

“* How the Greeks came to be what they were, and how, alone of all 
other nations, they opened almost every mine of thought that has since 
been worked by mankind ; how they invented and perfected almost every 
style of poetry and prose which has since been cultivated by the greatest 
minds of our race ; how they laid the lasting foundation of the principal 
arts and sciences, and in some of them achieved triumphs never since 
equalled, is a PROBLEM which neither historian nor philosopher has as yet 
been able to solve. Like their own goddess Athene, the people of Athens 
seem to spring full-armed into the arena of history ; and we look in vain 
to Egypt, Syria, or India for more than a few of the seeds that burst into 
such marvellous growth on the soil of Attica.” — Lectwres on the Science 
of Language, by MAx Mutter, Professor of Modern European Languages 
in the University of Oxford ; Second Series. 


TABLE OF SECTIONS. 


In each division below, the numbers in the first column indicate paragraphs or sections 
in former editions of the Grammar; while those in the second refer to corresponding sec- 
tions in the Revised and Compendious Editions. A smalls signifies and the following. 


Old. New.) Old. New.| Cld New. | Old. New. Old. New. Old. New. 
q . § § : § § § § § § § 


OOM OP COLD eH 
~ 
_ 
ive) 
=] 
co 
ve} 
— 
to} 
= 
bol 
or 
oo 
ive) 
NS 
bo 
—_ 
& 
= 
iv) 
— 
=) 
ivy) 
fer) 
ve) 





268s 30 47 134 110s 212 184 293 246 8=— 826 56% 
28 31 48 135s [111s 2138s | 185 276a | 2478 3828s | 33) 392 
29 35 49 187 113215 313s | 249 382 831s 393s 
30 36 50 188s | 114 216 § 3826e | 250 3338 | 333s 3958 
3l 82 bly), bi 116 219 €,¢ 3827 251 = 335 835 488 
82 48 N. 137d {116 220 186 276b | 252 835 489 
33 34 52 147 6H Ws ed We 187 in 253.1 325d | 337 494 
348 37 53 148 119 =218 188 278 838 = 897 
44 54 = =150 120. 221 189 279 2548 47 339 398 
86s 3888 155 151 121 =. 222 190 280 336 340s 399 
41s 40 56 162 122 89.228 191 281 340 342 = 400 


847s 405 

s | 61 149 1287 38229 197 287 268 - 848s | 849 406 

57 45h | 62 159 129 230 198 288 264 845 350 407 
58s 46 63 160 130 231 199 289 265 3846 425 
60 45q | 64 145s | 181 232 200 805 266s 347 351 408 
61 49 65 161 132 233 201 806 271 848 852 409 
62 54 66 162s | 138 234 202 290 272 352 353 410 
63 53 67 164 134 £35 289e | 278s 349 354 4i1 
64 76 68 165s | 135 236 203 291 2778 Sal 355 412 
65 7 69 1678s | 185 2378 | 204 292 849 1 356 413 
65 72 70 169s | 187s 2389s | 2056 293 2798 350 357 414 
67 738 71 171 1389 241 206s 294 282 3538 ! 858 415 








| 
| 
i} 
: 
Sls |72 172 | 140 242 | 2081 290a | 288s 357 ES 416 
| 
| 
{ 


$1 
2s 88s | 73 173 141 243 2 313 287s 3855 360 417 
3 84 74 174 142 247 3 320 289s 351 B51 418 
4 +85 75 175 14: 246 209 29538 | 296 350 362 419 
5 86 76 176s | 144s 244 210 297 297 . 349y | 363 420 
6 85¢ | 77 178 248 211 298 298 3528s | 354 421 
i 87 78 10 146 245 n. 168b | 299 35382 | 335 422 
8s 88s 179 147 249 212 299 390 B45 355 4238 
10 90 7 180 148 250) 213-300 B01 358 3857 = «424 
1M! 91 80 181 149 251 214 801s | 3802s 359s | 368s 426 
12 92 8! 182 150s 252 215 803 B04 re 370 = 427 
13 93 82 188s | 152 253 216 = =§=©309 305 371 428 


§ 800. SECTIONS COMPARED. 475 


Old. New Old. New. Old. New. Old. New. Old New. Old. New. 
3872 429 437s 481 515 546 570s 692 627 657 
373 430 439 482 516 547 572 593 628s 671s | 689 735 
517s 548 573 594 629.1 556c | 690 736 
519 549 574 595 630 673 691 737 
52038 550 575 603 6381s 674 692 738 











880s 434 492 | 522s 651 606 | 6383s 677 | 693 739 
435 445 491 |524 6552 |576 609 | 6848 657k | 694 740 
3838s 436s | 446 495s | 525 553 603 |635 674 |695 741 
3887 = 440 449 = B07 y 559b 1580 605 | 687 679 =| «697 rie 
3888 441 450 y 602 28 555 |581 596 (688s 675s a Oc 
389 442 6 d07e 569¢ | 582 601 | 640 680 741d 
390 448 451 489 |529 556 |5838 598 |G641la 504b/698 743 
3B9la 4387b 491 |5380 557 | 584s 610 657 h | 699 45 


A 
[on] 
5 
lo) 
i 
=I 
nm 
or 
S 
Bae a es 
~ x iS 
for) 
r3 bo R 
or 
= 
or 
J 
+I 
wm 
or 
We} 
Je) 
nm 
& 
fer) 
lor) 
=i 
o 
for) 
ile) 
oo 
—1 
fs 
bo 











x 438b | 453 499 582 560 588 618s | 644 683 70ls 746 
486¢ | 454 498 nN. 556d | 589s 614s | 645 684 7038s 747s 
392s 455 500 533 561 591s 269 | 646 685 705 749 
394 445 456 568 584 562 617 647 686s | 706 750 
395 446 457s 509 535 563 593 615 648 688 707s 751s 
396 447 459 504b | 586s 564 y 620 |649s 689s | 709 753 
3897 448 460 510 637.38 551g | 594 616 707 710 754 
398 449 461 il 538 565 595a 637b 712 711 755 
399 450 462 512 5389 564 B 687c¢ :652s 699 712 756 
400 451 468s 513 5389.2 566 y 647d | 654s 700s | 713 757 
401s 452 465 514 540s 567 & 627 656 705 714s 7588 
403 453 466 515 548 568 596 623 657 7038 716 760 
404 454 467s 516s | 544 4953 |597a 597 658 706 717 761 
405 455 469 520 a 50la | 598 628 | 659 704 718s 62s 
406 456 470s 521s |5458 571 599s 638 ; 660 707 = ue 
72 76 
408 459 473 524 548 499 601 624 662 Til 722 766 
409 460 474 525 549 569s |6021 650s | 663 709s | 728s ‘67 
410 462 75 526 550 500 G25 664s 7138 725 768 
411 463 476 527 551 573 3 626 667 714 726 7708 
412 464 477 528 552 574 6C3 631 | 668 715 1208 (ies 








= 
ts 
or 
-I 
m™ 
> 
os | 
bo 
on 
Li) 
(oe) 
+] 
a 
bo 
for) 
nse 
oO 
for) 
lop) 
lor) 
— 
S 
Lo 8) 
wn 


499 472g | 503s 6878 |567 608s | 6175 657i | 
i | 506s 539 p 606 |618s 658s |681 127 |745 1776 
430 473 | 507.7 587e| y 6ll | 620s 663 | 


431 477 508s 540s | 568 607 | 6238 665 | 683 729 i 
432 478 512 ' 642 643b | 624 6688 '684 7380 | 747 781 
433 479 : 5138-488 660 | 625 670 | 685s T8ls | 748s 782s 
434s 480 514 545 1569 591 1626 666 ‘687 783 ‘°750 ‘794 


800. “Let me repeat, that so far from dissuading from the study of 
Greek as a branch of general education, I do but echo the universal opin- 
ion of all persons competent to pronounce on the subject, in expressing my 
own conviction that the language and literature of ancient Greece constitute 
the most efficient instrwment of mental training ever enjoyed by man ; and 
that a familiarity with that wonderful speech, its poetry, its philosophy, 
its eloquence, and the history it embalms, is incomparably THE MOST VAL- 
UABLE OF INTELLECTUAL POSSESSIONS.” —MARsSH’s Lectures on the Eng- 
bish Language. 


ADDENDA. 


801. (To § 179.) The Cases are in general distinguished as follows: 
The NoMINATIVE expresses the subject of a finite verb; the GENITIVE, the 
point of departure or the cause; the Dative, the indirect object or simply 
accompaniment ; the ACCUSATIVE, the direct object or the effect ; and the 
Vocative, address. 


862. (To § 265s.) The Voices, Tenses, and Mopss are in general 
distinguished as follows : 

a. Vorces. The AcTIVE represents the subject of the verb as the doer 
of the action, or its agent ; the PAssivr, as the receiver of the action, or 
its object ; and the MIDDLE, as, more or less directly, both the agent and 
the object of the action : as, Act. éravoa I stopped another, Pass. éravOnv 
I was stopped by another, Mid. éravoapynv I stopped myself, I ceased. 

b. TENsES. The PRESENT represents the action as doing at the present 
time ; the IMPERFECT, as doing at some past time; the FUTURE, as one 
that will be performed in future time ; the Aorist, simply as performed ; 
the PerFEcT, as complete at the present time ; the PLUPERFECT, as com- 
plete at some past time; and the Future PERFECT, as one that will be 
complete at some futwre time: as, Pres. ypadw J am writing, Impf. éypa- 
dov J was writing, Fut. ypayo J shall write, Aor. typapa I wrote, Perf. 
yéypada I have written, Plup. éyeypadew I had written, Fut. Perf. ae- 
mavoopnat I shall have ceased. 

ec. Mopres. The INDICATIVE expresses fact (direct assertion, inquiry, 
&c.); the SUBJUNCTIVE, present contingency; the OPTATIVE, past con- 
tingency ; and the IMPERATIVE, direct command, entreaty, exhortation, or 
permission ; while the INFINITIVE partakes of the nature of an abstract 
noun; and the PARTICIPLE, of the nature of an adjective: as, Ind. éa8ov 
I learned, pavOdve ; ain I learning? Subj. ypadw iva paeys I write that 
you may learn, Opt. éypaya iva pdBors I wrote that you might learn, 
Imy. pade learn, Inf. padetv to learn, Part. pavOdvev learning. 


803. (To § 720.) Words which regularly stand first in their clauses 
or precede the words which they modify, are termed in distinction pre- 
positive: as the conjunctions dAda, ef, éav, ws, H, a, Kal, darws, StL, mpir, 
ws (701), the particles of question dpa, 4, uév (687), and most other con- 
nectives or interrogatives (718a); the negatives uy, od (685c); &e. 


804. (To § 797s.) Rererences. In this Grammar, the Arabic 
numerals of reference, with the letters which often follow them, refer to 
its sections and their parts, unless a preceding abbreviation or other sign 
(as i., ii., ili., &c., for the books of Xenophon’s Anabasis, A., B., T’., &c., 
for those of the Iliad, and a., B., y., &c., for those of the Odyssey) shows 
that they are used in citation from authors. The grammatical references 
are often more obvious from being enclosed in parentheses, or being pre- 
ceded by ‘‘see” or ‘‘ef.,” or ending with a small letter (which is not other- 
wise often so found except in citations from Plato). In some cases where 
there seemed to be need, the mark §, for section, is prefixed ; and in suc- 
cessive citations from the same book without an intervening period, chiefly 
of dialectic forms, the usual ‘*Id.” or ‘* 1b.” is sometimes omitted. The 
letter s is often added to a reference, to signify and the following ; and a 
small * above the line sometimes occurs to show that the reference is to 
the Revised Grammar only. The period and comma are used with nu- 





§ 805. ADDENDA. 477 


merals of reference according to the usual method: the period to separate 
a division and its subdivision, and the comma to separate divisions of the 
same class, 


805. Some Distrxctions 1x printinc. (a) On the preceding 
pages, the accents are usually omitted over forms not actually occurring, 
ut supposed for the explanation of existing forms ; while mere roots or 
stems are marked by hyphens affixed. (b) The doubtful vowels, when 
they are long and are not so determined by general rules or the con- 
text, are often marked, especially in the penult (79n), while the more 
prevalent short quantity (/26. 3.) is usually left to be understood. (c) 
Small capitals immediately affixed to etymologic forms (or in a few cases 
prefixed) denote dialectic use: viz., m. Molic, B. Beotic, p. Doric, 
E. Epic, 1. lonic, o. Old, 0. a. Old Attic, p. Poetic, &c. In lists of 
dialectic forms (as in 27 g, 48b), a sign of this kind applies to the words 
preceding, until another like sign occurs. The abbreviation ]. signifies 
late; andr., rare. (d) When a passage cited is fully translated (except, 
perhaps, a familiar particle), the translation is commonly printed in 
Italics ; but a partial translation, in Roman type with single marks of 
quotation ; and words introduced for explanation, in Roman type within 
brackets or parentheses. 



























wii 


1 01392986 4 Sy hee 
pmmusee 7 132954 











| phastesy 13295433 
Crosby, Alpheus el 
; AUTHOR S 
| TITLE 
A Grammar Of 


* 



























Selekesasetetotetatatesufeget (itetefaeqtes 
¢ NG Sethe ea et Colony Cats «in 
POSS PSPSPOPRPSIS PDP hPa PRPA Py SDL ORDR ne 
Legeetesres asecetecasesesee Ratatete 
sejeteceeetgieae IESORER ESD PRR DEER ESRD BRE RD 
atetetateS a 4S Sal) 044 efenesese - 
a Satatetetetetes 4 y SP4geetye Ay irtate te rte 
/ pes 



















ete a 
ater atete® 
hes, * tuts! 








P my) 
b Sasecasatene Te ate’ 
“4 





he ae * 
ada J i tt ¥ ¥ * a 
¢ eS et Nee Sia Se tee +, 
Perot hc hob Ratesess Ceteietetotete 
ee ftee ete rents aunties: SS ean “a 
bP ae! Me satate ta: OFF ett fot, Pos ‘2 * 
ehetedaiete pr tbspren », 
boo tpy > tetas 
som 


© 
hase tate os Set gSe ta tete >} rate ot 
< < a Ob Pe br ae nee pooch 











batet. 
«. 

iatdisigereresesesitie 

cee te lates acetate totale se ese eeee 
: «Sate Se 

S<fegese SS PSPE DPE DL IRD 
> sfeiess pri BEb 5 bi « 
<< £2888 ace teen eee 





See Se eee 

7 a taal ys 
io ee 
SPA Ae eh 





baa am 












ec¢ 


~ 
x 
= 





¥. 
a 


AA 
* 
: 


ARAL AAD 
T; 
¥. 
Si 


¢ 
al 

@, 
Ses. 


é 
Patt fete e Ses e ta lete se 
a SSiehhs ote Sedeselese 


4X, °. Cras ls 
SEORESSES DSRS SRE DS 
<sefesc 
ef etosese ee 
et hb by be bt be baby 
<hefeledesetete 
dekaheleSetesefesates 
pSrarepeet os bebe mnt 
Ret E eee ELON eat tte 
reper etet¢ SDS EDS DES boo ot bs Dhan 
setes sede ches eles eC edeet ad shee ee soe 
3s Ptaverarerpestat at stocat ee prot pee 
ies t 
SP LPePaee Pa Param PLP BLD LPS DLS 
Sa lefe tal asec Sere Sese eset esa tasers 
“ft ote Sut het ototetoty 
sa ahaa ote ta sse yeaa tes 
Sarat alaselatetenates esesdiet 
OSESPEDS PSPSPS DS hy DSS PS DEE DR PED DEOL DRS 
‘ Sssatecteegenceasesstenas 
Sebeteteta tae teseset tetas 
Pope heuer be boot bebe ¢ 
Satat shane latecetacasetesese’ 
+, ¢ 
een gseees stase 


« +. <4 
a4 4, 4 <2 
Rr eiaiiesestescacsies sis 
< « 4.48% as 
as iigaesecctestasegetssesesesnscstses 
redat tote ty tetetede! : 
ooh ofepeid Nase cata t statin tet 
atau ta toe Sas Se ehete se ty 
Sietitatatetal stats tite Setetots tas 
epaeeyegystieee uletetase! 


« 
Setate’ cieledesetesecets i yeaee 
aia setalenciete settee seidhe ccc ta se 
it * « 
< 


A A- 


tab aabaheobadhnaane 


¢ 
¢. 


ae 





tee dn 











LES Waa Sew ee aly ow 


SOS ye ee 







~ 
yoy tO 
vy 


Cee 


re 


stetatats: 





ey eee a *y 





: nae 













4 > 
2.4%, ote Cte See en 
tiles ss lsceise oo 










¥ 
oS 
eee 
om) 
Sieh 
Oe 
Cees 
ees 
= 
PO 
we 
6453 
& 
oe 
Lx 
wo 
ew + 
ro 
Po 
Pes 
s 
ea 
é po 
. ane . 
APA SA 
4 
Sey rere Saye gy 
AAAAAA SS 
Seah manda 
Pe a we 
aD? 
oa 
tae ‘S 
« 
ACA ye “ 


+ 
yi) 


SDSARRABRAR 


ran ee 
rs ‘ 
, * 
=r" 
RAs hoa te 










Mighete ted T 45s 



















yet Seree 


& 

Crp ocee) 
stant ssrierrt ‘ 
teleieteseieys 


qoeaesereae se ite 
Bereseciesticics 


MEN ek ee cI Pe oe Oe Bcd week a < 

= S Sate 
Malet forsietetitetntatatetetatetiiten telat 
s se an P 


‘ <4 









ota . 


* 
$ & 4 
ee 













F <'s 4? telacn 
Se Me te Be ta 4a be tet nat Mella tae 
Ppa eet Ntatata tetas tatsta tan, 









































754, r 
ate Brees sen soe 
< Ke! Gd Vey Bie iccg etets 
CR Raced, Betors site 
4) tae vile s 
Be Be cccccdgercsg BSc ee 
Be Racecar 3 a 
Bs Std Se tx ¢ ates Pep: tate 
‘hes be aby) seiahe evo 5! 
he fe aekas ioe taiei sate td : aes 
‘os OPP ahha la bens i bs 
«Bate Betas eaetat Hota, reyes tate i 
Rode, Mreiaceqeer tate rte sd tates tte 
Pade Partasatatg tate oeeertees i< 
Bs shh Sheespetrcee roceeppere boon 
* Feat, Rad ot feiets ita ie lett Fonte te ¢ a 
LDS WE, be DUDE NT DEM DORE bPal pone heme pe me Res 
ot. Bes 4 tM ad Ae 4 ete stat seat 
Min Hivtalatetssetasatetatetatesetatitctet tas 
f Fat OP PG yu Pah, Mea be hehe FP ioe me mee 
etd tase Se 








‘ 
* 
aaee 





t, 






















































$ es : 
: x 
. 33 
> m 
4 nt 
2 aS 
+> 
ae - ** «+ 
>? . ‘. 26% » 
$ ac¢ ors 
at ¢ ‘4, 
* A . +. 
Set. alate Sate Se Se < te “ eee: ; 
< 04 t ACs, at. 4 ¥ >! » . 
aaisenaisieniiiet aietaaistee felis 5 mae : 
aed te dtd hd ta tae ata tg tata a tana at isfaa ats ty < oot “ 
etatqtatatrt As eettat STH oe ey he a < > + +, ‘ 
Sotetetetite Seo ate tate PPE Pnh sos + a 
atatet ote < . 
. “ +s s 
+ pee “4 LPL ; 
Rear yer tetas 4 tata tet att ata tot et ‘ 
Neatitastere Gidte tates ta tst4 tates sotetatetets Soe 
Sr letsidtatatata® Mis fereteseSale tite tetattiatetes 3 
tee Sate piss tend es 4 ai eteta* 
+ * 
tie + 


‘ 
O 











<7 
bet EGOES ik aS od eh th nd 10 1a te tata tata ts td te at 
a 'é é 
Siessseepagecie cqanieieediee niece 
sha ldletetete eo arse pts 
Sess tetate +See Sets Se Ti Geers tate tt tnt ett, 
ee ; 7 ; 
SQ 83x ‘“) - 
4 454.8 yee 
bis 053 
; > 
4 i“ 
4 
>} 
>) 
ld 
4 
ta 
a4 


. 


